This is a modern-English version of Experimental Investigation of the Spirit Manifestations: Demonstrating the existence of spirits and their communion with mortals. Doctrine of the spirit world respecting heaven, hell, morality, and God. Also, the influence of Scripture on the morals of Christians., originally written by Hare, Robert.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Transcriber’s Notes
Obvious typographical errors have been silently corrected. Variations in hyphenation have been standardised but all other spelling and punctuation remains unchanged.
Obvious typos have been silently corrected. Variations in hyphenation have been standardized, but all other spelling and punctuation remain unchanged.
There is no anchor for footnote 5 on page 35 (containing paras 122,123 and 124), so the anchor has been placed at the end of para 122.
There is no anchor for footnote 5 on page 35 (containing paragraphs 122, 123, and 124), so the anchor has been placed at the end of paragraph 122.
Vail has been corrected to veil throughout.
Vail has been changed to veil everywhere.
The cover was prepared by the transcriber and is placed in the public domain.
The cover was created by the transcriber and is now in the public domain.
EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION
OF THE
SPIRIT MANIFESTATIONS,
DEMONSTRATING
SHOWING
THE EXISTENCE OF SPIRITS AND THEIR COMMUNION WITH MORTALS.
THE EXISTENCE OF SPIRITS AND THEIR CONNECTION WITH HUMANS.
DOCTRINE OF THE SPIRIT WORLD RESPECTING HEAVEN, HELL, MORALITY, AND GOD.
DOCTRINE OF THE SPIRIT WORLD REGARDING HEAVEN, HELL, MORALITY, AND GOD.
ALSO,
Also,
Influence of Scripture on the Morals of Christians.
Influence of Scripture on the Morals of Christians.
BY
BY
ROBERT HARE, M.D.
ROBERT HARE, M.D.
EMERITUS PROFESSOR OF CHEMISTRY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, GRADUATE OF YALE COLLEGE AND HARVARD UNIVERSITY, ASSOCIATE OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTE, AND MEMBER OF VARIOUS LEARNED SOCIETIES.
EMERITUS PROFESSOR OF CHEMISTRY AT THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, GRADUATE OF YALE COLLEGE AND HARVARD UNIVERSITY, ASSOCIATE OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTE, AND MEMBER OF SEVERAL LEARNED SOCIETIES.
Verba animi proferre, vitam impendere vero.
Speak your truth, dedicate your life to it.
Denounce dark Error and bright Truth proclaim, Though ghastly Death oppose, with threat’ning aim.
Denounce dark mistakes and proclaim bright truth, Even if terrifying death opposes with a threatening aim.
NEW YORK:
PARTRIDGE & BRITTAN, 342 BROADWAY.
1855.
NEW YORK:
PARTRIDGE & BRITTAN, 342 BROADWAY.
1855.
Entered according to act of Congress, in the year 1855, by
MARGARET B. GOURLAY,
Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1855, by
MARGARET B. GOURLAY,
in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States, for the Eastern
District of Pennsylvania.
in the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States for the Eastern
District of Pennsylvania.

PLATE I.
PLATE I.
Engraving and description of the apparatus, which, being contrived for the purpose of determining whether the manifestations attributed to spirits could be made without mortal aid, by deciding the question affirmatively, led to the author’s conversion.
Engraving and description of the device, which was designed to determine if the phenomena attributed to spirits could occur without human assistance, and by confirming this, led to the author's conversion.
(a) PLATE I. Fig. 1, is an engraving from a photograph of the apparatus above alluded to. The disk A is represented as supported upon a rod of iron forming the axis on which it turns. To the outer end of this rod, the index B is affixed, so as to be stationary in a vertical position; the upper termination situated just in front of the letters. These are placed around the margin of the disk. The cord C encircles the pulley situated about the centre of the disk, like a hub to a carriage wheel. The ends of the cord are severally tied to weights, which, when the table is tilted, react against each other through the pulley; one being so large as to be immovable, the other so small as to be lifted. Of course a hook in the floor may be substituted for the larger weight.
(a) PLATE I. Fig. 1 is an engraving from a photograph of the mentioned apparatus. The disk A is shown resting on an iron rod that acts as the axis for its rotation. At the outer end of this rod, the index B is attached, remaining stationary in a vertical position; the top end is positioned just in front of the letters, which are arranged around the edge of the disk. The cord C wraps around the pulley located near the center of the disk, similar to how a hub is positioned on a carriage wheel. The ends of the cord are each tied to weights that, when the table tilts, counterbalance each other through the pulley; one weight is large enough to stay in place, while the other is small enough to be lifted. Naturally, a hook in the floor can replace the larger weight.
PEASE’S APPARATUS.
PEASE'S EQUIPMENT.
(b) The relative position of the medium, and that of the screen intercepting her view of the disk, are too conspicuous to require particularization.
(b) The relative position of the medium and the screen blocking her view of the disk are too obvious to need any further details.
Fig. 2, represents Pease’s disk, or dial apparatus, associated with a vibrating lever and stand contrived by myself. The whole, thus modified, has been named the Spiritoscope.
Fig. 2, shows Pease’s disk, or dial device, linked to a vibrating lever and stand that I designed. The entire setup has been called the Spiritoscope.
(c) The apparatus thus designated consists of a box F, which is a miniature representation of a low, square, four sided house, with a single sloping roof, but without any floor closing it at the bottom.
(c) The device referred to here is a box F, which is a small model of a low, square, four-sided house with a single slanted roof, but it has no floor at the bottom.
(d) On the outside of the part serving as the roof, the alphabetic dial is depicted. On the inner surface of the roof board, the spring, pulley, and strings are attached, by which the index is made to revolve, so as to point out any letter.
(d) On the outside of the part acting as the roof, the alphabet dial is shown. On the inner surface of the roof panel, the spring, pulley, and strings are connected, allowing the index to rotate and indicate any letter.
(e) G represents the vibrating lever upon which the medium’s hands are placed. When test conditions are not requisite, her hands should be situated so as that merely one-half may be on each side of the fulcrum wire, on which the lever turns. When test conditions are requisite, the hands should be altogether on the portion of the board which is between the exterior end of the board and the fulcrum. When thus placed, it is utterly impossible to move the lever so as to cause it to select letters, or to control the selection, by any spirit who may be employing them to make a communication.[1]
(e) G represents the vibrating lever that the medium's hands rest on. When test conditions aren't necessary, her hands should be positioned so that only half is on either side of the fulcrum wire, which the lever pivots on. When test conditions are required, the hands should be entirely on the section of the board that is between the outer end of the board and the fulcrum. When placed this way, it's completely impossible to move the lever in a way that allows any spirit using it to select letters or influence the selection in any way.[1]
(f) Not only are the letters of the alphabet printed equidistant, in due order, on the margin of the disk or dial-face; there are likewise words, the digits, and notes of music.
(f) Not only are the letters of the alphabet spaced evenly and arranged properly on the edge of the disk or dial, but there are also words, numbers, and musical notes.
(g) The words are as follows: Yes—Doubtful—No—Don’t know—I think so—A mistake—I’ll spell it over—A message—Done—I’ll come again—Good-bye—I must leave. These words are printed on equidistant radial lines, nearly dividing the area between them. The digits are printed on radial lines intermediate between those on which the words appear.
(g) The words are as follows: Yes—Doubtful—No—Don’t know—I think so—A mistake—I’ll spell it over—A message—Done—I’ll come again—Good-bye—I must leave. These words are printed on evenly spaced radial lines, nearly dividing the area between them. The digits are printed on radial lines in between those on which the words appear.
Five concentric circular lines, dividing the margin into as many smaller portions, as in music paper, serve for the inditing of musical notes; respecting which the directions are given by Pease upon a printed slip of paper pasted inside.
Five circular lines, stacked on top of each other, split the margin into several smaller sections, like on music paper, to write musical notes. Instructions for this are provided by Pease on a printed slip of paper that's glued inside.
(h) The index in this instrument is secured upon the outer end of a pivot supporting a pulley of about ¾ of an inch in diameter. The spring consists of a coil of brass wire, of which one end is fastened into the inside of the roof-board (c) of which the outside forms the surface for the letters, &c., while the other end of the wire is prolonged beyond the coil to about 2½ inches, and, by means of a loop, has a string of catgut tied to it securely. This string is fastened to a perforation in the pivot. Another piece of the same kind of string is fastened to the circumference of the pulley. The pivot being turned so as to wind upon it the string proceeding from the spring, and thus constraining it so as to make it capable of effectual recoil from the pulley, the latter may, with a little care, be made, as the spring recoils, to wind about it another string duly attached to its circumference. The strings being thus wound, (one to the right, the other to the left,) when the string attached to the pulley is pulled from the outside of the box, it is unwound therefrom, and meanwhile winds that attached to the spring upon the pivot. The reaction of the spring, when left to itself, reverses this process, producing the opposite revolution in the pulley. The index attached to the pivot of course turns in one direction or the other, as the pivot is actuated by the drawing out or retraction of the string which proceeds from it. This, at the outer end, is tied to a ring, which prevents it from receding into the box.
(h) The index on this device is attached to the outer end of a pivot that holds a pulley about ¾ of an inch in diameter. The spring is made of a brass wire coil, with one end secured to the inside of the roof-board (c), the outside of which serves as the surface for the letters, etc. The other end of the wire extends about 2½ inches beyond the coil, and is connected to a sturdy catgut string through a loop. This string is attached to a hole in the pivot. Another piece of the same type of string is secured to the edge of the pulley. When the pivot is turned, it winds the spring string around it, making it ready to recoil from the pulley. With a little care, as the spring recoils, it can wind another string attached to its edge around the pulley. The strings are then wound (one to the right, the other to the left), so when the string connected to the pulley is pulled from the outside of the box, it unwinds from there and simultaneously winds the string from the spring onto the pivot. When left free, the spring reacts by reversing this process, causing the pulley to turn in the opposite direction. The index attached to the pivot turns in one direction or the other as the pivot responds to the pulling or retracting of the string from it. At the outer end, this string is tied to a ring that stops it from slipping back into the box.
(i) It is surprising with what readiness a spirit, even when unused to the apparatus, will, by moving the lever, actuate the index, causing it to point to the letters, words, or figures distributed on the face of the disk, as above mentioned.
(i) It’s surprising how easily a spirit, even if unfamiliar with the setup, can move the lever to activate the index, making it point to the letters, words, or numbers arranged on the face of the disk, as mentioned earlier.
(j) The apparatus of Pease above described, agreeably to the design of the maker, operates by means of a string extending from the brass ring, in which the pulley string terminates externally, to a weight situated upon the floor, so as to be taut when at rest. When this arrangement is made, tilting of the table, by raising the end at which the box is situated, causes the weight to pull the string, and of course to induce the revolution of the pulley, its pivot, and corresponding index. The restoration of the table to its usual position reverses the motion. Hence by these means the index may be moved either way, as requisite for the selection of the letters required for communicating.
(j) The device described by Pease works as intended, utilizing a string that runs from the brass ring, where the pulley string ends outside, to a weight placed on the floor, keeping it tight when not in use. Once this setup is in place, tilting the table by raising the end with the box makes the weight pull the string, which in turn causes the pulley and its pivot to rotate, moving the corresponding index. When the table is returned to its normal position, the motion is reversed. This allows the index to move in either direction, enabling the selection of the letters needed for communication.
(k) The other figure in the same plate represents Pease’s disk apparatus, so arranged, as to be affixed to any table of moderate dimensions. The fulcrum on which the lever vibrates is so made as to be affixed to one of the table’s edges by clamps, while the disk, situated in a vertical plane, is supported by a bar which has a clamp to secure it to the table, while to the disk it is fastened by being introduced into square staples, made to receive it securely, in a mode resembling that by which a square bolt is secured. Under the vibrating lever, a hollow wire is fastened by staples, so as to receive a solid wire, which can be made to slide farther in or out, and thus adjust itself to the distance.]
(k) The other figure in the same plate shows Pease’s disk apparatus, designed to be attached to any moderately sized table. The fulcrum that the lever pivots on is made to be secured to one of the table’s edges with clamps, while the disk, positioned in a vertical plane, is held up by a bar that is clamped onto the table. The disk is then attached to this bar using square staples that hold it securely, similar to how a square bolt is fastened. Below the vibrating lever, a hollow wire is secured with staples to accommodate a solid wire, which can slide in or out to adjust the distance.

PLATE II.
Plate II.
Description of the instrument by which spirits were enabled to move a table under the influence of mediumship, yet in no wise under the control of the medium employed, even clairvoyance being nullified.
Description of the tool that allowed spirits to move a table through mediumship, but it was not controlled by the medium used, and even clairvoyance was rendered ineffective.
(i) The table is about six feet in length, and sixteen inches in width, so contrived as to separate into three parts for conveniency of carriage.
(i) The table is about six feet long and sixteen inches wide, designed to break down into three pieces for easier transport.
(j) The pair of legs under the right side are upon castors. Those on the left side upon an axle, passing through perforations suitably made for its reception. The axle consists of a rod of about ½ of an inch in thickness. The axle serves for two wheels of about six inches diameter, of which one is grooved. A disk, already described as appertaining to apparatus in a preceding page, is secured upon a pivot affixed to a strip of wood, which is made to slide between two other strips attached to the frame of the table just under the top board. By these means, the band embraces both the hub of the disk and the wheel; when this turns in consequence of the shoving of the table horizontally along the floor, the disk turns with the wheel, and as much faster as the circumference of the groove in the hub, is less than that of the groove in the wheel.
(j) The legs on the right side are mounted on casters. Those on the left side are mounted on an axle that goes through specially made holes. The axle is a rod about ½ inch thick. It supports two wheels with a diameter of around six inches, one of which has a groove. A disk, which was mentioned earlier in this document, is attached to a pivot fixed to a wooden strip that slides between two other strips connected to the table frame just below the top. This setup allows the band to wrap around both the disk hub and the wheel; when the table is pushed horizontally across the floor, the wheel turns, causing the disk to spin as well, and it spins even faster because the circumference of the groove in the hub is smaller than the groove in the wheel.
(k) The index is in this apparatus situated precisely as in that described in Plate I.; and any mortal having due hold of the table, may, by shoving it one way or the other, bring any letter under the index, so as to spell out any desired word. But no person, sitting as the medium is in the engraving represented to sit, with the plate on two balls, can actuate the disk so as to spell out words as above mentioned. Utterly incapacitated from moving the table, it were manifestly impossible to actuate the disk, or to interfere with the movements otherwise imparted.
(k) The index in this device is located exactly as shown in Plate I.; and anyone who holds the table properly can slide it back and forth to bring any letter under the index, allowing them to spell out any desired word. However, no one, while seated like the medium shown in the engraving with the plate resting on two balls, can move the disk to spell out words as mentioned earlier. Being completely unable to move the table makes it obviously impossible to operate the disk or interfere with the movements in any other way.
(l) In the employment of the apparatus (Plate I.) it has been suggested that through clairvoyance the medium might see the letters, despite of the screen, or might learn them from the mind of the observer; but in this case the medium sees the letters without the aid of clairvoyancy; but this power does not account for the regulation of the manifestations; since, even seeing the letters, they cannot control the movements so as to give to the intuitive power thus exercised any efficacy.
(l) When using the apparatus (Plate I.), it has been proposed that the medium could see the letters through clairvoyance, even with the screen in place, or might pick them up from the observer's thoughts; however, in this case, the medium is seeing the letters without clairvoyance. But this ability alone doesn’t explain the organization of the manifestations; because even if they can see the letters, they aren’t able to control the movements enough to make that intuitive ability effective.
(m) On the surface of the table, on the right, may be seen a board upon castors. This was contrived as a substitute for the plate on balls. The castors, of course, perform the same office as the balls in allowing a solid material communication between the hands of the medium and the table, without giving the power to induce or control the movement. Evidently, though by any horizontal impulse the medium might cause the castors to turn and the board to move in consequence, the force necessary to effect this must fall short of that requisite to move the table.
(m) On the surface of the table, to the right, you can see a board on wheels. This was designed as a replacement for the plate on balls. The wheels, of course, serve the same purpose as the balls in allowing a solid connection between the hands of the medium and the table, without enabling the ability to initiate or control the movement. Clearly, while any horizontal push from the medium could cause the wheels to turn and the board to move as a result, the amount of force needed to do this must be less than what would be required to move the table.
(n) In point of fact, the board, when under the plate, balls, and hands of the medium, was often moved rapidly to and fro, without moving the table. To move this under such conditions without moving the board or tray, required a distinct spiritual process, of much greater difficulty, and which some spirits were either unwilling or unable to employ successfully.
(n) In fact, the board, when it was under the plate, balls, and hands of the medium, was often moved quickly back and forth without moving the table. Moving it under these conditions without shifting the board or tray required a specific spiritual process that was much more difficult, and some spirits were either unwilling or unable to do so successfully.
See “Mediumship” in this work. See also 164, 166.
See “Mediumship” in this work. See also 164, 166.

PLATE III.
PLATE 3.
(o) On the opposite page is a representation of an experiment, in which the medium was prevented from having any other communication with the apparatus, actuated under his mediumship, excepting through water. Yet under these circumstances the spring balance indicated the exertion of a force equal to 18 pounds.
(o) On the opposite page is a depiction of an experiment, where the medium was not allowed to communicate with the apparatus, which was operated under his mediumship, except through water. Still, under these conditions, the spring balance showed a force equivalent to 18 pounds.
(p) A board is supported on a rod so as to make it serve as a fulcrum, as in a see-saw, excepting that the fulcrum is at the distance of only a foot from one end, while it is three feet from the other. This end is supported by a spring-balance which indicates pounds and ounces by a rotary index.
(p) A board is placed on a rod to act as a pivot, similar to a see-saw, but the pivot is only a foot from one end and three feet from the other. One end of the board is held up by a spring scale that shows weight in pounds and ounces with a rotating dial.
(q) Upon the board, at about six inches from the fulcrum, there is a hole into which the knob of an inverted glass vase, nine inches in diameter, is inserted.
(q) On the board, about six inches from the pivot point, there's a hole for the knob of an upside-down glass vase that is nine inches wide.
(r) Upon two iron rods proceeding vertically from a board resting on the floor, so as to have one on each side of the vase, a cage of wire, such as is used to defend food from flies, of about five inches diameter, is upheld [inverted] by the rod within the vase concentrically, so as to leave between it and the sides of the vase an interstice of an inch nearly, and an interval of an inch and a half between it and the bottom of the vase.
(r) Two vertical iron rods rise from a board on the floor, with one rod on each side of the vase. A wire cage, similar to those used to keep flies away from food, is held upside down by the rod inside the vase, leaving a gap of about an inch between the cage and the vase sides, and about an inch and a half between the cage and the bottom of the vase.
(s) The vase being filled with water until within an inch of the brim, the medium’s hands were introduced into the cage and thus secured from touching the vase.
(s) The vase was filled with water until it was an inch from the top, and the medium’s hands were put into the cage, keeping them from touching the vase.
(t) These arrangements being made, the spirits were invoked to show their power, when repeatedly the spring-balance indicated an augmentation of weight equal to three pounds. The relative distances of the vase and balance from the fulcrum being as 6 to 36, the force exerted must have been 3 × 6 = 18 pounds; yet the medium did not appear to be subjected to any reaction, and declared that he experienced none.
(t) With these preparations in place, the spirits were called upon to demonstrate their power, and the spring scale consistently showed an increase in weight of three pounds. Since the distance between the vase and the scale from the fulcrum was in a ratio of 6 to 36, the force applied had to be 3 × 6 = 18 pounds; however, the medium seemed unaffected and stated that he felt nothing.
(u) It was on stating this result to the Association for the Advancement of Science, that I met with much the same reception as the King of Ava gave to the Dutch ambassador, who alleged water to be at times solidified in his country, by cold, so as to be walked upon.
u When I shared this finding with the Association for the Advancement of Science, I received a response similar to the one the King of Ava gave to the Dutch ambassador, who claimed that water in his country sometimes freezes solid enough to walk on.
(v) The belief in spiritual agency was treated as a mental disease, with which I, of course, had been infected; those who made this charge being perfectly unconscious that their education has associated morbid incredulity with bigoted and fanatical credence.
(v) The belief in spiritual agency was viewed as a mental illness, which I, of course, had caught; those who said this were completely unaware that their education had linked unhealthy doubt with narrow-minded and extreme belief.

PLATE IV.
PLATE 4.
(x) The apparatus of which the opposite cuts afford a representation are spiritoscopes, under modifications to which I resorted subsequently to the contrivance in which Pease’s dial is employed. For Pease’s “dial,” disks are substituted, resembling those originally employed by me, as represented in Plates I. and II. These last mentioned, however, were made to revolve under the index; while in Pease’s apparatus the index revolves, the disk remaining at rest. The advantage of having the disk to revolve is, that the letter is always to be looked for, within the same space; whereas in operating with the other the eye has to follow the index through all its rapid movements.
(x) The device represented by the opposite diagrams is a spiritoscope, modified from the design I used later with Pease’s dial. In Pease’s “dial,” disks are used instead of the original design I created, as shown in Plates I and II. However, in my version, the disks were made to spin under the index, while in Pease’s device, the index moves and the disk stays still. The benefit of having the disk spin is that the letter can always be located in the same area, whereas when using the other design, the eye has to follow the index as it moves quickly.
(y) The convenience and economy of casting the disks of iron was deemed a sufficient motive for resorting to the rotation of the index; as when made of that metal the disk becomes too heavy to be rotated with ease, first one way and then another.
(y) The convenience and cost-effectiveness of casting iron disks was considered a strong reason for using the rotating index; when made from that metal, the disk becomes too heavy to rotate easily back and forth.
(z) In Fig. 1 the vibrating lever is resorted to, and the process is precisely the same as that already described, in which Pease’s dial is associated with the same mechanism.
(z) In Fig. 1, the vibrating lever is used, and the process is exactly the same as described earlier, where Pease’s dial is connected to the same mechanism.
(aa) The words on the dial faces in Figures 1 and 2 are somewhat abbreviated.[2]
(aa) The text on the dial faces in Figures 1 and 2 is a bit shortened.[2]
(bb) The rod R slides in staples, so as to be made to extend farther or nearer from the fulcrum. The legs on which the disk is supported, which are a part of the casing, terminate below in a socket which fits upon a plug screwed into the base-board; upon this plug it may be fastened by the set screw (s). By sliding the rod (r) inward, the disk may be turned half round upon the plug, so as to place the lettered surface out of the sight of the medium, whose power to influence the communications is thus nullified. This is one mode of attaining test conditions; in other words, those conditions which make it impossible that the communications received should be due to any mortal, (151 to 166,) unless, as gratuitously and erroneously, as I believe, alleged, the medium by clairvoyancy sees the letters.
(bb) The rod R slides in staples, allowing it to be extended further away or closer to the fulcrum. The legs that support the disk, which are part of the casing, end in a socket that fits onto a plug screwed into the baseboard; it can be secured by the set screw (s). By sliding the rod (r) inward, the disk can be rotated halfway around on the plug, making the lettered surface out of the medium's sight, which effectively nullifies their ability to influence the communications. This is one way to achieve test conditions; in other words, these conditions ensure that the communications received cannot be attributed to any human source (151 to 166), unless, as has been mistakenly and falsely claimed, the medium sees the letters through clairvoyance.
(cc) By another method test conditions are obtained which are not exposed to this evil.
(cc) Another method provides test conditions that are not subject to this issue.
(dd) The method to which I allude has been explained in the description of Plate I. in reference to the spiritoscope formed with the aid of a Pease’s disk, paragraph (e). The process is the same in the employment of Fig. 1 Plate IV. under consideration. It may be better understood in this case, as the illustration of the lever board L is more conspicuous. In the ordinary mode of operating without test conditions, the hand of the medium is so situated as to have nearly half of it beyond the fulcrum, marked by the line F L. When test conditions are imposed, the tips of the fingers only reach to that line, without going beyond it. Situated as last mentioned, the medium to whom they appertain cannot move the rod R, because it is already against the lower edge of the disk, which prevents it from moving upwards. In the opposite direction the medium can create no pressure, since her efforts could only tend to lift her hand, per se, from the disk. It is important that the reader should pay attention to this exposition, as the conditions thus made evident are often appealed to as one proof, among others, that my information and credentials are from the immortal worthies of the spirit world.
(dd) The method I'm referring to has been explained in the description of Plate I regarding the spiritoscope created with Pease’s disk, in paragraph (e). The process is the same in the use of Fig. 1 Plate IV, which we're discussing. It is easier to understand in this case since the illustration of the lever board L is more noticeable. In the usual way of operating without test conditions, the medium's hand is positioned so that nearly half of it extends beyond the fulcrum, marked by the line F L. When test conditions are applied, only the tips of the fingers touch that line, without going past it. In this position, the medium cannot move the rod R, because it is already against the lower edge of the disk, preventing it from moving upwards. In the opposite direction, the medium cannot create any pressure since her efforts would only raise her hand, per se, off the disk. It’s important for the reader to focus on this explanation, as the conditions made clear here are often cited as one piece of evidence, among others, that my information and credentials come from the esteemed figures of the spirit world.
(ee) Fig. 2 is analogous in its mode of operating, to the apparatus represented in Plate II. It is in the substitution of a small board for a table that the principal difference consists.[3] The board requires only to be large enough to allow the hands to rest upon it in front of the disk. The index is actuated by a horizontal motion to and fro, which, as in the apparatus, Plate II., causes the rotation of a supporting wheel, which by means of a band communicates rotation to a pulley supported behind the disk on the pivot to which the index is secured in front. The sliding pulley P being fastened at a due distance from the disk (o), is used to keep the band tight.
(ee) Fig. 2 works similarly to the device shown in Plate II. The main difference is that it uses a small board instead of a table. The board only needs to be large enough for the hands to rest on it in front of the disk. The index moves back and forth horizontally, which, like in the device in Plate II, causes a supporting wheel to rotate. This rotation is transmitted to a pulley located behind the disk on the pivot where the index is attached in front. The sliding pulley P, positioned at the right distance from the disk (o), is used to keep the band tight.
(ff) This instrument is preferred by the spirits, and is easier for a feeble medium to employ effectually. I cannot as yet avail myself of Fig. 1; through Fig. 2 I have had some interesting tests.
(ff) This tool is favored by the spirits and is simpler for a weak medium to effectively use. I still can’t make use of Fig. 1; through Fig. 2, I’ve had some intriguing tests.
(gg) This form, then, is best for incipient mediumship.
(gg) This form is best for developing mediumship.
(hh) Fig. 2 may be employed under test conditions, by so situating it as that the dial shall be on the side opposite to that where the medium sits; under these circumstances she cannot see the index or the letters, and consequently cannot control the spelling of spirits, so as to give results from her own mind instead of theirs. This mode of testing does not preclude the subterfuge, so often resorted to, of clairvoyant power, enabling the medium to see through the cast-iron, or read the letters in the minds of the bystanders. This power I have never witnessed; yet it is absurdly attributed to media who, as well as all their friends, are ignorant of the existence of any such power.
(hh) Fig. 2 can be used under testing conditions by placing it so the dial is on the opposite side from where the medium is sitting; in this setup, she can't see the index or the letters, which means she can't influence the spelling of spirits and must rely on their input instead of her own thoughts. This method of testing doesn't eliminate the possibility of deception, which is often used, such as clairvoyant abilities that allow the medium to see through the cast-iron or read the minds of the people present. I've never seen this ability in action; yet it's absurdly claimed by mediums who, along with their friends, are completely unaware of any such power.
(ii) Another mode of testing is that illustrated in Plate II., where a plate upon two balls supports the hands of the medium, and forms the only means of conducting communication between the medium and apparatus. It may be easily conceived that instead of the hands being placed upon the board, the plate and balls being interposed, the hands of the medium may be supported over the board of Fig. 2. as they are represented to be supported over the table in Fig. 1, Plate II.
(ii) Another way to test this is shown in Plate II, where a plate rests on two balls and supports the medium's hands, serving as the only connection between the medium and the apparatus. It's easy to imagine that instead of placing the hands directly on the board, with the plate and balls in between, the medium's hands could be supported over the board in Fig. 2, just like they are shown above the table in Fig. 1, Plate II.
See 167, 169, 172, 177, 196.
See 167, 169, 172, 177, 196.
(kk) Fig. 3, Plate IV., is a representation of an association of serrated strips of iron in a wooden frame, which sliding on the lever board of Fig. 1, so as to have the saws just above the back of the hand of the medium, is found to increase the efficacy of the mediumship. It is only of importance to use it when test conditions are requisite, as explained already, Fig. 1, (hh). The rationale, so far as it can be suggested, will be stated under the head of mediumship. It will be perceived that the size of the frame is not in due proportion to the lever board, being upon a larger scale. But this renders it more conspicuous, and the reader can easily conceive its size to be such as to allow the grooves in the wooden sides of the frame to receive the edges of the lever board L, and thus to be secured firmly thereupon.
(kk) Fig. 3, Plate IV., shows a set of serrated iron strips in a wooden frame. These slide on the lever board from Fig. 1, positioned so that the saws are just above the medium's hand, which enhances the effectiveness of the mediumship. It's only necessary to use this when test conditions are needed, as explained earlier in Fig. 1, (hh). The reasoning behind it, as much as can be suggested, will be discussed under mediumship. You'll notice that the size of the frame doesn't match the lever board proportionately, as it is a larger scale. However, this makes it more noticeable, and the reader can easily imagine its size being such that the grooves in the wooden sides of the frame can hold the edges of the lever board L, securing it firmly in place.
PAGE | |
Preface.—Letter from J. F. Lanning, Esq.—Spiritual communication, through the mediumship of Mr. Lanning, to the author—Author’s Reply—Communication from an assembly of eminent spirits, sanctioning, under test conditions, the credentials transmitted through Mr. Lanning—Postscript by the author—Supplemental Preface | 3 |
Intro.—The evidence of the existence of a Deity, by the author—Theological Axioms | 17 |
Intuitive Proof of the Existence of Spirits.—Narrative of the author’s experimental investigation of Spiritualism—Letter in reply to an inquiry respecting the Influence of Electricity in Table-Turning—Of Manifestations founded on Movements without contact, or such contact as cannot be sufficient to cause the result—Hymn chanted, and reply | 35 |
Supporting Evidence for the Existence of Spirits.—Evidence afforded by the Rev. Allen Putnam, of Roxbury, Mass.—Evidence of Dr. Bell, of Somerville, near Boston—His errors, arising from ignorance of facts, (110, 283, 864.) | 55 |
Evidence from Abroad Supporting the Existence of Spirits.—Manifestations which occurred in France in 1851—Letter from T. R. P. Ventura—Letter of Dr. Coze—Letter of M. F. De Saulcy—Spiritualism in Paris—Spiritual Manifestations in France and Germany—Spiritualism in Great Britain—Letter of Robert Owen, Esq. | 66 |
Messages from the Spirit World.—Remarks introductory to my spirit father’s communication—My father’s communication—Communication from a spirit son of the author—Additional communications from spirits who died while infants—Communication from a very young spirit child to its parents | 85 |
Spiritual Birth.—Narratives given by spirits of their translation to the spirit world—Narrative of his spiritual birth, by W. W., a most benevolent spirit—The spirit Maria’s narrative—My sister’s account of her translation to the spirit world—My brother’s account of his spiritual birth, &c. | 101 |
Spirit Gathering.—Sixty-four queries addressed to a convocation of worthies from the spirit world; also their replies to the same, (through the mediumship of Mrs. Gourlay,) confirmed under conditions which no mortal could pervert | 113 |
Exposition of the Information Received from the Spirit World | 119 |
Sorry for my conversion.—Reasons for my change of opinion, and belief in the existence and agency of spirits—On the whereabout of heaven—Correspondence with Mr. Holcomb, of Southwick, Massachusetts | 125 |
Spiritualism's Moral Impact | 136 |
The Heaven and Hell of Spiritualism compared to the Heaven and Hell of Scripture. | 141 |
Instinctive feeling that heaven is above us.—Discordance as to the whereabout of the scriptural heaven | 149 |
"The Real Doctrine."—The Rev. H. Harbaugh’s opinion respecting heaven | 151 |
Of Spiritual Mediumship | 159 |
6 | |
Counter-Mediumship.—On the influence of the ill-treatment of media on spiritual manifestations—The author’s discovery of his powers as a medium | 166 |
On Psychological Explanations of Spiritual Manifestations | 168 |
Talking to spirits with letters.—Modern process for alphabetic converse with spirits as new as that of electric telegraph | 173 |
Impact of Everyday Wealth in the Upcoming World.—According to the spiritual code, riches elevate or degrade according to the morality displayed in their acquisition and employment | 176 |
Mrs. Gourlay’s Story of How She Embraced Spiritualism | 179 |
Practical Benefits of Spiritualism.—Illustration of the practical benefit of Spiritualism, in the happiness imparted by the conversion of an unbeliever to a belief in immortality—Letter from a spirit daughter—Correspondence with a spirit brother | 192 |
Marriage on Earth and in Heaven.—The hymeneal tie in the spirit world grows out of the necessity of the connubial union in the mundane sphere—“Free Love” imputation refuted | 204 |
The Impact of Scripture on Christian Morals.—The morality of Christendom being irreconcilable with the New Testament, cannot be its legitimate offspring—Inspiration can have no higher authority than the human testimony on which its existence is arrogated—Injurious influence of unreasonable restriction—No one would believe that a capable farmer would make such a mistake as to sow garlic instead of wheat; yet God, while represented as having intended to sow Protestantism, is considered as having caused throughout Christendom a crop of Catholicism, in the Roman or Grecian form, for more than a thousand years: those weeds still occupying more than half of the whole soil—Letter of William Pitt, afterward Earl of Chatham—Offer of guidance by a mundane spirit—Improper use of the epithet Infidel—On Atonement—On the massacre at Sinope—Opinions of God held by Sir Isaac Newton—On God and his attributes, by Seneca—On the better employment of the first day of the week—Additional remarks respecting the observance of the Sabbath, so called—If creatures be not so created as to love their neighbours as themselves, precepts can no more alter them in this respect than change the colour of their hair or the number of cubits in their stature—Attacks upon the authenticity of Scripture cannot endanger the prevalent morality, which, while superior to that of the Old Testament, indicates a recklessness of the precepts of Christ, excepting so far as faith is upheld as a counterpoise for sin—The doctrine of a peculiar belief being necessary to salvation, and a counterpoise for sin, a source of discord originally confined to Judea, expanded with Christianity and Islamism: verifying Christ’s allegation, that he came “as a sword, not as a messenger of peace”—Superior morality and far less questionable certainty of the communications from the spirit world—Quotation from Mosheim—Quotation from Gibbon—For more than a thousand years, the Grecian or Roman Catholic clergy were the solo depositaries of the word of God, so called, and regulators of religious morals; yet, according to Bishop Hopkins, during that time, the clergy were for the most part pre-eminent in vice, as compared with the rest of the community; whence it is inferred that, like Pope Boniface, the wicked clergy in general were unbelievers in the truth of the gospel—If the morals of the modern clergy are better, it is neither from the barbarous example furnished them in the Old Testament, nor the ultra precepts of the gospel; being too much enlightened to be governed by either—Summary made by Bishop Hopkins—Any religion, like that of Moses, which does not make immortality a primary consideration, must be chiefly confined to worldly objects, and, of course, unworthy of consideration. People profess Christianity more from a desire to do right, than they do right in consequence of their professions—A calumny against human nature to represent men as wilfully ignorant of the true religion—To appreciate the Jewish representation of the Deity, a reader should first form an idea of this planet and its inhabitants,7 comparatively with the hundred millions of solar systems, and the inconceivable extent of the space which encompasses them, and which falls within the domain of one common Deity—Our actions dependent, under God, on organization, education, and the extent to which we are tempted extraneously—On probation—World least moral when the Christian church had most sway—Honour and mercantile credit more trusted than religion. Virtue due more to the heart than to sectarianism. Bigotry acts like an evil spirit—Progress of literature and science in Arabia, under the Mohammedan pontiffs, called caliphs | 206 |
More Supporting Evidence for the Existence of Spirits.—The opinions of MM. de Mirville and Gasparin on Table Turning and Mediums, (considered in relation to theology and physics,) examined by the Abbot Almignana, doctor of the common law, theologian, &c.—Mechanical movements without contact, by Mr. Isaac Rehn, President of the Harmonial Society, Philadelphia—Communication from J. M. Kennedy, Esq.—Communication from Wm. West, Esq.—Koons’s Establishment—Communications from Joseph Hazard, Esq.—A visit to the Spiritualists of Ohio—Letter from John Gage—The home of the mediums, and the haunts of the spirits—What they did, said, and wrote—The house of the Spiritualists—Presence of electricity—The room where the spirits manifest their power—The furniture and occupants—The manifestations commence—The spirits play on drums, harps, French horns, accordeons, and tamborines—The manifestations continue, and the head spirit writes a communication—The spirit’s letter—Concluding remarks—An evening at Koons’s spirit room, by Charles Partridge, Esq., New York—Experience of the Hon. N. P. Tallmadge—Letter from Mr. D. H. Hume—Spiritualism in London—Lord Brougham with the spirits—Evidence afforded by the Rev. J. B. Ferguson—An exposition of views respecting the principal facts, causes, and peculiarities involved in spiritual manifestations; together with interesting phenomenal statements and communications, by Adin Ballou—Testimony of the Hon. J. W. Edmonds—Testimony of Henry Lloyd Garrison.—Testimony of Mr. and Mrs. Newton—Testimony of members of the New York circle—Testimony of the Rev. D. F. Goddard, Boston—Manifestations at Stratford, Connecticut, in the house of the Rev. Eliakim Phelps, D.D.—Remarkable exhibitions of power—Singular occurrences—Image-making—Destruction of furniture—Incendiary spirits—The spirits identified—Unhappy spirits, from the remembrance of wrong done in this world—Wrong doing revealed—Directions given for restoring ill-gotten gains—Discontinuance of the manifestations—Idea of the existence of a spiritual sun, and a vital spiritual oxygen, found to exist, independently, in the mind of a much-esteemed author | 273 |
Of Matter, Mind, and Spirit.—Of matter—Strictures on a speculation by Farraday respecting the nature of matter—On Whewell’s demonstration that all matter is heavy—Additional remarks on the speculation of Farraday and Exley, above noticed—Of mundane, ethereal, and ponderable matter, in their chemical relations—Suggestions of Massotti, respecting the nature of matter—On electro-polarity as the cause of electrical phenomena—Of mind, as existing independently, and as distinguished from matter—Of spirit independently, or as distinguished from mind and matter—Of the soul, as distinguished from mind and matter—On the odic, or odylic force | 363 |
Mr. Mahan's Religious Errors.—Proposition of Mr. Mahan—Of the origin of the Books of Moses no higher evidence exists, according to the testimony of the Bible itself, than that of an obscure priest and a fanatical king—Scriptural account of the finding of the Books of Moses by Hilkiah, the high-priest—Account of the finding of the Books of Moses, by Josephus—If the Pentateuch had been previously known to the Jews, it is incredible that it could have become obsolete and forgotten prior to the alleged discovery of it in the temple in the reign of Josiah—Great importance attached to a belief in immortality by Cyrus the Great,8 King of Persia, as contrasted with the recklessness of Moses respecting the same belief—The worship of a book, idolatry—Evidence of Josephus and Gibbon vs. Mr. Mahan—The worshippers of the golden calf more righteous than their assassins—Just denunciation of the religious imposture and usurpation of Moses, by noble-minded Israelites—Remarkable observance of the golden rule by Moses, in his last advice to the Israelites—Straining at spiritual gnats while swallowing scriptural camels—The evidence which is insufficient to establish the iniquity of a sinner cannot be sufficient to establish the divine authority of a book—Word of God, so called, or the golden rule inverted by God’s alleged commands—Pagan fearlessness of death—Observations of Mr. Huc, a Christian priest, that it is their religion which makes Christians more fearful of death than the Chinese—Mr. Huc’s observations—Conclusion of strictures on Mr. Mahan’s religious errors | 396 |
Conclusion.—The Pentateuch inconsistently represented as the basis of a belief in human immortality—Injustice of representing disbelievers in the Bible as not having as good ground for belief in immortality as those who rest their belief on a work which, by its silence, tends to discountenance the hope of a future life—Those who uphold the Bible against Spiritualism, the real antagonists of the only satisfactory evidence ever given to man of a future habitation in the spirit world | 423 |
APPENDIX.
Letter to Episcopal Clergy.—Letter from Dr. Hare to the clergy of the Protestant Episcopal Church, offering to lay before them the new evidence of immortality. (Submitted to the late convention, Philadelphia, May 15, 1855.) | 427 |
A Letter from Dr. Hare.—Addressed to the Association for the Advancement of Science, at their meeting, August 18, 1855—Preliminary remarks | 430 |
Farraday's Theory.—Speculation touching electric conduction and the nature of matter. By Farraday | 432 |
Reasons for Republishing My Memoir on Electrical Theory | 437 |
Electrical Theory.—Objections to the theories severally of Franklin, Dufay, and Ampere, with an effort to explain electrical phenomena by statical or undulatory polarization—Supposed grounds for a theory—Proofs of the existence of an enormous quantity of imponderable matter in metals—Electrical phenomena attributed to stationary or undulatory polarization—On the perfect similitude between the polarity communicated to iron filings by a magnetized steel bar and a galvanized wire—Process by which the ethereo-ponderable atoms within a galvanic circuit are polarized by the chemical reaction—Difference between electro-ethereal and ethereo-ponderable polarization—Competency of a wire to convey a galvanic discharge is as its sectional area, while statical discharges of frictional electricity, preferring the surface, are promoted by its extension. Yet in proportion as such discharges are heavy, the ability of a wire to convey them and its magnetic energy become more dependent on its sectional area, and less upon extent of surface—Difference between frictional electricity and galvanic does not depend on the one being superior as to quantity, the other as to intensity; but on the different degrees in which the ethereo-ponderable atoms of the bodies affected are deranged from their natural state of neutralized polarity—Of ethereo-ponderable deflagration—Summary. | 439 |

EMERITUS PROFESSOR OF CHEMISTRY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, GRADUATE OF YALE COLLEGE AND HARVARD UNIVERSITY, ASSOCIATE OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTE AND MEMBER OF VARIOUS LEARNED SOCIETIES.
Engraved at J. M. Butlers establishment, 84 Chestnut St. Philada.
As prefatory to this volume, it may be expedient here to introduce the credentials which I have lately received from the spirit world. With the medium of their communication, Mr. Lanning, of this city, No. 124 Arch St., I have had but little intercourse, knowing him, however, by report, as a good man and a zealous spiritualist. The communication which I owe to his mediumship, was utterly unexpected by me, never having, in any way, hinted to him, directly or indirectly, that it would be desirable to receive such an indication of confidence and approbation.
As an introduction to this book, it’s important to share the credentials I recently received from the spirit world. I haven't had much interaction with the medium, Mr. Lanning, from this city at No. 124 Arch St., but I've heard that he is a good person and a dedicated spiritualist. The message I received through his mediumship was completely unexpected; I had never suggested to him, in any way, that it would be important to get such a sign of trust and approval.
The first and only knowledge which I had of this, to me, stirring appeal, is comprised in the following letter from Lanning. The difference between the style of his own language, though very good for its purpose, and that which he ascribes to the spirits, must corroborate his allegation that this address did not originate in his brain.
The first and only knowledge I had of this stirring appeal came from the following letter from Lanning. The difference between the way he writes, which is quite effective for its purpose, and the way he attributes to the spirits, supports his claim that this message didn’t come from his own mind.
On submitting the address to my spirit father, he sanctioned the idea of its proceeding from spirits.
On giving the address to my spirit father, he approved the idea that it came from spirits.
Philadelphia, June 7, 1855.
Philadelphia, June 7, 1855.
Dear Sir: I send you the following communication, and think it to be an emanation from the spirit life. I feel not a little reluctance in so doing, for it is seldom I can get any thing for others. How it may suit your mind, I do not know, nor do I wish to impose it upon you for any thing worthy your consideration. I would hesitate much to instruct one so much my senior, and whose name I esteem, were it not that I love a cause so near your heart; and I feel that my mind is only the channel through which I have every evidence, the unseen in the spirit life, at times give their thoughts to mortals. I have no idea from what spirit it came, but know it did not originate in my own brain.
Dear Sir: I'm sending you this message, believing it comes from the spirit world. I feel some hesitation in doing so, as I rarely receive anything to share with others. I'm uncertain how it will resonate with you, and I don’t want to impose it upon you as something that deserves your attention. I would be quite reluctant to advise someone so much my senior, whose name I hold in high regard, if it weren’t for my passion for a cause that is so important to you; I feel that my mind is just a channel through which I sometimes receive thoughts from the unseen spirit world. I have no idea which spirit it may have come from, but I know it didn't originate in my own mind.
Very truly, yours, J. F. Lanning.
Best regards, J. F. Lanning.
To Dr. Robert Hare, Philadelphia:
To Dr. Robert Hare, Philly:
Prof. Robert Hare—Venerable and much-esteemed friend, it is an unwonted pleasure with us to number you as a leading mind in the ranks of this new and better gospel which is being given to the dwellers of earth. We see the many and perplexing difficulties which, to you, apparently hinder your progress in this path to light and love, and we sympathize with you in all your efforts to unfold your mind and to render it useful and happy.
Prof. Robert Hare—Honored and respected friend, we are delighted to count you among the leading thinkers in this new and improved message being shared with people everywhere. We recognize the numerous and complex challenges that seem to be slowing your progress on this journey toward understanding and compassion, and we empathize with you in all your efforts to expand your thoughts and make them meaningful and fulfilling.
Could you see the great glory which is to be the issue of your labours in the new unfoldings of spiritual science, you would not despair of your mission, nor weary in your devotion to it. Let us ask you, If there is any earthly fame or consideration that could induce you to turn back again to the familiar paths in which a life of patient labour has been spent? If there is any earthly joy or brilliant attainment which you have ever enjoyed, worthy to be compared with the little you have realized since you commenced your investigations in this the most important pursuit of your life? Ask yourself how much happiness you have found in the contemplation of that fact which has been demonstrated, not only to your wishes, but to your senses, that the thinking mind never dies; that the grave, which is but the wardrobe of the cast-off garment of the spirit, has no power over the soul; that it lives on, lives ever, and must throughout the ceaseless ages of eternity continue to unfold its powers. Ask yourself, what is earth, what is fame, what is the endearment to your present life, when contrasted or compared with the assurance which you now have, that there is no death, no loss of your individuality, no severing of the ties of friendship and love which shall not be renewed again in that fairer land, the home of the angels, whither you and all you love on earth are tending? Ponder then, our venerable friend, and ask your thirsting soul, if this knowledge is not worth more than the cost of diamonds to you? We, who have laid aside the crumbling casket which contained the priceless jewel that is never tarnished, know full well the value of this gem of knowledge which now sparkles on your vision just opened.
If you could see the incredible glory that will come from your efforts in the new developments of spiritual science, you wouldn't lose hope in your mission or tire in your devotion to it. Let me ask you, is there any earthly fame or recognition that could make you want to return to the familiar paths where you've spent your life working patiently? Is there any earthly joy or achievement you’ve had that could compare to what you’ve discovered since you started exploring this most important journey of your life? Reflect on how much happiness you’ve found in the realization of the fact that has been proven not just to your wishes, but to your senses, that the thinking mind never dies; that the grave, which is merely a wardrobe for the discarded garment of the spirit, has no power over the soul; that it lives on, lives forever, and will continue to unfold its powers throughout the endless ages of eternity. Consider, what is earth, what is fame, what is the affection for your current life, when compared to the assurance you now possess that there is no death, no loss of your individuality, no severing of the bonds of friendship and love that will not be renewed in that beautiful land, the home of the angels, where you and all your loved ones on earth are heading? Think deeply, our esteemed friend, and ask your longing soul if this knowledge isn’t worth more than the cost of diamonds to you? We, who have set aside the decaying container that held the priceless jewel which never tarnishes, truly understand the value of this gem of knowledge that now shines before your newly opened eyes.
There are many things which we would like to say to you, but the conditions and circumstances which control our operations render it impossible for us to present to your mind the light which it so much seeks. To answer the demands of your spirit is now impossible to us. Time and the unfoldings of your mind can only solve the questions you would propound. You are well aware that the growth of your present knowledge is but the effect of earnest inquiry, of patient toil, and deep study, and experiment after experiment in your searchings for truth. Such was the only way you reached the position which you now occupy in the science so dear to you. It came in no other way, it could come in no other. The child is subjected to the necessity of first learning the alphabet before it is prepared to spell, and must understand the meaning of words before it can comprehend the sentence it reads. So in this investigation. That which is apparently of little meaning must first be learned, the alphabet must be mastered, hard words pronounced, and all must be understood before there is a fittedness for progression. The wisest on earth, aye, the wisest in spirit life, are learners, students: none but God is perfectly wise; and it is no humiliation to any mind that it contains not all of wisdom. Let us say to you that if patient in your investigations, you shall in due time obtain that which you so earnestly seek. Could we work miracles, (a thing impossible,) they would astound rather than enlighten your mind. Could we withdraw the veil which separates the vision from the things you desire to see in our spheres of life, you have no data by which you could make plain to yourself or to the eyes of your fellow-man the sights you would behold.
There are many things we want to tell you, but the conditions and circumstances that affect our work make it impossible to provide you with the clarity you seek. Right now, we can't meet the needs of your spirit. Only time and the development of your mind can answer the questions you have. You know that the growth of your current knowledge comes from serious inquiry, hard work, deep study, and countless experiments in your pursuit of truth. That's the only way you achieved the understanding you have in the science you cherish. It didn't come any other way, and it couldn't come any other way. Just like a child must first learn the alphabet before they can spell and understand the meaning of words before they can grasp the sentences they read, you must also go through the same process in your investigation. You have to learn the seemingly insignificant things first, master the alphabet, pronounce the hard words, and understand everything before you're ready to progress. The wisest people on earth, and even the wisest in the spirit realm, are still learners and students; only God is perfectly wise, and it's not a shame for anyone to not know everything. We want to assure you that if you remain patient in your investigations, you will eventually obtain what you seek. If we could perform miracles (which is impossible), they would astonish you rather than enlighten you. Even if we could lift the veil separating your vision from the things you want to see in our realms, you wouldn't have the context needed to understand or explain what you would witness.
Go on in your searchings, our good friend: the end is not yet with you. Brilliant minds with brilliant thoughts are burning to give utterance to earth through you. You are a selected instrument of our own choosing, and we are watching and guiding in the path and to the goal you seek. You may not only “speak trumpet-tongued to the scientific world,” but in thunder-tones to those savans who think they are the masters of the keys of knowledge.
Keep searching, our good friend: you're not done yet. Smart minds with great ideas are eager to express themselves through you. You are a chosen instrument of our own selection, and we're watching and guiding you on the path to the goal you’re pursuing. You might not only “speak loudly to the scientific community,” but also in thunderous tones to those experts who believe they hold all the keys to knowledge.
Author’s Reply to the preceding Address.
Philadelphia, June 15, 1855.
Philadelphia, June 15, 1855.
To my spirit friends, to whom I owe the preceding address:
To my spirit friends, to whom I owe the previous speech:
It is quite unnecessary for my angel friends to urge upon my heart, or upon my reason the nothingness of this world, in comparison with that of which a description has lately been given to me.
It’s completely unnecessary for my angel friends to remind me, in my heart or in my mind, about the insignificance of this world compared to the one I’ve just been told about.
So highly do I estimate the prospect thus awakened, that it seems almost too good, too desirable to be realized. There are so many painful ideas awakened in my mind respecting the lot of humanity, by the events of past and present times, that it is difficult to conceive that, at the short distance of little more than the eightieth part of the diameter of our globe, there should be such a contrast. But to heighten my appreciation of the inestimable value of such an heirship is utterly uncalled for. If there be any drawback, it is the misery which pervades this mundane sphere. The sympathy which, on the one hand, ties you to this world, must, on the other, cause a participation in the sufferings which pervade all animated nature. While I am aware that sympathy, as above suggested, would prevent me from flying from a perception or contemplation of the wretchedness in question, it seems as if the heaven of Spiritualism were, in this phase, in some degree open to the objection to the heaven of Scripture, founded on its too great proximity to hell. Is not the spiritual heaven too near this sphere, and too much associated with it by its sympathy, not to suffer indirectly a portion of its miseries?
I value the possibility that has been brought to my attention so much that it almost seems too good, too desirable to actually come true. There are so many painful thoughts in my mind about the human condition, due to events from both the past and present, that it's hard to believe that just a short distance away—barely more than one-eightieth of the Earth's diameter—there can be such a stark contrast. However, there's really no need to heighten my appreciation for the immeasurable worth of such an inheritance. If there is any downside, it’s the suffering that fills this world. The empathy that, on one hand, connects you to this world, must also, on the other, lead to a sharing in the pain that affects all living beings. While I understand that this empathy would stop me from turning away from recognizing or contemplating the suffering in question, it feels like the heaven of Spiritualism, in this sense, faces some of the same criticisms as the heaven described in Scripture, due to its closeness to hell. Isn't the spiritual heaven too close to this realm, and too intertwined with it through its empathy, to avoid experiencing some of its sorrows indirectly?
If there were any thing I should deem to be requisite to render existence in the spirit world happier, it would be the power of removing the miseries of this lower world, and especially those arising from Error—the most prolific source of evil. According to Addison’s allegory, Death admitted the pretensions of Intemperance to be superior in destructiveness, to those of any of the numerous diseases which competed for the honour of the premiership in his cabinet; but might not Error have successfully competed with Intemperance?—Error, the main cause of intemperance, of intolerant bigotry, and of war, which destroys both by the sword and by sickness which it induces?
If there’s anything I think is necessary to make life in the spirit world better, it would be the ability to eliminate the suffering from this lower world, especially those caused by Error—the greatest source of evil. According to Addison’s allegory, Death acknowledged that Intemperance was more destructive than any of the many diseases vying for the top spot in his cabinet; but couldn’t Error have also rivaled Intemperance?—Error, the primary cause of intemperance, intolerant bigotry, and war, which destroys us both through violence and the illnesses it brings about?
It is difficult for us to conceive that good, affectionate spirits are not unhappy at witnessing the distress which they cannot relieve. The prisoners at Sing Sing are said to undergo mental torture by the silence imposed upon them. Yet this is imposed upon spirits, when often a word would prevent fatal events.
It’s hard for us to imagine that kind, loving souls aren’t upset when they see suffering they can’t ease. The prisoners at Sing Sing are said to experience mental anguish due to the silence forced on them. Yet this is also true for souls, when sometimes just a single word could avert tragic outcomes.
Nevertheless, Spiritualism, so far as it prevails, will make all better: in the first place, by removing error and sectarian discord, and, in the next place, by making nature the object of our study, and, indirectly, of our worship, as the work of the Being who created all.
Nevertheless, Spiritualism, as it exists today, will improve everything: first, by eliminating false beliefs and divisions between groups, and next, by focusing our attention on nature as the subject of our study and, indirectly, of our reverence, as the creation of the Being who made everything.
You need not any more strive to stimulate my estimation of the high office which you bestow on me as promulgator of the knowledge given me of the spheres, than to excite my appreciation of that knowledge. I would not relinquish my position for any temporal sovereignty. My love of truth, my desire for human happiness, would be sufficient for my pay in causing truth to triumph, as that, of course, would be a heaven to me in contemplating the misery obviated and the happiness induced.
You no longer have to try to convince me of the importance of the role you’ve given me as the messenger of the knowledge I have about the spheres. I wouldn’t give up my position for any earthly power. My love for the truth and my wish for human happiness are enough for me, as the victory of truth would be a paradise for me in considering the misery avoided and the happiness created.
Doubtless, not to be fairly appreciated would be painful; while merited applause would be a high gratification; but, were that my primary motive, I should not deserve applause. All that I would desire would be, to have that share of honour to which I might be entitled in common with other colabourers in the cause of truth: to exist in the spheres on the same plane with the illustrious Washington and his coadjutors, and associated with my beloved relatives and friends, having access to14 the wise and good men of all ages and nations! That were a heaven indeed! To be worthy of and enjoy such a heaven, is the only selfish ambition with which I am actuated, so far as I know myself.
Surely, not being appreciated would be painful; while getting deserved praise would be a great satisfaction. However, if that were my main goal, I wouldn’t deserve any praise. What I truly want is to share in the honor that I deserve alongside other workers in the pursuit of truth: to exist on the same level as the great Washington and his supporters, to be with my beloved family and friends, and to have access to14 the wise and good people from all ages and cultures! That would be a true paradise! To be worthy of and enjoy such a paradise is the only selfish ambition I feel, as far as I know myself.
Your truly devoted servant and friend, Robert Hare.
Your devoted servant and friend, Robert Hare.
Having suggested to my spirit father that it would be expedient that some names should be attached to the credentials with which the preceding address from the spirits seemed to endow me by appointment, he induced several spirits of eminence to accompany him to Mrs. Gourlay’s this morning, (August 4, 1855.) This gave me an opportunity to read Lanning’s letter, the address which I received through him as above represented, and my reply. In return I received the subjoined communication.
Having pointed out to my spirit father that it would be useful to have some names attached to the credentials I received from the spirits at the end of the previous address, he brought several notable spirits with him to Mrs. Gourlay’s this morning (August 4, 1855). This allowed me to read Lanning’s letter, the address I received through him as described above, and my reply. In return, I received the following message.
Communication from an assembly of eminent spirits, sanctioning the credentials transmitted through the mediumship of Mr. Lanning.
August 4, 1855.
August 4, 1855.
Respected Friend: We cheerfully accompany your father to sanction the communication given through our medium, Mr. Lanning, to yourself. My friend, we have sought media in various localities through whom to accredit you as our minister to earth’s inhabitants, but owing to unfavourable conditions, we have, in most instances, failed. We perceive with pleasure that your heart is fully imbued with the importance of your holy mission. It needs no fulsome flattery from us to incite you to action. A principle of right and truth pervades all your movements in this spiritual campaign. We truly style it a campaign, since you are battling fearlessly against Error, that hydra-headed monster who has slain his millions and tens of millions. We have looked forward to the publication of facts involved through your experimental investigations with interest. The communication above referred to was given by one who stood high in the estimation of the people of our great republic; but, for personal reasons, he wishes to withhold his name.
Respected Friend: We happily join your father in approving the message shared through our medium, Mr. Lanning, to you. My friend, we've searched for various sources to recognize you as our representative to the people of Earth, but due to unfavorable circumstances, we have often been unsuccessful. We are pleased to see that your heart is fully aware of the significance of your noble mission. You don’t need any excessive praise from us to motivate you. A sense of right and truth guides all your actions in this spiritual journey. We genuinely call it a journey, as you are bravely fighting against Error, that multi-headed beast that has taken millions of lives. We have eagerly anticipated the publication of the facts involved in your experimental investigations. The communication mentioned above was provided by someone who is held in high regard in our great republic; however, for personal reasons, he prefers to remain anonymous.
Be it known to all who may read these credentials, that we sanction them, and authorize our names to be affixed thereunto.
Let it be known to everyone who reads this document that we approve of it and give our permission for our names to be signed on it.
- George Washington,
- J.Q. Adams,
- Dr. Chalmers,
- Oberlin,
- W.E. Channing, and others.
Postscript by the author.
It is a well-known saying that there is “but one step between the sublime and the ridiculous.” This idea was never verified more fully than in the position I find myself now occupying, accordingly as those by whom that position is viewed may consider the manifestations which have given rise to it in the light wherein they are now viewed by me, or as they were two years ago viewed by myself, and are now seen by the great majority of my estimable contemporaries.
It’s a well-known saying that there’s “just one step between the sublime and the ridiculous.” This idea has never been more clearly demonstrated than in the position I currently hold, depending on how those observing that position interpret the actions that led to it, either through the way I see them now, or how I saw them two years ago, and how they are now perceived by most of my respected peers.
I sincerely believe that I have communicated with the spirits of my parents, sister, brother, and dearest friends, and likewise with the spirits of the illustrious Washington and other worthies of the spirit world; that I am by them commissioned, under their auspices, to teach truth and to expose error. This admitted, I may be reasonably inspired with the sentiment authorized in the preceding credentials, that I hold my office to be greatly preferable to that of any mundane appointment, and for the reasons above given in those credentials. But how vast is the difference between this estimate and that which must ascribe these impressions to hallucination! my position being that of a dupe or fanatic. Yet there can be no man of real integrity and good sense, unimpaired by educational bigotry, who will not respect sincere devotion to the cause of piety, truth, and human welfare, here and hereafter, however displayed. Hence, although the foregoing prefatory pages should have no other influence, they may operate to show my own deep conviction of the righteousness of my course, founded, as I believe it to have been, on the most precise, laborious, experimental inquiry, and built up under the guidance of my sainted father, as well as under the auspices of Washington and other worthy immortals.
I genuinely believe that I have communicated with the spirits of my parents, sister, brother, and closest friends, as well as with the spirits of the great Washington and other notable figures from the spirit world; that I have been given the task, under their guidance, to teach the truth and reveal falsehood. Given this, I feel justified in believing, as stated in the previous credentials, that my role is far more valuable than any earthly position for the reasons explained there. However, the difference between this belief and the view that these experiences are just hallucinations is immense! It places me in a position of being seen as a fool or a zealot. Yet, there is no person of true integrity and sound judgment, free from educational prejudice, who would not respect a genuine commitment to the causes of faith, truth, and human well-being, both here and in the afterlife, no matter how it is expressed. Therefore, even if the earlier introductory pages have no other impact, they may demonstrate my strong conviction in the righteousness of my path, which I believe has been built on careful, thorough, experimental investigation and inspired by my revered father, as well as the guidance of Washington and other honorable spirits.
Those who shall give a careful perusal to the following work will find that there has been some “method in my madness;” and that, if I am a victim to an intellectual epidemic, my mental constitution did not yield at once to the miasma. But let not the reader too readily “lay the flattering unction to his soul” that ’tis my hallucination that is to be impugned, not his ignorance of facts and his educational errors.
Those who take a close look at the following work will see that there’s been some “method in my madness;” and that, if I’m affected by an intellectual craze, my mind didn’t immediately succumb to the confusion. But let’s not have the reader too quickly comfort themselves with the idea that it’s my delusion that needs to be questioned, rather than their lack of knowledge and their educational mistakes.
The sanction of the spirits, as above given, was obtained under test conditions; so that it was utterly out of the power of any mortal to pervert the result from being a pure emanation from the spirits whose names are above given.
The approval of the spirits, as mentioned above, was achieved under controlled conditions; therefore, it was completely beyond any human's ability to distort the outcome from being a genuine expression from the spirits whose names are listed above.
It ought to be understood that the sanction given by the spirits whose names are attached to the preceding certificate, was obtained under test conditions, as explained in paragraph bb., dd., in the description of Plate iv. Moreover, I placed my hand on the instrument illustrated by Fig. 2 in same plate, so as to question the spirits directly as to the reliability of the affirmation, previously given to me, and the fidelity of the medium generally. In both cases the index moved so as to give an affirmative reply.
It should be noted that the approval given by the spirits named in the certificate above was obtained under test conditions, as explained in paragraphs bb. and dd. in the description of Plate iv. Additionally, I placed my hand on the instrument shown in Fig. 2 of the same plate to ask the spirits directly about the reliability of the statement previously given to me and the overall accuracy of the medium. In both instances, the index moved to provide a positive response.
The most precise and laborious experiments which I have made in my investigation of Spiritualism, have been assailed by the most disparaging suggestions, as respects my capacity to avoid being the dupe of any medium employed. Had my conclusions been of the opposite kind, how much fulsome exaggeration had there been, founded on my experience as an investigator of science for more than half a century! And now, in a case when my own direct evidence is adduced, the most ridiculous surmises as to my probable oversight or indiscretion are suggested, as the means of escape from the only fair conclusion.
The most detailed and rigorous experiments I’ve conducted in my exploration of Spiritualism have faced a lot of negative comments regarding my ability to not be fooled by any medium I used. If my findings had been the opposite, imagine the extent of the outrageous exaggeration that would have emerged, based on my experience as a science investigator for over fifty years! And now, when I present my own direct evidence, the most absurd speculations about my potential mistakes or carelessness are put forth as a way to avoid acknowledging the only reasonable conclusion.
Having despatched a spirit friend from Cape Island, at one o’clock on the third of July, to request Mrs. Gourlay, in Philadelphia, to send her husband to the bank to make an inquiry, and to report the result to me at half-past 3 o’clock, the report was made to me as desired. The subject was not mentioned until after my return to Philadelphia, when, being at the residence of Mrs. Gourlay, I inquired of her, whether she had received any message from me during my absence? In reply, it was stated that while a communication from her spirit mother was being made to her brother, who was present, my spirit messenger interrupted it to request her to send her husband to the bank to make the desired inquiry: that, in consequence, the application was made at the bank. The note-clerk recollected the application to him, but appeared to have considered it as too irregular to merit much attention. Hence the impression received by the applicants, and communicated to me, was not correct. But as it did not accord with that existing in my memory, it could not have been learned from MY mind.
Having sent a spirit friend from Cape Island at 1:00 PM on July 3rd to ask Mrs. Gourlay in Philadelphia to send her husband to the bank for an inquiry and report back to me by 3:30 PM, I received the report as requested. The topic wasn't brought up until I returned to Philadelphia. While at Mrs. Gourlay's house, I asked her if she had received any message from me during my absence. She replied that while a message from her spirit mother was being delivered to her brother, who was there, my spirit messenger interrupted to ask her to send her husband to the bank for the needed inquiry. As a result, the request was made at the bank. The note clerk remembered the request but seemed to think it was too unusual to take seriously. Because of this, the impression received by the people who applied, and communicated to me, was incorrect. However, since it didn't match what I remembered, it couldn't have come from MY mind.
Wishing to make this transaction a test, I was particularly careful to manage so that I might honourably insist upon it as a test; and, until I learned the fact from Mrs. Gourlay and from the note-clerk that the inquiry was made, it did not amount to a test manifestation. But, if I had been ever so indiscreet, would it not be absurd to imagine a conspiracy between any person at Cape Island with Dr. and Mrs. Gourlay, her brother, and the note-clerk at the bank, to deceive me on my return by concurrent falsehoods?
Wanting to make this transaction a test, I was particularly careful to handle it in a way that I could proudly claim it as a test; and until I found out from Mrs. Gourlay and the note clerk that the inquiry was made, it didn’t really count as a test manifestation. But even if I had been completely careless, wouldn’t it be ridiculous to think there was some kind of conspiracy among anyone at Cape Island with Dr. and Mrs. Gourlay, her brother, and the note clerk at the bank to mislead me with lies upon my return?
I submit these facts to the public, as proving that there must have been an invisible, intelligent being with whom I communicated at Cape Island, who, bearing my message to this city, communicated it to Mrs. Gourlay, so as to induce the application at the bank. Otherwise, what imaginable cause could have produced the result, especially within the time occupied—of two and a half hours?
I present these facts to the public, as evidence that there had to be an invisible, intelligent being I communicated with at Cape Island, who took my message to this city and relayed it to Mrs. Gourlay, prompting her to apply at the bank. Otherwise, what possible explanation could account for the outcome, especially within a span of just two and a half hours?
The existence of spirit agency being thus demonstrated, I am justified in solemnly calling on my contemporaries to give credence to the important information which I have received from spirits, respecting the destiny of the human soul after death. They may be assured that every other object of consideration sinks into insignificance in comparison with this information and the bearing it must have upon morals, religion and politics, whenever it can be known and be believed by society in general, as it is by me.
The existence of spirit agency being established, I feel justified in earnestly asking my peers to believe the important information I've received from spirits about the fate of the human soul after death. They can be assured that every other issue pales in comparison to this information and its potential impact on morals, religion, and politics whenever it is recognized and accepted by society as a whole, just as I believe it to be.
As introductory to this work, I shall make a few brief remarks on the following topics:—
As an introduction to this work, I want to share a few short thoughts on the following topics:—
Objects of religion.—Diversity of opinion as to the means by which they have been attainable.—Every sect, excepting one, would vote against any one.—Consequent sentiments of the Author as embodied in verse.—Reasons for his believing in the existence of a Deity.—American priesthood eminently honest and pious.—If people who have obtained a belief in immortality by one route are better and happier therefor, why object that others, by another route, should attain the same ends.—The table, no less than our firesides, an object of interest.—Inconsistency of those who make their Deity pass through all the stages of human existence, from the embryo to maturity, in objecting to the transient employment of tables.—Use of the tables soon laid aside in the manifestations to which the Author has resorted.—Inconsistency of accusing Spiritualists of undue incredulity as to scriptural miracles, and of the opposite defect as respects spiritual manifestations.—Of certain savans who strain at spiritual gnats, yet swallow scriptural camels.—Miracles of Scripture, if they ever occurred, can never be repeated; but the manifestations of Spiritualism will be repeated with an improved and a multifarious efficiency.—Religion and positive or inductive science having, under the guidance of devotion and atheism, been made to travel in opposite directions, are by Spiritualism so associated as to travel together in the same direction.—The atheist Comte would dissolve the union between theology and science.—According to Comte, where true science begins, the domain of theology terminates, being only a creature of the imagination.—According to Spiritualism, it is the domain of ignorance that is lessened, while theology, founded on knowledge, grows with its growth, and strengthens with its strength.—An effort to refute the idea of Comte, that the phenomena of the sidereal creation can be explained by gravitation; which, left to itself, would consolidate all the matter in the universe into an inert lump.—Suggestions respecting the devil.—Arguments founded on ignorance.
Objects of religion.—There’s a range of opinions about how they can be achieved.—Every sect, except one, would vote against others.—The Author’s resulting feelings are expressed in verse.—Reasons for his belief in a deity.—The American clergy are notably honest and devout.—If people who believe in immortality through one route are better and happier because of it, why should we oppose others reaching the same outcomes via a different route?—The table, just like our homes, is an object of interest.—It’s inconsistent for those who make their deity go through all stages of human life, from embryo to adulthood, to object to the temporary use of tables.—The use of tables was soon set aside for the manifestations the Author has turned to.—It’s inconsistent to accuse Spiritualists of skepticism regarding biblical miracles while also claiming the opposite about spiritual manifestations.—Some scholars who nitpick spiritual details yet accept major biblical contradictions.—Biblical miracles, if they ever happened, can never be repeated; however, the manifestations of Spiritualism will reoccur with enhanced variety and effectiveness.—Religion and positive or inductive science, under the influence of devotion and atheism, have been made to go in different directions, but Spiritualism unites them to move forward together.—Atheist Comte would break the bond between theology and science.—Comte believes that where true science begins, theology ends, as it is merely a product of the imagination.—Spiritualism argues that ignorance is diminished, while theology, based on knowledge, grows and strengthens with that growth.—An attempt to counter Comte's idea that the phenomena of the universe can be explained by gravitation, which, otherwise left alone, would pile all matter into a lifeless mass.—Thoughts on the devil.—Arguments based on ignorance.
4. To impart that knowledge of a state of existence beyond the grave which will be happier as we are more virtuous in this life, and more miserable as we are more vicious; this knowledge affording the best consolation amid temporal sufferings of the righteous, and the strongest restraint upon the vicious indulgence of passion in the unrighteous.
4. To share the understanding of a state of existence after death that will be happier the more virtuous we are in this life, and more miserable the more we indulge in vice; this understanding provides the greatest comfort during the temporary struggles of the righteous and the strongest deterrent against the reckless indulgence of passion in the unrighteous.
7. The above-mentioned postulates being generally admitted, various recorded traditions, pretended to have been derived from one or more deities, have been advanced as best calculated to meet the requisitions in question. Each of the religious doctrines thus advanced is tenaciously defended by its appropriate priesthood. If the opinions of the majority of these advocates of their respective revelations be taken as respects any creed excepting their own, it will be denounced as originating in error or fraud. The opinion being taken successively upon any one, by all but those to whom it appertains, each would be condemned.
7. With the above-mentioned principles widely accepted, various recorded traditions, claimed to come from one or more gods, have been put forward as best meeting the needs in question. Each of these religious beliefs is vigorously defended by its own group of priests. If the views of most of these defenders regarding any belief that isn’t their own are considered, it will be dismissed as stemming from mistake or dishonesty. When opinions are taken one after another on any one belief, by everyone except those who belong to it, each would be criticized.
They serve to show that my skepticism arose from my love of truth, instead of that aversion from it, ascribed to skeptics by many well-meaning bigots.
They show that my skepticism came from my love of truth, rather than the dislike for it that many well-meaning bigots attribute to skeptics.
On the Evidence of the Existence of a Deity.
BY THE AUTHOR.
11. The existence of the universe is not more evident than that of the reasoning power by which it is controlled. The evidence of profound and ingenious contrivance is more manifested the more we inquire. Yet the universe, and the reason by which it has been contrived and is regulated, are not one. Neither is the reason the universe, nor is the universe the reason. This governing reason, therefore, wherever, or however it may exist, is the main attribute of the Deity, whom we can only know and estimate by his works. And surely they are sufficiently sublime, beautiful, magnificent, and extensive to give the idea of a being who may be considered as infinite in comparison with man. Yet as the existence of evil displays either a deficiency of power, or a deficiency of goodness, I adopt the idea of a deficiency of power in preference.
11. The existence of the universe is no more obvious than the reasoning ability that controls it. The evidence of deep and clever design becomes clearer the more we investigate. However, the universe and the reasoning that designed and regulates it are not the same. The reason is not the universe, nor is the universe the reason. This controlling reason, wherever and however it exists, is the essential characteristic of the Deity, whom we can only understand and evaluate through his creations. And they are certainly grand, beautiful, magnificent, and vast enough to suggest a being that can be seen as infinite compared to humans. Yet, since the presence of evil indicates either a lack of power or a lack of goodness, I prefer to believe in a lack of power.
12. “If,” as Newton rationally infers, “God has no organs,” the person of man cannot be made after God’s image, since the human image is mostly made up by the human organs. Man has feet to walk, arms to work with, eyes for seeing, ears for hearing, a nose for smelling. It were absurd to attribute such organs to God.
12. “If,” as Newton logically concludes, “God has no body,” then humans cannot be made in God’s image, since the human form is primarily defined by our physical bodies. Humans have feet to walk, arms to work with, eyes for seeing, ears for hearing, and a nose for smelling. It would be ridiculous to assign such physical features to God.
13. It follows that while we have as much evidence of a Deity as we have of our own, we are utterly incapable of forming any idea of his form, mode of existence, or his wondrous power. We are as sure of the immensity and ubiquity of his power as of the existence of the universe, with which he must at least be coextensive and in separatelyassociated. That his power must have always existed, we are also certain; since if nothing had ever prevailed, there never could have been any thing: out of nothing, nothing can come.
13. It follows that while we have as much evidence of a Deity as we do of our own existence, we are completely unable to imagine his form, mode of existence, or his amazing power. We are as sure of the vastness and presence of his power as we are of the existence of the universe, with which he must at least be coextensive and closely associated. We are also certain that his power must have always existed; because if nothing had ever been dominant, there could never have been anything: out of nothing, nothing can emerge.
14. The universe, no less than the Deity, must be eternal, since if at any time, however remote, the Deity existed without a universe, there must have been an infinite antecedent period during which the divine power must have been nullified for want of objects for its exercise. A Deity so situated would be as a king without a kingdom to govern.
14. The universe, just like God, has to be eternal because if at any point, no matter how long ago, God existed without a universe, there would have been an infinite time beforehand when divine power was useless due to a lack of things to act upon. A God in that situation would be like a king without a kingdom to rule.
15. I am under the impression that mind is at least as essential to the creation as matter. It seems to me inconceivable that the various elementary atoms of the chemist could come into existence, with their adaptation to produce the multiplicity of efficient combinations which they are capable of forming, without having been modified by one mind. The existence of adaptation, I think, proves the existence of mind. But even were these atoms to possess inherently the adaptation which they manifest, of what possible utility could be the variegated consequences thereof, were there no minds to perceive, appreciate, or enjoy them. The beauty of colour, the music of sound, the elegance of curves or angles, could have no existence were there no perception of them; since those attributes are in a great measure attached to objects by mind. Independently of mind, music is mere aerial vibration, colour mere superficial texture, or intestinal arrangement producing undulatory waves variously polarized, which are the proximate causes, which would be sterile, were there no mind to be actuated by them through appropriate organs.
15. I believe that the mind is just as important to creation as matter. It seems impossible to me that the different basic atoms that chemists study could exist and adapt to create the many effective combinations they can form without being influenced by a mind. The presence of adaptation, in my opinion, indicates the existence of mind. Even if these atoms had the adaptation they show inherently, what would be the point of the diverse outcomes if there were no minds to notice, appreciate, or enjoy them? The beauty of color, the music of sound, the elegance of curves or angles would not exist without perception; those qualities are largely assigned to objects by the mind. Without mind, music is just air vibrations, color is simply a surface texture, or an internal arrangement producing undulating waves in different polarizations, which are the immediate causes that would be pointless without a mind to respond to them through the right organs.
24. Unfortunately, human opinion is very much influenced by passion and prejudice. Hence in questions respecting property, we often find honest men differing as to what is just. So when any creed is associated with the hope of enjoying by its tenure a better, if not exclusive, pretension to eternal happiness and the favour of God, the sectarian by whom it may be held becomes honestly tenacious of its despotic supremacy over all others.
24. Unfortunately, human opinions are heavily swayed by emotions and biases. As a result, when it comes to matters of property, we often see honest people disagreeing about what is fair. So when any belief is tied to the hope of gaining a better, if not exclusive, claim to eternal happiness and God’s favor, the adherent who holds it becomes genuinely protective of its authoritarian dominance over all others.
25. I have no doubt that a large portion of our American priesthood are sincere in the advocacy of the tenets respectively held by them. Among them I have known some of the best of men, and I have generally found them more tolerant of skepticism than the majority of their followers. It has not, however, been unfrequently urged by clergymen as a ground of adherence to Christianity, that without it, there is no authentic evidence of a future state of existence. I have seen an argument from an able and respectable Christian writer, urging that there is no refuge for the mass of mankind to be found in pure deism, unaccompanied by any specific evidence of a future state.
25. I have no doubt that many of our American priests are genuine in their support of the beliefs they hold. Among them, I have encountered some of the best people, and I have generally found them to be more accepting of doubt than most of their followers. However, it has often been argued by clergymen as a reason to stick with Christianity that without it, there is no reliable proof of an afterlife. I have seen a case made by a respected Christian author, arguing that there is no real escape for most people in simple deism, without any specific proof of an afterlife.
26. Under these circumstances should Spiritualism afford such a refuge to those who are utterly dissatisfied with the evidence of the truth of scriptural revelation, it will certainly be a blessing to them; and those who have heretofore found this essential comfort in one way, ought not to object should their neighbours find it in another way.
26. Given these circumstances, if Spiritualism provides a refuge for those who are completely dissatisfied with the evidence supporting the truth of scriptural revelation, it will definitely be a blessing to them; and those who have previously found this essential comfort in one way should not object if their neighbors find it in another way.
27. An effort has been made to throw ridicule on spiritual manifestations, on account of phenomena being effected by means of tables and other movable furniture; but it should be recollected that, when movements were to be effected, resort to movable bodies was inevitable; and as generally the proximity of media, if not the contact, was necessary to facilitate the movements, there was no body so accessible as tables. But these violent mechanical manifestations were always merely to draw attention; just as a person will knock, or even kick, violently at a front door, until some one looks out of a window to communicate with him. The more violent manifestations ceased both at Hydesville, at Rochester, and at Stratford in Connecticut, as soon as the alphabetic mode of communicating was employed. I never have had any to take place during my intercourse with my spirit-friends, unless as tests for unbelievers, when intellectual communications could not be made. It is more than fifteen months since I have resorted to instruments which have nothing in common with tables. Of these instruments, engravings and descriptions will be found in this work.
27. People have tried to mock spiritual manifestations because they often involve moving tables and other furniture. However, it's important to remember that when movements needed to be made, using movable objects was unavoidable, and usually, the presence of mediums, if not direct contact, was necessary to enable these movements. Tables were the most convenient option. These intense mechanical manifestations were just a way to get noticed; much like someone might bang or kick a front door until someone looks out the window to see what's going on. The more extreme manifestations stopped at Hydesville, Rochester, and Stratford in Connecticut as soon as we started using the alphabet for communication. I haven't experienced any during my interactions with my spirit friends, except as tests for skeptics when we couldn't communicate intellectually. It's been over fifteen months since I’ve used instruments that don’t involve tables. You’ll find engravings and descriptions of these instruments in this work.
28. But is it not a great error to consider our tables as less sacred than our firesides? Could any appeal more thoroughly vibrate to the heart of civilized man than that of any invasion of his rights which should render his fireside liable to intrusion? Hence, in the Latin motto, “Pro aris et focis,” the inviolability of the fireside is placed side by side with freedom of conscience. But, with the passing away of winter, the interest in the fireside declines: ’tis changeable as the temperature of air. It loses all its force in the tropics; but, throughout Christendom, the table still draws about it the inmates of every human dwelling, at all seasons, and in every kind of weather. Even when not excited by hunger, we value the social meeting which takes place around it.
28. But isn’t it a big mistake to think of our tables as less sacred than our homes? Is there any issue that can resonate more deeply with civilized people than the invasion of their rights, which would make their home vulnerable to intrusion? Thus, in the Latin motto, “Pro aris et focis,” the sanctity of the home is placed alongside freedom of conscience. However, as winter passes, our interest in the home fades; it’s as changeable as the temperature. It loses all its significance in the tropics; but across Christendom, the table still gathers together the people of every household, no matter the season or the weather. Even when we're not hungry, we cherish the social gathering that happens around it.
33. The human body of Christ must have gone through all the stages from the embryo to maturity. It was worshipped in a manger, and lived thirty years in obscurity and inaction. Why all this delay, when the angel, armed with the power of God, might have addressed Herod, the Roman emperor, and every other potentate on earth in a single year? The Almighty softening their hearts, as he hardened that of Pharaoh, the conversion of mankind had been the inevitable consequence.
33. The physical body of Christ must have experienced every stage from embryo to adulthood. It was adored in a manger and spent thirty years in obscurity and inactivity. Why all this waiting when the angel, empowered by God, could have reached out to Herod, the Roman emperor, and every other leader on earth in just one year? If the Almighty softened their hearts, just as He hardened Pharaoh's, the conversion of humanity would have been inevitable.
37. Had Christ taught these arts, they would not only have had a more general influence during the era of their accomplishment, but have left a durable and irrefragable proof of a towering mental superiority. As they would have gone into use, there could have been no question as to their accomplishment; so that every intelligent being might have become intuitively cognizant of their wonderful results.
37. If Christ had taught these skills, they wouldn't just have had a broader impact during their time, but would also have provided undeniable proof of a remarkable intellectual superiority. As they were put into practice, there would be no doubt about their effectiveness, allowing every intelligent person to intuitively recognize their extraordinary outcomes.
38. The invention of gunpowder, the telegraph, and the mariner’s compass might have been the means of preventing the inroads of the Goths and Vandals, and, subsequently, the success of the Mohammedans; since the Arabians would hardly have availed themselves of23 these inventions at the time the Mohammedan conquests were commenced.
43. Almost every editor is, more or less, a censor to the press, and a peon of popularity. The tendency is not to repress, but to gratify, and, of course, promote existing bigotry. This bigotry and its Siamese brother, intolerance, have, in all countries and ages, been exercising a mischievous, though often a well-intended, vigilance, over any innovation of a nature to emancipate the human mind from educational error; and, whenever supported by temporal power, has resorted to persecution—even to the use of the sword, of the rack, or the fagot; and, in this country of boasted freedom and much-vaunted liberty of the press, shows its baleful power by defamation, or alleging disqualification for employment, wherever its influence can be exerted.
43. Almost every editor is, to some extent, a censor of the press and a servant of popularity. The tendency is not to suppress, but to please, and, of course, encourage existing prejudices. This prejudice and its close sibling, intolerance, have, in every country and era, maintained a troublesome, though often well-meaning, watchfulness over any changes that could free the human mind from educational falsehoods; and, whenever backed by political power, have resorted to persecution—even using the sword, the rack, or the stake; and, in this country that prides itself on freedom and the much-celebrated liberty of the press, reveals its harmful influence through defamation or claiming disqualification for jobs, wherever its power can be applied.
44. A conspicuous printer in this city refused to print an edition of my recent pamphlet, as he would allow nothing to go through his press which was against the Bible. This shows how far fanaticism will go, even at this advanced era of science and in this country of vaunted intellectual freedom.
44. A well-known printer in this city refused to print a copy of my recent pamphlet because he wouldn’t allow anything to go through his press that was against the Bible. This demonstrates how extreme fanaticism can be, even in this advanced age of science and in a country that prides itself on intellectual freedom.
46. In reprobation of unbelief in the scriptural proofs of immortality, it has been usual for self-complacent believers to urge that the “wish was father to the thought;” that a sincere desire to perceive the truth could not exist without conviction; but the opposite must have been the prevailing weakness among unbelievers in Scripture who have become spiritualists, if they are now over-credulous in admitting the evidence on which Spiritualism is founded.
46. In rejecting the disbelief in the scriptural evidence of immortality, self-satisfied believers often argue that the “wish is the father of the thought;” that a genuine desire to understand the truth could not exist without belief. However, the opposite must have been the weakening factor among non-believers in Scripture who have turned to spiritualism, especially if they are now overly gullible in accepting the evidence on which Spiritualism is based.
47. I declare solemnly, that I always was intensely anxious to know the truth; that although, theoretically, I doubted the possibility of changing the course of things by prayer, yet I did often lift my thoughts up to24 God, imploring that some light might be given to me. Of course, as soon as the facts admitted of no other explanation than that my father, sister, brother, and other spirit friends, had been engaged in efforts to convince me of their existence, and of that of the spirit world, the most intense desire arose to verify the facts tending to settle the all-important question, whether man is immortal.
47. I solemnly declare that I have always been deeply anxious to know the truth; that although, in theory, I doubted the possibility of changing circumstances through prayer, I often lifted my thoughts up to 24 God, asking for some guidance. Naturally, once the facts allowed no other explanation than that my father, sister, brother, and other spirit friends were making efforts to convince me of their existence and that of the spirit world, I felt an overwhelming desire to verify the facts that would help answer the crucial question of whether humanity is immortal.
48. If the evidence of the truth of revelation were as adequate as represented by its votaries, my conscientious inability to believe in it would indicate an undue constitutional skepticism; whence I required more proof than the great mass of Christians, in order to produce credence. Yet, now having found the evidence of immortality in the case of Spiritualism satisfactory, it cannot be urged that my hesitation respecting the evidence of revelation arose from any unwillingness to believe in a future state, or unreasonableness as to the evidence requisite to justify belief. Manifestly, it would be inconsistent to accuse me of disbelieving in the one case from undue, hard-hearted incredulity, and yet, in the other, yielding from the opposite characteristics.
48. If the evidence supporting the truth of revelation was as strong as its supporters claim, my honest inability to believe in it would suggest that I am overly skeptical by nature; therefore, I needed more proof than most Christians to accept it. However, now that I find the evidence of immortality presented by Spiritualism to be convincing, it cannot be claimed that my doubts about the evidence of revelation stem from any reluctance to believe in an afterlife or an unreasonable demand for proof to justify my belief. Clearly, it would be inconsistent to accuse me of disbelieving in one case due to excessive skepticism while, in the other case, accepting it based on completely different traits.
49. Fundamentally, my reasons for not believing in revelation have been, that it violates certain axioms above stated, (18,) which have been as clear to my mind as those collated by Euclid.
49. Basically, my reasons for not believing in revelation are that it goes against certain principles mentioned earlier, (18,) which have been as clear to me as those compiled by Euclid.
50. It may be shown that the existing system fails to give any evidence which can be subjected to the intuition of each generation successively. It rests on the alleged intuition of human beings who existed ages ago, and of whom we know nothing but what they say of themselves through history or recorded tradition. It reposes entirely on the testimony of propagandists, who were interested to give it importance, or on partial human narrators or compilers. It has been erected on a species of hearsay evidence, inadmissible in courts of justice. This species of testimony in the case of Spiritualism is contemptuously set aside. No one will believe in manifestations unless intuitively observed. Wherefore this faith in ancient witnesses, this skepticism of those of our own times, even when they are known to be truthful?
50. It can be shown that the current system fails to provide any evidence that can be subjected to the intuition of each generation successively. It relies on the supposed intuition of people who lived long ago, about whom we know nothing except what they claimed about themselves through history or recorded tradition. It is completely based on the testimony of propagandists, who had a vested interest in promoting it, or on biased human narrators or compilers. It has been built on a kind of hearsay evidence that wouldn't be admissible in a court of law. This kind of testimony, in the case of Spiritualism, is dismissively ignored. No one will trust manifestations unless they are directly observed. So, why this faith in ancient witnesses, this skepticism of those of our own times, even when they are known to be truthful?
51. On my stating to a distinguished savan a fact which has been essentially verified since in more than a hundred instances, his reply was—I would believe you as soon as any man in the world, yet I cannot believe what you mention. He suggested the idea of its being an epidemic, with which I was of course infected; nevertheless, that savan, as a professing Christian, admitted facts vastly more incredible, depending on the alleged intuition of witnesses who lived two thousand years ago, nearly. This, doubtless, was the consequence of educational bigotry, which would have caused a belief in the miracles of any other religion in which he should have been brought up.
51. When I shared a fact with a well-respected scholar that has been confirmed in over a hundred cases, his response was—I'd believe you as much as anyone else, but I just can't accept what you're saying. He proposed the idea that it might be an epidemic, which I was of course drawn into; however, that scholar, as a professing Christian, accepted facts that were far more unbelievable, based on the alleged insights of witnesses from nearly two thousand years ago. This, without a doubt, was a result of educational bias, which would have led him to believe in the miracles of any other religion he had been raised in.
55. Spiritualism will in this respect have a great advantage, as it will always be supported by the intuition of its actual votaries. It will not rest on bygone miracles, never to be repeated, if they ever occurred, but will rest upon an intercourse with the spirit world which will grow and improve with time.
55. Spiritualism will have a significant advantage here, as it will always be backed by the intuition of its true followers. It won't rely on past miracles that can’t be repeated, if they even happened at all, but will be based on a connection with the spirit world that will develop and enhance over time.
56. One of the pre-eminent blessings resulting from this new philosophy will be its bringing religion within the scope of positive science. This word positive is employed by the learned atheist Comte to designate science founded on observation and experiment. It will give the quietus to the cold, cheerless view of our being’s end and aim presented in his work.
56. One of the major benefits of this new philosophy will be that it brings religion into the realm of positive science. The term positive is used by the educated atheist Comte to refer to science based on observation and experimentation. This will put an end to the bleak and joyless perspective on our existence's purpose presented in his work.
57. Professor Nichol endeavoured, in the following way, to comfort his Christian auditors against the apparent incompatibility of the phenomena of the sidereal creation with the language of Scripture: Having drawn two lines from the same point, making a right angle, the learned lecturer said, Suppose A sets out and pursues one of these routes, B pursues the other, and both arrive at certain truths; although these results should not seem to have any thing to do with each other; yet, said he, if they be truths, they must come together eventually; they cannot always travel away from each other. But if any person find that, agreeably to all his experience, the results thus attained, tend to greater and greater remoteness and inconsistency, there would be little comfort found in the idea of a possible ultimate approximation.
57. Professor Nichol tried to comfort his Christian listeners about the seeming contradiction between the phenomena of the universe and Scripture. He illustrated this by drawing two lines from the same point at a right angle and said, Imagine A takes one route, B takes the other, and both reach certain truths; even if these outcomes seem unrelated, he continued, if they are indeed truths, they must eventually converge; they can't always move farther apart. However, if someone finds that, based on their experience, the results they reach increasingly diverge and contradict each other, then the idea of a possible eventual convergence offers little comfort.
58. It is upon this actual fundamental discordancy between scriptural impressions, and the truths ascertained by experimental and intuitive investigation, that Comte builds his inference that theology is to be entirely abandoned. But very different is the position of Spiritualism relative to positive science. It starts from the same basis of intuition and induction from facts. It does not controvert any of the results of positive science within the ponderable material creation, to which the results contemplated by Comte belong. It superadds new facts respecting the spirit world, which had so entirely escaped the researches of materialists, that they entertain the highest incredulity merely upon negative grounds,—merely because the facts in question have not taken place within the experience of those who have investigated the laws of ponderable matter and one or two imponderable principles associated therewith.
58. The fundamental disagreement between scriptural beliefs and the truths discovered through practical and intuitive investigation is what Comte uses to argue that theology should be completely abandoned. However, Spiritualism takes a different approach regarding positive science. It begins with the same foundational intuition and induction from facts. It doesn't challenge any of the findings of positive science in the realm of tangible material creation, which is what Comte's conclusions focus on. Instead, it adds new insights about the spirit world, which have been completely overlooked by materialists. They are deeply skeptical simply because these facts haven't been observed by those who study the laws of tangible matter and a few associated intangible principles.
60. It is admitted by Comte that we know nothing of the sources or causes of nature’s laws; that their origination is so perfectly inscrutable, as to make it idle to take up time in any scrutiny for that purpose. He treats the resort to the Deity as the cause, as a mere abstraction tending to comfort the human mind before it has become acquainted with true science, and doomed to be laid aside with the advance of positive science.
60. Comte acknowledges that we know nothing about the sources or causes of nature’s laws; their origins are so completely unknowable that it’s pointless to spend time trying to investigate them. He views the appeal to a deity as merely an idea that helps comfort people before they understand real science, and it will inevitably be abandoned as positive science progresses.
61. Of course his doctrine makes him avowedly a thorough ignoramus as to the causes of laws, or the means by which they were established, and can have no other basis but the negative argument above stated, in objecting to the facts ascertained in relation to the spiritual creation. Hence when the spirits allege that by their volition they can neutralize gravity, or vis inertiæ,[4] there is nothing in positive science to confute this. The inability of material beings to neutralize gravitation by their powers is no proof that spiritual beings cannot effect this change.
61. Obviously, his beliefs show that he is completely clueless about the causes of laws or how they were created, and he can only base his objections on the negative argument mentioned earlier, regarding the facts determined about spiritual creation. Therefore, when spirits claim they can negate gravity or vis inertiæ, there’s nothing in established science that contradicts this. The fact that physical beings can’t counteract gravity with their abilities doesn’t prove that spiritual beings can’t bring about this change.
62. Thus while allowing the atheist his material dominion, Spiritualism will erect within and above the same space a dominion of an importance as much greater as eternity is to the average duration of human life, and as the boundless regions of the fixed stars are to the habitable area of this globe.
62. So while giving the atheist control over material things, Spiritualism will create within and above that same space a realm that is far more significant, just as eternity outweighs the typical length of human life, and as the infinite expanse of the fixed stars surpasses the livable area of our planet.
66. I cannot imagine how any philosopher so learned as Comte should not perceive the reduction of the phenomena of the universe to “different aspects” of the one faculty of gravitation to be utterly impossible. In27 the first place, it has been shown that gravitation could not be the basis of vis inertiæ, without which it cannot exist; and in the next place, gravitation has always, at any given point of time, its possible influence limited to the power of making a body move toward an appropriate centre of gravity, and afterward remain forever at rest, unless affected by some extraneous cause.
66. I can’t understand how a philosopher as knowledgeable as Comte wouldn’t see that reducing the phenomena of the universe to “different aspects” of the single force of gravity is completely impossible. In27 the first place, it’s been demonstrated that gravity cannot serve as the basis for inertia, which is essential for its existence; and secondly, gravity always has, at any given moment, its possible influence limited to the ability to pull an object toward a specific center of gravity, and then it will remain at rest indefinitely unless acted upon by an outside force.
69. How is it possible, I demand, to reduce the orbitual motion of a planet to fewer causes than vis inertiæ, motion, and gravitation? Vis inertiæ and motion are necessary to momentum; and momentum thus arising, acting in a tangential direction to that of gravitation, is indispensable to form, with the force of gravity, the resultant which constitutes the orbitual curve.
71. “The best illustration of this is in the case of the doctrine of gravitation. We say that the general phenomena of the universe are explained by it, because it connects, under one head, the whole immense variety of astronomical facts, exhibiting the constant tendency of atoms toward each other in direct proportion to their masses, and in inverse proportion to the squares of their distance.”
71. “The best example of this is the theory of gravitation. We say that it explains the general phenomena of the universe because it brings together the vast range of astronomical facts. It shows the consistent tendency of atoms to attract each other in direct relation to their masses and in inverse relation to the squares of their distance.”
73. Are there not three essential elements in such orbitual movements,—vis inertiæ, motion, and gravitation? Are not these as necessary to an orbit as three sides are to a triangle? and is it not as great an error to suppose that such movements can continue by the agency of one of them, as to make one right line serve to enclose a superficies?
73. Aren't there three essential elements in orbital movements—inertia, motion, and gravity? Aren't these as necessary to an orbit as three sides are to a triangle? And isn’t it just as big of a mistake to think that such movements can continue through just one of them, as it is to try to use a single straight line to enclose a surface?
74. Between two philosophers, both equally learned with Comte, one may be, like him, an atheist, the other, like Newton, a believer in God; and yet, as respects the whole range of positive science, would there be any clashing? They would attribute every thing to the same laws, whether these should be ascribed to a deity or not. The origin of the laws recognised by both would, by one, be ascribed to an inscrutable God; by the other, to inscrutability without a God.
74. Between two philosophers, both as knowledgeable as Comte, one might be, like him, an atheist, while the other, like Newton, believes in God; and yet, regarding the entire field of positive science, would there be any conflict? They would both attribute everything to the same laws, regardless of whether those laws are linked to a deity or not. The source of the laws acknowledged by both would be seen by one as stemming from an unfathomable God, and by the other as arising from inscrutability without a God.
75. Because the movements of the heavenly bodies are ascribed to the28 three elements above mentioned,—an unknown source of projectile force, vis inertiæ, by which that force is perpetuated, and gravitation, by which it is modified into elliptical, orbitual revolution, operating as laws governing planetary movement,—it does not make the astronomer who adopts this conception less of a theologian; it only makes him a more enlightened theologian. We ascribe less to the special interference of the Creator in proportion as our knowledge enables us to perceive results attained by general laws. This, Comte conceives, causes theists to be less theological, and to lessen what he seems to view as the domain which theology is allowed to have. But is it not more correct to assume that it is only the domain of ignorance which grows less, while that of theology becomes simpler and more correct, but not less extensive? It is not that less is ascribed to God, but that the aggregate is more intelligently ascribed as the laws through which his agency is recognised are fewer.
75. Because the movements of the heavenly bodies are attributed to the28 three previously mentioned elements—an unknown source of projectile force, inertia, which sustains that force, and gravity, which modifies it into elliptical, orbital motion, acting as laws that govern planetary movement—it doesn't make the astronomer who embraces this idea any less of a theologian; it simply makes him a more informed theologian. We attribute less to the specific intervention of the Creator as our understanding allows us to recognize results achieved through general laws. Comte believes this leads theists to be less theological and to shrink what he perceives as the territory allowed for theology. But isn't it more accurate to say that it is only the realm of ignorance that diminishes, while the realm of theology becomes clearer and more accurate, but not less extensive? It's not that less is attributed to God, but rather that the overall understanding is more intelligently assigned as the laws through which his influence is acknowledged are fewer.
76. Newton assumed inertia, gravitation, and motion as the foundation of his philosophy; but attributed these fundamental properties, or states of matter, to the will of that governing mind of which he held the existence to be as evident as that of the matter governed. Comte does not consider that there is any positive proof of the existence of such a ruling mind, and does not, therefore, find it necessary to admit the existence of a Deity. Thus, the states or properties above mentioned are, with Newton, proximate, with Comte, ultimate, causes. Hence, when we arrive at the foundation of the Newtonian doctrine, we cannot go deeper without admitting the existence of a God. Without this admission, we involve ourselves in the irremediable darkness of atheism.
76. Newton believed that inertia, gravitation, and motion were the basis of his philosophy; he credited these fundamental properties, or states of matter, to the intention of a governing mind, which he thought was as obvious as the matter it controlled. Comte, on the other hand, does not see any solid evidence for such a ruling mind, so he doesn’t feel it’s necessary to accept the existence of a Deity. Therefore, for Newton, the states or properties mentioned are immediate causes, while for Comte, they are ultimate causes. Thus, when we examine the foundation of Newton's doctrine, we cannot go any deeper without acknowledging the existence of God. Without this acknowledgment, we find ourselves lost in the inescapable darkness of atheism.
77. In this respect, I have always been a follower of Newton. Evidently, both the governing reason and the creation which it rules must have existed from eternity; since, if nothing ever existed exclusively, it must have forever endured, and there never could have been any thing. So, if there ever had been no mind, there never could have been any mind.
77. In this respect, I've always been a follower of Newton. Clearly, both the governing reason and the creation it oversees must have existed for eternity; because if nothing has ever existed solely, it must have always been there, and nothing could have ever existed. So, if there had ever been no mind, there could never have been any mind.
78. The human mind, says Comte, by its nature employs, in its progress, three methods of philosophizing,—the theological, the metaphysical, and the positive, differing essentially from each other, and even radically opposed. Hence, he assumes the successive existence of three modes of contemplating the aggregate phenomena of the universe, any one of which excludes the others. The first, “is the point of departure of the human understanding; the third, its ultimate, fixed, definite state; the second, merely a state of transition from the first to the third.”
78. The human mind, according to Comte, naturally uses three methods of thinking as it evolves—the theological, the metaphysical, and the positive. These methods are fundamentally different from one another and even completely opposed. Therefore, he suggests the successive existence of three ways of understanding the overall phenomena of the universe, with each one excluding the others. The first is “the starting point of human understanding; the third, its final, fixed, and definite state; the second, just a transitional phase from the first to the third.”
79. It seems to be assumed that the intellectual progress of the human mind must necessarily be through these three stages. Moreover, it is suggested that each individual, in reviewing the progression of his mind from childhood to mature age, will perceive that he was a theologian in his childhood, a metaphysician in his youth, and a natural philosopher in29 his manhood. If this did not come from a distinguished philosopher, I should pronounce it ridiculous. If allowed to be so egotistical, I must say that I am not aware that I went through these stages in the different periods of my life.
79. It seems that people assume the intellectual growth of the human mind has to go through these three stages. Additionally, it's suggested that each person, when reflecting on their mental journey from childhood to adulthood, will notice that they were a theologian as a child, a metaphysician in their youth, and a natural philosopher in 29 their adulthood. If this idea didn't come from a notable philosopher, I would find it laughable. If I'm allowed to be a bit self-centered, I have to say that I'm not aware of going through these stages at different points in my life.
80. Studying metaphysical works as a part of my education, I took great interest in the theory of moral sentiments, and published essays on topics of that nature in the “Portfolio;” but previously, I wrote my “Memoir on the Blowpipe.” In 1810, my “Brief View of the Policy and Resources of the United States” was published, in which it was first truly advanced that credit is money.
80. As part of my education, I studied metaphysical works and became very interested in the theory of moral sentiments, publishing essays on similar topics in the “Portfolio.” However, before that, I wrote my “Memoir on the Blowpipe.” In 1810, my “Brief View of the Policy and Resources of the United States” was published, in which I was the first to clearly argue that credit is money.
86. He holds that our inquiries should be bounded by the inscrutability of the well-ascertained physical properties and laws of matter. Coinciding, practically, with Comte until lately, I held that inquiry should be bounded by the inscrutability of the Divine Lawgiver, to whom these laws owed existence. But Spiritualism has opened an avenue to inquiry beyond the boundary thus practically admitted no less by myself than by Comte. Other inscrutable laws and phenomena have to be recognised within a region for the existence of which Comte, in denying spiritual agency, allows no room.
86. He believes that our questions should be limited to the unclear nature of the well-established physical properties and laws of matter. Until recently, I agreed with Comte that our inquiries should be restricted by the mystery of the Divine Lawgiver, from whom these laws derive their existence. However, Spiritualism has opened up a path for exploration beyond this limit, which both Comte and I have practically accepted. There are other mysterious laws and phenomena that need to be acknowledged in a realm that Comte denies by rejecting spiritual influence.
87. Though, practically, this field of inquiry was shut out from me as well as from Comte, theoretically, it was not excluded by my philosophy. Although in ascribing the universe to mind, the unity of its design and harmony of its phenomena led to the inference that it must be due to one supreme mind, there was still room for the coexistence of any number of degrees of subordinate mental agency, between that supreme mind and man.
87. Even though this area of study was practically off-limits to me, just like it was for Comte, theoretically, it wasn't ruled out by my philosophy. While attributing the universe to a mind, the unity of its design and the harmony of its phenomena suggested that it must originate from one supreme mind, there was still space for the existence of any number of lesser mental agencies that coexist between that supreme mind and humanity.
88. Beside those antagonists to Spiritualism, who would set aside the evidence of persons living at the present time and who are known to be30 truthful, by the evidence of others who lived some thousand years since, spiritualists are assailed by such as admit their facts, but explain them differently. Thus the Roman Catholic Church has admitted the manifestations to indicate an invisible physical and rational power which cannot be attributed to human agency. But instead of ascribing them to spirits, good or bad, of mortals who have passed the portal of death, they consider them the work of Old Nick.
88. Alongside those opponents of Spiritualism who ignore the evidence from people alive today, who are known to be30 truthful, in favor of accounts from people who lived thousands of years ago, spiritualists are also challenged by those who accept their facts but interpret them differently. For example, the Roman Catholic Church acknowledges the manifestations as signs of an unseen physical and rational force that can’t be attributed to human actions. However, instead of saying these phenomena come from the spirits—good or bad—of those who've died, they attribute them to Old Nick.
89. If this personage ever did influence the acts of any sect, manifestly it must have been in those instances in which alleged religious error has been made the ground for persecution, from the time of the extirpation and spoliation of the Midianites, Canaanites, and others, down to that of the extirpation of the Albigenses, the auto da fé, inquisition, massacre of St. Bartholomew, fires of Smithfield, roasting of Servetus, and the persecution of the Quakers and witches.
89. If this person ever had an impact on the actions of any group, it must have been in those cases where supposed religious mistakes were used as a reason for persecution, starting from the time of the elimination and plundering of the Midianites, Canaanites, and others, all the way to the eradication of the Albigenses, the auto da fé, the Inquisition, the St. Bartholomew's Day Massacre, the fires of Smithfield, the burning of Servetus, and the persecution of the Quakers and witches.
90. So far as the devil is only an imaginary embodiment of the evil passions of men, as conceived by many enlightened Christians, no doubt those and many other analagous acts were due to the devil; but when the benevolent language of the spirits respecting sinners is contrasted with the cruel doctrine of the church in question, as well as by others, it can hardly be conceived that this language comes from Satan, and that of the churches from the “benevolent” Jesus Christ.
90. If the devil is just an imaginary representation of the evil feelings of people, as many informed Christians believe, then it's likely that those and many similar actions were influenced by the devil. However, when we compare the compassionate words of spirits about sinners with the harsh teachings of the church in question and others, it's hard to believe that these words come from Satan, while those of the churches come from the "kind" Jesus Christ.
95. But I conceive that the existence of a devil is irreconcilable with all goodness and omnipotency; and that, were a devil created by God, the Creator would be answerable for all the acts of the being so created. Evidently, the devil could be nothing else but what omnipotence should make him, and could do nothing but what prescience would foresee. The acts of the devil would therefore be indirectly those of his maker.
95. But I believe that the existence of a devil is incompatible with all goodness and all-powerfulness; and that if a devil were created by God, the Creator would be accountable for all the actions of that being. Clearly, the devil could only be what an all-powerful being would make him, and could only do what foreknowledge would predict. Therefore, the actions of the devil would ultimately be the actions of his creator.
100. It would seem to be an axiom, that whenever any event does not take place, it must be because there is no being who has at once the power and the wish to cause it to happen; and when any event does ensue, there can exist no being having at once the power and wish to prevent it from happening. Moreover, consistently, no agent can exist whose destruction is desired by another being, who, having the right, is competent by mere volition to destroy that agent.
100. It seems to be a basic truth that whenever something doesn’t happen, it’s because there’s no one with both the power and the wish to make it happen; and when something does happen, there’s no one with both the power and wish to stop it. Additionally, no agent can exist if another being wants to destroy it and has the right to do so simply by choosing.
106. The language held by certain sectarians on such subjects, seems to me often contradictory of the idea they strive to enforce. Thus they represent that our sorrows and our pangs are intended for our amendment, or designed to prevent some greater evil here or hereafter; but what can justify a painful remedy, if there be power to adopt one which, while equally efficacious, would be painless?
106. The way some sectarians talk about these issues often seems to contradict the message they’re trying to convey. They claim that our suffering and pain are meant for our improvement or to prevent some bigger harm here or hereafter; but what can justify a painful solution if there is a way to choose one that would be just as effective, but painless?
107. God is, on one side, represented as the cause of all the circumstances under which we exist; yet, on the other, is under the necessity of afflicting us in order to remove or to remedy them! If possessing both ability and disposition to reform us without causing us to suffer, could suffering be inflicted consistently with all goodness?
107. God is portrayed as the reason for all the circumstances we find ourselves in; however, He also seems to have to make us suffer to fix or address those situations! If He has both the power and the willingness to change us without our suffering, how can suffering be justified alongside true goodness?
108. Of a most excellent Roman Catholic I inquired whether it was not held by their church that a belief in their tenets was necessary to salvation? The reply was in the affirmative. And yet, said I, of all who do believe, only those can be saved who do their Master’s will,—who add good works to an orthodox creed? The reply was again affirmative. Of all mankind, then, there is but a very small number, comparatively, who are not, according to the creed in question, to go to hell? Again I received an affirmative reply. I would then (I rejoined) when I die, rather go into an eternal sleep, than awake in heaven to find so many of my fellow-creatures in endless misery, the mere knowledge of which would make heaven itself a hell to a good-hearted angel.
108. I asked a very devout Roman Catholic if their church believes that faith in their teachings is essential for salvation. They answered yes. And yet, I pointed out, among all who believe, only those who follow their Master's will—who combine good deeds with a right belief—can be saved? They agreed again. So, among all people, there must be a very small number who, according to this belief, won’t end up in hell? Once more, they confirmed this. Then I said, when I die, I would rather fall into eternal sleep than wake up in heaven only to find so many of my fellow humans suffering endlessly—the mere thought of that would turn heaven into hell for a kind-hearted angel.
109. Another species of objection to the existence of spirits is, that although movements of bodies are admitted to take place without any perceptible or conceivable mortal agency, the existence of spirits as the cause is to be disbelieved, because the observers have not been successful in getting replies such as they think would have been given were spirits the source.
109. Another type of objection to the existence of spirits is that, while it's accepted that objects can move without any obvious or understandable human influence, the idea that spirits are the cause is dismissed because observers haven't been able to get responses that they believe would have been given if spirits were actually involved.
110. Thus a very distinguished physician, Dr. Bell, has alleged that nothing has in his investigations been communicated which was not previously in the mind of one or more mortals present. This is one of the instances in which the assailant of Spiritualism founds his argument in his error. It is an argument which has no other basis than inaccurate information, because I am enabled to disprove the truth of the conclusion on which the inference is founded.
110. A well-known doctor, Dr. Bell, has claimed that nothing in his investigations was shared that wasn't already known by one or more people present. This is one example where critics of Spiritualism base their argument on a mistake. It's an argument built on incorrect information, and I can prove that the conclusion it's based on is false.
111. Nevertheless, I am not surprised that an inference should have been made, which holds good as respects certain spirits or media, though not others. If a pack of cards be so cut that the card exposed cannot be seen by any mortal present, it may be found that although certain spirits cannot describe the card, unless seen by some person present, yet other spirits can describe the card under these circumstances. Among my guardian spirits, there are two who have repeatedly described the card exposed fortuitously by cutting a pack, as in the process for determining trumps in a game of whist.
111. Still, I’m not surprised that a conclusion has been drawn, which is true for certain spirits or mediums, but not for others. If a deck of cards is cut in such a way that the card revealed is invisible to anyone present, it may turn out that while some spirits cannot identify the card without someone seeing it, other spirits can describe the card in these situations. Among my guiding spirits, there are two who have repeatedly identified the card revealed by randomly cutting a deck, like in the process of determining trumps in a game of whist.
112. Since reading Dr. Bell’s remarks, cards, taken indiscriminately from a pack, and laid down behind the medium and myself, the denomination unseen by any mortal, have been named correctly by one of the spirits alluded to, although, about the same time, another eminent spirit could not name cards when similarly employed.
112. Since reading Dr. Bell’s remarks, cards taken randomly from a deck and placed behind the medium and me, with the value unseen by anyone, have been accurately named by one of the spirits mentioned. However, at the same time, another prominent spirit was unable to name the cards when used in the same way.
113. Agreeably to my experience in a multitude of cases, spirits have reported themselves who were wholly unexpected, and when others were expected. When I was expecting my sister in Boston, my brother reported himself. Lately, when expecting her, Cadwalader was spelt out, being the name of an old friend, who forthwith gave me a test, proving his identity. As this spirit had never visited my disk before, I had not the smallest expectation of his coming.
113. Based on my experience in many cases, spirits have introduced themselves when I least expected them and when I was anticipating others. When I was waiting for my sister in Boston, my brother came through instead. Recently, while expecting her, the name Cadwalader was spelled out, which is the name of an old friend. He immediately gave me a sign to prove his identity. Since this spirit had never connected with me before, I had no expectation at all of his arrival.
116. On the 3d instant, at one o’clock A. M., I requested the faithful being in question to go to my friend Mrs. Gourlay, No. 178 North Tenth street, Philadelphia, and request her to induce Dr. Gourlay to go to the Philadelphia Bank to ascertain at what time a note would be due, and that I would sit at the instrument at half-past three o’clock to receive the answer. Accordingly, at that time, my spirit friend manifested herself, and gave me the result of the inquiry.
116. On the 3rd of this month, at one o'clock A. M., I asked the loyal spirit in question to visit my friend Mrs. Gourlay at 178 North Tenth Street, Philadelphia, and to urge her to get Dr. Gourlay to go to the Philadelphia Bank to find out when a note would be due. I planned to wait at the instrument at half-past three o'clock to get the answer. At that time, my spirit friend appeared and shared the result of the inquiry with me.
117. On my return to the city, I learned from Mrs. Gourlay that my angelic messenger had interrupted a communication, which was taking place through the spiritoscope, in order to communicate my message, and, in consequence, her husband and brother went to the bank, and made the inquiry, of which the result was that communicated to me at half-past three o’clock by my spirit friend.
117. When I got back to the city, Mrs. Gourlay told me that my heavenly messenger had interrupted a communication taking place through the spiritoscope to deliver my message. As a result, her husband and brother went to the bank and made the inquiry, which resulted in the news that my spirit friend shared with me at half-past three o’clock.
119. But independently of the inability to communicate ideas, not pre-existing in the minds of mortals present, which has been so erroneously inferred to exist by Dr. Bell, let this eminent physician suggest any conceivable explanation of the phenomena attested by him, excepting that founded on the agency of spirits.
121. To conclude, I hope that while Spiritualism will give a quietus to atheism, it will be found, agreeably to the facts and reasoning presented in this book, better sustained by evidence, and to answer the great objects of religion, as above stated, vastly better than any other religious doctrine.
121. To wrap things up, I hope that while Spiritualism will put an end to atheism, it will be shown, based on the facts and reasoning presented in this book, to be better supported by evidence and to fulfill the key purposes of religion, as mentioned earlier, far better than any other religious belief.
THEOLOGICAL AXIOMS.
Is not the affirmative of any of these queries, as evidently true as any of the axioms of Euclid?
Isn't the answer to any of these questions as clearly true as any of Euclid's axioms?

NARRATIVE OF THE AUTHOR’S EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION OF SPIRITUALISM.
122. The first fruit of my attention to the phenomena of table turning, was the following letter. I trust I shall not be considered as self-complacent, when I allege it to be an exemplification of wise ignorance, which is about equivalent to folly. The wisest man who speaks in ignorance, speaks foolishly to the ears of those who perceive his ignorance. The great mass of men of science appear in this light to spiritualists when they argue against Spiritualism. Men who are only nominally Know Nothings have proved a formidable party in politics; unfortunately, Spiritualism has, in its most active opponents, real Know Nothings, who will not admit any fact of a spiritual origin, unless such as they have been educated to believe. In that case, many have powers of intellectual deglutition rivalling those of the anaconda in the physical way.[5]
122. The first result of my focus on the phenomenon of table turning was the following letter. I hope I won’t come across as self-satisfied when I say it's an example of wise ignorance, which is almost the same as folly. The wisest person who speaks from ignorance sounds foolish to those who can see his ignorance. The majority of scientists appear this way to spiritualists when they argue against Spiritualism. People who are only nominally Know Nothings have formed a significant faction in politics; unfortunately, Spiritualism’s most active opponents are real Know Nothings who reject any fact of spiritual origin unless it's something they’ve been taught to accept. In those cases, many possess a capacity for intellectual digestion that rivals that of an anaconda in the physical realm.[5]
Letter in reply to an Inquiry respecting the influence of Electricity in Table Turning.
Philadelphia, July 27, 1853.
Philadelphia, July 27, 1853.
123. “Dear Sir: I am of opinion that it is utterly impossible for six or eight, or any number of persons, seated around a table, to produce an electric current. Moreover, I am confident that if by any adequate means an electrical current were created, however forcible, it could not be productive of table turning. A dry wooden table is almost a non-conductor, but if forming a link necessary to complete a circuit between the sky and earth, it might possibly be shattered by a stroke of lightning; but if the power of all the galvanic apparatus ever made was to be collected in one current, there would be no power to move or otherwise affect such a table.
123. “Dear Sir: I believe it is completely impossible for six, eight, or any number of people sitting around a table to generate an electric current. Furthermore, I’m certain that even if an electrical current were somehow created, no matter how strong, it wouldn’t be able to cause the table to move. A dry wooden table is nearly a non-conductor, but if it acted as a necessary link to complete a circuit between the sky and the earth, it could potentially be struck and shattered by lightning. However, if all the electrical devices ever made were combined into one current, there would still be no power to move or otherwise affect such a table.
125. “Insulated conductors, whether inanimate, or in the form of animals, may be electrified by the most powerful means, without being injured or seriously incommoded. Before a spark of lightning passes, every object on the terrestrial surface, for a great distance around, is subjected to a portion of the requisite previous accumulation. Yet it is only those objects which are made the medium of discharge that are sensibly affected.
125. “Insulated conductors, whether non-living or in the form of animals, can be charged with electricity using the strongest methods without getting harmed or seriously disturbed. Before a lightning strike occurs, everything on the ground within a wide area experiences some level of the necessary buildup. However, only those objects that serve as the path for the discharge are noticeably affected.
126. “Powerful galvanic accumulation can only be produced by those appropriate arrangements which concentrate upon a comparatively small filament of particles their peculiar polarizing power; but nothing seems to me more inconsistent with experience than to suppose a table moved by any possible form or mode of galvanic reaction. It was ascertained by Gaziot that one of the most powerful galvanic batteries ever made could not give a spark before contact to a conductor presented to it, at the smallest distance which could be made by a delicate micrometer. If there is any law which is pre-eminent for its invariability, it is, that inanimate matter cannot, per se, change its state as respects motion or rest. Were this law liable to any variation, we should be proportionably liable to perish; since in that case the revolutions and rotations of our planet and its satellite might undergo perturbations by which the ocean might inundate the land, or the too great proximity or remoteness of the sun cause us to be scorched or frozen. If the globe did not carry the Pacific more steadily than the most competent person could carry a basin of water, we should be drowned by the overflow of the land. I recommend to your attention, and that of others interested in this hallucination, Faraday’s observations and experiments, recently published in some of our respectable newspapers. I entirely concur in the conclusions of that distinguished experimental expounder of Nature’s riddles.
126. “Powerful electrical buildup can only be created by specific setups that focus the unique polarizing power on a fairly small stream of particles; however, nothing seems more inconsistent with what we know than to think a table can be moved by any form of electrical reaction. Gaziot found that one of the most powerful electric batteries ever created couldn't produce a spark before a conductor was brought close to it, even at the tiniest distance measurable with a precise micrometer. If there's any law that holds true without exception, it's that inanimate matter cannot per se change its state regarding motion or rest. If this law were subject to change, we would be at significant risk; because in that case, the movements of our planet and its satellite could be disrupted, causing the oceans to flood the land or the varying distance from the sun to either scorch or freeze us. If the earth didn't keep the Pacific Ocean more steadily than even the most skilled person could hold a basin of water, we would be overwhelmed by flooding. I encourage you and others who are captivated by this illusion to look at Faraday’s observations and experiments, recently published in some of our reputable newspapers. I fully agree with the conclusions of that renowned experimental interpreter of Nature’s mysteries.”
Robert Hare.”
Robert Hare.”
127. This publication drew forth the following remonstrance in the subjoined letter, which does great credit to the correctness of the author’s observation and sagacity. It contributed, together with a personal invitation from Dr. Comstock to attend a circle, to induce the investigation upon which I entered immediately afterward.
Southwick, Mass., Nov. 17, 1853.
Southwick, MA, Nov. 17, 1853.
128. “Dear Sir: I had the pleasure of a slight acquaintance with you, something less than twenty years ago, when I exhibited telescopes in Philadelphia. You will, I trust, excuse the liberty I take in writing to you now. I have seen your letter to the Philadelphia Inquirer upon table moving. I never believed it was caused by electricity or galvanism, but is it not as likely to be these, as muscular force? You agree with Professor Faraday that the table is moved by the hands that are on it. Now I know, as certainly as I can know any thing, that this is not true in general, if it is in any instance. There is as much evidence that tables some37times move without any person near them, as that they sometimes move with hands on them. I cannot in this case doubt the evidence of my senses. I have seen tables move, and heard tunes beat on them, when no person was within several feet of them. This fact is proof positive that the force or power is not muscular.
128. “Dear Sir: I had the pleasure of knowing you a little less than twenty years ago when I showcased telescopes in Philadelphia. I hope you’ll forgive me for reaching out to you now. I saw your letter to the Philadelphia Inquirer about table moving. I never believed it was caused by electricity or galvanism, but isn't it just as possible for it to be those as it is for it to be muscular force? You agree with Professor Faraday that the table is moved by the hands that are on it. Now I know, as certainly as I can know anything, that this isn't generally true, assuming it’s true in any case. There’s just as much evidence that tables sometimes move without anyone around them as there is that they move with hands on them. In this scenario, I can't doubt what my senses tell me. I’ve seen tables move and heard tunes played on them when no one was within several feet of them. This fact clearly proves that the force or power is not muscular.
129. “If any further evidence was necessary to set aside Professor Faraday’s explanation, it is found in abundance in the great variety of other facts taking place through the country, such as musical instruments being played upon without any hands touching them, and a great variety of other heavy articles being moved without any visible cause. If tables never moved except when hands were on them, the case would be different; but as they do move, both with and without hands, it is plain that the true cause remains yet to be discovered.
129. “If more evidence was needed to disprove Professor Faraday’s explanation, it can be seen all around the country in the many occurrences, like musical instruments being played without anyone touching them, and various heavy objects being moved without any apparent reason. If tables only moved when hands were on them, that would be a different story; but since they can move both with and without hands, it’s clear that the real cause has yet to be found.
130. “I wish, sir, that you had leisure and opportunity to witness some other phases of this matter, which seem not yet to have fallen under your notice, and I think you would be satisfied that there is less ‘hallucination’ and ‘self-deception’ about it, than you have imagined. The intelligence connected with these movements has not been accounted for.
130. “I wish you had the time and chance to see some other aspects of this situation that haven't come to your attention yet, and I believe you would realize that there's less ‘hallucination’ and ‘self-deception’ involved than you think. The information related to these actions has not been explained.”
131. “If these things can be accounted for on scientific principles, would it not be a great acquisition to science, to discover what those principles are? If, however, science cannot discover them, the public are deeply interested in knowing the fact. It is certainly of great importance that these strange things that are taking place everywhere should be explained. It is affecting the churches seriously; whether for good or for evil is uncertain until the truth is known. No cause has yet been assigned that does not imply a greater absurdity than even to believe, as many do, that it is caused by spirits either good or bad, or both.
131. “If these things can be explained by scientific principles, wouldn’t it be a huge gain for science to find out what those principles are? However, if science can’t uncover them, the public deserves to know that. It’s definitely important to explain these strange occurrences happening everywhere. It’s having a serious impact on the churches; whether it’s for good or bad is uncertain until we know the truth. So far, no explanation has been given that doesn’t suggest an even greater absurdity than the belief, held by many, that these things are caused by spirits, whether good, bad, or both."
“Yours, respectfully, Amasa Holcombe.”
“Sincerely,” Amasa Holcombe.”
133. It will be perceived that the letter alluded to by Mr. Holcombe, written in reply to some inquiries respecting my opinion of the cause of table turning, was published in the Philadelphia Inquirer, in July, 1853. This letter will show that I was at that time utterly incredulous of any cause of the phenomena excepting unconscious muscular action on the part of the persons with whom the phenomena were associated. The inferences of Faraday, tending to the same conclusion, I thoroughly sanctioned.
133. It's clear that the letter mentioned by Mr. Holcombe, which I wrote in response to some questions about my views on table turning, was published in the Philadelphia Inquirer in July 1853. This letter will demonstrate that I was completely skeptical of any explanation for the phenomena other than unconscious muscle movements by the people involved. I fully supported Faraday's conclusions, which pointed to the same idea.
134. As no allusion to spirits as the cause had been made by this Herculean investigator in the letter which drew forth mine, they were not38 contemplated in my view of the subject. Had I ever heard spiritual agency assigned as a cause, so great was my disbelief of any such agency, that it would have made no impression on my memory.
134. Since this strong investigator didn't mention spirits as the cause in the letter that prompted my response, I didn't consider them in my perspective on the matter. Even if I had heard spiritual influence suggested as a cause, my disbelief in such an influence was so strong that it wouldn’t have stuck in my mind.38
135. Though present on several occasions when table turning was the subject of discussion, it was not, within my hearing, attributed to spiritual agency. In common with almost all educated persons of the nineteenth century, I had been brought up deaf to any testimony which claimed assistance from supernatural causes, such as ghosts, magic, or witchcraft.
135. Although I was there during several discussions about table turning, no one ever linked it to spiritual sources while I was listening. Like almost everyone educated in the nineteenth century, I had been raised to dismiss any claims of help coming from supernatural causes like ghosts, magic, or witchcraft.
136. Subsequently to my publication corroborating the inferences of Faraday, having, in obedience to solicitations already cited, consented to visit circles in which spiritual manifestations were alleged to be made, I was conducted to a private house at which meetings for spiritual inquiry were occasionally held.
137. Seated at a table with half a dozen persons, a hymn was sung with religious zeal and solemnity. Soon afterward tappings were distinctly heard as if made beneath and against the table, which, from the perfect stillness of every one of the party, could not be attributed to any one among them. Apparently, the sounds were such as could only be made with some hard instrument, or with the ends of fingers aided by the nails.
137. Sitting at a table with six other people, they sang a hymn with fervor and seriousness. Shortly after, distinct tapping sounds were heard, as if coming from beneath or against the table, which, due to the complete stillness of everyone present, couldn't be linked to anyone among them. The sounds seemed to come only from some hard object, or from fingers tapping with the help of their nails.
138. I learned that simple queries were answered by means of these manifestations; one tap being considered as equivalent to a negative; two, to doubtful; and three, to an affirmative. With the greatest apparent sincerity, questions were put and answers taken and recorded, as if all concerned considered them as coming from a rational though invisible agent.
138. I discovered that straightforward questions were answered through these signs; one tap meant 'no', two taps signified 'maybe', and three taps indicated 'yes'. With the utmost apparent sincerity, questions were asked, answers were received and noted, as if everyone involved believed they were coming from a logical but unseen source.
139. Subsequently, two media sat down at a small table, (drawer removed,) which, upon careful examination, I found to present to my inspection nothing but the surface of a bare board, on the under side as well as upon the upper. Yet the taps were heard as before, seemingly against the table. Even assuming the people by whom I was surrounded, to be capable of deception, and the feat to be due to jugglery, it was still inexplicable. But manifestly I was in a company of worthy people, who were themselves under a deception if these sounds did not proceed from spiritual agency.
139. After that, two people sat down at a small table, (drawer removed,) which, when I looked closely, I found was just a bare board on both the top and bottom. Yet the tapping sounds continued as before, apparently coming from the table. Even if the people around me could be faking it, and it was just some trick, it still didn't make sense. But it was clear that I was with decent people who would be deceived themselves if these sounds didn’t come from some spiritual source.
141. The medium to whose presence these manifestations were due, then held a flute against the panel of the door, and invited me to listen. On putting my ear near to the flute, tapping was quite audible. On the ensuing evening, I carried with me a sealed glass tube, a hollow tube of the same material, and a brass rod. These being successively held against39 the door panel, similarly to the holding of the flute, the rapping was again heard.[6]
141. The medium responsible for these manifestations then put a flute against the door panel and invited me to listen. When I put my ear close to the flute, I could clearly hear tapping. The next evening, I brought a sealed glass tube, a hollow tube made of the same material, and a brass rod. When I placed these against39 the door panel, just like I did with the flute, the tapping was heard again.[6]
142. I have much reason to confide in the disinterestedness of the medium through whose assistance these facts were observed. She would not allow me even to make a present to her child; and her sitting for me was deemed prejudicial to her comfort and health, so that by the advice of her physician it was finally discontinued. Her parents believed the manifestations obtained through her influence to be caused by spirits.
142. I have good reason to trust the selflessness of the medium who helped me observe these facts. She wouldn’t even let me give a gift to her child; and her sitting for me was considered harmful to her well-being, so, on her doctor’s advice, it was eventually stopped. Her parents believed the manifestations that occurred through her influence were caused by spirits.
143. Sitting at another mansion, in company with an able lawyer, (an unbeliever in Spiritualism,) as well as an accomplished female medium and two other persons, sounds were heard like those above mentioned. The lawyer alluded to, though from his profession accustomed to distrust and to scrutinize evidence, admitted that he found it utterly impossible to account for these sounds by any visible agency.
143. Sitting in another mansion, with a skilled lawyer (who didn’t believe in Spiritualism), along with a talented female medium and two other people, we heard sounds similar to those described earlier. The lawyer, although used to skepticism and examining evidence in his profession, admitted that he found it completely impossible to explain these sounds through any visible means.
144. In order to make my narrative of the evidence upon the subject of rapping continuous, I would state that during the evening of my first visit to the circle of spiritualists, as above mentioned, while grasping with my utmost energy a table at which I was seated, two female media, by merely placing their hands upon the surface of the table on the opposite side, caused it to move to and fro, in despite of my utmost exertions.
144. To keep my account of the evidence regarding rapping consistent, I want to mention that during the evening of my first visit to the group of spiritualists, as I noted earlier, while I was holding onto a table with all my strength, two female mediums, by simply placing their hands on the other side of the table, made it move back and forth despite my best efforts.
146. Passing the fingers over the letters upon an alphabetic pasteboard, like those to assist children in learning their letters, when it comes over the required letter, its selection is indicated either by a tapping or tilting. By this process, when the medium’s eyes were directed to the ceiling, as independently observed by the legal friend above mentioned, as well as myself, the following communication was given:
146. Running the fingers over the letters on an alphabet board designed to help kids learn their letters, when you reach the right letter, you indicate your choice by either tapping or tilting it. Using this method, when the medium's eyes were directed toward the ceiling, as independently noted by the previously mentioned legal friend and myself, the following message was conveyed:
148. The lawyer declared that he was utterly unable to conceive how, by the human means apparently employed, such sentences could be elaborated. Legerdemain on the part of the person who took down the manifestation was the only way to get rid of this evidence without resorting to the agency of some invisible intelligent being, who, by operating upon the tables, at once exercised physical force and mental power.
148. The lawyer stated that he simply couldn't understand how, using the seemingly human methods involved, such sentences could be created. The only explanation for getting rid of this evidence without the help of some unseen intelligent being, who would have to exert both physical force and mental influence on the tables, was trickery on the part of the person taking down the statement.
149. But assigning the result to legerdemain was altogether opposed to my knowledge of his character. This gentleman, and the circle to which he belonged, spent about three hours, twice or thrice a week, in getting communications through the alphabet, by the process to which the lines above mentioned were due. This would not have taken place, had they not had implicit confidence, that the information thus obtained proceeded from spirits.
149. But attributing the outcome to trickery was completely against my understanding of his character. This man, along with his group, dedicated about three hours, two or three times a week, to receiving messages through the alphabet, using the method that the earlier lines referred to. This wouldn't have happened if they hadn't had complete confidence that the information they received came from spirits.
150. Subsequently, I contrived an apparatus which, if spirits were actually concerned in the phenomena, would enable them to manifest their physical and intellectual power independently of control by any medium. (See Engraving and description, Plate I.)
150. Later on, I created a device that, if spirits were truly involved in the phenomena, would allow them to show their physical and intellectual abilities without being controlled by any medium. (See Engraving and description, Plate I.)
151. Upon a pasteboard disk, more than a foot in diameter, the letters cut out from an alphabet card were nailed around the circumference, as much as possible deranged from the usual alphabetic order. About the centre a small pulley was secured of two and a half inches diameter, fitting on an axletree, which passed through the legs of the table, about six inches from the top. Two weights were provided—one of about eight pounds, the other about two pounds. These were attached one to each end of a cord wound about the pulley, and placed upon the floor immediately under it. Upon the table a screen of sheet zinc was fastened, behind which the medium was to be seated, so that she could not see the letters on the disk. A stationary vertical wire, attached to the axle, served for an index.
151. On a cardboard disk over a foot wide, letters cut from an alphabet card were nailed around the edge, intentionally jumbled rather than following the usual order. In the center, a small pulley with a diameter of two and a half inches was secured, fitted onto an axle that ran through the table legs, about six inches from the surface. Two weights were used—one weighing around eight pounds and the other about two pounds. Each weight was connected to one end of a cord wrapped around the pulley and rested on the floor directly underneath it. A screen made of sheet zinc was attached to the table, behind which the medium would sit so she couldn't see the letters on the disk. A stationary vertical wire connected to the axle served as an indicator.
152. On tilting the table, the cord would be unwound from the pulley on the side of the larger weight, being wound up simultaneously to an equivalent extent on the side of the small weight, causing the pulley and disk to rotate about the axle. Restoring the table to its normal position, the smaller weight being allowed to act unresisted upon the cord and pulley, the rotation would be reversed. Of course, any person actuating the table and seeing the letters, could cause the disk so to rotate as to bring any letter under the index; but should the letters be concealed from the operator, no letter required could be brought under the index at will.
152. When the table is tilted, the cord unwinds from the pulley on the side of the larger weight, while at the same time, it winds up on the smaller weight, causing the pulley and disk to rotate around the axle. When the table is returned to its normal position, the smaller weight acts freely on the cord and pulley, reversing the rotation. Naturally, anyone operating the table and seeing the letters could make the disk rotate to bring any letter under the index; however, if the letters are hidden from the operator, no specific letter can be brought under the index at will.
157. “Will my father do me the favour to bring the letters under the index successively in alphabetical order?” Immediately the disk began to revolve so as to produce the desired result. After it had proceeded as far as the middle of the alphabet, I requested that “the name of Washington should be spelt out by the same process.” This feat was accordingly performed, as well as others of a like nature.
157. “Will my father do me the favor of bringing the letters under the index in alphabetical order?” Immediately, the disk started to turn to create the desired result. After it had gone halfway through the alphabet, I asked for “the name of Washington to be spelled out using the same method.” This was done, as well as other similar tasks.
159. I urged that the experiment was of immense importance, if considered as proving a spirit to be present, and to have actuated the apparatus; affording thus precise experimental proof of the immortality of the soul: that a matter of such moment should not be considered as conclusively decided until every possible additional means of verification should be employed.
159. I stressed that the experiment was extremely important, especially if it demonstrated the presence of a spirit that manipulated the apparatus; providing clear experimental evidence of the soul's immortality. Such a significant issue shouldn’t be considered definitively resolved until every possible additional method of verification has been used.
161. Nevertheless, the medium, relenting, gave me another sitting at her own dwelling a few days afterward; when I had improved the apparatus by employing two stationary weights by which the cord actuating the pulley, as in the drill-bow process, was made to pull it round by a horizontal motion of the table supported on castors, instead of the tilting motion.
161. Nevertheless, the medium, softening, gave me another session at her place a few days later; when I improved the setup by using two stationary weights that allowed the cord controlling the pulley, similar to the drill-bow method, to turn it by a horizontal movement of the table on wheels, instead of the tilting motion.
163. On the following week, I took my apparatus to the house of a spiritualist, where a circle was to meet. The apparatus being duly arranged, a lady whom I had never before noticed, and by whom my apparatus was seen for the first time, sat down at my table behind the screen. The spirit of an uncle who had left this life was invoked by this medium. Her invocation being successful, the spirit spelt his name out in full; other names were spelt out at request.
163. The following week, I brought my equipment to a spiritualist's house where a circle was set to meet. Once my equipment was properly set up, a woman I had never seen before, and who was seeing my equipment for the first time, sat down at my table behind the screen. The medium called upon the spirit of an uncle who had passed away. After her successful invocation, the spirit spelled out his name completely; other names were spelled out upon request.
164. Although the requisite letters were ultimately found, there was evidently some difficulty, as if there was some groping for them with an imperfect light. This has been explained since by my father’s spirit. He alleges that preferably the eyes of the medium would be employed, but that, although with difficulty, he used mine as a substitute.
164. Although the necessary letters were eventually found, there was clearly some trouble, as if there was some searching for them in dim light. This has since been explained by my father's spirit. He claims that ideally the medium's eyes would have been used, but that, although it was difficult, he used mine as an alternative.
166. Those spirits by whom I obtained my test manifestations were interested in my success. Others have refused to aid me in like manner. One who has assisted me with much zeal, has communicated that he would work my apparatus when arranged for a test; but, that as it caused much more exertion, and, of course, retardation, he advised that the test arrangement should not be interposed when it could be avoided.
166. The spirits that helped me with my test manifestations were genuinely invested in my success. Others, however, have chosen not to assist me in the same way. One spirit who has supported me enthusiastically mentioned that he would operate my equipment once it was set up for a test; however, since it required much more effort and, of course, caused delays, he suggested that we should avoid using the test setup whenever possible.
167.[7]The table, at this stage of my inquiry, was not more than thirty inches in length. I had improved the construction in the following way:
167.[7]At this point in my investigation, the table was only about thirty inches long. I had made the following improvements to its design:
168. Two of the legs were furnished with castors, through holes duly bored. Through perforations in the other two legs a rod was introduced, serving as an axle to two wheels of about five inches diameter. One of these wheels was grooved, so as to carry a band which extended around the pulley of the disk. Hence, pushing the table nine inches horizontally by the necessary rotation of the supporting wheels, caused the disk to make a complete revolution. It was while the table was of the size above mentioned, that I first saw the violent action to which they might be subjected without any corresponding or commensurate visible cause. The hand of the medium being laid on the table at about half-way between the centre and the nearest edge, it moved as if it were animated, jumping like a restive horse.
168. Two of the legs had wheels attached, with holes drilled for that purpose. A rod was put through the holes in the other two legs, acting as an axle for two wheels that were about five inches in diameter. One of these wheels was notched to hold a band that wrapped around the pulley of the disk. Therefore, pushing the table nine inches horizontally by rotating the supporting wheels caused the disk to complete a full turn. It was when the table was the size mentioned above that I first witnessed the intense movement it could endure without any apparent reason. When the medium placed their hand on the table about halfway between the center and the nearest edge, it moved as if it were alive, jumping like a restless horse.
169. Having my apparatus thus prepared, a medium sat at my table, the screen intercepting her view of the disk. No manifestation took place through the disk, though other indications of the presence of spirits were given. Hence, inducing the medium to sit at an ordinary table, I inquired if any change could be made which would enable them to communicate through my apparatus? The reply through the alphabetic card was, “Let the medium see the letters.” At first it struck me that this would make the experiment abortive, as it would remove the condition by which alone independency of interference by the medium was secured. However, it soon occurred that by means of a metallic plate, made quite true, and some brass balls, like billiard balls, with which I was provided, I could neutralize the power of the medium to move the table, so that she could not influence the selection of the letters, though permitted to see them.
169. With my setup ready, a medium sat at my table, and the screen blocked her view of the disk. There were no manifestations through the disk, but other signs of spirits were present. So, I asked the medium to sit at a regular table and if any changes could be made to allow them to communicate through my apparatus. The response through the alphabetic card was, “Let the medium see the letters.” At first, I thought this would ruin the experiment because it would eliminate the condition that ensured the medium's influence was limited. However, I soon realized that by using a perfectly flat metallic plate and some brass balls, similar to billiard balls, I could cancel out the medium's ability to move the table, allowing her to see the letters without being able to influence the selection.
170. Accordingly, as soon almost as the medium placed her hands on the plate resting on the ball, and without any other communication with the table, the disk began to revolve in such a way as to bring the letters under the index in due alphabetic order. Afterward various names were43 spelled, and communications were made. At subsequent sittings, the grandfather and brother of the medium manifested their presence successively by spelling their names on the disk. My father, by means of this apparatus, gave me the name of an uncle who was killed by the Arabs nearly seventy years ago. In order that, without any possibility of contact with the legs, the medium might sit at the table, the length was subsequently extended to six feet, being so made as to separate into three parts, for convenience in carrying from one place to another. It is under this modification that it is represented in Plate 2 accompanied by a description, with the medium sitting as when employed in obtaining some of the manifestations herein mentioned. On the left may be seen the wheels and axle. The front wheel may be distinguished, with its groove securing the band which embraces it, together with the pulley on the disk.
170. As soon as the medium placed her hands on the plate resting on the ball, and without any other communication with the table, the disk started to spin in a way that aligned the letters under her finger in alphabetical order. Afterwards, various names were spelled out, and messages were received. In later sessions, the medium's grandfather and brother showed their presence by spelling their names on the disk. My father, using this setup, revealed the name of an uncle who was killed by the Arabs nearly seventy years ago. To ensure that the medium could sit at the table without any possible contact with the legs, its length was later extended to six feet, allowing it to be separated into three parts for easy transport. It is in this modified form that it is depicted in Plate 2 with a description, showing the medium sitting as she did when obtaining some of the manifestations mentioned here. On the left, you can see the wheels and axle. The front wheel is identifiable, featuring its groove that holds the band, along with the pulley on the disk.
172. On one side of the long table, Plate 2, a board or tray on castors is represented. This was used sometimes as a support for the hands of the medium, by its being interposed between them and the table. On one occasion, where the hands of the medium were supported by the plate and ball upon this tray, it was moved briskly to and fro upon the table, the hands of the medium and the ball and plate accompanying the motion.
172. On one side of the long table, Plate 2, there’s a board or tray on wheels. This was sometimes used to support the medium’s hands by placing it between their hands and the table. On one occasion, when the medium's hands were resting on the plate and ball on this tray, it was moved back and forth quickly on the table, along with the medium's hands and the ball and plate.
173. On various subsequent occasions I have had this experiment of putting the hands of the medium on a plate and balls repeated, and with the same result. The interposition of the plate and balls makes it much more difficult for spirits to move a table than when the hands are directly applied. In the latter case, the spirits actuate the hands primarily, and the table or apparatus secondarily; but when the hands are incapacitated from influencing the motion, the spirit has to assail the inanimate matter directly, assisted only by an emanation from the medium. In this attack upon ponderable matter, the spirits of the second sphere are the most capable; but even with their assistance, the condition of the medium must be very favourable to render success possible.
173. On several occasions afterward, I repeated the experiment of placing the medium's hands on a plate and balls, and the results were the same. Using the plate and balls makes it much harder for spirits to move a table compared to when the hands are directly touching the surface. In the latter situation, the spirits primarily influence the hands, and the table or device moves as a result; however, when the hands are unable to affect the motion, the spirit must directly engage with the inanimate object, supported only by an energy from the medium. In this effort to affect solid matter, spirits of the second sphere are the most capable, but even with their help, the medium's condition must be very favorable for success to be possible.
174. I next resorted to an apparatus like the plaything called a see-saw, excepting that the fulcrum, instead of being under the middle of the board, was situated at one-fourth of the whole length from one end. There was one foot on one side of the fulcrum, and three feet on the other. The disk and its axle was transferred from the table, Plate I, near to the longer end of this seesaw-like apparatus. The cord attached to two weights was employed as above described, so that as the disk was made to rise or fall with the vibration of the board by the action of the cord, a revolution took place, bringing the letters successively under the index, as already explained to have resulted from the movements of the table.
174. I then used a device similar to a see-saw, but instead of the pivot being in the middle of the board, it was positioned one-fourth of the way from one end. There was one foot on one side of the pivot and three feet on the other. The disk and its axle were moved from the table, Plate I, close to the longer end of this see-saw-like device. The cord attached to two weights was used as described earlier, so that as the disk rose or fell with the board's vibrations due to the cord's action, it caused a rotation, bringing the letters one after another under the index, just like what happened with the movements of the table.
175. The disk being situated edgewise to the medium, the letters could not be seen. Under these circumstances, the hands of the medium were placed upon the surface of the smaller portion of the board outside of the fulcrum. The disk revolved to and fro, so as to bring the letters under the index in due alphabetic order. Moreover, while this process was under way, to render the result more unquestionable, I interposed a screen between the disk, and the eyes of the medium, without causing any arrestation of the process.[8]
175. The disk was positioned on its edge against the medium, making the letters unreadable. In this situation, the medium's hands were placed on the outer part of the smaller section of the board, away from the fulcrum. The disk moved back and forth to align the letters in the correct alphabetical order. Additionally, to make the outcome even more reliable, I put a screen between the disk and the medium's eyes, without interrupting the process.[8]
177. When the hands of the medium, or those of any other operator, were placed upon this tray, it was impossible to move the table by means of it, because much less force would make it move on its castors than would move the table. Sometimes the tray would be moved backward and forward with rapidity, the table remaining quite still. Yet, on urging that the table should be moved, this desideratum would be conceded, and the tray would become stationary, relatively, to the table. On one occasion, when an intelligent spirit was manifesting, I interposed a brass ball (Plate I.) and plate between the tray and the hands of the medium, and then requested that the tray might be moved. My request was obeyed; the tray moved repeatedly about a foot to and fro, accompanied by the hand of the medium, the ball remaining at rest, relatively, to the tray.
177. When the medium's hands, or anyone else's hands, were on this tray, it was impossible to move the table using it because it took much less force to move the tray on its wheels than to move the table. Sometimes the tray would move back and forth quickly while the table stayed completely still. However, when I asked for the table to be moved, that request was granted, and the tray would become still in relation to the table. One time, when a knowledgeable spirit was coming through, I placed a brass ball (Plate I.) and a plate between the tray and the medium's hands, and then asked for the tray to be moved. My request was fulfilled; the tray moved back and forth about a foot multiple times, while the medium's hand moved with it, and the ball stayed still in relation to the tray.
178. Having my apparatus at the residence of the lady by whom it had been actuated in the third trial above mentioned, (172) this lady sitting at the table as a medium, my sister reported herself. As a test question, I inquired “What was the name of a partner in business, of my father, who, when he had left the city with the Americans during the Revolutionary war, came out with the British, and took care of the joint property?” The disk revolved successively to letters correctly indicating the name to be Warren. I then inquired the name of the partner of my English grandfather, who died in London more than seventy years ago. The true name was given by the same process.
178. With my equipment set up at the home of the lady who had been involved in the third trial mentioned above, (172) this lady acting as a medium at the table, my sister announced her presence. As a test question, I asked, “What was the name of a business partner of my father, who, when he left the city with the Americans during the Revolutionary War, returned with the British and managed their shared property?” The disk spun around the letters, accurately revealing the name to be Warren. I then asked for the name of my English grandfather’s partner, who passed away in London over seventy years ago. The correct name was provided using the same method.
180. Subsequently, in the presence of a medium utterly unacquainted with my family, to whom I was first introduced in December, 1853, and who had only within two years previously removed to our city from Maine, I inquired of my father the name of an English cousin who had married an admiral. The name was spelled out. In like manner the maiden name of an English brother’s wife was given—an unusual name, Clargess.
180. Later on, in front of a medium who had no prior knowledge of my family, whom I first met in December 1853, and who had only moved to our city from Maine two years earlier, I asked my father for the name of an English cousin who had married an admiral. The name was spelled out. Similarly, the maiden name of an English brother’s wife was provided—an uncommon name, Clargess.
181. The principle of my apparatus for spiritual manifestations has been employed on a smaller scale by Mr. Isaac T. Pease, of Thompsonville, Connecticut, substituting the reaction of a spring for that of a weight, and making the index revolve instead of the disk. (Plate I.)
181. The basic idea behind my device for spiritual manifestations has been used on a smaller scale by Mr. Isaac T. Pease, of Thompsonville, Connecticut, using the reaction of a spring instead of a weight, and causing the index to spin instead of the disk. (Plate I.)
182. By the modification which I made for the employment of this smaller instrument communication was greatly facilitated. I had subsequently a copious interchange of ideas with my father, brother, and sister, and other friendly spirits. (See engraving and description, Plate I, Fig. 2.)
182. With the adjustments I made for using this smaller device, communication became much easier. I later had a lot of discussions with my dad, brother, sister, and other friendly people. (See engraving and description, Plate I, Fig. 2.)
183. At the house of a spiritualist who had been holding circles for more than a year, I had confirmatory evidence of the intelligence by which spirit rapping is regulated. I was allowed to subject the table employed to a strict scrutiny, removing the drawer to obtain a more thorough inspection. This table was nevertheless repeatedly agitated with an energy which could not be ascribed to the hands placed quietly upon its surface by a circle of persons perfectly quiescent. Often at this circle, and at others during the chanting of hymns, have I seen a table thus situated keeping time by its vibratory movements with a sympathetic tremour.
183. At the house of a spiritualist who had been holding gatherings for over a year, I found evidence that confirmed the intelligence behind spirit rapping. I was permitted to thoroughly inspect the table used in the session by taking out the drawer for a closer look. Despite this, the table was continually moved with a force that couldn’t be attributed to the hands resting calmly on its surface by a group of completely still individuals. Many times at this gathering, and at others during the singing of hymns, I observed a table in this position keeping rhythm with its vibrating movements in sync with a sympathetic tremor.
184. The spirit friend of a medium present, who called herself Amanda Ford, used on request to make a sound like that of the hammering by blacksmiths, designated as “ten-pounds-ten.” This sound would be shifted to that of sawing or sweeping. Doubtless, these manifestations might be imitated by certain ventriloquists; but I had not the smallest reason to suspect ventriloquism, and Amanda gave me the following unquestionable proofs of her spiritual existence:
184. The spirit companion of a medium named Amanda Ford would, upon request, make a sound resembling the hammering of blacksmiths, called “ten-pounds-ten.” This sound could shift to that of sawing or sweeping. While it’s true that some ventriloquists could imitate these sounds, I had no reason to suspect ventriloquism, and Amanda provided me with the following undeniable evidence of her spiritual existence:
185. Taking up the alphabetic card, and holding it up near my face, in a feeble light, with the back toward the medium, so as not to be inspected by any one else, I asked Amanda, as I should pass my fingers over the letters, to indicate those necessary for spelling out her name, by the usual manifestation. The name was in this way correctly spelt out.
186. In the next place, at the same time and under the same circumstances, I asked her then to spell the name of Washington. Passing my fingers over the letters of the alphabet, not regularly but zigzag, and stopping a short time at the letters adjoining the right ones, that much-revered name was correctly spelt out, with one single error, the omission of the G.
186. Next, at the same time and in the same situation, I asked her to spell the name of Washington. I moved my fingers over the letters of the alphabet, not in a straight line but zigzag, pausing briefly at the letters next to the correct ones, and that much-admired name was spelled out correctly, except for one mistake—the omission of the G.
Of manifestations founded on table movements without contact, or such contact, as cannot be sufficient to cause the result.
188. It was at the same mansion, where the above-mentioned manifestations were observed, that I first saw a table continue in motion when every person had withdrawn to about the distance of a foot; so that no one touched it; and while thus agitated on our host saying, “Move the table toward Dr. Hare,” it moved toward me and back again. At the same premises, when between the hands of each of two media and a small table a plate upon a brass ball was interposed, without any other communication with it, the table was violently overset, so as to have its legs uppermost. Yet while thus upside down, it continued to vibrate, a single finger of a medium girl, about twelve years of age, being the sole means of human contact therewith. This I ascertained, with the greatest care, by kneeling on the floor and causing the finger of the medium, by the tip of which alone her touch was effected, to be situated between me and the light of a lamp.
188. It was at the same mansion, where the previous occurrences were noted, that I first saw a table continue to move when everyone else had stepped back about a foot; so no one was touching it. While it was moving, our host said, “Move the table toward Dr. Hare,” and it slid toward me and then back again. At the same location, when a plate was placed on a brass ball between the hands of two mediums and a small table, without any other contact, the table was abruptly knocked over, ending up on its legs. Even while upside down, it kept vibrating, with just one finger from a medium girl, around twelve years old, being the only point of human contact. I confirmed this very carefully by kneeling on the floor and positioning her fingertip, which was the only part of her touching the table, between me and the light of a lamp.
189. In the observations above stated, respecting the movements of the table when untouched, I was aided by the presence of my friend Joseph Hazard, Esq., of Narragansett, Rhode Island, who occupied a seat opposite to mine on the other side of the table; so that while he saw all clear on one side, I saw all clear on the other. In my narrative I have adverted to two recent instances in which severally, in the presence only of the medium and myself, the table moved, as I could judge, about eight inches, being at the same time untouched by either of us.
189. In the observations mentioned earlier about the table's movements when untouched, I was assisted by my friend Joseph Hazard, Esq., from Narragansett, Rhode Island, who sat opposite me on the other side of the table; while he could clearly see everything on his side, I could see everything on mine. In my account, I referred to two recent instances where, only in the presence of the medium and myself, the table moved approximately eight inches, without either of us touching it.
190. Next in importance to the movements of tables which take place without any contact, are those in which the table rises under the hands of the medium laid gently upon it. On one occasion I saw a large circular table, supported by three massive claws on castors, overset several times by the influence of three ladies, who were media. In order to have this experiment performed with as much precision as circumstances would permit, I seated myself on one side of the table, so as to be equidistant from two of the three claws by which it was supported. The intermediate medium, was directly opposite the third claw, while the others stood one on each side of her. My relative position was such, that as they were standing upright before me, I could look at their persons partially below as well as above the table. These arrangements having been made, the three media laid their hands on the table a little beyond the margin, so that they could not apply their thumbs below the edge and thus assist the table to raise. Under these circumstances I was enabled to watch the media above as well as below the table, by casting my eyes upward and downward alternately, they being all on their feet, and standing upright.47 It was under these conditions, that the table, in three successive trials, came over toward me and went back to its normal position.
190. Next in importance to the movements of tables that happen without any contact are those where the table rises under the hands of the medium gently placed on it. One time, I witnessed a large circular table, supported by three sturdy legs on wheels, tipping over several times due to the influence of three women who were mediums. To conduct this experiment with as much accuracy as possible, I sat on one side of the table to be equidistant from two of the three legs that supported it. The medium in the middle was directly opposite the third leg, while the others stood on either side of her. My position allowed me to see both above and below the table as they stood upright before me. After arranging everything, the three mediums placed their hands on the table just beyond the edge, ensuring they couldn't push their thumbs underneath to lift it. In these conditions, I was able to observe the mediums above and below the table by alternating my gaze up and down, as they were all standing. Under these circumstances, the table tipped toward me three times in a row before returning to its original position.47
192. I called one morning at the dwelling of a medium to whom allusion has been made more than once in my narrative. I sat down at a table with the medium, her father, and a gentleman who accompanied me. I inquired if any of my spirit friends were present; the table tilted negatively. “Will the spirit give its initials through the alphabetic card?” In reply the letters M C were indicated. My companion, whose attention had been withdrawn, on hearing the result, said: “They are the initials of my daughter’s name;” exclaiming, “Maria, are you here?”
192. One morning, I visited a medium I had mentioned several times in my story. I sat down at a table with the medium, her father, and a man who was with me. I asked if any of my spirit friends were around; the table tilted negatively. “Can the spirit give its initials using the alphabet card?” In response, the letters M C were shown. My companion, who had been distracted, upon hearing the result, said: “Those are the initials of my daughter’s name;” and exclaimed, “Maria, are you here?”
194. Maria proving to be a sprightly spirit, a lively conversation ensued. I inquired if she could not work my apparatus; she answered through the card, “It is impossible for a spirit to work your apparatus; I am very sorry.” I replied that evidently it was not impossible, since it had been actuated by spirits successfully several times. “You mean to say,” I added, “that it is difficult.” To this she replied affirmatively by three tilts of the table.
194. Maria turned out to be quite the lively spirit, sparking an energetic conversation. I asked her if she could operate my device; she responded through the card, “It's impossible for a spirit to use your device; I'm really sorry.” I replied that it clearly wasn’t impossible, since it had been successfully activated by spirits several times. “What you mean is,” I continued, “that it's difficult.” To this, she confirmed with three tilts of the table.
195. As through the influence of the medium, who sat at the table with us, communications had been received through my apparatus several times, the alphabet arranged from a state of disarrangement, and names spelt out by the revolution of the disk, it cannot be imagined that the medium could have influenced the alphabetical communications in this instance, since the medium, even if prone to deception, would have perceived it ridiculous to allege it impossible to work an apparatus which had on several occasions under her influence, proved the opposite to be true, in the presence of her father as well as myself.
195. Since we received messages multiple times through my device because of the medium, who was sitting at the table with us, the letters were arranged from a jumbled state, and names were spelled out by the spinning disk. It’s hard to believe that the medium could have influenced the alphabetical messages in this case. Even if she was inclined to deceive, she would have found it absurd to claim that it was impossible to operate a device that had clearly demonstrated the opposite while her father and I were present.
196. It has been already mentioned in the narrative (164.) that my spirit father, and spirit friend W. W., had alleged that they worked my apparatus with great difficulty when under test conditions, from their great desire to make me a convert to Spiritualism. It was, therefore, quite consistent that a spirit, who had no such powerful motive, should have preferred to find an apology for not actuating my apparatus, rather than to have studied, or sought for the means of surmounting the obstacles.
196. It's already been mentioned in the narrative (164.) that my spirit father and spirit friend W. W. claimed they struggled to operate my device under testing conditions because they really wanted to convert me to Spiritualism. So, it makes sense that a spirit without such strong motivation would rather come up with excuses for not working my device than try to find ways to overcome the challenges.
197. As all the manifestations, observed on this occasion, were by the tilting or partial lifting of the table, I urged the spirit to aid me in obtaining a test that these manifestations came not from the medium, but from herself, a spirit. I immediately procured from a basket which I had previously brought to the premises, a brass ball, turned truly spherical, like a billiard ball, and a plate of zinc which had been ground quite true. I48 placed the ball on the table, the plate on the ball, and the hands of the medium on the plate. She had no other communication with the table than that which was thus established. Pressing on the ball when situated between perpendicular lines falling inside of all the legs of the table, would of course only press it downward more firmly on its feet.
197. Since all the movements observed during this event were due to the table tilting or being partially lifted, I urged the spirit to help me conduct a test to show that these manifestations were coming not from the medium but from her, a spirit. I quickly grabbed a brass ball, perfectly spherical like a billiard ball, and a zinc plate that had been finely ground from a basket I had brought with me. I48 placed the ball on the table, then put the plate on top of the ball, and set the medium's hands on the plate. She had no other connection with the table except for the setup we created. Pressing down on the ball, which was positioned between the vertical lines drawn inside the table legs, would only push it down more firmly onto its feet.
198. Things being thus arranged, I solicited Maria to repeat the upward jerks which she had employed in the communication which she had been making. Her father joined his solicitation to mine, pointing out that my object was to obtain evidence, which would satisfy the scientific world that such manifestations were due to the agency of spirits.
198. With things set up this way, I asked Maria to do the upward jerks again that she had used in her previous communication. Her father added his request to mine, emphasizing that my goal was to gather evidence that would convince the scientific community that these manifestations were caused by spirits.
200. Subsequently, being in company with Maria’s father, at the dwelling of a spiritualist, and sitting with a medium at the table supporting an apparatus for alphabetical communications, the spirit of Maria, who seems to follow her worthy father with much filial affection, reported herself. I inquired whether she remembered our previous meeting, and what means I resorted to as a test. She replied, “You used a plate and ball to support the hands of the medium, which I knocked away.”
200. Later, while I was with Maria’s father at a spiritualist's home, sitting with a medium at a table designed for communication, the spirit of Maria, who seems to care for her father deeply, made contact. I asked if she remembered our last meeting and what test I had used. She replied, “You used a plate and ball to stabilize the medium's hands, which I knocked away.”
201. While receiving communications from my spirit sister, the table tilting toward the medium, so as to cause the cord actuating the index, by being through a string tied to a weight on the floor, alternately to be withdrawn and returned, consequently, winding off and on the pulley which turned the index, I suggested that the relative position of the medium should be reversed, so that she should be on the same side with the apparatus. By this change the table would have to rise under the hands of the medium. The proposed modification was successfully carried out.
201. While receiving messages from my spirit sister, the table tilted toward the medium, causing the cord connected to the index, which ran through a string tied to a weight on the floor, to alternately pull back and return. This action wound the cord off and on the pulley that turned the index. I suggested that the medium should be positioned on the same side as the apparatus. With this change, the table would need to rise under the medium's hands. The suggested change was successfully implemented.
203. Under this head comes the experiment in which a board was supported so as to turn on a fulcrum, one foot of the board being on one side of the fulcrum, and three feet on the other, the longer end suspended on a spring balance. When a medium, eleven years old, placed his hands on the short end, that end rose while the other, of course, went down; in some instances, showing an increase of downward pressure on the balance, equivalent to seven pounds.
203. This section covers an experiment where a board was propped up to pivot on a fulcrum, with one foot of the board on one side of the fulcrum and three feet on the other. The longer end was held up by a spring scale. When a medium, who was eleven years old, placed his hands on the shorter end, that end would lift while the other end naturally sank, and in some cases, this showed an increased downward force on the scale equivalent to seven pounds.
204. This experiment was subsequently repeated at my laboratory, in the presence of John M. Kennedy, Esq. Having a basin of water on the board, the boy’s hands being merely immersed in the water, and not touching the parietes of the containing vessel; the balance was affected as in the experiment above described, although not to so great an extent.
204. This experiment was later repeated in my lab, with John M. Kennedy, Esq. present. With a basin of water on the table, the boy's hands were only submerged in the water and didn’t touch the sides of the container; the balance was influenced just like in the previous experiment, although not as much.
206. My much-esteemed friend, Prof. Henry, having treated this result as incredible, I was induced to repeat it with the greatest precision and precaution, as represented in Plate 3. The board, as already described, being about four feet in length, is supported by a rod as a fulcrum at about one foot from one end, and, of course, three feet from the other; a glass vase, about nine inches in diameter and five inches in height, having a knob to hold it by when inverted, had this knob inserted in a hole made in the board, six inches nearly from the fulcrum. Thus, the vase rested on the board, the mouth upward. A wire-gauze cage, such as is used to keep flies from sugar, was so arranged by well-known means, as to slide up or down on two iron rods, one on each side of the trestle supporting the fulcrum. By these arrangements it was so adjusted as to descend into the vase until within an inch and a half of the bottom, while the inferiority of its dimensions prevented it from coming elsewhere within an inch of the parietes of the vase. Water was poured into the vase so as to rise into the cage till within about an inch and a half of the brim.
206. My highly respected friend, Prof. Henry, found this result hard to believe, so I felt compelled to repeat it with utmost precision and care, as detailed in Plate 3. The board, as previously described, is about four feet long, supported by a rod acting as a fulcrum about one foot from one end and three feet from the other. A glass vase, around nine inches in diameter and five inches tall, has a knob that allows it to be held when flipped over; this knob was inserted into a hole made in the board, nearly six inches from the fulcrum. Thus, the vase rested on the board with its opening facing up. A wire-gauze cage, similar to those used to keep flies away from sugar, was arranged using familiar methods to slide up or down on two iron rods, one on each side of the trestle that supports the fulcrum. With these setups, it was adjusted to descend into the vase until it was about an inch and a half from the bottom, while its smaller size kept it from getting within an inch of the sides of the vase. Water was then poured into the vase to fill it until it rose into the cage, stopping about an inch and a half from the rim.
207. A well-known medium (Gordon) was induced to plunge his hands, clasped together, to the bottom of the cage, holding them perfectly still. As soon as these conditions were attained, the apparatus being untouched by any one excepting the medium as described, I invoked the aid of my spirit friends. A downward force was repeatedly exerted upon the end of the board appended to the balance equal to three pounds’ weight nearly.
207. A well-known medium (Gordon) was encouraged to place his hands, clasped together, at the bottom of the cage, keeping them completely still. Once these conditions were achieved, with the apparatus untouched by anyone except the medium as described, I called on my spirit friends for assistance. A downward force was consistently applied to the end of the board attached to the balance, equivalent to nearly three pounds.
208. It will be perceived that in this manifestation, the medium had no means of communication with the board, beside the water. It was not until he became quite still, that the invocation was made. Nevertheless, he did not appear to be subjected to any reacting force. Yet, the distance of the hook of the balance from the fulcrum on which the board turned, was six times as great as the cage in which the hands were situated. Consequently, a force of 3 × 6 = 18 pounds must have been exerted. The board would probably have been depressed much more, but that the water had been spilled by any farther inclination of the vase.
208. It can be seen that in this situation, the medium had no way to communicate with the board except through the water. It wasn't until he became completely still that the invocation was made. Still, he didn't seem to be affected by any opposing force. However, the distance of the hook from the fulcrum where the board pivoted was six times greater than the cage that held the hands. Therefore, a force of 3 × 6 = 18 pounds must have been applied. The board probably would have been pushed down much more, but the water had spilled due to any further tilt of the vase.
211. At the same time and place, after the manifestation by means of the spring balances above described (207) had been accomplished, I requested my spirit friends to repeat that which has been above mentioned,50 as performed by putting the hands of a medium upon a plate and ball supported by a tea-table. (pari passu.)
211. At the same time and place, after the demonstration using the spring balances described above (207) was completed, I asked my spirit friends to repeat what was previously mentioned, by placing the hands of a medium on a plate and ball supported by a tea table. (pari passu.)
214. During a visit to New York, I entered the apartment where one of the Misses Fox was sitting. There were more than half a dozen persons present. On my entrance, I inquired, “Does any one here recognise me, so as to know my name?” No person answered that I was known. As soon, however, as I inquired, my spirit sister announced herself, and indicated my name.
214. During a visit to New York, I walked into the apartment where one of the Misses Fox was sitting. There were more than six people there. When I arrived, I asked, “Does anyone here recognize me and know my name?” No one responded that they knew who I was. However, as soon as I asked, my spirit sister revealed herself and stated my name.
216. Only the first couplet in these verses differs at all from those which were given in the impromptu, the words having been too flattering for me, to have mentioned. Soon after being at the residence of a highly-esteemed friend, who is a medium, my spirit sister, who manifests much love for this lady, reporting herself, I told her of the change which I thus desired to have made. The reply was, “I give you full liberty to alter my verses; you know I never wrote two lines of poetry while in the flesh.” Miss Ellis is no poetess, still less is Mrs. P., the medium.
216. Only the first couplet in these verses differs at all from those given in the impromptu; the words were a bit too flattering for me to mention. Soon after I was at the home of a highly-respected friend who is a medium, my spirit sister, who has a lot of love for this lady, made contact. I told her about the change I wanted to make. The reply was, “You have my full permission to change my verses; you know I never wrote two lines of poetry while I was alive.” Miss Ellis isn't a poet, and neither is Mrs. P., the medium.
217. After my lecture at the Melodeon, being at the residence of Mrs. Hayden, an accomplished medium, I requested a repetition of the experiment, of which I had given an account on that occasion, in which the view of the disk was cut off from the medium, by the interposition of a screen; and Mrs. Hayden consenting, an arrangement was made so as to satisfy the bystanders, as well as myself, that the letters on the disk could not be seen by her. Under these conditions the name of Washington was spelt out.
217. After my talk at the Melodeon, while I was at the home of Mrs. Hayden, a skilled medium, I asked to repeat the experiment I had described earlier, where a screen blocked the medium's view of the disk. Mrs. Hayden agreed, and we set things up to ensure that both the onlookers and I could be sure she couldn't see the letters on the disk. Under these conditions, the name Washington was spelled out.
218. I have had this test repeated under Gordon’s mediumship, as well as that of others, several times. Afterward, Mrs. Hayden sitting aloof, on making the index move successively to each letter, those required for the51 name of Jefferson were selected in due order, by rapping at the one in demand, as it came under the index.
220. My charming, intelligent friend, Mrs. Eustis, daughter of the late Rev. Dr. W. E. Channing, though not a believer in Spiritualism, became desirous of seeing the manifestations so much relied upon by me. Having accompanied me to the residence of Mrs. Hayden, Mrs. Eustis was sitting beside her, while through her influence my sister was making a communication by means of the apparatus described. (Plate I, Fig. 2.) When the process commenced, the hand of Mrs. Hayden was resting on the lever in the usual position, but was subsequently lifted, so as to allow Mrs. Eustis, as well as myself, to see between it and the wooden surface, without creating any apparent abatement of the power of indicating the requisite letters. (Description of Plate I, par. e.)
220. My charming, intelligent friend, Mrs. Eustis, daughter of the late Rev. Dr. W. E. Channing, even though she didn't believe in Spiritualism, was eager to witness the phenomena I often talked about. After joining me at Mrs. Hayden's place, Mrs. Eustis sat next to her while, through her influence, my sister was sending a message using the apparatus I mentioned. (Plate I, Fig. 2.) As the process began, Mrs. Hayden's hand was resting on the lever in the usual position but was later lifted, allowing both Mrs. Eustis and me to see between it and the wooden surface without noticeably reducing the power to indicate the required letters. (Description of Plate I, par. e.)
223. Sometime after this feat was performed through Mrs. Hayden, I inquired of my sister if she could not perform it through an excellent medium under whose influence communications were making at the time of this inquiry. It was replied that Mrs. Eustis being unconsciously to a certain extent a medium herself, the power of Mrs. Hayden was augmented by her presence.
223. Some time after this achievement was completed with Mrs. Hayden, I asked my sister if she could do it with a great medium who was currently facilitating communications. She replied that since Mrs. Eustis was unconsciously a bit of a medium herself, Mrs. Hayden's abilities were enhanced by her presence.
224. But as respects the selection of letters without the assistance of the eyes of the medium, I have had many instances of this being done, although the facility of its performance is various, not only with different media and with different spirits, but likewise when the spirit and medium are the same: it varies with the state of the medium. I sat more than an hour with an accomplished medium, during an excessively hot evening, without receiving any communication; in consequence, as I supposed, of the effect of the heat upon her organism.
224. But regarding the selection of letters without the medium's eyesight, I've seen this happen many times, although the ease of doing it varies not just with different mediums and spirits, but also when the spirit and medium are the same—it depends on the medium's condition. I spent more than an hour with a skilled medium on an extremely hot evening without getting any messages; I assumed this was due to the heat affecting her body.
225. The interposition of water contained in a glass vase, upon the broad part of the lever actuating the index, so that the hands of the medium can touch nothing but the water, has an effect analogous to the lifting of the hand as above described, since the only difference in the conditions is, that in the one case there is air, in the other water, interposed.
225. The placement of water in a glass vase on the wide part of the lever controlling the index, so that the medium's hands only touch the water, has an effect similar to lifting the hand as described earlier. The only difference between the two situations is that one involves air, while the other involves water.
226. It has been stated that, by the interposition of water, the power of actuating the index was paralyzed; yet merely warming the water enabled the manifestation to proceed, so as to empower the spirit to spell such names as were called for. (210.)
226. It has been said that introducing water stopped the mechanism from moving the index; however, simply by warming the water, the process was able to continue, allowing the spirit to spell out the names that were requested. (210.)
227. In one instance, I took a book from my pocket which the medium had never seen, and opened it at a page where the heading “Publisher’s Preface” was conspicuous, without allowing the medium to see any thing more than the back of the book. Holding the page exposed to the disk, the spirit spelt out “Publish—,” and then seemed unable to proceed. Meanwhile, the medium called to her little son to be quiet; forthwith the deficient letters, ers, were supplied, so as to finish the word “Publisher’s.”
227. At one point, I took a book out of my pocket that the medium had never seen before and opened it to a page where the heading “Publisher’s Preface” was clearly visible, making sure the medium only saw the back of the book. With the page facing the disk, the spirit began to spell out “Publish—” before it seemed stuck. In the meantime, the medium asked her little son to be quiet; immediately, the missing letters, ers, were filled in to complete the word “Publisher’s.”
228. The medium alleged that her mind was imbued with the idea that the word “publishing” was coming forth, and with a view to aid the spirit, lent some muscular aid to the letters necessary to complete that word; but attention to her child causing her mind to be withdrawn, the spirit immediately selected the letters above indited. On the same occasion I opened the same book, keeping the back toward the medium, opposite to an engraving of Jefferson: immediately, Jefferson was spelt out.
228. The medium claimed that her mind was filled with the thought that the word “publishing” was emerging, and to help the spirit, she physically assisted in forming the letters needed to complete that word. However, when her attention shifted to her child, her focus wavered, and the spirit quickly chose the letters written above. At the same time, I opened the same book with the back facing the medium, opposite an image of Jefferson: immediately, the name Jefferson was spelled out.
229. On my way to Boston, I visited Mrs. Ann Leah Brown, formerly Miss Fox. At about eight in the morning, I found her under very unfavourable circumstances: Mrs. Brown had been watching the previous night with a sick child. Nevertheless, considering me as an advocate of the cause of truth, a short sitting was given to me, during which my faithful spirit sister manifested herself by comparatively loud knockings.
229. On my way to Boston, I visited Mrs. Ann Leah Brown, who was formerly Miss Fox. Around eight in the morning, I found her in a difficult situation: Mrs. Brown had been up the night before caring for a sick child. Still, viewing me as a supporter of the truth, she took a moment to meet with me, during which my devoted spirit sister made her presence known through relatively loud knockings.
231. On my return from Boston, I called again on this interesting medium, and then saw a table, situated at the distance of more than a foot from her person, which was quiescent, make a movement to and fro of at least eight inches. Moreover, as I sat on the opposite side of an intervening table, I felt unexpectedly a slight touch against my leg as if by a human finger.
231. When I got back from Boston, I visited this intriguing medium again, and I noticed a table, more than a foot away from her, which was still, suddenly start moving back and forth about eight inches. Additionally, while I was sitting on the other side of a table in between us, I felt an unexpected light touch against my leg, like a human finger.
232. During this visit, Mrs. Brown created much interest by giving a brief account of the trials which herself and her sister had undergone, being on the one hand urged to give their services to the community, as the means of promoting truth, while on the other they were treated as impostors or jugglers. The impression left on my mind was extremely favourable as respects Mrs. Brown’s sincerity in her Spiritualism and in her goodness of heart.
232. During this visit, Mrs. Brown sparked a lot of interest by sharing a brief account of the challenges she and her sister faced. On one hand, they were encouraged to serve the community as a way to promote truth, while on the other hand, they were treated as frauds or tricksters. I was left with a very positive impression of Mrs. Brown’s sincerity in her Spiritualism and her kindness.
233. In consequence of her invitation, I attended a circle at her house a few days subsequently, when I saw, in addition to all the usual manifestations, the following for the first time: Under a table around which the party was seated, a sheet of paper was deposited on the carpeted floor. A pencil was placed upon the paper; soon after, on examination, I found my name scrawled thereon.
233. Because of her invitation, I went to a gathering at her house a few days later, where I noticed, in addition to all the usual things, something new for the first time: Under a table where everyone was seated, a piece of paper was lying on the carpeted floor. A pencil was set on the paper; soon after, when I looked closely, I found my name scribbled on it.
236. While at Boston, having read to a friend a communication from my father through a writing medium, I placed it in one of my pockets, and proceeded to the Fountain Inn. When there, I felt for it without success. Unexpectedly, I went to Salem by the cars, and returned the same evening. On undressing myself the scroll was missing, and I inferred that it had been lost between the place where it had been read and the inn above named, where I felt for it unsuccessfully. On going next morning to Mrs. Hayden’s, and my spirit father reporting himself, I inquired whether he knew what had become of the scroll. It was answered, that it had been left upon the seat in the car on my quitting it at Salem.
236. While in Boston, I read a message from my father through a medium to a friend, then I put it in one of my pockets and went to the Fountain Inn. When I got there, I couldn't find it. Unexpectedly, I took a train to Salem and came back that same evening. When I got undressed, the scroll was gone, and I figured I had lost it between where I had read it and the inn I had just mentioned, where I unsuccessfully searched for it. The next morning, when I went to Mrs. Hayden's and my spirit father made contact, I asked if he knew what happened to the scroll. I was told it had been left on the seat of the train when I got off in Salem.
238. On one occasion, sitting at the disk with Mrs. Hayden, a spirit gave his initials as C. H. Hare. Not recollecting any one of our relations of that name precisely, I inquired if he were one of them. The reply was affirmative. “Are you a son of my cousin Charles Hare, of St. Johns, New Brunswick?” “Yes,” was spelled out. This spirit then gave me the profession of his grandfather, also that of his father, and the fact of the former having been blown into the water at Toulon, and of the latter having made a miraculous escape from Verdun, where he had been confined until his knowledge of French enabled him to escape by personating in disguise an officer of the customs. Only one mistake was made in referring to my English relatives, respecting an uncle’s name. Other inquiries were correctly answered.
238. One time, while sitting at the table with Mrs. Hayden, a spirit gave his initials as C. H. Hare. Not recalling anyone in our family with that name, I asked if he was one of them. The answer was yes. “Are you the son of my cousin Charles Hare from St. Johns, New Brunswick?” “Yes,” was spelled out. This spirit then shared details about his grandfather’s profession, his father’s profession, and mentioned that the grandfather was blown into the water at Toulon, while the father made a miraculous escape from Verdun, where he had been held until he could speak French well enough to disguise himself as a customs officer and get away. Only one mistake was made regarding my English relatives, about an uncle’s name. All other questions were answered correctly.
240. No one being present beside myself, and the medium ignorant of Latin, my father spelt out upon the disk the words he had pointed out to me in Virgil more than fifty-five years ago, as expressive of the beating Entellus gave Dares, as described by Virgil—“pulsatque versatque;” also the word which so much resembles the sound of horses’ hoofs trampling on the ground, “Quadrupedante.”
240. With no one else around except me, and since the medium didn't know Latin, my father wrote out on the disk the words he had shown me in Virgil over fifty-five years ago, detailing the beating Entellus gave Dares, as described by Virgil—“pulsatque versatque”; also the word that sounds like horses’ hooves pounding on the ground, “Quadrupedante.”
242. The employment of letters to express ideas neither existing in the mind of the medium nor in mine, cannot evidently be explained by54 any psychological subterfuge. The name Blodget being indicated by reference to the alphabet, instead of Cato, which was promised, precludes the idea that it was learned from the mind of any mortal present.
246. The fact that my spirit sister undertook at one o’clock, on the 3rd of July, 1855, to convey from the Atlantic Hotel, Cape May Island, a message to Mrs. Gourlay, No. 178 North Tenth street, Philadelphia, requesting that she would induce Dr. Gourlay to go to the Philadelphia Bank to ascertain the time when a note would be due, and report to me at half-past three o’clock; that she did report at the appointed time; and that on my return to Philadelphia, Mrs. Gourlay alleged herself to have received the message, and that her husband and brother went to the bank in consequence. With the idea received by the latter, my sister’s report coincided agreeably to his statement to me. All this proves that a spirit must have officiated, as nothing else can explain the transaction.
246. The fact that my spirit sister took it upon herself at one o’clock on July 3, 1855, to send a message from the Atlantic Hotel, Cape May Island, to Mrs. Gourlay, at 178 North Tenth Street, Philadelphia, asking her to persuade Dr. Gourlay to go to the Philadelphia Bank to find out when a note would be due and report back to me by half-past three; that she did report at the scheduled time; and that upon my return to Philadelphia, Mrs. Gourlay claimed she received the message, and that her husband and brother went to the bank as a result. The information my sister reported matched his account, which supports his statement to me. All of this indicates that a spirit must have been involved, as nothing else can explain the situation.
247. The note clerk recollects the application, but does not appear to have felt himself called upon to take the trouble to get the register, which was not in his hands at the time. Hence the impression received by the applicants was not correct, but corresponded with the report made to me by my sister, which differed from the impression on my memory, and of course, was not obtained from my mind.
247. The note clerk remembers the application but didn't seem to think it was necessary to fetch the register, which he didn’t have at that moment. As a result, the impression the applicants had was inaccurate and aligned with what my sister reported to me, which was different from what I remembered and obviously wasn’t derived from my own thoughts.
HYMN CHANTED TO MY SISTER, AND HER REPLY.
248. My sister having mentioned her name in the spheres, to be Queen of Flowers. I substituted this name translated into Latin in the Sicilian Mariners’ Hymn, replacing virgo by soror, the Latin for sister; seraph for mater; bonissima for piissima; carissima for purissima; and cura for ora. It then read as follows:—
248. My sister mentioned her name in the circles, calling her the Queen of Flowers. I replaced this name with its Latin translation in the Sicilian Mariners’ Hymn, switching virgo for soror, which means sister; seraph for mater; bonissima for piissima; carissima for purissima; and cura for ora. It then read as follows:—
250. “Dear Brother:—I answer your prayer by saying I do watch over you, and pray for your welfare. I am grateful for your remembrance, and shall strive to deserve it. O! brother, our cause is a common one, and we feel the same interest in its promulgation. I am daily striving to disseminate its truths, but can make little progress, having so much ignorance to contend against. I know that the truths of progression, with the help of a good and wise God, will ultimately prevail over all the land; but when that happy time comes to earth, your freed spirit will rove the endless fields of immortality with those loved friends who have gone a little while before. Then will we revel in delights which, in comparison with earth’s joys, are far more beautiful and sublime. I wish you could look with the eye of prescience, and see that glorious time, when all nations shall become as a band of brothers.”
250. “Dear Bro:—I’m writing to let you know that I do keep an eye on you and pray for your well-being. I appreciate you thinking of me, and I’ll work hard to live up to that. Oh! brother, our cause is shared, and we both care deeply about spreading it. I’m doing my best every day to share its truths, but it’s tough to make much headway with so much ignorance around. I believe that the truths of progress, with the guidance of a good and wise God, will eventually triumph everywhere; but when that joyful time arrives on earth, your liberated spirit will wander through the endless fields of immortality alongside those dear friends who left us a short while ago. Then we’ll celebrate in joys that are far more beautiful and profound compared to the pleasures of this world. I wish you could see with a visionary’s eye and witness that glorious time when all nations will unite as a brotherhood.”
CORROBORATIVE EVIDENCE OF THE EXISTENCE OF SPIRITS.
252. The evidence may be contemplated under various phases: First, those in which rappings or other noises have been made, which could not be traced to any mortal agency; secondly, those in which sounds were so made as to indicate letters forming grammatical, well-spelt sentences, affording proof that they were under the guidance of some rational being; thirdly, those in which the nature of the communication has been such as to prove that the being causing them must, agreeably to accompanying allegations, be some known acquaintance, friend, or relative of the inquirer.
252. The evidence can be looked at in several ways: First, instances where knocks or other noises occurred that couldn’t be linked to any human source; second, cases where sounds were made to spell out letters forming clear, grammatically correct sentences, showing that they were guided by some intelligent entity; third, situations where the content of the communication demonstrated that the entity responsible must, according to the claims made, be someone familiar, a friend, or a relative of the person asking.
255. Although the apparatus by which these various proofs were attained, with the greatest possible precaution and precision, modified them as to the manner; essentially all the evidence which I have obtained, tending to the conclusions above mentioned, has likewise been substantially56 obtained by a great number of observers. Many who never sought any spiritual communication, and have not been induced to enroll themselves as spiritualists, will nevertheless not only affirm the existence of the sounds and movements, but also admit their inscrutability.
255. Even though the methods used to gather these different proofs, with the utmost care and accuracy, changed the way they were presented, essentially all the evidence I have collected that supports the conclusions mentioned above has also been significantly56 gathered by numerous observers. Many who never looked for any spiritual communication and have not been persuaded to identify themselves as spiritualists will still not only confirm the presence of the sounds and movements but will also acknowledge their mystery.
256. But we have now, in a matter-of-fact, business-like publication, by E. W. Capron, a record of the original manifestations at Hydesville and Rochester, in New York; where, as it is well known, they produced intense interest, excitement, and controversy; which gave rise to successive town-meetings, and the appointment of committees by these meetings for the purpose of ascertaining whether any other cause could be discovered for the manifestations, except the spiritual beings who assumed them to be their doings. Some of the persons appointed to make the investigation, were prepossessed with the belief that the phenomena were due to some juggling contrivance. One alleged that he would throw himself over the Genesee Falls, or prove the knockings due to humbuggery. Another alleged that the media, aware of his prepossession, would not for one hundred dollars have him on the committee; yet both these persons being put on the committee, the latter came out in favour of the inscrutability of the noise; while the former neither accounted for it, “nor threw himself over the falls,” as Mr. Capron pointedly alleges.
256. However, we now have a straightforward, business-like publication by E. W. Capron that records the original events at Hydesville and Rochester, New York. These events sparked significant interest, excitement, and controversy, leading to a series of town meetings and the formation of committees by these meetings to determine if another explanation existed for the occurrences other than the spiritual forces claiming responsibility. Some individuals on the investigation committee were already convinced that the phenomena were the result of trickery. One claimed he would jump over the Genesee Falls or prove the knockings were a scam. Another claimed that the mediums, knowing his bias, wouldn’t let him join the committee for any amount of money; yet both ended up on the committee. The latter ultimately supported the idea that the noise was mysterious, while the former neither explained it nor “jumped over the falls,” as Mr. Capron pointedly states.
257. Subsequently, in the city of New York, the mystery was subjected to the ordeal of a public investigation by a number of distinguished citizens, whose reports confirmed those of the Rochester committees. Fennimore Cooper was among those appointed on the New York committee, and was the means himself of obtaining an unequivocal test. His sister’s death, which had resulted from being thrown from a horse, was correctly stated by her spirit in every particular, in reply to mental inquiries by him made.
257. Later, in New York City, the mystery underwent a public investigation conducted by several prominent citizens, whose findings backed up those of the Rochester committees. Fennimore Cooper was one of the members appointed to the New York committee and played a key role in obtaining a clear test. His sister’s death, which had occurred from being thrown off a horse, was accurately described by her spirit in every detail, in response to his mental inquiries.
258. Again at Stratford, Connecticut, at a house of a minister of the gospel, manifestations were made fully as striking as those which had occurred at Hydesville and Rochester, so as to establish in the mind of this estimable clergyman, and in those of many others acquainted with the facts, a belief in spiritual agency. (1667)
258. Once again in Stratford, Connecticut, at the home of a minister, experiences took place that were just as remarkable as those at Hydesville and Rochester, leading this respected clergyman and many others familiar with the details to believe in spiritual forces. (1667)
Corroborative evidence by the Rev. Allen Putnam, of Roxbury, Mass.
259. As affording support to the testimony which I have given, I deem it expedient to cite that of the Rev. Allen Putnam, formerly a Unitarian clergyman and preacher in Augusta, Maine, having been in the legislature of that State, and for some time editor of the New England Farmer. Mr. Putnam had the advantage of a theological and collegiate education at Harvard. I heard an able and erudite lecture from this worthy spiritualist, at Boston last October.
259. To support the testimony I’ve provided, I think it’s useful to mention the Rev. Allen Putnam, who used to be a Unitarian minister and preacher in Augusta, Maine. He was a member of the state legislature and also served as the editor of the New England Farmer for a while. Mr. Putnam benefited from a theological and college education at Harvard. I attended a thoughtful and knowledgeable lecture from this respected spiritualist in Boston last October.
260. Mr. Putnam entered upon the investigation of the manifestations in July, 1852, nearly eighteen months before my investigation com57menced. Like me, he began as an unbeliever, and was converted by communications received from the spirits of his wife and relatives, who had left this life. In a company ignorant of the fact that he had married twice, his first wife had made herself known to him, so as to create a conviction of her identity.
260. Mr. Putnam started looking into the phenomena in July 1852, almost eighteen months before I began my own investigation 57. Like me, he was initially a skeptic but was convinced by messages he received from the spirits of his wife and family members who had passed away. In a group unaware that he had been married twice, his first wife revealed herself to him to establish her identity convincingly.
261. In the next place, his ancestors communicated with Mr. Putnam, so as to satisfy his mind that they were the beings they professed to be. I do not enter into the detail of the facts which created conviction in the mind of this respectable observer; my object is to show that other minds have gone through the process which has influenced mine, in order that sceptics may not “lay the flattering unction to their souls” that ’tis my madness speaks in favour, not their prejudices that speak against, the conclusions in which investigators of sound understanding have concurred.
261. Next, his ancestors communicated with Mr. Putnam to ensure he was convinced they were who they claimed to be. I won’t go into the details of the facts that convinced this respectable observer; my aim is to show that others have gone through the same thought process that has influenced me, so that skeptics don’t “comfort themselves with flattering ideas” that it’s my madness speaking in favor, not their prejudices that speak against the conclusions that well-reasoned investigators have agreed upon.
263. The following narrative is taken from the pamphlet published by the author in question. It is quite characteristic of the variety of character found in the spheres. This juvenile spirit owed his education entirely to his schooling in the spirit world. It will be perceived that he died while yet an infant. (Page 34, Paragraph 3.)
263. The following story comes from the pamphlet published by the author in question. It reflects the diverse characters found in the spiritual realms. This young spirit received his education solely from his experiences in the spirit world. It's important to note that he passed away while still an infant. (Page 34, Paragraph 3.)
264. “Entering a medium’s room one morning, I saw a gentlemanly, intelligent man, apparently about thirty, sitting at the table and putting questions. Soon a tiny rap was heard, and the name Natty was spelled out. ‘Who are you?’ said the man. ‘I am your brother;’ was the answer. ‘No,’ said the man, ‘I had no such brother.’ ‘You had,’ said the rapper. ‘No,’ said the man. ‘Yes,’ said the other. ‘Well, let us see,’ added the man. ‘How old were you, Natty, when you died?’ ‘Five days,‘ was the answer. ‘How long since you died?’ ‘Thirty-five years.’ The gentleman here bit his lip in thought, and said—‘I believe there was an infant brother who died before I was born, but I thought they called him Oliver.’ ‘No,’ was the response, ‘they called him Natty, and I am he.’ ‘Natty,’ said the man, ‘how do you know that I am your brother?’ ‘By love,’ he answered. ‘By love?’ said the questioner; ‘but don’t you love others as well as relatives?’ Ans. ‘We like others, and love relatives!’ ‘What,’ it was then asked—‘what is the difference between love and like?’ The word LOVE was immediately written in large letters, two or three inches long, and like was traced under it in very small letters. ‘Natty,’ continued the man, ‘you are not my brother, but are some one else, attempting to impose upon me.’ ‘I am your brother,’ was the earnest rejoinder. ‘Then, will you tell me what sphere you are in?’ ‘The fourth,’ he said. ‘The fourth, ah? Now I’ve caught you—for as you died in infancy, you was fitted for the seventh sphere when you left the earth.’ ‘I have been there;’ was the response. ‘Have been there, and yet are now in the58 fourth! how is that? are you moving backward? coming down?’ ‘No, I am an adviser in the fourth.’ ‘Adviser! what is that? a sort of superintendent?’ ‘Yes.’ ‘Oh! you are in office, then?’ ‘Yes.’ ‘Do you get any pay? We pay well for such things here.’ ‘Yes, I get pay.’ ‘What pay?’ ‘The pleasure of seeing those under me progress.’
264. “One morning, as I walked into a medium’s room, I saw a well-dressed, intelligent man, probably around thirty, sitting at the table and asking questions. Soon, a light tap was heard, and the name Natty was spelled out. ‘Who are you?’ the man asked. ‘I am your brother,’ came the reply. ‘No,’ the man said, ‘I didn’t have any brother like that.’ ‘You did,’ said the voice. ‘No,’ the man insisted. ‘Yes,’ the voice replied. ‘Well, let’s find out,’ the man said. ‘How old were you, Natty, when you died?’ ‘Five days,’ was the answer. ‘How long ago did you die?’ ‘Thirty-five years.’ The man frowned thoughtfully and said, ‘I seem to recall an infant brother who died before I was born, but I thought they called him Oliver.’ ‘No,’ came the response, ‘they called him Natty, and that’s me.’ ‘Natty,’ the man asked, ‘how do you know I’m your brother?’ ‘By love,’ was the answer. ‘By love?’ the man questioned; ‘but don’t you love others besides family?’ ‘We like others, but we love family!’ ‘What,’ the man asked next—‘what’s the difference between love and like?’ The word LOVE was quickly written in large letters, two or three inches tall, and like was traced underneath in very small letters. ‘Natty,’ the man continued, ‘you’re not my brother; you’re someone else trying to trick me.’ ‘I am your brother,’ Natty insisted earnestly. ‘Then tell me, what sphere are you in?’ ‘The fourth,’ he replied. ‘The fourth, huh? I’ve got you now—since you died as an infant, you would have qualified for the seventh sphere when you left Earth.’ ‘I’ve been there,’ was the reply. ‘You’ve been there, but you’re now in the58 fourth! How is that? Are you moving backwards? Coming down?’ ‘No, I’m an adviser in the fourth.’ ‘Adviser! What’s that? Some kind of supervisor?’ ‘Yes.’ ‘Oh! So you have a position, then?’ ‘Yes.’ ‘Do you get paid? We pay well for that sort of work here.’ ‘Yes, I get paid.’ ‘What kind of pay?’ ‘The joy of seeing those I oversee progress.’
266. “My next remark was—‘Natty, I should like to make your acquaintance.’ ‘Hand out your card;’ was the instant response. Finding no card in my pocket, I wrote, secretly, on a slip of paper—‘Mr. Allen Putnam, Eustis St., Roxbury’—turned the paper over, placing the writing down upon the table, kept my hand over the paper, and asked Natty to make a copy. Instantly the medium’s hand wrote—Mr. A. P., U. St. Rox. The writing on my paper had been seen by me alone, and I was looking for a copy in full, but received only abbreviations, and those of every word, Eustis being reduced to the letter U. This closed my first interview with him.
266. “My next comment was—‘Natty, I’d like to get to know you.’ ‘Give me your card,’ was the immediate reply. Unable to find a card in my pocket, I secretly wrote on a slip of paper—‘Mr. Allen Putnam, Eustis St., Roxbury’—flipped the paper over, placed the writing face down on the table, kept my hand over it, and asked Natty to make a copy. Immediately, the medium’s hand wrote—Mr. A. P., U. St. Rox. I had only seen the writing on my paper, and I was looking for a full copy, but only received abbreviations, with Eustis shortened to the letter U. This concluded my first meeting with him.
267. “Some weeks afterward, when he was forgotten, the medium’s hand wrote, ‘Mr. A. P., U. St. Rox.—I have used your card.’ ‘Natty,‘ said I, ‘as you left the earth when very young, I would like to know how you learned the English language.’ He answered, ‘My mother knew it, I think;’ and asked, ‘Will you let my mamma come?’ ‘Certainly, with pleasure.’ And the following was written:
267. “A few weeks later, after he was forgotten, the medium's hand wrote, ‘Mr. A. P., U. St. Rox.—I have used your card.’ ‘Natty,’ I said, ‘since you left the earth when you were very young, I’m curious how you learned English.’ He replied, ‘I think my mother knew it;’ and asked, ‘Will you let my mom come?’ ‘Of course, I’d be happy to.’ Then the following was written:
Elizabeth Y-—-.’
Elizabeth Y-—-.
269. “Very often this little bright spark comes out with something unexpected, amusing, or witty; but at all times he manifests a very marked disposition to be obliging and kind. Once, when his communication seemed to be closed, I said, ‘You are not going, Natty?’ ‘Yes—gone—don’t you see the dust fly?’ ‘Where,’ I asked, ‘do you pick up such phrases?’ ‘Hear ‘um.’
269. “Very often this little bright spark says something unexpected, funny, or clever; but he always shows a strong tendency to be helpful and kind. Once, when it seemed like he was done talking, I asked, ‘You’re not leaving, Natty?’ ‘Yeah—gone—can’t you see the dust flying?’ ‘Where,’ I inquired, ‘do you come up with such phrases?’ ‘Hear ‘em.’
271. “When once I said to him, ‘How do you go to work, Natty, to use a medium’s hand?’ He said, ‘Why, you see, we just passes a chain of light around the wrist, and that sets it to shaking. The next operation is to make it write, of course. Sometimes the words are allowed to pass through the brains. We now have such a power over this medium, that we can make her shake awfully.’ ‘Try my wrist, Natty,’ said a lady who59 was present. ‘Dear, beloved aunty, I’ve got a peck of love for you, but I can’t make you trace my purified thoughts on the clean paper.’”
271. “One time I asked him, ‘How do you manage to use a medium’s hand, Natty?’ He replied, ‘Well, you see, we just put a chain of light around her wrist, and that gets it shaking. The next step is to make it write, of course. Sometimes the words come directly from our minds. We have so much control over this medium now that we can make her shake a lot.’ ‘Let me try, Natty,’ said a lady who59 was there. ‘Dear, beloved auntie, I have so much love for you, but I can’t get you to write down my pure thoughts on this clean paper.’”
For those who endeavour to get rid of the evidence of respectable witnesses, such as Mr. Putnam, by representing them as dupes, and the media as impostors, it may be well to quote the following passage from the same publication: (Page 44.)
For those who try to dismiss the credibility of respectable witnesses, like Mr. Putnam, by portraying them as fools and the media as frauds, it might be useful to quote the following passage from the same publication: (Page 44.)
272. “Within the last fourteen months I have seen twenty-two or three different mediums—all but four of them private ones—taking no pecuniary compensation; and more than half of them are our own citizens, several of whom are now present in this assembly. I have spent very many hours in their presence. Have seen them at their homes—at my own home—and in the parlours of neighbours and friends. I have met and watched them in the broadest sunlight and at evening. Every desirable opportunity has been furnished me for detecting machinery, jugglery, or imposture, and I have faithfully, but in vain, strove to find something mundane a sufficient cause for all these wonders. That trick or humbug is sometimes attempted by pretenders to uncommon susceptibilities, no one will have a wish to deny. But very many of the mediums, private ones, are as much above these things as are the very best persons among the witnesses.
272. “In the past fourteen months, I’ve encountered about twenty-two or three different mediums—all but four of them private—who received no payment for their services. More than half of them are our own citizens, several of whom are here with us today. I’ve spent countless hours in their company. I’ve seen them at their homes—at my own home—and in the living rooms of neighbors and friends. I’ve observed them in broad daylight and at night. I've had every opportunity to uncover any tricks, deception, or fraud, and I’ve sincerely tried, without success, to find anything ordinary that could explain these wonders. It’s true that some impostors try to exploit people with unusual sensitivities, and no one can deny that. But many of the private mediums are as above such tactics as the best individuals among the witnesses.”
273. “One medium, an active, energetic business man, of more than sixty years, has submitted himself to be used by me at any time, however suddenly called upon, whether in his counting-room or in mine,—whether called in his shirt sleeves from the woodpile, or coalbin, or dressed up and ready for company; and I have used him and watched him daily almost, and that through several successive months. Many mediums have been watched for long periods, and under quite varied circumstances; and, though the power exerted through any of them is very far from being uniform, and though the mode of manifestation is in no two alike, yet I have seen no sign of its being anywhere applied by machinery; or of its being varied by any preparation or act of the mediums themselves.
273. “One medium, an active, energetic businessman over sixty, has offered to be available for me at any time, no matter how suddenly called upon, whether in his office or mine—whether he’s called from working in his shirt sleeves at the woodpile or the coalbin, or dressed up and ready for guests; and I have used him and observed him almost daily for several months. Many mediums have been monitored for long periods and in quite different situations; and while the power shown through any of them varies greatly, and the way it manifests is never the same twice, I have not seen any indication that it involves machinery, or that it’s influenced by any preparation or actions of the mediums themselves.”
274. “They deny, one and all, young and old, educated and ignorant alike—they all deny, and that, too, in the most private and friendly circles, where all the thoughts flow out,—they all deny that they exercise their wills at all in the production of these wonders. And I cannot rate that fairness very high which, in the face of such a fact, will persist in saying that all of it is trick, imposture, humbug. More than one hundred thousand witnesses have looked on, and yet are unable to prove to any extent the cheats alleged. More than five thousand mediums in this country unitedly and persistedly declare that they use no machinery and practice no trick.”
274. “They all deny it, young and old, educated and uneducated alike—they all deny it, even in the most private and friendly settings, where thoughts are openly shared. They insist that they don’t use their wills in creating these wonders at all. I find it hard to respect the fairness of those who, despite this reality, continue to claim that it’s all just tricks, fraud, and nonsense. More than one hundred thousand witnesses have observed this, yet they can’t substantiate the accusations of cheating. Over five thousand mediums in this country collectively and consistently assert that they don’t use any machinery or tricks.”
278. “Many men, many minds,” is an old adage: it is equally true as respects the inhabitants of the spirit world, excepting that as their elevation in that world is higher, accordance in opinion is more prevalent. In the spirits of the fifth sphere, and those above that sphere, I find little diversity in important facts or doctrines.
278. “Many men, many minds,” is an old saying: it holds true for the inhabitants of the spirit world as well, except that the higher their status in that world, the more likely they are to share the same opinions. Among the spirits of the fifth sphere and those above it, I notice little disagreement on important facts or beliefs.
280. “The mortals of earth expect truth from the spirit land; they think that it is perfect, and that the angels are omnipotent. Oh, how far do they wander in the darkness of their own minds! The spirit home is progressive, like unto this: the canting hypocrite passes into the heavens with the same thoughts; the simple babe too passes into this new-born life with all its childlike innocence. Each one has to mount the ladder of progression.”
280. “People on earth expect truth from the spirit world; they believe it's perfect and that angels are all-powerful. Oh, how lost they are in the darkness of their own minds! The spirit realm is progressive, just like this: the insincere hypocrite enters the heavens with the same thoughts; the innocent child also enters this new life with all its childlike purity. Each person has to climb the ladder of progression.”
281. “There are millions in the spirit world that know not of the existence of this planet, even as the children of this earth know not of the starry world above. But on beholding angels descend to this hidden planet, they follow, and in wonderment behold a new world, and that world inhabited. Then do they find whence they originated.
281. “There are millions in the spirit world who are unaware of this planet's existence, just as the children of this earth are unaware of the starry world above. But when they see angels coming down to this hidden planet, they follow and in amazement discover a new world, a world that is inhabited. Then they realize where they came from.”
282. “Allusion has been made to the one-sided support given to Spiritualism on the part of those who admit many of the most important facts, yet do not ascribe them to the spirits of the departed. These opponents were alleged to be of different features; one ascribing them to Satan, the other disputing their spiritual origination, because agreeably to their imperfect information, certain traits were found to be deficient which should exist, were the intellectual communications due to the spirits of our departed fellow-creatures. The idea of these spiritual manifestations owing their existence to Satan has already been noticed, (88,) but from the communications which will be given in this work must appear still more untenable than they have, as I trust, been proved to be. As one of the most respectable of these, who deny the existence of spirits, the distinguished Dr. Bell, of Somerville, Massachusetts, has been noticed. (110.)
282. “People have pointed out the one-sided support for Spiritualism from those who acknowledge many important facts but don’t attribute them to the spirits of the deceased. These critics are said to have different views; one blames them on Satan, while the other contests their spiritual origin because, according to their imperfect understanding, certain characteristics that should be present are missing if the intellectual communications come from the spirits of our departed loved ones. The idea that these spiritual manifestations are due to Satan has been addressed, (88,) but the insights shared in this work will likely make that position seem even less valid than it has already been shown to be. One of the most respected among those who deny the existence of spirits, the notable Dr. Bell from Somerville, Massachusetts, has been mentioned. (110.)
283. “It is conceived that Dr. Bell’s positive evidence in favour of phenomena which he has seen, gives so much more weight in favour of the existence of spirits than his arguments on negative grounds, as to what he61 happens not to have seen or learned, that I will quote here his account of the manifestations which he has described, after having observed them with great circumspection:
283. “It is believed that Dr. Bell’s strong evidence in support of the phenomena he has witnessed carries much more weight for the existence of spirits than his arguments based on what he hasn’t seen or learned. Therefore, I will share his account of the manifestations he described after observing them very carefully:
284. “Dr. Bell commenced (at a meeting of hospital directors) by expressing his surprise that at the meeting, last year, of so large a number of persons whose lives were spent in investigating the reciprocal influences of mind and body, scarcely a single member had given a moment’s attention to a topic directly in their path, which, whether regarded as merely an epidemic mental delusion, or as a new psychological science, was producing such momentous effects upon the world. It was now said to number over two millions of believers, had an extended literature, a talented periodical press in many forms, and had certainly taken fast hold on many minds of soberness and power. He was well aware how easily it was turned to ridicule, and that there were many who would be ready to ask, when they saw hospital directors seriously discussing the spiritual phenomena, Quis custodiet ipsos custodes?
284. “Dr. Bell started (at a meeting of hospital directors) by expressing his surprise that at last year’s meeting, attended by so many people whose lives were dedicated to exploring how the mind and body affect each other, hardly anyone had spent a moment considering a topic that was directly relevant to them. This topic, whether seen as just an epidemic mental delusion or a new branch of psychology, was having significant impacts on the world. It was now claimed to have over two million followers, a vast amount of literature, and a skilled periodical press in various formats, and it had certainly captured the attention of many reasonable and influential people. He knew how easily this could be laughed at and that many would be quick to ask, when they saw hospital directors seriously discussing spiritual phenomena, Quis custodiet ipsos custodes?
285. “But if there was any class of men who had duties in this direction, it was those of our specialty. Our reports contain the record of many cases of insanity said to be produced by it. It was important, whether true or false, or mixed, that its precise depth, length, and nature should be studied out. As is well known, mystery always loses its terrific character when boldly met and opened to the light of noonday.
285. “But if there was any group of people who had responsibilities in this area, it was those in our field. Our reports include accounts of many cases of madness claimed to be caused by it. It was important, whether true, false, or a mix of both, that its exact depth, length, and nature should be thoroughly examined. As everyone knows, mystery always loses its frightening edge when confronted head-on and brought into the light of day.”
286. “Dr. Bell remarked, that on his return home from our meeting at Washington, he had a peculiar wish to verify his previous observations on what are technically known as the physical manifestations of this new science. He could not pretend that he could doubt his repeated personal observations, addressed to his sight, hearing, and touch, and separated, as he believed, from any possibility of error or collusive fraud. Yet the offer, by Professor Henry, of a large sum to any person who would make one of his tables move in the Smithsonian Institution, and the obvious incredulity of many of the ‘brethren,’ had induced the desire again to see some full and unequivocal experiment in table-moving.
286. “Dr. Bell mentioned that after returning home from our meeting in Washington, he had a strong desire to confirm his earlier observations on what are technically called the physical manifestations of this new science. He couldn't pretend to doubt his own repeated personal observations, which were based on his sight, hearing, and touch, and he believed were free from any chance of error or collusion. However, the offer from Professor Henry of a large reward to anyone who could make one of his tables move in the Smithsonian Institution, along with the clear disbelief from many of the ‘brethren,’ had made him eager to witness a definitive and conclusive experiment in table-moving.
287. “An opportunity was not long wanting. On the occasion of the visit of a well-known gentleman, long connected with the insane, and who never had seen any of these phenomena at the asylum, Dr. Bell invited him to go to a family where a medium of considerable power was visiting. The family was one of the most respectable of the vicinage, the head of it being a gentleman intrusted with millions of dollars of other people’s money, as the financial manager of a large banking institution. He and his wife had for some years been perfectly convinced of the spiritual character of these manifestations. The medium was a young lady of eighteen or twenty, of very slight figure, weighing eighty or ninety pounds, and had discovered herself to be a medium while on a visit to these distant relatives. A family, from character and position, more entirely beyond the suspicion62 of even winking at any thing like fraud or irregularity, does not exist in the world. They were so fortunate as to find the medium at home, and the circle was made of the five persons mentioned. The ordinary manifestations of raps, beating of musical tunes, and responses to mental and spoken questions, were very completely presented, as well as the movements of the table under the mere contact of fingers’ ends. Finding that things appeared very favourable to a full exhibition of what he wished to see, as evinced by the very facile movements of the table under contact, Dr. Bell proposed trying the grand experimentum crucis of the physical manifestations—the movement of the table without any human contact, direct or indirect. He was permitted to arrange things to suit himself, and began by opening the table more widely, and inserting two movable table-leaves, which increased the length from about six to perhaps nine or ten feet. This, he felt, also gave him an opportunity to see and upset all wires and mechanism concealed, or, at least, to answer positively as to their non-existence. The table was a solid structure of black walnut, with six carved legs, the whole of such a weight that when the castors were all in the right line of motion, he could just start it by the full grasp of the thumb and fingers of both hands.
287. “An opportunity didn't take long to present itself. When a well-known gentleman, who had long been involved with the mentally ill and had never witnessed any of these phenomena at the asylum, visited, Dr. Bell invited him to a family hosting a medium with considerable ability. This family was among the most respected in the area, led by a gentleman who managed millions of dollars in other people's money as the financial manager of a large banking institution. He and his wife had been completely convinced of the spiritual nature of these manifestations for several years. The medium was a young woman, around eighteen or twenty, with a very slight build, weighing about eighty to ninety pounds, who had discovered her abilities as a medium during a visit to these distant relatives. There isn't a family, based on character and standing, that could be more completely beyond suspicion of even hinting at any fraud or irregularity. They were fortunate to find the medium at home, and the circle consisted of the five individuals mentioned. The usual manifestations of knocks, musical notes, and answers to mental and spoken questions were clearly present, along with the movement of the table under the light touch of fingers. Observing that everything seemed favorable for a full demonstration of what he wanted to see, as indicated by the very easy movements of the table, Dr. Bell suggested trying the grand experimentum crucis of the physical manifestations—the table moving without any human touch, direct or indirect. He was allowed to arrange everything as he saw fit and began by spreading the table wider, adding two movable leaves to extend its length from about six to possibly nine or ten feet. He felt this also provided him an opportunity to check for and dismiss any hidden wires or mechanisms, or at least assert their absence. The table was a solid black walnut structure, with six carved legs, so heavy that when the casters were aligned correctly, he could only start it by gripping it with both hands.”
288. “The persons stood on the sides of the table, three and two, and back from its edge about eighteen inches. As Dr. Bell is some six feet two inches in height, he averred that he had no difficulty in seeing between the table and the persons of all present. The hands were raised over it at about the same height, of a foot and a half.
288. “The people stood on the sides of the table, three on one side and two on the other, about eighteen inches away from the edge. Since Dr. Bell is around six feet two inches tall, he claimed he had no trouble seeing between the table and everyone present. Their hands were raised over it at roughly the same height, about a foot and a half.
289. “At a request, the table commenced its motion, with moderate speed, occasionally halting, and then gliding on a foot or two at once. It seemed as if its motion would have been continuous, if the hands above it had followed along pari passu. On reaching the folding-doors dividing off the two parlours, and which were open, it rose over an iron rod on which the door-trucks traversed, and which projected half or three-quarters of an inch above the level of the carpet. It then entered the other parlour, and went its whole length until it came near the pier glass at its end—a centre-table having been pushed aside by one of the party to allow its free course.
289. “At a request, the table started moving at a moderate speed, sometimes stopping, and then gliding a foot or two at a time. It seemed like its movement would have been continuous if the hands above it had kept pace. When it reached the open folding doors separating the two parlors, it rose over an iron rod where the door-trucks moved, which stuck out half or three-quarters of an inch above the carpet. It then entered the other parlor and traveled the full length until it got close to the pier glass at the end—one of the group had pushed aside a center table to clear its path.”
290. “At request, for they during this time spoke as if to actual beings, the motion was reversed, and it returned until it again reached the iron rod. Here it stuck. The table hove, creaked, and struggled, but all in vain; it could not surmount the obstacle. The medium was then ‘impressed by the spirits’ to write, and seizing a pencil, hastily wrote that if the fore legs were lifted over the bar, they (i. e. the spirits) thought they could push the others over. This was done, and the motion kept on. Once or twice Dr. Bell requested all to withdraw a little farther from the table, ‘to see how far the influence would extend.’ It was found that whenever a much greater distance, say two feet, was reached, the move63ment ceased, and a delay of three or four minutes occurred before it recommenced, giving the idea that, if broken off, a certain reaccumulation of force was needful to put it in motion again. The table reached the upper end of the parlour, from which it had started, but was left some four feet from the medial line of the room. Dr. Bell expressed the thanks of the company for the very complete exhibition with which they had been favoured, but remarked that the obligation would be enhanced if the ‘spirits’ would move the table about four feet at right angles, so that the chairs would come right for their late occupants. This was immediately done, and the performance was deemed so perfectly full and satisfactory that nothing more was asked at this session.
290. “At their request, as they spoke as if to real beings during this time, the motion reversed and went back until it reached the iron rod again. It got stuck there. The table lifted, creaked, and struggled, but it couldn’t overcome the obstacle. The medium was then ‘instructed by the spirits’ to write, and grabbing a pencil, quickly noted that if the front legs were lifted over the bar, they (i.e. the spirits) thought they could push the others over. This was done, and the motion continued. Once or twice, Dr. Bell asked everyone to move a little farther away from the table, ‘to see how far the influence would stretch.’ It turned out that whenever they reached a much greater distance, about two feet, the movement stopped, and there was a delay of three or four minutes before it started again, suggesting that a certain amount of force was needed to get it moving again after being interrupted. The table made it to the far end of the parlor, where it began, but was left about four feet from the center of the room. Dr. Bell thanked everyone for the thorough demonstration they had experienced but noted that the obligation would be greater if the ‘spirits’ could move the table about four feet at a right angle, so the chairs would line up properly for their former occupants. This was done immediately, and the performance was considered so completely satisfying that nothing more was requested at this session.
291. “Dr. Bell was understood to say that this made some five or six times in which he had seen the table move without human contact, and all under circumstances apparently as free from suspicion as this just related. He also stated that the Rev. Mr. P., a clergyman of extraordinary sagacious perceptions and mechanical skill, took this same medium to his own house, without previous thought, where she never before had been, and where his own table, in the presence of his own family alone, went through the fullest locomotion without human touch. Dr. Bell mentioned that in his last experiment, that just narrated, the entire space moved through was over fifty feet.
291. “Dr. Bell reported that this was the fifth or sixth time he had witnessed the table move without any human contact, and all under circumstances that seemed as credible as the incident just mentioned. He also noted that the Rev. Mr. P., a clergyman with exceptional insight and mechanical ability, brought this same medium to his own home, without prior consideration, where she had never been before. There, his own table, in the presence of his family alone, moved completely without any human touch. Dr. Bell indicated that in his most recent experiment, which he just described, the total distance covered was over fifty feet.
292. “Dr. Bell then passed to the topic of responses to mental and verbal questions, and gave several narratives of long conversations with what purported to be the spirits of persons dead for twenty-five to forty years, in which every question he could devise relating to their domestic history, and to events in it known only to them and him, had been truly answered. Some of the subjects put mentally—i. e., without speaking or writing—had half a dozen correct replies, forbidding, of course, completely, on any doctrine of chances, the contingency of accident or coincidence, as such mental questions, per se, negative the explanation of previous knowledge on the part of the medium.
292. “Dr. Bell then moved on to discussing responses to mental and verbal questions and shared several stories of long conversations with what claimed to be the spirits of people who had passed away twenty-five to forty years ago. In these conversations, every question he could think of about their family history and events that only they and he would know had been accurately answered. Some of the questions posed mentally—i. e., without speaking or writing—received half a dozen correct responses, which, of course, completely ruled out the possibility of chance or coincidence. These mental questions, per se, refute any explanation that involves previous knowledge on the part of the medium.”
293. “A brief abstract of one of these will give a general idea of their character: Dr. Bell had frequently remarked to his ‘spiritual’ friends, that if any medium could reproduce the essential particulars of a final interview which had occurred between himself and a deceased brother in 1826, he should be almost compelled to admit that it came from his spirit; because he was sure that he (Dr. Bell) never had communicated it to any living being. Hence, as it never had been known to but two persons, and was of so peculiar, well-marked a character, as not to be capable of being confounded by generalities, he should hardly be able otherwise to explain it. A few weeks afterward what purported to be the spirit of that brother narrated the essential particulars of that interview, the place where, down to the well-recollected fact that he was adjusting the stirrups of his saddle, preparatory to a distant journey, when it was held! Pretty early,64 however, in his investigations, Dr. Bell began to find that, however correct his spiritual conferees were, in most of their responses, the moment a question was put involving a response the truth of which was unknown to him, uniform failure occurred. Sometimes, where he believed at the time that his questions were truly answered, subsequent information had shown him that he had been mistaken. He had answers which he believed to be true, when the facts were decidedly otherwise.
293. “A brief summary of one of these will give a general sense of their nature: Dr. Bell often told his ‘spiritual’ friends that if any medium could accurately reproduce the key details of a final conversation he had with a deceased brother in 1826, he would almost be forced to believe it came from his spirit; because he was certain that he (Dr. Bell) had never shared it with anyone else. Since it had only ever been known to two people and was unique enough that it couldn't be mixed up with generalities, he would have a hard time explaining it otherwise. A few weeks later, what seemed to be the spirit of that brother recounted the main details of that conversation, including the exact moment when he was adjusting the stirrups of his saddle in preparation for a long journey! However, early on in his investigations, Dr. Bell began to notice that no matter how accurate his spiritual associates were in most of their replies, whenever he asked a question that required a response he didn't already know, they consistently failed to provide an answer. Sometimes, when he thought his questions had been accurately answered, later information revealed that he had been wrong. He received responses he believed were true, when in fact, the reality was quite different.
294. “Pursuing this train of inquiry, he found the ‘spirits,’ while averring that they could see him distinctly, ‘face to face,’ never could read the signature to letters taken from an old file, and unfolded without his having seen the writing. Yet as soon as he had cast his eye upon the signature, without allowing any one else to see it, it was promptly and correctly reproduced by the alphabetical rappings. And again, when he had made a previous arrangement with his family that they should do certain things every quarter of an hour at home—he, of course, not knowing what—while he was to ask the ‘spirit’ what was done at the instant, uniform failure occurred. He proved, too, that the theory of the ‘spiritualists’ to meet such difficulties—viz., that evil or trifling spirits interfered at their end of the telegraph—was not tenable. For the responses just before and after these gross failures had been eminently and wonderfully accurate, and the ‘spirits’ not only declared that they saw with perfect clearness what was going on at his house, but denied that there had been any interruption or interference.
294. “Following this line of questioning, he discovered that the ‘spirits,’ while claiming they could see him clearly, ‘face to face,’ could never read the signature on letters taken from an old file and opened without him having seen the writing. Yet, as soon as he looked at the signature, without letting anyone else see it, it was quickly and accurately reproduced through the alphabetical knocks. And again, when he had previously arranged with his family to do specific things every fifteen minutes at home—he, of course, not knowing what they were—while he asked the ‘spirit’ what was happening at that moment, they consistently failed. He also demonstrated that the ‘spiritualists’ theory to explain such issues—that malevolent or petty spirits interfered on their end of the telegraph—was flawed. For the responses just before and after these blatant failures were remarkably and impressively accurate, and the ‘spirits’ not only insisted they could see perfectly what was happening at his house, but also denied any interruptions or interference.”
295. “Dr. Bell also gave examples where test questions, involving replies unknown to the interrogator, had been designedly intermixed with those which were known. The result uniformly was, that the known responses, however curious and far remote, were correctly reproduced; the unknown were a set of perfectly wild and blundering errors, the responses often being obviously formed out of the phraseology of the question, as a stuck schoolboy guesses out a reply!
295. “Dr. Bell also provided examples where test questions, mixing replies unknown to the interrogator with those that were known, were intentionally crafted. The outcome was always the same: the known answers, no matter how strange or unrelated, were accurately reproduced; the unknown ones were a series of completely wild and clumsy mistakes, with the responses often clearly constructed from the wording of the question, much like a stuck schoolboy trying to guess an answer!"
296. “The result of the inquiries of Dr. Bell and his friends—for several gentlemen of eminently fitting talents pursued the investigation with him—was briefly this:—That what the questioner knows the spirits know; what the questioner does not know, the spirits are entirely ignorant of. In other words, that there are really no superhuman agencies in the matter at all—no connection with another state of existence; but that it bears certain strong analogies to some of the experiences of clairvoyance, in that mysterious science of animal magnetism, as it has been protruding and receding for the last hundred years. Dr. Bell thought there was some reason to believe that the matter reproduced may come not only from the questioner, but if in the mind of any one at the circle, that it might be evolved. He made some observations upon the evidences of spirit existence, drawn from the character of the matter communicated by the mediums in a state of impression, when, as it is believed, spirits express65 themselves through the human agent. Of course, the quality of such composition is more or less a question of taste. Much of it is elevated, indicating high intellectual and moral capacities in the mind to which it owes its origin. Much more is absurd, puerile, and disgusting, infinitely below the grade of the human productions of the same persons from whom it professedly comes. Yet the spiritual revelation has given us nothing of such extraordinary value or novelty as to stamp it, in the judgment of unprejudiced minds, as of supermundane production. Dr. Bell alluded to a treatise which had been put into his hands by an earnest spiritualist, purporting to be the work of Thomas Paine, the author of the Age of Reason, &c., which was thought would carry conviction to anybody, as it purported to be a full explanation of the formation and changes of this earth, by one who, from his situs, must know all about it. The truth was, that the work was the production of some mind, celestial or mundane, ignorant of the very first rudiments of chemical philosophy, in which the most ridiculous blunders were made on every page in matters which are as demonstrable as mathematics, and where, of course, the answer cannot be made that the revelation was too high for common readers. Nor does Dr. Bell believe, from his observations, that the waters from this fountain ever reach a higher level than their source. The most elevated specimen of the spiritual literature would no doubt be found in the communications from Swedenborg and Lord Bacon in Judge Edmond’s and Dr. Dexter’s first and second volumes. Yet, whoever reads the very elegant and powerful preliminary treatise of these gentlemen, which Dr. Bell thought would compare favourably with any writings of the kind ever published, would not be able to feel that Swedenborg and Lord Bacon, after their nearly one and more than two centuries’ residence, respectively, amid the culture and refined senses of the superior spheres, had more than equalled their unpretending amanuenses still in the ‘vale of tears.’
296. “The findings from Dr. Bell and his colleagues—several highly qualified individuals conducted this investigation with him—were essentially this:—The spirits know what the questioner knows; what the questioner doesn’t know is completely unknown to the spirits. In simpler terms, there aren't any supernatural forces involved—no link to another state of being; however, it does show strong similarities to some experiences of clairvoyance in the mysterious field of animal magnetism, which has been pulsating in and out of focus for the last hundred years. Dr. Bell believed there was some reason to think that the information shared might not only come from the questioner but could also be drawn from anyone’s mind present in the circle. He made some observations regarding the evidence of spirit existence based on the nature of the information communicated by mediums in a state of impression, when it is believed that spirits communicate through the human agent. Naturally, the quality of this content is often subjective. Much of it is elevated, showcasing high intellectual and moral capacities from which it originates. However, a lot of it is absurd, childish, and repulsive, far below the level of human works from the same individuals it supposedly comes from. Yet, the spiritual revelations have provided nothing of such extraordinary value or originality that unbiased minds would deem it as having a supernatural origin. Dr. Bell mentioned a document given to him by a dedicated spiritualist, claiming to be written by Thomas Paine, the author of The Age of Reason, which was expected to convince anyone, as it was said to contain a thorough explanation of Earth's formation and changes, from someone who, due to his situs, must know everything about it. The reality was that the work was produced by a mind, whether celestial or earthly, unaware of the basic principles of chemical philosophy, making ridiculous mistakes on nearly every page in matters as provable as mathematics, and where it certainly could not be argued that the revelation was too advanced for average readers. Dr. Bell does not believe, based on his observations, that the insights from this source ever reach a higher level than its origin. The highest-quality examples of spiritual literature are likely found in the communications from Swedenborg and Lord Bacon in Judge Edmond’s and Dr. Dexter’s first and second volumes. Still, anyone who reads the very polished and persuasive preliminary treatise by these gentlemen—which Dr. Bell thought would stand up favorably against any similar writings ever published—would not feel that Swedenborg and Lord Bacon, after spending nearly one and over two centuries, respectively, among the culture and refined sensibilities of the higher realms, achieved anything that surpassed their unpretentious scribes still navigating the ‘vale of tears.’
297. “Dr. Bell concluded by the expression of his full convictions that, while the faith in spirits must be given up as being connected with these facts, it was a topic, whether regarded as a physical novelty or even as a delusion, cutting deeply into the very religious natures of our people, which was worth our fullest examination. There were great, novel, interesting facts here. They had not been treated fairly and respectfully, as they should have been. The effect was, that the community, knowing that here were facts, if human senses could be trusted at all, went away from those who should have thrown light upon the mysteries, but who would or could not, to those who gave some explanation, even if it was one which uprooted all previous forms of religious faith. He hoped that the members of this association, who were as much required to examine this topic as any order of men, except, perhaps, the clergy, would not be afraid of looking it in the face from any apprehensions of ridicule or of degrading their dignity.”
297. “Dr. Bell concluded by expressing his strong belief that, while faith in spirits should be abandoned as related to these phenomena, it was still a subject, whether seen as a scientific curiosity or even as a misconception, that profoundly impacted the religious beliefs of our society and deserved our complete attention. There were significant, new, and fascinating facts here. They hadn’t been treated with the fairness and respect they warranted. As a result, the community, realizing that there were facts, if human perception could be trusted, turned away from those who should have clarified the mysteries but either wouldn't or couldn't, to those who offered some explanation, even if it contradicted all previous forms of religious belief. He hoped that the members of this association, who needed to explore this topic as much as any other group, perhaps except for the clergy, would not shy away from confronting it out of fear of mockery or damaging their reputation.”
298. After giving much evidence, showing that physical movements take place without contact, and that communications were made to him which could not have ensued without controlling reason, Dr. Bell finds that in certain instances which have come to his knowledge spirits could not communicate information nor ideas which did not exist in his mind or that of some mortals present. Yet it appears that during a manifestation which my learned friend witnessed, a request to lift the legs of the table was given which did not occur to any mortal present.
298. After providing substantial evidence that physical movements can happen without direct contact, and that messages were conveyed to him that couldn't have occurred without rational control, Dr. Bell concludes that in certain cases he encountered, spirits couldn't share information or ideas that weren't already in his mind or the minds of other people present. However, it seems that during a demonstration my knowledgeable friend observed, a request to lift the legs of the table was made that none of the living people present had thought of.
299. I have already given a brief reply to these objections of Dr. Bell. Under this head I will only add my regret that my letter to the Episcopal clergy, with a sketch of the information derived from my spirit friends, had not fallen under Dr. Bell’s notice before his conclusions were published. It will be seen that the information thus alluded to is irreconcilable with Dr. Bell’s inferences. I shall, however, postpone this discussion until facts have been more fully presented to the reader. (866)
299. I’ve already given a quick response to Dr. Bell’s objections. I just want to express my disappointment that my letter to the Episcopal clergy, which included some insights from my spirit friends, wasn’t seen by Dr. Bell before he published his conclusions. It will be clear that the information I mentioned contradicts Dr. Bell’s inferences. However, I’ll hold off on this discussion until I’ve shared more facts with the reader. (866)
FOREIGN CORROBORATIVE EVIDENCE.
Some quotations from a work on Spiritual Philosophy, addressed to the Academy of Sciences at Paris, by James C. De Mirville.—Third Edition.
Some quotes from a book on Spiritual Philosophy, presented to the Academy of Sciences in Paris, by James C. De Mirville.—Third Edition.
Manifestations which occurred in France, in 1851.
300. There is a great resemblance between the manifestations which have been described by Capron and others as having taken place at the mansion of the Rev. Dr. Phelps, at Stratford, Connecticut, and those which occurred in the Presbytery of Cideville in France, so as to be verified before a court. The facts in this last-mentioned case were verified by the testimony taken during a trial which grew out of the circumstances. Some of the witnesses were persons distinguished by their high character and position in society. None had any interested motives for stating them; but, on the contrary, had to meet the odium which falls upon all who tell truths conflicting with the prejudices of the community within which they reside. Rochefoucault correctly urged that it is more politic, to tell a probable lie than an improbable truth.
300. There is a strong similarity between the events described by Capron and others that happened at the mansion of Rev. Dr. Phelps in Stratford, Connecticut, and those that occurred in the Presbytery of Cideville in France, which were verified in court. The evidence in this latter case was supported by testimonies collected during a trial that arose from these events. Some of the witnesses were individuals known for their strong character and status in society. They had no personal reasons to share these accounts; instead, they faced the backlash that comes to anyone who speaks truths that go against the biases of their community. Rochefoucault rightly pointed out that it’s often more politically savvy to tell a likely lie than an unlikely truth.
302. It is remarkable that in the case at Cideville, signals as the means of intellectual communication were employed, independently of their employment made between two and three years before in New York. Of course, those who resorted to this expedient, might have heard previously of the effort in the same way which had been successful in this country67 The signs employed, however, differed. At Rochester one rap was taken for no, two for doubtful, three for yes. At Cideville one rap was received for yes, and two for no. At the former place, the alphabet was directly referred to; at the latter, reference was made by figures indicating the place of the selected letter in the alphabetic card.
302. It's impressive that in the case at Cideville, signals were used as a means of communication, independently of their use that occurred two to three years earlier in New York. Of course, those who used this method might have heard about the successful effort in the same way in this country67. The signs used, however, were different. In Rochester, one rap stood for no, two indicated doubtful, and three meant yes. In Cideville, one rap meant yes, and two meant no. In the former place, the alphabet was directly referred to; in the latter, they used figures to indicate the position of the chosen letter on the alphabet card.
303. Of this character is the admission of the Roman Church of the spiritual origin of the manifestations; ascribed, however, to diabolic agency. To this allusion has been already made; but I subjoin some letters and expositions, translated from a French work lately published on Mesmerism, Clairvoyance, and Spiritual Manifestations.
303. This character is reflected in the Roman Church's acknowledgment of the spiritual origin of these manifestations; however, they attribute them to diabolic forces. This reference has already been mentioned, but I will add some letters and explanations, translated from a recently published French work on Mesmerism, Clairvoyance, and Spiritual Manifestations.
Letter from T. R. P. Ventura.
306. “My Dear Sir: When you came two years ago to consult me as to the merit and propriety of your labours, I hesitated so much the less to encourage their publication, that having myself entertained the same ideas for a long time, I had been several times on the point of proclaiming them from the sacred chair. I do not fear then to affirm ‘that the publication of this important and serious work would be of incontestable usefulness, and tend strongly to enlighten opinion on a mass of curious facts, and thus prepare for the solution of high and important questions; for, I add, it is necessary that all the phases of the subject should be first presented by the laity, in order that the church may thus be enabled to form their judgment with full knowledge of the case.’
306. “My Dear Sir: When you came to me two years ago to ask about the value and appropriateness of your work, I felt even more inclined to support its publication because I had been thinking about the same ideas for a long time and had been close to sharing them myself. Therefore, I confidently state that ‘publishing this significant and serious work would be undeniably beneficial and would greatly help clarify opinions on numerous intriguing facts, thus paving the way for addressing important and profound questions; I also emphasize that it is crucial for all aspects of the topic to be first presented by the public, so that the church can make an informed judgment about the matter.’”
307. “I do not say enough, my dear sir, in pronouncing your work useful; I might have called it indispensable, had I foreseen the approaching invasion of that scourge which you so happily designate as a spiritual epidemic: a scourge whose sudden and universal propagation, in my opinion, notwithstanding its appearance of puerility, will constitute ONE OF THE GREATEST EVENTS OF OUR AGE. But how has it been both received and entertained?
307. “I can’t say enough, my dear sir, about how valuable your work is; I could have called it essential if I’d known about the upcoming invasion of that plague you aptly refer to as a spiritual epidemic: a plague whose sudden and widespread spread, despite seeming trivial, will be ONE OF THE GREATEST EVENTS OF OUR TIME. But how has it been received and regarded?
308. “Commencing with your savans, it is impossible not to be alarmed by the obstinate incredulity which does not allow them to see what at the present time can be confirmed by anybody. Oculos habent et non vident.[9]
308. “Starting with your scholars, it’s hard not to be worried by their stubborn disbelief that prevents them from acknowledging what can currently be verified by anyone. Oculos habent et non vident.[9]
309. “Those individuals alarm me still more, who having given their attention, and of course seen, shake their heads as a sign of indifference68 and pity, as if the phenomenon exhibited was of a low character and beneath their notice. When they have descended to the foundation, they treat it with contempt.
312. “In fact, the justification of the church and of the faith are emanating from them: the definite condemnation of a fallen rationalism; and consequently, the approaching glorification of all the past in the true church, and even of that Middle Age, so calumniated, so ridiculed, and gratuitously endowed with so much darkness. The political events of these latter times have to justify that Middle Age, as respects good sense in the affairs of government; and behold these facts of a nature entirely foreign, coming to avenge its accusation of superstitious credulity. This reparation was necessary, and after all our own age has nothing to fear from it, for certainly it will not render injustice of any kind to the objective and useful progress of modern civilization.
312. “Actually, the church and the faith's justification are coming from them: the clear condemnation of a fallen rationalism; and as a result, the coming glorification of everything from the past in the true church, including that Middle Ages, which has been so unfairly criticized and mocked, and wrongly labeled as full of darkness. The political events of recent times must justify that Middle Ages in terms of common sense in government affairs; and here we are, facing facts that are completely unrelated, coming to counter its claims of superstitious gullibility. This correction was necessary, and ultimately our current age has nothing to worry about from it, as it certainly will not hinder the objective and beneficial progress of modern civilization.”
313. “As for yourself, sir, you will enjoy the honour of having brought, by your luminous discussions, a large stone for the construction of this majestic edifice, and I rejoice in the encouragement I have given you. I need not enlarge on this subject, FOR SUCCESS HAS SPOKEN, and think I am sufficiently acquainted with you to know that you did not anticipate one so brilliant. You have known how to engage the attention of the learned, and people generally, by making your work attractive while it is instructive—a quality sufficiently rare to claim my congratulations. I will only add another word: had this work been confined to the notice of those phenomena whose advent we deplore, it would probably share their fate; but what will secure its perpetuity is your discussion of medical science which you put in apposition with your subject, and which will not long be able to resist the severe stricture of your logic. Therefore, be assured, it will be the learned, and especially physicians, that you will first convert to your doctrine. Philosophers will only surrender after them; but so far there is no doubt that you will have given rise to most serious reflections in all of them.
313. “As for you, sir, you'll have the honor of having contributed, through your enlightening discussions, a significant piece for the construction of this grand structure, and I’m pleased with the encouragement I’ve offered you. I don’t need to elaborate on this topic, SUCCESS HAS SPOKEN, and I believe I know you well enough to realize that you didn’t expect such brilliance. You’ve managed to catch the attention of scholars and the general public by making your work engaging while also being educational—a quality that's rare enough to deserve my congratulations. I will just add one more thing: if this work had only focused on the phenomena whose arrival we lament, it would likely share their fate; however, what will ensure its lasting influence is your discussion of medical science, which you relate to your subject, and which will soon stand firm against the harsh scrutiny of your logic. So, be assured, it will be the scholars, especially doctors, that you will first win over to your ideas. Philosophers will follow after them; but so far, there's no doubt you will have sparked serious reflections in all of them.”
315. “Finally, my dear sir, I do not doubt that the God of truth will69 bless your labours. Continue them, for the subject is vast, and especially do not suffer yourself to be discouraged by the reasoning of light minds, ‘that in divulging all these things you favour their promulgation, when they had better be suppressed, &c. &c.’ A gross error! They might as well accuse the doctors of causing the cholera. And, beside, it is worthy of remark that all the cases of insanity lately developed in the midst of these exhibitions are due to thoughtless enthusiasm succeeding to an absolute state of doubt and disbelief. It could not well be otherwise; the prodigy which was doubted yesterday, and to-day is firmly established, will to-morrow be transformed into God. Truth alone is able to prevent and remedy such disastrous mishaps.
315. “Finally, my dear sir, I have no doubt that the God of truth will69 bless your efforts. Keep going, because the topic is huge, and especially don’t let yourself be discouraged by the reasoning of superficial minds, ‘that by revealing all these things you encourage their spread, when they should be kept hidden, etc.’ A serious misconception! They might as well blame doctors for causing cholera. Moreover, it’s worth noting that all the instances of insanity that have recently arisen in the midst of these exhibitions are caused by thoughtless enthusiasm following a complete state of doubt and disbelief. It couldn’t be any other way; the phenomenon that was doubted yesterday and is firmly accepted today will, by tomorrow, be transformed into God. Only truth can prevent and fix such disastrous outcomes.”
Receive, my dear sir, the assurance, &c.,
Le P. Ventura De Raulica,
Former General of the Monks, Examiner of the Bishops and of the Roman clergy.”
Please accept this assurance, dear sir, etc.,
Le P. Ventura De Raulica,
Former General of the Monks, Inspector of the Bishops and of the Roman clergy.”
Letter of Dr. Coze.
316. “Sir:—You do me the honour to ask my opinion of the book on the Spirits which you have just published. That opinion I have already expressed to our mutual friend, the good worthy doctor Paulin; and true it is, this book has made a strong impression on my mind, for I had arrived at similar conclusions from the examination of some magnetic phenomena and the moving of tables. I find in your book a chain of very remarkable facts—presented, too, with talent and clearness very unusual in this sort of writing. I see, beside, that science is brought back to the path which cannot mislead us to that of the sacred writings; there, as I think, are to be found the true philosophy and the true light.
316. “Sir:—I’m honored that you asked for my opinion on the book about the Spirits that you just published. I’ve already shared my thoughts with our mutual friend, the good Dr. Paulin. It's true this book has made a strong impression on me, as I reached similar conclusions while studying some magnetic phenomena and table moving. I find a remarkable chain of facts in your book—skillfully and clearly presented, which is quite rare in this kind of writing. Additionally, I see that science is returning to a path that leads us not astray, aligning with the sacred writings; there, as I believe, lies true philosophy and true light.”
I have the honour to be, &c.,
R. Coze,
Dean of the Faculty of Medicine at Strasbourg.”
I am honored to be, etc.,
R. Coze,
Dean of the Faculty of Medicine at Strasbourg.”
Letter of M. F. De Saulcy.
318. “Sir:—You desire me to report to you my opinion in writing which I have formed as to the strange phenomena, to say the least of them, which have been conventionally called table turning and table talking. I am not the man to recoil from what I regard as a truth, whatever sarcasm may be reserved for such profession of faith, and therefore proceed to satisfy your inquiry.
318. “Sir:—You want me to give you my written opinion on the strange phenomena, to say the least, that are commonly referred to as table turning and table talking. I'm not the kind of person to shy away from what I believe to be true, no matter the sarcasm aimed at such a belief, so I'll go ahead and respond to your inquiry.
319. “It is about eight or ten months since when the public of Paris was agitated by the late arrival of the fact from America and Germany; a fact which pure physics was not able to explain a priori. I did as many always70 do, and have no doubt done for a long time—received this account with the most determined incredulity, and, I confess, with ridicule. I considered its adepts as charlatans or as simpletons, and refused for a long time to bestow on it the least attention. I became tired of the war, however, and after hearing many affirm, to whom I could not apply these epithets, the reality of these facts, I determined to try for myself.
319. “It was about eight or ten months ago when the people of Paris were stirred by the recent news from America and Germany; a fact that pure physics couldn’t explain a priori. Like many others, I’ve always been skeptical and, to be honest, I found it quite laughable. I viewed its supporters as frauds or fools, and I ignored it for a long time. However, I grew tired of the debates, and after hearing many credible people affirm the reality of these facts, I decided to investigate for myself. 70
320. “My son and a friend were my two companions: we had the patience for forty-five minutes, seated at the table, to form what is called the chain, and were not a little surprised, I assure you, to see at the end of that time the table on which we were operating, and which was merely the parlour dinner-table, begin to move, and after some hesitation to contract a rotary movement, which, accelerating, soon became very rapid. We endeavoured by pressing to make it strike against the bar and arrest its motion, but could not succeed.
320. “My son and a friend were my two companions: we patiently waited for forty-five minutes, seated at the table, to create what’s known as the chain, and we were quite surprised, I assure you, to see the table we were using, which was just the dinner table in the parlor, start to move. After a bit of hesitation, it began to rotate, and soon it picked up speed. We tried pressing down to make it hit the bar and stop its movement, but we couldn't manage to do it.
321. “After repeating the experiment two or three times, I sought to find some cause in physics for the movement, and battled the whole theory of Electro-Dynamics with the aid of an electroscope, compass, iron-filings, iron, &c. As I could not detect the least trace of electricity, I thought then of impulses due to the volition of the operators, and of which a sort of integration might cause the motion of the table. On that I stopped, and for several weeks did not give the smallest attention to a phenomenon which did not seem to merit any further notice.
321. “After repeating the experiment a couple of times, I tried to find some physical reason for the movement and challenged the whole theory of Electro-Dynamics using an electroscope, compass, iron filings, iron, etc. Since I couldn’t find any sign of electricity, I considered the idea that the movements might be due to the intentions of the operators, which could lead to the table moving. That’s where I paused, and for several weeks, I didn’t pay any attention to a phenomenon that didn't seem worth further investigation.
322. “Finally was commenced the faculty of talking, and I assure you my incredulity was considerably greater than when its moving power was announced. I was sparing, however, in my epithets, for I soon found myself an investigator. I watched the rogues, as I suspected, for two hours, but left the room a full believer of its reality, without any further examination, confirmed too by all subsequent experiments. (1.)
322. "At last, the ability to talk began, and I can tell you my disbelief was much stronger than when the ability to move was first mentioned. Still, I held back on my descriptions because I quickly realized I needed to investigate. I observed the tricksters, as I suspected, for two hours, but left the room fully convinced of its reality, without any further examination, especially since all later experiments confirmed it. (1.)
326. “I believe that the Christian religion should not encourage the practice of these experiments. I believe there is danger in allowing them to become a habit, and at least we may lose the little reason which has been granted man by the Giver of all things. I believe, finally, that it is the duty of an honest man to dissuade others from occupying themselves71 with it, in preaching, by example, and not allowing it in the least to occupy himself.
326. “I think that the Christian faith shouldn’t support these kinds of experiments. I see a risk in letting them become a habit, and we could very well lose the little bit of reason that has been granted to us by the Creator. Lastly, I believe that it’s the responsibility of a decent person to discourage others from getting involved with it, through preaching, by setting a good example, and making sure it doesn’t occupy his own time at all.71
327. “This is the end I have reached after some months’ experience; and, ask permission to close this letter, already too long, by repeating a very wise saying of a man of high intelligence: ‘Either these phenomena are, or are not real; if not, it is disgraceful to lose time with them; if they are, it is dangerous to invoke them and to make them a pastime.’
327. “This is where I've arrived after a few months of experience; and I’d like to wrap up this already lengthy letter by quoting a very wise saying from a highly intelligent person: ‘Either these phenomena are real, or they're not; if they're not, it's shameful to waste time on them; if they are, it's risky to summon them and treat them as entertainment.’”
Please accept, &c.,
F. De Saulcy,
Member of the Institute.”
Please accept, etc.
F. De Saulcy,
Member of the Institute.”
Spiritualism in Paris.
[See New York Reformer, September, 1853.]
[See New York Reformer, September, 1853.]
“We find the following article in the London Illustrated News of July 23; it is an extract from the News’ Paris correspondence:—
“We find the following article in the London Illustrated News from July 23; it is an excerpt from the News’ Paris correspondence:—
328. “‘An immense sensation was caused here, a few days since, by a revelation given on the authority of some of the most respected and influential members of the clergy, headed by the Archbishop of Paris, on the subject of table movements. The archbishop, being questioned as to his opinion of the legitimacy, in a religious point of view, of attempting to communicate with spirits through the medium of the tables, alleged that he had not sufficiently studied the question to reply definitively; that he imagined that the effects produced were wholly of the nature of physical science, and in that case harmless; but that, in order to form a judgment, he would attend a meeting composed of certain members of the clergy, at a place appointed to make the usual experiments.
328. “‘A huge stir was caused here a few days ago by a revelation from some of the most respected and influential clergy, led by the Archbishop of Paris, about table movements. When asked for his opinion on the religious legitimacy of trying to communicate with spirits through table movements, the archbishop said he hadn't studied the issue enough to give a definite answer. He thought the effects were purely a matter of physical science, and if that’s the case, they’re harmless. However, to decide for sure, he planned to attend a meeting with some clergy members at a designated place to conduct the usual experiments.
329. “‘The table being put in motion, one of the party demanded it in reply, by a certain number of raps, if there were a spirit present. The response was in the affirmative; and in answer to a second question, the spirit represented herself, by raps indicating certain letters of the alphabet, to be that of Sœur Francoise, deceased a week previously at the convent of -—-, Paris. The Abbe B-—- stated that he had confessed the Sœur Francoise, who had, in fact, died at the time and place named. General consternation, as may be supposed, ensued when the Abbe L-—-, rising, commanded the spirit in the name of the Saviour to appear.
329. “‘As the table started moving, one of the group asked it to respond with a certain number of taps to indicate if a spirit was present. The answer was yes; and when asked a second question, the spirit tapped out letters of the alphabet to identify herself as Sœur Francoise, who had passed away a week earlier at the convent of -—-, Paris. The Abbe B-—- confirmed that he had given confession to the Sœur Francoise, who indeed died at the time and place mentioned. As you can imagine, general shock followed when the Abbe L-—- stood up and commanded the spirit to appear in the name of the Savior.
332. “‘Various narratives mention that, through the medium of the tables, communications are held with spirits of all nations. The spirits, happily, being excellent linguists, find no difficulty in expressing the72mselves in any language chosen by the questioner, and reveal the secrets of the prison-house with a frankness, not to say indiscretion, that would shock the more reserved ghost in Hamlet, in no way confirming his statement of the horrors of their temporary abode. Many of them describe in glowing terms the beauties and delights of their celestial abodes.’”
332. “‘Various stories mention that, through the use of the tables, people communicate with spirits from all over the world. Fortunately, the spirits are great linguists and have no trouble expressing themselves in any language the questioner chooses. They reveal the secrets of the afterlife with a candor, if not an indiscretion, that would surprise the more reserved ghost in Hamlet, completely contrasting his account of the horrors of their temporary residence. Many of them enthusiastically describe the beauty and joys of their heavenly homes.’”
SPIRITUAL MANIFESTATIONS IN FRANCE AND GERMANY.
The following contribution, under the preceding head, is translated by my much esteemed friend, Dr. Geib, from the work of De Mirville, whence the articles under the designation of Foreign Coroborative Evidence have been obtained through the same able translator:
The following contribution, under the preceding title, is translated by my respected friend, Dr. Geib, from the work of De Mirville, from which the articles labeled as Foreign Corroborative Evidence have been sourced through the same skilled translator:
333. “Toward the end of the year 1852 the epidemic had been imported into the North of Scotland by some American mediums; thence it got to London, where, according to the latest accounts, it must have reached, by the present time, a pretty extensive development. Seeing its progress in this way, we were led to say, If it ever reaches Germany, that whole country will be on fire.
333. “Towards the end of 1852, the epidemic was brought to the North of Scotland by some American mediums; from there, it made its way to London, where, based on the latest reports, it must have expanded quite a bit by now. Seeing its progress this way, we thought, if it ever reaches Germany, the entire country will be in chaos.
335. “‘Again the world is presented with various marvellous appearances, which, coming from elevated sources, force themselves on public notice, and which, in every case, throw a very marked shadow on our own epoch of civilization. It may be appropriate to communicate some of those found in the Gazette Générale; and leaving reflection to the reader, we will give some of the most striking.
335. “‘Once more, the world is presented with various amazing phenomena that arise from high sources, demanding public attention and casting a significant shadow on our current era of civilization. It might be fitting to share some of these found in the Gazette Générale; and leaving the reflection to the reader, we will present some of the most striking examples.
336. “‘The Morgan Blatt (Morning Sheet) announces among its novelties from Palatinat Rhénan, the phenomenon of a young girl not yet pubescent, who, they say, is able at will to command a rapping spectre, (Klopferle.) The spectre raps as often as the little girl orders him, being obedient in the extreme. What is remarkable is, that the spectres of the Old World, as well as the New, have a strong family likeness, being as much alike as two drops of water. And the Tribune of New York, printed in the German language, has lately contained various communications on this subject. But whence come these rapping spectres, and why make their appearance all at once?’
336. “‘The Morgan Blatt (Morning Sheet) reports among its updates from the Rhineland that there’s a phenomenon involving a young girl who hasn’t reached puberty yet. They say she can summon a rapping spirit at will, (Klopferle.) The spirit responds every time she calls, showing extreme obedience. What’s striking is that the spirits from both the Old World and the New look very similar, as alike as two drops of water. Recently, the German-language Tribune of New York has featured several articles on this topic. But where do these rapping spirits come from, and why have they all started appearing at the same time?’”
337. “The Gazette of Augsbourg then refers to several other facts of the same nature, which, at all times, have caused much embarrassment to the German authorities, either in giving rise to lengthy inquests, or in causing the condemnation of persons proved afterward to be entirely innocent; but as for those of the present time, it fully understands, proclaims, and demonstrates them to be of the American Affiliation.
337. “The Gazette of Augsburg then mentions several other similar incidents that have always created a lot of trouble for the German authorities, either leading to lengthy investigations or resulting in the condemnation of people who were later proven completely innocent; but as for those occurring now, it fully acknowledges, states, and shows them to be of the American Affiliation.
338. “The Journal du Magnetisme of the 10th of March, 1853, had already furnished us with the reported account given in the course of last January to the tribunal of London, by the rapping spirit of the house of Sanger; the same phenomena, the same stupefaction, the same impossibility to discover the jugglers. However, the subject appeared to rest at this point in Germany, when, in the month of April, the first phenomenon of table moving reached Bremen, and then the Augsbourg Gazette insisted on its true origin.
338. “The Journal du Magnetisme from March 10, 1853, had already provided us with the reported account presented last January to the London tribunal by the rapping spirit of the Sanger house; the same phenomena, the same astonishment, the same inability to identify the tricksters. However, the topic seemed to stagnate in Germany until April, when the first instance of table moving appeared in Bremen, and the Augsbourg Gazette emphasized its true origin.
342. “A general burst of pleasantry and incredulity first accompanied the revelation of the doctor. But soon experiment begins, and laughter gives place to a sort of dejection. Certain savans, professors of the University of Heidelberg, MM. Mittermouer and Zoepfl, M. Molh, brother of the member of the Institute, Eschenmajer, Ennemoser, and Kerner, attest the same facts; and Doctor Lœwe of Vienna undertakes to give the theory of it: ‘This theory consists, according to him, in the opposite polarity of the right and left sides of the human body; hence, having formed a chain of human beings, the contrary poles of which, viz. the right and left, touch each other, and this chain, exerting upon any body whatever a prolonged action, conveys to it an electric current, and converts it into a magnet, and thus polarization is established in that body; and in virtue of its tendency to magnetic orientation, the south pole of the table impressing it with a movement to the north, the latter commences a continued rotation, and turns on its axis as long as the indispensable conditions are continued.’
342. “At first, there was a general wave of amusement and disbelief when the doctor made his announcement. But soon, experimentation began, and the laughter faded into a kind of sadness. Certain scholars, professors from the University of Heidelberg, Messrs. Mittermouer and Zoepfl, Mr. Molh, brother of the member of the Institute, Eschenmajer, Ennemoser, and Kerner, support the same findings. Doctor Lœwe from Vienna proposes the theory behind it: ‘According to him, this theory is based on the opposite polarities of the right and left sides of the human body. Thus, when a chain of people is formed, where the opposing poles, that is, the right and left, come into contact, this chain exerts a prolonged effect on any object, transmitting an electric current, which magnetizes it, thereby establishing polarization in that object. Due to its tendency to align magnetically, the south pole of the table imparts a movement towards the north, causing it to begin a continuous rotation and to spin on its axis as long as the necessary conditions are maintained.’”
344. “We ask, however, what would have been said, had we foretold what began to appear unavoidable, that in less than a month, table and hat turning would reach Paris. The announcement was scarcely known when it appears that such a thing has always existed; that it is a law of nature; and that tables never had any other destiny!
344. “We wonder, though, what people would have said if we had predicted what soon seemed inevitable, that in less than a month, table and hat flipping would arrive in Paris. As soon as the news broke, it felt like this was something that had always existed; that it was a natural law; and that tables had no other fate!”
345. “Again we inquire of all serious minds, What is the faculty by which we predict, among other coming events, the turning of tables, which, nevertheless, do not turn till after the arrival of a vessel and a medium? However, silence becoming impossible, the French press has thought proper to speak. On the 4th of May, the Journal of the Empire, Le Pays, happened to inform us that ‘from the Baltic to the banks of the Danube, all Germany was in a fever.’ It became then plainer and plainer that we were going to be infected, and from that time we hastened to prepare our batteries.
345. “Once again we ask all rational thinkers, what is the ability we have to predict, among other upcoming events, the flipping of tables, which, however, only happen after the arrival of a vessel and a medium? As silence became impossible, the French press decided to speak up. On May 4th, the Journal of the Empire, Le Pays, informed us that ‘from the Baltic to the banks of the Danube, all of Germany was in a frenzy.’ It then became increasingly clear that we were going to be affected, and from that point on we rushed to prepare our defenses.
346. “It was high time, for about the end of April, the grand mysterious army had this time decidedly crossed the Rhine, and in all the large cities of France—Strasbourg, Marseilles, Bordeaux, Toulouse, &c.—the turning epidemic broke out like a discharge of musketry; and better to impress the mind, it only at first attacked stands, tables, hats, seats, &c., for all these participated in the demonstration.
346. “It was about time, because by the end of April, the grand mysterious army had definitely crossed the Rhine, and in all the major cities of France—Strasbourg, Marseille, Bordeaux, Toulouse, etc.—the turning epidemic erupted like a volley of gunfire; and to make a stronger impact, it initially targeted stands, tables, hats, seats, etc., since all these were part of the demonstration.
349. “It is true, too, that M. Rouilly, maître de pension at Orleans, undertook to give an answer. In the Moniteur due Loiret, he informs us that ‘at his house, even in the middle of the process, a large young man of twenty-six was seized with a violent trembling in all his limbs, and that his left forearm began suddenly to oscillate in a frightful manner, making as many as a thousand movements in a minute; being able, he said, to utter only broken syllables; staggered like an intoxicated man; it was necessary to carry him to bed, and the next day he still felt some nervous trembling.’ M. Rouilly ended in saying ‘that he felt it his duty to report this fact for the benefit of those who may enter into these experiments without knowing their possible serious inconveniences.’ Little attention was paid to this, so much had fashion asserted empire, so much was this pleasure worth its cost.
349. “It’s also true that M. Rouilly, maître de pension in Orleans, took it upon himself to respond. In the Moniteur du Loiret, he shares that ‘at his place, even during the process, a large young man of twenty-six suddenly started trembling violently in all his limbs, and his left forearm began to shake uncontrollably, making about a thousand movements in a minute; he could only manage to produce broken syllables and staggered like a drunk person; he had to be carried to bed, and the next day he still experienced some nervous shaking.’ M. Rouilly concluded by saying ‘that he felt it was his responsibility to report this incident for the benefit of those who might engage in these experiments without being aware of their potential serious risks.’ Little notice was taken of this, as fashion had so firmly taken hold and this pleasure seemed worth the cost.”
350. “However, knowing long since all the particulars, we are disposed to ask ourselves, What is going to result from all this? what will the savans say? Will they allow themselves to be carried away by electric appearances? will their philosophy allow them to seek independently of the fluids, which may be imagined to operate, the real agent of such a variety of effects? No; they well know, however, that in the sciences—medicine, for example—every investigation that stops short of phenomena, is of very secondary value; we may be satisfied, for want of better, but still we do not feel ourselves in possession of the truth; we still seek it. Why in75 this case should we do otherwise? These suppositions were just, but we say without hesitation our fantastic experimenters committed from the first an unpardonable fault, philosophically speaking; that is, not to have taken the least notice of those facts from America which were beginning to sound in their ears from all sides. When we are visited by the plague, yellow fever, or cholera, the first care of the faculty is to have it studied in Egypt, Spain, and Poland. These scourges are investigated even at the place of their birth; we notice their origin, development, and termination. Well! in doing the same in this case, these gentlemen would have seen as clear as day that the Augsbourg Gazette was right in telling them that this animal magnetizing was received direct from America. But what shall we do? we take no pleasure in looking at what we do not want to see.
350. “However, knowing all the details for a long time, we find ourselves asking, What will come of all this? What will the experts say? Will they let themselves be swayed by flashy appearances? Will their philosophy let them look beyond the potential forces at work to find the real cause of such a variety of effects? No; they are well aware that in the sciences—medicine, for instance—any inquiry that stops without examining the phenomena is of very little value; we might settle for it, lacking better options, but we still don’t feel like we have the truth; we continue to seek it. Why should we do any differently in this case? These assumptions were reasonable, but we can confidently say that the so-called experimenters made a serious philosophical error from the very beginning by ignoring the facts coming from America that were starting to make noise all around them. When we are faced with the plague, yellow fever, or cholera, the first priority for the medical community is to study it in Egypt, Spain, and Poland. These epidemics are scrutinized right where they originate; we observe their beginnings, development, and end. Well! By doing the same here, these individuals would have seen as clear as day that the Augsbourg Gazette was correct in stating that this animal magnetizing came directly from America. But what can we do? We take no joy in looking at what we prefer not to see.
351. “However, this affiliation once well established, well understood, by thoroughly studying the American prodigies, we should very soon have reached the assurance that there, at least, the spirits had exhibited themselves in open day; and there, as they were first concealed in tables or behind partitions, we could have seen immediately what might be reserved for us for the future.
351. “However, once this connection is established and clearly understood, by studying the American prodigies in depth, we should quickly gain confidence that, at the very least, the spirits had revealed themselves in broad daylight; and there, just as they were initially hidden in tables or behind partitions, we would have been able to see right away what might be in store for us in the future.
352. “But rest assured our French science will not yield; the snare is too gross; French science has no rival in physics and electricity; it only sees in this a waggish electricity, and will never consent to be persuaded that it has slept a hundred years at the side of such truths, or rather at the side of such enormities in physics.
352. “But rest assured our French science will not back down; the trap is too obvious; French science has no equal in physics and electricity; it only views this as a joking electricity, and will never agree to be convinced that it has slumbered for a hundred years next to such truths, or rather next to such absurdities in physics.
354. “This morning, in a journal of Lorraine, there is a notice of a circle formed in a first story, round a massive table; as long as the circle continued nothing was done; but getting tired they all leave for the street, and a few moments afterward the rebellious table begins to waltz, as if to bid defiance to the party. What a law of physics, what electricity! Behold, on the other hand, cities and countries disinherited! Behold the city of Valence, who laboured all in her power, who followed with angelic patience all the prescriptions of the new science; nothing could produce the phenomena. Is it that at Valence, perchance, the human species has no electricity? Mon Dieu! it has electricity, but it is not of that accidental and local kind, the real kind for the occasion, and which may be therefore denominated erratic; as the ancients called those gods that moved about from place to place.
354. “This morning, in a journal from Lorraine, there’s a report about a group gathered around a big table on the first floor; as long as they stayed in the circle, nothing happened. But eventually, they got bored and went outside, and just moments later, the stubborn table starts to dance, as if to mock them. What a law of physics, what electricity! Look at cities and countries that have been left behind! Look at the city of Valence, which did everything it could, patiently following all the guidelines of the new science; nothing worked to create the phenomena. Is it possible that in Valence, the human species lacks electricity? My God! It has electricity, but it’s not the kind that’s random and local, it’s the genuine type needed for the situation, which can hence be called erratic; just like the ancient gods that roamed from place to place.”
355. “No, Science is not to be so deceived; she is not satisfied with the explanation of the little fingers, but soon perceives that these little fingers supply here precisely the part of the famous mesmeric trough, and the chain that was formed entirely round it. Then, also, the chain was said76 to be very important; and the trough, magnet, steel, glass pile all necessary agents. Very well, what has now become of all these necessities? The magnetic effects exceed all those of that time, and notwithstanding they are not made any use of. Much more! since the passes have ceased to be the fashion, the phenomena have doubled. In Germany, where people go to the bottom of things, they have desired to look into the heart of it. Each master of the magnet—and they are pretty plenty there—has constructed his own trough. That of Walford consists of an iron box, furnished with bottles, iron wire, ground glass, &c. That of Keiser was made of beech without bottles, and filled with water, which did not prevent the effects from being precisely the same in the two cases. Thus it was said: It is magnetism alone which gives them this power, and they magnetized their best. But one lucky day it was thought proper not to magnetize, and the trough lost none of its power! ‘Ah! ah!’ they say, ‘the trough is magnetized by the magnetized patients themselves, and they put a stout man into it, free from all magnetic influence, and besides in excellent health. Well, this time! the magnetic effects exceeded in intensity all the previous experiments, and never had the phenomena exhibited themselves so brilliantly.’
355. “No, Science won’t be fooled so easily; she isn’t satisfied with the explanation of the little fingers, but quickly realizes that these little fingers are exactly what makes up the famous mesmeric trough and the chain that went completely around it. The chain was once said76 to be very important, along with the trough, magnet, steel, glass pile—all the necessary components. So, what has happened to all these necessities? The magnetic effects now outweigh everything from that time, and yet they aren’t being utilized at all. Even more! Since the passes have gone out of style, the phenomena have doubled. In Germany, where people dig deep into matters, they wanted to explore its essence. Each magnet master—and there are quite a few there—has created their own trough. Walford’s is made of an iron box filled with bottles, iron wire, ground glass, etc. Keiser’s was made of beech without bottles and filled with water, yet the results were exactly the same in both cases. Thus, it was said: It’s magnetism alone that grants them this power, and they magnetize their best. But one fortunate day, they decided not to magnetize, and the trough still didn’t lose any of its power! ‘Ah! ah!’ they said, ‘the trough is magnetized by the magnetized patients themselves,’ and they placed a strong man into it, free from all magnetic influence and in excellent health. Well, this time! the magnetic effects surpassed the intensity of all previous experiments, and the phenomena had never shown themselves so vividly.”
356. “This is the precise account of the famous report of Bailly, of which M. Arago spoke so highly in his last memoir; and in one respect he was right; for these great experimenters did not allow themselves to be caught by any of these electric seductions, and proclaimed physics to be entirely innocent of all the effects they witnessed. But at the same time they thought proper to refer to the imagination these same prodigious effects, which no one could understand even after having seen them; and there was their great mistake; they were right as savans, as philosophers inexcusable.
356. “This is the accurate account of the well-known report by Bailly, which M. Arago praised highly in his latest memoir; and in one way, he was correct; because these great experimenters didn't let themselves be swayed by any of these electric temptations and stated that physics was completely innocent of all the effects they observed. However, at the same time, they chose to attribute those incredible effects to the imagination, which no one could comprehend even after witnessing them; and that was their major mistake; they were right as scientists, but as philosophers, they were inexcusable.”
357. “Moreover, this absurd explanation by imagination he renewed under these circumstances; and that of jugglery is not more fortunate. What prejudice! These two words rendered much service, and covered many retreats! That is, however, passed; it will be necessary hereafter, not only to admit them, but to redeem all analogous precedents, for these are about to be, at last, explained. Again, what is to be done? It will be necessary to proclaim that these electric phenomena which are real as an effect, are not in fact real in their cause; that they lie when they wish the contrary to be believed, that they joke when they act by turns with and without a chain in a particular town, and not in some other, &c.
357. “Moreover, this ridiculous explanation by imagination was repeated under these circumstances; and the one about trickery isn’t any better. What a bias! These two words were very useful and helped cover many retreats! However, that’s in the past; moving forward, we’ll need to not only acknowledge them but also clarify all similar cases, as they are about to be finally explained. So, what do we do now? We need to declare that these electric phenomena, which are real as an effect, are not actually real in their cause; they deceive when they want to be believed otherwise, they play tricks when they operate alternately with and without a chain in one town, but not in another, etc.”
358. “But on the other hand to perceive a capricious and lying cause, is almost to perceive ... a mind. A mind, grands dieux! You represent yourself before the whole Academy Arago as recognising spirits, hobgoblins! grand experiment! But that itself is horrid to contemplate! Not a face at the Institute can remain uncovered, and that day will forever be regarded as unlucky for science, as it robs it of a victory which was thought to have been gained centuries before.
358. “But on the flip side, to recognize a whimsical and deceptive cause is almost like recognizing... a mind. A mind, oh my goodness! You present yourself in front of the entire Academy Arago as acknowledging spirits, goblins! What a grand experiment! But just that thought is terrifying to consider! Not a single face at the Institute can stay uncovered, and that day will always be seen as a bad day for science, as it takes away a victory that was believed to have been secured centuries ago."
361. “And already, what signifies that last phrase of a serious article which we find in the Courier du Nord? ‘In another house the table, they say, obeyed the commands of one of the experimenters; took the direction indicated, danced in measure to the sound of a piano, counted the hours, and told the age of the assistants,’ &c.
361. “And really, what does that last line of a serious article in the Courier du Nord mean? ‘In another house, the table, they say, followed the instructions of one of the experimenters; moved in the direction indicated, danced in sync with the piano, counted the hours, and revealed the age of the participants,’ &c.
362. “What means that other letter from Bordeaux, in the Guyenne? ‘A hat submitted to animal magnetism appeared more intelligent even than the table; it indicated, they say, by little gambols, the age of persons, the number of pieces of money they had in their pockets, it told the amount of ladies and gentlemen together in the room,’ &c.
362. “What does that other letter from Bordeaux, in the Guyenne? ‘A hat that had been exposed to animal magnetism seemed smarter than the table; it reportedly would show, through little antics, the age of people, the amount of money they had in their pockets, and it indicated the number of ladies and gentlemen present in the room,’ &c.
363. “What follows is better still: see in the Journal le Pays, a letter of M., the Abbé of Moigno, according to which it follows that MM. Seguin and de Montgolfier, very distinguished engineers, ordered the tables to rest on this leg and then on the other, and made them beat time, &c.
363. “What comes next is even more interesting: check out the Journal le Pays, where there's a letter from M., the Abbé of Moigno, stating that Mr. Seguin and de Montgolfier, who are both highly respected engineers, had the tables balance on this leg and then on the other, making them keep time, etc.
364. “We read in La Patrie—‘Explanation given by the savans.’ Ah! let us see! this subject is becoming important. According to this journal the following is the hypothesis at which the savans have arrived: ‘The table and hat turners act mostly in good faith, (quite a concession,) but they deceive themselves; they think they cause the motion of an inanimate object by an act of volition, or an effusion of magnetic fluid from their fingers; while it is by muscular action, imperceptible to themselves, or others.’ Ah! take notice! It is by a vibratory movement coming from thousands of small nervous branches. Add to this, lassitude, humidity of the hands, and you will have an explanation, if not entirely satisfactory, at least sufficiently plausible, of the phenomena which engage our attention. M. Chevreul (of the Institute) has analyzed this physiological predisposition, and has illustrated it by the fact familiar to the billiard player, who having struck the ball, follows it with his eyes, with his shoulders, and with the whole body, and makes fantastic motions, as if to impel it, though no longer subject to his direct action, &c.
364. “We read in La Patrie—‘Explanation given by the experts.’ Ah! let's see! This topic is getting important. According to this journal, here's the theory the experts have come up with: ‘The table and hat turners act mostly in good faith (that's quite a concession), but they mislead themselves; they believe they're making an inanimate object move by sheer willpower or by sending out magnetic energy from their fingers; when actually, it's through muscle movement that they can't perceive, or that others can't see either.’ Ah! Take note! It's through a vibrating action coming from thousands of tiny nerve endings. Add in fatigue, moisture on the hands, and you'll have an explanation that, while not entirely satisfactory, is at least plausible enough for the phenomena that capture our attention. M. Chevreul (from the Institute) has analyzed this physiological tendency and has demonstrated it by the experience familiar to billiard players, who, after striking the ball, follow it with their eyes, shoulders, and entire body, making exaggerated movements as if to push it, even though it is no longer under their direct control, etc.
365. “It is well M. Chevreul has used the phrase ‘as if to impel it,’ for had he been so unfortunate as to say, and in fact he did impel it, we should have been lost. In truth we should have been silenced. But that lucky ‘as if,’ saves us from a very bad predicament; it brings back to our memory what we were about to forget; that is to say, that in the relations of man and matter, never, up to the present time, has all the muscular effort of the world been able to influence, in the smallest degree, the direction of an object, not under its direct action. To the present78 time all the laws of physics have been based on the grand primordial law, and the player of ten-pins is not more successful from such efforts, than he of the billiard ball just named.
365. “It’s good that M. Chevreul used the phrase ‘as if to impel it,’ because if he had unfortunately said, and in fact he did impel it, we would have been lost. In fact, we would have been silenced. But that fortunate ‘as if’ saves us from a really bad situation; it reminds us of what we were about to overlook; namely, that in the relationship between humans and matter, never has all the muscle power in the world been able to change the direction of an object that isn’t directly acted upon. Up until now78, all the laws of physics have been founded on the great fundamental law, and the bowler isn’t any more successful from such efforts than the player of the billiard ball just mentioned.”
366. “How changed are the times! Two years ago, the whole Academy of Sciences revolted against the Baron de Humboldt for supposing that at a distance he caused a deviation of the magnetic needle—an experiment, too, which could never be renewed at Paris; and, behold! in place of needles, all at once heavy tables are seen waltzing about the room, and obedient to the will; and all this is easily explained! It is quite plausible! Yes, but this time, gentlemen Savans, we will not allow you to distort the facts. Since the commencement of this volume, we have done nothing but establish, on good evidence, all those which your colleagues arrange agreeably to their fancy, after having absolutely denied them. But now the half of France rises with us to convict them, and to say to you: No, your nervous branches will never explain it; neither the physical phenomena which you would refer to them, nor the intelligence of our tables which respond to our own questions, nor the super-intelligence of those which probably to-morrow will reveal to us what we are ignorant of ourselves.
366. “How much times have changed! Two years ago, the entire Academy of Sciences rebelled against Baron de Humboldt for suggesting that he could cause a deviation in the magnetic needle from a distance—an experiment that could never be repeated in Paris; and now, suddenly, instead of needles, we see heavy tables dancing around the room, responding to our wishes; and all of this is easily explained! It is totally plausible! Yes, but this time, esteemed scholars, we will not let you twist the facts. Since the beginning of this volume, we have done nothing but establish, with solid evidence, all those facts that your colleagues modify to fit their own imaginations after having completely denied them. But now half of France stands with us to hold them accountable and to tell you: No, your nervous branches will never explain this; neither the physical phenomena that you would attribute to them, nor the intelligence of our tables that answer our questions, nor the super-intelligence of those that may, tomorrow, reveal to us what we do not yet understand.”
367. “Attending on the morrow, then! It is truly sorrowful to see a man of the highest merit, like M. Chevreul, expose himself in this way to the weakest scholar who, cue in hand, might fairly undertake to answer him. Those may hereafter believe in physics who wish. It is most horribly compromised. A science, capable of thus forswearing all its principles, loses, in our estimation, much of its authority.
367. “So, you’re going to show up tomorrow, then! It’s really sad to see a man of such high merit, like M. Chevreul, put himself in this position against even the weakest scholar who could, with a cue in hand, take him on. Those who want to believe in physics can do so. It is terribly compromised. A science that can abandon all its principles loses a lot of its authority in our eyes.
371. “A just reward, gentlemen, for things here below. You would not believe and you are not believed now! We read afresh in La Patrie of May 21st, the recital of ‘tables promenading and upsetting without contact by pure efforts of volition, or even by a simple magnetic pass—a very superfluous precaution of the experimenter.’ Very superfluous, indeed! It could not have been better expressed.
371. “A fair reward, gentlemen, for things down here. You wouldn’t believe it, and people don’t believe you now! We just read again in La Patrie from May 21st about the account of ‘tables moving and tipping without contact by sheer willpower, or even by a simple magnetic pass—a very unnecessary precaution of the experimenter.’ Quite unnecessary, indeed! It couldn’t have been stated better.
372. “In the presence of such a fact, will the magnetizers still maintain that the magnetic rapport results from the mixture of the two nervous at79mospheres? The nervous system of tables, (disgueridons,) to use the language of Reichenbach, must be very sensitive; and in this new dance without contact—what becomes of the explanation by muscular vibration, and especially by the humidity of the hands?
372. “Given this fact, will the magnetizers still argue that the magnetic connection comes from a mix of the two nervous at79mospheres? The nervous system of tables, (disgueridons,) as Reichenbach puts it, must be very sensitive; and in this new dance without contact—what happens to the explanation involving muscular vibration, and especially the moisture of the hands?
373. “We have some very important communications, on the 23d of May, from M. Bonjean, member of the Royal Academy of Savoy, at Chambéry, respecting several experiments made at the academy itself, and establishing the perfect intelligence of the agent in question. M. Bonjean, however, always refers this intelligence to one uniform process. ‘These responses,’ he says, ‘are not, and cannot be but the reflection of the thoughts of the person who causes the phenomena, and the movables are only able to satisfy those questions whose answers are known, without ever being able to supply an answer that is not known.’
373. “On May 23rd, we received some very important communications from M. Bonjean, a member of the Royal Academy of Savoy in Chambéry. He discussed several experiments conducted at the academy, which demonstrate the perfect understanding of the involved agent. However, M. Bonjean always attributes this understanding to a single consistent process. He states, ‘These responses are not, and cannot be anything other than the reflection of the thoughts of the person who causes the phenomena, and the objects can only provide answers to questions whose answers are already known, without ever being able to offer an answer that is unknown.’”
375. “Besides, M. Bonjean does full justice to the muscular movements of M. Chevreul, by means of that single exception of the table of Strasbourg turning with all its operators, or certain tables at Lyons moved without immediate contact. Next, he passes from the physical to the moral question, which, if to be believed, is certainly not very encouraging. ‘Fathers and mothers,’ he exclaims, ‘if you do not desire to develope premature feelings in your daughters, husbands who regard the peace of your wives, be mistrustful of the magnetic chain in general, and of the dancing of tables in particular.’
375. “Besides, M. Bonjean gives full credit to the muscular movements of M. Chevreul, highlighted by that one instance of the table in Strasbourg turning with all its operators, or certain tables in Lyons moving without immediate contact. Then he shifts from the physical to the moral question, which, if taken seriously, is definitely not very uplifting. ‘Fathers and mothers,’ he exclaims, ‘if you don’t want to encourage premature feelings in your daughters, and husbands who care about your wives’ well-being, be wary of the magnetic chain in general, and the dancing of tables in particular.’”
377. “In a letter of May 24th from M. Seguin, one of our most distinguished engineers, to the Abbé Moigno, who had very ably opposed these experiments in Le Pays, M. Seguin says, ‘When I reason dispassionately on the real and very positive results which I have obtained, and seen obtained by others before my eyes, I think myself under the control of an hallucination which causes me to see things differently to what they are, so much does my reason refuse to admit them; but when I repeat my experiments, I find it impossible any longer to resist the force of evidence, when indeed it confounds and upsets all my opinions.
377. “In a letter dated May 24th from M. Seguin, one of our most notable engineers, to Abbé Moigno, who strongly opposed these experiments in Le Pays, M. Seguin states, ‘When I think clearly about the real and very positive results I've obtained, and have witnessed others achieve before my eyes, I feel like I’m under some kind of illusion that makes me perceive things differently than they are, so much so that my reasoning refuses to accept them; but when I repeat my experiments, I find it impossible to resist the overwhelming evidence, which truly challenges and disrupts all my beliefs.
378. “‘How can you expect me to accept your explanation, when a table touched very lightly by the ends of the fingers, presses against my hand and against my legs to such a degree as to repel me and almost break itself? How believe that the person whose hands touch it could impart to it a force equal to such efforts, and especially when that person is myself? Accept, then, freely and with courage, the facts as THEY ARE,80 the facts well seen and satisfactorily produced by myself, in whom you have, I think, as much confidence as in yourself. The explanation will come hereafter, rest assured. Believe firmly that in these phenomena of turning tables there is something more than you see—a physical reality outside of the imagination and of the faith of those who appear to make them move.’
378. “‘How can you expect me to accept your explanation when a table, barely touched by my fingertips, pushes against my hand and against my legs so strongly that it almost repels me and breaks itself? How can I believe that the person whose hands are on it could impart a force equal to such resistance, especially when that person is me? So accept, freely and bravely, the facts as THEY'RE,80 the facts I've clearly observed and documented, in whom I believe you have as much confidence as you have in yourself. The explanation will come later, trust me. Firmly believe that in these phenomena of turning tables, there’s something more than what you see—a physical reality beyond the imagination and faith of those who seem to make them move.’
380. “Referring to a communication made to the academy by one M. Vauquelin, about one of these enchanted tables, which in his hands was able to reply to the most mysterious questions, divine the most secret thoughts, &c., M. Meigno exclaims in Le Cosmos Revue Encyclopédique des Sciences: ‘This time it is too strong; we find ourselves definitively at the mercy of magic, and the moment has come to proclaim it at Rome. Then there is neither magnetism nor electricity; not even the influence of human volition on matter; but supposing the fact to be certain—WHICH IS HARD TO SWALLOW—there must be in it the intervention of spirits, or magic. Intelligence that can refuse these deductions of common sense, would be DISORDERED intelligence, as useless to dispute with as with fools. If you have not been mistaken, if the extraordinary facts which you affirm are true, we ourselves are believers. The intervention of spirits and of magic became the sorrowful but great realities.’
380. “Referring to a communication made to the academy by one M. Vauquelin about one of these enchanted tables, which in his hands could answer the most mysterious questions and reveal the most secret thoughts, M. Meigno exclaims in Le Cosmos Revue Encyclopédique des Sciences: ‘This time it's too much; we find ourselves completely at the mercy of magic, and the moment has come to announce it in Rome. Then there’s neither magnetism nor electricity; not even the influence of human will on matter; but if the fact is true—HARD TO BELIEVE—there must be the involvement of spirits or magic. An intelligence that can reject these common-sense conclusions would be DISORGANIZED intelligence, as pointless to argue with as with fools. If you have not been mistaken, and if the extraordinary facts you claim are true, we ourselves are believers. The involvement of spirits and magic has become the painful but undeniable reality.’
381. “M. Agenor De Gasparin, one of our most sedate philosophers, writes what follows in La Gazette de France:—‘I will not insist on this point. The phenomenon of rotation, if alone, would not appear to me entirely satisfactory. I am mistrustful, though not an academician, and, I admit, that it may be possible (at a pinch) that a mechanical impulsion might be communicated. But the rotation only serves to present other phenomena, the explanation of which it is impossible to refer to any kind of muscular action.
381. “M. Agenor De Gasparin, one of our most serious philosophers, writes the following in La Gazette de France:—‘I won’t dwell on this point. The phenomenon of rotation, by itself, doesn’t seem completely satisfying to me. I’m skeptical, even though I’m not an academic, and I admit that it might be possible (in a pinch) for a mechanical push to be transmitted. But the rotation only serves to show other phenomena, the explanation of which cannot be attributed to any form of muscular action.
382. “‘Each of us, in his turn, gave orders to the table, which it promptly obeyed; and I should succeed with difficulty in explaining to you the strange character of these movements, of blows struck with an exactness, with a solemnity that fairly frightened us. “Strike three blows; strike ten blows. Strike with your left foot; with your right foot; with your middle foot. Rise on two of your feet; on only one foot; remain up; prevent those on the side raised from returning the table to the floor.” After each command the table obeyed. It produced movements that no complicity, involuntary or voluntary, could have induced; for we should have afterward tried in vain to place it on one foot, and keep it there by the pressure of the hands, resisting incontestably the efforts to press it down.
382. “‘Each of us took turns giving commands to the table, which it immediately followed; and I would struggle to explain to you the strange nature of these movements, strikes delivered with a precision and seriousness that genuinely frightened us. “Strike three times; strike ten times. Strike with your left foot; with your right foot; with your middle foot. Stand on two feet; on just one foot; stay elevated; stop those on the lowered side from bringing the table back down to the floor.” After every command, the table complied. It performed movements that no collusion, voluntary or involuntary, could have caused; because later we would have tried in vain to balance it on one foot and maintain that position by applying pressure with our hands, resisting all efforts to push it down.
385. “‘Each person desired the table to rap the number of years of his age, and it gave our ages as indicated only in our mind, endeavouring in the most curious manner to hurry when the number was large. I must own, to my shame, that I was rebuked by it, for having unintentionally diminished my age; the table gave forty-three instead of forty-two, because my wife, with a better memory, had thought of the correct number.
385. “‘Each person wanted the table to show their age, and it reflected our ages as we perceived them in our minds, trying in the most interesting way to speed up when the number was high. I have to admit, with some embarrassment, that I was corrected by it for accidentally reducing my age; the table showed forty-three instead of forty-two, because my wife, who had a better memory, recalled the right number.
“‘Accept, gentlemen, the assurance of my best consideration,
“‘Please accept, gentlemen, my sincere assurance that you are in my thoughts.
A. De Gasparin.’
A. De Gasparin.
387. “We stop our citations here; for those who are not content with the testimony we have furnished, emanating as it does from philosophers, or men of serious minds, the same revelations appearing, too, in all parts of the world, will not be better satisfied by any thing we could add. A day is coming, however, that will open every mouth. Then from all those parlours so reserved before—from all those cabinets in which experiments had been conducted with closed doors, the truth will burst forth in its full power. Then it will be known that some of the most esteemed men of Paris, of the bench, pulpit, and men of letters, have both desired to see and have seen it; have desired to know and have known it. It will be known that the evil super-intelligence has been revealed to them, and that if they have been silent on the subject, or desired to suppress their name, it was only an act of prudence to restrain public opinion.
387. “We’ll stop our quotes here; for those who aren’t satisfied with the evidence we’ve provided, which comes from philosophers or serious thinkers, the same insights appearing in all parts of the world won’t be any more convincing with anything we could add. A day will come, however, when everyone will speak out. Then, from all those private rooms that were so reserved—from all those labs where experiments were done behind closed doors, the truth will come out in full force. It will become known that some of the most respected people in Paris, from the courts, the church, and the literary world, both wanted to see and have seen it; wanted to know and have known it. It will be clear that the evil super-intelligence has been revealed to them, and that if they’ve stayed silent on the topic or wanted to keep their names hidden, it was merely a cautious move to manage public perception.”
388. “But on that day what will Science be doing? We can boldly predict: the facts of to-day which it does admit, proving to amount to nothing, and the inadmissible facts being admitted, its faith will change, and its language become more modest. Like the ancient Augurs, two savants will not be able to look at each other any more without smiling, and often enough to exclaim: ‘It has been well said, my dear colleague; it has always been foretold, that “He, who is outside of pure mathematics, pronounces the word IMPOSSIBLE, WANTS PRUDENCE.’”
388. “But on that day, what will Science be up to? We can confidently say: the facts of today which it does acknowledge will prove to be insignificant, and the unacceptable facts will be accepted, its beliefs will evolve, and its language will become more humble. Like the ancient Augurs, two scholars won't be able to glance at each other without smiling, and often enough they'll exclaim: ‘Well said, my dear colleague; it has always been predicted that “Anyone who is outside the realm of pure mathematics speaks the word IMPOSSIBLE, Wants carefulness.’”
Arago.””
Arago.
SPIRITUALISM IN GREAT BRITAIN.
Account of Mr. Robert Owen’s Conversion.
389. “While in doubt upon this subject, I heard of the media in this country, and was casually introduced to Mrs. Hayden, an American medium, without having any intention to ask a question respecting the spirits; my object being to purchase a book which Mrs. Hayden had for sale, written by a valued and most truthful friend of mine in America, Adin Ballou, who has written a plain, practical, common-sense history of this new revelation to the human race.
389. “When I was uncertain about this topic, I came across the media in this country and was casually introduced to Mrs. Hayden, an American medium, without planning to ask anything about spirits; my intent was simply to buy a book that Mrs. Hayden was selling, written by a respected and very honest friend of mine in America, Adin Ballou, who has authored a straightforward, practical, common-sense history of this new revelation to humanity.
390. “While conversing with Mrs. Hayden, and while we were both standing before the fire, and talking of our mutual friends, suddenly raps were heard on a table at some distance from us, no one being near to it. I was surprised, and as the raps continued and appeared to indicate a strong desire to attract attention, I asked what was the meaning of the sounds? Mrs. Hayden said they were spirits anxious to communicate with some one, and she would inquire who they were. They replied to her, by the alphabet. that they were friends of mine who were desirous to communicate with me. Mrs. Hayden then gave me the alphabet and pencil, and I found, according to their own statements, that the spirits were those of my mother and father. I tested their truth by various questions, and their answers, all correct, surprised me exceedingly. I have since had twelve séances, some of long continuance, and during which, with one exception, I have had prompt and true answers so far as the past and present, and very rational replies as to the future; but these last have to be tested by time. The exception was my own afterward-discovered error.”
390. “While I was talking with Mrs. Hayden, and we were both standing in front of the fire discussing our mutual friends, we suddenly heard knocks coming from a table some distance away, with no one nearby. I was taken aback, and as the knocks continued and seemed eager to get our attention, I asked what the sounds meant. Mrs. Hayden said they were spirits wanting to communicate with someone, and she would find out who they were. They responded to her by using the alphabet, indicating they were friends of mine wanting to get in touch. Mrs. Hayden then gave me the alphabet and a pencil, and I learned from their own responses that the spirits were my mother and father. I tested their claims with various questions, and their completely accurate answers amazed me. Since then, I've had twelve sessions, some of which lasted a long time, and except for one instance, I've received quick and accurate responses regarding the past and present, along with very sensible answers about the future; however, those will need to be verified over time. The exception was a mistake I later discovered on my part.”
391. From the following quotation, it seems that Mr. Owen has not had any reason to diminish his faith in spiritualism. The manifestations, of which his account is subjoined, are eminently wonderful; yet they are not more so than those which are recorded as having been realized under the influence of the same medium, in this country, or at Koons’s Establishment in Ohio:—
391. From the following quote, it seems that Mr. Owen has no reason to lose his faith in spiritualism. The events he describes are truly remarkable; however, they are no more extraordinary than those recorded under the same medium's influence, both in this country and at Koons’s Establishment in Ohio:—
Letter of Robert Owen to the Yorkshire Spiritual Telegraph.
Seven Oaks, April 23, 1855.
Seven Oaks, April 23, 1855.
392. “Dear Sir:—Just now, on my return from London, where, last night, I had been giving a lecture to Mr. Ronge’s party of foreigners and others on Education, I had the pleasure to receive your 2d Number of ‘The Yorkshire Spiritual Telegraph.’ I have hastily glanced over it, and I feel much interest in your proceedings, and wish you all success in the good cause. I say good cause, for it is sure to lead to great ultimate good, and especially will it destroy the many evils arising from sectarianism, and other causes of hatred and ruin between man and nations. I must tell83 you of what occurred to me last night, after my return from the lecture, about nine o’clock.
392. “Dear Sir:—Just now, on my way back from London, where I gave a lecture to Mr. Ronge’s group of foreigners and others on Education last night, I was pleased to receive your second issue of ‘The Yorkshire Spiritual Telegraph.’ I quickly skimmed through it, and I'm really interested in what you’re doing. I wish you all the best in this important work. I call it important because it’s bound to lead to significant good, especially by eliminating the many problems caused by sectarianism and other sources of hatred and conflict between people and nations. I need to share with you what happened to me last night after I got back from the lecture around nine o’clock.
393. “A Mr. Hume, a young Scotchman, who went to America to pursue his studies as a medical student, four or five years ago, became a medium, (he is now about twenty years of age,) and soon became a very superior one. He had engaged to accompany the Haydens and Miss Jay. He took his passage and came, but the others, for some cause, postponed their voyage, but may now be daily expected. They arrived on the 22d. I had heard on my arrival in London, from friends on whom I could depend, of the extraordinary results by his mediumship. I made arrangements to visit those friends and Mr. Hume when I finished my lecture, which I did, and found my two friends and Mr. Hume waiting my arrival. On being seated around a regular full-sized card table, there were raps immediately, and because I do not hear very well, the raps increased until they became very loud, but I heard the first raps distinctly. Many spirits were present; some, relatives of my friends, and others, my own relations. My wife and daughters, my son and brother, and also my father and mother, with all of whom I have had frequent delightful intercourse through various mediums. My two friends present are husband and wife; and the first new occurrence to me was, seeing the lady’s silk apron untied by invisible means—a somewhat complicated operation—and taken from her and given to Mr. Hume, opposite to her. It was then conveyed backward and forward, from one to another, and it soon came to me. I held it with much force, but it was drawn from me with greater force, for I was afraid damage would be done to it. Next a flower was taken from the table, conveyed away by invisible means, and brought to me. The flower I kept for being so presented to me. Next I had my handkerchief out; it was taken from my hands, and in an instant thrown from the opposite side of the table, not as it was taken, but made into a large hat, which I also have as a curiosity. Then the spirits came and touched each of us. I was occasionally touched on one knee, then on the other, and afterward on both at once; and then one of them shook hands with me, and I most distinctly felt the fingers of them separately. An accordeon was then placed under the table, and soon the spirit of the daughter of the family played most beautifully several tunes and pieces of music. I asked for one of my favourite Scotch tunes, and it was immediately played. The instrument was then raised by invisible power, and given first to one, then to another; it was thus brought to me. The table was then lifted from the floor; at first, about a foot, and immediately afterward, about three feet.
393. “A Mr. Hume, a young Scotsman who went to America to study medicine four or five years ago, became a medium (he's now around twenty years old) and quickly became a very skilled one. He had agreed to travel with the Haydens and Miss Jay. He secured his passage and arrived, but the others postponed their trip for some reason, though they are expected any day now. They arrived on the 22nd. When I got to London, I heard from trustworthy friends about the amazing results of his mediumship. I made plans to visit those friends and Mr. Hume after my lecture, which I did, and found my two friends and Mr. Hume waiting for me. Once we sat around a regular full-sized card table, there were raps right away, and since I don’t hear very well, the raps got louder until they were quite loud, though I heard the first raps clearly. Many spirits were present, some of them relatives of my friends and others related to me. My wife and daughters, my son and brother, and also my parents, with whom I’ve often had delightful interactions through different mediums. The two friends who were there are a husband and wife; the first surprising thing for me was seeing the lady’s silk apron untied by unseen forces—a somewhat complicated process—and taken from her and handed to Mr. Hume, who was sitting across from her. It was then passed back and forth between them and soon came to me. I held it tightly, but it was pulled from me with even more force, as I was worried it might get damaged. Next, a flower was taken from the table, moved away by invisible means, and brought to me. I kept the flower since it was presented to me. Then I took out my handkerchief; it was taken from my hands and instantly thrown from the opposite side of the table, not in the same form as it was taken, but was made into a large hat, which I also kept as a curiosity. Then the spirits came and touched each of us. I was touched on one knee, then the other, and then both at once; afterward, one of them shook my hand, and I could distinctly feel the individual fingers. An accordion was placed under the table, and soon the spirit of the family's daughter played several beautiful tunes and pieces of music. I asked for one of my favorite Scottish tunes, and it was played immediately. The instrument was then lifted by invisible power and handed first to one person and then to another; it was eventually brought to me. The table was then lifted off the floor; first, about a foot, and immediately after, about three feet.
394. “After this the medium was put into a trance, during which he saw beautiful visions of spirits, and one of them spake through him while in that state sentiments that went to the heart of each of us, giving us advice, invaluable in its import, and in language beautifully and eloquently expressed, and calculated to make the deepest impression on our memo84ries. While reason remains I shall never forget it; and it was given with many encouraging words, to pursue my course in the measures in which I am engaged; to endeavour to introduce the millennium, but also stating the obstacles I should meet, and the great difficulties which were to be overcome.
394. “After that, the medium fell into a trance, during which he experienced stunning visions of spirits, and one of them spoke through him. While in that state, he expressed feelings that resonated deeply with each of us, offering advice that was invaluable and articulated in beautiful, eloquent language. It truly made a lasting impression on our memo84ries. As long as I have my wits about me, I will never forget it; and it was filled with many encouraging words to keep pursuing my path in my endeavors; to strive to bring about the millennium, while also acknowledging the challenges I would face and the significant difficulties that needed to be overcome.”
“Yours sincerely,Robert Owen.”
“Best regards, Robert Owen.”
Mr. Hume at Springfield.
397. “Rufus Elmer, Esq., of Springfield, informs us that Mr. Hume spent the nights of March 17th and 18th at his house. On the evening of the 17th, thirteen persons were present, when a series of most extraordinary demonstrations took place. First, two large tables standing together, around which the company were sitting, were lifted from the floor, while all hands were resting upon their tops. Then an accordeon, held under the table in one of Mr. Hume’s hands, (the other being on the table,) with the keys downward, was played in strong tones, three parts being maintained, and any tune performed that was called for—even foreign music. The instrument was also played upon while held in the same manner by each person present,—all hands except the one holding the accordeon being upon the tables in sight. (These manifestations were all made in a room well lighted by gas.) A bell, weighing over a pound, was passed about under the tables, put in the hands of each person, taken away again, passed rapidly from one end of the tables to the other, a distance of eight feet, knocking loudly on the under side as it went; and, finally, the tables having been separated a few inches, and a cloth spread over the aperture, the bell was held up under the cloth, while the company were allowed to feel the hand which held it. Next, the bell was slid out on to one of the tables from beneath the covering, and the hand which grasped it was exposed to the view of all the company—the hands of each being at the same time in full view. To gratify one who sat at so great a distance as not to have a clear view, it was communicated that if all others would for a moment avert their eyes, so as not to concentrate their magnetism so powerfully upon the object, it could be more plainly manifested to this one alone. Acting upon this hint, each person was allowed to look singly at the hand—to the full satisfaction of all. One of those present, mentally requested, unknown to all others, that the hand of her85 spirit-child might be exhibited to her; and, behold! a child’s hand was presented, while no child in the body was in the room. One of the company was a coloured domestic in the family of Mr. E-—-, and she mentally requested that her mother, who had before purported to communicate to her, if present, would show her hand; when, lo! a black hand appeared! These are but specimens of what occurred during the evening.”
397. “Rufus Elmer, Esq., of Springfield, tells us that Mr. Hume stayed at his house on the nights of March 17th and 18th. On the evening of the 17th, there were thirteen people present when some truly amazing things happened. First, two large tables that were sitting close together and around which everyone was seated, were lifted off the ground, even though everyone had their hands resting on them. Next, an accordion that Mr. Hume was holding under the table with one hand (the other hand was on the table) was played loudly, producing three distinct parts, and could play any tune that was requested—even foreign music. The instrument was also played by each person present while held in the same way—everyone's hands, except the one holding the accordion, were on the tables and visible. (All of this happened in a room that was well lit by gas.) A bell weighing over a pound was passed around under the tables, placed in each person's hand, taken away, and quickly moved from one end of the tables to the other, a distance of eight feet, making loud knocks underneath as it went. Finally, after the tables were moved apart a few inches and a cloth was spread over the gap, the bell was raised under the cloth while the group was allowed to touch the hand that was holding it. Then, the bell was slid out onto one of the tables from under the covering, and the hand holding it was revealed to everyone—the hands of all present were visible at the same time. To satisfy one person who was sitting too far away to see clearly, it was suggested that if everyone else looked away for a moment, the object could be better shown to that individual alone. Acting on this suggestion, each person was allowed to look at the hand individually, much to everyone’s satisfaction. One of those present silently requested that the hand of her spirit-child be shown to her; and to her surprise, a child's hand appeared, even though no child was in the room. One of the guests was a Black domestic worker in Mr. E—-’s family, and she silently asked to see her mother’s hand if she was present, and, lo and behold! a Black hand appeared! These are just a few examples of what occurred during the evening.”
COMMUNICATIONS FROM THE SPIRIT WORLD.
Remarks Introductory to my Spirit Father’s Communication.
398. Agreeably to my spirit father’s communication, the manifestations which of late have given birth to Spiritualism, have been the result of a deliberate effort, on the part of the inhabitants of the higher spheres, to break through the partition which has interfered with the attainment, by mortals, of a correct idea of their destiny after death. To carry out this intention, a delegation of advanced spirits has been appointed. Referring to this statement, I inquired how it happened that low spirits were allowed to interfere in the undertaking? The answer was, that the spirits of the lower spheres being more competent to make mechanical movements and loud rappings, their assistance was requisite.
398. Agreeably to my spirit father's message, the recent happenings that sparked Spiritualism are a result of a conscious effort by those in higher realms to break the barrier that has hindered humans from understanding their true purpose after death. To achieve this goal, a group of advanced spirits has been assigned. When I asked why lower spirits were allowed to get involved in this project, I was told that the spirits from the lower realms were better at making physical movements and loud knocks, so their help was necessary.
399. Likewise, I inquired why it was deemed expedient to make these manifestations, in the first instance, at Hydesville, near Rochester, through the spirit of a murdered man? The answer to this was, that the spirit of a murdered man would excite more interest, and that a neighbourhood was chosen where spiritual agency would be more readily credited than in more learned or fashionable and conspicuous circles, where the prejudice against supernatural agencies is extremely strong; but that the manifestations had likewise been made at Stratford, in Connecticut, under other circumstances. Nor were these the only places. They had been made elsewhere, without much success in awakening public attention.
399. Similarly, I asked why it was considered necessary to make these events happen, first at Hydesville, near Rochester, through the spirit of a murdered man. The answer was that the spirit of a murdered man would create more interest, and a location was chosen where people would be more likely to believe in spiritual matters than in more educated or fashionable places, where there's a strong bias against supernatural phenomena; however, manifestations had also occurred in Stratford, Connecticut, under different circumstances. These weren't the only locations; they had happened elsewhere too, but without much success in capturing public attention.
400. Thus, it appears that at the outset, the object was to draw attention, and in the next place to induce communications. It will appear from the account of the manifestations at Hydesville and Stratford, that as soon as through an ingenious agreement upon signals rational intercommunication was established, the manifestations became changed in character. The mischievousness displayed, in the primitive derangement of furniture, ceased. This was attributed to the replacement of spirits of inferior grade, by their superiors.
400. So, it seems that initially, the goal was to attract attention, and then to encourage communication. From the reports of the events at Hydesville and Stratford, it will be clear that once a clever system of signals was agreed upon and meaningful communication was established, the nature of the events changed. The chaos shown in the initial disturbances of furniture stopped. This was thought to be due to lower spirits being replaced by more advanced ones.
402. But still there has been another source of temporary degradation,86 not arising solely from the spirits, but from the inquirers also. The great motive in the first instance for witnessing spiritual manifestations was the love of the marvellous, or the desire to expose what was deemed jugglery. The mere movements of tables, without any reference to spiritual agency, was the great object of attention. Though I was present where table turning was discussed, if I ever heard the idea of spirits being the cause, it left no impression on my memory, as has already been stated. (134.)
402. However, there has been another reason for temporary decline, 86 not just coming from the spirits, but also from those asking questions. Initially, the main reason for witnessing spiritual events was the fascination with the extraordinary or the desire to prove it was all just trickery. The focus was primarily on the movement of tables, without any consideration for spiritual involvement. Even when I was at a discussion about table turning, if I ever heard the suggestion that spirits were responsible, it didn’t stick in my mind, as I’ve already mentioned. (134.)
403. But after alphabetical communication commenced, it was performed so slowly, that the replies were often brief, and made with a view to establish identity of the spirits with the individual whom it professes to personate; or to test the existence of a spirit by the replies given to inquirers respecting facts which could not be known to the medium. At the first recognition, the spirit would occupy the time mainly with statements very natural and amiable, but not instructive beyond the degree of confirmation thus afforded of the great fact of such intercourse being possible on the part of friends who have quitted this stage of existence.
403. But once alphabetical communication started, it happened so slowly that the responses were often brief, aimed at confirming the identity of the spirits with the person they claimed to represent; or to verify the existence of a spirit by answering questions from inquirers about facts that the medium couldn't possibly know. At the initial recognition, the spirit would mostly take up the time with statements that were quite natural and friendly, but not very informative beyond providing confirmation of the significant fact that communication is possible with friends who have left this life.
405. As soon as convinced that the phenomena were due to the shades of the dead, I looked with eagerness for some consistent information of their abodes, modes of existence, of the theological doctrines entertained by them, and the actual diversities of their situation consequent to various degrees of moral and intellectual merit.
407. Urging this deficiency of information upon those spirit friends who seemed to have selected me as an instrument in promulgating the invaluable truths of Spiritualism, I obtained information, as early as May, 1854, respecting the situation of the spiritual spheres, or country of spirits, relatively to the earth; but about the latter part of October my father commenced writing on the subject through a medium of the other sex, but the ideas furnished were too much blended with her own prepossessions, with which her mind was replete. Hence, although many pages had been written, they were rejected, and resort was had to another medium—Mrs. Gourlay. The result thus obtained was afterwards read to the author, at the disk, so as to have every paragraph scrutinized.
407. I pressed this lack of information on the spirit friends who seemed to have chosen me as a channel for sharing the invaluable truths of Spiritualism. As early as May 1854, I learned about the position of the spiritual spheres, or the realm of spirits, in relation to Earth. However, around late October, my father began writing on the subject through a female medium, but her ideas were too intertwined with her own biases, which filled her mind. So, even though many pages had been written, they were rejected, and we turned to another medium—Mrs. Gourlay. The results we got were later read to the author at the disk to ensure every paragraph was carefully examined.
My Spirit Father’s Communication.[10]
410. The spirit world lies between sixty and one hundred and twenty miles from the terrestrial surface; the whole intermediate space, including that immediately over the earth, the habitation of mortals, is divided into seven concentric regions called spheres. The region next the earth, the primary scene of man’s existence, is known as the first or rudimental sphere.
410. The spirit world is located between sixty and one hundred and twenty miles above the Earth's surface; the entire space in between, including the area directly above the Earth where people live, is divided into seven concentric areas called spheres. The area closest to the Earth, where humans primarily exist, is known as the first or basic sphere.
413. You will understand, then, they are not shapeless chimeras, or mere projections of the mind, but absolute entities, as much so indeed as the planets of the solar system or the globe on which you now reside. They have latitudes, longitudes, and atmospheres of peculiar vital air, whose soft and balmy undulating currents produce a most pleasurable and invigorating effect. Their surfaces are diversified with an immense variety of the most picturesque landscapes; with lofty mountain ranges, valleys, rivers, lakes, forests, and the internal correspondence of all the higher phenomena of earth. The trees and shrubbery, crowned with exquisitely beautiful foliage and flowers of every colour and variety, send forth their grateful emanations.
413. You will understand, then, they are not formless illusions, or just products of the imagination, but real entities, just as concrete as the planets of the solar system or the Earth on which you currently live. They have latitudes, longitudes, and atmospheres filled with a unique vital air, whose gentle and soothing currents create a very pleasant and refreshing effect. Their surfaces are filled with an incredible variety of beautiful landscapes, including towering mountain ranges, valleys, rivers, lakes, forests, and the internal connections of all the higher phenomena on Earth. The trees and shrubs, adorned with stunningly beautiful leaves and flowers of every color and type, release their delightful fragrances.
415. Although the spheres revolve with the earth on a common axis, forming the same angle with the plane of the ecliptic, and move with it about the ponderable sun, they are not dependent on that body for either light or heat, receiving not a perceptible ray from that ponderable source; but receive those dispensations wholly from his internal or spiritual correspondence, (a spiritual sun concentric with the sun of your world,)—from that great central luminary whose native brightness and uninterrupted splendour baffle description.
415. Although the spheres rotate with the earth on a shared axis, forming the same angle with the plane of the ecliptic, and move along with it around the substantial sun, they do not rely on that body for either light or heat, receiving not even a noticeable ray from that significant source; instead, they get their illumination entirely from its internal or spiritual correspondence, (a spiritual sun that is centered with the sun of your world)—from that great central light whose natural brightness and constant brilliance defy explanation.
417. Although we, like you, are constantly progressing toward perfection, our ideas of time and the seasons differ widely from yours; with you it is time—with us, eternity. In the terrestrial sphere, a man’s thoughts, being bounded by time and space, are limited; but with us they are extended in proportion as we get rid of those restrictions and our perceptions of truth become more accurate.
417. Even though we, like you, are always moving toward perfection, our understanding of time and the seasons is very different from yours; for you, it’s about time— for us, it’s about eternity. In the physical world, a person’s thoughts, constrained by time and space, are limited; but for us, they expand as we free ourselves from those limits and our grasp of truth becomes clearer.
418. As order is a primary object in the spheres, there are of course laws for its preservation. Fundamentally, these proceed through his ministering angels, from the Divine Lawgiver, who commands the angelic hosts of heaven and rules the inhabitants of earth; who employs myriads of ministering angels as the means of intercommunication between their Supreme Master and his creatures throughout the universe.
418. Since order is a key focus in the realms, there are naturally laws to maintain it. Essentially, these laws are carried out by his serving angels, coming from the Divine Lawgiver, who directs the angelic beings in heaven and governs the people on earth; who uses countless serving angels as a means of communication between their Supreme Master and his creations across the universe.
419. So far as legislation, subordinate or supplementary to that of the Supreme Legislator, is required, the government of the spheres is republican, exercising legislative, judicial, and executive powers. But these functions are not embarrassed by the necessity of codes indited or printed, nor by that of physical coercion. The results of these functions are realized in simultaneous and homogeneous opinions awakened in the minds of the ruling spirits, as truth takes hold of the minds of mathematicians, pari passu, as they read the same series of demonstrations. The conclusions in which the chief spirits thus unanimously concur, are by them impressed upon their constituents, who, thus impressed, are constitutionally unable to resist the sentiment which, like a magic spell, operates upon their sense of right, and overrules any rebellious passion.
419. As far as laws that support or complement those of the Supreme Legislator are concerned, the government of the spheres operates as a republic, exercising legislative, judicial, and executive powers. However, these functions aren't hindered by the need for written codes or the use of force. The outcomes of these functions manifest in simultaneous and uniform opinions among the ruling minds, much like how mathematicians grasp a concept together as they read the same set of proofs. The conclusions that the primary leaders agree on are then imposed on their constituents, who, once influenced, find it impossible to resist the prevailing sentiment that, like a magic spell, shapes their sense of right and overrides any rebellious feelings.
420. As, in the rudimental sphere, weighing, measurement, or mathematical calculation or demonstration, when performed by competent persons, are rarely disputed, so in the spheres, the decisions of those whose authority is intuitively evident in moral or legal questions, meet with acquiescence. It follows, therefore, that neither imprisonment nor fetters are requisite for the enforcement of moral or legal restrictions.
420. Just like in basic areas like weighing, measuring, or performing mathematical calculations—when done by qualified individuals, these are rarely challenged—in other fields, the decisions made by those who have clear authority in moral or legal matters are generally accepted. Therefore, it can be said that neither imprisonment nor shackles are necessary to enforce moral or legal restrictions.
422. We acknowledge no aristocracy but that of mind and merit. In our diplomatic intercourse with our brothers of earth, when affairs of the greatest importance are to be transacted, (the present dispensation, for example,) we intrust them to a delegation of the most advanced spirits—those who are best acquainted with the affairs of the celestial country and of that to which they are accredited.
422. We recognize no aristocracy other than that of intellect and ability. In our diplomatic interactions with our fellow beings on Earth, when we need to handle matters of utmost importance (like the current situation, for instance), we assign them to a group of the most enlightened individuals—those who are most knowledgeable about the matters of the heavenly realm and the place they represent.
423. Our laws are meted out in the scale of exact justice, from whose89 awards there is no appeal. Punishments are but the natural consequences of violated laws; being invariably commensurate with offences, and have reference as well to the reformation of the offender, as to the prevention of future crime.
425. Wealth consists, upon earth, of those objects of human luxury or taste, which can only be acquired by means of labour and capital. Other things being equal, the value is generally in proportion to the cost incurred in the production. But in the spheres, such objects existing in profusion, the supply is of course always equal to the demand, though no less necessary than the air which you breathe; like it, they have no marketable value; there is no one who has occasion to buy, all being abundantly supplied from a common inexhaustible stock.
425. Wealth on earth consists of those luxuries or desirable items that can only be obtained through labor and capital. Generally, if everything else is the same, the value is proportional to the cost of production. However, in areas where these items are abundant, the supply always matches the demand, even though they are just as essential as the air you breathe; like air, they have no market value because everyone has plenty from a limitless source.
426. Hence it will appear that we have no occasion for gold or silver, which perisheth with the using, but the currency of moral and intellectual worth, coined in the mint of divine love, and assayed by the standards of purity and truth. Our bank, whose charter is eternal, and whose notes are never subject to fluctuations, and always payable on demand, is none other than the great bank of heaven, whose capital stock consists of an infinitude of love, mercy, and benevolence, of which our Heavenly Father is president and director, and in which his beloved children, the whole human family, are shareholders.
426. So it seems we don't need gold or silver, which fade away with use, but instead the currency of moral and intellectual value, minted from divine love and measured by the standards of purity and truth. Our bank, with an everlasting charter and notes that never lose value and are always redeemable on demand, is the great bank of heaven, whose capital is filled with infinite love, mercy, and kindness, with our Heavenly Father as its president and director, and where his beloved children, the entire human family, are shareholders.
428. Although the members of each society unite as near as may be on the same plan, agreeing in the most prominent moral and intellectual features; yet it will be found, on careful analysis, that the varieties of character, in each society, are almost infinite; being as numerous as the persons who compose the circle.
428. While the members of each society come together as closely as possible around the same plan, agreeing on the key moral and intellectual aspects, a closer look will reveal that the varieties of character within each society are nearly endless, with as many differences as there are individuals in the group.
429. Each society has teachers from those above, and not unfrequently from the higher spheres, whose province it is to impart to us the knowledge acquired from their instructions and experience, in the different departments of science, and which we in turn transmit to those below. Thus, by receiving and giving knowledge our moral and intellectual faculties are expanded to higher conceptions and more exalted views of the great Creator, whose almighty power is no less displayed in the constitution of spirit worlds, than in that of the countless resplendent orbs of space.
429. Every society has teachers from those above, and often from the higher realms, whose role is to share the knowledge they've gained through their teaching and experiences in various fields of science, which we then pass on to those below us. By receiving and sharing knowledge, our moral and intellectual abilities grow, leading us to greater insights and more elevated perspectives of the great Creator, whose mighty power is evident in the structure of spirit worlds, just as it is in the numerous brilliant bodies of space.
430. We do not, as many persons in the rudimental state imagine, abandon the studies which we commenced on earth, which would presup90pose the loss of our reasoning powers, and our consequent inferiority to yourselves; but on the contrary, we go on progressing in knowledge and wisdom, and shall progress throughout the boundless ages of eternity. You being chained down to earth, by the law of gravitation, are comparatively limited in your resources for information; but we having arrived at a higher sphere of thought and action, and having a more extensive field of vision, can soar higher and farther into the wonderful workings of that mysterious Being, who, owing to the infinity of his perfections, must be forever in advance of us, his finite creatures, and to whom, of course, we can bear no relative proportion.
430. We don’t, as many people in the early stages of understanding think, abandon the studies we started on Earth, which would imply losing our reasoning abilities and being inferior to you; instead, we continue to grow in knowledge and wisdom and will keep progressing through the endless ages of eternity. You are tied down to Earth by the law of gravity, which limits your access to information; however, we have reached a higher level of thought and action, and with a broader perspective, we can explore deeper into the amazing workings of that mysterious Being, who, because of the infinite nature of his perfections, will always be ahead of us, his finite creations, and to whom we cannot compare ourselves in any meaningful way.
431. Our scientific researches and investigations are extended to all that pertains to the phenomena of universal nature; to all the wonders of the heavens and the earth, and to whatever the mind of man is capable of conceiving: all of which exercise our faculties, and form a considerable part of our enjoyments. The noble and sublime sciences of astronomy, chemistry, and mathematics, engage a considerable portion of our attention, and afford us an inexhaustible subject for study and reflection.
431. Our scientific research and investigations cover everything related to the phenomena of the natural world; all the wonders of the sky and the earth, as well as anything the human mind can imagine: all of these challenge our abilities and make up a significant part of our enjoyment. The noble and profound sciences of astronomy, chemistry, and mathematics capture a large part of our attention and provide us with endless opportunities for study and contemplation.
432. Nevertheless, there are millions of spirits who are not yet sufficiently advanced to take any interest in those pursuits; for you will bear in mind that the spheres are but so many departments of a great normal school, for the mental discipline and development of the race, each of which is reached only by the spiral[11] stages of progression,—the earth being the first in the series, and the seventh sphere the last; being preparatory to an entrance into the supernal heaven. You will perceive, then, that we have an unlimited scope for the prosecution of our studies, and that whatever knowledge you fail to acquire in the rudimental state, legitimate thereto, you will have to obtain, in some of the degrees of the spiritual spheres.
432. Still, there are millions of spirits who aren't advanced enough to care about those pursuits; remember that the spheres are just different sections of a vast normal school, designed for the mental training and growth of the human race. Each sphere is accessed through the spiral stages of progression—the earth being the first in the series, and the seventh sphere the last, serving as preparation for entry into the higher heavens. So, you can see that we have endless opportunities to continue our studies, and any knowledge you don’t gain during the basic phase, that is relevant to it, you'll have to acquire in some of the levels of the spiritual spheres.
433. We do not study those practical arts, which are so essential to the earth life, such as mechanics, &c.; for we do not stand in need of their applications; our studies being wholly of a mental character, we attend to the fundamental principles only. All the more intellectual branches of the arts and sciences are cultivated in a much more perfect manner than that to which we have been accustomed upon earth. The mind being untrammelled by the gross material body, and having its intellectual energies and perceptions improved, we can by intuition, as it were, more clearly and rapidly perceive and understand the principles and truths on which the sciences are based. We can trace the various relations of each subject, so as to understand its connective importance; a knowledge at which mortals arrive only by a long and tedious process.
433. We don’t study those practical skills that are essential for everyday life on Earth, like mechanics and such. We don’t need to apply them; our focus is entirely on mental pursuits, so we only look at fundamental principles. All the more intellectual fields of arts and sciences are developed in a much more advanced way than what we're used to on Earth. The mind, free from the limitations of a physical body and with enhanced intellectual abilities and perceptions, allows us to intuitively grasp the principles and truths underlying the sciences more clearly and quickly. We can explore the different connections of each subject to understand its significance, something that mortals achieve only through a long and difficult process.
435. In addition to our studies we have many other sources of intellectual, moral, and heartfelt enjoyment, from which we derive the most ineffable pleasure: one of which is social reunions and convivial meetings; a coming together of dear friends, brothers, sisters, children and parents; where the liveliest emotion and tenderest affections of our nature are excited, and the fondest and most endearing reminiscences are awakened; where spirit meets in unison with spirit, and heart beats responsive to heart.
435. Alongside our studies, we have many other sources of intellectual, moral, and heartfelt enjoyment that bring us the greatest pleasure. One of these is social gatherings and joyful meetings—a coming together of dear friends, brothers, sisters, children, and parents—where the strongest emotions and deepest affections within us are stirred, and the most cherished and loving memories are revived; where spirits connect in harmony, and hearts respond to one another.
436. Yet individuals united by the ties of consanguinity are not always linked together, even here, by the golden chain of love and benevolent affection, since it not unfrequently happens that there is much more harmony existing among those who are not members of the same family. Notwithstanding that persons who were intimately acquainted with each other in the natural world, and those who are akin, may be and often are separated, sometimes for long periods, still they do occasionally meet together; those in the higher degrees and spheres passing to the lower, while those in the latter never ascend to the former till fully prepared for such a transition, agreeably to the fixed and unalterable laws of progression. The periods of such separations vary according to the relative gradations of intellectual and moral qualities in each.
436. Yet people connected by blood aren't always tied together by the strong bond of love and kindness, as it's common for there to be more harmony among those who aren't family. Even though people who knew each other well in life and those who are related can be and often are apart for extended periods, they do sometimes come together; those in higher realms can visit those in lower realms, while those in the lower ones only ascend to the higher when they are completely ready for that shift, according to the strict and unchanging laws of progress. The length of these separations differs based on the varying levels of intellectual and moral qualities in each.
438. As regards the institution of marriage, I would observe that on earth it is a civil contract, entered into by two persons, male and female, mutually or otherwise, as the case may be, for and during the term of their natural lives, but which is legally annulled on the demise of either party; so that whether or not it be renewed in the spiritual world, is determined by choice, not obligation.
438. When it comes to marriage, I want to point out that here on earth it is a legal contract between two people, a man and a woman, either by mutual consent or other circumstances, lasting for the duration of their natural lives. However, it becomes legally void upon the death of either person. Therefore, whether it continues in the spiritual realm is based on personal choice, not obligation.
439. Celestial marriage, however, is quite a different affair: it is the blending of two minds in one, resulting from an innate reciprocal love in each; a conjunction of negative and positive principles, forming a true and indissoluble bond of spiritual union, which human legislation cannot reach: a marriage which is born of God, and is therefore eternal. It is often asked, “Will all be married in heaven?” I answer, Yes, most assuredly; it never was designed for man to be alone, either on earth or in heaven: each will seek and find their counterpart.
439. Celestial marriage, however, is a completely different concept: it’s the merging of two minds into one, resulting from a natural mutual love in each person; a combination of negative and positive forces that creates a genuine and unbreakable spiritual bond, which human laws cannot touch: a marriage that comes from God, and is therefore eternal. It’s often asked, “Will everyone be married in heaven?” I say, Yes, definitely; it was never meant for anyone to be alone, whether on earth or in heaven: each person will seek and find their true match.
441. Evil or misdirected spirits find their affinities in the second sphere, where the lowest and most undeveloped are associated together, and remain for indefinite periods, but with all the moral depravity and darkness with which they are enveloped, through the benign influence exerted over their perceptive and rational faculties, by higher intelligences, each begins to feel, sooner or later, the low and degraded position he occupies; moreover, finding new means of progress, and new sources of contemplation as well as delight, and his capacity of making perpetual advancement in knowledge, his intellectual faculties become gradually expanded, and his moral powers increased. Hence the grovelling propensities of his nature yielding to the dictates of reason, his grosser passions subside, causing him to aspire to higher associations and circumstances, which in turn beget new wants, thoughts, and feelings.
441. Evil or misguided spirits find their connections in the second sphere, where the weakest and least developed are grouped together and remain for an indefinite time. Despite the moral corruption and darkness that surround them, due to the positive influence of higher intelligences on their perception and reasoning, each spirit eventually realizes the low and degraded status they hold. Furthermore, they discover new ways to grow, as well as new sources of reflection and enjoyment. As their capacity for continuous advancement in knowledge develops, their intellectual abilities gradually expand, and their moral strength increases. Consequently, their base instincts start to yield to the guidance of reason; their coarser passions diminish, leading them to seek higher associations and situations, which in turn create new desires, thoughts, and emotions.
442. We have no sectarian or ecclesiastical feuds; no metaphysical dogmas; nor are we troubled with those insatiable cravings and inordinate ambitions, so often manifested by mortals; nor have we any taxation for religion, the voluntary contributions of intellectual and moral minds being its meet support.
442. We have no religious or church conflicts; no complicated beliefs; and we aren't burdened by the endless desires and excessive ambitions that people often show; nor do we impose any taxes for religion, as the voluntary donations from thoughtful and ethical individuals are its appropriate support.
443. Our religious teachers belong to that class of persons who were noted, during their probation on earth, for their philanthropy and deeds of moral bravery; those who, regardless of the scoffs and sneers of the time-serving multitude, dared to promulgate and defend the doctrines of “civil and religious liberty.” These practical reformers and saviours of the race, instead of worrying their hearers, as is the custom with many on earth, with horrible denunciations and awful threats of eternal vengeance for their misdoing, admonish and exhort them to higher and nobler aims and aspirations; to the study of Deity as manifested in his stupendous works.
443. Our religious leaders are those individuals who were recognized, during their time on earth, for their compassion and acts of moral courage; those who, despite the mocking and criticism of the self-serving crowd, bravely promoted and defended the principles of “civil and religious freedom.” These dedicated reformers and saviors of humanity, rather than stressing their listeners out with terrifying warnings and dreadful threats of eternal punishment for their wrongdoings, encourage and inspire them to pursue higher and more noble goals and aspirations; to explore the divine as revealed in his incredible creations.
444. They urge upon them, too, the necessity of their co-operation in the reformation and advancement of their more degraded brethren, by instructing them in the divine principles of love, wisdom, and benevolence. They instruct them in the soul-inspiring and elevating doctrine of universal and eternal progression, and in the sublime truth that evil is not an indestructible and positive principle, but a negative condition, a mere temporary circumstance of their existence; and, furthermore, that suffering for sin is not a revengeful and malevolent infliction of God, but a necessary and invariable sequence of violated law.
444. They emphasize the importance of working together to support the reformation and advancement of their less fortunate peers by teaching them the fundamental principles of love, wisdom, and kindness. They guide them in the uplifting and inspiring message of universal and eternal growth, and in the profound truth that evil is not an unchangeable and positive force, but a negative state, a temporary situation in their lives; and, additionally, that suffering for wrongdoing is not a vengeful and spiteful punishment from God, but a necessary and unavoidable result of breaking the law.
445. They teach them also that, according to the divine moral economy, there is no such thing as pardon for sins committed—no immediate mercy—no possible escape from the natural results of crime, no matter where or by whom committed; no healing of a diseased moral constitution by any outward appliances, or ceremonial absurdities; and finally, that the only way whereby to escape sin and its consequences, is by progressing above and beyond it.
445. They also teach that, according to divine moral principles, there’s no such thing as forgiveness for sins committed—no immediate mercy—no way to escape the natural consequences of crime, regardless of where or by whom it was committed; no healing of a flawed moral foundation through any external remedies or ceremonial nonsense; and ultimately, that the only way to avoid sin and its consequences is by rising above and beyond it.
446. We derive much pleasure from the exercise of our talents in vocal and instrumental music, which far excels the noblest efforts of musical genius on earth. When we convene to worship God in our temples, whose halls and columns beam with inherent celestial light, our voices are blended together in songs of praise and adoration to the Almighty Author of our existence, from whom all blessings are derived.
446. We find great joy in using our talents in singing and playing instruments, which surpasses even the greatest musical achievements on earth. When we gather to worship God in our temples, with halls and columns shining with natural heavenly light, our voices come together in songs of praise and worship to the Almighty Creator of our existence, from whom all blessings come.
447. From what has been stated, it may be perceived that we are moral, intellectual, and sensitive creatures. Instead of being, as many of you imagine, mere shadowy and unsubstantial entities, we are possessed of definite, tangible, and exquisitely symmetrical forms, with well-rounded and graceful limbs, and yet so light and elastic that we can glide through the atmosphere with almost electric speed. The forked lightnings may flash, and the thunders roll in awful reverberation along the vault of heaven, and the rain descend in gushing torrents; nevertheless, by the mere act of volition, we may stand unharmed at your side.
447. From what we've said, it’s clear that we are moral, intellectual, and sensitive beings. Instead of being, as many of you think, just shadowy and insubstantial figures, we have definite, tangible, and beautifully symmetrical forms, with well-proportioned and graceful limbs, and we’re light and agile enough to glide through the air with almost electric speed. The lightning may flash, and the thunder may roar in terrifying echoes across the sky, and the rain may pour down in heavy torrents; yet, with just a thought, we can stand unharmed by your side.
448. We are, moreover, endowed with all the beauty, loveliness, and vivacity of youth, and are clothed in flowing vestments of effulgent nature suited to the particular degree of refinement of our bodies. Our raiment being composed of phosphorescent principles, we have the power of attracting and absorbing or reflecting the rays evolved, according as our condition is more or less developed. This accounts for our being seen, by clairvoyants, in different degrees of brightness, from a dusky hue to the most intensely brilliant light.
448. We are also blessed with all the beauty, charm, and energy of youth, dressed in flowing garments made from radiant nature that match the level of refinement of our bodies. Our clothing is made of glowing elements, which give us the ability to attract, absorb, or reflect light, depending on how developed we are. This explains why clairvoyants see us in varying levels of brightness, from a dark shade to an incredibly bright light.
449. The spiritual body is a perfect human form, originating in, and analogous to, the corporeal organization in its several parts, functions, and relations. The heart beats in rythmic pulsations, the lungs fulfil their office of respiration, and the brain generates its vitalized magnetic fluid, whose life-giving currents permeate every portion of the spiritual organism. Man in the rudimental state is tripartite, consisting of soul, of spirit, and flesh; but in the spheres a duality, composed of soul and spirit. Having approached the portals of death, he disrobes himself of the exterior form as he would put away a worn-out garment. The gross and cumbrous physical machine, which was given for the purpose of developing his more beautiful and excellent spiritual body, and of bringing him into more immediate relationship with the outward world, can serve his purposes no longer.
449. The spiritual body is a perfect human form, arising from, and similar to, the physical body in its various parts, functions, and connections. The heart beats in rhythmic pulses, the lungs perform their job of breathing, and the brain produces its energized magnetic fluid, whose life-giving currents flow through every part of the spiritual organism. In a basic state, a person is made up of three parts: soul, spirit, and body; but in the afterlife, they exist as a duality, consisting of soul and spirit. When facing death, they shed their physical form like removing an old piece of clothing. The heavy and bulky physical body, which was meant to help develop their more beautiful and refined spiritual body and to connect them more directly with the outside world, is no longer useful.
450. For your clearer understanding of the modus operandi of our intercourse with man, you will remember that by our transition to the world of spirits we part with the body only. We lose none of our intelligence by the transfer, but, on the contrary, become daily more and more developed in our knowledge of and power over the forces in nature; so that we are enabled to perform many feats to you, seemingly wonderful, and which really appear miraculous to the majority of those who witness them.
450. To help you better understand the way we interact with humans, remember that when we move to the spirit world, we only let go of our bodies. We don’t lose any of our intelligence in this transition; instead, we actually become more and more knowledgeable and gain greater control over the forces of nature. This allows us to accomplish many acts that may seem amazing and truly miraculous to most of those who see them.
451. Having disposed of the external mechanism of flesh, we cannot come into direct contact with physical matter, but we are able, through94 the sphere of the medium, when natural conditions are complied with, not only to communicate our thoughts and wishes to our friends, but to move solid, ponderable bodies. By spheres, I mean the particular mental or physical state, or emanation by which all bodies, organic or inorganic, are immediately surrounded, and the particular electrical relations which they sustain to each other, causing repulsions and attractions in man and animals as well as in chemical reagents.
451. After letting go of our physical bodies, we can't directly touch physical matter, but we can, through94 the medium's realm, when natural conditions are met, not only express our thoughts and desires to our friends, but also move solid, tangible objects. By spheres, I refer to the specific mental or physical state, or energy that surrounds all bodies, whether living or non-living, and the unique electrical connections they have with one another, leading to forces of repulsion and attraction in humans and animals, as well as in chemical substances.
452. When we wish to impress the mind of the medium, by the effort of our magic will, (provided always that he or she is in sympathy with or sustains a negative relation to the operator,) we can dispose and arrange the magnetic currents of the brain so as to form or fashion them into ideas of our own. We can also learn to read the thoughts of another—conditions being favourable—as readily as you can gain a knowledge of the characters or symbols of a language foreign to your own.
452. When we want to influence the mind of the medium through the power of our magic will, (as long as they are in sync with us or maintain a receptive stance towards the operator,) we can direct and organize the brain's magnetic currents to shape them into our own ideas. We can also learn to read someone else’s thoughts—if the conditions are right—just as easily as you can learn the letters or symbols of a language that’s not your own.
454. To influence, mechanically, the hand of a medium to write, we direct currents of vitalized spiritual electricity on the particular muscles which we desire to control. In order to produce the physical manifestations, it is not by any means requisite that the medium should be possessed of a good moral character or well-balanced mind, as an individual of small mental calibre would answer our purpose equally well; but an advanced spirit could not directly impress or control the organs of a mind with which he is not in affinity, and vice versâ.
454. To influence, mechanically, the hand of a medium to write, we direct currents of energized spiritual electricity to the specific muscles we want to control. To create the physical manifestations, it's not necessary for the medium to have a good moral character or a well-balanced mind; someone with limited mental capacity would serve our purpose just as well. However, an advanced spirit cannot directly impress or control the faculties of a mind they're not in tune with, and vice versa.
456. The raps are produced by voluntary discharges of the vitalized spiritual electricity, above mentioned, from the spirit, coming in contact with the animal electricity emanating from the medium. These discharges we can direct at will to any particular locality, thereby producing sounds or concussions.
457. The question being often asked, “How do you move solid substances?” I would partly answer it by asking, How does a magnet attract and raise from their resting-places certain bodies within whose sphere it is brought? How does a man move his body and direct it whithersoever it goeth? How does God, the almighty cause of all causes, move and keep in perpetual motion the immense systems which revolve in space, and maintain each in its due relative position? I answer, By the magnetism of a positive will.
457. People often ask, “How do you move solid objects?” I would partially respond by asking, How does a magnet attract and lift certain objects when it's close? How does a person move their body and control it wherever it goes? How does God, the all-powerful source of everything, move and maintain the vast systems that spin in space, keeping everything in its right place? I would say, By the magnetism of a positive will.
458. We, in common with you and all animals, possess an infinitesimal portion of this power, varying in degree in different classes and in95 different individuals. When you raise your arm, as in the act of lifting or moving a body, you direct by the force of your will-power galvanic currents on the muscles required to perform the function. The muscles acting as levers, through the stimulus of the subtle element, act and react on the more solid parts, the bones, and thus is the object laid hold of and moved, and still you do not come into direct contact with the object. Now, this is called a very simple operation, and so it would appear, but who understands it? Although advanced spirits are much more conversant with the forces operating in nature than the most intellectually developed man in the form, still they do not, nor can they ever, as long as eternity rolls on, understand the hidden sphere of cause. The operation of the will it is impossible to understand. Now, as I have said, we are not possessed of physical bodies; still we can make the imponderable elements subserve our purposes by acting as bones, nerves, and muscles.
458. Like you and all animals, we have a tiny bit of this power, which varies in different species and individuals. When you lift your arm, like when you're picking something up or moving it, you use your willpower to send electric currents to the muscles you need. These muscles act like levers, responding to the subtle energy, which then interacts with the stronger parts, the bones, allowing you to grab and move objects without directly touching them. This is called a very simple action, and it might seem straightforward, but who really understands it? Even though advanced spirits know much more about the forces of nature than the smartest human, they still can’t fully grasp the hidden reasons behind it all. The workings of the will are impossible to comprehend. As I mentioned, we don’t have physical bodies, but we can still make the intangible elements work for us by acting like bones, nerves, and muscles.
459. Touching our peregrinations and voyages of discovery, about which so much has been said by spirits, as well as mortals, I will say that it is a fallacy to suppose that every spirit can visit at will the planets of the solar system, much less those of the more remote systems, since I am certain that none but the residents of the seventh sphere, or the angels of the “Supernal Heavens,” have the power to do so; because each planet, being an inhabited globe, hath its concentric or spiritual spheres, through all of which in order to reach it a spirit must pass. It is obvious, therefore, according to the immutable law of progression, that the transit of a spirit to a distant planet would require its adaptation to the highest sphere of that body.
459. Regarding our journeys and explorations, which have been widely discussed by both spirits and humans, I want to clarify that it's a misconception to think that every spirit can freely visit the planets of our solar system, let alone those of more distant systems. I am convinced that only the inhabitants of the seventh sphere, or the angels of the “Supernal Heavens,” possess that ability. Each planet is an inhabited world with its own concentric or spiritual spheres, and to visit it, a spirit must navigate through all of these layers. Therefore, it is clear that, following the unchanging law of progression, for a spirit to travel to a far-off planet, it would need to adapt to the highest sphere of that realm.
460. Having spoken of the angels of the “Supernal Heavens,” I will explain what is meant by this designation. They are those pure and comparatively exalted beings who, having advanced beyond the highest sphere of the planet to which they belonged, and attained a very high state of moral and intellectual development, have been admitted into that great and illimitable sphere of progression which lies outside of all other spheres, and in which the greatest conceivable degree of harmony reigns. It is composed of one grand harmonial society, whose members are privileged to go wheresoever they will through the boundless empire of space. They are principally from the planets Jupiter and Saturn, and hold a much more distinguished rank in the intellectual, moral, and social system than the inhabitants of earth. I have not learned that any spirit from our planet has yet reached the Supernal Heaven.
460. After discussing the angels of the "Supernal Heavens," I will clarify what this term means. They are those pure and relatively elevated beings who, having progressed beyond the highest realm of their home planet and achieved a very advanced level of moral and intellectual development, have been granted entry into that vast and limitless realm of progression that exists beyond all other realms, where the greatest possible degree of harmony exists. This realm is made up of one grand harmonious society, whose members can travel wherever they choose throughout the infinite expanse of space. They mainly come from the planets Jupiter and Saturn and hold a much more esteemed position in the intellectual, moral, and social hierarchy than the inhabitants of Earth. I have not learned that any spirit from our planet has yet reached the Supernal Heaven.
462. Physical laws and substances are gross or externalized spiritual96 laws and things. The more refined and developed the spirit, the less it requires of gross aliment. Refined, intellectual, and moral beings are nourished and sustained by refined, intellectual, and moral nutriment. Their food is derived from the “Tree of Knowledge,” and they slake their thirst at the crystal streams which continually flow from the inexhaustible fountain of God’s wisdom and love. The lowest undeveloped spirit lives on comparatively refined aliment to that on which mortals subsist. It consists of the more refined elements of spiritual fruits and vegetables. The spirit’s need of rest depends on its particular degree of development, diminishing in proportion to its advancement from the material plane.
462. Physical laws and substances are just the more obvious expressions of spiritual96 laws and things. The more refined and developed the spirit, the less it needs from coarse nourishment. Refined, intellectual, and moral beings are sustained by refined, intellectual, and moral nourishment. Their sustenance comes from the “Tree of Knowledge,” and they quench their thirst at the clear streams that continually flow from the never-ending well of God’s wisdom and love. The least developed spirit feeds on a relatively refined diet compared to what humans consume. It consists of the more subtle elements of spiritual fruits and vegetables. A spirit’s need for rest depends on its level of development, decreasing as it progresses away from the material realm.
463. Though the principles embodied in our teachings and philosophy may be regarded, by the majority of mankind, as strange and incomprehensible, they are, nevertheless, no more so than the principles of natural science would be to the unlettered mind. As the ability to comprehend the principles on which the natural sciences are based increases with the expansion of the intellectual faculties, in like manner is the power of perceiving spiritual things and relations increased by the development of the interior or spiritual faculties.
463. Although most people might find the principles in our teachings and philosophy to be strange and hard to understand, they are no more so than the concepts of natural science would be to someone who is uneducated. Just as the ability to understand the principles of natural sciences grows with the enhancement of intellectual skills, the ability to perceive spiritual matters and relationships also increases with the development of one's inner or spiritual abilities.
464. As there are no words in the human language in which spiritual ideas may be embodied so as to convey their literal and exact signification, we are obliged ofttimes to have recourse to the use of analogisms and metaphorical modes of expression. In our communion with you we have to comply with the peculiar structure and rules of your language; but the genius of our language is such that we can impart more ideas to each other in a single word than you can possibly convey in a hundred.
464. Since there are no words in any human language that can perfectly capture spiritual concepts in their exact meaning, we often have to rely on analogies and metaphors. When we communicate with you, we have to work within the unique structure and rules of your language; however, the nature of our language allows us to share more ideas with each other in a single word than you could convey in a hundred.
465. I have thus given you a general outline of the leading facts connected with the destiny of the race. I have endeavoured to show you that man is a progressive being, that he possesses a refined material (449) organization, which, going with him at death, serves as a medium through which he may communicate with the visible world. I will here add that, under certain circumstances, this spiritual organization has the power of reflecting the rays of light, so as to be rendered visible to the natural eye, as are certain gaseous bodies.
465. I've given you a general outline of the key facts related to the fate of humanity. I’ve tried to show you that humans are progressive beings, possessing a refined material (449) organization that, after death, serves as a medium for communicating with the visible world. I should also add that, under certain circumstances, this spiritual organization can reflect light in a way that makes it visible to the natural eye, similar to certain gaseous substances.
466. I have attempted to show you, too, that the spirit on entering the spheres, being governed by its affinity, takes its position in that circle for which it is morally and intellectually adapted; hence the first sphere is the abode of all the most degraded spirits, and that their advancement, however slow it may be, is nevertheless sure, since “onward and upward” is the motto emblazoned on the spiritual banner.
466. I've tried to show you that when a spirit enters the spheres, it naturally finds its place in the circle that matches its moral and intellectual level. That's why the first sphere is home to the most degraded spirits, and even though their progress might be slow, it's guaranteed to happen because "onward and upward" is the motto written on the spiritual banner.
467. I have endeavoured to show you, also, that the spirit is a finite being like man in the form, and, therefore, fallible, and that as he advances in knowledge, he grasps more of truth and drops more of error. I have attempted to show you that the spirit world is a counterpart of the natural world, and that we, no less than you, are subject to surrounding conditions97 and circumstances. Spirits of congenial minds and opinions are drawn toward each other and to you, on the principle that “like attracts like.” In order to receive high moral and intellectual communications, it is essentially necessary that the medium and circle should be in affinity with each other, and with the spirits who are capable of giving such communications.
467. I have tried to show you that the spirit is a finite being like a human in form and, therefore, fallible. As the spirit grows in knowledge, it understands more of the truth and lets go of more error. I’ve attempted to explain that the spirit world mirrors the natural world, and we, just like you, are influenced by the surrounding conditions97 and circumstances. Spirits with similar minds and beliefs are drawn to each other and to you based on the idea that “like attracts like.” To receive higher moral and intellectual messages, it’s essential that the medium and circle have a connection with each other and with the spirits capable of providing such messages.
468. Besides the topics adverted to, I will briefly call your attention to a few of the most prominent among the beneficial results which will flow from spiritual intercommunion. It will settle the important question, “If a man die, shall he live again?” It will reduce the fact of the immortality of the human spirit to a certainty, so that the world’s knowledge of the fact will not be the result of a blind faith, but a positive philosophy. It will show the relation existing between mind and matter. It will make men thinking and rational beings. It will establish a holy and most delightful intercourse between the inhabitants of the terrestrial world and their departed spirit friends. It will expand and liberalize the mind far beyond your present conceptions. It will fraternize and unite all the members of the human family in an everlasting bond of spiritual union and harmonial brotherhood. It will establish the principles of love to God and your fellows. It will do away with sectarian bigotry. It will show that many of the so-called religious teachings are but impositions on the credulity of mankind, being founded on the grossest absurdities and palpable ignorance of the nature of things.
468. In addition to the topics mentioned, I want to briefly highlight a few of the key positive outcomes that will come from spiritual communication. It will answer the crucial question, “If a person dies, will they live again?” It will establish the immortality of the human spirit as a certainty, so that people won’t just believe it blindly but will understand it as an undeniable truth. It will reveal the connection between mind and body. It will encourage people to think and act rationally. It will create a sacred and joyful connection between those living on Earth and their deceased friends. It will broaden and open up the mind far beyond what you currently think. It will bring together all members of the human family in an unbreakable bond of spiritual unity and brotherhood. It will promote love for God and one another. It will eliminate sectarian intolerance. It will demonstrate that many of the so-called religious teachings are merely manipulations of people’s gullibility, built on the most ridiculous absurdities and clear ignorance of the true nature of reality.
469. It will give man higher and infinitely more exalted views of God, and bring him into closer communion with the Author of his being. It will do away completely with the sting of death, and rob the grave of its terrors. It will teach the eternal progression of the soul, and show that the time is fast approaching when the moral condition of the race is to be vastly improved; when error is to be abolished, and truth is to take its place; when the glory of the Lord is to be revealed, and all flesh shall see it together! In fine, it will be a help to the soul in the hour of its adversity, and enable it to bear up under affliction with noble and heroic fortitude; and when about to launch its barque on the river of eternal life for the fair and beautiful land of promise, it will be its stay and sheet-anchor.
469. It will provide people with a deeper and far more elevated understanding of God, bringing them into a closer relationship with the Creator. It will completely eliminate the fear of death and diminish the terrors of the grave. It will teach the ongoing evolution of the soul and indicate that the time is quickly approaching when humanity's moral state will greatly improve; when falsehood will be eliminated, and truth will prevail; when God’s glory will be revealed, and everyone will witness it together! Ultimately, it will support the soul in times of struggle, helping it endure hardship with great bravery and strength; and when it is about to embark on the journey to eternal life towards the beautiful promised land, it will be its foundation and guiding force.
Your father, Robert Hare.
Your dad, Robert Hare.
Communication from a Spirit Son of the Author.
I have in the spirit world two sons, one of whom died, thirteen months old, in 1813; the other, five months old, in 1825. Both have been to communicate with me. I subjoin a letter received from the younger:
I have two sons in the spirit world. One passed away at thirteen months old in 1813, and the other died at five months old in 1825. Both have tried to reach out to me. I'm including a letter I got from the younger one:
470. “My Dear Father:—I made a very brief communication to you through the medium of Mr. Gordon, which was my first successful effort to control the human organism. It has been long known to me that spirits could manifest themselves to mortals; and that they have always held communion with their brethren in the flesh, is not new to me. The law is as98 natural as gravitation, and like it, I presume, will endure forever. But so great has been, and still is, the superstition of the masses, and to such an extent has man’s mental vision been obscured by his so-called spiritual teachers, that, excepting a comparatively few instances, spirits have failed in their attempts to reveal themselves to the civilized portion of mankind. The conditions have, for the most part, been wanting, owing to the above causes, and which have grown out of man’s false notions respecting his natural and true relation with the unseen world. The less civilized of our Father’s children, in regard to their communion with spirits, have been much more highly favoured than their otherwise more fortunate brethren, since it has not been an uncommon circumstance for them to commune with their departed friends.
470. “My Dear Father:—I sent you a brief message through Mr. Gordon, which was my first successful attempt to control the human body. I've long known that spirits can show themselves to people; it's not new to me that they've always communicated with those of us still living. This law is as98 natural as gravity and, like it, I assume it will last forever. However, the superstition among the masses has been enormous, and people's understanding has been clouded by their so-called spiritual teachers. As a result, aside from a few cases, spirits have struggled to reveal themselves to the civilized world. The necessary conditions have mostly been absent due to these issues, which stem from people's misconceptions about their true relationship with the unseen world. The less civilized among our Father’s children have actually been more fortunate in terms of communicating with spirits, as it hasn't been uncommon for them to connect with their deceased loved ones.
471. “Many years, my dear parent, have elapsed since I entered the bright abode of the blest—a very little child, yet a very happy one. My first and second birth rapidly succeeded each other; but so little did I know, from actual experience, of my rudimental condition, that I have never realized the change. I have no memory of my earth-life, yet I know from observation and reflection that I am to some extent the loser by my premature birth into the spiritual state. I have, it is true, measurably obtained since then that knowledge of exterior nature which I should have acquired in the flesh, on the globe which gave me birth, as an independent, individualized existence.
471. “Many years have passed, my dear parent, since I arrived in the bright realm of the blessed—as a very small child, yet a very happy one. My first and second births came one right after the other; but I was so unaware, from real experience, of my basic state, that I never truly understood the change. I have no memory of my life on Earth, yet I know from observation and reflection that I’ve missed out to some degree because of my early transition into the spiritual state. It is true that I have somewhat gained that knowledge of the outside world that I should have learned in the flesh, on the planet that gave me life, as an independent, individual being.
472. “My life here has been a charmed one; enrapturing scenes of beauty being constantly presented to view, like the ever-varying landscapes delineated on the canvas by a skilful artist. Now is seen a beautiful silvery lake on whose translucent bosom floats the graceful swan, bending his pliant neck, as if proudly conscious of his surpassing beauty; and anon, among the lilies of this lake, which appear like gems placed on a virgin brow, shoots a tiny barque, freighted with angelic children. Then is presented a bolder view, of towering mountains and wide-extended plains, with the accompanying characteristics of hill and dell.
472. “My life here has been truly magical; stunning scenes of beauty are always in front of me, like the ever-changing landscapes painted by a talented artist. Right now, a beautiful silvery lake is visible, on whose clear surface floats a graceful swan, arching its flexible neck as if proudly aware of its stunning beauty; and soon, among the lilies in the lake, which look like gems on a pure brow, a tiny boat carrying angelic children glides by. Then a more dramatic view appears, with towering mountains and expansive plains, featuring the delightful ups and downs of hills and valleys."
473. “In answer to a question which would naturally suggest itself to your mind, respecting the means by which I have become acquainted with that knowledge of the external world which I should have gained in it, I would say it has been acquired by frequent visits to the earth. I have been accustomed to accompany you, father, in your daily walks, and to study, through you and mother, those elementary lessons which are so essential to the full development of the spirit. Your son Theodore, though nearly forgotten by you, has not been far distant. The time is fast approaching, and is near at hand, when man’s spiritual nature and destiny will be much more fully comprehended by the world. Then spirit manifestations and spirit intercourse will be considered as natural as for the sun to rise in the eastern heavens. Spirits highly elevated in love and wisdom would not descend from their exalted position except to teach, fo99r their attractions are upward, but their mission is to instruct those below them, from which they derive much happiness. You know, father, how much pleasure it gives you to impart knowledge to others. How much greater then is our enjoyment, whose minds are intensely more susceptible of real joys! Your spiritual mission on earth has just begun, and we are endeavouring to impress your mind with the sacred importance of its fulfilment. Give unto others that we give unto you, and you shall receive abundantly. I occupy a place which has not yet been opened to your perception. Prepare yourself, my dear father, for its higher and more glorious unfoldings, by first gaining that knowledge which pertains to the lower degrees, and you will thereby become elevated to the higher spiritual planes, and increase your knowledge of things celestial, and greatly develop and enlarge your sphere of usefulness.
473. “In response to a question that would naturally come to mind about how I gained my understanding of the outside world, I would say it has been obtained through frequent visits to Earth. I've been used to joining you on your daily walks, father, and learning, through you and mother, those basic lessons that are so important for fully developing the spirit. Your son Theodore, though almost forgotten by you, has not been far away. The time is coming soon when humanity will have a much better understanding of its spiritual nature and destiny. Then, communication with spirits will be seen as natural as the sun rising in the east. Spirits that are highly elevated in love and wisdom wouldn’t lower themselves from their high position unless to teach, for their desires are upwards, but their mission is to educate those below them, which brings them much joy. You know, father, how much pleasure it brings you to share knowledge with others. How much greater is our joy, whose minds are greatly more capable of experiencing true happiness! Your spiritual mission on Earth has just started, and we are trying to impress upon you the sacred importance of fulfilling it. Give to others as we give to you, and you will receive abundantly. I occupy a place that hasn’t yet been opened to your awareness. Prepare yourself, my dear father, for its higher and more glorious revelations by first acquiring the knowledge related to the lower levels, and this will elevate you to the higher spiritual realms, expanding your understanding of celestial matters and greatly enhance your capacity to be useful.
Theodore.”
Theodore.
Additional Communications from Spirits who died while Infants.
475. While I was in a state of extreme unbelief, Dewitt’s mother told me that her son, who died when aged only thirteen months, had communicated with her; and said that his stature had grown with his age, now sixteen years. This statement I mentioned as an exemplification of credulity, little thinking that this wonder would be realized by the existence of my spirit children being made evident to me by such communications as that from Theodore, above given.
475. While I was in complete disbelief, Dewitt’s mother told me that her son, who died when he was just thirteen months old, had reached out to her and claimed that his height had increased with his age, now at sixteen years. I brought this up as an example of gullibility, not realizing that this miracle would become evident to me through the existence of my spirit children, as shown by the communication from Theodore mentioned above.
Communication from a very young Spirit child to its Parents.
478. The following message, says Mr. Helmick, came through the medium of Miss Irish, some eight months since, on an occasion when there were some twelve or fifteen persons present, nearly all of whom were entire strangers to me and my wife, who was also present. We had never seen Miss Irish before, and we know that she had no knowledge of us in any respect.
478. The following message, Mr. Helmick says, came through the medium of Miss Irish about eight months ago, during an event attended by about twelve or fifteen people, most of whom were complete strangers to my wife and me, who were also there. We had never met Miss Irish before, and we know that she had no knowledge of us at all.
480. “Father, do you not, kind father, feel my soft and gentle touch upon your brow?[12] Can you not feel my presence, as grandmamma and I, with care, enfold you in our embrace?
480. “Dad, don’t you, dear dad, feel my soft and gentle touch on your forehead?[12] Can you not sense me here, as Grandma and I carefully wrap you in our arms?
“Mother, gentle, loving mother, do you not feel my angel kiss, as I imprint it upon your cheek?
“Mom, gentle, loving mom, do you not feel my angel kiss as I press it against your cheek?”
“Father, mother, I left you before earth’s errors had a chance to take root within my young and tender mind.
“Dad, Mom, I left you before the world’s mistakes could take hold in my young and impressionable mind.
“Spirit Child.”
“Spirit Child.”
For George Helmick.
For George Helmick.
The following message was received through Mrs. Gourlay on the 27th of October last, by the aid of a disk and alphabet as arranged by Dr. Hare:
The following message was received through Mrs. Gourlay on October 27th, last year, using a disk and alphabet arranged by Dr. Hare:
483. “A calm and holy atmosphere pervades this little company, and lovely forms are surrounding each earth friend. O thou great God of goodness! to thee our hearts are raised in thanksgiving for this privilege of communion with our friends on earth. Gratitude should fill the hearts of all present. Little children are sporting in this atmosphere of love like gentle moonbeams, kissing with a gentle touch the brows of their loving parents.
483. “A peaceful and sacred vibe fills this small gathering, and beautiful figures are surrounding each friend on Earth. Oh, great God of goodness! We lift our hearts in thanks for this chance to connect with our friends here. Everyone present should feel gratitude. Little kids are playing in this atmosphere of love like soft moonlight, gently touching the foreheads of their caring parents.
“Little Walter.”
“Little Walter.”
Mrs. Helmick.
Ms. Helmick.
OF THE SPIRITUAL BIRTH,[13] CALLED DEATH, OF HUMAN BEINGS, CALLED MORTALS, ALTHOUGH IMMORTAL.
Of Spiritual Birth.
488. Having obtained from several of my most valued spirit friends or relatives, narratives of their translation from this sphere to the world of spirits, it appears, from their concurrent testimony, that on the death of the body, the soul finds itself soon afterward awaking from a profound sleep,—but so much more like dreaming than being awake, as for a short time to create a doubt whether it be not dreaming. Meanwhile, bright shadowy forms become more and more distinguishable; and the body which it has left being perceived apart on its bed, or in whatever position its death occurred, the conviction is induced that another state of existence has been attained. As the forms, at first shadowy, become distinct, they are usually found to be those of the nearest or dearest previously departed friends. These meet the nascent spirit with every possible manifestation of affection, while the most ecstatic emotions are awakened.
488. After getting stories from several of my closest spirit friends or relatives about their transition from this world to the spirit realm, it seems, based on their shared experiences, that when the body dies, the soul quickly wakes up from a deep sleep. However, this state feels more like dreaming than being fully awake, creating a brief doubt about whether it's really a dream. Meanwhile, bright, shadowy figures become easier to see, and the body left behind, whether on its bed or wherever it died, is perceived separately. This leads to the realization that another kind of existence has been reached. As these initially vague figures become clear, they are usually recognized as the closest and most beloved departed friends. They greet the newly awakened spirit with all possible signs of love, stirring up the most ecstatic feelings.
Narrative given by Spirits of their translation to the Spirit World, the abode of human souls in a future state
490. The following narrative is from an excellent spirit philanthropist, who, though a stranger to me in this world, introduced himself to me at the session of a small circle, by the communication alleged to be intended for me, which has already been quoted. (147.)
490. The following story comes from a generous person dedicated to helping others, who, even though I didn’t know him in this life, introduced himself to me during a small group meeting with a message that was said to be meant for me, which has already been mentioned. (147.)
491. He has since reported himself as the author of those sentiments, and has held many conversations with me.[14]
491. He has since claimed to be the author of those thoughts and has had many discussions with me.[14]
492. Subsequently to an address made by me at Franklin Hall, he expressed himself as follows: “Do not keep your light under a bushel. I was present and heard you speak last night. I wish you to say more about your personal experience. That would weigh with the community at large.” I excused my course by answering, that I wished my experience to be riper before submitting it to the community.
492. After I spoke at Franklin Hall, he said, “Don’t hide your light. I was there and heard you talk last night. I want you to share more about your personal experience. That would resonate with the community.” I explained that I wanted my experience to be more developed before sharing it with everyone.
Narrative of his Spiritual Birth, by W. W-—-, a most benevolent Spirit of the Fifth Sphere.
493. “Did you ever have a most delightful dream in which you saw your near and dear friends about you, all seeming happy and contented with their condition? If you have, then you can form an imperfect idea of my state when I awoke to the reality of the change which opened upon my entranced sight on being ushered into the spheres. I had been long sick, and was subject to periods of unconsciousness. Therefore I did not soon perceive the change to be real. I felt almost too much happiness for my spirit to bear.
493. “Have you ever had a really wonderful dream where you saw your close friends around you, all looking happy and content with their lives? If you have, then you can get a glimpse of how I felt when I woke up to the reality of the transformation that unfolded before my amazed eyes as I was brought into the next realm. I had been seriously ill and often fell into spells of unconsciousness. So, I didn’t realize right away that the change was real. I felt almost too much joy for my soul to handle.
“On looking around, I perceived my mother, with outstretched arms, ready to receive her welcome son to the mansion prepared for him.
“Looking around, I saw my mother with open arms, ready to welcome her son to the home she had prepared for him.”
494. “Did I still dream? I asked: no! it was a blessed reality; all pain had fled, and my spirit rejoiced in new health. I could hardly contain myself from expressing my gratitude to God in verbal ejaculations. But I soon found that I had a much more delightful mode of expression. Each countenance beamed with love and intelligence, and the spirits could interpret my thoughts as readily as mortals can read a well-printed book.
494. “Was I still dreaming? I asked: no! it was a wonderful reality; all pain had disappeared, and my spirit celebrated in newfound health. I could barely hold back my gratitude to God in spoken bursts of joy. But I quickly realized that I had a much more delightful way to express myself. Every face radiated love and understanding, and the spirits could understand my thoughts as easily as people can read a clearly printed book.
495. “One spirit, on whose countenance I could read volumes, approached, and taking me by the hand said, ‘Welcome, dear brother, to this sinless world, where your progression is sure; no obstacles shall impede your footsteps; the conditions of time are removed; your feet shall fail not in the race of progress. Onward and Upward is our motto.’
495. “One spirit, whose expression told me so much, came forward and took my hand, saying, ‘Welcome, dear brother, to this pure world, where your growth is guaranteed; nothing will stand in your way; the limits of time are gone; you will not stumble in the journey of progress. ‘Onward and Upward’ is our motto.’”
496. “With willing heart I followed my guide. Every step taken led me up toward the great Source of light and truth. I never wearied in my journey. Bright and sparkling waters flowed at my feet, and living flowers sprang up before me. Each new object gave me courage to proceed. Old familiar faces met my gaze at every footstep, and cherub forms flitted past me. Golden clouds rested over the scene, and all nature was refulgent with light and animation. Huge oaks tossed their giant branches to the pure breezes of heaven, and lofty pines bowed their heads in love and adoration. The little birds sent forth their notes of praise, while the air was laden with the perfume of flowers. Being fond of the beauties of nature while on earth, I enjoyed this scene much.
496. “With an eager heart, I followed my guide. Each step took me closer to the great Source of light and truth. I never grew tired on my journey. Bright, sparkling waters flowed at my feet, and vibrant flowers blossomed in front of me. Every new sight gave me the courage to keep going. Familiar faces greeted me at every turn, and cherubic figures flitted by. Golden clouds hovered over the scene, and all of nature was radiant with light and energy. Towering oaks swayed their massive branches in the pure breezes of heaven, while tall pines bowed their heads in love and reverence. Little birds sang their praises, and the air was filled with the fragrance of flowers. Having loved the beauty of nature while I was on earth, I truly enjoyed this scene.
500. “My habitation consists of suites of rooms, most beautifully ornamented with paintings and statues and the most elegant productions of spirit art. Each individual can have his dwelling to suit his own particular taste or fancy. The more refined and elevated the spirit, the more refined and beautiful is the house or home that he inhabits.
500. “My home is made up of beautifully decorated rooms, filled with paintings, statues, and the finest examples of artistic expression. Everyone can have a space that reflects their own style or preferences. The more sophisticated and elevated the spirit, the more exquisite and attractive the home they live in.
SPIRITUAL BIRTH OF MARIA.
The Spirit Maria’s Narrative, as given through the Mediumship of Mrs. M. B. Gourlay.
505. Dear Father: I promised to give you an account of my entrance into, and life in the spheres. As I said to you on a former occasion, I felt like one just awaking from a deep sleep induced by the deadening influence of an opiate. It was some time before I could collect my scattered senses. On partially regaining my consciousness, I recollected having been sick, and the anxiety of my friends for my restoration to health; and I wondered at the sudden change in my feelings. Those racking pains I experienced had all fled, and I felt a newness of life which was truly delightful. Indistinct and shadowy forms flitted before me. On closely inspecting them, I perceived that they were my departed friends. It was then that I fully realized the change in my condition. My first and greatest concern was for those who seemed so inconsolable at my loss, and for whom I still entertained the most devoted love and affection. My vision becoming gradually clearer, I perceived, among the group, my brother William ready to receive me. He was clothed in a garment of living light, and closely resembles you, dear father, in form and features. He addressed me in the following language:—“Welcome, thrice welcome, my beloved sister, to the regions of immortality! I have been your guardian angel through life, and have looked forward with pleasure to this happy reunion.” I was now informed by him that I must leave my treasures on earth. This gave me some uneasiness, but being assured that I should visit them again, I cheerfully accompanied him in his upward flight.
505. Dear Father: I promised to tell you about my entry into and my life in the afterlife. As I mentioned before, I felt like someone just waking up from a deep sleep caused by a powerful sedative. It took a while for me to gather my thoughts. As I started to regain my awareness, I remembered being ill and how worried my friends were for my recovery; I was surprised by the sudden shift in my feelings. The intense pain I had been feeling was gone, and I experienced a refreshing sense of life that was truly wonderful. Vague and hazy shapes moved around me. When I looked closely, I realized they were my departed friends. That was when I fully understood the change in my situation. My first and biggest concern was for those who seemed so heartbroken over my loss, and for whom I still held a deep love and affection. As my vision gradually cleared, I noticed my brother William among the group, ready to welcome me. He was dressed in a garment of radiant light and resembled you, dear father, in both shape and features. He spoke to me, saying: “Welcome, so welcome, my dear sister, to the realms of immortality! I have been your guardian angel throughout your life, and I’ve looked forward to this joyful reunion.” He then told me that I had to leave my earthly treasures behind. This made me a bit uneasy, but after being assured that I would visit them again, I happily followed him as he ascended.
507. Gliding swiftly upward, on gaining an elevation of some sixty miles from the earth’s surface, we passed into the second sphere;[15] on entering which a tremor seized me. A moral darkness pervades the atmosphere, which renders it gloomy and uncomfortable in the extreme. The inhabitants are dark and dismal in their appearance, and are continually tortured with the pangs of a guilty conscience. Here disorder and confusion reign supreme, each spirit vieing with the other in rendering discord more discordant. We passed on rapidly, leaving the second sphere and its undeveloped inhabitants behind.
507. Gliding swiftly upward, after reaching an altitude of about sixty miles from the Earth's surface, we entered the second sphere;[15] and as I did, I felt a shiver run through me. A heavy moral darkness fills the atmosphere, making it extremely gloomy and uncomfortable. The inhabitants appear dark and dismal, constantly tortured by the pain of their guilty consciences. Disorder and confusion are everywhere, with each spirit competing to make the discord even more chaotic. We moved on quickly, leaving the second sphere and its underdeveloped inhabitants behind.
508. On approaching the third sphere, we were met by a company of angels from the seventh sphere, among whom I recognised my brothers105 who died in infancy. They had attained the stature of men. I now felt that law of affinity which binds us so closely together, drawing me toward them, and I was enabled at once to single them out from the multitude which accompanied them. With smiles they greeted me, saying, “Welcome, dear sister; another link is added to the chain of love which binds us together. One by one they shall be removed from earth till the chain is completed here.”
508. As we approached the third sphere, we were greeted by a group of angels from the seventh sphere, among whom I recognized my brothers105 who had passed away in infancy. They had grown to the stature of men. I felt that deep connection that draws us together, pulling me towards them, and I was instantly able to identify them from the crowd that was with them. They welcomed me with smiles, saying, “Welcome, dear sister; another link has been added to the chain of love that connects us. One by one, they will leave the earth until the chain is complete here.”
510. Anxiously desiring to reach my destiny, we quickly passed to the fourth sphere. How different the scene! every thing looked bright and beautiful to my enraptured sight. It seemed like an enchanted land. Thousands of flowers scented the air with their odoriferous perfume, and rapturous strains of music thrilled me with delight! We now approached a beautiful temple devoted to the science of the harmony of sounds. In it music in all its departments is taught. O, father, could you hear the master spirits of song, who lived ages ago on earth, attuning their instruments to harmony, your senses would become entranced. Music, being conceived in heaven, is sent forth to earth to elevate man, and attract him to our great and beneficent Father. I perceived that the fourth sphere was to be my abiding-place for the present.
510. Eager to reach my destination, we quickly moved on to the fourth sphere. What a difference in the scene! Everything looked bright and beautiful to my captivated eyes. It felt like a magical land. Thousands of flowers filled the air with their fragrant perfume, and exhilarating strains of music thrilled me with joy! We now approached a stunning temple dedicated to the science of sound harmony. In it, music is taught in all its forms. Oh, father, if you could hear the masterful spirits of song who lived long ago on earth tuning their instruments to harmony, your senses would be entranced. Music, created in heaven, is sent to earth to uplift humanity and draw us closer to our great and loving Father. I sensed that the fourth sphere was to be my home for the time being.
511. On my return to the second sphere, it looked somewhat different to me, for, having lost my fear, I could more closely inspect the place and its inhabitants. The country, as far as my vision could penetrate, seemed like a vast desert, without a green spot to relieve the eye. Its denizens are seen straggling here and there, with no fixed object in view. All are seeking to minister to their perverted tastes. Some are holding forth in loud tones, and painting in false and gaudy colours the joy of their home; others, who occupied high stations on earth, hang their heads in confusion, and would fain hide themselves from view; but they are taunted with rude jests, and told that their “pride of position will avail them nothing here.” One heart-sickening feature of this place is the absence of children. No purity can exist where such evils abound. “The loud laugh, which bespeaks the vacant mind,” is heard pealing forth in derision, as the teachers from the higher spheres approach the motley group. Some, in whom the work of regeneration has commenced, are seen ascending the spiral stairway of progress which leads to the third sphere.
511. When I returned to the second sphere, it appeared a bit different to me because, having lost my fear, I could examine the area and its inhabitants more closely. The landscape, as far as I could see, resembled a vast desert, with no green spot to soothe the eyes. The people were scattered here and there, with no specific purpose in mind. All were trying to satisfy their distorted tastes. Some were shouting loudly and painting a false and flashy picture of their joy at home; others, who had held high positions on earth, hung their heads in shame, wanting to hide from view; but they were mocked with rude jokes and told that their “pride of position will mean nothing here.” One heartbreaking aspect of this place is the lack of children. No innocence can exist where such evils thrive. “The loud laugh, which indicates a vacant mind,” can be heard echoing in mockery as the teachers from the higher spheres approach the mixed group. Some, who have started the process of regeneration, can be seen ascending the spiral staircase of progress that leads to the third sphere.
512. The beauty of the third sphere far transcends that of earth. The scenery is endlessly diversified with spiritual objects, corresponding to things of your planet. Mountains and valleys, hills and dales, rivers and lakes, and trees and plants, lend their enchantment to the scene. The inhabitants of this sphere are anxious for instruction. The teachers from the higher degrees are listened to with profound respect and attention.
512. The beauty of the third sphere far surpasses that of Earth. The landscape is endlessly varied with spiritual objects that correspond to things from your planet. Mountains and valleys, hills and dales, rivers and lakes, and trees and plants all add to the scene's enchantment. The inhabitants of this sphere are eager for guidance. The teachers from the higher levels are listened to with great respect and attention.
513. I saw many persons whom I knew in the rudimental state. I met a spirit yesterday whom I have seen in your company before he left the form.[16] I felt attracted to him. On approaching him, he smilingly said, “Why do you take such an interest in me, fair being? I know you not.” “True,” I replied, “but I saw you in my father’s company before you left the earth, and was present once when my brother gave you a communication, which, by the way, you received with much incredulity; therefore, I feel constrained to speak to you.” He thanked me, saying, “I never believed in the immortality of the soul; consequently, it was not strange that I should doubt the spirits.” “Your skepticism,” I replied, “was honest; therefore you will rise much sooner in the scale of progression. A sincere unbelief is better than false professions.” Here I left him, and followed a multitude who were just entering a magnificent temple, where a teacher was to address them. This structure is immensely large and exquisitely symmetrical in its proportions. Many stately columns support its roof, each surmounted by a cap of chaste design. The material of this temple is similar in appearance to alabaster, but transparent. The seats are semicircular, forming an amphitheatre, in the centre of which stood the speaker, Channing. With uplifted hands he invoked God’s blessing on all mankind. With what breathless attention all listened to the glowing words of eloquence which fell from his lips! This is the true worship of the soul. His text was: “The light that is within you.” He dwelt at some length on the importance of self-elevation, as a means of progressing others. He spoke of the moral bond of union which binds the race together. “When one individual,” said he, “is degraded, all must suffer.” His discourse abounded with clear and energetic thought.
513. I saw many people I recognized in their basic form. I met a spirit yesterday whom I had seen in your presence before he left his physical body. I felt drawn to him. As I approached, he smiled and said, “Why are you so interested in me, kind being? I don’t know you.” “True,” I replied, “but I saw you with my father before you left the earth, and I was there once when my brother communicated with you, which, by the way, you received with a lot of skepticism; so I felt compelled to talk to you.” He thanked me, saying, “I never believed in the immortality of the soul; so it wasn’t surprising that I doubted spirits.” “Your skepticism,” I replied, “was honest; therefore, you will progress much faster. A sincere disbelief is better than false claims.” I then left him and joined a crowd that was entering a magnificent temple where a teacher was going to speak. This structure is extremely large and beautifully symmetrical. Many tall columns support the roof, each topped with a modestly designed cap. The material of this temple looks like alabaster, but it is transparent. The seats are arranged in a semicircular shape, forming an amphitheater, and in the center stood the speaker, Channing. With raised hands, he invoked God’s blessing on all of humanity. Everyone listened with rapt attention to the powerful words of eloquence that flowed from his lips! This is the true worship of the soul. His main message was: “The light that is within you.” He elaborated on the importance of self-improvement as a way to elevate others. He spoke of the moral connection that unites the human race. “When one person,” he said, “is brought down, everyone suffers.” His speech was filled with clear and vibrant thoughts.
514. As we passed from this temple, I met my friend of yesterday. He remarked that he had learned much from the speaker who had just addressed us. He said that his mind, before entering the spheres, had been much troubled about the future, although light had begun to dawn on his mental horizon. “Hope,” said he, “with her cheering countenance, had almost deserted me, and the world appeared like a dreary wilderness. Sick and disheartened, I laid me down to recruit my exhausted energies. An unconscious period intervened, and then burst on my enraptured vision the glorious morning of the resurrection in all its loveliness; and with it came a bright messenger of light to bear me onward and upward to the boundless regions of progressive wisdom, where my107 untrammelled spirit can soar aloft to study the wondrous works of Almighty God.”
514. As we left the temple, I ran into my friend from yesterday. He mentioned that he had learned a lot from the speaker who had just talked to us. He said that before entering this new realm, he had been very worried about the future, even though some clarity was starting to come into his mind. “Hope,” he said, “with her uplifting smile, had nearly abandoned me, and the world felt like a bleak desert. Sick and discouraged, I lay down to regain my exhausted strength. I drifted into an unconscious state, and then the beautiful morning of resurrection filled my vision with its splendor; along with it came a bright messenger of light to lead me onward and upward to the limitless realms of growing knowledge, where my107 unrestrained spirit can rise high to explore the amazing works of Almighty God.”
515. In the fourth sphere the scenery is characterized by still more beautiful landscapes: the grass appears of a greener green, and the flowers are more gorgeous in their hue, and the birds sing still more sweetly. Shall I lead you to this parterre? Here you perceive the lily with its almond-shaped leaves, and stamens delicately tinted with the faintest crimson; by its side is the blushing rose. Here you observe the myrtle, the emblem of love, and the passion-flower, which speaks of a deathless passion. All have an interior language which spirits alone can fully comprehend. The trees here are somewhat different from those on earth. This is a strange-looking one. Its trunk is very straight, and runs up to an immense height without branches; its top is surmounted by tufts of beautiful spiral-shaped silvery leaves; by its side stands one of very different appearance, whose depending branches, like the graceful willow, bend beneath their wealth of leaves, courting one to repose beneath their grateful shade. Here, too, are sparkling streams, murmuring cascades, and gushing fountains, and trees bending beneath their load of golden fruit; and here are temples devoted to the arts and sciences.
515. In the fourth sphere, the scenery is filled with even more beautiful landscapes: the grass is a brighter green, the flowers are more vibrant, and the birds sing even more sweetly. Shall I take you to this garden? Here you can see the lily with its almond-shaped leaves and stamens delicately tinted with the faintest crimson; beside it is the blushing rose. Here you also notice the myrtle, the symbol of love, and the passion-flower, which represents an everlasting passion. All of these have a deeper meaning that only spirits can fully understand. The trees here are somewhat different from those on earth. There’s one that looks quite unusual. Its trunk is very straight and reaches an immense height without any branches; at the top, it is crowned with clusters of beautiful spiral-shaped silvery leaves. Next to it stands a very different tree, with drooping branches like a graceful willow, bending beneath their abundance of leaves, inviting you to rest in their generous shade. Here, too, are sparkling streams, murmuring cascades, and gushing fountains, along with trees weighed down by their golden fruit; and here are temples dedicated to the arts and sciences.
516. Now, dear father, let not a school on earth rise up before your imagination. Our schools and systems of instruction differ widely from those in the rudimental sphere, inasmuch as they are far more beautiful. We use neither books nor charts, but the spirit or substance of each subject is presented to the student, whose mind at once perceives its internal meaning. In this way are solved the most difficult problems.
516. Now, dear father, don't let any school on earth come to mind. Our schools and teaching methods are very different from those in the basic realm, as they are far more beautiful. We don't use books or charts; instead, the essence of each subject is presented to the student, allowing their mind to immediately grasp its deeper meaning. This is how even the toughest problems are resolved.
517. Let us enter this building devoted to the teachers from the seventh sphere. See the multitude thronging its portals. Before we enter, let us glance at its exterior. It is circular in form, and beautiful in its architectural design. Its spiral columns are entwined with the richest flowers, which yield a delicious fragrance. As you enter this temple, its fretted vaults resound with the soft harmonious symphonies of spirit voices. In the midst of the group stands the teacher, Melancthon, who suffered in the cause of religious freedom. His countenance is mild and angelic, but he still retains that fearless spirit which characterized him on earth.
517. Let’s go inside this building dedicated to the teachers from the seventh sphere. Look at the crowd gathering at its entrance. Before we step in, let’s take a look at the outside. It’s circular in shape and beautifully designed. Its spiral columns are wrapped with the most vibrant flowers, filling the air with a wonderful fragrance. As you walk into this temple, the intricate ceilings echo with the soft, harmonious melodies of spirit voices. In the center of the group stands the teacher, Melancthon, who suffered for the sake of religious freedom. His expression is gentle and angelic, but he still has that fearless spirit that defined him during his life on earth.
519. Let us now wend our way to the fifth sphere. This state is in a still greater degree heavenly. As far as the eye can reach are seen lovely villas, magnificent temples, forest-crowned hills, and gently undulating plains. Let us go up this avenue, shaded with lofty sycamores: this is the residence of H. K. White. How enchanting the spot! It is a low cottage embosomed in the midst of trees and flowers, which, by interlacing,108 form beautiful arbours with arched entrances. The grounds about this dwelling are skilfully and tastefully laid out. The clematis and honeysuckle entwine their tendrils around the trellis-work of the door. Let us enter. Statues of the most exquisite finish fill the niches; couches and divans of various forms and singular devices grace the rooms, and carpets of the softest texture and most brilliant dyes cover the floors. It is, indeed, the beau ideal of a poet’s home. In this sphere dwell Channing, Ballou, Murray, the Wesleys, Byron, Burns, Moore, Shelley, Scott, and Hahnemann, the founder of your school, who is still engaged in the investigation of scientific truths. I speak of those persons in particular, because I am personally acquainted with them, being attracted to them by a congeniality of feeling.
519. Let’s now make our way to the fifth sphere. This place is even more heavenly. As far as the eye can see, there are beautiful villas, stunning temples, forest-covered hills, and gently rolling plains. Let's walk up this path lined with tall sycamores: this is the home of H. K. White. What a charming spot! It’s a cozy cottage surrounded by trees and flowers that intertwine to create lovely arbours with arched entrances. The grounds around this home are thoughtfully and tastefully designed. The clematis and honeysuckle wrap their tendrils around the trellis of the door. Let’s go inside. Statues of exquisite craftsmanship fill the niches; couches and divans of various shapes and unique designs decorate the rooms, and carpets with the softest texture and most vibrant colors cover the floors. It truly is the ideal home for a poet. In this sphere live Channing, Ballou, Murray, the Wesleys, Byron, Burns, Moore, Shelley, Scott, and Hahnemann, the founder of your school, who is still exploring scientific truths. I mention these individuals specifically because I know them personally, drawn to them by a shared feeling.
520. The sixth state or sphere far transcends the most gorgeous picture of oriental splendour. So lovely are the scenes presented to the view there, that I cannot impress your mind with any thing like a just conception of them. I receive my ideas of the fifth, sixth, and seventh spheres from the spirits who dwell therein, having never visited them in person. What a magnificent panorama is there presented to the spirit’s gaze! There are colossal temples, and “houses not made with hands, eternal in the heavens.” As far as the vision can extend may be seen cities and palaces, whose lofty domes sparkle like diamonds in the sunbeams of heaven; oceans and seas with which yours are mere lakes in comparison; placid lakes and noble rivers winding their interminable way through valleys clothed with perpetual verdure.
520. The sixth state or sphere far exceeds even the most beautiful images of Eastern splendor. The scenes there are so lovely that I can't convey a true sense of them to you. I get my impressions of the fifth, sixth, and seventh spheres from the spirits who live there, as I've never visited them myself. What an incredible view is presented to the spirit's sight! There are massive temples and “houses not made with hands, eternal in the heavens.” As far as the eye can see, there are cities and palaces, their tall domes sparkling like diamonds in the sunlight of heaven; oceans and seas that make your lakes seem tiny by comparison; serene lakes and grand rivers winding endlessly through valleys lush with perpetual green.
521. There are gardens there of inconceivable beauty, filled with the choicest and most aromatic herbs and flowers, and birds with every conceivable variety of plumage. The parks are of great magnitude, and abound with the most beautiful animals. The swift antelope, the wild gazelle, and the graceful deer are seen ranging over the flowery plains. There the lion and the lamb lie down together in peaceful innocence. There are congregated millions of spirits, who are associated together like a harmonious and happy family. The vales are vocal with celestial melody, and the air is redolent with the perfume of flowers.
521. There are gardens there of unimaginable beauty, filled with the finest and most fragrant herbs and flowers, and birds of every imaginable color. The parks are vast and filled with the most beautiful animals. You can see swift antelopes, wild gazelles, and graceful deer roaming over the flower-filled plains. There, the lion and the lamb lie down together in peaceful innocence. Millions of spirits gather, united like a joyful and harmonious family. The valleys are alive with heavenly music, and the air is filled with the scent of flowers.
522. How shall I describe to you the transcendent glory of the seventh sphere? Let us contemplate it. In it all the beauties and joys of the lower degrees are combined, but in a much more refined and sublimated form. There dwell the spirits of the just made more perfect. Innumerable companies of children, which constitute the infant army of heaven, are singing in gladsome strains the love of Him who called them into being, causing the atmosphere to resound with harmonious shouts of joy. There dwells Jesus of Nazareth, the great moral reformer, and “John the beloved.” There reside the apostles, prophets, and martyrs of olden time. There live Confucius, Seneca, Plato, Socrates, and Solon, with all the philosophers of ancient Greece and Rome.
522. How can I describe to you the amazing glory of the seventh sphere? Let’s take a moment to think about it. Here, all the beauty and joy of the lower levels come together, but in a much more refined and elevated way. The spirits of the righteous are made even more perfect. Countless groups of children, forming the heavenly infant army, are joyfully singing praises to Him who brought them to life, filling the atmosphere with joyful shouts. Jesus of Nazareth, the great moral teacher, and "John the beloved" are present here. The apostles, prophets, and martyrs from ancient times reside here as well. Confucius, Seneca, Plato, Socrates, and Solon live here, along with all the philosophers of ancient Greece and Rome.
My Sister’s account of her Spiritual Birth, or Translation to the Spirit World.
524. Dear brother: The language of mortals is inadequate to convey to your mind a tenth part of the joy that I experienced when liberated from the physical body. You remember well the hour when the summons came. You did not expect me to depart so soon. The mutual relationship which had existed between my body and spirit being dissolved, I found myself still a living, thinking, and intelligent being, and in a world of tangible and eternal realities.
524. Dear brother: Regular human language falls short of expressing even a fraction of the joy I felt when I was freed from my physical body. You remember the moment the call came. You weren't expecting me to leave so soon. Once the bond between my body and spirit was broken, I discovered that I was still a living, thinking, and aware being, existing in a world of real and everlasting truths.
525. When the last act in the drama of life was finished, and as soon as I had emerged from the pleasing reverie which succeeded the moment of dissolution, I found my room filled with bright visitants from the world of spirits, and my ears were delighted with the sweetest melodies. I now felt that the great secret was about to be disclosed, and I began to realize that I had indeed passed from death unto life.
525. When the final act of life’s drama was over, and as soon as I had come out of the pleasant daydream that followed the moment of passing, I found my room filled with bright visitors from the spirit world, and my ears were filled with the sweetest music. I now felt that the great secret was about to be revealed, and I began to understand that I had truly moved from death to life.
526. Dazzled by the exceeding brilliancy of the light which emanated from the pure beings who surrounded me, I began to distrust my senses, and looked about to assure myself that I was not in a dream or trance. I was soon startled from my musing by a gentle pull at my garment, and on turning round to discover the cause, I instantly recognised my beloved father. Oh! imagine my feelings at that joyful moment; no words can describe them. I now felt a strong desire to leave earth. Father perceiving this, placed his hand in mine, and said, “My daughter, the battle is fought, the victory is won; follow me.” He now led me forth into open space. We were immediately encircled by a magnificent halo of light, and strains of heavenly music floated on the circumambient air. Here a scene of glory was revealed to me which human imagination is unable to conceive. As we penetrated the clear blue depths of ether, myriads of angelic beings crossed our path, and many greeted me with words of welcome.
526. Blinded by the incredible brightness of the light coming from the pure beings around me, I started to doubt my senses and looked around to make sure I wasn't dreaming or in a trance. I was soon jolted from my thoughts by a gentle tug on my clothes, and when I turned to see what it was, I immediately recognized my beloved father. Oh! Just imagine how I felt in that joyful moment; no words can capture it. I then felt a strong urge to leave this world. Dad, noticing this, took my hand and said, “My daughter, the battle is fought, the victory is won; follow me.” He then led me out into open space. We were immediately surrounded by a magnificent halo of light, and heavenly music floated through the air. A scene of glory was revealed to me that human imagination cannot comprehend. As we moved deeper into the clear blue of the ether, countless angelic beings crossed our path, and many welcomed me with kind words.
527. Having passed beyond earth’s sphere, new and more glorious scenes burst upon my enraptured vision, and they increased in beauty at each successive stage of our journey. I felt that a great change had taken place in my condition, for the most intense sensations of pleasure pervaded my soul. Father watched my emotions with deep interest, and was delighted with the startling and happy effect produced on my mind. We passed quickly through the different stages of our progress, till we arrived at the fifth spiritual sphere, which is my present home. I am often with my friends on earth, and would gladly influence them, and prove my identity to them, if they would render themselves receptive to my power.
527. After leaving the earth, incredible and more magnificent sights filled my amazed vision, and they became more beautiful at every stage of our journey. I sensed that a significant change had occurred within me, as overwhelming sensations of joy filled my soul. My father observed my feelings with great interest and was thrilled by the surprising and uplifting effect it had on my mind. We quickly moved through the various stages of our progress until we reached the fifth spiritual sphere, which is now my home. I often connect with my friends on earth and would gladly reach out to them and prove my identity if they would allow themselves to be open to my influence.
528. My present home, in point of beauty, far excels any scene ever witnessed by mortal eye. The interior of nature is laid open to the spirit’s perception, and the hidden treasures of earth are exposed to its view. When we desire to be with our friends on earth, we have only to will it, and our desire is instantly gratified. We can visit the spheres below, but not those above us until we are prepared for admission into them by a gradual process of development.
528. My current home is far more beautiful than anything I’ve ever seen. The essence of nature is revealed to the spirit’s understanding, and the hidden wonders of the earth are visible. When we want to be with our friends on earth, all we have to do is wish for it, and our wish is immediately fulfilled. We can visit the realms below us, but we can’t access those above until we are ready for entry through a gradual process of growth.
529. The first spiritual sphere is the abode of those spirits whose desires are low and sensuous; they pursue those pleasures which are most congenial to their unrefined and grovelling natures; but as their moral faculties become strengthened, they lose their taste for debasing pursuits, and rise in the scale of being. The brightness of the halo which envelopes the spirit is increased in proportion to its increase of moral and intellectual greatness.
529. The first spiritual sphere is where spirits with basic and physical desires reside; they seek out pleasures that fit their low and base natures. However, as their moral qualities strengthen, they start to lose interest in degrading pursuits and elevate themselves in the scale of existence. The brightness of the halo surrounding a spirit increases as its moral and intellectual greatness grows.
532. Each individual in the spirit world is judged and suffers according to the deeds done in the body. There is no possible escape from the legitimate consequences of evil actions. The book of God’s judgment is the record made on the tablets of the mind, and it may be read by all. The hypocrite can remain hypocrite no longer, as he will inevitably appear in his true colours; and in this fact, in part, shall his punishment consist.
532. Everyone in the spirit world is judged and experiences consequences based on the actions taken in life. There's no way to avoid the rightful outcomes of bad deeds. God's judgment book is the record stored in the mind, which everyone can access. The hypocrite can no longer hide behind their facade, as they'll ultimately show their true self; and this realization will be part of their punishment.
533. I would say a few words to you concerning the condition of infants. The infant spirit ascends directly to the seventh sphere, and is given in charge of a guardian spirit, by whom it is cared for and instructed in those things which most serve to develop its intellectual powers. It is permitted occasionally to visit its parents who may be in lower spheres, and to descend even to earth with its guardian angel, who often communicates for it.
533. I want to share some thoughts about the state of infants. The spirit of an infant goes straight to the seventh sphere and is assigned a guardian spirit, who looks after it and teaches it things that help develop its intellectual abilities. It is allowed to occasionally visit its parents, who might be in lower spheres, and even come down to earth with its guardian angel, who often communicates on its behalf.
536. It is thought by many of our brothers in the flesh that we will impart to them all the knowledge that we possess respecting the mysteries of the spheres; but on this point let them be undeceived, for it is utterly impossible for them to comprehend all in their present rudimental state. Our chief object is to assure them, by unmistakable signs, of the sou111l’s immortality, and the conditions necessary to be observed by them in order to obtain a happy future existence.
536. Many of our brothers in the flesh believe that we will share with them all the knowledge we have about the mysteries of the spheres; but regarding this, let them be clear, as it is completely impossible for them to grasp everything in their current simplistic state. Our main goal is to assure them, through clear signs, of the soul’s immortality, and the conditions they need to follow to achieve a happy future existence.
537. Notwithstanding the truth of spirit manifestations and spirit teachings, there are many persons who will not readily perceive it; their minds are so much cramped and distorted by false teachings, that many years shall have elapsed before there can be much improvement in them; of such it hath been said, “They would not believe though one should arise from the dead.”
537. Despite the reality of spirit manifestations and teachings, there are many people who simply won’t see it; their minds are so constrained and twisted by false beliefs that it will take many years before significant improvement can happen; of these, it has been said, “They wouldn’t believe even if someone came back from the dead.”
538. My brother, I would say a word to you touching your duty in regard to the present dispensation. You occupy a prominent and important place in the dissemination of this most glorious gospel; your mind has ever been desirous of the truth; a uniform consistency of conduct has marked your course through life: pursue, then, the even tenor of your way, and let love be the controlling principle of your motives and actions, and if reviled, revile not again, but bear all things nobly for the truth’s sake, and great will be your reward. I would say, moreover, let your reason determine the value of our teachings. You are engrossed to some extent by the cares and perplexities of earth life; therefore you cannot so fully realize the wondrous joys which await you in yonder peaceful heaven!
538. My brother, I want to say something to you about your duty regarding the current situation. You hold a significant and crucial role in spreading this wonderful gospel; your mind has always sought the truth; a consistent way of living has characterized your journey through life. So, keep following your path, and let love guide your motives and actions. If you face criticism, don’t retaliate, but bear everything with dignity for the sake of the truth, and your rewards will be great. Additionally, let your reason evaluate the value of our teachings. You are somewhat preoccupied with the worries and challenges of earthly life; therefore, you may not fully grasp the incredible joys that await you in that peaceful heaven!
Martha.
Martha.
My Brother’s account of his Spiritual Birth.
540. Dear brother Robert: How long I remained in a state of unconsciousness, previous to my spiritual birth, is unknown to me; suffice it to say, when the vital cord which bound me to the physical body was parted, I experienced a full consciousness of my personality. I enjoyed perfect freedom from pain and sickness, and an unwonted degree of strength and buoyancy of spirit; sensations of the most exalted character took possession of me, and a holy calm pervaded the sanctuary of my soul. It was not, however, until I saw my body lying upon the bed, that the true nature of my situation flashed across my mind. I shall never forget that moment of ecstatic bliss. I felt a sudden and indescribable consciousness of increased mental and physical power, and my body was most beautifully and symmetrically formed; in fact, I beheld myself a perfect and immortal man! I perceived, too, that my step was lighter, freer, and more elastic than usual, and my whole system was singularly rejuvenated. I knew that I was in eternity, yet I saw that I was upon the earth. As my mind became clear, and my vision less obstructed, a radiant spirit, whom I had not before noticed, addressed me in these words: “Brother! welcome, welcome, to the bright and joyous spirit land, to this blest habi112tation for the children of men, to this land of ceaseless progression.” The spirit having spoken thus, beckoned me away.
540. Dear brother Robert: I don’t know how long I was in a state of unconsciousness before my spiritual awakening; all I can say is that when the connection tying me to my physical body was broken, I became fully aware of my identity. I felt completely free from pain and sickness, and an extraordinary sense of strength and joy filled my spirit; I was overcome by feelings of the highest nature, and a sense of holy peace filled my soul. However, it wasn’t until I saw my body lying on the bed that the reality of my situation struck me. I will never forget that moment of pure bliss. I felt a sudden and indescribable awareness of heightened mental and physical power, and my body appeared beautifully and symmetrically formed; in fact, I saw myself as a perfect and immortal man! I also noticed that my steps were lighter, freer, and more energetic than usual, and my entire being felt remarkably rejuvenated. I understood that I was in eternity, yet I could still see that I was on earth. As my mind cleared and my vision sharpened, a radiant spirit, whom I had not noticed before, spoke to me, saying: “Brother! welcome, welcome, to the bright and joyful spirit land, to this blessed home for the children of men, to this land of endless progression.” After speaking, the spirit gestured for me to follow.
541. Having passed beyond the sphere of earth, we entered the regions of perpetual day, where the foot of mortal never trod; where the brilliant flowers were never culled by mortal hands; where beautiful spirits, angelic beings, float in mid air, and sport beside the sparkling fountains; where harmonious voices mingle with the rich tones of golden harps, and silver flute-notes ascend to the arching heavens. On our way thither we saw many companies of ministering angels passing to and fro on their respective missions. Some, who were assembled in groups, talked earnestly together upon congenial subjects; while others blended their voices in anthems of praise, whose echoes were prolonged far up through the realms of space to blend with still more glorious harmonies in spheres above. Those celestial beings, though beautiful beyond the conception of finite man, were not of the highest order of angels. They belong to that class whose mission is to visit the dwellings of men, and to minister unto the bereaved and afflicted of earth; to tend the beds of the dying, and to whisper rest to the weary and hope to the desponding.
541. After leaving the realm of Earth, we entered the land of endless daylight, where no human has ever walked; where dazzling flowers have never been picked by human hands; where lovely spirits, angelic beings, float in the air and play beside sparkling fountains; where harmonious voices blend with the rich sounds of golden harps, and notes from silver flutes rise to the arching heavens. On our journey there, we saw many groups of ministering angels moving back and forth on their various missions. Some, gathered in clusters, engaged in earnest discussions on topics they held dear; while others joined their voices in anthems of praise, the echoes of which stretched far up through the realms of space to merge with even more glorious harmonies in higher spheres. Those celestial beings, though incredibly beautiful beyond human understanding, were not of the highest order of angels. They belong to the group assigned to visit human homes and to comfort the grieving and suffering on Earth; to care for the dying, and to offer rest to the weary and hope to the hopeless.
542. My brother, I might speak to you of the past, but I prefer to open the door of the bright and glorious future. Solon said that no one should call himself happy before death; now, although I do not sanction this advice of the distinguished sage, I know that there is, comparatively speaking, no happiness in the rudimentary state; no pleasure equal to that which awaits the resurrected spirit in those beautiful mansions where it shall forever bathe in the eternal sunlight of its Father’s love. I cannot find words to describe to you the magnificent creations of Him from whom all order, beauty, and harmony proceed.
542. My brother, I could talk to you about the past, but I’d rather focus on the bright and glorious future. Solon said that no one should consider himself happy before death; while I don’t fully agree with this wise advice, I do believe that there is, relatively speaking, no happiness in a basic state; no joy matches what the resurrected spirit will experience in those beautiful places where it will forever bask in the eternal light of its Father’s love. I can't find the words to describe the magnificent creations of Him from whom all order, beauty, and harmony come.
Brother, the years of your external life are drawing to a close. When your initial term is finished, you will enter upon an unending series of moral and intellectual developments; then you will be fully compensated for all that you have endured in the cause of truth on earth. Your present life, remember, is but the prelude to ineffable joys in the world beyond the grave. Thank God, your barque is not drifting rudderless and pilot113less on the great ocean of time. No! she is well-manned and equipped, and pursues her direct course, fearing neither Scylla nor Charybdis.
Brother, your time in this life is coming to an end. When your first phase is over, you will start an endless journey of moral and intellectual growth; then you will be fully rewarded for everything you’ve endured in the name of truth here on earth. Remember, your current life is just the beginning of unimaginable joys in the afterlife. Thank God, your ship isn’t aimlessly drifting without direction on the vast ocean of time. No! It is well-staffed and prepared, and it’s following its path, not fearing any obstacles.
Robert, you have acted nobly and fearlessly in defending the great cause of humanity. We are watching your movements with great interest. Continue to devote your mental energies to the development of spiritual facts, and we will aid you when conditions favour. Farewell.
Robert, you have acted bravely and without fear in defending the important cause of humanity. We're closely following your actions with great interest. Keep focusing your mental efforts on developing spiritual truths, and we’ll support you when the time is right. Goodbye.
C. W. H.
C.W.H.
CONVOCATION OF SPIRITS.
Sixty-four Queries addressed to a Convocation of Worthies from the Spirit World; also, the Replies given by them, and confirmed under conditions which no mortal could pervert.
Sixty-four Questions posed to a Gathering of Great Figures from the Spirit World; along with their Answers, which were verified under conditions that no human could distort.
548. Having received many pages of communication from my father, sister, brother, and certain other spirit friends, on the subject of the spirit world, and having been urged by him and other inhabitants of that world to publish the information thus communicated, I represented, at a time when this honoured being reported his presence, that I felt a reluctance at publishing solely on the authority of my relations; and requested that certain distinguished spirits, who, as I had been told, had attended one of my lectures at Boston, should sanction a synopsis of the facts which I had learned respecting the spirit world. (409 to 547.)
548. After receiving numerous pages of messages from my father, sister, brother, and some other spirit friends about the spirit world, and being encouraged by him and others from that world to share the information, I expressed, when this respected being announced his presence, that I was hesitant to publish only based on the authority of my family; and I asked that some prominent spirits, who I had been told attended one of my lectures in Boston, should approve a summary of the facts I had gathered regarding the spirit world. (409 to 547.)
549. The propriety of my request being admitted, it was appointed that on Monday, the 18th of February, 1855, at nine o’clock, there should be a convocation of some of the worthies in question at the dwelling of the excellent medium employed. Accordingly, soon after my arrival there, at the appointed time, my father reported himself, and the following names were spelt out as being present:
549. Since my request was accepted, it was decided that on Monday, February 18, 1855, at nine o’clock, a meeting of some of the important individuals would take place at the home of the skilled medium involved. So, shortly after I arrived at the scheduled time, my father announced his presence, and the following names were spelled out as being there:
- George Washington,
- J. Q. Adams,
- Wm. H. Harrison,
- A. Jackson,
- Henry Clay,
- Benjamin Franklin,
- W. E. Channing,
- H. K. White,
- Isaac Newton,
- Byron,
- Martha Washington,
- Besides relatives and friends.
551. The answers were given through an instrument analogous to that represented by Fig. 1, Plate 4, and described on the page opposite to the plate.
551. The answers were provided through a device similar to the one shown in Fig. 1, Plate 4, and detailed on the page facing the plate.
552. Finally, after all the queries had been answered agreeably to the114 usual conditions, a confirmation of the whole was given under test conditions, as explained in the page opposite Plate 4.
552. Finally, after all the questions had been answered in line with the usual conditions, a confirmation of everything was given under test conditions, as explained on the opposite page Plate 4.
553. Relying on these conditions as competent to secure the issue against the control of the medium or that of any other mortal, the question was put, “Have all the answers been correctly communicated?” In reply, the index moved so as to point to the word “Yes,” and the following address was made at the same time:
553. Relying on these conditions as capable of ensuring the outcome against the influence of the medium or any other person, the question was asked, “Have all the answers been communicated correctly?” In response, the index moved to indicate the word “Yes,” and at the same time, the following message was conveyed:
556. (1.) Is it true that within a space lying between the earth and the lunar orbit there are seven concentric regions, denominated spheres, which may be called the country of spirits; that this country has all the features of terrestrial scenery, but with a much greater beauty, even in the third sphere, while the beauty of the other four spheres is greater in proportion as they are higher?
556. (1.) Is it true that in the space between the Earth and the lunar orbit, there are seven concentric areas, called spheres, which can be referred to as the realm of spirits? This realm has all the characteristics of earthly landscapes, but with much greater beauty, especially in the third sphere, while the beauty of the other four spheres increases with their altitude?
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yup.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yeah.
559. (4.) Are the narratives of their translation to the spirit world, which I have received from my sister, brother, William Wiggins, and the spirit Maria, to be relied on as coming from them, and as correct in their representations of the usual process of transference to the spiritual world after death?
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yep.
Ans. Seven.
Ans. 7.
Ans. Six.
Six.
Ans. Six.
Six.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yup.
Ans. Either as circles or planes.
Ans. Either as circles or flat surfaces.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. Sixty miles.
60 miles.
Ans. Yes.
Answer: Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. By a peculiar sun within the spiritual spheres.
Ans. By a unique light within the spiritual realms.
Ans. No.
Ans. Nope.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. No.
Ans. Nope.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. Of course, not without a loss of ponderosity, which involves a loss of identity or a transformation.
Ans. Of course, not without a loss of significance, which leads to a loss of identity or a change.
Ans. Yes.
Yep. Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Answer: Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yep.
Ans. Yes.
Answer: Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. In the third sphere.
In the third area.
Ans. Diversity of impression made upon the spirit.
Different effects on the spirit.
Ans. A moral specific gravity, in which the weight is inversely as the merit, prevents the spirit from rising above his proper level.
Ans. A moral specific gravity, where the weight is inversely related to the merit, keeps the spirit from rising above its proper level.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. They are in the spheres heavy as compared with other spirits, but their weight would not influence a scale-beam in this mundane sphere.
Ans. They are heavy in their realms compared to other spirits, but their weight wouldn’t affect a scale in this physical world.
Ans. They do not act by weight, but all spirits, under favourable conditions and with certain means, possess, in a minute degree, a portion of that power possessed to an infinite extent by the Deity, of annulling gravitation and vis inertiæ; and though they cannot exercise such powers without the aid of a medium, the medium is to them as an implement in the hands of a human being.
Ans. They don't operate based on weight, but all spirits, under the right conditions and with specific means, have a tiny bit of the unlimited power that the Deity has to negate gravity and inertia; and although they can't use such powers without a medium, the medium serves as a tool for them, much like an instrument in the hands of a person.
Ans. Gravity and vis inertiæ being neutralized, the physical law of action and reaction does not prevail against the spirit volition.
Ans. With gravity and inertia canceled out, the physical law of action and reaction doesn't apply to the will of the spirit.
Ans. Not necessarily.
Ans. Not really.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yeah.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. It is denied.
Ans. It's denied.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yup.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yep.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yep.
Ans. It is carefully instructed.
Ans. It is clearly instructed.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. It is not rendered unhappy, in consequence of the peculiar manner in which such circumstances act upon the spirit mind.
Ans. It is not made unhappy because of the unique way such circumstances affect the mind and spirit.
Ans. In purity and simplicity they are contented to live.
Ans. They are happy to live with purity and simplicity.
Ans. Greater.
Ans. Bigger.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yup.
Ans. Between spirits joined by matrimony in the spheres there is a greater blending of mutual self-love into one common sentiment than in any other friendship.
Ans. Among spirits united by marriage in the realms, there is a deeper merging of mutual self-love into a shared feeling than in any other type of friendship.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Answer. Yes.
Ans. No.
Answer: No.
Ans. Yes.
Sure.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. Yes.
Ans. Yeah.
Ans. Yes.
Yes.
Ans. The spiritual gas imperceptibly accompanying atmospheric air is especially necessary to fishes.
Ans. The spiritual gas that goes unnoticed in the air is especially important for fish.
Ans. Belief, being an involuntary act of the mind, has no merit or culpability attached to it, excepting so far as it is the consequence or is productive of prejudices; the advance of a spirit is retarded by these defects.
Ans. Belief, as an uncontrollable action of the mind, carries no value or blame except when it leads to biases; these flaws hold back the progress of one's spirit.
Ans. In the spheres, vice is displayed by the endurance of bad passions; virtue is manifested by love, purity, and the aspiration for improvement.
Ans. In the spheres, bad behaviors are shown through the persistence of negative feelings; goodness is shown through love, purity, and the desire to improve.
617. (62.) As the diversities of human character are clearly the results of organization and education, neither of which can be controlled by the human beings whose merit or demerit is the inevitable consequence, how can there be any culpability? It is true that a man can act as he wills; but is not his will the creature of his passions and reason jointly? If his passions be increased, will not reason be less capable of controlling them? and, vice versâ, if his passions be enfeebled or his reason strengthened, will not his passions have less sway? Does it not follow that while we must in self-defence resist or restrain those who cannot govern themselves, should we not commiserate all who have the misfortune to be so badly constituted?
617. (62.) Since the differences in human character clearly result from biology and upbringing, neither of which can be controlled by the individuals whose actions reflect their strengths or weaknesses, how can there be any blame? It's true that a person can act according to their will; but isn't their will shaped by both their emotions and their reasoning? If their emotions are heightened, won't their reasoning be less effective in controlling them? And conversely, if their emotions are weakened or their reasoning is stronger, won't their emotions have less influence? Doesn't it follow that while we must defend ourselves by resisting or restraining those who cannot control themselves, we should also feel pity for those who are so unfortunate as to be poorly made?
Ans. We are no more able to answer that than you.
Ans. We can't answer that any better than you can.
618. (63.) When a being virtuously constituted is murdered by one of the opposite character, who is most an object of commiseration? which is most favoured as a creature of God? Is not the difference between these beings analogous to that between the dog and the wolf? Both creatures of God—one is to be extirpated, the other cherished, as an inevitable consequence of the laws of creation?
618. (63.) When a virtuous person is killed by someone with the opposite character, who deserves more sympathy? Who is more favored as a creation of God? Isn't the difference between these beings similar to that between a dog and a wolf? Both are creations of God—one should be eliminated, while the other should be cherished, as a natural result of the laws of creation?
Ans. The victim is most favoured.
Ans. The victim is most favored.
619. (64.) Has not the analogy between a wicked or a savage man, and one who has the advantage of a good organization and education, a better exemplification in the case of a wild dog, and one brought up by a kind master, since the wild dog is reclaimable, may be reformed, and so may the bad or savage man. Hence, in the spheres, is not punishment or restraint made with a view to reformation rather than as a retribution for inevitable defects?
619. (64.) Isn't the comparison between a wicked or savage person and someone who benefits from a good upbringing and education better illustrated by the example of a wild dog and one raised by a caring owner? The wild dog can be trained and changed, just like a bad or savage person can. So, in these situations, isn't punishment or restraint aimed more at reforming someone rather than just punishing them for their unavoidable flaws?
Ans. Correct.
Ans. Right.
EXPOSITION OF THE INFORMATION RECEIVED FROM THE SPIRIT WORLD.
621. At the distance of about sixty miles from the terrestrial surface, the spirit world commences. It consists of six bands or zones, designated as spheres, surrounding the earth, so as to have one common centre with it and with each other. An idea of these rings may be formed from that of the planet Saturn, excepting that they are comparatively much nearer to their planet, and that they have their broad surfaces parallel to the planet, and at right angles to the ecliptic, instead of being like Saturn’s rings, so arranged that their surfaces are parallel to the plane in which his ecliptic exists.
621. About sixty miles above the Earth’s surface, the spirit world begins. It consists of six bands or zones, called spheres, that surround the Earth, sharing a common center with it and with one another. You can think of these rings like those of the planet Saturn, except they are much closer to their planet, and their wide surfaces are parallel to the planet and perpendicular to the ecliptic, rather than being aligned like Saturn’s rings, which are parallel to the plane of its ecliptic.
622. Supposing the earth to be represented by a globe of thirteen and a half inches in diameter, the lower surface of the lowest of the spiritual spheres, if represented in due proportion to the actual distance from the earth, would be only one-tenth of an inch from the terrestrial surface. The bands observed over the regions in the planet Jupiter which correspond with our tropical regions, agree very well in relative position with those which are assigned to our spiritual spheres. They are probably the spiritual spheres of that planet.
622. If we imagine the earth as a globe with a diameter of thirteen and a half inches, the lowest part of the spiritual spheres, if scaled to the actual distance from the earth, would be only one-tenth of an inch above the earth's surface. The bands seen over the areas of Jupiter that match our tropical regions align quite nicely with those designated for our spiritual spheres. They likely represent the spiritual spheres of that planet.
It having struck me as possible that these bands might be due to spiritual spheres appertaining to Jupiter, I inquired of the spirits; their reply was confirmatory.
It occurred to me that these bands might be related to spiritual realms connected to Jupiter, so I asked the spirits; their response confirmed my thought.
623. The objection naturally occurs that ours are invisible to us; yet we know that light may be polarized in passing through transparent masses so as to produce effects in one case which it does not in others when not so polarized. It would have to pass through the spheres of Jupiter, and return through them again. This light, twice subjected to the ordeal of passing through the spirit world, when contrasted with that which goes and returns without any such ordeal, may undergo a change of a nature to produce an effect upon the eye, when, in the absence of this contrast, no visual change should be perceptible.
623. It’s a common objection that the things we’re discussing are invisible to us; however, we know that light can be polarized as it moves through clear substances, creating effects in some situations that it doesn’t in others when it’s not polarized. This light would need to travel through Jupiter’s atmospheres and come back through them again. This light, having gone through the experience of passing through the spirit world twice, might change compared to light that travels back and forth without going through such an experience, potentially producing an effect on the eye when, without this comparison, no visual change would be noticeable.
624. I am aware that it has been alleged that the bands do not appear always to occupy the same boundaries, and at times appear separated or more unequally distributed than at others. This may be due in part to actual changes which the spiritual essence may undergo as to its relative position, or optical delusions, if not deviations, resulting from the susceptibility of polarizing causes.
624. I know there are claims that the bands don’t always stay within the same boundaries, and sometimes they seem to be separated or unevenly distributed. This could be partly because the spiritual essence might change its relative position, or it could be due to optical illusions—or even shifts—caused by the effects of polarizing factors.
628. When the rays of the setting sun fall upon the glass of windows, we see one portion reflected with great effulgence, yet another goes through the glass. The last-mentioned portion of the rays received on a second pane are reflected, while those which were reflected will pass through another pane without reflection.
628. When the rays of the setting sun hit the glass windows, some are reflected brightly, while others pass through the glass. The portion of the rays that passes through the first pane gets reflected off a second pane, while the rays that were reflected off the first pane pass through another pane without reflecting.
631. Each sphere is divided into six “circles” or plains. More properly these may be described as concentric zones, occupying each about one-sixth of the space comprised within the boundaries of the sphere. There being six subdivisions to each of the six spheres, in all there must be thirty-six gradations.
631. Each sphere is split into six "circles" or levels. More accurately, these can be described as concentric zones, each taking up about one-sixth of the area within the boundaries of the sphere. Since there are six subdivisions in each of the six spheres, there are a total of thirty-six gradations.
633. This allegation of the existence of an invisible spirit world within the clear azure space intervening between the surface of this globe and the lunar orbit may startle the reader; and yet this idea may have been presented by Scripture to the same mind, without awakening skepticism. It was urged by a spirit friend—Is it more wonderful that you should find our habitations invisible, than that we are invisible?
633. This claim about the existence of an unseen spirit world in the clear blue space between the surface of Earth and the moon's orbit might surprise the reader; yet this concept may have been introduced by Scripture to the same mind, without causing doubt. A spirit friend suggested—Is it more astonishing that you find our homes invisible than that we are?
634. It is plain that between the lowest degrees of vice, ignorance, and folly, and the highest degrees of virtue, learning, and wisdom, there are many gradations. When we are translated to the spheres, we take a rank proportional to our merit, which seems to be there intuitively susceptible of estimation by the law above alluded to, of the grossness being greater as the character is more imperfect. Both the spirits and spheres are represented as having a gradation in constitutional refinement, so that the sphere to which a spirit belongs is intuitively manifest. Rank is determined by a sort of moral specific gravity, in which merit is inversely as weight. Another means of distinction is a circumambient halo by which every spirit is accompanied, which passes from a darkness to effulgency as the spirit belongs to a higher plane. Even mortals are alleged to be surrounded with a halo visible to spirits, although not to themselves. Intuitively, from the extent and nature of this halo, spirits perceive the sphere to which any mundane being belongs. The effulgence of the higher spirits is represented as splendid. As soon as emancipated from their corporeal tenement, spirits enter the spheres, and are entitled to a station higher in direct proportion to their morality, wisdom, knowledge, and intellectual refinement.
634. It's clear that there are many levels between the lowest forms of vice, ignorance, and foolishness, and the highest forms of virtue, knowledge, and wisdom. When we move to the spiritual realms, we take a place that reflects our worth, which seems to be intuitively measurable by the principle mentioned earlier: the more imperfect the character, the greater the grossness. Both spirits and realms show a range of inherent refinement, making it obvious which sphere a spirit belongs to. Rank is defined by a kind of moral density, where merit is inversely related to weight. Another way to distinguish spirits is by a surrounding halo, which varies from darkness to brightness based on the spirit's level. Even humans are said to have a halo visible to spirits, although they can't see it themselves. Spirits can intuitively assess the sphere of any earthly being based on the size and nature of this halo. The brightness of the higher spirits is described as magnificent. Once freed from their physical bodies, spirits enter the spiritual realms and are assigned a position that correlates directly with their morality, wisdom, knowledge, and intellectual refinement.
635. The first spiritual sphere, or the second in the whole series, is as large as all the other five above it. This is the hell or Hades of the spirit world, where all sensual, malevolent, selfish beings reside. The next sphere above this, or the third in the whole series, is the habitation of all well-meaning persons, however bigoted, fanatical, or ignorant. Here they are tolerably happy.
635. The first spiritual sphere, or the second in the entire series, is as large as the other five above it. This is the hell or Hades of the spirit world, where all sensual, malevolent, and selfish beings live. The next sphere above this, or the third in the entire series, is the home of all well-meaning people, no matter how bigoted, fanatical, or ignorant they might be. Here, they experience a tolerable sense of happiness.
636. In proportion as spirits improve in purity, benevolence, and wisdom, they ascend. They may ascend as love-spirits, in consequence of the two122 first-mentioned attributes; but cannot go up on account of wisdom alone. A knave, however wise, cannot advance in the spheres. There are, in fact, two modes of ascent—love, so called, and love and wisdom united. Those who go up in love are called love-spirits; those who unite both qualifications are called wisdom-spirits. A feminine spirit, who had been remarkable for her disinterested devotion to her relatives and friends, ascended almost forthwith to the fifth sphere. My friend W. W. had an ascent equally rapid to the same sphere. Yet another spirit, who was fully as free from vice as either of those above alluded to, took many years to ascend in wisdom to the fifth sphere, not being satisfied to rise unless accompanied by the attributes of wisdom, as well as love. Spirit B. alleged that because he was a free-thinker he went up more quickly than another spirit, A. A., being questioned, admitted that B. had got on more speedily, in consequence of superior liberality.
636. As spirits become purer, more compassionate, and wiser, they rise. They can ascend as love-spirits because of the first two attributes mentioned, but they can't move up solely due to wisdom. A clever person, despite their intelligence, cannot progress in the spiritual realms. In fact, there are two ways to rise—through love alone, or through a combination of love and wisdom. Those who ascend through love are known as love-spirits; those who possess both qualities are called wisdom-spirits. A female spirit, who was known for her selfless dedication to her family and friends, quickly ascended to the fifth sphere. My friend W. W. also experienced a similar rapid rise to the same sphere. However, another spirit, who was just as free from vice as the ones mentioned previously, took many years to ascend in wisdom to the fifth sphere, not wanting to rise unless accompanied by both wisdom and love. Spirit B claimed that being a free thinker allowed him to rise faster than spirit A. When questioned, A acknowledged that B had indeed progressed more quickly due to his greater open-mindedness.
639. Degradation ensues as an inevitable consequence of vice, and as the means of reform, not as vindictive punishment. God is represented as all love, and is never named without the most zealous devotion. Spirits in any sphere can descend into any sphere below that to which they belong, but cannot ascend above this sphere. They are surrounded by a halo, which is brighter in proportion as their sphere is higher. They have an intuitive power of judging of each other and of mortals. Attachments originating in this life are strengthened, while hatred passes away. The spirits in the upper spheres have “ineffable” happiness. The sufferings of those below are negative, rather than positive. They are made to feel shame at a degradation which is rendered intuitively evident to themselves and all other spirits. But all are capable of improvement, so as to have elevation and happiness within their reach sooner or later. The higher spirits are always ready to assist sinners by kind admonition. (92.)
639. Degradation occurs as a natural result of wrongdoing and as a way to reform, not as a harsh punishment. God is seen as pure love and is always referred to with deep devotion. Spirits in any realm can fall into lower realms but can't rise above their own. They are surrounded by a halo, which shines brighter the higher their realm is. They have an innate ability to assess each other and humans. Bonds formed in this life become stronger, while hatred fades away. Spirits in the higher realms experience “ineffable” happiness. The suffering of those in lower realms is more about feeling negative emotions rather than positive ones. They feel shame due to the degradation that becomes clear to themselves and other spirits. However, everyone has the potential for growth, making elevation and happiness achievable sooner or later. Higher spirits are always willing to help those who have sinned with gentle guidance. (92.)
641. Spirits are carried along with our globe by their moral affections and affinity, which upon them acts as gravitation upon material bodies. They are just where they wish themselves to be, as they move in obedience to their moral impulses or aspirations, not having a gross, material body to carry along with them.
643. Blessed spirits are endowed with a power competent to the gratification of every rational want. They enjoy, as I am authorized to say by the convocation of spirits to whom allusion has been made, a power like that ascribed to the genius of Aladdin’s lamp. (593.)
643. Blessed spirits have a power capable of fulfilling every rational desire. They experience, as I can affirm based on the gathering of spirits mentioned earlier, a power similar to that attributed to the genius of Aladdin’s lamp. (593.)
646. Whether the connubial tie endures or not, is optional. Hence those who have not found their matrimonial connection a source of happiness in this world, are at liberty to seek a new hymeneal union in the spirit world. Where there have been a plurality of husbands or wives, those unite who find themselves happy in doing so. But, as if to indemnify mortals for the crosses in marriage or in love, or for the dreariness of mundane celibacy, all are destined in the spheres to find a counterpart with whom they may be happy, there being peculiarly ardent pleasurable emotions attached to the connubial union in the spheres which mortals cannot understand.
646. Whether a marriage lasts or not is a personal choice. Therefore, those who haven’t found happiness in their marriage in this life are free to pursue a new union in the spirit world. In cases where there have been multiple husbands or wives, those who find happiness in being together will unite. But, as if to compensate people for the struggles in marriage or love, or for the loneliness of being single, everyone is meant to find a partner in the afterlife with whom they can be happy. There are intense and pleasurable emotions associated with marriage in the afterlife that people on Earth can’t fully comprehend.
648. The alleged motives for our existence in this rudimental sphere, is the necessity of contrast to enable us to appreciate the immunity from suffering of the higher spheres. Infants in this respect are at a disadvantage; but being unable to appreciate their deficiency, do not grieve therefor. “Where ignorance is bliss, ‘twere folly to be wise.”
648. The supposed reasons for our existence in this basic realm are the need for contrast, which helps us appreciate the freedom from suffering in higher realms. Infants, in this case, are at a disadvantage; however, since they can't understand their lack, they don't feel upset about it. “Where ignorance is bliss, it would be foolish to be wise.”
649. Allusion has already been made to the condition of those who have departed from this world during infancy, or prior to maturity. A letter from one of my sons who died when five months old has been introduced into this work, (470.) The change which ensues on spiritual birth, has been described. (488.)
649. We've already mentioned the situation of those who left this world during infancy or before they reached maturity. A letter from one of my sons who passed away at five months old has been included in this work, (470.) The transformation that happens with spiritual birth has been explained. (488.)
650. Among the most wonderful facts narrated by my spirit father, and sanctioned by the convocation of spirits, is the existence of a spiritual sun concentric with ours, and yet emitting independent rays for the spirit world, not for our world; while the rays of our sun do not reach the world above mentioned.
650. Among the most amazing things my spiritual father shared and that were confirmed by the gathering of spirits is the existence of a spiritual sun that is centered around ours but emits rays specifically for the spirit world, not for our world; meanwhile, the rays from our sun do not reach the aforementioned world above.
653. After I had written the preceding exposition of the knowledge imparted to me of the spirit world, I solicited an intercommunion with Washington, to submit the summary for his sanction. Accordingly, he was ushered into my presence by a reliable spirit, and my exposition, and the pages contrasting the heaven of Spiritualism with that of Scripture, were read, and received his sanction under test conditions. (See Plate 4.)
653. After I had written the previous explanation of the knowledge I received about the spirit world, I asked to connect with Washington to present the summary for his approval. He was then brought to me by a trustworthy spirit, and my explanation, along with the pages comparing the heaven of Spiritualism to that of Scripture, were read and approved by him under test conditions. (See Plate 4.)
654. In this, my first interview, I premised that I wished to let him know that I had always been one of his most devoted political advocates, having always styled myself a Washington Federalist, and that I had as early as 1812 embodied my sentiments in some verses. He said he was aware that such verses were written by me, but would wish me to repeat them. I obeyed his request. They are as follows:
654. In this first interview of mine, I stated that I wanted him to know I had always been one of his most devoted supporters in politics, proudly calling myself a Washington Federalist, and that I had expressed my feelings in some verses back in 1812. He mentioned that he was aware I had written those verses, but he wanted me to recite them again. I fulfilled his request. They are as follows:
659. My friend, I sympathize with you in your arduous undertaking; but let me assure you that your reward will be greater than the suffering you have endured. Yes, most nobly you have fought against error; and you will yet place the banner of freedom high upon the battlement of truth. Farewell, noble scion of a noble man!
Geo. Washington.
George Washington.
APOLOGY FOR MY CONVERSION.
Apology for my change of opinion and belief in the existence and agency of Spirits.
660. I do not conceive that in my change of opinion I have been involved in any inconsistency of principle. It always appeared to me that in explaining the planetary movements, after arriving at the Newtonian boundary made by momentum and gravitation, there could be no alternative between appealing to the spiritual power of God, or resorting to atheism. An appeal to the power of God has always been my choice; nevertheless holding that wondrous power to be of a nature wholly unintelligible to finite man. (57 to 87.)
660. I don't believe that changing my opinion shows any inconsistency in my principles. It has always seemed to me that, when explaining planetary movements and reaching the Newtonian limits defined by momentum and gravity, the only options are to appeal to the spiritual power of God or to embrace atheism. I've always chosen to appeal to God's power, even while acknowledging that this amazing power is completely beyond human understanding. (57 to 87.)
661. Confining the range of my philosophy to the laws of motion, magnificently illustrated by the innumerable solar systems, but no less operative in every minute mechanical movement, I hold that I could only come to the same conclusion as Faraday, that if tables when associated with human beings moved, it must in some way be due to those beings, since, agreeably to all experience of the laws of matter in the material world, inanimate bodies cannot originate motion. But as when the planetary motions are considered, any hypothesis fails which does not account for the rationality of the result, and therefore involves the agency not only of a powerful but a rational cause; so the manifestations of Spiritualism,126 involving both reason and power, might consistently justify me in looking for agents endowed with the reason and power manifested by the phenomena. This power being invisible and imponderable, and at the same time rational, there was no alternative but to consider it as spiritual, no less than that to which planetary motion is due. In its potentiality the power thus manifested might be extremely minute as compared with the potentiality of the Creator; still it had to be of the same spiritual nature.
661. Narrowing my philosophy to the laws of motion, beautifully demonstrated by the countless solar systems but also very much at play in every tiny mechanical movement, I believe I reached the same conclusion as Faraday: if tables when around people move, it must somehow be because of those people, since, based on all experience with the laws of matter in the material world, inanimate objects cannot cause motion on their own. However, when we look at planetary motions, any theory that doesn't explain the rationality of the outcome fails and thus requires the presence of not just a powerful but also a rational cause; likewise, the phenomena of Spiritualism,126 which include both reason and power, might reasonably lead me to search for agents with the reason and power shown by these phenomena. This power is invisible, imponderable, and also rational, so I could only see it as spiritual, just like the force behind planetary motion. While this power could be extremely small compared to the potential of the Creator, it still had to be of the same spiritual essence.
662. It has not appeared unreasonable to infer that the soul in assuming the spirit form should acquire a power of which material beings are destitute, and of which they can only conceive an idea from its necessity to the operations of God. Parting with its material attributes, were the soul not to acquire others, even if it could exist, it would be perfectly helpless. Hence, in becoming an immaterial spirit, it must acquire powers indispensable and appropriate to that state of existence.
662. It hasn't seemed unreasonable to assume that when the soul takes on a spiritual form, it gains abilities that physical beings lack, and which they can only imagine as necessary for God's actions. If the soul gives up its physical traits but doesn't gain new ones, it would be completely powerless, even if it could exist. Therefore, in becoming a non-material spirit, it must obtain essential powers suitable for that state of existence.
663. Since we know that the animal frame for the most part after death, on the exposure to the air, warmth, and moisture, returns to the atmosphere whence it is mainly derived, it follows that on undergoing that awful change the soul must take the spirit form, unless it perish with its material tenement. So far, then, all who believe in the immortality of the soul, must concur with spiritualists that on dying we become spirits.
663. Since we understand that the body, after death, primarily returns to the atmosphere when exposed to air, warmth, and moisture, it follows that during this profound transformation, the soul must take on a spiritual form, unless it ceases to exist along with its physical body. Thus, everyone who believes in the immortality of the soul must agree with spiritualists that upon death we become spirits.
664. It will then be admitted by all who believe in the immortality of the soul that, as for every mortal that dies a spirit is born, innumerable spirits must exist. Is it not then reasonable to consider them as agents in producing phenomena which can only be ascribed to invisible, imponderable, rational, and affectionate beings, especially when they themselves sanction this inference by word and deed?
664. It will then be accepted by everyone who believes in the immortality of the soul that, for every person who dies, a spirit is born, meaning countless spirits must exist. Isn’t it reasonable to think of them as forces behind events that can only be attributed to invisible, weightless, rational, and caring beings, especially when they support this idea through their words and actions?
665. Were a tyrant to enclose a human being while alive within a cast-iron vessel, the aperture through which the introduction should be made being closed by a stopple soldered in air-tight, all the ponderable elements of the corporeal body would be retained; but can any one who believes the soul to survive the body, think that it would remain included in that vessel so long as it should endure? Cast-iron coats itself with a carbonated peroxide, vulgarly called rust, and then undergoes no farther change; so that the corporeal elements might be retained to an infinite time. But could the soul be thus imprisoned, perhaps to eternity? Could the tyranny of a man thus imprison an immortal soul? Does it not follow that the soul would not be confined by the air-tight and apparently impenetrable metallic vessel?
665. If a tyrant were to trap a living person inside a cast-iron container, sealing it shut with an airtight stopper, all the physical elements of the body would be kept inside. But can anyone who believes that the soul continues to exist after death think it would stay trapped in that container for however long it lasts? Cast iron develops a layer of carbonated peroxide, commonly known as rust, and does not undergo any further change, so the physical elements could be preserved indefinitely. But could the soul really be locked away like that, maybe forever? Can a person's tyranny truly confine an immortal soul? Doesn’t it make sense that the soul wouldn’t be trapped by the airtight, seemingly impenetrable metal container?
Invisibility of the Soul.
666. The invisibility of the soul in leaving the body, must be admitted, since, however the dying may be surrounded by their friends and nurses, and vigilantly guarded after death by watches, as customary with many, the soul is not seen to leave the body. It must, therefore, be in127visible, and capable of permeating cast-iron or any other material within which, while alive, an immortal being might be enclosed air-tight.
666. The invisibility of the soul when leaving the body has to be acknowledged. Even though the dying are surrounded by friends and nurses, and are carefully watched after death as is common practice for many, the soul can't be seen leaving the body. Therefore, it must be 127 invisible and able to pass through cast iron or any other material that might tightly enclose an immortal being while they are alive.
On the Whereabout of Heaven.
668. In communicating with a friendly spirit, I adverted to the difficulty of inducing people to conceive that in the clear azure space existing between the earth and moon, there should be scenery like ours, with plains, hills, mountains, valleys, rivers, lakes, seas, and every variety of edifice in greater perfection than upon earth. “You do not see us,” said my friend; “then why should you wonder at not seeing our world?”
668. While talking with a friendly spirit, I mentioned how hard it is for people to imagine that in the clear blue space between the Earth and the Moon, there could be landscapes like ours, with plains, hills, mountains, valleys, rivers, lakes, seas, and all kinds of buildings that are even more perfect than those on Earth. “You can’t see us,” my friend said; “so why should you be surprised that you can’t see our world?”
669. It is quite evident that no such obstacle stood in the way of belief in the existence of heaven among the Jews, as it is constantly referred to as being above; Noah’s deluge came through the windows of heaven; and this idea has been sustained in the language of Christ, as well as of the Hebrew prophets.
670. Elijah is represented as having visibly ascended to heaven. That the vicinity and invisibility of heaven are not at war with Scripture, is alleged in a recent work by the Rev. Mr. Harbaugh of the German Reformed Church, of Lancaster, Pennsylvania. He quotes approvingly a passage in a work, entitled “Physicial Theory of Another Life,” by Taylor, which I subjoin:
670. Elijah is depicted as having clearly ascended to heaven. The idea that heaven's proximity and invisibility don't conflict with Scripture is argued in a recent work by Rev. Mr. Harbaugh of the German Reformed Church in Lancaster, Pennsylvania. He quotes a passage from a book titled “Physical Theory of Another Life” by Taylor, which I’ll include here:
671. Taylor suggests—“That within the space occupied by the visible and ponderable universe, and on all sides of us, there is existing and moving another element, fraught with another species of life, corporeal indeed, and various in its orders, but not open to the cognízance of those who are confined to the conditions of animal organization, not to be seen nor heard, nor to be felt by man.” “Our present conjecture,” remarks the author in another place, “reaches to the extent of supposing that within the space encircled by the sidereal revolutions, there exists and moves a second universe, not less real than the one we are at present conversant with: a universe elaborate in structure, and replete with life; life agitated with momentous interests, and perhaps by frivolous interests; a universe conscious perhaps of the material spheres, or unconscious of them, and firmly believing (as we do) itself to be the only reality. Our planets in their sweep do not perforate the structure of this invisible creation; our suns do not scorch its plains: for the two collateral systems are not connected by any active affinities.”
671. Taylor suggests, “That within the space taken up by the visible and tangible universe, and all around us, there exists and moves another element, filled with another type of life, physical for sure, and varied in its forms, but not detectable by those limited to the conditions of animal existence, not to be seen, heard, or felt by humans.” “Our current guess,” the author notes elsewhere, “extends to the idea that within the space defined by the movements of the stars, there exists and functions a second universe, just as real as the one we currently know: a universe complex in structure and filled with life; life stirred by significant concerns, and maybe by trivial ones; a universe possibly aware of the material worlds, or unaware of them, and firmly believing (like us) itself to be the only reality. Our planets in their orbits do not penetrate the structure of this invisible creation; our suns do not scorch its fields: for the two separate systems are not linked by any active connections.”
672. This would bring “the things which are not seen,” indeed, near to and around us. To enter the other world would not be so much a removal in space, as just to be made loose from, or to become insensible to,128 the conditions of this life. Death will be only the destruction or disappearance of human and earthly affinities, and directly we shall be surrounded by affinities adapted to our new state of existence, and shall find for ourselves a congenial home in and around our present habitation.
672. This would bring “the things which are not seen” closer to us. Entering the other world wouldn’t be so much about moving through space as it would be about becoming free from, or becoming unaware of, 128 the conditions of this life. Death will simply be the end or fading away of human and earthly connections, and we will immediately find ourselves surrounded by connections suited to our new state of existence, discovering a welcoming home in and around our current living space.
673. Much is argued in favour of this theory. It is said in no place to interfere with Scripture, but rather to be countenanced by incidental hints and allusions. It is said to be made highly probable by the known truths of physical science. An unseen world, in all respects material, inhabited by corporeal beings, it is said, is possible. There are material elements which are not cognizable to any of our senses except by a round of research and experiment, and then only in their remote effects, as, for instance, electricity. The atmosphere also, and light, are material, and yet so subtle as almost entirely to evade our unassisted observation; and may there not be still others as yet to us unknown? We are related to, and become acquainted with, the external world by the medium of the five senses; but who will say that there are not other senses hidden in possibility in our nature which may by means of other affinities communicate with a world far more refined in its constitution, with which we cannot now come in contact? Science has discovered living animalculæ in the solidest substances; the air we breathe and the water we drink are the homes of myriads of beings, and though unseen by the naked eye, these elements are swarming with miniature life! It seems to be God’s motto, “Multum in parvo”—life in life, world in world, universe in universe! With these known facts in science before us, may we not, it is asked, consider the above theory probable?
673. There’s a lot of support for this theory. It claims not to conflict with Scripture, but instead to be supported by hints and references found within it. It's considered highly likely based on established truths of physical science. An invisible world, completely physical and filled with tangible beings, is said to be possible. There are material elements that we can't detect with our senses unless we conduct thorough research and experiments, and even then, we can only see their distant effects, like with electricity. The air and light are also physical, yet they are so subtle that they almost escape our unaided observation; could there be other elements that remain unknown to us? We connect with the external world through our five senses, but who can say there aren't hidden senses within us that could connect with a far more sophisticated world that we can't currently access? Science has found tiny living organisms in the densest materials; the air we breathe and the water we drink are filled with countless unseen creatures, teeming with microscopic life! It seems that God’s motto is, “Multum in parvo”—life within life, world within world, universe within universe! Given these scientific facts, might we not consider the above theory to be probable?
674. It is further supposed that this invisible world around us is the after stage of the present life; and as it is a stage of being in all respects superior to this, it may be that its inhabitants have a knowledge of us, though we have not of them, just as we are acquainted with grades of animalcule life beneath us, when it can hardly be supposed that they know any thing of our existence. Hence, too, in some exceptive cases it may be possible for them to break through the veil of separation, and appear in various ways unto men on the platform of human life. Then we are indeed “surrounded by a cloud of witnesses,” who stand around, or bend over us, and look with deep interest upon the struggle of life, and when they see it unequal in the case of the saints, they break through in their ardour, and become ministering spirits to those who are heirs of eternal life.
674. It is further believed that this invisible world around us is the next stage of existence after our current life; and since it is a realm of being that is superior to this one in every way, its inhabitants might be aware of us, even though we are not aware of them, similar to how we understand the different forms of microscopic life below us, even though it’s unlikely they know anything about our existence. Therefore, in some exceptional cases, it might be possible for them to break through the separation and appear to humans in various ways. In this sense, we truly are “surrounded by a cloud of witnesses,” who gather around us, observing with great interest our struggles in life, and when they see the challenges faced by the saints, they intervene with fervor, becoming guardian spirits for those who are destined for eternal life.
675. It is also supposed that these beings in the world unseen may have capacities to communicate with the remotest inhabitants of God’s universe. The facilities of communication may be so great in these ethereal climes, that space is annihilated, and the different hosts of intelligences in the wide universe may commune with each other and God as one family in their “Father’s house.”
675. It is also believed that these beings in the unseen world might have the ability to communicate with the farthest inhabitants of God’s universe. The means of communication may be so advanced in these ethereal realms that distance is meaningless, allowing the various groups of intelligences across the vast universe to connect with each other and God as one family in their “Father’s house.”
676. There is a surprising degree of coincidence between the speculations comprised in this quotation, and the accounts which I have received respecting the spirit world from some of those occupying an elevated grade therein. It has been observed above that if the soul be immortal, it cannot be imagined to remain in the grave, since the greater part of the human organization in hot weather escapes through putrefaction, as vapour or gas. Hence the endurance of the soul after death involves spiritual existence. We must, therefore, on dying, take an invisible spiritual form.
676. There’s a surprising amount of overlap between the ideas in this quote and what I’ve heard about the spirit world from some of its higher-level inhabitants. It’s been mentioned before that if the soul is immortal, it couldn’t possibly stay in the grave, since most of the human body breaks down into vapor or gas in hot weather. So, the survival of the soul after death implies a spiritual existence. Therefore, upon death, we must take on an invisible spiritual form.
677. Believers in revelation stare incredulously when mention is made of a spirit, as if its existence were an impossibility; yet it has been shown, that according to orthodoxy, death extricating the soul from the body, it must forthwith commence its spiritual life. The existence of spirits being thus established, that they should communicate with us would be more probable than that they should not, excepting that it has not been heretofore generally known to take place. But spirits allege that the manifestations which have been taking place for some years have been the result of efforts especially made by a delegation of philanthropic spirits, to break through the partition which has so long prevented the communication to mortals of a correct knowledge of the existence of the human soul after death, and the requisites to the attainment of celestial happiness.
677. Believers in revelation look on in disbelief when a spirit is mentioned, as if its existence were impossible; yet it has been shown that, according to traditional beliefs, death frees the soul from the body, and it immediately begins its spiritual life. Since the existence of spirits has been established, it's actually more likely that they would communicate with us than that they wouldn't, except that this hasn't been widely recognized until now. However, spirits claim that the recent manifestations we've been witnessing are due to efforts made by a group of compassionate spirits to break through the barrier that has long kept the knowledge of the soul's existence after death from reaching humans, as well as the requirements for achieving heavenly happiness.
679. The management is intrusted to advanced spirits acquainted with the affairs of both worlds. Agreeably to Scripture, heaven is above, over our heads; to prevent the Tower of Babel from reaching it, a confusion of tongues was ordained. The second commandment speaks of heaven above and earth beneath. Christ “descended into hell,” according to the apostles’ creed; of course, hell is below. “Whosoever calls his brother a fool, is in danger of hell-fire.” That hell and fire should be thus associated is therefore consistent with the observations of geologists, who infer that the interior of the earth consists of ignited matter of which volcanoes are the safety-tubes, however inconsistent with reason to suppose immortal souls to be broiling therein.
679. The management is entrusted to advanced spirits familiar with the affairs of both worlds. According to Scripture, heaven is above, over us; to stop the Tower of Babel from reaching it, a confusion of languages was created. The second commandment refers to heaven above and earth below. Christ “descended into hell,” as stated in the apostles’ creed; naturally, hell is below. “Whoever calls his brother a fool is in danger of hellfire.” The connection between hell and fire aligns with the observations of geologists, who suggest that the earth's interior is made up of heated matter, with volcanoes acting as safety valves, even though it seems unreasonable to assume that immortal souls are suffering there.
680. But enlightened Christians do not, I believe, locate hell within this earth, nor call in fire to aid in their conceptions of it. Evidently, the more rational idea of the future abode of souls is that of its being above every point on the earth’s surface, and equidistant therefrom. This would involve that of a space concentric with the earth, and which falls in with the idea of that comprising the spheres of Spiritualism.
680. But I don't think enlightened Christians see hell as being on this earth, nor do they imagine it as a place filled with fire. Clearly, a more rational view of where souls go after death is that it's above every point on the earth's surface, at an equal distance from it. This suggests a space that surrounds the earth, which aligns with the concept found in the spheres of Spiritualism.
681. If we leave this earth, in order to imagine any location beyond the range of astronomical bodies, it would place the locality at a distance,130 according to Herschel, requiring nineteen hundred thousand years for souls to travel, moving with the velocity of light, two hundred thousand miles in a second. In one of my lectures, in 1842, I suggested that heaven might be situated at that central space about which all the constellations of the universe have been supposed to revolve.
681. If we leave this earth and try to imagine any place beyond the reach of stars, it would put that location at a distance,130 according to Herschel, which would take nineteen hundred thousand years for souls to reach, traveling at the speed of light, two hundred thousand miles per second. In one of my lectures in 1842, I proposed that heaven might be located in that central space around which all the constellations of the universe are thought to revolve.
682. But if we infer a general place of reception for souls, then in that celestial emporium every soul from all the myriads of planets, of all the solar systems in the universe, must congregate. Far more rational does it not seem that our heaven should be associated with our own planet, in the welfare, the past history, and future prospects of which the souls who were born upon it, must take pre-eminent interest?
682. But if we assume there’s a general place where souls go, then in that heavenly marketplace, every soul from countless planets across all solar systems in the universe would gather. Doesn’t it make more sense that our heaven would be linked to our own planet, in which the souls born here would have a primary interest in its welfare, history, and future?
683. The separation of any heaven into spheres seems inevitable, since the association of spirits according to their virtue and intellectual acquirements and capacity seems indispensable to harmony and happiness. Thus the more virtuous, wise, and cultivated spirits are, the higher their spheres of existence.
684. Let any person contemplate the information respecting the spirit world given in the preceding pages, in the communications from my spirit relations and others, and then say whether, in receiving them as true, any believer in immortality, as vaguely portrayed in the gospel, will not make a beneficial exchange.
685. How can any person become a spiritualist without forthwith finding an irresistible impulse to conduct himself in this world, so as to acquire eminence in the next? For what are we all working? is it not for happiness, “our being’s end and aim,” the difference being only in the mode by which it is sought? By some it is through the good of others as well as of themselves; yet too many seek it without regard to that portion of their fellow-creatures whom they may deem it their interest to oppress, deceive, cheat, or rob.
685. How can anyone become a spiritualist without immediately feeling a strong urge to live in this world in a way that will help them excel in the next? What are we all striving for? Isn’t it happiness, “our being’s end and aim,” with the only difference being how we pursue it? Some people seek it through the well-being of others as well as themselves; however, too many pursue it without considering the welfare of those they may feel inclined to oppress, deceive, cheat, or rob.
689. In justice to myself, and to give more weight to the inferences drawn from my laborious investigations, I will subjoin the correspondence between Mr. Holcomb and myself, which succeeded the receipt of the letter which has been introduced in the commencement of my narrative, (128.) So far as my judgment goes, there never was a letter written of which the131 facts or inferences are more correct; yet it appears that so late as the 8th of February I was still a doubter. The tenor of the correspondence will show that if I was conquered, I did not yield the ground undisputed, and was vanquished only by facts and reasons which, when understood or admitted, must produce in others the conviction which they created in me. If I was the victim of an intellectual epidemic, my mental constitution did not yield at once to the miasma. It took some three months to include me among its victims.
689. To be fair to myself and to give more weight to the conclusions drawn from my thorough investigations, I will include the correspondence between Mr. Holcomb and me, which followed the receipt of the letter introduced at the beginning of my story, (128.) As far as I can tell, no letter has ever been written with more accurate facts or inferences; yet, it seems that as late as February 8th, I was still unsure. The content of the correspondence will show that if I was convinced, I did not give in easily, and I was only overcome by facts and arguments that, once understood or accepted, must inspire in others the same conviction they inspired in me. If I was caught up in an intellectual craze, my mind did not succumb to it immediately. It took about three months for me to become one of its victims.
Philadelphia, January 14, 1854.
Philadelphia, January 14, 1854.
690. Dear Sir:—Your letter of the 17th of November met my eye as I was this morning looking over a file of letters. I am led to write, therefore, that in consequence of your suggestion, and those of others, I have been giving my attention to the phenomena to which you alluded. When I come to any conclusion, I will write again.
691. I still concur with Faraday, and have seen nothing to make me believe in the spiritual manifestations. Yet I am not surprised that the latter should be believed in by those who have that belief, as there are phenomena which I cannot explain yet, any more than many which I have seen resulting from jugglery. The converts are, however, such worthy persons, that I cannot bring myself to suspect them of deception. I think you must be mistaken as respects a table moving when left to itself entirely. The circumstances for producing this phenomena have been repeatedly made favourable by the mediums in my presence, but excepting in one instance, when it was within reach of the feet, no motion ensued.
691. I still agree with Faraday and haven't seen anything that makes me believe in spiritual manifestations. However, I'm not surprised that some people believe in them, as there are phenomena I can't explain, just like many things I've seen that were just tricks. But the people who have converted to this belief are such good individuals that I can’t suspect them of lying. I think you must be mistaken about a table moving on its own completely. The conditions to produce this phenomenon have been made favorable by the mediums in my presence, but except for one instance when it was within reach of my feet, there was no movement.
Robert Hare.
Robert Hare.
Southwick, Mass., Feb. 3d, 1854.
Southwick, MA, Feb. 3, 1854.
693. Dear Sir: I wish, however, to say something in regard to the subject-matter of your letter. You say you are not surprised at the belief of many in Spiritualism, as there are phenomena which you cannot explain. You also say that you think I must be mistaken “as respects a table moving when left to itself entirely.” I do not think a table would move if left to itself entirely, since matter cannot put itself into motion. The great question is, What is the power that makes the table move? You think it is muscular, and I am certain that it is something else. When I am looking at the sun in a clear sky, I know that it shines. No argument would have any influence to make me doubt the evidence of my senses. There has, no doubt, been a great deal of jugglery in the world, but shall I doubt the evidence of my senses on that account? How shall we prove any thing in a court of justice, if the evidence of our senses is not to be relied upon? While I am looking at a table, it moves, and I132 have the same evidence that no body touches it, that I have that it moves. I see the table tilt up, and poise itself on two of its four legs, and then on the other two, and finally it wholly rises from the floor, and seems to float in the air without any visible support whatever; all this time there are no persons within six feet of it. In a letter of N. P. Talmadge, published in the Tribune of May 27th last, he gives an account of his seeing tables move when nothing visible touched them. I mention him, because I suppose his character and standing would be likely to have weight with you. It would, however, be very easy to mention a very great many cases, proved by testimony that would be conclusive in any court of justice. I supposed that it was too late in the day to doubt facts of this character, as they are taking place in numerous places in this country and also in Europe. I suppose this is the reason why Faraday’s explanation has availed so little to check Spiritualism in England or France.
693. Dear Sir: I want to address the topic of your letter. You say you're not surprised that many people believe in Spiritualism because there are phenomena that you can't explain. You also think I must be wrong “about a table moving when left completely alone.” I don't believe a table would move if it were completely alone, since matter can't set itself into motion. The big question is, what is the force that makes the table move? You think it’s muscular, but I’m convinced it’s something else. When I look at the sun on a clear day, I know it shines. No argument could make me doubt what my senses tell me. There’s undoubtedly been a lot of trickery in the world, but should I doubt my senses because of that? How can we prove anything in a court of law if we can't trust what we see? When I watch a table, it moves, and I have the same proof that no one is touching it as I do that it’s moving. I see the table tilt up and balance on two of its four legs, then on the other two, and finally it completely rises from the floor, appearing to float in the air with no visible support; all this happens with no one within six feet of it. In a letter from N. P. Talmadge published in the Tribune on May 27th, he describes seeing tables move without anything visible touching them. I mention him because I believe his character and reputation would be credible to you. However, it would be easy to provide many other cases validated by testimony that would be conclusive in any court. I thought it was too late to question facts like these, as they are happening in many places across this country and also in Europe. This is likely why Faraday’s explanation has had little impact in stopping Spiritualism in England or France.
694. I believe Henry Gordon resides now in Philadelphia. I have no doubt you can see such things for yourself in his presence by attending a few times. Our judge of probate, who lives a few miles from me, told me a few days ago that a young lady of his acquaintance put her hands upon a table and it moved. He then took hold of the table to prevent the motion, but he had not strength to do it. The table would slide on the floor, notwithstanding his utmost efforts to prevent it. Now it is perfectly idle to say that the young lady unconsciously exerted such a power. The judge ridicules the idea of its being caused by spirits. He says that it is electricity. You are too well acquainted with the laws of electricity to believe that under such circumstances it can produce any such feats. I know of a case, in Springfield City, in which four respectable merchants, with whom I am acquainted, testify that a large table, with two of them on it, moved around the room. In that instance the medium’s hands were on the table. But who can believe that such a force could be exerted without the movers being conscious of it. There are cases enough of the same description to fill a volume.
694. I believe Henry Gordon now lives in Philadelphia. I'm sure you can witness this for yourself by visiting him a few times. Our probate judge, who lives a few miles from me, told me a few days ago that a young lady he knows put her hands on a table and it moved. He then grabbed the table to stop it from moving, but he couldn’t do it. The table slid across the floor, despite his best efforts to hold it in place. It's pointless to claim that the young lady was unconsciously using such power. The judge dismisses the idea that it's caused by spirits. He says it's electricity. You understand the laws of electricity well enough not to believe that it could cause such phenomena in these circumstances. I know of a situation in Springfield City where four respectable merchants, whom I know, testified that a large table, with two of them sitting on it, moved around the room. In that case, the medium's hands were on the table. But who can believe that such a force could be generated without the movers being aware of it? There are enough similar cases to fill a book.
695. There is another phase of this matter that is worthy of attention, and that is the intelligence connected with it. You mention cases where the answers were not correct. Thousands of such cases might be furnished. In the presence of some of the mediums, almost all the answers will be false; while in the presence of others, it will be very rare that a wrong answer is given. Some of the answers being wrong does not prove that there is no intelligence connected with it. In the presence of a good medium, a question asked mentally is answered as readily and as correctly as when asked vocally. I do not depend on the testimony of others for this. I have found it to be true in my own experience. In the presence of some mediums, mental questions are not answered. The foregoing are facts that are well settled if evidence can settle any thing. To say that we are dupes and fools, decides nothing. I suppose that I can examine a133 matter as carefully and intricately as most men, and I know I am not deceived about the facts. But the cause is quite another matter.
695. There’s another aspect of this issue that deserves attention, and that’s the intelligence involved. You mention instances where the answers were incorrect. There could be thousands of such examples. In the presence of some mediums, nearly all the answers will be wrong; while with others, it’s quite rare to receive an incorrect answer. Just because some answers are wrong doesn’t mean there’s no intelligence involved. When a good medium is present, a question asked mentally is answered as readily and accurately as if it were asked out loud. I don’t rely on others’ testimony for this. I’ve experienced it myself. In the presence of some mediums, mental questions go unanswered. These are established facts if evidence can determine anything. Claiming that we are naive and foolish settles nothing. I believe I can examine a matter as thoroughly and carefully as most people, and I know I’m not misled about the facts. But the cause is a completely different issue.
696. I suppose you are acquainted with the various and conflicting explanations that have been given. They all appear to my mind perfectly absurd and incredible, and no two of them agree. Rev. Dr. Beecher was appointed by his association to examine and report. He did so, and decides that the communications are from the spirits of the dead, but from the evil or unblest portion of them. If it is from spirits, there is as much evidence that some of them are good, as that others are evil.
696. I guess you know about the different and conflicting explanations that have been offered. They all seem completely ridiculous and unbelievable to me, and no two of them match up. Rev. Dr. Beecher was assigned by his group to investigate and report. He did that and concluded that the messages are from the spirits of the dead, but from the evil or cursed ones. If these are from spirits, there is just as much evidence that some of them are good as there is that others are bad.
697. I must close. I did not expect an answer, but was glad to hear from you, and if you make any important discovery, I should be glad to hear from you again; I am not settled in my mind respecting the cause of these strange phenomena. I agree with you heartily in your last remark in your letter, that “it would indeed be a glorious mercy if God would give us some evidence which should settle the religious opinions of mankind.”
697. I need to wrap this up. I didn’t expect a reply, but I was pleased to hear from you. If you make any significant discovery, I’d love to hear from you again; I’m still unsure about the reasons behind these strange phenomena. I wholeheartedly agree with your last comment in your letter that “it would truly be a wonderful blessing if God would provide us with some evidence to clarify the religious beliefs of humanity.”
Yours, very respectfully,
Amasa Holcomb.
Best regards,
Amasa Holcomb.
In reply to the preceding, so much of a letter from the Author as relates
to Spiritualism.
Philadelphia, February 8, 1854.
Philadelphia, February 8, 1854.
Robt. Hare.
Robt. Hare.
Southwick, February 20, 1854.
Southwick, February 20, 1854.
701. Dear Sir: Your letter of February 8th is before me. You did not say whether you believed in the soul’s immortality or not! This is the most important of all questions to me, and how is it to be settled? If the Bible is not to be depended upon, and we have no communications from the spirit world, what evidence have we of our immortality? I have been greatly afflicted with doubts upon this subject. It has exceeded all other afflictions that I have met with. You will of course see at once how desirous I am that these apparent communications should prove to be in reality from the spirit world, as that would settle the question. I seize upon every thing that seems to have a bearing upon the question of immortality, and I confess that I have strong hopes that Spiritualism, as it is termed, will settle this question. If it be true that there is physical force134 and intelligence, neither of which proceed from the medium, how is it to be explained? You doubt these two, but I am as well assured of them as I can be of any thing.
701. Dear Sir: I have your letter from February 8th in front of me. You didn’t mention whether you believe in the immortality of the soul or not! This is the most important question for me, and how can it be resolved? If the Bible can't be trusted, and we have no messages from the spirit world, what proof do we have of our immortality? I’ve been struggling with doubts about this topic. It has overshadowed all other difficulties I’ve faced. You can see how eager I am for these apparent communications to actually be from the spirit world, as that would clarify everything. I hold onto anything that seems relevant to the question of immortality, and I must admit that I have strong hopes that what’s called Spiritualism will answer this question. If it’s true that there is physical force134 and intelligence that doesn’t come from the medium, how do we explain that? You may doubt these two, but I’m as certain of them as I am of anything.
702. If spirits communicate, it is certain that some of them deceive. It would appear that there are all sorts of characters, the same as there are in this world. If you should become satisfied of the two facts that I mentioned, I should like to have you and other men of science try your skill at explanation.
703. I will relate what took place at the first sitting that I ever attended. It was in Boston, and I went as a perfect stranger. Before the sitting commenced, and but few had collected, a strolling musician came along and commenced playing at the door, and every tune played at the door was beaten or rapped on the table. The medium was in the room; I saw her walk up to the table and lay her hand on it, and then walk away, but it made no difference with the raps on the table; they continued, without any person near it, as long as the tunes were played at the door. When it came my turn to question, I asked, Are any of my relatives present? Ans. Yes. Will you rap at each letter of your name, if the alphabet is called over. Ans. Yes! The alphabet was called, and there was a rap at A, one at L, one at F, one at R, one at E, and one at D,—Alfred: a son that died at the age of twenty-two years. Among a great many questions, I asked, How many years since you died. Is it twelve? Is it eleven? Is it ten? Is it nine? Is it eight? Is it seven? There was a rap at seven, but I asked, Is it six? and instantly there were rapped........; the seventh was fainter. I said, He probably means that it is six and a piece, when instantly they were repeated ........; the last the faintest. The raps were equidistant, like the ticking of a clock, and about as loud. I supposed at the time that it was less than seven. After the sitting was over, and we were preparing to leave, I said, It is possible that we may have mistaken the time since my son’s death? There was instantly a loud rap on the table. I then asked, Did you mean seven? and there was instantly an affirmative. I inquired for the odd months, and the answer was four. When I got home, I found the true time was seven years, four months, and two days. These last raps were when no person was within six feet of the table. I confess myself unable to explain the foregoing without admitting that it was my son who responded. If you could have such an opportunity, and inquire for some dear friend whom you loved in life, I think you would witness what would interest you.
703. I will share what happened at the first session I ever attended. It was in Boston, and I went in as a complete stranger. Before the session started, and while only a few people had gathered, a street musician came by and began playing at the door. Every tune played at the door was echoed with knocks or taps on the table. The medium was in the room; I saw her walk up to the table, put her hand on it, and then step away, but it didn’t affect the tapping on the table; it continued, even with nobody near it, as long as the music played outside. When it was my turn to ask questions, I inquired, "Are any of my relatives present?" Ans. Yes. "Will you tap at each letter of your name if the alphabet is called?" Ans. Yes! The alphabet was called, and there was a tap for A, one for L, one for F, one for R, one for E, and one for D—Alfred: a son who died at the age of twenty-two. Among many questions, I asked, "How many years has it been since you died? Is it twelve? Eleven? Ten? Nine? Eight? Seven?" There was a tap at seven, but I asked, "Is it six?" and immediately there were taps........; the seventh was softer. I said, "He probably means it’s six and a bit," and instantly they were repeated........; the last one was the faintest. The taps were spaced out evenly, like the ticking of a clock, and about as loud. At that moment, I thought it was less than seven. After the session ended and we were getting ready to leave, I said, "Is it possible that we might have miscalculated the time since my son’s death?" There was a loud tap on the table right away. I then asked, "Did you mean seven?" and there was an immediate yes. I inquired about the extra months, and the answer was four. When I got home, I discovered the actual time was seven years, four months, and two days. These last taps occurred when no one was within six feet of the table. I admit I'm unable to explain what happened without accepting that it was my son who responded. If you had such an opportunity and asked about a dear friend you loved in life, I think you would witness something that would deeply interest you.
704. I mention the foregoing as a specimen. I have received a great many communications purporting to be both from my son and a daughter, who died at the age of eighteen, quite as remarkable as the above. Now, admitting the two facts of physical force and intelligence, I don’t know even then that spirits are the agents; but it seems probable, because I135 doubt whether any other explanation can be given, that will appear at all reasonable. It is very evident that there is an intelligence that governs the world; but if that intelligence has given us no revelation excepting what is in nature, then it appears to me that every thing that can give us any knowledge of what we are to be hereafter, is valuable beyond all price. Uncertainty upon this matter is painful, but then we know so little about the Deity, that I think there is great uncertainty in our views of what he does, either to prevent or bring to pass the good and evil that we see around us. Yours, very respectfully,
704. I bring this up as an example. I've received a lot of messages claiming to be from my son and my daughter, who passed away at eighteen, just as remarkable as the one above. Now, assuming that physical energy and intelligence are real, I still can’t say for sure that spirits are the ones communicating; it just seems likely because I doubt any other explanation would seem reasonable at all. It's clear there's an intelligence that runs the world; however, if that intelligence has revealed nothing to us except what we see in nature, then it seems to me that anything that can provide insight into what we will become in the future is invaluable. The uncertainty around this issue is painful, but we understand so little about the Divine that I believe there’s a lot of uncertainty in how we perceive what He does, whether to prevent or cause the good and bad we see around us. Yours, very respectfully,
Amasa Holcomb.
Amasa Holcomb.
Some parts of a letter to Mr. Holcomb, in reply to the parts of his letter relating to Spiritualism.
Philadelphia, February 24, 1854.
Philadelphia, February 24, 1854.
705. Dear Sir: There is a great resemblance in your sentiments, as described in your letter of the 20th, (just received,) and those which I entertain, excepting that while I am very desirous—I may say extremely desirous—to learn something which may prove another state of existence, I am not unhappy at my not being able to find out the truth. If I have less hopes, I have also less fears, than those who have heaven and hell both to encounter. I do not envy those who are placed in the situation of depending upon the estimate which may be formed of them hereafter, whether they are to be placed among the “sheep” or “the goats.”
705. Dear Sir: Your feelings expressed in your letter of the 20th, which I just received, are very similar to mine. However, while I am very eager—actually, extremely eager—to discover anything that might show another state of existence, I’m not upset about not knowing the truth. Although I may have fewer hopes, I also have fewer fears than those who have to face both heaven and hell. I don’t envy those who find themselves in a position where their future depends on how they are judged, whether they end up among the “sheep” or “the goats.”
706. It is true that the gospel holds out the idea on one hand that intense belief, called faith, will wash away sin; but on the other, it is said, that “he who knoweth his Master’s will, yet doeth it not,” shall be beaten with many stripes, while he who is ignorant of that will, and doeth it not, shall be beaten with few. Under these circumstances, who can escape flagellation? Who is it that does the will of God, as enumerated by Christ? Who loves his neighbour as himself? Who presents a second cheek on receiving a blow on one? Who gives his coat, when his cloak has been taken? Who returns good for evil? Who acts as if it were as hard for a rich man to go to heaven as for a camel to get through the eye of a needle?
706. It's true that the gospel suggests that strong belief, or faith, can wipe away sin; but on the flip side, it says that “the person who knows their Master’s will but doesn't do it” will face severe punishment, while someone who is unaware of that will and doesn't follow it will face lesser consequences. Given this, who can avoid suffering? Who actually does what God wants, as mentioned by Christ? Who loves their neighbor as themselves? Who offers the other cheek when they get hit? Who gives away their coat when their cloak has been taken? Who responds with kindness when faced with wrongdoing? Who truly believes that it's just as hard for a rich person to enter heaven as for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle?
707. Unless our missionaries can make better Christians abroad than they leave at home, it were inhuman to add to the number, who are to be pre-eminently punished for their neglect of their Master’s will, while fully apprized of it. In many cases a pagan will be better off than his nominally Christian instructor, although he should not prove a convert to Christianity.
707. Unless our missionaries can create better Christians abroad than those they leave behind at home, it would be cruel to increase the number of people who will face severe punishment for ignoring their Master's will, especially when they are fully aware of it. In many cases, a non-Christian might be better off than his so-called Christian teacher, even if he doesn’t become a Christian himself.
708. My sentiments are much like those which Socrates expressed. I hope for a future world, and therein to have a happier existence. All those reasons which have been advanced by wise and good men in favour of such futurity, operate upon my mind as upon theirs; but if there be136 no such a state of future existence, I shall never wake up to feel my disappointment. It will only be a prolongation of a state of oblivion analogous to that which we enter upon transiently, every night.
708. My feelings are very much like those expressed by Socrates. I hope for a better world in the future, where I can have a happier life. All the reasons given by wise and good people in support of such a future resonate with me just as they do with them; but if there is136 no future existence, I will never wake up to feel my disappointment. It will just be an extension of a state of forgetfulness similar to what we experience briefly every night.
711. I have, however, constructed an instrument to put the question of independency of intelligence to the test. It works independently of any control of the medium, as the letters, which must be seen to bring them correctly under the index, are concealed by a screen. (Plate I.)
711. I have, however, built a device to test the idea of independent intelligence. It operates without any influence from the medium, as the letters, which need to be viewed to properly align with the index, are hidden by a screen. (Plate I.)
Robert Hare.
Robert Hare.
MORAL INFLUENCE OF SPIRITUALISM.
714. Among the best precepts afforded by the gospel is that of laying up treasure in heaven, in preference to seeking to become rich in this world. To pursue the last-mentioned course has been alleged to disqualify us more or less for entering heaven. Certainly, however, honest exertion for the acquisition of wealth is the corner-stone of human prosperity, and money seems in most instances necessary to the effectual exercise of that fellow-feeling in the cultivation of which human virtue pre-eminently consists. (See Influence of Mundane wealth on Celestial Happiness.)
714. One of the best teachings from the gospel is to focus on storing up treasures in heaven instead of trying to get rich in this world. It's been said that chasing after wealth can make it harder for us to enter heaven. However, honest effort to earn money is essential for human prosperity, and in most cases, money is needed to effectively express compassion, which is a key part of human virtue. (See Influence of Mundane wealth on Celestial Happiness.)
715. How can a man display charity, hospitality, or contribute his means and time to objects of philanthropy, unless he beforehand lay up wealth? How could the Samaritan have assisted the traveller who had been maltreated by thieves, had he not taken care to have something beforehand, not only for himself, but for the needy? But still the precept, Lay up treasure for thyself in heaven, is precisely the course which Spiritualism indicates. Precepts may lead, but examples will draw. Those who have gone before us to eternal life, furnish us not only precepts, but examples also. They furnish exemplifications of the consequences of their conduct, if followed. With few exceptions, my intercourse has been with those only, who did lay up treasure in heaven, by doing on earth as they would have others to do unto them. Of the spirits with whom I have communicated, only two alleged or indicated that they were unhappy. Of these, I was informed, one bore an ill character upon earth.
715. How can a person show kindness, hospitality, or contribute their resources and time to charitable causes unless they first build up some wealth? How could the Samaritan have helped the traveler who was attacked by thieves if he hadn't made sure to have something saved up, not just for himself, but for those in need? Yet, the principle of storing up treasure in heaven is exactly what Spiritualism teaches. Principles can guide us, but examples inspire us. Those who have passed on to eternal life provide us not only with principles but also with examples. They show us the outcomes of their actions if we choose to follow them. With few exceptions, my interactions have been with those who really have stored up treasure in heaven by treating others on earth the way they wished to be treated. Among the spirits I've communicated with, only two claimed or suggested that they were unhappy. I learned that one of them had a bad reputation while alive.
716. Another, after having suggested to his inquiring brother some measures relating to his surviving wife’s temporal concerns, spontaneously added the following words: “I am not hapey.” The inquiry being made for the cause of his misery, the resulting reply was, “I did not do rite when I was in this world.”
718. Having evidently been a seaman, who had sailed under an officer who was present, he had preserved the usual fondness of sailors for tobacco and grog. This propensity he could not avoid displaying, notwithstanding his having passed death’s dread portal, and the obvious inutility of expressing to mortals his craving for those pernicious stimulants.
718. Having clearly been a sailor, who had served under an officer who was present, he still held the typical affection sailors have for tobacco and alcohol. This tendency was impossible for him to hide, despite having crossed the threshold of death, and the apparent uselessness of conveying to the living his desire for those harmful substances.
722. Believing in the existence of a spirit world, where there are thirty-six grades of existence, corresponding to degrees of purity and intellectual acquirement,—purity alone giving exaltation merely, while cultivation of mind secures breadth of consideration,—we have, in the first place, to adhere strictly to truth, honesty, justice, benevolence, and doing as we would be done by, to reach a sphere higher in proportion as we are more successful. Yet, among those on the same plane, superiority in mental attributes gives precedence.
722. Believing in the existence of a spirit world, where there are thirty-six levels of existence linked to degrees of purity and knowledge—purity alone brings elevation, while developing the mind provides a broader perspective—we must first commit to truth, honesty, justice, kindness, and treating others as we want to be treated, in order to reach a higher realm as we become more successful. However, among those on the same level, having superior mental qualities takes priority.
723. Nothing is better known than “while precepts may lead, examples draw,” and that subjection to bad examples, even when checked by good precepts, is generally irresistible by the young. But when there are no precepts to check, but, on the contrary, ill counsel as well as bad example, few human beings, however well constituted organically, could resist the tendency of such educational evil. Let bad hereditary propensities be superadded, and what can ensue but a climax of wickedness? Manifestly, however, all this is independent of any choice on the part of the victim. A high degree of virtue may consistently be inferred to result if all these conditions be inverted, and good precepts, good examples, co-operative in improving a mind of the opposite kind, one which owes to its progenitors goodness of heart and high intellectual capacity.
723. Nothing is better known than “while rules may guide, examples inspire,” and that being exposed to bad examples, even when countered by good rules, is usually impossible for young people to resist. But when there are no rules to provide guidance, and instead, there’s bad advice along with poor examples, few people, no matter how well they are made, can resist the pull of such harmful education. Add in negative inherited traits, and what can result but a peak of wrongdoing? Clearly, all this happens without any choice from the person affected. A strong level of virtue can logically be expected if these conditions are reversed, with good rules and good examples working together to improve a mind that has inherited goodness and high intelligence from its ancestors.
724. Much stress is laid upon free-will, but is will ever free from the joint control of reason and passion? What is will, if it be not the resultant of the conflict or co-operation of these? It may be a question whether, without passions, a man would act at all; but certainly he would act like an idiot or baby, so far as his will should be entirely independent of his reason.
724. A lot of emphasis is put on free will, but is will ever truly free from the combined influence of reason and emotion? What is will, if it isn’t the result of the struggle or collaboration between the two? It’s worth asking whether, without emotions, a person would take any action at all; but it’s clear that he would behave like a fool or a child if his will were completely separate from his reason.
726. The great features of the spiritual religion are, as I understand them, as follows:—Its foundation is laid in the belief of an all-good Deity, whose power is manifested to us by the immensity, profundity, sublimity, ingenuity, and adaptation of the means to the ends in the creation ascribed to the co-operation, if not origination, of his mind. The Bible of the spiritualist is the book of nature—the only one which by inward and outward evidence can be ascribed to divine authorship.
726. The main aspects of spiritual religion, as I see it, are these: Its foundation is based on the belief in a completely good God, whose power is shown to us through the vastness, depth, greatness, creativity, and suitability of the means to the ends in creation, which can be attributed to the collaboration, if not the origin, of His mind. The spiritualist's Bible is the book of nature— the only one that can truly be said to have divine authorship based on both internal and external evidence.
727. In this book we read, as matters of fact, that there is an infinite series of gradation in the rank of animals, as well as variety in their dispositions and propensities. This may be seen, from the half-animal, half-vegetable known as the polypus, up to man, there being gradations not only of genera, but of species and varieties. Thus amid men there are various races, rising one above the other in development, from the Bushman, Hottentot, or lowest Negro, up to the most highly-developed race of white men. But when we have passed through the gradation of the races, we have to enter upon that of individuals, who in the same race are by diversity of organization or education, or of both, made extremely different as to intellectual, moral, and scientific pre-eminence.
727. In this book, we read that there is an endless range of ranks among animals, as well as a variety in their behaviors and tendencies. This is evident from the half-animal, half-plant known as the polypus, all the way up to humans, with gradations not just of genera, but also of species and varieties. Among humans, there are different races, each more advanced than the last, starting from the Bushman, Hottentot, or the lowest groups of Black people, up to the most developed groups of white people. However, after we examine the variations among races, we must consider individuals within the same race, who, due to differences in their makeup, education, or both, can be extremely different in terms of intellectual, moral, and scientific superiority.
728. It is difficult for human reason to reconcile with impartiality this immense diversity in the lot of the creatures of God; but that such is the law of nature is self-evident: it is an intuitive truth. To reconcile it with the all-goodness of God, we must suppose a limitation of power, and that it has been beyond his power to put created beings more nearly upon a level. But, as Seneca observes, all have received more than they had a claim for. Some may think that the parable of the hiring of labourers for a vineyard, conveys an idea like that of the Roman sage.
728. It's hard for human reason to accept this huge variety in the circumstances of God's creations with an unbiased perspective; however, it's obvious that this is the natural order of things: it's an intuitive truth. To align this with the all-goodness of God, we would have to assume a limitation of power, suggesting that it was beyond His ability to bring created beings closer to equality. But, as Seneca points out, everyone has received more than they deserved. Some might believe that the story of the laborers hired for a vineyard expresses a similar idea as that of the Roman philosopher.
729. These considerations being premised, it would seem that punishment in the spirit world is only the carrying out of the same system, excepting that while the deficiencies or vices which have arisen in this world become a punishment in the next, they also operate as the means of improvement, or, to use the language of that world, of “progression.” It may be inferred that as in this world the power of the Deity, although commensurate with the all but infinite universe in which we exist, was so restricted by conditions as to induce that enormous diversity of position in139 the scale of animation which has been presented to view. Yet in the world to come these defects and vices are liable to be remedied; and, though they react upon their victim, it is with a view to his own ultimate benefit. There is not a malevolent devil to seize the poor miscreant, and, like the savage Indian, torture him with a fiend-like pleasure. He is regarded with compassion, and as soon as contrition is induced, treated with sympathy by the higher spirits, and assisted by counsel and enlightened by instruction. Unable any longer to indulge his bad propensities, the desire of rising to a higher level becomes a passion. Intellectual and social pleasures begin to be enjoyed. So long as he remains under the influence of his mundane appetites, he has to consort with spirits who are similarly actuated; they read each other’s mind, and thus are made acquainted with the deformity of their own. They eventually thus become instrumental in reciprocal correction. So soon as an aspiration for a better state is awakened, they rise to the next plane or circle above that in which they may have been existing; the only difficulty is in taking the first step. Progression grows with its growth, and strengthens with its strength, so that all beings may sooner or later attain to the highest sphere in the spirit world. It should be understood that there is no pardon for existing sin. Pardon can only exist as a consequence of reform, and in proportion thereto. (92.)
729. With these thoughts in mind, it seems that punishment in the spirit world is just a continuation of the same system. The flaws or vices developed in this life become a form of punishment in the next, but they also serve as a way to improve, or as that world describes it, to achieve “progression.” We can gather that, just as in this life, the power of the Deity, despite being vast enough for the almost infinite universe we live in, is constrained by conditions that lead to the immense variety of positions in the hierarchy of life we've seen. However, in the next world, these shortcomings and vices can be corrected; and while they do affect the individual, it’s all aimed at their eventual benefit. There's no malicious devil ready to capture the unfortunate soul and torture them with sadistic pleasure. Instead, they are viewed with compassion, and once remorse is felt, they're treated with kindness by higher spirits and guided with advice and illuminated with knowledge. Unable to indulge their negative habits any longer, the drive to reach a higher state becomes a strong desire. They start enjoying intellectual and social pleasures. As long as they're driven by their earthly desires, they are surrounded by spirits with similar motivations; they can read each other’s thoughts, which helps them see their own flaws. This interaction ultimately leads to mutual improvement. As soon as they feel a yearning for a better situation, they rise to the next level or circle above where they currently are; the only challenge is taking that initial step. Progression enhances itself and becomes stronger over time, so eventually, all beings can reach the highest level in the spirit world. It’s important to note that there is no forgiveness for existing sins. Forgiveness can only come as a result of genuine change, and in relation to that change. (92.)
730. An assailant of Spiritualism, who not long since lectured at Sansom Street Hall, founded one of his charges on the commiseration felt by good angels for sinners, agreeably to Spiritualism. But from the examination above given respecting the origin of the difference between the virtuous and vicious, does it not appear that the fate of the latter is quite as hard as can be reconciled with justice, even under the more benign institution of Spiritualism? According to this, there exist in the spirit world six spheres, each subdivided into six circles or planes, forming together a succession of grades in which the soul finds its place according to moral and intellectual merit. The first of the spheres is throughout comparatively hideous in its aspect and disgusting in its inhabitants, who are designated by a dark halo in lieu of the effulgence which distinguishes spirits of the rest of the spheres. Moreover, this distinguishing effulgence, as well as the beauty of the spirit world, augments with the grade of the being whom it envelops, thus making a series of ranks in society founded on real nobility of head and heart. When it is considered that this immense diversity ensues mainly from contingency in organization, education, and greater or less exposure to trial, it must be clear that the difference made between the good and the bad by Spiritualism does not fall short of the degree which human reason can reconcile with justice.
730. A critic of Spiritualism, who recently gave a lecture at Sansom Street Hall, based one of his claims on the sympathy that good angels feel for sinners, according to Spiritualism. However, from the examination above regarding the origin of the difference between the virtuous and the vicious, doesn’t it seem that the fate of the latter is just as harsh as can be justified by justice, even within the more compassionate framework of Spiritualism? In this view, there are six spheres in the spirit world, each divided into six circles or planes, forming a progression of ranks where the soul is placed according to moral and intellectual merit. The first sphere is generally ugly in appearance and unpleasant in its inhabitants, who are marked by a dark halo instead of the bright glow that distinguishes spirits from the other spheres. Additionally, this distinguishing glow, along with the beauty of the spirit world, increases with the rank of the being it surrounds, creating a hierarchy based on true nobility of mind and heart. Considering this vast diversity arises mainly from differences in background, education, and various levels of adversity faced, it should be clear that the distinction made between the good and the bad by Spiritualism does not exceed what human reason can align with justice.
731. The assailant of Spiritualism to whom allusion was made, while admitting the truth of the evidence given of communication with spirits, explained it by reference to Satan. It is remarkably inconsistent with140 this idea that this evidence is of a nature to abrogate the existence, and of course the sovereignty, of that imaginary arch-fiend. Again, it can hardly be conceived that the greater commiseration for sinners should come from a malevolent devil, and the urging for everlasting and cruel torture from a sincere disciple of the benevolent Jesus Christ. But how much, then, must it shock one who embraces these views, that in addition to the misfortune of being badly organized, badly educated, and badly tempted, the being subjected to these disadvantages is to be exposed eternally to misery, typified, if not realized, by broiling on burning brimstone! I am aware that doing away with the more horrible attributes of hell will be alleged to be subversive of one of the restraints upon criminality; but, in the first place, it is evident that a man who is restrained from crime solely by the fear of punishment is only a more prudent villain than one who is not restrained by that selfish apprehension. When a man is deterred from crime only by prudence, hope of reward, or fear of punishment, he ought not to have a higher grade in heaven than the perpetrator of the crime.
731. The critic of Spiritualism mentioned earlier, while acknowledging the truth of the evidence for communication with spirits, explained it in terms of Satan. It's notably inconsistent with140 this idea that such evidence would undermine the existence and, of course, the authority of that fictional arch-enemy. Moreover, it seems hard to believe that more compassion for sinners would come from a malicious devil rather than from a true follower of the loving Jesus Christ. But how shocking it must be for someone who holds these views to realize that, in addition to the misfortune of being poorly structured, poorly educated, and poorly tempted, they are also subjected to eternal misery, symbolized, if not actually represented, by burning in hellfire! I know that removing the horrific aspects of hell will be claimed to undermine a key deterrent against crime; however, first of all, it's clear that someone who is only kept from wrongdoing by the fear of punishment is just a more cautious criminal than one who doesn't have that fear. When a person is deterred from crime only by self-interest, hope for reward, or fear of consequences, they shouldn't be considered more worthy of a place in heaven than the criminal who acts out.
732. But, agreeably to experience, of all restraints upon crime, none are more efficacious than the fear of degradation. The lawyer who will do the bidding of a caucus (or of a powerful demagogue in the executive office) in order to get a judicial appointment, when securely seated therein, will not give a charge which will degrade him in the eyes of the legal profession, and consequently in that of society, as well as in his own estimation. The dishonest gambler, who neglects to pay his tradesman’s bill, will not fail to pay his gambling debts. The debtor who will take every advantage in getting a high price for his goods, and who will put off any other payment as long as possible, fails not to pay his note at a bank. Sovereign states, who pay no other claims, take every means to meet the interest on their funded obligations. “Failure” in the one case, in the mercantile adaptation, involves the loss of reputation for good financial faith, abroad as well as at home; but the just complaints of domestic claimants, not heard upon the exchange, are unheeded. The great object, in many cases, is not to leave the crime “undone, but to keep it unknown.” The corrupt, selfish politician, who would promote war in order to give himself an opportunity of emolument or official pre-eminence, when facing the enemy in the field of battle will nominally die for that country whose interests he has sacrificed. But not from the alleged motive will he die, but either to avoid being degraded as a coward, or for the hope of popularity which may help him to office.
732. But, based on experience, of all the things that stop crime, none are more effective than the fear of losing respect. A lawyer who follows the orders of a political group (or a powerful leader in the government) to get a judge position, once in that position, won’t give a ruling that will lower his status in the legal field, which would also affect how society views him and how he sees himself. The dishonest gambler who doesn't pay his bills to merchants will make sure to pay off his gambling debts. The debtor who maximizes profits from selling goods and delays any payments for as long as he can won’t skip paying his banknote. Even states that ignore other debts will do everything possible to pay the interest on their loans. A “failure” in this financial context can lead to a loss of reputation for trustworthiness, both internationally and nationally; however, the valid complaints from domestic creditors, not addressed on the stock exchange, are ignored. Often, the key goal is not to avoid the crime but to keep it hidden. The corrupt, self-serving politician who pushes for war to gain personal benefits or power will, when facing the enemy, supposedly die for the country whose interests he has betrayed. But his reasons for dying won’t be the ones he claims; instead, it will be to avoid being seen as a coward or to gain popularity that may help him in his career.
733. In the spirit world, all are seen through and justly estimated, so that degradation and vice, or elevation and virtue, are inevitably associated by spiritual intuition. Yet there is, in my opinion, far more satisfactory proof of the truth of Spiritualism than of any other creed involving immortality; while, so far as adopted, it must tend to do away with priest141craft, sectarian malevolence, and religious intolerance. Man will go to the spirits of his ancestors for his religion, not to a fanatical, bigoted, or interested priest. Should spirits actually exist, as supposed, and convey the same religious knowledge all over the world, all men will agree that virtue is to be the means of salvation, not bigotry, under the name of faith.
733. In the spirit world, everyone is seen clearly and judged fairly, so that degradation and vice, or elevation and virtue, are inevitably perceived through spiritual insight. However, I believe there's much stronger evidence supporting Spiritualism as a truth compared to any other belief system that involves immortality; and where it is embraced, it will likely diminish the influence of priests, sectarian hatred, and religious intolerance. People will seek their religion from the spirits of their ancestors rather than from a fanatical, narrow-minded, or self-serving priest. If spirits do exist, as thought, and share the same religious understanding worldwide, everyone will come to agree that virtue is the path to salvation, not bigotry disguised as faith.
734. It is conceived that Spiritualism has all the desirable attributes of religion, as stated in the second page of the introduction of this work. It sanctions the idea of the existence of one Supreme Being, who is represented as all love to his creatures; while his powers are made known to us by the sublimity, profundity, magnificence, and inconceivable extent of the creation which he rules. It does not represent him as selfishly creating us for the purpose of worshipping him, as capable of jealousy or implacable wrath for the result of errors which his alleged omnipotence could by a fiat correct. On the contrary, we have been created to be happy sooner or later; evil existing not through design, but in consequence of conditions which he cannot control or cure unless through the operation of general principles.
734. Spiritualism is seen as having all the qualities we want in a religion, as mentioned on the second page of the introduction to this work. It supports the idea of one Supreme Being, who is portrayed as all love towards his creations, while his powers are revealed through the beauty, depth, grandeur, and unimaginable vastness of the universe he governs. It doesn’t depict him as selfishly creating us just to worship him, nor as someone who feels jealousy or endless anger over mistakes that his supposed omnipotence could easily fix. Instead, we are created to ultimately find happiness; evil exists not by design but as a result of conditions that he cannot control or resolve except through the application of universal principles.
737. Spiritualism has the merit pre-eminently not only of furnishing a knowledge of immortality beyond the grave, but a precise knowledge of the spirit world in lieu of the silence of the Pentateuch and the vagueness and inconsistency of the gospel. An effort to establish the truth of these allegations will be made under the next head.
737. Spiritualism stands out because it provides not only an understanding of life after death but also clear insights into the spirit world, filling the gaps left by the silence of the Pentateuch and the ambiguity and inconsistencies found in the gospel. An attempt to prove the validity of these claims will be addressed in the next section.
THE HEAVEN AND HELL OF SPIRITUALISM CONTRASTED WITH THE HEAVEN AND HELL OF SCRIPTURE.
738. On the first spiritual manifestations occurring, the great object of the mass of observers was to see the physical effects. In the next place, intellectual communications were sought, but these being obtained by a tedious process, it was deemed sufficiently interesting if a few sentences could be made out, or even one. It was, moreover, a great object with inquirers to ascertain by the interchange of language, whether the spirit of a relation or friend were really present, as alleged by the supposed spirit. Hence, the communications were very deficient as respects any information of the spirit world. It is not surprising, therefore, that prejudicial unbelievers should have taken up the idea that there is nothing inviting in the142 heaven of Spiritualism. I hope that, agreeably to the communications from the spirit world recorded in the preceding pages, there is enough to create an ardent desire to become a dweller therein.
738. When the first spiritual experiences happened, most observers were focused on seeing the physical effects. Next, they sought intellectual communications, but since these were obtained through a lengthy process, it was considered quite interesting if they could understand even a few sentences or just one. Additionally, it was very important for inquirers to confirm through conversation whether the spirit of a loved one was truly present, as claimed by the supposed spirit. As a result, the communications were often lacking in meaningful information about the spirit world. It's not surprising that skeptical non-believers embraced the idea that there’s nothing appealing in the 142 realm of Spiritualism. I hope that, in line with the communications from the spirit world mentioned in the earlier pages, there is enough to inspire a strong desire to dwell there.
739. But is it not unreasonable for a person to disdain a state of existence which is by the spirits themselves described as “ineffably” happy? Alluding to the progression, which is to carry spirits eventually among the ministering angels of God, I observed to my spirit friend, Dr. W. E. Channing, that I did not consider him in heaven yet. “Were you situated as I am,” said he, “you would not say that!” But let us see how far the ideas of heaven, as warranted in Scripture, are comparable with those which have been communicated by spirits.
739. But isn’t it unreasonable for someone to look down on a state of being that is described by the spirits themselves as “ineffably” happy? Referring to the journey that will eventually take spirits among the ministering angels of God, I mentioned to my spirit friend, Dr. W. E. Channing, that I didn’t think he was in heaven yet. “If you were in my position,” he replied, “you wouldn’t say that!” But let’s explore how the biblical concepts of heaven compare to those shared by spirits.
740. In a work by the Rev. Mr. Harbaugh, of the German Reformed Church of Lancaster, Pa., a great effort is made to collect all the hints respecting heaven which have been given in the Old and New Testaments. This learned divine quotes the following paragraph from Dr. Chalmers: “The common imagination,” says Dr. Chalmers, “that we have a paradise on the other side of death, is that of a lofty aerial region, where the inmates float in ether, or are mysteriously suspended upon nothing—where all the warm and sensible accompaniments which give such an expression of strength, and life, and colouring to our present habitation, are attenuated into a sort of spiritual element; that is, meagre and imperceptible, and utterly uninviting to the eye of mortals here below; where every vestige of materialism is done away, and nothing left but unearthly scenes, that have no power of allurement, and certain unearthly ecstasies, with which it is felt impossible to sympathize.”
740. In a work by Rev. Mr. Harbaugh from the German Reformed Church in Lancaster, Pa., a significant effort is made to gather all the insights about heaven found in the Old and New Testaments. This learned scholar quotes the following passage from Dr. Chalmers: “The common notion,” says Dr. Chalmers, “that we have a paradise on the other side of death is of a grand aerial space, where the inhabitants float in the atmosphere, or are mysteriously suspended in nothingness—where all the warm and tangible aspects that give such a sense of strength, life, and color to our current existence are reduced to a kind of spiritual essence; that is, thin and barely noticeable, completely uninviting to the eyes of mortals below; where every trace of materialism is eliminated, leaving behind only otherworldly scenes that hold no attraction and certain otherworldly ecstasies that seem impossible to relate to.”
742. The most favourable idea of heaven given in Scripture seems to be that which identifies it with Paradise; in other words, a most beautiful garden. But who would conceive an eternal residence in one garden, however superlative its attractions, as desirable? The idea of the spheres assumes a succession of gardens, with every pleasure, every joy of which the human heart and intellect are capable; and beyond those gardens the whole universe is open to us, and an ultimate ministration as angels under our Heavenly Father.
742. The most appealing idea of heaven presented in Scripture seems to be the one that equates it with Paradise; in other words, a stunning garden. But who would imagine an eternal stay in just one garden, no matter how amazing it is, as something desirable? The concept of the spheres suggests a series of gardens, each filled with every pleasure and joy that the human heart and mind can experience; beyond those gardens, the entire universe is accessible to us, along with a final support as angels under our Heavenly Father.
743. The portraiture cited by Chalmers is not approved of by the Rev. Mr. Harbaugh, but in order to confute it he does not resort to any better picture given in the Bible, but to reasoning. This shows that, learned as he is, and idolatrous as he appears in worshipping the Bible as an adequate fountain of light, he cannot get from the object of this idolatry any passage tending to prove the inconsistency of the idea quoted from Chalmers with Scripture. Were there not the greatest poverty of instruction on this all-important subject, the ideas alleged to exist as above mentioned,143 upon the high authority of Dr. Chalmers, could never have had sufficient currency to merit notice. It may be assumed that no Christians can conceive themselves to be better entitled to the joys of heaven than the twelve apostles of Christ. In order to show how far any expectations of a bliss higher than that afforded by Spiritualism could have been entertained by those disciples consistently with Scripture, I deem it in point to refer the language held to them by their Divine Master. I subjoin a few lines from Dr. Harbaugh, wherein he quotes the query put to that Master, by the twelve, and the consequent reply. Nothing can be farther from my idea of a happy state than the benefaction promised to them. The query and reply are subjoined, in order to enable the reader to judge of both:—Behold, we have left all and followed thee: what shall we have therefor? The Saviour answered the above query when made by Peter, as follows:—When the Son of Man shall sit upon the throne of his glory, ye shall also sit upon twelve thrones, judging the twelve tribes of Israel. Here is a direct answer by Christ to an inquiry respecting the nature of the reward which his disciples were to have for their merits as his faithful devotees. They are to be made severally worldly dignitaries; each is to sit on a throne, judging a tribe of Israel. That is, they are to have worldly pre-eminence, accompanied, of course, by all the vexations attendant on such stations, as well as the uncertainty and limitation arising from liability to death and disease. How weak and worldly-minded must his disciples have been, could such a prospect be alluring to them! I ask for any sectarian to say in candour, whether a governorship over one of the wealthiest States, the presidency, or any sovereignty in Christendom, would be deemed a heaven in comparison with that eternity of ineffable happiness enjoyed by the immortal spirits of the higher spheres? Yet Mr. Harbaugh, with the simplicity of blind faith, quotes this without perceiving how meagre is the gospel evidence thus afforded of the joys awaiting the faithful as a reward for their good conduct in this life.
743. The portrayal mentioned by Chalmers isn’t supported by Rev. Mr. Harbaugh. However, to argue against it, he doesn’t use a better example from the Bible but relies on reasoning. This indicates that, despite his knowledge and his apparent idolatry in treating the Bible as a complete source of truth, he can’t find any scripture that disproves Chalmers’ statement. If there weren’t such a significant lack of instruction on this crucial topic, the ideas attributed to Dr. Chalmers could never have gained enough traction to deserve attention. It seems safe to say that no Christians believe they are more deserving of heavenly joy than the twelve apostles of Christ. To illustrate how any hope for a greater bliss than what Spiritualism offers could align with scripture, I think it’s relevant to refer to the words spoken to them by their Divine Master. I’ll include a few lines from Dr. Harbaugh, where he quotes the question asked of that Master by the twelve, along with the response. My vision of a joyful state is far removed from the reward promised to them. The question and answer are provided so readers can make their own judgment: Look, we have left everything and followed you: what will we get in return? The Savior answered Peter's question like this: When the Son of Man sits on his glorious throne, you will also sit on twelve thrones, judging the twelve tribes of Israel. Here is Christ’s clear response to a query about the type of reward his disciples would receive for their loyalty as his followers. They’re to become worldly leaders; each will sit on a throne, judging a tribe of Israel. In other words, they are promised worldly superiority, along with all the troubles that come with such roles, as well as the uncertainties and limitations brought on by the possibility of death and illness. How weak-minded and focused on the world must those disciples have been if such a future seemed appealing to them! I challenge any sectarian to honestly say whether being a governor in a wealthy state, the president, or any ruler in Christendom would be considered heaven compared to the eternal, indescribable happiness enjoyed by the immortal beings in higher realms? Yet Mr. Harbaugh, with the simplicity of blind faith, presents this without realizing how inadequate this gospel evidence is regarding the joys awaiting the faithful as a reward for their good deeds in this life.
744. The following remarks, made by Mr. Harbaugh, demonstrate how partial sectarians are in reading Scripture: “What shall we have therefor? This is a question that frequently arises in the Christian’s mind, as he endeavours to cheer his ofttimes drooping spirits with a look toward the recompense of reward. What shall we have? We have left all for thee, and by following thee we have confessed that we are pilgrims and strangers upon earth. In this world we shall have tribulation; but thou didst overcome the world; what shall those have who overcame with thee?” Harbaugh remarks: “Here then is curiosity which the Saviour himself approves, because he satisfies it. The same pious curiosity still manifests itself in the minds of God’s people in their holiest hours, and shall there be nothing revealed to satisfy them? Yes, God will approve of such inquiries, and will grant the influence of that Spirit, who leads unto all truth to all those who search the Scripture for an answer.” Drawing an144 eloquent picture of the aspirations of the soul for some realization of the vague ideas of the rewards of the faithful in a future state of existence, he exults that this curiosity, as he calls it, should be sanctioned by Christ, “who approves this curiosity because he satisfies it.” How does he satisfy it? Is it by holding up the hope of a judgeship for each? It seems it was not then foreseen that instead of performing the part of the Jewish Messiah, with which he thus identified himself, that of gathering together the chosen people of God, he was to put forth opinions which were to scatter them through the world. “Wo unto you, Chorazin,” &c., for the heinous offence of not admitting him to be both the Messiah and the Son of God. The promise of the judgeships was quite consistent with the former character, and strengthens the idea that he never pretended to any higher mission. With this the promise in question is consistent, but is wholly irreconcilable with his divinity, which would make these judgeships worse than giving a stone for bread or a serpent for a fish. In order to have bestowed these judgeships, the Roman empire must have been subverted. It seems that if (as stated by the worthy Mr. Harbaugh) the curiosity of the disciples was truly and correctly satisfied, that this satisfaction was the sum total of the heaven with which they were remunerated; since not the slightest hint is given that they were, like the penitent thief, to be with their object of devotion in paradise. It would seem, on the whole, that the rewards of the thief and the beggar Lazarus were of a more heavenly nature than those promised to the apostles, even had the latter been susceptible of realization, instead of being irreconcilable with the doom which awaited the Hebrews, and consequently a mere vox et præterea nihil. But while, in lieu of an eternal progressive happiness, Christ holds up the transient, precarious, and limited supremacy from which a truly pious and wise man would turn in disgust, when hell is to be represented, we have eternal torments typified by fire, and weeping and gnashing of teeth in utter darkness, in despite of this fire. The situation which Christ, the Son of God, was to have, was to bear manifestly a relation to that of his disciples. His situation would be somewhat analogous to that of Washington, when he was in the presidential chair, and the thirteen States were governed by as many of his faithful followers in the Revolutionary War. Yet Washington did not find his chair worth retaining longer than the good of the country made it important to remain. I am confident that neither would that great man leave his position in the seventh sphere for the presidency, nor any spirit among those who held the gubernatorial dignity, as suggested, find a governorship now a motive for leaving their bright abodes in the celestial world.
744. The following remarks made by Mr. Harbaugh show how partial some people are when reading Scripture: “What will we receive? This is a question that often arises in a Christian's mind as they try to lift their sometimes heavy spirits by considering the promise of reward. What will we receive? We have given up everything for you, and by following you, we admit that we are travelers and outsiders on this earth. In this world, we will face challenges; but you have conquered the world; what will those who have triumphed with you receive?” Harbaugh notes: “This is a curiosity that the Savior himself values, because he addresses it. The same faithful curiosity continues to be present in the minds of God's people during their most holy moments, and will there be nothing revealed to satisfy them? Yes, God will appreciate such questions and will provide the guidance of that Spirit, who leads to all truth, to those who seek answers in the Scriptures.” He paints an144 eloquent picture of the soul’s yearning for some understanding of the unclear ideas regarding the rewards of the righteous in a future existence, and he celebrates this curiosity, as he calls it, should be endorsed by Christ, “who supports this curiosity because he addresses it.” How does he address it? Is it by offering the hope of being judges? It seems it wasn't anticipated at that time that instead of fulfilling the role of the Jewish Messiah, with which he identified himself, gathering the chosen people of God, he would express views that would scatter them throughout the world. “Woe to you, Chorazin,” etc., for the serious offense of not accepting him as both the Messiah and the Son of God. The promise of judgeships was perfectly in line with the previous role and reinforces the notion that he never claimed a higher mission. This promise aligns with that idea but is entirely incompatible with his divinity, which would make these judgeships worse than giving a stone for bread or a serpent for fish. To grant these judgeships, the Roman Empire would have to be overturned. It seems that if (according to the esteemed Mr. Harbaugh) the disciples' curiosity was honestly and accurately satisfied, then this satisfaction was the entirety of the heaven they were rewarded with; since there’s not a hint that they were, like the remorseful thief, to be with their object of devotion in paradise. Overall, it would appear that the rewards of the thief and the beggar Lazarus were of a more heavenly quality than those promised to the apostles, even if the latter could be realized, instead of being incompatible with the fate that awaited the Hebrews, thus merely a vox et præterea nihil. But while, instead of an eternal, increasing happiness, Christ offers a temporary, uncertain, and limited supremacy that a truly pious and wise person would reject in disgust, when it comes to hell, we have eternal punishments represented by fire, along with weeping and grinding of teeth in utter darkness, despite this fire. The role that Christ, the Son of God, was to have was clearly related to that of his disciples. His position would be somewhat similar to that of Washington when he was president, with the thirteen States governed by as many of his faithful followers from the Revolutionary War. However, Washington didn't hold onto his position longer than was beneficial for the country. I’m sure that neither would that great man leave his place in the seventh sphere for the presidency, nor would any spirit among those who held gubernatorial authority, as suggested, find a governorship compelling enough to abandon their radiant realms in the celestial world.
745. Dr. Harbaugh sanctions the idea that the revolutions of all the constellations with which telescopic examination has made us acquainted, may take place about a central sun, bearing the relation to other suns145 analogous to that which God has been represented to have to the other potentates; whence the title of “King of kings.” The existence, then, of a sun of suns is suggested, about which the constellations formed by inferior bodies of the same kind revolve. It would seem, then, that a more fitted allotment had been made if, enthroned by his Father’s side on that sun of suns, he had allotted to each of his disciples a constellation, than have assigned to them miserable transitory judgeships in Judea: a speck of territory, in this speck of a globe, which in a field of vision embracing the universe, would be imperceptible.
745. Dr. Harbaugh supports the idea that the movements of all the constellations we've observed through telescopes might revolve around a central sun, similar to how God is thought to relate to other rulers, which is why He is called the "King of kings." This suggests the existence of a sun of suns, around which the constellations made up of lesser bodies of the same type revolve. It seems more appropriate that, sitting beside His Father on that sun of suns, He would assign each of His disciples a constellation, rather than giving them insignificant temporary positions in Judea: a tiny patch of land on this small globe, which would be invisible in the vastness of the universe. 145
746. There being in Scripture so much more stress laid upon the torments of hell than the joys of heaven, is probably the reason why the horror of death is so great among Christians in general. Their practice in this respect is to speak of death as a great calamity. Here and there may be found a believer who is thoroughly convinced that the efficacy of his peculiar tenets, combined with the absence of criminality, and the redeeming influence of repentance, will insure him a passage to heaven; but the predominant language is to represent the death of any large number of human beings as a great calamity. Those who are exposed to danger pray most earnestly to be saved, and their death is always treated as a cause for deep regret by surviving friends. Hence the weeping, the grief, and the mourning called for by custom,—the relations and connections wearing black for months. Hence the dark hearse, the black pall, and bitter lamentation over the grave; which shows that it is not realized that death is only a glorious spiritual birth! I am confident that spiritualists will soon abandon a custom which must on their part be inconsistent; since they must look on death as no more a bereavement, than a residence in a foreign country, the means of communication being within reach, and a happy reunion foreseen.
746. The Bible emphasizes the torments of hell way more than the joys of heaven, which likely contributes to the fear of death that many Christians experience. Generally, they see death as a major tragedy. Occasionally, you might find someone who firmly believes that their unique beliefs, along with being morally good and the power of repentance, will guarantee them a place in heaven; however, the prevailing attitude is to view the death of many people as a terrible loss. Those in danger tend to pray intensely to be spared, and the death of a loved one is always seen as a source of deep sorrow among those left behind. This leads to the tears, grief, and mourning that tradition demands—family and friends wearing black for months. This results in the dark hearse, the black shroud, and the intense sorrow at the grave; it shows that the idea of death as a glorious spiritual rebirth isn’t fully understood! I believe that spiritualists will soon move away from this custom since it contradicts their beliefs; to them, death should feel no different than living in another country, with communication still possible and a joyful reunion expected.
748. It has been urged that a most substantial idea of heaven, given in the old Bible, is that of a restoration to Paradise, of which the description gives the idea of an exquisite, beautiful garden; but Spiritualism gives the idea of garden above garden, improving in beauty with their elevation. Then there are thirty-six gradations in all, and in the five happy spheres thirty; so that there is excitement arising from well-rewarded emulation as a source of interest. Into the idea of heaven, as suggested in Scripture, intellectual ability and improvement form no part and give no superiority; whence the tendency of the more strict constructionists to turn a cold shoulder to every acquirement which is not coupled with scriptural knowledge. Neither the Athenæum, nor any library, is to be accessible on Sunday. If the time devoted at meetings and at church146 were given to the study of the real book of God, how much more learned would be those who thus employ their Sundays! It is held that the lowest and most ignorant person who is educated to believe implicitly the tenets of a sect, when he would by the same process as easily be made to believe any other tenets, is in heaven to be as high as the most enlightened as well as virtuous man, who has the only merit which can be attached to belief in a high degree—that of ardent desire for truth, and taking the pains to form an opinion for himself. Nay, the ignorant bigot is to be higher in heaven, if the free-thinker alluded to, should not agree with the ghostly adviser, of the devoted sectarian with whom he is compared.
748. It's been argued that a key idea of heaven in the old Bible is about returning to Paradise, which is described as a stunning, beautiful garden. However, Spiritualism presents the concept of garden after garden, becoming more beautiful with each level. There are a total of thirty-six levels, with thirty in the five happy spheres, creating excitement from well-earned competition as an engaging factor. In the idea of heaven suggested in Scripture, intellectual ability and growth play no role and offer no advantage, which leads more strict interpreters to dismiss any knowledge not tied to biblical teachings. Neither the Athenæum nor any library can be accessed on Sundays. If the time spent in meetings and at church146 were dedicated to studying the true book of God, those who spent their Sundays this way would be much more knowledgeable! It is believed that the lowest, most ignorant person who learns to blindly accept the beliefs of a sect, who could easily be made to accept any other beliefs through the same process, will rank in heaven as highly as the most enlightened and virtuous person, who has the singular merit of a strong desire for truth and the effort to form their own opinions. In fact, the ignorant bigot might rank higher in heaven if the free-thinker mentioned doesn't align with the religious advisor, compared to the devoted sectarian being judged.
749. The idea of living in the finest garden which imagination can conceive, without the enjoyments and progression which my father’s communication attributes to the spheres, would beget tedium rather than the ineffable happiness which my spirit friends profess to enjoy. But while one of the Jewish ideas of heaven in its best form, is thus deficient, the description given by the learned Josephus of hell is horrible in the extreme, that of heaven being disgusting. I give it as I find it quoted by the Rev. Mr. Harbaugh:
749. The idea of living in the most beautiful garden that imagination can create, without the enjoyment and growth that my father's teachings associate with the afterlife, would result in boredom rather than the indescribable happiness that my spirit friends claim to experience. However, while one of the best Jewish concepts of heaven is lacking in this way, the description provided by the scholar Josephus of hell is shockingly terrible, making heaven sound dreadful. I present it as I found it quoted by Rev. Mr. Harbaugh:
750. “Now as to Hades, wherein the souls of the righteous and unrighteous are detained, it is necessary to speak of it. Hades is a place in the world not regularly finished, a subterraneous region, wherein the light of this world does not shine; from which circumstance in this region there must be perpetual darkness. This region is allotted as a place of custody for souls, in which angels are appointed as guardians to them, who distribute to them temporary punishment, agreeably to every one’s behaviour and manners.
750. “Now regarding Hades, where the souls of both the good and the bad are kept, it’s important to discuss it. Hades is a part of the world that isn’t fully complete, an underground area where the light of this world doesn’t shine; because of this, there must be constant darkness in this place. This area is designated as a holding place for souls, where angels are assigned as their guardians, administering temporary punishments based on each person's actions and behavior.
751. “In this region there is a certain place set apart as a lake of unquenchable fire, whereinto, we suppose, no one hath hitherto been cast, but it is prepared for a day aforedetermined by God, in which one righteous sentence shall deservedly be passed upon all men; when the unjust, and those that have been disobedient to God, and have given honour to such idols as have been the vain operations of the hands of men as to God himself, shall be adjudged to this everlasting punishment, as having been the causes of defilement; while the just shall obtain an incorruptible and never-fading kingdom. These are now indeed confined in Hades, but not in the same place wherein the just are confined. For there is one descent in this region, at whose gate, we believe, there stands an archangel, with a host; which gate, when those pass through that are conducted down by the angels appointed over souls, they do not go the same way, but the just are guided to the right hand, and are led with hymns, sung by the angels appointed over that place, unto a region of light, in which the just have dwelt from the beginning of the world, not constrained by necessity, but ever enjoying the prospect of the good things they see, and rejoicing i147n the expectation of those new enjoyments which will be peculiar to every one of them, and esteeming those things beyond what we have here; with whom there is no place of toil, no burning heat, no piercing cold, nor any briers there; but the countenances of the fathers and the just, which they see always, smile upon them while they wait for the rest, and eternal new life in heaven, which is to succeed this region. This place we call the bosom of Abraham. But as to the unjust, they are dragged by force to the left hand, by the angels allotted for punishment, no longer going with a good will, but as prisoners driven by violence; to whom are sent the angels appointed over them to reproach them, and threaten them with their terrible looks, and to thrust them still downward. Now these angels that are set over these souls drag them into the neighbourhood of hell itself; who, when they are hard by it, continually hear the noise of it, and do not stand clear of the hot vapour itself; but when they have a near view of this spectacle, as of a terrible and exceeding great prospect of fire, they are struck with a fearful expectation of a future judgment, and in effect punished thereby; not only so, but when they see the place (or choir) of the fathers and of the just, even thereby are they punished, for a chaos deep and large is fixed between them, insomuch that a just man that hath compassion upon them cannot be admitted, nor can any one that is unjust, if he were bold enough to attempt it, pass over it.”
751. “In this area, there's a specific place known as a lake of unquenchable fire, where, as far as we know, no one has ever been thrown, but it’s set aside for a day predetermined by God, when a single righteous decision will justly be made about all people; when the unjust, those who have disobeyed God, and those who have honored idols created by human hands instead of God himself, will be sentenced to this everlasting punishment due to their defilement; while the righteous will receive an incorruptible and everlasting kingdom. They are currently confined in Hades, but not in the same location as the just. There is one descent in this area, at whose gate we believe an archangel stands with a host; when those intended for this descent pass through the gate, they do not go the same way; instead, the just are directed to the right, led by hymns sung by the angels in charge of that place, into a region of light where the just have existed since the beginning of the world, not out of necessity, but always enjoying the view of the blessings in sight, and rejoicing in the expectation of the new delights that will be uniquely theirs, valuing those things above anything we have here; with them, there’s no fatigue, no burning heat, no biting cold, nor any thorns; but the faces of the fathers and the just, which they always see, smile upon them while they wait for the rest and eternal new life in heaven, which will follow this region. We call this place the bosom of Abraham. On the other hand, the unjust are forcibly dragged to the left by the angels assigned for punishment, no longer willingly but like prisoners being driven by force; the angels sent to them reproach and threaten them with their terrifying looks, pushing them further down. These angels in charge of these souls drag them close to hell itself; when they are nearby, they constantly hear its noise and cannot avoid the hot vapor; but when they catch a glimpse of this dreadful and vast spectacle of fire, they are overwhelmed with fear for the future judgment, and thus suffer punishment; not only that, but when they see the place (or choir) of the fathers and the just, they are punished even more because there’s a deep and wide chasm fixed between them, so much so that a compassionate just person cannot reach them, nor can any unjust person, even if they dared, cross over.”
752. So much for Josephus. Mr. Harbaugh subjoins as follows: “This extract is exceedingly interesting. It shows to what extent of distinctness the Jewish ideas of the future state had attained. The dreamlike underworld is here considerably illuminated. The righteous and the wicked are separated, and already share the first fruits of their eternal reward. The righteous are surrounded with intimations and shadowy promises of better things to come, in the expectation of which they are already happy; the wicked are surrounded with tokens and forebodings of more fearful ill, much of which they already suffer in awful expectation.
752. So much for Josephus. Mr. Harbaugh adds the following: “This excerpt is really interesting. It highlights how clear the Jewish beliefs about the afterlife had become. The dreamlike underworld is much better explained here. The righteous and the wicked are separated and already experiencing the initial rewards of their eternal destinies. The righteous are filled with hints and vague promises of better things to come, and they find happiness in that hope; the wicked are surrounded by signs and fears of more terrible suffering, much of which they are already enduring in horrifying anticipation.
753. “Through this picture,” says our good parson, “we see in faint but terrible glimmerings, in the distance, the region of eternal fire, which awaits the wicked when the judgment-day shall remove them from Hades; on the other hand, we see also the dawning of an eternal day for the just, the rest and eternal new life which is to succeed this region. This kingdom of the dead, beyond which the thoughts of men in the early ages did not wander, is considered only as a place of detention for judgment, while the idea of a final state, both for the righteous and the wicked, is believed to exist beyond it.”
753. “Through this image,” says our good parson, “we glimpse, though faintly and terrifyingly, in the distance, the realm of eternal fire that awaits the wicked when judgment day takes them from Hades; on the flip side, we also see the dawn of an eternal day for the righteous, the rest and everlasting new life that will follow this realm. This kingdom of the dead, beyond which people's thoughts in ancient times rarely ventured, is viewed merely as a holding place for judgment, while the concept of a final state, for both the righteous and the wicked, is believed to lie beyond it.”
754. How can any person sincerely pretend that those who rely on a happy idea of our immortal life are indebted for it to the source from which this Hebrew Pharisee derived the impressions given in the preceding quotation? Yet the Pharisees were the only conspicuous Hebrew sect who believed in heaven. The Sadducees did not believe in immortality.
754. How can anyone honestly claim that those who depend on an optimistic view of our eternal life owe it to the source from which this Hebrew Pharisee got the ideas mentioned in the previous quote? Still, the Pharisees were the only prominent Hebrew group that believed in heaven. The Sadducees did not believe in immortality.
755. The history of Lazarus and the rich man, (says Harbaugh, page 168,) “plainly teaches that both the righteous and the wicked on death pass into a fixed and eternal abode, where no change is possible;” and he further states (pp. 169-70) that “the misery of the wicked commences immediately after death, and before the resurrection, and their condition is unchangeably fixed.” According to St. Luke, (chapter xvi.) in the page alluded to above by Harbaugh, we are informed that the wicked, while in the torture of hell-fire, are within the view of the righteous, (verse 23.) The righteous are near enough to converse with those in torment, and yet there is an impassable barrier between them. The rich man is not tortured for his sins, but simply because he had “enjoyed good things.” Yet Abraham, who turned his son and son’s mother out in the wilderness to starve, and twice exposed his wife to prostitution, is represented as enjoying the reward due to the righteous.
755. The story of Lazarus and the rich man, (says Harbaugh, page 168,) “clearly teaches that both the righteous and the wicked, upon death, enter a fixed and eternal state where no change is possible;” and he also mentions (pp. 169-70) that “the suffering of the wicked begins immediately after death, and before the resurrection, and their condition is unchangeably established.” According to St. Luke, (chapter xvi.) in the section referred to by Harbaugh, we learn that the wicked, while enduring the torment of hell-fire, are visible to the righteous, (verse 23.) The righteous are close enough to speak with those in pain, but there’s an unbridgeable gap between them. The rich man isn’t punished for his sins but simply because he had “enjoyed good things.” However, Abraham, who sent his son and his son's mother into the wilderness to starve and twice put his wife in danger, is depicted as receiving the reward meant for the righteous.
759. According to Matthew, (chapter xxv. 24,) the blessed, after the day of judgment, are to inherit the kingdom prepared from the foundation of the world. Of the joys that kingdom would afford there is no description. But, as usual, hell is made sufficiently horrible, (chapter xxv. 41,)—“Depart from me, ye cursed, into everlasting fire, prepared for the devil and his angels.”
759. According to Matthew, (chapter xxv. 24,) the blessed, after the day of judgment, are to inherit the kingdom prepared from the foundation of the world. There’s no description of the joys that kingdom would bring. But, as always, hell is portrayed as quite dreadful, (chapter xxv. 41,)—“Depart from me, you cursed, into everlasting fire, prepared for the devil and his angels.”
761. It has been urged that human conduct is so much dependent on organization, education, temptation, and example, neither of which are within the option of any soul, that the orthodox doctrine respecting sin is manifestly wrong. But admitting the culpability which that doctrine imputes, it has been shown that the gradations of sinfulness between the extremes of vice and virtue are innumerable. Suppose for each gradation a strand in a ladder, like that of which Jacob dreamed, and human souls supported severally at elevations commensurate with their respective pretensions. This adjustment being made, suppose a plane at any level to divide the vertical row into two portions, all below the plane being con149sidered as goats, all above the plane as sheep. Evidently, between the soul just above, and that just below the plane, there would be only a shade of difference; yet the one would have to go to hell, the other to heaven, eternally.
761. It's been argued that human behavior relies heavily on factors like organization, education, temptation, and example, none of which individuals can control, making the traditional views on sin clearly incorrect. However, even if we accept the blame that those views assign, it's been demonstrated that there are countless degrees of sinfulness between the extremes of vice and virtue. Imagine each degree as a rung on a ladder, like the one Jacob envisioned, with human souls positioned at different heights based on their respective claims. With that setup, picture a horizontal line at any point separating the vertical line into two parts, with everything below considered goats and everything above considered sheep. Clearly, there would be only a slight difference between the person just above the line and the person just below it; yet, one would be condemned to hell while the other is granted eternal entry to heaven.
763. One of the most agreeable conceptions attending our future existence in the spheres, is that of being restored to the appearance of youth; the decrepitude and wrinkles of age, of disease, mutilation, deformity, ugliness, are all avoided in the spiritual body. The insane are restored to reason, the idiot gradually improved in mind.
763. One of the most pleasant ideas about our future life in the spiritual realms is that we will regain the appearance of youth; the frailty and wrinkles of old age, along with illness, injury, deformity, and ugliness, are all absent in the spiritual body. Those who are insane will be restored to sanity, and the intellectually disabled will gradually improve.
DISCORDANCE AS TO THE WHEREABOUT OF THE SCRIPTURAL HEAVEN.—INSTINCTIVE IMPRESSION AS TO HEAVEN BEING OVERHEAD.
764. There is no small degree of contradiction in Scripture respecting the locality of heaven. In addressing the thief, paradise is identified with heaven by Christ. “St. Paul is alleged to have been taken up into paradise,” says Harbaugh; yet, according to the map accompanying the work of Josephus, Paradise is represented as being upon the river Tigris, near the Persian Gulf. The idea given of the abode of Adam and Eve, in Genesis, conveys the impression that it was a terrestrial locality.
764. There’s quite a bit of contradiction in Scripture regarding where heaven is located. When speaking to the thief, Christ equates paradise with heaven. “St. Paul is said to have been taken up into paradise,” Harbaugh notes; however, the map in Josephus's work shows Paradise as situated near the Tigris River, close to the Persian Gulf. The description of Adam and Eve’s home in Genesis suggests that it was a physical place on Earth.
766. Elijah was carried up to heaven in the sight of Elisha. The commandment makes heaven above, the earth beneath. Christ was seen ascending by his disciples, and according to the apostles’ creed, after descending into hell, he arose on the third day and ascended into heaven. Yet Josephus consigns both heaven and hell to a subterranean region, like the Elysian Fields and Erebus of the heathen, but places them on each side of a lake of everlasting fire. This representation is sanctioned in the allusion by Christ to Dives, Lazarus, and Abraham; the former, broiling to eternity, requests that Lazarus should get a little water to cool the tip of his tongue. This Abraham declares to be impossible. Hence it appears the parties were so near as to converse with each other, and for those who were blest to witness the sufferings of the damned. Thus, according to Christ as well as Josephus, heaven and hell are in immediate proximity, and both must be in the infernal regions.
766. Elijah was taken up to heaven in front of Elisha. The commandment establishes heaven above and earth below. Christ was seen ascending by his disciples, and according to the apostles’ creed, after descending into hell, he rose on the third day and ascended into heaven. However, Josephus places both heaven and hell in a subterranean area, similar to the Elysian Fields and Erebus of the pagans, but separates them by a lake of eternal fire. This depiction is supported by Christ's reference to Dives, Lazarus, and Abraham; the former, suffering eternally, asks for Lazarus to dip his finger in water to cool his tongue. Abraham responds that this is impossible. Thus, it seems the two groups were close enough to talk with each other, allowing those who are blessed to witness the torments of the damned. Therefore, according to both Christ and Josephus, heaven and hell are in close proximity, and both must be in the infernal regions.
770. It is not the feebleness of the impressions respecting the existence of another world, where happiness is proportional to good conduct, that renders the existing system so inoperative in preventing those vices which it especially interdicts; as, for instance, combativeness, cupidity, and revengefulness; so that the course usually pursued by professed Christians, does not merely amount to a neglect of Christ’s precepts, but renders an adherence to them disreputable? Nothing is more degrading throughout Christendom than poverty or tame submission to blows. The last excuse Christians in general will make for any omission or deficiency is their poverty.
770. It's not the weakness of the beliefs about another life, where happiness is linked to good behavior, that makes the current system ineffective in stopping the vices it specifically prohibits, like aggression, greed, and a desire for revenge. The usual behavior of many Christians doesn't just amount to ignoring Christ’s teachings, but it actually makes following them look shameful. Nothing is more humiliating in the Christian world than being poor or passively accepting abuse. The final excuse most Christians will offer for any mistakes or shortcomings is their poverty.
772. Notwithstanding the representations of Josephus, sanctioned, as above shown, by Christ, of the subterranean localization of Elysium, there seems, nevertheless, an instinctive propensity to assume that heaven is overhead. Clergymen all look upward when they address God, and the Thespian artists universally follow their example. Whenever heaven is referred to, it is customary, I believe, for all devout persons to turn their eyes in the same direction.
772. Despite what Josephus said, which was approved by Christ regarding the underground location of Elysium, there seems to be an instinctive tendency to think of heaven as being above us. Clergymen always look upwards when they pray to God, and actors do the same. Whenever heaven is mentioned, I believe it's customary for all faithful people to gaze in that same direction.
773. But if heaven be above, what does this term above mean? It practically designates a vertical direction relatively to this globe at any point over which a speaker who uses the word may stand. Consequently, it indicates a space overhead, having everywhere the same relative position to the terrestrial surface; in other words, a region concentric with that surface, like that within which the clouds float. This floating takes place rarely at a less distance than two, or more than six, miles.
773. But if there is a heaven above, what does the term above actually mean? It essentially refers to a vertical direction in relation to this planet at any spot where someone using the word may be standing. Therefore, it signifies a space overhead that maintains the same relative position to the Earth's surface everywhere; in other words, a region that surrounds that surface, similar to the area where clouds are found. This floating typically happens at a distance of no less than two miles and no more than six miles.
775. According to Christianity, there is no immortality for animals below the grade of humanity; but according to Spiritualism, animals that are favourites of man in this world are his companions in the next. Much stress is laid on the singing of birds in the account given of the spheres. There is a line of demarcation below which the privilege of an existence after death is not enjoyed. Respecting that boundary my information is at present incomplete.
775. According to Christianity, animals below the level of humans do not have immortality; however, according to Spiritualism, animals that are beloved by humans in this life become their companions in the next. The singing of birds is emphasized in the descriptions of the afterlife. There is a clear boundary beneath which the gift of existence after death is not granted. My knowledge about that boundary is currently limited.
776. In order to do justice to the excellent and learned clergyman to whom I have so often referred, I will annex the whole of those pages in which he conceives himself to give the “true doctrine” respecting heaven. However unsatisfactory it may be to me, I hope it will be found interesting to those who, like the author, look only to the Bible for information respecting their existence beyond the grave.
776. To properly acknowledge the great and knowledgeable clergyman I've referenced so many times, I will include all the pages where he believes he provides the “true doctrine” about heaven. While it might not be satisfying to me, I hope it will be engaging for those who, like the author, seek only the Bible for insights about their lives after death.
“THE TRUE DOCTRINE”
Respecting Heaven, according to the Rev. H. Harbaugh, Pastor of the First German Reformed Church, Lancaster, Penna.
777. “The different theories by which the souls of saints are supposed to be detained from entering heaven immediately at death, have now been exhibited. They have led us a long and dreary chase. The groundlessness of these theories has been, in part, shown in connection with a statement of them. They will, however, be more completely overthrown by a statement of the true doctrine, and by the arguments that may be adduced in its support. Various arguments that, in passing along, were offered against these false views, will also substantiate the true doctrine; thus the same implements that have been used to tear down the old building may be employed to erect the new. If, therefore, any thing should be presented in this section, among other things, which may seem to have been presented before, it must be remembered that though they are the same tools, they are now used to do a different kind of execution.
777. “The various theories about why the souls of saints are thought to be held back from entering heaven immediately after death have now been presented. This has taken us on a long and tiring journey. We've shown that these theories lack foundation, at least in part, while outlining them. However, they will be more thoroughly disproved by presenting the true doctrine and the arguments supporting it. Various arguments that were made against these false views along the way will also back up the true doctrine; thus, the same tools that have been used to dismantle the old structure can be used to build the new one. So, if anything in this section seems familiar or previously presented, it should be noted that while they are the same tools, they are now being applied in a different way.”
778. “We consider the true doctrine of God’s word on this subject to be this: The saints do immediately, at death, enter that place which is called heaven, where the body of the Saviour now is, where the divine manifestations are most clearly and gloriously made, where angels have their proper home, and where all the heirs of Christ shall finally and forevermore be assembled.
778. “We believe the true teaching of God’s word on this topic is this: The saints go directly to heaven at death, the same place where the body of the Savior currently is, where divine manifestations are most clearly and gloriously revealed, where angels find their rightful home, and where all the heirs of Christ will ultimately and eternally gather together."
779. “That the saints pass immediately at death into heaven, is taught in the symbols in some of the most pious and learned denominations in152 the church. We grant that this does not prove it absolutely true; but it has much weight, as showing how the Scripture on this subject was understood by many pious and learned men who had the same interest in and motives for the truth as we have, and were, we may therefore suppose, just as sincerely anxious to be led into the truth as we can possibly be. The conclusions, therefore, to which they have come, and which have been adopted by their numerous successors for centuries, are valuable. Beside furnishing us with the testimony of so much learning and piety, it serves to show that this is no new idea, and that it is not the faith of a few, but is the testimony of the church.
779. “The belief that saints go directly to heaven upon death is found in the teachings of several of the most devout and educated denominations in152 the church. While we acknowledge that this doesn't prove it to be absolutely true, it carries significant weight in demonstrating how Scripture on this topic was interpreted by many devout and knowledgeable individuals who had the same commitment to finding the truth as we do, and who were, one can reasonably assume, just as genuinely eager to discover the truth as we are. Therefore, the conclusions they arrived at, which have been embraced by their many successors for centuries, hold considerable value. In addition to providing us with the insights of such extensive knowledge and faith, it also illustrates that this is not a novel concept and that it is not merely the belief of a select few, but rather a testimony of the church as a whole.
780. “The first symbolical testimony we produce is the Heidelberg Catechism, published first in 1563. This symbol has been the embodiment of the reformed faith for more than three centuries. Its influence has been very extensively respected and felt. It has, since its publication, been translated and read in at least fourteen different languages; and it is said that half a million editions of it have been published in Germany alone. In this country it is received as a symbolic book, both in the Dutch Reformed and in the German Reformed churches. In the fifty-seventh question it is asked, What comfort is afforded to us by the doctrine of the resurrection of the body; and the answer is: ‘That not only my soul after this life shall be immediately taken up to Christ its head; but also, that my body, being raised by the power of Christ, shall be reunited with my soul, and be made like unto the glorious body of Christ.’ Here the doctrine is plainly taught, and has been responded to with a joyful amen by millions during three hundred years.
780. “The first symbolic evidence we present is the Heidelberg Catechism, which was first published in 1563. This text has represented the reformist faith for over three centuries. Its impact has been widely acknowledged and felt. Since its release, it has been translated and read in at least fourteen different languages; and it is estimated that half a million editions have been published in Germany alone. In the United States, it is accepted as a symbolic book in both the Dutch Reformed and German Reformed churches. In the fifty-seventh question, it asks, What comfort do we get from the doctrine of the resurrection of the body? The answer is: ‘That not only my soul after this life shall be immediately taken up to Christ its head; but also, that my body, raised by Christ’s power, shall be reunited with my soul and transformed to be like the glorious body of Christ.’ This doctrine is clearly stated and has received a joyful amen from millions over three hundred years.”
781. “The next is from the Shorter Catechism, received as a symbolic book in the different branches of the Presbyterian communion. It is in answer to the thirty-seventh question: ‘What benefits do believers receive from Christ at death? The souls of believers are at their death made perfect in holiness, and do immediately pass into glory; and their bodies, being still united to Christ, do rest in their graves till the resurrection.’ In the eighty-sixth question of the Larger Catechism this same doctrine is taught in more words. The following quotation is from the Westminster Confession of Faith: ‘The bodies of men, after death, return to dust and see corruption; but their souls, (which neither die nor sleep,) having an immortal substance, immediately return to God who gave them. The souls of the righteous, being then made perfect in holiness, are received into the highest heavens, where they behold the face of God in light and glory, waiting for the full redemption of their bodies.’ The declaration that they are ‘then made perfect in holiness,’ is no doubt directly aimed against the idea of a process of purgatorial or medicinal preparation, mentioned in a previous section. The declaration that they are then ‘received into the highest heavens,’ is intended to stand in opposition to the idea of a middle abode in all its forms.
781. “Next is from the Shorter Catechism, accepted as a symbolic book in the various branches of the Presbyterian church. It answers the thirty-seventh question: ‘What benefits do believers receive from Christ at death? The souls of believers, at their death, are made perfect in holiness, and immediately pass into glory; and their bodies, still united to Christ, rest in their graves until the resurrection.’ In the eighty-sixth question of the Larger Catechism, the same doctrine is discussed in more detail. The following quote is from the Westminster Confession of Faith: ‘The bodies of people, after death, return to dust and decay; but their souls, (which neither die nor sleep,) having an immortal essence, immediately return to God who gave them. The souls of the righteous, being then made perfect in holiness, are received into the highest heavens, where they see the face of God in light and glory, waiting for the complete redemption of their bodies.’ The statement that they are ‘then made perfect in holiness’ is clearly aimed against the idea of a purgatorial process or medicinal preparation, mentioned earlier. The statement that they are then ‘received into the highest heavens’ is meant to oppose the idea of a middle state in all its forms.”
782. “The book of ‘Doctrines and Discipline of the Methodist Episcopal Church’ is silent on this subject; but, so far as I have been able to learn, the proper Protestant doctrine on this subject is held in that large communion. Their views of the nature of justification and sanctification would admit of no other to be consistently believed among them. It is believed that this is also the prevailing sentiment among Baptists, and other Congregationalists.
782. “The book of ‘Doctrines and Discipline of the Methodist Episcopal Church’ doesn’t say anything about this topic; however, from what I’ve gathered, the appropriate Protestant beliefs on this matter are upheld in that large community. Their perspectives on justification and sanctification would exclude any other beliefs from being consistently accepted among them. It is also thought that this view is common among Baptists and other Congregationalists.
783. “What is here presented from symbols as the united faith of so many learned and pious men living in different ages, and in different parts of the world, is also founded on holy Scripture. By no wresting and violence has the church, in the general stream of its theological views, been turned aside from this faith. It is vain that men hope to annul, by means of violent and unnatural interpretations, the plain declarations of Scripture, to serve a theory.
783. “What is presented here through symbols as the shared belief of many educated and devout individuals living in various times and places around the world is also based on holy Scripture. The church has not deviated from this belief through any forced or distorted reasoning in the overall flow of its theological perspective. It is pointless for people to think they can invalidate the clear statements of Scripture using violent and unnatural interpretations to support a theory.”
784. “The Saviour said to the penitent thief on the cross—‘To-day shalt thou be with me in paradise.’ Now the question arises, Where and what is that paradise in which the Saviour promised the dying penitent that he should be with him that day? This can be seen by referring to other passages in the Scriptures where the word paradise is used, and where its sense cannot be mistaken. This can be seen by reference to 2 Cor. xii. There it is said that Paul was caught up into paradise; and in the same passage the place into which he was taken is called the third heaven—the highest and holiest place in the universe. In Rev. ii. 7 we are told that the tree of life stands in the midst of the paradise of God; and in Rev. xxii. 2, we are told that that same tree of life stands by the side of the river which flows from the throne of God and the Lamb. From this it is evident that paradise is the heaven where God dwells and the Lamb. Is then the middle abode, Hades, the kingdom of shades, the peculiar abode of God and the Lamb?
784. “The Savior said to the repentant thief on the cross—‘Today you will be with me in paradise.’ Now the question arises, where and what is that paradise in which the Savior promised the dying repentant would be with him that day? This can be understood by looking at other passages in the Scriptures where the word paradise is used, and where its meaning is clear. For example, in 2 Cor. xii. it says that Paul was taken up into paradise; and in the same passage, the place he was taken to is called the third heaven—the highest and holiest place in the universe. In Rev. ii. 7 we are told that the tree of life stands in the middle of the paradise of God; and in Rev. xxii. 2, we learn that that same tree of life is situated beside the river that flows from the throne of God and the Lamb. From this, it's clear that paradise is the heaven where God and the Lamb dwell. So, is the intermediate place, Hades, the kingdom of shadows, the special dwelling place of God and the Lamb?
785. “The objection that the Saviour himself did not go to heaven that day, but was for forty days afterward on the earth, and that therefore he could not be with the penitent thief in paradise, has no force. During the three days that intervened between his death and resurrection, he could as well be in heaven as in Hades. Indeed, it is evident that he was in heaven during those three days, from what he says to his disciples shortly before his death: ‘A little while, and ye shall not see me; and again, a little while, and ye shall see me, because I go to the Father.’ Moreover, his tarrying on the earth and appearing among his disciples does not conflict with the idea that he was also in paradise. When he was yet in the flesh on earth, he could say: ‘And no man hath ascended up to heaven, but that he came down from heaven, even the Son of man which154 is in heaven.’ In the same way that he was in heaven at that time, he may have been in heaven with the penitent thief during the forty days between his death and ascension.
785. “The argument that the Savior didn’t go to heaven on that day but spent forty more days on earth, and therefore couldn’t be with the repentant thief in paradise, doesn’t hold up. During the three days between his death and resurrection, he could just as easily have been in heaven as in Hades. In fact, it’s clear he was in heaven during those three days based on what he told his disciples just before his death: ‘A little while, and you will not see me; and again, a little while, and you will see me, because I go to the Father.’ Additionally, his staying on earth and appearing to his disciples doesn’t contradict the idea that he was also in paradise. While he was still in the flesh on earth, he could say: ‘And no one has ascended to heaven, except he who came down from heaven, the Son of man which154 is in heaven.’ Just as he was in heaven at that time, he may have been in heaven with the repentant thief during the forty days between his death and ascension.
786. “The history of the rich man and Lazarus (Luke xvi.) plainly teaches that both the righteous and the wicked, at death, pass into a fixed and eternal abode, where no change is possible. No comment on the passage is necessary. This portion of Scripture has a thousand times been tortured out of its meaning by errorists of various kinds, and as often has its testimony fallen back into the church’s healthful stream of sound views. As a sheep, carried away from the fold, returns when set free, so this passage always comes back again; for the voice of a stranger it heareth not, nor followeth!
786. “The story of the rich man and Lazarus (Luke xvi.) clearly shows that both the righteous and the wicked, upon death, enter a fixed and eternal home, where no change can occur. No explanation of the passage is needed. This part of Scripture has been misinterpreted countless times by various errorists, and just as often, its true message has returned to the church’s healthy stream of sound beliefs. Like a sheep that strays from the fold but returns when given the chance, this passage always comes back; for it does not hear the voice of a stranger, nor does it follow!
787. “In the Revelation, John, in his vision, saw the souls of departed martyrs and saints ‘in heaven,’ ‘under the altar,’ ‘before the throne of God,’ &c., and in the company of each other, of God, of Christ, and of angels, in the central and highest heavens, and in that place where the saints go no more out forever. Let it be remembered, also, that all this is before the resurrection; and if the following passages are carefully considered, they will leave no doubt on any candid mind that the saints are, immediately after death, admitted into heaven. To quote them all would be too tedious; a reference to them is sufficient: Rev. v. 6-14; vi. 9-12; vii. 9-17; xiv. 1-6; xiv. 12, 13.
787. “In the Revelation, John, in his vision, saw the souls of departed martyrs and saints ‘in heaven,’ ‘under the altar,’ ‘before the throne of God,’ etc., and in the company of one another, of God, of Christ, and of angels, in the central and highest heavens, and in that place where the saints no longer leave forever. It should also be noted that all this is before the resurrection; and if the following passages are carefully considered, they will leave no doubt in any open-minded person that the saints are immediately after death welcomed into heaven. Quoting them all would be too lengthy; a reference to them is enough: Rev. v. 6-14; vi. 9-12; vii. 9-17; xiv. 1-6; xiv. 12, 13.
788. “For further proof still the reader is referred to Acts vii. 59; 2 Cor. v. 1-9; Phil. i. 21-24; 2 Tim. iv. 6-9; Eph. iii. 15. In this last passage, the whole family of Christ is represented to be at two places, in heaven and on earth; but according to the other theory, there ought also to be some in Hades, or the third place.
788. “For additional evidence, the reader can refer to Acts 7:59; 2 Corinthians 5:1-9; Philippians 1:21-24; 2 Timothy 4:6-9; Ephesians 3:15. In the last passage, the entire family of Christ is seen as being in two places, in heaven and on earth; however, according to the other theory, there should also be some in Hades, or a third place.
789. “It may also be remarked that the misery of the wicked commences, according to the Scripture, immediately after death, and before the resurrection, and that their condition is unchangeably fixed. This is evident from Luke xvi.; and also from that passage in Jude where he says that those who had died impenitent in the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah were, at the time he wrote, ‘suffering the vengeance of eternal fire.’ In like manner it is said of the righteous at death, that they are blessed ‘from henceforth;’ and of those who were clothed in white robes, having come up through great tribulation, it is said, ‘therefore are they before the throne of God.’
789. “It can also be noted that the suffering of the wicked begins, according to Scripture, right after death and before the resurrection, and that their state is permanently set. This is shown in Luke 16; and also in Jude, where he states that those who died unrepentant during the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah were, when he wrote, ‘suffering the punishment of eternal fire.’ Similarly, it is said of the righteous at death that they are blessed ‘from now on;’ and of those wearing white robes, who have come through great suffering, it is said, ‘therefore are they before the throne of God.’
790. “These passages are plain, and it would, in all probability, never have been attempted to make them mean any thing different from their plain sense, were it not for some difficulties, which, it is thought, stood in the way of the doctrine that the souls of the saints pass immediately at death into heaven. Let us look at these, and see whether they are not fancied difficulties, which one glance at the truth ought to remove:
790. “These passages are straightforward, and it likely wouldn’t have been tried to interpret them any differently from their obvious meaning if it weren’t for some challenges that seem to obstruct the belief that the souls of the saints go directly to heaven upon death. Let's examine these challenges to see if they are not imagined difficulties that a simple look at the truth should clear away:
791. (1.) “It is said that the soul, in a state of separation from the155 body, cannot be in the same state, nor properly in the same place, as it will be after the resurrection; and as heaven is to be the eternal abode of the saints after the resurrection, it cannot be a proper abode for them before. This objection has, however, no force. There is, for instance, in this world, a great difference between a person in childhood and old age, yea, before he is born and after, or between his sleeping and waking state; and yet he is in all these in the same world, in the same place, and is the same person. The state and condition of the Saviour differs widely from that of any saint or angel, and yet both are in heaven. So angels and human spirits differ, and yet both are in one company and in one place. So in heaven the condition of the saints before and after the resurrection may differ much, and yet they may be, in both cases, in the same place.
791. (1.) “It is said that the soul, when separated from the155 body, cannot exist in the same state or truly be in the same place as it will be after the resurrection; and since heaven is meant to be the eternal home of the saints after the resurrection, it cannot be a proper home for them before that. However, this objection isn't valid. For example, in this world, there is a significant difference between a person in childhood and in old age, even before they are born and after, or between being asleep and being awake; yet they are all in the same world, in the same place, and are the same person. The state and condition of the Savior are very different from that of any saint or angel, yet both are in heaven. Similarly, angels and human spirits are different, yet they can still be in one company and in one place. Therefore, in heaven, the condition of the saints before and after the resurrection may vary greatly, and yet they can still be in the same place in both instances.”
792. “(2.) The saints cannot enter heaven, it is said, before they are judged; and as the day of judgment is represented to be after the resurrection, the saints cannot enter heaven until after that, and consequently not immediately at death. We may, however, consider, as is generally done, that the day of judgment is only a public and final consummation of the decision of man’s destiny. Although God can, and no doubt, does, for himself, judge and decide for each one when he dies, yet it seems necessary for the glorious praise of his justice and righteousness that all other intelligences should see the propriety of his decision. This is necessary, that every mouth may be stopped; and in order to do this he has appointed a day in the which he will judge the world in righteousness by that man whom he has ordained.
792. “(2.) It’s said that saints can’t enter heaven before they are judged; and since the day of judgment is believed to occur after the resurrection, saints cannot enter heaven until then, which means not immediately at death. However, we can generally consider that the day of judgment is just a public and final confirmation of the decision regarding a person's destiny. While God can and likely does judge and decide for each individual at the time of their death, it seems important for the glory of his justice and righteousness that all other beings understand the fairness of his decision. This is necessary so that every mouth may be stopped; and to achieve this, he has set a day when he will judge the world in righteousness through the man he has appointed.”
793. “(3.) It is also said that the condition of many is represented in that day to be undecided. Thus many are said to be disappointed; coming to be judged, they find that their expectations of heaven are vain, and they say, ‘Have we not prophesied, cast out devils, and done many wonderful works in Thy name?’ Now it is said that if these persons had been in a fixed state before, they could not have been in doubt on this matter. The force of this objection is only apparent. The representations of the judgment are after the manner of men, and consequently our conceptions of it must be more or less according to what we are accustomed to see on earth. The Saviour is warning his hearers not to delay preparation for death; and, in order to impress his solemn exhortation, tells them that many will find themselves disappointed in their expectations in reference to the final decision of their judge, and that their hopes of heaven, being built on the sand, will fail at last. It does no more exclusively refer to that day than the many warnings to prepare to meet the Son of Man refer to the time of his second coming. He is always coming, and to prepare for death is to prepare to meet him. So to find ourselves deceived at the day of death is the same as to find ourselves deceived at the day of judgment.
793. “(3.) It’s also said that many people's situations will be uncertain on that day. Many will feel let down; when they come to be judged, they discover that their hopes of going to heaven are meaningless, and they ask, ‘Haven’t we prophesied, cast out demons, and done many amazing things in Your name?’ Now, it’s argued that if these people had been in a stable state before, they wouldn’t be uncertain about this. The strength of this objection is only superficial. The depictions of judgment are portrayed in a way that humans can understand, and therefore our ideas about it are likely shaped by what we’ve seen on earth. The Savior is warning his listeners not to postpone preparing for death; and to stress this serious message, He tells them that many will be disappointed regarding their judge's final decision and that their hopes of heaven, built on shaky foundations, will ultimately fail. This doesn’t just refer to that day any more than the many warnings to prepare to meet the Son of Man specifically refer to the time of His second coming. He is always coming, and preparing for death means preparing to meet Him. So, being deceived at the time of death is the same as being deceived at the time of judgment.”
794. “(4.) Again, it is said that in some cases the full effects and156 consequences of persons’ actions are not fully worked out when persons die. Thus, for instance, it is known that the labours and writings of many infidels, who are long since dead, are still working for evil; and on the other hand, the labours and writings of many good men are still working out good. These consequences must, in a certain sense, come into the consideration of their punishment or reward. Hence it is thought their destiny cannot immediately be decided. But to this it may be replied that God, who judges, knows how these consequences will work themselves out, and is able, therefore, to give a just judgment as well at the day of death as at the end of the world. At the last day, when all consequences have run out their history, it will be proper that they should be exhibited in a solemn public judgment, that all may see for themselves that all his ways are just and right. Besides, there is nothing unreasonable or unscriptural in the belief that the happiness of the righteous in heaven, and the misery of the lost in hell, will increase in exact proportion as the consequences of their actions on the earth are developing themselves, until the day of judgment, when the cup will be full, and then the full draught of happiness or misery will be taken finally and forever! Oh, what a moment will that be!
794. “(4.) It’s also said that in some cases, the full effects and156 consequences of people’s actions aren’t completely realized when they die. For example, it’s known that the efforts and writings of many non-believers, who have been dead for a long time, continue to have negative impacts; conversely, the efforts and writings of many good people still contribute positively. These consequences must be considered when evaluating their punishment or reward. Therefore, it’s believed their fate can’t be decided immediately. However, it can be argued that God, who judges, knows how these consequences will unfold and is capable of delivering a fair judgment both at the time of death and at the end of the world. On the last day, when all consequences have played out, it will be appropriate for them to be shown in a solemn public judgment, allowing everyone to see that all His ways are just and right. Furthermore, there’s nothing unreasonable or unbiblical in the belief that the happiness of the righteous in heaven and the misery of the lost in hell will grow in direct proportion to how their actions on earth unfold, until the day of judgment, when the cup will be full, and the full measure of happiness or misery will be finally and eternally consumed! Oh, what a moment that will be!
796. “We shall only gain proper ideas in reference to this interesting subject when we have corrected our ideas of heaven, for many of them are evidently wrong. We are inclined to think of heaven as affording to the saints a fixed or stereotyped condition, without attaching to it the idea of degrees and progression. When we maintain that the saints pass immediately at death into heaven, we do not mean that they enter then upon their final condition, or into their highest state of perfection, but only that they enter into that place which is their final abode. When, for instance, a child is born into the world, it is in the world; but it is limited in its observations, actions, ideas, capacities, and enjoyments, and yet all these are in their state perfect; all its faculties occupy their place symmetrically, and we have in the child a uniform but not a perfect being. Analogous to this may be the primary stage of our future celestial history. The child is in the world before it is born and during its infantile years, but how different is it, and how different is the world to it, from what it will be when all its faculties are ripe! So in heaven. The child before self-consciousness appears to enjoy an indistinct and floating life, but happy too; so may it be with our future condition before the resurrection of the body. The condition of the disembodied spirit will, no doubt, be somewhat isolated and lonely, (in a pleasant sense,) its happiness being derived much, though not entirely, from the flow of its own harmonious existence,157 and not from its connection with things external. Its future connection with its body will arrest its floating condition, and connect it again more consciously with locality and materiality. Thus it will become more capable of social relations and joys; just as the child emerging from its floating state in infancy has its social powers developed by being furnished with self-consciousness and speech, by which it learns intelligently to separate and distinguish itself from the general mass of being, which makes its enjoyments higher in their nature and more acute and sensible in their quality.
796. “We will only gain a proper understanding of this interesting subject when we correct our ideas about heaven, as many of them are clearly wrong. We tend to think of heaven as providing the saints with a fixed or unchanging state, without considering the idea of growth and progression. When we say that the saints go straight to heaven at death, we don’t mean they reach their final state or their highest level of perfection right away, but that they enter the place that is their ultimate home. For example, when a child is born into the world, it is in the world, but it's limited in its observations, actions, ideas, capabilities, and enjoyments; yet all of those are perfect in their state. All its abilities function symmetrically, and we have in the child a uniform but not a perfect being. A similar idea can be applied to the early stage of our future existence in heaven. The child exists in the world before birth and during its early years, but it is so different, and the world is so different to it, compared to what it will be like when all its abilities have developed! The same goes for heaven. Before a child gains self-awareness, it seems to enjoy a vague and drifting existence, but it's also happy; perhaps our future state will be like that before the resurrection of the body. The state of the disembodied spirit will likely be somewhat isolated and lonely (in a pleasant way), with its happiness coming mostly, but not entirely, from its own harmonious existence,157 rather than from external connections. Its eventual reunion with its body will ground its floating state and connect it more consciously to place and materiality. This will make it more capable of social relationships and joys; just as a child emerging from its drifting state in infancy has its social abilities developed through self-awareness and speech, which help it to intelligently separate itself from the general mass of existence, making its joys higher in nature and sharper and more sensitive in quality.”
797. “Perhaps the state of the saints previous to the resurrection of the body, and in the first stage of their future being, may be analogous to (but of course higher than) a state of ordinary sleep, with active, pleasant dreaming. In dreams, the spirit acts and enjoys, unconscious of the body; and may we not suppose that the spirit after death may, to a certain extent, act and enjoy without the body? Perhaps it may in this state pass profitably and pleasantly through the first stages of its future history. It may, so to say, become habituated to eternal things, and develop its spiritual capacities to such a degree as to be prepared, at the time of the resurrection, to enter upon a more tangible and positive state of existence. It may thus, also, become acquainted with purely spiritual beings, and with the modes of purely spiritual existence. This will be useful, because the saints after the resurrection will be required to hold communion with things material and immaterial. While the saint is in this world, in the body, he becomes conversant with material things, and habituated to them; now, in the other world, in a disembodied state, previous to the resurrection, he will become conversant with and habituated to purely spiritual existence, so that after the resurrection, when soul and body are again united, he will be able to hold converse and communion with either material or immaterial existences at pleasure.
797. “Maybe the state of the saints before the resurrection of the body, and in the initial phase of their future existence, is similar to (but obviously greater than) a typical sleep state, with active and enjoyable dreaming. In dreams, the spirit functions and delights, unaware of the body; could we not assume that the spirit after death might, to some extent, operate and enjoy without the body? Perhaps it can in this state positively and pleasantly navigate the early stages of its future journey. It may, so to speak, become accustomed to eternal matters and enhance its spiritual abilities to such an extent that it is prepared, at the resurrection, to step into a more substantial state of existence. It might also become familiar with purely spiritual beings and the nature of purely spiritual existence. This will be beneficial because, after the resurrection, the saints will need to interact with both material and immaterial things. While the saint is in this world, in the body, they become familiar with material things and adapt to them; now, in the next world, in a disembodied state prior to the resurrection, they will become familiar with and adapt to purely spiritual existence, so that after the resurrection, when soul and body are reunited, they will be able to engage and communicate with either material or immaterial existences as they wish.”
799. “This objection, so far from militating against this idea, most beautifully illustrates and confirms it. Thus the souls of men are more developed in spiritual things now, and will be still more in future, than they were in the earlier ages of the world. Those who lived in the morning of the world had very limited and indistinct ideas of divine and eternal things. Their views of a future world, especially, were exceedingly misty and obscure. As the church advanced, life and immortality were more and more brought to light. Revelation passed from types, shadows, and ceremonies, into brighter and clearer realities; and spiritual conceptions gained a firmer and more distinct hold upon the consciousness of men. The new dispensation was an advance upon the old, as under the158 old the age of prophecy had been upon the law, and the law upon the simple twilight of the patriarchal age. In what a different light those who lived after the new dispensation dawned, stood from those under the Old Testament, is clear from what the Saviour says—‘Among those that are born of women, there is not a greater prophet than John the Baptist; but he that is least in the kingdom of God’ (in the new dispensation) ‘is greater than he.’
799. "This objection, far from challenging this idea, actually highlights and confirms it beautifully. People's souls are more developed in spiritual matters now, and they will continue to develop even more in the future, compared to the earlier ages of the world. Those who lived in the world's early days had very limited and unclear understandings of divine and eternal concepts. Their visions of an afterlife, in particular, were extremely vague and hazy. As the church progressed, the concepts of life and immortality became more clear and evident. Revelation transformed from types, shadows, and rituals into brighter and clearer realities; and spiritual understanding took a stronger and more distinct hold on people's consciousness. The new dispensation represents an advancement over the old, just as the prophetic age was an advancement over the law, and the law was an advancement over the simple twilight of the patriarchal age. It is evident from what the Saviour says—‘Among those born of women, there is no greater prophet than John the Baptist; but the least in the kingdom of God’ (in the new dispensation) ‘is greater than he.’” 158
800. “At the present day, clearer views are enjoyed than were enjoyed in the early history of the Christian church. Let any one read the history of the patristic controversies, and he will see how the most learned stumbled among propositions in search of truth which are now clearly comprehended by intelligent Sabbath-school children. And so it will go on into the future. Spiritual ideas which are as giants to us, and the nature and relations of which we do not see, will be apprehended by our successors at once. Thus, under the tuition of the Spirit, revelation will show itself progressive, and new things, as well as old, in reference to the spiritual world, will be constantly and successively brought out of the treasure of God’s word, of which the divine Spirit is the commentator. How, you ask, does all this apply to the subject in hand? Thus the earlier a saint lived in this world, the longer time for this heavenly pupilage he will have in the next before the resurrection, and he needs more; the later he lived in this world, the less will he have in the other before the resurrection, and he needs less. Thus those who enjoy in this world superior advantages on account of living under the clearer dispensation of divine truth in the last ages of the church, shall not have any advantage over those who had less on account of living in the first ages, since those who had less will have longer time in the future world before the resurrection.
800. “Today, we have a clearer understanding than what was available in the early days of the Christian church. If you read the history of the patristic controversies, you'll see how even the most educated people struggled with ideas in their pursuit of truth that are now easily understood by intelligent children in Sabbath school. This trend will continue into the future. Spiritual concepts that seem monumental to us, which we find hard to grasp, will be instantly understood by those who come after us. Therefore, under the guidance of the Spirit, revelation will unfold progressively, presenting new insights as well as old within the context of the spiritual realm, continually drawn from the treasures of God’s word, with the divine Spirit serving as the interpreter. You may ask how this relates to the current topic. Here’s how: the earlier a saint lived in this world, the more time they will have for heavenly learning in the next life before the resurrection, and they will need that time. Conversely, those who lived later in this world will have less time before the resurrection in the next life and will need less. Therefore, those who benefit from greater advantages in this world due to living under clearer teachings of divine truth in the later stages of the church will not have an advantage over those who lived in the earlier periods, since those earlier individuals will have more time in the future world before the resurrection.”
801. “With this idea in view, the passage in 1 Thess. iv. 15 becomes beautifully intelligible: ‘For this we say unto you by the word of the Lord, that we which are alive and remain unto the coming of the Lord, shall not prevent’ (that is, shall not go before, anticipate, or have any advantage over) ‘those which are asleep; the dead in Christ shall RISE first: then’ (when they have risen) ‘we which are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air; and so shall we be ever with the Lord.’ Those who shall live in the last moment, having had their spirits fully enlightened and prepared for a future existence in the brightness of the latter-day glory before death, shall not ‘sleep’ at all, for there will be no necessity for it; but ‘shall all be changed in a moment, in the twinkling of an eye, at the last trump.’ ‘The dead shall be raised incorruptible,’ having been prepared for their incorruptible body, but ‘we shall be changed.’ 1 Cor. xv. 51, 52.
801. “With this idea in mind, the passage in 1 Thess. iv. 15 becomes clearly understandable: ‘For this we say to you by the word of the Lord, that we who are alive and remain until the coming of the Lord shall not precede’ (meaning, shall not go before, anticipate, or have any advantage over) ‘those who are asleep; the dead in Christ shall Rise first: then’ (when they have risen) ‘we who are alive and remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air; and so we will always be with the Lord.’ Those who live in the last moment, having had their spirits fully enlightened and ready for a future existence in the brightness of the latter-day glory before death, will not ‘sleep’ at all, because there will be no need for it; but ‘will all be changed in a moment, in the blink of an eye, at the last trump.’ ‘The dead will be raised incorruptible,’ having been prepared for their incorruptible body, but ‘we will be changed.’ 1 Cor. xv. 51, 52.
802. “This theory may be seen in the same way to illustrate itself consistently when applied to those who are lost. Those who live last in the world, when superior light is around them, sin against greater light159 than those who lived earlier, and are therefore sooner prepared to have their doleful station fixed finally in hell, in the union of soul and body.
802. “This theory can be consistently observed in those who are lost. Those who live last in the world, surrounded by greater understanding, sin against a higher level of knowledge159 than those who lived before them, and are therefore quicker to have their unfortunate fate permanently set in hell, in the union of soul and body.
803. “The doctrine we present in reference to the condition of the spirits of the saints in heaven, differs from the idea of a middle state, in a third place, in several important particulars. It excludes the idea of a middle place entirely, and of course all idea of probation, which is generally attached to it in some form or other. The state of the spirit in heaven, though imperfect, being the celestial childhood of the spirit, is nevertheless final, and not probationary. Our enjoyments there will be in exact proportion to our capacity; and as fast as our spirits are unfolded, will our joys increase.
803. “The beliefs we hold about the state of the spirits of the saints in heaven differ from the concept of a middle state in several significant ways. It completely removes the notion of a middle place, and therefore any idea of probation typically associated with it. The spirit's state in heaven, although not perfect, serves as the celestial childhood of the spirit, but it is still final and not a temporary test. Our enjoyment there will directly relate to our capacity; as our spirits grow, so will our joys.”
OF MEDIUMSHIP.
807. There are two modes in which spiritual manifestations are made through the influence or sub-agency of media. In the one mode, they employ the tongue to speak, the fingers to write, or hands to actuate tables or instruments for communication; in the other, they act upon ponderable matter directly, through a halo or aura appertaining to media; so that although the muscular power may be incapacitated for aiding them, they will cause a body to move, or produce raps intelligibly so as to select letters conveying their ideas, uninfluenced by those of the medium.
807. There are two ways spiritual manifestations occur through the influence or assistance of mediums. In one way, they use the tongue to speak, fingers to write, or hands to move tables or instruments for communication; in the other, they act on physical matter directly, through a halo or aura associated with the medium; so that even if the medium's muscles are unable to help them, they can still make a body move or produce knocks clearly enough to choose letters that express their ideas, without being influenced by those of the medium.
808. Even where they act through the muscular frame of the media, their vision may be intercepted by a screen, so that they cannot influence the selection of the letters requisite to a communication. (Plate I.)
808. Even when they operate through the physical presence of the media, their perspective might be blocked by a screen, preventing them from affecting the choice of the words needed for a message. (Plate I.)
810. It will be perceived that my spirit father, in reply to the queries put in relation to this mystery, asks, “How do you move your limbs—carry the body wheresoever it goeth? how does God cause the movements of astronomical orbs?” (457.)
810. You'll notice that my spiritual father, in response to the questions about this mystery, asks, “How do you move your limbs and carry your body wherever it goes? How does God make the celestial bodies move?” (457.)
812. As there is an ethereal medium by means of which light moves through space from the remotest visible fixed star to the eye, at the rate of two hundred thousand miles per second; as through an affection of the same ether frictional electricity moves, according to Wheatstone’s estimate, with a velocity exceeding that of light,—so may we not infer that the instrument of Divine will acts with still greater velocity, and that in making man in this respect after his own image, so far as necessary to an available existence, gives him one degree of power over the same element while in the mortal state, and another higher degree of power in the spiritual state. But if there be an element through which a spirit within his mortal frame is capable of actuating that frame, may not this element of actuation be susceptible of becoming an instrument to the will of another spirit in the immortal state?
812. Just as there is an ethereal medium that allows light to travel through space from the farthest visible fixed star to our eyes at a speed of two hundred thousand miles per second, and as frictional electricity moves, according to Wheatstone's estimate, faster than light through the same ether—might we not conclude that the force of Divine will operates at an even greater speed? In creating humans in a way that allows them to exist, analogous to His own image, He grants them one level of control over this element while in the mortal state and a higher level of control in the spiritual state. However, if there is a substance through which a spirit within its mortal body can influence that body, could this actuation element also become a tool for the will of another spirit in the immortal state?
813. The aura of a medium which thus enables an immortal spirit to do within its scope things which it cannot do otherwise, appears to vary with the human being resorted to; so that only a few are so endowed with this aura as to be competent as media. Moreover, in those who are so constituted as to be competent instruments of spiritual actuation, this competency is various. There is a gradation of competency, by which the nature of the instrumentality varies from that which empowers violent loud knocking and the moving of ponderable bodies without actual contact, to the grade which confers power to make intellectual communications of the higher order without that of audible knocking. Further, the power to employ these grades of mediumship varies as the sphere of the spirit varies.
813. The energy of a medium that allows an immortal spirit to do things within its range that it can't do otherwise seems to change depending on the person being used; only a few people have this energy strong enough to act as effective mediums. Additionally, among those who can serve as capable instruments for spiritual interaction, their ability varies. There’s a spectrum of ability, ranging from the capacity to create strong, loud knocks and move solid objects without touching them, to a level that allows for higher intellectual communications without any audible knocking. Moreover, the ability to utilize these levels of mediumship changes based on the sphere of the spirit involved.
815. As media, in proportion as they are more capable of serving for the higher intellectual communication, are less capable of serving for mechanical demonstration, and as they are more capable of the latter are less competent for the former, spirits likewise have a higher or lower capacity to employ media. It has been mentioned that having made a test apparatus, my spirit sister alleged that it could not be actuated by her without assistance of spirits from a lower sphere. I inquired whether she could not meet me again, accompanied by the requisite aid. The reply was in161 the affirmative, and accordingly she met me at an appointed hour, and my apparatus was actuated effectually under test conditions. (Plate 4, dd, ii, kk.)
815. Media that are better suited for higher intellectual communication are less effective for mechanical demonstration, and media that excel in mechanical demonstration are not as good for intellectual communication. Similarly, spirits have varying abilities to use media. It was noted that after setting up a test apparatus, my spirit sister claimed she couldn’t activate it without help from spirits from a lower sphere. I asked if she could meet with me again, bringing the necessary assistance. She confirmed that she could, and so she met me at the scheduled time, and my apparatus was effectively activated under test conditions. (Plate 4, dd, ii, kk.)
816. After I had read over an exposition of my information respecting the spirit world to the spirit of the illustrious Washington, I requested him to give me a confirmation while the medium should be under test conditions. (Plate 4, kk.) I placed the hand of the medium upon the board lever of the instrument, of which a representation has been given, (Plate I, Plate 4,) so as to be on the outer side of the fulcrum, and requested him to attest the reliability of the medium during the previous intercommunion. In reply it was alleged not to be within his power to give me that test; I urged that this test had been given in his presence. “We had an employee, then,” was his rejoinder. Fortunately I had contrived a test instrument requiring less of the mechanical power, so that by means of it he was enabled to perfect the evidence by bringing the index to the affirmative, under conditions which put it out of the power of the medium to produce that result. (See Plate 4 and description.)
816. After I read an explanation of my findings about the spirit world to the spirit of the great Washington, I asked him to confirm it while the medium was under test conditions. (Plate 4, kk.) I placed the medium's hand on the board lever of the instrument, which has been described, (Plate I, Plate 4,) positioning it on the outer side of the fulcrum, and asked him to verify the reliability of the medium during our previous communication. In response, he claimed that he couldn't provide that test; I insisted that this test had been conducted in his presence. “We had an employee, then,” he replied. Luckily, I had devised a test instrument that required less mechanical power, so he was able to confirm the evidence by moving the index to the affirmative, under conditions that made it impossible for the medium to achieve that result. (See Plate 4 and description.)
817. These facts make the subject of mediumship a most complicated mystery; but the creation teems with mystery, so that inscrutability cannot be a ground for disbelief of any thing. The only cases wherein there is absolute incredibility, are those in which the definition of the premises contradicts those of the inferences or conclusions.
817. These facts make the topic of mediumship a very complex mystery; however, the universe is filled with mysteries, so the unknown shouldn't be a reason to disbelieve anything. The only cases where there is complete disbelief are those where the definition of the premises contradicts the inferences or conclusions.
819. If we undertake to generalize, it must come pretty near what I have said above, that spirits are endowed, as my spirit father alleges, with a “magic will,” capable of producing, as they allege, wonderful results within their own world, (452;) nevertheless that this will does not act by itself directly on mundane bodies. An intermedium is found in the halo or aura within or without certain human organizations. The halos thus existing are not all similarly endowed; some having one, some another capability. Some are better for one object, some for another object. Again, the will-power varies as the sphere of the spirits is higher or lower, so that the medium suited for one is not suited for another.
819. If we try to generalize, it must be close to what I mentioned earlier: that spirits have, as my spirit father says, a “magic will” that can create, as they claim, remarkable results in their own realm, (452;) however, this will doesn’t directly affect physical bodies. An intermediary is found in the halo or aura present within or around certain individuals. The halos that exist are not all the same; some have one ability, while others have a different one. Some are better suited for one purpose, and some are better for another. Additionally, the strength of will varies depending on whether the spirits are from a higher or lower realm, meaning that a medium suitable for one may not work for another.
821. Evidently, the ponderable elements recognised by mundane chemists cannot contribute to any of the bodies of the spirit world, since their gravity must disqualify them for use in a world where every thing is, in comparison with them, weightless. Accordingly, one of the queries put by me to the convocation of spirits (574) was, whether any of our elements, being ponderable, could act as such in the imponderable spiritual creation.162 The reply was, Not without undergoing a transformation. This would be equivalent to annihilating them first, and recreating them afterward, when the process of creating alone would be sufficient. But manifestly it is of no importance, whether their adaptation to the spirit world be the result of creation or of transformation.
821. Clearly, the tangible elements recognized by ordinary chemists cannot be part of the spirit world, since their gravity disqualifies them in a realm where everything else is, in comparison, weightless. So, one of the questions I asked the gathering of spirits (574) was whether any of our tangible elements could function in the intangible spiritual realm.162 The response was, not without undergoing a transformation. This would mean they would need to be completely destroyed and then recreated, but the act of creation alone would be enough. However, it clearly doesn’t matter if their adaptation to the spirit world comes from creation or transformation.
822. Concerned in the processes of mediumship, it is manifest that there is none of that kind of electricity or magnetism of which the laws and phenomena have been the subject of Faraday’s researches, and which are treated of in books, under the heads of frictional or mechanical electricity, galvanism, or electro-magnetism.
823. Frictional electricity, such as produced usually by the friction of glass in an electrical machine, or of aqueous globules generated by steam escaping from a boiler, is always to be detected by electrometers, or the spark given to a conducting body when in communication with the earth; the human knuckle, for instance. When not sufficiently accumulated to produce these evidences of its presence, it must be in a very feeble state of excitement. But even in the highest accumulation by human means, as in the discharge of a powerfully charged Leyden battery, it only acts for a time inconceivably brief, and does not move ponderable masses as they are moved in the instance of spiritual manifestation. It is only in transitu, that frictional electricity displays much power, and then its path is extremely narrow, and the duration of its influence inconceivably minute. According to Wheatstone’s experiments and calculations, it would go round the earth in the tenth part of a second.
823. Frictional electricity, like that usually created by the rubbing of glass in an electrical machine or by droplets of water generated when steam escapes from a boiler, can always be detected by electrometers or by the spark given to a conducting body when it is grounded, like the human knuckle, for example. If it hasn’t built up enough to show these signs, it must be in a very weak state of activity. However, even at the highest levels generated by humans, such as when discharging a strongly charged Leyden battery, it only lasts for an incredibly brief moment and doesn’t move physical objects the way they are moved in cases of spiritual phenomena. Frictional electricity shows significant power only while in transit, and its path is very narrow, with its effect lasting an unfathomably short time. According to Wheatstone’s experiments and calculations, it would circle the earth in a tenth of a second.
825. Galvanic or voltaic electricity does not act at a distance so as to produce any recognised effects, except in the case of magnetic metals, or in the state of transition produced by an electric discharge. In these phenomena the potent effects are attainable only by means of perfect insulated conductors, as we see in the telegraphic apparatus. No reaction with imperfect conducting bodies competent to toss them to and fro, or up and down, can be accomplished. The decomposing influence, called electrolytic, is only exhibited at insensible distances, within a filament of the matter affected.
825. Galvanic or voltaic electricity doesn't work over distances to create any noticeable effects, except with magnetic metals or during the transition caused by an electric discharge. In these cases, significant effects can only be achieved using perfectly insulated conductors, like those found in telegraph systems. There’s no reaction with poorly conducting materials that could make them move around or shift up and down. The decomposing effect known as electrolytic only shows up at very short distances, within a small amount of the affected material.
826. It has appeared to me a great error on the part of spirits, as well as mortals, that they should make efforts to explain the phenomena of the spirit world by the ponderable or imponderable agents of the temporal world. The fact that the rays of our sun do not affect the spirit world, and that there is for that region an appropriate luminary whose rays we do not perceive, (415) must demonstrate that the imponderable element to which they owe their peculiar light differs from the ethereal fluid which,163 according to the undulatory theory, is the means of producing light in the terrestrial creation.
826. I believe it's a significant mistake for both spirits and humans to try to explain the phenomena of the spirit world using the measurable or unmeasurable forces of our physical world. The fact that sunlight doesn’t impact the spirit world and that there’s a specific luminary for that realm, whose light rays we can’t see, (415) should show that the unseen element responsible for their unique light is different from the ethereal fluid that, according to the wave theory, causes light in the earthly realm.163
827. In one of the replies made by the convocation, (571,) the idea was sanctioned of the effulgence of the spirit being due to an appropriate ethereal fluid, analogous to that above alluded to. But it has, I think, been shown by me, that as light is due to the undulations of our ether, so electricity is due to waves of polarization. But if undulations produce light in the ether of the spiritual universe as well as in ours, why may not polarization produce in the ether of the spirit world an electricity analagous to ours? Thus, although in spiritual manifestations our electricity takes no part, their electricity may be the means by which their will is transmitted effectually in the phenomena which it controls.
827. In one of the responses given by the convocation, (571,) the idea that the glow of the spirit comes from a specific ethereal fluid was approved. But I believe I have demonstrated that just as light is caused by the undulations of our ether, electricity arises from waves of polarization. If undulations can create light in both the spiritual ether and ours, then why couldn't polarization generate an electricity in the ether of the spirit world that is similar to ours? Therefore, even though our electricity plays no role in spiritual manifestations, their electricity might be the way their will is effectively transmitted in the phenomena it influences.
829. This mesmerical magnetism seems to be dependent rather on properties which we have as immortals, encased in a corporeal clothing, than as mortals owing our mental faculties to that frame. If it be the spiritual portion of our organization which is operative in clairvoyancy, spiritual electricity may be the intermedium both of that faculty and of mesmeric influence.
829. This captivating attraction seems to rely more on the qualities we have as immortal beings wrapped in a physical body, rather than as mortal beings whose thinking abilities come from that body. If it's the spiritual part of our being that is active in clairvoyance, then spiritual electricity could be the connection for both that ability and mesmeric influence.
830. All spirits are clairvoyant more or less, and where this faculty is exercised, it seems to be due to an unusual ascendancy of the spiritual powers over the corporeal, so that clairvoyants possess some of the faculties which every spirit, after shuffling off the mortal coil, must possess to a greater or less extent.
830. All spirits have some level of clairvoyance, and when this ability is used, it appears to result from a strong dominance of spiritual powers over physical ones. As a result, clairvoyants have certain abilities that every spirit, after shuffling off the mortal coil, must have to varying degrees.
831. In striving to make a test apparatus by which the communication should be uninfluenced by the muscular power of the medium, through which alone her will could modify the ideas communicated, an interesting fact was ascertained. The nullifying of the power of muscular control, which it is the object of this contrivance to accomplish, is obtained unexceptionally by means of two balls and a plate, as already illustrated, (Plate 2,) or by placing the hands of the medium exterior to the fulcrum of the lever-board, as described in the instance of testing the communication received from the convocation. But these methods requiring that the conditions should be favourable, both, as respects the spirit communicating and the medium, are liable to fail. It struck me that the distance between the hands and the surface of the table or tray to be moved, by lessening the influence of the medium on the table or tray, lessened the power of actuation. My efforts were therefore directed to contrive to have the hand of the medium near the surface to be moved, without the possibility of contact.
831. While trying to create a testing device that would ensure communication was not affected by the physical strength of the medium, which was the only way her will could change the ideas shared, an interesting fact was discovered. The goal of this device is to eliminate muscular control, which can be achieved consistently using two balls and a plate, as previously shown, (Plate 2,) or by positioning the medium’s hands outside the pivot point of the lever board, as explained in the example of testing the communication received from the gathering. However, since these methods depend on favorable conditions for both the spirit communicating and the medium, they can often fail. It occurred to me that increasing the distance between the hands and the surface of the table or tray being moved would reduce the medium's influence on that surface, thereby reducing the actuation power. Therefore, I focused on designing a setup that kept the medium’s hand close to the surface being moved, without allowing any contact.
832. With this view I placed a board for receiving the hands of the164 medium upon delicate rollers, so that no horizontal movement would affect the base board supporting the rollers and actuating the index. To give greater efficacy to the aura, a plate of glass was supported in a wooden frame or sash by means of four screw rods fixed upright on the base board, each furnished with two screw nuts. The screw rods passed through four suitable holes, so as to have one nut beneath, the other above, the sash. Thus situated, by adjusting the nuts, the sash could be regulated to any horizontal level, so as to be near the upper surfaces of the hands without any contact therewith.
832. With this in mind, I set up a board to receive the hands of the 164 medium on delicate rollers, ensuring that no horizontal movement would disrupt the base board supporting the rollers and controlling the index. To enhance the aura's effectiveness, a glass plate was held in a wooden frame by four screw rods fixed upright on the base board, each equipped with two screw nuts. The screw rods went through four appropriately sized holes, allowing one nut to be positioned below and the other above the frame. This setup allowed us to adjust the nuts so the frame could be leveled horizontally, bringing it close to the surfaces of the hands without making contact.
834. Under these circumstances, I had the glass plate or pane slit lengthwise into two equal strips. These being restored to the position previously occupied in the sash, I interposed between their edges a piece of sheet-tin, with teeth cut in one of its edges, (Plate 4, kk,) so as to make it look like a long narrow saw, such as are used by sawyers in frames. With the aid of a leaden joint, (such as is used by glaziers to join glass panes,) to which the saw was soldered, the teeth of this projected about the eighth of an inch below the glass, so as to be near the upper surface of any hand, resting on the sliding board.
834. Given these circumstances, I had the glass pane sliced lengthwise into two equal strips. Once they were put back into the frame, I placed a piece of sheet metal with notches cut along one edge between their edges, (Plate 4, kk,) making it resemble a long narrow saw like those used by sawyers in frames. With a lead joint, (similar to what glaziers use to attach glass panes,) to which the saw was attached, the notches extended about an eighth of an inch below the glass, so they would be close to the top surface of any hand resting on the sliding board.
839. An account is given in my narrative of an experiment in which a board, suspended at one end from a spring-balance, was made to descend with a force of three pounds, through the instrumentality of a medium who had no connection with the board, excepting water which was interposed. Hence, as the hook screwed into the board, by which it was secured to the hook of the balance, was six times as far from the fulcrum as the hands of the medium, the force exerted by the officiating spirit was equal to 3 × 6 = 18 pounds. (See Plate 3, and description.) Nevertheless, no upward reaction was perceptible to me, nor was any experienced by the medium, Henry Gordon, as he declared.
839. My narrative includes an experiment where a board was suspended at one end from a spring scale, and it was made to descend with a force of three pounds, thanks to a medium who had no direct connection to the board, other than through water that was placed between them. Since the hook attached to the board, which connected to the scale, was six times farther from the pivot point than the medium's hands, the force exerted by the spirit was equal to 3 × 6 = 18 pounds. (See Plate 3, and description.) However, I didn’t feel any upward force, nor did the medium, Henry Gordon, say he felt anything.
840. In the case of the boy (Plate 3,) a downward action of seven pounds was observed, which, multiplied by the difference of distance, amounted to165 7 × 6 = 42 pounds, and yet the boy was not perceptibly impelled in the opposite direction. Nor, when through the same juvenile mediumship, the whole of the apparatus was thrown upon the floor, did the boy appear to be impelled in the opposite direction. Nor was there any reaction when the apparatus was thrown down. Now, agreeably to the laws of nature, as established by human experience, in all cases of motion or momentum, there must be an equal force exercised in the opposite direction by the vis inertiæ of some other matter endowed with that attribute. Hence Archimedes said, “Give me but where to stand, and I will move the world.” A point of support, a place of resistance, however, was held to be indispensable.
840. In the case of the boy (Plate 3,) a downward force of seven pounds was observed, which, when multiplied by the difference in distance, added up to165 7 × 6 = 42 pounds, yet the boy did not seem to be pushed in the opposite direction. Similarly, when the entire apparatus was thrown on the floor through the same youthful ability, the boy did not appear to move the opposite way. There was also no reaction when the apparatus was dropped. According to the natural laws established by human experience, in all cases of motion or momentum, an equal force must be exerted in the opposite direction by the vis inertiæ of another object possessing that property. Thus, Archimedes stated, “Give me a place to stand, and I will move the world.” A point of support, a place of resistance, was considered essential.
842. That the spirit should, by its “magic” will-power, take possession of the frame of a human being, so as to make use of its brain and nervous system, depriving its appropriate owner of control, is a wonderful fact sufficiently difficult to believe, yet, nevertheless, intelligible. The aura which surrounds a medium must be imponderable. No volition of the medium can, through its instrumentality, move ponderable bodies, nor cause raps or consequent vibrations in the wooden boards. Hence, the presence of a medium imparts power to spirits which the medium does not possess.
842. The idea that a spirit can, through its "magical" willpower, take control of a person's body, using their brain and nervous system, while leaving the original owner without control, is an amazing concept that is hard to accept, yet makes sense. The aura surrounding a medium must be weightless. No intention of the medium can, through their abilities, move physical objects or create knocks or vibrations in the wooden floor. Therefore, the presence of a medium gives spirits a power that the medium does not have.
843. The aura on the one side, and the spirit on the other, are inert unless associated. Thus the volition of the spirit gives activity to an effluvium, by itself, so devoid of efficacy that it wholly escapes the perception of the possessor or the observation of his mundane companions. It has been already alleged, that the usual reference to mundane electricity must be wholly unsatisfactory to all acquainted with the phenomena and laws associated under that name; since no such movements have ever been produced by such electrical means, nor is it consistent with those mundane electrical laws, nor the facts which electricians have noticed, that such movements should be produced. Those movements which have been produced by electricity have never been effected without surfaces oppositely charged, nor, of course, without the means of charging them. Neither are there associated with the spiritual manifestations means at hand of creating nor of holding charges either much more minute than those which display perceptible force or cause audible sound.
843. The aura on one side and the spirit on the other are inactive unless they are connected. The will of the spirit activates an energy that is so ineffective on its own that it completely goes unnoticed by the individual or their worldly companions. It has already been pointed out that the typical reference to earthly electricity must be entirely unsatisfying to anyone familiar with the phenomena and laws associated with that term; because no such movements have ever been generated by such electrical means, and it's incompatible with those earthly electrical laws and the facts that electricians have observed for such movements to occur. The movements created by electricity have never happened without oppositely charged surfaces, and naturally, without the means to charge them. Additionally, there are no methods involved in spiritual manifestations for creating or holding charges that are significantly smaller than those that produce noticeable force or cause audible sound.
ON THE INFLUENCE OF THE ILL-TREATMENT OF MEDIA, ON SPIRITUAL MANIFESTATIONS.—OF COUNTER-MEDIUMSHIP.
847. Allusion has been above made to the unfavourable influence upon manifestations of the demeanour and incredulity of the investigator, displayed in suspicious, cold, scrutinizing looks, such as would be merited only by a cheat or pickpocket. All this has a deteriorating influence upon mediumship, and likewise repels the spirits. While communicating through a medium, a near blood relative, much beloved by the communicating spirit while in this world, coming into the circle, an immediate departure of the spirit was the consequence. It was subsequently alleged in explanation that there existed a repulsiveness between him and the spirit, founded on the idea that his opinions were under the influence of worldly considerations, whence a predetermination to disbelieve, as far as possible, by an unfavourable view of the evidence.
847. There has been earlier mention of the negative impact on the demeanor and skepticism of the investigator, shown through suspicious, cold, and scrutinizing looks, which one would typically reserve for a con artist or pickpocket. This attitude harms mediumship and also drives away spirits. When a close family member, who was greatly loved by the spirit during their life, joined the circle while the medium was communicating, the spirit immediately left. Later, it was suggested that there was a kind of repulsion between him and the spirit, based on the belief that his views were influenced by worldly concerns, leading to a predetermined skepticism and a negative perception of the evidence presented.
848. An incredulity liable to be overcome by the reason by which it has been created does not form a bar; but where an impregnable bigotry has been introduced merely by education, so that the person under its influence would have been a Catholic, Calvinist, Unitarian, Jew, or Mohammedan by a change of parentage, cannot usually be changed by any evidence or argument. Spirits will not spend their time subjecting their manifestations to such impregnable bigotry, or to predetermined malevolence.
848. A disbelief that can be overcome by reason does not create a barrier; however, when unyielding bias has been instilled solely through education, making the person influenced by it likely to have been a Catholic, Calvinist, Unitarian, Jew, or Muslim had they been born to different parents, it usually cannot be changed by any evidence or argument. Spirits will not waste their time subjecting their manifestations to such unbreakable bias or to predetermined hostility.
851. It were impossible for any one to be more incredulous than I was when I commenced my investigations; but in the first place, my recorded religious impressions, founded on more than a half century of intense reflection, in no respect conflicted with the belief which Spiritualism required. As I said to a clergyman, I wish I knew as well what I ought to believe, as I can perceive what I ought not to believe. I was ardently desirous that the existence of a future state should be established in a way to conform to positive science, so that they might start together. This was perceived by my spirit friends, and that they had only to give me sufficient evidence of the existence of spirits and their world, to make me lay down in the cause my comparatively worthless mortal life, could I be more useful to truth in dying than in living.
851. It was impossible for anyone to be more skeptical than I was when I started my investigations; however, my documented religious beliefs, shaped by over fifty years of deep thought, didn’t clash with the belief that Spiritualism proposed. As I told a clergyman, I wish I knew just as clearly what I should believe as I do what I shouldn’t believe. I was eagerly hoping that the existence of an afterlife could be proven in a way that aligns with established science, so they could progress together. My spirit friends understood this, and they knew that if they provided me with enough proof of the existence of spirits and their realm, I would willingly sacrifice my comparatively insignificant mortal life if it meant I could contribute more to the truth in death than in life.
852. My father and sister, brother and friend Blodget, were therefore not deterred by my sneers or denunciations. Moreover, I was never pre167disposed to suspect any medium of treachery, and therefore never disgusted them by the display of any such impressions. To the aid of these truly angelic spirits who were nearly allied with me, came another angel, (whom I will designate by his initials W. W.,) who, from philanthropic motives, seems to have selected me to serve in this invaluable dispensation. Hence, his first annunciation of my destined course, in language which so far, however it may imply an overestimate of my capacity to serve, shows the more the partiality with which it seems to have been estimated by him. (47.)
852. My dad, sister, brother, and friend Blodget weren’t put off by my mockery or accusations. Besides, I never had any inclination to think any medium was being dishonest, so I never upset them by expressing any such thoughts. To support these truly angelic spirits who were closely connected to me, another angel appeared, whom I’ll refer to by his initials W. W. He seems to have chosen me out of kindness to help with this invaluable purpose. Therefore, his first announcement about my destined path, in words that, while they might overestimate my ability to help, reveal how favorably he seems to see me. (47.)
The Author’s Discovery of his powers as a Medium.
853. It occurred to me to try how far the interposition of my hand would interfere with the powers of the medium to whom I resorted. To my surprise, it seemed very little to impair the actuation of the index by the officiating spirit. It next occurred to me to ascertain how far a diminution of contact, between the hand of the medium and mine, would impair the power exercised under these conditions. In pursuance of my request, the contact was diminished by successively lifting the fingers of the medium and the rest of the hand from mine, until only one finger was left. Finally, this finger was removed, and yet the power of actuation still continued to exist, though enfeebled. The officiating spirit, my friend W. W., now was made a party to this investigation, being requested to estimate the effects as well as myself.
853. I decided to find out how much my hand's interference would affect the abilities of the medium I was working with. To my surprise, it didn’t seem to disrupt the movement of the pointer much at all. Then I wondered how reducing the contact between my hand and the medium’s would influence the power in this situation. Following my suggestion, we started to lessen the contact by gradually lifting the medium's fingers and the rest of her hand off mine until only one finger remained in contact. Eventually, that finger was removed too, yet the ability to move the pointer was still there, although weaker. The spirit guiding us, my friend W. W., was also involved in this investigation, as I asked him to assess the effects along with me.
855. At a subsequent sitting, having made due preparation, a strip of sheet tin about two inches wide, and about fifteen inches in length, being applied to the back of my hand while resting on the base board of the spiritoscope, (Plate 4, Fig. 2,) the medium held it successively at various distances. Under these circumstances, the facilitation was greater as the distance between her hand and mine was diminished.
855. At a later session, after getting ready, a strip of sheet tin about two inches wide and about fifteen inches long was placed on the back of my hand while it was resting on the base of the spiritoscope, (Plate 4, Fig. 2). The medium held it at different distances. In this situation, the effect was stronger as the space between her hand and mine decreased.
857. The frame (Fig. 3, Plate 4) being in situ, as described, paragraph kk of the description, under these circumstances the removal of the serrated strips diminished the power more and more as removed.
857. With the frame (Fig. 3, Plate 4) in place, as described in paragraph kk of the description, removing the serrated strips reduced the power more and more with each strip taken away.
858. Thus it appears that there is a mesmeric electricity, or spiritual electricity, which may be considered as appropriate to the spirit world as their vital air is; but which like that air, may influence our spiritual bodies while in their mundane tenement. It may, as well as the vital air of the spirit world, belong in common to the inhabitants of that world and to us168 as spirits, being a polarizing affection of the spiritual ethereal medium, of which the undulations constitute the peculiar rays of their spiritual sun.
858. So, it seems there is a mesmerizing type of electricity, or spiritual electricity, that is as essential to the spirit world as their vital air. Like that air, it can affect our spiritual bodies while we are in our physical forms. This electricity, like the vital air of the spirit world, may be shared between the inhabitants of that world and us168 as spirits, functioning as a polarizing quality of the spiritual ethereal medium, where the waves create the unique rays of their spiritual sun.
860. We live in a wonder-working universe, which becomes more and more wonderful as we learn more of it, instead of being brought more within our comprehension. When we compare what we know with the knowledge of savages, it may appear a mountain of learning and science; but this very learning and science only makes us see still more how great is our ignorance!
860. We live in an extraordinary universe that becomes even more amazing as we discover more about it, rather than making it easier to understand. When we compare what we know to the knowledge of less advanced people, it might seem like a huge amount of learning and science; but this very learning and science only reveals to us how vast our ignorance really is!
ON PSYCHOLOGICAL EXPLANATIONS OF SPIRITUAL MANIFESTATIONS.
862. It is not in reference to this distinguished physician in his individual capacity that I name him thus often, but in reference to the hypothesis which his allegations must oblige him to sustain, and of which he may be considered a most respectable advocate. Dr. Bell not only admits, but confirms by his own testimony, the important fact of the movement of heavy bodies without contact. His experience, in this respect, is more striking than mine, since he has not only seen this phenomena take place repeatedly, but on one occasion, as before stated, saw tables move fifty feet, intelligently obedient to his directions. He also admits the reception of such communications from pretended spirits, as spiritualists would consider as coming from real spirits. Yet on the negative ground, that agreeably to his experience, nothing was found to be communicable but what pre-existed in the mind of some mortal present, he infers that the ideas received are not derived from spirits, but from the minds of those mortals who are parties to the process.
862. I don't mention this esteemed physician by name just for the sake of it, but rather to highlight the hypothesis he has to support, for which he serves as a respected advocate. Dr. Bell not only acknowledges but also provides evidence for the significant fact that heavy objects can move without any physical contact. His experiences in this regard are even more impressive than mine, as he has witnessed this phenomenon happen multiple times, and on one occasion, as previously mentioned, he observed tables move fifty feet, obediently following his instructions. He also accepts the idea of receiving messages from supposed spirits, which spiritualists would interpret as coming from actual spirits. However, based on his experiences, he concludes that nothing communicated is genuinely from spirits but rather originates from the thoughts of the living people involved in the situation.
864. I have already adduced manifestations irreconcilable with the assumption on which the whole of Dr. Bell’s inference is built, (111 to 288.) But were his observations verified, in order to make them justify the abnegation of spirits, it should be shown that any spirit could tell him any thing which must be known to him, whether known to the spirits or not.169 Remembering all the facts communicated to him by his spirit brother, it should be shown that any other spirit could narrate them as well as his spirit brother. Any inquiry made of any spirit, of which the answer is known to the inquirer, should be told on request as well as any other; but it will be found that answers are given only to those of which the spirit knows the answers independently, through his own memory. Under favourable circumstances mental questions are answered; but often, when mental questions cannot be answered, those put verbally are replied to. I have detected spirit impostors, by their inability to tell the name of my sister in the spheres.
864. I have already provided evidence that contradicts the assumption on which Dr. Bell's entire conclusion is based, (111 to 288.) However, for his observations to be credible and justify dismissing the idea of spirits, it must be demonstrated that any spirit could tell him any information that he must know, regardless of whether the spirits know it or not.169 Considering all the facts shared with him by his spirit brother, it should be shown that any other spirit could recount those facts just as well as his spirit brother. Any question posed to any spirit, for which the answer is already known to the inquirer, should be answered upon request like any other; yet it turns out that answers are only given for inquiries that the spirit can answer from its own memory. Under the right conditions, mental questions get answered; but often, when mental questions are unanswerable, those asked verbally are responded to. I have exposed spirit frauds by their inability to name my sister in the afterlife.
866. Whatever want of ability may be shown, by Dr. Bell, to exist in the communications alleged to come from Paine, Swedenborg, and Bacon, or from spirits personating those distinguished men, it cannot do away the valuable information which I have obtained from my spirit father and others, sanctioned by a convocation of spirits. It has been shown that in a few pages of that communication, there is vastly more knowledge of our happy prospects in the future world, than all that can be found in the Scriptures.
866. No matter what limitations Dr. Bell claims exist in the messages said to come from Paine, Swedenborg, and Bacon, or from spirits impersonating those notable individuals, it doesn't diminish the valuable insights I've received from my spirit father and others, endorsed by a gathering of spirits. It has been demonstrated that within just a few pages of that communication, there is far more knowledge about our bright future in the afterlife than can be found in all of the Scriptures.
869. My experience does not tend to establish that there is less folly or more wisdom in the inhabitants of the spirit world than in this. I concur with Dr. Bell in the opinion that the work to which he alludes, attributed to the spirit of Paine, merits all the denunciation which he bestows on it. I concur that it must be the work of a mind, whether celestial or mundane, ignorant of the rudiments of chemical philosophy. But if such a work coming from a mortal would not disprove the author’s claim to be a mortal human being, wherefore then should a foolish book coming from a foolish, ignorant spirit, personating Paine, disprove the author to be a spirit? It only shows that low, ignorant, foolish spirits personate the spirits of eminent authors; but does that disprove the existence of spirits? Does madness or idiocy annihilate the victim of these afflictions? But in all cases where communications are obtained through speaking or writing media, the minds of the media are liable, unconsciously, to pervert or repress the sentiments of the spirits, and therefore are not trusted by me, unless corroborated by communications through the alphabet.
869. My experience doesn’t suggest that there’s less foolishness or more wisdom in the inhabitants of the spirit world than in our own. I agree with Dr. Bell that the work he mentions, attributed to the spirit of Paine, deserves all the criticism he gives it. I also agree that it must be the work of a mind—whether heavenly or earthly—that lacks the basics of chemical philosophy. However, if such a work from a mortal wouldn’t disprove the author’s claim to being human, then why should a foolish book from a foolish, ignorant spirit impersonating Paine disprove the author’s spirit status? It only shows that low-minded, ignorant spirits impersonate the spirits of notable authors; but does that deny the existence of spirits? Does madness or foolishness erase the person suffering from those conditions? In all cases where messages are received through speaking or writing mediums, the minds of the mediums are likely to unintentionally distort or suppress the thoughts of the spirits. Therefore, I don’t trust them unless they’re backed up by communications through the alphabet.
870. By their existence in the spheres, it seems to me that spirits improve as to their talents, not as to their reasoning powers. They have a superior knowledge to that which we possess of their own world, but not of our sciences, as far as I have had means of judging. Having no great objects to effect, they have no great incentive to thought or contrivance. It is by learning, more than by invention, that they rise in the spheres.
870. From what I see, spirits evolve in their abilities while remaining limited in their reasoning. They have a greater understanding of their own realm than we do, but they're not knowledgeable about our sciences, at least from what I've observed. Lacking significant goals to achieve, they don't have a strong motivation for deep thinking or creativity. They advance in the spheres primarily through learning rather than through innovation.
878. A good man cannot accept a creed which sanctions wickedness; that, for instance, which authorizes, under certain sophistical pretences, spoliation, massacre, rape, fraud, &c. Whenever any man brings himself to believe that his God ever authorized such crimes, or patronized those who were guilty of them, he becomes more or less immoral. Dr. Berg truly alleged that “a devotee is assimilated to the God whom he worships.”
878. A good person can't accept a belief system that allows for wrongdoing; like one that justifies, under some clever pretexts, theft, murder, assault, deception, etc. Whenever someone convinces themselves that their God ever allowed such crimes or supported those who committed them, they become at least somewhat immoral. Dr. Berg accurately stated that “a devotee is assimilated to the God whom he worships.”
879. To assist me, as it were, in exposing the errors of those who with Dr. Bell admit, for the most part, the facts of Spiritualism, yet ascribe the whole to the minds of mortals acting as media or inquirers, an advocate of that side of the question gives this explanation of the fact of my having sent a message to Mrs. Gourlay by my spirit sister:
879. To help me, so to speak, in revealing the mistakes of those who, like Dr. Bell, mostly accept the facts of Spiritualism but attribute everything to the minds of humans acting as mediums or seekers, a supporter of that viewpoint offers this explanation for why I sent a message to Mrs. Gourlay through my spirit sister:
881. That Mrs. Gourlay and myself being frequently in each other’s society, it followed that if at the distance of about a hundred miles I wished her to induce Dr. Gourlay to apply at the bank, Mrs. Gourlay, although at the time engaged in receiving a most interesting communication from171 her mother for her brother, had so much more snail-like sympathy, with me at Cape Island, than with the ideas she believed to proceed from her mother, that she would interrupt the one forthwith, to attend to the other at that particularly inconvenient time! Meanwhile, the phenomenon of the index of my disk being moved independently of any effort of mine, so that I can make oath that no mortal moved it, is not taken into view. Surely if by such means a message respecting a pecuniary affair could awaken sympathy, there are many messages which it would be of immensely more importance to convey, than that which I sent in the instance in question.
881. Since Mrs. Gourlay and I often spent time together, it was only natural that if I wanted her to persuade Dr. Gourlay to apply at the bank from about a hundred miles away, she would, even while she was engaged in receiving a very interesting message from171 her mother for her brother, feel more sympathetic toward me on Cape Island than toward the ideas she thought came from her mother. She would immediately interrupt that conversation to focus on mine, even at such an inconvenient time! Meanwhile, the strange fact that the index on my disk moved on its own, without any effort from me, which I can swear no one else moved, isn’t considered. If a message about a financial matter could spark such sympathy, there are certainly many other messages that would be far more important to deliver than the one I sent in this case.
882. But how comes it that neither I nor any other of her friends can send messages to Mrs. Gourlay while in the same city with her? Must her friends go to Cape Island for the purpose? Will this erudite and ingenious psychologist inform me by what means I may bring about this object, which, on business account, would be more convenient than sending notes by penny post?
882. But why is it that neither I nor any of her friends can send messages to Mrs. Gourlay while we’re in the same city as her? Do her friends really have to go to Cape Island for that? Could this knowledgeable and clever psychologist let me know how I can achieve this, which would be more convenient for business than sending notes by regular mail?
883. Am I to go through the same process of sitting down at my spiritoscope? Will this learned assailant of Spiritualism inform me why I must do this, and must wait till the index moves? Wherefore should it move after a quarter of an hour’s invocation, when it will not move at first?
883. Am I really expected to go through the same routine of sitting down at my spiritoscope? Will this knowledgeable attacker of Spiritualism explain to me why I have to do this and wait for the index to move? Why does it only move after a quarter of an hour of trying, when it doesn’t move at all at first?
884. Again, I wish the circumstance I am about to mention to be explained by psychology: I was sitting in my solitary third-story room at Cape Island, invoking my sister as usual, when to my surprise I saw Cadwallader spelt out on my disk. “My old friend, General Cadwallader?” said I. “Yes.” A communication ensued of much interest. But before concluding, I requested him, as a test, to give me the name of a person whom I met in an affair of honour more than fifty years ago, when he (General Cadwallader) was my second. The name was forthwith given, by the pointing out on the disk the letters requisite to spell it.
884. Once again, I hope the situation I'm about to describe can be explained by psychology: I was in my quiet third-floor room at Cape Island, calling on my sister as usual, when to my surprise I saw Cadwallader spelled out on my disk. “My old friend, General Cadwallader?” I asked. “Yes.” A conversation followed that was quite interesting. But before wrapping up, I asked him, as a test, to provide the name of someone I met during an honor-related incident more than fifty years ago, when he (General Cadwallader) was my second. The name was promptly revealed by pointing out the necessary letters on the disk.
885. Now as the spirit of General Cadwallader, during more than fifteen months that other friends had sought to communicate with me, had never made me a visit, why should his name have been spelt out when I had not the remotest hope of his coming, and was expecting another spirit, the only one who had been with me at the Cape?
888. Let him show his hand by reducing his sophistry, as I conscientiously consider it, to black and white. He may learn the difference between talent and judgment. I am aware that he shows a vast deal more of the172 appropriate ability of his profession in defending the view he has espoused, than I could hope to exert. It is only in the strength of truth that I feel strong. “Thrice is he armed that hath his quarrel just.”
888. Let him reveal his true thoughts by simplifying his arguments, as I see it, to clear and straightforward. He might understand the difference between skill and judgment. I know he demonstrates much more of the172 relevant ability of his profession in supporting the position he has taken than I could ever hope to achieve. It’s only in the power of truth that I find my strength. “He who has a just cause is three times armed.”
889. It is of no small importance that this learned and subtle psychologist, should explain how my spiritoscope, or any other instrumental means of alphabetic indication, becomes necessary to effect the psychologization of a medium at a great distance, so as to convey to her mind the ideas which it is an object to impart. Why is it necessary that the index over a disk at Cape May, should revolve to the letters requisite to spell a message, in order that the index of another disk in Philadelphia, should revolve at a subsequent time? How does the mechanism in one place, acquire a power from the remote actuation of another? Will it be pretended that they are affected analogously to the sympathetic snails; whence, having kept each other’s company, this miracle ensued? But even this is not true, since they were not kept together, if ever they were in each other’s company.
889. It's really significant that this knowledgeable and insightful psychologist explains how my spiritoscope, or any other tool for alphabetic communication, becomes essential for reaching a medium far away, so that her mind can receive the ideas we want to share. Why does the indicator on a disk in Cape May need to turn to the letters needed to spell out a message for the indicator on another disk in Philadelphia to move at a later time? How does the mechanism in one location gain influence from the distant action of another? Are we supposed to believe they’re linked in the same way as sympathetic snails, with the miracle happening because they’ve been in each other’s presence? But even that isn't accurate, since they weren't in each other's company, if they ever were at all.
890. Could any process be divined by which an instrument for supposed alphabetic communication with spirits, could be applied to transmit such messages as that for which I employed mine, according to this psychological hypothesis, it would be superior to the existing telegraphic process, since the ocean could be no barrier to messages which, although dependent on snail-like sympathy, would have nothing in it of the proverbial creeping attribute of the animal in question.
890. Could we figure out a way for a device meant for communicating with spirits through the alphabet to send messages like the ones I used mine for? According to this psychological theory, it would be better than the current telegraphic method, since the ocean wouldn't block messages that, while relying on a slow connection, wouldn't have the sluggish quality associated with the animal in question.
892. Calling on Miss Ellis, it was found that her time was so pre-engaged, that she could not, as she said, sit for me till the day but one succeeding. My spirit sister manifested her desire to communicate, and conveyed the idea that Miss Ellis could give an hour named next day, if she would examine her list. This examination being made, the suggestion was verified.
892. When I contacted Miss Ellis, I found out that she was so busy that, as she put it, she couldn’t meet with me until the day after tomorrow. My spirit sister showed her desire to communicate and suggested that Miss Ellis could spare an hour the next day if she checked her schedule. After she did check, the suggestion was confirmed.
893. Here was an idea not obtained from the mind of any person present. It could not exist in the minds of those who, like my friend and myself, had not seen the list, nor could it have been in Miss Ellis’s mind, as in that case she would not have had to consult the list, in order to determine the truth of the suggestion.
894. In this visit, Dr. W. F. Channing, who was my companion, said that possibly he had better not accompany me. It was left to my spirit sister to decide. No instrument being ready, as the quickest mode of communication, the medium was made to take up her pen, and began forthwith to make figures upon a sheet of paper. When the operation terminated, nothing but figures were seen to have been written. The medium said she did not know what to make of it. But under the letters it was written, “Select, from the alphabet, the letters corresponding, and you have173 my answer.” This being done, the following sentence was obtained: “My dear brother, come alone.”
894. During this visit, Dr. W. F. Channing, who was with me, suggested that perhaps it would be better if he didn’t come along. It was up to my spirit sister to make the choice. Since no instrument was ready, the quickest way to communicate was for the medium to take her pen and start making figures on a piece of paper. When she finished, only figures were visible. The medium said she didn’t know what to make of it. But under the letters, it was written, “Select, from the alphabet, the letters corresponding, and you have173 my answer.” After doing this, the following sentence was revealed: “My dear brother, come alone.”
895. It cannot be reasonably imagined that either Miss Ellis, my friend, or myself suggested this reply, as my friend and myself regretted the result, and it was not the interest of Miss Ellis to lessen the circle. But none of us had the ability to have perceived the numbers indicating the relative position of letters in the alphabetic row, so as to have selected them correctly. It would take some time to associate the letters with the numbers duly, and an unusual strength of memory to recollect them.
895. It's hard to believe that either Miss Ellis, my friend, or I suggested this response, since my friend and I regretted the outcome, and Miss Ellis had no reason to reduce the group. However, none of us could have figured out the numbers representing the position of letters in the alphabet, so we couldn't have chosen them accurately. It would take time to match the letters with the numbers correctly, and it would require an exceptional memory to remember them.
MODERN PROCESS FOR ALPHABETIC CONVERSE WITH SPIRITS, AS NEW TO MAN AS THE ELECTRIC TELEGRAPH.
897. To me it seems that I have never read any thing in history in which intellectual communication was established by sounds or mechanical movements with invisible beings. Sight has almost always been the sense most appealed to in evidence of the appearance of ghosts. In the instance of the Witch of Endor, Samuel is made to come from his grave, not like one of our happy spirits from his beautiful abode in the spirit world:—
897. It seems to me that I've never read anything in history where people communicated with unseen beings through sounds or mechanical movements. Sight has almost always been the sense most relied upon for proof of ghostly appearances. In the case of the Witch of Endor, Samuel is summoned from his grave, not like one of our cheerful spirits emerging from a lovely place in the spirit world:—
“Then said the woman, Whom shall I bring up unto thee? And he said, Bring me up Samuel. And when the woman saw Samuel, she cried with a loud voice: and the woman spake to Saul, saying, Why hast thou deceived me? for thou art Saul. And the king said unto her, Be not afraid: for what sawest thou? And the woman said unto Saul, I saw gods ascending out of the earth. And he said unto her, What form is he of? And she said, An old man cometh up; and he is covered with a mantle. And Saul perceived that it was Samuel, and he stooped with his face to the ground, and bowed himself. And Samuel said to Saul, Why hast thou disquieted me, to bring me up? And Saul answered, I am sore distressed; for the Philistines make war against me, and God is departed from me, and answereth me no more, neither by prophets, nor by dreams: therefore I have called thee, that thou mayest make known unto me what I shall do. Then said Samuel, Wherefore then dost thou ask of me, seeing the Lord is departed from thee, and is become thine enemy? And the Lord hath done to him as he spake by me: for the Lord hath rent the kingdom out of thine hand, and given it to thy neighbour, even to David: Because thou obeyedst not the voice of the Lord, nor executedst his fierce174 wrath upon Amalek, therefore hath the Lord done this thing unto thee this day. Moreover, the Lord will also deliver Israel with thee into the hand of the Philistines: and to-morrow shalt thou and thy sons be with me: the Lord also shall deliver the host of Israel into the hand of the Philistines.” 1 Sam. xxviii. 11-19.
“Then the woman said, Who should I bring up for you? And he said, Bring me Samuel. When the woman saw Samuel, she screamed loudly and spoke to Saul, saying, Why have you deceived me? You are Saul. The king said to her, Don't be afraid; what did you see? The woman said to Saul, I saw spirits coming up from the ground. He asked her, What does he look like? She replied, An old man is coming up, and he is covered with a mantle. Saul recognized that it was Samuel, and he bowed with his face to the ground. Samuel said to Saul, Why have you disturbed me by bringing me up? Saul answered, I am in great distress; the Philistines are waging war against me, and God has turned away from me and no longer answers me, neither by prophets nor by dreams. So I called you to tell me what I should do. Then Samuel said, Why are you asking me, since the Lord has turned away from you and has become your enemy? The Lord has done to you what he said through me: he has taken the kingdom from your hand and given it to your neighbor, David. Because you did not obey the Lord's voice and did not carry out his fierce wrath against Amalek, the Lord has done this to you today. Moreover, the Lord will also hand over Israel with you to the Philistines, and tomorrow you and your sons will be with me. The Lord will also give the army of Israel into the hands of the Philistines.” 1 Sam. xxviii. 11-19.
898. It is represented in this quotation, that the ghost of Samuel came and conversed with Saul; that he “ascendeth out of the earth; an old man cometh up, and he is covered with a mantle.” Where is there any thing in common between this representation and the process by which I communicate with my familiar spirits,—not coming up from the grave, or the disgusting heaven of Josephus, but from their magical abodes in the skies! I challenge any one to adduce the idea, as having ever been expressed, that any one had found any mode of conversing with spirits resembling in its operation that which we now have discovered. This seems to be as new to the spirits as to us, being as much a novelty as the electric telegraph. The very limited degree in which it has been recently accomplished has been attained with very great difficulty. It appears that efforts were made to establish this intercourse in England at the mansion of the celebrated Wesley, without any beneficial result. If ever this art had been discovered, certainly it would not have been lost. Even the idea of rapping or knocking independently of mortal agency, had the fact ever been established, could not have been held so incredible as it was, almost universally, when it took place at Hydesville, or in Great Britain, as above mentioned.
898. This quote shows that the ghost of Samuel came and talked to Saul; that he “ascendeth out of the earth; an old man cometh up, and he is covered with a mantle.” What is similar about this description and the way I connect with my familiar spirits—not coming up from the grave or some disgusting heaven from Josephus, but from their magical homes in the sky? I dare anyone to point out a previous idea that anyone had found a way to communicate with spirits like we have now. This seems as new to the spirits as it is to us, just as much a novelty as the electric telegraph. The very limited success we've had recently came with great difficulty. There were attempts to establish this connection in England at the famous Wesley's home, but they were not successful. If this skill had ever been discovered, it surely wouldn’t have been lost. Even the idea of rapping or knocking independently of mortal agency, if it had ever been proven, wouldn’t have been seen as so unbelievable as it was, almost universally, when it occurred at Hydesville or in Great Britain, as mentioned above.
899. The learned Dr. Priestley, utterly incredulous that the rappings at Wesley’s could be ascribed to any supermundane agency, attributes it to some trick on the part of servants, assisted by neighbours. It appears that in general the most scientific and well-read persons are the most backward in ascribing such phenomena to invisible spirits. If, therefore, during past ages such inscrutable noises and movements of bodies had occurred, resembling those recently noticed, still no such use had been made of them as we now behold. Such manifestations being once so far demonstrated as to induce people of sound mind to unite in referring them to the immortal spirits of departed friends, is a fact of such awful, thrilling interest, that it never could have become obsolete; especially as the same state of things which permitted it once to be successfully witnessed, would have led to its reiteration. Neither the spirits nor mortals had laid it aside, any more than the telegraph or the railways will be disused, after experiencing the advantages of those inventions.
899. The educated Dr. Priestley, completely skeptical that the sounds at Wesley’s could be attributed to any supernatural force, suggests it's a trick played by the servants, with some help from neighbors. It seems that generally, the most educated and knowledgeable people are the least likely to attribute such phenomena to invisible spirits. If, in the past, there had been similar mysterious noises and movements of objects like those recently observed, they were never utilized in the same way as we see today. The fact that these occurrences have been demonstrated enough to lead rational people to conclude they come from the immortal spirits of deceased friends is so profoundly intriguing that it could never fall out of interest; especially since the same circumstances that allowed them to be witnessed would have led to them happening again. Neither the spirits nor the living have dismissed it, just as the telegraph or trains will not be abandoned after their benefits have been realized.
900. Is there not as much reason for the lateness of this discovery, as for that of any of those inventions by which modern times are distinguished from ancient? Even now, with what difficulty has it been accomplished to the degree to which it has arrived. After eighteen months of laborious175 investigation, I find myself surrounded by inveterate skeptics among my own family friends and most of my comrades in science.
900. Isn't there just as much reason for the delay in this discovery as for any of those inventions that set modern times apart from ancient ones? Even now, achieving this to the extent that it has been accomplished is quite challenging. After eighteen months of hard 175 investigation, I find myself surrounded by stubborn skeptics among my family, friends, and most of my fellow scientists.
901. There is scarcely a country besides this in which I should escape legal penalties or tyrannical restraint, in expressing the opinions which I most devoutly entertain, and am impelled irresistibly to express; and, although in this country, free from legal penalties, there is scarcely an orthodox female tongue belonging to some of the best of the sex (in all other respects amiable) which will not devote itself universally in the service of bigotry and intolerance.
901. There's hardly any other country where I could express my deeply held beliefs without facing legal consequences or oppressive control. Here, even without legal repercussions, there’s almost no conventional woman among the best of her kind (who are otherwise quite pleasant) who won’t wholeheartedly commit to supporting bigotry and intolerance.
902. But beside the arguments thus founded, there is another, resting on the fact that had there been any intellectual communication with the spirit world, there could not have been such an ignorance of the religious doctrines which there prevail. There is in that world no diversity as respects the existence and unity of God; nor as to the unimportance of those creeds which have caused in this world so much mischief, by the consequent animosity, persecutions, and warfare. The superior efficacy of good works over creeds is by the higher spirits invariably insisted upon.
902. But apart from the arguments made, there's another point based on the fact that if there had been any genuine communication with the spirit world, there wouldn't be such a lack of understanding about the religious beliefs that exist there. In that realm, there’s no disagreement about the existence and unity of God; nor about the unimportance of those beliefs that have caused so much harm in this world through resulting hate, persecution, and conflict. The higher spirits consistently emphasize the greater importance of good deeds over beliefs.
903. Then, agreeably to the same authority, the idea of an omnipotent, omniscient, and prescient God being under the necessity of subjecting things to trial, is considered as involving a contradiction; the premises being irreconcilable with the conclusion. There is not an elevated spirit that will not answer in the affirmative, every query proposed in the verses inserted, (page 34.)
903. Then, according to the same authority, the concept of an all-powerful, all-knowing, and all-seeing God needing to test things is seen as contradictory; the premises don't align with the conclusion. There isn't a noble spirit that wouldn't respond positively to every question posed in the verses included, (page 34.)
904. There is but one sentiment as respects the question between probation and progression, and that is in favour of the latter. “Onward and upward is the motto on our spiritual banner.” Such is the language held, and repeated over and over again. It would not take a quarter of an hour for a spirit to pour information into the ear of a mortal which, if credited, would put an end to all honest discord respecting religion, and induce that mortal thenceforth to look to the spirit world as his ultimate destination. The language of the paragraph in the address through Lanning, would go home to every human mortal having reason to comprehend it, so that whatever they might pursue in this world would be with an ultimate view to ascendancy in the other. (See Preface.)
904. There is only one feeling about the debate between probation and progression, and that is in favor of the latter. “Onward and upward is the motto on our spiritual banner.” This is the message that is expressed and repeated time and time again. It wouldn’t take more than fifteen minutes for a spirit to share insights with a mortal that, if believed, would put an end to all honest disagreements about religion, leading that mortal to see the spirit world as their ultimate goal. The message in the paragraph from the address through Lanning would resonate with every human who understands it, so that whatever they pursue in this world would ultimately aim for advancement in the next. (See Preface.)
905. Bigotry, fanaticism, selfish sectarianism, the want of media and bold, enlightened investigators, seem to have formed impenetrable obstacles to the promulgation of a knowledge of the greatest importance to human prosperity, morals, and future happiness. No doubt that so much evil should arise merely from want of a knowledge so near at hand, is one of the facts which human reason finds it most difficult to reconcile with the power and goodness of the Almighty Ruler of the universe; but that is a difficulty which exists in case any one creed be assumed as true; since none has been heretofore so communicated as to be within the reach of mankind in general. Meanwhile the error has originated in various sects, that they176 have been especially favoured by God, so that they alone of all his creatures have had true light let in upon them.
905. Prejudice, extremism, self-centered sectarianism, and the lack of media and courageous, open-minded investigators have created major barriers to spreading knowledge that is crucial for human well-being, ethics, and future happiness. It's hard for people to understand how so much harm can come from a lack of knowledge that is so readily available, especially when considering the power and goodness of the Almighty Ruler of the universe. But this challenge arises if one assumes that any single belief system is true, as none has ever been presented in a way that is accessible to all of humanity. In the meantime, various groups have fallen into the error of thinking that they have been uniquely chosen by God, believing that they alone have received true insight. 176
906. Happily, from the mode in which the light of Spiritualism has been received by its present votaries, it may be gradually extended to all their fellow-creatures; and meanwhile those who enjoy this light do not assume that their fellow-creatures who are in this respect less fortunate, are on that account to be censured, denounced, and persecuted as far as the power to persecute goes. Spiritualists believe the wonderful manifestations on which their creed rests, to have far more testimony in its favour than any other before accredited; and that the manifestations relied on being more recent, and observed by multitudes of eye-witnesses, known by their neighbours to be truthful, have, as mere hearsay proof, an immense superiority over the recorded tradition of an obscure, illiterate, superstitious age and country. But then the same privilege which has been enjoyed by one set of observers belongs to any succeeding number, and no less to succeeding ages than to this. It is not assumed that any special inspiration appertains to any existing being, as an instrument of promoting truth, that will not inure to others. No particular exclusive capacity for miracles is claimed for this age; on the contrary, the belief is that in this, as in other things, there will be improvement and progression, and that posterity will learn directly from the same high angelic source whence we learn.
906. Fortunately, because of the way the light of Spiritualism has been embraced by its current followers, it can gradually be shared with all their fellow beings; and in the meantime, those who benefit from this light don’t believe that their less fortunate counterparts should be criticized, condemned, or persecuted as much as anyone has the power to persecute. Spiritualists hold that the remarkable experiences that form the basis of their belief have much more evidence supporting them than any other previously accepted beliefs; and since these experiences are more recent and witnessed by many honest observers known to their communities, they offer a huge advantage over the documented traditions from a distant, illiterate, and superstitious age and place. But the same privilege enjoyed by one group of observers is available to any future group, and it applies just as much to future generations as to the present one. There’s no claim that any special inspiration belongs to individuals living today as a means of promoting truth that won’t also apply to others. No exclusive ability to perform miracles is asserted for this era; on the contrary, it’s believed that, as with other aspects, there will be growth and advancement, and that future generations will learn directly from the same high angelic source from which we learn.
907. The more the moral code of Spiritualism is contrasted with that which has heretofore prevailed, the better we shall be pleased. We challenge the strongest, the most learned of those who adhere to that dispensation, to meet us ore rotundo seu currente calamo. Confident in the strength of truth and the feebleness of error, the writer of these lines fears not any competitor who makes error his client.
907. The more we compare the moral code of Spiritualism with the one that has existed until now, the more satisfied we will be. We invite the strongest and most knowledgeable supporters of that belief system to confront us ore rotundo seu currente calamo. Confident in the power of truth and the weakness of falsehood, the writer of these lines is not afraid of any opponent who associates with error.
INFLUENCE OF MUNDANE WEALTH IN THE WORLD TO COME.
According to the Spiritual Code, riches elevate or degrade according to the virtue displayed in their acquisition and employment.
908. The great object of the more prudent and calculating portion of mankind, is to provide for that old age which they all hope to attain, or, if it be not reached, to provide the means for themselves or families which may insure a comfortable if not luxurious support, in case sickness or mutilation should deprive them of the power of making money, or competency to earn wages.
908. The main goal of the more careful and strategic people is to prepare for the old age they all hope to reach, or, if they don't get there, to ensure they and their families have the resources for a comfortable, if not luxurious, living in case illness or injury takes away their ability to earn a paycheck or make a living.
909. But how precarious and fleeting are any such worldly advantages, when compared with those of an eternal home, where every thing desirable may be had without causing a drop of sweat to fall from the brow! Let177 the description of the higher spheres be compared with any earthly paradise, which, besides inferiority in every attribute which can render it attractive, is open to all the ills of mental and bodily suffering to which flesh is heir. If there be any objection to the consequences of a due appreciation of the bliss which we may expect in the spirit world, it would seem to be founded on its tendency so to enfeeble our interest in this world, as to deter the human efforts on which this sphere is, under God’s laws, mainly dependent for improvement. But then, as a matter of principle, in order to merit elevation in the spirit world, exertion may be induced in this; and exertion thus originating, can never be perverted to the perpetuation of those wrongs now so often forming the steps to human aggrandizement. The subjugation, the pillage, and extirpation of mankind, will never be induced by considerations founded on the desire to accumulate treasure in heaven.
909. But how unstable and temporary are any such worldly benefits when compared to those of an eternal home, where everything desirable can be had without breaking a sweat! Let177 the description of the higher realms be compared to any earthly paradise, which, besides being inferior in every way that makes it appealing, is subject to all the mental and physical suffering that humans face. If there’s any concern about the consequences of properly appreciating the joy we can expect in the spirit world, it seems to stem from its potential to weaken our interest in this world, potentially hindering the human efforts that, according to God’s laws, are essential for improvement here. However, as a matter of principle, in order to earn a place in the spirit world, effort can be encouraged in this one; and that effort, originating from such motivation, can never lead to perpetuating the injustices that often pave the way for human advancement. The domination, plunder, and destruction of humanity will never be driven by considerations based on the desire to accumulate treasure in heaven.
910. There is hardly in respect to any subject, more error than in the estimate made of persons who strive to acquire wealth. The question lies not in the zeal with which it may be sought, but in the object for which it is desired. Although the maxim that the end justifies the means, be immoral when extended so far as to palliate any dereliction of the cardinal virtues, does it not hold good so long as the means employed are consistent with these virtues? Is it not charitable honestly to seek the pecuniary means of being charitable? Is it not liberal to seek the means wherewith to be liberal? Hospitable, to seek the means to support hospitality? Is it not the duty of each man to promote the welfare of his wife and children, by seeking the means wherewith to house, clothe, and feed them, and, moreover, to educate them intellectually as well as morally? Since, when destitute of education, a man is little above a brute, surely it must be meritorious to seek the means of educational improvement, both for ourselves and for those by whom we are surrounded; but more especially for those who are so dependent on us, that it can only through us be attained.
910. There is hardly any topic with more misconceptions than how people perceive those who work to gain wealth. The issue isn't about the passion with which wealth is pursued, but rather the reasons behind that pursuit. While the saying that the end justifies the means is unethical if used to excuse neglect of fundamental virtues, doesn't it apply as long as the methods used align with those virtues? Isn't it a charitable act to honestly seek financial resources in order to be charitable? Isn't it generous to look for the means to be generous? Isn't it hospitable to seek the resources needed to provide hospitality? Isn't it a man's responsibility to ensure the well-being of his wife and children by finding the means to house, clothe, and feed them, and also to educate them intellectually and morally? Since a person without education is only slightly above an animal, it must be commendable to strive for educational improvement for ourselves and those around us—especially for those who depend on us, as they can only achieve it through our efforts.
911. That part of the Lord’s prayer which deprecates temptation, is perhaps of pre-eminent importance; since where there is one man who goes through the world honestly by resisting temptation, there are hundreds who preserve their honesty by avoiding temptation: by so providing pecuniary means in due time, as not to be placed between the alternative of starving, begging, cheating, or stealing.
911. The part of the Lord’s Prayer that asks to avoid temptation is probably the most important. For every person who navigates life with honesty by resisting temptation, there are countless others who maintain their honesty by steering clear of it altogether. They ensure they have enough financial resources in advance to avoid being faced with the choice of starving, begging, cheating, or stealing.
912. In our republic it will be found that while the acquisition of wealth enables one individual to raise his family by educational superiority, the offspring of another, by the loss of fortune, sink into the mass of illiterate labourers; so that there is a perpetual undulation by the educational influence of money. Though public schools may extend the advantages of education to the poor, yet want drives the educated youth to loathsome drudgery, made more painful by the enlargement of his views resulting from education.
912. In our society, it's clear that while gaining wealth allows one person to elevate their family through better education, the children of another can, due to financial loss, fall into a group of uneducated laborers. This creates a constant fluctuation in the impact of money on education. Although public schools may provide educational opportunities for the less fortunate, the struggle against poverty leads educated young people to tedious work, made even more difficult by their broader understanding that comes from education.
913. To the consequence of hereditary noblemen hereditary wealth is essential, having vastly more influence than titles. In those countries where titles exist without associated wealth, they have scarcely any weight. However incompetent money may be to give importance to an uneducated commoner, a cotton-spinner, by educating his son and giving him his fortune, may prepare him to sway an empire; when, had his father been a pauper, the premier might have lived among those so eloquently described by Shakspeare’s Henry the Fourth, as upon “uneasy pallets stretching them.” How different from those perfumed chambers and canopies of costly state, to which this spinner’s boy was actually enabled to climb through the education and position resulting from paternal affluence!
913. For hereditary nobles, wealth is crucial and holds much more power than titles. In countries where titles exist without wealth, they hardly carry any significance. While money alone may not elevate an uneducated commoner, a cotton-spinner can change his son's future by providing an education and fortune, enabling him to influence an empire. If that father had been poor, the prime minister might have lived among those described by Shakespeare in Henry the Fourth, as lying “on uncomfortable beds.” This is so different from the luxurious rooms and lavish surroundings that the spinner’s son could actually attain thanks to his father's wealth and education!
914. Civilization elevates those who have the advantages of education, and who are either professionally employed in intellectual pursuits, or have leisure to cultivate science and literature from taste. But the same division of human labour and enterprise which gives intellectual pursuits to a few as a profession, gives to the mass occupations inconsistent with the cultivation of their intellectual powers. Those who are engaged in the humblest species of industry, living from hand to mouth, have little or no time to spare from that which their necessities imperatively require; and the bodily fatigue incurred during working hours, makes repose from all exertion the primary object.
914. Civilization lifts up those who have access to education, whether they are working in intellectual jobs or have the free time to explore science and literature out of interest. However, the same division of labor and entrepreneurship that allows a few to pursue intellectual careers means that many are stuck in jobs that don’t foster their intellectual abilities. Those involved in the most basic forms of work, struggling to get by, have very little time to spare beyond what is absolutely necessary for survival; the physical exhaustion from their demanding roles makes rest from any effort the main priority.
915. But the situation of the poor, ignorant, and uneducated labourer in civilized society, is rendered worse than that of an equally ignorant and uneducated barbarian, by contrast with his educated neighbours. The lowest savage has as much scholastic education as his chief, while the civilized labourer may be in the rear of an educated child of five years of age. Thus the absolute evil is made relatively still greater. When any man reflects on these facts, can he be otherwise than anxious for those means which are necessary to put his offspring upon a par in learning with those of others in the same community?
915. But the situation of the poor, ignorant, and uneducated laborer in modern society is worse than that of an equally ignorant and uneducated barbarian because of the contrast with his educated neighbors. The lowest savage has just as much formal education as his chief, while the educated laborer may be behind a five-year-old child in learning. Thus, the absolute issue is made relatively even worse. When anyone thinks about these facts, can they not feel anxious for the necessary means to ensure their children are on the same educational level as others in the community?
916. Early in life, it is manifest to every one who does not enjoy pecuniary affluence, that any species of indulgence which he may desire requires money for its attainment. Even the command of leisure for any enjoyment requires money, since, if obliged to work to earn his bread, a man may not have leisure for any other object.
917. Among the most rational motives for the pursuit of wealth is the love of independence. “Thy spirit, Independence, let me share—lord of the lion heart and eagle eye!” In this sentiment every noble soul must participate. How many have had, like the apothecary in Shakspeare’s tragedy, to allow their poverty to rule, instead of honest will! How many have been induced to “earn their daily bread by their daily shame!”
917. One of the most logical reasons for chasing wealth is the desire for independence. “Your spirit, Independence, let me join—master of the lion heart and eagle eye!” Every noble person must resonate with this feeling. How many have had, like the apothecary in Shakespeare’s tragedy, to let their lack of money dictate their choices instead of their honest intentions! How many have felt pushed to “earn their daily bread by their daily shame!”
918. Prudent, thoughtful, honest men, who do not choose to live houseless, without clothes, nor upon the sweat of other men’s brows, turn from the paths of amusement, of sensual enjoyment, from the love of literature179 or science, or from the observation and investigation of nature’s beauties and miracles, in order to get, through wealth, the power, and honest right to indulge. But while pursuing this great object, in the first instance only as the means of attaining other objects, good or bad, they grow old in the chase; their passions burn out, while avarice originates as it were from their ashes, not, phœnix-like, to replace one parental being, but a horrid monster, having nothing in common with a plurality of progenitors, but the selfish, ardent love of money, unmitigated by any redeeming aspiration. A being so actuated—or, in other words, a miser—would certainly find it as difficult to reach a higher sphere in the spirit world, as it were for a camel to get through the needle’s eye.
918. Careful, thoughtful, honest people who don’t want to live without homes, clothes, or on the hard work of others, choose to step away from paths of entertainment and pleasure, from the enjoyment of literature179 or science, or from observing and exploring the beauty and wonders of nature in order to gain, through wealth, the power and rightful chance to indulge. However, while chasing this significant goal, initially just as a means to achieve other good or bad objectives, they grow old in the pursuit; their passions fade away, while greed seems to rise from the remnants of their former selves, not to be reborn like a phoenix, but instead as a dreadful creature, having nothing in common with their many origins, except for the selfish, burning desire for money, lacking any redeeming purpose. A person driven in this way—or, in other words, a miser—would undoubtedly find it as challenging to reach a higher state in the spiritual realm as it would be for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle.
919. As swine accumulate fat to bequeath to those to whom they leave their carcasses, so the avaricious accumulate wealth, to hoard until it can no longer be retained. They die with an immense amount of negative sin; since all their omissions to do good, which is within their power, is carried to their debit in the spirit world. Their poverty in the spirit world will be proportioned to their ill-used wealth in this temporal abode.
919. Just as pigs pack on fat to leave behind for those who inherit their bodies, greedy people pile up wealth, hoarding it until they can’t hold on to it anymore. They pass away with a huge amount of negative karma; all their missed opportunities to do good, which they could have taken, get counted against them in the spiritual realm. Their lack in the spirit world will match the way they mismanaged their wealth in this life.
MRS. GOURLAY’S NARRATIVE.
921. The following is a narrative of the circumstances which led to the conversion to a belief in Spiritualism, of my esteemed friend, Mrs. M. B. Gourlay, through whose high attributes as an intellectual medium, I am in a great measure indebted for my conversion. I do most devoutly believe that the information received from my spirit father, through her mediumship, would, if duly credited, be of more value to true religion and morality, than the forty millions of dollars annually expended upon the Church of England.
921. Here’s a story about how my respected friend, Mrs. M. B. Gourlay, came to believe in Spiritualism, largely thanks to her remarkable skills as an intellectual medium, for which I am deeply grateful for my own conversion. I genuinely believe that the insights I received from my spirit father through her mediumship would be worth more to true religion and morality than the forty million dollars spent each year on the Church of England.
Philadelphia, May 20, 1855.
Philadelphia, May 20, 1855.
To Professor Robert Hare:
To Professor Robert Hare
922. My Dear Sir: Pursuant to your request, I have the pleasure to present you the following particulars of my experience and observation in relation to the phenomena of spiritual intercourse,—phenomena which engage, at the present time, the serious and profound attention of thousands of intelligent minds; manifestations that are rapidly and steadily spreading their influence over the entire continent, and carrying with them the evidence of their spiritual origin, while impressing receptive minds with the truth of their sacred importance to an extent unexampled in the history of any other movement.
922. My Dear Sir: Following your request, I’m pleased to share my experiences and observations regarding spiritual communication—an area that currently captures the serious attention of thousands of thoughtful individuals. These manifestations are quickly and steadily expanding their impact across the entire continent, bringing with them proof of their spiritual roots while impressing open-minded people with their significance unlike any other movement in history.
926. Having been admonished by a much-loved, intelligent, and, I would add, practical Christian mother to worship at the altar of truth, while exercising my reason on all subjects presented to my mind, I was, as might be presumed, nearly, if not entirely, free from the shackles of bigotry, superstition, and dogmatism, and was thus prepared, so far at least as these barriers to mental and moral progression are concerned, to investigate any subject within the range of my capacity.
926. Having been encouraged by a beloved, smart, and, I would add, practical Christian mother to seek the truth, while using my reason on all topics that came to mind, I was, as you might expect, mostly, if not completely, free from the constraints of prejudice, superstition, and rigid beliefs. Because of this, I was ready, at least in terms of overcoming these obstacles to intellectual and moral growth, to explore any topic within my ability.
928. Not many days had elapsed after forming this resolution, before I met an intimate friend, an exemplary and respected member of the Methodist Episcopal denomination, who informed me that she was interested in spiritual manifestations, and desired to investigate them. But alas! she was bound by the galling fetters of sectarian and priestly bondage, and dared not move in such an investigation. Her pastor had said that the “arch deceiver,” the veritable Satan, was the prime instigator in this scheme, and, moreover, that to participate in a movement so diabolical in its character would render her liable not only to loss of membership in the church, but expose her to divine wrath in this world, as well as endless torment in the world to come.
928. Not long after I made this decision, I ran into a close friend, a respected and exemplary member of the Methodist Episcopal Church, who told me that she was curious about spiritual manifestations and wanted to explore them. But unfortunately, she was held back by the restrictive beliefs of her denomination and felt too scared to pursue such an investigation. Her pastor had warned her that the “arch deceiver,” the true Satan, was the main force behind this scheme, and he added that getting involved in something so evil could not only cost her her church membership but also subject her to divine punishment in this life and eternal suffering in the next.
929. I believed such an intolerant and persecuting spirit, to be diametrically opposed to every principle of true Christianity, and repugnant to the claims of reason; and deprecating any doctrine, orthodox though called, that would thus stifle free thought and inquiry, and consign to eternal misery the children of our heavenly Father, even however depraved, I advised my friend to exercise her reason, with which she was by nature endowed, and regardless of the sneers of a time-serving multitude, or the anathemas of the church, to obey the injunction of the apostle—“Prove all things—hold fast that which is good.”
929. I believed that such an intolerant and persecuting attitude was completely against all the true principles of Christianity and contrary to reason. I rejected any doctrine, even if it was deemed orthodox, that would suppress free thought and inquiry and condemn the children of our heavenly Father, no matter how flawed, to eternal misery. I advised my friend to use her reasoning abilities, which she naturally possessed, and to disregard the mockery of a conformist crowd or the curses of the church. Instead, I encouraged her to follow the apostle's advice—“Prove all things—hold fast that which is good.”
932. Having, agreeably to request, placed our hands on the table, we silently raised our thoughts in solemn and sincere aspirations to the great Father of spirits, and desired to be brought into more harmonious relation with the spirits of our dear departed friends, and hoping that these might thereby be better able to manifest themselves to their friends still in the earthly habiliments of humanity.
932. Following the request, we placed our hands on the table and quietly focused our thoughts in sincere prayer to the great Father of spirits. We wished to be brought into a more harmonious connection with the spirits of our dear departed friends, hoping that this would help them better communicate with those still living in the earthly form of humanity.
933. We had not remained long in this position, before we heard distinct sounds like the falling of drops of water on the table. Imagine our surprise and inexpressible delight, when first aroused to a vital consciousness of the presence of celestial visitants in our midst! I shall never forget the glorious expression of pleasure which illumined the countenances of that little band of seekers for truth, nor the electric thrill of joy which I experienced on this happy occasion.
933. We hadn’t been in this position for long before we heard clear sounds like drops of water hitting the table. Imagine our surprise and overwhelming joy when we first became fully aware of the celestial visitors among us! I’ll never forget the glorious look of delight on the faces of that small group of truth seekers, nor the electrifying thrill of joy I felt on this joyful occasion.
934. The sounds continued to respond to our inquiries; three expressing the affirmative, and one the negative. It was suggested by a member of the circle to use the alphabet as a means of communication; and that on passing a pencil slowly over the card, the spirits would indicate, by the sounds, the letters required to convey their thoughts. In this manner we received many convincing evidences of spirit intercourse; such as getting the names of our spirit friends, the particular localities of their birth and death, and the precise time of their departure from this world, with many other proofs of their presence and identity.
934. The sounds kept responding to our questions; three were affirmative and one was negative. A member of the group suggested using the alphabet as a way to communicate; by slowly moving a pencil over the board, the spirits would indicate, through the sounds, the letters needed to express their thoughts. This way, we received many convincing pieces of evidence of spirit communication, such as the names of our spirit friends, the specific locations of their birth and death, and the exact time they left this world, along with many other confirmations of their presence and identity.
935. We were soon informed by the communicating intelligence that a much more rapid mode of communication would now be established between us. On inquiring its nature, it was spelt out—Let Welthea (referring to my friend) take the pen, and we will write through her hand.[17] To all of us this was a new and unexpected revelation. My friend, being very timid and retiring in her nature, was evidently confused by this announcement. At our very earnest solicitation, however, she lifted the pen from the table. Her hand was now seized by an invisible and intelligent power, and being in a normal state, several beautiful stanzas,[18] touching182 her mission in this glorious cause, resulted from this first and, to all of us, astounding performance.
935. We were soon told by the communicating intelligence that a much faster way of communicating would now be established between us. When we asked what it was, it spelled out—Let Welthea (referring to my friend) take the pen, and we will write through her hand.[17] This was a new and unexpected revelation for all of us. My friend, being very shy and reserved, was clearly confused by this announcement. However, with our earnest encouragement, she picked up the pen from the table. Her hand was then guided by an invisible and intelligent force, and in a normal state, several beautiful stanzas,[18] touching on her mission in this glorious cause, resulted from this first and, to all of us, astonishing performance.
937. Soon after writing the stanzas alluded to, her hand was again influenced to write a communication to a gentleman present. He was a stranger to my friend, now regarded as a medium, and the communication was from the spirit of a sister who had passed from earth about thirty years before, the name, in full, of the spirit being appended.
937. Shortly after writing the mentioned verses, her hand was compelled again to write a message to a gentleman present. He was a stranger to my friend, who is now seen as a medium, and the message was from the spirit of a sister who had passed away about thirty years earlier, with the full name of the spirit included.
939. On the succeeding day I visited my friend at her residence, and received many additional evidences of the presence and identity of spirits. My father, mother, and sister, and many other loved spirit friends with whom the medium had no acquaintance, and whose names even were not known to her, communicated, and reminded me of many incidents of their life on earth of which my friend was wholly ignorant, and some of them I had myself almost forgotten.
939. The next day, I went to see my friend at her home, and I got more proof of the presence and identity of spirits. My dad, mom, and sister, along with many other dear spirit friends whom the medium didn’t know and whose names she wasn’t even aware of, reached out to me. They reminded me of many moments from their lives on earth that my friend had no idea about, and some of those I had almost forgotten myself.
942. “My dear M: You will be surprised and pleased to learn that an old schoolmate is present; one that you never, while on earth, anticipated hearing from again. Many years have fled since our last meeting. I have come from the realms of the unseen, to renew the acquaintance with you begun in childhood, and to advise you in relation to your spiritual development. You are destined to become a good impressional medium for spiritual truth. Follow the directions which we from time to time shall give you, and you will progress rapidly, and be greatly profited thereby. Elevate your mind to the source of light and truth, and seek to be saved from every thing that might hinder your spiritual advancement. Devote a portion of each day to the development of your spirit, and investigate the principles which govern the physical and spiritual departments of the universe. You are living in the light of an advanced age, and are surrounded by many advantages. Improve the privileges that you enjoy, for the benefit of yourself and others.
942. “My dear M: You’ll be surprised and happy to hear that an old schoolmate is here; someone you never expected to hear from again while you were alive. It’s been many years since we last met. I’ve come back from the unseen world to reconnect with you from our childhood and to guide you in your spiritual journey. You’re meant to be a strong impressional medium for spiritual truth. Follow the instructions we’ll give you from time to time, and you’ll make quick progress and benefit greatly from it. Elevate your mind toward the source of light and truth, and try to avoid anything that could hold back your spiritual growth. Spend some time each day developing your spirit and explore the principles that govern both the physical and spiritual aspects of the universe. You’re living in a bright and advanced time, surrounded by many advantages. Make the most of the opportunities you have for your own benefit and for others.”
Lydia Manly.”
Lydia Manly.
943. The communication being finished, my friend handed it to me, saying, “I am not acquainted with this name.” I said, on glancing at the signature, that I never knew any one of the name of Hanly. It was immediately written, “Let Margaret look again, and she will find that she is mistaken in the name; it is Manly, not Hanly.” Imagine my astonishment on recognising the name of a schoolmate whom I had not seen, heard, nor thought of, for many years. This was to me, and might be to any one, a full and satisfactory confirmation of spiritual communion.
943. Once the communication was done, my friend handed it to me and said, “I don’t know this name.” I replied, glancing at the signature, that I had never heard of anyone named Hanly. It was quickly written, “Let Margaret look again, and she will see that she’s mistaken about the name; it’s Manly, not Hanly.” Imagine my surprise upon recognizing the name of a schoolmate I hadn’t seen, heard from, or thought about in years. This was, for me and could be for anyone, complete and convincing proof of spiritual connection.
944. On a subsequent occasion, it was written, through my friend, by my spirit sister, “Do you want instruction? I will talk to you of friendship this time. Let the basis of your friendship be esteem, and by all means seek to have this sure foundation. Friendship is a source of the greatest pleasure, and when begun in a right manner, ends not on earth, but continues to increase with unabated interest throughout eternity. Yours has thus far been characterized by firmness and sincerity. Oh! if you knew with what interest I look upon you, my dear sisters, watching the progress of your affections, and seeking a close intimacy with your spirits, it would awaken in both of your minds a lively interest for heavenly objects, and incite you to the pursuit of solid happiness. Friendship should begin in time to continue in eternity. Oh! could I convey to you the worth of time when viewed in this light!
944. Later on, my spirit sister wrote through my friend, “Do you want advice? This time, I’ll talk to you about friendship. Make sure that your friendship is built on respect, and definitely ensure this strong foundation. Friendship brings great joy, and when it starts off right, it doesn’t end here on earth but grows more meaningful for all eternity. So far, your friendship has been marked by strength and honesty. Oh! If you only knew how much I care about you, my dear sisters, watching how your feelings develop and hoping for a deeper connection with your spirits, it would spark in both of you a genuine interest in heavenly matters and inspire you to seek true happiness. Friendship should begin in this life to last into the next. Oh! If only I could show you the value of time from this perspective!”
945. “I am watching your silent communings. The lofty aspirations of your souls are not of an earthly nature. Your minds are being enlightened and seeking communion with God. Be encouraged, my dear sisters; we shall all be united in love. Be well grounded in the spiritual faith, and let your motto be—Onward in the divine life.
945. “I see your quiet conversations. The high hopes of your souls aren't of this world. Your minds are being opened and are looking for a connection with God. Stay encouraged, my dear sisters; we will all come together in love. Be strong in your spiritual faith, and let your motto be—Onward in the divine life.
Mary.”
Mary.
946. Again, it was written, “Sing with the spirit! Sister, let thy heart make tuneful melody with an angel choir who now surround you! Sing a song to immortality; how the dear departed, clothed in robes of victory, now stand on heavenly hills, enwrapt in glorious visions of the Great Eternal, bowing before the throne! Sing, ‘Death, where is thy sting? oh! grave, where is thy victory?’
946. Again, it was written, “Sing with the spirit! Sister, let your heart create a joyful melody with the angel choir surrounding you! Sing a song for eternity; how the beloved departed, dressed in robes of victory, now stand on heavenly hills, wrapped in glorious visions of the Great Eternal, bowing before the throne! Sing, ‘Death, where is your sting? Oh! grave, where is your victory?’”
947. “While here you meet, guardian angels are in attendance. Here is a gray-haired sire, a mother, and a sweet-lipped babe. All have come, with noiseless wing, to listen to thee. Precious moments! Improve them in converse sweet of heaven, and blessings, richer far than earthly treasures, we will pour upon you.”
947. “While you are here, guardian angels are present. There is an older man with gray hair, a mother, and a sweet-faced baby. All have come, silently, to listen to you. Cherished moments! Make the most of them in delightful conversations of heaven, and we will shower you with blessings far more valuable than earthly treasures.”
948. The reminiscences of the hours devoted with my friend to the investigation of this sublime subject are among the happiest of my life. They serve to awaken the purest, holiest, and most affectionate sentiments and sympathies of my nature, and thereby lead me into closer communion with the loved ones who have gone before me.
949. But in reference to my family, I was for a season destined to be alone in my happy belief. It is true, my husband did not reject the sub184ject, but thought the phenomena in question might be accounted for by a reference to the principles of mental science. I requested him to solve the mystery. He attempted it, but failed. His explanation, like all others adverse to the spiritual theory, was an explanation in which nothing is explained.
949. But when it comes to my family, I was meant to be alone in my happy belief for a while. It’s true, my husband didn’t dismiss the topic, but he thought the phenomena could be explained through the principles of mental science. I asked him to figure out the mystery. He tried, but he couldn’t. His explanation, like all others that opposed the spiritual theory, was an explanation in which nothing is explained.
950. About three months after these occurrences, a lady informed my husband that one of her daughters, about fifteen years of age, was a medium for the rappings. The young lady being present, declined the appellation as a term of reproach. Perceiving her discomfort, he requested to know what she thought of these manifestations. Her reply was, that they claimed a spiritual origin, but, in her opinion, they were due to “electricity, or something of that sort.”
950. About three months after these events, a woman told my husband that one of her daughters, around fifteen years old, was a medium for the rappings. The young lady, who was there, rejected the label as an insult. Noticing her unease, he asked what she thought about these occurrences. She replied that they said they were of spiritual origin, but in her opinion, they were caused by “electricity, or something like that.”
951. Hearing the raps on the young lady’s chair, and on various other articles of furniture in the room, he requested her to put her hands on the table. This being done, the sounds were made on the table so loud and distinct, that they might have been heard in an adjoining apartment. Inquiring of the spirits if they would communicate with him by the alphabet, he was answered in the affirmative by three raps.
951. Hearing the knocks on the young lady’s chair and on various other pieces of furniture in the room, he asked her to place her hands on the table. Once she did, the sounds on the table were so loud and clear that they could have been heard in the next room. When he asked the spirits if they would communicate with him using the alphabet, he received a yes response with three knocks.
953. The sounds having at length ceased to respond, he tried to read the communication, but found it impossible to do so until he had first arranged what was written into words and sentences. This having been accomplished, he read, to his utter amazement, as follows: “My dear son, your parent rejoices in this opportunity to communicate with you. Let me advise you to investigate this most important subject; it will benefit you in time and eternity.
953. After the sounds finally stopped, he tried to read the message, but he found it impossible until he organized what was written into words and sentences. Once he did that, he read, to his complete astonishment, the following: “My dear son, your parent is grateful for this chance to speak with you. I encourage you to look into this very important matter; it will be beneficial to you now and forever.”
Your spirit father, W. G.”
Your spirit guide, W. G.”
955. Months rolled on, and we continued to receive and enjoy the delightful intercourse of our spirit friends. One day, while engaged in sewing, the needle dropped suddenly from my fingers. At the same instant I experienced a sensation in my right hand and arm analogous to a slight electric shock. My husband, seeing me start, inquired the cause. Perceiving the temperature of my hand diminished, he became somewhat alarmed, and commenced rubbing it. In a few moments we heard sounds on the workstand at which I was seated. I inquired if the spirits wished to communicate, which was responded to by three raps. Taking the card and passing a pencil over it, the following words were given:
955. Months went by, and we kept enjoying the wonderful connection with our spirit friends. One day, while I was sewing, the needle suddenly slipped from my fingers. At that same moment, I felt a sensation in my right hand and arm like a mild electric shock. My husband noticed me jump and asked what was wrong. Feeling my hand getting colder, he got a bit worried and started rubbing it. A few moments later, we heard noises on the worktable where I was sitting. I asked if the spirits wanted to communicate, and they responded with three knocks. I took a card and ran a pencil over it, and the following words appeared:
957. “My dear Child: Your mother would impart to you a few thoughts relative to an event which is generally regarded with unspeakable horror. I mean the dissolution of the material body. Death should present no terror to the mind, since it is but a transition of the spirit to a more exalted and perfected state of being; a disunion of the imperishable and eternal principles of the soul and spirit from their temporary home in the physical form. It is but the door at whose threshhold the spirit lays aside its worn-out garment, to appear clothed in its much more beautiful habiliments in the spiritual realm—the entrance to “a house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens.”
957. “My dear Child: Your mother wants to share some thoughts about an event that is often viewed with immense fear. I’m talking about the end of the physical body. Death shouldn’t frighten you, as it’s just a transition of the spirit to a higher and more perfected state of existence; a separation of the everlasting and eternal essence of the soul and spirit from their temporary home in the physical body. It’s simply the doorway where the spirit sheds its worn-out clothing to emerge dressed in far more beautiful garments in the spiritual realm—the entryway to “a house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens.”
958. “To the mind that views this change in the condition of the spirit in its true light, it will appear a necessary preliminary step in the development of the immortal germ to a higher and much more glorious existence. With the gross earthly body, the spirit could not inhabit the celestial spheres, nor rove the elysian fields of eternal progression. You have a rosebud in your keeping, which must expand to an immortal flower in heaven. Earth has given it birth, but its vitality is feeble. It needs transplanting into a more genial soil in the garden of our Father and our God, where it will ultimately unfold its fair and beautiful proportions. In other words, your little infant, Emily, will soon join me; for I perceive that disease is deep seated in her system—a disease that no remedy can reach. Be prepared, then, my dear child, for the change which is soon to take place. Prepare for the messenger Death! Be calm, be firm!
958. “To the mind that sees this change in the spirit’s condition clearly, it will seem like a necessary first step in the growth of the immortal essence into a higher and much more glorious existence. With its heavy earthly body, the spirit can't dwell in the heavenly realms or wander through the blissful fields of eternal progress. You have a rosebud in your care that must bloom into an immortal flower in heaven. Earth has given it life, but its strength is weak. It needs to be planted in a richer soil in the garden of our Father and our God, where it will eventually reveal its lovely and beautiful form. In other words, your little baby, Emily, will soon join me; for I can see that illness is deeply rooted in her body—an illness that no cure can reach. So be ready, my dear child, for the change that will soon happen. Prepare for the messenger of Death! Stay calm, stay strong!”
“Your mother, Lydia.”
“Your mom, Lydia.”
959. This was a manifestation to me of a spirit mother’s love and watchful care. She foresaw that the inevitable event was at hand. She perceived that our darling child was incurably diseased. Although I trembled at the thought of parting with my treasure, still I was much calmer and more resigned in consequence of this parental warning, when the dread summons came.
959. This was a sign to me of a mother’s love and protective care. She knew that the inevitable was approaching. She realized that our beloved child was suffering from an incurable illness. Even though I was terrified at the idea of losing my treasure, I felt much calmer and more accepting because of this parental warning when the awful call came.
960. Three weeks passed, and still there was no apparent change in our little one from her usual seemingly healthy condition. My husband had business which called him to Philadelphia. At his urgent request I accompanied him. We left our little ones in charge of a female friend and a faithful nurse, intending to be absent about two weeks. Ten days subsequent to the time of our departure from home, I received a strong impression to return, and that my presence would soon be required there. My husband objected, on the ground that his business was unfinished. I proposed returning alone, but he was unwilling, and we started for home the next morning. We found our children all well. I was joked about my spiritual impression, and was told it was the result of imagination. On the day succeeding our return, however, our dear child was taken sick, and186 after an illness of three days her enfranchised spirit passed from earth to heaven.
960. Three weeks went by, and there was still no noticeable change in our little one from her usual seemingly healthy state. My husband had work that required him to go to Philadelphia. At his urgent request, I went with him. We left our little ones in the care of a female friend and a loyal nurse, planning to be away for about two weeks. Ten days after we left home, I felt a strong urge to return, sensing that my presence would soon be needed. My husband disagreed, saying his work was not finished. I suggested going back alone, but he wasn’t on board with that, so we headed home the next morning. We found our kids all well. I was teased about my spiritual feeling, and people said it was just my imagination. However, the day after we got back, our dear child fell ill, and after three days, her liberated spirit left this world for heaven. 186
961. Notwithstanding the ridicule heaped, at that time, by its opposers upon the believers in Spiritualism, and the affected contempt in which the votaries of this much-abused doctrine were then held, we pursued the investigation of the subject, and became daily more imbued with a sense of the truth and harmony of its divine teachings. We had the pleasure of seeing many persons, who had once denounced it as an idle dream, as a humbug, and a delusion, now converted to a full faith in its glorious realities. A change came over the spirit of their dream, and they are now blessed in the enjoyment of the richest feast for mind and soul ever bestowed by a munificent God upon his grateful children. And many do not hesitate to proclaim the fact to the world; for, thank heaven, the days of the Inquisition are numbered, and a brighter and more glorious day is dawning on benighted humanity.
961. Despite the mockery thrown at believers in Spiritualism by its critics at that time and the fake disdain directed at its followers, we continued our exploration of the topic and became increasingly aware of the truth and harmony in its divine teachings. We were pleased to see many who once dismissed it as a silly fantasy, a scam, and a delusion now fully embrace its wonderful realities. A shift happened in their perspective, and they are now blessed with the most enriching experience for the mind and soul ever given by a generous God to his thankful children. Many do not hesitate to share this with the world; for, thank goodness, the days of the Inquisition are coming to an end, and a brighter, more glorious day is arriving for humanity.
962. The following extracts from a letter of my brother, Dr. North, of Waterville, Maine, in reply to my husband, may serve to show the mind of one of the skeptics referred to, in regard to the subject of Spiritualism, both before and after investigation. As they may not be uninteresting to your readers, I give them to you, as follows:
962. The following excerpts from a letter from my brother, Dr. North, of Waterville, Maine, in response to my husband, will illustrate the perspective of one of the skeptics mentioned regarding Spiritualism, both before and after his investigation. Since they might interest your readers, I’m sharing them with you as follows:
963. “Dear Doctor:—Your letter of the 17th instant is before me, and its remarkable contents noticed. Had a great man or men, for instance, Daniel Webster, Henry Clay, or Millard Fillmore, advised a friend to a certain course, if I thought that course improper, I should have felt at liberty to dissent from him or them; but when the adviser is the spirit of my departed mother, or the soul of your departed brother, I cannot dissent, or give an opinion that would conflict with them. It seems to me, dear doctor, that you cannot have better advisers unless you call the spirit of Gabriel to your assistance, and you can do no less than consult the dictates of the rappers.
963. “Dear Doctor:—I have your letter from the 17th, and I've taken note of its remarkable contents. If a great person, like Daniel Webster, Henry Clay, or Millard Fillmore, had advised a friend to follow a certain path, and I believed that path was wrong, I would have felt free to disagree with them. But when the adviser is the spirit of my departed mother, or the soul of your departed brother, I can't disagree or express an opinion that contradicts them. It seems to me, dear doctor, that you can’t find better advisers unless you call on the spirit of Gabriel, and you would do well to heed the messages from the rappers.
964. “To be serious, I am surprised at your easy conversion to Spiritualism. I had supposed you spirit-proof, the greatest skeptic in the land; but I find you are completely taken in and done for! I do not place the least reliance on your superhuman communications, and would advise you to look upon them as phenomena of Mesmerism or mind-reading. The medium is in a mesmeric state, and consequently is capable of reading the thoughts of the inquirer, and answering questions correctly. The sounds are easily accounted for. The subject is alarmed and superstitious, and therefore easily imposed upon. The creaking of a boot is often taken by such persons in this state of mind as a spiritual rap. Do not be imposed upon by such superstition, but choose rather to be guided by good sound sense.
964. “Seriously, I’m surprised at how easily you’ve turned to Spiritualism. I thought you were immune to this stuff, the biggest skeptic around; but it seems you’ve been completely taken in and done for! I don’t trust your supposed superhuman communications at all, and I advise you to see them as just tricks of Mesmerism or mind-reading. The medium is in a hypnotic state, so they can read the inquire's thoughts and answer questions accurately. The noises have simple explanations. The person is alarmed and superstitious, making them easy to fool. A creaking shoe is often misinterpreted by people in this frame of mind as a spiritual knock. Don’t let yourself be fooled by such superstition; instead, rely on solid common sense.”
968. “In relation to Spiritualism, I am deeply convinced of its truthfulness. God grant that the grand and glorious realities which it reveals may so influence me that my progress in goodness and holiness will never end! Do I believe in it? Yes! yes! It is my daily hope and happiness; the bread of life; and it will be my consolation in death. I have read much, but have seen little of the manifestations. I should be very happy to spend a fortnight with you and meet your circle.
968. “When it comes to Spiritualism, I truly believe in its authenticity. I hope that the amazing realities it uncovers will inspire me to keep growing in goodness and holiness forever! Do I believe in it? Yes! yes! It’s my daily source of hope and joy; it’s the essence of life; and it will comfort me in death. I've read a lot, but have witnessed few of the manifestations. I would be very happy to spend two weeks with you and meet your group.
969. “My wife is reading and approximating toward belief. We have read the following works:—Davis’s Harmonia; Davis’s Present Age and Inner Life; Edmonds’s and Dexter’s work on Spiritualism; Beecher’s Report, and Brittan’s Reply to the same; Stilling’s Pneumatology; Riechenbach’s Dynamics; Cahagnet’s Celestial Telegraph, and the Spiritual Telegraph, weekly. I am so deeply interested in spiritual literature that other reading is insipid to me. I am rejoiced that people in the higher walks of life are engaged in the subject. It will give popularity to it, and the weak and fearful souls will be encouraged and strengthened in well-doing.” The following was addressed to me last February:
969. “My wife is reading and getting closer to believing. We have read the following works:—Davis’s Harmonia; Davis’s Present Age and Inner Life; Edmonds’s and Dexter’s work on Spiritualism; Beecher’s Report, and Brittan’s Reply to it; Stilling’s Pneumatology; Riechenbach’s Dynamics; Cahagnet’s Celestial Telegraph, and the Spiritual Telegraph, weekly. I’m so interested in spiritual literature that everything else seems boring to me. I'm glad that people in higher social classes are exploring this subject. It will make it more popular, and those who are weak and fearful will find encouragement and strength to do good.” The following was addressed to me last February:
970. “My Dear Sister: You say it is too late to wish us a happy New Year. It is never too late to wish our friends happiness, and strive to make them happy. This is a new year indeed; a new era to be made memorable through time and eternity; one in which the spirits of our friends are striving for our happiness. Then let us not only make each other happy, but by purifying our thoughts and conversation, strive to progress in this rudimental world, so that when we find ourselves disrobed of these bodies, and in the sphere of eternal progression, we may be with and make the spirits of our friends happy. This is a glorious happy new year. The old ark of theology and superstition is passing away. The life-blood of the popular theology is drying up. The lens of the spiritual philosophy is concentrating upon it the powerful and burning rays of truth. Already a dense and fetid smoke is issuing from its decaying portals. Its priests and votaries already are crying, Fire! fire! God grant, that from its ashes no phœnix may arise to propagate anew its senseless dogmas. Then will this be a happy year for all mankind.” On a subsequent occasion he writes—
970. “My Dear Sister: You say it’s too late to wish us a happy New Year. It’s never too late to wish our friends happiness and to work towards making them happy. This is indeed a new year; a new beginning that should be remembered through time and eternity; a time when the spirits of our friends are working for our happiness. So let’s not only make each other happy, but also, by keeping our thoughts and conversations pure, aim to grow in this basic world, so that when we shed these bodies and enter the realm of eternal growth, we can join our friends’ spirits in happiness. This is a wonderful, happy new year. The old system of outdated theology and superstition is fading away. The core of traditional theology is losing its strength. The lens of spiritual philosophy is focusing the powerful and illuminating rays of truth on it. Already, a thick and foul smoke is coming from its crumbling doors. Its priests and followers are already shouting, Fire! Fire! God help us, that from its ashes no phœnix arises to spread its meaningless doctrines again. Then this will be a happy year for all of humanity.” On a subsequent occasion, he writes—
971. “The spiritual doctrine is gaining ground here. Many of our influential citizens are believers. Some that were infidels have become hopeful Christians. Public opinion is softening, and it is not now esteemed a disgrace, as it was some time since, to believe. The acquisition of such men as Professor Hare, Edmonds, Talmadge, Chase, Simmons, Dexter, and188 Brittan to our ranks, has given respectability to it, and wrought a revolution in opinion.”
971. “The spiritual doctrine is becoming more popular here. Many of our influential citizens are now believers. Some who were nonbelievers have turned into hopeful Christians. Public opinion is changing, and it’s no longer considered a disgrace, as it was not too long ago, to hold these beliefs. The addition of prominent figures like Professor Hare, Edmonds, Talmadge, Chase, Simmons, Dexter, and 188 Brittan to our ranks has given it respectability and created a shift in public opinion.”
972. Thus much I have said respecting my spiritual experience anterior to leaving Maine. Concerning my experience since then, much more might be said, but as you are already familiar with the most of it, it remains for me to present you with a few of the best and most unequivocal demonstrations of spiritual communion that I have witnessed, but which have not come under your personal observation. Among which the following touching incidents cannot fail to interest those whose hearts and minds are not closed by the iron bars of prejudice and superstition:
972. I've shared a lot about my spiritual experiences before leaving Maine. I could say much more about what I've experienced since then, but since you're already familiar with most of it, I will present a few of the most powerful and clear demonstrations of spiritual connection that I've seen, which you haven’t personally experienced. The following poignant incidents are sure to interest those whose hearts and minds aren't shut off by the rigid boundaries of prejudice and superstition:
973. While spending the evening of January the 21st, 1854, at the house of a friend, it was proposed by the lady and her husband that we should form a circle. We had not been long seated at the table when three ladies, two of whom I had never seen, favoured us with their company, and took their seats at some distance from the circle. They had been in the room but two or three minutes, when the following was given through the table:
973. On the evening of January 21, 1854, while I was at a friend's house, the lady and her husband suggested that we create a circle. We had barely settled at the table when three ladies, two of whom I had never met before, joined us and took their seats a little way from the circle. They had only been in the room for a couple of minutes when the following message came through the table:
Sarah North.”
Sarah North.
977. When the gentleman who took down the communication read it, I was surprised at hearing the name of North, that being my maiden name. As there was no Sarah in our family, I asked the spirits, Who is Sarah North? Before they had time to reply, one of the ladies referred to (Mrs. Wightman) approached the table in tears. She said, “That is from my daughter Sarah. I have been engaged to-day in the solemn duty of selecting a tombstone to her memory.”
977. When the gentleman who wrote down the message read it, I was surprised to hear the name North, as that is my maiden name. Since there was no Sarah in our family, I asked the spirits, Who is Sarah North? Before they could answer, one of the ladies mentioned (Mrs. Wightman) came to the table in tears. She said, “That is from my daughter Sarah. I have been occupied today with the solemn task of choosing a tombstone in her memory.”
978. On Nov. 25th, 1854, I sat by appointment with Mrs. Wightman for spirit intercourse. Mrs. W. put the question, “Is Elizabeth Adams present?” “Yes.” “Will she communicate?” “Yes.” “My dear aunt,” was immediately spelt out. Interrupting the communication at that point, I asked Mrs. W. if Elizabeth Adams was her niece. No, she replied; it must be a mistake. Thinking it probable that there was something wrong in the conditions, I removed my hand for a few moments. On replacing it, to our surprise, the words, “My dear aunt,” were repeated. “Well!” we exclaimed, simultaneously, “that is strange. Let us see what may come;” and we received the following:
978. On November 25, 1854, I met with Mrs. Wightman for a spirit session. Mrs. W. asked, “Is Elizabeth Adams here?” “Yes.” “Will she communicate?” “Yes.” “My dear aunt,” was spelled out immediately. I interrupted the communication at that point and asked Mrs. W. if Elizabeth Adams was her niece. No, she said; it must be a mistake. Thinking that there might be an issue with the conditions, I took my hand away for a moment. When I placed it back, to our surprise, the words, “My dear aunt,” were repeated. “Well!” we exclaimed at the same time, “that’s strange. Let’s see what else might come;” and we received the following:
Your niece, Almira Barnes.”
Your niece, Almira Barnes.”
980. It was some moments before Mrs. W. could recall to mind the fact that her sister had lost a child, of the above name, about twenty-three years since, aged three months. Here is intelligence so clearly independent of our minds, that it is, in my opinion, entirely fatal to the theory of “mental reflection” so often adduced by the unbelievers in Spiritualism. At the close of this communication the following was received:
980. It took Mrs. W. a few moments to remember that her sister had lost a child, named above, about twenty-three years ago, when the child was three months old. This information is clearly independent of our thoughts, which, in my opinion, completely undermines the theory of “mental reflection” frequently cited by skeptics of Spiritualism. At the end of this communication, the following was received:
981. “Dear Mother: I am happy to have this opportunity to send you a kind message. Although I am often with you, I cannot speak to you through your own mediumship. Oh mother! what delight it would give me could I make myself visible to you. What would you say if you should see me sitting in the chair I so long occupied when an invalid? I often sit in that chair, but you cannot yet see me. Have you not heard me rap to you? I have tried in various ways to make myself manifest. I think you had better go South this winter. I think father’s health would be better there. I will visit you, if you go. The climate where you now live is too bracing for father’s lungs. When the warm weather returns, you can bid farewell to the sunny South and seek your Northern home. I wish I could speak to you through your own dear hand, but that I cannot yet do.
981. “Dear Mother: I'm glad to have the chance to send you a kind message. Even though I’m often with you, I can’t communicate through your own mediumship. Oh mother! How wonderful it would be if I could make myself visible to you. What would you say if you saw me sitting in the chair I used to occupy when I was unwell? I often sit in that chair, but you still can’t see me. Haven’t you heard me knock for you? I’ve tried in different ways to make myself known. I believe you should go South this winter. I think father's health would improve there. I’ll visit you if you do. The climate where you currently live is too harsh for father’s lungs. When warm weather comes back, you can say goodbye to the sunny South and return to your Northern home. I wish I could communicate with you through your own dear hand, but I can't do that yet.”
Elizabeth Adams.”
Elizabeth Adams.
983. The above, as may be seen, was from the spirit that Mrs. W. called for, and the communication was designed for the spirit’s mother, who lived in the State of New York. The message was subsequently forwarded to her address. E. A., Mrs. Wightman, informed me, died after a lingering illness of consumption. She occupied the arm-chair alluded to during the greater part of her sickness, and she promised her mother she would come back and sit in it after her death, if she could. Her step-father, whose indisposition she refers to, is affected with a chronic disease of the lungs. The loved ones are Elizabeth’s brothers and sisters, all of whom, five or six, are in the spirit world. These facts were unknown to me at the time.
983. As you can see, this was from the spirit that Mrs. W. called for, and the message was intended for the spirit’s mother, who lived in New York. The message was later sent to her address. E. A., Mrs. Wightman, let me know that she died after a long illness from tuberculosis. She sat in the armchair mentioned during most of her sickness and promised her mother she would return and sit in it after she died, if she could. Her stepfather, whose health she mentions, has a chronic lung disease. The loved ones are Elizabeth’s brothers and sisters, all of whom, five or six, are in the spirit world. I was unaware of these details at the time.
984. Last January, my friend Mrs. Wightman brought two ladies to witness, for the first time, some of the phenomena of our beautiful philosophy. Their names were suppressed, to be disclosed by the communications that might come from their spirit friends, in order to strengthen the evidences of spiritual intercourse. My hand being applied to the disk, the index spelled out the following:
984. Last January, my friend Mrs. Wightman brought two ladies to experience, for the first time, some of the phenomena of our beautiful philosophy. Their names were kept private, to be revealed by the messages that might come from their spirit friends, in order to enhance the evidence of spiritual communication. My hand was placed on the disk, and the index spelled out the following:
985. “Dear Mother: I am not dead, but living in the love sphere of my Father in heaven. When you laid my little body in the ground, it caused you many tears. Kind friends wept. I see one here who was a190 faithful friend to you in that hour of anguish. Cherish her, for she was a friend in need. Oh! mother, I wish you to believe that your little child is indeed with you. I can come to earth when I wish to see you and father. It only causes me to feel a little sad that you and father cannot see me.
985. “Dear Mom: I am not dead, but living in the love of my Father in heaven. When you buried my little body, it made you cry a lot. Caring friends shed tears. I see one here who was a190 loyal friend to you in that moment of pain. Treasure her, because she was a friend when you needed one. Oh! Mom, I want you to believe that your little child is indeed with you. I can come to earth whenever I want to see you and Dad. It just makes me feel a little sad that you and Dad can't see me.
F. H. W.”
F. H. W.
986. One of the ladies rose from her seat and accepted the communication as from her darling boy, who had been put in his grave two years before. The name was all right: “Franklin Henry Wilcox.” The friend referred to was Mrs. Wightman, who had been a true friend in the trying hour of a mother’s sorrow, and had performed the solemn duty of preparing her dear child for the depository of his earthly remains, and to pour balm on the heart of a bereaved and stricken mother.
986. One of the women got up from her seat and took the message, thinking it was from her beloved son, who had been buried two years prior. The name was correct: “Franklin Henry Wilcox.” The friend mentioned was Mrs. Wightman, who had been a real support during the difficult time of a mother’s grief, and had taken on the solemn task of preparing her beloved child for burial, soothing the heart of a heartbroken and devastated mother.
987. About two months since, two of the professors of the Female Medical College of Pennsylvania, one of whom, Dr. Harvey, is favourably known to you, called to see me in relation to the subject of Spiritualism. I had never seen either of these gentlemen. After a few minutes’ conversation on the topic in question, Dr. H. observed—“We should like, madam, if you will be kind enough to favour us with a sitting, to communicate with our spirit friends.” Complying with the doctor’s request, I placed my hand on the disk, and the subjoined was rapidly communicated:
987. About two months ago, two professors from the Female Medical College of Pennsylvania, one of whom, Dr. Harvey, you know well, came to see me regarding Spiritualism. I had never met either of these men before. After a brief discussion on the topic, Dr. H. said, “We would appreciate it if you would give us a sitting to connect with our spirit friends.” Following the doctor’s request, I put my hand on the disk, and the message below was quickly conveyed:
988. “My brothers in the glorious profession of medicine! I greet you this afternoon with unabated affection and respect. It seems like a dream that I have passed from your midst; but passing away is written on all things of a perishable nature. Not so with the spirit, which is an emanation from God.
989. “My earthly career is closed, and a brighter one is now in view. Oh, the inexpressible delight which fills my soul when I behold the wondrous works of Omnipotence! Here I can pursue, untrammelled, those subjects which were so delightful to me when an inhabitant of the mundane sphere. Oh! that I had prepared my mind in some measure, by proper investigation, for this transcendent world of living beauties! but the love of my profession filled my mind, to the exclusion of the more important one of spiritual progression. I would that I could converse with my beloved wife, that I might console her for her early loss! Tell her that I am happy; this will speak volumes.
989. “My time on Earth is over, and a brighter future is now ahead of me. Oh, the indescribable joy that fills my soul when I see the amazing works of the Almighty! Here I can freely explore those subjects that captivated me when I lived in the physical world. Oh! I wish I had prepared my mind a bit better, through proper study, for this incredible world of living wonders! But my dedication to my profession kept me focused, pushing aside the more crucial pursuit of spiritual growth. I wish I could talk to my beloved wife, to comfort her for her early loss! Tell her that I am happy; that will mean so much.”
Johnson.”
Johnson.”
993. I have thus, my dear friend, given you a very hasty and imperfect191 sketch of my experience in Spiritualism, and my development as a medium. Little need here be said to prove, to reflecting minds, the value of this heaven-descended philosophy. It is a theme that all may study with pleasure and profit, when so disposed.
993. So, my dear friend, I’ve given you a quick and imperfect191 overview of my experiences with Spiritualism and my growth as a medium. There’s not much more to say to convince thoughtful people of the value of this divine philosophy. It’s a topic that anyone can explore with joy and benefit when they feel like it.
994. Whatever may be thought of modern Spiritualism, and however opposed it may be to many of the preconceived notions and opinions of mankind, it is certain that there is nothing in its fundamental doctrines and teachings, which may not be reconciled with the laws of God, so far as these are known to man.
994. No matter what people think about modern Spiritualism, and regardless of how much it goes against many established beliefs and opinions of humanity, it is clear that there is nothing in its basic principles and teachings that cannot be aligned with the laws of God, as far as these are understood by humans.
995. It matters not, I should think, whether this movement is sanctioned or not by a former revelation, as that would neither add to nor detract from its intrinsic merit. Spiritualism is endeared to the heart of thousands by its fond associations, and mementoes of love and affection from those dear friends who have passed from their sight, though still united to them by kindred ties. It has gone on in triumph, overspreading every State in our glorious republic, and, passing over the broad sea, has reached the shores of other lands, binding together the brotherhood of man in the sacred bonds of love, and dispelling the discordant elements of strife and sectism which have hung over the world, and like a dark pall, imparted their sombre hue to the minds of men. Progress is its name, and love its mission. It has no affinity with vice. It makes no war with right, but inculcates the highest standard of morality. It is noiselessly accomplishing its divine mission. Many a widow’s heart is made to leap with joy by its benign influence, and many an orphan feels its silent ministration. Many a prodigal son has been reclaimed at the brink of ruin by the voice of a spirit mother! It is not only a few individuals who are to receive the blessings which flow from this new dispensation—the masses are to be benefited. It inculcates principles which will strengthen the foundations of society, promote harmony in the social system, and ultimately unite all mankind under its broad standard of peace. That Spiritualism is rapidly extending its bounds, and gaining hundreds of thousands of converts, admits not of a doubt; and that it has the elements within it to elevate, reform, and redeem the race, it were folly, nay, madness, to deny.
995. It doesn't really matter, I think, whether this movement is approved by an earlier revelation or not, since that wouldn't add to or take away from its inherent value. Spiritualism is cherished by thousands for its warm connections and memories of love from those dear friends who have passed away but remain connected through familial bonds. It has flourished, spreading across every state in our great country, and, crossing the ocean, has reached other nations, uniting humanity in the sacred ties of love and easing the conflicts of strife and division that have overshadowed the world, casting a dark shadow over people’s minds. Progress is its name, and love is its mission. It has no connection to wrongdoing. It doesn't fight against what is right but promotes the highest standards of morality. It quietly pursues its divine mission. Many widows have had their hearts lifted with joy through its positive influence, and many orphans feel its gentle support. Many wayward sons have been brought back from the brink of destruction by the voice of a spirit mother! It’s not just a few individuals who will benefit from this new revelation—the entire population stands to gain. It teaches principles that will strengthen the foundations of society, promote harmony in social structures, and ultimately unite all of humanity under its wide banner of peace. There's no doubt that Spiritualism is rapidly expanding its reach and gaining hundreds of thousands of followers, and to deny that it has the potential to uplift, reform, and redeem humanity would be foolish, even mad.
996. Eighteen months have scarcely elapsed, my dear friend, since our first acquaintance, and you are aware of the circumstances which afforded me this highly-esteemed pleasure. The event, I am happy to say, has proved an era in my own life that I shall always revert to with pleasurable and heartfelt emotion; for its results have not only proved a blessing and solace to you, but a source of much joy and happiness to myself. Though you have encountered much opposition, and even abuse, from the ignorant and illiterate as well as from the professed votaries of science, in defending the cause of spiritual philosophy, you have fearlessly and faithfully battled against error, and planted your standard on the high pinnacle of truth. And as David of old, with the smooth stones of Kedron, slew the192 Gathean giant, and was met with songs of triumph and dances of joy by the daughters of Israel; so you, armed with the panoply of truth, have gone forth with the weapons of philosophy and reason to prostrate the hydra-headed monster; and will, I trust, receive in your turn the acknowledgments and love of your grateful friends.
996. It's been just eighteen months, my dear friend, since we first met, and you know the circumstances that brought me this wonderful pleasure. I'm happy to say that this event has marked a significant moment in my life that I will always look back on with joy and heartfelt emotion; because its outcomes have not only been a blessing and comfort to you, but also a great source of happiness for me. Although you have faced a lot of opposition and even hostility from both the ignorant and the so-called experts in science while defending the cause of spiritual philosophy, you have bravely and faithfully fought against falsehood and established your claim on the high ground of truth. Just as David of old, with the smooth stones from the brook, defeated the giant from Gath and was celebrated with songs and dances by the daughters of Israel; you, equipped with the armor of truth, have gone forth with the tools of philosophy and reason to conquer the multi-headed beast; and I trust you will, in return, receive the gratitude and love of your appreciative friends.
ILLUSTRATION OF THE PRACTICAL BENEFIT OF SPIRITUALISM, IN THE HAPPINESS IMPARTED BY THE CONVERSION OF AN UNBELIEVER TO A BELIEF IN IMMORTALITY.
999. Those who, for faith in immortality, have been satisfied to rely on the creed which they may have chanced to derive from their ancestors through education, and have consequently felt the comfort of a belief in immortality thence arising, may readily conceive of the benefit which must ensue to those of their fellow-creatures upon whom such a creed has not been impressed, but who are quite sensible of the immense value of any facts tending to create such a belief in life to come. It is to be lamented, however, that persons who have this impression contingently from a peculiar education, are irritated at having analogous impressions created in a different way.
999. Those who believe in immortality and are content to trust in the beliefs passed down from their ancestors through education, finding comfort in that faith, can easily understand the benefits it brings to others who haven't been shaped by such beliefs but recognize the tremendous importance of facts that could inspire a belief in life after death. However, it is unfortunate that individuals who hold their beliefs due to a specific education often become annoyed when similar beliefs are formed through different means.
1000. But in obedience to any dissatisfaction thus arising, to assail those who may acquire a knowledge of futurity by a new route, is manifestly inconsistent with the golden rule. As an exemplification of the benefit which the new evidences of another and a better world may pro193duce in the minds of those who are not satisfied with that of revelation, I will subjoin the account of his conversion indited by one of my esteemed friends, Doctor W. Geib, who preceded me in spiritual investigation, and has longer enjoyed the influence which Spiritualism exercises over its votaries.
1000. However, reacting negatively to any arising dissatisfaction by attacking those who gain insight into the future through a new approach clearly goes against the golden rule. To illustrate the advantages that new evidence of a different and better world can have on those who are unsatisfied with revelation, I will include the story of his conversion written by one of my respected friends, Dr. W. Geib, who explored spirituality before me and has experienced the influence that Spiritualism has on its followers for a longer period. 193
1003. “There was pain in the thought, that scenes so enchanting, feelings so susceptible to their charms, a mind constituted to appreciate their miraculous wonders and pervading fascinations, and to do homage to the great Intelligence which gave them existence, should in a few short years be destined, like the foliage of the forest, to death and decay.
1003. “It was painful to think that such enchanting scenes, feelings so easily captivated by their charms, a mind built to appreciate their miraculous wonders and irresistible fascinations, and to pay respect to the great Intelligence that created them, would in just a few short years be doomed, like the leaves of the forest, to death and decay.
1004. “Still, to his mind there was arrogance in the thought that man could ever be the recipient of joys beyond those provided for him in common with all animal creation; and he chased from his mind the sombre thought of death, as a dreaded incubus upon life and the enemy of his few remaining joys.
1005. “But how changed the scene! Death, once so disturbing to his peace, so discordant with the moral attributes of his nature, which ‘puzzles the will,’ and leads the mind to seek in wonder and discouragement the motive for human life, is now but a ‘consummation devoutly to be wished,’ when this race of earthly life shall have been duly run; when we may have filled the measure of our destined usefulness, and secured by our moral affinities a joyful reception in the spheres above.
1005. “But how changed the scene! Death, once so upsetting to his peace, so out of sync with the moral qualities of his nature, which 'puzzles the will,' and causes the mind to search in confusion and discouragement for the reason behind human existence, is now just a 'conclusion devoutly to be wished,' when this journey of earthly life comes to an end; when we may have fulfilled our purpose of usefulness, and ensured through our moral connections a warm welcome in the realms above.
1006. “And why this change in thought and feeling? How are the horrors of the grave, the dread of dissolution into the primordial elements of creation, exchanged for the blissful assurance of immortal life for the soul of man, in all its associate identity, after it shall have departed from its earthly tenement of flesh?
1007. “The answer to this all-absorbing question, which sheds light into the gloomy recesses of the skeptic’s mind, and gives joy to his despairing heart—which supplied evidence where none had been sought, conviction where it had been sought in vain, and imparts to the accepted hope and faith of the professional believer, the confirmation of a demonstrated fact—is to be found in the irrefutable evidence of Spiritual Philosophy.
1007. “The answer to this all-consuming question, which brings clarity to the dark corners of the skeptic’s mind and brings joy to their despairing heart—providing proof where there was none before, certainty where it had been sought in vain, and giving the established hope and faith of the professional believer the backing of a proven fact—is found in the undeniable evidence of Spiritual Philosophy.
1008. “How invaluable is this dispensation of an Almighty Providence, which has made his despairing creature, a believer in the immortality of the soul of man; has cleared from his mental vision the clouds of doubt194 and disbelief, and has opened to his rejoicing mind the irrefragable evidence of a future life beyond the grave!
1008. “How invaluable is this gift from an Almighty Providence, which has turned his hopeless existence into a belief in the immortality of the human soul; has cleared away the clouds of doubt194 and disbelief from his mind, and has revealed to his joyful thoughts the undeniable proof of a life after death!
1014. Asking what the subject might be, and being asked in return, if I had not heard of the wonders of Spiritualism, a painful impression was made on my mind and feelings that, where all had been regarded as sound and straight, there must be some latent obliquity of thought; that my friend, as the Spaniards say, was a little tonto, or that he was likely soon to become so, was quite apparent.
1014. When I asked what the topic might be and got asked back if I had heard about the wonders of Spiritualism, it left a troubling impression on my mind and emotions. It seemed that where everything was seen as solid and straightforward, there had to be some hidden flaw in the thinking. It was obvious that my friend, as the Spaniards say, was a little tonto, or was likely to become one soon.
1015. However, my strictest scrutiny could detect no decline of his intelligent and ingenuous mind, and his well-digested remarks addressed to my incredulous ears, gave proof enough that this might be another demand for the investigation of science, and a step forward in the progressive development of nature’s laws.
1016. Being the leading member of a circle that held its meetings at his house, and kindly acquiescing in my request to be present and witness the phenomena, I found myself shortly afterward seated at a table, on a Sabbath evening, with about twenty ladies and gentlemen, whose every appearance was fatal to my preconceived prejudices against the understanding of those with whom I expected to be associated.
1016. As the main member of a group that met at his house, and graciously agreeing to my request to join and observe the phenomena, I soon found myself sitting at a table on a Sunday evening with around twenty men and women, whose every aspect challenged my preconceived notions about the people I thought I would be interacting with.
1017. It was evidently a meeting for religious devotion. Sacred songs took the lead, and my own voice, as if impelled by a foreign influence, was raised for the first time by the impulse of feeling to participation in this vocal prayer of gratitude and praise, sung to the great, almighty Founder of the universe.
1018. Indeed it would be well for the cause of spiritual philosophy if all exhibitions of its wonderful and sacred phenomena were made under circumstances calculated to impress the mind with the greatness and dignity of its source. To feel protected from the nefarious cupidity of the world is an important first step for the successful investigation of a subject so sacred in its character, and so absorbing, in contemplating the prospective existence of man.
1018. Truly, it would benefit the cause of spiritual philosophy if all demonstrations of its amazing and sacred phenomena were conducted in ways that highlight the greatness and dignity of their source. Feeling shielded from the corrupt greed of the world is a crucial first step for successfully exploring such a sacred subject that deeply engages us in considering the future existence of humanity.
1020. And ever will my mind recur with delight and gratitude to the influence on my moral nature of this mission of love and salvation to an invulnerable heart! It flashed like electricity across the mind; the clouds of skepticism were ruptured, and shed a grateful and refreshing shower of hopeful joy on the feverish doubts of an unbelieving soul. This beginning led to progressive investigation, and that, as is uniformly the case, to a confirmed conviction of the communion of spirits with their friends on earth.
1020. I will always reflect with joy and gratitude on how this mission of love and salvation impacted my moral nature and touched an impenetrable heart! It struck my mind like a bolt of lightning; the clouds of doubt split open, pouring a refreshing and grateful shower of hopeful joy on the anxious uncertainties of an unbelieving soul. This initial moment sparked further inquiry, which, as usually happens, led to a deep belief in the connection between spirits and their friends on earth.
1021. Hearing much of physical demonstrations, but having witnessed only the concussions, vulgarly called the raps, the question was put to my friend, the gentleman already referred to, if a demonstration could be had to gratify my curiosity, and strengthen my assurance, when the following dialogue occurred:
1022. ‘Will the spirits be so obliging as to make a physical demonstration?’ Answered by three raps on the table, which were responded to by an affirmative expression from the whole circle. My seat was at the side of the medium, a married lady of considerably more than ordinary weight. Question. Will the spirits move Mrs. D. in her chair? Ans. Yes.
1023. As this demonstration was intended for my special benefit, and our invisible friends were fully committed for its performance, my attention was riveted on the lady who was to be the subject of it. ‘Madam, will you please put your feet on the spar of the chair?’ This being fully196 accomplished—‘and your hands in your lap,’ was added. As her hands dropped, the lady left my side, passed about two feet backward, and immediately returned to her former position at the table.
1023. Since this demonstration was meant specifically for me, and our unseen friends were all set for it, I focused intently on the lady who was going to be the subject. ‘Madam, could you please place your feet on the spar of the chair?’ Once she did that—‘and now put your hands in your lap,’ I added. As her hands fell into place, the lady moved away from my side, slid about two feet back, and then instantly came back to her original spot at the table.
1024. My astonishment was naturally raised to the highest pitch, demanding of Dr. P., who sat on her opposite side, if I could believe my own eyes, and that Mrs. D. had really been moved from my side. ‘Oh, certainly,’ he replied; ‘that is nothing. I have seen far more wonderful manifestations than that.’
1025. The idea of collusion was too ridiculous to be entertained for a moment; every consideration condemned it. The carpet on which the chair stood on its slender legs, with at least one hundred and fifty pounds added to its gravity, must have been extensively injured had the chair remained in contact with it. But not even a sound was audible, and my mind was left to contemplate an invisible power that had effected the movement of a ponderous body in mid air.
1025. The idea of collusion was too absurd to even consider; every factor ruled it out. The carpet that the chair stood on, supported by its delicate legs and with at least one hundred and fifty pounds of weight on it, would have been significantly damaged if the chair had stayed in contact with it. But not even a sound was heard, leaving me to think about an invisible force that had moved a heavy object through the air.
1026. Showing the interest of my own dear invisible guardian friends, it was spelt out by the card, the primitive mode of communication at that time, that I should change my seat to the side of the medium; and it was only after this change had been made that my mind was impressed to ask for a demonstration.
1027. By this demonstration of supernal agency I was delighted, humbled, and convinced. As the octogenarian Robert Owen, of London, proclaimed to the world in a published letter, in relating his own case, I became a convert to spiritual life and intercourse by the force of this evidence, because I should have considered any man a fool, who, with a mind free from the curse of a bigoted education, and whose thoughts and feelings were not mortgaged to the world, could reject such palpable and convincing proof, and entertain a different conclusion.
1027. This demonstration of higher power left me feeling delighted, humbled, and convinced. As the elderly Robert Owen from London stated in a published letter about his own experience, I became a believer in spiritual life and communication through the strength of this evidence. I would have thought anyone a fool—who, with a mind untainted by narrow-minded education and whose thoughts and feelings weren't tied to worldly concerns—could dismiss such clear and convincing proof and reach a different conclusion.
1028. Being subsequently in the city of New York, I visited the public circles of Mrs. C., a medium for automatic writing and the sounds. Being requested, as the rest had been, but without response, to ask if any of my spirit friends were present, my interrogation was answered by three distinct raps on the table. ‘Now ask who it is; a father, mother, and so on;’ and I was informed it was a son. ‘Is your sister with you?’ ‘Yes.‘ ‘Will you spell her name?’ ‘Yes;’ and it was correctly given. ‘Is her little son with her?’ ‘Yes.’ ‘Will you spell his name?’ ‘Yes;’ and a name of seventeen letters was correctly spelt out by the card, the letters being indicated, when pointed to, by three raps.
1028. Later, while I was in New York City, I attended the public sessions hosted by Mrs. C., a medium known for automatic writing and sounds. As everyone else had done, I was asked to find out if any of my spirit friends were around, but initially got no response. When I finally got an answer, it came in the form of three distinct knocks on the table. "Now ask who it is; a father, mother, and so on;" I was told it was a son. "Is your sister with you?" "Yes." "Can you spell her name?" "Yes;" and it was spelled correctly. "Is her little son with her?" "Yes." "Can you spell his name?" "Yes;" and a name with seventeen letters was spelled out correctly, with the letters indicated by three knocks when pointed to.
1029. My spirit son also informed me when he had died and of what disease. I asked if they were happy. It will be observed that my son’s name had not been mentioned, reserving it for a test. Three raps had replied in the affirmative to my question, when the medium spasmodically seized a pencil, extended a sheet of paper toward me, and wrote upside down, so that I might read it as written: ‘We are looking forward197 for you to join us, when we shall be more so;’ and to my perfect delight and astonishment, signed my son’s name to the communication, asking whether the name was correct.
1029. My spirit son also let me know when he had died and what illness he had. I asked if they were happy. You’ll notice that my son’s name wasn’t mentioned, keeping it for a test. Three knocks answered my question affirmatively when the medium suddenly grabbed a pencil, held out a sheet of paper towards me, and wrote upside down so I could read it as it was written: ‘We are looking forward197 to you joining us, when we’ll be even happier;’ and to my absolute joy and amazement, he signed my son’s name to the message, asking if the name was correct.
1030. On a subsequent occasion, when a large and respectable company was present, I remarked to Mrs. C. that she had reported the fact that foreign languages had been written by her hand. ‘All kinds of language; but I don’t know any thing about them,’ was the reply. ‘If you have no objection, I should like to get a communication from my son, in a foreign language.’ ‘Oh, not the least; if he knew it in this world, he will know it in the next.’ ‘My son, will you give me a communication in a foreign language?’ Answer, three raps. The company were all intent on this striking and convincing test of spiritual intercourse. In French? no; one rap. In Spanish? three raps. The medium’s hand, as before, seized the pencil, and wrote upside down a communication to me in correct Spanish, though we all accepted her declaration, that she was not acquainted with one word of the Spanish language.
1030. At a later time, when a large and respectable group was present, I mentioned to Mrs. C. that she had claimed to have written in foreign languages. “All kinds of languages; but I don’t know anything about them,” she replied. “If you don’t mind, I would like to receive a message from my son in a foreign language.” “Oh, not at all; if he knew it in this life, he will know it in the next.” “My son, will you give me a message in a foreign language?” The answer was three knocks. Everyone was focused on this striking and convincing demonstration of spiritual communication. In French? No; one knock. In Spanish? Three knocks. The medium’s hand, as before, picked up the pencil and wrote upside down a message to me in correct Spanish, even though we all accepted her claim that she didn’t know a single word of Spanish.
1031. As it is said of our beneficent almighty Father, that when two or three are gathered together in his name, he is with them, so it is with the spirits of our dear departed relatives and friends. When a few congenial, harmonious spirits of earth are associated in virtuous love, and their affinity for their supermundane spirit friends is strong enough to draw them here, they come on missions of friendship, and pour happiness into our hearts, provided the presence of a medium, possessing the required conditions, affords them an opportunity.
1031. Just like it's said about our loving and all-powerful Father that when two or three come together in His name, He is with them, the same goes for the spirits of our beloved departed family and friends. When a few like-minded and harmonious people are united in genuine love, and their connection to their spiritual friends is strong enough to bring them close, they come to share friendship and bring joy into our hearts, as long as there’s a medium present who has the right conditions to make it possible.
1032. It has been my good fortune to be a member of such an association, called a spirit circle; and the communications which have come to me from my dear departed children, and others who are dear to me, filled with love and interest for my welfare in the world, have given a value to life which it never had before, supplying a stimulus to the heart and mind which has guarded them from the influence of surrounding excitements, and strewed that path with many sweets which was too apt, with less humility and resignation, to be regarded with doubt and pursued with remorse.
1032. I’ve been lucky to be part of an organization called a spirit circle. The messages I’ve received from my beloved departed children and others who mean a lot to me, filled with love and concern for my well-being in this life, have given my life a significance it never had before. They provide motivation for my heart and mind, protecting them from the distractions around me, and making my journey somehow sweeter, which I might have otherwise faced with uncertainty and regret if I hadn't embraced humility and acceptance.
1033. Let it not be said that spiritual philosophy imparts no benefit to man. It need not be asked if opening heaven to the mind of the skeptic is not a boon: it is too manifest an axiom to be made a question. Is it no advantage to mankind to know that this life is a prelude to one in the skies? no incentive to virtue to be taught that the beginning of our spirit life will correspond with the termination of our mundane existence, and that our position there will be governed by our affinities here? Operating on spiritual, as gravity does on physical, matter, and giving to crime a weight which holds the criminal back in the career of immortal happiness; and that this must be first disposed of by the redeeming laws of nature before the soul can begin its progressive flight to spheres of celestial bliss.
1033. It should not be said that spiritual philosophy offers no benefit to people. There’s no need to question whether expanding the skeptic’s understanding of heaven is beneficial: it’s too clear to debate. Isn’t it a major advantage for humanity to realize that this life is just a preparation for one in the afterlife? Isn’t there motivation for goodness in knowing that the start of our spiritual existence aligns with the end of our physical life, and that our experiences there will be influenced by our connections here? Just as gravity affects physical matter, spirituality brings a weight to wrongdoing that hinders the wrongdoer from achieving eternal happiness; this burden must be addressed by the redeeming principles of nature before the soul can begin its uplifting journey to realms of heavenly joy.
1034. At one of those family harmonious associations at which spirits are wont to come, I received a first communication from a much-loved daughter, whose devoted affection in this world caused her untimely death to leave a large blank in my happiness, till spiritual philosophy gave to my mind the assurance of her exalted bliss and unaltered love.
1035. To hear, as it were, the voice of one who had been resolved, agreeably to my belief, into the primitive elements of her physical nature, proclaiming her existence and transcendent happiness in scenes of surpassing beauty and fascination, was well calculated to soften the heart, however hard before, and make it for the future a more ready recipient of happy impressions; to open the floodgates of feeling, waken up the latent sympathies of our nature, and make us participants of those fountains of joy, which flow from the blessings of pure religion.
1035. Hearing, in a way, the voice of someone who had been transformed, as I believed, into the fundamental elements of her physical being, declaring her existence and profound happiness in scenes of incredible beauty and allure, was sure to soften even the hardest heart and make it more receptive to joy in the future; to unleash a flood of emotions, awaken the hidden sympathies within us, and allow us to share in the sources of joy that come from the blessings of pure faith.
Letter from a Spirit Daughter.
1037. Poets have sung of heavenly joys, but fancy cannot paint, nor artist sketch, the wondrous beauties of the spirit home. Darling father, how glad I am to see you have begun to live for heaven! I shall be one to welcome you when life’s journey is over. Oh, mother dear, will you, for the love you bear to us, listen to the voice of your children? We will give you all the proof you ask.
1037. Poets have celebrated the joys of heaven, but imagination can't capture, nor can any artist draw, the incredible beauty of the spirit world. Dear father, I'm so happy to see you starting to live for heaven! I will be there to welcome you when your journey in life ends. Oh, dear mother, will you, for the love you have for us, listen to your children's voices? We'll provide you with all the evidence you need.
Maria.”
Maria.
1039. A beautiful and much-loved son, who left this world at three years of age, came to me, at the end of twenty-seven years, from the seventh supernal sphere, with words of love, consolation, and advice. Such events, to a believer in the spiritual doctrine, are well calculated to arouse the strongest energies of the soul and inspire the best feelings of the heart!
1039. A beautiful and cherished son, who left this world at the age of three, came to me after twenty-seven years, from the seventh heavenly realm, with words of love, comfort, and guidance. Such events, for a believer in spiritual teachings, are bound to stir the deepest emotions of the soul and inspire the greatest feelings of the heart!
1040. The regular progress of maturity of the spirit, uninterrupted by the grave, is made evident to our astonished minds by an event like this. We are also admonished by the same source that decline is not an attribute of spirit life; that old age recedes, and infancy advances, to the same point of maturity, with entire immunity from all physical infirmity.
1040. The steady development of the spirit, undisturbed by death, becomes clear to us through an event like this. We are also reminded by the same source that decline is not a characteristic of spiritual life; that old age fades away, and infancy progresses, to the same level of maturity, completely free from any physical weaknesses.
1042. ‘Dear angel Child: The untiring affinity of your cherished199 love, which, unobstructed by time and space, makes you so often the companion of my mind and heart, and the dear partner of my thoughts and feelings, would seem to render the present object of addressing a letter to you and your dear brothers in heaven a superfluous task.
1043. But, my dear Maria, my ever dear and cherished child, with my growing faith in the blessed reality of spiritual existence, I am becoming daily more anxious to preserve the history of my happy experience, and also my correspondence with my beloved relations of this world, who have preceded me in the progressive destiny of the human race. Beside which, my beloved daughter, it will assimilate, revive, and perpetuate that mundane correspondence, the dear mementoes of which had their beginning seventeen summers since in your sick chamber on the banks of the Hudson, while an ambitious and youthful votary of Minerva, and ended on the Alabama, ever sacred to my memory, with the termination of your worldly career, a wife and a mother.
1043. But, my dear Maria, my beloved and treasured child, as my faith in the wonderful reality of spiritual existence grows, I find myself becoming more eager each day to preserve the story of my joyful experiences and my correspondence with my beloved family members from this world who have moved on in the continuous journey of humanity. Additionally, my dear daughter, it will help to connect, revive, and keep alive that earthly correspondence, which had its beginning seventeen summers ago in your sick room by the Hudson River, while I was a hopeful and youthful student of knowledge, and concluded in Alabama, a place forever cherished in my memory, with the end of your life in this world as a wife and mother.
1044. The considerations which engage my mind and elicit my solicitude, in this contemplated correspondence with my spirit relatives and friends, are the mode of conducting it, that may make them acquainted with its contents, the fear of transcending the limits of propriety in the subject-matter of my letters, and my solicitude to make all my thoughts, feelings, and acts as conformable to the high behests of spirit life as may be within the reach of my weak and earthly nature.
1044. The thoughts that occupy my mind and cause my concern in this planned correspondence with my spiritual relatives and friends are how to approach it in a way that keeps them informed about its contents, the worry of going beyond what is appropriate in the topics of my letters, and my desire to ensure that all my thoughts, feelings, and actions align as closely as possible with the lofty principles of spiritual life, given my limited and earthly nature.
1045. The communications I have received from you and your dear brothers, and from your Uncle John and Aunt Rebecca, are a perpetual source of happiness to my mind, and nothing, while I am in this world, can reflect so much joy on my heart as the continued correspondence of all the loved ones who have gone before me.
1047. The assurance which you and your dear brother have given me, that my sickness has had the happy effect to spiritualize my mental and physical nature, has been already made manifest to my grateful mind by strengthened resolution for the future, and a more exalted sense of the demands of that true spiritual philosophy which felicitates our life in this, and secures for us a desirable position in the spheres above.
1047. The reassurance you and your dear brother have given me, that my illness has positively influenced my mental and physical well-being, has already become clear to my thankful mind through a stronger determination for the future and a heightened awareness of the requirements of the true spiritual philosophy that enhances our lives here and ensures us a favorable place in the higher realms.
1048. Flowing from my warm aspirations for the increased happiness of my fellow-creatures in this mundane sphere, by the dissemination and growth of the spiritual doctrine, I cherish a wish that this letter may be made to subserve that divine object, by exhibiting to the world an irrefutable test of spiritual intercourse.
1049. For this purpose, my dear angel child, in your next interview through our much-respected medium, allow me to request the favour of200 you to make my letter so far the subject of your communication, as may exhibit the reality of your spiritual existence, intelligence, and clairvoyance, and your continued correspondence of heart and mind with your happy father.
1049. For this reason, my dear angel child, in your next meeting with our respected medium, please do me the favor of200 making my letter a part of your message, which should demonstrate the truth of your spiritual existence, intelligence, and clairvoyance, as well as your ongoing connection of heart and mind with your joyful father.
“Christmas, 1854.
“Christmas, 1854.”
1052. ‘We have been constantly with you. Having wished to give a communication the evening our friend (a lady who is a very superior medium) was with you and mother, but the mode was too tedious. It was an era in mother’s life. Her opposition tends in some measure to repulse us; not that we love her less, but our loving natures must meet reciprocal tenderness.
1052. ‘We have been with you all the time. We wanted to share a message the night our friend (a woman who is a really talented medium) was with you and your mom, but the process was just too slow. It was a significant time in your mom's life. Her resistance kind of pushes us away; not that we care for her any less, but our loving natures need to be met with the same kindness in return.
Maria.’
Maria.
W. G.’
W.G.
1057. ‘Brother William: We are still with and around you. During your sickness it was the province of Maria to watch you daily. Other friends were near; among these were father and mother, with your sons Jacob, William, and Henry, Rebecca, and many others bound to you by the ties of consanguinity. On Christmas-day we held a levee in your room. If you could have seen us, I think it might have disturbed your placidity, but you sat as composed as if you were entirely alone. I think if you will recall the circumstances, you will confess that a power foreign to your own was exerting an influence to give forth spiritual monitions.
1057. ‘Brother William: We are still here with you. During your illness, Maria took it upon herself to watch over you every day. Other friends were nearby; among them were your father and mother, along with your sons Jacob, William, and Henry, Rebecca, and many others connected to you by blood. On Christmas day, we gathered in your room. If you could have seen us, it might have disrupted your peace, but you remained as calm as if you were completely alone. I think if you remember how things were, you would admit that a force beyond your own was influencing you to share spiritual messages.
1060. ‘Dear Father: I mentioned to you briefly at the circle that brother William impressed you to write the letter which you addressed to201 me on Christmas-day. I perceive with pleasure that my friend Mrs. G. is now sufficiently under my control to answer your affectionate epistle. The proposed correspondence between us affords me much pleasure, and causes me to feel as if I were really to live over again the days of my earthly existence, when I was blessed with the oft-repeated manifestations of your parental love and affection. I flatter myself, my dear father, that this revival of loving association will tend much to your happiness as well as mine. I will be a friendly star to guide you in your course over the troubled sea of life, that you may not become submerged in its surging billows, but arrive safely at the haven of eternal joy and felicity. I will lift your soul by degrees to the source of love and wisdom, and cause you to feel sensations of pleasure such as you have never before experienced. You have a mind which delights in the beauties of nature and art. Let me tell you, then, that no scene of earthly grandeur which you have ever witnessed, nor the sublimest flight of fancy of the wildest enthusiast in the cause of Spiritualism, can compare with the beauties and joys of the spirit home.
1060. ‘Dear Father: I briefly mentioned at the gathering that brother William encouraged you to write the letter you sent me on Christmas day. I’m happy to see that my friend Mrs. G. is now able to respond to your heartfelt letter. The idea of corresponding with you brings me great joy and makes me feel like I’m reliving the days of my life when I was blessed with your constant expressions of love and care. I believe, dear father, that this rekindling of our loving relationship will bring happiness to both of us. I will be a guiding light for you as you navigate the rocky seas of life, helping you avoid getting overwhelmed by its waves, and ensuring you reach the safe harbor of everlasting joy and bliss. I will gradually uplift your spirit towards the source of love and wisdom, allowing you to experience feelings of joy like you’ve never known before. You have a mind that appreciates the beauty of nature and art. Let me tell you, no majestic scene you’ve ever seen, nor the wildest imagination of any passionate advocate for Spiritualism, can match the beauty and happiness of the spirit world.
1061. ‘I regret that the members of my loved family are so much blinded by prejudice, as to debar themselves the holy privilege of spiritual intercourse—a communion which would serve to connect them indissolubly with us, and teach them of a world beyond death and the grave. Oh! father, how my heart rejoices that I can come to you with cheering words, and pour into your willing ear the tidings of the gospel of peace, which will prove a balm of consolation to your drooping spirit! The ordinary trials of life are but as dew on the eagle’s wing, when the proud bird soars aloft to court the rays of the rising sun. Father, I have already presented you with a view of the beautiful realities of my spirit home. The picture I have drawn is no ideal one, but a real and substantial scene of enduring pleasures. Now let me ask, How will your joys compare with ours? Oh! that the minds of my darling children might become imbued with an understanding of this most holy religion, for I am conscious that it would add largely to their present and future bliss!
1061. ‘I regret that my beloved family is so blinded by prejudice that they deny themselves the sacred privilege of spiritual connection—a bond that would link them forever with us and teach them about a world beyond death and the grave. Oh! Father, my heart rejoices because I can share uplifting words with you and pour into your eager ear the comforting message of the gospel of peace, which will soothe your weary spirit! The everyday challenges of life are just like dew on an eagle's wing when the proud bird soars high to greet the rays of the rising sun. Father, I've already given you a glimpse of the beautiful realities of my spiritual home. The picture I've painted is not just an ideal but a real and meaningful scene of lasting joy. Now, let me ask, how do your joys compare with ours? Oh! How I wish my precious children could understand this most sacred religion, as I know it would greatly enhance their happiness now and in the future!
1062. Dear father, I perceive the emotions of your inmost heart, and if the love of a devoted child can in any wise conduce to your happiness, it is most freely thine. Oh! that dear mother could feel as you do, how happy her declining years on earth might become! When she is disposed to listen to the voices of her spirit children, it will be our pleasure to come to her “with glad tidings of great joy.” Wishing you both, my dear parents, all the happiness which earth can afford, I subscribe myself your ever loving daughter.
1062. Dear Dad, I can sense the feelings in your heart, and if the love of a devoted child can bring you any happiness, it's completely yours. Oh! If only Mom could understand how you feel, how joyful her later years could be! When she is open to hearing from her spirit children, we will be happy to come to her “with glad tidings of great joy.” I wish you both all the happiness this world can give, and I remain your forever loving daughter.
Maria.’”
Maria.’”
1063. The following letter was placed in a sealed envelope, addressed and handed to Mrs. Gourlay for an impressional reply. A few days afterward the answer to it, here annexed, was handed to me by my esteemed friend, the lady named, with the original letter still in the sealed envelope202 as it had been handed to her. This has to be regarded as a beautiful specimen of psychometric mediumship.
1063. The following letter was put in a sealed envelope, addressed, and given to Mrs. Gourlay for an impressive reply. A few days later, the answer to it, included here, was given to me by my valued friend, the lady mentioned, along with the original letter still in the sealed envelope202 as it had been given to her. This should be seen as a remarkable example of psychometric mediumship.
Philadelphia, March 23, 1855.
Philadelphia, March 23, 1855.
1064. My dear Brother John: Your communication last evening at our circle of “progress” afforded me much gratification, as you are doubtless aware from your pervading perception. I regret that circumstances do not allow of a more frequent intercourse with my beloved friends of the spirit land. It is also my ardent desire to hold communion with all my spirit relatives, and would wish with you, my dear brother, to bring about this delightful consummation.
1064. My dear Brother John: Your message last night during our “progress” gathering brought me a lot of joy, as you probably sensed. I wish we could connect more often with my cherished friends from the spirit world. It’s also my strong desire to communicate with all my spirit relatives, and I hope, dear brother, we can make this wonderful connection happen.
1065. Your injunction of cheerfulness, as an efficient means of securing a healthful equilibrium of the vital organism, I can fully appreciate, and shall endeavour to profit by your welcome brotherly and excellent advice, as far as circumstances will permit. It is true, my dear John, that a longer sojourn here harmonizes with my desire to effect some objects, the accomplishment of which would probably add to my happiness here, and my claim for congenial association. The object to which I allude is the amelioration of the condition of the poor and wretched of my fellow-creatures, making them through my agency the recipients of some active benevolence.
1065. I completely understand your advice to stay cheerful as a great way to maintain balance in life, and I will try to take your kind and excellent suggestions to heart as much as I can. It’s true, my dear John, that staying here longer aligns with my wish to achieve certain goals that would likely bring me happiness and allow me to connect with like-minded people. The goal I’m referring to is improving the lives of the poor and suffering among us, helping them through my efforts to receive some real compassion.
1066. I have imbibed the opinion that the only acceptable offering at the throne of the great God, is the actual performance of those duties which are incumbent on us as individuals and social beings; beginning with the establishment of our own personal physical and moral character, and those of our own household and immediate social circle of relatives and friends; and then, to the accomplishment of this, to cultivate the sentiment of benevolence in aiding to promote the individual welfare of mankind in the use of what talent and other means may have fallen to our lot. I am prone, in my relations with the great Omnipotent Ruler of the universe, to apply the time-honoured maxim, “Actions speak louder than words.”
1066. I believe that the only true offering to the great God is actually doing the duties we have as individuals and members of society. This starts with building our own personal physical and moral character, as well as those of our family and close friends. From there, we should work on cultivating a spirit of kindness by helping to improve the well-being of others, using whatever talents and resources we have. In my relationship with the all-powerful ruler of the universe, I hold on to the old saying, “Actions speak louder than words.”
1067. Your invitation, my dear brother, to increase my intercourse with my spirit friends, finds in my heart and mind a very ready compliance. You propose a daily appropriation of time to this object. If you will do me the favour to appoint the time most agreeable to them and most desirable for myself, it shall be, to the fullest extent of my power, sacredly devoted to a duty and pleasure that are nearest to my heart.
1067. Your invitation, dear brother, to deepen my connection with my spirit friends is met with eager willingness in my heart and mind. You suggest setting aside time each day for this purpose. If you could please choose a time that works best for them and is most desirable for me, I will dedicate it, to the best of my ability, to a duty and pleasure that are closest to my heart.
1068. I feel the assurance that the good earth-character and intelligence of my spirit family, and the extent of our mutual love and affinity, afford me a more than ordinary opportunity for receiving information of that bright world which has become a delightful prospective inheritance to me and to thousands of doubting, fearful, and despairing minds.
1068. I feel confident that the positive nature and intelligence of my spiritual family, along with the depth of our shared love and connection, give me more than the usual chance to receive insights from that shining world, which has become a wonderful future promise for me and for countless doubtful, fearful, and despairing minds.
1069. Your inspiring cheerfulness, my dear John, has already verified your sensible prognostic of the great influence on disease of a cheerful mind. I have learnt to entertain a high opinion of the bright intelligence203 and clairvoyance of the more elevated denizens of the spirit world; and shall always, therefore, regard any advice that may be offered me for the better government of my body and soul as a welcome and precious offering from those I love. I will close for the present with the assurance of my unaltered affection.
1069. Your uplifting spirit, dear John, has already proven your wise insight about how a positive mindset greatly affects health. I've come to have a deep appreciation for the bright wisdom203 and understanding of the higher beings in the spirit world; therefore, I will always see any advice given for the better care of my body and soul as a cherished gift from those I care about. I will end for now with the promise of my unwavering love.
William.
William.
1070. My dear Brother: With heartfelt love and affection I respond to your letter in reply to a message which I delivered through the instrumentality of our devoted friend, Mrs. Gourlay. During our happy interchange of thought, it will be my endeavour to suggest such ideas to your mind as may serve to elevate it and develope its capabilities. To the mind that is ignorant and prejudiced, this mode of communion with the invisible world may seem to be a direct violation and infringement of nature’s laws; but it is, on the contrary, not only natural, but perfectly legitimate to the age in which you now live. It is not a new revelation, but simply the discovery of hidden truths peculiarly adapted to the present advanced state of the race. It is old material in a new form. The material and spiritual elements are contributing, as never before, to the elevation and happiness of mankind, and already is established a spiritual telegraph on which I am at this moment successfully operating—sending a message of love to you, my brother.
1070. My dear Brother: With all my love and affection, I’m writing back to you in response to your letter, which you sent after I shared a message through our devoted friend, Mrs. Gourlay. During our wonderful exchange of ideas, I’ll try to suggest thoughts that might uplift you and develop your potential. To someone who is uneducated and biased, this communication with the unseen world might seem like a serious breach of nature's laws; however, it's actually not only natural but completely legitimate in your current age. This isn’t a new revelation but rather the uncovering of hidden truths that are particularly suited to the advanced state of humanity today. It’s the same old material, just presented in a fresh way. The physical and spiritual elements are working together, as never before, to enhance the welfare and happiness of people, and a spiritual telegraph has already been established through which I’m currently sending you a message of love, my brother.
1073. You observe that it gives you great pleasure to receive messages from those in the spirit world who are bound to you by the ties of relationship. Let me assure you, my dear brother, that the feeling is mutual; and while time lasts with you, it will be our endeavour to gladden your heart with tokens of our increasing and untiring love. Your cup of happiness shall be filled to the brim, if it depends on us.
1073. You notice that it brings you so much joy to receive messages from those in the spirit world who are connected to you by the bonds of family. Let me reassure you, my dear brother, that the feeling is shared; and as long as you are here with us, we will strive to make your heart happy with signs of our growing and unwavering love. Your happiness will be overflowing, as long as it’s up to us.
1074. Brother, may you meet with friends true and kind; may the labours of the cheerful morn render each day a happier one to you; and when night steals upon a slumbering world, may you close your outward eyes in peace with all mankind! Keep the mind’s sunshine bright! You have a soul to feel for others’ woes, and this is the true stamp of divinity.
1074. Brother, I hope you find true and kind friends; may the efforts of the cheerful morning bring you happiness each day; and when night falls over a sleeping world, may you close your eyes in peace with everyone! Keep your mind shining bright! You have a soul that empathizes with others’ struggles, and this is the true mark of divinity.
John.
John.
MARRIAGE ON EARTH AND IN HEAVEN.
The Hymeneal Tie in the Spirit World grows out of the necessity of the Connubial Union in the Mundane Sphere. “Free love” imputation refuted.[19]
1075. Some peculiar views respecting marriage, which are not consistent with the ideas of female delicacy and chastity heretofore entertained, have been designated by the name of “Free Love,” and have been commented on as proceeding from the spirit world. I am happy to say that, agreeably to the impressions which I have derived from my spirit friends, any doctrine, having a tendency of the kind thus described, would be at least as much censured in the spirit world as in this. As the best mode of removing this groundless imputation on Spiritualism, I will state the impressions which I entertain on the subject of marriage.
1075. Some unusual views about marriage, which don’t align with traditional ideas of female delicacy and chastity, have been labeled as “Free Love” and are said to come from the spirit world. I'm glad to report that, based on the messages I’ve received from my spirit friends, any belief of this nature would face just as much criticism in the spirit world as it does here. To clear up this unfounded accusation against Spiritualism, I will share my thoughts on marriage.
1076. Among the sources of happiness in the spirit world much insisted on is that resulting from a combined union of those really created for each other. The marriage contracted in this world, loses its binding power in the spirit world, yet may endure if mutually desired. If a husband has had several wives, or a wife several husbands, the tie endures only between the most congenial pair.[20]
1076. One of the main sources of happiness in the spirit world is the union of souls that are truly meant for each other. While marriages formed in this world lose their significance in the spirit world, they can last if both partners want that. If a husband has multiple wives or a wife has multiple husbands, the bond remains only between the pair that is most compatible. [20]
1077. Sexual association is the means throughout nature by which the perpetuation of species is effected. But that this association may exist among human beings without degradation, it is manifestly necessary that it should not be indiscriminate. Not only delicacy, modesty, and the cultivation of congenial affection, but likewise the interests of offspring, require that the parents and children should form one family. The welfare of children, their equal duty to both parents, and natural affections between the parents and their children, must make a separation painful to all parties, however affection may have declined between the husband and wife, on the part of either or both.
1077. Sexual relationships are the way nature ensures the continuation of species. However, for these relationships to exist among humans without leading to degradation, it's essential that they aren't random. Delicacy, modesty, and the development of meaningful affection, along with the well-being of children, demand that parents and their children form one family. The welfare of children, their equal responsibilities toward both parents, and the natural bonds between parents and their children should make any separation difficult for everyone involved, even if the affection between the husband and wife has faded for one or both of them.
1078. Hence, in the mundane sphere, the perpetuation of the human race consistently with decorum, and the welfare of offspring, and the happiness of the parties, especially the mother and wife, seems to be the great object of matrimony. In the spheres it is difficult to perceive how any motives of equally high importance can exist. It must be that connubial union in the spirit world rather grows out of marriage in this world, in order to fill up the void in the heart which might otherwise205 arise from our mundane habits. It would seem as if it were a benevolent indemnification for celibacy, or for the miseries so often resulting from the connubial state in this world, consequent, like the sufferings of child-bearing, to the perpetuation of mankind.
1078. So, in the everyday world, the main goals of marriage seem to be to continue the human race while respecting traditions, ensuring the well-being of children, and promoting the happiness of everyone involved, particularly the mother and wife. It's hard to see how any motivations of equal significance could exist in other realms. It seems that the bond of marriage in the spiritual world develops from the marriages we have here, to fill the void in our hearts that could otherwise205 arise from our everyday lives. It appears as though it serves as a kind of generous compensation for remaining single, or for the struggles that frequently come with being married in this life, which, much like the pains of childbirth, are necessary for the continuation of humanity.
1081. It seems, moreover, even where marriage actually results from the passion of love, that it is more or less the consequence of a species of hallucination, through which lovers deck an object with all that they would wish to exist in the way of merit, and feel toward them an affection proportionate to their own capacity to love, rather than of the degree of power in the object, reasonably to excite such intense partiality. It is thus that the love of the mother to the child she believes to be her own, will be powerful in proportion to her own capacity for maternal love, rather than of the child to excite love; since though it be a monster, and not really her own child, but fraudulently substituted therefor, it will cause no diminution of her maternal devotion.
1081. It seems that even when marriage actually comes from the passion of love, it’s often the result of a kind of illusion, where lovers place all the qualities they wish their partner had onto them, and feel an affection based on their own ability to love, rather than on the actual qualities of the person that would reasonably inspire such strong feelings. In this way, a mother’s love for a child she believes to be hers is strong in relation to her own capacity for maternal love, rather than the child’s ability to inspire that love; because even if the child is a monster and not really her own, but instead fraudulently substituted, it doesn't lessen her maternal devotion.
1083. But where to all those qualifications which would create friendship between persons of the same sex, the peculiar emotions which take place between those of different sexes are superadded, those who come together in this world under the hymeneal tie, may find it something more than a mere civil contract, and not terminated by death. Moreover, independently of the original passion, there arises an affection which is justly distinguished as conjugal, and which differs from the other in this highly important particular, that it is founded on a thorough reciprocal knowledge, instead of that ignorance which too often accompanies attachments produced by the arrows of the blind god, as Cupid is sometimes designated with figurative consistency.
1083. But where all those qualities that foster friendship between people of the same sex exist, the unique emotions that occur between different sexes are added. Those who come together in this world under the marriage bond may discover it to be something more than just a legal agreement, and not something that ends with death. Furthermore, apart from the initial passion, a deep affection arises that is rightly recognized as marital love, which is distinct from the others in a critically important way: it is based on a complete mutual understanding, rather than the ignorance that often comes with the attachments created by the arrows of the blind god, as Cupid is sometimes metaphorically referred to.
1084. Having always supposed that independently of the emotions peculiar to the sexes, there could only be friendship between a man and woman like that which would exist between a brother and sister, I am at a loss to understand what it can be which, in the spiritual state of existence, can induce indissoluble marriage.
1085. On submitting the suggestions comprised in the preceding statement to the spirit to whom I owe much information, herein quoted, and206 to the spirit of a most intimate male friend, by both it was alleged that peculiar emotions were attendant on sexual affection in the spheres, as well as on earth, so far as consistent with the absence of that which exists in common with brutes.
1085. When I shared the suggestions from the previous statement with the spirit who has given me much valuable information, as quoted here, and with the spirit of a very close male friend, both claimed that unique emotions accompany sexual affection in the spiritual realms, just as they do on Earth, but without the elements associated with animals.206
THE MORALITY OF CHRISTENDOM BEING IRRECONCILABLE WITH THE NEW TESTAMENT, CANNOT BE ITS LEGITIMATE OFFSPRING.
Inspiration can have no higher authority, than the human testimony on which its existence is arrogated.
1086. Is it not a mistake to suppose that any doctrine gains any validity by claiming inspiration as its source, when there is nothing but human testimony to advance in support of that claim? For if in the instance of Spiritualism, human testimony is deemed to be unavailable, how comes it to avail when adduced in support of this arrogant claim of inspiration? As well might a man expect to cure the defect of a marshy foundation by substituting columns of iron for wooden posts, or that, while resting on wood, the support could be made firmer by introducing iron into the superstructure.
1086. Isn't it a mistake to think that any belief becomes valid just because it claims to be inspired, especially when there's only human testimony to back it up? If, in the case of Spiritualism, human testimony is considered unreliable, why is it accepted when used to support this bold claim of inspiration? It’s as foolish as believing that you can fix a weak, marshy foundation by replacing wooden posts with iron columns, or that you can make a wooden structure more stable by adding iron on top.
1088. But as respects the ancient witnesses, their own statements make them out unworthy of confidence. Facts or circumstances are stated which are manifestly blasphemous, inconsistent, and absurd, if not impossible. Thus a want of veracity or of discretion being demonstrated in some points, is sufficient to destroy validity in all.
1088. But when it comes to the ancient witnesses, their own statements show that they are not trustworthy. The facts or circumstances they mention are clearly blasphemous, contradictory, and nonsensical, if not outright impossible. Therefore, the lack of truthfulness or judgment in certain areas is enough to undermine their credibility in all aspects.
1089. Revelation assumes God to be omnipotent, omniscient, prescient, and all good, yet represents him as under the necessity of subjecting his creatures to probation, to find out what, by the premises, he must foresee. It represents him while wishing his creatures to know him and his attributes, as not teaching them that which he wishes them to learn, yet punishing them and their posterity for ignorance arising from his own omission.
1089. Revelation considers God to be all-powerful, all-knowing, foresighted, and completely good, yet depicts him as needing to put his creations through trials to discover what he must already know. It portrays him as wanting his creations to understand him and his qualities, while not teaching them what he wants them to know, yet punishing them and their descendants for the ignorance caused by his own failure to provide that knowledge.
1090. It does not suffice to allege that the Old Testament taught God’s will to the Jews; since it is to me incredible that our Heavenly Father would give instruction of vital importance to a few of his children, leaving all the rest uninstructed, and yet afflict them for this result. But, admitting this possible, it appears that the instruction given the Jews in207 the book of Moses failed in those particulars, which are of paramount importance.
1090. It's not enough to claim that the Old Testament taught God's will to the Jews; it seems unbelievable to me that our Heavenly Father would only instruct a handful of His children while leaving the rest in the dark and then hold them accountable for the outcome. However, if we assume this is possible, it seems that the guidance given to the Jews in 207 the book of Moses fell short in crucial areas that really matter.
1091. In the Bible, God is represented as susceptible of jealousy, of wrath, of authorizing the butchery of three thousand Israelites for worshipping a golden calf; sanctioning the massacre of the whole nation of the Midianites, with the reservation of the virgins for violation by the bloody murderers of their kindred; the outrageous deception and fraud on the part of Jacob; swindling the Egyptians by borrowing their ornaments with intention of purloining them; hardening the heart of Pharaoh, yet afflicting his subjects for the obduracy thus produced; instructing Saul to surprise and massacre the Amalekites, even to each “suckling babe”, for a wrong done by their ancestors some hundred years before, as authorizing the hewing down with a sword the regal prisoner Agag in cold blood,[21] and sanctioning the destruction of whole pagan communities by David.[22]
1091. In the Bible, God is depicted as capable of jealousy, anger, and allowing the slaughter of three thousand Israelites for worshiping a golden calf; permitting the genocide of the entire Midianite nation, while only reserving the virgins for the violent acts of their relatives; the outrageous deception and fraud committed by Jacob; tricking the Egyptians by borrowing their jewelry with no intention of returning it; hardening Pharaoh's heart, yet punishing his people for the stubbornness that resulted; instructing Saul to ambush and kill the Amalekites, including every “suckling babe,” for a grievance committed by their ancestors hundreds of years earlier, as well as allowing the cold-blooded execution of the captured king Agag, [21] and permitting David to destroy entire pagan communities.[22]
1092. The following is the account given of this favourite of Jehovah: “And David said in his heart, I shall now perish one day by the hand of Saul: there is nothing better for me than that I should speedily escape into the land of the Philistines; and Saul shall despair of me, to seek me any more in any coast of Israel; so shall I escape out of his hand. And David arose, and he passed over with the six hundred men that were with him unto Achish, the son of Maoch, king of Gath. And David dwelt with Achish at Gath, he and his men, every man with his household, even David with his two wives, Ahinoam the Jezreelitess, and Abigail the Carmelitess, Nabal’s wife. And it was told Saul that David was fled to Gath: and he sought no more again for him. And David said unto Achish, If I have now found grace in thine eyes, let them give me a place in some town in the country, that I may dwell there: for why should thy servant dwell in the royal city with thee? Then Achish gave him Ziglag that day: wherefore Ziglag pertaineth unto the kings of Judah unto this day. And the time that David dwelt in the country of the Philistines was a full year and four months. And David and his men went up, and invaded the Geshurites, and the Gezrites, and the Amalekites: for those nations were of old the inhabitants of the land, as thou goest to Shur, even unto the land of Egypt. And David smote the land, and left neither man nor woman alive, and took away the sheep, and the oxen, and the asses, and the camels, and the apparel, and returned, and came to Achish. And Achish said, Whither have ye made a road to-day? And David said, Against the south of Judah, and against the south of the Jerahmeelites, and against the south of the Kenites. And David saved neither man nor woman alive, to bring tidings to Gath, saying, Lest they should tell on us, saying, So did David, and so will be his manner all the while he dwelleth in the country of the Philistines. And Achish believed David, saying, He hath made his people Israel utterly to abhor him; therefore he shall be my servant forever.”
1092. Here’s the story of this favorite of the Lord: “And David thought to himself, I am going to die someday at the hands of Saul. There's nothing better for me than to quickly escape to the land of the Philistines. Then Saul will give up looking for me in any part of Israel, and I will be safe from him. So David got up and crossed over with the six hundred men who were with him to Achish, the son of Maoch, king of Gath. David and his men settled with Achish in Gath, each man with his family, including David with his two wives, Ahinoam the Jezreelitess and Abigail the Carmelitess, the widow of Nabal. When Saul learned that David had fled to Gath, he stopped searching for him. David said to Achish, If I’ve found favor in your sight, please give me a place in one of the towns in your territory where I can live; why should your servant live in the royal city with you? So Achish gave him Ziklag that day; therefore Ziklag has belonged to the kings of Judah to this day. David lived in the land of the Philistines for a year and four months. David and his men went up and attacked the Geshurites, the Gezrites, and the Amalekites, for those nations had been living in the land long ago, as you go to Shur, even to the land of Egypt. David struck down the land and left no man or woman alive, and took away the sheep, the oxen, the donkeys, the camels, and their clothing, and then returned to Achish. Achish asked, Where did you raid today? And David replied, Against the southern area of Judah, and against the southern region of the Jerahmeelites, and against the southern part of the Kenites. David did not spare any man or woman alive to bring news to Gath, saying, Otherwise they might tell on us, saying, This is what David did, and this is what he will keep doing as long as he lives in the land of the Philistines. And Achish believed David, saying, He has made his people Israel completely hate him; so he will be my servant forever.”
1093. Here is massacre, spoliation, base lying to Achish, his truly noble-hearted friend, whom he deceives into a belief that he had made the people of Israel abhor him, when it was his intention to become king of Judea, and of course the enemy of his too-confiding protector, whenever an opportunity offered.
1093. Here is a massacre, plundering, and deceit directed at Achish, his genuinely kind-hearted friend, whom he tricks into believing that he had made the people of Israel loathe him. In reality, he aims to become the king of Judea and, naturally, the enemy of his overly trusting protector whenever the chance arises.
1095. Jehovah is made to arrest the sun, in order that Joshua may slaughter his flying foes. He is described as authorizing the Jews to extirpate their neighbours and seize their territory. I do most conscientiously declare that the portrait of Jehovah by the Bible appears to me more209 suitable for Satan than for our heavenly Father, who is represented by the spirits as perfectly impartial and equally loving to all his creatures.
1095. God is depicted as stopping the sun so that Joshua can defeat his enemies. He is portrayed as giving the Jews permission to wipe out their neighbors and take their land. I firmly state that the description of God in the Bible seems to me more fitting for Satan than for our heavenly Father, who is shown by the spirits as completely fair and equally loving toward all his creations.209
1096. The example set in the Bible of slandering and persecuting those who did not believe in its doctrines, has ever been followed out by scriptural devotees, who would presumptuously represent that it is only from the Scriptures, which they recognise as the word of God, that a correct knowledge of the divine attributes can be obtained. But this is the converse of the truth. As described by Seneca, the Roman Sage, the God of the ancient theist was to the Jehovah of the Bible as Hyperion to Satyr. (See Seneca’s opinions of God, 1224)
1096. The example set in the Bible of slandering and persecuting those who didn’t believe its teachings has always been followed by devoted followers of scripture, who arrogantly claim that the only place to find a true understanding of God's nature is in the Scriptures they accept as the word of God. But that's the opposite of the truth. As Seneca, the Roman philosopher, described, the God of ancient theism is to the Jehovah of the Bible as Hyperion is to a Satyr. (See Seneca’s opinions of God, 1224)
1098. The Old Testament does not impart a knowledge of immortality, without which religion were worthless. The notions derived from the gospel are vague, disgusting, inaccurate, and difficult to believe. The Pentateuch did not give the Jews an idea of immortality, nor were those Jews distinguished for morality, who from other sources than the Pentateuch embraced a belief in immortality. It has already been pointed out that the most enlightened sect among the children of Israel, the Sadducees, did not believe in a future state, while the Pharisees, who professed to believe therein, appear to have been so immoral as to be pre-eminently the objects of Christ’s denunciation.
1098. The Old Testament doesn’t teach about immortality, which would make religion worthless. The ideas coming from the gospel are unclear, off-putting, inaccurate, and hard to believe. The Pentateuch didn’t give the Jews a concept of immortality, nor were those Jews known for their morality who believed in immortality from sources outside of the Pentateuch. It has already been noted that the most enlightened group among the Israelites, the Sadducees, didn’t believe in an afterlife, while the Pharisees, who claimed to believe in it, seem to have been so immoral that they were particularly targeted by Christ’s criticism.
1099. As respects the precepts of Christ, those on which he laid most stress are not only neglected, but grossly violated, by the opposite course being sanctioned by the overruling sentiment of society. Nothing would subject a man to more contempt in Christendom than a tame submission to blows, or being so poor as to wear patched or ragged clothes. There are few, if any, in Christendom, who would not rather have any deficiency in attire attributed to accident or taste, than to poverty.
1099. When it comes to the teachings of Christ, the ones he emphasized the most are not just ignored, but openly violated, as the prevailing attitude of society endorses the opposite behavior. There's nothing that would bring a man more scorn in Christendom than passively accepting physical abuse, or being so poor that he has to wear patched or worn-out clothes. Almost no one in Christendom would prefer to have any flaw in their clothing seen as a result of hardship rather than a matter of style or chance.
1100. I have shown that the idea which the Pharisees entertained of heaven, as portrayed by Josephus, representing the wicked like the rich man within sight of the good, would be a hell to a good-hearted angel. This representation is sanctioned by Christ in his story of the rich man and Lazarus. The only reward promised to his apostles was worldly preeminence in the form of judgeships. Hence it were hardly reasonable for those who are subordinate in merit to the disciples to expect any better remuneration. Hell is as absurdly as horridly typified by eternal exposure to interminable fire.
1100. I have demonstrated that the Pharisees' idea of heaven, as described by Josephus, shows the wicked, like the rich man, being able to see the good, which would be a hell for a kind-hearted angel. Christ endorses this view in his story of the rich man and Lazarus. The only reward promised to his apostles was earthly status in the form of judgeships. Therefore, it wouldn’t make sense for those who have less merit than the disciples to expect any better rewards. Hell is portrayed as absurdly and horrifically characterized by endless exposure to never-ending fire.
1101. Thus neither among the Jews, nor among Christians, has the Bible furnished any adequate account of a future state, nor has it been productive of higher morality; since the only morality which does exist,210 is coupled not only with the neglect, but with the violation of those precepts which the gospel inculcates.
1102. Diogenes took a lantern to see if he could find an honest man in Greece. Were any one to employ a lime-light, he would not in Christendom find a Christian who carries out in practice the precepts of his divine Master. If those who know their Master’s will, yet do it not, are to be beaten with many stripes, while the ignorant pagan is to bear but few, were it not better to be a pagan than such a Christian as those are, for the most part, who exist in Christendom? Unless our missionaries can make better Christians, is it not inhumane to add to the number?
1102. Diogenes took a lantern to see if he could find an honest man in Greece. If anyone were to use a spotlight, they wouldn't find a Christian in Christendom who actually lives according to the teachings of their divine Master. If those who know what their Master wants but don't follow it are to be punished severely, while the ignorant pagan is only lightly punished, wouldn't it be better to be a pagan than to be one of those Christians, for the most part, who exist in Christendom? Unless our missionaries can create better Christians, isn't it cruel to increase the number?
1103. On calling on a bigoted, self-styled disciple of Christ to show me anyone who put the precepts of Christ into practice, the reply was, “We rely on his merits.” “That is all you do,” said I. “In common with others of your tenets, you make the blood of Christ a fund on which every sinner may draw in proportion as he has confidence in its detersive influence.”
1103. When I asked a bigoted, self-proclaimed follower of Christ to show me someone who actually lives according to Christ's teachings, the response was, “We rely on his merits.” I replied, “That’s all you do.” “Like others who share your beliefs, you treat the blood of Christ as an account that every sinner can access based on how much faith they have in its ability to cleanse them.”
1105. “But the want of faith is more open and direct than this, and it is the more obvious and pointed upon religious subjects. The Bible is boldly and practically denied in every particular. No class or body of men believe and obey it, and strange as it may seem, it is by no nation, or people, or churches, or sects of men, less implicitly believed and followed than by those very people and sections of the church who talk so much about it. There are no persons less obedient to the plain sense and mandates of the written word of God, than those who most speak of and uphold it as the sole authority and standard, and reject all assistance from the history of the church and what is spoken against as tradition. Every class of persons reject some portion or other of the sacred Scriptures. If you talk to some of temporal honour and rewards, and the observance of a day of rest, and the patriarchs, they will say, Oh! that is the Old Testament, and is abrogated. If you speak to others of good works, they will say, Oh! that is only in the Gospels, and the Epistles carry us much beyond that, and are superior to it. Unitarians, again, receive a Bible of their own; that is, just so many passages are excluded as will suit their own belief and purpose. Others, of numerous sects, dwell each upon some half dozen chapters, or passages, or phrases, or words of Scripture, of the Epistles especially, and dwell upon them idolatrously and devotedly, to the exclusion of all the rest, so far as the authority of Scripture is concerned, from belief and practice.
1105. “But the lack of faith is more obvious and straightforward than this, especially on religious topics. The Bible is openly and practically denied in every detail. No group of people fully believes and follows it, and strangely enough, it's those very individuals and segments of the church who talk the most about it who actually believe and adhere to it the least. There are no people less obedient to the clear meaning and commands of the written word of God than those who most frequently discuss and support it as the ultimate authority and standard while rejecting any aid from church history or what is dismissed as tradition. Every group of people rejects some part of the sacred Scriptures. If you mention matters of earthly honors and rewards, the importance of a day of rest, or the patriarchs, they will say, 'Oh! that's the Old Testament and it's been abolished.' If you talk about good works, some will claim, 'Oh! that's only in the Gospels, and the Epistles go far beyond that and are superior.' Unitarians, on the other hand, have their own version of the Bible; that is, they exclude specific passages that don't align with their beliefs and purposes. Others, from various sects, focus obsessively on just a handful of chapters, passages, phrases, or words from Scripture, particularly from the Epistles, and cling to them almost idolatrously, ignoring the rest in terms of their belief and practice.”
1107. The Bible is denied in every particular. Men do not believe that we are really to be Christians; that we are to imitate our Lord. They do not believe that the world could possibly go on if all men were to act upon pure Christian motives, and up to a perfect Christian rule: if they were to forgive and forget injuries; if they were not to resent an affront; if they were to give to people because they asked them: if they were to lend money without looking for interest; if we were all to give up luxuries, and style, and costly furniture and equipage; if we, our cattle and servants, were strictly to observe the day of rest. How many are there among us who believe that ‘the tree of knowledge’ is not an absolute good? or that we ought to receive the gospel with the simplicity of little children. Who believes that we ought to honour our father and mother, and our sovereign? Who is there that acts up to the precept that we ought not to judge others in their character? How many are there who appear to believe that it is not right to be anxious about the future; that riches are not a good thing; that the entrance into heaven is easier to the poor man; that we ought to return a tenth to God; that we would bring a blessing to give freely and largely to the poor; that children are a blessing and a gift from the Lord, and that the man is happy who has his quiver full of them? It is evident that in all these points the Bible is disbelieved and is practically denied, and does not control or guide us in our habits and principles of life and society.
1107. The Bible is rejected in every way. People don’t believe we are meant to be true Christians or to emulate our Lord. They doubt that the world could function if everyone acted on pure Christian principles and followed a perfect Christian standard: if we were to forgive and forget wrongs; if we didn’t hold grudges; if we gave to others simply because they asked; if we lent money without expecting interest; if we all gave up luxuries, fancy styles, and expensive furniture and vehicles; if we, our animals, and our employees strictly observed the day of rest. How many among us really believe that ‘the tree of knowledge’ isn’t an absolute good? Or that we should accept the gospel with the innocence of little children? Who believes we should honor our parents and our sovereign? Who lives by the rule not to judge others’ character? How many seem to think it’s wrong to worry about the future; that wealth is not a good thing; that it’s easier for the poor to enter heaven; that we should give a tenth back to God; that we’d be blessed by generously helping the poor; that children are a blessing and a gift from the Lord, and that a man is happy when his quiver is full of them? It’s clear that on all these points, the Bible is doubted and effectively disregarded, and it doesn’t guide or influence our habits and principles in life and society.
1108. Still less do we believe that the public measures, the laws, and government of211 the state, and the intercourse with other nations, ought to be, or can be, carried on and conducted upon Christian principles. What number or classes of persons believe that righteousness exalteth a nation? that we are punished according to the national sins of the people, and for the sins of the rulers? and that if wicked and irreligious men preside over our councils, we shall as a nation suffer the penalties of it? or that the conscience of the government is the conscience of the people, and that our rulers are bound to take the first care for the pure religion and morals of the country; and that, if they do so, their righteousness will bring down a blessing upon the nation?
1108. We certainly don't think that public policies, laws, and the government of 211 the state, as well as interactions with other countries, should be based on Christian principles, or that they can be. How many people truly believe that righteousness elevates a nation? That we are held accountable for the collective sins of our society and the wrongdoing of our leaders? And that if immoral and godless individuals lead our government, our nation will face the consequences? Or that the government's conscience reflects the people's conscience, and that our leaders should prioritize the integrity of our country's religion and morals; and that if they do, their righteousness will bring blessings to the nation?
1109. To come again to more direct practice, and to our own habits of life. Who is there who thinks first what is right, and according to the pattern of Christ, and after the will of God, in what he is about to do, and not what is wise and expedient? Who seeks first the kingdom of God, and God’s rule of righteousness, and trusts that all temporal good consequences will follow upon it? Who is there who thinks and abides only by the rule of what is right and commanded? We may almost answer in the words of Scripture, ‘There is none righteous, no, not one!’ Who believes in and trusts to the assistance and suggestions of the Spirit in his designs and undertakings, and believes, and acts, and writes, and thinks, as believing that the most useful and important and influential suggestions of our thoughts and invention come to our mind by the inspiration of the Holy Spirit, more than by our own cleverness, and exertion, and memory, and prays for divine help upon commencing every task, or writing, or undertaking accordingly? Who forbears strictly and endeavours to expel at once all thought and every suggestion of the mind in worldly matters on a Sunday, with confidence and faith that the same and more useful thought will be supplied on the succeeding week-days, and that the unqualified dedication and sanctification of the Lord’s day will make the labour of the six days more effectual and fruitful than would be that of the seven? Who would believe now that a sabbatical year would not necessarily be impracticable and ruinous, or that a populous country could exist under such a rule, or that it would not produce a debasing and demoralizing idleness?”
1109. Now, let's return to more practical matters and our daily lives. Who actually thinks first about what is right, following the example of Christ and the will of God in what they are about to do, instead of focusing on what seems wise or convenient? Who seeks the kingdom of God and His righteousness first, trusting that all good things will follow? Who is there that only thinks about and sticks to what is right and commanded? We can almost respond with the words of Scripture, ‘There is none righteous, no, not one!’ Who believes in and relies on the guidance and inspiration of the Spirit in their plans and actions, truly believing and acting in the knowledge that the most valuable and significant ideas that come to us are inspired by the Holy Spirit rather than our own intelligence, effort, or memory, and who prays for divine help before starting every task, writing, or undertaking? Who strictly refrains from worldly thoughts and tries to eliminate all distractions on a Sunday, with the confidence that the same, or even better, ideas will come to them during the week, believing that dedicating and sanctifying the Lord’s Day will make the work in the other six days more effective and fruitful than if they worked all seven? Who would believe today that taking a sabbatical year wouldn’t be impractical and harmful, or that a populous nation could thrive under such a practice, or that it wouldn’t lead to degrading and harmful idleness?
1110. Let not the reader infer that these admissions come from a free-thinker. The following remarks will prove the writer one of the faithful, in the sense in which this epithet argues a mind chained down by abject enthralment, to put any constructions on facts but that which is subversive of educational prejudice: “All the evils of which the existence is admitted are due to our narrowing down our reception of truths and facts to the limits of reason—of our own more or less shallow individual reason.”
1110. Don’t assume that these acknowledgments come from someone who thinks freely. The following comments will show that the writer is one of the faithful, in the way that this term suggests a mind restricted by deep subjugation, interpreting facts only in a way that undermines educational bias: “All the problems we acknowledge are because we limit our acceptance of truths and facts to the confines of reason—our own somewhat superficial individual reason.”
1111. Now to me it seems that the nominal profession of a faith in facts which are absurd and contradictory, and professed reverence for precepts which are as utterly impracticable as unwise in the abstract, induces this monstrous incompatibility of the actual morality of Christendom with the professions of Christians and doctrines of Christianity.
1113. It strikes me, from the considerations presented under the head of Mundane Wealth, that the precepts of Christ were fundamentally erroneous, so far as they discredit and discourage efforts for the honest acquisition of wealth. (908.)
1113. It seems to me, based on the points made about Mundane Wealth, that Christ's teachings were basically wrong because they undermine and discourage the legitimate pursuit of wealth. (908.)
1114. God has given the fowls of the air feathers as a natural clothing, and thus any effort to procure clothing on their part is rendered unnecessary; he has not given them hands nor intellectual ingenuity to spin and weave. On the other side, with little exception, man is naturally devoid of clothing, and requires clothes to protect him from the scorching solar212 rays or freezing blasts of winter, but has been furnished with the hands and the ingenuity to spin and weave. Under these circumstances, was it reasonable to allege that man should be governed by the example of the feathered creation? Was it reasonable to infer that there should be no spinning or weaving by men, because there neither was nor could be any performed by fowls?
1114. God has given birds feathers as their natural clothing, so they don’t need to worry about getting dressed; He hasn’t given them hands or the intelligence to spin and weave. In contrast, with very few exceptions, humans don’t have natural clothing and need garments to protect themselves from the scorching sun212 or frigid winter winds, but have been equipped with hands and the ingenuity to spin and weave. Given these facts, was it logical to suggest that humans should follow the example of birds? Was it reasonable to conclude that there should be no spinning or weaving by humans just because birds can’t do it?
1115. Again, the lily, like all other vegetables, not only comes into existence naked, but remains so, since it neither can nor will clothe itself, and would perish if by any artificial clothing it were shut out from the influence of the solar rays, and from the absorption of carbonic acid, which furnishes the vegetable creation with the carbon requisite for the fibres essential to stability. Hence the allegation that Solomon in all his glory was not clothed like the lily, is irreconcilable with the nature and actual state of this beautiful flower, which is destitute of clothing by nature, and which would perish if it were clothed. The skin of vegetable leaves, to a certain extent, performs for them what mouths do for animals. How unreasonable, then, to argue from one to the other, that man should imitate the vegetable; or to compare a plant, naturally and of necessity naked, with a king gorgeously clothed?
1115. Again, the lily, like all other plants, comes into existence exposed and stays that way, since it neither can nor wants to dress itself, and would die if it were artificially covered and cut off from the sun’s rays and the absorption of carbon dioxide, which provides plants with the carbon they need for stability. Thus, the statement that Solomon in all his glory was not dressed like the lily doesn't match the true nature of this beautiful flower, which is naturally naked and would die if it were dressed. The skin of plant leaves somewhat serves the same purpose as mouths do for animals. How unreasonable, then, to argue from one to the other, suggesting that humans should mimic plants; or to compare a naturally uncovered plant with a lavishly dressed king?
1116. The degrading a rich man, whether honest or not, to the level of a felon or murderer, as respects accessibility to heaven, and of course favour in the sight of God, is so erroneous, that there never was a precept which was less respected in practice, by the votaries of its author. As I have heretofore remarked, the conduct of Christians is not merely negative in respect to this precept—they do not merely neglect it; their course is the converse of any obedience to its dictates. Yet professed Christians while violating their divine Master’s behests in a way which makes their performance the inverse of the results which their professions involve, for the most part treat any person who does not profess devotion for Christ’s doctrines, as actually more culpable than themselves, and more liable to retribution after death. This is about as just as for a man, who after marrying a woman and calling her his wife, should act the inverse of the obligations imposed by the connubial contract, and then consider an individual who had never entered into any obligation with her of any kind, as guilty of sinful neglect in not acknowledging as a wife, one whom he never married. The question is, who treats the woman most ill, he who acknowledges but neglects, or he who does not display a hymeneal devotion which he never led her to expect?
1116. Lowering a wealthy person, whether they are honest or not, to the level of a criminal or murderer in terms of access to heaven, and thus favor in God's eyes, is so misguided that no principle has been less followed in practice by those who profess it. As I have pointed out before, Christians' behavior is not just passive regarding this principle—they don't just ignore it; their actions are the opposite of obeying its teachings. Yet, so-called Christians, while violating their divine Master’s commands in a way that completely contradicts what their beliefs suggest, generally view anyone who doesn’t profess devotion to Christ’s teachings as actually more guilty than themselves and more deserving of punishment after death. This is about as fair as a man who, after marrying a woman and calling her his wife, acts in direct opposition to the obligations of marriage, and then considers someone who has never made any commitment to her as guilty of sinful neglect for not acknowledging her as a wife, even though he never married her. The real question is, who treats the woman worse: the one who acknowledges her but neglects her, or the one who never expressed any marital commitment that she had no reason to expect?
1117. Again, the precept to return good for evil, would, if acted up to, encourage evil. Were a man to submit quietly to be robbed, whipped, and cheated, he would encourage robbing, flagellation, and fraud. Far wiser is the precept of Confucius, “Return good for good; for evil, justice.” The impracticable precept of Christ is so far from being carried out by professing Christians, that in their conduct to the aborigines of Africa,213 India, and America, they have always been aggressive, always rewarding the hospitality of the natives with fraud and violence, and their conduct toward each other is the inverse of the ultra precept of Christ—“Return good for evil.” They not unfrequently return evil for good.
1117. Once again, the idea of returning good for evil, if put into practice, would only encourage wrongdoing. If someone allowed themselves to be robbed, beaten, and cheated without resistance, they would be supporting robbery, punishment, and deception. Confucius had a much wiser approach: “Return good for good; for evil, justice.” The ideal of Christ is so rarely practiced by self-proclaimed Christians that in their treatment of the indigenous people in Africa,213 India, and America, they have consistently acted aggressively, responding to the natives' hospitality with deceit and violence. Moreover, their treatment of one another often contradicts Christ's extreme teaching to “Return good for evil.” They frequently repay good with harm.
1118. There is, as I think, nothing more injurious than the habitual violation of acknowledged professions. If the violator be aware of his inconsistency, it involves the incessant perpetration of manifest wickedness; and if his mind be so cramped by education that he commits such violations unconsciously, it must degrade the all-important power of distinguishing good from evil. Thus, in the garb of truth,
1118. I believe there's nothing more harmful than regularly going against what one claims to believe. If someone knows they are being hypocritical, it leads to constant wrongdoing; and if they are so limited by their upbringing that they don't even realize they are contradicting themselves, it severely undermines their ability to tell right from wrong. Therefore, dressed in the clothing of truth,
1120. But I am conscientiously of opinion that the respect paid to Abraham, Jacob, Moses, Samuel, David, &c., by which one five hundred-millionth of the blood of Abraham is made an honour to Jesus Christ, is among the reasons of the low state of morality among those who consider the Bible as the Word of God, and are thus led to view with indulgence, prostitution, murder, massacre, rape, cheating, and fraud. Agreeably to the opinion of a champion of Christianity, already quoted, “The worshipper is assimilated to the imaginary deity whom he worships.”
1120. But I strongly believe that the respect given to Abraham, Jacob, Moses, Samuel, David, etc., which turns one five hundred-millionth of Abraham's blood into a point of honor for Jesus Christ, is one reason for the low level of morality among those who view the Bible as the Word of God. This perspective leads them to tolerate prostitution, murder, massacre, rape, cheating, and fraud. According to a noted supporter of Christianity, previously mentioned, “The worshipper becomes like the imagined deity they worship.”
1121. With the exchange of two words for two other words, the verses which Pope ascribes to Eloisa, might well be uttered by many self-called Christians, who in defending the gospel from any conscientious attack, hesitate not at any intemperance of language, and yet think that the marriage ceremony is all that is called for.
1121. By swapping two words for two different words, the lines that Pope attributes to Eloisa could easily be spoken by many self-proclaimed Christians, who, in protecting the gospel from any sincere criticism, don’t hold back on any harsh language, while believing that the marriage ceremony is all that is necessary.
1123. Although the substitution of the words wealth and power for love and man would spoil the rhythm, it would not lessen the applicability to the great mass of those who call themselves Christians, while not only neglecting, but positively violating the precepts of Him by whose blood they still hope, by a due degree of faith, to wash away their transgressions.
1123. Although replacing the words wealth and power with love and man would ruin the flow, it wouldn't change how relevant it is to the vast majority of people who identify as Christians but are not only ignoring but actively breaking the teachings of Him whose blood they still hope, through a certain level of faith, will cleanse them of their sins.
1124. The universe, as it is presented to my mind, induces a belief that it must have a presiding deity of commensurate power. As there are millions of suns, each having its planets; as the space which it occupies appears to us little short of infinity; as it must have endured from eternity, and must endure eternally,—the power and glory of this presiding214 deity must be commensurate with his realm, as to extent and magnificence. Yet evil exists; which can only exist from choice on his part, or because it cannot be avoided. There must be a want of will or power to prevent or remove evil. Such is the God which my reason obliges me to acknowledge. Where impressions are the offspring of reason, they cannot destroy their parent. But those who owe their opinions of their deity to tradition, have a deity which, not having originated from reason, may always be made the means of setting its dictates aside.
1124. The universe, as I perceive it, leads me to believe that it must have an all-powerful deity overseeing it. With millions of suns, each surrounded by its own planets; with the space it occupies seeming almost infinite; with it having existed forever and continuing to exist eternally—this deity's power and glory must match the vastness and grandeur of their realm. Yet, evil exists; which can only be the result of a choice made by this deity, or because it can't be avoided. This suggests a lack of will or power to prevent or eliminate evil. This is the God my reason compels me to recognize. Where insights are rooted in reason, they cannot negate their source. However, those who derive their beliefs about their deity from tradition may have a deity that, lacking origin from reason, can always be used to disregard its principles.
1126. The fear of public opinion, or a desire to do what is deemed right among men, seems to be the principal motive for religious professions and church-going in the great mass of society. The prevailing morality being, as already noticed, not only neglectful of Christ’s precepts, but absolutely the inverse of them—not only permitting, but calling for a course diametrically opposite, as respects the acquisition of wealth and submission to wrongs—shows that it is not generally founded on a desire to cultivate the good will of Christ, but to square with sectarian opinion. I hold that one cause of this is, that the conviction of a future state, in which happiness is in proportion to our deportment here, is not so deep as that which I now have. Under the conviction which I have, nothing could tempt me to act in such way as to produce a retrograde influence on my pretensions as a spirit.
1126. The fear of what others think, or the desire to do what is seen as right among people, seems to be the main reason most of society participates in religious practices and attends church. The common moral values, as previously mentioned, not only ignore Christ’s teachings but are actually the opposite of them—encouraging behavior that sharply contrasts with how to gain wealth and respond to injustices. This indicates that the motivation isn’t really about wanting to earn Christ’s favor but rather about conforming to what different religious groups believe. I believe one reason for this is that the understanding of an afterlife, where happiness relates to how we behave here, isn’t as strong as the conviction I currently possess. With the conviction I have, nothing could tempt me to act in ways that would undermine my integrity as a spiritual being.
1127. It seems to me, as urged by me before, that no one believing the language of Abraham, as narrated and sanctioned by Christ, to have come authenticated direct from the Son of God, and consequently expecting it to be verified, would render himself liable to the punishment of Dives for the sake of enjoying the good things of this world.
1127. It seems to me, as I mentioned before, that anyone who believes the words of Abraham, as told and approved by Christ, to have come directly from the Son of God, and therefore expects them to be confirmed, would not put themselves at risk of Dives' punishment just to enjoy the good things of this world.
1128. The idea that souls are to remain in the grave till the “last day,” the procrastination of that day and geological knowledge being inconsistent with the belief that any such day will arrive, makes the sinner less fearful, the good less hopeful, and diminishes the number of those who are actually, in their worldly conduct, influenced by their hopes or fear of future rewards or punishments.
1128. The idea that souls stay in the grave until the “last day,” along with the uncertainty of when that day will come and what we know from geology, makes sinners less afraid, the good less optimistic, and reduces the number of people whose daily actions are influenced by their hopes or fears of future rewards or punishments.
1129. The expectation of washing away sin through the merit of a bigoted belief in Christ, co-operating with the vague, contradictory, and irrational idea of heaven and hell recorded in Scripture, seems to be the reason why Christians act so inconsistently with the precepts of Him whom they professedly adore.
1129. The belief that one can wash away sin through a narrow-minded faith in Christ, combined with the unclear, contradictory, and irrational concepts of heaven and hell found in Scripture, appears to be the reason why Christians often behave inconsistently with the teachings of the one they claim to worship.
1131. Had there ever been any available light let in from the spirit215 world, this error had been denounced, and having been thus stamped as erroneous from on high, could not have acquired or retained its mischievous hold of so many millions of human beings, by substituting blind faith for genuine virtue.
1131. If there had ever been any light coming from the spirit215 world, this mistake would have been exposed, and since it would have been clearly marked as wrong from above, it wouldn't have been able to maintain its harmful influence over so many millions of people by replacing true virtue with blind faith.
Injurious Influence of unreasonable Restriction.
1133. Some of the excellent Society of Friends may, as respects war, have been obedient to the precepts of Christ, and probably in other respects deviate from them less than most other sects; but as to wealth their course is the inverse of giving away their money. They are rationally among the most active and successful in the honest acquisition of money. In this they would act morally, excepting the violation of their recognised obligation to obey the precepts of Christ.
1133. Some of the good members of the Society of Friends may have followed Christ's teachings regarding war, and likely in other areas deviate from them less than many other groups; however, when it comes to wealth, their approach is the opposite of philanthropy. They are practically some of the most active and successful in genuinely earning money. In this, they might act ethically, except for not fulfilling their acknowledged duty to adhere to Christ's teachings.
1134. Does not experience show that nothing is more injurious to morals than unreasonable restraint? This has been seen in the profligacy of the children of puritanical sectarians. To disobey an unreasonable restriction always appears comparatively a trivial offence. Going to a play, in the opinion of the mass of the world, is not sinful; but for a minor to go to a play in disobedience of parental authority, by stealth, deception, or lying, becomes sinful delinquency, and introduces a habit which may lead to crime as wicked as that of the conduct of Jacob to Esau. Lying and deceiving for venial purposes will soon induce the habit. The restriction from eating pork or drinking wine has no doubt induced much deception and falsehood among the followers of Mohammed, and thus made a crime where none would have existed. In like manner, the putting a rich man on a footing with a felon, as respects access to heaven, forbidding the resistance to blows or spoliation, makes almost every professed Christian practically unfaithful to his professions, and of course an infidel of the worst kind. More or less of this infidelity is involved in various ways, as above admitted by “Bosanquet.”
1134. Doesn’t experience show that nothing harms morals more than unreasonable restrictions? We've seen this in the reckless behavior of the children from strict religious groups. Disobeying an unreasonable rule often seems like a minor offense. To most people, going to a play isn't seen as a sin; however, when a minor sneaks off to a play against their parents' wishes, through tricks or lies, it becomes a sinful act and establishes a habit that could lead to serious wrongdoing, as seen in Jacob's deceit towards Esau. Lying and deceit for trivial reasons can quickly turn into a habit. Restrictions like not eating pork or drinking wine have undoubtedly caused much dishonesty and falsehood among followers of Mohammed, creating a sin where there wouldn't have been one. Similarly, treating a wealthy person the same as a felon in terms of access to heaven, and discouraging resistance to attacks or theft, leads many so-called Christians to be practically unfaithful to their beliefs, and essentially makes them the worst type of unbelievers. This kind of infidelity is present in various forms, as acknowledged by “Bosanquet.”
1136. A painful picture of the morals of the clergy during that period may be found in a recent work by Bishop Hopkins of Vermont. It would seem as if the crimes and indecency displayed during the Middle Ages, exceed even those of Abraham, Moses, Jacob, and David, and Samuel, the cruel, despotic pope of Judea. The deposition of Saul for not killing Agag, and his hewing his royal prisoner down with a sword in cold216 blood, may have been looked to as a justification of pontifical cruelty and despotism.
1136. A painful view of the morals of the clergy during that time can be found in a recent work by Bishop Hopkins of Vermont. It seems that the crimes and indecency shown during the Middle Ages surpass even those of Abraham, Moses, Jacob, David, and Samuel, the cruel, tyrannical pope of Judea. Saul's deposition for not killing Agag, and his execution of his royal prisoner with a sword in cold216 blood, might have been seen as a justification for papal cruelty and tyranny.
No one would believe that a capable farmer would make such a mistake as to sow garlic instead of wheat. Yet God, while represented as having intended to sow Protestantism, is considered as having caused, throughout Christendom, a crop of Catholicism, in the Roman or Grecian form, for more than a thousand years; those weeds still occupying more than half of the whole soil.
1137. The immense importance attached by mankind to correct religious impressions is demonstrated, in the first place, by the enormous expenditure throughout this world in sustaining those who are conceived by their constituents to be the true expounders of religion;[23] and, in the second place, by the blood and treasure which have been expended either in missions or in wars, for the extension or defence of the impressions believed by various sectarians to be the most accordant with truth.
1137. The great significance that people place on having the right religious beliefs is shown, first of all, by the massive amounts of money spent around the world to support those who are seen by their followers as the true teachers of religion;[23] and, secondly, by the lives and resources that have been sacrificed either in missions or in wars, to promote or protect the beliefs that different groups consider to be the most aligned with the truth.
1138. Yet it must be plain that in no case has there been any higher evidence than that of an alleged human communication, direct or indirect, with some recognised deity, if not the true God. If the will of God has ever been revealed, the number who have actually pretended to an interview with him, or with any immortal subordinate spirit are very few. The Old Testament depends upon the testimony of Moses and a few Hebrew prophets, whose inspiration rests upon their own allegations, respecting themselves or each other.
1138. However, it should be clear that there has never been any stronger evidence than that of an alleged human interaction, whether direct or indirect, with some recognized deity, if not the true God. If God's will has ever been revealed, the number of people who have actually claimed to have had a meeting with Him, or any immortal subordinate spirit, is very small. The Old Testament relies on the accounts of Moses and a few Hebrew prophets, whose inspiration is based on their own claims about themselves or each other.
1139. As regards the basis of Christianity, there are two irreconcilable opinions: one held by the Protestants, the other by the Roman Catholics; since although there is a great diversity of opinion between Protestants, there is between all Protestants and Papists this difference: The latter relying on their own church as the sole depository of all the evidence of Christianity, do not allow any direct recourse to Scripture for a rule of faith. The former reject the claims of the church of Rome, and resort to the gospel for their rule of faith.[24]
1139. When it comes to the foundation of Christianity, there are two opposing views: one from Protestants and the other from Roman Catholics. While there is a wide range of beliefs among Protestants themselves, the main difference between all Protestants and Catholics is this: Catholics rely on their church as the only source of all evidence for Christianity and do not permit direct access to the Scriptures as a guideline for faith. In contrast, Protestants reject the authority of the Roman church and turn to the gospel as their basis for faith.[24]
1140. But wherefore should such implicit confidence be placed in language alleged to have been held by Moses or any other ancient author? or should they be credited, even when they allege God to have used such words as these, “Let me wax hot in my wrath that I may consume them.” The motive for this imputation against God, was that Moses might take credit for moderation in slaughtering only three thousand of God’s chosen people in one day, for worshipping a golden calf, made by his own brother, afterward made high-priest. Thus the ringleader, being the brother of Moses, was loaded with honours, while those whom he led astray were to217 be massacred in cold blood. Yet it is on such witnesses as this blood-thirsty, blasphemous bigot, that orthodoxy relies for assuming the Pentateuch to be the word of God, censuring, if not persecuting, all who do not concur with it.
1140. But why should we place such blind trust in the words supposedly spoken by Moses or any other ancient writer? Or should we believe them, even when they claim that God said things like, “Let me become angry so I can wipe them out.”? The reason for this accusation against God was so Moses could take credit for showing moderation by killing only three thousand of God’s chosen people in one day for worshipping a golden calf, created by his own brother, who later became the high priest. So, the mastermind behind it all, being Moses’ brother, was honored, while those he led astray were to217 be brutally killed. Yet it is on such a bloodthirsty, blasphemous bigot that orthodoxy depends to claim the Pentateuch is the word of God, condemning, if not persecuting, anyone who disagrees with it.
1141. The intercourse with the angel Gabriel rests upon the evidence of Mary alone, who was interested immensely to make her child a god, instead of being her illegitimate offspring. Of the dream of Joseph there can be no witness besides himself. But would a dream be now admitted as testimony in any court of justice.
1141. The interaction with the angel Gabriel relies solely on Mary’s account, as she was highly motivated to present her child as divine rather than the result of an illegitimate union. As for Joseph's dream, he stands as the only witness. But today, would a dream be accepted as evidence in any court of law?
1142. The diversity of opinion existing between Romanists and Protestants, are briefly exhibited in the subjoined quotations from the controversy between Archbishop Hughes and the Rev. Mr. Breckinridge. They have already been cited by me in a pamphlet on the better employment of the first day of the week. Here are the opinions of two men highly qualified to judge. In one, we have an eminent champion of Romanism; in the other, a no less able champion of Calvinism. To the latter belongs the distinction of having persecuted the Quakers and witches, and of having roasted Servetus; to the former, putting some hundreds of thousands to death or torture by the sword, the rack, or the fagot.
1142. The difference in opinions between Catholics and Protestants is briefly shown in the quotes below from the debate between Archbishop Hughes and Rev. Mr. Breckinridge. I’ve already mentioned these in a pamphlet about better ways to use the first day of the week. Here are the views of two individuals who are well-qualified to make judgments. One is a prominent defender of Catholicism; the other is just as skilled an advocate for Calvinism. The latter is notable for having persecuted Quakers and witches and for having executed Servetus; the former is responsible for putting hundreds of thousands to death or torture by sword, the rack, or burning.
1143. Agreeing with each of the parties that the other is in the wrong, I, of course, assume that they are both in error. Taken together, they may be considered as proving that there is no evidence in favour of Christianity, which I have not the authority of eminent Christians for rejecting. In the 29th page of the controversy between himself and Breckinridge, Bishop Hughes speaks as follows:
1143. Since both sides agree that the other is at fault, I naturally believe they are both mistaken. Together, they seem to suggest that there's no evidence supporting Christianity, which I feel justified in dismissing, backed by prominent Christians. On page 29 of the debate between him and Breckinridge, Bishop Hughes states:
1144. “My fourth argument was, that the Protestant rule of faith actually undermines the authority of the Scriptures, by extinguishing the proofs of their authenticity and inspiration, and consequently terminates in moral suicide. Just imagine to yourself an ordinary will or testament, written but twenty years ago, purporting to be the last will and testament of a wealthy deceased relative, and designating you as heir, but without either signature or probate, and ask yourself what it would be worth? Could such a document establish its own authenticity? And yet this is precisely the situation to which the Protestant rule of faith reduced the Scriptures, by which, and by which alone, their authenticity could have been established. St. Augustine, of whom Presbyterians are sometimes wont to speak with respect, declared that it was the testimony of the church which moved him to believe in the Scriptures. But now the order of belief is ‘reformed.’ Men pick up (pardon the phrase) the sacred volume, as they find it floating on the sea of two thousand years, and by one great but gratuitous act of belief, which flings all intermediate church authority and tradition to the winds, they say ‘the Bible is the Bible, and we are its interpreters, every man for himself.'”
1144. “My fourth point is that the Protestant rule of faith actually weakens the authority of the Scriptures by eliminating the evidence of their authenticity and inspiration, which ultimately leads to moral downfall. Just picture an ordinary will or testament, written only twenty years ago, claiming to be the last will and testament of a wealthy deceased relative, naming you as heir, but without any signature or probate. What would it be worth? Could such a document prove its own authenticity? And yet this is exactly the situation the Protestant rule of faith has created for the Scriptures, which could have established their authenticity. St. Augustine, whom Presbyterians often regard with respect, said it was the testimony of the church that led him to believe in the Scriptures. But now the order of belief has been ‘reformed.’ People pick up (forgive the term) the sacred text as they find it drifting in the sea of two thousand years, and with one grand but gratuitous act of belief, which dismisses any authority and tradition from the church, they declare ‘the Bible is the Bible, and we interpret it, each person for themselves.'”
1145. It seems not to have occurred to the right reverend champio218n of the Catholic creed, that it is not more true that a testament without witnesses is of no validity, than it is true that the testimony of witnesses claiming under the will, cannot be admitted. A document written after the death of the testator would not be considered in a court of justice as entitled to the name of a testament. But were persons to write a will after a man’s death, and bring it forward, claiming under it supremacy, would their claim produce any result beside derision?
1145. It seems to have escaped the right reverend champion218 of the Catholic faith that it’s just as true that a will without witnesses is invalid as it is that testimony from witnesses claiming under the will can’t be accepted. A document created after the death of the person who made the will wouldn’t be recognized in a court of law as a valid will. But if people were to write a will after someone’s death and then try to enforce it, wouldn’t their claim just lead to mockery?
1149. Your rule, if observed, requires implicit faith in the decretals and interpretations of fallible men, which is subversive of the very nature and end of religion in the soul. Faith supposes knowledge, conviction on evidence, and trust in God, founded on a belief of divine truth; but your rule requires unconditional submission to the dicta of the church in the lump. The ‘Carbonaria fides,’ or faith of the collier, is the very faith required. It is as follows: When asked, ‘What do you believe?’ he answered, ‘I believe what the church believes.’ ‘What does the church believe?’ Ans. ‘What I believe.’ ‘Then what do you and the church together believe?’ Ans. ‘We both believe the same thing.’ This is the grand catholicon for believing every thing, without knowing any thing. In this soil grew the maxim that ‘ignorance is the mother of devotion.’ It is believing by proxy, or rather not believing at all, in the true sense. Here is the secret of the unity of your church.”
1149. Your rule, if followed, requires blind faith in the decrees and interpretations of fallible people, which undermines the true essence and purpose of religion in the soul. Faith requires knowledge, conviction based on evidence, and trust in God, grounded in the belief of divine truth; but your rule demands unconditional submission to the church's commands as a whole. The ‘Carbonaria fides,’ or faith of the collier, is the very faith that is expected. It goes like this: When asked, ‘What do you believe?’ he replies, ‘I believe what the church believes.’ ‘What does the church believe?’ Ans. ‘What I believe.’ ‘Then what do you and the church together believe?’ Ans. ‘We both believe the same thing.’ This is the ultimate prescription for believing everything without knowing anything. From this perspective arose the saying that ‘ignorance is the mother of devotion.’ It is believing on someone else's behalf, or rather not believing at all, in the true sense. Here lies the secret of your church's unity.”
1150. To conclude, I agree with the right reverend able and learned archbishop, that Christianity has no witnesses but those disciples of Christ whom he calls the church; but I also concur with his able, learned, and reverend opponent, that the said church is neither competent as a witness, nor reliable as a foundation for Christianity.
1150. In conclusion, I agree with the knowledgeable and learned archbishop that Christianity only has witnesses in the disciples of Christ, known as the church; however, I also agree with his learned and respected opponent that this church is neither a competent witness nor a reliable foundation for Christianity.
1153. Could any one believe that an experienced farmer would sow a field with garlic when intending to have a crop of wheat? Would not th219e conclusion be that if a field upon his farm were occupied by that objectionable weed, it must have been the spontaneous production of the soil, not of a mistake so gross on his part? Yet our prescient God is represented as so much inferior in foresight to an ordinary farmer, that while the religious soil of Christendom was for ages occupied with crops of Catholicism, in the Grecian or Roman modification, the seed of Protestantism was sown by God through his son and vicegerent, Christ, intending to have the soil occupied by Protestantism. Manifestly, either it was intended that Catholicism should prevail, as above described, or an omnipotent, omniscient, and prescient God did not preside over the seeding.
1153. Can anyone believe that a seasoned farmer would plant garlic in a field when he actually wants to harvest wheat? Wouldn't the logical conclusion be that if a field on his farm was full of that unwanted weed, it must have come up naturally from the soil, rather than being a huge mistake on his part? Yet, our all-knowing God is portrayed as having less foresight than an average farmer, since the religious landscape of Christendom was for centuries filled with Catholicism, in its Greek or Roman form, while God intended to plant Protestantism through His son and representative, Christ, wanting the land to be taken over by Protestantism. Clearly, either it was intended for Catholicism to dominate as described, or an all-powerful, all-knowing, and all-seeing God was not in charge of the planting.
1154. Yet notwithstanding this diversity as to the true import of Christianity between the most distinguished Christian sectarians, each sect conceives itself justified in propagating its own peculiar opinions among ignorant pagans. The principle being thus sanctioned, that those who believe themselves to have become acquainted with religious truth, are justified in propagating a knowledge of it, wherefore should not that privilege be exercised by a spiritualist as well as a Christian?
1154. Yet despite the differences in understanding the true meaning of Christianity among the most notable Christian groups, each group feels justified in spreading its specific beliefs among ignorant non-believers. The principle has been accepted that those who think they have discovered religious truth are entitled to share that knowledge. So, why shouldn't a spiritualist also have that right, just like a Christian?
1155. Humility is one of the virtues inculcated by Christ; but if his disciples assume to themselves a peculiar capacity to know what is true, and an exclusive right to teach what they thus assume to be truth, there will be no humility in their practice, however it may be blazoned among their professions.
Letter of William Pitt.
“Pure Religion and undefiled before God and the Father, is this: to visit the Fatherless and Widows in their afflictions, and to keep one’s self unspotted from the World.”
“True religion that is pure and faultless in the sight of God the Father is this: to take care of orphans and widows in their suffering, and to keep oneself unstained by the world.”
1157. “Gentlemen: Whoever takes a view of the world, will find, that what the greatest part of mankind have agreed to call religion, has been only some outward exercise esteemed sufficient to work a reconciliation with God. It has moved them to build temples, flay victims, offer up sacrifices, to fast and feast, to petition and thank, to laugh and cry, to sing and sigh by turns; but it has not yet been found sufficient to induce them to break off an amour, to make a restitution of ill-gotten wealth, or to bring the passions and appetites to a reasonable subjection. Differ as much as they may in opinion concerning what they ought to believe, or after what manner they are to serve God, as they call it, yet they all agree in gratifying their appetites. The same passions reign eternally in all countries and in all ages, Jew and Mohammedan, the Christian and the Pagan, the Tartar and the Indian, all kinds of men who differ in almost every thing else, universally agree with regard to their passions. If there be any difference220 among them, it is this; that the more superstitious, the more vicious they always are, and the more they believe, the less they practise. This is a melancholy consideration to a good mind; it is a truth, and certainly above all things, worth our while to inquire into. We will, therefore, probe the wound, and search to the bottom; we will lay the axe to the root of the tree, and show you the true reason why men go on in sinning and repenting, and sinning again through the whole course of their lives; and the reason is, because they have been taught, most wickedly taught, that religion and virtue are two things absolutely distinct; that the deficiency of the one might be supplied by the sufficiency of the other; and that what you want in virtue, you must make up in religion. But this religion, so dishonourable to God, and so pernicious to men, is worse than Atheism, for Atheism, though it takes away one great motive to support virtue in distress, yet it furnishes no man with arguments to be vicious; but superstition, or what the world means by religion, is the greatest possible encouragement to vice, by setting up something as religion which shall atone and commute for the want of virtue. This is establishing iniquity by a law, the highest law; by authority, the highest authority; that of God himself. We complain of the vices of the world, and of the wickedness of men, without searching into the true cause. It is not because they are wicked by nature, for that is both false and impious, but because to serve the purposes of their pretended soul-savers, they have been carefully taught that they are wicked by nature, and cannot help continuing so. It would have been impossible for men to have been both religious and vicious, had religion been made to consist wherein alone it does consist; and had they been always taught that true religion is the practice of virtue in obedience to the will of God, who presides over all things, and will finally make every man happy who does his duty.
1157. “Gentlemen: Anyone who takes a look at the world will see that what most people call religion has just been some outward practice thought to be enough to reconcile them with God. It has led them to build temples, slaughter animals, offer sacrifices, fast and feast, pray and give thanks, laugh and cry, sing and sigh at different times; but it hasn’t been enough to motivate them to end an affair, return stolen wealth, or control their desires and appetites. No matter how much they may disagree on what they should believe or how they should serve God, as they put it, they all come together in satisfying their desires. The same passions are present in all countries and throughout history—Jews and Muslims, Christians and Pagans, Tartars and Indians, all kinds of people who differ in almost every other way, universally agree when it comes to their passions. The only difference, if there is one, is that the more superstitious someone is, the more corrupt they tend to be, and the more they believe, the less they actually practice. This is a sad reality for a decent person; it’s true, and certainly worth examining deeply. Therefore, we will examine the issue closely; we will cut to the root of the problem and show you the real reason why people keep sinning, repenting, and sinning again throughout their lives; and the reason is that they’ve been taught, most wickedly taught, that religion and virtue are completely separate; that what they lack in virtue can be compensated for by the sufficiency of religion; and that whatever is lacking in virtue must be made up with religion. But this type of religion, so disreputable to God and so harmful to humanity, is worse than Atheism, because Atheism, while it removes one major incentive to uphold virtue in tough times, doesn’t provide anyone with reasons to be immoral; yet superstition, or what the world calls religion, is the greatest possible encouragement for vice by establishing something as religion that can atone for the lack of virtue. This sets up wrongdoing as a legal norm, the highest law; backed by the highest authority—that of God himself. We complain about the vices of the world and the wickedness of people without looking for the true cause. It’s not because they are inherently wicked, as that is both false and blasphemous, but because, to further the objectives of their so-called soul-savers, they have been carefully taught that they are wicked by nature and can't help but stay that way. It would have been impossible for people to be both religious and immoral had religion been defined by what it truly consists of; and had they always been taught that true religion is the practice of virtue in obedience to the will of God, who oversees everything and will ultimately make every person happy who fulfills their duty.
1158. This single opinion in religion, that all things are so well made by the Deity, that virtue is its own reward, and that happiness will ever arise from acting according to the reason of things, or that God, ever wise and good, will provide some extraordinary happiness for those who suffer for virtue’s sake, is enough to support a man under all difficulties, to keep him steady to his duty, and to enable him to stand as firm as a rock, amid all the charms of applause, profit, and honour. But this religion of reason, which all men are capable of, has been neglected and condemned, and another set up, the natural consequences of which have puzzled men’s understandings, and debauched their morals, more than all the lewd poets and atheistical philosophers that ever infested the world; for instead of being taught that religion consists in action, or obedience to the eternal moral law of God, we have been most gravely and venerably told that it consists in the belief of certain opinions which we could form no idea of, or which were contrary to the clear perceptions of our minds, or which had no tendency to make us either wiser or better, or, which is much221 worse, had a manifest tendency to make us wicked and immoral. And this belief, this impious belief, arising from imposition on one side, and from want of examination on the other, has been called by the sacred name of religion, whereas real and genuine religion consists in knowledge and obedience. We know there is a God, and know his will, which is, that we should do all the good we can; and we are assured from his perfections, that we shall find our own good in so doing.
1158. This single belief in religion—that everything is perfectly created by God, that virtue is its own reward, and that happiness comes from acting in accordance with reason, or that God, who is always wise and good, will provide extraordinary happiness for those who suffer for the sake of virtue—is enough to support a person through all challenges, keep them committed to their duties, and enable them to stand firm like a rock amidst the allure of praise, profit, and honor. However, this religion of reason, which anyone can understand, has been overlooked and condemned, while another has been established, the natural results of which have confused people's minds and corrupted their morals more than all the immoral poets and atheistic philosophers that have ever existed; instead of being taught that religion is about action, or adhering to God's eternal moral law, we have been solemnly and respectfully told that it consists of believing certain ideas which we cannot truly understand, which contradict our clear thoughts, or which do not help us become wiser or better, or, worse still, have a clear tendency to make us wicked and immoral. This belief, this misguided belief, stemming from deception on one side and lack of inquiry on the other, has been wrongly labeled as religion, while true and genuine religion is based on knowledge and obedience. We know there is a God and understand His will, which is that we should do as much good as we can; and we are assured by His nature that we will find our own good in doing so.
1159. And what would we have more? are we, after such inquiry, and in an age full of liberty, children still? and cannot we be quiet unless we have holy romances, sacred fables, and traditionary tales to amuse us in an idle hour, and to give rest to our souls, when our follies and vices will not suffer us to rest?
1159. And what more do we want? Are we still like children, even after we've asked all these questions and in a time full of freedom? Can’t we find peace without needing holy stories, sacred myths, and traditional tales to entertain us during our downtime and soothe our souls when our mistakes and wrongdoings won’t let us find rest?
1160. You have been taught, indeed, that right belief, or orthodoxy, will, like charity, cover a multitude of sins; but be not deceived; belief of, or mere assent to the truth of propositions upon evidence, is not a virtue, nor unbelief a vice; faith is not a voluntary act, does not depend upon the will; every man must believe or disbelieve, whether he will or not, according as the evidence appears to him. If, therefore, men, however dignified or distinguished, command us to believe, they are guilty of the highest folly and absurdity, because it is out of our power; but if they command us to believe, and annex rewards to belief, and severe penalties to unbelief, then they are most wicked and immoral, because they annex rewards and punishments to what is involuntary, and, therefore, neither rewardable nor punishable. It appears, then, very plainly unreasonable and unjust to command us to believe any doctrine, good or bad, wise or unwise; but, when men command us to believe opinions which have no tendency to promote virtue, but which are allowed to commute or atone for the want of it, then they are arrived at the utmost pitch of impiety, then is their iniquity full; then have they finished the misery, and completed the destruction of poor mortal man; by betraying the interest of virtue, they have undermined and sapped the foundation of all human happiness; and how treacherously and dreadfully have they betrayed it! A gift, well applied, the chattering of some unintelligible sounds called creeds; an unfeigned assent and consent to whatever the church enjoins, religious worship and consecrated feasts; repenting on a death-bed; pardons rightly sued out; and absolution authoritatively given, have done more toward making and continuing men vicious, than all the natural passions and infidelity put together. For infidelity can only take away the supernatural rewards of virtue; but these superstitious opinions and practices have not only turned the scene, and made men lose sight of the natural rewards of it, but have induced them to think, that were there no hereafter, vice would be preferable to virtue, and that they increase in happiness as they increase in wickedness; and this they have been taught in several religious discourses and sermons, delivered by men222 whose authority was never doubted, particularly by a late Rev. prelate, I mean Bishop Atterbury, in his sermon on these words: ‘If in this life only be hope, then we are of all men the most miserable,’ where vice and faith ride most lovingly and triumphantly together. But these doctrines of the natural excellency of vice, the efficacy of a right belief, the dignity of atonements and propitiations have, beside depriving us of the native beauty and charms of honesty, and thus cruelly stabbing virtue to the heart, raised and diffused among men a certain unnatural passion, which we shall call a religious hatred—a hatred constant, deep-rooted, and immortal. All other passions rise and fall, die and revive again; but this of religious and pious hatred rises and grows every day stronger upon the mind as we grow more religious, because we hate for God’s sake, and for the sake of those poor souls, too, who have the misfortune not to believe as we do; and can we in so good a cause hate too much? the more thoroughly we hate the better we are; and the more mischief we do to the bodies and states of these infidels and heretics, the more do we show our love to God. This is religious zeal, and this has been called divinity; but remember, the only true divinity is humanity.
1160. You’ve been taught that having the right beliefs, or orthodoxy, will, like charity, cover up a lot of wrongs; but don’t be fooled. Simply believing in or agreeing to the truth of claims based on evidence isn’t a virtue, and not believing isn’t a vice. Faith isn’t something we choose; it doesn’t depend on our will. Everyone has to believe or disbelieve, whether they want to or not, based on how they perceive the evidence. So, if people, regardless of their status or reputation, tell us to believe, they are acting foolishly and absurdly because it’s beyond our control. But if they pressure us to believe and attach rewards to belief and harsh penalties to disbelief, then they are truly wicked and immoral, as they are linking rewards and punishments to something we can’t control, and thus it can't be rewarded or punished. It’s clearly unreasonable and unjust to require us to believe in any doctrine, whether it’s good or bad, wise or foolish; however, when individuals compel us to believe ideas that don't foster virtue but are allowed to substitute for a lack of it, they reach the extreme of impiety; their wrongdoing is complete; they have added to the suffering and destruction of humanity. By betraying the cause of virtue, they have weakened the foundation of all human happiness, and how ruthlessly and dreadfully they have done so! Bestowing an empty gift, what’s often just the meaningless babble of creeds; a genuine agreement and submission to whatever the church demands, religious rituals and holy days; remorse on one’s deathbed; pardons sought out correctly; and absolution given authoritatively have done more to make and keep people immoral than all natural passions and disbelief combined. For disbelief only removes the supernatural rewards of virtue; but these superstitious beliefs and rituals have not only shifted perspectives, causing people to lose sight of the natural rewards of virtue, but have also led them to believe that if there were no afterlife, vice would be better than virtue, and that they find happiness in wickedness. This has been taught in various religious speeches and sermons by men222 whose authority was rarely questioned, especially by a recent Reverend bishop, Bishop Atterbury, in his sermon on the phrase: ‘If in this life only we have hope, we are of all people the most miserable,’ where vice and faith seem to thrive together. Yet these teachings about the natural value of vice, the power of correct belief, and the significance of atonements and offerings have not only stripped away the inherent beauty and appeal of honesty, cruelly wounding virtue, but have also fostered an unnatural feeling among people that we’ll call religious hatred—a lasting, deep-rooted, and immortal hatred. All other feelings come and go, rise and fall, die and revive; but this kind of religious hatred grows stronger in our minds as we become more religious, because we hate for God’s sake and for the sake of those unfortunate souls who don’t believe the same as we do. Can we really hate too much for such a noble cause? The more we hate, the better off we are; and the more harm we inflict on the bodies and lives of these nonbelievers and heretics, the more we show our love for God. This is called religious zeal, and it has been labeled as divinity; but remember, the only true divinity is humanity.
W. Pitt.”
W. Pitt.
Offer of Guidance by a Mundane Spirit.
1161. The Rev. Allen Putnam, whose narrative of his conversion to Spiritualism, has been submitted, gave a very sensible and interesting lecture on this new doctrine, at the Melodeon, in Boston, last October. One of his remarks struck me as being very well warranted by my own observation and experience. He said that we are wont to express indignation at the absurd, cruel, and unnatural Chinese custom of cramping the female foot; but to him it appeared that in Christendom a much worse practice existed, that of cramping the minds of females by bringing them up zealous sectarians, their opinions, in general, being determined by their parentage. Thus Miss A. is a Romanist; Miss B. an Episcopalian; Miss C. a Calvinist; Miss D. a Methodist; Miss E. a Jewess; all most excellent creatures in any other respect excepting the effects of educational sectarianism, which had been interchanged, had their parentage been commuted. (259.)
1161. The Rev. Allen Putnam, whose story of his conversion to Spiritualism has been shared, gave a very thoughtful and engaging lecture on this new belief at the Melodeon in Boston last October. One of his comments resonated with my own observations and experiences. He noted that we often express outrage at the absurd, cruel, and unnatural Chinese practice of binding women's feet; but to him, it seemed that a much worse practice exists in Christendom: the constraining of women's minds by raising them as passionate sectarians, with their beliefs largely shaped by their upbringing. Thus, Miss A. is a Roman Catholic; Miss B. is an Episcopalian; Miss C. is a Calvinist; Miss D. is a Methodist; Miss E. is a Jewish woman; all of whom are wonderful individuals in every respect except for the impacts of sectarian education, which would have been different had their backgrounds been switched. (259.)
1162. One of the blessings of Spiritualism, according to my view, is, that this cramped state of the mind, which attaches importance to various phases of analogous educational error, will be removed by receiving their opinions from the same source. But it seems that one of the most amiable and interesting among those angelic devotees, has been actuated by the same anxiety for my salvation from hell, that I have felt for her emancipation from the educational ligatures imposed upon her otherwise excellent understanding. The following letter is the fruit of her zeal in my favour:
1162. One of the benefits of Spiritualism, in my opinion, is that this limited way of thinking, which gives importance to various aspects of similar educational mistakes, will be alleviated by getting their views from the same source. However, it seems that one of the most kind and fascinating among those angelic followers has been driven by the same concern for my salvation from hell that I have had for her freedom from the educational constraints placed on her otherwise great understanding. The following letter is the result of her enthusiasm on my behalf:
August 1, 1855.
August 1, 1855.
1163. My dear Sir: You have too much kindness yourself, not to receive in kindness what is so intended; and you have too much politeness not to223 grant as much as you ask of a friend. I, therefore, with all confidence, send you the enclosed letter, written by one of the first intellects in the country. Now, if when you send your pamphlets and the papers you wish me to read, you will state that you have read this letter, (with the care you wish me to read yours,) not to refute but to comprehend the mind of the writer, I will do the same. But, as what I send to you requires higher power than any power in created man, I will continue to pray to this higher power, this Creator of all things, that you may so read under his blessing and guidance, (before whom you and the very world upon which you tread, are but a molecule or mite,) that you, I say, may find that salvation for your immortal soul, which you seem so much to desire. If you believe that your father and sister exist, and consequently, that you have a soul that cannot die, you must feel a deep anxiety with us all for the future welfare of this soul, and will not treat with indifference the attempt to offer you that which is a complete satisfaction to your friend!
1163. My dear Sir: You’re too kind not to accept, with kindness, what is meant for you; and you're too polite not to give as much as you expect from a friend. So, with total confidence, I’m sending you the letter enclosed, written by one of the top minds in the country. Now, when you send your pamphlets and the papers you want me to read, please mention that you’ve read this letter, (with the care you want me to read yours,) not to argue but to understand the writer’s perspective. I will do the same. But since what I’m sending you requires a greater power than any human, I will keep praying to this higher power, this Creator of all, that you read it with His blessing and guidance, (before whom you and the whole world are just a tiny speck,) and that you, I say, may find that salvation for your immortal soul, which you seem to long for. If you believe your father and sister are alive, and thus that you have a soul that won’t die, you must feel a deep concern like the rest of us for the future of this soul, and won’t ignore the attempt to offer you something that will completely satisfy your friend!
1164. I would avoid argument, as two persons at opposite points can never see the objects in the same light; but I send simply the Christian’s plan of salvation, to which I only ask you to attend as carefully as I attended to the statement of your theory. When I return to New York permanently, I will inform you. As I am anxious to retain these papers, and life is uncertain, please so arrange them that they may easily be found, should any thing happen.”
1164. I’d like to steer clear of an argument, since two people at opposite ends can never really see things the same way; but I’m just sharing the Christian's plan of salvation, which I ask you to consider as carefully as I considered your theory. When I move back to New York for good, I’ll let you know. Since I want to keep these papers safe, and life can be unpredictable, please organize them so they’re easy to find in case something happens.
1167. Persons who should differ about axioms could never agree in mathematical demonstrations, nor is it possible for A and B to agree in theology, when A assumes what to B appears to comprise a contradiction within its premises and conclusions. Having for years held the opinion conveyed in the above lines, to be self-evident truth, it is of course useless to debate with those who take an opposite view, especially just at this time, when I believe that opinion to be sanctioned by my spirit friends. This opinion was urged in my letter to the Episcopal clergy; yet this kind adviser has not seen, or has not taken pains to understand, its all-important bearing.
1167. People who disagree about basic principles can never come to an agreement in mathematical arguments, nor can A and B find common ground in theology if A accepts something that B sees as a contradiction in the premises and conclusions. Having held the belief expressed in these lines as a self-evident truth for years, it seems pointless to argue with those who have a different perspective, especially now, as I feel this belief is supported by my spirit friends. I emphasized this belief in my letter to the Episcopal clergy; however, this kind advisor either has not acknowledged it or has not made an effort to understand its crucial significance.
1168. The letter of this charming woman commences with begging the question. It is assumed that the arguments of her clerical friend require for comprehension a higher power than any power created in man. But224 this to me appears fanatical presumption, just as much as it would be in any other sectarian. The excellent authoress of the epistle puts herself in a class of females whom it has been my object to emancipate from the restraint imposed upon their minds, no less cramping than that to which the feet of Chinese ladies are subjected.
1168. The letter from this charming woman starts off by raising a question. It assumes that the arguments of her clerical friend require a higher understanding than anything that can be found in humans. But224 to me, this seems like fanatical arrogance, just as it would be in any other religious group. The author of the letter places herself among a category of women that I aim to free from the mental constraints, which are just as limiting as those imposed on the feet of Chinese women.
1169. It must be evident, that unless there was a successful precursory effort by facts and reasoning, to make me believe that what appears to me below good sense, is actually above it, her inference that discussion would be useless is quite evident. But this amounts to an admission that the opinions which it is her object to impart, are not founded in reason.
1169. It must be clear that unless there was a successful prior attempt with facts and reasoning to convince me that what seems to me below common sense is actually above it, her conclusion that discussion would be pointless is quite apparent. But this amounts to admitting that the opinions she intends to share are not based on reason.
1170. Her clerical friend falls into the same error, as will appear from the following quotation. The last postulate in the world which he could induce me to admit, would be that any thing which owes its existence entirely to barbarous, wicked, ignorant, covetous, and blood-thirsty men, can be God’s word, and, therefore, paramount to human reason.
1170. Her clerical friend makes the same mistake, as you can see from the following quote. The last thing in the world that he could convince me to accept is that anything created entirely by brutal, evil, ignorant, greedy, and bloodthirsty people can be God's word, and therefore superior to human reason.
1171. How would he enable an idiot to believe in the Bible, or in any thing? Is not our capacity to believe correctly, greater as our reason is better by nature? It is only through his own intellectual faculties that he has received his opinions and can defend them. It is through my reason that my head and heart repel the Old Testament as, for the most part, the work of a set of unprincipled bigots, comprising allegations which the present state of astronomy and geology demonstrate to be fallacious, and which, independently of that cramping of the intellect by education, which it is my ardent desire to remove, would be denounced replete with indecency, immorality, and misrepresentation of God.
1171. How could he convince someone foolish to believe in the Bible, or in anything? Isn’t our ability to believe accurately greater when our reasoning is stronger by nature? He has formed his beliefs and can defend them only through his own intellectual abilities. It’s through my reasoning that my mind and heart reject the Old Testament as largely the work of unprincipled bigots, filled with claims that the current understanding of astronomy and geology shows to be false, and which, aside from the way education can stifle the mind, which I passionately want to change, would be condemned as filled with indecency, immorality, and misrepresentation of God.
1172. It is striking that this kind lady, in referring to my sister and other spirit friends, should suppose that I would slight the direct heartfelt evidence received from them, in obedience to impressions felt by her in common with every other devotee to any religion whatever. They could, with just as much consistency, appeal to their tenets, and assume their “Koran,” their “Shasters,” or “Zendavesta” to be above my reason.
1172. It's interesting that this kind woman, in talking about my sister and other spiritual friends, thinks I would ignore the direct heartfelt evidence I received from them, just to follow feelings she shares with any other follower of any religion. They could just as easily rely on their beliefs and claim that their “Koran,” “Shasters,” or “Zendavesta” are superior to my reasoning.
1173. But the whole tenor of this application shows that the authoress expects to set aside the results of nearly twenty months’ investigation, creating in me a firm devout conviction that I have a correct knowledge of the spirit world, received through my relatives, friends, and high spirits, in deference to those of a set of people of whom I know nothing but ill. May God do that for her which she has so benevolently implored for me, and remove from her brain the influence of educational narrowness. I would utter the same aspiration for the divine whom she has brought in as her advocate, who I hope as sincerely believes what he alleges, as I believe in the communications of my guardian spirits.
1173. But the overall tone of this application shows that the author expects to dismiss the findings of nearly twenty months' investigation, leading me to firmly believe that I have a true understanding of the spirit world, gained through my relatives, friends, and elevated spirits, in contrast to that of a group of people about whom I know nothing but negative things. May God grant her what she has kindly asked for me, and clear her mind of the limitations imposed by her education. I would express the same wish for the divine being she has brought in as her advocate, who I hope sincerely believes what he claims, just as I believe in the messages from my guardian spirits.
1174. But this superior intellect, it will be shown, falls into one of the most inexcusable errors, into which a tyro in reasoning can fall, that of founding his arguments on premises which are emphatically denied by225 the other party—a gross begging of the question, that the Bible is the word of God, and paramount to human reason.
1174. But this superior intellect will show that it makes one of the most inexcusable mistakes a novice in reasoning can make: basing its arguments on premises that are strongly rejected by225 the other side—a blatant begging the question that the Bible is the word of God and superior to human reason.
1175. In a subsequent part of this letter, Hume’s excellent rule is set aside: that we must weigh the probability of the evidence against the improbability of the miracle. Rochefoucault alleges, ‘Tis better to tell a probable lie, than an extremely improbable truth. By what evidence can any record be proved true, when it is vastly more probable it should be false, than the facts recorded by it should be true.
1175. In another part of this letter, Hume’s great rule is ignored: we should compare the likelihood of the evidence to the unlikeliness of the miracle. Rochefoucault claims, ‘It’s better to tell a believable lie than to state an incredibly improbable truth. What evidence can confirm any record as true when it's much more likely that it's false than that the facts it contains are true?
1176. Manifestly, there are but these two ways in which any record can command credence: either there must be external evidence sufficient to weigh against the improbability of the facts which it has recorded; or those facts must be of a nature to create belief from their probability, from what is called internal evidence. As to external evidence, clearly any amount of that, may be adduced without creating a belief in spiritual manifestations. Human evidence is wholly inadequate to prove any thing which sectarianism does not wish to admit. Considering the external evidence of Scripture as vastly inferior to that on which Spiritualism is founded, and the miracles recorded, and the doctrines taught, as carrying no evidence of their truth, but the contrary, I do not understand upon what reasonable ground they are to be identified with the word of God.
1176. Clearly, there are only two ways any record can be trusted: either there must be enough external evidence to outweigh the unlikelihood of the facts it presents, or those facts must be believable based on their likelihood, which is referred to as internal evidence. Regarding external evidence, it's plain that no amount of it can lead to a belief in spiritual manifestations. Human evidence is completely inadequate to prove anything that certain groups don't want to accept. Given that the external evidence of Scripture is significantly weaker than that supporting Spiritualism, and that the miracles described and the doctrines taught lack credible evidence for their truth—in fact, often suggest the opposite—I don't see on what reasonable basis they can be associated with the word of God.
1177. This fascinating lady supposes that she gave ear to my exposition of my views; but I am under the impression that she is quite deaf to any thing that does not concur with her fanatical impressions, otherwise she would never have looked upon me as one to be converted from the opinions which I entertain by the reasoning of her clerical friend, beginning with a begging of the question: assuming that revelation is God’s word, in order to prove it to be God’s word.
1177. This intriguing woman thinks she listened to my explanation of my views; however, I believe she is completely closed off to anything that doesn’t align with her extreme beliefs. If she weren’t, she wouldn’t view me as someone who could be swayed from my opinions by the arguments of her religious friend, who starts with a circular reasoning: assuming that revelation is God’s word in order to prove that it is God’s word.
1179. If she can so confine her mind as to become master of the pyramid of facts which I have raised in favour of Spiritualism, she will perceive that all other evidence of immortality sinks into insignificance as compared with it. Now all this may be nominally abrogated by denying the truth of it. But if I do not rely on my own senses, is it likely I shall rely on those of other persons, in whom I have no more confidence than her clerical adviser and herself have in Mohammed and his disciples.
1179. If she can focus her thoughts enough to grasp the mountain of evidence I've built in support of Spiritualism, she'll realize that all other proof of immortality pales in comparison. Of course, this can all be dismissed by simply denying its validity. But if I can't trust my own senses, why would I trust those of others, including her clergy advisor and herself, who have just as little faith in Mohammed and his followers?
1180. I subjoin a portion of the letter of the clerical champion, whose reasoning this interesting devotee deems so conclusive. I have gone over the whole of it, and have ascertained that by substituting Allah for God, Mohammed for Christ, Prophet for Redeemer, Mediator for Saviour, it has a qualification which would be deemed a merit elsewhere, if not in Christendom: it would serve just as well to uphold the religion of Mohammed, as that of Christ.
1180. I’m including part of the letter from the clerical supporter, whose arguments this devoted follower finds so convincing. I’ve gone through all of it and realized that by replacing God with Allah, Christ with Mohammed, Redeemer with Prophet, and Saviour with Mediator, it has a quality that would be considered an advantage in other places, if not in Christianity: it could just as easily support the religion of Mohammed as that of Christ.
1181. The letter is so long that it would occupy too many pages to give226 the whole; but I will give a portion, sufficient to show how the reasoning, on which many sectarians rely, may be just as good for any other creed, founded on an arrogation of premises, as that for which they contend.
1181. The letter is so lengthy that it would take up too many pages to present the entire thing226; however, I will share a portion that is enough to demonstrate how the reasoning many sectarians use can just as easily apply to any other belief system based on assumed principles, just like the one they support.
1182. “Allah forbid that I should depreciate the value of reason in any of its offices. Reason is Allah’s gift to man, and must be used as Allah designs. But so is the Koran Allah’s gift to man, and must be used as Allah designs. Two gifts from the same perfect being cannot conflict with each other. The Koran in its teachings and revealings may go beyond or rise above the comprehension of our reason, because reason in man is a finite and imperfect gift, while the Koran from Allah opens the mind of an infinite and perfect being. But the Koran does not and cannot in any thing contradict reason, because Allah does not and cannot contradict himself. Unless, therefore, you are prepared to say that the Koran is not Allah’s gift to man—if you are a believer in its true divine inspiration—you must see and admit that when the Koran, as Allah’s mouth, reveals any thing which our reason cannot as yet comprehend, because beyond or above, though not against, that reason, then Faith must submissively receive the revelation addressed to it, and Reason stop her speculation and shut her mouth at the limit which Allah has set. Reason has to do with the evidences which show the Koran to be Allah’s gift; with the grammatical and intended sense of what Allah taught and revealed in the Koran, and with the use of what in the Koran is clear to the comprehension of man. But here Reason’s province ends. When the Koran goes beyond or rises above this point, Reason must pause and adore, and Faith must go forward and receive. I do not hold, as you intimate, that the right exercise of reason ‘is impious,’ or that Reason is to be discarded and Faith substituted, if by this be implied any thing incompatible between the proper offices of Reason and Faith; but I mean that our finite reason is to stop at the limit assigned her by her author, and let Faith as a higher power go forward and receive what Allah teaches or reveals to her acceptance. Faith can now receive more than Reason can as yet comprehend. She does so in the province of nature; she must do so in the province of revelation. This cannot be denied without taking at once the ground of the infidel—a ground from which, I doubt not, you would shrink back as from the border of an open pit of destruction.
1182. “God forbid that I should undermine the value of reason in any of its roles. Reason is a gift from God to humanity, and it needs to be used as God intended. The same goes for the Quran; it is also a gift from God and should be used according to His design. Two gifts from the same perfect being cannot contradict one another. The teachings and revelations of the Quran may exceed or transcend the understanding of our reason, since human reason is finite and imperfect, while the Quran from God is meant to enlighten the mind of an infinite and perfect being. However, the Quran does not and cannot contradict reason because God does not and cannot contradict Himself. Therefore, unless you are willing to say that the Quran is not a gift from God — if you believe in its true divine inspiration — you must acknowledge that when the Quran, as God’s voice, reveals something that our reason cannot understand yet, either because it goes beyond or above that reason, then Faith must accept the revelation as it is, and Reason must pause and respect the boundaries set by God. Reason deals with the evidences that demonstrate the Quran to be God’s gift; it focuses on the grammatical and intended meaning of what God has taught and revealed in the Quran, along with the use of what is clear for human understanding. But here, Reason’s role ends. When the Quran goes beyond or transcends this point, Reason must stop and marvel, while Faith must move forward and accept. I do not believe, as you suggest, that the proper use of reason ‘is impious,’ or that Reason should be discarded in favor of Faith instead, if that implies any incompatibility between the rightful functions of Reason and Faith; rather, I mean that our finite reason should stop at the limits set by its creator, while allowing Faith, as a higher power, to advance and accept what God teaches or reveals. Faith can accept more than Reason can currently understand. It already does so in the realm of nature; it must do the same in the realm of revelation. This cannot be denied without adopting the stance of the unbeliever—a stance from which, I have no doubt, you would recoil as if from the edge of a gaping pit of destruction.”
1183. I am thus brought to your remark, that ‘The Mohammedan system, as generally received, is not difficult to understand.’ If this be strictly true, it must be because that system, ‘as generally received,’ is not the true system; for, in this sense, or as truly and rightly received, the Mohammedan system contains various things which it is difficult to understand, if by understanding be meant comprehending. We may, indeed, understand that a fact or a truth exists or is revealed, while that fact or that truth itself is, for the present, utterly beyond or above our comprehension. And this is precisely the case with the Mohammedan system rightly viewed.227 It contains various facts and truths which our reason cannot yet fathom. Natural reason loves to separate and set aside these great and high things from the Koran as non-essentials, and then to busy itself with those parts of the Koran which are level with its own height; pleased with the dream that it has grasped enough, has grasped all that can be of any real value. Believe me when reason does this, for one who has the Koran in his hands, she plays at a perilous game.
1183. This brings me to your comment that "The Muslim system, as it’s generally understood, isn’t hard to grasp." If this is strictly true, it must be because that system, "as generally understood," isn’t the true system; because in that sense, or as truly and correctly understood, the Muslim system includes various concepts that are hard to grasp, if by understanding we mean comprehending. We can, indeed, understand that a fact or truth exists or is revealed, while that fact or truth itself is, for now, completely beyond our comprehension. And this is exactly the case with the Muslim system when viewed correctly.227 It contains various facts and truths that our reason hasn’t yet fully explored. Natural reason tends to separate and dismiss these significant and profound aspects of the Koran as non-essentials, then focuses on those parts of the Koran that are on its own level; satisfied with the illusion that it has grasped enough, that it has understood all that truly matters. Believe me, when reason does this, for someone with the Koran in their hands, it plays a dangerous game.
1184. The main position which I have thus far taken is, however, virtually conceded in another part of your letter. Alluding to what I had urged as to the importance of acknowledging Mohammed as your mediator, and relying on his mediation only for justification as all-sufficient, reconciling all difficulties, and removing all embarrassment from the consideration of the union of justice and mercy in the deity, you say: ‘But does it remove all embarrassment? Is not Allah himself the author of the plan of salvation? Was not Mohammed himself Allah, and also his vicegerent?’ The impossibility of answering these questions satisfactorily to the plainest reason, teaches me to recoil from the impiety of inquiring how my Maker will save me or reconcile his own attributes? I know full well that the great mass of human minds are totally incapable of considering such a subject with any approximation to a solution of it, and therefore do I feel that the eternal salvation or condemnation of mankind does not depend on such theological questions. Here you directly admit the inability of reason in most minds satisfactorily to comprehend some of the great and high points of the Mohammedan system, and the consequent impiety of her attempting such a comprehension. You might as well explicitly admit her inability for this comprehension in all minds; for no mind in its present state can by reason alone grasp all that Allah has revealed in the Koran. These great and high things are not proposed to reason alone, but to reason so far as their evidence is concerned, and to faith so far as their substance is to be received. Reason may satisfy herself that they are revealed. Faith alone can take in the substance which they contain. When they are proposed to it, faith must receive them, or salvation cannot come, whether the reason of the individual addressed be the ‘plainest’ or otherwise.
1184. The main point I've made so far is actually acknowledged in another part of your letter. Referring to what I've said about the importance of recognizing Mohammed as your mediator and relying solely on his mediation for justification—making it all-encompassing, resolving all difficulties, and clearing up any confusion regarding the union of justice and mercy in God—you ask: ‘But does it really clear up every issue? Isn't Allah himself the author of the salvation plan? Wasn't Mohammed himself Allah, and also his representative?’ The impossibility of satisfactorily answering these questions with straightforward reasoning makes me hesitate to ask how my Creator will save me or reconcile his own attributes. I understand that the vast majority of people can't contemplate such subjects close to finding answers, which is why I believe that the eternal salvation or condemnation of humanity doesn't hinge on these theological debates. Here you directly acknowledge that most people can’t adequately comprehend some of the grand principles of the Mohammedan system, and the resulting disrespect in trying to understand them. You might as well openly admit that no mind in its current state can grasp all that Allah has revealed in the Koran through reason alone. These significant matters are not presented to reason alone, but to reason insofar as their evidence is concerned, and to faith regarding the substance that must be accepted. Reason may assure itself that they are revealed. Only faith can fully appreciate the substance they hold. When they are presented to it, faith must accept them, or salvation cannot be attained, whether the reasoning of the individual addressed is the ‘clearest’ or not.
1185. Your argument in the above extract does not satisfy me so well as your admission. From the inability of the great mass of minds satisfactorily to comprehend the high mysteries of the Koran, you infer that the ‘eternal salvation or condemnation of mankind does not depend on such theological questions.’ Certainly, the salvation of mankind in the mass does not depend on these or any other theological questions; if by this be meant depending on the ability to comprehend such questions, because the points involved in these questions, so far as they are mysteries, are proposed not to reason as comprehending, but to faith as receiving. But do you mean to be understood as saying, that when the Koran is put into228 any man’s hand, and when Allah through the Koran opens to that man his revealed way of salvation, the individual thus approached may accept what is level with his reason, but reject what is proposed to his faith and above his reason, and that yet notwithstanding such rejection he may reasonably hope to be saved? If so, I ask you by what right you argue thus? Who is Allah, and what is man? When he tells you the way in which he will save you, not the mass of mankind or the heathen to whom the Koran has never come, but you yourself, what right have you to say that your salvation does not depend on your faith’s reception of those very things which are above your reason’s comprehension? How do you know but that the whole efficacy of the plan proposed to you, depends on your receiving the great facts and truths propounded to your faith? ‘Faith itself, I admit,’ you may contend, ‘does not save any man; it is the Mediator that saves.’ But you have no right to say, or think, or hope that he will or can save you with the Koran in your hand, in any other way than that which in the Koran he proposes to your faith. And if when he demands your faith in what surpasses your reason, you withhold that faith, and plead the sufficiency of what he has incidentally made level with your reason, do you not thereby show that you have not the spirit which he requires, and that you are yet none of his? In the Koran he has not only revealed to you his mission and sanctification, but also proposed to you his mediation as a propitiation for your sin; and he has told you that ‘you must be born again,’ not only of water, but also ‘of the spirit;’ that except you be converted and become as a ‘little child, you shall not enter into the kingdom of heaven;’ and that ‘he that believeth and is baptized shall be saved, but he that believeth not shall be damned:’ ‘believeth’ not a part only, but the whole of the Koran then intrusted to its Ulemas. Here he explicitly demands your faith in the whole Koran. But suppose it had been otherwise, suppose he had simply opened to you a way by which he could certainly save you, without saying any thing about faith, as the one great and necessary receiver of the facts and truths involved in that way; I ask, would not a rejection of a part of those involved facts and truths be equivalent to a rejection of the whole? Would it not display the same spirit as a rejection of the whole? Would it not show that you were not walking in his way, but in some other which you supposed might possibly be found? Nay, would it not show that in your heart you had no confidence in him as a mediator; that you even rebelled against his right to prescribe to you the terms on which he would save you?”
1185. Your argument in the extract above doesn’t convince me as much as your admission does. From the inability of most people to fully grasp the profound mysteries of the Koran, you conclude that the ‘eternal salvation or condemnation of humanity does not rely on such theological questions.’ Certainly, the salvation of humanity as a whole isn’t dependent on these or any other theological questions, if by this you mean the reliance on the ability to comprehend such questions. The matters involved in these questions, as far as they are mysteries, are meant not for reason to comprehend, but for faith to receive. But are you really saying that when the Koran is handed to any individual, and when Allah reveals through the Koran his revealed path to salvation, that the person approached can accept what aligns with their reason, but dismiss what is offered to their faith and is beyond their reason, and yet still hope to be saved? If that’s the case, I must ask by what authority you make such an argument? Who is Allah, and who is man? When He tells you how He will save you—not the entire mass of humanity or the non-believers who have never encountered the Koran, but you yourself—what right do you have to state that your salvation doesn’t rely on your faith accepting those very things that transcend your understanding? How can you be sure that the entire effectiveness of the plan offered to you relies on your acceptance of the significant facts and truths presented to your faith? ‘Faith itself, I acknowledge,’ you might argue, ‘doesn’t save anyone; it’s the Mediator who saves.’ But you have no right to claim, think, or hope that He will or can save you with the Koran in your hands, except in the manner that the Koran proposes to your faith. And if when He asks for your faith in what exceeds your reason, you withhold that faith and insist that what He has made clear to your reason is enough, don’t you show that you lack the spirit He desires, and that you are not truly one of His? In the Koran, He has not only revealed His mission and sanctification but has also offered His mediation as a payment for your sins; He has told you that ‘you must be born again,’ not just of water but also ‘of the spirit;’ that unless you are converted and become like a ‘little child, you shall not enter the kingdom of heaven;’ and that ‘he who believes and is baptized shall be saved, but he who does not believe shall be damned:’ ‘believes’ not just a part but the whole of the Koran entrusted to its Ulemas. Here he explicitly asks for your faith in the entire Koran. But imagine if it were different, suppose He had simply opened a way for you to be certainly saved without mentioning anything about faith as the necessary acceptor of the facts and truths in that way; I ask, wouldn’t rejecting a part of those involved facts and truths be the same as rejecting the whole? Wouldn’t it reveal the same attitude as completely dismissing it? Wouldn’t it indicate that you weren’t following His path but were instead on some other one that you thought might lead somewhere? In fact, wouldn’t it reveal that in your heart you had no faith in Him as a mediator; that you even resisted His authority to set the terms for how He would save you?”
1186. To conclude, with respect to this guardian angel of my soul, to whom this digression owes its existence; it may comfort her to know that I conceive myself so securely protected and guided already, and so sure of the result of that guidance and protection, that I would advise her, in my turn, to consider well whether she ought not to pray to God to give her a little more light respecting her own destiny, than is afforded by the229 book which is vaunted as being above reason, and as being the word of God. Does she conceive the subterranean cave with the “lake of unquenchable fire,” in which Dives is roasting in sight of the blessed, to be so satisfactory as to be unwilling to hear of a preferable abode in the azure sky? Does she aspire to some official position commensurate with that of the judgships which Christ promised his disciples? If it is to procure me a place in the heaven described in Scripture, I beg leave to decline, being pre-engaged; and therefore give her an invitation to meet me hereafter in the glorious abode to which I confidently aspire, and where I shall feel myself especially called upon to render her my assistance to rise from the inferior though happy sphere to which, with her present opinions, she is destined.
1186. To wrap things up, regarding this guardian angel of my soul, to whom this digression owes its existence; it might comfort her to know that I feel so securely protected and guided already, and so confident in the outcome of that guidance and protection, that I would suggest she consider asking God for a bit more clarity about her own destiny than what's provided by the 229 book that's claimed to be beyond reason and to be the word of God. Does she really think the underground cave with the “lake of unquenchable fire,” where Dives is suffering in view of the blessed, is so appealing that she's unwilling to hear about a better place in the clear sky? Is she hoping for a role similar to the judge positions that Christ promised his disciples? If it's to secure me a spot in the heaven described in Scripture, I have to decline, as I’m already committed; and so I invite her to meet me later in the glorious place I confidently aim for, where I will feel particularly called to help her rise from the lower yet happy realm to which, based on her current beliefs, she is headed.
1187. I would recommend to her, and to others in the same predicament, the perusal of the influence of the conversion to Spiritualism on my friends, as presented in this volume. I would also recommend her to study the comparison made between the heaven and hell of Scripture and that of Spiritualism, as herein presented.
1187. I would suggest that she, and others in similar situations, read about how the switch to Spiritualism has affected my friends, as shown in this book. I would also advise her to explore the comparison made between the heaven and hell described in the Scriptures and those in Spiritualism, as presented here.
1188. I hope my would-be mundane guide to salvation will find in the verse and prose addressed to me by one more nearly allied (215, 250, 538) a sufficient apology for declining her kindly-tendered guidance, especially as the path through which she would lead me is known to this excellent relative, who has frequently passed and repassed it during her residence of more than two years in the spirit world, while to my mundane friend it is as yet unknown, and, as I believe, misapprehended. But although my mind has not been converted to her view of the service tendered, my heart will never cease to be gratefully inclined toward one who, while actually in want of guidance herself, thought so much of the supposed deficiency from which it is imagined I suffer.
1188. I hope my would-be everyday guide to salvation will find in the verse and prose directed to me by someone more closely related (215, 250, 538) a good enough reason for me to decline her kindly offered guidance, especially since the path she wants to lead me down is familiar to this wonderful relative, who has often traveled it during her time of over two years in the spirit world. Meanwhile, to my everyday friend, it remains unknown and, I believe, misunderstood. But even though my mind hasn’t accepted her view of the help she offers, my heart will always be grateful to someone who, while also in need of guidance herself, cared so much about what she thought was a lack in me.
Improper use of the epithet Infidel, as used in the parodied quotation from the Clergyman’s Letter.
1189. If a man cannot be guilty of infidelity to another man’s wife, how can he be guilty of infidelity to another man’s religion? The Mohammedan wrongfully calls the Christian “infidel,” because he does not believe in Mohammed; and as wrongfully is the epithet retorted, because the Mohammedan does not believe in Christ. The epithet can only be truly applicable to those who, while professing a religion, do not act up to their professions. In this sense, Christendom, so called, teems with infidels to Christianity.
1189. If a man can’t be unfaithful to another man’s wife, how can he be unfaithful to another man’s religion? The Muslim wrongly calls the Christian “infidel” because he doesn’t believe in Muhammad; and just as wrongly is the term thrown back, because the Muslim doesn’t believe in Christ. The term can only truly apply to those who, while claiming a religion, don’t live according to their beliefs. In this sense, so-called Christendom is filled with infidels to Christianity.
On Atonement.
1191. As respects free-will, Dr. Johnson shrewdly said that all practice is in its favour, all theory against it; but whatever view may be taken on this subject, no one can deny that so far as it is possible for sin to be avoided, it must be within the power of God to make men virtuous. The fact that they are not sinless, must arise either from his not wishing to make them more virtuous, or from his inability to make them so. That he does not make them free from sin implies either a want of will or a want of power.
1191. When it comes to free will, Dr. Johnson cleverly pointed out that all actions support it, while all theories oppose it. Regardless of the perspective taken on this matter, no one can deny that as far as it is possible to avoid sin, it must be within God's ability to make people virtuous. The fact that they are not sinless must stem from either His choice not to make them more virtuous or His inability to do so. The absence of a sinless state suggests either a lack of desire or a lack of ability.
1193. All this it was in his power to obviate by not creating men, or by making their temptations less, or their power of resistance greater. But foreseeing their wickedness, and imposing fetters on his omnipotent power, so as to render a certain amount of suffering inevitable, he is said to have determined that a portion of the godhead should expiate in the flesh, by the pains of crucifixion, the punishment due to the sinful creatures which he has been supposed to have wilfully created, foreseeing this result.
1193. All of this was within his control to prevent by not creating humans, or by reducing their temptations, or increasing their ability to resist. But understanding their potential for evil and limiting his all-powerful nature to make a certain amount of suffering unavoidable, he is said to have decided that a part of the divine would atone in the flesh, through the agony of crucifixion, for the punishment owed to the sinful beings he is thought to have intentionally created, knowing this outcome.
1194. But in order to make men better, instead of using that almighty power with which he is said to have hardened the heart of Pharaoh, to soften the human heart and enlighten the human mind universally, he is made to resort to a method which, however cruel and manifestly unjust in making an innocent being suffer for the guilty, has proved utterly inefficient, since only a small minority of mankind profess Christianity, and of that minority only an imperceptible portion, if any, comply with its requisitions, as before observed; hence the greater part are liable “to be beaten with many stripes,” while those to whom the mission of Christ has been unknown are to “be beaten with but few stripes.”
1194. But to improve humanity, instead of using that powerful force he allegedly used to harden Pharaoh's heart, he should soften and enlighten everyone's heart and mind. Instead, he relies on a method that, while cruel and clearly unfair for punishing the innocent for the guilty, has been completely ineffective. Only a small portion of people follow Christianity, and of that group, only a tiny fraction, if any, actually live by its teachings. Therefore, most are at risk of being “beaten with many stripes,” while those who haven't heard of Christ's mission will “be beaten with but few stripes.”
1195. Human lawgivers may enact constitutions which result in practical failure, because they do not foresee the issue. Such failures are ascribed to their deficiency in practical wisdom. But the failure of measures for the production of any result proving it unwise, must demonstrate that it did not originate with an all-wise author; in other words, with the Almighty.
1195. Human lawmakers can create constitutions that end up failing in practice because they didn't anticipate the problems. These failures are seen as a lack of practical wisdom on their part. However, if efforts to achieve a certain outcome turn out to be unwise, it must show that it didn't come from an all-knowing source; in other words, from the Almighty.
1196. It is manifestly absurd to ascribe to that Being any measures which have failed to effect the ends for which they have been specially devised. Knowing that Mohammed would have more followers than Christ, that the largest portion of mankind would remain pagans, that even in Christendom the Christian religion would be a source of bloody contention and theological hatred, making scarcely any real Christians,—how could it originate with a wise and prescient Deity?
1196. It is obviously ridiculous to attribute to that Being any plans that didn't achieve the goals for which they were intended. Knowing that Mohammed would have more followers than Christ, that most people would still be pagans, and that even among Christians, the Christian faith would lead to violent disputes and theological hatred, producing hardly any genuine Christians—how could this come from a wise and all-knowing Deity?
1199. Arguments such as I have used are met often by referring to the evils, to which all animated nature is subjected, in the way of misery, mutilation, disease, or death. But when the government of the universe is attributed to general laws, it may be inferred that evil results from a want of power to render those laws free from bad consequences. Nothing but such limitation of power, or an indisposition to prevent those evils, can account for their occurrence. But this is widely different from assuming, in the first place, with self-called orthodoxy, that God is omnipotent, omniscient, all-wise, and all-good, and then representing him as resorting to measures for the accomplishment of his ends which are utterly inefficacious. This is accusing the Almighty of acting like an idiot. Can any thing be more preposterous, than that an all-wise, all-good, all-powerful, and all-foreseeing Deity should require the services of human missionaries to carry out his will? Would he not at least require that such messengers of his word should first agree as to what that word ought to be? A pagan might remain during his whole life a pagan, should he, before adopting any creed, require that professed Christians, in general, should agree as to the tenets which he should espouse.
1199. Arguments like the ones I've used often get dismissed by pointing to the suffering, injury, illness, or death that all living beings endure. However, when we attribute the governance of the universe to general laws, we can suggest that evil arises from a lack of power to make those laws free of negative outcomes. Only such a limitation of power, or a refusal to prevent these evils, can explain their existence. But this is very different from the self-proclaimed orthodoxy that assumes God is all-powerful, all-knowing, all-wise, and all-good, yet still portrays Him as using methods to achieve His goals that are completely ineffective. This implies that the Almighty is acting foolishly. Is there anything more absurd than suggesting that an all-wise, all-good, all-powerful, and all-knowing deity would need the help of human missionaries to fulfill His will? Wouldn’t He expect that these messengers of His word agree on what that word should be first? A pagan could spend his entire life as a pagan if he required that professed Christians, as a whole, come to a consensus on the beliefs he should adopt before embracing any creed.
1200. Agreeably to the attributes assigned to the Deity by orthodoxy, the state of things which exists in the universe cannot be otherwise than as God wishes it to be, to the falling of a sparrow; so that any change sought by man, beyond the immediate sphere of his necessities, must be an officious interference with God’s providence.
1200. According to the characteristics attributed to God by traditional beliefs, the current state of the universe must be exactly as God intends it to be, even down to the falling of a sparrow. Therefore, any change that a person seeks, beyond what is immediately necessary for them, would be an unwelcome interference with God’s plan.
1202. How can any being who contemplates the wonderful power displayed in the creation, hesitate to perceive that if the divine Architect desired that all men should coincide in their modes of worship, he would have furnished them sufficient evidence of his will, and disposed their minds to receive the desired impression?
1203. Nevertheless, his measures are represented as the inverse of these. It is represented that a creed which he wished all men to embrace was promulgated in an obscure part of an obscure country, under the yoke of heathen despotism, in a language unknown to any other people. It was so promulgated that the great majority of mankind were entirely out of232 the reach of its influence, and have remained so for nearly two thousand years. Moreover, those who have been made acquainted with Christianity are unable to agree in what it consists.
1203. However, his actions are depicted as the opposite of this. It is said that a belief he wanted everyone to follow was spread in a little-known part of a little-known country, under the control of pagan tyranny, in a language that no other people understood. It was spread in such a way that the vast majority of humanity was completely beyond its reach, and has stayed that way for almost two thousand years. Additionally, those who have learned about Christianity cannot agree on what it actually is. 232
On the massacre at Sinope, as a probable consequence of Religious Fanaticism and Intolerance.
1206. The Turks have done vastly more harm to the Greek Christians, when, with fire and sword, they subdued the Greek empire, and obliged each man to pay annually for wearing his head, than the tribe of Amalek did to the Hebrews. In the one case there does not appear to have been for centuries any repetition of the wrong; but in the other the wrongs were reiterated, and of an enduring nature. It is true that the Mohammedan sovereigns were in Turkey more tolerant of their Christian subjects than Christian sovereigns were of Mohammedans; or even of the Albigenses, Lollards, Wicliffites, Lutherans, or Calvinists. The Turks never introduced an inquisitorial tribunal to burn or torture unbelievers. On this account they may think themselves less open to the charge of cruel intolerance than some of the self-called disciples of Christ; and no doubt the discordancy between the conduct of those disciples and the precepts of their teacher, may have contributed to their contemptuous opinions of those whom they improperly call infidels to Mohammed, not perceiving that people who have not professed a religion, can no more be infidels thereto than one man can be guilty of infidelity to another man’s wife. This argument, however, would be answered by the fact that Christians call Mohammedans infidels, not in consequence of any violation of their faith in Mohammed, but because they have never had any faith in Christ.
1206. The Turks have caused far more damage to the Greek Christians by conquering the Greek Empire with fire and sword and forcing each person to pay a tax for wearing his head than the tribe of Amalek did to the Hebrews. In one case, it seems there hasn’t been a repeat of the wrong for centuries; in the other, the injustices were ongoing and long-lasting. It’s true that the Muslim rulers in Turkey were more tolerant of their Christian subjects than Christian rulers were of Muslims or even groups like the Albigenses, Lollards, Wicliffites, Lutherans, or Calvinists. The Turks never set up an inquisitional court to burn or torture non-believers. Because of this, they may consider themselves less guilty of harsh intolerance than some self-proclaimed followers of Christ; and certainly, the gap between those followers' behavior and the teachings of their leader may have led to their disrespectful views of those they mistakenly label infidels to Mohammed, not realizing that people who haven't adopted a religion can no more be infidels to it than one person can betray another person’s spouse. However, this reasoning would be countered by the fact that Christians call Muslims infidels not due to any breach of their faith in Mohammed, but because they have never had any faith in Christ.
1209. The religion taught by Mohammed, like that of Moses, authorized the most cruel wars, the extermination of nations for erroneous belief,233 while the religion of Christ directs us to love our neighbours as ourselves; to return good for evil; to give our coat when our cloak is taken; to submit passively to blows, and that the possession of wealth interferes with access to heaven. Christianity is, moreover, unfavourable to polygamy or concubinage.
1209. The religion taught by Mohammed, like that of Moses, permitted some of the most brutal wars and the destruction of nations for holding different beliefs,233 while the religion of Christ teaches us to love our neighbors as ourselves; to respond to evil with good; to give our coat when our cloak is taken; to endure hardship without retaliating, and to recognize that having wealth can hinder our access to heaven. Additionally, Christianity is not supportive of polygamy or concubinage.
1210. It follows that the precepts of Jesus call for restraint upon the predominant passions of human nature, while those of Mohammed, in justifying warfare, excessive indulgence in women, and in the spoliation and massacre of unbelievers, coincide with the most predominating propensities of human nature. It is, therefore, far easier to be faithful to the precepts of Mohammed than those of Christ.
1210. It follows that the teachings of Jesus require self-control over the dominant passions of human nature, while those of Mohammed, by justifying warfare, excessive indulgence in women, and the plunder and killing of non-believers, align with the strongest tendencies of human nature. It is, therefore, much easier to adhere to the teachings of Mohammed than those of Christ.
1212. None of the ancient Pagans were as hostile to the Hebrews, as the disciples of Mohammed have been to the Greek Christians. But not even the Mohammedans have been so intolerant to those whom they call infidels, as Christian sectarians have been, to such persons as they have dogmatically adjudged to be heretics.
1214. Whenever men adopt the idea entertained by the Jews and Mohammedans, and certain sects of Christians, that a peculiar creed is necessary to salvation, it is deemed humane to inflict any temporal evil in order to eradicate any other belief which will subject souls to eternal punishment. When to the Catholics in the reign of Queen Mary it was urged that burning heretics alive would not change their creed, the reply was, that although the victims should not be converted, the souls of their progeny would be saved from damnation by the extirpation of the heresy with the heretics. Admitting the premises, the conclusion was correct, and the auto-da-fé and the tortures of the inquisition were even more excusable than a painful chirurgical operation, when it preserves the temporal life of the patient.
1214. Whenever people adopt the belief held by Jews, Muslims, and certain groups of Christians that a specific creed is essential for salvation, it is considered humane to inflict any temporary harm to eliminate any other belief that might condemn souls to eternal suffering. When it was suggested to Catholics during Queen Mary's reign that burning heretics alive wouldn't change their beliefs, the response was that, although the victims wouldn't be converted, the souls of their descendants would be saved from damnation by removing heresy along with the heretics. Accepting the premises, the conclusion was accurate, and the auto-da-fé and the tortures of the Inquisition were viewed as even more justifiable than a painful surgical procedure that preserves the patient's life.
1216. Moreover, by some Christians, Jesus is considered as having sanctioned the retention of that characteristic of the Hebrew portraiture of Jehovah, which makes it right to exterminate unbelievers in the orthodox creed. This must be a source of discord wherever it is recognised, as it induces persecution from conscientious regard to the salvation of the victims upon whom it acts, while in them it naturally creates bitter resentment instead of gratitude.
1216. Additionally, some Christians view Jesus as having approved the continuation of the trait in the Hebrew depiction of Jehovah that justifies the elimination of unbelievers in the orthodox belief system. This inevitably leads to conflict wherever it is acknowledged, as it drives persecution motivated by genuine concern for the salvation of the victims affected, while naturally fostering deep resentment in those individuals instead of gratitude.
1217. Having submitted the representations of Jehovah, given in the Old Testament, I will subjoin those of the great modern philosopher Newton, and those of Seneca, one of the most distinguished sages of antiquity. The reader may, from these data, judge how far piety or morality would suffer, were that ancient record to give way to the direct evidence of Spiritualism.
1217. After presenting the views of Jehovah as outlined in the Old Testament, I will add the perspectives of the great modern philosopher Newton and those of Seneca, one of the most renowned thinkers of ancient times. From this information, the reader can assess to what extent piety or morality might be affected if that ancient record were replaced by the direct evidence of Spiritualism.
Opinions of God held by Sir Isaac Newton.—Enfield’s Philosophy, Page 638.
1220. “This most beautiful system of the sun, planets, and comets could only arise from the counsel and dominion of an intelligent and powerful being; and if the fixed stars be centres of similar systems, these, being all formed by like wisdom, must be subject to the dominion of one; especially since the light of the fixed stars is of the same nature with the light of the sun; and all systems mutually give and receive light.
1220. “This incredible system of the sun, planets, and comets could only come from the guidance and control of an intelligent and powerful being; and if the fixed stars are centers of similar systems, then these, being all created by the same wisdom, must be under the authority of one; especially since the light from the fixed stars is similar to the light of the sun; and all systems exchange light with one another.
1221. “God governs all things, not as the soul of the world, but as the Lord of the universe. The Supreme Deity is an eternal, infinite, and absolutely perfect being, omnipotent and omniscient; that is, his duration extends from eternity to eternity, and his presence from infinity to infinity; he governs all things, and knows all things which exist, or can be known. He is not eternity or infinity; but eternal and infinite; he is not duration or space; but he endures and is present; he endures forever and is present everywhere. Since every portion of space is always, and every indivisible moment of duration is everywhere, certainly the Maker and Lord of all things cannot be never or nowhere. God is omnipresent, not virtually only, but substantially; for power cannot subsist without substance. In him all things are contained and move, but without reciprocal affection. God is not affected by the motion of bodies, nor do bodies suffer resistance from the omnipresence of God.
1221. “God rules everything, not as the soul of the world, but as the Lord of the universe. The Supreme Being is an eternal, infinite, and perfectly complete entity, all-powerful and all-knowing; his existence stretches from eternity to eternity, and his presence spans from infinity to infinity; he governs everything and knows all things that exist or can be known. He is not eternity or infinity; rather, he is eternal and infinite; he is not duration or space; but he lasts and is present; he lasts forever and is present everywhere. Since every part of space is always available, and every indivisible moment of time is everywhere, certainly the Maker and Lord of all things cannot be never or nowhere. God is omnipresent, not just in a virtual sense, but in a substantial way; for power cannot exist without substance. In him, all things exist and move, but without mutual influence. God is not affected by the movement of bodies, nor do bodies experience resistance from the omnipresence of God.”
1222. “It is universally allowed that God exists necessarily; and by the same necessity he exists always and everywhere. Whence he is throughout similar, all eye, all ear, all brain, all arm, all power of perceiving, understanding, and acting; but in a manner not at all human, not at all corporeal; in a manner to us altogether unknown. As a blind man has no idea of colours, so we have no idea of the manner in which the most wise God perceives and understands all things. He is entirely without body, and bodily form, and therefore can neither be seen, nor heard, no235r touched; nor ought he to be worshipped under any corporeal representation. We have ideas of his attributes, but what the substance of any thing is, we are wholly ignorant. We see only the figures and colours of bodies; we hear only sounds; we touch only external superficies; we smell only odours; we taste only savours; of their internal substance we have no knowledge by any sense, or by any reflex act of the mind; much less have we any idea of the substance of God. We know him only by his properties and attributes, by the most wise and excellent structure of things, and by final causes; and we reverence and worship him on account of his dominion. A God without dominion, providence, and design, is nothing else but fate and nature.”
1222. “It's generally accepted that God exists necessarily; and by that same necessity, He exists always and everywhere. Therefore, He is uniformly present, all-seeing, all-hearing, all-knowing, all-powerful in perceiving, understanding, and acting; but in a way that is entirely non-human and non-physical; in a way that is completely unknown to us. Just as a blind person has no concept of colors, we have no idea how the most wise God perceives and understands everything. He is completely without body or form, and so cannot be seen, heard, or touched; nor should He be worshipped through any physical representation. We have concepts of His attributes, but we are completely ignorant of what the substance of any thing actually is. We only see the shapes and colors of objects; we hear only sounds; we touch only surfaces; we smell only scents; we taste only flavors; we have no knowledge of their internal substance through any sense or through any reflective thought; let alone do we have any idea of God's substance. We know Him only through His properties and attributes, through the wise and excellent design of things, and through final causes; and we honor and worship Him because of His sovereignty. A God without sovereignty, providence, and purpose is nothing more than chance and nature.”
1223. The language above quoted does not involve the idea that Newton owed his idea of God to the Bible, or that he considered him as having any person, much less that he consisted of three persons. He makes no allusion to Christ or to the Scriptures. His opinions are quite reconcilable with Theism, but incompatible with the existence of the Trinity.
1223. The quoted language doesn’t suggest that Newton derived his concept of God from the Bible, nor does it imply that he viewed God as a person, let alone as three persons. He doesn’t reference Christ or the Scriptures. His views are consistent with Theism but incompatible with the idea of the Trinity.
On God and his Attributes, by Seneca.
1225. “We begin to know God from his works. What is God? All that you see, and all that you do not see. In what does the nature of God and man differ? The best part of man is his mind; in God there is nothing but mind. He is pure spirit. Many names are applicable to him. Do you call him Fate? You do not err. He it is upon whom every thing depends. The cause of causes. Do you call him Providence? You are right. It is by his appointment that this world is so arranged that it performs without confusion the part assigned to it. Do you call him Nature? You do not sin. It is he from whom all things are produced.
1225. “We start to understand God through his creations. What is God? Everything you see, and everything you don't see. How do God and man differ? The best part of man is his mind; in God, there is nothing but mind. He is pure spirit. He goes by many names. If you call him Fate, you’re not wrong. He is the foundation of everything. The cause of causes. If you call him Providence, you are right. It is by his design that this world is organized to function smoothly in its designated role. If you call him Nature, you are correct. He is the source from which everything comes.”
1226. “You may properly apply to God any name expressive of celestial power. All his benefits may give rise to distinctive appellations. Thus he is called Father, Hercules, Mercury, &c. Father, because he is truly the Father of all; Hercules, because he is omnipotent; Mercury, because he is pure Reason, the principle of science, of order, and of harmony.
1226. “You can suitably refer to God by any name that reflects divine power. All his blessings can lead to different titles. So, he is called Father, Hercules, Mercury, etc. Father, because he is genuinely the Father of everyone; Hercules, because he is all-powerful; Mercury, because he represents pure Reason, the foundation of knowledge, order, and harmony."
1230. “Who is so wretched, so neglected, who born to so cruel a destiny, as not to have received any benefits from the gods? Look at those who complain of their lot, you will find that they are not deprived of all comforts. Is the gift of life nothing? Are there no objects pleasant to the eye, to the ear, or to the mind? God’s kindness does not only supply us with what is necessary to existence, he provides also for our pleasure. Witness the variety of fruits, differing in flavour; the many healthful vegetables, so great a variety of food for different seasons of the year, some produced from the earth without culture, even for the idle; animals of all kinds abounding in the earth, the sea, and the air, as if all things in nature were tributary to our enjoyment. Consider the rivers flowing gracefully through the fields which they fertilize; others, whose deep beds in their vast and navigable courses, afford the means of a profitable commerce, or by overflowing their banks during the drought and heat of summer, water the parched earth and cause it to bring forth abundantly. You deny that you have received any favours, and yet are unwilling to part with what you possess. There are some philosophers who do not appreciate the divine gifts. They complain that we are not endowed with perfect health, incorruptible virtue, and foreknowledge. They scarcely refrain from impudently despising nature, that she has made us less than gods. How much better would it be to return thanks to the gods for the many benefits we have received, and for placing us in this beautiful world, and subjecting it to our rule, as their vicegerents.
1230. “Who is so unfortunate and overlooked, who is destined for such a cruel fate, that they haven’t received any blessings from the gods? Look at those who complain about their situation; you’ll see they aren’t completely stripped of comfort. Is the gift of life meaningless? Are there no sights, sounds, or thoughts that bring us joy? God’s generosity not only provides what we need to survive but also takes care of our enjoyment. Just look at the variety of fruits, each with its unique flavor; the many nutritious vegetables, and the vast range of food available for different seasons of the year, some even growing without effort, even for the lazy; animals of all kinds filling the land, sea, and sky, as if everything in nature exists for our pleasure. Think about the rivers that flow beautifully through the fields they nourish; others, with their deep channels and wide, navigable paths, enable profitable trade, or flood their banks during the summer droughts, watering the dry earth and leading it to produce abundantly. You claim that you haven’t received any favors, yet you refuse to let go of what you have. Some philosophers fail to appreciate the divine gifts. They grumble that we aren’t granted perfect health, unchanging virtue, and foreknowledge. They nearly disrespect nature for creating us as less than gods. How much wiser it would be to be grateful to the gods for the countless blessings we've received, for placing us in this stunning world, and allowing us to govern it as their representatives.”
1231. “The Deity has thought of us from the beginning; and this world has been so arranged as to make his care of us manifest. We admit our obligation to love our parents, as those from whom we derive our existence. They were, however, certainly not the authors of our existence, but were utterly ignorant of the mysteries of nature.
1231. “The Divine has had us in mind from the start; and this world has been set up to clearly show how much He cares for us. We recognize that we owe love to our parents, as they are the ones through whom we came into being. However, they were definitely not the creators of our existence and were completely unaware of the mysteries of nature."
1233. “The strong instinct of a mother, making her willing to endure any privation for the helpless stranger; the sacred fountain which, at the moment it is wanted, flows from the mother’s breast; the air adapted to the lungs, the light to the eye: what more shall I say?—a present God is revealed!
1233. “A mother’s strong instinct makes her ready to go through any hardship for that helpless little one. The precious source that flows from a mother’s breast just when it’s needed, the air that fits perfectly in our lungs, the light that helps us see: what else can I say?—a present God is revealed!
1234. “Our kind Father begins to bestow benefits on us before we are capable of perceiving our obligations to him, and continues them even when we are ungrateful. Some accuse him of forgetting them; some of injuring them; others believe him to be regardless of his works; nevertheless, like a good parent, who smiles at the follies of his children, God does not cease to confer his benefits on those who deny his existence, but237 with an equal eye regards all nations, and uses his power only to bless. He sprinkles the earth with soft showers; he moves the sea by his breath; tempers the severity of winter and the heat of summer, and is placable to the errors of imperfect mortals.”
1234. “Our kind Father starts giving us benefits before we even realize we owe him anything, and he keeps giving them even when we’re ungrateful. Some people think he forgets us; some think he harms us; others believe he ignores his creation; still, like a good parent who smiles at their children's silly mistakes, God doesn’t stop blessing those who deny him, but237 sees all nations equally and uses his power solely to bring good. He showers the earth with gentle rain; he stirs the sea with his breath; softens the harshness of winter and the heat of summer, and is forgiving of the mistakes of flawed humans.”
On the Better Employment of the First Day of the Week.
1235. The subjoined essay, as above designated, was written nearly ten years ago, before the author had any hope that any knowledge of a future state would be mercifully afforded through himself, as well as many others, which would supply the only deficiency in the elements requisite to the proposed innovation. Fortunately the doctrines, since taught by the spirits, entirely corroborate the suggestions of this essay; so that Spiritualism, natural religion, and literature, may hereafter go hand in hand on Sunday.
1235. The essay attached here, as mentioned above, was written nearly ten years ago, before the author had any hope that he or others would be mercifully given knowledge of a future state, which would fill the only gap in the elements needed for the proposed change. Fortunately, the ideas taught by the spirits since then completely support the suggestions in this essay; so that Spiritualism, natural religion, and literature may now go hand in hand on Sundays.
1236. This now gloomy day, may, through the happy united instrumentality suggested, become a day of real intellectual improvement, as well as of every species of variety of innocent recreation. Yet every species of selfish sensual pleasure will be avoided and condemned by every conscientious believer in spiritual manifestations.
1236. This now somber day might, through the joyful combined efforts suggested, turn into a day of genuine intellectual growth, as well as a diverse range of innocent fun. However, every form of selfish physical pleasure will be shunned and disapproved by any sincere believer in spiritual experiences.
1237. It is suggested that persons opposed to sabbatarianism, inconsistent with the early and long-continued practice of Christianity, and with the freedom of conscience guaranteed by the Constitution of the United States, should unite to render Sunday (erroneously called the Sabbath) a day of moral, literary, and scientific instruction, for those who, dissatisfied with the sectarianism of the existing places of worship, pass the day without edifying occupation.
1237. It is suggested that people who oppose sabbatarianism, which goes against the early and long-standing practices of Christianity and the freedom of conscience guaranteed by the United States Constitution, should come together to make Sunday (incorrectly referred to as the Sabbath) a day for moral, literary, and scientific education for those who, unhappy with the sectarianism of current places of worship, spend the day without productive engagement.
1238. The object of this association would be to contemplate the Deity, agreeably to the opinions entertained by the first and one of the best of philosophers, Sir Isaac Newton; the sentiments of morality comprised in the precepts ascribed to Confucius, as well as to Christ, “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.”
1243. As favouring toleration, the sentiments expressed by Seneca, the238 Roman sage, should be cherished. The sentiments of this sage prove that among the heathens a more pious idea of God existed than that given by the Bible, which represents him as jealous, and as punishing not only the individual, but his posterity, for an involuntary ignorance, which by a mere fiat, omnipotency could correct.
1243. Supporting tolerance, the views shared by Seneca, the238 Roman philosopher, should be valued. His beliefs show that even among pagans, a more reverent concept of God existed than the one portrayed in the Bible, which depicts Him as jealous and punishing not only individuals but also their descendants for an unintentional lack of knowledge that, with just a command, omnipotence could easily resolve.
1245. Instead of teaching people to dislike and disesteem those who may differ from them, as to the designation, form, or name under which the Deity is to be worshipped, it should be held that no person of sound mind would waste his time and his energies in worshipping that which he does not conscientiously believe to be entitled to adoration, any more than a man will knowingly pay a debt to or court the favour of one to whom he owes nothing, and from whom he cannot expect any thing in return. It might be argued as reasonably, that a person in paying by mistake a forged draft, is less honest than in paying one which is genuine, as that a virtuous pagan is to have less favour with God than any other man, however orthodox his creed. (See Theological Axioms, page 34.)
1245. Instead of teaching people to dislike and devalue those who may have different beliefs about how to worship the Deity, we should recognize that no one with a sound mind would spend their time and energy worshipping something they don't truly believe deserves reverence. It's similar to how someone wouldn't willingly pay a debt or seek favor from someone to whom they owe nothing and expect nothing in return. One could argue just as reasonably that a person who accidentally pays a forged check is less honest than someone who pays a legitimate one, just as a virtuous non-believer could be viewed as having less favor with God than anyone else, no matter how orthodox their beliefs may be. (See Theological Axioms, page 34.)
1246. Were a lessee to pay a forged order for rent due to his landlord, would the latter strive to punish him for the mistake, especially if so wealthy as not to feel the want of the money? But what would be said of the landlord who, knowing that his lessee had received an erroneous impression as to the owner of his tenement, should allow him to pay year after year without any effort to prevent him from being cheated? Would not this deprive him of moral if not of legal claim to the rent? God is represented as omniscient, and consequently as cognizant of the misapprehension which leads the pagan to kneel before his idol, and yet without either influencing his mind, or placing before him any evidence of his error, punishing him for his mistake.
1246. If a tenant were to pay a fake rent invoice to their landlord, would the landlord try to penalize them for the mistake, especially if they were wealthy enough not to need the money? But what about the landlord who, knowing that the tenant had a wrong understanding about who owned the property, allows them to pay year after year without making any effort to stop this deception? Wouldn't that take away any moral, if not legal, right to the rent? God is seen as all-knowing, and therefore aware of the misunderstanding that leads a person to worship an idol, yet without changing their mind or providing any proof of their error, punishes them for their mistake.
1247. It should, moreover, be an object to prove the greatness and goodness of God, by making men acquainted with the wondrous miracles of that universe of which a nook has been assigned to the inhabitants of this planet, which, in comparison with the totality, is as minute as any grain of sand which contributes to form our terrestrial globe is to the whole mass of which it constitutes a part—so insignificant. It should be an object to show how that “honesty is the best policy,”—the bad never being happy.
1247. It should also serve to demonstrate the greatness and goodness of God by making people aware of the incredible miracles in the universe, of which a small corner has been set aside for the inhabitants of this planet. This planet, in the grand scheme of things, is as tiny as a grain of sand is to the whole Earth. It should be a goal to show that “honesty is the best policy,” because those who are dishonest are never truly happy.
1248. Those well-educated sectarians of different creeds should be held wanting in humility, who severally considered themselves free from that error in belief to which they deem all other men liable. It is conceived, also, that individuals are answerable for their opinions to God only, and that for one man to condemn another for not thinking as he himself thinks, is to violate the precept, “judge not, lest ye be judged,” and the golden rule of acting toward other men as you would have them act toward you.
1248. Those well-educated people from various beliefs should recognize their lack of humility if they think they are free from the errors in belief they believe others have. It’s also understood that individuals are accountable for their opinions only to God, and that when one person condemns another for not thinking the same way he does, it goes against the teaching, “judge not, lest ye be judged,” as well as the golden rule of treating others the way you want to be treated.
1249. Since our missions are all intended to induce pagans and others to think freely as respects the tenets in which they have been educated, how can it be otherwise than proper for every person to think without fear of denunciation upon the tenets of his ancestry. Are we to deny ourselves the liberty of thought, which we claim for all who differ from us as to their creeds?
1249. Since our missions aim to encourage pagans and others to think freely about the beliefs they were raised with, how can it be anything but right for everyone to think without fear of criticism regarding their ancestral beliefs? Are we supposed to give up our freedom to think, which we advocate for everyone who holds different beliefs?
1250. A sectarian who is a Christian only as to observances, and is therefore really a practical infidel, accuses a man of infidelity who is practically a Christian, so far as Christianity and virtue are associated, because that man does not arrive at his morality by the route which his denunciator points out, but never follows to any good purpose.
1250. A sectarian who is Christian only in terms of ritual, and is therefore really a practical nonbeliever, accuses a man of being unfaithful who is actually a Christian, as far as Christianity and virtue go, because that man doesn’t achieve his moral values through the method that his accuser suggests, which he never truly follows to any positive end.
Additional Remarks respecting the Observance of the Sabbath, so called.
1252. It is believed that a great majority of the people of the United States, while favourable to the observance of Sunday as a day of worship, of innocent recreation, and of moral and intellectual improvement, are adverse to the legal enforcement of restrictions introduced into Christianity by puritanism. They do not consider the first day of the week as liable to the commandment given to the Jews for the observance of the seventh day; still less that the innocent recreation allowed to the Jews under that commandment is to be denied to Christians on that day of rest. The commandment forbids work, but does not prohibit recreation. That it was thus viewed by the Hebrews, is asserted upon the authority of a learned Jew.
1252. It is thought that a large majority of people in the United States, while supportive of Sunday as a day for worship, enjoyable activities, and moral and intellectual growth, are against the legal enforcement of restrictions that puritanism introduced into Christianity. They don't see the first day of the week as subject to the commandment given to the Jews for observing the seventh day; even less do they believe that the innocent recreation allowed to the Jews under that commandment should be denied to Christians on that day of rest. The commandment forbids work, but does not prohibit recreation. This perspective was supported by a learned Jewish scholar.
1255. Precepts may lead, but example will draw. Aware of this, is it conceivable that God would enjoin man to keep any day holy, and yet fail to keep it holy himself? Regulating the blowing of the winds, as well as the falling of sparrows, when creating a storm, would he not be responsible for forcing the breach of the Sabbath upon the mariner?
1256. Ought the farmer to lose his crops in order to avoid working on Sunday? The Romans took advantage of the Hebrew Sabbath to make their advances upon Jerusalem, the tenets of the Jews restricting them from resistance; yet there was no divine interference to shield this chosen240 people against the heathen conqueror, or to assist them in the observance of the commandment.
1256. Should the farmer sacrifice his crops to avoid working on Sunday? The Romans exploited the Hebrew Sabbath to attack Jerusalem, as the Jews' beliefs prevented them from fighting back; yet there was no divine intervention to protect this chosen240 people from the pagan conqueror or to help them follow the commandment.
1257. The plea on which the commandment was founded is manifestly groundless—that an omnipotent God could be so weary as to require rest. But it has been suggested by enlightened Christians, that the six days were periods of immense duration, and of course the seventh day being like the rest could not be a day of twenty-four hours, like the Jewish Sabbath so called, but, on the contrary, an era comprising many ages.
1257. The argument that the commandment was based on is clearly unfounded—that an all-powerful God could be so tired that He needs rest. However, some progressive Christians have proposed that the six days were actually long periods of time, and therefore the seventh day, like the other six, couldn't just be a 24-hour day like the so-called Jewish Sabbath, but rather, it could be an era that spans many ages.
If Creatures be not so created as to love their Neighbours as themselves, precepts can no more alter them in this respect, than change the Colour of their Hair, or the Number of Cubits in their Stature.
1258. In the spheres, agreeably to the communication received from spirits, great importance is attached to the friendship, the affection, and the ardent love, which may subsist between congenial minds or souls; they seem to recognise love as something which cannot be felt by all to all; so that while benevolence, charity, and sympathy may be sentiments entertained to mankind generally, there are other sentiments which require concentration, in order to have any efficacy. Of this nature are parental, filial, and conjugal affection, as well as other intimate friendships.
1258. According to the messages received from spirits, friendship, affection, and deep love are considered very important in the spiritual realms. They seem to see love as something that isn't universally experienced by everyone. While kindness, charity, and sympathy can be feelings directed towards all of humanity, there are other emotions that need focus to be effective. This includes parental, childlike, and marital love, along with other close friendships.
1259. Sympathy between the parent and child, between husband and wife, and likewise occasionally between brothers and sisters, or such friends as Pylades and Orestes, may be so strong as to induce the risk, if not the loss of life, but this sympathy cannot be self-induced. Where, from principle, a person may determine to make the sacrifice, not from impulse, he cannot endow himself with the sensitiveness which would make him feel for the sufferer as for himself. A being may admire such a sentiment, and have an ambition to be so actuated, but that would not create the sensibility to which its existence is due. It has been alleged that Napoleon’s mother said of him, as I remember to have read somewhere: “He wished to have a good heart.” The most that can be done is to act as if we did love, and consequently sympathize, so as to feel the pains and privations of another as if they were our own. But it were inconsistent to entertain a love so powerful and peculiar, and not give our time, thought, services, or attention to the object of our affection. It were inconsistent so to love and keep at a distance, and behave toward the object as if we were indifferent. But were the sentiment to be felt universally, or even generally, there would be such a cutting up of our time, service, or attention, that, as respects any individual in particular, it would be nugatory, and might as well not exist. There would likewise be such a multiplicity and perplexity of yearnings that it would distract the heart, perhaps place it in a less happy condition than if it were devoid of any affection whatever.
1259. Sympathy between parents and children, between husbands and wives, and sometimes between siblings or close friends like Pylades and Orestes, can be so powerful that it brings about the risk, if not the actual loss, of life. However, this type of sympathy can’t be created on one's own. When someone decides to sacrifice for a principle, rather than out of impulse, they can't give themselves the sensitivity that would allow them to feel for someone suffering as they would for themselves. A person may admire that kind of sentiment and want to feel it, but that desire alone won't generate the sensitivity that comes with it. It’s been said that Napoleon's mother remarked about him that “He wished to have a good heart.” The most we can do is pretend to love and thereby empathize, allowing us to feel another's pain and hardships as if they were our own. But it would be inconsistent to feel such a powerful and unique love without dedicating our time, thoughts, efforts, or attention to the one we care about. It makes no sense to love deeply and yet maintain distance, acting indifferent towards the person we claim to care for. However, if this sentiment were felt universally or even widely, it would fragment our time, energy, and attention to the point where, in relation to any specific individual, it would be meaningless and might as well not exist. There would also be so many competing emotions that it could overwhelm the heart, possibly leaving it in a worse state than if it had no affection at all.
1260. Although temporal life may at times be sacrificed by one being to save that of another, it is manifestly because the being who makes the241 sacrifice is constituted so nobly as to endure less pain under the circumstances in question in making than avoiding self-immolation. But can any one who has not been so organized and educated as to make such a sacrifice, be sufficiently changed by preaching, or monition, to undergo self-immolation to save a fellow-creature?
1260. While one person might sometimes sacrifice their life to save another, it's clear that the person making that sacrifice is so noble that they feel less pain from doing it than from avoiding the act of self-immolation. But can someone who hasn't been raised or taught to make such a sacrifice really be transformed by preaching or advice enough to give up their life for another?
1261. Is it reasonable to order, direct, or advise people to love, especially on the part of any one who by his acknowledged omnipotency could so constitute them as to sympathize to any required extent? I admit, that it may be consistent to urge them to act toward others, as far as possible, as if they were loved.[25]
1261. Is it reasonable to tell people to love one another, especially when someone with recognized power could make them feel love to any extent needed? I agree that it might make sense to encourage them to treat others as if they were loved.[25]
1262. Should not the great object of cultivation be sympathy and benevolence, which are general in their nature? We may deeply sympathize with a sufferer, even with a brute, whom we do not love. Benevolence should we not also cultivate, by endeavouring habitually to take the most favourable view of those around us which our observation and reason can permit? Does it not argue a want of discrimination to treat love as a sentiment, to be entertained toward all other mortals by mere volition? Is it reasonable that Christ, or any other teacher, assuming to be missionaries of the Creator, should enjoin us to love, when the capacity for that sentiment manifestly varies through organization and education, derived from that Creator by various human beings, as much nearly, as the opposite propensities of the wolf and dog? Behold the difference between the elephant and rhinoceros: the former capable of a canine fidelity and affection, the latter irretrievably hostile; and again between a wild elephant and one tamed by education.
1262. Shouldn't the main goal of development be empathy and kindness, which are universal in nature? We can deeply empathize with someone who is suffering, even a creature we don't care for. Shouldn't we also work on kindness by trying to consistently see the best in those around us, based on what we observe and rationalize? Doesn't it show a lack of discernment to treat love as just a feeling we should have toward all other people simply by choice? Is it fair to expect Christ or any other teacher, who claims to be messengers of the Creator, to instruct us to love, when the ability to feel that way clearly varies among individuals, influenced by their experiences and upbringing from the Creator, much like the stark differences between a wolf and a dog? Look at the contrast between the elephant and the rhinoceros: the former capable of loyal affection, the latter unavoidably aggressive; and similarly between a wild elephant and one that has been domesticated through training.
1263. Were his organization and education dependent on himself, it might be reasonable to say to a human being, Love your neighbour as yourself, love your enemies; but how can that Deity who determines man’s race and his parentage, and of course whether he be a savage or a civilized man, whether a Thug or a real Christian, if such a thing can be,—how can that Deity require a being to do that which is irreconcilable with his passions, opinions, and habits, derived from nature and education, as well as the examples set by those around him?
1263. If a person's identity and education were entirely up to them, it might make sense to say to someone, "Love your neighbor as yourself, love your enemies." But how can that Deity, who decides a person's race and background, and therefore whether they are a savage or a civilized person, whether a Thug or a real Christian, if such a thing exists—how can that Deity ask someone to do something that conflicts with their feelings, beliefs, and habits shaped by their nature, upbringing, and the examples set by those around them?
1264. The inutility of precepts in controlling human passions, may be seen in the history of Christendom, in which, as already urged, the morals and conduct of mankind, with very few exceptions, have been diametrically opposite to that of their divine Master, so called. Who have been more242 aggressive than the great majority of professed Christians? Who have been more actuated by cupidity? Yet these votaries have been, for the most part, vociferous in their professions of devotedness to Christ, making him the Son of God as well as their teacher, and too often cruelly maltreating those who have denied his divinity.
1264. The uselessness of rules in controlling human emotions can be seen in the history of Christianity, where, as previously mentioned, the morals and actions of people, with very few exceptions, have been completely opposite to those of their so-called divine Master. Who has been more242 aggressive than the vast majority of self-proclaimed Christians? Who has been more driven by greed? Yet these followers have mostly been loud in their claims of loyalty to Christ, identifying him as the Son of God and their teacher, while often cruelly mistreating those who reject his divinity.
1265. Both on the part of the ancient Jews, or on that of modern Christians, religion has been made an excuse or a plea for despoiling unbelievers of their patrimony. In the contention respecting the right to Oregon, the great question, on which judgment was to turn, was, which of all of the Christian potentates claiming it, was the first to lay his longing eyes upon the object of contention? It has been shown that the massacre of whole nations involved no criminality, provided they were pagans. David put to the sword the pagan communities, man, woman, and child, during which time Jehovah was with him. The pagans being mere vermin in the estimation of the Jewish deity, the wrongs done to them were not cited as among David’s misdoings. No Nathan came to call him to account for his flagitious conduct to them, or to Achish, (1 Sam. xxvii. 8 to 12.)
1265. Both in ancient Jewish culture and in modern Christianity, religion has often been used as a justification for taking the property of nonbelievers. In the debate over the rights to Oregon, the key issue was which Christian ruler got to the area first. It has been demonstrated that the massacre of entire nations was not considered wrong as long as they were pagans. David killed the pagan populations—men, women, and children—while he had the support of Jehovah. Since pagans were viewed as mere pests by the Jewish God, the harm inflicted upon them was not considered among David’s wrongs. No prophet came to hold him accountable for his heinous actions against them or against Achish (1 Sam. xxvii. 8 to 12).
Attacks upon the authenticity of Scripture cannot endanger the prevalent morality, which, while it is superior to that of the Old Testament, indicates a recklessness of the precepts of Christ, excepting so far as they make faith a counterpoise for sin.
1267. In the preceding pages, I have endeavoured to show that the existing morality of Christendom does not owe its existence to Christianity. My object has been to do away the apprehension that this morality would be deprived of its foundation were Spiritualism or any other innovation to be accredited which would be inconsistent with revelation. But I hope I have shown that whatever merit may be possessed by the existing state of morals, it cannot be ascribed to any influence exercised by those precepts of Christ which are not only neglected, but acted in diametric opposition to.
1267. In the previous pages, I’ve tried to demonstrate that the current morality of Christendom doesn’t come from Christianity. My aim has been to dispel the fear that this morality would lose its foundation if Spiritualism or any other new idea were accepted that contradicts revelation. But I hope I’ve shown that any value found in the current state of morals cannot be attributed to the teachings of Christ, which are not only ignored but are often directly opposed.
1268. Another cause of alarm has been that it would weaken that belief in a future state of rewards and punishments which is so essential to encourage virtue and repress vice. But it has been pointed out that the authority of Moses is against the existence of a future state, not merely negatively, but positively, so far as any authority is given to him as inspired by God. For what stronger argument need there be that there is no state of existence beyond the grave, than the fact that the being who of all mankind solely had immediate converse with the Deity, should not have learned from him the all-important fact? If, as now held generally among Chris243tians, an unbeliever in a future state is culpable in the sight of God, as well as theirs, and disqualified from testifying in courts of justice, can it be conceived that God would have failed to communicate a knowledge of immortal existence to his favourite lawgiver; or how could that lawgiver have been so devoid of that desire for immortality as to have been satisfied to remain ignorant?
1268. Another reason for concern has been that it would undermine the belief in a future state of rewards and punishments, which is crucial for promoting virtue and discouraging vice. However, it has been noted that Moses' authority actually argues against the existence of a future state, not just indirectly, but directly, as far as any authority he has as someone inspired by God. What stronger argument could there be that there is no existence beyond the grave than the fact that the one person in all of humanity who had direct communication with God did not learn from Him this essential truth? If, as is now widely believed among Christians, someone who does not believe in a future state is guilty in God’s eyes, as well as theirs, and unqualified to testify in court, could it be imagined that God would not have revealed the knowledge of eternal life to His chosen lawgiver? Or how could that lawgiver have been so lacking in the desire for immortality that he would have been content to remain uninformed?
1270. Converts from Materialism to Spiritualism, who have shown much zeal in the investigation of the subject, and eagerness in believing in immortality as soon as evidence was obtained, were, by certain sectarians, doomed to hell for their heresy. Yet this Hebrew materialist, who made no use of his transcendent opportunities of acquiring correct knowledge of futurity from the Deity, is made an object of veneration, and the book which he wrote, while devoid of this pre-eminently important information, is worshipped as an idol.
1270. People who shifted from Materialism to Spiritualism, showing great enthusiasm in exploring the topic and a strong belief in immortality as soon as they found evidence, were, by some sects, condemned to hell for their beliefs. Yet, this Hebrew materialist, who did not take advantage of his unique chance to gain accurate knowledge about the future from the Divine, is honored and revered, while the book he wrote, lacking this crucial information, is treated like an idol.
1271. His allegations that God authorized the Israelites to borrow in order to purloin, or that he authorized the murder of the people misled by Aaron to worship the golden calf, are manifestly as false as blasphemous. Then why imagine that mankind can suffer by the substitution of a belief in a future state associated with the purest principles of morality, for the books of Moses, which sanction crimes and discredit immortality?
1271. His claims that God allowed the Israelites to borrow to steal, or that He condoned the killing of those misled by Aaron to worship the golden calf, are clearly as false as they are blasphemous. So why believe that humanity would be harmed by replacing the belief in a future state linked to the highest moral principles with the books of Moses, which endorse crimes and undermine the idea of immortality?
1272. As respects any subsequent alleged inspirations to which Pharisees, the papists of Judea, owed their professed belief in a future state, in the first place, we have the authority of Christ for viewing them as hypocrites: externally, like whited sepulchres, internally, as no less corrupt than dead men’s bones. Of course there is reason, on this account, to doubt whether they acquired a sincere belief in a future state from any part of Scripture. But evidently it did not make them moral. Their immorality, on the contrary, was made more hideous by the cloak of false religion. Nothing is more detestable than to see religion in men’s mouths, with cupidity and unprincipled ambition at their hearts. Yet this much may be said for the Pharisees, that they had not professed themselves Christians, and thus subject to those precepts of Jesus which place the acquisition of wealth on a level with felony as respects the accessibility to heaven. The Pharisees of Christendom, even those who assumed to be exclusively the depositories of revelation and sole expounders of God’s word, have been absolutely as wicked as the Pharisees, and relatively more wicked by the monstrous discordancy of their course with their professed devotion to the ultra precepts of the alleged Son of their God.
1272. Regarding any later supposed inspirations that the Pharisees, who were the religious leaders of Judea, claimed led to their professed belief in an afterlife, we can rely on Christ's authority to see them as hypocrites: outwardly, they appeared clean like whitewashed tombs, but inwardly, they were as corrupt as decaying bones. Because of this, we can reasonably doubt that they had a genuine belief in an afterlife derived from any Scripture. However, it’s clear that this belief didn’t make them moral. Their immorality was made even worse by the disguise of fake religion. There’s nothing more disgusting than seeing people use religion to mask their greed and ruthless ambition. Yet, it can be said that the Pharisees didn’t profess to be Christians, and thus weren’t subject to Jesus's teachings that equate the pursuit of wealth with serious wrongdoing in relation to entering heaven. The Pharisees of Christendom, including those who claimed to be the exclusive holders of revelation and sole interpreters of God’s word, have been absolutely as wicked as the original Pharisees, and relatively more wicked because of the shocking contradiction between their actions and their stated devotion to the extreme teachings of the supposed Son of God.
1273. It has been shown, moreover, that although Christ occasionally referred to hell, yet he gave inconsistent views of it, (738, 764764.) At one244 time it is fire, into which any one is to be doomed for alleging his brother a fool, whether this allegation be true or not; at another, it is utter darkness, with weeping and gnashing of teeth; and of course there could be no fire. Then the disgusting description given by Josephus is sanctioned, agreeably to which, like the Elysium and Erebus of the heathen, both hell and heaven are subterranean localities, but separated by a lake of unquenchable fire, across which Abraham and Dives converse. At another time, heaven is above; he ascends to heaven in sight of his apostles, yet the penitent thief is to be with him in paradise, which, agreeably to Genesis and Josephus, is upon the earth on the river Tigris, near the Persian Gulf. But wherever the Elysium and Erebus of the gospel may be, all souls, according to it, are to remain in their graves till the “last day,” and then, like Samuel, being called up from their tombs, are to be sorted into two squadrons, of which one is to go to an undescribed heaven, the other to the “hell fire prepared for the devil and his angels from the beginning of the world.” The injustice which would follow from a judgment of this kind, by which two souls differing from each other only by a shade would meet a fate so different that one would have to go to heaven, the other to hell to remain eternally, is so manifest, that, like the ultraism of the same record, it loses its effect altogether upon people in general.
1273. Furthermore, it's been shown that while Christ occasionally mentioned hell, his views on it were inconsistent, (738, 764764.) At one point, hell is described as a fire where someone can be condemned for calling their brother a fool, whether that claim is true or not; at another moment, it’s described as complete darkness, along with weeping and gnashing of teeth, meaning there could be no fire. Then, there's the repugnant portrayal given by Josephus, which suggests that, like the Elysium and Erebus of pagan beliefs, both hell and heaven are underground places, separated by a lake of unquenchable fire, where Abraham and Dives converse. At another time, heaven is depicted as being above; he ascends to heaven in view of his apostles, while the penitent thief is to be with him in paradise, which, according to Genesis and Josephus, is located on earth by the river Tigris, near the Persian Gulf. But wherever the Elysium and Erebus of the gospel may be, all souls are said to remain in their graves until the “last day,” when, like Samuel, they are called up from their tombs and sorted into two groups: one going to an undescribed heaven, the other to the “hell fire prepared for the devil and his angels from the beginning of the world.” The injustice that would result from a judgment like this, where two souls that differ only slightly face such drastically different fates—one going to heaven and the other to hell for eternity—is so clear that, like the extremism in the same record, it loses its impact on people in general.
1274. It must be clear that the great mass of professed Christians are very little restrained by their fears of such an eternity of punishment. Had Christ any specific knowledge of the kingdom of heaven to which he occasionally alluded, wherefore did he not convey that knowledge to his disciples? But they seem to have learned no more from Jesus than Moses did from Jehovah, and hence their querulous inquiry as to what would be their reward. But the promise of judgeships, (743 to 745,) of worldly preeminence, was a satire upon them. It argues that he considered them as worldly-minded. Had he known the world to be looked upon by the apostles as beneath consideration in comparison with immortal life, he would hardly have insulted them by the offer. But their tone has a great deal too much of the Swiss in it. Had they been so very dull, or Christ so reserved, that the idea was not conveyed to them that in acting the part of pious, virtuous men, they would have the reward promised to the righteous in the other world.
1274. It should be obvious that most people who claim to be Christians are not very much held back by their fear of an eternity of punishment. If Christ had specific knowledge about the kingdom of heaven that he sometimes mentioned, why didn’t he share that knowledge with his disciples? It seems they learned no more from Jesus than Moses did from Jehovah, which is why they asked what their reward would be. However, the promise of judgeships, (743 to 745,) and worldly status was really mocking them. It suggests he saw them as focused on worldly things. If he believed that the apostles looked at the world as insignificant compared to eternal life, he wouldn’t have insulted them with such offers. But their tone reflects too much of a narrow-minded perspective. Were they really so slow to understand, or was Christ so reserved that the idea didn’t get through to them that by acting as devout, virtuous individuals, they would receive the reward promised to the righteous in the afterlife?
1275. Thank God, no spiritualist who reads with attention the communications given in this work, will ever inquire as to the extent of selfish reward which he is to enjoy! He would be impressed by his general knowledge with the idea that the less any being is actuated by selfish aspiration, the greater his capacity for happiness and his pretensions to the means of felicity.
1275. Thank goodness, no spiritualist who pays close attention to the messages in this work will ever ask about the level of selfish gain they will receive! They would realize from their general understanding that the less a person is driven by selfish desires, the greater their ability to experience happiness and their claim to the means of joy.
The Doctrine of a peculiar Belief being necessary to Salvation, and a counterpoise for Sin, a source of discord originally confined to Judea, expanded with Christianity and Islamism; verifying Christ’s allegation, that he came “as a Sword, not as a Messenger of Peace.”—Superior Morality, and far more unquestionable Certainty of the Communications from the Spirit World.
1276. It were in vain, I think, to find in the apple of discord, in the mischiefs let loose from Pandora’s box, or any other figurative exemplification, any idea adequate to convey my conception of the mischief done to the world by introducing the dogma, that belief could be the means of salvation; so that if God had so constituted or so situated a people, that they could not believe what was communicated to them by certain itinerant preachers, it should be worse for them in the day of judgment than for Sodom and Gomorrah; two cities which God had destroyed because he had not so organized them, and circumstanced them, as to make them as virtuous as he, subsequently to their creation, desired.
1276. I think it's pointless to look for a comparison in the apple of discord, the troubles released from Pandora’s box, or any other figurative example, to fully express how much harm has been caused to the world by the idea that faith could be the path to salvation. This suggests that if God had created or placed a group of people in such a way that they couldn’t believe what was preached to them by certain traveling messengers, it would be worse for them on judgment day than it was for Sodom and Gomorrah. Those were two cities that God destroyed because he hadn’t shaped them or placed them in circumstances that would make them as virtuous as he wanted after their creation.
1277. Christ fully justified this opinion, when he alleged himself to have come as a sword, not as a messenger of peace, and to set father and son, mother and daughter, &c., at variance with each other, making the people of a man’s own household his foes. It may be said that he identified himself with piety and rectitude; so that it was for the virtue of which he, as the Son or missionary of God, was the representative, that he plead; but this pious devotion has much more of self in it than people imagine. They identify God or Christ with the welfare of their souls and bodies. It is through the hope of benefit to these that they take such a deep interest in God.
1277. Christ fully justified this view when he stated that he came as a sword, not as a messenger of peace, intending to create conflict between father and son, mother and daughter, etc., turning the members of a man’s own household against each other. It could be said that he aligned himself with piety and goodness; so, for the virtue he represented as the Son or messenger of God, he advocated. However, this devotion to piety often contains more self-interest than people realize. They equate God or Christ with the well-being of their souls and bodies. It is the hope of gaining benefits for these that drives their strong interest in God.
1278. But is it not strange that the Christian religion should be treated as a harbinger of peace and harmony, when, with its entrance into the world, came the intolerance, before confined to Judea, and when by its founder it is represented as a sword, to sever the dearest ties by introducing the poisoning idea that belief could be a virtue or a sin? It seems to have been the cause of a peculiar animosity which has always accompanied its progress, if not its endurance, and which set the example to Mohammed of attaching the same fanatical idea to another basis, comporting with his individual aggrandizement, at the expense of much human misery.
1278. But isn't it odd that the Christian religion is viewed as a symbol of peace and harmony when its arrival in the world brought about intolerance that was once limited to Judea? Its founder even described it as a sword, meant to cut ties by introducing the harmful belief that faith can be either a virtue or a sin. This seems to have sparked a specific hostility that has always followed its growth, if not its survival, and this set an example for Mohammed, who associated the same fanatical belief with his own interests, leading to a lot of human suffering.
1279. The language of Christ held to his apostles, showing that he considered them as thirsting for temporal honours, and his aspiration for the throne of his glory, situated, of course, in the same mundane region, may warrant the surmise that his views did not differ from those of Mohammed as to the ultimate object, however much he may have found it necessary, under the Roman despotism, to fight with the tongue instead of the sword.
1279. The language of Christ spoke to his apostles, indicating that he saw them as eager for earthly honors, and his yearning for the throne of his glory, of course, located in the same worldly realm, may suggest that his goals were not that different from those of Mohammed when it came to the ultimate objective, even though he may have felt it necessary, under Roman oppression, to engage in verbal battles instead of using a sword.
1280. But how can this sentiment be justified in which he makes devotion to himself irreconcilable with the holy ties between the child and his246 parents, or the parents and their children? The God of Spiritualism would view parental and filial love as the truest piety. He asks only that love. He has not constituted us to have that sort of love for him. Had he wished it, he would have made us so, as to be thus actuated.
1280. But how can this feeling be justified when he makes devotion to himself conflict with the sacred connections between a child and their246 parents, or between parents and their children? The God of Spiritualism would see parental and child love as the greatest form of piety. He only asks for that love. He hasn't made us capable of having that kind of love for him. If he wanted it, he would have created us to feel that way.
1281. “He that believeth in me shall have eternal life.” “Thy faith hath made thee whole.” These allegations produced a change in the world at large. That bigotry and animosity which led the Jews to consider that all who did not agree with them in creed, were objects of spoliation, massacre, rape, enslavement, were now extended to other parts of the world.
1281. “Whoever believes in me will have eternal life.” “Your faith has made you whole.” These claims brought about a significant shift in the world. The prejudice and hostility that caused the Jews to view anyone who disagreed with their beliefs as targets for plunder, violence, assault, and slavery had now spread to other regions of the world.
1282. No doubt the success of this exclusive notion, on the part of Christ, led to its adoption by Mohammed, and thus some hundred millions have been actuated by this mischievous impression, which is now at work on the Russian territory. It has been already suggested that this idea always begets persecution to the extent of the power to exercise it. While seeing the horrid consequences of this error in the persecution of the French Calvinists, Calvin could not avoid the diabolic impulse in the instance of Servetus. It cannot be necessary to recall to our readers the many bloody persecutions and religious wars which have disgraced Christendom far more than any other part of the globe, nor to allude to the tyranny reciprocally employed by any sect having complete ascendancy. Yet with these consequences before the mind—the facts which I have adduced to prove that the morality of Christendom is not due to Scripture—the tocsin is sounded wherever any effort is made to get rid of the crimes and indecencies of the Old Testament, or the error of making bigoted belief, under the name of faith, a primary consideration on the part of the New Testament. People are taught that every thing good is due to Scripture; that thence alone can we get any correct notions of morality, any knowledge of a future state. The idea is entertained that Christianity made a great change for the better as soon as it prevailed, and that without it we should sink into a state of demoralization.
1282. Undoubtedly, the success of this exclusive idea, on the part of Christ, led to its adoption by Mohammed, resulting in hundreds of millions being influenced by this harmful belief, which is currently affecting Russian territory. It has already been pointed out that this notion inevitably leads to persecution whenever there's the power to carry it out. Observing the terrible outcomes of this mistake in the persecution of the French Calvinists, Calvin could not escape the evil urge in the case of Servetus. It's unnecessary to remind our readers of the numerous bloody persecutions and religious wars that have stained Christendom far more than any other part of the world, or to mention the tyranny exercised by any sect that gains complete dominance. Yet, with these consequences in mind— the evidence I've provided to show that the morality of Christendom doesn't come from Scripture—the alarm is raised whenever there's an attempt to eliminate the crimes and indecencies of the Old Testament, or the mistake of prioritizing bigoted belief, under the guise of faith, as a major focus of the New Testament. People are taught that everything good comes from Scripture; that it is the only source of correct moral understanding and knowledge of an afterlife. There's a belief that Christianity brought about a significant positive change as soon as it became established, and that without it, we would descend into a state of immorality.
1283. Consistently with my experience of the effect of a confident belief in a future state of existence on my own mind, as already suggested, I was always under the impression, prior to my conversion, that those who believed in a future state must be happier; and if that belief were not associated with mischievous error, that it should not be assailed. The idea that what I considered as bigotry, should be a counterpoise for sin, I did consider a mischievous error, tending to substitute devotion for good works, and as I saw, too, made nations selfish. The love of hoarding was very commonly coupled with this selfishness, which operated at once to produce efforts to lay up treasure on earth by close dealing, and in heaven by strict sectarianism, bigotry, and intolerance. But, nevertheless, I was restrained from any effort to cure these errors, from the conviction that religion, unaccompanied by the expectation of a future state, can never take hold of the human heart.
1283. Based on my experience with how a strong belief in an afterlife affects my mind, as I've mentioned before, I always felt that those who believed in an afterlife must be happier. I thought that if that belief wasn’t linked to harmful misconceptions, it shouldn't be challenged. I regarded the idea that what I saw as bigotry could somehow balance out sin as a harmful misconception. It seemed to promote devotion over good deeds, and, as I noticed, it made nations selfish. The desire to hoard was often tied to this kind of selfishness, which led people to try to accumulate treasure on earth through shrewd dealings and in heaven through strict sectarianism, bigotry, and intolerance. However, I held back from trying to address these misconceptions because I believed that religion, without the expectation of an afterlife, could never truly reach the human heart.
1284. In a dialogue between the spirit of Wm. Penn and that of Thos. Paine, the former points out this error: “You strove to take from your readers one of their greatest comforts under the afflictions of mortal life.” Foreseeing this would have prevented me from writing the Age of Reason. Any set of skeptics who should only coincide in disbelieving, could never adhere together nor make many converts. The prospect of future life must be promised confidently, or there would be few proselytes.
1284. In a conversation between the spirit of Wm. Penn and Thos. Paine, the former highlights this mistake: “You tried to take away from your readers one of their greatest comforts during the struggles of human life.” Knowing this would have stopped me from writing the Age of Reason. A group of skeptics who only agree on disbelief could never stick together or gain many followers. The promise of an afterlife must be confidently offered, or there would be few converts.
1285. But the spiritual manifestations, and the intellectual, the heartfelt intercommunion with my relatives, friends, and the immortal, great, and good Washington, now enable me to assert that there is not, nor can be upon any record of the past, any evidence so complete, as that presented to my senses, concurrently with a multitude of observers. I now, therefore, feel myself warranted to speak out what my reason justifies and my conscience dictates; and have not hesitated to express the opinions which are spread out upon the pages immediately preceding that which contains this exposition.
1285. But the spiritual experiences, along with the intellectual and heartfelt connections with my relatives, friends, and the immortal, great, and good Washington, now allow me to assert that there is no record of the past that can provide evidence as complete as that which has been presented to my senses, along with many other observers. I now feel justified in expressing what my reason supports and my conscience dictates; and I have not hesitated to share the opinions laid out in the pages right before this one that contains this exposition.
1286. With a view to show how much more happy was the state of reciprocal sectarian feeling in the world before this idea of making belief an object of vital importance, I will quote here, first a passage from Mosheim’s Ecclesiastical History, vol. i., and will subjoin some pages from “Gibbon’s Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire;” following these up with quotations from Bishop Hopkins, of Vermont:
1286. To demonstrate how much happier the state of mutual sectarian feelings was in the world before the idea of treating belief as something critically important, I will first quote a passage from Mosheim’s Ecclesiastical History, vol. i., and then include some pages from “Gibbon’s Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire;” followed by quotes from Bishop Hopkins of Vermont:
Quotation from Mosheim.
1287. “Each nation suffered its neighbours to follow their own method of worship, to adore their own gods, to enjoy their own rites and ceremonies, and discovered no displeasure at their diversity of sentiments in religious matters. They all looked upon the world as one great empire, divided into various provinces, over every one of which a certain order of divinities presided, and that, therefore, none could behold with contempt the gods of other nations, or force strangers to pay homage to theirs.
1287. “Each nation allowed its neighbors to practice their own way of worship, to honor their own gods, to celebrate their own rituals and ceremonies, and showed no disdain for the differences in their religious beliefs. They all viewed the world as one large empire, divided into various regions, each governed by a specific order of deities, and thus, no one could look down on the gods of other nations or compel outsiders to worship theirs.
1288. “The Romans exercised this toleration in the amplest manner. As the sources from which all men’s ideas are derived are the same, namely, from their senses, there being no other inlet to the mind but thereby, there is nothing wonderful in the general prevalence of a sameness of the ideas of human beings in all regions and all ages of the world. The affections of fear, grief, pain, hope, pleasure, gratitude, &c., are as common to man as his nature as a man, and could not fail to produce a corresponding similarity in the objects of his superstitious veneration. To have nothing in common with the already established notions of mankind, to bear no features of resemblance to their hallucinations and follies, to be nothing like them, to be to nothing so unlike, should be the essential predications and necessary credentials of the ‘wisdom which is from above.’
1288. “The Romans showed this tolerance in the broadest way. Since all human ideas come from the same sources, specifically our senses—there's no other way for the mind to receive information—it's not surprising that people across different regions and ages share similar ideas. Feelings like fear, grief, pain, hope, pleasure, and gratitude are just as common to humanity as being human itself, and this inevitably leads to similarities in what people revere superstitiously. To have nothing in common with the established beliefs of humanity, to lack resemblance to their misconceptions and irrationalities, and to be unlike them in every way should be the fundamental characteristics and necessary credentials of the ‘wisdom which is from above.’
1289. “It has, however, been alleged by learned men, with convincing arguments of probability, ‘that the principal deities of all the Gentile nations resembled each other extremely, in their essential characters; and if so, their receiving the same names could not introduce much confusion into mythology, since they were probably derived from one common source. If the Thor of the ancient Celts was the same in dignity, character, and attributes with the Jupiter of the Greeks and Romans, where was the impropriety of giving him the same name? Dies Jovis is still the Latin form for our Thor’s day. When the Greeks found in other countries deities that resembled their own, they persuaded the worshippers of those foreign gods that their deities were the same that were honoured in Greece, and were, indeed, themselves convinced that this was the case. In consequence of this, the Greeks gave the names of their gods to those of other nations, and the Romans in this followed their example. Hence we find the names of Jupiter, Mars, Mercury, Venus, &c. frequently mentioned in the more recent monuments and inscriptions which have been found among the Gauls and Germans, though the ancient inhabitants of those countries had worshipped no gods under such denominations.”
1289. “However, learned individuals have argued convincingly that the main gods of all the non-Jewish nations were very similar in their core characteristics; and if that's true, their sharing similar names wouldn't lead to much confusion in mythology, as they likely originated from a common source. If the Thor of the ancient Celts held the same status, character, and attributes as the Jupiter of the Greeks and Romans, what was inappropriate about calling him by the same name? Dies Jovis is still the Latin term for our Thor’s day. When the Greeks encountered deities in other cultures that resembled their own, they convinced the followers of those foreign gods that they were the same as those honored in Greece, and they genuinely believed this to be true. As a result, the Greeks assigned the names of their gods to those of other nations, and the Romans followed their lead. This is why we often see the names Jupiter, Mars, Mercury, Venus, etc., mentioned in more recent monuments and inscriptions found among the Gauls and Germans, even though the ancient people of those areas never worshipped gods by those names.”
Quotation from Gibbon.
1290. “The policy of the emperors and the senate, as far as it concerned religion, was happily seconded by the reflections of the enlightened, and by the habits of the superstitious, part of their subjects. The various modes of worship which prevailed in the Roman world were all considered by the people as equally true; by the philosopher, as equally false; and by the magistrate, as equally useful. And thus toleration produced, not only mutual indulgence, but even religious concord.
1290. “The approach of the emperors and the senate regarding religion was fortunately supported by the thoughts of the educated and the practices of the superstitious part of their followers. The different forms of worship that existed in the Roman world were all seen by the people as equally valid; by the philosopher, as equally untrue; and by the magistrate, as equally beneficial. And so, tolerance led to not just mutual respect but even religious harmony."
1291. “The superstition of the people was not imbittered by any mixture of theological rancour; nor was it confined by the chains of any speculative system. The devout polytheist, though fondly attached to his national rites, admitted with implicit faith the different religions of the earth. Fear, gratitude, and curiosity, a dream or an omen, a singular disorder, or a distant journey, perpetually disposed him to multiply the articles of his belief, and to enlarge the list of his protectors. The thin texture of the pagan mythology was interwoven with various, but not discordant, materials. As soon as it was allowed that sages and heroes, who had lived, or who had died, for the benefit of their country, were exalted to a state of power and immortality, it was universally confessed that they deserved, if not the adoration, at least the reverence, of all mankind. The deities of a thousand groves and a thousand streams possessed, in peace, their local and respected influence; nor could the Roman, who deprecated the wrath of the Tiber, deride the Egyptian who presented his offering to the beneficent genius of the Nile. The visible powers of nature, the planets, and the elements, were the same throughout the universe249 The invisible governors of the moral world were inevitably cast in a similar mould of fiction and allegory. Every virtue, and even vice, acquired its divine representative; every art and profession its patron, whose attributes, in the most distant ages and countries, were uniformly derived from the character of their peculiar votaries. A republic of gods of such opposite tempers and interests required, in every system, the moderating hand of a supreme magistrate, who, by the progress of knowledge and flattery, was gradually invested with the sublime perfections of an Eternal Parent, and an omnipotent Monarch. Such was the mild spirit of antiquity, that the nations were less attentive to the difference than to the resemblance of their religious worship. The Greek, the Roman, and the Barbarian, as they met before their respective altars, easily persuaded themselves that under various names, and with various ceremonies, they adored the same deities. The elegant mythology of Homer gave a beautiful and almost regular form to the polytheism of the ancient world.
1291. “The people's superstition wasn't tainted by any theological bitterness; nor was it limited by any rigid belief system. The devoted polytheist, while fond of his national rituals, accepted the different religions around the world with unwavering faith. Fear, gratitude, curiosity, a dream or an omen, a strange illness, or a long journey constantly led him to expand his beliefs and add to his list of protectors. The delicate fabric of pagan mythology blended various, but harmonious, elements. Once it was accepted that sages and heroes, who had lived or died for the good of their country, were elevated to a state of power and immortality, it was widely acknowledged that they deserved, if not worship, at least respect from everyone. The deities of a thousand groves and streams held their local and respected influence peacefully; nor could the Roman, fearful of the Tiber's wrath, mock the Egyptian who offered gifts to the benevolent spirit of the Nile. The visible powers of nature, like the planets and elements, were consistent throughout the universe249. The unseen rulers of the moral world were cast in a similar mold of fiction and allegory. Every virtue, and even vice, had its divine representative; every art and profession had its patron, whose traits, in the most distant ages and places, were consistently drawn from the nature of their unique followers. A republic of gods with such contrasting personalities and interests needed, in every system, the guiding hand of a supreme leader, who, through the advancement of knowledge and flattery, was gradually endowed with the noble qualities of an Eternal Parent and an all-powerful Monarch. Such was the gentle spirit of antiquity that nations focused more on the similarities than the differences in their religious practices. The Greek, the Roman, and the Barbarian, as they gathered at their respective altars, easily convinced themselves that, under different names and rituals, they were worshiping the same deities. The refined mythology of Homer beautifully and almost systematically shaped the polytheism of the ancient world.”
1292. “The philosophers of Greece deduced their morals from the nature of man rather than from that of God. They meditated, however, on the Divine Nature as a very curious and important speculation, and in the profound inquiry they displayed the strength and weakness of the human understanding. Of the four most celebrated schools, the Stoics and the Platonists endeavoured to reconcile the jarring interests of reason and piety. They have left us the most sublime proofs of the existence and perfections of the first cause, but as it was impossible for them to conceive the creation of matter, the workmen in the Stoic philosophy was not sufficiently distinguished from the work, while, on the contrary, the spiritual God of Plato and his disciples resembled an idea rather than a substance. The opinions of the Academics and Epicureans were of a less religious cast; but while the modest science of the former induced them to doubt, the positive ignorance of the latter urged them to deny the providence of a Supreme Ruler. The spirit of inquiry, prompted by emulation and supported by freedom, has divided the public teachers of philosophy into a variety of contending sects; but the ingenuous youth who, from every part, resorted to Athens and the other seats of learning in the Roman empire, were alike instructed in every school to reject and to despise the religion of the multitude. How, indeed, was it possible that a philosopher should accept, as divine truths, the idle tales of the poets, and the incoherent traditions of antiquity, or that he should adore as gods those imperfect beings whom he must have despised as men! Against such unworthy adversaries Cicero condescended to employ the arms of reason and eloquence, but the satire of Lucian was a much more adequate as well as more efficacious weapon. We may be well assured that a writer conversant with the world would never have ventured to expose the gods of his country to public ridicule, had they not already been the objects of secret contempt among the polished and enlightened orders of society.
1292. “The philosophers of Greece derived their morals from human nature rather than from God. They did, however, contemplate the Divine Nature as an intriguing and significant topic, showing both the strengths and weaknesses of human understanding. Among the four most famous schools, the Stoics and the Platonists tried to reconcile the conflicting interests of reason and faith. They provided us with the most profound evidence of the existence and perfection of the first cause, but since they couldn’t imagine the creation of matter, the practitioners of Stoic philosophy were not clearly separated from their work. In contrast, the spiritual God of Plato and his followers resembled more of an idea than a substance. The views of the Academics and Epicureans were less religious, but while the humble knowledge of the former led them to skepticism, the outright ignorance of the latter pushed them to reject the idea of a Supreme Ruler's providence. The spirit of inquiry, fueled by competition and supported by freedom, has splintered public philosophy teachers into various opposing sects. Still, the earnest young people who flocked to Athens and other centers of learning in the Roman Empire were taught in every school to dismiss and scorn the religion of the masses. How could a philosopher possibly accept, as divine truths, the nonsensical stories of poets and the chaotic traditions of the past, or worship as gods those flawed beings he would find contemptible as humans? Against such poor opponents, Cicero resorted to the tools of reason and rhetoric, but the satire of Lucian was a far more appropriate and effective weapon. We can be confident that a knowledgeable writer would never have dared to mock the gods of his nation publicly if they were not already objects of hidden disdain among the refined and educated members of society.”
1293. “Notwithstanding the fashionable irreligion which prevailed in the age of the Antonines, both the interest of the priests and the credulity of the people were sufficiently respected. In their writings and conversation, the philosophers of antiquity asserted the independent dignity of reason, but they resigned their actions to the commands of law and of custom. Viewing, with a smile of pity and indulgence, the various errors of the vulgar, they diligently practised the ceremonies of their fathers, devoutly frequented the temples of the gods, and sometimes condescending to act a part on the theatre of superstition, they concealed the sentiments of an atheist under the sacerdotal robes. Reasoners of such a temper were scarcely inclined to wrangle about their respective modes of faith or of worship. It was indifferent to them what shape the folly of the multitude might choose to assume; and they approached with the same inward contempt, and the same external reverence, the altars of the Lybian, the Olympian, or the Capitoline Jupiter.
1293. “Despite the trendy irreligion that was common in the time of the Antonines, both the interests of the priests and the beliefs of the people were still given enough consideration. In their writings and discussions, ancient philosophers emphasized the independent importance of reason, but they followed the rules of law and tradition in their actions. They viewed the various mistakes of the common people with a mix of pity and tolerance, while diligently observing the rituals of their ancestors, faithfully visiting the temples of the gods, and occasionally playing a role in the spectacle of superstition, hiding their atheist beliefs beneath priestly garments. Thinkers with such a mindset were hardly inclined to argue about their different beliefs or practices. It didn't matter to them what form the foolishness of the masses took; they approached the altars of the Libyan, the Olympian, or the Capitoline Jupiter with the same inner disdain and the same outward respect.”
1294. “It is not easy to conceive from what motives a spirit of persecution could induce itself into the Roman councils. The magistrates could not be actuated by a blind though honest bigotry, since the magistrates were themselves philosophers, and the schools of Athens had given laws to the senate. They could not be impelled by ambition or avarice, as the temporal and ecclesiastical powers were united in the same hands. The pontiffs were chosen among the most illustrious of the senators, and the office of Supreme Pontiff was constantly exercised by the emperors themselves. They knew and valued the advantages of religion, as it is connected with civil government. They encouraged the public festivals which humanize the manners of the people. They managed the arts of divination, as a convenient instrument of policy, and they respected as the firmest bond of society the useful persuasion that, either in this or a future life, the crime of perjury is most assuredly punished by the avenging gods? But while they acknowledged the general advantages of religion, they were convinced that the various modes of worship contributed alike to the same salutary purposes, and that, in every country, the form of superstition which had received the sanction of time and experience was the best adapted to the climate and to its inhabitants. Avarice and taste very frequently despoiled the vanquished nations of the elegant statues of their gods and the rich ornaments of their temples, but in the exercise of the religion which they derived from their ancestors, they uniformly experienced the indulgence, and even protection, of the Roman conquerors. The province of Gaul seems, and indeed only seems, an exception to this universal toleration. Under the specious pretext of abolishing human sacrifices, the Emperors Tiberius and Claudius suppressed the dangerous power of the Druids; but the priests themselves, their gods and their altars, subsisted in peaceful obscurity till the final destruction of paganism.
1294. “It’s hard to understand what could motivate a spirit of persecution to infiltrate the Roman councils. The magistrates couldn’t be driven by a blind but honest prejudice, since they were philosophers themselves, and the schools of Athens had shaped the laws for the senate. They couldn’t be motivated by ambition or greed, as the political and religious powers were held by the same people. The pontiffs were chosen from among the most distinguished senators, and the position of Supreme Pontiff was often held by the emperors themselves. They recognized the benefits of religion as it relates to civil government. They supported public festivals that helped refine the people's manners. They practiced divination as a useful tool of policy and respected the notion that, whether in this life or the next, the crime of perjury would surely be punished by the avenging gods. While acknowledging the general benefits of religion, they believed that the different forms of worship all contributed to the same positive outcomes and that, in every region, the form of superstition that had stood the test of time was best suited to the local climate and people. Greed and taste often stripped the conquered nations of the beautiful statues of their gods and the lavish decorations of their temples, but in maintaining the religion passed down from their ancestors, they consistently found leniency and even protection from their Roman conquerors. Gaul seems to be, at least on the surface, an exception to this widespread tolerance. Under the misleading pretext of eliminating human sacrifices, Emperors Tiberius and Claudius aimed to dismantle the dangerous influence of the Druids; however, the priests, their gods, and their altars continued to exist in quiet obscurity until the eventual fall of paganism.”
1295. “Rome, the capital of a great monarchy, was incessantly filled with subjects and strangers from every part of the world, who all introduced and enjoyed the favourite superstitions of their native country. Every city in the empire was justified in maintaining the purity of its ancient ceremonies; and the Roman senate, using the common privilege, sometimes interposed to check this inundation of foreign rites. The Egyptian superstition, of all the most contemptible and abject, was frequently prohibited; the temples of Serapis and Isis demolished, and their worshippers banished from Rome and Italy. But the zeal of fanaticism prevailed over the cold and feeble efforts of policy. The exiles returned, the proselytes multiplied, the temples were restored with increasing splendour, and Isis and Serapis at length assumed their place among the Roman deities. Nor was this indulgence a departure from the old maxims of government. In the purest ages of the commonwealth, Cybele and Æsculapius had been invited by solemn embassies, and it was customary to tempt the protectors of besieged cities by the promise of more distinguished honours than they possessed in their native country. Rome gradually became the common temple of her subjects, and the freedom of the city was bestowed on all the gods of mankind.”
1295. “Rome, the capital of a vast empire, was constantly filled with citizens and visitors from all over the world, who brought and enjoyed the popular superstitions from their home countries. Every city in the empire had the right to uphold the integrity of its ancient rituals; and the Roman senate, using their common authority, occasionally intervened to limit this flood of foreign practices. The Egyptian superstition, the most despised and lowly of all, was often banned; the temples of Serapis and Isis were destroyed, and their worshippers exiled from Rome and Italy. However, the fervor of fanaticism overcame the weak and hesitant efforts of authority. The exiles returned, the converts increased, the temples were rebuilt with even greater magnificence, and Isis and Serapis eventually took their places among the Roman gods. This tolerance was not a break from the traditional principles of governance. In the earliest days of the republic, Cybele and Æsculapius had been summoned by formal envoys, and it was common to entice the protectors of besieged cities with the promise of more prestigious honors than they had in their homeland. Rome gradually transformed into the shared temple of her subjects, and the freedom of the city was granted to all the gods of humanity.”
For more than a thousand years the Grecian or Roman Catholic Clergy were the sole depositories of the word of God, so called, and Regulators of Religious morals; yet during that time the Clergy were for the most part pre-eminent in vice, as compared with the rest of the community; whence it is inferred that, like Pope Boniface, the wicked Clergy in general were really unbelievers in the truth of the Gospel. If the morals of the modern Clergy are better, it is neither from the barbarous example furnished them in the Old Testament, nor the ultra precepts of the Gospel; being too much enlightened to be governed in practice by either.
1296. “Origen complains of the neglect and inattention of his day, through the increase of worldliness. Cyprian about the same time mourns over the progress of degeneracy, and Eusebius, toward the close of the third century, laments the corruption of the primitive morality in strong terms of censure.
1296. “Origin expresses his frustration about the neglect and lack of attention in his time, caused by the rise of worldliness. Around the same period, Cyprian grieves over the decline in morality, and Eusebius, towards the end of the third century, strongly criticizes the decay of the original moral values.
1297. “But yet superstition was rapidly advancing, and the complaints of priestly corruption and general licentiousness were on the increase. The election of Pope Damasus was the occasion of a public riot, in which his partisans besieged the church where the friends of the other candidate were assembled, broke down the doors, and uncovered the roof; and in the shameful battle that ensued, one hundred and thirty-seven persons were slain, of both sexes. The splendour of the Roman bishops had grown so rapidly, that the heathen historian Ammianus Marcellinus pronounced the episcopal style of living to be superior to that of a king. Toward the close of the fourth century, Chrysostom defended the new system of monkery, on the ground that Christians had become so corrupt, especially in the large cities. Jerome before him had bitterly complained of the prevailing degeneracy, and became a monk in order to escape from it. St. Augustine lamented that many Christians in his day (about A. D. 389) were superstitious, that they adored the sepulchres and pictures of the saints, and ate and drank to excess at funerals, under the excuse that it was an act of religion.
1297. “But superstition was growing quickly, and complaints about corrupt priests and general moral decay were increasing. The election of Pope Damasus sparked a public riot, where his supporters surrounded the church where the friends of the other candidate were gathered, broke down the doors, and tore off the roof; in the disgraceful battle that followed, one hundred thirty-seven people were killed, both men and women. The luxury of the Roman bishops had risen so fast that the pagan historian Ammianus Marcellinus stated that the lifestyle of bishops was better than that of a king. Toward the end of the fourth century, Chrysostom defended the new trend of monasticism, arguing that Christians had become so corrupt, especially in large cities. Jerome, before him, had harshly criticized the widespread moral decline and became a monk to escape it. St. Augustine lamented that many Christians in his time (around A. D. 389) were superstitious, worshiped the tombs and images of saints, and indulged excessively at funerals, claiming it was a religious act.”
1298. “The fifth century was not likely to improve the state of the church, but on the contrary it witnessed a rapid deterioration. The testimony of Salvian is set forth by Fleury, proving that among the Roman Christians there was much heathen idolatry re252maining; that the greater part were only Christians in name, and worse than the barbarians in life and conversation.
1298. “The fifth century probably didn’t improve the condition of the church; instead, it saw a quick decline. Fleury highlights Salvian's testimony, showing that among Roman Christians, there was still a lot of pagan idolatry 252; most were only Christians in name and lived worse than the barbarians.”
1300. “The seventh century. We begin to see the fruits of clerical celibacy in the rule established by the council of Toledo, that the illegitimate children of the clergy, from the bishop down to the sub-deacon, should be slaves in the church where their fathers served. It is to be presumed that this canon was intended to discourage and amend the incontinence of the clergy, but the adoption of such an extraordinary law proves plainly the prevalence of the evil. So general had the worldliness of the clergy become, that in the latter part of this century the most eminent bishops of France took great part in political matters, and in time of war marched at the head of their troops, like the lay barons.
1300. “The seventh century. We begin to see the results of clerical celibacy with the rule established by the Council of Toledo, stating that the illegitimate children of the clergy, from bishops down to sub-deacons, should be slaves in the church where their fathers served. This canon was likely meant to discourage and correct the misconduct of the clergy, but the existence of such an unusual law clearly indicates how widespread the issue was. The clergy had become so worldly that by the later part of this century, the most prominent bishops in France were heavily involved in politics and, during wartime, led their troops just like the lay barons.”
1301. “One of the most important events of the eighth century was the forgery of the Decretals, by which all the primitive bishops of Rome, from Clement to Sylvester, were made to utter the most extravagant doctrines concerning the power of the pope, the supremacy of Rome, and the authority to judge the other bishops, while the pope himself could be judged by none. Yet such was the ignorance of the times, that this forgery was successful throughout the whole Latin Church, and remained unquestioned for eight hundred years together. Another strong proof of this prevailing ignorance is found in the course of the bishops at the second council of Nice, where pretended miracles performed by images were cited from false documents without any suspicion of mistake.
1301. “One of the most significant events of the eighth century was the creation of the Decretals, which falsely presented all the early bishops of Rome, from Clement to Sylvester, as endorsing extreme beliefs about the pope's power, the dominance of Rome, and the ability to judge other bishops, while asserting that the pope could not be judged by anyone. Despite the ignorance of the era, this forgery spread throughout the entire Latin Church and went unchallenged for eight hundred years. Another strong indication of this widespread ignorance can be found in the behavior of the bishops at the second council of Nice, where fake miracles attributed to images were referenced from false documents without any hint of doubt.”
1302. “The parliament of Worms presented to the emperor a request from all the people that the bishops should no longer go out at the head of their troops, but should stay in their dioceses and assist the army by their prayers; and Charlemagne willingly granted the petition. But it is remarkable that this application came not from the clergy, but from the laity; and it was so little regarded afterward, that we shall find some warlike bishops even among the popes themselves. This same emperor endeavoured with great zeal to purify the morals of the clergy; and his reproofs of their worldliness, their avarice, and their prostitution of sacred things for the sake of gain, are remarkable monuments of his own good sense and of the corruption which infested the church in the ninth century. After his death, which occurred in A. D. 814, some churches invoked him as a saint, notwithstanding he had four wives and five concubines.
1302. “The parliament of Worms presented a request to the emperor from all the people that the bishops should no longer lead their troops but should remain in their dioceses and support the army with their prayers; Charlemagne willingly granted this request. However, it's notable that this appeal came not from the clergy but from the laity; and it was so little taken into account afterward that we actually find some warrior bishops even among the popes themselves. This same emperor worked hard to purify the morals of the clergy; his criticism of their worldliness, greed, and exploitation of sacred things for profit stands as a testament to his good sense and highlights the corruption that plagued the church in the ninth century. After his death, which occurred in A. D. 814, some churches honored him as a saint, despite the fact that he had four wives and five concubines.”
1303. “The year 844 was signalized by the introduction of false relics at Dijon in France, by which, nevertheless, several remarkable cures were supposed to have been effected, until the fraud was discovered; but the proceedings show that such impostures were common. In A. D. 850 a poor presbyter named Gotheschalk, who had adopted high views on predestination, was not only deposed from the priesthood, but afterward publicly whipped, as an incorrigible heretic, and cast into prison, where he died after eighteen years’ confinement. Yet his doctrine was defended by other bishops of high reputation, and his punishment was denounced as cruel and unjust.
1303. “The year 844 was marked by the introduction of fake relics in Dijon, France, which were said to have caused several remarkable healings until the fraud was uncovered; however, the events indicate that such scams were common. In A. D. 850, a poor priest named Gotheschalk, who held strong beliefs about predestination, was not only removed from the priesthood but also publicly whipped as an unrepentant heretic and thrown into prison, where he died after eighteen years of confinement. Despite this, other respected bishops defended his teachings, and his punishment was condemned as harsh and unjust.
1304. “In A. D. 864, a violent outrage took place at Rome, in which Gonthier, the Archbishop of Cologne, protesting against the judgment of Pope Nicholas, told his brother Hildwin, who was a priest, to place his protestation on the tomb of Saint Peter: that is, upon the altar of the church. Accordingly, Hildwin entered into the church with several followers, all armed, and as the keepers opposed him, he repulsed them with blows, and killed one of them upon the spot. He then accomplished his purpose, and retreated sword in hand. The anecdote is only of importance as a proof of the spirit of the age. The first instance of a partial interdict occurs in A. D. 871. The ordeals of boiling water, cold water, and red-hot iron were employed in this age, to determine questions of justice under the auspices of the priests; and even kings employed them, with all faith and confidence. The Duke of Naples had formed an alliance with the Saracens, which the pope disproved; and as he refused to break it on the order of the pontiff, he was excommunicated. The Bishop Athanasius, who was the duke’s own brother, took him and put out his eyes, sent him as prisoner to Rome, and caused himself to be proclaimed Duke of Naples in his place. The pope approved this conduct highly, and praised the bishop for loving God more than his brother, and putting out the right eye which had offended, according to Scripture. This pontiff was John VIII., and the time was A. D. 877.
1304. “In A.D. 864, a violent incident occurred in Rome, where Gonthier, the Archbishop of Cologne, challenged Pope Nicholas's judgment. He instructed his brother Hildwin, who was a priest, to place his protest on the tomb of Saint Peter, which is the altar of the church. Hildwin entered the church with several armed followers, and when the guards tried to stop him, he fought them off and killed one of them on the spot. He then fulfilled his goal and left, sword in hand. This story is significant as it reflects the spirit of the time. The first recorded case of a partial interdict happens in A.D. 871. During this era, rituals like boiling water, cold water, and red-hot iron were used to resolve justice issues, overseen by priests, and even kings trusted them completely. The Duke of Naples allied himself with the Saracens, which the pope condemned; when he refused to break this alliance at the pope's command, he was excommunicated. Bishop Athanasius, the duke's own brother, blinded him, took him prisoner to Rome, and declared himself the new Duke of Naples. The pope highly approved of this action and praised the bishop for prioritizing God over his brother, equating it to putting out the right eye that had sinned, as stated in Scripture. This pope was John VIII., and the year was A. D. 877.”
Reasons for not proceeding farther with Quotation of Details.
1305. It would occupy too much space, and make too wide a digression, were I to proceed in quoting the details of the evidence showing the state of morals in Christendom during the Middle Ages to have been much below that which the heathen displayed during the period immediately succeeding the advent of Christ, according to Mosheim and Gibbon. But253 although the reader should not be enabled to form an opinion directly, by a perusal of the details, fortunately I am enabled to submit that of the right reverend prelate by whom they have been compiled.
1305. It would take up too much space and go off-topic if I were to continue quoting the details of the evidence showing that the morals in Christendom during the Middle Ages were much lower than those of the pagans in the period right after Christ's arrival, according to Mosheim and Gibbon. But253 even if the reader can't form a direct opinion by reading the specifics, I can fortunately share the perspective of the right reverend prelate who compiled them.
1306. The fact deserves attention, that for more than a thousand years, of all the upper classes of society the Christian clergy were pre-eminently wicked, frequent complaints having been made against them by the laity, notwithstanding the cruel persecution to which complainants were liable. The popes were generally as prominent in wickedness as high in official distinction. The summing up of Bishop Hopkins, which I subjoin, fully confirms the impression which I have endeavoured to convey:
1306. It's important to note that for over a thousand years, among all the upper classes of society, the Christian clergy were particularly corrupt. There were many complaints against them from the general public, despite the harsh persecution faced by those who spoke out. The popes were usually as notorious for their wrongdoing as they were for their high positions. The summary provided by Bishop Hopkins, which I have included, strongly supports the impression I have tried to express:
1307. “I have now gone over the history of your church, with the single aim of proving, from your own records, the rise, progress, and terrible extent of its corruption, up to the close of the sixteenth century. Here we see that for a period of seven centuries together there had been a constant outcry for reformation; that the popes and priesthood were the objects of continual complaint on the part of the laity; that by their own acknowledgment, although the church was never destitute of true Christians, yet holiness was the exception, and iniquity the rule, since the great body of the clergy were steeped in licentiousness, avarice, simony, cruelty, violence, falsehood, and blood; that the University of Paris, one of your most famous nurseries of theological education, was infested with an infidel philosophy, and with habits of libertine sacrilege; that the boasts of absolute atheism were heard from the lips of pontiffs and cardinals; that the reliance of your church was in the terrors of the inquisition, in the rack, the dungeon, and the stake; that war, and treachery, and assassination, were patronized in the service of religion; that bishops, and cardinals, and popes, were ready to lead their troops to battle; that there were constant revolts and rebellions against the tyranny of the priestly power; that there were many schisms in the papal kingdom, in which two or three pretenders to infallibility cursed each other at the same time, in the name of God and his apostles; and that every effort to banish these horrible iniquities proved utterly abortive, until the success of the Protestant reformation compelled them to respect public opinion, by fear for their very being if they continued to brave it any longer.”
1307. “I have now reviewed the history of your church with the sole purpose of demonstrating, based on your own records, the rise, progress, and alarming extent of its corruption up to the end of the sixteenth century. Here we see that for a span of seven centuries there was a persistent call for reform; that the popes and clergy were continuously criticized by the laity; that, by their own admission, while the church was never without true Christians, holiness was rare and wrongdoing was the norm, since the majority of the clergy were mired in promiscuity, greed, corruption, cruelty, violence, dishonesty, and bloodshed; that the University of Paris, one of your most renowned centers of theological education, was plagued by an infidel philosophy and practices of sacrilegious libertinism; that the claims of absolute atheism were voiced by popes and cardinals; that your church relied on the fear of the Inquisition, torture, imprisonment, and execution; that war, betrayal, and assassination were condoned in the name of religion; that bishops, cardinals, and popes were eager to lead their armies into battle; that there were ongoing uprisings against the oppressive power of the clergy; that numerous schisms existed within the papal realm, where two or three rivals for infallibility cursed each other simultaneously in the name of God and His apostles; and that every attempt to eliminate these dreadful wrongs was completely ineffective until the Protestant Reformation succeeded in forcing them to heed public opinion, out of fear for their very existence if they continued to disregard it any longer.”
1308. It is believed that there was no such wickedness among the pagan priesthood as to have become a cause of complaint, although far less power existed to silence accusation. Throughout Christendom even monarchs were made to suffer severely for their remonstrances against papal tyranny, and had to make concessions after having been ill-treated. By way of exemplifying his disrespect for those precepts of Christ which enjoin humility, meekness, and poorness of spirit as the means of reaching heaven, Pope Celestin kicked the crown from the head of the emperor, Henry VII., as this potentate knelt before him. Could any sane man have done this while believing that Christ’s allegations were to be verified,254 agreeably to which the “poor in spirit” are to have heaven, the meek to inherit the earth? (See Hopkins.)
1308. It's believed that the pagan priesthood didn't have such wickedness that it became a reason for complaint, even though there was much less power to silence accusations. Across Christendom, even kings faced serious consequences for protesting against papal tyranny and had to make concessions after being mistreated. To show his disregard for Christ's teachings on humility, meekness, and poverty of spirit as paths to heaven, Pope Celestin kicked the crown off Emperor Henry VII's head while the emperor was kneeling before him. Could any sane person have done this while believing that Christ's statements were valid, which say that the “poor in spirit” will inherit heaven and the meek will inherit the earth? (See Hopkins.)254
1309. According to Taylor’s Diegesis, Constantine inquired of Sopater, the pagan priest, if he could absolve him from his sins, among which was that of scalding one of his wives to death, and executing unjustly one of his sons. Sopater informed him that it went beyond his power to obtain pardon for such sins. The Christian priests having agreed to procure the desired absolution, is supposed to have been one of the principal motives which induced Constantine to embrace Christianity. Yet it was under this wicked despot that the Council of Nice was held, which decided in favour of the divinity of Christ.
1309. According to Taylor’s Diegesis, Constantine asked Sopater, the pagan priest, if he could forgive him for his sins, including the murder of one of his wives by scalding and the unjust execution of one of his sons. Sopater told him that it was beyond his ability to grant forgiveness for such sins. The agreement among the Christian priests to secure the forgiveness he wanted is believed to have been one of the main reasons that led Constantine to adopt Christianity. Yet, it was during this cruel tyrant's rule that the Council of Nice was held, which affirmed the divinity of Christ.
1310. It is difficult to imagine that persons who actually believed in a future state of rewards and punishments, and who of course must have been impressed with the comparative insignificance of any worldly enjoyments, would, for any earthly objects, have acted so much in a way to doom their souls to perpetual torture. It may therefore be inferred that the clerical papists who acted so wickedly were religious hypocrites, like the Jewish Pharisees. I am strongly under the impression that the imperfection of the proof of the truth of Scriptures, in the first place, and the inadequate and disgusting representations respecting the future world which they present, has always been productive of secret unbelief, and consequent recklessness respecting the dictates of religion or morality.
1310. It’s hard to believe that people who genuinely believed in a future filled with rewards and punishments, and who must have recognized how insignificant worldly pleasures are, would act in ways that would lead their souls to endless torment for any material gains. This suggests that the clerical papists who behaved so immorally were merely religious hypocrites, much like the Jewish Pharisees. I have a strong feeling that the weaknesses in the proof of Scripture's truth, along with the inadequate and off-putting views of the afterlife that they present, have always led to hidden doubt and a lack of concern for the teachings of religion or morality.
1311. Of the manner in which the clergy of the present day reason themselves into a belief, and expect to induce others to concur with them, the parodied quotation from the clerical Goliah of my would-be guide to heaven is an exemplification. It is only by frowning down objections, or begging the question, that they can get on. (1182.)
1311. The way today’s clergy convince themselves of their beliefs and expect others to agree with them can be seen in the parody of a quote from the clerical Goliah in my would-be guide to heaven. They can only make progress by ignoring objections or assuming their point is true. (1182)
1312. Said one among the most amiable of my clerical friends to me, when I adverted to the improbability that the Deity of this almost infinite universe would select a few human animalcules in Judea as his especial favourites: “Dr. Hare, you must not expect me to sit by patiently, and see the pillars of my profession assailed.” I am sorry, said I, if I have said any thing to give you pain. “How would you like the pillars of your science to be attacked?” I would defend them, not endeavour to silence the assailant! But all criticisms which lead to the cure of errors only benefit a science founded on truth.
1312. One of my most friendly clerical colleagues said to me, when I mentioned how unlikely it is that the God of this nearly infinite universe would choose a few human beings in Judea as His special favorites: “Dr. Hare, you can’t expect me to just sit by and watch the foundations of my profession being challenged.” I felt bad, I said, if I said anything that upset you. “How would you feel if the foundations of your science were being attacked?” I would defend them; I wouldn’t try to silence the critic! But all criticism that leads to correcting mistakes only helps a science based on truth.
1313. The skepticism produced by reading the Bible is alleged, by Archbishop Hughes, as the motive of his church for forbidding the reading of it to the faithful. It was the reading of the Bible, when a minor, which led to my unbelief in its authenticity. Bible societies may, without intending it, do much to prepare the reasoning portion of mankind for the adoption of a more moral, consistent, and rational gospel.
1313. According to Archbishop Hughes, the skepticism that comes from reading the Bible is the reason his church prohibits the faithful from reading it. It was my reading of the Bible as a minor that caused me to doubt its authenticity. Bible societies, even if they don’t mean to, may help people think more critically and eventually embrace a more moral, consistent, and rational gospel.
1315. “The year 1308 was marked by the resolution of Pope Clement V. to take up his residence at Avignon. Two years afterward, he appointed three cardinals to examine the witnesses against the former pope, Boniface VIII., and Cardinal Cajetan; and the testimony taken on the occasion proved them both to have been downright atheists. It was in substance as follows:
1315. “The year 1308 was marked by Pope Clement V's decision to move his residence to Avignon. Two years later, he assigned three cardinals to investigate the witnesses against the former pope, Boniface VIII, and Cardinal Cajetan; the testimonies gathered during this inquiry revealed that both had been outright atheists. The gist was as follows:
1316. “Nicholas, a priest and canon of the cathedral, &c., on oath, said, that being at Naples, under the pontificate of Celestin V., viz. A. D. 1274, in the house of Marin Sichinulfe, where Cardinal Benedict Cajetan dwelt, he entered the chamber of the cardinal in the suite of the Bishop of Fricenti, and found there a clerk disputing with him, in presence of several persons, upon the questions, which was the best law or religion, that of the Christians, of the Jews, or of the Saracens? and who those were that best observed their own? Then the cardinal said, What are all these religions? They are the inventions of men. We need not put ourselves to any trouble, except for this world, since there is no other life but the present. He said also, on the same occasion, that this world has had no beginning, and would not have an end. Nicholas, Abbot of St. Benedict, &c., deposed to the same fact, adding that the Cardinal Cajetan had said that the bread was not changed in the sacrament of the altar, and that it was false that it was the body of Jesus Christ; that there is no resurrection; that the soul dies with the body; that this was his opinion and that of all men of letters, but that the simple and ignorant thought otherwise. The witness being asked if the cardinal did not thus speak jestingly, replied that he said these things seriously and in good faith.
1316. “Nicholas, a priest and canon of the cathedral, etc., testified under oath that while he was in Naples during the papacy of Celestin V, specifically in A.D. 1274, at the home of Marin Sichinulfe where Cardinal Benedict Cajetan was staying, he entered the cardinal's room alongside the Bishop of Fricenti and found a clerk arguing with him in front of several witnesses about which law or religion was superior: that of Christians, Jews, or Saracens? And who practiced their own beliefs best? The cardinal then remarked, What are all these religions? They’re just human inventions. We shouldn’t bother ourselves with anything but this world, as there is no life beyond this one. He also stated on that occasion that this world has no beginning and will have no end. Nicholas, Abbot of St. Benedict, etc., testified to the same incident, adding that Cardinal Cajetan claimed the bread in the sacrament of the altar was not changed and that it was a lie that it became the body of Jesus Christ; that there is no resurrection; that the soul dies with the body; and that this was his view and that of all educated people, but the simple and uneducated thought differently. When asked if the cardinal spoke in jest, the witness replied that he said these things seriously and sincerely.”
1317. “Manfred, a lay citizen of Lucca, said, that in the year 1300, before Christmas, being in the chamber of Pope Boniface, in presence of the ambassadors of Florence, of Boulogne, and of Lucca, and many other persons, a man, who appeared to be the Pope’s chaplain, told his holiness of the death of a certain knight who had been a wicked man, and therefore it was necessary to pray for him, that Jesus Christ might have pity on his soul. Upon which Boniface treated him as if he were a fool; and after having spoken injuriously of Jesus Christ, he added: This knight has already received all the good and evil he can have, and there is no other life than this, nor any other paradise or hell than what is in this world. The witness testified to another discourse of Boniface, which modesty does not allow of our reporting; and another witness recited a story about him still more impious than the foregoing.
1317. “Manfred, a regular citizen of Lucca, said that in the year 1300, just before Christmas, while in the room of Pope Boniface, in front of the ambassadors from Florence, Boulogne, and Lucca, along with many others, a man who seemed to be the Pope’s chaplain informed His Holiness about the death of a certain knight who had been a wicked man, and thus it was necessary to pray for him, so that Jesus Christ might have mercy on his soul. To this, Boniface treated him as if he were foolish; after speaking disrespectfully about Jesus Christ, he added: This knight has already received all the good and evil he can get, and there is no life beyond this one, nor any paradise or hell other than what exists in this world. The witness testified to another conversation of Boniface, which modesty does not permit us to report; and another witness recounted an even more impious story about him.”
1318. “‘What remains of this information,’ says Fleury, ‘comprehends the depositions of thirteen witnesses, all to a similar effect. Another information which appeared the following year contained the evidence of twenty-three witnesses to the same facts, with others equally scandalous. But as the affair was never brought to judgment, it is superfluous to enter into any further details.’
1318. “‘What’s left of this information,’ says Fleury, ‘includes the statements of thirteen witnesses, all saying the same thing. Another report that came out the following year included the testimonies of twenty-three witnesses about the same events, along with some equally shocking details. But since the case was never taken to court, there’s no need to go into any more details.’”
1319. “Now here is a very extraordinary and powerful evidence to prove that at least one pope, and he a very distinguished one, Boniface VIII., and one cardinal, of high reputation, were not only infidels themselves, but claimed to be of the same class with ‘all men of letters.’ That the testimony was satisfactory seems incontrovertible; because the witnesses were thirty-six in number, unimpeached in character, and thought sufficient by Philip the Fair, King of France, and all his leading nobility. He proposed that Boniface should be arraigned, though dead, for heresy, and that his bones should be disinterred and burned, according to the modern fashion established by the Roman Church. It may seem strange, however, that even if Boniface and Cajetan had held such sentiments, they should have been so foolish as to utter them in the presence of so many. To this two answers may be given. First, that the influence of the philosophy which we have already noted in the University of Paris was so prevalent, that the clergy and the upper ranks of the laity were generally infected with it, and religion was looked upon, by nearly all, as a thing of policy, necessary to keep the vulgar in order, but only professed by the higher classes, as it was in heathen Rome, ‘for the sake of appearances.’ Unhappily, there are many proofs too strong to be doubted that this infidel philosophy was rife among the priesthood; and perhaps there is no other way of accounting for the manifest fact that the church, like the state, was governed for so many ages by the machinery of force and fear, as if there was no inward conscience to appeal to, except among a few pious souls, here and there—enough to perpetuate the church, according to the promise of Christ, but not enough to affect the general sentiment.”
1319. “Now here is a very extraordinary and powerful piece of evidence showing that at least one pope, a highly distinguished one, Boniface VIII, and one well-regarded cardinal were not only infidels themselves but also claimed to be on par with ‘all men of letters.’ The validity of the testimony seems undeniable because there were thirty-six witnesses, all reputable and considered sufficient by Philip the Fair, King of France, and his leading nobility. He suggested that Boniface should be put on trial, even posthumously, for heresy, and that his bones should be dug up and burned, following the modern practice established by the Roman Church. However, it may seem odd that even if Boniface and Cajetan held such views, they would be so careless as to express them in front of so many people. Two points can be made in response to this. First, the influence of the philosophy we previously noted at the University of Paris was so widespread that both clerics and the upper echelons of society were generally infected by it, viewing religion as a matter of policy meant to keep the masses in check, but only professed by the elite, similar to what was seen in pagan Rome, 'for the sake of appearances.' Unfortunately, there are many undeniable proofs that this infidel philosophy was rampant among the clergy; possibly the only way to explain the clear fact that the church, much like the state, was ruled for many ages by the machinery of force and fear, as if there was no inner conscience to appeal to, except among a few devout individuals scattered here and there—enough to sustain the church, as promised by Christ, but not enough to influence the general sentiment.”
Any religion, like that of Moses, which does not make Immortality a primary consideration, must be chiefly confined to worldly objects, and of course unworthy of consideration or respect.
1320. While the silence of the Pentateuch respecting immortality throws the authority of the “word of God,” so called, against the endowment of the human soul with that all-important attribute, the language of the de256calogue is inconsistent with the unity of the divine power. The words, “Thou shalt have no other gods before me,” implies that there were other gods who might be acknowledged; since if there were none other, the proper words would be—Thou canst have no other God but me, or—There is no other God but me.
1320. While the silence of the Pentateuch on immortality undermines the authority of the so-called “word of God” when it comes to the human soul having that crucial trait, the language of the de256calogue contradicts the unity of divine power. The phrase, “Thou shalt have no other gods before me,” suggests that there were other gods that could be recognized; since if there were none, the correct phrases would be—Thou canst have no other God but me, or—There is no other God but me.
1321. Again, when Jehovah alleges himself to be jealous, of whom could he be jealous, if there was no other God to excite the sentiment of jealousy? Can any one conceive God to be jealous of an idol, when he must perceive that whatever worship may be bestowed on idols, is actually intended for the true God? (1245, 1246.) Could Adam have been jealous when there was no other man in existence to be jealous of?
1321. Again, when Jehovah says he is jealous, who could he be jealous of if there is no other God to provoke that feeling? Can anyone imagine God being jealous of an idol, knowing that any worship given to idols is really meant for the true God? (1245, 1246.) Could Adam have been jealous when there was no other man around to be jealous of?
1322. In the Introduction the ends to be answered by religion were stated, (page 18.) Several of the foregoing pages have been designed to show that Scripture does not fulfil these objects, being almost silent as respects immortality, using doubtful language respecting the unity of the divine power. Moreover, Jehovah is described as wrathful, jealous, and vindictive; as sanctioning the massacre, spoliation, and extirpation of neighbouring nations.[26] The fruits of the religion of Moses were two sects, of whom one did not believe in a future state of rewards and punishments; the other, although professing such a belief, (according to the barbarous idea of Josephus,) were not as moral as the unbelievers, (750, 1098.) Moreover, as respects the New Testament, the precepts on which it laid the most stress, those against pecuniary cupidity and resistance of wrong, have been not only neglected, but acted upon inversely; so that rapacity and aggression have been the predominant features of the conduct of Christians, unworthily so called, toward each other, but especially toward those who have been of a different religious belief. In one trait, however, the words of Christ, already cited, have been fully carried out: “I come as a sword.”[27]
1322. In the Introduction, the purposes of religion were mentioned (page 18). Several of the previous pages have aimed to show that Scripture does not achieve these purposes, being mostly silent about immortality and using uncertain language regarding the oneness of divine power. Furthermore, Jehovah is portrayed as angry, jealous, and vengeful; as one who condones the massacre, looting, and destruction of neighboring nations.[26] The outcomes of Moses' religion were two groups, one of which did not believe in a future of rewards and punishments; the other, while claiming to believe in such a future (according to the harsh views of Josephus), were not as moral as the unbelievers, (750, 1098.) In addition, regarding the New Testament, the principles it emphasized the most—those against greed and injustice—have not only been ignored but also acted upon in the opposite way; thus, greed and aggression have been the main characteristics of the behavior of those who call themselves Christians towards one another, especially towards those with different religious beliefs. However, one aspect of Christ's words, which have already been quoted, has been completely realized: “I come as a sword.”[27]
1323. It may be seen from the passages quoted, that prior to the pro257mulgation of Christianity, people of various religious sects were willing to live in harmony; but that after its promulgation there was much discord, and that those who should have been especially influenced by Christianity (the priesthood) were the foremost in vice!
1323. From the quoted passages, it's clear that before Christianity was established, people from different religious groups were able to coexist peacefully. However, after Christianity became prominent, there was a lot of conflict, and those who should have been most influenced by Christianity (the priesthood) were often the worst offenders!
1324. It is conceived that either on the one side the evidence of Christianity could not have gone home to the soul of those who so grossly violated its monitions, or that the rewards held out by it had not been presented under an aspect sufficiently inviting to counteract the fleeting allurements of this temporal world. It is conceived that Scripture is from beginning to end, from the Pentateuch to the Gospel of John, too worldly, as first exhibited in the promise of lands to the Jews, and lastly of judgeships to the apostles. The Old Testament, of necessity, can treat of nothing but worldliness, since there is throughout scarcely any reference to heaven; and some of the Psalms would accord better with the curses of a devil, than with the prayers of a sincere Christian. The cix. Psalm contains this language:
1324. It seems that either the message of Christianity didn't really resonate with those who blatantly ignored its teachings, or the rewards it promised weren't presented in a way that was appealing enough to outweigh the temporary attractions of this world. It appears that Scripture, from start to finish, from the Pentateuch to the Gospel of John, is too focused on worldly matters, as initially shown in the promise of land to the Jews, and ultimately of positions of authority to the apostles. The Old Testament can only deal with worldly issues, as it hardly references heaven; and some of the Psalms seem more aligned with the curses of a devil than with the prayers of a true Christian. The cix. Psalm contains this language:
1325. “When he shall be judged, let him be condemned; and let his prayer become sin. Let his days be few; and let another take his office. Let his children be fatherless, and his wife a widow. Let his children be continually vagabonds, and beg: let them seek their bread also out of their desolate places. Let the extortioner catch all that he hath, and let the strangers spoil his labour. Let there be none to extend mercy unto him: neither let there be any to favour his fatherless children. Let his posterity be cut off; and in the generation following let their name be blotted out. Let the iniquity of his fathers be remembered with the Lord; and let not the sin of his mother be blotted out. Let them be before the Lord continually, that he may cut off the memory of them from the earth. Because that he remembered not to show mercy, but persecuted the poor and needy man, that he might even slay the broken in heart. As he loved cursing, so let it come unto him: as he delighted not in blessing, so let it be far from him. As he clothed himself with cursing like as with his garment, so let it come into his bowels like water, and like oil unto his bones. Let it be unto him as the garment which covereth him, and for a girdle wherewith he is girded continually. Let this be the reward of mine adversaries from the Lord, and of them that speak evil against my soul.”
1325. “When he is judged, let him be found guilty; and may his prayers be counted as sin. Let his days be short; and let someone else take his position. Let his children be orphaned, and his wife become a widow. Let his children wander and beg, seeking food from their desolate homes. Let the oppressor take everything he has, and let outsiders plunder his work. May no one show him mercy; may no one favor his orphaned children. May his lineage be cut off; and in the next generation, may their name be erased. May the sins of his parents be remembered by the Lord; and may his mother's sins not be forgotten. May they stand before the Lord forever, so He can erase their memory from the earth. Because he did not remember to show mercy, but persecuted the poor and needy, even intending to kill those who are heartbroken. As he loved cursing, let it fall upon him; as he did not delight in blessing, may it be far from him. As he wrapped himself in curses like clothing, let it consume him like water, and seep into his bones like oil. Let it be to him like the garment that covers him, and like a belt that he is strapped with continually. Let this be the reward for my enemies from the Lord, and for those who speak ill against my soul.”
1326. Under these circumstances, wherefore should there be any alarm for the consequences of replacing belief in Scripture by belief in Spiritualism, if the evidence of this be, as we think, vastly more reliable, and the morality far more consistent with that followed in practice by great and good men of ancient and modern times.
1326. Given these circumstances, why should we be concerned about the outcomes of trading belief in Scripture for belief in Spiritualism, if the evidence for Spiritualism is, as we believe, significantly more reliable, and the morality much more aligned with the practices of great and good people throughout history, both ancient and modern?
1327. Moreover, the basis of probation, upon which the morality of Scripture is built, is manifestly a castle in the air, since it involves this contradiction, that an omnipotent, omniscient, and prescient Deity, who can make his creatures what he wishes them to be, and must know what they are, has to resort to trial to learn that which he knows before the process is undertaken, as well as he can possibly after its accomplishment. This demonstration alone overturns the whole probationary superstructure existing in the minds of sectarians.
1327. Furthermore, the idea of probation, which is the foundation of the morality in Scripture, is clearly a castle in the air. This is because it presents a contradiction: an all-powerful, all-knowing, and foreseeing God, who can shape His creations as He wants and already knows what they are, would have to rely on trials to discover what He knows even before the trials begin, just as well as He could after they've taken place. This alone dismantles the entire structure of probation that exists in the minds of sectarians.
People profess Christianity more from a desire to do right, than they do right in consequence of their professions.
1329. I am aware how much it is a part of the existing system of education to imbue a confident faith in whatever tenets may be taught, and how little it is possible, in consequence, to have any arguments fairly considered which bear against the educational impressions. It may be seen in the instance of the interesting lady to whom I owe the kind letter, (1163,) how much more anxious such persons are to teach than to listen. She had, as she supposed, listened to an exposition of my views, of which the foundation had already been described in a published letter, with an effort to compare the heaven and hell of Scripture with those of Spiritualism; yet in all confidence of victory, this excellent creature brings me a letter written by one whom she considers to have a first-rate intellect, and who begins by assuming what I most emphatically deny, and of which the argument is just as good for Mohammedanism as for Christianity, provided the Koran be assumed as the word of God in lieu of the Bible, and Mohammed as the vicegerent of God instead of Christ. This may be considered as the argument of an eminent Episcopalian in favour of the truth of Christianity, while in those cited from Hughes and Breckinridge we have the arguments of an eminent Romanist on one side, and an eminent Calvinist on the other. The one objects to the basis of “fallible” men as the rule of faith; the other, to any inference derived from a gospel by “fallible” men. Breckinridge does not recollect that there is nothing more fallible than the traditions, compilations, and translations of fallible men, nor how skeptical all those who sustain the truth of Scripture on this evidence, are of any other evidence of the same kind which conflicts with Scripture.
1329. I realize how much the current education system focuses on instilling a strong belief in whatever doctrines are taught, and how difficult it is, as a result, for any counterarguments to be fairly considered against these educational beliefs. It’s evident in the case of the interesting lady from whom I received the kind letter, (1163,) just how eager such individuals are to teach rather than to listen. She believed she had absorbed a presentation of my views, the foundation of which I had already outlined in a published letter, in an attempt to compare the heaven and hell of Scripture with those of Spiritualism; yet, with great confidence, this lovely person presents me with a letter from someone she considers highly intelligent, who starts by assuming something I firmly reject. This argument is just as valid for Islam as it is for Christianity, as long as the Koran is accepted as the word of God instead of the Bible, and Mohammed is viewed as God’s representative instead of Christ. This may be seen as the argument of a notable Episcopalian supporting the truth of Christianity, while the positions taken by Hughes and Breckinridge showcase a prominent Roman Catholic on one side and a leading Calvinist on the other. One criticizes the reliance on “fallible” humans as the standard of faith; the other disputes any conclusions drawn from a gospel by “fallible” humans. Breckinridge seems to forget that there’s nothing more fallible than the traditions, compilations, and translations created by fallible humans, nor does he recall how skeptical those who defend the truth of Scripture based on this evidence usually are toward any other evidence of the same nature that conflicts with Scripture.
1330. If the reader will look at the letters of Amasa Holcomb and my replies, (690,) he will see an exemplification of the difficulty in which many were placed, who had no other evidence of a future state beside that afforded by Scripture. Let him apply to the human evidence of antiquity no less skepticism than is now applied to the human evidence of Spiritualists, and then estimate the weight of testimony in favour of the Scriptures. Let him fairly consider the internal evidence against Scripture, as briefly sketched in this work or elsewhere, and then say whether he can conscientiously condemn Mr. Holcomb or myself for conscientiously disbelieving Scripture.
1330. If the reader examines the letters from Amasa Holcomb and my responses, (690,) they will see an example of the struggle many faced, who had no other proof of an afterlife besides what was found in Scripture. Let them apply the same level of skepticism to the historical evidence as is currently directed at Spiritualists, and then evaluate the strength of the testimony supporting the Scriptures. Let them carefully consider the arguments against Scripture outlined in this work or elsewhere, and then decide if they can honestly criticize Mr. Holcomb or me for sincerely doubting Scripture.
1331. Let it be considered whether belief in Christianity is not at the present time a consequence of morality, rather than its cause; whether it is not, with ninety-nine in a hundred, the consequence of early impressions, which have associated the Christian religion and morals inseparably on the conscience; without, however, inducing in any one of the individuals thus influenced any idea that the precepts of Christ are to be carried out in259 practice. It would be manifestly preposterous to look for this where the clergy, who were the teachers, did not practically obey the precepts, but went ahead in the race of iniquity, whichever way the current might lead, and almost everywhere as desirous of wealth, and power, and worldly distinction as other men. The imperfection of the evidence of scriptural truth, on which the belief in it rests, or that false moral sense derived from education, which makes the person affected just as tenacious of one creed as of another, whether it be Judaic, Christian, or Mohammedan, causes the faith thus arising to yield whenever the moral sense is impaired on which it rests. Not being supported by reason, as soon as the educational conscientiousness on which it was founded is blunted, any faith built upon it forms no barrier. The individual perceives that his opinions were not formed by himself, but imparted, and would have been different, had he been born of different parents. Thus faith rests upon morality, not morality upon faith; and when morality goes, faith ceases to be a barrier. But meanwhile those who abandon morality, find in their educational impressions one which is a salvo to them, however sinful. They find that Christ died for those who believe in his divinity or in his divine mission, and of course, that by closing their ears and eyes to all evidence or argument impeaching Christianity, and continuing to cherish the early impressions made by their teachers, they may be redeemed from future punishment; whereas, as Dr. Berg alleged in his debate with Barker, “A sinner cannot be saved out of Christ.”
1331. Let's consider whether belief in Christianity today is more a result of morality than its origin; whether, for the vast majority, it stems from early experiences that have tied Christian beliefs to morals in our conscience, without actually leading those influenced to think about putting Christ's teachings into259 practice. It would clearly be absurd to expect this from those whose teachers—the clergy—didn't follow the teachings themselves, but instead chased after wealth, power, and social status just like anyone else. The unreliable evidence for scriptural truth that underlies this belief, or the flawed moral sense shaped by education, makes individuals just as committed to one belief system as another, whether it's Jewish, Christian, or Muslim, causing their faith to waver whenever their moral foundation weakens. Since it lacks rational support, as soon as the conscientiousness built on education fades, any belief based on it offers no protection. The individual realizes that their opinions weren't self-formed but rather taught to them and would have been different if they had different parents. Therefore, faith relies on morality, not the other way around; when morality wanes, faith no longer acts as a shield. Meanwhile, those who abandon morality find comfort in their educational influences, however wrong. They believe that Christ died for those who accept his divinity or his mission, and by ignoring any evidence or arguments against Christianity while holding onto early teachings, they believe they can avoid future punishment; as Dr. Berg stated in his debate with Barker, “A sinner cannot be saved out of Christ.”
1332. But one consequence of this interested, bigoted belief is, that animosity which, it was foretold by Christ, would cause such horrible discord, and would make his advent equivalent to a severing of all the dearest ties between relatives and friends, the superior and his subordinates. As at this time any idea of a religion would be scouted with indignation which should not make a future state of rewards and punishments the primary object, it is inconceivable to me wherefore the Old Testament should be an object of veneration to those whose thoughts are heavenward. How could there be any thing but worldliness where nothing but the things of the world were objects of desire—no heaven beyond.
1332. But one result of this biased, self-serving belief is the hostility that Christ predicted would lead to terrible conflict, causing his arrival to feel like a breaking of the strongest bonds between family and friends, as well as between those in power and their inferiors. Right now, any idea of a religion that doesn’t prioritize a future of rewards and punishments would be rejected with outrage, so I can’t understand why the Old Testament would be respected by those whose focus is heavenward. How could there be anything other than materialism when only worldly things are desired—no heaven beyond?
1333. From what has been urged, is it not manifest that, in the first place, it is of great importance that the evidence of a future state should be placed on a firmer footing than on recorded and translated traditions, or on the decretals of a most profligate priesthood? Would it not be one of the greatest imaginable blessings that those who have not the consolation of believing in immortality, should have that consolation, and those who already believe in a future state of existence, should have a better knowledge of that state, than that given by Josephus, sanctioned by Christ, even as collated by the pious and learned clergyman, Dr. Harbaugh? (750.)
1333. From what has been said, isn't it clear that, first of all, it's really important for the evidence of an afterlife to be based on something more solid than just recorded and translated traditions or the decrees of a very corrupt priesthood? Wouldn't it be one of the greatest blessings imaginable if those who don't have the comfort of believing in immortality could find that comfort, and if those who already believe in an afterlife could have a better understanding of that existence than what Josephus offered, approved by Christ, even as compiled by the devoted and knowledgeable clergyman, Dr. Harbaugh? (750.)
1334. If Christ had nothing but the vicinity of the fire prepared for the devil and his angels, agreeably to Josephus, and his story of Dives and260 Lazarus, or imaginary worldly appointments, or lying in the grave till the last day,—if these are all the grounds that Christians have had to build upon as respects future happiness, is it to be wondered at that the priesthood of the Middle Ages, who best knew the defect of gospel evidence, how little they themselves were to be trusted, and how illusory was the promise made to the apostles of judgeships, (743,) should, of all others in society, be the least restrained by fear of future punishment?
1334. If Christ only had the heat of the fire meant for the devil and his angels, according to Josephus, and his tale of Dives and Lazarus, or just empty worldly positions, or lying in the grave until the last day,—if these are all the reasons that Christians have relied on regarding future happiness, is it surprising that the priesthood of the Middle Ages, who were most aware of the shortcomings of gospel evidence, how untrustworthy they themselves were, and how misleading the promise made to the apostles of judgeships, (743,) should be the ones in society least held back by fear of future punishment?
It is a calumny against human nature to represent men as wilfully ignorant of the true religion.
1335. A prevalent calumny against human nature has been, that men remain wilfully reckless as respects religious truth; or that they remain in error designedly, and not because they mistake it for truth. But it is notorious, that as respects the laws of man, those who make it their business to violate them take great care to make themselves acquainted with the laws which it is their object to break. None but an idiot would expect the law to be less severe in proportion as he should keep himself ignorant of its provisions. No banditti in the Russian empire would expect the less to go to Siberia because they should deny the reigning czar to be the sovereign. They would not expect to escape his power by enthroning a pretended czar, and paying him honour. Such conduct would be too absurd, even for fools to pursue; yet it is upon such erroneous views that three thousand Israelites were surprised and assassinated for worshipping the golden calf; and that eminent clergymen do not consider it as blasphemy against the paternal God, described by Seneca (1224) to represent him as sanctioning this horrible butchery.[28]
1335. A common accusation against human nature has been that people deliberately ignore religious truth or stay in error on purpose, rather than mistaking it for truth. However, it’s clear that when it comes to the laws of society, those who choose to break them take great care to understand the laws they intend to violate. No one would expect the law to be less harsh simply because they remain ignorant of its rules. No criminals in the Russian empire would think they’d escape punishment by denying the current czar’s authority. They wouldn’t expect to avoid his power by supporting a false czar and honoring him. Such behavior would be too ridiculous, even for fools; yet it’s on these misguided beliefs that three thousand Israelites were caught off guard and killed for worshipping the golden calf; and that respected clergymen don’t see it as blasphemy against the loving God, as described by Seneca (1224), to portray Him as approving of this terrible slaughter.[28]
1336. The truth is, the selfishness of the worst men makes it quite as much an object with them, as with good men, to know to what punishments they may become liable, or what advantages they will be entitled to hereafter. Self-interest makes every man anxious to know that which deeply affects his future existence. Is there any one who would not wish to learn whether his soul is to rot in the coffin with its fleshy integuments, or to have another and eternal existence, happy or wretched according to his deportment in this world?[29]
1336. The truth is, the selfishness of the worst people makes it just as important for them, as it is for good people, to understand what punishments they might face or what benefits they will have in the future. Self-interest drives everyone to want to know what deeply impacts their future. Is there anyone who wouldn't want to find out if their soul will decay in the grave with its physical body, or have another eternal existence, either happy or miserable depending on how they acted in this world?[29]
1337. Those who really wish to serve the cause of true religion, and human welfare here and hereafter, should not expect that harsh words or measures will promote these objects. If, from want of due consideration, they uphold that which is repulsive to the human heart and understanding, and turn a deaf ear to facts and reasoning, which would produce a more beneficial issue, they will really be amenable to the blame which they so unjustly lavish upon those whom they calumniate as “Infidels,” while they themselves are really infidels to their professed principles. The Bible itself made me an unbeliever in its authenticity, and makes unbelievers of many who read it attentively and fearlessly, after their reason is matured.
1337. Those who genuinely want to support true religion and the well-being of humanity now and in the future shouldn't think that harsh words or actions will achieve these goals. If, without proper consideration, they stand by what is off-putting to the human heart and mind, ignoring facts and reasoning that could lead to a better outcome, they will rightly face the criticism they unjustly direct at those they label as “Infidels,” while they themselves are actually betraying their own professed beliefs. The Bible itself turned me into a skeptic regarding its authenticity and causes many who read it thoughtfully and fearlessly, once their reasoning is developed, to become skeptics as well.
To appreciate the Jewish representation of the Deity, a reader should first form an idea of this planet and its inhabitants, comparatively with the hundred millions of solar systems, and the inconceivable extent of the space which encompasses them, which fall within the domain of one common Deity.
1339. In order to form an idea of the Deity, we must consider the extent of the universe over which he rules, and the magnificence and multiplicity of the bodies which it comprises. Alpha Centauri, a star of the Centaur, a constellation in the southern hemisphere, is the nearest of the fixed stars; it nevertheless is nearly twenty thousand million of miles from the earth. Light, flying at the rate of two hundred thousand miles in a second, to come from that star, would take three years and three months to reach the earth.
1339. To get an idea of the Deity, we need to think about the vastness of the universe He governs and the beauty and variety of the celestial bodies it contains. Alpha Centauri, a star in the Centaur constellation located in the southern hemisphere, is the closest of the fixed stars; however, it is still about twenty billion miles away from Earth. Light, traveling at a speed of two hundred thousand miles per second, would take three years and three months to travel from that star to Earth.
1340. A star in the constellation of the Swan, known as “61 Cygni,” is another among the few whose distance is sufficiently small to allow it to be measured. This is nearly three times as far as Alpha Centauri; so that it would take light nine years to come from “61 Cygni” to the earth. This star appears single to the naked eye, but, seen through a telescope, appears like two stars, which according to Mitchell, are six thousand millions of miles apart.
1340. A star in the constellation Cygnus, called “61 Cygni,” is one of the few that is close enough for its distance to be measured. It's almost three times farther away than Alpha Centauri, meaning it takes light nine years to travel from “61 Cygni” to Earth. To the naked eye, this star looks like a single point of light, but when viewed through a telescope, it appears as two stars that, according to Mitchell, are six billion miles apart.
1341. But the stars which enter into the nebula of Orion are so remote, that light, to come from one of them, would require ninety-two thousand years. Suppose an imaginary right line to be extended from a star in Orion so as to pass through the centre of this planet, and to reach a star on the other side as remote as that first mentioned; of course, the distance262 being doubled, it would require light twice the time to perceive it, or one hundred and eighty-four thousand years. Suppose a spherical space of which that line forms a diameter, or we may suppose a larger sphere, including all the nebula visible by the Rosse telescope. It is estimated that there are in all not less than one hundred millions of stars visible with the aid of that magnificent instrument, each of which is a sun with its planets; so that we have reason to suppose that there are an hundred millions of solar systems. Some of the suns are, like Sirius, estimated to give sixty-three times as much light as our sun emits. Our planet is to Jupiter as one to twelve hundred; to Saturn, as one to one thousand; to the sun, as one to one million four hundred thousand. It is hardly to be seen by the naked eye from Jupiter, and would be invisible to any human eye situated upon any planet more remote than Jupiter. To the whole of the sidereal creation, it is as a globule of water in the ocean, and the inhabitants are as animalcules in that globule.
1341. But the stars that are part of the Orion nebula are so far away that it would take ninety-two thousand years for their light to reach us. Imagine drawing a straight line from a star in Orion that goes through the center of our planet and extends to another equally distant star on the other side. The distance would be doubled, meaning it would take light one hundred and eighty-four thousand years to travel that distance. Now, picture a spherical space where that line is the diameter, or a larger sphere that includes all the nebulae visible through the Rosse telescope. It's estimated that there are at least one hundred million stars visible with that amazing instrument, each one a sun with its own planets, suggesting there are a hundred million solar systems. Some suns, like Sirius, are estimated to emit sixty-three times more light than our sun. Our planet is to Jupiter as one is to twelve hundred; to Saturn, as one is to one thousand; to the sun, as one is to one million four hundred thousand. It’s hardly visible to the naked eye from Jupiter and would be unseeable from any planet farther out than Jupiter. In the vastness of the universe, it’s like a droplet of water in the ocean, and the inhabitants are like tiny organisms within that droplet.
1342. Having thus prepared his mind with a proper conception of the vastness of the attributes of the Deity, and the degree of the comparative importance of the human race in the divine mind, as it surveys the whole creation, let the reader take up the book of Genesis, and compare the impressions which that alleged word of God would convey with those which the preceding facts and considerations would induce. It may be expedient that the reader, while under the sublime impression of the majesty and magnificence of the Deity, as displayed in his works, should consider what evidence there is of any entity having the relation to him of a female; and if it be irrational to suppose a commensurate being of the other sex, let the reader consider how this Supreme Deity could have a son? The existence of a son requiring both a father and mother, it may be well to think how a male without a female god could have a son. He may take into view the opinions of Newton, that God cannot be presumed to have organs. Doubtless it will be perceived that this all-pervading, magnificent being cannot require eyes to see, ears to hear, a nose to smell, a tongue to speak, or a mouth to eat, legs with which to walk, or arms with which to strike. Of course he will not consider him as having a person made of those organs, as in the instance of his creature, man. He will agree with Newton, that it were absurd to ascribe even one person to God, and would be still more so to ascribe three persons. Again, if three persons be essential to God, he being eternal, the three persons must be eternal, and of course neither can bear the relation of a son to the other; nor can the coeval Holy Ghost proceed from two of the trio, forming the third person, who, by the premises, existed before he came into his subsequent existence, as alleged by the contradictory conclusion. If the individuals composing the Godhead have any distinct will or reason, the admission of the trinity amounts to polytheism; and if they have not severally independent natures and reason, then the association of the idea of three persons is useless. Is it not263 idolatrous thus to associate with the Deity effete masses of spiritual matter, under the name of persons, and worship the imaginary monster thus created as the true God? Still more, is it not monstrous to represent that those who cannot adore this imaginary idol, are wilfully incredulous?
1342. Having prepared his mind with a clear understanding of the vastness of God's attributes and the relative importance of humanity in the divine perspective as it observes all creation, the reader is encouraged to open the book of Genesis and compare the impressions that this supposed word of God conveys with those shaped by the previous facts and reflections. It may be beneficial for the reader, while feeling the awe of the majesty and greatness of God demonstrated in His creations, to consider what evidence exists of any entity having a female relationship to Him; and if it seems unreasonable to assume a being of the opposite gender, then the reader should reflect on how this Supreme Deity could have a son? Since having a son requires both a father and a mother, it is worth pondering how a male deity could have a son without a female counterpart. He may take into account Newton's view that God cannot be presumed to have physical organs. Clearly, it will be recognized that this all-encompassing, magnificent being does not need eyes to see, ears to hear, a nose to smell, a tongue to speak, or a mouth to eat, nor legs to walk or arms to act. Obviously, one wouldn't think of Him as possessing a form made of those organs like His creation, man. He will concur with Newton that it is absurd to attribute even one person to God, and even more so to claim there are three persons. Furthermore, if three persons are essential to God, and He is eternal, then those three persons must also be eternal, and therefore none can be the son of another; nor can the coexistent Holy Ghost proceed from two of them to form a third person, who, by the argument, existed before he came into his subsequent existence, as suggested by the contradictory conclusion. If the individuals forming the Godhead each have distinct wills or rationality, then accepting the trinity amounts to polytheism; and if they do not have separate independent natures and reasoning, then the notion of three persons becomes meaningless. Is it not263 idolatrous to associate with the Deity outdated collections of spiritual substance, calling them persons, and to worship this imagined figure as the true God? Moreover, is it not monstrous to claim that those who cannot worship this imaginary idol are willfully skeptical?
1343. I have said that the account of the creation, given in the Pentateuch, is inconsistent with geological facts. Much sophistry has been employed to escape from this truth. Thus eminent geologists have striven to reconcile the alleged creation of the world in six days, to mean actually six eras, each of immense duration; yet Scripture representing that the day succeeding those so employed, should be kept holy as a Sabbath, and this being viewed in the Decalogue as a period of twenty-four hours, precludes the assignment of any longer duration to each of the six days, actually occupied by the Creator in performing his great work.
1343. I've mentioned that the creation story in the Pentateuch doesn't align with geological evidence. A lot of reasoning has been used to avoid facing this truth. For instance, respected geologists have tried to interpret the supposed creation of the world in six days as actually meaning six long periods, each lasting a significant amount of time; however, Scripture states that the day following those periods should be observed as a holy Sabbath, and since the Decalogue describes this as a 24-hour period, it rules out assigning a longer duration to each of the six days that the Creator spent on His monumental work.
1344. To enable the reader to judge how far the facts ascertained by geological investigation, can be reconciled with the scriptural account, I shall here quote them, as stated by Professor Hitchcock, in his work entitled “Religion of Geology,” page 19. It should be known to the reader that this author is among those who assume the Bible to be the word of God upon the same grounds as the clergyman, (1182.)
1344. To help the reader evaluate how the findings from geological research align with the biblical account, I will quote them as presented by Professor Hitchcock in his book titled “Religion of Geology,” page 19. It's important for the reader to know that this author views the Bible as the word of God for the same reasons as the clergyman, (1182.)
1345. “Under these circumstances, all that I can do, is to state definitely what I apprehend to be the established principles of the science that have a bearing upon religious truth, and refer my hearers to standard works on the subject for the proof that they are true. If any will not take the trouble to examine the proofs, I trust they will have candour and impartiality enough not to deny my positions.
1345. “Given these circumstances, all I can do is clearly outline what I believe to be the established principles of the science that relate to religious truth, and direct my audience to reliable sources on the subject for evidence that supports these claims. If anyone is unwilling to take the time to review the evidence, I hope they will be fair-minded enough not to dismiss my arguments.”
1346. “The first important conclusion to which every careful observer will come is, that the rocks of all sorts which compose the present crust of the globe, so far as it has been explored, at least to the depth of several miles, appear to have been the result of second causes; that is, they are now in a different state from that in which they were originally created.
1346. “The first key takeaway for any careful observer is that the various types of rocks that make up the Earth's crust—at least down to a depth of several miles—seem to have come about through secondary processes; in other words, they are no longer in the same condition as when they were originally formed."
1347. “It is, indeed, a favourite idea with some, that all the rocks and their contents were created, just as we now meet them, in a moment of time; that the supposed remains of animals and plants, which many of them contain, and which occur in all states, from an animal or plant little changed, to a complete conversion into stone, were never real animals and plants, but only resemblances; and that the marks of fusion and of the wearing of water, exhibited by the rocks, are not to be taken as evidences that they have undergone such processes, but only that it has pleased God to give them that appearance; and that, in fact, it was as easy for God to create them just as they now are as in any other form.
1347. “Some people really like the idea that all the rocks and everything in them were created exactly as we see them now, in an instant. They believe that the supposed remains of animals and plants found in the rocks, which range from hardly changed to completely turned into stone, were never actual animals and plants but just imitations. They think that the signs of melting and water erosion on the rocks shouldn’t be seen as proof that those processes happened, but rather that it was God's choice to make them look that way; and that, in fact, it was just as easy for God to create them in their current form as it would be in any other way.”
1348. “It is a presumption against such a supposition, that no men, who have carefully examined rocks and organic remains, are its advocates. Not that they doubt the power of God to produce such effects, but they deny the probability that he has exerted it in this manner; for through264out nature, wherever they have an opportunity to witness her operations, they find that when substances appear to have undergone changes, by means of secondary agencies, they have in fact undergone them; and, therefore, the whole analogy of nature goes to prove that the rocks have experienced great changes since their deposition. If rocks are an exception to the rest of nature,—that is, if they are the effect of miraculous agency,—there is no proof of it; and to admit it without proof is to destroy all grounds of analogical reasoning in natural operations; in other words, it is to remove the entire basis of reasoning in physical science. Every reasonable man, therefore, who has examined rocks, will admit that they have undergone important changes since their original formation.
1348. "It's generally assumed that no one who has closely studied rocks and organic remains supports this idea. It's not that they doubt God's ability to create such changes; they just reject the likelihood that He has done so in this way. Throughout264nature, whenever they observe her processes, they find that when materials seem to have changed due to secondary factors, they actually have changed. Therefore, the overall pattern in nature suggests that rocks have undergone significant changes since they were formed. If rocks were an exception to this—if they were produced by miraculous means—there's no evidence for it; accepting that without proof undermines all analogical reasoning in natural processes. In other words, it destroys the foundation of reasoning in physical science. Every reasonable person who has studied rocks will agree that they have experienced major changes since their initial formation."
1349. “In the second place, the same general laws appear to have always prevailed on the globe, and to have controlled the changes which have taken place upon and within it. We come to no spot, in the history of the rocks, in which a system different from that which now prevails appears to have existed. Great peculiarities in the structure of animals and plants do indeed occur, as well as changes on a scale of magnitude unknown at present; but this was only a wise adaptation to peculiar circumstances, and not an infringement of the general laws.
1349. “Firstly, it seems that the same basic laws have always been in effect on Earth, governing the changes that have happened on and within it. In our exploration of the history of rocks, we don’t find any area where a system different from what we see today has been in place. While there are notable differences in the structure of animals and plants, along with changes on a scale we can’t currently imagine, these were simply smart adaptations to unique circumstances, not a violation of the overarching laws.”
1351. “Fourthly. It is demonstrated that the present continents of the globe, with perhaps the exception of some of their highest mountains, have for a long period constituted the bottom of the ocean, and have been subsequently either elevated into their present position, or the waters have been drained off from their surface. This is probably the most important principle in geology; and though regarded with much skepticism by many, it is as satisfactorily proved as any principle of physical science not resting on mathematical demonstration.
1351. “Fourthly. It is shown that the current continents of the world, except maybe for some of their tallest mountains, have for a long time been the ocean floor, and have either been raised to their current position or the water has been removed from their surface. This is likely the most crucial principle in geology; and although many view it with skepticism, it is as convincingly demonstrated as any principle in physical science that doesn't rely on mathematical proof.
1353. “Sixthly. The fossiliferous rocks, or such as contain animals and plants, are not less than six or seven miles in perpendicular thickness, and are composed of hundreds of alternating layers of different kinds, all of which appear to have been deposited, just as rocks are now forming, at the bottom of lakes and seas; and hence their deposition must have occupied an immense period of time. Even if we admit that this deposition went on in particular places much faster than at present, a variety of facts forbid the supposition that this was the general mode of their formation.
1353. “Sixthly. The fossil-rich rocks, or those that contain animals and plants, are at least six or seven miles thick, made up of hundreds of alternating layers of various types, all of which seem to have been formed just like rocks are currently forming at the bottoms of lakes and oceans; therefore, their formation must have taken an enormous amount of time. Even if we accept that this formation happened much faster in certain areas than it does now, a variety of evidence suggests that this was not the overall process of their creation."
1354. “Seventhly. The remains of animals and plants found in the earth are not mingled confusedly together, but are found arranged, for the265 most part, in as much order as the drawers of a well-regulated cabinet. In general, they appear to have lived and died on or near the spots where they are now found; and as countless millions of these remains are often found piled together, so as to form almost entire mountains, the periods requisite for their formation must have been immensely long, as was taught in the preceding proposition.
1354. “Seventhly. The remains of animals and plants found in the earth aren't mixed up randomly; instead, they are mostly arranged in a way similar to a well-organized cabinet. Generally, it seems they lived and died close to the places where we find them today. Since countless millions of these remains are often found stacked together to form almost entire mountains, the time needed for their formation must have been extremely long, as explained in the previous point.
1355. “Eighthly. Still further confirmation of the same important principle is found in the well-established fact, that there have been upon the globe, previous to the existing races, not less than five distinct periods of organized existence; that is, five great groups of animals and plants, so completely independent that no species whatever is found in more than one of them, have lived and successively passed away before the creation of the races that now occupy the surface. Other standard writers make the number of these periods of existence as many as twelve. Comparative anatomy testifies that so unlike in structure were these different groups, that they could not have coexisted in the same climate and other external circumstances.
1355. “Eighthly. Further proof of this important principle can be seen in the well-established fact that there have been at least five distinct periods of organized life on Earth prior to the current species; that is, five major groups of animals and plants that were so completely independent that no species can be found in more than one of them, have existed and then disappeared before the emergence of the species we see today. Other respected authors suggest that there may have been as many as twelve of these periods. Comparative anatomy shows that these different groups were so structurally different that they could not have existed at the same time in the same environment or under similar conditions.”
1356. “Ninthly. In the earliest times in which animals and plants lived, the climate over the whole globe appears to have been as warm as, or even warmer than, it is now between the tropics. And the slow change from warmer to colder appears to have been the chief cause of the successive destruction of the different races; and new ones were created, better adapted to the altered condition of the globe; and yet each group seems to have occupied the globe through a period of great length; so that we have here another evidence of the vast cycles of duration that must have rolled away even since the earth became a habitable globe.
1356. “Ninthly. In the earliest times when animals and plants existed, the climate across the entire planet seems to have been as warm as, or even warmer than, it is now in the tropics. The gradual shift from warmer to cooler temperatures appears to have been the main reason for the gradual extinction of different species; new ones emerged that were better suited to the changed conditions of the Earth. Still, each group seems to have existed on Earth for a very long time, providing further evidence of the immense cycles of time that must have passed since the Earth became a livable planet.”
1357. “Tenthly. There is no small reason to suppose that the globe underwent numerous changes previous to the time when animals were placed upon it; that, in fact, the time was when the whole matter of the earth was in a melted state, and not improbably also even in a gaseous state. These points, indeed, are not as well established as the others that have been mentioned; but, if admitted, they give to the globe an incalculable antiquity.
1357. “Tenthly. There’s a good reason to believe that the Earth went through many changes before animals were put on it; in fact, there was a time when all the material of the planet was melted, and possibly even in a gaseous state. These points aren't as well established as the others mentioned, but if accepted, they would imply that the Earth is incredibly ancient.
1359. “Twelfthly. Among the thirty thousand species of animals and plants found in the rocks,[30] very few living species have been detected; and even these few occur in the most recent rocks, while in the secondary266 group, not less than six miles thick, not a single species now on the globe has been discovered. Hence the present races did not exist till after those in the secondary rocks had died. No human remains have been found below those alluvial deposits which are now forming by rivers, lakes, and the ocean. Hence geology infers that man was one of the latest animals that was placed on the globe.
1359. “Twelfthly. Among the thirty thousand species of animals and plants found in the rocks, very few living species have been detected; and even these occur only in the most recent rocks, while in the secondary266 group, which is not less than six miles thick, not a single species currently on Earth has been discovered. This suggests that the present races did not exist until after those in the secondary rocks had died out. No human remains have been found below the alluvial deposits that are currently forming by rivers, lakes, and the ocean. Therefore, geology concludes that humans were among the last animals to appear on the planet.”
1360. “Thirteenthly. The surface of the earth has undergone an enormous amount of erosion by the action of the ocean, the rivers, and the atmosphere. The ocean has worn away the solid rock, in some parts of the world, not less than ten thousand feet in depth, and rivers have cut channels through the hardest strata, hundreds of feet deep and several miles long; both of which effects demand periods inconceivably long.
1360. “Thirteenthly. The surface of the earth has experienced a massive amount of erosion due to the actions of the ocean, rivers, and atmosphere. In some areas, the ocean has worn away solid rock by as much as ten thousand feet deep, while rivers have carved out channels through the hardest layers, hundreds of feet deep and several miles long; both of these processes require incredibly long time periods.
1363. “Sixteenthly. There is evidence, in regard to some parts of the world, that the continents are now experiencing slow vertical movements—some places sinking, and others rising. And hence a presumption is derived that, in early times, such changes may have been often repeated, and on a great scale.
1365. “Finally. The present races of animals and plants on the globe are for the most part disposed in groups, occupying particular districts, beyond whose limits the species peculiar to those provinces usually droop and die. The same is true, to some extent, as to the animals and plants found in the rocks; though the much greater uniformity of climate that prevailed in early times permitted organized beings to take a much wider range than at present; so that the zoological and botanical districts were then probably much wider. But the general conclusion, in respect to living and extinct animals is, that there must have been several centres of creation, from which they emigrated as far as their natures would allow them to range.
1365. “Finally. Most of the current species of animals and plants on Earth are grouped together, residing in specific areas, beyond which the species unique to those regions typically struggle and die. The same applies, to some degree, to the animals and plants found in rocks; however, the significantly more uniform climate that existed in earlier times allowed living organisms to spread much farther than they can today, meaning that the zoological and botanical regions were probably much larger back then. But the overall conclusion regarding living and extinct animals is that there must have been several origins of creation, from which they spread as far as their nature permitted them to go.
1366. “It would be easy to state more principles of geology of considerable importance; but I have now named the principal ones that bear upon the subject of religion. A brief statement of the leading truths of theology, whether natural or revealed, which these principles affect, and on which they cast light, will give an idea of the subjects which I propose to discuss in these lectures.
1366. “It would be simple to mention more important geological principles; however, I have already pointed out the main ones that relate to religion. A concise overview of the key truths of theology, whether they are natural or revealed, that these principles influence and clarify, will provide an understanding of the topics I plan to discuss in these lectures.
1367. “The first point relates to the age of the world. For while it has been the usual interpretation of the Mosaic account that the world was brought into existence nearly at the same time with man and the other existing animals, geology throws back its creation to a period indefinitely but immeasurably remote. The question is, not whether man has existed on the globe longer than the common interpretation of Genesis requires,—for here geology and the Bible speak the same language,—but whether the globe itself did not exist long before his creation; that is, long before the six days’ work, so definitely described in the Mosaic account? In other words, is not this a case in which the discoveries of science enable us more accurately to understand the Scriptures?
1367. “The first point concerns the age of the world. While the traditional interpretation of the Mosaic account suggests that the world was created almost simultaneously with humans and other existing animals, geology pushes this timeline back to a period that is both incredibly distant and hard to measure. The question isn't whether humans existed on Earth longer than what the typical reading of Genesis suggests—because in this case, both geology and the Bible agree—but rather whether the Earth itself existed long before humans were created; that is, long before the six days of creation described in the Mosaic account. In other words, is this not a situation where scientific discoveries help us better understand the Scriptures?”
1368. “The introduction of death into the world, and the specific character of that death described in Scripture as the consequence of sin, are the next points where geology touches the subject of religion. Here, too, the general interpretation of Scripture is at variance with the facts of geology, which distinctly testify to the occurrence of death among animals long before the existence of man. Shall geology here, also, be permitted to modify our exposition of the Bible?
1368. “The introduction of death into the world, and the specific nature of that death described in Scripture as a result of sin, are the next areas where geology intersects with religious beliefs. In this case, too, the general interpretation of Scripture conflicts with geological facts, which clearly show that death among animals happened long before humans appeared. Should we also allow geology to influence our understanding of the Bible here?
1369. “The subject of deluges, and especially that of Noah, will next claim our attention. For though it is now generally agreed that geology cannot detect traces of such a deluge as the Scriptures describe, yet upon some other bearings of that subject it does cast light; and so remarkable is the history of opinions concerning the Noachian deluge, that it could not on that account alone be properly passed in silence.”
1369. “Next, we will focus on the topic of floods, particularly the one concerning Noah. While it’s widely accepted now that geology cannot find evidence of a flood as described in the Scriptures, there are still other aspects of the topic that are enlightening; the history of views regarding the Noah's flood is so notable that we can't just ignore it.”
Our actions dependent, under God, on organization, education, and the extent to which we are tempted extraneously.
1371. May it not be consistently inquired, who, without God’s assistance, can make his passions less ardent? his counteracting reason or conscientiousness more competent to restrain them? Who, prior to his sublunary existence, had the option, whether he should be born a Jew, a Gentile, or a Christian; whether in the Roman, Grecian, Episcopalian, or dissenting churches; whether his progenitors should be Chinese, Hindoos, Europeans, negroes, or savages? Who has, through his own previous choice, been brought up, on the one hand, by ignorant and vicious, or on the other, by virtuous and well-educated, parents? Can any soul be alleged to be responsible for entering the body of an infant begotten by idolaters, and thus subjected to the curse of the commandment? Or can a soul be deemed to have any merit because it came into the world as the progeny of parents orthodox in their own estimation, and happy in the belief that while myriads are to suffer to eternity in another world, for errors or crimes arising from causes beyond their control, a few are to be made eternally268 happy, notwithstanding their admitted sinfulness, by virtue of a bigoted confidence in the pre-eminent ability of their parents, their priests, or of themselves to learn tenets of which the great majority of mankind are ignorant? Humility in profession is associated with a towering and overbearing presumption in practice toward all who differ with them in creed: hence an effort to instruct others at the expense of millions spent in missions, while they have no better evidence of the accuracy of their own knowledge than a fallible human conviction.
1371. Shouldn’t we question who, without God’s help, can make their emotions less intense or their reasoning and conscience better at controlling them? Who, before being born, had the choice to come into the world as a Jew, a Gentile, or a Christian; whether in the Roman, Greek, Episcopalian, or other churches; whether their ancestors would be Chinese, Hindus, Europeans, Black, or savages? Who has, by their own previous choice, been raised by either ignorant and immoral parents or virtuous and well-educated ones? Can anyone be held accountable for being born into a family of idolaters and facing the consequences of that? Or can a soul be considered worthy simply for coming from parents who believe themselves to be orthodox, thinking that while countless others will suffer for mistakes or crimes caused by factors beyond their control, a select few will be made eternally268 happy despite their admitted wrongdoing, simply because of a biased certainty in the superior ability of their parents, priests, or even themselves to understand beliefs that most people are completely unaware of? They claim humility in their beliefs but act with overwhelming arrogance towards those who hold different views: thus, they strive to teach others while spending millions on missions, even when they have no better proof of their own understanding than a fallible human opinion.
1373. It may be said that they are free agents, being endowed with free-will; but if they be perfectly alike and similarly situated, (agreeably to the premises,) their free-will must be perfectly similar; and if not, let it be allowed to be, through God’s will, perfectly similar. Is it in their power to alter the nature of their will, any more than “the colour of their hair.”
1373. One could argue that they are free agents, blessed with free will; however, if they are exactly alike and in the same circumstances, (as stated in the premises,) their free will must also be exactly alike; and if that’s not the case, let it be accepted as being perfectly similar through God's will. Can they change the nature of their will any more than they can change “the color of their hair”?
1375. But it may be inquired, where is the merit of virtue, or the demerit of vice, if they be the consequences of causes over which we have no control? The reply is, that virtue is an endowment due to the will of Deity, just as the difference between the different races of mankind and the various genera of animals, or between individuals of the same species, must be due to that volition. An analogous idea of the necessity of God’s help to virtue is insisted upon by some of our most respectable and numerous Christian sects. It places virtue in man, so far as it may exist, upon the same basis as in God. It has always been held by all Christians that God can do no wrong; that vice is inconsistent with his nature. The more, then, a man is by nature and education incapable of being vicious, the greater his natural aptitude for virtue, the more he approaches its most perfect exemplification.
1375. But one might ask, what’s the point of virtue, or the blame of vice, if they result from causes beyond our control? The answer is that virtue is a gift from God, much like the differences among human races and various types of animals, or among individuals within the same species, must come from His will. Many respected and numerous Christian denominations emphasize the necessity of divine assistance for virtue. It positions virtue in humans, wherever it exists, on the same foundation as it is in God. Throughout history, all Christians have believed that God cannot do wrong and that vice contradicts His nature. Thus, the more a person is naturally and through education incapable of being vicious, the greater their inherent ability for virtue, bringing them closer to its highest expression.
1376. But how can the punishment of the wicked be justified under this view of their case? I answer, that it can only be justified in self-defence, for the reformation of the offender, or to prevent the repetition of injury where no other means can be employed, just as killing wild beasts, noxious insects, or our enemies in warfare is justified.
1377. Punishment, unless with a view to prevention or reformation, seems to me diabolic. It seems irreconcilable with the injunction to return good for evil, that the Deity from whom it proceeds should return evil for evil, in excess; that he should, for finite and transient sins, award eternal punishment.
1377. Punishment, unless it's aimed at preventing future harm or reforming behavior, feels inhumane to me. It seems incompatible with the command to repay good for evil that the Deity who enforces it would return evil for evil, in excess; that He would impose eternal punishment for temporary and limited wrongs.
1378. The inference that omniscience and omnipotence could create myriads of beings, foreseeing that they must be subjected to extreme misery for an unlimited time, is irreconcilable with all goodness and omniscience. But it may be demanded, does not the fear of future punishment make mankind more virtuous? The man who avoids a felony solely through fear of future punishment is not the less wicked; he is only a more prudent, or a more cowardly villain. That piety to God and philanthropy are virtues, is most evident; but then these incentives must be disinterested. If Abraham could believe that shedding his son’s blood upon the altar would gratify the Deity, in order to make it a pious or virtuous act, it should have been unaccompanied by any expectation of benefit to himself. He must have had a conception of the Deity fully as bad as that of any heathen, to suppose that the sacrifice would be agreeable to him.
1378. The idea that being all-knowing and all-powerful could create countless beings, knowing they would be subjected to extreme suffering for an unlimited time, contradicts any notion of goodness and omniscience. But it might be asked, does the fear of future punishment make people more virtuous? A person who avoids committing a crime simply out of fear of future punishment is not actually less wicked; they're just a more careful or more cowardly wrongdoer. It's clear that piety toward God and compassion for others are virtues, but these motivations need to be selfless. If Abraham could believe that sacrificing his son's life on the altar would please God, for it to be a pious or virtuous act, it should have been without any hope of personal gain. He must have had a view of God that was just as twisted as that of any pagan if he thought that the sacrifice would be pleasing.
1379. There is, moreover, much reason to infer that a man who could pass his wife as his sister, and send her to a palace in order to gain influence with a king, did not lose sight of himself when he contemplated killing his son to propitiate the King of kings. But no human testimony should induce us to credit such imputations against Jehovah. Nothing is more probable than that priests should invent this absurd fable, and nothing more improbable than that an omniscient God, who could read Abraham’s inmost thoughts, should have found it necessary to ask such a barbarous sacrifice, in order to determine the extent and sincerity of that devotion of which he must have already known the precise limits.
1379. Additionally, there's plenty of reason to think that a man who could pass his wife off as his sister and send her to live in a palace to gain favor with a king wouldn't hesitate to consider killing his son to appease the King of kings. However, no amount of human testimony should lead us to believe such accusations against Jehovah. It’s far more likely that priests invented this ridiculous story, and far less likely that an all-knowing God, who could understand Abraham’s deepest thoughts, would find it necessary to demand such a cruel sacrifice to determine the depth and sincerity of a devotion that He must have already fully understood.
On Probation.
1380. I have already made objections to the idea that we can be placed in this world for the purpose of probation. I will here make use of additional arguments in support of those objections. Spiritualism assumes that we are placed here for progression. It has, in this aspect, a self-evident ascendency over the scriptural doctrine.
1380. I have already expressed my concerns about the idea that we are here in this world for the sake of testing ourselves. I will now present more arguments to back up those concerns. Spiritualism believes that we are here to grow and evolve. In this regard, it clearly has an advantage over the teachings found in scripture.
1381. A finite being has need to subject his works to trial, in order to learn whether they have the requisite perfection; but how can an omnipotent and omniscient Deity be under any necessity of trying his works? In the first place, they must be precisely what he has designed; in the next place, foreseeing the result of any experiment he may make, he has no motive for the trial. Thus, before placing Adam and Eve in Paradise, God must have known that Adam would be incompetent to resist his wife, his wife the serpent, and that the apple would be eaten. How useless then was the experiment! How can it be reconciled with omniscience and omnipotence? The crime would not have taken place had God made woman less inquisitive; her husband strong enough morally to resist temptation and his wife’s seductive influence; or had not the serpent or Satan, under the form of this reptile, been allowed to tempt Eve. And yet in consequence of that act, not only the soul of the first man, but that270 of all his posterity, are considered by orthodoxy as having fallen, as being doomed to eternal punishment, unless by being morally regenerated, principally by a blind belief in the allegation of certain priests, who do not agree among themselves as to what we are to believe.
1381. A finite being needs to test his works to see if they have the necessary perfection; but how can an all-powerful and all-knowing God need to test his creations? First, they must be exactly as he intended; second, since he knows the outcome of any test he might conduct, there is no reason for the trial. So, before placing Adam and Eve in Paradise, God must have known that Adam would be unable to resist his wife, his wife would be tempted by the serpent, and that the apple would be eaten. What a pointless experiment! How can this be reconciled with his omniscience and omnipotence? The sin would not have occurred if God had made woman less curious; if her husband had been morally strong enough to resist temptation and her seductive power; or if the serpent or Satan, disguised as this reptile, hadn't been allowed to entice Eve. Yet, because of that act, not only is the soul of the first man considered by orthodoxy to have fallen, but so is the soul of all his descendants, who are deemed condemned to eternal punishment unless they are morally regenerated, mainly through blind faith in the claims of certain priests, who themselves cannot agree on what we should believe.
1382. But what had souls unborn to do with the acts of Adam and Eve? Is it conceivable that the soul of the child is begotten by the souls of its parents, or to be inferred that it is a spiritual being, created by God for the body, which the progenitors beget in their corporeal capacity? (See Seneca’s opinion, 1230.) How could a dumb snake, belonging to the class of reptiles, very low comparatively in intellectual capacity, acquire power of speech and reason without a special miracle on the part of God, either directly or indirectly through Satan, acting with the cognizance of his divine master. This reptile, previously created without feet, because the devil merely assumed his form, is doomed as a punishment to crawl on his belly, in the only way in which he could move consistently with his organization, independently of the sentence!!! Would it be any greater punishment to cause snakes to creep on their bellies than quadrupeds to go on their feet? Since none of the genera of serpents are endowed with reason or speech, how could they be responsible for the acts of an animal which, being endowed with those attributes, would not belong to their order? It must have been a peculiar reptile, in the form of a snake, created for the special purpose of tempting Eve. If, with Milton, it be assumed that it was Satan, in the form of a serpent, who tempted her? how could serpents be responsible for the crime?
1382. But what do unborn souls have to do with the actions of Adam and Eve? Is it possible that a child's soul is created by the souls of its parents, or should we assume that it is a spiritual being created by God for the body that its parents conceive in their physical capacity? (See Seneca’s opinion, 1230.) How could a mute snake, which is a reptile, and therefore much lower in intellectual ability, gain the power of speech and reasoning without a specific miracle from God, whether directly or indirectly through Satan, acting with the knowledge of his divine master? This reptile, initially created without legs because the devil simply assumed its form, is condemned as a punishment to crawl on its belly, which is the only way it could move given its design, regardless of the sentence!!! Would it be any greater punishment for snakes to crawl on their bellies than for four-legged animals to walk on their feet? Since none of the types of snakes have reasoning or speech, how could they be held accountable for the actions of an animal that, possessing those traits, wouldn’t belong to their kind? It must have been a specific reptile, in the shape of a snake, created solely to tempt Eve. If, following Milton's interpretation, it is believed that it was Satan, in the form of a serpent, who tempted her, how could snakes be held accountable for the crime?
World least moral when the Christian church had most sway.—Honour and mercantile credit more trusted than religion.—Virtue due more to the heart than to sectarianism.—Bigotry acts like an evil spirit.
1383. It will be perceived, that when the church had the world most completely under its sway, there was the least morality; but as the arts and sciences grew up, in despite of religious intolerance, morality improved. Thus a system has been established, which while violating, more especially the most emphatic monitions of Christ, tends to enforce those rules of conduct which are necessary to the welfare of society. But an auxiliary principle—honour—has come into operation, which often restrains those who are not influenced by religion, nor by pure morality. Honour, like the fear of hell, may make a man act more nobly, or more honestly, without improving his religious principles or his heart. Hence the saying, “Honour among thieves,” and likewise among unprincipled gamblers.
1383. It can be seen that when the church had the most control over the world, there was the least morality. However, as the arts and sciences developed, despite religious intolerance, morality improved. This has led to a system that, while neglecting some of Christ's most important teachings, tends to uphold the rules of conduct essential for societal well-being. Additionally, another principle—honor—has come into play, often holding back those not swayed by religion or pure morality. Honor, much like the fear of hell, can lead someone to act more nobly or honestly, without enhancing their religious beliefs or character. Hence the saying, “Honour among thieves,” and also among unscrupulous gamblers.
1384. Mercantile honour, under the name of mercantile credit, is another important substitute for real heartfelt integrity. The ill consequences of a loss of worldly consideration, or of those advantages which result from the ability to borrow, or to postpone payment with consent of the creditor, is a motive for punctual payment, when a debt equally due,271 in honesty, would be neglected. This goes much farther as an element of the prevailing morality in securing punctual payment, than religion.
1384. Business honor, referred to as business credit, is another significant substitute for genuine integrity. The negative effects of losing social status, or the benefits that come from the ability to borrow or to delay payment with the creditor's consent, motivate timely payment when an equally owed debt, in good faith, might be overlooked. This plays a much larger role as a component of the current morality in ensuring timely payment than religion does.271
1385. That religion has actually very little to do with mercantile morals, must be evident, since it is never, on change, an object of inquiry. When men are about to trust large sums, they do not inquire how often the other party goes to church, nor to what church he goes. It has never been my lot to know any one whom I thought better for his religion. I have known many whom I thought better through native goodness of heart than they would have been if left to the influence of their bigoted opinions alone. I heard a clergyman, distinguished for his amiability and liberality in social intercourse, speak from the pulpit of infidelity as “the work of the devil.”
1385. It's clear that religion has very little to do with business ethics, since it's never a topic of discussion on the trading floor. When people are about to trust large amounts of money, they don't ask how often the other person goes to church or which church they attend. I've never met anyone whom I thought was a better person because of their religion. I've known many who I believed were better due to their natural kindness, rather than the influence of their narrow-minded beliefs. I once heard a clergyman, known for his friendliness and open-mindedness in social situations, refer to infidelity from the pulpit as “the work of the devil.”
1386. There are allegations of this kind made from the pulpit which to me appear to be absolutely calumnious, though those who make them do not conceive themselves to be calumniators. It is, in truth, their false religion which speaks; they are possessed as if by an evil spirit, yet the goodness of their hearts prevents them from realizing any such calumnies in their personal intercourse with society. Dr. Berg said it was not he (Dr. Berg) that spoke when he used ill language to Barker, but the Bible. There is a want of Christian moderation in the language of Christ, and John the Baptist, and in some of the Psalms, which seems inconsistent with Christ’s precepts. John, addressing the Pharisees as “vipers fleeing from the wrath to come,” representing them as poisonous reptiles, and God as enraged against them. The language of Christ respecting some of the same sect, to which allusion has been made, is even more abusive.
1386. There are accusations like this made from the pulpit that I find completely slanderous, even though the people who make them don’t see themselves that way. Ultimately, it’s their misguided beliefs that shout out; they act like they’re under some bad influence, but their good intentions stop them from realizing how damaging their words are in social situations. Dr. Berg said it wasn’t him (Dr. Berg) speaking when he used harsh words towards Barker, but rather the Bible. There’s a lack of Christian moderation in the language of Christ, John the Baptist, and parts of the Psalms, which seems at odds with Christ’s teachings. John called the Pharisees “vipers fleeing from the wrath to come,” portraying them as poisonous snakes and God as furious with them. The language Christ used about some of the same group, which has been referenced, is even harsher.
1387. But among the calumnies to which I have alluded, are those which represent the human heart as innately wicked, and only to be corrected by religious regeneration. All the souls created since Adam ate the apple, must be born anew, thus drawing a marked distinction between those who have gone through this second birth, and such as myself, who have not undergone this recuperative process. But what man of common sense draws a line between those who are thought to have been born over again, and those who have not? The great majority of those who call themselves Christians, do not put any more trust in one who has gone through this second birth, than in one who is not deemed to have been thus regenerated.
1387. But among the false accusations I've mentioned are those that depict the human heart as naturally evil and only fixable through religious rebirth. All souls created since Adam ate the apple must be born again, creating a clear difference between those who have experienced this second birth and people like me, who haven't gone through this healing process. But what reasonable person draws a line between those believed to have been reborn and those who haven't? The vast majority of people who call themselves Christians don’t place any more trust in someone who has undergone this second birth than in someone who is seen as not having been regenerated.
Progress of Literature and Science in Arabia under the Mohammedan Pontiffs, called Caliphs.
1388. While the science and literature of the Roman Empire sank under the influence of the Christian pontiff (pope) into ignorance, superstition, and vice, the Arabians, under the influence of their Mohammedan pontiffs, (caliphs,) arose from barbarism to a comparatively superior state272 of intellectual acquirement, as the following quotation, from “Gibbon’s Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire,” will show:
1388. While the science and literature of the Roman Empire fell into ignorance, superstition, and immorality under the influence of the Christian pope, the Arabians, guided by their Islamic leaders (caliphs), progressed from barbarism to a much higher level of intellectual achievement, as the following quote from “Gibbon’s Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire” will illustrate: 272
1389. “After their civil and domestic wars, the subjects of the Abbassides, awakening from this mental lethargy, found leisure and felt curiosity for the acquisition of profane science. This spirit was first encouraged by the Caliph Almansor, who, besides his knowledge of the Mohammedan law, had applied himself with success to the study of astronomy, but when the sceptre devolved to Almamon, the seventh of the Abbassides, he completed the designs of his grandfather, and invited the muses from their ancient seats. His ambassadors at Constantinople, his agents in Armenia, Syria, and Egypt, collected the volumes of Grecian science: at his command they were translated by the most skilful interpreters into the Arabic language; his subjects were exhorted assiduously to peruse these instructive writings; and the successor of Mohammed assisted with pleasure and modesty at the assemblies and disputations of the learned. ‘He was not ignorant,’ says Abulpharagius, ‘that they are the elect of God, his best and most useful servants, whose lives are devoted to the improvement of their rational faculties. The mean ambition of the Chinese or the Turk may glory in the industry of their hands, or the indulgence of their brutal appetites. Yet these dexterous artists must view, with hopeless emulation, the hexagons and pyramids of the cells of a bee-hive: these fortitudinous heroes are awed by the superior fierceness of the lions and tigers; and in their amorous enjoyments, they are much inferior to the vigour of the grossest and most sordid quadrupeds. The teachers of wisdom are the true luminaries and legislators of a world, which, without their aid, would again sink in ignorance and barbarism.’ The zeal and curiosity of Almamon were imitated by succeeding princes of the line of Abbas: their rivals, the Fatimites of Africa and the Ommiades of Spain, were the patrons of the learned, as well as the commanders of the faithful: the same royal prerogative was claimed by their independent emirs of the provinces; and their emulation diffused the taste and the rewards of science from Samarcand and Bochara to Fez and Cordova. The vizir of a sultan consecrated a sum of two hundred thousand pieces of gold to the foundation of a college at Bagdad, which he endowed with an annual revenue of fifteen thousand dinars. The fruits of instruction were communicated, perhaps at different times, to six thousand disciples of every degree, from the son of the noble to that of the mechanic: a sufficient allowance was provided for the indigent scholars; and the merit or industry of the professors was repaid with adequate stipends. In every city the productions of Arabic literature were copied and collected by the curiosity of the studious and the vanity of the rich. A private doctor refused the invitation of the sultan of Bochara, because the carriage of his books would have required four hundred camels. The royal library of the Fatimites consisted of one hundred thousand manuscripts, elegantly transcribed and splendidly bound, which were lent, without jealousy or avarice, to the students of Cairo. Yet this collection must appear moderate, if we can believe that the Ommiades of Spain had formed a library of six hundred thousand volumes, forty-four of which were employed in the mere catalogue. Their capital, Cordova, with the adjacent towns of Malaga, Almeria, and Murcia, had given birth to more than three hundred writers, and above seventy public libraries were opened in the cities of the Andalusian kingdom. The age of Arabian learning continued about five hundred years, till the great eruption of the Moguls, and was coeval with the darkest and most slothful period of European annals; but since the sun of science has arisen in the West, it should seem that the Oriental studies have languished and declined.”
1389. “After their civil and domestic wars, the subjects of the Abbasids, waking from this mental fog, found time and curiosity to learn secular knowledge. This enthusiasm was first supported by Caliph Almansor, who, alongside his understanding of Islamic law, immersed himself in astronomy. However, when the scepter passed to Almamon, the seventh of the Abbasids, he fulfilled his grandfather’s vision and invited the arts back to their former places. His ambassadors in Constantinople and agents in Armenia, Syria, and Egypt gathered books on Greek science: at his command, skilled translators turned them into Arabic; he urged his subjects to diligently study these valuable texts, and the successor of Muhammad participated joyfully and humbly in scholarly meetings and debates. ‘He wasn’t unaware,’ says Abulpharagius, ‘that they are the chosen of God, his finest and most useful servants, dedicating their lives to enhancing their intellect. The petty ambitions of the Chinese or the Turk may boast about their manual labor or gratification of base desires. Yet, these skilled artisans must look, with envy, at the hexagons and pyramids of a beehive; those brave heroes are intimidated by the raw strength of lions and tigers; and in their romantic pursuits, they fall short compared to the vigor of the most basic and base animals. The teachers of wisdom are the true lights and lawmakers of a world that, without their guidance, would revert to ignorance and barbarism.’ Almamon's zeal and curiosity were mirrored by subsequent Abbasid princes: their rivals, the Fatimids of Africa and the Ommiads of Spain, were patrons of the learned and leaders of the faithful: the same royal honor was claimed by their independent emirs in the provinces; their competition spread the appreciation and rewards of knowledge from Samarkand and Bukhara to Fez and Córdoba. The vizier of a sultan dedicated two hundred thousand gold coins to establish a college in Baghdad, which he funded with an annual income of fifteen thousand dinars. The benefits of education were shared, perhaps at different times, with six thousand students from all backgrounds, from noble sons to those of laborers: sufficient support was provided for needy scholars; and the merit or effort of the professors was compensated with fair salaries. In every city, the works of Arabic literature were copied and collected through the curiosity of learners and the pride of the wealthy. A private scholar turned down an invitation from the Sultan of Bukhara because transporting his books would need four hundred camels. The royal library of the Fatimids comprised one hundred thousand manuscripts, beautifully copied and lavishly bound, lent freely to students in Cairo. Yet this collection seems modest when compared to the Ommiads of Spain, who had created a library of six hundred thousand volumes, with forty-four just for the catalog. Their capital, Córdoba, along with nearby Málaga, Almería, and Murcia, produced more than three hundred writers, and over seventy public libraries opened in the cities of the Andalusian kingdom. The era of Arabic learning lasted about five hundred years, until the massive invasion of the Mongols, overlapping with Europe’s darkest and most stagnant period; but since the rise of knowledge in the West, it seems that Eastern studies have faded and diminished.”
1390. I here close my remarks upon the Influence of Scripture on the Morals of Christians. They have proceeded from a desire to promulgate what I deem to be truth, and to expose the errors by which I conceive it to be environed. It is inconsistent with my nature to state less than the truth when treating on any subject. I shall be sorry for any pain which I may give to those whose hearts are so associated with their opinions, that whatever conflicts with the one is painful to the other; yet I wish any persons so wounded to reflect how little denunciation has been spared, not only as respects opinions, but as respects motives, where “infidels,” unjustly so called, have been held up to view. I have not assailed the motives of any one; even as respects opinions, I have withheld or modified sarcasms which, as I think, might have been justly employed, or used without modification.
1390. I’ll wrap up my thoughts on the Influence of Scripture on the Morals of Christians here. My intention has been to share what I believe to be the truth and to highlight the misconceptions surrounding it. It’s not in my nature to say anything less than the truth when discussing any topic. I regret any discomfort I may cause to those whose beliefs are so intertwined with their hearts that any challenge to one can be painful for the other; however, I urge anyone feeling hurt to consider how much criticism has been directed not just at beliefs, but also at the intentions of those who are unfairly labeled as “infidels.” I haven’t attacked anyone’s motives; in fact, when it comes to opinions, I’ve held back or adjusted sarcastic comments that I believe could have been rightfully used or expressed without alteration.
ADDITIONAL CORROBORATIVE EVIDENCE OF THE EXISTENCE OF SPIRITS.
1391. Subsequently to the printing of the articles under the head of Corroborative Evidence, a pamphlet was received from which the subjoined pages are translated, by my friend, Dr. Geib. It serves to show the impression made by spirit manifestations in another part of Christendom, upon one who belongs to the church.
The Opinions of MM. de Mirville and Gasparin, on Table Turning and Mediums, (considered in relation to theology and physics) examined, by the Abbot Almignana, Doctor of the Canon Law, Theologian, &c.
Introduction.
1392. “Mesmerism, table turning, and mediumship being phenomena which, in my estimation, demand serious investigation before pronouncing judgment on them, as soon as this became known to me, as an ocular witness, far from judging of them, ex abrupto, as so many have done under the same circumstances, I confined myself to make numerous experiments, with the hope that they might in time furnish me with some very useful facts, in searching for the cause of these wonderful phenomena.
1392. “Mesmerism, table turning, and mediumship are phenomena that, in my opinion, require serious investigation before passing judgment. Once I became aware of this as a firsthand observer, instead of judging them ex abrupto, like so many others have done in similar situations, I decided to conduct numerous experiments, hoping that over time they would provide me with some valuable insights in understanding the cause of these remarkable phenomena.”
1394. “I consider the present moment the more opportune, that the facts furnished by my investigation, being at variance with certain leading points in the doctrines contained in the Pneumatology of M. de Mirville, and the Supernatural in General of M. de Gasparin, may induce those writers to give a new complexion to their doctrines, by taking counsel from my facts. These, shedding a new light on the triple phenomena, would powerfully aid in the solution of a problem which, up to the present time, does not appear to have been solved in a manner as clear and positive, as the interests of truth, science, and religion demand. Such has been and is now my belief, as well as that of many others whom I thought proper to consult before undertaking the task in which I have engaged.
1394. “I think now is the best time because the facts from my research contradict some key points in the teachings found in the Pneumatology of M. de Mirville and the Supernatural in General of M. de Gasparin. I hope this will encourage those authors to rethink their positions based on my findings. These new insights into the triple phenomena could significantly help solve a problem that, to date, hasn’t been addressed as clearly and definitively as truth, science, and religion require. This has been my belief and that of many others I consulted before starting this project.”
1395. “Simple as my language is, it will be seen to have issued from the pen of a man who boldly seeks the truth, and is not to be arrested in his course by any worldly interests. Persuaded that in view of my position, my readers will grant me the indulgence which in a similar case I could not refuse them, I will proceed to the main question without further preliminaries. I divide my monograph into two parts; facts opposed to the Pneumatology of M. de Mirville, and the Supernatural in General of M. de Gasparin.
1395. “Even though my language is simple, it shows that it comes from someone who boldly seeks the truth and won’t let any worldly concerns stop him. Knowing that my readers will give me the same understanding I would offer them in a similar situation, I’ll get straight to the main point without any more introductions. I’ve divided my monograph into two parts: facts that challenge M. de Mirville's Pneumatology and the Supernatural in General by M. de Gasparin.”
First Part.
1396. “Table turning and mediumship are nothing more, in the opinion of M. de Mirville, than the work of the devil! I give an abstract of his doctrine as found in his Pneumatology. ‘In the letter,’ he says, ‘which I had the honour to address to the Societe Mesmerisme of Paris on the non-intervention of the devil in therapeutic mesmerism, dated Sept. 20, 1847, and published in numbers 54, 56, and 57 of the Journal of Magnetism, I established the existence of the devil, with the attributes given him in the Scriptures, as well as the power he possesses, with divine permission, to act morally and physically on mankind, as set forth in the same holy books.’
1396. “Table turning and mediumship are nothing more, in M. de Mirville's view, than the work of the devil! Here’s a summary of his beliefs from his Pneumatology. ‘In the letter,’ he states, ‘that I was honored to send to the Societe Mesmerisme of Paris regarding the devil's non-intervention in therapeutic mesmerism, dated September 20, 1847, and published in issues 54, 56, and 57 of the Journal of Magnetism, I established the existence of the devil, along with the characteristics given to him in the Scriptures, as well as the power he has, with divine permission, to influence humanity both morally and physically, as described in those same holy texts.’
1397. “In view of what I have just said, I cannot be mistaken by M. de Mirville with respect to demonology. But while admitting the existence of a devil, and his power over man, I cannot agree with the opinion of M. de Mirville in his Pneumatology, which admits the direct intervention of the devil in table turning and table talking, as well as in the powers of mediums; a view of the subject which I hold to be at variance with the teachings of the Catholic Church on the possessed, and the manner of deliverance therefrom, the evil spirit, which I proceed to explain.
1397. “Based on what I’ve just said, I can't be wrong about M. de Mirville concerning demonology. However, while I acknowledge the existence of a devil and his influence over humans, I disagree with M. de Mirville's perspective in his Pneumatology, which suggests that the devil directly intervenes in activities like table turning and table talking, as well as the powers of mediums. I believe this view contradicts the teachings of the Catholic Church regarding possession and how to achieve deliverance from it, which I will explain further.”
1398. “It is an axiom as old as the world—in proportion as the cause is removed the effect ceases; sublata causa tollitur effectus. The truth of this maxim, in reference also to diabolical possessions, is found to be explicitly proved in the Holy Scriptures. A mute is presented to Christ to be cured: oblatus est ei mutus. The Divine Master, knowing that dumbness is caused by the devil, hastens to remove the cause, by chasing the evil spirit from the body of the possessed, which being done, the mute spoke in the midst of the people ravished with admiration. ‘And he was casting out a devil, and it was dumb. And it came to pass when the devil was gone out, the dumb spake, and the people wondered.’ St. Luke xi. 14.
1398. “It’s a saying as old as time—when the cause is removed, the effect stops; sublata causa tollitur effectus. The truth of this principle, regarding demonic possession, is clearly demonstrated in the Holy Scriptures. A mute is brought to Christ to be healed: oblatus est ei mutus. The Divine Master, knowing that the inability to speak is caused by the devil, quickly removes the cause by casting the evil spirit out of the possessed person. Once that is done, the mute speaks, leaving the crowd in awe. ‘And he was casting out a devil, and it was dumb. And it came to pass when the devil was gone out, the dumb spake, and the people wondered.’ St. Luke xi. 14.
1399. “There was at Philippi, in Macedonia, a girl who, being possessed of the evil spirit, had the gift of divination to such an extent, that people came from all parts to consult her, much to the benefit of her masters. St. Paul having chased the demon from the body of the possessed, she lost the gift of divination; which exasperating her masters, they dragged St. Paul before a magistrate like a malefactor. (Acts xv.) Admitting these principles, it follows that if the devil intervenes directly in tables and mediums, as Christ drove him from the mute, and St. Paul from the girl of Philippi, then, a fortiori, should clairvoyants lose their lucidity, tables be made to stand still, and mediums be deprived the power of tracing a line however short; sublata causa tollitur effectus. The cause being removed, the effect must cease.
1399. “In Philippi, Macedonia, there was a girl who, possessed by an evil spirit, had the ability to predict the future to such a degree that people came from all around to consult her, much to the advantage of her masters. When St. Paul drove the demon out of her, she lost her gift of divination, which angered her masters, and they dragged St. Paul before a magistrate like a criminal. (Acts xv.) If we accept these ideas, it follows that if the devil interacts directly with tables and mediums, just as Christ cast him out of the mute and St. Paul expelled him from the girl in Philippi, then, a fortiori, clairvoyants should lose their clarity, tables should stop moving, and mediums should be unable to trace any line, no matter how short; sublata causa tollitur effectus. Once the cause is removed, the effect must stop.”
1400. “Our next object is to refer to the means for removing the evil spirit wherever found; and consulting the Catholic ritual affords us this275 knowledge. In fact, agreeably to these teachings, demons are driven off by the sacred names of God and Jesus, by prayer, the sign of the cross, by holy water, and exorcisms; and these means being known, I am going to report the effect of these means on clairvoyant subjects, tables, and mediums.
1400. “Our next focus is on how to remove evil spirits wherever they are found, and looking into the Catholic ritual gives us this275 understanding. According to these teachings, demons can be driven away by the sacred names of God and Jesus, through prayer, the sign of the cross, holy water, and exorcisms. Now that we know these methods, I’m going to share the effects of these practices on clairvoyant subjects, tables, and mediums.
1403. “Having witnessed some extraordinary phenomena, and desiring to assure myself as to the presence of a diabolical agency in these manifestations, as I had been persuaded to believe—profiting by the opportunity offered by some mediums magnetized by others, and not by myself—I was induced to pray to invoke the sacred names of God and Jesus, to make the sign of the cross on the subjects, and went so far as to sprinkle them with holy water, with the design of driving out the devil, should he have taken possession of them. However, as not one of these mediums lost, in my presence, the smallest part of their powers, I was led to infer that the devil had nothing to do with the phenomena.
1403. “After witnessing some incredible events and wanting to confirm the presence of a sinister force behind these occurrences, which I had been led to believe—taking advantage of the opportunity provided by some mediums who were influenced by others, and not by me—I felt compelled to pray, calling on the sacred names of God and Jesus, to make the sign of the cross on the individuals, and even went as far as to sprinkle them with holy water, hoping to drive out the devil if he had possessed them. However, since none of these mediums lost any of their abilities in my presence, I came to the conclusion that the devil had no involvement in the phenomena.
1404. “The following fact should attract the attention of all observers holding the orthodox faith: A youth of thirteen, put to sleep by his mother, at my house, gave proof of the greatest clairvoyance, even so far as to be in communion with supermundane beings. Alarmed, as I acknowledge I was, at what passed under my eyes, and suspecting, as I did, that the devil might be the agent of those phenomena, I took my crucifix, and presenting it to the clairvoyant, conjured him in the holy name of Jesus. But in place of repelling it, as I expected, he seized the cross in the most affectionate manner, and, smiling, pressed it to his lips; as much to the edification of his mother as of myself. Should M. de Mirville desire the address of the parties, he can have it.
1404. “The following fact should grab the attention of anyone with traditional beliefs: A thirteen-year-old boy, put to sleep by his mother at my house, demonstrated incredible clairvoyance, even connecting with spiritual beings. I was understandably alarmed by what I witnessed and suspected that the devil might be behind these phenomena. I took my crucifix and, using the holy name of Jesus, urged the clairvoyant to repel it. However, instead of pushing it away as I expected, he embraced the cross affectionately, smiling and pressing it to his lips, much to the amazement of both his mother and me. If M. de Mirville wants the contact information for the individuals involved, he can have it.”
1405. “The means thus employed by me to discover if the evil spirit actuated mesmeric subjects, have been employed also by other persons with the same view, and with similar results. Should M. de Mirville desire to know some of these persons, I will be happy to facilitate the acquaintance. As to exorcism, it is known by the biography of the celebrated clairvoyant Prudence, that although exorcised on several occasions, the exorcisms failed to deprive him, in the smallest degree, of his great clairvoyance. To the facts which I have just reported in support of the non-intervention of the devil, some new facts of another kind will be adjoined, which in some measure confirm the first.
1405. “The methods I've used to find out if an evil spirit influences mesmeric subjects have also been used by others with the same intent and similar outcomes. If M. de Mirville wants to know about some of these individuals, I would be glad to make the introductions. Regarding exorcism, the biography of the famous clairvoyant Prudence shows that even though he was exorcised on multiple occasions, these attempts did not diminish his remarkable clairvoyance at all. In addition to the facts I’ve just mentioned that support the idea that the devil doesn’t intervene, I will add some new facts of a different kind that somewhat confirm the initial findings."
1406. “One of the models of sacred eloquence, the R. P. Lacordaire, speaking of mesmerism in 1846, far from qualifying it as satanical, as M. de Mirville has done, proclaimed from the pulpit of truth, in the church of Notre Dame of Paris, that this phenomenon belonged to the order of prophecy, and that it was a provision of the divinity to humble the pride of materialism. This language, descended from the summit of the sacred tribune, is known to have received the public approbation of Mgr. Affre, the centre of Catholicism of the diocese of Paris, who, addressing the276 faithful, said to them: ‘My brothers, it is God who speaks with the mouth of the illustrious Dominican.’
1406. “One of the representatives of sacred eloquence, the Rev. Father Lacordaire, discussing mesmerism in 1846, far from labeling it as satanic, as Mr. de Mirville has done, proclaimed from the pulpit of truth, in the church of Notre Dame in Paris, that this phenomenon was a form of prophecy and that it was a divine provision to humble the arrogance of materialism. This statement, made from the heights of the sacred pulpit, is known to have received the public approval of Monsignor Affre, the leader of Catholicism in the diocese of Paris, who, addressing the276 faithful, said to them: ‘My brothers, it is God who speaks through the mouth of the esteemed Dominican.’
1407. A very pious female, abandoned by her medical adviser, being in a state of despair, was magnetized by one of her parents, and fell into the most complete trance. In one of her first sleeps, she said she saw a person who, according to the description she gave of him, appeared to be the clairvoyant’s great-grandfather, deceased several years before the birth of his grand-daughter. The latter was cured by the advice received during her trance condition from the said great-grandfather. This fact appeared to me so grave in its nature, and so interesting to science and religion, that I thought proper to publish it in number nineteen of the Magnetisme Spiritualiste, with an appeal to all those who, by their knowledge, might be able to explain this phenomenon.
1407. A very devout woman, abandoned by her doctor, found herself in despair when one of her parents hypnotized her, leading her into a deep trance. During one of her early sleep states, she claimed to see a figure who, based on her description, seemed to be her clairvoyant great-grandfather, who had passed away several years before she was born. She later recovered thanks to the advice she received during this trance from her great-grandfather. This situation struck me as significant and intriguing for both science and religion, so I decided to publish it in issue nineteen of the Magnetisme Spiritualiste, calling on anyone with knowledge to help explain this phenomenon.
1408. Among those to whom our appeal was made, figured the theologians, to whom, in speaking of the person who appeared to the clairvoyant, I said: ‘Should this not be considered the devil, who, assuming a fantastic personation, took that of the great-grandfather of M. R., and appearing thus to him, cured him of a disease which he himself had originated?’
1408. Among those we appealed to were the theologians. When discussing the figure that appeared to the clairvoyant, I said: ‘Shouldn’t this be seen as the devil, who, by taking on a false identity, impersonated M. R.'s great-grandfather and, appearing in that form, cured him of a disease he had caused himself?’
1409. Some copies of the number of the journal in question were sent to the sovereign pontiff, through his apostolic nuncio at Paris, to Mgr. the archbishop of Paris, to the faculty of theology at Sorbonne, to RR. PP. Jesuits of the Rue des Postes, to R. P. Lacordaire, and to the Calvinistic Consistory of Paris, begging them to enlighten me on a fact of such grave importance. But to the present time, a period of three years, not one of these great personages has informed me that the phenomenon to which I invited their attention is the work of the devil, which proves that, in their opinion, the evil one is a stranger to this phenomenon; for otherwise they would not have failed to answer my inquiry, if only from interest for religion, or through charity to myself. Should M. de Mirville desire to know the clairvoyant I refer to, he can be conducted to his domicile.
1409. Some copies of the journal in question were sent to the Pope, through his ambassador in Paris, to the Archbishop of Paris, to the theology faculty at Sorbonne, to the Jesuits on Rue des Postes, to Father Lacordaire, and to the Calvinistic Consistory of Paris, asking them to clarify a matter of significant importance. However, after three years, not one of these prominent figures has informed me that the phenomenon I pointed out is the work of the devil, which suggests that they believe this phenomenon is not connected to evil; otherwise, they would have responded to my inquiry, if only out of concern for religion or out of kindness toward me. If Mr. de Mirville wants to know about the clairvoyant I’m talking about, he can be taken to his home.
1410. Mgr. Sibour, on mesmerism, and La Grandeur, if interrogated, will tell you that the thoughts expressed by clairvoyants are only reflections from their magnetizers, without saying a single word to you about the devil. But we have said enough on clairvoyants, and will pass to the tables.
1410. Mgr. Sibour, when asked about mesmerism and La Grandeur, will tell you that the thoughts shared by clairvoyants are just reflections of what their magnetizers put into them, without mentioning anything about the devil. But we've talked enough about clairvoyants, so let's move on to the tables.
1411. I have made a great many experiments in table-turning and table-talking with pious laymen and with ecclesiastics, men of prayer and serious habits, and even with a venerable bishop, and always in a very serious manner; desiring to know, for the sake of religion and our souls, if the devil is in reality the agent who conveys movement and language to the tables. Besides exorcism, we have employed all the means taught and prescribed in the Catholic Church to drive out the devil, and we have277 never obtained any results; for neither prayer, nor the sacred names of God and Jesus, nor the sign of the cross made on the tables, nor the crucifix, nor the chapelet, (the beads,) nor the Gospels, nor the image of Christ placed on the tables, nor holy water, could stop their turnings, knockings, and replying to our questions. But far from it, and much to our astonishment, we have seen the table turn over before the image of Christ crucified. I will say no more. In the experiments made with the bishop just named, and the person with whom I was boarding, it was the venerable bishop himself that made the sign of the cross on a stand, without in the least retarding the motion of that small piece of furniture. Monseigneur then asked the stand if it loved the cross, and it replying in the affirmative, it was with surprise that Monseigneur saw the stand turn over before his croix pastorale, and speak to him in orthodox language of a future life.
1411. I have done a lot of experiments with table-turning and table-talking alongside devout laypeople and clergy, serious individuals and even an esteemed bishop, always in a very serious way, hoping to understand, for the sake of religion and our souls, if the devil is truly the one who makes the tables move and talk. Besides exorcism, we've used all the methods taught and prescribed by the Catholic Church to expel the devil, and we have277 never seen any results; because neither prayers, nor the sacred names of God and Jesus, nor the sign of the cross made on the tables, nor the crucifix, nor the rosary, nor the Gospels, nor the image of Christ placed on the tables, nor holy water could stop their movements, knocking, and responses to our questions. On the contrary, it was quite astonishing to see the table turn over in front of the image of the crucified Christ. I won't say more. In the experiments conducted with the aforementioned bishop and the person I was staying with, it was the venerable bishop himself who made the sign of the cross over a stand, without the slightest delay in the movement of that small piece of furniture. Monseigneur then asked the stand if it loved the cross, and after it responded affirmatively, Monseigneur was surprised to see the stand turn over before his croix pastorale and speak to him in orthodox terms about the afterlife.
1412. If, according to all the facts which I have just reported, it be necessary to reason agreeably to M. de Mirville, behold what that reasoning must be. The teachings of the Catholic ritual give to prayer, to the sacred names of God and Jesus, to the sign of the cross, to the holy water, and the exorcisms, the virtue of driving the devil (le démon) out of the possessed. Now, as neither prayer, the sacred names, the sign of the cross, &c. are able to drive the spirit out of mediums, nor out of tables, which, according to M. de Mirville, are also victims, then the Catholic Instructor, which assigns these means for removing evil spirits, must be in error. Then the Scripture, the SS. PP., and the Church, authorities on which the Catholic teachings are based on the subject of possessions, and the manner of delivering the possessed of the evil spirit, (les démons,) are in error.[31] And what true Catholic dare entertain this language? It is then to avoid getting into so unfortunate a position, that I have thought proper to reject the opinion of M. de Mirville on the manifestations of spirits. I shall be told that if the prescribed means sometimes fail, it is from want of faith on the part of those who employ them. This is my reply to that objection. The peasants do not possess a large quantity of faith, and, notwithstanding, Origen says the name of God, pronounced even by a peasant, chases the demons.—Origines contra celsum.
1412. Based on all the facts I've just shared, if we are to reason like M. de Mirville, here's how that reasoning should go. The teachings of the Catholic ritual attribute the power of driving out the devil to prayer, the sacred names of God and Jesus, the sign of the cross, holy water, and exorcisms. However, since neither prayer, the sacred names, the sign of the cross, etc., can drive the spirit out of mediums or tables, which M. de Mirville claims are also possessed, it follows that the Catholic Instructor, which prescribes these methods for removing evil spirits, must be mistaken. Consequently, the Scripture, the Fathers of the Church, and the Church itself—authorities on which Catholic teachings regarding possessions and the removal of evil spirits are based—are also in error. And which true Catholic would dare to entertain such ideas? It is to avoid ending up in such an unfortunate position that I have chosen to reject M. de Mirville's views on spirit manifestations. I can already hear the counterargument that if the prescribed methods sometimes fail, it’s due to a lack of faith from those using them. Here’s my response to that objection: peasants don’t have a great deal of faith, yet, as Origen states, even the name of God, pronounced by a peasant, drives away demons.—Origines contra celsum.
1413. There are a great many people, and among them figure some pious ecclesiastics and laymen, who quite frequently partake of the sacrament, who have experimented with me, who have prayed with me, have278 invoked with me the sacred names of God and Jesus, &c.; is it then credible that among these persons, not one should be found possessing a portion of faith equal to that of a peasant, which is able, according to Origen, to drive out the devil in the name of God? I am unable to believe it. What! the venerable bishop, who experimented with me during four years, had sacrificed himself in propagating the faith in distant lands, should he not have as much faith as a peasant, in order to be able to remove an evil spirit in the name of God? This would be to insult the sacred labour of propagating the faith in the person of one of its most distinguished apostles.
1413. There are a lot of people, including some devout clergy and laypeople, who often take part in the sacrament, who have tried things out with me, who have prayed with me, and have278 called on the sacred names of God and Jesus, etc.; is it really believable that among these people, not a single one has faith equal to that of a peasant, which, according to Origen, can drive out the devil in the name of God? I just can’t accept that. What! The respected bishop, who worked with me for four years, who dedicated himself to spreading the faith in far-off lands, should he not have as much faith as a peasant to be able to cast out an evil spirit in the name of God? That would be an insult to the sacred mission of spreading the faith in the person of one of its most notable apostles.
1414. But this is not enough; notice how St. John teaches us to know if a spirit is of God or not. ‘My well beloved, this is how to know that a spirit is of God: all spirits who confess that Jesus Christ has come in the flesh, are of God, and those who do not confess that he is come in the flesh, are not of God.’ (1 John ix.) Instructed by St. John in the manner of knowing the spirits of God, to assure myself further on the nature of spirits or occult forces, exhibited in the movement and language of tables, I have used the method indicated by St. John. It was with this view that, my little table being in motion, I addressed to it the following questions: Do you confess that Jesus Christ is come in the flesh? Yes, it replied. The same question, repeated several times, produced uniformly the same answer. Having this experiment alone at my house, I was desirous of seeing whether the same results would be obtained in company. With this design I went to the houses of persons acquainted with these phenomena, and begged a gentleman, a medium, to place his hands with mine on a stand. The movement of the stand being felt, the same question was answered in the same manner. And after this experience can I conscientiously believe in the intervention of the devil in the turning and speaking of the tables, without regarding the testimony of St. John as erroneous; and should I regard it as such? It is for M. de Mirville to answer.
1414. But that's not enough; notice how St. John teaches us to determine if a spirit is from God or not. ‘Dear friends, this is how to recognize the Spirit of God: every spirit that acknowledges that Jesus Christ has come in the flesh is from God, but every spirit that does not acknowledge Jesus is not from God.’ (1 John ix.) Following St. John's guidance on how to discern the spirits of God, to further investigate the nature of spirits or occult forces shown in the movement and language of tables, I used the method suggested by St. John. With this in mind, as my little table began to move, I asked it the following questions: Do you acknowledge that Jesus Christ has come in the flesh? Yes, it replied. Repeating the same question several times resulted in the same answer each time. Having only this experiment at my home, I wanted to see if the same results would happen in a group. With this goal, I visited friends familiar with these phenomena and asked a gentleman, a medium, to place his hands with mine on a stand. As we felt the stand move, the same question was asked and received the same answer. After this experience, can I truly believe in the devil's involvement in the movement and speaking of the tables, while disregarding St. John's testimony as incorrect? Should I consider it as such? That’s for M. de Mirville to answer.
1415. But I do not stop here. It is said in the ritual of Paris and others, in the chapter of the possessed, as follows: Signa energumenorum sunt. Ignota lingua liogni idque, maxima serie verborum quæ previderi non potuerunt velita loquentem intelligere distantia, et oculta patefacere et vires supra etatis suæ naturam ostendere. Very well, if demons, as the ritual says, speak all languages, even those unknown, after the great number of experiments which I have made, I am prepared to declare that tables do not speak all languages, even the known ones, nor do they understand them. Let some one who does not understand Greek, addressing a question to the table in French, request it to reply in Greek, and we will see if the table does it. Let a stranger give to an inquirer at the table a question in a language unknown to him, limiting himself to merely reading it, and we will see if the table respond; I defy all the tables in the world to do it. If M. de Mirville desires to make these experiments with me, I am entirely at his service.
1415. But I won't stop here. It's stated in the rituals of Paris and others, in the chapter about the possessed, as follows: Signa energumenorum sunt. Ignota lingua liogni idque, maxima serie verborum quæ previderi non potuerunt velita loquentem intelligere distantia, et oculta patefacere et vires supra etatis suæ naturam ostendere. Very well, if demons, as the ritual claims, speak all languages, even the unknown ones, after the many experiments I've conducted, I'm ready to say that tables don't speak all languages, not even the known ones, nor do they understand them. Let someone who doesn’t understand Greek ask a question to the table in French and request it to respond in Greek, and we’ll see if the table does that. Let a stranger pose a question to the person at the table in a language they don’t understand, simply reading it aloud, and we’ll see if the table responds; I challenge all the tables in the world to do so. If M. de Mirville wants to conduct these experiments with me, I’m fully available.
1416. I have endeavoured to discover if tables have the faculty which, according to the ritual, is possessed by the devil (les démons) to penetrate the hidden and the future, and I have found in this direction more error than truth. As to the superior physical force which, according to the ritual, is possessed by the devil, (les démons,) there is not a single turning table in the world, whose movement cannot be arrested or retarded by enveloping the hands of the experimenters in silk; which proves that the tables have not a power supra naturam, and that of course it could not be the devil who furnishes the momentum. But what gives more force to the reasons on which I rest, for not referring the motive-power to an evil spirit, is this: that having made them separately known to four prelates of the church of France, three of whom are conspicuous in the religious investigation of these phenomena, begging a due examination and report if my opinion is in error, that I may retract and write against the tables, not one of these prelates has pronounced me wrong, nor in the least blamed my exposition of facts. And in case it may become necessary to establish this fact, I retain the letters of these prelates. Let us now pass to the consideration of the mediums.[32]
1416. I've tried to find out if tables have the ability that, according to the ritual, the devil (les démons) is said to possess—to see the hidden and the future. In this effort, I've found more error than truth. Regarding the supposed superior physical strength attributed to the devil (les démons), there's not a single table in the world that can't be stopped or slowed down by wrapping the hands of the experimenters in silk. This shows that tables don't have a supra naturam power, and therefore, it couldn't be the devil providing the energy. What strengthens my argument against attributing the motive power to an evil spirit is this: I presented my findings to four church prelates in France, three of whom are notable for their investigation into these phenomena, asking for a proper review and feedback if I'm mistaken, so I can retract and criticize the tables. Not one of these prelates has deemed me wrong or criticized my explanation of the facts. And if it's necessary to prove this, I have kept their letters. Now, let's move on to discuss the mediums.[32]
1417. Hearing that there were persons whose hands, without their will, were made to write some very extraordinary things, and that these persons were called ‘mediums,’ one day, in order to assure myself of the fact, I took a crayon in my hand, and placing it on paper, concentrated myself as much as possible. But a few minutes had passed, when I felt my hand controlled without my will, and saw it trace some lines, letters,280 and words. This experiment being repeated often with the same success, I have therefore become a medium, though of a secondary degree.
1417. I heard about people whose hands could write some really amazing things without their control, and they were called ‘mediums.’ So one day, just to see if it was true, I took a crayon, placed it on paper, and focused as hard as I could. After a few minutes, I felt my hand moving on its own and saw it sketching lines, letters,280 and words. I repeated this experiment many times with the same results, so I’ve ended up becoming a medium, albeit one of a secondary level.
1418. Desiring to know whether, in this phenomenon, there might not be some diabolical agency, in order to satisfy my mind on that subject, I asked of the occult power, or the spirit that controlled my hand, if it was the devil; being answered in the negative, I requested to have proof of it. Scarcely were those words uttered, when my hand, moving with energy, drew a large cross. Seeing this, I put the same questions about J. C. that were put at my table, and the answers, being written, were the same; from which I concluded that the agency in the writing of mediums is the same as in moving the tables, which, in my opinion, is not that of the devil, as already said. However, in order to confirm my assurance of the non-intervention of the devil in the phenomena of mediums, I desired to add another experiment, which follows:
1418. Wanting to know if there was any kind of demonic influence involved in this phenomenon, I asked the unseen force, or the spirit that guided my hand, if it was the devil. I got a negative response, so I requested some proof of that. As soon as I spoke those words, my hand, moving energetically, drew a large cross. Seeing this, I asked the same questions about J. C. that I had asked at my table, and the written answers were the same. From this, I concluded that the force involved in the writing of mediums is the same as that in moving tables, which, in my view, is not demonic, as I mentioned before. However, to further confirm my belief that the devil does not intervene in mediumistic phenomena, I wanted to conduct an additional experiment, which follows:
1419. As the devil speaks all languages, according to the ritual, even those unknown, to see whether the occult power or spirit which caused me to write possessed this satanic attribute, which, being so, would prove the intervention of the devil in the performance of mediums, I asked the invisible agent if it would cause the Lord’s prayer to be written in several languages, and was answered in the affirmative. Yielding my hand with a pen to the motive power, the Pater was written in two ways, which the same power, also by writing, said was in Valaque and in Russian. Then requesting the same to be written in French, Spanish, Italian, and Latin, it was immediately done; when requesting it to be written in English and German, was answered it could not be done. Why not? I inquired. Because you neither speak nor write those two languages, which is necessary.
1419. As the devil is said to speak every language, according to the ritual, even those unfamiliar, to determine if the occult force or spirit that prompted me to write had this devilish quality, which, if true, would indicate the devil's involvement in the actions of mediums, I asked the invisible entity if it could have the Lord’s prayer written in multiple languages, and it affirmed. Letting my hand move with a pen guided by this force, the Pater was written in two versions, which the same force, through writing, stated were in Valaque and Russian. After that, when I asked for it to be written in French, Spanish, Italian, and Latin, it was done right away; however, when I asked for it to be written in English and German, I was told it couldn't be done. Why not? I asked. Because you neither speak nor write those two languages, which is necessary.
1420. In what languages then, I asked, are you able to make me write? In the languages which I spoke on earth, as the Valaque and Russian, and those which you speak. The Pater, thus written, I had the honour to present it personally to Monseigneur the Archbishop of Paris, by his request. Having mentioned this, I was advised to request my spirit friend to write something in Valaque, and have it submitted to some one acquainted with that language, in order to determine the fact of its being so; which proposal I willingly accepted.
1420. So, what languages can you make me write in? I can write in the languages I spoke on Earth, like Romanian and Russian, and the ones you know. I had the honor of personally presenting the Pater to Monseigneur the Archbishop of Paris at his request. After mentioning this, I was told to ask my spirit friend to write something in Romanian and have it checked by someone who knows that language, to confirm it; I gladly accepted this suggestion.
1421. But, returned to my house, the idea occurred to me to make an experiment to control my familiar spirit myself. I wrote on a piece of paper a phrase in French, and took a separate copy of it on another piece of paper. I read this phrase to my spirit, and requested him to render it in Valaque. The spirit, having made some lines, told me by writing that the translation was already made. I requested him to do the same with it in Spanish, Italian, and Latin, and it was done. Requesting him further to write the same in English, he replied it could not be done, as I did not speak that language. Allowing a few minutes to pass, I took the281 copy of the phrase, and requested the spirit to do the same with it that he had done with the original. The spirit having caused me to write, as he professed, the same phrase in the same languages as he had caused me to write it in previously, I hastened to compare the two translations; but what was my surprise when finding the Spanish, Italian, and Latin translations of the copy like those of the original; I found the Valaque translation of the original and that of the copy not at all alike!
1421. But when I got back to my house, the thought struck me to try to control my familiar spirit myself. I wrote a phrase on a piece of paper in French and made a separate copy of it on another piece of paper. I read this phrase to my spirit and asked him to translate it into Valaque. The spirit wrote out some lines and told me that the translation was already done. I then asked him to do the same in Spanish, Italian, and Latin, and he complied. When I asked him to translate it into English, he said it couldn’t be done since I didn’t speak that language. After a few minutes, I took the281 copy of the phrase and asked the spirit to translate it like he had done with the original. The spirit made me write what he claimed was the same phrase in the same languages as before. But I was shocked to find that the Spanish, Italian, and Latin translations of the copy matched those of the original, while the Valaque translation of the original and that of the copy were completely different!
1422. “Convinced, then, that my spirit did not understand the Valaque, which proved to me, according to the ritual, that it was not a devil, (un démon,) but that notwithstanding he had deceived me, I gave him a severe reprimand, treating him as an infamous cheat, and driving him from my presence. At this juncture, my hand was caused to tremble excessively, which terminated by writing in large characters: ‘I am the devil, and you are a bad preacher that seeks to find out the secrets of God!’ Very well, I said; your proclamation in large letters that you are the devil, is no reason why I should believe it. The devil, according to the ritual, speaks all languages, and you do not speak the Valaque nor English, and therefore you are not the devil. If I am a bad preacher, that does not concern you. It is God who will judge me, and I submit to his holy will. Could I see you as I feel you, I would fix you well; but as it is, I decline any further correspondence with you.
1422. “Convinced, then, that my spirit didn’t understand the Valaque, which proved to me, according to the ritual, that it wasn’t a devil, (un démon), but that even though it had deceived me, I gave it a harsh reprimand, calling it an infamous cheat and sending it away. At that moment, my hand started to tremble uncontrollably, which resulted in writing in large letters: ‘I am the devil, and you are a bad preacher trying to uncover God’s secrets!’ Very well, I said; your large-letter proclamation that you are the devil doesn’t mean I have to believe it. The devil, according to the ritual, speaks all languages, and you don’t speak the Valaque or English, so you aren’t the devil. If I am a bad preacher, that’s not your concern. It’s God who will judge me, and I accept his holy will. If I could see you as I feel you, I would deal with you properly; but as it is, I’m done communicating with you.”
1423. “Scarcely had I expressed these words, when my hand, being influenced, wrote as follows: ‘Pardon! pardon! I am not the devil. If I said so, it was to frighten you, because you continued to plague me with your questions; but I see you are a man that fears nothing. You are not a bad preacher, but a great thinker. Continue then to experiment with me, and I will always tell you the truth!’
1423. “Barely had I said this when my hand, under some influence, wrote: ‘Forgive me! Forgive me! I'm not the devil. If I claimed that, it was just to scare you because you wouldn’t stop pestering me with your questions; but I see you're someone who fears nothing. You're not a bad preacher, but a deep thinker. So keep experimenting with me, and I will always tell you the truth!’”
1424. “Very well, I pardon you, and request you to say, without deceiving me, what languages you do speak? ‘I speak no other languages than those which you speak, and if I did otherwise, it was for amusement.’ Then what are the languages which the spirits speak? ‘Those of the communing person, and no others.’[33] And this ended the meeting.
1424. “Okay, I forgive you, and I ask you to tell me honestly what languages you speak. ‘I only speak the languages you speak, and if I spoke any others, it was just for fun.’ So, what languages do the spirits speak? ‘Only those of the person communicating, and no others.’[33] And that wrapped up the meeting.
1425. “Wishing still to test what had been said to me by my spirit, I went to the house of a writing medium, like myself, and begged him to try some experiments in writing. In the midst of our experiments, I wrote the following words on a small piece of paper in Spanish: Como té llamos? and without making their signification known to the medium in French, requested him to read them to the spirit friend. This was done, but the spirit was silent. The medium, however, insisting on an answer, was impressed by the spirit to write the word malheur, (misfortune.) The282 reply not agreeing with the question, I told the medium to say to his spirit that he had badly replied. Then the spirit made the medium write as follows: ‘If I have not complied with your request, it is because I do not understand that language.’
1425. “Still wanting to test what my spirit had told me, I went to the home of a writing medium, who was also like me, and asked him to try some writing experiments. During our experiments, I wrote the following words on a small piece of paper in Spanish: Como té llamos? and without revealing their meaning to the medium in French, I asked him to read them to the spirit friend. He did so, but the spirit was silent. However, the medium, pushing for an answer, was prompted by the spirit to write the word malheur, (misfortune.) The282 response not matching the question, I told the medium to inform his spirit that it had answered poorly. The spirit then had the medium write: ‘If I haven't fulfilled your request, it's because I don't understand that language.’
1426. As the medium did not understand what had been read to the spirit, which in French would mean, Comment vous appelez-vous? (What is your name?) I perceived that if the spirit did not reply to the Spanish, it was because the medium neither spoke nor understood that tongue; which agreed with what my spirit had told me. Then I requested the medium to ask his spirit to make me write. On the affirmative response of the spirit, I took the pen, and addressing the same question to him: Como te llamos? he replied in Spanish—Benito. Answer me in French—Benoit. In Latin—Benedictus.
1426. Since the medium didn’t understand what had been said to the spirit, which in French means, Comment vous appelez-vous? (What is your name?), I realized that if the spirit didn’t respond to the Spanish, it was because the medium neither spoke nor understood that language; this lined up with what my spirit had told me. I then asked the medium to get his spirit to help me write. When the spirit agreed, I took the pen and asked the same question: Como te llamos? He replied in Spanish—Benito. Answer me in French—Benoit. In Latin—Benedictus.
1427. This experiment confirming what my spirit had told me, that the spirits could produce only the language of those with whom they communed, was a new proof for me of the non-intervention of the devil; seeing, according to the ritual, that he is master of all languages, and that mediums only write those they understand, and have previously learnt.[34] If M. de Mirville desires to make some such experiments with me, it will afford me great pleasure to do so.
1427. This experiment confirmed what my intuition had already suggested, that spirits can only use the language of those they communicate with. This was further evidence for me of the absence of the devil's influence; since, according to the rituals, he masters all languages, and mediums can only write in the languages they understand and have previously learned.[34] If M. de Mirville wants to conduct some experiments with me, I would be very happy to do so.
1428. Nota bene: What merits particular regard in the information received from my spirit friend as to the language used by spirits in communing with men is, that the same was said one hundred and five years since by the ecstatic Swedenborg. See No. 236 of his Treatise on Heaven and Hell, by Le Boys des Guays.
1428. Nota bene: What stands out in the information I got from my spirit friend about the language spirits use when communicating with people is that this was already stated one hundred and five years ago by the visionary Swedenborg. Check No. 236 of his Treatise on Heaven and Hell, by Le Boys des Guays.
Second Part.
1430. “All the prodigies of the mesmeric subjects of clairvoyants, the sorcery, haunting spirits, apparitions, visions, &c., owe their origin, according to M. de Gasparin, to nervous excitement, fluidic action, and some283times are hallucinations. As I do not design here to make a critical analysis of M. de Gasparin’s work, not considering myself capable, and leaving this honour to those who are in some scientific line, I design merely occupying myself with some facts which refer personally to me, and which appear to me to oppose some points in the doctrine of M. de Gasparin in his table-turning, or Supernatural in General, as already noticed in the introduction to the monograph, and I commence with the subject of ecstasy.
1430. “All the amazing things that happen with the mesmerized subjects of clairvoyants—like magic, ghostly spirits, apparitions, visions, etc.—according to M. de Gasparin, come from nervous excitement, fluidic action, and sometimes are just hallucinations. Since I’m not planning to do a critical analysis of M. de Gasparin’s work, as I don’t think I’m qualified and will leave that to those who are more scientifically inclined, I’m just going to focus on some facts that personally relate to me and that seem to challenge certain points in M. de Gasparin’s doctrine regarding table-turning, or Supernatural in General, as mentioned in the introduction to the monograph, and I will start with the topic of ecstasy.
1431. “Speaking of ecstatics, M. de Gasparin explains himself as follows: ‘As to their intellectual faculties, they are capable in those cases of prodigious development. The ecstatics declare themselves that they have two souls; that a voice foreign to their own causes them to speak; that they suddenly receive ideas entirely unknown to them, and terms of expression entirely strange to them. It happens even that the peasant accustomed to patois, speaks French, and that illiterate men express themselves in Latin. Now, have we something here that is supernatural? Certainly not; it is a physiological state, or often the treasures of reminiscence, which the subject possessed, though in fact not aware of it. The peasant may have known how to speak French; she may not have known it, and still it may all have been engraved on the deep recesses of the memory, where nothing is ever really effaced. Exalted or sick, she finds herself in possession of the French language. A merchant, who has scarcely passed the first classes, and who never knew Latin, finds himself the possessor of the Latin language, and embarrasses his doctor, whom he addresses in that tongue.’
1431. “Speaking of ecstatics, M. de Gasparin explains himself as follows: ‘Regarding their intellectual abilities, they can experience remarkable development in these cases. The ecstatics claim that they have two souls; that a voice different from their own makes them speak; that they suddenly receive ideas they’ve never known before, along with completely unfamiliar ways of expressing them. Sometimes a peasant who usually speaks in patois will suddenly speak French, and uneducated individuals will express themselves in Latin. So, do we have something supernatural here? Certainly not; it’s a physiological state, or often just hidden memories that the person had, even if they weren’t aware of it. The peasant might once have known how to speak French; she might not have realized it, but it could have been stored deep in her memory, where nothing is ever completely erased. Whether exalted or unwell, she finds herself capable of speaking French. A merchant who has only completed basic schooling and who never learned Latin suddenly finds himself able to speak Latin, leaving his doctor puzzled as he addresses him in that language.’
1432. “According to this ecstatic theory of M. de Gasparin, it follows that the ideas expressed by the subjects, and which were unknown to them in their normal state, are nothing more than reminiscences. I admit, with M. de Gasparin, that reminiscence is only the return of the soul to the recollection of a thing or an idea, which, though engraven on the memory, was forgotten. This return, however, does not happen without some remarks, which, from the recollection of some ideas or incidents, conduct the mind to the recollection of what was forgotten.
1432. “According to this enthusiastic theory by M. de Gasparin, it suggests that the ideas expressed by the subjects, which they were unaware of in their normal state, are simply memories. I agree with M. de Gasparin that a memory is just the soul reconnecting with something or an idea that, while marked in the memory, was forgotten. However, this reconnection doesn’t happen without some cues, which, from remembering certain ideas or events, lead the mind back to what was forgotten.
1433. “I am a medium: according to the received opinion, a medium is a waking magnetic subject. Now, every magnetic subject is in a degree ecstatic; therefore I, being a medium, am ecstatic. Well, I being ecstatic, take a pencil, and concentrating myself in that state, request the occult power that moves my hand without my volition to cause it to write, if it is possible, something on the creation. The last word is scarcely pronounced when my hand proceeds to write, without interruption, something true or false, on the creation, which surprises me.
1433. “I am a medium: by common understanding, a medium is a conscious magnetic subject. Now, every magnetic subject is somewhat in an ecstatic state; therefore, since I am a medium, I am ecstatic. So, in this ecstatic state, I grab a pencil and, focusing on that feeling, I ask the mysterious power that moves my hand without my control to make it write, if possible, something about creation. As soon as I say the last word, my hand starts to write, without stopping, either something true or false about creation, which really surprises me.
1434. “This interview terminates, and desiring to know if these ideas on the creation come from reminiscences, I seek to discover if they could have been engraven on my memory, either from reading or hearing them284 related. With this view I commenced by reading religious and philosophic books that would be likely to discuss the question, but could find nothing like what I had written. I consulted the public libraries, and they contained nothing on the creation similar to what my hand had communicated. Not a professor, philosopher, naturalist, physiologist, theologian, or historian, with whom I had ever had any intercourse, could recollect any thing of the kind.
1434. “This interview comes to an end, and wanting to understand if these ideas about creation stem from memories, I’m trying to figure out if they could have been planted in my mind from reading or hearing them284 shared. To do this, I started reading religious and philosophical texts that might address the topic, but I couldn’t find anything similar to what I had written. I checked the public libraries, and they didn’t have anything on creation that matched what I had communicated. Not a single professor, philosopher, naturalist, physiologist, theologian, or historian I ever spoke to could recall anything like it.
1436. “But it is not enough, we have said, that in reminiscence, are necessary, which, by the recollection of an object, idea, or notion, we are led to the further recollection of something forgotten. That this should take place, some time is required, however little it may be. However, in the case related, not a moment was required, and this breaks up the required process, in order to respond to the theory of M. de Gasparin.
1436. “But we’ve said that it’s not enough for us to simply remember; we need to recall an object, idea, or concept that leads us to remember something we’ve forgotten. To make that happen, even a little time is needed. However, in the situation described, not even a moment was needed, which disrupts the required process and challenges M. de Gasparin's theory.”
1437. “Now, if these ideas on the creation are not reminiscences—if they do not emanate from the devil, who, agreeably to our author, is an entire stranger to these phenomena—if it is not the soul of a deceased person that controlled my hand, as M. de Gasparin, being a Protestant, does not believe in returning spirits nor in communion with the dead, who then caused to be written by my hand such strange things, without my knowledge or assistance? And I beg M. de Gasparin to be so good as to explain this phenomenon, which appears to be in opposition with his theory on the prodigies of ecstatic subjects. Should M. de Gasparin desire to see what I have written, he can be gratified. But what will he say, when having requested my spirit to reply in writing on some subject familiar to my mind, he is unable to do it, or replies contrary to my thoughts and convictions? Can this be called reminiscence? I pass now to consider mesmerism.
1437. “Now, if these ideas about creation are not just memories—if they don’t come from the devil, who, according to our author, is completely unfamiliar with these phenomena—if it’s not the soul of a deceased person controlling my hand, since M. de Gasparin, being a Protestant, doesn’t believe in spirits returning or communicating with the dead—then who made me write such strange things without my awareness or involvement? I ask M. de Gasparin to kindly explain this phenomenon, which seems to contradict his theory on the wonders of ecstatic subjects. If M. de Gasparin would like to see what I’ve written, he is welcome to do so. But what will he think when, after asking my spirit to write about a topic I know well, it can’t do so or responds in a way that contradicts my own thoughts and beliefs? Can that be called a memory? Now, I will move on to discuss mesmerism.”
1438. “In speaking on this subject, the Supernatural of M. de Gasparin says, ‘The clairvoyance of mesmerism appears in general to have only the character of an echo. Its wonders are those of reminiscence or perception of images and thoughts, which occupy the intelligence of the person with whom the clairvoyant is in rapport. This appears to be the balance-sheet of animal magnetism, and it has changed but little since its origin.’ (Tome ii. page 311.)
1438. “On this topic, the Supernatural by M. de Gasparin states, ‘The clairvoyance of mesmerism generally seems to function merely as an echo. Its marvels are really about recalling or perceiving images and thoughts that are present in the mind of the person connected with the clairvoyant. This seems to be the summary of animal magnetism, and not much has changed since it began.’ (Tome ii. page 311.)
1439. “According to what M. de Gasparin has just told us, it follows, that when a clairvoyant tells us in his sleep that he sees the spirit of a deceased person, and gives us an exact description of his person, we are not to regard it as the deceased person that the clairvoyant sees, but his image impressed on the memory of that clairvoyant from acquaintance with the defunct when living, or in the memory of the consulting visitor in285 rapport; so that the clairvoyant, in these apparitions of the dead, is governed only by reminiscence or the reflection of images or of thoughts. Now, having allowed M. de Gasparin to speak, I desire in my turn to speak also.
1439. “Based on what M. de Gasparin just told us, it follows that when a clairvoyant, while asleep, claims to see the spirit of a deceased person and gives a detailed description of them, we shouldn't consider it to be the actual deceased person that the clairvoyant sees. Instead, it's their image that’s been imprinted on the clairvoyant's memory from their prior acquaintance with the deceased when they were alive, or from the memory of the person seeking guidance in285 rapport. Thus, in these instances of seeing the dead, the clairvoyant is influenced only by recall or the reflection of images or thoughts. Now that I’ve let M. de Gasparin speak, I would like to share my thoughts as well.”
1440. “In January, 1848, a work was published, entitled Les Arcanes de la Vie Future Révelée: The Arcana of a Future Life Revealed. My attention being attracted by the title of this work, it was procured, and proved to be nothing but a collection of the apparitions of deceased persons to clairvoyants.
1441. “On so delicate a question, I thought it best to consult the Scriptures, to see whether the appearance of the dead to the living was admitted by the sacred volumes. I opened, then, the Bible, and the first passage that met my eye was the chap. xxvii. of the first book of Kings, where it said that Samuel had appeared to the witch of Endor, and that, by the intermediation of the latter, the prophet spoke to Samuel; an apparition on which were sketched those reported by M. Cahagnet in his Arcana. I saw afterward in the second book of Maccabees, the high-priest Onias and the prophet Jeremiah appearing to Judas Maccabeus. I see in St. Matthew, chap. xvii., the apparition of Moses and Elias to Peter, John, and James on the Tabor. Finally, I read, in chap. xxviii. of the said St. Matthew, that at the death of our Saviour Jesus Christ, many of the dead appeared to a great number of the inhabitants of Jerusalem.
1441. “On such a sensitive topic, I thought it was best to consult the Scriptures to see if the appearance of the dead to the living was recognized in the sacred texts. I opened the Bible, and the first passage I came across was chapter 27 of the first book of Kings, which mentioned that Samuel appeared to the witch of Endor, and through her, the prophet spoke to Samuel; an apparition similar to those reported by M. Cahagnet in his Arcana. Later, I found in the second book of Maccabees that the high priest Onias and the prophet Jeremiah appeared to Judas Maccabeus. In St. Matthew, chapter 17, I read about the appearance of Moses and Elijah to Peter, John, and James on the Tabor. Finally, I saw in chapter 28 of St. Matthew that at the moment of our Savior Jesus Christ's death, many of the dead appeared to a large number of the people in Jerusalem.
1442. “Convinced by the holy volume of the possibility, or rather of the reality, of the apparition of the dead to the living, I put to myself this question: Can these apparitions of the dead to the living which, according to the Bible, took place in former times, be permitted to occur at the present time? In order to resolve that question, I desired again to consult the Bible, and found the Holy Spirit, in Ecclesiastes, holding the following language: ‘What has been, is what shall be; and what has been done, is what shall be done again.’
1442. “Convinced by the sacred text about the possibility, or rather the reality, of the dead appearing to the living, I asked myself this question: Are these appearances of the dead to the living, which the Bible says happened in the past, allowed to happen in the present? To answer that question, I wanted to look again at the Bible and found that the Holy Spirit, in Ecclesiastes, says: ‘What has been, is what shall be; and what has been done, is what shall be done again.’”
1443. “Then, I said to myself, the appearance of the dead to the living has taken place, according to the Bible; therefore, agreeably to the same sacred volume, what has existed at one time may exist at another. Therefore, there is no reason for rejecting the doctrine of communion of spirits, God willing, at the present time.
1444. “But it is to be found out whether the apparitions reported in the Arcana were realities, or were only illusions, so called. The solution of this problem belongs to me. And with this view I found myself at the house of the author of the Arcana, where a very serious discussion took place between him and myself on his work, which ended with the apparition of my brother Joseph, the third one that figures in the second volume of the Arcana. In fact, I called for the apparition of my late brother, and scarcely had a few minutes passed when the clairvoyant,286 Adile, told me she saw a gentleman, and by the description she gave of the stature, costume, character, the cause and place of the death of the person appearing, I could not avoid recognising in the said person that of my brother Joseph.
1444. “But we need to find out whether the apparitions mentioned in the Arcana were real or just illusions. Figuring this out is my responsibility. With that in mind, I went to visit the author of the Arcana, where a serious conversation unfolded between us about his work, which concluded with the appearance of my brother Joseph, the third person mentioned in the second volume of the Arcana. Actually, I called for the spirit of my late brother, and hardly had a few minutes passed when the clairvoyant,286 Adile, informed me that she saw a gentleman. Based on her description of his height, clothing, demeanor, and the circumstances and location of his death, I couldn't help but recognize that the person she described was my brother Joseph.
1445. “This apparition had such an effect on me, as to keep me awake the whole night, seeking to explain the phenomenon. But becoming fatigued with researches, I thought, as a magnetizer, to be able to explain these apparitions by the same means as M. de Gasparin pretends to explain them at the present time. I said to myself that clairvoyants saw the image of things impressed on the memory of the persons with whom they were in rapport; the image of my late brother being engraved on my memory, it was enough for M. Cahagnet to put me, by an act of his will, in rapport with his clairvoyant, for the latter to have seen the image of my brother on the tablets of my memory.
1445. “This vision had such an effect on me that I couldn’t sleep at all that night, trying to make sense of the phenomenon. But after getting tired from my investigations, I thought, as a magnetizer, that I could explain these visions in the same way that M. de Gasparin claims to explain them today. I told myself that clairvoyants could see the memories imprinted in the minds of the people they connected with; since the image of my deceased brother was etched in my memory, it would be enough for M. Cahagnet to connect me, through an act of his will, to his clairvoyant for her to see my brother’s image in the records of my memory.
1446. “With this impression, I wrote to M. Cahagnet, saying to him, that in spite of my assurance yesterday of the reality of the apparition of my brother, my knowledge of magnetism had caused me to-day to think otherwise, and that further evidence would be necessary to convince me of its reality. M. Cahagnet having complied, two spirits were evoked; one of my aforesaid brother Joseph, and the other of Antoinette Carré, the sister of my domestic; apparitions reported in the second volume of the Arcana, and the description given by the clairvoyant could not have been more correct. But as I still entertained the idea that these images could not be traced by the clairvoyant in my mind, this meeting produced no results. Curious, however, to know whether other clairvoyants possessed the same faculty as the clairvoyant of M. Cahagnet in regard to these apparitions, in the sense I understand them, I begged M. Lecocq, clockmaker of the navy, living at Argenteuil, to try some experiments with his sister, a very lucid clairvoyant.
1446. “With this feeling, I wrote to M. Cahagnet, telling him that despite my confidence yesterday in the reality of my brother's apparition, my understanding of magnetism had led me to reconsider today, and that I would need more evidence to convince me of its reality. M. Cahagnet complied, and two spirits were summoned; one was my brother Joseph, and the other was Antoinette Carré, the sister of my housekeeper; these apparitions were reported in the second volume of the Arcana, and the description given by the clairvoyant was incredibly accurate. However, since I still believed that these images couldn’t be accessed by the clairvoyant from my mind, this meeting produced no outcomes. Still, out of curiosity to see if other clairvoyants had the same ability as M. Cahagnet's clairvoyant regarding these apparitions, as I understand them, I asked M. Lecocq, a clockmaker in the navy living in Argenteuil, to conduct some experiments with his sister, who is a very clear-sighted clairvoyant.
1447. “Five apparitions appeared, of whom three were unknown to him or his clairvoyant, knowing only their names; and their identity was determined by the assistance of other persons present who had known them, as reported from two sources, the letter written me by M. Lecocq, which M. de Gasparin can see, and the report made by the former to M. Cahagnet, which was published in the second volume of the Arcana, page 244. In view of this fact, and others of the same nature come to my knowledge, my opinion as to the derivation of appearances and thoughts from the mind of communicants through the clairvoyant begins to be modified. However, to be entirely convinced of the reality of these apparitions, I should require similar facts to be presented to my own eyes.
1447. “Five apparitions appeared, three of whom were unknown to him or his clairvoyant, only their names being known; and their identities were confirmed with help from others present who recognized them, as reported from two sources: the letter M. Lecocq wrote to me, which M. de Gasparin can view, and the report he made to M. Cahagnet, published in the second volume of the Arcana, page 244. Considering this fact, along with other similar instances I have learned about, my opinion regarding the origin of appearances and thoughts from the minds of communicants through the clairvoyant is beginning to change. Still, to be fully convinced of the reality of these apparitions, I would need to see similar evidence myself.”
1448. “Animated by these sentiments, I requested a person in whom I reposed entire confidence, to give me the name of a defunct, entirely unknown to me, and that of Joseph Moral was given. The young clairvoyant of thirteen years, whom I named at the beginning of this mono287graph, being one day put to sleep by his mother at my house, I used the opportunity to request the subject to invoke the spirit of Joseph Moral. Scarcely had two minutes elapsed, when the young clairvoyant announced the presence of a person, whom she described. Having never seen the said Joseph Moral, and therefore not able to say any thing about him, I was limited to writing down a faithful account of him as given by the clairvoyant.
1448. “Motivated by these feelings, I asked someone I completely trusted to give me the name of a deceased person I didn't know, and the name Joseph Moral was given. The young clairvoyant, who was thirteen years old and whom I mentioned at the beginning of this mono287graph, was one day put to sleep by his mother at my house. I seized the opportunity to ask the clairvoyant to summon the spirit of Joseph Moral. Within just two minutes, the young clairvoyant announced the presence of someone, whom she described. Having never seen Joseph Moral myself and therefore unable to provide any information about him, I could only write down a detailed account of him as described by the clairvoyant.
1450. “This fact was for me a positive conviction that clairvoyants, in their communion with the dead, do not simply see the image of the deceased in the memory of the consulting party, but that they see the veritable souls of the departed, as the witch of Endor saw the soul of Samuel, according to our creed, called the Holy Spirit of the Ecclesiastic. And should M. de Gasparin desire to know the person who gave me the name of M. Joseph Moral, it will give me pleasure to wait on him to her house.
1450. “This made me absolutely convinced that clairvoyants, when connecting with the deceased, don't just see an image of the person from the memory of the one seeking guidance, but actually perceive the true souls of the departed, just like the witch of Endor saw the soul of Samuel, according to our beliefs, referred to as the Holy Spirit of the Ecclesiastic. And if M. de Gasparin wants to know who shared the name of M. Joseph Moral with me, I'd be happy to visit him at her place.”
1451. “Here is another fact like the preceding, but still more interesting. M. de Sarrio, of Alicant, in Spain, a cavalier of Malta, gave to my brother Joseph, of whom I have already spoken, fifteen thousand francs, to be distributed among the poor; for which sum my brother aforesaid gave a receipt to the benevolent donor. At the death of M. de Sarrio, his brother, the Marquis of Algolfa, becoming his heir, found this receipt among the papers of the deceased. At the death of my brother, the Marquis desiring to know if all the amount had been disbursed, addressed my sister, who became his heir, on the subject. But my sister, being unacquainted with his affairs, not having lived with him, submitted to the marquis the schedule of the deceased; which, showing only the distribution of half the amount, the other half was claimed by the marquis, and finally made the subject of a lawsuit.
1451. “Here’s another fact similar to the previous one, but even more intriguing. M. de Sarrio, from Alicante, Spain, a knight of Malta, gave my brother Joseph, whom I've already mentioned, fifteen thousand francs to distribute among the poor. For this amount, my brother provided a receipt to the generous donor. When M. de Sarrio passed away, his brother, the Marquis of Algolfa, became his heir and found this receipt among the deceased's documents. After my brother died, the Marquis, wanting to know if the full amount had been distributed, approached my sister, who was his heir, about it. However, my sister, who was unfamiliar with his affairs and had not lived with him, presented the Marquis with the deceased's records. These showed that only half of the amount had been distributed, leading the Marquis to claim the other half, which ultimately resulted in a lawsuit.”
1452. “My sister, much aggrieved, made me a party to her troubles, in a letter from Alicant. Discomforted by what had happened to my sister, I visited my young clairvoyant and demanded the presence of my brother, who, as she had said, had several times been with her. He was reported present, and I questioned him in relation to the money received from M. de Sarrio, reproaching him in regard to the reversion of the said balance, and the pain he had caused my sister.
1452. "My sister, feeling really upset, included me in her troubles in a letter from Alicante. Disturbed by what had happened to her, I went to see my young psychic and insisted that my brother be present, as she had mentioned that he had been with her several times. He was reportedly there, and I asked him about the money received from M. de Sarrio, scolding him about the remaining balance and the hurt he had caused my sister."
1453. “My brother, astounded at my language, said, that he owed nothing to anybody; and as to the amount referred to, he had given it to Father Mario before dying, to be distributed to the poor; to prove which it would be necessary to call Father Mario. Scarcely had my brother said this, when the clairvoyant said she saw a man with my brother, and from the descrip288tion she gave of him, I thought I recognised a Capuchin friar, who, interrogated by my brother, confirmed what he had said.
1453. “My brother, shocked by my words, claimed that he owed nothing to anyone; and regarding the amount in question, he had given it to Father Mario before he died to be distributed to the poor. To prove this, we would need to call Father Mario. Just after my brother said this, the clairvoyant mentioned she saw a man with my brother, and from her description, I thought I recognized a Capuchin friar, who, when questioned by my brother, confirmed what he had said.” 288
1454. “Having never heard the name of Father Mario, as I had left Alicant thirty years before, I requested some particulars of his country and family, and was told he belonged to St. Vincent du Respect, one league from Alicant, &c., and I put the following questions to my sister, by letter: Was your brother Joseph visited in his sickness by a priest named Father Mario, having a sister at St. Vincent du Respect? and do you know if this Father Mario is dead? Following is the answer:
1454. “Since I hadn’t heard of Father Mario—having left Alicant thirty years ago—I asked for some details about his background and family, and was informed he was from St. Vincent du Respect, one league from Alicant, etc. I then sent my sister the following questions in a letter: Did a priest named Father Mario, who has a sister at St. Vincent du Respect, visit your brother Joseph during his illness? And do you know if this Father Mario is dead? Here’s the response:
1455. “‘As to Father Mario, he left this country several years since, and it is not known if he is in France or America. He did not visit our brother in his last sickness, because he had left some years before. He has two sisters, one was in Algeria, and the other went with him.’ The letters written by me to my sister on this subject, and her replies, with other details, were published in the third volume of the Arcana. The originals are at the disposal of M. de Gasparin, and I would desire to ask that gentleman one question: Whether the apparition of Father Mario, as established by the letters of my sister, confirming the existence of Father Mario, is not a positive fact, and not an hallucination? Whether, as this monk had never been seen nor known by me, his image could possibly have been perceived by the clairvoyant through any impression made upon my mind? Of course, it could not have been the devil who personated Father Mario, if M. de Gasparin correctly repudiates the intervention of Satan in spiritual manifestations.
1455. “‘Father Mario left this country several years ago, and it’s unclear whether he’s in France or America. He didn’t visit our brother during his last illness because he had already departed a few years earlier. He has two sisters; one was in Algeria, and the other went with him.’ The letters I wrote to my sister about this, along with her replies and other details, were published in the third volume of the Arcana. The originals are available to M. de Gasparin, and I would like to ask him one question: Is the apparition of Father Mario, as confirmed by my sister’s letters, not a real fact and not just an illusion? Since I had never seen or known this monk, could his image have been perceived by the clairvoyant through some impression I had made? Obviously, it couldn’t have been the devil impersonating Father Mario if M. de Gasparin correctly denies the involvement of Satan in spiritual events.
1456. “Can M. de Gasparin explain to me the appearance of Father Mario consistently with his Psychological hypothesis in General. These are the facts which I have at present to oppose to the Psychological Rationale of M. de Gasparin. At a future time I shall be prepared to say more to him as well as to M. de Mirville, both on mesmerism and table-turning, as well as in regard to mediums.
1456. “Can M. de Gasparin help me understand Father Mario's behavior in relation to his Psychological Hypothesis in General? These are the facts I currently have to challenge M. de Gasparin's Psychological Rationale. Later on, I’ll be ready to discuss more with him and M. de Mirville about mesmerism, table-turning, and mediums.”
Mechanical Movements without Contact. By Mr. Isaac Rhen, President of the Harmonial Society of Philadelphia.[35]
1458. Among the most distinguished and eloquent advocates of Spiritualism in Philadelphia, is Mr. Isaac Rehn, President of the Harmonial Society. It is said that a good countenance is a constant letter of289 recommendation. The truth of this adage is conspicuously realized in the instance of this sensible and agreeable spiritualist. There is an air of good feeling and sincerity in Mr. Rehn’s tones and expression, which would cause him to be viewed as a reliable witness before any honest and intelligent jury.
1458. Among the most respected and articulate supporters of Spiritualism in Philadelphia is Mr. Isaac Rehn, President of the Harmonial Society. It’s often said that a pleasant face is a constant letter of289 recommendation. This saying is clearly demonstrated in the case of this thoughtful and likable spiritualist. There’s a sense of warmth and authenticity in Mr. Rehn’s voice and demeanor that would make him seen as a trustworthy witness in front of any honest and intelligent jury.
1459. The fact of mechanical movements being induced without muscular contact, direct or indirect, is one of the phenomena which scarcely any one will believe without intuitive proof. It will be seen that on the third of February, 1854, after I had been engaged in the investigation of spiritual manifestations for more than two months, I was still so incredulous as to employ this language to Mr. Holcomb: “You believe fully that tables move without contact, because you have seen them thus moved; I am skeptical, because I have not seen them move without human contact, although I have been at several circles.”
1459. The fact that mechanical movements can happen without direct or indirect muscular contact is something that hardly anyone will believe without firsthand proof. It will be noted that on February 3, 1854, after I had been exploring spiritual phenomena for more than two months, I was still so doubtful that I said to Mr. Holcomb, “You fully believe that tables move without contact because you’ve seen them do it; I’m skeptical because I haven’t seen them move without human touch, even though I’ve attended several sessions.”
1460. But one of the forms of this phenomenon, which has excited the most wonder and incredulity, is that of the carrying of Mr. Henry Gordon, a medium, through the air without the contact of any mundane body. Mr. Rehn having been among the witnesses of this fact, I requested him to give me a statement of it, as well as of others of a similar kind. Subjoined is a letter, written in consequence of my request:
1460. One of the most astonishing and unbelievable examples of this phenomenon is when Mr. Henry Gordon, a medium, was carried through the air without any physical support. Since Mr. Rehn was one of the witnesses to this event, I asked him to provide a statement about it, as well as other similar occurrences. Below is a letter he wrote in response to my request:
Philadelphia, August 1, 1855.
Philadelphia, August 1, 1855.
Professor Robert Hare:
Professor Robert Hare
1462. During the early part of the year 1850, some friends of mine, in whom I had full confidence, stated to me the result of several intercommunions had with these mysterious agents, by which I was led to a determination to test the matter for myself; and, accordingly, on the fifth day of July, in company with a friend, I visited New York, that being the only accessible point known to us at which to gain the object of our visit. The Fox family, consisting of Mrs. Fox, Mrs. Fish, (afterward Mrs. Brown,) Catherine and Margaret Fox were then at Barnum’s Hotel, giving to the public opportunities to test the reality or imposture of the so-called spiritual phenomena. We called at the rooms of the family, and obtained a sitting during the afternoon of the same day. A dozen or more persons were present at the sitting, the result of which was the conviction that the sounds were not a deception on the part of the mediums, but the result of some occult force and intelligence, independent of the ladies themselves.
1462. In early 1850, some friends I completely trusted shared with me the outcomes of various interactions they had with these mysterious agents, which led me to decide to investigate myself. So, on July 5th, I went to New York with a friend, the only place we could access for our purpose. The Fox family, made up of Mrs. Fox, Mrs. Fish (later Mrs. Brown), and sisters Catherine and Margaret Fox, were staying at Barnum’s Hotel, where they provided the public a chance to test the authenticity of the so-called spiritual phenomena. We visited their rooms and managed to sit in on a session that afternoon. There were about a dozen people present, and the outcome convinced us that the sounds weren’t just tricks by the mediums, but rather the result of some hidden force and intelligence separate from the ladies themselves.
1464. Shortly after the commencement of the sounds in the first circle instituted in this city, and of which I was, from the first, a member, demonstrations in the form of movements of tables, chairs, and other articles commenced. Many times they were very violent, but in most instances it was necessary that the hands of the company, and especially those of the medium, should be upon the table. During the session of a circle, however, held in the afternoon—and of course in daylight—these movements became unusually violent. Two card-tables, around which the company sat, having been drawn to the centre of the floor, were thrown backward and forward with great force. After moving thus for some minutes, one of the tables started toward some two or three of the company, and pressed heavily against them, causing them to recede until they had reached the wall; the table would then retreat to the centre of the floor, and, as it were, charge some two or three more, whom in like manner it would press back. Thus it continued retreating and attacking, until the entire company were seated around at the sides of the room.
1464. Shortly after the sounds began in the first circle established in this city, of which I was a member from the beginning, we started to see demonstrations involving movements of tables, chairs, and other items. Often, these movements were quite forceful, but most of the time, it was necessary for everyone, especially the medium, to have their hands on the table. However, during a session held one afternoon—and naturally in daylight—these movements became exceptionally intense. Two card tables, around which the group was seated, were thrown back and forth with great force. After moving like this for several minutes, one of the tables began advancing toward two or three people in the group, pressing heavily against them until they were pushed back against the wall; then the table would retreat to the center of the floor and charge at another two or three individuals, pressing them back in the same way. This continued, with the table retreating and attacking until the entire group was seated around the sides of the room.
1466. These and other manifestations were at the time so wonderful and strange to that part of the company present which had never before met in a circle, as to cause great terror. One lady became so much alarmed during the performance of the spirits with the table as above described, that she screamed aloud, which interfering with the requisite conditions for success, the table fell heavily upon the floor, breaking off the top.
1466. These and other events were so amazing and unusual for the group present who had never gathered like this before that they caused a lot of fear. One lady was so frightened during the spirit performance with the table that she screamed out loud, which disrupted the necessary conditions for success, causing the table to crash heavily to the floor, breaking off the top.
1468. At the time this phenomenon was occurring, a friend of mine, Mr. J. A. Cutting, of Boston, Massachusetts, being seated by my side, found himself moved, as though some one had drawn the chair on which he was sitting. He then placed his feet upon the front round of the chair, so as to entirely insulate himself from the floor, and while in this position he was raised from the floor, chair and all. This gentleman was quite large and stout, weighing, I should think, not less than one hundred and seventy pounds.
1468. At the time this phenomenon was happening, a friend of mine, Mr. J. A. Cutting from Boston, Massachusetts, sat next to me and felt like someone had pulled the chair he was sitting on. He then put his feet on the front round of the chair to completely disconnect himself from the floor, and while in that position, he was lifted off the ground along with the chair. This gentleman was quite large and heavy, weighing, I would guess, at least one hundred seventy pounds.
1470. At the same session, a tumbler and pitcher being upon a washstand in a corner of the room, some five feet distant from any person present, suddenly a crash was heard in the direction in which those articles291 were situated. Upon examination, the tumbler was found to be broken into several hundred pieces, and what is still more strange, the pieces were not scattered around, but occupied a spot which did not exceed eight or ten inches in diameter! It seemed as if the tumbler had collapsed; even the bottom, thick as it was, was broken into many pieces. These facts occurred at the house of Mr. George D. Henck, dentist, in Arch street, who, with the other persons present on that occasion, will at any time corroborate these statements.
1470. During the same session, a tumbler and pitcher were sitting on a washstand in a corner of the room, about five feet away from anyone present. Suddenly, a crash was heard from that direction. When we checked, the tumbler was found shattered into hundreds of pieces, and even stranger, the fragments were not scattered around but were confined to a spot no bigger than eight or ten inches in diameter! It looked like the tumbler had collapsed; even the bottom, which was quite thick, was broken into many pieces. These events took place at the home of Mr. George D. Henck, a dentist on Arch Street, who along with the others present that day can confirm these details. 291
1471. On another occasion, at the house of Mr. J. Thompson, of this city, during a sitting, I requested, among other things, that the spirits would move the table without physical contact. Mrs. Thompson, Mrs. R-—-, and myself, the only persons in the room, drew back from the table, and it was then moved some six or eight inches. In addition to this, it moved from various points, and objects were retained on the table, when under ordinary circumstances, from the inclination of the table, they must have fallen off.
1471. One time, at Mr. J. Thompson’s house in this city, during a session, I asked the spirits to move the table without anyone touching it. Mrs. Thompson, Mrs. R—-, and I, the only ones in the room, stepped back from the table, and then it moved about six or eight inches. Additionally, it shifted from different spots, and items stayed on the table, even though normally, because of the table's tilt, they would have fallen off.
1472. At a sitting at my own residence, some two years since, some very strange phenomena occurred. At the close of the session, a young man, of slender frame and constitution, (Mr. H. C. Gordon,) had his hand thrown violently upon the centre of a large dining-table, weighing not less than eighty or ninety pounds. Some of the company were requested to raise Mr. Gordon’s hand from the table. This, after much effort, was accomplished, and, strange to relate, the table accompanied the hand until it was entirely isolated from the floor. This was a result which I would have doubted, had it not come under my own personal observation.
1472. About two years ago, during a gathering at my home, some very strange events took place. At the end of the meeting, a young man, who was quite slender (Mr. H. C. Gordon), had his hand suddenly slammed down on a large dining table that weighed at least eighty or ninety pounds. Some of the guests were asked to lift Mr. Gordon’s hand off the table. After much struggle, they finally managed to do it, and surprisingly, the table came up with his hand until it was completely off the floor. I would have doubted this outcome if I hadn't witnessed it myself.
1473. About the same time, a company of persons, whose names, as far as I can recollect, I shall mention, were seated around two tables, joined together, in order to furnish room sufficient to seat the party. The house in which I then lived had two parlours, with folding doors. The two tables referred to occupied the entire length of the front parlour, leaving barely room enough for the chairs at the front end of the room; the other end of the table extended quite to the folding doors, leaving, of course, no passage on either end. It so happened that I was seated at that end of the table projecting into the doorway. The medium, Mr. Gordon, was seated about midway of the tables, on the left, the other seats being occupied by the rest of the company.
1473. Around the same time, a group of people, whose names I can recall, were gathered around two tables that were pushed together to make enough space for everyone. The house I lived in had two parlors with folding doors. The two tables took up the entire length of the front parlor, leaving barely enough space for the chairs at the front end of the room; the other end of the table reached all the way to the folding doors, leaving no passage at either end. I was seated at the end of the table that jutted into the doorway. The medium, Mr. Gordon, was sitting about halfway along the tables on the left, with the other seats filled by the rest of the group.
1474. After a variety of manifestations had occurred, the medium was raised from his seat by an invisible power, and, after some apparent resistance on his part, was carried through the doorway between the parlours, directly over my head, and his head being bumped along the ceiling, he passed to the farther end of the back room, in which there was no one beside himself.
1474. After several events had taken place, the medium was lifted from his seat by an unseen force, and, after some clear struggle from him, was moved through the doorway between the parlours, right above me, with his head hitting the ceiling as he went, and he ended up at the far end of the back room, where he was alone.
1475. Although all the individuals present had not equally good opportunity of ascertaining the facts in this case, the room having been some292what darkened, still his transit over the end of the table at which I was seated, and the utter impossibility of the medium passing out in other way than over our heads, his continued conversation while thus suspended, and his position, as indicated by the sound, with other facts in the case, leave no reasonable doubt of the performance of the feat.
1475. Even though not everyone in the room had the same chance to figure out what was happening since it was somewhat dark, the way he moved across the end of the table where I was sitting, the fact that there was no way for him to move out except over our heads, his ongoing conversation while he was in that position, and the sounds he made, along with other details about the situation, leave no reasonable doubt that the act was performed.
Respectfully, I. Rehn.
Respectfully, I. Rehn.
Communication from J. M. Kennedy, Esq.
1478. One of our most zealous and eloquent spiritualists, is my friend, J. M. Kennedy. He has done me the favour, out of many striking manifestations observed by him, to communicate two, which are among the most demonstrative of a physical power and mental intelligence, and which cannot be ascribed to mortal agency. That in which the magnetic needle was moved by his request, without physical contact, is, as I conceive, pre-eminently interesting.
1478. One of our most passionate and articulate spiritualists is my friend, J. M. Kennedy. He has kindly shared with me two striking manifestations he observed, which are among the most convincing examples of physical power and mental intelligence that can't be attributed to human involvement. The one where the magnetic needle moved at his request, without any physical touch, is, in my opinion, particularly fascinating.
Philadelphia, August, 1855.
Philadelphia, August 1855.
“Professor Hare:
“Professor Hare:
1479. “Sir: You ask me to state some facts I have witnessed, which tended to convince my mind that the varied phenomena, occurring among us, are truly ascribable to the direct action of disembodied spirits. I will state two matters, remarking, however, that I have had other and different forms of evidence equally satisfactory to me.
1479. “Sir: You’re asking me to share some experiences I’ve had that led me to believe that the various phenomena happening around us are genuinely caused by the direct influence of spirits. I will present two occurrences, but I want to note that I have other forms of evidence that are just as convincing to me.”
1480. “About two years since, I was invited to meet a private circle to witness physical manifestations. I met them at the house of a near neighbour, whose lady is a medium. There were about ten persons present. The circle being seated, the movement of the table and tipping in answer to questions occurred. I now asked for a communication with myself, which was assented to. I then inquired if the spirits would move the table, despite of my power to hold it still, the company to withdraw from the table, excepting the medium and myself. The answer was, ‘We will!’ The company all arose, and removed their chairs; I stood up and took hold of the table, exercising my best judgment as to the use of my strength in the pending contest. The medium having placed her hand on the table, I promptly announced, ‘I am ready.’ At once, the movement of the table commenced, despite of my efforts to prevent it, and having slightly pushed me backward, it began to draw me in the opposite direc293tion. It moved entirely across the room, dragging me along with it, my feet sliding on the carpet. I resisted the motion of the table with all the power I could command, and no visible being but myself had any contact with it, excepting the medium, whose hand (not hands) was on the top of the table.
1480. “About two years ago, I was invited to join a small group to witness physical phenomena. I met them at the home of a nearby neighbor, whose wife is a medium. There were about ten people there. Once everyone was seated, the table began to move and tilt in response to questions. I then asked for a message for myself, which they agreed to. I asked if the spirits could move the table, even though I would try to keep it still, with everyone else leaving the table except for the medium and me. The answer was, ‘We will!’ Everyone stood up and moved their chairs away; I got up and held onto the table, carefully deciding how to use my strength in the upcoming struggle. The medium placed her hand on the table, and I quickly declared, ‘I am ready.’ Immediately, the table started moving, despite my attempts to stop it, and after slightly pushing me backward, it began to pull me in the opposite direction. It moved all the way across the room, dragging me along, my feet sliding on the carpet. I fought against the table's movement with all my strength, and no one else but me was touching it, except for the medium, whose hand (not hands) was resting on top of the table.
1481. “I then said, ‘If I sit on the table, will you throw me off?’ Answer. Yes. I at once sat on it, and the medium placing her hand as before, I said, ‘I am ready,’ and almost instantaneously the table was turned over on its side, of course, throwing me off. All this occurred at a private house; the room was light enough to read small print, and there was entire freedom to search for trick, machinery, &c. There was to me evidence of an intelligent, invisible power, giving us the tests we suggested and asked for, to prove its presence and power.
1481. “I then said, ‘If I sit on the table, will you throw me off?’ Answer. Yes. I immediately sat on it, and with the medium placing her hand as before, I said, ‘I am ready,’ and almost instantly the table flipped onto its side, of course, throwing me off. All this happened in a private home; the room was bright enough to read small print, and we were free to look for any tricks, machinery, etc. To me, there was evidence of an intelligent, invisible force, giving us the tests we suggested and asked for, to prove its presence and power.
1483. “Among other manifestations which occurred was this: I placed on the centre of the large dining-table a glass tumbler, on which I placed a compass, the needle being one foot in length. On the periphery of the compass, the alphabet, as well as the various points, was painted, and at each letter there was a small metallic pin permanently fixed. After changing the compass freely, to see if the needle worked free and true, I left it so placed that the needle pointed due north, according to the points marked therefor. We then removed our chairs from the table some distance, no one being in contact with it. My friend was on the east, his lady on the south, the medium on the west, and myself on the north side of the table. I then requested that the spirits would move the compass needle to such points as we might designate; and naming north, south, east, west, north-east, south-west, &c., perhaps, in all, nearly twenty different points, I saw the needle promptly and quickly moved to each point, as and when designated by me, and there held steadily for a brief time; and on each occasion, after having been thus held, I saw it fly back to the north point. I also requested that they (the spirits) would spell John by moving the needle to the letters, and I saw the needle promptly moved to the several letters required to spell the name, stopping at each, tipping and touching the small pin opposite the letter, and then immediately returning to its position due north.
1483. “Among other things that happened, I placed a glass tumbler in the center of the large dining table and put a compass on top of it, with the needle measuring one foot long. The compass had the alphabet and various directional points painted around its edge, and there was a small metal pin fixed at each letter. After adjusting the compass to make sure the needle was moving freely and accurately, I set it so that the needle pointed straight north, according to the markings. We then moved our chairs away from the table, with no one touching it. My friend sat on the east side, his lady on the south, the medium on the west, and I sat on the north side of the table. I then asked the spirits to move the compass needle to the points we designated, naming north, south, east, west, north-east, south-west, and so on, maybe around twenty different points in total. I watched as the needle quickly moved to each point I named and stayed there for a short time; after each of these moments, it would spring back to the north point. I also asked the spirits to spell out John by moving the needle to the corresponding letters, and I watched as it moved to each letter needed to spell the name, stopping at each one, tipping, and touching the small pin next to the letter, before returning to its position pointing due north.”
1484. “This manifestation I was compelled to regard as clearly proving the action of an invisible, intelligent power, present with us, and purporting to be a disembodied spirit once known among us as a man. There was here also perfect freedom to search for trick, machinery, &c.; and all these suggested explanations occurred as clearly to my mind as to men generally, and were duly cared for by me; for I was then an investigator294 of the truth of spirit manifestations, and did not wish to be humbugged. These cases, however, are but a sample of the chain of testimony that has satisfied my mind fully on this question.
1484. “I felt compelled to see this experience as clear evidence of an invisible, intelligent force with us, claiming to be a disembodied spirit that was once known to us as a person. There was complete freedom to look for tricks, mechanisms, etc.; all the possible explanations came to my mind just as they would to anyone else, and I took them into account. At that time, I was an investigator294 of the truth behind spirit manifestations and didn’t want to be fooled. However, these examples are just a small part of the extensive evidence that has completely satisfied me on this matter.”
John M. Kennedy.”
John M. Kennedy.
Communication from Wm. West, Esq.
1485. As respects the communication which follows, I have only to say that I consider the author as quite reliable, both as to his capacity to observe accurately, and his disposition to exert that capacity faithfully. I believe him to have one of those minds which, like the scale-beam, allows every thing pro or con to have its due weight.
1485. Regarding the communication that follows, I just want to say that I find the author to be very reliable, both in his ability to observe accurately and in his willingness to use that ability honestly. I believe he has one of those minds that, like a balance scale, gives proper weight to everything pro or con.
“Philadelphia, September 6, 1855.
“Philadelphia, September 6, 1855.”
“Professor R. Hare:
“Prof. R. Hare:
1487. “About three years since I lectured in this city against the spiritual agency of ‘the modern manifestations,’ and advocated a nerve aura, obedient to the will. At that time I had the power to stop the physical movements. Subsequently, the agents in these phenomena refused to obey me. I have since been informed by the spirits, that they permitted me to control them for a time, in order ultimately to convince me by depriving me of said power.
1487. “About three years ago, I gave a lecture in this city opposing the spiritual agency of ‘the modern manifestations’ and supported the idea of a nerve aura that follows the will. Back then, I could stop the physical movements. After that, the agents involved in these phenomena stopped obeying me. I've since been told by the spirits that they allowed me to control them temporarily to ultimately prove to me that I no longer had that power.
1489. “On the evening of June 22, 1853, while sitting at the table at Mrs. Long’s, (a writing medium, living at No. 9 Thompson St., New York), my deceased wife purported to be communicating with me. At that time I had been appointed, by the spirits, dictator to a circle, which convened every Wednesday evening at the residence of H. C. Gordon, 103 North Fifth St., Philadelphia. I inquired of my wife if she could convey a message to the circle then assembled in Philadelphia. She answered, ‘I will try.’ I then requested her to take my respects to the circle, and inform them that I was succeeding admirably in my investigation, and becoming stronger in the glorious truth of spirit intercommunion. In the course of seventeen minutes, the spirit again announced her presence, and informed us she had delivered the message. On the next Wednesday evening, I was present at the circle in Philadelphia, and was informed by all the members present that my communication had been duly received. Another spirit, I was informed, had been communicating, when an interruption occurred, and my wife gave her name, and, in substance, the communication, through the hand of Mr. Gordon.
1489. “On the evening of June 22, 1853, while sitting at the table at Mrs. Long’s (a writing medium living at 9 Thompson St., New York), my deceased wife was attempting to communicate with me. At that time, I had been appointed by the spirits as the leader of a circle that met every Wednesday evening at the residence of H. C. Gordon, 103 North Fifth St., Philadelphia. I asked my wife if she could send a message to the circle gathered in Philadelphia. She replied, ‘I will try.’ I then requested her to extend my regards to the circle and let them know that I was making great progress in my investigation and becoming stronger in the wonderful truth of spirit communication. After seventeen minutes, the spirit once again announced her presence and told us she had delivered the message. The following Wednesday evening, I attended the circle in Philadelphia and was informed by all the members present that my message had been successfully received. I was also told that another spirit had been communicating when an interruption happened, and my wife provided her name and the essence of the message through Mr. Gordon.”
Yours, &c. W. West.
“George St., 4th house west of Broad.”
Best regards, W. West.
“George St., 4th house west of Broad.”
Koons’s Establishment.
1493. Among the wonders of Spiritualism, none have excited so much astonishment as the manifestations which have occurred at the establishment of Mr. Koons, in Athens county, Ohio. The phenomena are so extraordinary, as to be difficult to be believed, even by Spiritualists; and yet there is far more evidence of their truth than of any of the miracles recorded in Scripture. In no instance has any of these been attested in due form by known spectators, and admitting that, in this respect, there is no deficiency, they were not of a nature to be repeated before a succession of observers. Those at Koons’s have been repeated, and are still being repeated. I first heard that there was such an establishment from my spirit brother, at least fifteen months ago. My spirit friends confirm the truth of the account received, and sanction the idea that there is something in the locality which favours mediumship. I subjoin the narratives of several visitors to the establishment in question:
1493. Among the wonders of Spiritualism, none have sparked as much amazement as the events that have taken place at Mr. Koons's establishment in Athens County, Ohio. The phenomena are so incredible that even Spiritualists find them hard to believe; yet there is much more evidence supporting their authenticity than for any of the miracles recorded in the Bible. In no instance have any of these events been formally verified by known witnesses, and while this aspect may not be lacking, they also weren't the kind that could be replicated in front of a series of observers. Those at Koons's have been replicated and continue to be replicated. I first learned of such an establishment from my spirit brother about fifteen months ago. My spirit friends affirm the truth of this information and endorse the idea that there is something in the area that promotes mediumship. I will share the accounts of several visitors to the establishment in question:
Communication from Joseph Hazard, Esq.
1494. Joseph Hazard, Esq., of Narragansett, R. I., is very well known in Philadelphia, as well as in the vicinity of his residence. Mr. Hazard accompanied me, in some of my investigating visits, to spiritual circles, and was present, as I have mentioned, (139,) on the occasion when I first saw a table move without contact. There is no doubt but that he is a truthful witness. If he has overrated what he heard or saw, it must be from the enthusiasm with which he was inspired.
1494. Joseph Hazard, Esq., from Narragansett, R. I., is quite well known in Philadelphia, as well as in the area around his home. Mr. Hazard joined me on some of my investigative visits to spiritual circles and was present, as I mentioned, (139,) when I first saw a table move without anyone touching it. There's no doubt that he is a reliable witness. If he has exaggerated what he heard or saw, it’s likely due to the enthusiasm he felt.
Athens Co., Ohio, May 4, 1855.
Athens Co., Ohio, May 4, 1855.
1495. My Dear Sir: I have been here these three days, witnessing the wonderful spirit manifestations of which we have heard so much. Allow me to assure you that the published account of them is no more to the reality than shadow is to substance. No pen can describe, and if it could, I believe no mind could believe that had not witnessed them. The spirits talk audibly through a trumpet, not with good articulation, but as if the process were mechanical. On the accordeon, however, the language is exquisitely articulated, being some beautiful air or catch, according to the number of words; the harmony being perfect, and every note forming a part or whole word. They frequently move overhead, next the ceiling,296 with a rapidity of motion inconceivably astounding, blowing a trumpet with deafening blasts at times, or beating a tamborine or some other instrument.
1495. My Dear Sir: I have been here for three days, witnessing the amazing spirit manifestations we've heard so much about. Let me assure you that the published accounts are nothing compared to the reality—like a shadow compared to substance. No words can truly describe it, and even if they could, I don’t think anyone who hasn’t seen them would believe it. The spirits speak out loud through a trumpet, not clearly, but more like a mechanical process. However, on the accordion, the language is beautifully articulated, producing lovely melodies based on the number of words; the harmony is perfect, and every note is part of a word or forms a whole word. They often move above, near the ceiling, 296 with an incredibly fast motion, sometimes blowing the trumpet with deafening blasts, or playing a tambourine or another instrument.
1496. One of the exhibitions represents a spirit hand during this circuit, beating a tamborine, there being a piece of sand-paper with phosphorus on it, which they use for illuminating the hand. I saw them begin the work and complete it. The hand was small and delicate, and flew all over the room with something like the rapidity of light on a broken surface of water, frequently snapping the fingers, and stopping often near to myself and others, that we might see it to full advantage.
1496. One of the exhibitions shows a spirit hand during this event, playing a tambourine, with a piece of sandpaper containing phosphorus used to illuminate the hand. I watched them start and finish the work. The hand was small and delicate, darting around the room almost as fast as light on a broken surface of water, often snapping its fingers and stopping frequently near me and others so we could see it clearly.
1500. I have not yet seen them write. I have heard them talk and play on many instruments by the hour. There is a base and tenor drum on which they perform with such violence, that it is almost deafening at times, and the whole house resounds till it shakes throughout. Some of the music is seraphic, especially when they speak with the harmonicon, when it is more unearthly in its character than I should have been able to imagine.
1500. I haven't seen them write yet. I've heard them talking and playing various instruments for hours. There's a bass and tenor drum that they play with such intensity that it can be almost deafening at times, and the whole house vibrates. Some of the music is heavenly, especially when they use the harmonicon; it sounds more otherworldly than I could have ever imagined.
1501. The spirit houses are distinct buildings of one room, dark as Erebus, and rather lonesome places, in this wilderness. I have, nevertheless, obtained permission to sleep on the floor each night in one: and during two of those nights I have been favoured with faint music on the drums. Last night, from the moment I extinguished the light, drumming was continued throughout the night, accompanied by a few notes on the violin.
1501. The spirit houses are unique one-room buildings, dark as night and quite lonely spots in this wilderness. Still, I've managed to get permission to sleep on the floor in one each night: and during two of those nights, I've been treated to soft music on the drums. Last night, as soon as I turned off the light, the drumming went on all night, along with a few notes on the violin.
1503. One spirit attempted to sing through the trumpet, but could not make music; after each failure he would stop a minute, and then, very good-naturedly, say, “I will try again.” This he did several times, when he added “What shall I do for you, if I can’t sing?” He at length took up an accordeon, and succeeded better on that; but I presume did not suit himself, as he would exclaim every once in a while, “Oh, dear!” very despondingly.
1503. One spirit tried to play music through the trumpet, but couldn’t make any sound; after each attempt, he would pause for a moment, and then very cheerfully say, “I’ll give it another shot.” He repeated this a few times until he finally said, “What can I do for you if I can’t sing?” Eventually, he picked up an accordion and had more success with it; however, it seems he still wasn’t satisfied, as he would occasionally exclaim, “Oh, dear!” in a very downcast way.
1504. The effort the spirits make to manifest themselves is very great,297 evidently, and the amiability of their demeanour here is striking. However, I cannot tell you but a small portion of what I have seen, but believing you would be interested in this sketch, I have hastily made it, and hope you will excuse the rudeness of it. If I could not witness again what I have seen during the last seventy-two hours, I would not part with the consciousness of it for the whole State of Ohio.
1504. The effort that spirits put into showing themselves is really significant,297 clearly, and their friendly demeanor here is impressive. However, I can only share a small part of what I've experienced, but believing you would find this overview interesting, I’ve quickly put it together and hope you’ll forgive its roughness. If I could not experience again what I’ve seen in the last seventy-two hours, I wouldn’t trade the knowledge of it for all of Ohio.
I am very sincerely your friend,
Jos. P. Hazard.
I am truly your friend,
Jos. P. Hazard.
To Prof. Robt. Hare, Philada.
To Prof. Robt. Hare, Philly.
A VISIT TO THE SPIRITUALISTS OF OHIO.
Letter from John Gage.—The Home of the Mediums and the Haunts of the Spirits.—What they did, said, and wrote.
LOCALITY OF JONATHAN KOONS.—A HILLY AREA.
1506. Persons going from the West can go to Lancaster, which is the nearest point by railroad, thence down the Hocking River by stage, which runs daily to Chauncey, thence on foot two miles to Koons. From the North persons would take the stage at Columbus, thence to Lancaster by the lines above described. From the East there are steamboats to McConnelsville, on the Muskingum, both from Zanesville and Marietta, but from these private carriages must be got; distance as above, twenty-five miles, but the miles bear no correspondence to the hours, for on every route they think they do well if they accomplish two and a half miles an hour. No man ever travelled over so hilly a country anywhere else, and when you finally get into Koons’s vicinity, you find the essence of hills personified; there is no such thing as a level spot large enough to put a house on.
1506. People traveling from the West can reach Lancaster, the closest railroad stop, and then take a stagecoach down the Hocking River, which runs daily to Chauncey. From there, it’s a two-mile walk to Koons. Those coming from the North would catch the stagecoach in Columbus, then head to Lancaster via the same routes mentioned earlier. From the East, steamboats travel to McConnelsville on the Muskingum River, departing from both Zanesville and Marietta, but private carriages will be needed from there; the distance is still twenty-five miles. However, don’t let the mileage fool you—it takes a long time to travel because on every route, they feel accomplished if they make two and a half miles an hour. No one has ever traversed such a hilly area anywhere else, and when you finally arrive near Koons, you’ll find hills everywhere; there isn’t a single flat space large enough to build a house on.
THE HOUSE OF THE SPIRITUALIST.—PRESENCE OF ELECTRICITY.
1507. Koons’s house is located on the south-east angle of a sharp ridge, some few rods below the edge of the ledge, and where, when the native trees occupied the ground, the lightning was wont to make frolic among them; and where it still likes to sport. The stove-pipe above the spirit room was burst off, and a number of times during the sitting of the mediums, the electric sparks were seen to play over the wires of the spirit table.
1507. Koons’s house is situated at the southeast corner of a steep ridge, a short distance below the ledge, where, when the native trees once covered the area, lightning would often dance among them; and it still enjoys playing there. The stovepipe above the spirit room was damaged, and several times during the mediums' sessions, electric sparks were observed dancing across the wires of the spirit table.
THE ROOM WHERE THE SPIRITS MANIFEST THEIR POWER.
1508. The spirit room is built of logs, as well as the house in which Mr. Koons resides; it is situated at the end of his dwelling-house, and six feet from it. It is twelve by sixteen feet square, and seven feet high inside; there is a tight floor, and the ceiling above is of rough boards, laid close edge to edge; in the garret above, there is less than three feet clear room to the peak of the roof, and up here are stowed old shoes and other old trumpery. There is a door in the front, near the centre of the building, and a small window on each side of it, and one window in the back side; the windows have each close shutters outside to exclude the light. Across the back end of the room are three rough board shelves. Two feet in front of these, stands the spirit table, three feet wide and six feet long. In front of this, and setting against it, is a common fall-leaf table, about three and a half feet square, which extends to within one foot of the stove; and across the back end of the room are two rough benches for spectators to sit upon, and the front one comes within one foot of the stove. Then, on each end of the table is room for three or four chairs, all of which fills the room so full that there is no room to get around. Mr. Koons’s seat is at the left of the table, where he sits and plays the fiddle. Nahum, his son, sits on the left of the table; he is a lad eighteen years old, and the principal medium; and his mother sits next to him.
1508. The spirit room is made of logs, just like the house where Mr. Koons lives; it’s located at the back of his house, six feet away from it. The room measures twelve by sixteen feet and is seven feet high inside; it has a solid floor, and the ceiling above is made of rough boards, fitted closely together. In the attic above, there’s less than three feet of clearance to the peak of the roof, and it’s where old shoes and other junk are stored. There’s a door in the front, near the center of the building, with a small window on each side and one window at the back; the windows each have tight shutters outside to block out the light. Across the back wall of the room are three rough wooden shelves. Two feet in front of these is the spirit table, which is three feet wide and six feet long. In front of it, leaning against it, is a standard drop-leaf table, about three and a half feet square, which extends to within a foot of the stove; across the back of the room are two rough benches for spectators, with the front one coming within a foot of the stove. There’s space for three or four chairs at each end of the table, which fills the room so much that it’s cramped for movement. Mr. Koons sits on the left of the table, where he plays the fiddle. Nahum, his eighteen-year-old son and the main medium, sits to his left, and his mother sits next to him.
THE FURNITURE AND OCCUPANTS.
1509. The spirit table has a frame or rack standing on it, and extended from one end to the other; this rack sustains a tenor drum at one end and a brass drum at the other, attached to it by means of wires; there are wires also passing in various directions about the rack, and sustaining some small bells, some images of birds cut out of copper plate, &c.; there are two fiddles, a guitar, banjo, accordeon, French harp, tin horn, tea bell, triangle, and tamborine, either hanging up or on the tables. The room will hold eighteen or twenty persons besides the mediums, and when filled, as it usually is, there is no room to pass around or between the people and the table or stove.
1509. The spirit table has a frame or rack on it, stretching from one end to the other; this rack holds a tenor drum at one end and a brass drum at the other, connected by wires; there are also wires running in different directions around the rack, holding some small bells, copper-cut bird images, etc.; there are two violins, a guitar, a banjo, an accordion, a harmonica, a tin horn, a tea bell, a triangle, and a tambourine, either hanging up or resting on the tables. The room can accommodate eighteen to twenty people besides the mediums, and when it's full, which it usually is, there’s no space to move around between the people and the table or stove.
THE MANIFESTATIONS COMMENCE.—THE SPIRITS PLAY ON DRUMS, HARPS, FRENCH HORNS, ACCORDEONS, AND TAMBORINES.
Koons’s Room, June 19, 1855.
Koons’s Room, June 19, 1855.
1511. Between eight and nine o’clock, Mr. Koons and his son Nahum went into the room and closed the doors and shutters, for the purpose, they said, of inquiring of King, the presiding spirit, whether he would attend that evening, and what time he would commence; this they always do,299 and they were told to get ready in twenty minutes. We went into the room. Mr. Koons took his seat with his fiddle and tuned it; I took my seat by his side, and my wife next to me, our chairs setting close to each other, and the chairs and benches in the room were all filled. The window-shutters and doors were now closed, and Mr. Koons put out the light, and immediately there came a startling blow upon the table that made the room jar, and almost brought me to my feet. “Well, King,” said Mr. Koons, “you are here,” and commenced playing a lively tune. As soon as Koons began to play the fiddle, the bass and tenor drums began to play with such power and energy as to frighten me; the whole house was on a jar and vibrating in perfect time with the music; and I know no mortal hands had hold of the drumsticks, and for the time the thought was irresistible and constant that spirits controlled them. After two or three tunes on the drums, the tamborine was taken up and beat with such violence, that I expected every moment it would be dashed to pieces, at the same time it was making rapid circles in the room and dashing from one place to another, and occasionally thrust almost in my face, so that I was afraid it would hit me. Then the French harp would be played, and then the drums, harp, and accordeon altogether; then a strange kind of unearthly noise would sing in concert with the music. Interspersed between the tunes upon the harp was talking through the horn, the horn frequently passing through the room, over and around us at the same time.
1511. Between eight and nine o’clock, Mr. Koons and his son Nahum entered the room and closed the doors and shutters. They said they were checking with King, the presiding spirit, to see if he would join them that evening and what time he would start. This was their regular routine,299 and they were informed to get ready in twenty minutes. We went into the room. Mr. Koons took his seat with his violin and tuned it; I sat next to him, and my wife sat beside me, our chairs close together, and the other chairs and benches in the room were all filled. The window shutters and doors were now shut, Mr. Koons turned off the light, and suddenly there was a jarring thud on the table that shook the room and nearly made me jump to my feet. “Well, King,” said Mr. Koons, “you’re here,” and he started playing a lively tune. As soon as Koons began to play the violin, the bass and tenor drums erupted into sound with such force and energy that it scared me; the whole house shook and vibrated perfectly in time with the music. I was certain that no human hands were holding the drumsticks, and for that moment, the thought that spirits were controlling them was inescapable. After two or three tunes on the drums, the tambourine was picked up and struck with such intensity that I thought it would break at any moment, spinning rapidly around the room and darting from place to place, occasionally almost hitting my face, which made me nervous. Then the harmonica would be played, followed by the drums, harmonica, and accordion all together; then a strange, otherworldly noise would harmonize with the music. Interspersed between the tunes on the harmonica was talking through the horn, which often passed through the room, around and over us simultaneously.
THE MANIFESTATIONS CONTINUE, AND THE HEAD SPIRIT WRITES A COMMUNICATION.
1513. Koons talked some time with the voice in the horn and harp; then asked him to write a communication for me. We then heard the rattling of paper, and the phosphorus began to show itself, was taken up in a hand, showed the hand. It then got a pencil, took some paper, and laid it on a table close before me, and wrote on it, making the same sound that a pencil always makes in rapid writing; then made some flourishes on the paper below the writing, threw down the pencil, handed the paper into my hand, and threw the phosphorus on the floor in front of Mr. Koons, who took it up and handed it to the hand again; it then threw it in the corner of the room, and said, “Good-night,” when Mr. Koons lighted a candle. I examined the paper that the hand had given me, and found it was my paper, which I had placed on the table, with a private mark on it. There were four lines written on it in a good legible hand, and following the ruled lines on the paper as follows:
1513. Koons chatted for a while with the voice coming from the horn and harp; then he asked it to write a message for me. We then heard the sound of paper rustling, and the phosphorus began to reveal itself, was lifted by a hand, and showcased the hand. It then grabbed a pencil, took some paper, and placed it on a table right in front of me, writing on it and making the same sound that a pencil makes when writing quickly; then it added some flourishes below the writing, dropped the pencil, handed the paper to me, and tossed the phosphorus on the floor in front of Mr. Koons, who picked it up and passed it back to the hand. It then threw it into the corner of the room and said, “Goodnight,” just as Mr. Koons lit a candle. I examined the paper that the hand had given me and realized it was my paper that I had put on the table, marked with my private symbol. There were four lines written on it in a clear, readable handwriting, following the ruled lines on the paper as follows:
King.”
King.”
At Koons’s, Thursday, June 21.
At Koons's, Thursday, June 21.
1515. We have much more of a performance than usual, and one highly satisfactory. Among other things, after they had finished playing a tune, Mr. Schenick, who sat next to me, and who plays the violin very well, said, “King, won’t you hand me the other fiddle?” It was taken up and handed to him over my head, thumbing the strings as it passed. “Yes,” it said, “I will give you the fiddle; you do not want the bow, I suppose.” “Oh, yes,” said Schenick, “I want the bow, too.” The horn said, “Can’t you get along without it?” Schenick answered, “I can’t play very well with my fingers.” Then the bow was handed to him, the horn named a tune, and both fiddles began to play, accompanied by the drums and the accordeon, and a number of voices sang, something like human voices.
1515. We had a much better performance than usual, and it was really enjoyable. After they finished playing a tune, Mr. Schenick, who was sitting next to me and plays the violin really well, said, “King, can you pass me the other fiddle?” It was lifted up and handed to him over my head, touching the strings as it went by. “Yes,” it said, “I’ll give you the fiddle; you don’t want the bow, right?” “Oh, yes,” Schenick replied, “I want the bow, too.” The horn chimed in, “Can’t you manage without it?” Schenick responded, “I can’t play very well using just my fingers.” Then the bow was passed to him, the horn called out a tune, and both fiddles started playing, joined by drums and the accordion, with several voices singing, sounding a bit like human voices.
1516. Then the tamborine was played with much spirit, and passed rapidly around the room. At the same time it made stops in front of a person, touched them gently on the shoulder, head, or somewhere else, playing all the while; then passed to another, and so on. It passed me, and dropped into my wife’s lap. It then flew over Van Sickle’s head, made a great flourish, lit on it, and began to press down; and Van says, “Bear down; I can hold you up.” He then said there was the weight of a large man put on his head; it also passed to a number of others, and pressed down on their heads. Mr. Koons then asked him to lay the tamborine on my head, which it did immediately, bearing down, I should think, with a weight of twenty pounds: I raised up my hand and took hold of it, when it started up, and I held on as fast as I dared for fear of breaking the Tamborine; it then passed around and came to my wife, and pressed gently against her head. This, she said, she mentally requested it to do, as she did not want it to bear down hard on her.
1516. Then the tambourine was played with a lot of energy and quickly passed around the room. At the same time, it would stop in front of someone, lightly touch them on the shoulder, head, or somewhere else, all while continuing to play; then it would move on to the next person, and so on. It came to me and landed in my wife's lap. It then flew over Van Sickle's head, made a big show, landed on it, and started to press down. Van said, “Go ahead and push down; I can handle it.” He then mentioned that it felt like a heavy man was sitting on his head; it also moved to several others, pressing down on their heads. Mr. Koons then asked it to land on my head, which it did right away, pressing down, I’d guess, with a weight of twenty pounds: I raised my hand and grabbed it, and when I did, it shot up, and I held on as best as I could for fear of breaking the tambourine; it then made its way around and came back to my wife, gently pressing against her head. She said she had mentally asked it to do that, so she didn’t want it pressing down hard on her.
1517. Mr. Koons then said, “King, it is very warm here; won’t you take Mrs. Gage’s fan and fan us?” But before he had finished speaking, the tamborine began to fly around the room like lightning, breathing a strong current of wind, and fanning all in the house. Then the phosphorus was taken up and darted around the room like flakes of lightning, and a hand began to develop. We talked with the voice while this process was going on, and tried to urge our spirit friends to write a communication for us. When the hand was formed, it passed around the room and shook hands or touched the hands of many of us. It took hold of my hand, and then of my wife’s. We both felt the shape of a hand distinctly. It then got some paper and a pencil, and laying the paper on the table, right in front of us, began to write with great rapidity; covered one side of the sheet; turned it over again, wrote five lines, signed it, filled the rest of the page with301 flourishes, folded it, and placed it in my wife’s hand. It then flew around the room, darting from the table up to the ceiling, there making three or four distinct knocks, and darting down and up, repeating the knocks a number of times in succession; it then passed all around the room, stopping and showing the hand to all that wanted to see it. It then commenced darting around the room again, and snapping its fingers as loud as a man could do. It then threw the phosphorus in the back corner of the room, said “Good night,” and was gone. Mr. Koons then lighted the candle, and my wife read the paper which was given her by the spirit hand, as follows:
1517. Mr. Koons then said, “King, it’s really warm in here; could you take Mrs. Gage’s fan and fan us?” But before he finished speaking, the tambourine started flying around the room like lightning, creating a strong breeze that fanned everyone in the house. Then the phosphorus took flight, zipping around the room like flashes of lightning, and a hand began to form. While this was happening, we communicated with the voice and urged our spirit friends to write a message for us. Once the hand was created, it moved around the room, shaking hands or touching the hands of many of us. It took hold of my hand, then my wife’s. We both distinctly felt the shape of a hand. It then got some paper and a pencil, laid the paper on the table right in front of us, and started writing quickly; it filled one side of the sheet, flipped it over, wrote five lines, signed it, filled the rest of the page with 301 flourishes, folded it, and handed it to my wife. It then zipped around the room, darting from the table to the ceiling, where it made three or four distinct knocks, then shot down and back up, repeating the knocks several times in a row; it then moved all around the room, stopping to show the hand to anyone who wanted to see it. It started darting around the room again, snapping its fingers as loudly as a man could. It then tossed the phosphorus into the back corner of the room, said “Good night,” and disappeared. Mr. Koons then lit the candle, and my wife read the message that was given to her by the spirit hand, as follows:
THE SPIRIT’S LETTER.
1519. 1st. Let the inquirer conceive himself entering a congregated promiscuous assembly of persons, who are all anxiously awaiting his approach under the discharge of some important and general mission, in behalf of those in attendance. On entering the assembly, he looks around upon his anxious inquirers, and sees them attended with their respective safeguards, such as he never saw before. In the discharge of his official duty, however, he is necessitated to exclude himself from the direct view and intercourse of the safeguards, so as to be brought into a nearer relation to the corresponding parties. The interlocution accordingly takes place, when each one in turn begins to interrogate the speaker in his excluded position, on subjects relating to their excluded guard, of which the speaker knows but little or nothing, except the cognition of their presence on his arrival; and in order to acquaint himself with the circumstances and matters inquired after, so as to answer correctly, the speaker has to disencumber himself at every inquiry, and not only so, but would also fail to perform his devolved duty by submitting himself to the scrutiny and criticism of the corresponding parties. Which, then, of the two requirements would be of the most consequence—to discommode the general interest of the assembly and that of his own official duty, or to omit the latter and attend to the discharge of a more important and higher duty, by which the peace and consoling riches would be augmented to the fulness of their cup?
1519. 1st. Imagine yourself walking into a crowded gathering of people who are all eagerly awaiting your arrival for some important mission on behalf of everyone there. As you enter, you survey the anxious faces around you and notice they all have certain protections that you've never seen before. However, as you carry out your official duty, you must keep yourself away from the direct view and interaction with these protections to engage more closely with the people involved. This leads to a dialogue where each person takes a turn to question you about their protections, which you know little to nothing about, other than their presence when you arrived. To answer their questions correctly, you must free yourself from each inquiry, and if you don’t, you risk neglecting your responsibilities by exposing yourself to scrutiny and criticism from the involved parties. So, which is the greater priority—disrupting the overall interest of the gathering and your official duty, or prioritizing the latter while fulfilling a more significant and higher obligation that would enhance their peace and comfort?
1520. Now, this is the position our presiding spirit occupies. When himself and band enter the room, he recognises, many bright guardian spirits interspersed among the promiscuous assembly, of whom he has no knowledge. And in the discharge of their manifesting performances, they necessarily must assume physical incumbrances, which shuts them from a direct view of the attending spirits; and as many questions that are led in relation to them so often, the corresponding spirit has to disrobe him302self so as to give a correct relation, to say nothing of the possibility of receiving and conveying wrong impressions from spirits who do not regard the truth.
1520. Now, this is the role our leading spirit plays. When he and his team enter the room, he sees many bright guardian spirits mixed in with the crowd, whom he doesn't know. In carrying out their performances, they have to take on physical forms, which prevents them from directly seeing the attending spirits; and since many questions come up about them, the corresponding spirit has to reveal himself302 to provide an accurate account, not to mention the chance of getting and passing on incorrect impressions from spirits who don't value the truth.
THE ABOVE IS CERTIFIED TO.
CONCLUDING REMARKS.
1525. When a person comes here and sees the rooms, and finds them open all day for the children to run in and out of, and for visitors to examine, and sees there are no juggler’s tools about, and no place to keep them; the mediums and all engaged are of that artless stamp, and in their whole appearance, bearing, and conduct, so marked with honesty and sincerity of purpose, that the idea of their being imposters, or of their psychologizing their auditors, is simply ridiculous. That the music is not imaginary, is proved in another way, if further proof is necessary; it can be heard as well outside as inside of the houses, and is frequently heard by the neighbours for miles around. There is no question about the manifestations, and about their having all that superhuman or unaccountable character that the most sanguine writers have given them. They rather seem to be over-cautious about exaggerating any thing, and consequently fall far short of conveying an adequate idea of the phenomena. Therefore, all we have to do is to account for these existing facts, for the facts cannot be controverted. The intelligence displayed is sometimes of a high order, and they always claim to be spirits of men or women who have left the earthly form, and passed to that undiscovered country from whose bourne it has been said no travellers return. But of this every one can judge for themselves, though it is difficult to imagine what they can be, if they are not spirits.
1525. When someone comes here and sees the rooms, finding them open all day for children to come and go and for visitors to check out, and notices there are no juggling props lying around, nor any place to keep them; the mediums and everyone involved are so genuine in nature, with their overall appearance, demeanor, and behavior marked by honesty and sincerity of purpose, that the notion of them being frauds or manipulating their audience is simply laughable. The music isn’t imaginary, and if further evidence is needed, it can be heard just as clearly outside as inside the houses, and is often heard by neighbors for miles around. There’s no doubt about the manifestations, and they possess all that extraordinary or inexplicable quality that even the most optimistic writers have described. They seem to be overly cautious about exaggerating anything and, as a result, fail to fully convey the significance of the phenomena. Therefore, all we need to do is explain these existing facts, as the facts cannot be disputed. The intelligence displayed is sometimes quite profound, and they always assert that they are spirits of people who have left their earthly bodies and moved on to that undiscovered realm from which it’s said no one returns. But everyone can judge for themselves, even though it’s hard to fathom what else they might be, if not spirits.
John Gage.
John Gage.
An Evening at Koon’s Spirit Room. By Charles Partridge, Esq., New York.
1526. Sunday evening, 27th May last, I walked some three miles through a wood over a very poor road, in the direction of what is called the spirit rooms of Jonathan Koons. I noticed at the foot of a hill several carriages by the roadside, and horses tied to the fence and trees; and on reaching the place, I observed from thirty to fifty men sitting on stones,303 logs, and fences around a dilapidated log-cabin. The men looked respectable, and their deportment and conversation bore the impress of a religious meeting. I inquired who lived there, and was informed that Jonathan Koons lived in that house, (pointing to the cabin,) and that (pointing to a small one near by) is the spirits’ room. I inquired what spirits lived there, and was told that it was the room where people go in to talk with their spirit friends who have gone out of their earthly tabernacle. On inquiry as to what this gathering was for, I was informed that these people had come to talk with their spirit friends and to witness spirit manifestations. I was informed that I might go in—that everybody was free to enter and examine the room, and to attend the circle. I selected a good “soft” stone, and sat me down, a perfect stranger, with the other disciples. I scrutinized the people closely, and listened to their conversation without joining in it. I overheard one say that Mr. Koons was in his house. In the course of half an hour a man came out, whom several persons addressed as Mr. Koons; he glanced his eyes over the congregation; presently, two men drove up, who, as I subsequently learned, came from Amesville, some ten miles distant; they were entire strangers to me and I to them; they looked around, spoke with some persons, and then with Mr. Koons, asking whom he had there, &c., and finally asked him who I was, pointing me out to Mr. Koons. Mr. Koons observed that he had not learned my name, that I had just come; but he was impressed by spirits to say, “His name is Charles Partridge, of New York.” Soon after, one of these men approached me, and asked if I was Mr. Partridge, from New York. I answered in the affirmative. “Charles Partridge?” “Yes.” “Well,” said he, “the spirits told Mr. Koons who you were.” I had not overheard their conversation, but such was the result of one of my tests as to the spirit origin of these manifestations.
1526. On Sunday evening, May 27th, I walked about three miles through a wooded area along a rough road, heading toward what are known as the spirit rooms of Jonathan Koons. I noticed several carriages by the roadside and horses tied to the fence and trees. When I arrived, I saw between thirty and fifty men sitting on stones,303 logs, and fences around a rundown log cabin. The men appeared respectable, and their demeanor and conversation suggested they were at a religious gathering. I asked who lived there, and was told that Jonathan Koons lived in that cabin (pointing to the cabin), and that (pointing to a small one nearby) is the spirits’ room. I asked what spirits lived there, and was informed that it was the room where people go to communicate with their spirit friends who have passed on. When I inquired about the purpose of the gathering, I learned that these people had come to talk with their spirit friends and to witness spirit manifestations. I was told I could go in—that anyone was welcome to enter, check out the room, and join the circle. I picked a comfortable “soft” stone and sat down, a complete stranger, with the other attendees. I observed the people closely and listened to their conversations without participating. I overheard one mention that Mr. Koons was inside his house. After about half an hour, a man came out, whom several people greeted as Mr. Koons; he scanned the crowd. Soon after, two men drove up, who, as I later learned, had come from Amesville, about ten miles away. They were complete strangers to me, and I to them; they looked around, talked to some people, and then to Mr. Koons, asking who he had there, etc., and finally asked him who I was, pointing me out to Mr. Koons. Mr. Koons noted that he hadn’t caught my name and that I had just arrived; however, he felt prompted by spirits to say, “His name is Charles Partridge from New York.” Shortly after, one of these men approached me and asked if I was Mr. Partridge from New York. I confirmed this. “Charles Partridge?” “Yes.” “Well,” he said, “the spirits told Mr. Koons who you were.” I hadn’t overheard their conversation, but that was the conclusion of one of my tests regarding the spirit origin of these manifestations.
1527. Mr. Koons and one of his children (a medium) went into the spirit room alone, as is their custom before forming the public circle, to receive such instruction from the presiding spirit (King) as he might wish to communicate. There are often more persons present desiring to obtain admittance than the room will hold. In such cases the spirit directs Mr. Koons to especially invite those in who have come the longest distance, and such as cannot remain there for another opportunity, usually calling the names of the parties, and leaving out the neighbours and those who can make it convenient to be present on subsequent occasions. At one of these preliminary interviews, I was invited in by Mr. Koons. Immediately on closing the doors, the spirit took up the trumpet, (described in my last communication,) and spoke through it audibly and distinctly, saying, “Good evening, friends!” to which we responded in like manner. The spirit then addressed me by name, and observed, in substance, that although they were strangers to me, I was not a stranger to them: they had been cognizant of my thoughts, desires, and efforts in behalf of Spiritualism from304 the time my attention was first called to the subject. They spoke in very flattering terms of myself and others, who had been bold to testify to the spiritual manifestations witnessed in the early times, and during the severer trials and opposition. They had watched the TELEGRAPH with anxious solicitude, and with eminent satisfaction. They closed in a fervent benediction and consecration to further and greater good and uses. After which this spirit (King) said to Mr. Koons, that they could not hold a public circle that evening, as he was elsewhere engaged. Mr. Koons expressed much regret at this announcement, and said he felt much embarrassed and mortified, because several persons were there who had come a long way; some from New York, Pennsylvania, Virginia, Canada, and other distant places. The spirit said he was sorry, but he had engaged to attend a circle elsewhere, (naming the place a long distance away,) and he must be there in fifteen minutes. Mr. Koons would not be satisfied with any excuses, but insisted that he (King) had agreed to preside over his circle, and meet the company who came there; and rather than be made the instrument of apology to others for the disappointment in the performances, he would abandon it altogether, etc. King said, “Wait a few moments, and I will go and see if arrangements can be made.” He thereupon laid down the trumpet, and to all appearances left us, and we could get no further replies for four or five minutes, when the trumpet was again taken up, and King spoke through it, saying he had arranged the matter by deputizing a portion of his band to fill his engagement, and they would therefore hold a circle in that place, commencing the performance in fifteen minutes, but perhaps they would not be able to make so good music, or have the full complement of the manifestations. Thus ended this preliminary interview, which sufficiently indicates the character of all similar ones.
1527. Mr. Koons and one of his children (a medium) went into the spirit room alone, as they usually do before starting the public circle, to get any instructions from the presiding spirit (King) that he wanted to share. Often, there are more people wanting to come in than the room can hold. In these cases, the spirit tells Mr. Koons to especially invite those who have traveled the farthest and those who won’t be able to return for another opportunity, usually mentioning their names while leaving out neighbors and those who can come back later. During one of these preliminary meetings, Mr. Koons invited me in. As soon as the doors were closed, the spirit picked up the trumpet (described in my last message) and spoke through it clearly, saying, “Good evening, friends!” to which we replied in kind. The spirit then addressed me by name and mentioned that even though we were strangers to each other, I was not unknown to them: they had been aware of my thoughts, desires, and efforts to promote Spiritualism since I first became interested in it. They spoke highly of me and others who had bravely testified to the spiritual activities seen in earlier times and during tougher challenges and opposition. They had been following the Text message with great concern and were very pleased. They concluded with a heartfelt blessing and dedication to ongoing and greater good. After that, this spirit (King) told Mr. Koons that they couldn’t hold a public circle that evening, as he had another commitment. Mr. Koons showed a lot of regret about this news and said he felt embarrassed and mortified because there were several people there who had traveled a long way; some from New York, Pennsylvania, Virginia, Canada, and other distant places. The spirit said he was sorry, but he had promised to attend a circle elsewhere (naming a location far away) and had to be there in fifteen minutes. Mr. Koons didn’t accept any excuses and insisted that King had agreed to oversee his circle and meet the guests who were present; rather than being the reason for an apology to others for the disappointment, he would cancel it altogether. King said, “Wait a moment, and I’ll see if arrangements can be made.” He then set down the trumpet and seemingly left us, and we couldn’t get any further responses for four or five minutes, when the trumpet was picked up again, and King spoke through it, saying he had worked things out by assigning some members of his band to take his place, so they would hold a circle in that location, starting the performance in fifteen minutes, but they might not be able to produce as good music or have the full range of manifestations. Thus ended this preliminary meeting, which gives a clear idea of the nature of all similar ones.
1528. I attended three public circles in the spirit house of Mr. Koons, and three in the spirit house of Mr. John Tippie; they are situated about three miles apart; the rooms and manifestations are very similar, although the electrical tables, so called, differ somewhat in their construction; the presiding spirits are of the same name, King; they claim to be father and son. These rooms will seat about twenty-five or thirty persons each, and are usually full. Many times, while I was there, more persons desired to go in than the house would hold, and some of them had to remain outside. They could hear the music and the spirits’ conversation just as well, and they only had to forego being touched by spirits and seeing them. The music is heard, under favourable circumstances, at the distance of one mile, or as far as any band of martial music can be heard. After the circle is formed, the door and windows are shut, the light is usually extinguished, and almost instantaneously, a tremendous blow by the large drumstick is struck on the table, when immediately the bass and tenor drums are beaten rapidly, like calling the roll on the muster-field, waking a thousand echoes. The rapid and tremulous blows on these drums are really frightful to many305 persons. This beating of the drums is continued five minutes or more, and when ended, King usually takes up the trumpet and salutes us with “Good evening, friends,” or something like it, and often asks what particular manifestations are desired. If none are specially asked for, King often asks Mr. Koons to play on the violin, the spirit band playing at the same time on the drums, triangle, tamborine, harp, accordeon, harmonica, etc. etc.; upon these the spirits perform scientifically, in very quick and perfect time. They commence upon each instrument at one instant, and in full blast, and stop suddenly after sounding the full note, showing that they have some more perfect method than we have of notifying each performer of the instant to start and stop. After the introductory piece on the instruments, the spirits often sing. I heard them sing. The spirits spoke to us, requesting us to remain perfectly silent. Presently, we heard human voices singing, apparently in the distance, so as to be scarcely distinguishable; the sounds gradually increased, each part relatively, until it appeared as if a full choir of human voices were in our small room, singing most exquisitely. I think I never heard such perfect harmony; each part was performed with strict attention to its relative degree of sound or force. There was none of that flopping, floundering, ranting, and shrieking which constitutes the staple of what is latterly called music; harmony, rather than noise, seemed to constitute the spirits’ song. So captivating was it, that the heartstrings seemed to relax or to increase their tension, to accord with the heavenly harmony. It seems to me that no person could sit in that sanctuary without feeling the song of “Glory to God in the highest, peace on earth, and good-will to man,” spontaneously rising in the bosom, and finding expression on the lip. I don’t know that the spirits attempted to utter words with their song; if they did, they succeeded in this particular no better than modern singers. But it was hardly necessary for the spirits to articulate, for every strain and modulation seemed pregnant with holy sentiments, and language could scarcely signify more. After this vocal performance, several pieces of quick music were performed by the spirits on the several instruments. They play faster than mortals usually do, and in most perfect time throughout. If any instrument gets out of chord, they tune it; they tuned the violin in my presence, and did it rapidly and skilfully.
1528. I went to three public circles at Mr. Koons' spirit house and three at Mr. John Tippie's; they are located about three miles apart. The rooms and experiences are very similar, although the so-called electrical tables vary a bit in their design. The presiding spirits are both named King and claim to be father and son. Each room can hold about twenty-five or thirty people, and they usually fill up. Many times while I was there, more people wanted to join than the space could accommodate, so some had to stay outside. They could still hear the music and the spirits' conversations just fine, but they missed out on being touched by the spirits and actually seeing them. Under good conditions, the music can be heard from a mile away, similar to how far any military band can be heard. Once the circle is formed, the doors and windows are closed, the lights are usually turned off, and almost immediately, a loud bang from a large drumstick hits the table, followed by rapid beats on the bass and tenor drums, echoing like a roll call on a muster field. The quick and shaky drumming can be quite frightening to some people. This drumming goes on for five minutes or more, and when it stops, King usually picks up the trumpet and greets us with, “Good evening, friends,” or something like that, often asking what specific manifestations we want. If no specific requests are made, King frequently asks Mr. Koons to play the violin, while the spirit band simultaneously plays the drums, triangle, tambourine, harp, accordion, harmonica, and more. The spirits perform incredibly well, playing in perfect sync. They start on each instrument all at once and stop abruptly after finishing a note, showing they have a more efficient way of signaling each performer when to start and stop than we do. After the introduction on the instruments, the spirits often sing. I heard them sing. The spirits asked us to remain perfectly silent. Soon, we heard human voices singing, faintly at first, but gradually getting louder until it felt like a full choir was in our small room, singing beautifully. I think I’ve never heard such perfect harmony; each part was played with precise attention to volume. There was none of that awkwardness and shouting that often passes for music these days; instead, it was true harmony, not just noise, that made up the spirits' song. It was so captivating that it felt like my heartstrings either relaxed or tightened to align with the heavenly harmony. It seems to me that no one could sit in that place without feeling the song of “Glory to God in the highest, peace on earth, and goodwill to man,” rising spontaneously within, ready to be expressed with words. I’m not sure if the spirits tried to sing actual words; if they did, they weren’t any better at it than modern singers. But it hardly mattered, as every note and shift felt full of sacred meaning, and words could barely convey more. After this vocal performance, the spirits played a few fast pieces of music on various instruments. They played faster than we usually do, and with perfect timing throughout. If any instrument was out of tune, they adjusted it; I saw them tune the violin right in front of me, and they did it quickly and skillfully.
1529. Spirits reconstruct their physical bodies, or portions of them, from similar elements, apparently, as those which constitute our mortal bodies. Spirits’ hands and arms were reorganized in our presence, on several of these occasions; and that we might see the more distinctly, they sometimes wet their hands with a weak solution of phosphorus, (which Mr. Koons prepared some time previous by their request,) which emits a light, so that their hands can be almost as distinctly seen in a dark room as they could be if the room were light. At one of these circles which I attended, there were three hands which had been covered with this solution of phosphorus,306 and we all saw them passing swiftly around the room, over our heads, carrying the instruments, and playing upon the violin, accordeon, triangle, harmonica, and tamborine, and all keeping perfect time. These instruments were moved so swiftly and near the faces of the audience,—our own among them,—that we felt the cool atmospheric current as distinctly as we do that produced by a fan. Several of the company in different parts of the room remarked that they not only felt this disturbance of the air, but heard it, and distinctly saw the hand and instrument pass close to their faces. Several of us requested the spirits to place these instruments in our hands, or touch us on our heads or other parts of our bodies; and in most cases it was instantly done. I held up my hands, and requested the spirits to beat time with the tamborine on my hands. They did so, and gave me more than I asked for, by striking my knees, hands, and head in a similar manner. I have seen the tamborine players in the minstrel bands of New York; I have seen the best performers in the country; but they cannot perform equal to these spirits. The perfect time and the rapidity with which they beat are truly surprising.
1529. Spirits reconstruct their physical bodies, or parts of them, using elements similar to those that make up our mortal bodies. On several occasions, we witnessed spirits’ hands and arms being reorganized in front of us; and to make it more visible, they sometimes wet their hands with a diluted phosphorus solution (which Mr. Koons had prepared earlier at their request), which gives off a light, allowing their hands to be almost as visible in a dark room as they would be in a lit one. At one of the gatherings I attended, there were three hands covered with this phosphorus solution,306 and we all saw them swiftly moving around the room above our heads, carrying instruments and playing the violin, accordion, triangle, harmonica, and tambourine, all in perfect time. These instruments were moved so quickly and close to the audience's faces,—including mine,—that we felt the cool air current just like that created by a fan. Several people in different parts of the room noted that they not only felt the air movement but also heard it and clearly saw the hand and instrument pass by their faces. Many of us asked the spirits to place these instruments in our hands or to touch our heads or other parts of our bodies, and in most instances, it was done right away. I raised my hands and asked the spirits to play the tambourine on my palms. They did that and exceeded my request by also striking my knees, hands, and head in the same way. I’ve seen tambourine players in New York's minstrel bands; I have seen the best performers in the country, but none can play as well as these spirits. The perfect timing and the speed with which they played were truly astonishing.
1530. Spirit hands with phosphorus upon them passed around the room, opening and shutting, and exhibiting them in various ways and positions which no mortal hand could assume or occupy—demonstrating them to be veritable spirit hands, physically organized. The phosphorescent illumination from these hands was so distinct, that it occurred to me I could see to read by it; and I took a pamphlet from my pocket, and asked the spirit to place the hand over it, that I might see if I could read by the light. The spirit did so, when I at once perceived that I held the pamphlet wrong end up. I turned it, and could read. The members of the circle remarked that they could see very plainly my hands, face, and the pamphlet I held, and as distinctly could see the spirit’s hand and a portion of the arm. I then put out my hands, and asked the spirits to shake hands with me; they did so almost instantly. I then asked them to let me examine their hands, and they placed them in mine, and I looked at them and felt them until I was entirely satisfied. Others asked the same favour, and it was readily granted them. These spirit hands appeared to be reorganized from the same elements that our hands are; and, except that they had a kind of tremulous motion, and some of them being cold and death-like, we could not by our senses distinguish them from hands of persons living in the form.
1530. Spirit hands with phosphorus on them passed around the room, opening and closing, and showing themselves in various positions that no living hand could take—proving they were real spirit hands, physically formed. The glowing light from these hands was so bright that I realized I could read by it; so I took a pamphlet from my pocket and asked the spirit to cover it with the hand so I could see if I could read by the light. The spirit did this, and I immediately noticed I was holding the pamphlet upside down. I flipped it around and could read it. The people in the circle commented that they could clearly see my hands, face, and the pamphlet I held, and they could also see the spirit’s hand and part of its arm just as clearly. I then reached out and asked the spirits to shake hands with me; they did so almost instantly. I asked if I could examine their hands, and they placed them in mine, and I looked at and felt them until I was completely satisfied. Others asked for the same favor, and it was readily granted to them. These spirit hands seemed to be formed from the same elements as our hands; and, except for having a slight trembling motion and some being cold and lifeless, we could not tell them apart from the hands of living people.
1531. This spirit hand took a pen, and we all distinctly saw it write on paper which was lying on the table; the writing was executed much more rapidly than I ever saw mortal hand perform; the paper was then handed to me by the spirit, and I still retain it in my possession. At the close of the session the spirit of King, as is his custom, took up the trumpet and gave us a short lecture through it—speaking audibly and distinctly, presenting the benefits to be derived, both in time and eternity, from intercourse307 with spirits, and exhorting us to be discreet and bold in speech, diligent in our investigations, faithful to the responsibilities which these privileges impose, charitable toward those who are in ignorance and error, tempering our zeal with wisdom; and finally closing with a benediction.
1531. This spirit hand picked up a pen, and we all clearly saw it write on paper that was on the table; the writing was done much faster than I’ve ever seen a human hand do it. The paper was then given to me by the spirit, and I still have it in my possession. At the end of the session, the spirit of King, as he usually does, picked up the trumpet and gave us a quick talk through it—speaking clearly and audibly, outlining the benefits of interacting with spirits, both in this life and the next, and encouraging us to be careful and confident in our speech, thorough in our inquiries, responsible with the privileges we have, compassionate towards those who are misinformed or mistaken, balancing our enthusiasm with wisdom; and finally ending with a blessing.
1532. I am aware that these facts so much transcend the ordinary experience of mortals, that few persons can accept them as true on any amount of human testimony. I obtained the addresses of the following named persons, and hope they will excuse me for the liberty I take in referring to them in this connection, for the confirmation of my statements. They were present at some or all the circles which I attended, when these manifestations occurred: R. I. Butterfield, Cleveland, Ohio; William D. Young, Covington, Ind.; George and David Brier, Rainsville, Ind.; David Edger and daughter, Mercer co., Pa.; S. Van Sickle, Delaware, O.; S. T. Dean, Andrew Ogg, and Geo. Walker and son, Amesville, O.; Azel Johnson, Millfield, O.; W. S. Watkins, New York; Thomas Morris and wife, Dover, O.; Dr. Geo. Carpenter, Athens, O.; Thomas White, Mount Pleasant, O. Many other persons were present, whose names I did not learn.
1532. I know that these facts are so far beyond what most people typically experience that very few can believe them based on any amount of human testimony. I got the contact information for the following individuals and hope they will forgive me for mentioning them in this context, as they can confirm my statements. They were present at some or all of the gatherings I attended when these events took place: R. I. Butterfield, Cleveland, Ohio; William D. Young, Covington, Indiana; George and David Brier, Rainsville, Indiana; David Edger and his daughter, Mercer County, Pennsylvania; S. Van Sickle, Delaware, Ohio; S. T. Dean, Andrew Ogg, and Geo. Walker and his son, Amesville, Ohio; Azel Johnson, Millfield, Ohio; W. S. Watkins, New York; Thomas Morris and his wife, Dover, Ohio; Dr. Geo. Carpenter, Athens, Ohio; Thomas White, Mount Pleasant, Ohio. Many other individuals were present whose names I did not catch.
Charles Partridge.
Charles Partridge.
Experience of the Hon. N. P. Tallmadge.
1533. The following communication from Governor Tallmadge to Mrs. Sarah H. Whitman, of Providence, R. I., has been in print for some time, and came out early, when Spiritualism had made too little impression to be duly appreciated. I for one, at the period of its first publication, could not realize it. But the public are now better prepared, and it may be repeated with advantage. Besides, this work is made for the uninformed and incredulous, rather than for those who have been heretofore converted, and who are familiar with the earliest manifestations.
1533. The following message from Governor Tallmadge to Mrs. Sarah H. Whitman in Providence, R. I., has been published for some time now, and was released early on, when Spiritualism hadn’t yet made a significant impact to be fully understood. I, myself, at the time of its first publication, couldn’t grasp it. However, the public is now more ready, and it can be shared again to good effect. Additionally, this work is intended for those who are uninformed and skeptical, rather than for those who have already been convinced and are familiar with the earliest events.
Baltimore, Tuesday, April 12, 1853.
Baltimore, Tuesday, April 12, 1853.
1534. Dear Madam: I seize a few leisure moments, while detained here a short time on business, to give you a more extended account of the “Physical Manifestations” to which I alluded in a former letter. In this account, I shall confine myself to those which purport to come from the spirit of John C. Calhoun.
1535. I have received numerous communications from him, from the commencement of my investigation of this subject down to the present time. Those communications have been received through rapping mediums, writing mediums, and speaking mediums. They are of the most extraordinary character. In style and sentiment, they would do honour to him in his best days on earth.
1535. I have received many messages from him, starting from the beginning of my investigation into this topic up to now. These messages have come through various mediums, including rapping, writing, and speaking. They are absolutely remarkable. In terms of style and sentiment, they would make him proud in his prime on earth.
“John C. Calhoun.”
“John C. Calhoun.”
1539. It is proper here to remark, that all the communications referred to in this letter, were made by Calhoun after a call for the alphabet, and were rapped out, letter by letter, and taken down by me in the usual way. They were made in the presence of the Misses Fox and their mother. I called on Monday at the hour appointed, and received the following communication:
1539. It's important to note that all the messages mentioned in this letter were communicated by Calhoun after a request for the alphabet, and were spelled out, letter by letter, which I recorded in the usual manner. These messages were made in the presence of the Misses Fox and their mother. I visited on Monday at the scheduled time and received the following message:
John C. Calhoun.”
John C. Calhoun.”
1543. The coincidence in sentiment of the answer of J. C. Calhoun and W. E. Channing, in regard to the object of these manifestations, is remarkable, and worthy of particular notice. The concurrence of two such great minds, whether in or out of the body, on a subject so engrossing, cannot fail to command the attention of every admirer of exalted intellect and moral purity.
1543. It's striking how similarly J. C. Calhoun and W. E. Channing responded regarding the purpose of these expressions, and it deserves special attention. The agreement between two such brilliant minds, regardless of their physical presence, on such a captivating topic, is sure to capture the interest of anyone who appreciates high intellect and moral integrity.
1544. During the above communication of Calhoun, the table moved occasionally, perhaps a foot, first one way and then the other. After the communication closed, we all moved back from the table, from two to four feet, so that no one touched the table. Suddenly the table moved from the position it occupied some three or four feet, rested a few moments, and then moved back to its original position. Then it again moved as far the other way, and returned to the place it started from. One side of the table was then raised, and stood for a few moments at an angle of about thirty-five degrees, and then again rested on the floor as usual.
1544. During Calhoun's previous communication, the table shifted occasionally, maybe a foot or so, first in one direction and then in another. After the communication ended, we all backed away from the table, moving two to four feet, so that no one touched the table. Suddenly, the table moved from its position about three or four feet, paused for a moment, and then returned to where it started. It then moved as far in the opposite direction and came back to its original spot. One side of the table was then lifted and stayed at an angle of about thirty-five degrees for a few moments before settling back on the floor as usual.
1545. The table was a large, heavy, round table, at which ten or a dozen persons might be seated at dinner. During all these movements no person touched the table, nor was any one near it. After seeing it raised in the manner above mentioned, I had the curiosity to test its weight by raising it myself. I accordingly took my seat by it, placed my hands under the leaf, and exerted as much force as I was capable of in that sitting posture, and could not raise it a particle from the floor. I then309 stood up in the best possible position to exert the greatest force, took hold of the leaf, and still could not raise it with all the strength I could apply. I then requested the three ladies to take hold around the table, and try altogether to lift it. We lifted upon it until the leaf and top began to crack, and did not raise it a particle. We then desisted, fearing we should break the table. I then said, “Will the spirits permit me to raise the table?” I took hold alone and raised it without difficulty. After this, the following conversation ensued:
1545. The table was large, heavy, and round, able to seat ten or a dozen people for dinner. Throughout all these movements, no one touched the table, nor was anyone near it. After seeing it lifted as described earlier, I was curious to test its weight by trying to lift it myself. I sat down, placed my hands under the tabletop, and pushed with all my strength while sitting, but couldn’t lift it at all. I then309 stood up, positioned myself to exert maximum force, grabbed the edge, and still couldn’t lift it no matter how hard I tried. I then asked the three ladies to help me lift it together. We pulled on it until the tabletop started to crack, but we still didn’t move it an inch. We stopped, worried we might break the table. I then asked, “Will the spirits allow me to lift the table?” I grabbed it by myself and lifted it effortlessly. After that, the following conversation took place:
1548. The square table was of cherry, with four legs—a large-sized tea-table. It was brought out and substituted for the round one, the leaves being raised. I took my seat on the centre; the three ladies sat at the sides and end, their hands and arms resting upon it. This, of course, added to the weight to be raised—namely, my own weight and the weight of the table. Two legs of the table were then raised about six inches from the floor, and then the other two were raised to a level of the first, so that the whole table was suspended in the air about six inches above the floor. While thus seated on it, I could feel a gentle vibratory motion, as if floating in the atmosphere. After being thus suspended in the air for a few moments, the table was gently let down again to the floor!
1548. The square table was made of cherry wood, with four legs—a large tea table. It was taken out and replaced the round one, with the leaves lifted. I sat in the center; the three ladies were at the sides and the end, with their hands and arms resting on it. This, of course, added to the weight to be lifted—my weight and the weight of the table. Two legs of the table were raised about six inches off the floor, and then the other two were lifted to the same level, so that the whole table was suspended in the air about six inches above the floor. While sitting on it like this, I could feel a gentle vibrating motion, as if I were floating in the air. After being suspended for a few moments, the table was gently lowered back down to the floor!
1549. Some pretend to say, that these physical manifestations are made by electricity! I should like to know by what laws of electricity known to us, a table is at one time riveted, as it were, to the floor, against all the force that could be exerted to raise it; and at another time raised entirely from the floor, with more than two hundred pounds weight upon it?
1549. Some people claim that these physical phenomena are caused by electricity! I’d like to know which laws of electricity we know of could explain how a table can be stuck to the floor, resisting all efforts to lift it, and then, at another moment, be lifted completely off the floor with over two hundred pounds resting on it?
1550. At a subsequent meeting, Calhoun directed me to bring three bells and a guitar. I brought them accordingly. The bells were of different sizes—the largest like a small-sized dinner-bell. He directed a drawer to be put under the square table. I put under a bureau-drawer, bottom side up. He directed the bells to be placed on the drawer. The three ladies and myself were seated at the table with our hands and arms resting on it. The bells commenced ringing in a sort of chime. Numerous raps were made, as if beating time to a march. The bells continued to ring and to chime in with the beating of time. The time of the march was slow and solemn. It was beautiful and perfect. The most fastidious ear could not detect any discrepancy in it.
1550. At a later meeting, Calhoun asked me to bring three bells and a guitar. I brought them as requested. The bells were different sizes—the largest was like a small dinner bell. He instructed that a drawer be placed under the square table. I put a bureau drawer, bottom side up, underneath. He instructed the bells to be placed on the drawer. The three ladies and I were seated at the table with our hands and arms resting on it. The bells started ringing in a sort of chime. There were numerous taps, as if to keep time with a march. The bells continued to ring and chime along with the beat. The tempo of the march was slow and solemn. It was beautiful and flawless. Even the most discerning ear couldn’t detect any flaws in it.
1551. The raps then ceased, and the bells rang violently for several minutes. A bell was then pressed on my foot, my ankle, and my knee. This was at different times repeated. Knocks were made most vehemently against the underside of the table, so that a large tin candlestick was, by every blow, raised completely from the table by the concussion.
1551. The knocking stopped, and the bells rang loudly for several minutes. A bell was pressed against my foot, ankle, and knee. This was repeated at different times. There were loud knocks against the underside of the table, causing a large tin candlestick to lift completely off the table with each impact.
1552. I afterward examined the underside of the table, (which, it will310 be recollected, was of cherry,) and found indentations in the wood, made by the end of the handle of the bell, which was tipped with brass. Could electricity make those violent knocks with the handle of the bell, causing indentations and raising the candlestick from the table at every blow? Or was it done by the same invisible power that riveted the table to the floor and again raised it, with all the weight upon it, entirely above the floor?
1552. I later looked at the underside of the table, (which, as you might remember, was made of cherry wood,) and saw indentations in the wood created by the end of the bell’s handle, which had a brass tip. Could electricity create those loud knocks with the bell’s handle, making indentations and lifting the candlestick off the table with every hit? Or was it caused by the same unseen force that glued the table to the floor and then lifted it, along with everything on it, completely off the ground?
1554. I was then directed to put the guitar on the drawer. We were all seated as before, with our hands and arms resting on the table. The guitar was touched softly and gently, and gave forth sweet and delicious sounds, like the accompaniment to a beautiful and exquisite piece of music. It then played a sort of symphony, in much louder and bolder tones. And, as it played, these harmonious sounds becoming soft, and sweet, and low, began to recede, and grew fainter and fainter, till they died away on the ear in the distance. Then they returned and grew louder and nearer, till they were heard again in full and gushing volume, as when they commenced. I am utterly incapable of giving any adequate idea of the beauty and harmony of this music. I have heard the guitar touched by the most delicate and scientific hands, and heard from it, under such guidance, the most splendid performances. But never did I hear any thing that fastened upon the very soul like these prophetic strains drawn out by an invisible hand from the spirit-world. While listening to it, I was ready to exclaim, in the language of the Bard of Avon—
1554. I was then instructed to place the guitar on the drawer. We were all sitting as before, with our hands and arms resting on the table. The guitar was played softly and gently, producing sweet and lovely sounds, like the background to a beautiful and exquisite piece of music. It then played a kind of symphony, with much louder and bolder tones. As it played, these harmonious sounds became soft, sweet, and low, starting to fade away until they vanished into the distance. Then they returned, growing louder and closer, until they came back in full and vibrant volume, just as they had begun. I am completely unable to convey the beauty and harmony of this music. I have heard the guitar played by the most skilled and delicate hands and experienced magnificent performances under such talent. But I’ve never heard anything that touched the soul like these prophetic melodies drawn out by an unseen hand from the spirit world. While listening to it, I felt compelled to exclaim, in the words of the Bard of Avon—
John C. Calhoun.”
John C. Calhoun.
1559. We were directed to place the Bible on a drawer under the table. I placed it there, completely closed. It was a small pocket Bible, with very fine print. Numerous raps were then heard, beating time to “Hail Columbia,” which had been called for. Soon the sounds began to recede, and grew fainter and fainter, till, like the music of the guitar, they died away in the distance. The alphabet was then called for, and it was spelled out, “Look.” I looked on the drawer and found the Bible open. I took it up and carefully kept it open at the place as I found it. On bringing311 it to the light, I found it open at St. John’s Gospel, chapter ii. being on the left side, and chapter iii. being on the right side. I said, “Do you wish us to look at chapter ii.?” A. “No.” “Do you wish us to look at chapter iii.?” A. “Yes.” And it was then said, “Read.” I commenced reading the chapter, and significant and emphatic raps were given at many verses; and at verses 8, 11, 19, 34, most vehement raps were given. By looking at these verses, you will appreciate the significancy and intelligence of this emphatic demonstration. This manifestation purported to come from Calhoun, who had previously invited us three gentlemen to be present at a particular hour.
1559. We were instructed to place the Bible in a drawer under the table. I set it there, completely closed. It was a small pocket Bible with very tiny print. Then we heard a series of knocks in rhythm with “Hail Columbia,” which had been requested. Soon the sounds began to fade away, becoming softer and softer, until, like the music from a guitar, they disappeared into the distance. The alphabet was then called for, and it spelled out, “Look.” I looked in the drawer and saw the Bible open. I picked it up and carefully kept it open at the page I found. When I brought311 it to the light, I found it open to St. John’s Gospel, chapter ii. on the left side, and chapter iii. on the right side. I asked, “Do you want us to look at chapter ii.?” A. “No.” “Do you want us to look at chapter iii.?” A. “Yes.” Then it was said, “Read.” I started reading the chapter, and there were significant and strong knocks on many verses; and at verses 8, 11, 19, 34, especially forceful knocks were given. By looking at these verses, you will understand the significance and intelligence of this strong demonstration. This demonstration was said to come from Calhoun, who had previously invited us three gentlemen to be present at a specific time.
1560. In reflecting on the preceding manifestations, one cannot but marvel at the power by which they are made, and the intelligence by which that power is directed. And it would seem impossible for one to doubt the source of that intelligence. If, however, doubt should still remain on the mind of any one acquainted with similar manifestations, that doubt must be entirely dispelled by the account of the manifestation which follows:
1560. Looking back on the previous occurrences, it’s hard not to be amazed by the force behind them and the intelligence guiding that force. It seems impossible for anyone to question where that intelligence comes from. However, if there is still any doubt in the mind of someone familiar with similar events, that doubt should be completely cleared up by the account of the manifestation that follows:
1561. I was present, by Calhoun’s appointment, with the Misses Fox and their mother. We were seated at the table as heretofore, our hands and arms resting upon it. I was directed to put paper and pencil on the drawer. I placed several sheets of unruled letter-paper, together with a wood pencil, on it. I soon heard the sound of the pencil on the paper. It was then rapped out, “Get the pencil and sharpen it.” I looked under the table, but did not see the pencil. At length I found it lying diagonally from me, three or four feet from the table. The lead was broken off within the wood. I sharpened it, and again put it on the drawer. Again I heard the sound of the pencil on the paper. On being directed to look at the paper, I discovered pencil marks on each side of the outer sheet, but no writing. Then was received the following communication:
1561. I was there, as Calhoun had arranged, with the Misses Fox and their mother. We were seated at the table as before, our hands and arms resting on it. I was told to put paper and a pencil in the drawer. I placed several sheets of plain letter-paper and a wooden pencil on it. Soon, I heard the sound of the pencil on the paper. It was then instructed, “Get the pencil and sharpen it.” I looked under the table but couldn’t find the pencil. Finally, I spotted it lying diagonally from me, three or four feet away from the table. The lead was broken inside the wood. I sharpened it and placed it back on the drawer. Again, I heard the sound of the pencil on the paper. When I was directed to look at the paper, I saw pencil marks on both sides of the outer sheet, but no actual writing. Then I received the following communication:
John C. Calhoun.”
John C. Calhoun.”
1565. I soon heard a rapid movement of the pencil on the paper, and a rustling of the paper, together with a movement of the drawer. I was then directed to look under the drawer. I looked, and found my pencil outside of the drawer, near my feet, but found no paper on the drawer where I placed it. On raising up the drawer, I discovered the paper all312 under it. The sheets were a little deranged, and on examining, I found on the outside sheet these words: “I’m with you still.”
1565. I soon heard a quick movement of the pencil on the paper, along with the rustling of the paper and some shuffling of the drawer. I was then told to look under the drawer. I looked and found my pencil outside of the drawer, near my feet, but there was no paper on top of the drawer where I had left it. When I lifted the drawer, I discovered all the paper underneath it. The sheets were a bit messy, and upon examining them, I found on the top sheet these words: “I’m with you still.”
1566. I afterward showed the “sentence” to General James Hamilton, former Governor of South Carolina, General Waddy Thompson, former Minister to Mexico, General Robert B. Campbell, late Consul at Havana, together with other intimate friends of Calhoun, and also to one of his sons, all of whom are as well acquainted with his handwriting as their own; and they all pronounced it to be a perfect fac simile of the handwriting of John C. Calhoun.
1566. Later, I showed the “sentence” to General James Hamilton, the former Governor of South Carolina, General Waddy Thompson, a former Minister to Mexico, General Robert B. Campbell, the recent Consul in Havana, along with other close friends of Calhoun, and one of his sons. All of them know his handwriting as well as they know their own, and they all agreed it was a perfect fac simile of the handwriting of John C. Calhoun.
1569. How significant, then, does this fact become! We have not only the most unequivocal testimony to the handwriting itself, but, lest any skeptic should suggest the possibility of an imitation or a counterfeit, this abbreviation, peculiar to himself, and known only to his most intimate friends, and which no imitator or counterfeiter could know, is introduced by way of putting such a suggestion to flight forever.
1569. How important does this fact become! We have not only the clearest evidence of the handwriting itself, but, to prevent any skeptics from suggesting that it could be a fake or a forgery, this abbreviation, unique to him and known only to his closest friends, is included to dismiss such suggestions once and for all.
1570. This “sentence” is perfectly characteristic of Calhoun. It contains his terseness of style, and his condensation of thought. It is a text from which volumes might be written. It proves—1. The immortality of the soul; 2. The power of spirits to revisit the earth; 3. Their ability to communicate with relatives and friends; and, 4. The identity of the spirit to all eternity.
1570. This "statement" is a perfect example of Calhoun. It reflects his concise style and condensed thinking. It's a passage from which entire books could be created. It demonstrates—1. The immortality of the soul; 2. The ability of spirits to return to earth; 3. Their capacity to communicate with family and friends; and, 4. The essence of the spirit remains the same for all time.
Very truly yours, N. P. Tallmadge.
Mrs. Sarah Helen Whitman, Providence, R. I.
Best regards, N. P. Tallmadge.
Ms. Sarah Helen Whitman, Providence, R. I.
Letter from Mr. D. H. Hume.—Spiritualism in London.
1572. The author of the letter which comes under this head has already been introduced to the readers of this work, in giving an account of the manifestations observed through his mediumship, (393.)
1572. The writer of the letter mentioned here has already been introduced to the readers of this work when discussing the phenomena observed through his mediumship, (393.)
Ealing Villa, near London, July 26, 1855.
Ealing Villa, close to London, July 26, 1855.
1573. * * * In London I found but a limited number, comparatively speaking, who possess any intelligent or rational idea of the spiritual313 philosophy. The subject has not made any great advance here; but those who are investigating include in their number some of the best minds of England. The first call I received was from Sir Charles E. Ischam, who has proved a most excellent friend to me. A day or two after this I received an invitation from Sir Edward Bulwer Lytton to visit him at his country-seat at Knebworth. I accepted his invitation, and had an interesting and delightful visit.
1573. * * * In London, I found only a small number of people who have a clear or rational understanding of spiritual313 philosophy. The topic hasn't made much progress here, but among those exploring it are some of the brightest minds in England. The first person to reach out to me was Sir Charles E. Ischam, who has been a fantastic friend. A day or two later, I received an invitation from Sir Edward Bulwer Lytton to visit him at his country home in Knebworth. I accepted the invitation, and I had an interesting and enjoyable visit.
1574. I was deeply interested in Sir Edward, who is, by birth, education, and mind, a most superior person. His love of the beautiful, in nature and art, but especially in nature, is manifested at every part of his wide domain. Knebworth was originally built by a follower of the Conqueror, and was, in the year of the Armada, occupied by Queen Elizabeth. The state-room contains the bed upon which her majesty slept. It has rich velvet hangings—the same which shaded the slumbers of Queen Bess. The room of the extensive library contains the oak table at which Cromwell, Pym & Co. sat while planning the rebellion. * * * We had some manifestations at our seances almost as good as those we had at-—- ‘s in your place. The spirits showed their presence in the same palpable way, by presenting tangible hands, shaking hands, &c., and Sir Edward “acknowledges the corn,” to use a Yankee vulgarism. He is much interested in the subject, and has bestowed no small share of thought upon the matter.
1574. I was really interested in Sir Edward, who is, by background, education, and intellect, a truly exceptional person. His appreciation for beauty, in both nature and art—especially nature—is evident throughout his vast estate. Knebworth was originally built by a supporter of the Conqueror and was occupied by Queen Elizabeth during the year of the Armada. The state room features the bed where her majesty slept, complete with rich velvet hangings—the same ones that shaded Queen Bess during her rest. The large library holds the oak table where Cromwell, Pym, and others gathered while planning the rebellion. * * * We had some impressive experiences at our seances that were almost as good as those we had at—-‘s place. The spirits made their presence known in similar, tangible ways, by showing their hands, shaking hands, etc., and Sir Edward “acknowledges the corn,” to use a bit of American slang. He is very interested in the topic and has thought about it quite a bit.
1575. I have also had the pleasure of being presented to the Marchioness of H-—-s, Baroness G-—-y R-—-n. She is a highly intellectual and altogether charming lady, who possesses much native refinement and a fearless desire to learn and follow the TRUTH. I met, too, the Earl of E-—-e and the Marquis of C-—-e, at one of our circles a few evenings since. A most kind friend I also found in the Vicomte de St. Amirro, Chargé d’Affaires from Brazil, who has given me valuable letters to France. I am to meet him and his lady (both investigators) the coming autumn at the Neapolitan court.
1575. I have also had the pleasure of being introduced to the Marchioness of H-—-s, Baroness G-—-y R-—-n. She is a very intelligent and completely charming woman, who has a natural grace and a strong desire to learn and pursue the TRUTH. I also met the Earl of E-—-e and the Marquis of C-—-e at one of our gatherings a few nights ago. I found a very kind friend in the Vicomte de St. Amirro, Chargé d’Affaires from Brazil, who has given me helpful letters to France. I’m set to meet him and his wife (both researchers) this coming autumn at the Neapolitan court.
1576. I enclose a paragraph from one of the London journals, giving a sketch of an interview I had with Lord Brougham and Sir David Brewster. The latter, as you are well aware, wrote that article in the Edinburgh Review, some months ago, in which he argued against the existence of spirit agency in the production of the manifestations, and in which he denounced the whole matter, in the bitterest terms, as a delusion and an imposition. His article has been eagerly and widely quoted by the opponents of Spiritualism on both sides of the Atlantic, and its statements are doubtless believed by those who are incapable of appreciating or comprehending the truths which they assail.
1576. I'm sharing a paragraph from one of the London journals, summarizing an interview I had with Lord Brougham and Sir David Brewster. As you know, Brewster wrote that article in the Edinburgh Review a few months ago, where he argued against the idea of spirit agency in the manifestations and harshly criticized the whole subject as a delusion and a scam. His article has been widely quoted by opponents of Spiritualism on both sides of the Atlantic, and its claims are surely believed by those who can't appreciate or understand the truths they attack.
1577. Sir David, however, has for once met with a “stumper,” for he has seen and felt such manifestations of his spirit friends as to completely upset his philosophy. He frankly confessed that he is “sorely puzzled”314 at what he has witnessed, and Lord Brougham acknowledges himself to be thoroughly nonplussed. Both of these noted men brought the whole force of their keen discernment to bear upon the solution of the phenomena; but the presence of substantial, actual hands, and the demonstrative strength of the spirits who thus clothed themselves for the time and moved material objects about the room, proved to be too much of a question for them to master.
1577. Sir David, however, has for once encountered a “stumper,” as he has seen and felt such displays of his spirit friends that it completely challenged his beliefs. He openly admitted that he is “sorely puzzled”314 by what he has experienced, and Lord Brougham confessed he is completely baffled. Both of these prominent figures applied their sharp insights to solve the phenomena; however, the presence of real, tangible hands, and the undeniable strength of the spirits who manifested in that moment and interacted with physical objects in the room, proved to be too great a mystery for them to comprehend.
1578. Time will not allow me to mention the various interesting sittings I have had, nor the many distinguished personages who have been in our circles during my short stay in London. I am at present enjoying the quiet of an English country home. The gentleman with whom I am stopping (Mr. Rymer) is one of the most distinguished solicitors in London. He has been a materialist, or disbeliever in a future state, all his life previous to witnessing these demonstrations of spirit existence. He is now a believer (or rather a knower) of the future life. The manifestations, so often scoffed at by professing Christians, have done for him, as they have for upward of twenty-five thousand infidels and atheists in America, what no power of the pulpit or doctrine of evangelical religion could ever have effected.
1578. I don’t have enough time to talk about all the fascinating sessions I’ve experienced or the many notable people I've met during my brief time in London. Right now, I'm enjoying the peace of an English country home. The gentleman I'm staying with (Mr. Rymer) is one of the top solicitors in London. He spent his life as a materialist, or a nonbeliever in an afterlife, until he witnessed these demonstrations of spiritual existence. Now, he’s a believer (or rather a knower) of the afterlife. The manifestations, often mocked by self-proclaimed Christians, have changed his perspective, just like they have for over twenty-five thousand skeptics and atheists in America, in ways that no sermon or doctrine of evangelical religion could ever achieve.
1579. Is not this one fact alone a sufficient reply to the oft-repeated question of “What good does it all do?” There is many a broad-loving soul that, failing in the effort to narrow itself down to the limits of a dogmatical creed, has ended in infidelity or blank atheism; but the number of these is becoming steadily less by the influence of the spirit manifestations, which are to them what the placing of the hand in the spear-wound was to Thomas. Mr. R., since his conversion, has given a lecture on the subject, and will give another.
1579. Isn't this one fact enough to answer the frequently asked question, “What good does it all do?” There are many open-minded people who, unable to limit themselves to a strict dogmatic belief, have fallen into disbelief or complete atheism; however, the number of these individuals is steadily decreasing due to the influence of spirit manifestations, which serve for them like putting a hand in the wound for Thomas. Mr. R., since his conversion, has given one lecture on the subject and will be giving another.
1580. One thing I will not omit. Mrs. Trollope, whom Americans will be apt to remember, came, with her son, from Florence to London for the express purpose of seeing the manifestations. They were accordingly invited to spend a few days with me at my village home; and, I must say, I was agreeably disappointed in her. My previous ideas of her had not been such as to prepossess me in her favour, but I have become an admirer of her private character. She has none of the stiffness of the author about her, nor any of the “blue-stocking.” She enjoys the realities of existence more fully than any one I have ever met in a circle.
1580. One thing I won't leave out. Mrs. Trollope, whom many Americans might remember, came to London from Florence with her son just to see the phenomena. They were invited to stay with me for a few days at my village home, and I have to say, I was pleasantly surprised by her. My earlier impressions of her weren't very favorable, but I've come to admire her as a person. She doesn’t have the stiffness you might expect from an author, nor does she fit into the "blue-stocking" stereotype. She appreciates the realities of life more than anyone I've ever met in this circle.
1581. The seance with her was one of strange interest. Her son was an unbeliever, and his mother was very desirous that he should be “brought to a knowledge of the truth.” When at length the light did beam upon his soul, and the chords of his spirit vibrated in unison with the celestial harmonies that ushered in the birth of faith through the shadows of his old unbelief, the result was too much for his stoicism, and the tears of holy joy coursed down his manly cheeks. Her joy was too great for utterance, and her rapturous emotions seemingly too great to be315 endured. It was an impressive scene, and an occasion of deep interest. There are many such in the life of a spirit medium.
1581. The seance with her was oddly fascinating. Her son didn't believe, and she desperately wanted him to be "brought to a knowledge of the truth." When the light finally did shine upon his soul, and the chords of his spirit resonated with the celestial harmonies ushering in the birth of faith, breaking through the shadows of his old disbelief, it overwhelmed his stoicism, and tears of holy joy streamed down his strong cheeks. Her joy was too immense for words, and her rapturous emotions seemed too great to be315 endured. It was a powerful scene and a moment of deep significance. There are many such moments in the life of a spirit medium.
Yours truly, D. H. Hume.
Best regards, D. H. Hume.
The following is the article referred to as having appeared in the London Journal:
The following is the article that was said to have been published in the London Journal:
Lord Brougham with the Spirits.
1583. “A circumstance which has excited the most extraordinary sensation among the privileged few who have been admitted within the sphere of its operations, has taken place at Ealing, a village on the Uxbridge road. A young gentleman, named Hume, a native of Scotland, but who has resided for many years in America, is now on a visit at the house of Mr. Rymer, a highly respectable solicitor. Mr. Hume is what the Americans term a ‘medium,’ and through his instrumentality some extraordinary and, if true, miraculous, occurrences have taken place.
1583. “An event that has stirred up an incredible buzz among the select few allowed to experience it has occurred in Ealing, a village along the Uxbridge road. A young man named Hume, originally from Scotland but having lived in America for many years, is currently visiting the home of Mr. Rymer, a well-respected lawyer. Mr. Hume is what Americans call a ‘medium,’ and through his abilities, some remarkable and, if genuine, miraculous events have happened.
1584. “The spirits of deceased persons have been heard and felt in Mr. Rymer’s house, and a variety of circumstances have taken place, which the persons who were present affirm could not have been produced except by supernatural agency. One of the spirits is supposed to be that of a son of Mr. Rymer, a little boy about eleven or twelve years of age, who has been induced to write to his parents under the cover of the table, and the writing is, to all appearances, precisely similar to that of the child when alive. Mr. Rymer, who is thoroughly convinced of the bonâ fides of the affair, has invited several persons to witness the manifestations, and among them the Rev. Mr. Lambert, the incumbent, who has become a devout believer in the existence of these communicative spirits.
1584. “The spirits of deceased individuals have been heard and felt in Mr. Rymer’s house, and a variety of events have occurred that those present insist could only have been caused by supernatural forces. One of the spirits is believed to be that of Mr. Rymer's son, a young boy around eleven or twelve years old, who has reportedly been compelled to write to his parents from underneath the table, and the writing appears to be exactly like the child’s when he was alive. Mr. Rymer, who is completely convinced of the authenticity of this situation, has invited several people to observe the phenomena, including the Rev. Mr. Lambert, the local minister, who has become a devoted believer in the existence of these communicating spirits.
1585. “Some rumours of the spirit manifestations having reached Lord Brougham, the medium had an interview with the noble and learned lord in the presence of Sir David Brewster, when several unaccountable revelations were made, and even Lord Brougham has confessed himself amazed and sorely bothered to comprehend the description of agency by which an accordeon is forced into his hands and made to play, or his watch taken out of his pocket and found in the hands of some other persons in the room; for such are among the vagaries performed by the Ealing spirits. The house of Mr. Rymer is, of course, besieged by persons anxious to witness the manifestations, and scarcely a night passes that some scoffer is not converted into a true believer in the mystery of spiritual manifestations.”
1585. “Some rumors about spirit manifestations reached Lord Brougham, so the medium had a meeting with the noble and learned lord in front of Sir David Brewster, during which several strange revelations occurred. Even Lord Brougham has admitted he was astonished and quite puzzled trying to understand how an accordion was forced into his hands and played, or how his watch was taken out of his pocket and found in the hands of others in the room; these are some of the odd things done by the Ealing spirits. Mr. Rymer's house is, of course, overwhelmed with people eager to see the manifestations, and hardly a night goes by without some skeptic being turned into a true believer in the mystery of spiritual manifestations.”
Evidence afforded by the Rev. J. B. Ferguson.
1589. “First. I have seen tables and other furniture moved, with and without hands; heard distinct and sometimes loud raps on the ceiling, floor, and furniture of various rooms, which were changed from one locality to another, as doubts arose as to any unobserved causes, to which we would have attributed them but for the transition; have heard them upon my person, clothing, pillow, pulpit, and still have them in almost every serious hour of thought and meditation, and have them near me as I write; and I find this experience to be that of hundreds who, with me and others, believers and skeptics, have witnessed or realized all I here state to be true.
1589. “First. I have seen tables and other furniture moved, both with and without hands; heard clear and sometimes loud knocks on the ceiling, floor, and furniture in various rooms, which shifted from one place to another, as doubts arose about any unexplained causes, to which we would have attributed them if not for the change; have felt them near me, on my clothing, pillow, pulpit, and I still experience this in almost every serious moment of thought and reflection, and they are close to me as I write; and I find that this experience is shared by hundreds who, along with me and others, believers and skeptics, have witnessed or recognized everything I state here as true.
1590. “Second. I have heard, in the presence of scores, whose names are at any man’s command who may desire them for an honest reference, native Americans, who never spoke a word of German, discourse for hours in that tongue, in prose and poetry, in the presence of native Germans, who pronounced their addresses pure specimens of the power of their language. I see, daily, lengthy essays and books written under what claims to be spirit intelligence, above, far above, the capacity and culture of the instruments through whom they are written. There is scarcely a day in which I do not receive such communications; and if a day passes without it, it is my neglect, not that of the intelligence, that seems ever ready to speak when a proper medium can be secured. At home and abroad, in the houses of strangers and acquaintances, such mediums have described the age, appearance, time of death, and the peculiarities of character of the deceased relatives of persons present, and where they could have had no acquaintance with them, and, in many instances, could not have known of their existence or death. I have had meetings of mediums who knew nothing of each other occur at my house and elsewhere, without their knowledge, and to which they were brought from a distance of miles, and which seemed as inexplicable to them as to me, until after some effect for their benefit was secured by their meeting, and explained by their spirit monitors. To prove the identity of spirit intelligences, communicating to me through others, they have detailed private conversations held with me317 during their earth life; referred to incidents and events of which the mediums could have known nothing; described, accurately, occurrences taking place at a distance of hundreds of miles; answered questions that had been written in my private records for future investigation, months after they had passed from my active memory; stated the state of my investigations of various subjects, with the folly or wisdom, as they regarded it, of my difficulties; leaving me, on the whole, no choice as to whether I would regard them as what they claimed to be, save that of honest conviction or the most shameless hypocrisy. Allow me to say, therefore, that there is no event of history, no fact in mental philosophy, no conclusions in logical dialectics, more fully and forcibly established, in my convictions, than the following:
1590. “Second. I have heard, in front of many people, whose names can easily be provided for anyone needing a reliable reference, Native Americans, who never spoke a word of German, discuss for hours in that language, both in prose and poetry, in front of native Germans, who regarded their speeches as true examples of the strength of their language. I see, daily, extensive essays and books written under what is said to be spirit intelligence, far exceeding the abilities and knowledge of the individuals through whom they are produced. There is hardly a day that goes by without me receiving such messages; and if a day does go by without one, it’s my oversight, not the intelligence’s, which always seems ready to communicate when a suitable medium is available. Whether at home or abroad, in the homes of strangers or friends, such mediums have described the age, appearance, time of death, and unique traits of the deceased relatives of those present, and they did so without having any prior acquaintance with them and, in many cases, without even knowing they existed or had died. I’ve had gatherings of mediums who were unaware of one another take place at my home and elsewhere, without their knowledge, and they were brought in from miles away, leaving both them and me puzzled until something beneficial for them occurred through their meeting, later clarified by their spirit guides. To prove the identities of the spirit intelligences communicating with me through others, they have recounted private conversations we had during their earthly lives; pointed to incidents and events the mediums could have had no knowledge of; accurately described occurrences happening hundreds of miles away; answered questions that I had written in my private records for future review, months after those memories had faded; and stated the status of my investigations into various topics, whether they saw my challenges as foolish or wise, giving me, overall, no option but to accept them as what they claimed to be, aside from my honest belief or the most blatant deceit. Therefore, let me state that there is no historical event, no fact in mental philosophy, no conclusions in logical reasoning that I find more firmly and powerfully established in my beliefs than the following:
1592. “You will not be surprised, therefore, at my willingness to risk reputation, the dearest ties of friendship, and prospects of earthly gain and honour, if need be, in the avowal and propagation of this faith, and the results to which it must inevitably lead. God knows, and every intimate friend on earth knows, that I would hesitate, long and seriously, to avow a faith that was doubtful in my own mind, or of doubtful influence for good in my dim foresight, where so much is apparently at stake. I think I may safely appeal to my past life as proof that the dearest personal and earthly considerations have often been sacrificed, where it was thought my action would affect the interests or happiness of others. Know, then, that it is from the maturest consideration of duty, and the obligation that every man owes to truth and right, and especially when truth and right are ridiculed and denounced, that I detail to you these results of a long experience and the most serious and solemn investigations of my life. Willingly, I cannot find it in my heart to disappoint a friend or injure an enemy. And with such friends as in the providence of God have surrounded me, who have proved themselves true and enduring when every form of bigotry and animosity were aroused against my position, reputation, and influence,—with all this pressure of enmity and friendship upon me, you must know, and all will hereafter know, that nothing but loyalty to conviction and a desire to preserve privileges I have learned to esteem above what men call life or death, could induce me to lay these facts before the world.
1592. “You won’t be surprised, then, at my willingness to risk my reputation, my closest friendships, and the chances of earthly success and honor, if necessary, in expressing and spreading this belief, and the consequences it will inevitably bring. God knows, and every close friend knows, that I would think long and hard before declaring a belief that I was unsure about or that might not have a positive impact, especially when so much seems to be at stake. I believe I can confidently point to my past as evidence that I have often sacrificed my most cherished personal and worldly interests when I thought my actions would benefit others’ well-being or happiness. So, know that it is from careful consideration of duty and the obligation every person has to truth and what is right—especially when truth and right are mocked and condemned—that I share with you the results of a long experience and the most serious and profound investigations of my life. I cannot bring myself to disappoint a friend or harm an enemy. And with the friends that God’s providence has placed around me, who have shown themselves to be true and steadfast when bigotry and hostility were stirred up against my beliefs, reputation, and influence—given all this pressure from both enmity and friendship, you must understand, and all will eventually understand, that only my loyalty to my convictions and my desire to preserve the privileges I have come to value more than what people call life or death could drive me to present these facts to the world.”
1593. “If it be asked what good we expect to effect by the statement of these facts, we answer, the spread of truth upon the dearest, purest, and holiest relations of man, and the breaking away of the clouds that gather around the mind of man in view of death and futurity, the darkness of which can nowhere be more distinctly felt than in the asking of suc318h a question. The purity, angelic loveliness, and divine holiness that such a faith, if firmly based, must secure, inspires the loyal soul as with heavenly beatitudes in the contemplation. Its power to restrain and reform; to soften the hard heart of evil indulgence; to expose the still harder heart of bigotry and religious denunciation; to moisten the eye of criminal effrontery, which the hypocrisies of the world have made stern and fixed; to bring the strong man of selfish apathy, as a child once more in company with his brother-children, at the feet of maternal or sisterly tenderness, whose earthly bodies have long since been entombed; to keep down the unnatural separations of families beneath the manly wisdom and fatherly affection of one who claims all as his, and still needing his care; to turn the scoff of godless ribaldry into loving faith, and the shame of pulpit curses pronounced upon human brethren and by human beings, of eternal doom, into blessings of eternal help; to make all, yes all, realize an inner religion, which worships at the altar of eternal truth and unchangeable love. With such aims and prospects before us, to ask what is the good of general, tangible spirit intercourse, is to ask the good of immortality, of heaven, and of God.”
1593. “If someone asks what benefits we hope to gain from sharing these facts, we say it's about spreading truth in the most cherished, purest, and holiest aspects of human relationships. It aims to lift the mists that cloud our thoughts about death and what comes after, where the weight of such uncertainties is felt more acutely than when confronting such questions. The purity, beauty, and divine holiness that a firmly held faith can provide fills the faithful soul with a sense of heavenly joy while contemplating these ideas. Its ability to restrain and reform, soften the hardened heart of indulgence in wrongdoing, expose the even tougher heart of bigotry and religious condemnation, moisten the eye of those hardened by the world’s hypocrisy, and bring the man who is callously indifferent back to a place of childlike wonder at the feet of tender maternal or sisterly love—love that has long been buried—can help heal the unnatural rifts within families under the wise and loving guidance of one who sees everyone as his own and still needs to care for them. It can transform the mockery of those without faith into loving belief, and the shame of sermons condemning our fellow humans to eternal damnation into blessings of everlasting support; it encourages everyone to recognize an inner spirituality that worships at the altar of eternal truth and unchanging love. With such goals and possibilities in front of us, to question the value of connection through spirit is essentially to question the value of immortality, heaven, and God.”
An Exposition of views respecting the principal facts, causes, and peculiarities involved in Spiritual Manifestations; together with interesting phenomenal statements and communications. By Adin Ballou.
1594. The preceding is the title of a work by the Rev. Adin Ballou, of Hopedale, Massachusetts. It is among those which give what appears to me available, well-considered facts and opinions respecting Spiritualism. Mr. Ballou judiciously, as I think, disposes the spirit manifestations under the following heads:
1595. “I. Those in which all the important demonstrations were most evidently caused by departed spirits. II. Those in which some of the important demonstrations were probably caused or greatly affected by undeparted spirits. III. Those in which the demonstrations were of a heterogeneous, incongruous, or derogatory character.
1598. “I will not go into minute narration or description, but simply mention the more important phenomena I have witnessed. I have heard multiform sounds in the presence of spirit media, purporting to be made by departed spirits; some like the tickings of a small watch, others like the clicking of a common clock, others like the loud knocking of a labouring man on the door of his neighbour with his knuckles, others like the319 scratching of a hard finger-nail on a board, others like the creaking of a door or window, &c. &c. I have heard the time and metre of tunes beaten out with the utmost accuracy, and by several rappers in unison—not only while the tune was being played or sung, but afterward, without accompaniment. And I am as certain that these sounds were not made by any conscious mortal agency, as I am of the best-authenticated facts in the common transactions of life.
1598. “I won’t go into detailed storytelling or descriptions, but I’ll just mention the key experiences I’ve had. I’ve heard various sounds in the presence of spirit mediums, claiming to be produced by deceased spirits; some sounded like the ticking of a small watch, others like the clicking of a regular clock, some like a loud knock from a worker on a neighbor's door with his knuckles, and others like the scratching of a hard fingernail on a board, or the creaking of a door or window, etc. I’ve heard rhythms and melodies tapped out with perfect accuracy, by several rappers at once—not only while the tune was being played or sung, but also afterward, without any music. And I am just as sure that these sounds weren’t created by any conscious human effort, as I am of the best-documented facts in everyday life.”
1599. “I have seen tables and light stands of various size moved about in the most astonishing manner, by what purported to be the same invisible agency, with only the gentle and passive resting of the hands or finger-ends of the medium on one of their edges; also, many distinct movings of such objects, by request, without the touch of the medium at all. I have sat and conversed by the hour together with the authors of these sounds and motions, by means of signals first agreed on; asking questions and obtaining answers—receiving communications spelled out by the alphabet—discussing propositions sometimes made by them to me, and vice versâ; all by a slow process, indeed, but with every possible demonstration of intelligence, though not without incidental misapprehensions and mistakes. I have witnessed the asking of mental questions by inquirers, who received as prompt and correct answers as when the questions were asked audibly to the cognition of the medium.
1599. “I have seen tables and light stands of different sizes move in the most incredible way, as if by some unseen force, with just the light and passive touch of the medium's hands or fingertips on one of their edges. I've also witnessed many clear movements of these objects, upon request, without any contact from the medium at all. I've sat and talked for hours with the sources of these sounds and movements, using signals we had previously agreed on; asking questions and getting answers—receiving messages spelled out with the alphabet—discussing ideas sometimes proposed by them to me, and vice versa; all through a slow process, indeed, but with every possible indication of intelligence, despite some occasional misunderstandings and errors. I've seen people ask mental questions and get back quick and accurate answers just as if the questions were spoken aloud for the medium to hear.”
1600. “I have known these invisibles, by request, to write their names with a common plumbago pencil on a clean sheet of paper—half a dozen of them, each in a different hand. To make sure of this, as an absolute fact, the medium was required to lay her left hand, back downward, in the hollow of a veracious person’s hand, both open; when a piece of pasteboard paper was laid on her hand, a well-examined blank sheet of writing-paper placed thereon, and a lead pencil on top of that; in which position (the medium’s right hand being held up to view,) both the hands, with these fixtures resting on them, were placed under the leaf of the table, as insisted on by the writers. After a minute or two, at a given signal by the spirits that they had done, the paper was exhibited with various names written thereon, as above affirmed. This was repeatedly tested with the same results, under circumstances putting all suspicion of fraud and jugglery entirely at rest.
1600. “I've seen these spirits, at their request, write their names with a regular pencil on a clean sheet of paper—about six of them, each in a different handwriting. To confirm this as a definite fact, the medium had to place her left hand, palm down, in the palm of a trustworthy person's hand, both hands open. Then, a piece of cardboard was laid on her hand, a well-examined blank sheet of writing paper was placed on top of it, and a pencil was put on top of that; in this position (while the medium’s right hand was held up for everyone to see), both hands, with these items resting on them, were placed under the table's surface, as insisted by the writers. After a minute or two, at a given signal from the spirits that they were finished, the paper was shown with various names written on it, as stated before. This was tested repeatedly with the same results, under conditions that eliminated any suspicion of fraud or trickery.”
1601. “I have requested what purported to be the spirit of a friend, many years deceased, to go to a particular place, several miles distant from that of the sitting, and to bring me back intelligence respecting the then health and doings of a certain relative well known to the parties. In three minutes of time the intelligence was obtained, numerous particulars given, some of them rather improbable, but every one exactly confirmed the next day by personal inquiries made for that purpose.
1601. “I asked what claimed to be the spirit of a friend who passed away many years ago to go to a specific location, several miles away from the sitting, and bring me back information about the health and activities of a certain relative well known to everyone involved. In just three minutes, the information was gathered, with many details provided—some of which seemed unlikely—but every single detail was confirmed the next day through personal inquiries made for that purpose.
1602. “I have been requested by the invisibles to speak on a particular subject, at a given time and place, with the assurance that responses should320 be made on the occasion, by knockings, approving the truths uttered; all which was strikingly verified. Once, at a most unexpected interview, when nothing of the kind had been previously thought of by any person present, a spirit, so purporting, who had several times evinced much interest in my public labours, spelled out:—‘Have you selected your subjects of discourse for the next Sunday?’ Only one of them, I answered. Would my spirit friend like to suggest a text for the other part of the day? ‘Yes.’ What is it? I inquired. He spelled out the word ‘The,’ and ceased. Wondering at his silence, the signal of another spirit was given. The new-comer communicated by movings of the table, not by raps, like the other. He said that our friend, the rapper, had been suddenly summoned away for a few moments, but would certainly return soon. He did return within fifteen minutes, resumed his communication just where he left it, and spelled out—‘The second chapter of first Corinthians, the twelfth and thirteenth verses.’ No man in the room had the least recollection of the words referred to. So the Bible was called for, when the text proved to be the following:—‘Now we have received, not the spirit of the world, but the spirit which is of God, that we might know the things that are given to us of God. Which things we also speak, not in the words which man’s wisdom teacheth, but which the Holy Ghost teacheth; comparing spiritual things with spiritual.’ Struck with the sublimity, purity, richness, and force of the passage, I answered that I accepted it thankfully, as a very appropriate text for the occasion referred to, and would endeavour to illustrate its great truths as well as I might be able. My spirit friend expressed great pleasure by sounds rapidly made on the table, and announced that he and several other sympathizing spirits should be present to hear the discourse, and, if the medium should also be there, would manifest their approbation of the good things uttered. All this was verified in a remarkable manner.
1602. "I've been asked by the invisibles to speak on a specific topic, at a certain time and place, with the assurance that responses will be given through knocks, affirming the truths spoken; all of which was strikingly confirmed. Once, during an unexpected meeting, when no one had previously thought of anything like this, a spirit, who had shown a lot of interest in my public efforts, spelled out: ‘Have you chosen your topics for next Sunday?’ I replied that I had selected one of them. Would my spirit friend like to suggest a topic for the other part of the day? ‘Yes.’ What is it? I asked. He spelled out the word ‘The,’ then stopped. Curious about his silence, another spirit signaled. The newcomer communicated through movements of the table, not by knocks, like the first. He said that our friend, the knocker, had been suddenly called away for a moment, but would definitely be back soon. He did return within fifteen minutes, picked up the communication right where he left off, and spelled out—‘The second chapter of first Corinthians, the twelfth and thirteenth verses.’ No one in the room remembered the words mentioned. So we got the Bible, and the text turned out to be: ‘Now we have received, not the spirit of the world, but the spirit which is of God, that we might know the things that are given to us of God. Which things we also speak, not in the words which man’s wisdom teacheth, but which the Holy Ghost teacheth; comparing spiritual things with spiritual.’ Moved by the beauty, purity, richness, and power of the passage, I said that I accepted it gratefully, as a very fitting topic for the occasion in question, and would try to illustrate its profound truths as best as I could. My spirit friend expressed great joy with quick sounds on the table and mentioned that he and several other supportive spirits would be present to hear the talk, and if the medium was there too, they would show their approval of the good things said. All of this was confirmed in an amazing way."
1603. “I have seen a medium gently magnetized and thrown into a trance in one minute, by the imperceptible influence of the spirits, in accordance with their own original proposition, reluctantly acceded to by the medium and her friends; during which sometimes she had visions of the spirit world, and at others became entirely non-cognizant of every thing transpiring in either world. In the latter case, the spirits, as previously promised, made use of her organs of speech, unconsciously to herself, and thus answered numerous questions, instead of responding by the rappings. That these trances were not superinduced by mortal agency, and were not feigned, but real, I am as certain as I can be of any thing not absolutely beyond the possibility of mistake.
1603. “I have seen a medium gently hypnotized and put into a trance in one minute, by the subtle influence of the spirits, based on their original proposal, which the medium and her friends reluctantly agreed to; during this time, she sometimes had visions of the spirit world, and at other times was completely unaware of everything happening in either world. In the latter case, the spirits, as they had promised, used her vocal cords, without her being aware of it, to answer numerous questions instead of responding with knocks. I am as certain as I can be that these trances were not caused by human intervention and were not feigned, but real.
1604. “I might proceed much further in the particularization of manifestations coming under my personal observation, but will not make myself tedious. Suffice it to say, that I have witnessed enough with my own eyes and ears to prepare me for the belief of the still more incredible manife321stations reported from a thousand places in our country and the world. I will merely add, that I have received many excellent communications from these invisible friends, and scarcely a single one of a light, frivolous, or low character; though I know that in this respect my experience has been unlike that of some others. I can say in truth, speaking for myself alone, that my whole moral nature has been purified and elevated by the influences which have flowed in upon me during the investigation of this subject. Others, I am sure, can say the same. There are those, no doubt, who have abused the whole thing—befooling themselves and others in a lamentable manner. What is there in the wide world that has wholly escaped abuse and perversion? Reason, inspired and crowned with the wisdom from above, is indispensable to the avoidance of these evils. Until a much larger portion of mankind than at present attain to the development of their higher faculties, we must expect the abuse and perversion, to a greater or less extent, of every thing in nature. ‘But wisdom is justified of all her children.’”
1604. “I could go on and share more examples from my personal experiences, but I won’t drag this out. It's enough to say that I’ve seen enough with my own eyes and ears to be open to the even more unbelievable accounts reported from countless places in our country and around the world. I’ll just add that I’ve received many valuable messages from these unseen friends, and hardly any of them have been light, silly, or low in nature; although I know my experiences differ from some others. I can honestly say, speaking only for myself, that my entire moral character has been enriched and uplifted by the influences I've received while exploring this topic. I’m sure others can make the same claim. There are undoubtedly those who have misused the whole thing—deceiving themselves and others in a regrettable way. What in the world hasn’t been subject to misuse and distortion? Reason, enlightened and guided by wisdom from above, is essential to avoid these pitfalls. Until a much larger part of humanity develops their higher faculties, we should expect the misuse and distortion of everything in nature, to some degree. ‘But wisdom is justified of all her children.’”
1606. “There are many facts which have come under my observation, equally convincing of the intelligence and utility of the communications from these unseen agents, who, I now believe, are continually about us, and more perfectly acquainted with all our ways, and even our thoughts, than we are with each other. But the fact in reference to my friend Pickard is what you desire. He was at my house on Friday afternoon, April 6, 1849. None of the Fox family were present. While at the tea-table, we had free communications on different subjects. Pickard was requested to ask questions. He desired to know who it was that would answer questions. The answer was—‘I am your mother, Mary Pickard.’ Her name, or the fact of her death, was not known to any of us. The next Monday evening he (Pickard) was at Mr. G-—- ’s, and tarried there over night. He there received a communication, purporting to be from his mother, saying, ‘Your child is dead.’ He came immediately to my place, and said he should take the stage for home, (Lockport, sixty miles distant.) He left in the stage at 8 or 9, A. M. At 12, M., I returned to my house, my wife meeting me with a telegraph envelope. I broke the seal and read mentally, first:
1606. “I’ve observed many things that clearly demonstrate the intelligence and usefulness of the messages from these unseen agents, who I now believe are always around us, knowing our habits and even our thoughts better than we know each other. But you want to know about my friend Pickard. He was at my house on Friday afternoon, April 6, 1849. None of the Fox family were there. While we were having tea, we talked freely about various subjects. Pickard was asked to pose some questions. He wanted to know who would be answering the questions. The answer was, ‘I am your mother, Mary Pickford.’ None of us knew her name or that she had passed away. The following Monday evening, he (Pickard) was at Mr. G-—-’s and stayed there overnight. He received a message that was supposedly from his mother, saying, ‘Your child is dead.’ He rushed to my place and said he was going to take the stage back home (Lockport, sixty miles away). He boarded the stage around 8 or 9 A.M.. When I returned to my house at noon, my wife met me with a telegram envelope. I broke the seal and read mentally, first:
“‘Rochester, April 10, 1849.
“Rochester, April 10, 1849.
R. Mallory.’
R. Mallory.
“Yours, truly, A. H. Jarvis.’
“Yours truly, A. H. Jarvis.”
“To E. W. Capron, Auburn.”
“To E. W. Capron, Auburn.”
1613. “3. All human beings possess certain mental and moral qualities, partly constitutional, partly circumstantial, and partly self-wrought, which determine for the time being each individual’s real spiritual character and relative nearness to, or distance from, the divine standard of perfection. So that each one is in a certain sphere, and in some circle or degree of that sphere, as to his spirit, always, whether existing in the fleshly body or after his dissolution. And if a person is spiritually in a certain sphere at death, in that sphere he finds himself the moment he resumes his consciousness in the spirit world, associated with kindred spirits.
1613. “3. All human beings have certain mental and moral qualities, which are partly inherited, partly influenced by circumstances, and partly developed through their own efforts. These qualities determine an individual’s true spiritual character and their proximity to or distance from the divine standard of perfection at any given time. Each person exists within a specific sphere and in some circle or degree of that sphere regarding their spirit, always, whether they are in a physical body or after they have passed away. If a person is in a particular spiritual sphere at the time of death, they find themselves in that same sphere the moment they regain their consciousness in the spirit world, surrounded by similar spirits.
1614. “4. There are seven spirit spheres, or circles,[36] inferior to the heavenly or celestial spheres, and each sphere or circle has several degrees. Man is a being by nature capable of progress, subject to certain fundamental spiritual and moral laws. In conformity to these laws, he may now progress from lower to higher spheres; i. e. he may draw nearer and nearer to God; or, what is the same thing, nearer as a spirit to the divine standard of perfection. But without conformity to these laws, he cannot progress, but obscures and debases himself. Death does not change man’s real character, nor his proper spirit sphere, nor his capability to make progress, nor the laws of progress. No man is in a morally worse state, all things considered, by reason of passing into the spirit world. The worst even are, if any way affected, in a better state there than in the flesh. They whose spirit sphere was purer, find themselves proportionally blessed. Many remain very long in the lower spheres, where, though enabled to enjoy existence in the degree possible at such a distance from the divine focus of blessedness, they are ‘spirits in prison,’ and wretched in com323parison with those in the paradisaical spheres. Their existence is a blessing to them even while thus low, and there is no such place or state as a HELL of unmitigated, hopeless misery. Meantime, God, angels, and all the higher spirits, are for ever seeking the elevation of the inferior spirits, by all just, wise, and appropriate means. And no one, however low and sluggish of progress, will finally fail to be attracted upward, obediently to the divine laws, from one degree to another, and from one sphere to another, till he reach the heavenly mansion—even though it take an age of eternities to complete his destiny.
1614. “4. There are seven spiritual spheres, or circles, [36] that are below the heavenly or celestial spheres, and each sphere or circle has several levels. Humans are naturally capable of growth, bound by certain fundamental spiritual and moral laws. Following these laws, they can progress from lower to higher spheres; i. e. they can get closer to God; or, in other words, closer as a spirit to the divine standard of perfection. However, without adhering to these laws, they cannot progress and only diminish and degrade themselves. Death does not alter a person’s true character, their spiritual sphere, their ability to progress, or the laws of progress. No one is in a morally worse position, all things considered, just because they have moved into the spirit world. The worst among them, if affected at all, are in a better situation there than in the physical realm. Those whose spiritual spheres were purer find themselves correspondingly blessed. Many remain in the lower spheres for a long time, where, while able to experience existence to the extent possible at such a distance from the divine source of happiness, they are ‘spirits in prison’ and are miserable compared to those in the paradisaical spheres. Their existence remains a blessing even while they are low, and there is no such place or state as a Hades of complete, hopeless misery. Meanwhile, God, angels, and all higher spirits are constantly working towards uplifting the lesser spirits through all just, wise, and suitable means. And no one, no matter how low or slow to progress, will ultimately fail to be drawn upward, in obedience to the divine laws, from one level to another, and from one sphere to another, until they reach the heavenly abode—even if it takes an eternity to fulfill their destiny.
1615. “5. Spirits in the higher of the seven spheres are employed in three general exercises. 1. In religious aspirations, meditations, worship—in striving after a more perfect knowledge of and communication with God—whom they cannot see there any more than here, as a personal being, but only in spirit by faith and intuition. 2. In study, self-examination, contemplations of truth, and acquainting themselves with all useful knowledge attainable by them. 3. In ministering to struggling spirits on earth and in the lower spheres—endeavouring to elevate and bless them; thus cultivating love to God, wisdom within themselves, and ever-active benevolence to their inferiors in condition. Spirits in any circle can descend into all the circles below their own, but cannot, except by special permission, ascend into a higher sphere, until qualified by spiritual progress.
1615. “5. Spirits in the higher of the seven spheres are engaged in three main activities. 1. In seeking a deeper understanding of and connection with God through religious aspirations, meditation, and worship—who they can’t perceive as a personal being any more than we can here, but only through faith and intuition. 2. In studying, self-reflection, contemplation of truth, and gaining all useful knowledge they can access. 3. In helping struggling spirits on earth and in the lower spheres—trying to uplift and bless them; thus fostering love for God, wisdom within themselves, and constant kindness toward those in lesser conditions. Spirits in any circle can move down to all the circles below them, but cannot, except by special permission, move up to a higher sphere until they have progressed spiritually.”
1616. “6. Mankind are by nature one family of brothers and sisters, the offspring of a common Father in heaven, whom they ought to love with all their heart, and each other as themselves. The good of each is really the good of all, and that of all the good of each. Therefore, no one can injure another without injuring himself in the end. All kinds of tyranny and oppression are utterly sinful. So all war, violence, revenge, and vindictive punishment. So all intemperance, debauchery, and sexual pollution. So all falsehood, covetousness, fraud, extortion, and pecuniary taking of advantage. So all pride and domineering of superiors over inferiors. So all religious bigotry, thrusting down, persecution, and sectarian bitterness. So every thing contrary to personal holiness, to the piety which loves God supremely, and man as a brother, whether friend or foe. These reliable spirits are everywhere reformers, regenerators of the world, individually and socially. They are for the reconciliation of all things—for universal harmony—on the great principles of truth, purity, justice, love, and wisdom. And they all predict a better future for the human race here on earth, as well as in the future state.
1616. “6. Humanity is naturally one family of brothers and sisters, the children of a common Father in heaven, whom they should love with all their hearts, and each other as themselves. The well-being of one is truly the well-being of all, and the well-being of all is the well-being of one. Therefore, no one can harm another without ultimately harming themselves. All forms of tyranny and oppression are completely wrong. This includes all war, violence, revenge, and cruel punishment. It also includes all excess, debauchery, and sexual immorality. Additionally, all dishonesty, greed, fraud, extortion, and taking unfair advantage of others are wrong. So is all pride and dominance of those in power over those who are not. Religious intolerance, persecution, and sectarian hatred are also unacceptable. Everything that goes against personal holiness, and the devotion that loves God above all and treats everyone as a sibling, whether they are friends or enemies, is therefore wrong. These trustworthy individuals are everywhere reformers, rejuvenators of the world, both individually and collectively. They stand for the reconciliation of all things—for universal harmony—based on the great principles of truth, purity, justice, love, and wisdom. They all foresee a better future for humanity on earth, as well as in the afterlife.”
1617. “7. It is the imperative duty of every human being to exercise his own powers, faculties, reason, and judgment, with modesty, humility, and firmness, and not to be overawed, borne down, or led away captive, by any assuming spirit in or out of the flesh. Every one is accountable for himself, and ought both to judge and act for himself, with supreme reverence for God and his moral perfections, according to his own highest con324victions of truth and duty. Thus he should examine the Bible and all books. Thus all human governments, authorities, powers, constitutions, laws, customs, and usages, in church and state. Thus try all spirits, and their communications—all pretended prophets, philosophers, and teachers—all professions and assumptions whatsoever. No one should imperiously dictate, or cower down before another. But truth, rectitude, reason, and the suasion of wisdom, should alone sway the minds of moral agents.
1617. “7. It is the essential responsibility of every individual to use their own abilities, reasoning, and judgment with modesty, humility, and confidence, and not to be intimidated, overwhelmed, or led astray by any dominating presence, whether physical or not. Everyone is responsible for themselves and should judge and act independently, with deep respect for God and His moral qualities, based on their own strongest beliefs about truth and duty. This approach should apply when examining the Bible and all literature. It should also apply to all forms of human governance, authority, power, constitutions, laws, customs, and practices, in both church and state. Therefore, one should assess all spirits and their messages—every so-called prophet, philosopher, and teacher—along with all claims and assertions of any kind. No one should impose their will on others, nor should anyone yield meekly to another's authority. Instead, truth, integrity, reason, and the influence of wisdom should guide the thoughts and actions of moral agents.
1618. “Such is a fair digest and summary of the principal doctrines put forth in ninety-nine one hundredths of the communications of reliable spirits throughout the country. I have stated them in my own language, as I have understood them. It will be seen that they differ in some respects from every sectarian view of theology, religion, and morality now popular in the world.”
1618. “This is a clear summary of the main ideas presented in almost all the messages from trustworthy spirits across the nation. I’ve put them into my own words as I understand them. You’ll notice that they differ in certain ways from the common beliefs about theology, religion, and morality that are popular today.”
The Hon. J. W. Edmonds’s Testimony.
1620. “It was in January, 1851, that my attention was first called to the subject of ‘spiritual intercourse.’ I had, in the course of my life, read and heard from the pulpit so many contradictory and conflicting doctrines on the subject (of man’s future existence) that I hardly knew what to believe.
1621. “For about four months I devoted at least two evenings in a week, and sometimes more, to witnessing the phenomenon in all its phases. I kept careful records of all I witnessed, and, from time to time, compared them with each other, to detect inconsistencies and contradictions. I read all I could lay my hands upon, on the subject, and especially all the professed ‘exposures of the humbug.’ In fine, I availed myself of every opportunity that was afforded thoroughly to sift the matter to the bottom. I was all this time an unbeliever. At length the evidence came, and with such force that no sane man could withhold his faith.
1621. “For about four months, I spent at least two evenings a week, and sometimes more, observing the phenomenon in all its phases. I kept detailed notes of everything I witnessed and occasionally compared them to identify inconsistencies and contradictions. I read everything I could find on the topic, especially the so-called ‘exposures of the scam.’ In short, I took every chance I had to thoroughly investigate the matter. Throughout this time, I was a skeptic. Eventually, the evidence came, and it was so strong that no rational person could deny it.”
1622. “To detail what I witnessed for those four months, and recorded, would fill, at least, one hundred and thirty closely-written pages. I will, however, mention a few things, which will give a general idea of that which characterized interviews now numbering several hundred. Most of them have occurred in the presence of others. I have preserved their names in my records. * * * * * These considerations grow out of this fact:
1622. “To describe what I experienced over those four months and documented would take up at least one hundred and thirty pages of dense writing. However, I will mention a few points that will provide a general sense of what defined the interviews, which now number in the hundreds. Most of these took place with others present. I have kept a record of their names. * * * * * These thoughts stem from this fact:
1625. “My attention was first drawn to the intercourse by the rappings, then the most common, but now the most inconsiderable, mode of communing. Of course I was on the look-out for deception, and at first relied upon my senses, and the conclusions which my reason might draw from their evidence. * * *
1626. “After depending upon my senses as to these various phases of the phenomenon, I invoked the aid of science, and, with the assistance of an accomplished electrician and his machinery, and of eight or ten intelligent, educated, and shrewd persons, examined the matter. We pursued our inquiries many days, and established, to our satisfaction, two things: first, that the sounds were not produced by the agency of any person present or near us; and, secondly, that they were not forthcoming at our will and pleasure. In the mean time, another feature attracted my attention, and that was ‘physical manifestations,’ as they are termed. Thus, I have known a pine table, with four legs, lifted up bodily from the floor, in the centre of a circle of six or eight persons, turned upside down, and laid upon its top at our feet, then lifted up over our heads, and put leaning against the back of the sofa on which we sat. * * * * I have seen a mahogany centre-table, having only a centre leg, and with a lamp burning upon it, lifted from the floor, at least a foot, in spite of the efforts of those present, and shaken backward and forward, as one would shake a goblet in his hand. * * * *
1626. “After relying on my senses to understand these different aspects of the phenomenon, I called in science for help. With the support of a skilled electrician and his equipment, along with eight or ten intelligent, educated, and sharp individuals, we investigated the situation. We spent many days on our inquiry and confirmed two things to our satisfaction: first, that the sounds were not made by anyone present or nearby; and second, that they didn’t happen at our command or desire. In the meantime, another aspect caught my attention, known as ‘physical manifestations.’ For example, I witnessed a pine table, which had four legs, being lifted completely off the floor while a group of six or eight people stood in a circle around it. It was flipped upside down and placed on its top at our feet, then raised above our heads and leaned against the back of the sofa we were sitting on. * * * * I have also seen a mahogany center table, which had only one central leg, and a lamp lit on it, lifted at least a foot off the ground, despite the efforts of those present, and shaken back and forth as if one were shaking a goblet in hand. * * * *”
1627. “I have known a dinner-bell, taken from a shelf in a closet, rung over the heads of four or five persons in that closet, then rung around the room over the heads of twelve or fifteen persons in the back parlour, and then borne through the folding-doors to the farther end of the front parlour, and then dropped on the floor.
1627. “I’ve seen a dinner bell, taken from a shelf in a closet, rung over the heads of four or five people in that closet, then rung around the room over the heads of twelve or fifteen people in the back parlor, and then carried through the folding doors to the far end of the front parlor, and then dropped on the floor.
1629. “I have known a mahogany chair thrown on its side, and moved swiftly back and forth on the floor, no one touching it, through a room where there were, at least, a dozen people sitting. Yet no one was touched, and it was repeatedly stopped within a few inches of me, when it was coming with a violence which, if not arrested, must have broken my legs.
1629. “I’ve seen a mahogany chair tipped over and moved quickly back and forth across the floor, with no one touching it, in a room with at least a dozen people sitting around. Yet no one was harmed, and it kept stopping just inches away from me, coming with such force that, if it hadn't been stopped, it would have broken my legs.
1630. “This is not a tithe, nay, not an hundredth part, of what I have seen, of the same character. At the same time, I have heard from others, whose testimony would be credited in any human transaction, and which I could not permit myself to disregard, accounts of still more extraordinary transactions; for I have been by no means so much favoured in this respect as some.
1630. “This is not even a tithe, not even a hundredth of what I have seen of the same kind. At the same time, I've heard from others, whose testimony would be trusted in any situation, and which I couldn't ignore, stories of even more extraordinary events; because I have definitely not been as fortunate in this area as some have been.
1631. “Intelligence was a remarkable feature of the phenomenon.326 Thus, I have frequently known mental questions answered—that is, questions merely framed in the mind of the interrogator, and not revealed by him or known to others. Preparatory to meeting a circle, I have sat down alone in my room, and carefully prepared a series of questions to be propounded; and I have been surprised to find my questions answered, and in the precise order in which I wrote them, without my even taking my memorandum out of my pocket, and when I knew that no person present knew that I had prepared questions, much less what they were.
1631. “Intelligence was a remarkable aspect of the phenomenon.326 I often found that mental questions were answered—that is, questions that were only thought of by me and not shared with anyone else. Before meeting with a group, I would sit alone in my room and carefully prepare a list of questions to ask. I was always surprised to see my questions answered, and in the exact order I had written them, without even pulling out my notes, even when I knew that no one present had any idea that I had prepared questions, much less what those questions were.
1633. “I have known Latin, French, and Spanish words spelled out through the rappings; and I have heard mediums, who knew no language but their own, speak in those languages, and in Italian, German, and Greek, and in other languages unknown to me, but which were represented to be Arabic, Chinese, and Indian, and all done with the ease and rapidity of a native.
1633. “I have seen words in Latin, French, and Spanish spelled out through the tapping; and I have heard mediums, who only spoke their native language, communicate in those languages, as well as in Italian, German, and Greek, and in other languages I didn’t recognize, which were said to be Arabic, Chinese, and Indian, all done with the ease and speed of a native speaker.
1636. “I went into the investigation, originally thinking it a deception, and intending to make public my exposure of it. Having, from my researches, come to a different conclusion, I feel that the obligation to make known the result is just as strong. Therefore it is, mainly, that I give the result to the world.
“J. W. Edmonds.”
“J. W. Edmonds.”
Testimony of Henry Lloyd Garrison.
1639. “When we first heard of the ‘Rochester knockings,’ we supposed (not personally knowing the persons implicated) that there might be some collusion in that particular case, or, if not, that the phenomena would ere long elicit a satisfactory solution, independent of all spiritual agency. As the manifestations have spread from house to house, from city to city, from one part of the country to the other, across the Atlantic into Europe, till327 now the civilized world is compelled to acknowledge their reality, however diverse in accounting for them—as these manifestations continue to increase in variety and power, so that all suspicion of trick or imposture becomes simply absurd and preposterous—and as every attempt to find a solution for them in some physical theory relating to electricity, the odic force, clairvoyance, and the like, has thus far proved abortive—it becomes every intelligent mind to enter into an investigation of them with candour and fairness, as opportunity may offer, and to bear such testimony in regard to them as the facts may warrant, no matter what ridicule it may excite on the part of the uninformed or skeptical.
1639. “When we first heard about the ‘Rochester knockings,’ we thought (not personally knowing the people involved) that there might be some kind of collusion in that specific case, or if not, that the phenomena would soon provide a satisfactory explanation, independent of any spiritual involvement. As the manifestations have spread from house to house, from city to city, and from one part of the country to another, crossing the Atlantic into Europe, until327 now the civilized world is forced to acknowledge their reality, regardless of the differing explanations— as these manifestations continue to grow in variety and intensity, any suspicion of trickery or deception becomes completely absurd and ridiculous—and since every attempt to explain them through some physical theory related to electricity, the odic force, clairvoyance, and so on, has so far failed—it is essential for every intelligent person to approach an investigation of these phenomena with openness and fairness, as opportunities arise, and to offer any testimony that the facts may support, no matter what ridicule it might provoke from the uninformed or skeptical.”
1640. “As for ourselves, most assuredly we have been in no haste to jump to a conclusion in regard to phenomena so universally diffused, and of so extraordinary a character. For the last three years, we have kept pace with nearly all that has been published on the subject; and we have witnessed, at various times, many surprising ‘manifestations;’ and our conviction is, that they cannot be accounted for on any other theory than that of spiritual agency. This theory, however, is not unattended with discrepancies, difficulties, and trials. It is certain that, if it be true, there are many deceptive spirits, and that the apostolic injunction to ‘believe not every spirit,’ but to try them in every possible way, is specially to be regarded, or the consequences may prove very disastrous.
1640. “As for us, we definitely haven't rushed to conclusions about phenomena that are so widespread and remarkable. For the last three years, we've stayed up to date with almost everything that's been published on the topic; and we've seen many surprising ‘manifestations’ at various times. We believe that they can only be explained by spiritual agency. However, this theory comes with its own discrepancies, challenges, and tests. It's clear that, if it's true, there are many deceptive spirits, and the apostolic advice to ‘not believe every spirit,’ but to test them in every possible way, should be taken seriously, or the results could be quite disastrous.”
1642. “The medium in this instance was Mrs. Brown, formerly Mrs. Fish, of Rochester. The circle was composed of six gentlemen and four ladies. The table was of ample dimensions, so as to accommodate the party without inconvenience. We sat around it in the usual manner, (the hands of each individual resting upon the table,) and engaged in social chit-chat. While waiting for some demonstrations from the invisible world, we had our right foot patted as by a human hand, and the right leg of our pantaloons strongly pulled, by some unseen agency. This was done repeatedly, though we said nothing at the time; but, thinking it might be possible that the foot of some one of the company might undesignedly be in contact with our own, we cautiously felt around to ascertain if this were the case, but there was nothing tangible; and the moment we put our foot down, the same familiar tappings and jerks followed. Still, we made no disclosure. Raps were then distinctly heard, and the alphabet was called for. Letter by letter, it was rapped out that the medium must put her feet in the custody of one of the party, and then we were told to wait for demonstrations. This was evidently done to convince every one present that the medium had nothing to do with the phenomena, by way of fraud or collusion; and, during the entire sitting, (a protracted one,) before any re328markable feat was performed, the medium was invariably ordered to take such a position as to render it clearly impossible for her to be privy to it. The presence of several spirits was indicated during the evening, and satisfactory tests were made; but the most communicative and efficient one purported to be that of ‘Jesse Hutchinson.’ It was he who had been playing bo-peep with us under the table; and, now that the medium was secured, to the satisfaction of all present, he renewed his salutations, not only to us personally, but to nearly every one of the circle. The ladies had their dresses, and the gentlemen their pantaloons, pulled, and their feet patted, in the most emphatic manner. Heavy raps were now made on the floor; and, on being requested to that effect, ‘Jesse’ beat a march—it seemed to us Washington’s march—in admirable time, and in the most spirited manner; no drummer could have done it more skilfully. He was then asked to beat time, while the company joined in singing several tunes—‘The Old Granite State,’ among others—which he did to perfection. He then spelt out the following communications by the alphabet: ‘I am most happy, dear friends, to be able to give you such tangible evidence of my presence. The good time has truly come. The gates of the New Jerusalem are open, and the good spirits, made more pure by the change of spheres, are knocking at the door of your souls.’
1642. “In this case, the medium was Mrs. Brown, previously Mrs. Fish, from Rochester. The group included six men and four women. The table was large enough to comfortably fit everyone. We sat around it in the usual way, our hands resting on the table, and started chatting. While we waited for some signs from the spirit world, we felt our right foot being patted as if by a human hand, and the right leg of our pants was tugged strongly by some unseen force. This happened multiple times, but we said nothing at first; thinking it might be possible that someone’s foot was inadvertently touching ours, we carefully checked to see if that was the case, but there was nothing there. As soon as we put our foot down, the same familiar taps and pulls happened again. Still, we kept quiet. Then we heard distinct knocks, and the alphabet was requested. Letter by letter, it was knocked out that the medium needed to have her feet held by one of the guests, and then we were told to wait for more signs. This was clearly done to prove to everyone there that the medium had no involvement in the phenomena through trickery or cooperation; throughout the entire session, which lasted a long time, the medium was always instructed to position herself so it would be obvious that she couldn’t be aware of what was happening. Several spirits were indicated during the evening, and satisfactory tests were conducted; however, the most talkative and effective one claimed to be ‘Jesse Hutchinson.’ He was the one who had been playing peek-a-boo under the table with us, and now that the medium was secured to everyone’s satisfaction, he greeted not only us but almost everyone in the circle. The ladies had their dresses tugged, and the men felt their pants pulled and their feet patted emphatically. Loud knocks were then made on the floor; when asked, ‘Jesse’ drummed a march—it sounded like Washington’s march—perfectly and energetically; no drummer could have done it better. He was then asked to keep the beat while the group sang several songs—including ‘The Old Granite State’—which he did flawlessly. He then spelled out the following message: ‘I am very happy, dear friends, to provide you with such clear evidence of my presence. The good time has indeed arrived. The gates of the New Jerusalem are open, and the good spirits, made purer by their change of realms, are knocking at the door of your souls.’”
1643. “Isaac T. Hopper now indicated his presence to his daughter, who was at the table, and made some physical demonstrations. His message, as rapped out, was as follows: ‘I am truly happy to echo back joy and gladness from my happy home. Truth is bearing its way on gloriously, and the subject of Spiritualism will work miracles in the cause of reform. My friends, the rock of prejudice begins to yield to the hammer of truth; and, now, with the aid of good spirits, you can blast it without the use of powder.’ And he subsequently added, ‘I want you to see that spirits have power to move matter.’
1643. “Isaac T. Hopper now signaled to his daughter, who was at the table, and made some gestures. His message, as communicated, was as follows: ‘I’m really happy to share joy and happiness from my wonderful home. Truth is making its way forward beautifully, and the topic of Spiritualism will create miracles in the name of reform. My friends, the hard surface of prejudice is starting to give way to the power of truth; and now, with the help of good spirits, you can break through it without needing explosives.’ He then added, ‘I want you to understand that spirits can move physical objects.’
1644. “It was next rapped out, ‘Put the bell under the table.’ We, accordingly, took the bell, (an ordinary table-bell,) and put it down at our feet. In a few moments, it was smartly rung by an unseen power, and then fell to the floor. This was done again and again—the bell making the circuit of the table, and ringing so loudly that the servant-girl, in an adjacent room, supposing she was needed, came in to inquire what was wanted.
1644. “Then it was instructed, ‘Put the bell under the table.’ So, we took the bell, (just a regular table bell,) and placed it at our feet. A few moments later, it rang loudly by some unseen force, then dropped to the floor. This happened repeatedly—the bell moving around the table and ringing so loudly that the maid, in an adjacent room, thinking she was needed, came in to ask what was requested.
1645. “Next, a cane with a hooked handle was laid on the carpet, under the table. Immediately, it struck the table violently, and rubbed along the under surface its entire length. It then fell to the floor, and traversed over and under the feet of several of the party, like a living snake—in one or two instances the foot being involuntarily lifted to enable it to pass under. Its movements were exceedingly curious. At one time, we caught hold of the handle as it protruded itself by our side, and endeavoured to pull it from under the table; but the resistance was as strong as though another hand was grasping it at the opposite end.
1645. “Next, a cane with a hooked handle was placed on the carpet under the table. Suddenly, it began to strike the table violently and slid along the underside for its entire length. Then it dropped to the floor and moved over and under the feet of several people at the gathering, like a living snake—at one or two points, someone involuntarily lifted their foot to let it pass underneath. Its movements were incredibly strange. At one point, we grabbed the handle as it stuck out beside us and tried to pull it from under the table, but the resistance was as strong as if another hand was holding it at the other end.
1646. “We were now directed to put several things under the table, observe how they were placed, and wait for results. When told to look, we found that a penknife was missing, nor could it be discovered by the most careful search. On again resuming our seats, we were told to take another look; and, behold! there was the penknife, precisely where it had been originally placed!
1646. “We were now instructed to put several items under the table, take note of their arrangement, and wait for results. When we were told to check, we discovered that a penknife was missing, and it couldn’t be found no matter how carefully we searched. After taking our seats again, we were instructed to look once more; and, lo and behold! there was the penknife, exactly where it had been originally placed!
1647. “Next, we were directed to lay some writing-paper, with a pencil upon it, under the table. This was done; and, in a few moments, on being told to look, we found the word ‘Jesse’ written upon it in a scrawling hand, as though made with great difficulty. The same experiment was again made, and ‘Isaac T. H.’ (Hopper) was written very legibly, and in a different hand. A third time this was done, and ‘Mary Jane’ was recorded,—the name of a young lady who had been communicating with a gentleman present. The first two autographs we have in our possession.
1647. “Next, we were instructed to place some writing paper with a pencil underneath the table. We did this, and in a few moments, when we were told to look, we saw the word 'Jesse' scrawled on it, as if it had been written with a lot of effort. The same experiment was repeated, and ‘Isaac T. H.’ (Hopper) was written down very clearly and in a different handwriting. We tried it a third time, and ‘Mary Jane’ was noted—this was the name of a young lady who had been in touch with a gentleman present. We have the first two signatures in our possession.
1648. “We now made two requests of ‘Jesse,’ to convince us yet more strongly of his presence. The first was, to press our right foot firmly to the floor, and to make loud raps directly under it. This was quickly done, the foot being grasped as by a mortal hand, and vibrating to the raps thus strangely made. The second was, if possible, to take us by the right hand with his own, so as to make the touch palpable beyond a doubt. Keeping the hand carefully in custody between our knees as we sat—the hands of all the company, including those of the medium, being on the table—we, in a few moments, had it patted, first on one side, then on the other, briskly and repeatedly, as if by another hand, having a negative feeling, as though there was no warmth in it, but natural in every other respect. For the general gratification, the same thing was done to others of the party.
1648. “We made two requests of ‘Jesse’ to further confirm his presence. The first was for him to press our right foot firmly against the floor and make loud knocks directly underneath it. This happened quickly, the foot was held as if by a human hand, and it vibrated with the knocks that were made. The second was to take our right hand with his own, so we could feel the touch unmistakably. While keeping our hand carefully between our knees as we sat—everyone's hands, including the medium's, resting on the table—we soon felt pats on our hand, first on one side, then on the other, briskly and repeatedly, as if by another hand that felt cool, lacking warmth, but perfectly normal in every other way. For everyone's enjoyment, the same was done to several others in the group.”
1649. “How shall demonstrations like these be accounted for, except on the hypothesis of spirit-agency? If we cannot positively affirm that Isaac T. Hopper and Jesse Hutchinson were present on that occasion, we are, at least, prepared to declare, as our own conviction, as well as that of the entire company, we believe, that invisible spirits, not of this mundane sphere, performed the phenomena we have thus briefly narrated to our readers.”
1649. “How can we explain demonstrations like these other than by suggesting the involvement of spirits? While we can’t definitively say that Isaac T. Hopper and Jesse Hutchinson were there at that moment, we are ready to express our own belief, which we think is shared by everyone present, that unseen spirits from beyond this world were responsible for the events we've just summarized for our readers.”
Testimony of Mr. and Mrs. Newton.
1650. The following is extracted from a highly interesting letter, entitled, “The Ministry of Angels Realized,” addressed by Mr. and Mrs. Newton to the Edward’s Congregational Church, Boston, of which they were members. Mr. Newton is editor of the “New England Spiritualist,” and sustains a reputation for high moral and intellectual attainment.
1650. The following is taken from a very interesting letter called "The Ministry of Angels Realized," written by Mr. and Mrs. Newton to the Edward's Congregational Church in Boston, where they were members. Mr. Newton is the editor of the "New England Spiritualist" and is known for his high moral and intellectual standards.
1651. “The results, however, of this first investigation, at the time, were (for reasons not then apparent, but which have since been made plain to us) far from satisfactory. Though we witnessed some striking evidences of invisible intelligent agency, there was nothing by which this agency could330 be possibly identified; and the conclusion seemed most in accordance with our previous opinions, that, if any agency beyond that of human beings was concerned, it was that of evil and seducing spirits. Some months subsequently to this, we were led to attempt the investigation under circumstances more favourable to arriving at a satisfactory conclusion. * * * The results of this interview were of the most surprising, yea, astounding character. An intelligence, claiming to be that of a venerated parent, who had long since passed within the veil, manifested its presence, and addressed to one of us a communication glowing with parental affection, and breathing the very spirit of the upper realm. This was accompanied by the statement of a number of facts, pertaining to his earthly life, none of which, we were fully satisfied, could have been known to any person, bodily present, except the inquirer, and some of them unknown even to him. Although the investigation had been approached with minds on the alert and perceptions sharpened to detect collusion, imposture, deception, or diabolism, in any of its forms, no trace of them could be perceived; all was conducted with evident frankness and candour, on the part of those concerned; and no solution of the mystery was then arrived at, and no adequate one has since been offered, which does not recognise the agency of intelligent beings. A trumpet-blast from the clouds could scarcely have been more startling to our prejudices and unbelief than was that message from the hidden world. * * * As may be well supposed, the interest awakened by this occurrence was sufficient to lead to a further investigation. But a truth so novel and startling could not at once be received, however demonstrative and convincing the evidence on which it rested. Nor was it until evidence had accumulated upon evidence, and proof become piled upon proof—not until manifestations of the most marvellous character had been repeatedly witnessed, under a great variety of circumstances, and notwithstanding the application of every conceivable test—that we could consent to acknowledge, even to ourselves, a belief in the agency of spiritual beings. That belief, however, in spite of prejudice and skepticism, in spite of the general cry of “humbug” and “imposture,” in spite of all attempts of scientific men to explain the marvels on the basis of materialism, (which explanations we found in every case to be wholly inadequate to account for what we witnessed,) that belief became at length forced upon our minds by irresistible evidence.
1651. “The results of our first investigation weren't very satisfying at the time, though the reasons for this weren't obvious then but have become clear since. We saw some compelling signs of an invisible intelligent force, but there was nothing to identify this force; our conclusion aligned with our previous beliefs that if any power beyond humans was involved, it was likely that of evil and deceptive spirits. A few months later, we decided to try the investigation again under better conditions for reaching a conclusive understanding. * * * The results of this session were incredibly surprising, even astonishing. An intelligence, claiming to be that of a respected parent who had long since passed away, made its presence known and sent a message filled with parental love, embodying the very essence of the spiritual realm. This was accompanied by several specific facts related to their life on Earth, which we were convinced only the inquirer knew, with some of them unknown even to the inquirer themselves. Even though we entered this investigation with alert minds and sharpened perceptions to detect any collusion, deception, or trickery, we found no signs of any of that; everything was carried out openly and honestly by those involved. We didn’t reach a solution to the mystery at that time, and no adequate explanation has emerged since that doesn’t acknowledge the involvement of intelligent beings. A message from the hidden world was as shocking to our biases and disbelief as a trumpet blast from the clouds. * * * As you can imagine, the interest sparked by this event prompted further investigation. However, a truth so new and shocking couldn't be immediately accepted, no matter how convincing the evidence appeared. It wasn't until evidence built upon evidence and proof piled upon proof—not until we had repeatedly witnessed extraordinary manifestations under various circumstances while applying every possible test—that we could bring ourselves to acknowledge, even to ourselves, a belief in the existence of spiritual beings. That belief, despite our biases and doubts, despite the widespread claims of “humbug” and “imposture,” and despite all attempts by scientists to explain the phenomena based on materialism—explanations we found completely inadequate to account for what we experienced—eventually became something we could no longer deny due to overwhelming evidence.”
1652. “But the question still pressed upon us, who were these invisible beings? and what their character and designs? They claimed to be the spirits of departed human beings. Some of them insisted that they were our relatives and friends, and they furnished most startling and inexplicable proofs of their identity. They professed to be thus manifesting themselves to our outward senses, for the purest and holiest of purposes. * * *
1652. “But the question still weighed on us, who were these unseen beings? And what were their nature and intentions? They claimed to be the spirits of people who had passed away. Some of them insisted they were our relatives and friends, providing the most shocking and unexplainable evidence of their identity. They stated they were making themselves known to our senses for the most pure and sacred reasons. * * *
1654. “For several months did we continue to apply to what was transpiring under our notice, through the mediumship of others, the keenest powers of observation, and the highest exercise of moral perception, which have been granted us; ever seeking light and aid from Him who has said, ‘Ask, and ye shall receive.’
1655. “At length, these intelligences from another sphere began to manifest themselves to us in a manner most unlooked-for and diverse from any thing we had elsewhere witnessed, in the quietness and seclusion of our own home, and without the intervention of any other person. From small and gentle beginnings, they have gone forward, as we were able to bear the increasing light, to give greater, and higher, and clearer proofs of the reality of their presence, their identity, and their heavenly mission; until, through a period of six or seven months, we have been permitted, as we believe, the almost daily enjoyment of the sweetest and most intimate communion with the spirits of ‘just ones made perfect above.’
1655. “Eventually, these beings from another realm started to show themselves to us in ways we never expected, completely different from anything we had experienced before, right in the comfort and privacy of our own home, without anyone else being involved. Starting from small and gentle signs, they have progressed, as we were ready for more illumination, to provide greater, stronger, and clearer proof of their presence, their identities, and their divine purpose; until, over the course of six or seven months, we have been granted, as we believe, the almost daily pleasure of the sweetest and most intimate connection with the spirits of ‘just ones made perfect above.’
“A. E. Newton,
S. J. Newton.”
“A. E. Newton, S. J. Newton.”
Testimony of Members of the New York Circle.
1657. “Persons at the circle have been unexpectedly turned round in the chairs in which they were sitting, and moved to and from the table. Chairs and sofas have suddenly started from their positions against the wall, and moved forward to the centre of the room, when they were required in the formation of the circle. The persons in the circle have each successively lifted his own side of the table, and the invisible power has raised the opposite side correspondingly. Occasionally the spirits have raised the table entirely, and sustained it in air, at a distance of from one to three feet from the floor, so that all could satisfy themselves that no person in the flesh was touching it. Lights of various colours have been produced in dark rooms. A man has been suspended in, and conveyed through, the air, a distance of fifty feet, or more. The communications have been given in various ways, but chiefly in writing, and by the rappings through the ordinary alphabetical mode.
1657. “People at the circle were unexpectedly turned around in the chairs they were sitting in and moved to and from the table. Chairs and sofas suddenly broke away from their spots against the wall and moved to the center of the room when they were needed for the circle formation. Each person in the circle lifted their side of the table, and an invisible force raised the opposite side in response. Sometimes, the spirits lifted the table entirely, holding it in the air between one and three feet off the ground, allowing everyone to see that no one physically was touching it. Lights of different colors appeared in dark rooms. A man was lifted and moved through the air a distance of fifty feet or more. The messages were communicated in various ways, mainly through writing and by using knocks following the standard alphabetical method.”
1658. “At the close of the session held on the 17th of November, 1851, the spirits, through the alphabet, and in their usual manner, said, ‘We wish to give you a sentence for you to find out and remember;’ when the following was communicated: ‘Debemos amar á todo el mundo aun á nuestros enemigos.’ No person present on that occasion understood a word of this language, but we were subsequently informed that it was Spanish.
1658. “At the end of the session on November 17, 1851, the spirits, using the alphabet and in their usual way, said, ‘We want to give you a sentence for you to figure out and remember;’ when the following was communicated: ‘Debemos amar a todo el mundo aun a nuestros enemigos.’ No one present at that time understood a word of this language, but we later learned that it was Spanish.
1659. “During the session on the 19th of January, 1852, the spirits sig332nified their desire to make a communication in Hebrew. Mr. Partridge asked who should call the alphabet, and received for answer, ‘The only person present who understands it—George Bush.’ Professor Bush thereupon proceeded to repeat the Hebrew alphabet, and a communication in that language was received.
1659. “During the meeting on January 19, 1852, the spirits indicated their wish to communicate in Hebrew. Mr. Partridge asked who should call out the alphabet and was told, ‘The only person here who understands it—George Bush.’ Professor Bush then went on to recite the Hebrew alphabet, and a message in that language was received.”
1661. “We cannot allow the present occasion to pass, without an expression of the entire confidence and unqualified esteem with which Mr. Fowler is regarded by the members of the New York circle, and by those who know him generally. We have had an intimate personal acquaintance with him for two years past—some of us for a much longer period—and we have only known him as a high-minded and honourable young man. From the beginning, he has steadily refused to accept the slightest compensation for his time and services while employed in the capacity of a medium; and we deem it but an act of simple justice to Mr. F. to record the fact that, on all occasions, we have found him entirely unassuming in his deportment, and eminently truthful in his life.
1661. “We cannot let this moment go by without expressing our complete confidence and genuine respect for Mr. Fowler from the members of the New York circle and those who know him in general. We've had a close personal relationship with him for the past two years—some of us even longer—and we've only seen him as a principled and honorable young man. From the start, he has consistently declined to accept any form of payment for his time and services while working as a medium; we believe it's only fair to Mr. F. to note that, at all times, he has been totally humble in his demeanor and exceptionally honest in his life.
“R. T. Hallock, M. D.,
J. T. Warner, M. D.,
Almira L. Fowler,
A. G. Hull, M. D.,
W. J. Baner,
John F. Gray, M. D.,
Samuel T. Fowler,
Mr. & Mrs. Charles Partridge.”
“R. T. Hallock, M.D.,
J. T. Warner, M.D.,
Almira L. Fowler,
A. G. Hull, M.D.,
W. J. Baner,
John F. Gray, M.D.,
Samuel T. Fowler,
Mr. and Mrs. Charles Partridge.”
Testimony of the Rev. D. F. Goddard, Boston.
1662. “This is to certify that, during a long investigation of the modern phenomena which are now attracting attention in our own country and in the old, I have repeatedly seen my own table, in my own room, to which I know there is no nice machinery affixed for purposes of deception, without any contact whatever of earthly kind, raised, tipped, moved about the room, as if a strong man was there at work. Also, a piano-forte played upon in the same way, without mortal contact, producing most beautiful music—an ocean piece, in which a storm was represented succeeded by a calm. These phenomena occurred in the presence of several other individuals of both sexes, all of whom saw, and all of whom are ready to testify. I have also received from a medium, who never saw me before, and knew nothing of my family, the fact of my father’s death, his name, and a perfect fac-simile of his handwriting; and this when I was not expecting such handwriting, and could not have possibly imitated it, without a copy, in the labour of three months.
1662. “This is to certify that, during an extensive investigation of the modern phenomena currently grabbing attention both in our country and abroad, I have repeatedly witnessed my own table, in my own room, which I know has no hidden machinery rigged for deception, raised, tipped, and moved around the room, as if a strong man were at work. Additionally, a piano played on its own without any human contact, producing beautiful music—a piece depicting a storm followed by calm. These events occurred in the presence of several other individuals of both genders, all of whom observed and are ready to testify. I also received information from a medium who had never met me and knew nothing about my family, including the fact of my father's death, his name, and a perfect fac-simile of his handwriting; all of this when I wasn’t expecting such handwriting and couldn’t possibly have imitated it, without a copy, in three months of effort.”
D. F. Goddard.”
D. F. Goddard.
1663. As this work may be read by many who have not perused any other book on the subject of which it treats, I hope that those who take it up, having a knowledge of the most important spirit manifestations heretofore published, will excuse my quoting them here. My object is to fur333nish the readers of this volume a reasonably, comprehensive view of Spiritualism, without the necessity of their referring to works which may not be easily accessible.
1663. Since many readers may not have read any other books on this topic, I hope those who pick this up, having some understanding of the key spirit manifestations previously published, will forgive my quoting them here. My goal is to provide the readers of this volume a reasonably comprehensive view of Spiritualism, without requiring them to look up works that may not be easily accessible. 333
1664. To the cool Yankee sagacity of Mrs. Fox and her daughters, the world is indebted for the happy result that these manifestations did not, like those which preceded them in other parts of the world, end in a mere inexplicable mystery, and erroneous inferences as to their origin. I allude here to the well-known fact, that similar manifestations were made in the early part of the last century, in Epworth, England, at the mansion of the celebrated clergyman, Wesley, and that one of his daughters was endowed with the attributes of a medium for many years, without the art of alphabetic communication having been suggested.
1664. Thanks to the clever insight of Mrs. Fox and her daughters, the world can appreciate that these events didn’t, like those in other parts of the globe, end in an inexplicable mystery and incorrect conclusions about their origin. I’m referring to the well-known fact that similar occurrences happened in the early part of the last century in Epworth, England, at the home of the famous clergyman, Wesley, and that one of his daughters served as a medium for many years without anyone suggesting the method of alphabetic communication.
1665. I might here republish the history of the famous “rappings and knockings” at Hydesville and Rochester, in the State of New York; but as regards evidence, they amount to about the same thing, only not so concentrated, as those demonstrations which occurred at the residence of the Rev. Dr. Phelps, in Stratford, Connecticut. The doctor, who is a Congregationalist, and one of the most worthy men in the world, became a convert to Spiritualism in consequence of these manifestations, an account of which is subjoined. I quote it from the excellent work of E. W. Capron, Esq., entitled, “Modern Spiritualism, its Facts and Fanaticisms.”
1665. I could share the story of the well-known “rappings and knockings” that took place in Hydesville and Rochester, New York; but when it comes to evidence, they are pretty much the same, just less focused, as the events that happened at the home of Rev. Dr. Phelps in Stratford, Connecticut. The doctor, who is a Congregationalist and one of the most honorable individuals out there, became a believer in Spiritualism because of these occurrences, which I will recount here. I’m quoting it from the outstanding book by E. W. Capron, Esq., called “Modern Spiritualism, its Facts and Fanaticisms.”
Manifestations at Stratford, Conn., in the House of Rev. Eliakim Phelps, D.D.—Remarkable Exhibitions of Power.—Singular Occurrences.—Image-making.—Destruction of Furniture.—Incendiary Spirits.—The Spirits identified.—Unhappy Spirits, from the remembrance of wrong done in this World.—Wrong-doing revealed.—Directions given for restoring ill-gotten Gains.—Discontinuance of the Manifestations.
1667. “While these strange occurrences were taking place at Rochester and Auburn, and the press and people were busy in trying to account for them on strictly mundane principles, making all manner of insinuations against the character and motives of those who even dared to investigate for themselves, some manifestations took place at Stratford, Conn., which attracted attention to that quarter, as well on account of the character and standing of the gentleman at whose house they occurred, as the very strange, boisterous, and violent character of the manifestations. I have been allowed to examine all the records kept of the occurrences by Dr. Phelps, and shall be able, therefore, to present the history with more minuteness and accuracy than has ever before appeared.
1667. “While these unusual events were happening in Rochester and Auburn, and the media and people were busy trying to explain them using traditional reasoning, making all sorts of implications about the character and motives of anyone who dared to investigate for themselves, some phenomena occurred in Stratford, Conn., which drew attention due to both the reputation of the gentleman whose home they took place in and the very strange, chaotic, and violent nature of the events. I have been granted access to all the records kept by Dr. Phelps regarding these occurrences, so I will be able to present the history with more detail and accuracy than ever before.”
1668. “The first disturbances took place on the tenth day of March, 1850, at the house of Rev. Eliakim Phelps, D.D. The house had been occupied by him from the 22d of February, 1848. It is a large and genteel country mansion, separated from the street by a fence forty-five feet in front of the house; which is thirty-two feet in front, and, including the piazza, seventy feet deep, with a hall thirteen feet wide, running through the whole depth of the building. Adjoining, and opening from this hall, are two parlours and a dining-room. On the second floor are five sleeping-rooms, and on the third floor two. The kitchen is in the basement. The house was built about the year 1829 or ‘30 by a Captain Dondall, who for several years commanded a vessel in the China trade, and who died in the Bay of Canton within two or three years after his family had taken up their residence in the house. The property then passed into the hands of another sea-captain, by the name of Purcell, who, with his family, occupied it for several years. Captain Purcell dying suddenly in New York, the family removed, and the house was occupied by an Episcopal clergyman for a school a year or more, and afterward by a Mr -—-, also as a school for boys.
1668. “The first disturbances occurred on March 10, 1850, at the home of Rev. Eliakim Phelps, D.D. He had been living there since February 22, 1848. It's a large, stylish country house set back from the street by a fence that’s forty-five feet in front. The house itself is thirty-two feet wide and, including the porch, seventy feet deep, with a hallway that’s thirteen feet wide running through the entire length of the building. Off of this hallway are two parlors and a dining room. The second floor has five bedrooms, while the third floor has two. The kitchen is located in the basement. The house was built around 1829 or 1830 by Captain Dondall, who commanded a ship in the China trade for several years and died in the Bay of Canton within a couple of years after his family moved in. Afterwards, the property was taken over by another sea captain named Purcell, who lived there with his family for several years. Captain Purcell died suddenly in New York, leading his family to move out, after which the house was used by an Episcopal clergyman as a school for a year or more, and later by a Mr. —--- as a school for boys.”
1669. “None of the families who had thus far occupied the house had ever been disturbed, or witnessed any thing aside from ordinary events. At the death of Captain Purcell it became the property of the two daughters, of whom Dr. Phelps purchased it during the month of November, 1847. For two years previous to this it had been unoccupied. Dr. Phelps and family commenced their residence therein on the 22d of February, 1848. Nothing occurred to excite the attention of the family out of the ordinary course of events until the 10th of March, 1850; and, as before stated, nothing can be learned of any strange or unusual events occurring there previous to that time. It will be observed by the dates given that Dr. Phelps had occupied the house more than two years, had found it an agreeable and quiet place of residence—having never himself or any member of the family been disturbed or alarmed by unusual occurrences. On the 10th of March, as above stated, it being the Sabbath, Dr. Phelps and family, consisting of Mrs. Phelps, two daughters, and two sons, the eldest a daughter aged sixteen, a son of twelve years, and a second daughter of six years, children of Mrs. Phelps by a former marriage, and another son of Dr. Phelps by the present marriage, not then three years old, all attended church; and an Irish servant girl, who had been employed in the family some six months, and had shown herself to be honest and trustworthy, had gone on that day to Bridgeport, to attend the Catholic church. On leaving the house in the morning, it appears that the doctor had secured the chamber doors, and put the keys in his pocket; those which could be were locked inside and the keys left in them. The only door by which the chambers could be entered was locked, and the key taken by Dr. Phelps. He also locked the front door inside, left the key in the lock, and, passing out at335 the back door, locked that, and placed the key in his pocket. On returning from church at noon, the front door was found standing open; the chamber doors, which were left fastened, were now open; and in the nursery the furniture was thrown about in disorder; chairs on the bed, and thrown down upon the floor; the shovel, tongs, and poker, with other things, were in unusual positions and places, every thing showing unmistakable signs of the work of some rude hand making mischief in their absence. Upon discovering the disorder here, Dr. Phelps passed into other rooms on the same floor, but could see no further evidence of intrusion. The first supposition was, very naturally, that some person or persons had entered and robbed the house. Search was immediately made in the closets where silver plate, spoons, forks, etc., were kept. All were found safe and undisturbed. A gold watch, left in an exposed place, remained there as left. The impression still remained that burglars had been in; and, on examination of the windows, one was found that could be raised from the outside, and though there was no evidence of entrance having been made there, no doubt existed that this was the place of access. Thinking they might return during the afternoon, Dr. Phelps remained at home, the other members of the family going again to church. Being left alone, the doctor armed himself, and, selecting a secluded position, awaited the return of the burglars. There was no disturbance during the afternoon; no sound of footfall; all remained quiet. On the return of the family, after the service, usually closing at three o’clock, several other articles were found out of place, but not in a way to make it certain that they were not moved in the morning. Articles of kitchen furniture were changed about. A teakettle, which had been used at dinner-time, was found hidden behind some boxes in the cellar. The bread, sugar-bowl, eggs, and numerous other things kept in the kitchen, were found where they did not belong, and where they had evidently been placed in some way which the family could not account for. Upon entering the middle chamber, occupied as a sleeping-room, a sheet was found spread over the bed outside the counterpane, and beneath which was a nightgown and chemise laid out with the arms folded across the breast, with stockings placed in a position to represent, as it seemed, a corpse disposed as is usual before placing it in the coffin. On the wall were written characters resembling those said by certain clairvoyants to belong to a spiritual language, but which none of the family were able to decipher. Whether they had any significance, or how they came there, was alike an unanswerable question by the family; they had not observed them before. Occurrences ceased for that day and night, yet, no one thinking of any mystery in the matter, they imputed it to roguish boys, or others, who had effected entrance with false keys, for mischief rather than for robbery, and that the culprits would soon be detected. The next morning, March 11th, when the family went up stairs, after breakfast, the middle chamber had again been visited, exhibiting much the same scene336 of disorder presented the previous day. A sheet was spread out upon the floor, the washstand laid upon its back upon the sheet, a candlestick set upon the stand, the washbowl placed upon one side, and the pitcher on the other. The nightgown and chemise, used on the previous occasion to represent a dead body, were found one in the bowl, the other in the pitcher. It appears that these articles of clothing were not then in use; they had been placed in a trunk which stood in a closet adjoining that room. They were replaced in the trunk when removed from the bed the day before. As they were conversing in relation to the disposition of the things as above stated, Mrs. Phelps looked under the bed, and discovered articles there, partially concealed by the bed, resembling those in question. They were taken out and pronounced to be the same. Dr. Phelps had not before examined them, but then took them, noted the name and number on each, as they were marked, folded and placed them again in the trunk, remarking that he would put them where they would stay; did not lock the trunk, not having a key, but locked the closet and placed the key about his own person; then requesting the family to all leave the room first, which they did, the doctor, following, locked the door of the room, and kept the key. Having observed that Mrs. Phelps seemed a little troubled as to the mystery, he thought to convince her that there was no mystery in the matter, and, having secured the closet and room, he descended to the rooms below, following them all. After the lapse of some fifteen minutes, some person spoke to the doctor, upon which he went up to the chambers. At the head of the stairs, out in the hall, he found the same articles which he had left as before stated. He examined them, and was positive they were the same. He went to the door, found it locked, entered by applying the key from his pocket, went to the closet, found it locked, took the key from his pocket, opened the door, looked in the trunk, and the articles were gone! Dr. Phelps states that he was confident there was no deception in the case, and that he then, for the first, felt that there was a mystery about the affair. He had never believed in the appearing of ghosts or departed spirits, warnings, or any thing of that nature, and, at the age of threescore, had never seen or heard any thing connected with that class of phenomena. The evidence upon which such superstitions, as he termed them, rest, he had never examined, and, while he had no proof positive that they were impossible, and never did occur, he had no evidence to found a belief upon that they ever had. His idea of spiritual manifestations seems to have been that most, if not all, followed by a strict scrutiny, might be accounted for on natural or known principles, or some physical means, which would disrobe them of the mysterious altogether. But it was not to rest here. On the same day (March 11th) the moving and throwing of furniture commenced. An umbrella, standing at the end of the hall, leaped, without visible assistance, a distance of at least twenty-five feet. Dr. Phelps saw the movement, and knows there337 was no perceptible agency by which the motion was produced. A bucket, standing at the head of the stairs, was thrown into the entry below. Smaller articles, such as nails, forks, knives, spoons, bits of tin, iron, and keys, were thrown from different directions about the house. He says, ‘There were times when they came from such directions that they might have been thrown by some person in the house’—at least, that may be admitted; but in very many cases the motion and point of starting were such as to preclude all possibility of deception on the part of persons in the rooms. During the afternoon, Dr. and Mrs. Phelps had occasion to go to Bridgeport, a distance of some three miles. During their absence the shovel and tongs, standing in the dining-room, were thrown violently down the basement stairs; a piece of mourning-crape fastened to the knocker of the back door, and the mirrors in the front chambers covered with sheets and tablecloths, as is the custom in some parts of the country while a person lies dead in the house. The crape on the door Dr. Phelps did not see, but the covering on the mirrors he removed with his own hands. The position of the mirrors in one room was such that the coverings could not, without great difficulty, have been placed there by any person about the house. Various articles were said to have been thrown about the room—the phenomena continuing in his absence about the same as when he was present in the fore part of the day. Soon after sundown all was again quiet, and so continued through the night.
1669. “None of the families that had lived in the house before had ever been bothered or seen anything except normal events. After Captain Purcell died, the house became the property of his two daughters, and Dr. Phelps bought it in November, 1847. It had been empty for two years before this. Dr. Phelps and his family moved in on February 22, 1848. Nothing unusual happened to draw their attention until March 10, 1850; and, as mentioned before, there are no reports of any strange or unusual events occurring there prior to that date. From the dates provided, it's clear that Dr. Phelps had lived in the house for over two years and had found it to be a quiet and pleasant place to live—neither he nor any family member had been disturbed or alarmed by anything unusual. On March 10, as stated, it was a Sunday, and Dr. Phelps and his family—Mrs. Phelps, two daughters, and two sons (the oldest daughter was sixteen, the son was twelve, and the younger daughter was six; these were children from Mrs. Phelps's first marriage), along with a son from his current marriage who was almost three—attended church. An Irish servant girl, who had worked with the family for about six months and had proven to be honest and reliable, went to Bridgeport that day to attend the Catholic church. When leaving the house in the morning, Dr. Phelps locked the chamber doors and put the keys in his pocket; those that could be locked were secured inside with the keys left in them. The only door to access the chambers was locked, with the key taken by Dr. Phelps. He also locked the front door from the inside, left the key in the lock, and then left through the back door, locking it and placing the key in his pocket. When they returned from church at noon, the front door was found wide open; the chamber doors that had been secured were now open; in the nursery, the furniture was in disarray—chairs were on the bed and thrown on the floor; items like the shovel, tongs, and poker were in unusual positions—all indicating that some disruptive force had been at work during their absence. Upon discovering the chaos, Dr. Phelps checked other rooms on the same floor but found no further signs of intrusion. The initial thought was understandably that someone had entered and robbed the house. An immediate search of the closets where silver plates, spoons, forks, and similar items were stored found everything safe and untouched. A gold watch that was left in plain sight remained undisturbed. There was still a suspicion that burglars had been there; upon checking the windows, one was found that could be opened from the outside, and although there was no evidence of entry from it, there was uncertainty about it being a potential access point. Thinking they might return in the afternoon, Dr. Phelps decided to stay home while the rest of the family went back to church. Left alone, he armed himself and took a hidden position, waiting for the supposed burglars to return. There was no disturbance throughout the afternoon; no sign of someone entering the house. When the family returned after the service, which usually ended around three o'clock, several other items were found out of place, but in a manner that didn’t confirm they were disturbed earlier that day. Kitchen items were rearranged. A teakettle that had been used at lunch was found hidden behind some boxes in the cellar. Bread, sugar, eggs, and a number of other kitchen items were found in places they didn’t belong, evidently moved in a way the family couldn’t explain. Upon entering the middle chamber, which served as a sleeping room, they found a sheet spread over the bed outside the counterpane, and beneath it lay a nightgown and chemise folded across the breast, with stockings arranged as if mimicking a corpse prepared for a coffin. On the wall were characters resembling a spiritual language said by some clairvoyants to exist, but none of the family could decipher them. It was unclear if they had any meaning or how they ended up there, as they hadn’t noticed them before. Events ceased for that day and night, but no one saw any mystery in the situation; they attributed it to mischievous boys or others who had slipped in with fake keys to create mischief rather than theft, thinking the culprits would soon be caught. The next morning, March 11th, when the family went upstairs after breakfast, they found the middle chamber had been visited again, showing a scene much like the day before. A sheet was spread out on the floor, the washstand was turned upside down on it, with a candlestick placed on the stand, the washbowl at one side, and the pitcher at the other. The nightgown and chemise, previously used to represent a dead body, were found—one in the washbowl and the other in the pitcher. It seems these clothing items weren’t in use; they had been stored in a trunk in an adjoining closet. They had been returned to the trunk after being removed from the bed the day before. While discussing the arrangement of these items, Mrs. Phelps looked under the bed and found articles that matched what had been removed, partially hidden by the bed. They were taken out and identified as the same items. Dr. Phelps hadn’t checked them before but then noted the name and number on each item as marked, refolded them, and returned them to the trunk, saying he would secure them so they wouldn’t be disturbed again. He didn’t lock the trunk since he didn’t have a key but did lock the closet and kept the key with him; then he asked the family to leave the room first, which they did. Following them out, he locked the door to the room and kept the key. Noticing that Mrs. Phelps seemed a bit worried about the mystery, he aimed to show her there was no mystery, and after securing the closet and room, he went downstairs to join the family. After about fifteen minutes, someone spoke to Dr. Phelps, prompting him to return upstairs. At the top of the stairs, in the hallway, he found the same items he had left as before. He inspected them and was *certain they were the same*. He tried the door, found it locked, entered using the key from his pocket, went to the closet, found it locked, took the key out again, opened it, checked the trunk, and the items were gone! Dr. Phelps insists he was sure there was no trickery involved and that for the first time he felt there was a mystery about the situation. He had never believed in ghosts or spirits, omens, or anything of that sort and, at sixty years old, had never encountered anything related to those kinds of phenomena. He had never examined the evidence behind such superstitions, as he described them, and although he could not definitively prove they were impossible and never happened, he had no evidence to support a belief that they ever did. His view on spiritual manifestations seemed to be that most, if not all, could be explained through natural or known principles or some physical means, stripping them of their mysterious nature. But it didn’t stop there. On the same day (March 11th), furniture began to move and get tossed around. An umbrella that was standing at the end of the hall jumped a distance of at least twenty-five feet without any visible assistance. Dr. Phelps witnessed this movement and confirmed that there was no discernible force causing the motion. A bucket placed at the top of the stairs was thrown into the hallway below. Smaller objects—nails, forks, knives, spoons, bits of tin, iron, and keys—were thrown from different spots around the house. He stated, ‘There were times when they came from such angles that they *might* have been thrown by someone in the house’—which could be accepted; but in many instances, the direction and origin of the movement excluded any possibility of deception by people in the rooms. During the afternoon, Dr. and Mrs. Phelps needed to go to Bridgeport, about three miles away. While they were gone, the shovel and tongs from the dining room were thrown forcefully down the basement stairs; a piece of mourning crape was attached to the knocker of the back door, and the mirrors in the front rooms were covered with sheets and tablecloths, as is customary in some areas while someone lies dead in the house. Dr. Phelps didn’t see the crape on the door, but he removed the coverings from the mirrors with his own hands. The position of the mirrors in one room was such that the coverings could not, without significant difficulty, have been placed there by anyone in the house. Various items allegedly continued to be tossed around the room—the events ongoing in his absence were similar to those that had occurred earlier in the day. Shortly after sunset, everything went quiet again and stayed that way through the night.
1670. “The next morning, (March 12th,) soon after the family were up, the same phenomena began again; knives, forks, spoons, blocks of wood, nails, etc. etc. were thrown from different directions, and with increased frequency, attended by still stranger circumstances, and those of a still more mysterious character. Mrs. Phelps expressed some alarm, and a wish that some of the neighbours might be called in. Dr. Phelps called on a retired clergyman of Stratford, a man of extensive information, much experience, and sound judgment, who was universally admitted to be capable of rendering correct judgment and good advice in such a case. He requested him to call and spend an hour at the house, to which he cheerfully consented. Dr. P. told him that his family had been a little excited by some occurrences in the house, but did not state any of the details of the matter, but desired that he would sit with them for a short time and witness for himself. He remained all day, but was, at first, firmly of the opinion that the occurrences were produced, in some way, through the agency of the girl, or some other person about the house, and his main attention was directed to the girl in the kitchen, or the children, in the expectation that he should detect them in doing it.
1670. “The next morning, (March 12th,) soon after the family got up, the same phenomena started again; knives, forks, spoons, blocks of wood, nails, and so on were thrown from different directions, and with more frequency, accompanied by even stranger circumstances that were more mysterious in nature. Mrs. Phelps expressed some concern and suggested that they should call in some neighbors. Dr. Phelps reached out to a retired clergyman from Stratford, a man with extensive knowledge, plenty of experience, and good judgment, who was universally recognized as capable of providing sound advice in such situations. He asked him to come over and spend an hour at their house, to which he happily agreed. Dr. P. explained that his family had been a bit rattled by some events in the house but didn’t go into detail, just asking him to sit with them for a little while and see for himself. He stayed all day but was initially convinced that the events were somehow caused by the girl or someone else in the house, and he mainly focused his attention on the girl in the kitchen or the children, expecting to catch them in the act.”
1671. “The door leading from the parlours to the kitchen was, by his request, locked, and all communication between it and the other parts of the house cut off; still, the throwing of articles went on as before. The children were sent out of the room, and the doors locked; but this made338 no difference. He stayed through most of the day on Thursday, and returned soon after breakfast next morning, and remained most of the time for nearly three weeks. He became satisfied, before the close of the second day, that neither the girl in the kitchen nor the children had any agency in producing the strange movements. During the day (March 12th) some of the neighbours were in the house, and small blocks of wood were seen to fall in different places in their presence; but only one person noticed them in a way to excite inquiry, and that person was requested not to mention what she had seen.
1671. “The door from the living room to the kitchen was locked at his request, cutting off all communication between it and the other parts of the house; still, things continued to be thrown around as before. The children were sent out of the room, and the doors were locked; but this didn’t change anything. He stayed for most of the day on Thursday, and came back shortly after breakfast the next morning, remaining almost constantly for nearly three weeks. By the end of the second day, he was convinced that neither the girl in the kitchen nor the children were responsible for the strange movements. During the day (March 12th), some neighbors were in the house, and small pieces of wood were seen to fall in different spots while they were there; but only one person noticed them enough to raise questions, and that person was asked not to mention what she had seen.338
1672. “On Wednesday, March 13th, the manifestations commenced early in the morning, in the middle chamber, the room in which two children slept, and began while they were both asleep. A book, standing in the library, ten or twelve feet from the bed, leaped from the shelf into the middle of the room. The blower, which was in the grate, leaped out on the floor, a distance of at least six feet, the noise of which first awakened the children. At the breakfast-table several articles were thrown; among them a large potato, which had been sent from Pennsylvania, and laid up in a closet in the east chamber, fell on the table directly by the side of Dr. P.'s plate, in a manner that no person could have done it without instant detection. The doctor’s curiosity was much excited, and he watched, with all the scrutiny he was capable, every person in the room. He took up the potato and let it fall from different heights, in order to determine how far it must have fallen to have made the concussion that it did; and it was adjudged by all that the distance could not have been more than twelve or fifteen inches.
1672. “On Wednesday, March 13th, the events started early in the morning, in the middle room where two children were sleeping, and it began while they were both asleep. A book, sitting in the library, ten or twelve feet away from the bed, jumped off the shelf into the middle of the room. The blower, which was in the fireplace, jumped out onto the floor, a distance of at least six feet, making a noise that was what first woke the children. At the breakfast table, several items were thrown; among them, a large potato that had been sent from Pennsylvania and stored in a closet in the east room fell onto the table right next to Dr. P.’s plate, in a way that no one could have done without being immediately noticed. The doctor was very curious and observed everyone in the room with great attention. He picked up the potato and dropped it from different heights to figure out how far it must have fallen to create the noise it did; everyone agreed that the distance could not have been more than twelve or fifteen inches.”
1673. “Rev. Mr. —— came in soon after breakfast, and remained during the day. Several Bibles were opened at different passages, which seemed to be selected with a great deal of care, and indicated either by placing small pieces of paper on them or turning down a leaf. These things first occurred in the middle chamber, where the library stood. While the family were at dinner similar things were done in the parlour adjoining the dining-room. Two Bibles and an Episcopal prayer-book were opened at different passages, chairs turned forward on the floor, two solar lamps placed on the floor, a hat and man’s cap put one on each; nearly every thing in the room had been moved, and in so short a time, that it seems wholly inadmissible that any person about the house could have done it; beside, the whole household were in the dining-room, all seated at the table, except the servant, and she was employed waiting on the table.
1673. “Rev. Mr. —— came in soon after breakfast and stayed for the day. Several Bibles were opened to different passages, which seemed to have been chosen very carefully, indicated either by small pieces of paper placed on them or by having the pages turned down. This first happened in the middle room, where the library was located. While the family was at dinner, similar things were done in the parlor next to the dining room. Two Bibles and an Episcopal prayer book were opened to various passages, chairs were pulled forward on the floor, two solar lamps were placed on the floor, and a hat and a man’s cap were set on each of them; nearly everything in the room had been moved, and in such short a time that it seems entirely impossible that anyone in the house could have done it; besides, the entire household was in the dining room, all seated at the table except the servant, who was busy waiting on the table.”
1675. “The throwing of various things occupied the afternoon. The articles thrown were picked up and placed upon the mantel, and between339 the hours of one and four o’clock, the number amounted to forty-six; among which were nails, bits of tin, iron, keys, and small blocks, all of which were gathered from different parts of the house; most of them from closets on the second floor and the chambers. At one time, while Mr. M-—- was standing near the centre of the room, a padlock, which was known to have been in the closet of the middle chamber, fell at his feet. He took it in his hand, letting it fall from different heights, to discover the probable distance it must have fallen to produce the concussion. After various trials it was judged to have fallen not more than two or two and a half feet. As Dr. P. was sitting, perhaps ten feet from the piano-forte, he saw a small toy-mouse, which was on the piano, arise as if tossed, and, describing a parabola as it came, fall at his side, so near that he took it from the floor without leaving his chair. This he speaks of seeing as distinctly as he ever saw any thing, the whole being perfectly in his view. He also saw, in the same way, among other things, a nail, cotton-spool, and key, arise from behind the sofa, which stood diagonally across the corner of the room. He arose, went to the sofa, looking behind and under it, but could discover nothing which might give impulse to the articles. While examining the carpet about the sofa to find if any other things were there, without success, as his eyes were directed to one spot, there arose from that very point a piece of cheese-rind, perhaps eight inches from the floor; when he saw it first it arose four or five feet, passed over the sofa, and fell on the floor. He is positive it was not there when he was looking at the carpet, and knows there were no visible means of its moving.
1675. “The afternoon was filled with throwing various items. The things thrown were collected and placed on the mantel, and between one and four o’clock, they totaled forty-six; which included nails, bits of tin, iron, keys, and small blocks, all gathered from different areas of the house, mostly from closets on the second floor and the bedrooms. At one point, while Mr. M—- stood in the center of the room, a padlock that had been in the closet of the middle bedroom fell at his feet. He picked it up and dropped it from different heights to determine how far it must have fallen to cause the noise. After several attempts, it was estimated to have fallen no more than two to two and a half feet. As Dr. P. sat about ten feet from the piano, he saw a small toy mouse on the piano rise as if it had been tossed, following a curved path before landing right beside him, so close that he picked it up from the floor without leaving his chair. He clearly recalls seeing this as distinctly as he ever saw anything, with everything perfectly in view. He also saw, in a similar manner, a nail, cotton spool, and key rise from behind the sofa that was placed diagonally in the corner of the room. He got up, approached the sofa, and looked behind and beneath it, but found nothing that could have caused the movement of the items. While inspecting the carpet around the sofa to see if there were other items, he unsuccessfully directed his gaze to a specific spot when, from that exact place, a piece of cheese rind rose, perhaps eight inches from the floor; when he first noticed it, it rose four or five feet, passed over the sofa, and landed on the floor. He is certain it wasn’t there when he was looking at the carpet and knows there were no visible means for it to have moved.”
1676. “Mr. M-—- suggested, as he was about to leave on Wednesday night, that if the strange phenomena should return, he would like to have some other persons called in. Early the next morning, Thursday, the 14th, the manifestations commenced about as they had on the previous day. Soon after breakfast a sheet was found spread upon the floor, several Bibles were opened at different places, the candlesticks, in a row, the highest in the middle, and covered with a sheet; other articles changed about the room, without any seeming design, more than to attract attention. Mr. M-—- proposed that notes be despatched to Rev. Mr. W-—-, Congregational minister, and Mr. Plant, a lawyer of high standing and respectability, which was accordingly done. It was at this time that they first began to hear rappings and heavy poundings. A loud sound, like some person striking the floor with some heavy substance, was heard, generally in the middle chamber. This was usually done when no one was in the chamber, and on any one entering all was still. In one instance a chair was seen to rise from the floor and beat down again, five or six times, with a violence which caused the house to tremble so as to be felt in all the adjoining apartments. A large plated candlestick, standing on the mantel, was moved by some unseen power to the floor, and then rose up and down, beating the floor, until the candlestick was broken. This340 was the first article that was damaged about the house. Several times during the day loud noises, like some one pounding with an axe or some heavy substance on the floor, were heard in different parts of the house, and several times the loud poundings terminated with a frightful scream; it was not a cry of distress, or any thing that could be easily imitated, seeming like something between the cry of a cat and the bleating of a calf, but louder than either. These sounds occurred in all probably twenty times while the manifestations were going on. Sometimes the screams seemed to be in the third story, sometimes in the front-hall chamber, several times out in the yard, and occasionally in other places. There was at no time any audible expression of words. The sounds consisted of poundings, knockings, and screamings. On this day the first images were found, which will be spoken of more fully hereafter.
1676. “Mr. M-—- suggested, just before leaving on Wednesday night, that if the strange events happened again, he wanted to have some other people called in. Early the next morning, Thursday the 14th, the manifestations started up again, just like the day before. Soon after breakfast, a sheet was found laid out on the floor, several Bibles were opened to different pages, the candlesticks were lined up with the tallest in the middle, covered with a sheet; other items were moved around the room in a way that seemed designed to draw attention. Mr. M-—- suggested sending notes to Rev. Mr. W-—-, the Congregational minister, and Mr. Plant, a well-respected lawyer, which was done. It was at this time they started to hear knocking and loud pounding. A loud sound, similar to someone hitting the floor with a heavy object, was heard, generally coming from the middle room. This usually happened when no one was in the room, and as soon as someone entered, everything went quiet. In one instance, a chair was seen lift off the floor and slam down again, five or six times, with such force that it made the house shake, felt in all the nearby rooms. A large plated candlestick on the mantel was moved to the floor by some unseen force, then went up and down, banging against the floor until it broke. This340 was the first object that was damaged in the house. Several times throughout the day, loud noises, like someone hitting the floor with an axe or a heavy object, were heard in different areas of the house, and often these loud sounds ended with a terrifying scream; it wasn’t a cry of distress or anything easily mimicked, sounding sort of like a mix between a cat's cry and a calf's bleating, but louder than both. These sounds happened probably twenty times while the manifestations were occurring. Sometimes the screams appeared to come from the third story, sometimes from the front hall room, a few times out in the yard, and occasionally from other places. There was never any audible speech. The sounds consisted of pounding, knocking, and screaming. On this day, the first images were found, which will be discussed in more detail later.
1677. “In the evening of this day, just after some young ladies had called, Dr. P.‘s daughter returned to the parlour, it being between nine and ten o’clock. After seeing the young ladies to the door, an iron stand, in which stood the fire-shovel, tongs, and poker, leaped from the hearth, where it stood, into the middle of the floor, and rose up and beat the floor with a force that made a jar that could be felt, and the sound heard, in any part of the house. This was seen only by the daughter, but Dr. P. and wife heard the noise. The daughter ran through the dining-room to get up stairs, and, as she passed, a large table was standing, with the other furniture, arranged for breakfast the next morning. The table was three feet nine inches wide, and five feet three inches long, made of solid mahogany; and when she entered the room it rose up and beat five or six times against the floor with a force which made the house jar. The noise was heard by many persons in the house. Mrs. P. was alarmed, and screamed out, ‘Oh, take me from this place!’ This happened between nine and ten o’clock, P. M. Previous to this time all manifestations had ceased by sundown, or a little after.
1677. “In the evening of this day, shortly after some young ladies had visited, Dr. P.’s daughter returned to the living room, it being between nine and ten o’clock. After seeing the young ladies to the door, a metal stand, which held the fire-shovel, tongs, and poker, jumped from the hearth and landed in the middle of the floor. It rose up and struck the floor with such force that it caused a thud that could be felt and heard throughout the house. Only the daughter witnessed this, but Dr. P. and his wife heard the noise. The daughter hurried through the dining room to get upstairs, and as she passed, a large table was set up with other furniture, prepared for breakfast the next morning. The table was three feet nine inches wide and five feet three inches long, made of solid mahogany; and when she entered the room, it lifted and pounded against the floor five or six times with enough force to shake the house. Many people in the house heard the noise. Mrs. P. was frightened and screamed, ‘Oh, take me from this place!’ This occurred between nine and ten o'clock, PM Before this time, all activities had stopped by sundown or shortly after.”
1678. “Soon after daylight on Friday, March 15th, movements similar to those on previous days commenced. Henry, a lad then eleven and a half years of age, attended the academy, and nothing had, thus far, ever occurred to connect these strange phenomena with his presence. Dr. P. had never heard or thought of particular persons being ‘mediums.’ But on this day the remarkable occurrences seemed to be connected more or less with this boy. His cap was torn on his head, so as to be entirely destroyed. Another one which he put on was taken in the same way. First a small hole opened in the crown; this gradually extended, and in a short time it was torn into many pieces. On another cap characters were made, apparently with chalk. They resembled those sometimes made by persons in the higher mesmeric state, describing them as characters of a spiritual language. Five or six of these characters were, at one time, made on the boy’s cap. Others, supposed to constitute a sentence, were341 written on a red pocket-handkerchief; others on his pantaloons and coat, and on the inside of his sack-coat. Copies of these characters were taken with great care, and were preserved till September following, when they were mysteriously destroyed. From this time it became evident that some of the phenomena had some kind of connection with this boy.
1678. “Soon after daylight on Friday, March 15th, strange events similar to those of previous days began again. Henry, an eleven-and-a-half-year-old boy, went to the academy, and until now, nothing had ever linked these odd occurrences to his presence. Dr. P. had never considered that specific individuals could be ‘mediums.’ But on this day, the extraordinary happenings seemed to be more or less tied to this boy. His cap was ripped to the point of being completely ruined. Another one he put on also met the same fate. First, a small hole appeared in the top; this gradually widened, and before long, it was ripped into many pieces. On another cap, symbols appeared, seemingly drawn with chalk. They looked like the symbols sometimes produced by people in a deep mesmerized state, described as a kind of spiritual language. Five or six of these symbols were made on the boy’s cap at one time. Others, thought to form a sentence, were341 written on a red handkerchief, and more appeared on his trousers and coat, as well as on the inside of his sack-coat. Copies of these symbols were carefully taken and kept until September, when they were mysteriously destroyed. From this point, it became clear that some of the phenomena had some sort of connection with this boy.
1679. “An umbrella which he was carrying was, in a mysterious manner, torn in several pieces. His pantaloons were torn from the bottom upward, as high as the knee, and sometimes higher, and were literally torn to ribbons, an inch or more wide. This occurred several times under the immediate inspection of Rev. Mr. M., which seems to fix the fact that, in those instances at least, no power visible did it. Thus it continued for several weeks, clothing to the amount of twenty dollars being destroyed. At one time, while he was riding in a carriage with Dr. P., his cap on his head was torn in a mysterious manner, and his pants torn from the waistband to the bottom, in a way that no human power could have done. Dr. P. heard them torn, but could see nothing doing it, and knows the boy could not have done it himself. It was on this day, March 15th, that images, dressed in articles of clothing, were again seen; only two or three appeared on that day. The most extraordinary occurrences of this kind took place on Saturday, the 16th. Soon after breakfast two or three images appeared in the middle chamber; soon again another, followed by others still, numbering in all eleven or twelve. They were formed of articles of clothing, found about the house, stuffed to resemble the human figure. A lady’s dress would be stuffed in some cases with a muff; again with a pillow, and sometimes with other dresses; a bonnet and shoes were aptly placed to complete the figure. These, on this occasion, all but one, represented females in the attitude of devotion, some having Bibles or prayer-books placed before them. One, formed of Mrs. P.‘s dress, so much resembled the real, that the little boy, scarce three years old, coming into the room with his sister, older, whispered, ‘Be still, ma is saying prayers.’
1679. “An umbrella he was carrying was mysteriously torn into several pieces. His trousers were ripped from the bottom up to the knee, and sometimes even higher, literally shredded into ribbons about an inch wide. This happened multiple times under the direct supervision of Rev. Mr. M., which suggests that, at least in those cases, no visible force caused it. This continued for several weeks, with clothing worth twenty dollars being destroyed. At one point, while he was riding in a carriage with Dr. P., his cap was mysteriously torn from his head, and his pants ripped from the waistband to the hem in a way that no human could have done. Dr. P. heard the tearing but couldn't see anything doing it, and he knew the boy couldn’t have done it himself. On this day, March 15th, images dressed in pieces of clothing were once again seen; only two or three appeared that day. The most extraordinary events of this kind occurred on Saturday, the 16th. Shortly after breakfast, two or three images appeared in the middle chamber, followed by others, totaling eleven or twelve. They were made from clothing found around the house, stuffed to resemble human figures. A lady’s dress was stuffed in some cases with a muff; in others, it was filled with a pillow or other dresses; a bonnet and shoes were neatly arranged to complete the figures. On this occasion, all but one represented females in a posture of devotion, some with Bibles or prayer books placed in front of them. One figure, made from Mrs. P.'s dress, resembled her so closely that the little boy, barely three years old, came into the room with his older sister and whispered, ‘Be quiet, mom is saying prayers.’”
1680. “A portable writing-desk, usually standing on the secretary in the room, was taken and placed upon the floor, a towel spread over it, and the image of a child kneeling beside it. A Yankee clock was taken from the mantel in the nursery and placed upon the floor in the middle room, a distance of twenty feet, and so carefully done that the clock was still going when discovered in its new place, though it stopped some time after. It does not appear that any of these images were seen in the process of construction, or that the clothing, which was gathered from different localities, was seen in the act of moving. When persons entered the room every thing was still, the clothing about the floor, which, upon going in again within a few minutes, were found wrought into forms. The marked rapidity of their construction, and the lifelike appearance of them, seems to have been truly wonderful. During this day several others than members342 of the family were present. In several instances, when the rooms were closed and the doors guarded, so that no person could enter, the images were constructed. To one reading or listening to the relation of these facts, the mischief and cunning evinced will seem amusing as well as most wonderful; but to the family, who bore the annoyance and witnessed the terrifying demonstrations, it was a serious and trying affair.
1680. “A portable writing desk, usually sitting on the secretary in the room, was taken and placed on the floor, with a towel spread over it, and an image of a child kneeling beside it. A Yankee clock was removed from the mantel in the nursery and set down in the middle room, twenty feet away, and it was done so carefully that the clock was still ticking when found in its new spot, although it stopped shortly after. It seems that none of these images were seen while they were being made, nor was the clothing, gathered from various places, observed moving. When people entered the room, everything was still, with the clothing on the floor, which, upon returning a few minutes later, was found shaped into forms. The speed of their creation and their lifelike appearance were truly remarkable. Throughout this day, several guests besides family members were present. In several cases, when the rooms were closed and the doors were watched, ensuring no one could enter, the images were formed. To someone reading or listening to this account, the mischief and cleverness displayed may seem amusing as well as fascinating; however, for the family, who endured the disturbances and witnessed the frightening events, it was a serious and challenging situation. 342
1681. “The reader will keep in mind that this was on Saturday of the first week of these strange proceedings, and many persons were still believing that they must be produced by some one in the house; every member of the family therefore was subjected to the most rigid scrutiny, which makes it morally certain that no member of the household could have had any agency in the matter without being at once detected. Beside the neatness and despatch with which they were formed, the natural appearance of most of them must have required taste and skill beyond the conception of ordinary persons in the flesh. Mr. M. remained there throughout the day, Mr. W., Governor Plant, and Captain S., a part of the day. During the day and evening various things were thrown in different parts of the house. A brick-bat, which lay on the stairs leading to the third story, was thrown violently down stairs, passing very near the head of the eldest daughter as she was descending the stairs. A fire-shovel was also thrown near her, which she first saw high above her in a position to fall upon her head. She was several times constrained to cry out from fear, so much as to cause apprehension on her account.
1681. “The reader should keep in mind that this took place on Saturday of the first week of these strange events, and many people still believed that they must be caused by someone in the house; therefore, every family member was subjected to intense scrutiny, making it very likely that no one in the household could have been involved in the situation without being immediately caught. Besides the neatness and quickness with which they were created, the natural look of most of them would have required a level of taste and skill beyond what ordinary people could imagine. Mr. M. stayed there throughout the day, while Mr. W., Governor Plant, and Captain S. were present for part of it. Throughout the day and evening, various items were thrown in different parts of the house. A brick was thrown violently down the stairs, narrowly missing the eldest daughter as she came down. A fire shovel was also thrown near her, which she first noticed high above her, about to fall on her head. She was several times forced to cry out in fear, causing concern for her safety.”
1682. “[I omit, in this place, at the request of Dr. Phelps, a minute account of occurrences in which the medium seemed to be one who has now grown to be a young woman, and would feel a repugnance at having her name mentioned in connection with the subject. At one time a ribbon was tied around her neck, while she was sleeping, so tight as to cause a serious affection of the brain. Dr. Phelps was sitting in the room when it was done. Several other remarkable occurrences are omitted, on account of her connection with them. In the main they do not differ materially in their nature from the occurrences herein related.]
1682. “[I’m leaving out, at Dr. Phelps's request, a detailed account of events involving the medium, who has now grown into a young woman and would feel uncomfortable having her name associated with this subject. At one point, a ribbon was tied around her neck while she was sleeping, so tightly that it caused a serious brain issue. Dr. Phelps was in the room when it happened. Several other notable events are also left out due to her involvement. Overall, they are not significantly different in nature from the events discussed here.]
1683. “The hiding of hats, caps, clothing, &c., seems at this time to have become of common occurrence. On several occasions a hat was seen to go up stairs—not thrown, but seemed to be carried rapidly by unseen hands. For several days Dr. P. was forced to keep his hat under lock and key to prevent its disappearance, if left out as usual. Coats, hats, and canes of gentlemen, who were strangers in the house, were spirited away; the only object seeming to be the gratification of mischievous desires, with the exception of a few instances. They were found sometimes in the chimney, under the bed, and in the bottom of trunks. The design seemed to be to detain the owners to witness further demonstrations. Two gentlemen from an adjoining town called, one of whom had expressed an earnest desire to witness the phenomena; but having passed several hours, and343 seeing nothing, they were about to leave, when the person who expressed the wish found himself minus a hat. A thorough searching followed, but no hat could be found; consequently, the gentleman decided to remain until the next day. During the evening and night, phenomena transpired sufficient to gratify his most abundant desire. Similar cases, with like results, afterward occurred.
1683. “The hiding of hats, caps, clothing, etc., seems to have become quite common lately. On several occasions, a hat was seen going up the stairs—not tossed, but appearing to be quickly carried by invisible hands. For several days, Dr. P. had to keep his hat locked up to avoid having it disappear when left out as usual. Coats, hats, and canes of male guests who were new to the house often went missing; the only motivation seemed to be a mischievous urge, except for a few cases. They were sometimes found in the chimney, under the bed, and at the bottom of trunks. The intent seemed to be to keep the owners around to see more strange occurrences. Two gentlemen from a nearby town visited, one of whom was eager to see the phenomena; however, after spending several hours and seeing nothing, they were about to leave when the man who wanted to see something realized his hat was missing. A thorough search followed, but no hat could be found; as a result, the gentleman decided to stay until the next day. That evening and night, various phenomena occurred that fulfilled his highest expectations. Similar incidents, with the same results, happened later on.”
1684. “On the nineteenth and twentieth, little occurred to cause alarm. Some of the family heard loud and frightful screams in an adjacent outhouse, which must have been torturing to the feelings, much more so than the silent images. Small articles were also thrown about the house. Reports had now got abroad, and some excitement was being produced, as is always the case in country towns, where each person knows their neighbour’s private business quite as well, and sometimes better, than those most interested. And in a matter of this kind all efforts to prevent publicity would prove unavailing. Curiosity and staring wonder would overstep all bounds of propriety and respect for the private rights and feelings of the family, forgetting that it is no slight thing for the harmony and quiet of a household to be invaded, each member being subjected to suspicion, ill-natured scrutiny, or careless reproach. On this subject I can speak from experience, having myself passed the ordeal. To persons of refined sensibility it is a trial indeed. In this case, Dr. P. adopted the rule of giving all who called an opportunity to investigate for themselves, and to this rule he adhered, notwithstanding the annoyance such a constant visitation must have occasioned. In one instance, while a rabble was gathered outside, a stranger, who came unintroduced by letter or otherwise, asked to spend the night, and was refused for obvious reasons.
1684. “On the nineteenth and twentieth, not much happened to raise concern. Some family members heard loud, terrifying screams coming from a nearby outhouse, which must have been more distressing than the quiet images. Small items were also tossed around the house. Word had started to spread, creating some buzz, as always happens in small towns where everyone knows each other's business, sometimes better than those directly involved. In situations like this, trying to keep things private is pointless. Curiosity and nosiness will overstep any boundaries of decency and respect for the family's private rights and feelings, forgetting how disruptive it is for the peace and comfort of a home to be disturbed, with every member under suspicion, harsh scrutiny, or careless blame. I can speak from experience on this matter, having gone through it myself. For those with sensitive feelings, it is truly a trial. In this instance, Dr. P. decided to let anyone who came visit investigate for themselves, and he stuck to this decision, despite the annoyance of constant visitors. Once, while a crowd gathered outside, a stranger, who showed up without any introduction or letter, asked to stay the night and was turned away for obvious reasons."
1685. “On Friday and Saturday, March 23d and 24th, the disturbances increased, and became still more annoying. Loud poundings and screams were heard in different places, and on Saturday evening, between sunset and dark, Harry was passing through the dining-room, and thought himself suddenly caught up by some unseen power from the floor, and supposed that he was about to be carried off through the ceiling. He was very much frightened, and screamed so as to alarm the family, and remained in a state of great nervous excitement for two or three hours, and the effects did not wholly wear off for more than a week. At times he was in such a state as to require two men to hold him. For several days after this, he spent a portion of his time with one of the neighbours during the day; but the disturbances continued the same at the house, although he appeared to be more or less the medium as long as the phenomena continued. At one time he was thrown into a cistern of water; at another he was tied up and suspended from a tree, and several times was thrown into a state of apparent insensibility, in which he would remain from ten to fifteen minutes, and for which no human cause could be assigned.
1685. “On Friday and Saturday, March 23rd and 24th, the disturbances intensified and became even more bothersome. Loud banging and screams were heard in various places, and on Saturday evening, between sunset and darkness, Harry was walking through the dining room when he suddenly felt as if an unseen force had lifted him off the floor, making him think he was about to be taken up through the ceiling. He was really scared and screamed loudly, alarming the family. He remained extremely anxious for two or three hours, and the effects didn’t fully wear off for over a week. At times, he was so agitated that it took two men to hold him down. For several days afterward, he spent part of his days with a neighbor, but the disturbances continued at home, even though he seemed to be more or less the focal point as long as the events persisted. Once, he was thrown into a cistern full of water; another time, he was tied up and hung from a tree, and several times he fell into a state of apparent unconsciousness, lasting from ten to fifteen minutes, with no clear explanation for it."
1686. “Somewhere about the 20th or 22d of March, Dr. P.‘s attention344 was called to a pamphlet, (Capron and Barron’s,) giving a history of the ‘mysterious noises’ at Rochester and Auburn. Several persons who had read the same proposed to question the agents of these disturbances in the manner there recorded, and see if they could get answers to questions. To this the doctor objected, for reasons known to himself, but which may readily be imagined by those knowing his position in life, and his general opinions of such phenomena.
1686. “Around the 20th or 22nd of March, Dr. P.'s attention344 was drawn to a pamphlet (by Capron and Barron) that detailed the history of the ‘mysterious noises’ in Rochester and Auburn. Several people who had read it suggested questioning the sources of these disturbances as described in the pamphlet to see if they could get answers. The doctor was against this idea for reasons he kept to himself, but which can easily be imagined by those familiar with his life and views on such phenomena."
1687. “On the 26th of March Anna left Stratford, and on the 3d of April Harry also left. No manifestations took place while both were away. Harry was absent a week, and Anna three weeks; but the very day that Harry returned, the manifestations commenced with greater power than ever. Even before he arrived at the house, a paper with some mysterious characters was dropped near the front door. These characters were interpreted by a clairvoyant[37] to read as follows:
1687. “On March 26th, Anna left Stratford, and on April 3rd, Harry left as well. While both were gone, nothing unusual happened. Harry was away for a week, and Anna for three weeks; however, the very day Harry returned, the strange occurrences began again, stronger than ever. Even before he reached the house, a paper with some mysterious symbols was found near the front door. A clairvoyant interpreted these symbols to mean the following:
1691. The ‘wicked ones,’ in this case, seemed to come nearer the truth than the ‘good ones;’ for, on the afternoon of the eighth of April, the breaking of glass commenced for the first time, by the breaking of a pane in a mysterious manner. In the evening of the same day another was broken during family prayers, some of the pieces falling inside and some outside. There were no indications of any thing being thrown against it.
1691. The 'bad ones,' in this case, appeared to be closer to the truth than the 'good ones;' because, on the afternoon of April 8th, the glass started to break for the first time, with a pane breaking in a mysterious way. Later that evening, another pane shattered during family prayers, with some pieces landing inside and others outside. There were no signs that anything was thrown at it.
1692. From this time forward for several weeks glass was broken almost daily, until the whole number of panes broken amounted to seventy-one in the house and out-buildings. Most of them were broken by something being thrown against them; among the articles were a brush, a shoe, a poker, a fire-shovel, a candlestick, a pair of snuffers, books, and numerous other things; occasionally a stone or piece of brick, thrown from the outside.
1692. From then on, for several weeks, glass was broken almost every day, until the total number of broken panes reached seventy-one in the house and outbuildings. Most of them were shattered by something being thrown at them; among the items were a brush, a shoe, a poker, a fire shovel, a candlestick, a pair of snuffers, books, and many other things; occasionally, a stone or piece of brick was thrown from the outside.
1693. Dr. P. thinks it would have been possible, but not probable, that, in some of these cases, they might have been broken by human agency; but he was an eye-witness in some twenty or thirty cases, and knows that they could not have been so done. He saw a brush, which he knew to have been on a certain shelf but a moment before, and no person near345 the shelf, fly to the window, break out a glass, and fall down between the shutter and sash, where he knew from the position that no one could have thrown it. He saw a tumbler, which was standing on a bureau, rise from its place, fly to the window, and dash out the only pane remaining whole in the window, when no person was within twenty feet of it, and the only persons in the room were himself and Harry, the latter standing by the doctor’s side in the doorway of the room—a position in which it was utterly impossible for him to have done it without detection.
1693. Dr. P. believes it could have been possible, but not likely, that in some of these situations, they might have been broken by someone; however, he was an eyewitness in about twenty or thirty instances and is convinced that they couldn't have been caused by a person. He witnessed a brush, which he knew had been on a certain shelf just moments before with no one nearby335, suddenly fly to the window, break a pane of glass, and fall between the shutter and sash, where he knew that no one could have thrown it. He also saw a tumbler that was sitting on a bureau rise from its spot, fly to the window, and smash the only intact pane left in the window, all when no one was within twenty feet of it, and the only people in the room were him and Harry, the latter standing beside the doctor in the doorway of the room—a position from which it was completely impossible for him to have done it without being seen.
1694. The mysterious visitors, whoever they were, seemed at times to be actuated by a spirit of sheer mischief in the destruction of property, particularly glass and crockery. Even the glass in the carriage-top was broken out. Pitchers of water were, on two or three occasions, poured into the beds, and the pitchers and other vessels thrown about the room and broken. The damage to furniture during the whole time was nearly two hundred dollars. Sometimes there was a cessation of ‘hostilities’ for two or three days; but they would then return with additional violence; in fact, they increased gradually in violence from the beginning to the middle of April. On the evening of that day, and during the night, they were more violent and destructive than ever before. On the night of the 13th of April, loud pounding and beating, as with some hard substance, were frequent in the room adjoining that in which Dr. P. slept; so loud and continued were they, that at one o’clock no person in the house had been able to sleep. Soon after, a small drawer was taken from a dressing-table, and beaten so violently against the bedstead as to break it into fragments, some of which were thrown against the windows, breaking two panes of glass. The knockings were now transferred to Mrs. P.‘s room. She was pinched, pricked with pins, and otherwise annoyed in a manner beyond explanation ‘on any known laws of matter or mind.’ Mr. W. C. was staying in the house that night. He went to the room by request, and proposed to interrogate them, as they were then doing at Rochester and other places in Western New York. Being left to act his pleasure, he queried, and was replied to as follows: ‘Who are you? If a spirit, knock.’ Immediately there were heard on the head of the bed distinct knocks. Q.—‘Are you a good or bad spirit? If good, knock.’ To this there was no answering sound. ‘If a bad spirit, knock.’ At once the same sounds as before were heard. Q.—‘Will you spell your name if the alphabet is called?’ A.—Knock. It was done; and a name was spelled out, and a communication made of a most extraordinary character, detailing the particulars of a transaction in which a portion of the family were said to have been defrauded out of a large property. As this whole communication relates to a matter which may yet come before the tribunals of our country for adjudication, I am expressly prohibited from making any extracts from this part of the journal. I regret this more, as the facts in this case form one of the most wonderful and unaccountable cases on record.
1694. The mysterious visitors, whoever they were, sometimes seemed to act out of pure mischief in their destruction of property, especially glass and dishware. Even the glass on top of the carriage was shattered. Water pitchers were, on two or three occasions, dumped into beds, and the pitchers and other items were thrown around the room and broken. The total damage to the furniture amounted to nearly two hundred dollars. Occasionally, there was a break in the ‘hostilities’ for two or three days; but then they would return with even more intensity; in fact, their violence gradually increased from the beginning to the middle of April. On the evening of that day and during the night, their actions were more violent and destructive than ever before. On the night of April 13th, there were frequent loud banging and pounding sounds, as if caused by some hard object, coming from the room next to where Dr. P. was sleeping; they were so loud and persistent that by one o’clock, no one in the house could sleep. Shortly after, a small drawer was taken from a dressing table and smashed violently against the bed frame, breaking it into pieces, some of which were thrown against the windows, shattering two panes of glass. The knocking then moved to Mrs. P.’s room. She was pinched, poked with pins, and otherwise disturbed in ways that defy explanation ‘according to any known laws of matter or mind.’ Mr. W. C. was staying in the house that night. He went to the room at her request and suggested questioning the spirits, as they were doing at Rochester and other places in Western New York. Given the freedom to proceed as he wished, he asked, and received the following responses: ‘Who are you? If you are a spirit, knock.’ Immediately, distinct knocks were heard on the head of the bed. Q.—‘Are you a good or bad spirit? If you are good, knock.’ There was no response to this. ‘If you are a bad spirit, knock.’ Instantly, the same sounds as before were heard. Q.—‘Will you spell your name if I call out the alphabet?’ A.—Knock. It happened; a name was spelled out, and a communication was made of a very unusual nature, detailing a transaction in which part of the family was said to have been defrauded of a significant amount of property. Because this entire communication relates to a matter that may still come before the courts of our country for resolution, I am expressly prohibited from making any extracts from this part of the journal. I regret this more, as the facts in this case represent one of the most remarkable and inexplicable occurrences on record.
1695. The family concluded that, after these important disclosures were made, the disturbances would cease; but they were doomed to be disappointed. The following night no communications were made, but the throwing of articles and breaking of windows, crockery, etc., were renewed with greater violence than before. Four or five panes of glass were broken in one room in the space of half an hour. While the family were together in the east chamber, a small sauce-dish, with an iron handle, rose from the floor, under the washstand, and beat against the bedstead with such violence as to break the handle off, and was then thrown back from whence it started. It beat seven or eight times against the bedstead, producing a noise that could easily be heard twenty rods. A round of a chair was beaten against the bedstead in the same manner, when there was no person within seven or eight feet of it. A lamp that was on the mantel leaped into the middle of the floor, and was extinguished. Being left thus suddenly in the dark produced no little agitation, and Mrs. Phelps proposed that they should take the children and go into the street, rather than stay in the house that night. In a few minutes two gentlemen, who had appointed to spend the night with them, arrived, and the more violent of the manifestations ceased.
1695. The family thought that after these important revelations, the disturbances would stop; but they were in for a disappointment. The next night, there were no communications, but the throwing of objects and breaking of windows, dishes, etc., resumed with even greater intensity than before. Four or five panes of glass were shattered in one room in just half an hour. While the family was gathered in the east room, a small sauce dish with an iron handle lifted off the floor under the washstand and slammed against the bed with such force that it broke the handle off, before being thrown back to its original spot. It slammed against the bed seven or eight times, making a noise that could be heard twenty yards away. A chair rail was also slammed against the bed in the same way, even though no one was within seven or eight feet of it. A lamp on the mantel suddenly jumped to the middle of the floor and went out. Being left in darkness like that caused quite a bit of panic, and Mrs. Phelps suggested they take the children and go outside instead of staying in the house that night. In a few minutes, two men who had planned to spend the night with them arrived, and the more violent disturbances stopped.
1697. On the 17th the communications were renewed, and from that time they had frequent communications, mainly respecting the property affair. At one time they asked how they should know that this was really from the spirit it purported to be, and requested his signature; when in less than four minutes a small piece of paper, having on it an exact fac-simile of his handwriting, was seen sticking to the wall—the writing apparently done with a pencil. Dr. Phelps still preserves the original paper, with the name inked over. It was stuck to the wall by being made damp.
1697. On the 17th, communication resumed, and from that point on, they had frequent exchanges, mostly about the property issue. At one point, they asked how they could be sure that the messages were truly from the spirit it claimed to be and requested a signature; within less than four minutes, a small piece of paper with an exact replica of his handwriting was found stuck to the wall—the writing seemed to be done with a pencil. Dr. Phelps still keeps the original paper, with the name written over in ink. It was stuck to the wall by being made damp.
1698. It was now discovered that, in order to get the rapping, the presence of Henry was necessary. At one time a request was made by the rapping to send him to New York, and a threat that all the windows in the house would be broken, if they did not, was made; but in a few minutes after, a small piece of paper was seen to fall, apparently from the ceiling, and on it written, ‘Send him not to New York—evil will befall him.’ It was evident that there were two or more contending agencies engaged in the manifestations. It was not easy to define or imagine what their objects were. At times, when one was making a communication, the other would rap, seemingly to make confusion. At other times, when a communication was being made by alphabet, a paper would be dropped down, and on it written, ‘It is all a lie; don’t believe347 what he says.” Sometimes language the most profane, and occasionally, but rarely, obscene, would be written out in this way. Inquiry was made as to how these contradictory communications were to be accounted for, and the answer was that an opposing spirit was attempting to defeat the object of the first; that this spirit was now one of his tormentors; that both were in a state of misery, and his suffering would be mitigated if the object of the first could be accomplished, although he would never go to a state of happiness.
1698. It was now found that Henry's presence was necessary for the rapping to happen. At one point, a request was made for him to be sent to New York, accompanied by a threat that all the windows in the house would be broken if they didn't comply. However, just a few minutes later, a small piece of paper fell from what seemed like the ceiling, with the message, ‘Don’t send him to New York—bad things will happen to him.’ It was clear that there were two or more conflicting forces involved in the events. It was hard to understand or define their motives. Sometimes, when one was trying to communicate, the other would rap, seemingly to create chaos. Other times, while a message was being communicated through letters, a paper would drop with a note saying, ‘It’s all a lie; don’t believe347 what he says.’ Occasionally, very profane language, and rarely, obscene messages, would appear in this manner. An inquiry was made regarding the contradictory messages, and it was explained that an opposing spirit was trying to undermine the first entity's goal; that this spirit was now one of his tormentors; that both were in a state of distress, and his suffering would lessen if the first entity's goal could be achieved, even though he would never reach a state of happiness.
1699. “Among the spirits who communicated were two who professed to be in a state of happiness, and three in a state of misery. One of the good spirits claimed to be a sister of him who made the first communication; she communicated frequently, and constantly manifested herself in the morning and evening devotions of the family, and always gave two distinct knocks at the utterance of ‘Amen.’ Upon inquiry as to the meaning of these two knocks, the answer was given that it was a response, after the manner of the Episcopal service, signifying that she joined in the devotions.
1699. “Among the spirits that communicated, two claimed to be happy, while three said they were miserable. One of the happy spirits said she was the sister of the person who made the first communication; she would frequently reach out and always made herself known during the family's morning and evening prayers, giving two distinct knocks when 'Amen' was said. When asked what these two knocks meant, the response explained that it was a way of confirming, similar to the Episcopal service, indicating that she was joining in the prayers.”
1700. Much that was communicated after the first few days was of a trifling and childish character; some, more like what would be received from street rowdies than any thing else. To the question why they destroyed property, they replied, ‘For fun.’ It was asked of the opposing spirit what could be done to afford him relief; he answered that ‘The best thing they could do would be to give him a piece of pie.’ Sometimes letters would come, purporting to be from ministers of Philadelphia, giving accounts of conversions in their congregations and additions to their churches. These were addressed to the doctor, and indicated a knowledge of things in Philadelphia to an astonishing degree. Some of the letters were addressed to Mrs. Phelps, signed, or rather purporting to be signed, by departed spirits of persons who had lived in Philadelphia, and all, or nearly all, who had lived in a single square, and were the acquaintances of Mrs. Phelps, during a residence in that city, in the time of her former marriage. Sentimental notes were also addressed to the daughter. These letters and billets were frequent, amounting in all to nearly one hundred, and were all written in one hand, though purporting to come from different persons. The fact was at one time referred to, and an explanation desired, to which the following was given: ‘We do not write with the hand—do not touch the pencil; we write with the will.’ At one time a paper was thrown down to Mrs. Phelps, while in the parlour with a number of ladies, having written on it, with a pencil, as follows:
1700. A lot of what was communicated after the first few days was trivial and immature; some of it sounded more like what you’d expect from rowdy kids than anything else. When asked why they destroyed property, they replied, “For fun.” When they asked the opposing spirit what could be done to help him, he said, “The best thing they could do would be to give me a piece of pie.” Sometimes letters arrived, supposedly from ministers in Philadelphia, detailing conversions in their congregations and growth in their churches. These were addressed to the doctor and showed an astonishing knowledge of things happening in Philadelphia. Some letters were addressed to Mrs. Phelps, signed, or rather pretending to be signed, by the spirits of people who had lived in Philadelphia, most of whom had lived in the same block and knew Mrs. Phelps during her time in that city while she was previously married. Sentimental notes were also sent to the daughter. These letters and notes were frequent, totaling nearly one hundred, and all were written in the same handwriting, despite claiming to come from different people. At one point, this fact was brought up, and an explanation was requested, to which the response was: “We do not write with our hands—we don’t touch the pencil; we write with our will.” At one time, a piece of paper was tossed to Mrs. Phelps while she was in the parlor with several ladies, and it had written on it, with a pencil, the following:
H. P. Devil.’
H. P. Devil.’
1708. On the 28th of July, 1850, two singular letters were thrown down, addressed to Dr. Phelps. They were both in one handwriting, but were signed by two different orthodox clergymen of Philadelphia. Their interest in religious movements, and their acquaintance with the phraseology of ‘revival’ correspondence, are seen at a glance. ‘St. Peter’s,’ in the second letter, is a Puseyite church.
1708. On July 28, 1850, two unusual letters were delivered, addressed to Dr. Phelps. They were both written in the same handwriting, but signed by two different orthodox clergymen from Philadelphia. Their interest in religious movements and familiarity with the language of ‘revival’ correspondence is clear. ‘St. Peter’s’ in the second letter refers to a Puseyite church.
1709. ‘Dear Brother: The Lord is dealing bountifully with his chosen people. Brother Barnes admitted to the church forty-nine last Sunday, and Brother Parker thirty-four to-day. Brother Converse has had the cholera, and Brother Fairchild has grown so fleshy as scarcely to be recognised. Our friend Mr. Tarr has buried his wife. She died of consumption. E. Tarr is married. Brother Mahu, being suddenly inspired last Sunday, spoke so eloquently and so loud, and used such majestic action, as to be quite done up for a while. He broke a blood-vessel. Old Tiers has gone crazy, and is shut up in a mad-house, or, rather, a hospital. The H-—- s have gone into the country to spend some time. That’s all the news.
1709. ‘Hey Bro: The Lord is blessing His chosen people abundantly. Last Sunday, Brother Barnes welcomed forty-nine new members to the church, and today Brother Parker welcomed thirty-four. Brother Converse has had cholera, and Brother Fairchild has gained so much weight that he's barely recognizable. Our friend Mr. Tarr has lost his wife; she passed away from tuberculosis. E. Tarr is now married. Brother Mahu felt suddenly inspired last Sunday and spoke so passionately and loudly, with such grand gestures, that he completely wore himself out and broke a blood vessel. Old Tiers has gone insane and is locked up in a mental hospital. The H-—-s have gone to the countryside to spend some time. That’s the latest news.
‘Your faithful brother in Christ,
‘R. A.’
‘Your loyal brother in Christ,
‘R. A.’
1710. ‘Dear Brother: The millennium truly is coming. The day of the Lord is at hand. We are adding countless numbers to the altar of the Lord. Brother A-—- became inspired last Sunday to such a degree, that his soul took its flight to the regions above, and has not yet returned. The Catholic churches, St. Joseph’s and St. Mary’s, were burned down; St. Peter’s, also—I believe that is a Catholic church. Brother Mahu was preaching from the text, ‘Resist the devil,’ &c., when he was suddenly overturned by an invisible power, which frightened him so that his hair turned white in five minutes.
1710. ‘Hey Brother: The millennium is truly approaching. The day of the Lord is near. We are bringing countless souls to the altar of the Lord. Brother A-—- felt such inspiration last Sunday that his spirit soared to the heavens and hasn’t come back yet. The Catholic churches, St. Joseph’s and St. Mary’s, were burned down; St. Peter’s too—I think that’s a Catholic church. Brother Mahu was preaching from the verse, ‘Resist the devil,’ and suddenly he was thrown down by an unseen force, which scared him so much that his hair turned white in five minutes.
1711. ‘Brother Barnes, to render his church more attractive, is going to have opera-singing and dancing every Sunday afternoon. Mrs. Alexander Tower, old Mr. Tiers, Brother Fairchild, and Mrs. Somerville are going to dance. I think they will find it a very lucrative employment. Jane and Martha still progress in Hebrew.
1711. ‘Brother Barnes is making his church more appealing by hosting opera-singing and dancing every Sunday afternoon. Mrs. Alexander Tower, old Mr. Tiers, Brother Fairchild, and Mrs. Somerville are all set to dance. I believe they will find it quite a profitable venture. Jane and Martha are still advancing in Hebrew.
‘Your affectionate brother, M. R.’
‘Your loving brother, M. R.’
1712. On Sunday, April 27th, 1851, on returning from church, the family found strange characters written on the last leaf of a writing-book, lying on the hall floor, although it was known to be in the nursery previous to their going away. None of the family had any knowledge of how the book got into the hall.[38]
1712. On Sunday, April 27th, 1851, when they returned from church, the family discovered strange symbols written on the last page of a notebook that was on the hall floor, even though it had been known to be in the nursery before they left. None of the family knew how the book ended up in the hall.[38]
1716. Spirit-writing, without visible human agency, has never been a common mode of communicating, although it was among the early occurrences at Hydesville, Rochester, and Auburn.[39]
1716. Spirit writing, without visible human involvement, has never been a common way to communicate, although it was one of the earliest events at Hydesville, Rochester, and Auburn.[39]
1717. Sometimes these missives were enclosed in a book, and thrown down stairs or into the room; sometimes wrapped about a key or nail, or any thing that would give a momentum, and thrown into the room. Often they were seen to fall from above; this occurring frequently when the doors were closed, and it was not possible for any visible agent to have been the cause. Writing would appear on the wall at times, made, as it appeared, with a pencil. On one occasion, Dr. Phelps was writing at his desk, and, turning his back for a few moments, without leaving his chair, turned again to his paper, where he found written in large letters, ‘Very nice paper and very nice ink for the devil.’ The ink was not yet dry, the desk was not two feet from him as he sat, and he was entirely alone in the room.
1717. Sometimes these messages were hidden in a book and tossed down the stairs or into the room; other times, they were wrapped around a key or nail or anything that would give them some weight and then thrown into the room. Often, they were seen falling from above, frequently happening when the doors were closed and there was no visible way for it to happen. Writing would occasionally appear on the wall, looking as if it was done with a pencil. On one occasion, Dr. Phelps was writing at his desk and, after turning his back for a brief moment without leaving his chair, turned back to find written in large letters, ‘Very nice paper and very nice ink for the devil.’ The ink wasn’t even dry, the desk was less than two feet away from him while he sat, and he was completely alone in the room.
1718. About the first of May, Dr. Phelps, of Boston, brother of the Rev. Doctor, and Prof. Phelps, of Andover, a son of the Rev. Doctor, went to Stratford to ‘expose the humbug,’ and with a full belief that it was a trick of evil-minded persons, and that they should be able to detect and expose it without trouble; and they were disappointed, as hundreds have been350 under like circumstances. On Tuesday evening a loud rap was heard on the back door, seeming to be made by the knocker, loud enough to be heard twenty rods distant. The servant went to the door, but no person was there. After the lapse of five or eight minutes, the rap was repeated. It was then supposed that some one had done it mischievously; but, on looking about, no person was discovered. It was in the shades of evening, but not dark enough to prevent any person being seen, who might have done it, as easily as at mid-day. The knocking came the third time, when Dr. Phelps—the visitor—placed himself in the hall, perhaps four feet from the door, and the Professor, of Andover, took a position on the steps without, each having full view of the door. The same loud raps were repeated on the door between them. The knocker did not move, nor could the eye detect any cause for what met the ear. The noise was heard throughout the house, and both the gentlemen were positive that no visible agent was employed to produce it. About bed-time, a loud pounding was heard on the chamber-door. The gentlemen, each with a candle in hand, stood on either side of the door, as the pounding, as though done with a heavy boot, was continued. The noise appeared to each to be on the side of the door opposite to him. On the following morning, as Dr. Phelps, of Stratford, was standing at the foot of the stairs leading to the third story, a noise as loud and much resembling the report of a pistol occurred apparently close to his ear. These boisterous sounds occurred at intervals during a great part of the time that the disturbance was continued. Sometimes for weeks they would not be heard; and again for days they were heard every day.
1718. Around the first of May, Dr. Phelps from Boston, brother of the Rev. Doctor, and Prof. Phelps from Andover, son of the Rev. Doctor, went to Stratford to “expose the scam,” fully believing it was a trick by malicious individuals and that they could easily uncover it; however, they were disappointed, just like hundreds have been in similar situations350. On Tuesday evening, a loud knock was heard at the back door, seemingly made by the knocker, loud enough to be heard twenty rods away. The servant went to the door, but there was no one there. After five or eight minutes, the knock was repeated. It was then thought that someone was doing it for fun; but upon investigation, no one was found. It was in the shadows of evening, but not dark enough to keep anyone from being seen, as easily as at noon. The knocking came a third time, when Dr. Phelps—the visitor—positioned himself in the hall, about four feet from the door, while the Professor from Andover stood on the steps outside, both clearly seeing the door. The same loud knocks occurred on the door between them. The knocker didn't move, nor could they see any cause for what they heard. The noise resonated throughout the house, and both men were convinced that no visible source was creating it. Around bedtime, a loud pounding was heard on the bedroom door. Each gentleman, holding a candle, stood on either side of the door as the pounding continued, sounding as if done with a heavy boot. Each thought the noise was coming from the side of the door that faced him. The next morning, as Dr. Phelps from Stratford stood at the bottom of the stairs leading to the third floor, a sound as loud as a gunshot occurred, seemingly right by his ear. These loud disturbances happened at intervals for much of the time that they continued. Sometimes weeks would pass without them being heard; other times they were heard daily for days on end.
1719. It would seem, from various occurrences, that the agents of these sounds, whoever they were, must have been human beings, or, at least, possessed of all the leading characteristics of humanity. They were evidently influenced by kindness or unkindness, by respect and confidence, as persons generally are in this life. Some instances illustrating this are given. One morning, during the breakfast hour, they would push the table suddenly, raise up one side and shake it in such a manner as to spill the coffee, and otherwise occasion serious inconvenience. A person at the table spoke to them in a tone of authority, commanding them to desist; but the act was at once repeated. Again they were commanded to cease, but increased violence followed this command. This was five or six times repeated, and the shaking was each time renewed. At length another person at the table said, ‘I request you kindly to cease this annoyance, and allow us to take our breakfast quietly,’ and they ceased at once, without a repetition. It was found, from this time, that kindness had about the same effect upon them that it produces upon mankind at large. A lady, the wife of a clergyman, spent a few weeks in the family during the summer, who received many communications from them, would often, when the scissors, thimble, or things of that kind, were mislaid, say, ‘I will thank the351 spirits to return my thimble, scissors,’ or whatever was missing, and the article named would drop at her side, or in her lap, within a minute. Things of this kind occurred very many times in the course of the time that these phenomena were continued. If a key or knife, or any thing of the kind, was mislaid, and any person was looking for it, frequently it would be thrown to them as though their wants were anticipated. Dr. Phelps was once with Harry in the stable, when the currycomb could not be found, and he asked Harry where it was, to which Harry replied that he did not know. At that moment, the doctor saw it rise, as if thrown, from a point ten feet distant from them, and, describing a parabola, fall within a short distance of the spot where they both were standing.
1719. It seems that, based on various events, the sources of these sounds, whoever they were, must have been human or at least shared the main traits of humanity. They clearly responded to kindness and unkindness, as well as respect and trust, just like people do in everyday life. Some examples of this are provided. One morning, during breakfast, they suddenly pushed the table, lifted one side, and shook it in a way that spilled coffee and caused noticeable trouble. Someone at the table spoke to them in an authoritative tone, ordering them to stop; however, they repeated the act immediately. When they were told to stop again, they responded with even greater force. This happened five or six times, and each time the shaking resumed. Finally, another person at the table said, ‘I kindly ask you to stop this annoyance and let us enjoy our breakfast in peace,’ and they immediately ceased, without repeating the behavior. From then on, it was clear that kindness had a similar effect on them as it does on people in general. A lady, the wife of a clergyman, spent a few weeks with the family over the summer and received several messages from them. Whenever she mislaid her scissors, thimble, or similar items, she would say, ‘I would appreciate it if the spirits could return my thimble, scissors,’ or whatever was missing, and the requested item would appear beside her or in her lap within a minute. Incidents like this happened numerous times during the period these phenomena continued. If a key, knife, or similar object was lost and someone was searching for it, it would often be thrown to them as if their needs were anticipated. Dr. Phelps was once with Harry in the stable when they couldn’t find the currycomb. He asked Harry where it was, and Harry replied he didn’t know. At that moment, the doctor saw it rise as if thrown from a point ten feet away and fall in a curve, landing close to where they were standing.
1720. About the middle of May, Dr. Phelps and Harry were riding to Huntington, a distance of seven miles. When they had proceeded about one mile on the way, a stone, about the size of a hen’s egg, was thrown into the carriage, and lodged on Dr. Phelps’s hat. Soon another and another were thrown in. The carriage was a covered one, and the back curtain was down, and there was no way a stone could have been thrown in by ordinary means. At one house where they stopped, the moment the front door was opened, two stones were thrown, one of which entered the door as it stood partly open, and the other hit one of the lights of glass, and broke it. Harry was standing on the door-steps at the time, and there was no one in the street who could have thrown them. Two stones were also thrown against another house where they stopped of an errand. Sixteen stones were thrown into the carriage on the doctor’s return, and, including those thrown against the two houses, twenty, in driving three or four hours.
1720. Around the middle of May, Dr. Phelps and Harry were riding to Huntington, which was about seven miles away. After they had gone about a mile, a stone, roughly the size of a hen's egg, was thrown into the carriage and landed on Dr. Phelps's hat. Soon, another stone and then another were thrown in. The carriage had a cover, and the back curtain was down, so there was no way a stone could have been thrown in by conventional means. At one house where they stopped, as soon as the front door was opened, two stones were thrown—one of which went through the partly open door, and the other shattered one of the glass panes. Harry was standing on the steps at that moment, and there was nobody in the street who could have thrown them. Two stones were also thrown at another house where they stopped for a quick errand. On the way back, sixteen stones were hurled into the carriage, and including those tossed at the two houses, that made twenty during the three to four hours of travel.
1721. As it was now apparent that these strange things were in some way connected with Harry as a medium, it was thought best to separate him from the family. Accordingly board was obtained for him in a family some two miles distant. One day, when he came home, he told his mother, in great secrecy, that on the night previous he had been awakened from his sleep by some person dressed in white, whom he saw standing by his bedside. He was frightened, and was about to scream, when the person spoke and said, ‘Be not afraid, my son; I am your father;’ and then placed in the boy’s hand a silver watch, and told him to wear it for his sake. The boy affirms that he had the watch in his hand; that it was not a dream; and that he was entirely awake; and that his father told him to tell no one of it but his mother and Dr. P. His mother told him it was nothing but a dream, and turned it off as a light affair.
1721. Now that it was clear these strange occurrences were somehow linked to Harry as a medium, it was decided to keep him away from the family. So, arrangements were made for him to stay with a family about two miles away. One day, when he returned home, he told his mother, in great secrecy, that the previous night he had been awakened from his sleep by someone dressed in white, standing by his bedside. He was scared and about to scream when the person spoke, saying, ‘Don’t be afraid, my son; I am your father;’ and then placed a silver watch in the boy’s hand, telling him to wear it for his sake. The boy insists he had the watch in his hand, that it wasn’t a dream, and that he was fully awake. His father instructed him to tell no one about it except his mother and Dr. P. His mother dismissed it as nothing more than a dream and brushed it off as a light matter.
1722. It seems that a valuable silver watch had been left the boy by his father, which was not in use, but had been kept locked up in a drawer of a dressing-table, to which he (Harry) had no access. A member of the family, having occasion to look into the drawer, saw the watch, and knows it was there, and that the drawer was locked, and the key given to Mrs. P.352 A few minutes after the conversation with his mother about the apparition and the watch, the night previous, he came in from the yard with the watch in his hand! He said his father had again appeared to him, and put the watch into his hand again, and said, ‘Wear this for my sake.’ He brought the watch into the house, and showed it to his mother, and said that his father said, ‘Tell your mother to look at the second-hand.’ The hand was off, and lay on the face of the watch under the crystal. A credible person will make oath, if called upon, that she saw the watch in the drawer, where it was usually kept, not more than six or eight minutes before, and that she locked the drawer and gave the key to Mrs. Phelps. The key had been in possession of no other person, and Harry had not been in the room during the time. The watch was taken to Dr. P., and he tried to replace the second-hand, but could not succeed. He closed it, leaving the hand loose on the face, and passed it back to Harry, saying that he must take it to the watch-maker. When he took it in his hand, he exclaimed, ‘Why, it’s on!’ They looked, and it was on and going. In a few minutes it was off again, and was put on a second time, all within a minute or two. The doctor affirms that it was not out of his sight a moment; that he knows the watch was not opened, and that no visible power was employed in doing it.
1722. It seems a valuable silver watch had been left to the boy by his father, which wasn’t being used, but was kept locked in a drawer of a dressing table that he (Harry) didn’t have access to. A family member, needing to check the drawer, saw the watch and confirmed it was there, locked, with the key given to Mrs. P.352 A few minutes after the conversation with his mother about the ghost and the watch from the night before, he came in from the yard holding the watch! He said his father had appeared to him again and placed the watch in his hand, telling him, ‘Wear this for my sake.’ He brought the watch into the house, showed it to his mother, and mentioned that his father said, ‘Tell your mother to look at the second-hand.’ The hand was off and lay on the face of the watch under the crystal. A reliable person can swear, if needed, that she saw the watch in the drawer, where it was usually kept, no more than six or eight minutes earlier, and that she locked the drawer and gave the key to Mrs. Phelps. The key had only been with her, and Harry hadn’t been in the room at that time. The watch was taken to Dr. P., who tried to fix the second-hand but couldn’t. He closed it, leaving the hand loose on the face, and handed it back to Harry, saying he needed to take it to the watchmaker. When Harry took it, he exclaimed, ‘Oh, it’s on!’ They looked, and it was working. A few minutes later, it stopped again, but then started working a second time, all within a couple of minutes. The doctor asserts that it was never out of his sight; he knows the watch wasn’t opened, and no visible force was used to make it work.
1723. On one occasion the piano-forte was played while it is known that no person was in the room; and, at another time, it was turned around, the front toward the wall, and so far removed from the side of the room as to allow the player room to sit next to the wall; the stool was also appropriately placed.
1724. On several occasions, about this time, certain members of the family saw, or thought they did, visible appearances. Dr. P. did not give entire credit to these statements; not but what he had full confidence in the honesty of the family, but the excited state in which some of them had been for a long time led him to think that they might imagine they saw what had no existence in fact. Toward the last of May, it was signified that one of the spirits who had communicated would appear visibly—first to the daughter, then to Mrs. P., and then to the doctor himself. They asked in what manner he would appear, and the answer was, ‘In a sheet.’ Between ten and eleven o’clock the same night, soon after the family had retired, Anna, who occupied the east bedroom, the door between her room and that where the doctor and his wife slept being open, and a lamp burning on a stand so placed as to light both rooms, called to her mother, and said, ‘There it is, in a sheet.’ Dr. P. asked where; when she said it was in the door between the two rooms, coming from the room the doctor occupied, but the doctor saw nothing. The daughter was frightened, and covered up her head, and in a few minutes looked up and saw nothing. He was represented as moving slowly from one room to the other.
1724. Around this time, some family members claimed to have seen visible appearances. Dr. P. didn't fully believe these accounts; he trusted the family's honesty, but the heightened emotions some of them had been experiencing for a while made him think they might be imagining things that weren't really there. Toward the end of May, it was announced that one of the spirits that had communicated would appear visibly—first to the daughter, then to Mrs. P., and finally to the doctor himself. They asked how he would appear, and the response was, “In a sheet.” Between ten and eleven o’clock that same night, shortly after the family had gone to bed, Anna, who was in the east bedroom with the door open between her room and her parents', and a lamp lit to illuminate both rooms, called out to her mother, saying, “There it is, in a sheet.” Dr. P. asked where, and she replied it was at the door between the two rooms, coming from the room where the doctor was. However, he didn’t see anything. The daughter was scared and covered her head, but after a few minutes, she looked up and saw nothing. The figure was described as moving slowly from one room to the other.
1726. After two or three minutes had elapsed, the doctor also saw it. It appeared to him to move slowly from the hall chamber into his, and turn and move slowly back. It had the appearance of a very tall person with a sheet thrown around it; he saw only the sheet. In about one minute, something was thrown on to the bed, which proved to be a sheet which had been taken from the wardrobe in the hall. Dr. Phelps declares that he was not frightened in the least, and could not have been mistaken in the appearance. Some two or three weeks subsequent to this a similar appearance was seen, and Dr. P. sprang out of bed, determined to seize hold of it if possible. It came part way into his room, and then moved slowly back. The daughter affirmed that the doctor was within two or three feet of it when it disappeared, and a sheet dropped into a chair. These were the only instances in which the doctor saw any thing himself. Others of the family saw persons in a mysterious way several times.
1726. After two or three minutes had passed, the doctor saw it too. It seemed to move slowly from the hall chamber into his room, then turn and move slowly back. It looked like a very tall person wrapped in a sheet; he only saw the sheet. About a minute later, something was thrown onto the bed, which turned out to be a sheet taken from the wardrobe in the hall. Dr. Phelps says he wasn’t scared at all and couldn’t have mistaken what he saw. A couple of weeks later, he saw a similar figure again, and Dr. P. jumped out of bed, ready to grab it if he could. It came partway into his room, then slowly moved back. His daughter confirmed that the doctor was only two or three feet away when it vanished, and a sheet fell onto a chair. These were the only times the doctor saw anything himself. Other family members experienced sightings of mysterious figures several times.
1727. At one time, while Anna was in the dining-room, and a cousin of hers and some of the children in the front yard, her attention was arrested by some one entering the front parlour. She went in, and saw three gentlemen—two of them sitting on the sofa, and one on a chair by the table—all having their hats on, and drawn down over their eyes more than usual; the one by the table had his feet upon the table, and was reading a paper. She was surprised that neither of them rose up, or looked at her, as she entered the room; and when she was within five or six feet of the one nearest her, he leaned over on one side and fell, chair and all, on the floor, and instantly all disappeared! She was frightened, and ran to her cousin, who was near the front door. She came in, but no persons were there, neither could they have entered without her seeing them. The chair was thrown down, but no person near who could have done it.
1727. Once, while Anna was in the dining room, a cousin of hers and some of the kids were in the front yard, she noticed someone entering the front parlor. She went in and saw three men—two sitting on the sofa and one on a chair by the table—all wearing their hats pulled down over their eyes more than usual; the one by the table had his feet on the table and was reading a newspaper. She was surprised that none of them got up or even looked at her as she came into the room. When she got within five or six feet of the closest one, he leaned to the side and fell, chair and all, onto the floor, and suddenly, they all vanished! She was scared and ran to her cousin, who was near the front door. She came in, but there was no one there; they couldn’t have entered without her seeing them. The chair was knocked over, but there was no one around who could have done it.
1728. A few other instances occurred in which appearances were supposed to have been seen; but the circumstances were not of a character to put the matter beyond a doubt, therefore no record was kept of them. About the middle of May, Dr. Phelps spent some time with the Fox family in New York. He soon decided that the manifestations were essentially the same as those at his house, with a few points of difference. With them property was not destroyed, and they were not painfully annoyed. The sounds were different, it being with them a double or rolling sound, and at his house a single knock. They could call upon and receive answers from different spirits, or what claimed to be different ones. This could be done at his house. During the months of June and July the same general occurrences continued at Stratford. Sometimes for two or three days there would seem to be an entire cessation of ‘hostilities.’354 Then they would commence again with redoubled force. People from all parts of the country were visiting the house, to whom every facility was afforded to search into the cause. Newspaper discussions were going on, casting the most unjust and painful reflections, subjecting the family to suffering little short of martyrdom, while numberless other persons had as good an opportunity of explaining the matter as the persecuted family. In this affliction I can sympathize somewhat with Dr. Phelps and family. In the first days of these phenomena in Western New York, all persons who were involved with or interested in them were looked upon and treated at once as void of all common feeling or sensibility, both privately and publicly; their names passed about, coupled with opprobrious epithets; their houses were entered without ceremony, and even in the face of direct request to the contrary; their right to quiet and repose invaded, their houses often being crowded with visitors, prompted by idle curiosity and a malicious desire to torture, beyond the midnight hour; still insisting to remain, and adding insult to injury by declaring in your ears that it was an arrant cheat—a grand humbug—being carried on; and all for—what? And at the same time those whose ill-fortune it then seemed to be to have an identity with it were weeping and praying for the scourge to be removed from them; for scourge it seemed, indeed, under such circumstances.
1728. There were a few other instances where sightings were thought to have occurred, but the circumstances weren't clear enough to confirm them, so no records were kept. Around mid-May, Dr. Phelps spent some time with the Fox family in New York. He quickly determined that the phenomena were basically the same as those at his home, with a few differences. In their case, property wasn't damaged, and they weren't painfully disturbed. The sounds were different; theirs had a double or rolling sound, while his was just a single knock. They could call on and receive responses from different spirits, or ones claiming to be different. This was also possible at his house. Throughout June and July, the same general events continued at Stratford. Sometimes, there would be a complete halt to the 'hostilities' for two or three days. Then they would start up again, stronger than before. People from all over the country visited the house, and every opportunity was given to investigate the cause. Newspapers were discussing the situation, making unjust and hurtful comments, subjecting the family to suffering almost like martyrdom, while countless other people had just as much chance to explain the situation as the affected family. In this distress, I can somewhat relate to Dr. Phelps and his family. In the early days of these phenomena in Western New York, anyone involved or interested was immediately seen and treated as if they lacked any common decency or sensitivity, both privately and publicly; their names circulated with derogatory labels; their homes were intruded upon without permission, even against explicit requests; their right to peace was violated, with their houses often overflowing with visitors driven by idle curiosity and a spiteful wish to torment them, well past midnight; they insisted on staying, adding insult to injury by declaring in your face that it was all a sham—a huge scam—being perpetrated; and all for—what? Meanwhile, those who seemed unluckily connected to it were weeping and praying for the affliction to be lifted from them; truly, it felt like a scourge under such circumstances. 354
1729. Dr. and Mrs. Phelps concluded, in August, as the demonstrations were then less frequent, on taking a short journey of three weeks. The disturbances were still more annoying in their absence than before; and it was decided as best to close the house for the winter, and remain away. Accordingly, on the 11th of September, Harry left for Pennsylvania, and it was arranged that the other members of the family should follow within three weeks. It seems that, although the manifestations were connected more intimately with Harry, his presence was not all-important, as they did not cease altogether when he left; but communications were still made, though with less force and violence. The knockings were not as loud, and the communications less free or frequent. At one time a note was thrown into the room, while Dr. P. was writing at the desk, which contained the following: “How soon do the family expect to go to Pennsylvania? I wish to make some arrangements before they go. Please answer in writing.’ The doctor replied as desired, as follows: ‘About the first of October,’ and placed the paper in a position where he had before put writings of the kind, and heard nothing further.
1729. Dr. and Mrs. Phelps decided in August, when the disturbances were happening less often, to take a short trip for three weeks. The disturbances ended up being even more bothersome while they were away than they had been before; so they decided it would be best to close up the house for the winter and stay away. On September 11th, Harry left for Pennsylvania, and the rest of the family was supposed to follow within three weeks. Although the strange events seemed to be more closely linked to Harry, his presence wasn’t crucial, as they didn’t completely stop when he left; there were still occurrences, but they were less intense. The knockings weren’t as loud, and the messages were less clear or frequent. At one point, a note was tossed into the room while Dr. P. was writing at his desk, which said: “When does the family expect to go to Pennsylvania? I would like to make some arrangements before they leave. Please respond in writing.” The doctor replied as requested: “About the first of October,” and placed the note where he had previously put similar messages, and then he didn't hear anything else.
1730. Two or three days after this, a communication was given by use of the alphabet, saying that Root, a gentleman who had been in the house, had destroyed the doctor’s book. He inquired ‘What book?’ and was answered ‘The big book.’ Yet he did not know what book was designated, and repeated the question, and received the answer, ‘The big book in the secretary.’ Still it was not understood. Again was spelled, ‘Look and see!’ Dr. Phelps had in the secretary two blank books; in the355 larger one he had written a full account of the mysterious manifestations, in the form of a diary, and, having noted them as they occurred from day to day, they were recorded with more minuteness than could afterward be done. Upon looking, it was discovered that every page that had been written upon was torn from the book and gone. After a long search, the fragments of the leaves were found in the vault. Copies of the characters which the doctor had carefully taken, and felt anxious to preserve, were every scrap gone. There were, in a dressing-table drawer in the chamber, a great number of the notes sent. These were set on fire with a match and burned in the drawer. The fire was discovered by the smoke, but not until the papers were so far charred as to injure them beyond preservation. A few of these writings only are retained, which were in other places. The last of the annoyances was on the 25th of September, and was that of throwing ink upon the daughter’s dress. She was standing on the piazza, near the front door; the window of the front chamber was open, from which was thrown a small bottle of ink. The ink went over her dress in a way to entirely unfit it for further use. There was no person in the chamber who would have done such a thing for mischief; and, indeed, no person in the house who would have been guilty of it.
1730. Two or three days later, a message was conveyed using the alphabet, indicating that Root, a gentleman who had been in the house, had destroyed the doctor’s book. He asked, “What book?” and was told, “The big book.” Still unsure, he repeated the question and got the reply, “The big book in the secretary.” It was still unclear to him. Once more, it was spelled out, “Look and see!” Dr. Phelps had two blank books in the secretary; in the355 larger one, he had written a detailed account of the strange occurrences, keeping a diary and recording them day by day with more detail than could be done later. When he checked, he found that every page that had been written on was ripped out and missing. After an extensive search, the torn pieces were discovered in the vault. Copies of the characters that the doctor had carefully recorded and wanted to keep were completely gone. There were many notes sent, stored in a drawer of a dressing table in the room. These were set on fire with a match and burned in the drawer. The fire was noticed because of the smoke, but by then, the papers were so badly charred that they couldn’t be saved. Only a few of these writings remain, which were kept in other places. The last of these disturbances happened on September 25, when ink was thrown onto the daughter’s dress. She was standing on the porch near the front door when a small bottle of ink was tossed from the open window of the front room. The ink splattered all over her dress, making it completely unusable. There was no one in the room who would have done such a thing out of mischief, nor anyone else in the house who would be capable of it.
1732. On the second day of October, the family, with the exception of Dr. Phelps and the cook, left Stratford to go to Pennsylvania. During their absence all demonstrations ceased, with what may be termed one exception. A letter, addressed by Dr. Phelps to Mrs. Phelps, contained, when it reached her, some of the spirit-writing in pencil, saying that ‘her husband was sick and wished her to return if she expected to see him alive.’ He was then in good health; but the next week was sick and confined to his bed two or three days. There may or may not have been some connection between the two occurrences. It was the design of Dr. Phelps to separate the family for a time, in order, if possible, to get rid of the annoyance; and for the five weeks he remained at Stratford, after the family had left, no disturbances took place. Harry stayed in Bucks county (Pa.) all winter, and the other members of the family lived in Philadelphia.
1732. On October 2nd, the family, except for Dr. Phelps and the cook, left Stratford for Pennsylvania. While they were away, all disturbances stopped, with one possible exception. A letter from Dr. Phelps to Mrs. Phelps included some spirit writing in pencil, stating that “her husband was sick and wanted her to come back if she hoped to see him alive.” At that time, he was healthy, but the following week he got sick and was laid up in bed for two or three days. It's unclear if there was a connection between the two events. Dr. Phelps planned to keep the family apart for a while to try to eliminate the disturbances; during the five weeks he stayed in Stratford after the family left, there were no issues. Harry stayed in Bucks County (Pa.) all winter, while the other family members lived in Philadelphia.
1733. In the month of March the family returned to Stratford. The house had been closed and under the charge of a neighbour, and no sign of any disturbance was visible, as every article of furniture was found just as they left it. About the fourth or fifth day after their return slight rapping was heard as they sat at the tea-table. They affected not to notice it, and the next day it was repeated more distinctly, but no response was made. Soon after, certain characters were found about the house, which were known, from the circumstances, to be of recent origin. Two or three356 days after, distinct communications were made by a spirit purporting to be Dr. Phelps’s daughter, who died at the age of twelve years. On being questioned, this spirit could not give any evidence of identity.
1733. In March, the family returned to Stratford. The house had been locked up and was being looked after by a neighbor, and there was no sign of any disturbance; everything was exactly as they had left it. About four or five days after their return, they heard a slight tapping while sitting at the tea table. They pretended not to notice it, but the next day it happened again, more clearly, yet they still didn't respond. Shortly after, some symbols were discovered around the house that were clearly recent. A few days later, they received clear messages from a spirit claiming to be Dr. Phelps's daughter, who had died at the age of twelve. When questioned, this spirit was unable to provide any proof of identity.
1737. At one time, on cutting a loaf of bread, there were found in it nails, pen-holders, small sticks, and tin, under circumstances which showed that they must have been placed there after it was put on the table and before the family were ready for tea. At one time Harry’s hat was hid away, and then his cap, and then another hat. He took his brother’s cap to use, and that was also taken away. On the evening of the 18th of July they set fire to some papers in the doctor’s secretary, and some twenty papers and letters were burned before they were discovered. Fire was set at the same time to the papers in both the closets, under the stairs in the hall. They were discovered by the smoke. Two or three days after this, when some friends who had visited them were about to leave, their bonnets and some other articles could not be found, although search was made in every part of the house, until the train by which they were to go to New York had passed. They were at last found, locked into an enclosed washstand, in a way that made it morally certain that they could not have been placed there by human hands.
1737. At one point, when slicing a loaf of bread, nails, pen-holders, small sticks, and tin were discovered inside, in ways that indicated they must have been put there after it was set on the table and before the family was ready for tea. There was a time when Harry’s hat went missing, then his cap, and then another hat. He borrowed his brother’s cap, but that was also taken away. On the evening of July 18th, they set fire to some papers in the doctor’s secretary, burning around twenty papers and letters before they were noticed. Fire was also started at the same time in both closets under the stairs in the hall, which was discovered due to the smoke. A couple of days later, when some friends who had been visiting were about to leave, their bonnets and some other items went missing, despite a thorough search of the entire house, until the train they were supposed to take to New York had already departed. Eventually, they were found locked inside a closed washstand in a way that made it clear that they could not have been placed there by anyone.
1738. On the 29th of July Harry left to spend some time at New Lebanon, N. Y., and during his absence no manifestations were noticed, although they were constantly on the look-out for something of the kind. Anna and her mother left for Philadelphia on the 25th of September, and they had been so long exempt from annoyances that they hoped they had ceased altogether. But Harry had the manifestations at New Lebanon, and there was first operated on, by invisible agency, to produce a magnetic sleep, into which he passed with a sudden shock. He had never been magnetized before, although frequent attempts had been made to do so. In this state he evinced all the phenomena common to good clairvoyance. On his return to Stratford, on the 9th of October, the sounds accompanied him almost constantly; but they seemed less inclined to mischief than formerly, because, as they said, ‘Harry had passed to a higher state, where the low and ignorant spirits could not communicate with him.’
1738. On July 29th, Harry left to spend some time in New Lebanon, N.Y., and while he was gone, no unusual occurrences were noticed, even though they were always on the lookout for something. Anna and her mother left for Philadelphia on September 25th, and since they had been free from disturbances for so long, they hoped that the issues had completely stopped. However, Harry experienced strange events in New Lebanon, where he was first affected by an unseen force that induced a magnetic sleep, which he entered with a sudden jolt. He had never been magnetized before, despite several attempts. While in this state, he showed all the typical signs of strong clairvoyance. When he returned to Stratford on October 9th, the sounds followed him almost constantly, but they seemed less troublesome than before, because, as they put it, ‘Harry had moved to a higher state, where the lower and ignorant spirits could not reach him.’
1741. These Harry interpreted to mean: ‘You may expect good spirits to come by-and-by.’ The same characters had been said, by A. J. Davis, to read: ‘Our society desires through various mediums to impart thoughts.’ The spirit that seemed to be most prominent in all these communications claimed to be Harry’s father, and sometimes a sister of Dr. Phelps, who died about three years previous to this; also a child of Dr. Phelps, who died more than twenty-two years before. The communications seemed generally to come from the boy’s father. On the 12th of October he passed into a mesmeric state, and wrote some characters, which he translated as follows:
1741. These Harry interpreted to mean: ‘You can expect good vibes to come soon.’ The same symbols had been described by A. J. Davis as meaning: ‘Our community wants to share ideas through various mediums.’ The spirit that appeared to be the most significant in all these messages claimed to be Harry’s father, along with the sister of Dr. Phelps, who passed away about three years before this; and also a child of Dr. Phelps, who died more than twenty-two years earlier. Most of the messages seemed to come from the boy’s father. On October 12th, he entered a trance state and wrote some symbols, which he interpreted as follows:
Your spirit sister, Bliss.’
Your soul sister, Bliss.
1745. The person here supposed to communicate is a sister of Dr. Phelps, a widow, who left the earth-sphere in 1848, and by whom several of the previous communications are said to have been made. Other characters, of the same general formation, were made at the same time, but were not then translated.
1746. On the evening of the 12th, Dr. Phelps, Harry, and two younger children, were seated at a table; responses were frequently given by raps under the table. Dr. Phelps inquired if it would accommodate them at all to have some substance to rap with; to which they replied affirmatively. He threw down a table-knife; the raps seemed immediately to be made by striking the knife against the table-leaf, and soon it was tossed up on to the table. A small tea-bell was then placed under the table; it was rung several times, and tossed on to the table as the knife had been. It was again put down, and returned as before; the same being repeated several times in succession. The light was then extinguished, and the candle put under the table with a match-box containing matches, and the spirits requested to light it. They distinctly heard the match drawn upon the bottom of the box, which was prepared with sand-paper for that use. All saw the light, but the first match went out. Again the scratching of the match was heard; it ignited, the candle lighted, and was358 placed upon the table! The experiment was repeated several times, with the same result; every precaution being taken to prevent collusion in the matter.
1746. On the evening of the 12th, Dr. Phelps, Harry, and two younger children were sitting at a table; they often heard responses as raps under the table. Dr. Phelps asked if it would help them to have something to rap with; they replied yes. He dropped a table knife, and the raps immediately started sounding like the knife hitting the table. Soon, it was tossed back onto the table. A small tea bell was placed under the table next; it was rung several times and then tossed onto the table just like the knife. This was repeated several times. The light was then turned off, and a candle was put under the table along with a matchbox filled with matches. They asked the spirits to light it. They distinctly heard the match being struck on the bottom of the box, which was lined with sandpaper for this purpose. Everyone saw the light, but the first match went out. They heard the scratching sound again; the match ignited, the candle was lit, and it was 358 placed on the table! The experiment was repeated several times with the same outcome, ensuring that every precaution was taken to prevent any collusion.
1747. On a subsequent occasion a chair was placed upon the table by invisible power, and the two children, Harry and Hannah, raised up and placed upon it; they could neither of them tell how it was done. The sensation was that of some person placing a hand under them and raising them up. Many of these things occurred when the room was darkened, as has been the case in numerous other places, and for which explanations have been recorded, as given by the spirits. On the evening of the 20th of October, the light being put out of the room, the bell was placed under the table, with a request that it should be rung, and placed in the doctor’s hand. He was sitting by the table with both his hands lying on his lap open, with the palms upward. The bell rung several times with some violence, and then was placed in his left hand. This was repeated four or five times in succession. Dr. P. sat beyond the reach of any one, and the room was sufficiently light for him to have detected any movement on the part of persons present. He requested them to let him feel the hand that placed the bell in his. Very soon a hand came in contact with his, took hold of his fingers, shaking his hand, passed slowly over the back of his hand, then over the palm again, took hold of his fingers, and he felt what he is sure to have been a human hand. He describes it as being cold and moist, which accords with my own experience repeatedly, and that of my friends. They then took hold of his foot, shook it with much force, loosened the string, took off the shoe, and placed it upon the table before him. At his request the shoe was replaced, the heel adjusted, and the strings drawn up, but not tied.
1747. On another occasion, a chair was lifted onto the table by an unseen force, and the two children, Harry and Hannah, were lifted up and placed onto it; neither of them could explain how it happened. It felt like someone was lifting them up by placing a hand under them. Many of these events happened when the room was darkened, similar to what has been documented in many other places, along with explanations provided by the spirits. On the evening of October 20th, after the lights were turned off in the room, a bell was placed under the table with a request for it to be rung and then positioned in the doctor's hand. He sat by the table with both hands open in his lap, palms facing up. The bell rang several times quite forcefully and was then placed in his left hand. This happened four or five times in a row. Dr. P. was seated out of reach of anyone else, and the room was bright enough for him to notice any movements from those present. He asked to feel the hand that placed the bell in his hand. Soon, a hand touched his, grasped his fingers, shook his hand, moved slowly over the back of his hand, then back over the palm, grasped his fingers again, and he distinctly felt what he believed to be a human hand. He described it as cold and moist, which matches what I and my friends have experienced several times. They then grabbed his foot, shook it with considerable force, loosened the shoelace, removed the shoe, and set it on the table in front of him. At his request, the shoe was put back on, the heel adjusted, and the laces tightened, but not tied.
1748. On a subsequent occasion a large-sized tea-bell was rung under the table, then rose up, passed round the room, ringing violently all the way, and fell upon the table. The candle was in the closet, but the room was sufficiently light to make it certain that no person left the table to convey it. It was manifest that from the time Harry returned from New Lebanon the manifestations began gradually to subside. They were less frequent and less marked. It was arranged that he should accompany the family to Philadelphia, and go to a boarding-school at a town about twenty miles distant from the city. At different times he had been told that if he went there he would again be annoyed by bad spirits. The question was many times put, ‘Will you annoy him again if he goes to the school?’ A.—‘We will not, but others will.’—‘What others?’ A.—‘Those who were with him last summer.’—‘Will they disturb him if he stays here and goes to the academy in Stratford?’—‘No. They will not disturb him while he is with you.’—‘What will they do if he goes to Pennsylvania?’ A.—‘They will tear his clothes, destroy his books, and break his windows.’—‘Can you not control those bad spirits, and prevent359 their doing him any injury?’—‘No.’—‘Will you do all you can?’—‘Yes.’ At another time Dr. Phelps inquired if they would not leave him, as his mother was so much opposed to the whole thing. ‘Will you not, to oblige her, leave him, that he may be a medium no longer?’ said the doctor. The reply was, ‘If we leave him, evil spirits will get possession of him again.’ These communications were made by what purported to be the boy’s father. For two weeks previous to going to Philadelphia the manifestations had almost wholly subsided; perhaps only occurred when requested; and notwithstanding the repeated declarations that when he should leave for the school in Pennsylvania, the bad spirits would come in and make him trouble, it was determined to try the experiment, and on the 11th of November the family set out for Philadelphia, where they were to spend the winter, while Harry was to go to school. He remained with the family in Philadelphia about a week, where a few communications were given to Dr. Phelps in private. The spirits said they would begin to annoy the boy on the cars, on his way to the school, would pinch him and tear his clothes, so that, when he got there, they would be found torn, and that the troubles would follow him in the school as long as he stayed there. Dr. Phelps, under all the circumstances, thought it best not to send him; but on consultation it was decided to have him go, and on the 19th of November he started for the school. Dr. P. went a mile or two with him, put him under the care of the conductor, and told him to report on his return if any thing worthy of notice occurred on the way. In two days the doctor was sent for to come and take him away. He said that soon after his father left him on the cars, he was pinched, pricked with pins, and annoyed in various other ways, until he reached his destination; that, on his arrival there, he found that his pantaloons were torn in front, between the waistband and the knees, in two places, several inches in length. He changed them for another pair which were new and made of very substantial material, and these were torn down in front at least half a yard in length, before the doctor arrived there. The knockings had attended him in school and other places; his books were torn and damaged to the amount of two dollars, which the doctor paid. The family where he was had become alarmed, and would not keep him, and he was taken away. The boy stated that on one of the evenings, while he was there, he was walking in the street, when his cap was mysteriously taken from his head and thrown upon the sidewalk. As he stooped to pick it up he saw the flash of a gun at some distance, and a bullet passed over his back and struck a board fence near him. He was afterward informed by the rapping that, had he not stooped down, he would have been killed, and that his friendly spirit took this means to preserve him.
1748. On another occasion, a large tea bell rang under the table, then lifted up, passed around the room, ringing loudly the whole time, and fell onto the table. The candle was in the closet, but the room was bright enough to show that no one left the table to move it. It was clear that since Harry returned from New Lebanon, the occurrences had gradually decreased. They were happening less often and were less intense. It was planned for him to go with the family to Philadelphia and attend a boarding school about twenty miles from the city. At different times, he’d been told that if he went there, he would again be harassed by bad spirits. The question was asked many times, ‘Will you annoy him again if he goes to the school?’ A.—‘We won’t, but others will.’—‘Who are those others?’ A.—‘Those who were with him last summer.’—‘Will they disturb him if he stays here and goes to the academy in Stratford?’—‘No. They won’t disturb him while he’s with you.’—‘What will they do if he goes to Pennsylvania?’ A.—‘They will tear his clothes, destroy his books, and break his windows.’—‘Can’t you control those bad spirits and stop them from harming him?’—‘No.’—‘Will you do everything you can?’—‘Yes.’ At another time, Dr. Phelps asked if they would leave him since his mother was so opposed to everything. ‘Will you leave him to please her, so he won’t be a medium anymore?’ said the doctor. The response was, ‘If we leave him, evil spirits will take over again.’ These messages were supposedly from the boy’s father. For two weeks before going to Philadelphia, the manifestations had almost completely stopped; they only seemed to happen when asked. Despite the repeated claims that when he left for school in Pennsylvania, the bad spirits would return and cause him trouble, it was decided to go ahead with the plan, and on November 11th, the family departed for Philadelphia, where they would spend the winter, while Harry would attend school. He stayed with the family in Philadelphia for about a week, during which a few private messages were given to Dr. Phelps. The spirits warned they would start bothering the boy on the train to school, pinching him and tearing his clothes, so that when he arrived, they would be found ripped, and that the problems would follow him at school for as long as he was there. Under the circumstances, Dr. Phelps thought it best not to send him, but after consulting, they decided he should go, and on November 19th, he left for school. Dr. P. accompanied him for a mile or two, put him under the conductor's care, and asked him to report back if anything significant happened on the way. Two days later, the doctor was called to come get him. He said that shortly after his father left him on the train, he was pinched, poked with pins, and bothered in various ways until he reached his destination; upon arrival, he found that his pants were torn in front, between the waistband and the knees, in two places, several inches long. He changed into another pair that was new and made of very strong material, and those were also ripped in front by at least half a yard before the doctor got there. The knockings had followed him at school and other places; his books had been damaged, costing two dollars, which the doctor paid. The family where he was staying became alarmed and refused to keep him, so he was removed. The boy said that one evening, while he was outside, his cap was mysteriously snatched from his head and thrown onto the sidewalk. As he bent down to pick it up, he saw a flash from a gun at some distance, and a bullet flew over his back and hit a nearby board fence. He was later informed through the rapping that if he hadn’t bent down, he would have been killed, and that his protective spirit took this action to save him.
1749. Dr. P. now concluded to return with Harry to Stratford, and was told that the bad spirits would have no control over him there. The family in which they resided in Philadelphia had become alarmed at the360 strange occurrences, and finally they again returned to Stratford. From that time the disturbances began to subside, and by the 15th of December, 1851, they had ceased altogether. The family remained at Stratford till the spring of 1852, when they returned to their former residence in the city. The house at Stratford is occupied by another family, but no disturbances have ever occurred with the family which now occupy the house, and none with Dr. P.‘s family since the above date.
1749. Dr. P. decided to go back to Stratford with Harry, as he was told that the bad spirits wouldn't bother him there. The family they were staying with in Philadelphia had gotten worried about the strange happenings, and eventually, they returned to Stratford. From that point on, the disturbances started to fade away, and by December 15, 1851, they had completely stopped. The family stayed in Stratford until the spring of 1852, when they went back to their old home in the city. The house in Stratford is now occupied by a different family, but there have been no disturbances with the current residents, and none with Dr. P.'s family since that time.
1750. Thus ends one of the most remarkable histories in the whole course of modern spiritual manifestations. The authority on which it comes to the world is indisputable, and the characters of all concerned are beyond suspicion. It will be observed that generally the demonstrations, as in case of Mr. Calvin R. Brown, in the Fox family, were less boisterous after the family consented to hold communication with them. It seemed to be the desire of a spirit to communicate and set right a matter which was making him unhappy. This accomplished, the demonstrations ceased.
1750. This concludes one of the most remarkable stories in the history of modern spiritual experiences. The authority behind it is undeniable, and the integrity of everyone involved is not in question. Generally, it can be noted that the manifestations, similar to those experienced by Mr. Calvin R. Brown in the Fox family, became less disruptive once the family agreed to communicate with them. It appeared that a spirit wanted to reach out and resolve an issue that was troubling him. Once that was done, the manifestations stopped.
1751. From the foregoing narrative it will be seen that these phenomena do not attach to places, as some have supposed. It makes the fact equally clear that they do attach to persons, and that without certain media they cannot, to any extent, take place. If there is such a thing as ‘haunted houses,’ they must belong to another class of phenomena, or a very different phase of the same, than those always depending on the presence of particular persons.
1751. From the narrative above, it's clear that these phenomena are not linked to specific locations, as some people believe. It also makes it clear that they are connected to certain individuals and that, without specific mediums, they can't occur to any significant degree. If ‘haunted houses’ do exist, they would belong to a different category of phenomena, or an entirely different aspect of the same thing, than those that consistently rely on the presence of particular people.
Idea of the existence of a spiritual sun, and a vital spiritual oxygen, found to exist independently in the mind of a much esteemed author.
1753. The most wonderful and important of all the facts communicated to me by my spirit father, and subsequently sanctioned by a convocation of spirits, were the following: 1. That there is a special spirit sun, concentric with our sun, which illuminates the spirit world, without perceptibly affecting our visual organs. 2. That there is a peculiar vital gas which spirits breathe, although inscrutable to our senses or chemical tests, which we respire in our spiritual capacity. These facts I have considered as among those, which it was impossible could have been learned from the minds of Mrs. Gourlay or myself, as they were certainly new to both of us, and difficult to realize when communicated. My attention has been recently directed by a friend to an essay in a work entitled “Rambles and Reveries of a Student,” wherein I find (page 11) the ideas in question to have been awakened in the author without the smallest interchange of ideas with Mrs. Gourlay or myself. I have been under the impression that his361 leaning would have been unfavourable to Spiritualism. The language employed is as follows:
1753. The most amazing and significant facts shared with me by my spirit father, later confirmed by a gathering of spirits, are the following: 1. There is a unique spirit sun that aligns with our sun, which lights up the spirit world without noticeably affecting our eyesight. 2. There exists a special vital gas that spirits breathe, though it's imperceptible to our senses or chemical tests, which we inhale in our spiritual form. I believe these facts are among those that could not have been learned from the thoughts of Mrs. Gourlay or myself, as they were definitely new to both of us and hard to grasp when explained. A friend recently pointed out an essay in a publication titled “Rambles and Reveries of a Student,” where I found (page 11) that the author came up with these ideas independently, without any discussion with Mrs. Gourlay or me. I thought his361 perspective would have been against Spiritualism. The language used is as follows:
1754. I hold it as a truth, that a divine atmosphere surrounds our earth—an aroma emitted from the world of spirits, in which dwell the great truths and secrets of the universe—a great world that pours down riches upon us, as the sun pours down heat; and as without the sun this world would be but a formless wilderness, so, without this spirit sun, would it be barren of thought or beauty.
1754. I believe it's true that a divine presence surrounds our planet—like a scent coming from the spirit realm, where the profound truths and mysteries of the universe reside. This vast world showers us with abundance, just as the sun provides warmth, and just as our world would be a lifeless wasteland without the sun, it would be devoid of ideas and beauty without this spiritual light.
1755. Above us and around us exists a spiritual atmosphere, more subtle than the natural one. As the latter is the supporter of physical life, so the former is of psychal. We absorb the delicate magnetic aromata from all substances, through the medium of the air, as well as the comparatively coarse oxygen; so all of our soul-life comes from this spirit atmosphere—all thought, all feeling, all appreciation of truth and beauty.
1755. Above us and all around us is a spiritual atmosphere, more subtle than the natural one. Just as the natural atmosphere supports physical life, the spiritual one supports our inner life. We take in the delicate magnetic essence from all things through the air, along with the more tangible oxygen; therefore, all our emotional life comes from this spiritual atmosphere—all thoughts, all feelings, and all appreciation for truth and beauty.
1756. Man is the apex of earth-creation, and the basis of all heavenly life—the foundation of all spiritual existence. Standing thus in a middle plane as the highest thing of earth, and the lowest of heaven, he holds magnetic relationship to both; the earth not only supplying the physical requirements of his being, such as food, drink, and air, but he absorbs impalpable nourishment from all his surroundings: the aroma from flowers, and trees, and fruit, as well as the magnetic emanations from people; intuitively appreciating harmonious influences—feeling an instinctive repulsion when under those that are inharmonious. This antagonism, or horror, we call antipathy; and biography abounds with strange stories of its individual action. Whenever antipathy is experienced, it is a proof that something exists in the peculiar magnetic sphere which has no affinity with the other sphere.
1756. Humans are the pinnacle of earthly creation and the foundation of all heavenly life—the basis of all spiritual existence. Positioned in between as the highest of the earth and the lowest of heaven, they have a magnetic connection to both. The earth provides for their physical needs, like food, drink, and air, but they also draw invisible nourishment from their surroundings: the scents of flowers, trees, and fruits, as well as the energy from other people. They instinctively recognize positive influences and feel a natural aversion to those that are negative. This feeling of repulsion, or horror, is what we call antipathy; and there are many unusual stories throughout history that illustrate its unique effects. Whenever someone feels antipathy, it indicates that something in the specific magnetic field does not resonate with the other field.
1758. Man, regarded as the animal, possesses nothing after his death but the spiritual attributes he has received, corresponding to the physical things he sought in his earthly life; if that was low and sensual, his spiritual condition will be the same; for the spirit land is as much a spiritual condition as it is a place.
1758. Man, seen as an animal, takes nothing with him after death except for the spiritual qualities he has gained, which reflect the physical things he pursued during his life; if those pursuits were shallow and selfish, his spiritual state will mirror that. The spirit world is as much about spiritual conditions as it is about a location.
1759. As man’s external form grows from appropriating substance from the earth, so are thoughts and sentiments, and all things relating to the soul, appropriated from the spirit world. Take the earth from man, and he ceases to exist as a physical being; take the spirit world from him, and he ceases to exist as an immortal soul.
1759. Just as a person's physical body develops by taking in resources from the earth, thoughts and feelings, along with everything connected to the soul, come from the spirit world. Remove the earth from a person, and they no longer exist as a physical being; remove the spirit world from them, and they stop existing as an immortal soul.
1760. All physical things have corresponding truths in the spiritual world, and a man is truly harmonious when he receives the corresponding essence or quality with the material thing—not as a mere symbolization,362 but as an actuality, as real to the soul as its corresponding earthly truth is to the body. As a petty illustration, we will say that where an apple is eaten, a harmonious man receives not only the nutriment contained in the fruit, but he also receives its spiritual correspondence, so as to be doubly nourished by it.
1760. Everything physical has a matching truth in the spiritual world, and a person is truly balanced when they accept the corresponding essence or quality along with the material item—not just as a mere symbol, 362 but as a reality, as real to the soul as its related earthly truth is to the body. For example, when someone eats an apple, a balanced person not only takes in the nourishment from the fruit but also receives its spiritual counterpart, allowing them to be nourished in two ways.
1764. Men originate nothing: they have merely different degrees of receptivity; are merely more or less in magnetic relationship with the higher world. A principle, or truth, is not your truth, or my truth, but God’s truth; as much as a drop of water in the ocean, or a sand-grain in the great desert; as little a personal possession as the cloud above your head. If we look at it abstractly, we perceive the absurdity of all quarrels in relation to originality of ideas—water refreshes the thirsty traveller, whether drunk from his own cup or the cup of another; and if we can incorporate a new truth into our lives, it is unimportant whether we receive it directly or indirectly from the great fountain.
1764. People don’t create anything new; they just have different levels of openness and connection to the spiritual realm. A principle or truth isn’t your truth or my truth, but God’s truth; it’s as insignificant as a drop in the ocean or a grain of sand in the vast desert; it’s not a personal possession, just like the cloud above your head. If we look at it from a broader perspective, we can see how ridiculous all arguments about the originality of ideas are—water quenches the thirsty traveler, whether it comes from their own cup or someone else's; and if we can bring a new truth into our lives, it doesn't matter whether we receive it directly or indirectly from the ultimate source.
1766. Prayer is a simple and natural method of becoming en rapport with higher beings and a higher world: yet no thinker ever believed that prayer would move the Divine Being to alter His eternal plans. As He is the fountain of all Love and all Wisdom, His designs must be without flaw—must be for eternal good: yet prayer is one of the most holy, beautiful, and useful of things; it is the earnest asking of the soul for comfort—whatever the words may be—and by the exaltation of feeling, we rise up from the earth-life into the higher spiritual planes, and become harmonized by the indwelling harmonies of those spheres. Prayer is aspiration. Prayer is the desire to embrace the Infinite. The form of prayer is unimportant; its power lies in the indwelling desire of good. Men should not have forms and times of prayer, but their whole lives should be long, unending acts of prayer.”
1766. Prayer is a straightforward and natural way to connect with higher beings and a transcendent reality. However, no thinker has ever believed that prayer would compel the Divine Being to change His eternal plans. Since He is the source of all Love and Wisdom, His intentions must be perfect and aimed at eternal good. Still, prayer remains one of the most sacred, beautiful, and beneficial practices; it is the sincere request of the soul for comfort—regardless of the specific words used—and through the elevation of our feelings, we can lift ourselves from earthly existence to higher spiritual realms, becoming attuned to the harmonies present in those spheres. Prayer is aspiration. Prayer is the longing to connect with the Infinite. The specific form of prayer doesn't matter; its true strength lies in the genuine desire for good. People shouldn't limit prayer to specific forms and times; rather, their entire lives should be an ongoing, uninterrupted act of prayer.
1768. As the author, to whom reference is thus made, was on terms of363 great mutual friendship with my late sister, as well as with myself, I have consulted her spirit as to the origin of the impressions which had been thus indited by our common friend. It appears from her reply to my inquiry, that these ideas were communicated to him by my spirit father, and that his conversion to Spiritualism had commenced prior to his decease, which took place about two years ago.
1768. Since the author mentioned here had a close friendship with my late sister and with me, I reached out to her spirit to understand the origin of the impressions written by our mutual friend. From her response to my question, it seems these ideas were shared with him by my spirit father, and that he had started his journey into Spiritualism before he passed away about two years ago.
OF MATTER, MIND, AND SPIRIT.
Of Matter.
1769. It is a fact, that as we study more deeply the nature of matter, we find that we know the less about it. The crude impressions by which it makes us sensible of its presence are, of course, intuitively received, and are reiterated incessantly. Hence, the mass of mankind do not imagine that there can be any mystery respecting that ponderable matter which influences the scale-beam. The existence of any other matter, people generally are slow to admit. The electric fluid and caloric, the supposed causes of electricity and heat, were rarely believed in, out of the scientific world, but ponderable matter is the last thing of which any person would imagine himself ignorant. Yet we find that some of the most experienced investigators of nature, have not made up their minds as to what ponderable matter is.
1769. It's a fact that as we study the nature of matter more deeply, we realize we actually know less about it. The basic impressions that alert us to its presence are intuitively received and constantly repeated. Because of this, most people don’t think there can be any mystery about the tangible matter that affects the scale. Generally, people are slow to accept the existence of any other types of matter. The electric fluid and heat, the supposed causes of electricity and warmth, were rarely believed outside the scientific community, but tangible matter is the last thing anyone would think they don't understand. Still, we find that some of the most experienced nature researchers have not been able to determine what tangible matter really is.
1770. According to Newton, matter consists of hard, impenetrable particles, endowed with vis inertiæ, gravitation, and chemical attraction for other particles; vis inertiæ being that force by which a body, if in motion, requires a certain degree of force to arrest or retard it, or to put it into motion if at rest. Gravitation causes all masses to attract each other reciprocally, with a force exactly proportioned to their vis inertiæ; so that these forces are reciprocally measures of each other. It is usual to make gravitation its own measure, by estimating it to be as the weight of the mass; while weight is only the reciprocal attraction of gravitation between the body tried, and the earth. (64.)
1770. According to Newton, matter is made up of solid, impenetrable particles that have vis inertiæ, gravity, and chemical attraction to other particles. Vis inertiæ is the force that means a moving body needs a certain amount of force to slow down or stop it, or to get it moving if it’s at rest. Gravity makes all masses attract each other equally, with a force that is directly proportional to their vis inertiæ; in this way, these forces measure each other. It’s common to measure gravity by considering it equal to the weight of the mass, while weight is simply the reciprocal attraction of gravity between the object being tested and the earth. (64.)
1771. These properties being conceded as belonging to matter, and the measure of its quantity, the next question is, of what does massive matter consist? As to the ratio of weight to bulk, which is designated as “specific gravity,” we see an immense disparity between solids. Potassium, for instance, weighs three-fourths of its bulk of water, while platinum weighs twenty-one times its bulk in that fluid. The density of gaseous hydrogen is to that of platina not more than 1 to 25,000, and yet it may be rarified to the one-hundredth part of its normal spissitude, while apparently filling the same space. Thus the same space may be filled successively by different portions of matter, yet the quantity of matter in the364 space, in the first case, may be to the quantity contained in the second, as 2,500,000 to 1. Newton’s definition of material particles was as follows:
1771. If we accept that these properties belong to matter and measure its quantity, the next question is: what is massive matter made of? Regarding the ratio of weight to volume, known as “specific gravity,” there’s a huge difference between solids. For example, potassium weighs three-fourths of its volume in water, while platinum weighs twenty-one times its volume in the same fluid. The density of gaseous hydrogen compared to platinum is about 1 to 25,000, yet it can be thinned out to one-hundredth of its normal thickness while still seemingly occupying the same space. Thus, the same space can be filled in succession by various portions of matter, but the mass of matter in the first case may compare to the amount in the second as 2,500,000 to 1. Newton’s definition of material particles was as follows:
1772. “It seems probable to me that God, in the beginning, formed matter in solid, massy, hard, impenetrable, movable particles, of such sizes and figures, and with such other properties, and in such proportion to space, as most conduced to the end for which he formed them; and that those primitive particles, being solids, are incomparably harder than any porous bodies compounded of them; even so very hard as never to wear or break in pieces; no mundane power being able to divide what God himself intended to be indivisible.”
1772. “It seems likely to me that God, at the start, created matter as solid, heavy, hard, impenetrable, moving particles, of various sizes and shapes, with specific properties, and in proportions that best served the purpose for which He created them; and that those original particles, being solid, are far harder than any porous materials made from them; so hard, in fact, that they will never wear down or break apart; no worldly force being able to separate what God intended to remain unbreakable.”
1773. Boscovitch, observing that all that was essential to material atoms was attraction and repulsion, the latter being the substitute of Newton’s impenetrability, suggested an hypothesis which dispensed with the atom, and assumed only the forces of attraction and repulsion; alternating, as it appears to me, in a way more original than warrantable. This idea of atoms has been modified by an accomplished mathematician, Exley, of Bristol, England. I quote here Exley’s view:
1773. Boscovitch, noticing that the only things crucial to material atoms were attraction and repulsion, the latter acting as a replacement for Newton’s concept of impenetrability, proposed a hypothesis that eliminated the need for atoms and focused solely on the forces of attraction and repulsion; alternating, it seems to me, in a way that's more creative than justified. This concept of atoms has been refined by a skilled mathematician, Exley, from Bristol, England. I quote Exley’s perspective here:
1774. “The reader has only to allow that each atom of matter consists of an indefinitely extensive sphere of attraction, resting on a very small concentric sphere of repulsion, the force being everywhere, from the centre, inversely as the square of the distance, repulsive near the centre, and then attractive. Now that part which regards the attraction has already obtained the consent of all the followers of Newton; and much more than the other part, which respects repulsion, has been already received in the principles of our present philosophy.
1774. “The reader just needs to understand that each particle of matter has an endlessly large area of attraction, surrounded by a very small area of repulsion, with the force being everywhere, from the center, inversely proportional to the square of the distance, repulsive near the center, and then attractive. The part related to attraction has already been accepted by all followers of Newton, and much more than the other part regarding repulsion has already been incorporated into the principles of our current philosophy.
1776. But this hypothesis, however convenient and consonant with our prejudices, is not absolutely necessary to the explanation of natural phenomena; for, it may be conceived, according to the theory of Boscovitch, that matter consists not of solid particles, but of mere mathematical centres, of forces attractive and repulsive, whose relations to space were ordained, and whose actions are regulated and maintained by the Creator of the universe. Both hypotheses, however, agree in one great principle, viz.: that the properties of bodies depend upon forces emanating from immovable points (whether substantial or not is of little importance) of their masses.
1776. However, this theory, while convenient and in line with our beliefs, isn't absolutely necessary to explain natural phenomena. According to Boscovitch's theory, it's possible to think that matter isn't made up of solid particles, but rather consists of just mathematical points of attractive and repulsive forces, whose relationship to space was established, and whose actions are governed and maintained by the Creator of the universe. Both theories, however, agree on one major principle: that the properties of objects depend on forces coming from fixed points (whether they are solid or not isn't very important) within their masses.
1777. The atoms of matter constituted as in the theory now proposed possess all the individuality, indivisibility, and indestructibility, which the learned and illustrious Newton ascribes to his small solids, and they answer all the ends he has mentioned; the central points, indeed, will be utterly impenetrable by each other, since the repulsion there is infinite; and if at those centres we suppose small solids to be placed, they can answer no farther end than is accomplished by this immensely great repulsive force; for from what we know of matter, we must suppose them to be indefinitely small, if we introduce such solids; and hence they will occupy the place where the repulsion is infinitely great; such solids would be found only an obstacle, and an incumbrance to the free actions of matter; since, however small we imagine them to be, their magnitude will be infinite if compared with a mathematical point, the centre of an atom, which is devoid365 altogether of magnitude. It may be added, that if any reader wish to retain these solids at the centres of the atoms, it will not materially affect the conclusions, provided he allow us to have them as small as we please; and so much, if he intend to philosophize, he must grant, whatever course he may determine to pursue.”
1777. The atoms of matter described in the proposed theory have all the individuality, indivisibility, and indestructibility that the renowned Newton attributes to his small solids, and they fulfill all the purposes he mentions. The central points will be completely impenetrable to each other because the repulsion there is infinite; and if we place small solids at those centers, they won't serve any purpose beyond what is achieved by this immensely strong repulsive force. Based on what we know about matter, we must assume these solids are infinitely small if we introduce them, which means they would occupy a space where the repulsion is infinitely great. Such solids would merely be an obstacle and a hindrance to the free movement of matter; since no matter how tiny we think they are, their size will be infinite compared to a mathematical point, which is the center of an atom and has no size at all. Additionally, if any reader wants to keep these solids at the centers of the atoms, it won't significantly change the conclusions as long as he allows us to make them as small as we like. If he intends to engage in philosophy, he must agree to this, no matter the path he chooses to take. 365
Strictures on a Speculation by Farraday, respecting the Nature of Matter.
1779. This sagacious investigator adverts to the fact, that after each atom in a mass of metallic potassium has combined with an atom of oxygen and an atom of water, forming thus a hydrated oxide—caustic potash—the resulting aggregate occupies much less space than its metallic ingredient previously occupied; so that, taking equal bulks of the hydrate and of potassium, there will be in the metal only 430 metallic atoms, while in the hydrate there will be 700 such atoms. Yet in the latter, besides the 700 metallic atoms, there will be an equal number of aqueous and oxygenous atoms, in all 2800 ponderable atoms. It follows, that if the atoms of potassium are to be considered as minute impenetrable particles, kept at certain distances by an equilibrium of forces, there must be, in a mass of potassium, vastly more space than matter. Moreover, it is the space alone that can be continuous. The non-contiguous material atoms cannot form a continuous mass. Consequently, the well-known power of potassium to conduct electricity must be a quality of the continuous empty space which it comprises, not of the discontinuous particles of matter with which that space is regularly interspersed. It is in the next place urged, that while, agreeably to these considerations, space is shown to be a conductor, there are considerations equally tending to prove it to be a non-conductor, since in certain non-conducting bodies, such as resins, there must be nearly as much vacant space as in potassium. Hence the supposition that atoms are minute impenetrable particles, involves the necessity of considering empty space as a conductor in metals, and as a non-conductor in resins, and of course in sulphur and other electrics. This is considered as a reductio ad absurdum. To avoid this contradiction, Farraday supposes that atoms are not minute impenetrable bodies, but, existing throughout the whole space in which their properties are observed, may penetrate each other. Consistently, although the atoms of potassium pervade the whole space which they apparently occupy, the entrance into that space of an equivalent number of atoms of oxygen and water, in consequence of some reciprocal reaction, causes a contraction in the boundaries by which the combination thus formed is enclosed. This is an original and interesting view of this subject, well worthy of the contemplation of chemical philosophers.
1779. This insightful researcher points out that after each atom in a mass of metallic potassium combines with an atom of oxygen and an atom of water, forming a hydrated oxide—caustic potash—the resulting compound takes up much less space than the metallic potassium did before. Therefore, if you compare equal volumes of the hydrate and potassium, there would be only 430 metallic atoms in the metal, while there would be 700 in the hydrate. However, in the hydrate, in addition to the 700 metallic atoms, there will be an equal number of water and oxygen atoms, totaling 2800 measurable atoms. This implies that if we consider potassium's atoms as tiny, impenetrable particles kept apart by forces in balance, there must be significantly more space than matter in a mass of potassium. Moreover, only this space can be continuous. The non-contiguous material atoms can't form a continuous mass. As a result, potassium's well-known ability to conduct electricity must stem from the continuous empty space within it, rather than from the separate particles of matter that are scattered throughout that space. Furthermore, it can be argued that while, based on these insights, space is shown to be a conductor, there are equally valid arguments indicating it is a non-conductor, since certain non-conducting materials, like resins, must contain nearly as much empty space as potassium does. Thus, the idea that atoms are tiny, impenetrable particles leads to the conclusion that empty space acts as a conductor in metals and as a non-conductor in resins, as well as in sulfur and other insulators. This is regarded as a reductio ad absurdum. To resolve this contradiction, Faraday suggests that atoms are not tiny, impenetrable bodies but exist throughout the entire space where their properties are observed and can permeate each other. Consistently, although the atoms of potassium spread throughout the space they seemingly occupy, the introduction of an equivalent number of oxygen and water atoms into that space, due to some reciprocal reaction, causes a contraction of the boundaries enclosing the resulting combination. This presents a novel and intriguing perspective on the subject, deserving of consideration by chemists.
1780. But, upon these premises, Farraday has ventured on some in366ferences which, upon various accounts, appear to me unwarrantable. I agree that “a” representing a particle of matter, and “m” representing its properties, it is only with “m” that we have any acquaintance, the existence of “a” resting merely on an inference. Heretofore I have often appealed to this fact, in order to show that the evidence of imponderable, no less than of ponderable matter, is precisely the existence of properties which can only be accounted for by inferring the existence of an appropriate matter to which those properties appertain. Yet I cannot concur in the idea that, because it is only with “m” that we are acquainted, the existence of “a” must not be inevitably inferred, so that bodies are to be considered as constituted of their materialized powers. I use the word “materialized,” because it is fully admitted by Farraday, that by dispensing with an impenetrable atom “a” we do not get rid of the idea of matter, but have to imagine each atom as existing throughout the whole sphere of its force, instead of being condensed about the centre. This seems to follow from the following language:
1780. But based on this information, Farraday has made some in366ferences that seem, for various reasons, unjustified to me. I agree that “a” represents a particle of matter, and “m” represents its properties, but we are only familiar with “m,” as “a” exists only as an inference. I have often pointed out this fact to argue that the evidence of both imponderable and ponderable matter relies on properties that can only be explained by inferring an appropriate matter to which they belong. However, I cannot agree with the notion that just because we are familiar only with “m,” we cannot inevitably infer the existence of “a” and that bodies should be seen as made up solely of their materialized powers. I use the term “materialized” because Farraday acknowledges that by eliminating the idea of an impenetrable atom “a,” we don’t eliminate the concept of matter; instead, we must envision each atom existing throughout the entire range of its force, rather than being concentrated around a center. This seems to be supported by the following statement:
1781. “The view now stated of the constitution of matter would seem to involve necessarily the conclusion that matter fills all space, or at least the space to which gravitation extends, including the sun and its system; for gravitation is a property of matter dependent on a certain force, and it is this force which constitutes matter.”
1782. Literally, this paragraph seems to convey the impression, that, agreeably to this new idea of matter, the sun and his planets are not distinct bodies, but consist of certain material powers reciprocally penetrating each other, and pervading a space larger than that comprised within the orbit of Neptune. We do not live upon, but within, the matter of which the earth is constituted, or rather within a mixture of all the solar and planetary matter belonging to our solar system. I cannot conceive that the sagacious author seriously intended to sanction any notion involving these consequences. I shall assume, therefore, that, excepting the case of gravitation, his new idea of matter was intended to be restricted to those powers which display themselves within masses at insensible distances, and shall proceed to state the objections which seem to exist against the new idea as associated with those powers.
1782. Basically, this paragraph suggests that, according to this new understanding of matter, the sun and its planets aren’t separate bodies but are made up of certain material energies that mutually penetrate each other, filling a space larger than what’s within Neptune's orbit. We don’t live on the earth, but within the matter that makes up the earth, or more accurately, within a mix of all the solar and planetary matter in our solar system. I find it hard to believe that the insightful author genuinely meant to support any idea that leads to these implications. Therefore, I’ll assume that, aside from gravity, his new understanding of matter was meant to focus on the forces that show themselves within masses at negligible distances, and I will continue to outline the objections that appear to exist against the new idea as it relates to those forces.
1783. Evidently the arguments of Farraday against the existence, in potassium and other masses of matter, of impenetrable atoms endowed with cohesion, chemical affinity, momentum, and gravitation, rest upon the inference that in metals there is nothing to perform the part of an electrical conductor besides continuous empty space. This illustrious philosopher has heretofore appeared to be disinclined to admit the existence of any matter devoid of ponderability! The main object of certain letters which I addressed to him was to prove that the phenomena of induction could not, as he had represented, be an “action” of ponderable atoms, but, on the contrary, must be considered as an affection of them consequent to367 the intervention of an imponderable matter, without which the phenomena of electricity would be inexplicable. This repugnance to the admission of an imponderable electrical cause, has been the more remarkable, as his researches have not only proved the existence of prodigious electrical power in metals, but likewise that it is evolved during chemico-electric reaction, in equivalent proportion to the quantity of ponderable matter decomposed or combined.
1783. Clearly, Farraday's arguments against the existence of impenetrable atoms in potassium and other substances, which have properties like cohesion, chemical affinity, momentum, and gravitation, rely on the assumption that in metals, there’s nothing that acts as an electrical conductor except for continuous empty space. This well-known philosopher has seemed reluctant to accept the idea of any matter that lacks weight! The main purpose of certain letters I sent him was to demonstrate that the phenomena of induction could not, as he suggested, be an “action” of weighty atoms, but rather should be seen as an affection of them resulting from367 the presence of an imponderable matter, without which the phenomena of electricity would be impossible to explain. His resistance to acknowledging an imponderable electrical cause is even more notable since his research has not only shown the presence of tremendous electrical power in metals but also that it emerges during chemico-electric reactions in direct relation to the amount of weighty matter that gets broken down or combined.
1784. According to his researches, a grain of water, by electrolytic reaction with four grains of zinc, evolves as much electricity as would charge fifteen millions of square feet of coated glass when supplied by a plate machine of fifty inches in diameter. But in addition to the proofs of the existence of electrical powers in metals thus furnished, it is demonstrated that this power must be inseparably associated with metals, by the well-known fact that in the electro-magnetic machine—an apparatus which we owe to his genius, and the mechanical ingenuity of Pixii and Saxton—a coil of wire, being subjected to the inductive influence of a magnet, is capable of furnishing, within the circuit which it forms, all the phenomena of an electrical current, whether of ignition, shock, or electrolysis.
1784. Based on his research, a drop of water, when it reacts electrolytically with four drops of zinc, generates enough electricity to charge fifteen million square feet of coated glass using a plate machine that's fifty inches wide. Furthermore, besides providing evidence of electrical properties in metals, it also shows that this power is inherently linked to metals. This is demonstrated by the well-known fact that in the electro-magnetic machine—an invention that we owe to his brilliance, along with the mechanical skill of Pixii and Saxton—a coil of wire, when exposed to the magnetic influence, is able to produce all the effects of an electrical current within the circuit it creates, including ignition, shock, or electrolysis.
1785. The existence in metals of an enormous calorific power must be evident from the heat evolved by mere hammering. It is well known that by a skilful application of the hammer, a piece of iron, between it and a cold anvil, may be ignited. To what other cause than their inherent calorific power can the ignition of metals by the discharge of a Leyden battery be ascribed?
1785. The huge heat energy present in metals should be clear from the heat produced just by hammering. It’s well known that with the right technique, a piece of iron can catch fire when struck between a hammer and a cold anvil. What other reason could there be for metals igniting from the discharge of a Leyden battery, if not their inherent heat-producing ability?
1786. It follows, that the existence of an immense calorific and electrical power is undeniable. The materiality of these powers, or of their cause, is all that has been questionable. But, according to the speculations of Farraday, all the powers of matter are material; not only the calorific and electrical powers are thus to be considered, but likewise the powers of cohesion, chemical affinity, inertia, and gravitation, while of all these material powers only the latter can be ponderable!
1786. It follows that the existence of a massive thermal and electrical power is undeniable. The physical nature of these powers, or their source, is what has been questioned. However, according to Farraday's theories, all powers of matter are material; not only should thermal and electrical powers be viewed this way, but also the powers of cohesion, chemical affinity, inertia, and gravity, while of all these material powers only the latter can be weighed!
1787. Thus, a disinclination on the part of this distinguished investigator to admit the existence of one or two imponderable principles, has led him into speculations involving the existence of a much greater number. But if, while the rest of the properties of the metal are represented by Newtonian atoms, the calorific and electrical powers be both material and imponderable, and of these such enormous quantities exist in potassium, as well as in zinc and all other metals, so much of the reasoning in question as is founded on the vacuity of the space between the metallic atoms is groundless.
1787. So, this distinguished investigator's reluctance to accept the existence of one or two unknown principles has led him to speculate about the existence of many more. However, if, while other properties of the metal are explained by Newtonian atoms, both thermal and electrical powers are material and unknown, and if large amounts of these powers exist in potassium, zinc, and all other metals, then much of the reasoning he presents, which is based on the emptiness of the space between metallic atoms, is unfounded.
1788. Although the space occupied by the hydrated oxide of potassium comprises 2800 ponderable atoms, while that occupied by an equal mass of the metal comprises only 430, there may be in the latter proportionally as much more of the material, though imponderable, powers of heat and electricity, as there is less of matter endowed with ponderability.
1788. Even though the space taken up by the hydrated potassium oxide contains 2800 heavy atoms, while an equal mass of the metal only contains 430, there could be significantly more of the material in the latter that is, while weightless, full of heat and electricity, even though there is less matter with weight.
1789. Thus, while assuming the existence of fewer imponderable causes than the celebrated author of the speculation has himself proposed, we explain the conducting power of metals, without being under the necessity of attributing to void space the property of electrical conduction. Moreover, I consider it quite consistent to suppose that the presence of the ethereal basis of electricity is indispensable to electrical conduction, and that diversities in this faculty are due to the proportion of that material power present, and the mode of its association with other matter. The immense superiority of metals will be explained, by referring it to their being peculiarly replete with the ethereal basis of heat and electricity.
1789. So, while we assume there are fewer unknown factors than the well-known author of this theory suggested, we can explain how metals conduct electricity without needing to claim that empty space has the ability to conduct electricity. I also think it's reasonable to believe that the presence of the ethereal basis of electricity is essential for electrical conduction, and that differences in this ability come from the amount of that material presence and how it's combined with other materials. The significant superiority of metals can be explained by their unique abundance of the ethereal basis of heat and electricity.
1790. Hence Farraday’s suggestions respecting the materiality of what has heretofore been designated as the properties of bodies, furnish the means of refuting his arguments against the existence of ponderable impenetrable atoms as the basis of cohesion, chemical affinity, momentum, and gravitation.
1792. I have said that of all the powers which are, according to Farraday’s speculations, to be deemed material, gravitation can alone be ponderable; since, according to his speculations, gravitation, in common with every power heretofore attributed to impenetrable particles, must be a matter independently pervading the space throughout which it is perceived. This being the consequence, by what tie is gravitation, or, in other words, weight—indissolubly attached to the rest? It cannot be pretended that either of the powers is the property of any other. Each of them is an m, and cannot play the part of an a, not only because an m, an effect, cannot be an a, its cause, but because, according to the premises, no a can exist. Nor can it be advanced that they are the same power, since chemical affinity and cohesion act only at insensible distances, while gravitation acts at any and every distance, with forces inversely as their squares; and, moreover, the power of chemical affinity is not commensurate with that of gravitation. One part, by weight, of hydrogen has a greater affinity, universally, for any other element than two hundred parts of gold. By what means then are cohesion, chemical affinity, and gravitation inseparably associated in all the ponderable elements of matter? Is it not fatal to the validity of the highly ingenious and interesting deductions of Farraday, that they are thus shown to be utterly incompetent to explain the inseparable association of cohesion, chemical affinity, and inertia with gravitation, while the existence of a vacuity between Newtonian atoms, mainly relied upon as the basis of an argument against their existence, is shown to be inconsistent both with the ingenious speculation which has called forth these remarks, and those Herculean “researches”369 which must perpetuate his fame? (See Appendix for Farraday’s Speculations on Electric Conduction and the Nature of Matter.)
1792. I have stated that out of all the forces that are, according to Farraday’s theories, considered material, only gravitation can be measured; since, based on his theories, gravitation, like every force previously attributed to impenetrable particles, must be an entity that independently fills the space in which it is felt. Given this, what connects gravitation, or in other words, weight—unbreakably tied to the rest? It cannot be claimed that either of the forces is owned by the other. Each one is an m, and cannot act as an a, not only because an m, an effect, cannot be an a, its cause, but also because, according to the arguments, no a can exist. Nor can it be argued that they are the same force, since chemical affinity and cohesion work only at imperceptible distances, while gravitation operates at any and every distance, with forces inversely proportional to their squares; additionally, the strength of chemical affinity does not match that of gravitation. One unit, by weight, of hydrogen has a greater attraction overall for any other element than two hundred units of gold. So how are cohesion, chemical affinity, and gravitation inseparably linked in all the measurable elements of matter? Is it not detrimental to the credibility of the incredibly clever and fascinating conclusions of Farraday that they are shown to be completely inadequate in explaining the inseparable connection of cohesion, chemical affinity, and inertia with gravitation, while the idea of a vacuum between Newtonian atoms—which is primarily used as an argument against their existence—is demonstrated to be inconsistent both with the brilliant theory that prompted these comments and those monumental “researches”369 that will ensure his legacy? (See the Appendix for Farraday’s Speculations on Electric Conduction and the Nature of Matter.)
On Whewell’s demonstration that all matter is heavy.
1794. This subject may be interesting now, when we are anxious to understand well the nature of matter, which Comte would represent as the basis of mind, and when it becomes a point of departure in forming ideas of spirit and mind, as they must be contemplated by Spiritualism. I therefore subjoin a critique upon the allegation that all matter can be heavy, and on the relation between vis inertiæ and gravitation.
1794. This topic might be interesting now, as we’re eager to understand the nature of matter, which Comte would describe as the foundation of mind, and when it serves as a starting point in developing concepts of spirit and mind, as they need to be viewed by Spiritualism. I’m therefore adding a critique on the claim that all matter can be heavy, and on the relationship between inertia and gravity.
1795. One consideration seems to be usually overlooked in contemplating these forces. It is forgotten that inertia is the property of one body, while gravitation requires two for its existence. If there were only one body in nature, it might move on, in obedience to its vis inertiæ, for any length of time; but, during an isolated existence, could neither attract nor be attracted. Whewell’s theorem, in his own language, is as follows:
1795. One aspect often overlooked when thinking about these forces is that inertia is a property of a single object, while gravitation depends on the presence of two objects. If there were only one object in the universe, it could continue to move according to its vis inertiæ for as long as it wanted; however, in that isolated state, it couldn’t attract anything or be attracted to anything. Whewell’s theorem, in his own words, is as follows:
1796. “We see,” alleges Whewell, “that the propositions that all bodies are heavy, and that inertia is proportional to weight, necessarily follow from those fundamental ideas which we unavoidably employ in all attempts to reason concerning the mechanical relations of bodies.” (See Demonstration that all Matter is heavy, by the Rev. William Whewell, B.D. Silliman’s Journal, vol. 42, page 265.)
1796. “We see,” claims Whewell, “that the statements that all objects have weight and that inertia is proportional to weight naturally follow from the basic concepts we inevitably use in any effort to understand the mechanical relationships of objects.” (See Demonstration that all Matter is heavy, by the Rev. William Whewell, B.D. Silliman’s Journal, vol. 42, page 265.)
To Professor Whewell:
To Professor Whewell:
1798. I conceive that to demonstrate that all matter is heavy, is, in other words, to prove that all matter is endowed with attraction of gravitation, or that general property which, when it causes bodies to tend toward the centre of the earth, is called weight. Hence to assert that all matter is heavy, is no more than to say, that attraction of gravitation exists between all or any masses of matter.
1798. I believe that showing that all matter is heavy means proving that all matter has the force of gravity, or that general property which, when it pulls objects toward the center of the earth, is called weight. So, to claim that all matter is heavy is just to say that gravitational attraction exists between all or any masses of matter.
1799. You say, “it may be urged that we have no difficulty in conceiving of matter which is not heavy.” I have no hesitation in asserting that there should be no difficulty in entertaining such a conception; since I cannot understand why any two masses may not be as readily conceived to repel, as to attract each other, or neither to attract nor to repel. Is it not easier to imagine two remote masses indifferent to each other, than that370 they act upon each other? Is any thing more difficult to understand than that a body can act where it is not?
1799. You might say, “it's easy to think of matter that isn't heavy.” I confidently assert that there shouldn’t be any trouble entertaining that idea; I don’t see why two masses can’t just as easily be conceived to repel each other as to attract each other, or neither attract nor repel. Isn't it simpler to picture two distant masses being indifferent to one another than to imagine that370 they influence each other? Is there anything harder to grasp than that a body can act from a distance?
1800. It is also mentioned by you, that it may be urged “that inertia and weight are two separate properties of matter.” Now I will not only urge, but also, with all due deference, will undertake to show, that the existence of inertia may as well be proven, and its quantity estimated, by means of repulsion as by means of attraction.
1800. You also mentioned that it can be argued “that inertia and weight are two separate properties of matter.” Now, I will not only argue this but, with all due respect, I will also demonstrate that the existence of inertia can be proven and its amount estimated through repulsion just as well as through attraction.
1801. Suppose two bodies, A and B, to be endowed with reciprocal attraction, or, in other words, to gravitate toward each other. Being placed at a distance, and then allowed to approach, if, after any given time, it were found that they had moved severally any ascertained distances, evidently their relative inertias would be considered as inversely as those distances.
1801. Imagine two objects, A and B, that attract each other, or in other words, pull towards each other due to gravity. If they start at a distance and then come closer, and after a certain amount of time it’s observed that they have each moved specific distances, it’s clear that their relative masses would be viewed as inversely proportional to those distances.
1802. In the next place, let us suppose two bodies, X and Y, endowed with the opposite force of reciprocal repulsion, to be placed in proximity, and then allowed to fly apart. The distances run through by them severally, being, at any given time, determined, might not their respective inertias be taken to be inversely as those distances; so that the question would be as well ascertained in this case as in that above stated, in which gravitation should be resorted to as the test?
1802. Now, let's imagine two objects, X and Y, that have opposing forces of repulsion, placed close together and then allowed to move apart. The distances each of them travels at any given moment could be considered, couldn't their respective inertias be thought of as inversely proportional to those distances? In this case, the question could be determined just as clearly as in the previous example, where gravity was used as the reference.
1803. It seems to me that this question is sufficiently answered in the affirmative, in your second paragraph, page 7, (p. 269,) in which you allege, that “one body has twice as much inertia as another, if, when the same force acts upon it for the same time, it acquires but half the velocity. This is the fundamental conception of inertia.”
1803. I believe this question is answered clearly in your second paragraph, page 7, (p. 269,) where you state that “one body has twice as much inertia as another if, when the same force is applied for the same amount of time, it only reaches half the velocity. This is the basic idea behind inertia.”
1804. In the third paragraph, fourth page, (p. 261,) you say, “that the quantity of matter is measured by those sensible properties of matter which undergo quantitative addition, subtraction, and division, as the matter is added, subtracted, or divided, the quantity of matter cannot be known in any other way; but this mode of measuring the quantity of matter, in order to be true at all, must be true universally.”
1804. In the third paragraph, fourth page, (p. 261,) you say, “the amount of matter is measured by those observable properties of matter that can increase, decrease, and be divided. As matter is added, taken away, or divided, the amount of matter can only be understood this way; but this method of measuring matter must hold true universally to be valid.”
1806. In reply to these allegations, let me inquire, Cannot a matter exist of which the sensible properties do not admit of being measured by human means? Because some kinds of matter can be measured by “those sensible qualities which undergo quantitative addition, subtraction, and division,” does it follow that there may not be matter which is incapable of being thus measured? And wherefore would the method of obtaining philosophical truth be “futile” in the one case, because inapplicable in the other? Because the inertias of A and B have been discovered, by means of their gravitation, does it follow that the inertias of X and Y cannot371 be discovered by their self-repellent power? Why should the inapplicability of gravitation in the one case render its employment futile in the other?
1806. In response to these allegations, let me ask, can there not be a type of matter whose properties cannot be measured by human methods? Just because some types of matter can be quantified through “sensible qualities that can be added, subtracted, and divided,” does that mean there can't be matter that can't be measured in this way? And why would the approach to finding philosophical truth be considered “futile” in one instance while being inapplicable in another? Just because we've discovered the inertias of A and B through their gravitational effects, does that mean we can't uncover the inertias of X and Y through their repulsive forces? Why should the unapplicability of gravity in one situation make its use pointless in the other? 371
1809. If, in the case of all matter, weight be admitted to be the only measure of quantity, it were inconsistent to suppose any given quantity of matter, of any one kind, to have less weight than an equal quantity of another kind; but upon what other than a conventional basis is it to be assumed that there is more matter in a cubic inch of platinum than in a cubic inch of tin? in a cubic inch of mercury than in a cubic inch of iron? Judging by the chemical efficacy of the masses, although the weight of mercury is to that of iron as 13.6 is to 8, there are more equivalents of the latter than the former in any given bulk, since by weight twenty-eight parts of iron are equivalent to two hundred and two parts of mercury.
1809. If we consider weight as the sole measure of quantity for all matter, it would be inconsistent to think that a specific quantity of one type of matter weighs less than an equal quantity of another type. But on what basis, other than a conventional one, can we claim that there is more matter in a cubic inch of platinum than in a cubic inch of tin? Or in a cubic inch of mercury than in a cubic inch of iron? When looking at the chemical effectiveness of these substances, even though the weight of mercury is 13.6 times that of iron, there are more equivalents of iron than mercury in a given volume because, by weight, twenty-eight parts of iron equal two hundred and two parts of mercury.
1810. Weight is one of the properties of certain kinds of matter, and has been advantageously resorted to, in preference to any other property, in estimating the quantity of the matter to which it appertains. Nevertheless, measurement by bulk is found expedient or necessary in many cases. But may we not appeal to any general property which admits of being measured or estimated? Farraday has inferred that the quantity of electricity is as the quantity of gas which it evolves. Light has been considered as proportional in quantity to the surface which it illuminates with a given intensity at a certain distance. The quantity of caloric has been held to be directly as the weight of water which it will render aeriform; and has also been estimated by the degree of its expansive or thermometric influence. What scale-beam is more delicate than the thermoscope of Melloni?
1810. Weight is one of the properties of certain types of matter, and it has often been used instead of any other property to measure the amount of matter it represents. However, measuring by volume is often practical or necessary in many situations. But can we rely on any general property that can be measured or estimated? Faraday concluded that the amount of electricity relates to the amount of gas it produces. Light has been seen as proportional to the area it lights up with a certain intensity at a specific distance. The amount of heat has been thought to be directly related to the weight of water that it can turn into vapor; it has also been measured by how much it expands or its effect on thermometers. What scale or balance is more sensitive than Melloni's thermoscope?
1811. In the last paragraph but one, seventh page, (p. 270,) you suggest, that “perhaps some persons might conceive that the identity of weight and inertia is obvious at once, for both are merely resistance to motion; inertia, resistance to all motion, or change of motion; weight, resistance to motion upward.”
1811. In the second to last paragraph, on the seventh page (p. 270), you mention that “maybe some people might think that the connection between weight and inertia is clear right away, since both are just resistance to motion; inertia is the resistance to any motion or change of motion; weight is the resistance to upward motion.”
1812. I am surprised that you should think the opinion of any person worthy of attention, who should entertain so narrow a view of weight, as antagonist of momentum, as that above quoted, “that it is a resistance to motion upward.” Agreeably to the definition given at the commence372ment of the letter, weight, in its usual practical sense, is only one case of the general force which causes all ponderable masses of matter to gravitate toward each other, and which is of course liable to resist any conflicting motion, whatever may be the direction. When, in the form of solar attraction, it overcomes that inertia of the planets which would otherwise cause them to leave their orbits, does gravitation “resist motion upward?”
1812. I'm surprised you think the opinion of anyone is worth considering when they have such a limited view of weight as merely the opposite of momentum, like the one quoted: “that it is a resistance to motion upward.” According to the definition given at the beginning372 of the letter, weight, in its usual practical sense, is just one example of the general force that pulls all material masses toward each other, and it can resist any opposing motion, regardless of the direction. When it comes to solar attraction, does it not overcome the planets' inertia that would otherwise cause them to drift away from their orbits? So, does gravitation “resist motion upward?”
1815. Gravity has been considered as acting upon falling bodies by an infinity of impulses, each producing an adequate acceleration; but to every such accelerating impulse, producing of course a “change of motion,” will there not be a commensurate resistance from inertia? and the impulses and resistances being both infinite, will not one be as continuous as the other?
1815. Gravity has been seen as affecting falling objects through countless impulses, each causing a corresponding acceleration; but for every accelerating force, which naturally leads to a “change of motion,” shouldn’t there be an equal resistance from inertia? And since both the impulses and resistances are infinite, won’t they be equally continuous?
1817. Agreeably to Mossotti, the creation consists of two kinds of matter, of which the homogeneous particles are mutually repellent, the heterogeneous mutually attractive. Consistently with this hypothesis, per se, any matter must be imponderable; being endowed with a property the very opposite of attraction of gravitation. This last-mentioned property exists between masses consisting of both kinds of particles, so far as the attraction between the heterogeneous atoms predominates over the repulsion between those which are homogeneous. It would follow from these premises, that all matter is ponderable or otherwise, accordingly as it may be situated.
1817. According to Mossotti, creation includes two types of matter: homogeneous particles that repel each other, and heterogeneous ones that attract. In line with this idea, per se, any matter must be weightless; it has a property that is the complete opposite of gravitational attraction. This last property exists between masses made up of both types of particles, as long as the attraction between the heterogeneous atoms is stronger than the repulsion between the homogeneous ones. From this reasoning, it follows that all matter is either weighty or weightless, depending on its position.
1818. Can the ether by which, according to the undulatory theory, light is transmitted, consist of ponderable matter? Were it so, would it not be attracted about the planets with forces proportioned to their weight, respectively? and becoming of unequal density, would not the diversity in its density, thus arising, affect its undulations, as the transmission of sound is influenced by any variations in the density of the aeriform fluid by which it is propagated?
1818. Can the ether, as described by the wave theory, be made up of physical matter? If that were the case, wouldn't it be attracted to the planets with forces based on their respective weights? And if its density varied, wouldn't those differences impact its waves, just like how variations in the density of air affect the transmission of sound?
With esteem, I am yours truly,
Robert Hare
With respect, I am sincerely yours,
Robert Hare
(See appendix for Whewell’s Essay.)
(See appendix for Whewell’s Essay.)
Additional Remarks on the Speculations of Farraday and Exley, above noticed.
1819. Is it possible for a mere centre to be endowed with a force? or reasonable that language should not make a distinction between something and nothing, between cause and effect, between matter and the properties of matter? m being the properties, and a the Newtonian atom, of which they have been considered as the attributes, I cannot concur in the reasoning which infers that where we can only perceive phenomena, we are to dispense with the idea of causation, because that causation is not directly perceptible. It seems to me, from the meaning of the words, that no cause can exist without some effect, nor can any effect exist without a cause. Language founded on the existence of ideas cannot be disused. Can there be any reason for considering any thing as endowed with existence which gives no evidence of existence? We distinguish between the thing which causes and the effect which it produces. The cause evidently has a centrality; the effect, though it indicates by the direction in which it arrives, the centre whence it proceeds, is remote from that centre. The existence of this centrality seems to be recognised in the suggestion that atoms are centres of forces. This implies that the source or cause is at the centre in each atom, and, of course, the phenomenon, being more or less remote from the centre, cannot be the source or cause, and hence has been treated as an effect or property.
1819. Can a simple center really have a force? Or is it reasonable for language to not distinguish between something and nothing, between cause and effect, between matter and its properties? m represents the properties and a is the Newtonian atom, which have been seen as their attributes. I can’t agree with the reasoning that suggests we should ignore the idea of causation just because we can't directly perceive it. From the meanings of the words, it seems to me that no cause can exist without some effect, and no effect can exist without a cause. Language based on the existence of ideas can’t be dismissed. Is there any reason to consider something to exist if it shows no evidence of existence? We can distinguish between the cause and the effect it produces. The cause clearly has a center; the effect, although it hints at the direction it comes from, is distant from that center. The idea of this centrality appears in the suggestion that atoms are centers of forces. This suggests that the source or cause is at the center of each atom, and, naturally, the phenomenon, being more or less distant from the center, cannot be the source or cause and is therefore seen as an effect or property.
1820. The suggestion that the office of atoms may be performed by centres of forces, in fact, assigns to a mere centre the part now performed by a Newtonian atom. But it must be evident that the centre is that point within any rotating mass, which does not turn therewith; and which, where neither of the opposite motions resulting from rotation take place, can neither have length nor breadth. This reduces the idea of a centre to a common definition with a mathematical point; which is nihility in the extreme. An absolutely void space may be identified with nihility, and a mathematical point is a portion of that space, without length, breadth, or thickness. To endow centres with forces is to disregard the axiom, “Out of nothing nothing can come.” Moreover, wherefore should there be a force at certain mathematical points, and yet others be destitute of the same attribute? Manifestly, if some mathematical points are deficient of powers with which others are endowed, there must be something associated with one, which is not associated with the other. This justifies the Newtonian idea, that the force, though proceeding from the centre, is, like the terrestrial attraction of gravitation, the resultant of the complicated attraction of the whole of a body surrounding the centre. But the centrality of the force does not seem to accord with the idea of the inferred diffusion of properties. In the instance of gravitation it does not account for those attributes by which this globe acts as a solid mass within its374 material superficies, and yet, according to the Farradian definition, reaches beyond the moon!
1820. The idea that atoms can be represented by centers of forces basically gives a mere center the role that a Newtonian atom currently plays. However, it's clear that the center is the point within any rotating mass that doesn't move with it, and where neither of the opposing motions from rotation occurs, it can't have length or width. This simplifies the concept of a center to a definition that matches that of a mathematical point, which is essentially nothing. A completely empty space can be seen as nothingness, and a mathematical point is just part of that space, lacking length, width, or thickness. To give forces to centers overlooks the principle that "Nothing comes from nothing." Also, why should certain mathematical points have force while others do not? Clearly, if some mathematical points lack the powers that others possess, there has to be something connected to one that isn't connected to the other. This supports the Newtonian idea that the force, even though it originates from the center, is, like Earth's gravitational attraction, the result of the complex attraction of the entire body surrounding the center. However, the notion of central force doesn't seem to fit with the idea of the distribution of properties. For gravity, it doesn't explain the characteristics that allow this planet to function as a solid mass within its374 material surface, yet, according to Farradian definition, it extends beyond the moon!
1821. But the idea of that polarity, of which Farraday has done so much to establish the existence in all matter, in one form or another, seems to involve that, to constitute atoms, there must be two centres of analogous, but opposite, forces in each: whence it ensues that crystals shoot in prisms or spiculæ, as water is seen to shoot in freezing; and through which salts, as deposited by the evaporation of the solvent from a solution of them, are seen to travel over the sides of the vessel; and upon which property the phenomena of electricity and magnetism appear to be dependent. How is this to be reconciled with this notion of each atom existing in a diffusible penetrable state throughout the space in which its properties prevail? Since these opposite polarities are energetic in their reciprocal polar attraction, what keeps them together, yet prevents them from so uniting as to produce neutralization?
1821. The concept of polarity, which Faraday has significantly demonstrated exists in all matter in one way or another, suggests that to form atoms, there must be two centers of similar, but opposite, forces in each. This leads to the observation that crystals grow in prisms or spikes, just like water is seen to take shape when it freezes; and we can observe salts traveling up the walls of the container as they crystallize from evaporating solutions. This property seems to underpin the phenomena of electricity and magnetism. How can this be reconciled with the idea that each atom exists in a diffusible, penetrable state throughout the space where its properties are active? Given that these opposite polarities energetically attract each other, what keeps them together while preventing them from uniting and resulting in neutralization?
1822. Mr. Exley’s ideas, if admitted, leave no alternative but either to place a Newtonian atom within each of his concentric spheres, or to assume that nothing can have properties, or that effects can exist without causes. What is to cause a force at any mathematical point more than at any other? How, in case of a moving body, are the forces to appear successively to proceed from various centres, if there be nothing in which it is inherent, which moves and carries its forces or properties wheresoever it goes? Does not this suggestion that atoms are centres of their forces, by making the cart draw itself, force the effect to be its own cause? It is quite consistent with the Newtonian definition, that the resultant of the action of every part of a mass should comport as if it proceeded from a common centre, as does terrestrial gravitation; and of course, whether we have the Newtonian idea or that of Boscovitch, Farraday, or Exley, we have forces proceeding from centres. The great difference is that agreeably to the one these forces emanate from nothing; agreeably to the other, from something. I used to define matter to my pupils as that which has properties. In the mind, is not force distinguished from some moving power which gives it rise? Is not this distinction inevitable? and were the word force employed to designate the moving power which exercises force, would it not confound ideas, without altering the actual state of the case? Would it not impoverish language, without improving science?
1822. Mr. Exley’s ideas, if accepted, only leave us with the choice of placing a Newtonian atom within each of his concentric spheres or assuming that nothing can have properties, or that effects can exist without causes. What could cause a force at any mathematical point more than at another? How, in the case of a moving body, can the forces appear to come successively from various centers if there’s nothing inherent that moves and carries its forces or properties wherever it goes? Doesn’t the suggestion that atoms are centers of their forces make the cart pull itself, forcing the effect to be its own cause? It is entirely consistent with the Newtonian definition that the sum of the actions of every part of a mass should behave as if it came from a common center, as does gravitational force on Earth; and of course, whether we accept the Newtonian concept or that of Boscovitch, Farraday, or Exley, we have forces coming from centers. The main difference is that according to one view, these forces come from nothing; according to the other, from something. I used to define matter for my students as that which has properties. In the mind, isn’t force distinguished from some moving power that gives rise to it? Isn’t this distinction unavoidable? And if the word force were used to refer to the moving power that exerts force, wouldn’t it confuse ideas without changing the reality of the situation? Wouldn’t it degrade language without enhancing science?
Of Mundane, Ethereal, and Ponderable Matter, in their Chemical relations.
1823. The bodies which occupy the attention of a chemist are found in one of three states—those of solidity, fluidity, and elasticity. Ice, liquid water, and steam exemplify these different states. The fact is thus illustrated, that the same chemical compound, consisting of oxygen and hy375drogen, may exist in either state, according to the temperature to which it may be subjected.
1823. The substances that a chemist focuses on exist in one of three states—solid, liquid, and gas. Ice, liquid water, and steam are examples of these states. This illustrates the fact that the same chemical compound, made up of oxygen and hydrogen, can exist in any of these forms depending on the temperature it is exposed to. 375
1825. Beside the property of gravitation, of which the energy is inversely as the square of the distance, however great, (as when it enables the two suns, apparently forming but one—the double star, 61 Cygni (1340)—at the distance of six thousand millions of miles, to attract each other so as to revolve about their common centre of gravity,) atoms are endowed with a force called attraction of aggregation, which operates only at insensible distances, so that when brought into due proximity they unite and form a coherent mass. Again, they are endowed, as already mentioned, with chemical affinity, which varies with the kind of particles in which it exists as a property; being the characteristic by which they are distinguished one from the other.
1825. Along with the property of gravity, where the energy decreases as the square of the distance—no matter how far apart (like the two suns that look like one—the double star, 61 Cygni (1340)—at a distance of six thousand million miles, still able to pull each other in a way that makes them orbit around their common center of gravity), atoms also have a force known as the attraction of aggregation, which works only at very close distances. When they come close enough, they join together to form a solid mass. Additionally, as mentioned before, they possess chemical affinity, which changes based on the type of particles and serves as the feature that sets them apart from one another.
1826. According to the doctrine which chemists have heretofore suggested for the existence of matter in the elastic or gaseous state, each aerial or gaseous atom was conceived to be enveloped in an atmosphere of fluid called caloric, resembling the ether in the self-repellent power of its constituent particles. This atmosphere has been assumed to impart to atoms which it envelopes its own inherent power of reciprocal repulsion, like that which those of the ether have. But Dalton showed that there was no repulsion between gaseous atoms when heterogeneous. Two or more such gases, hydrogen and nitrogen, for instance, being comprised in the same cavity, there would be no repulsion between the atoms of hydrogen and those of nitrogen, but only between those of the same gas. This has been held to be equally true, however many gases might be mingled, or whatever vapours might be superadded.
1826. According to the ideas that chemists have previously put forward about the existence of matter in the elastic or gaseous state, each gas or air atom was thought to be surrounded by a fluid atmosphere called caloric, similar to the ether in the way its particles repel each other. This atmosphere was assumed to give the atoms it surrounds a natural ability to repel each other, just like the particles of ether do. However, Dalton demonstrated that there was no repulsion between different gaseous atoms. For example, if hydrogen and nitrogen gases were in the same space, there would be no repulsion between hydrogen and nitrogen atoms, only between atoms of the same type of gas. This has been believed to be true regardless of how many gases were mixed together or what other vapors were added.
1827. The idea is thus refuted, which ascribes the repulsive power to the same elastic fluid, since in that case the diversity of the gaseous atoms could not so affect the repulsive influence as to nullify it between heterogeneous atoms, while sustaining this repulsion, where the atoms should be alike.
1827. The idea is therefore rejected, which attributes the repulsive force to the same elastic fluid, because in that case, the differences among the gas atoms couldn’t affect the repulsive force enough to cancel it out between different atoms while still allowing for this repulsion when the atoms are identical.
1828. Moreover, as the rays of light have been found to be mere undulations in the ether; the rays of heat, being perfectly analogous in their attributes, must also be due to ethereal undulations. But vaporization may be affected by radiant heat, and gases owe their aeriform state to the same cause as vapor or steam; yet transient undulations evidently cannot form a permanent combination, so as to confer the durable elasticity of a permanent gas.
1828. Moreover, since light rays are simply waves in the ether, heat rays, which have similar qualities, must also be caused by these ether waves. However, vaporization can be influenced by radiant heat, and gases exist in their gaseous state for the same reason as vapor or steam. Yet, temporary waves clearly cannot create a permanent combination that provides the lasting elasticity of a stable gas.
1829. It appears, then, that neither the doctrine of caloric, nor the undulatory doctrine, as it is received, will explain the creation of permanent gas. Under these circumstances a modification of the existing opinions is376 called for. It has, for some years, occurred to me, that the Newtonian doctrine of radiation might be associated with that of undulation.
1829. It seems that neither the caloric theory nor the wave theory, as it stands, can explain the formation of permanent gas. Given this situation, a change in the current views is376 necessary. For a while now, I've thought that the Newtonian theory of radiation could be linked to the theory of waves.
1830. The fact that radiant heat could be collected by a mirror so as to raise the temperature of bodies placed in the focus, and that this process could take place in vacuo, as ascertained by Sir Humphrey Davy, had been adduced as unquestionable evidence of the materiality of caloric, the supposed fluid cause of heat. But as the cold proceeding from a snowball or any cold body could be collected by the same process, it was urged by some chemists that the evidence of the materiality of the cause of cold must also be admitted. Prevost met this argument by suggesting that no body in nature is absolutely cold. Every body, however refrigerated, is not so cold as to be incapable of greater refrigeration. Hence all bodies being absolutely above the zero of nature, are throwing off rays to each other, and where there is equality of temperature, they do not cause any change in their relative temperatures. The rays thrown off by A are compensated by those which it receives from B, and vice versa. But if A throws off to B more than B reciprocates, the temperature of A must fall until an equilibrium is attained. Thus, A being the mirror and B the snowball, the mirror is refrigerated, and causes a greater radiation from any body situated about its focus. This explanation was generally received, but to me, the following rationale, which I advanced, appeared preferable:
1830. The fact that a mirror can collect radiant heat to raise the temperature of objects placed at its focus, and that this can happen in a vacuum, as demonstrated by Sir Humphrey Davy, was seen as undeniable proof of the existence of caloric, the supposed fluid that causes heat. However, since cold from a snowball or any cold object could also be collected in the same way, some chemists argued that the existence of the substance responsible for cold should also be acknowledged. Prevost countered this by suggesting that no object in nature is truly cold. Every body, no matter how cooled it is, can still be further cooled. Therefore, since all bodies are above the absolute zero, they are emitting rays towards one another, and when there is an equal temperature, there is no change in their relative temperatures. The rays emitted by A are balanced out by those it receives from B, and vice versa. But if A emits more to B than B sends back, A’s temperature must drop until balance is restored. So, with A as the mirror and B as the snowball, the mirror cools down and causes an increase in radiation from any object near its focus. This explanation was commonly accepted, but I personally preferred the following reasoning that I put forward:
1831. I assumed caloric to exist throughout the sublunary creation, as the luminiferous ether is assumed to be diffused throughout all space by the undulationists; the diffusion arising from the reciprocal repulsion of its particles being similar to that which had been supposed to cause the diffusion of caloric. There is the greatest analogy between this diffusion and that which is known to exist in the case of gases. The process is the same, whether the gas be dense like chlorine, or thirty-six times as rare, as in the instance of hydrogen, and in the luminiferous ether resembles the process by which hydrogen is rarified, or might be rendered more rare, were the pressure of the atmosphere removed.
1831. I believed that heat existed everywhere in the world, just as people assume that the light-carrying ether is spread throughout all of space according to the undulation theory; this spreading occurs because the particles push away from each other, similar to what was thought to cause the spread of heat. There is a strong similarity between this spreading and what we know happens with gases. The process is the same, whether the gas is dense like chlorine or thirty-six times lighter, like hydrogen, and in the light-carrying ether, it resembles how hydrogen becomes less dense or could be made even less dense if atmospheric pressure were removed.
1832. It is known that in any gas or gaseous mixture like that which we breathe, if a deficit of pressure be caused in any spot, the gaseous particles will quickly move toward it, in order to restore the equilibrium of pressure, and that if, on the other hand, any augmentation of pressure be produced at any spot, the gas will move outward to restore the equilibrium.
1832. It is known that in any gas or gas mixture, like the air we breathe, if there is a drop in pressure in any area, the gas particles will quickly move toward that spot to balance out the pressure. Conversely, if there is an increase in pressure at any location, the gas will spread out to restore balance.
1833. The particles being symmetrically arranged in lines, a row of particles may be conceived to lie between every two remote points. If we suppose any number of points in the focal body, and a corresponding number in the surface of the mirror, it may be conceived that the intervening ethereal or calorific particles will move in rows one way or the other, as the pressure in the focal space may become greater or less. Thus an effect is brought about, equivalent to that which the Newtonian idea of377 radiation involves; lines of particles proceed from the hotter points to the colder ones.
1833. The particles are organized in symmetrical lines, so you can think of a row of particles positioned between every two distant points. If we consider several points in the focal body and an equal number on the mirror's surface, we can imagine that the particles in between, whether ethereal or calorific, will move in one direction or the other as the pressure in the focal area increases or decreases. This creates an effect similar to what the Newtonian concept of 377 radiation describes; particles move from the hotter areas to the cooler ones.
1834. The arrangement of the particles of caloric, which was originally, in my view, confined to the sublunary creation, appears of necessity to belong to the luminiferous ether, required by the theory ascribing light to undulations, though the last-mentioned medium must be endowed with ubiquity as above stated, so as to abound in every part of space through which light reaches the eye.
1834. The way heat particles are arranged, which I initially thought was limited to the world we see, seems to necessarily apply to the light-bearing ether, as required by the theory that connects light to waves. However, this ether must be everywhere, as mentioned before, to be present in every part of space that light travels through to reach our eyes.
1837. In order to make this illustration elucidate the conception which I advance, we have only to suppose that the cord, instead of being attached to the post, should be drawn rapidly over pulleys, and, while thus actuated, be subjected to a cause of undulatory vibration. It may be conceived that, by this process, the ethereal particles, while performing all which the undulatory theory requires, might at the same time perform all required by that of emission and material calorific radiation. Directed upon a vaporizable liquid, the undulations might perform the part of sensible heat; the ethereal particles, successively combining, might furnish the latent heat requisite to the constitution of vapour.
1837. To clarify the idea I'm presenting, let's imagine that the cord, instead of being attached to a post, is pulled quickly over pulleys and is also affected by a source of wave-like vibration. One could envision that through this process, the ethereal particles, while fulfilling everything needed for the wave theory, could simultaneously fulfill everything required by the emission and material heat radiation theory. When directed at a liquid that can vaporize, the waves could act as sensible heat; the ethereal particles, blending together, could provide the latent heat necessary to form vapor.
1838. Agreeably to Newton, the seven colours of the spectrum are due to as many different kinds of radiant particles of various refrangibility, or susceptibility of being bent from the rectilinear path when passed through the same refracting medium.[40]
1838. According to Newton, the seven colors of the spectrum come from several different types of light particles that bend in different ways when they pass through the same medium. [40]
1839. According to the undulatory theory, the colours are caused by diversities in the undulations producing them. Retaining this feature, the last-mentioned hypothesis, as modified by myself, appears to be competent to explain the phenomena of light as well as those of vaporization, produced by calorific radiation, since not only is any vaporizing liquid subjected to the transient effect of the undulations, but also may combine with the ethereal particles as they come into contact with it.
1839. According to the wave theory, colors are caused by variations in the waves that produce them. Keeping this aspect, the last-mentioned hypothesis, as I have adjusted it, seems capable of explaining both the phenomena of light and the process of vaporization caused by heat radiation, since not only is any liquid that vaporizes affected by the temporary impact of the waves, but it can also interact with the ethereal particles upon contact.
1840. Thus modified, the rationale of the rainbow, or prismatic spectrum, would not be that the colours indicate as many varieties of original radiant particles, but that they are to be explained agreeably to the undulatory hypothesis, which ascribes them to as many varieties in the undulations, just as the notes in music are ascribed to diversities of vibration.
1840. With this change, the reasoning behind the rainbow or prismatic spectrum would be that the colors don't represent different types of original light particles, but are instead explained by the wave theory, which attributes them to different types of wave patterns, just as musical notes are related to variations in vibration.
1843. The correctness of the inference, that conductors owe their conductive power to ethereal matter entering into their composition, has been insisted upon in my strictures on Farraday’s speculation in some of the preceding pages. The facts admitted by this distinguished investigator of nature’s laws, gave to me a basis on which to rest an argument in favour of the existence of an imponderable cause of heat and electricity in metals, which seems to me unanswerable.
1843. I've emphasized in my criticisms of Faraday's theories in the earlier sections that conductors derive their ability to conduct from the ethereal matter that makes them up. The facts accepted by this renowned researcher of nature's laws provided me with a solid foundation to support my argument for the presence of an unseen source of heat and electricity in metals, which I believe is compelling and unrefutable.
1844. Agreeably to the hypothesis respecting which the preceding preparatory suggestions have been made, gasification is not due to a repulsive atmosphere of ethereal matter, severally appropriated to each ponderable constituent atom, but to an attraction for every such atom exercised by the ethereal fluid, such as water exercises toward sugar, quick-lime, salt, or any soluble substance. The ether attracts the particles of certain solids, and is of course reacted upon by them. The particles thus attracted naturally distribute themselves throughout it, at symmetrical distances. Hence the law of Pettit and Dulong is verified, which, at least, holds good with all gasifiable atoms, that their capacity is inversely as their atomic weight.
1844. According to the theory that the previous suggestions are based on, gasification isn’t caused by a repulsive atmosphere of ethereal matter assigned to each heavy atom, but by an attraction that the ethereal fluid has for each atom, similar to how water attracts sugar, quicklime, salt, or any soluble substance. The ether draws in the particles of certain solids, and naturally, those particles respond to it. The attracted particles spread themselves evenly throughout the ether. This confirms the law of Pettit and Dulong, which states, at least for all atoms that can be gasified, that their capacity is inversely related to their atomic weight.
1845. The atomic weights of hydrogen, nitrogen, and chlorine being severally 1, 14, 36, when associated with equal volumes of the imponderable ether, they will have still the same weight. Equal volumes will weigh the same as the atoms with which they are associated; and the capacity for heat, being directly as the volumes, will be inversely as the weights, the calculation being the same, whether ether or caloric be the imponderable principle to which they owe their gasification. By concurring with those chemists, who estimate the atoms of oxygen at 16, instead of 8, this gas will come into the same calculation.
1845. The atomic weights of hydrogen, nitrogen, and chlorine are 1, 14, and 36, respectively. When these elements combine with equal volumes of the imponderable ether, they still maintain the same weight. Equal volumes will weigh the same as the atoms they are combined with; and since capacity for heat is directly proportional to volume, it will be inversely proportional to weight. The calculations are the same whether ether or heat is the imponderable principle responsible for their gaseous state. Agreeing with those chemists who consider the atomic weight of oxygen to be 16 instead of 8, this gas will fit into the same calculation.
1846. When heterogeneous gases are confined within the same cavity, that they should not react with each other is no more wonderful, than that the same mass of water may at the same time hold different substances in solution, which may add to its hydrostatic pressure though they have no reciprocal reaction.
1846. When different gases are trapped in the same space, it's just as unremarkable that they don't react with one another as it is that the same body of water can hold various substances in solution at the same time, which can increase its hydrostatic pressure even though those substances don't interact with each other.
1847. Sensible heat appears to be due to vibrations in the ether, kept up by the solar rays or central ignition within this globe. By the heat thus acquired the self-repellent power of the ether is augmented. When by refrigeration this source of repulsion is diminished beyond a certain379 limit, the atoms of certain vaporizable particles, such as those of steam and other condensible vapours, are approximated sufficiently to attract each other, and consequently coalesce and are condensed.
1847. Sensible heat seems to be caused by vibrations in the ether, maintained by solar rays or internal ignition within the Earth. This heat enhances the self-repellent power of the ether. When refrigeration reduces this source of repulsion beyond a certain379 limit, the atoms of certain vaporizable particles, like those of steam and other condensable vapors, come close enough to attract one another, leading them to coalesce and condense.
1848. It follows that light is due to undulation, sensible heat to vibration, and electricity to the polarization caused in the ethereal medium, while either in a free, or in a combined state. Thus this luminiferous ether performs the part heretofore attributed to latent heat or caloric in one state; in another state, that of sensible heat.
1848. It follows that light is caused by waves, sensible heat by vibration, and electricity by the polarization that occurs in the ethereal medium, whether in a free or combined state. In this way, this light-carrying ether takes on the role previously assigned to latent heat or caloric in one form; in another form, that of sensible heat.
Suggestions of Massotti, respecting the Nature of Matter.
1849. Massotti has suggested that all bodies consist of two kinds of ultimate particles; that any two or more particles of one kind are repulsive of each other, while any two or more of different kinds are reciprocally attractive. Hence atoms are formed, consisting of one atom of one kind and one of the other kind. Of course, were the opposite forces exercised by the heterogeneous and homogeneous equal, the resulting atoms would be neither attractive nor repulsive; but assuming the attractive power to have the ascendency, the hypothesis would account for the property of gravitation.
1849. Massotti has proposed that all matter is made up of two types of fundamental particles; that any group of particles of the same type repels each other, while any group of different types attracts each other. This leads to the formation of atoms, which consist of one particle of one type and one particle of the other type. If the opposing forces from the different and same types were equal, the resulting atoms wouldn't be either attractive or repulsive; however, if we assume that the attractive force is stronger, this theory could explain the property of gravitation.
1850. Let the suggestions of Massotti be modified, so far as that the extremities of each particle, whether of one or the other kind, are to be considered as endowed with opposite polarities, like those of the magnetic needle, as already suggested in the case of matter in general. Then in one relative position of the extremities they may be reciprocally repulsive, in the other reciprocally attractive; likewise one of the kinds of matter, like the light-producing ether of the undulationists, may pervade the universe, and be condensed in a peculiarly great quantity within perfect conductors: all this being premised, it may be conceived how the waves of opposite polarization, which proceed from oppositely electrified, or in other words, oppositely polarized bodies, cause the matter through which they pass to be decomposed or explosively rent.
1850. Let's modify Massotti's suggestions a bit, so that the ends of each particle, regardless of type, are seen as having opposite polarities, similar to those of a magnetic needle, as previously mentioned regarding matter in general. In one position of the ends, they can repel each other, while in another position, they can attract each other. Additionally, one type of matter, like the light-producing ether described by undulationists, might spread throughout the universe and become highly concentrated in perfect conductors. With this in mind, we can understand how waves with opposite polarization, which come from oppositely charged bodies, can cause the matter they pass through to break apart or explode.
1851. As elsewhere stated, in large bodies of water, waves are the effect of transference of motion successively from one part of the mass to the other; the rolling of the wave causing nothing to pass but the motion, and of course, the momentum is invariably consequent to motion. The waves by which sound is transmitted, are analogous; nothing being transferred excepting a vibration of the air, capable of affecting the tympanum of the ear with the impression requisite to create in the sensorium the idea of sound.
1851. As mentioned before, in large bodies of water, waves result from the transfer of motion from one part of the mass to another; the rolling of the wave allows only the motion to pass, and consequently, momentum always follows motion. The waves that carry sound are similar; nothing is transferred except a vibration of the air, which can impact the eardrum and create the perception of sound in the brain.
1852. Any affection of matter, capable of existing in successive parts of a material body, so that while the body is stationary, the affection passes from one part of the mass to others, may be considered as a wave of that affection, as reasonably as the affection called momentum is considered as producing a wave in water, when passing through it, as above described.380 It is in this way that I consider that the term wave of polarization may be applied to an affection of matter consisting of an abnormal position of the poles of the constituent particles, successively induced in rows of atoms, so as to proceed from one part of the series to the other.
1852. Any change in matter that can occur in different parts of a material body, so that while the body stays still, the change moves from one part to another, can be thought of as a wave of that change, just like momentum creates a wave in water when it moves through it, as described earlier.380 This is how I believe the term wave of polarization can be used to describe a change in matter where the positions of the poles of the individual particles are altered in a sequence within rows of atoms, allowing it to move from one part of the series to the next.
1853. And as two sets of waves, of which the hollows of one should correspond with the elevations of the others, would, by being associated, produce an even surface and equalization of the momentum in the aqueous liquid, so, in opposite polarities, there might be reciprocal neutralization by the coming together of the polarities.
On Electro-polarity as the Cause of Electrical Phenomena.
1854. Agreeably to the view which I take of the present state of our electrical knowledge, the phenomena designated under the name of electricity are due entirely to a process which I designate as polarization, and the consequences thereof. Those attractions and repulsions which have been found to exist between particles of matter, instead of being an endowment of the whole mass of each particle, seem confined, as already suggested, to particular terminations or spots, as we see this property on a larger scale in the loadstone or natural magnet. In the body long known under this appellation, the attractive power which it exercises is displayed usually at two distinct portions of its superficies, which are called poles. When a piece of steel wire is duly rubbed by either of these poles, it acquires a similar attractive polarity, which always appears at the extremities. When formed into an appropriate shape and freely suspended, such a wire magnet constitutes the compass needle, having the wonderful and all-important faculty of arranging itself within a meridian plane, so as to be always nearly north and south; the same pole invariably pointing in the same direction. The poles are named from the quarter to which they point, one being called the north pole of the needle, the other the south pole. This involves that the north pole of the earth itself has nominally south polarity; the south pole, north polarity.
1854. According to my understanding of our current knowledge of electricity, the phenomena we refer to as electricity are entirely caused by a process I call polarization and its effects. The attractions and repulsions observed between particles of matter don't seem to be a property of the entire mass of each particle; rather, they seem to be limited to specific ends or spots, much like we observe this property on a larger scale in a lodestone or natural magnet. In this well-known natural magnet, its attractive power is usually evident at two distinct areas on its surface, which are referred to as poles. When a piece of steel wire is appropriately rubbed by either of these poles, it acquires a similar attracting polarity, which always shows up at the ends. When shaped correctly and freely suspended, such a wire magnet becomes the compass needle, possessing the amazing ability to align itself within a meridian plane, consistently pointing nearly north and south; the same pole always pointing in the same direction. The poles are named based on the direction they point, with one being called the north pole of the needle and the other the south pole. This means that the north pole of the Earth itself is nominally south in polarity, while the south pole has north polarity.
1855. When two suspended compass needles are sufficiently approximated, it will be seen that between the poles which point in the same direction, there is repulsion; between those which point in different directions, attraction. When the dissimilar poles are brought into contact, they adhere; and if left cohering, will continue attached for any length of time; and while in that state of coherence, the magnetic power of the poles thus touching, being neutralized, disappears.[41]
1855. When two suspended compass needles are brought close enough together, you'll notice that the poles pointing in the same direction repel each other, while those pointing in opposite directions attract. When the opposite poles touch, they stick together; and if they stay stuck, they can remain attached indefinitely. While they are in that stuck position, the magnetic force of the touching poles gets neutralized and disappears. [41]
1858. It is to the existence of the power by which these effects are caused, at opposite terminations, that bodies, in congealing or freezing from the state of liquidity, shoot into prismatic, oblong, regular forms, called crystals. This is illustrated in the formation of ice, which is seen to shoot into such prismatic crystals.
1859. When a pane of glass is so situated as to have the focus of a solar microscope thrown upon any spot, so that the glass thus affected may be between the eye of an observer and the microscope, any small crystals formed are greatly magnified. Hence if the focal space be moistened with a solution of certain salts, the solvent evaporating, crystallization ensues, and is seen to form appropriate figures for each salt employed. It is owing to this property that when certain solutions of various substances are evaporated, the soluble solid, as it is deposited from the solvent, arranges itself longitudinally; one atom attaching itself to the pole of another, until it creeps over the sides of the vessel in great quantity. The appearance of arborescence in certain minerals is thus accounted for. When an amalgam of mercury with silver is hung by a platina wire within a bottle of a solution of silver in nitric acid, there is formed a beautiful branching of silver filaments. These are longer, though more slowly formed, as the solution is more dilute. In very dilute solutions I have seen prisms of silver of more than an inch in length, so delicate, that but for the brilliancy of the surface they could not have been detected by the eye.
1859. When a piece of glass is positioned so that the focus of a solar microscope is directed at a specific spot, and the glass is placed between the observer's eye and the microscope, any small crystals formed are greatly magnified. Therefore, if the focal area is moistened with a solution of certain salts, the solvent evaporates, leading to crystallization, which results in distinct shapes for each salt used. This property explains why certain solutions of various substances, when evaporated, allow the soluble solid to arrange itself in a linear manner; one atom binds to the pole of another until it spills over the sides of the container in large amounts. This phenomenon accounts for the appearance of branching in certain minerals. When a mercury-silver amalgam is suspended by a platinum wire inside a bottle containing a solution of silver in nitric acid, beautiful branching silver filaments are produced. These grow longer but more slowly when the solution is more diluted. In very dilute solutions, I have observed silver prisms over an inch long, so delicate that without the brilliance of their surface, they would hardly be noticeable to the naked eye.
1860. Farraday distinguished two kinds of polarity—ferro-magnetic and dia-magnetic. That above described as taking place between steel magnets is designated as ferro-magnetic. Dia-magnetic particles under magnetic influence take position at right angles to that which would ensue from ferro-magnetism.
1860. Farraday identified two types of polarity—ferromagnetic and diamagnetic. The phenomenon described earlier that occurs between steel magnets is called ferromagnetic. Diamagnetic particles, when exposed to a magnetic field, align themselves at right angles to what would occur with ferromagnetism.
1862. It is expected that the preceding discussions have prepared the reader to conceive that the atoms of all ponderable matter are endowed with two analogous but opposite polar powers, which we term polarity. That in any two atoms the dissimilar polar powers tend to make them unite, the similar powers having the opposite tendency. That in any inert mass the opposite powers or polarities are in contact, and thus reciprocally neutralized.
1862. It is expected that the earlier discussions have prepared the reader to understand that the atoms of all physical matter have two similar but opposing polar powers, which we call polarity. In any two atoms, the different polar powers tend to bring them together, while the similar powers tend to push them apart. In any stationary mass, the opposing powers or polarities are in contact, effectively canceling each other out.
1863. It will be also understood that the ethereal fluid which pervades the universe as the means of illumination is assumed to consist in like382 manner of atoms or particles which are endowed with polarity, so that when the opposite poles are in proximity, there is neutralization: repulsion, and disturbance, when similar poles are approximated. This being premised, the allegation may be intelligible, that when bodies are electrified, the poles of the component atoms or particles are conceived to be deranged from their natural position of reciprocal neutralization, so that they react with exterior bodies, disturbing the poles of their constituent particles, and thus electrifying them by induction.
1863. It will also be understood that the ethereal fluid that fills the universe as a means of illumination is assumed to consist of atoms or particles that have polarity. When opposite poles are close together, they neutralize each other; however, similar poles push away from each other and cause disruption. With this in mind, it can be understood that when objects are electrified, the poles of the individual atoms or particles are thought to be disturbed from their natural position of neutralization, causing them to interact with outside bodies, disrupting the poles of their constituent particles, and thus electrifying them by induction. 382
1865. Thus when in an electric machine a vitreous surface is rubbed by a leather cushion, the particles both of the leather and glass surfaces are deranged from their natural state of reciprocal neutralization, and present their poles in an active state, and the glass surface, moving through the ethereal medium, (812) polarizes it as it passes, the ether resuming its normal state till the ethereal atmosphere over the conductor is reached. To that it imparts durable polarity; the metallic superficies of the conductor taking the opposite state, so that the charge is retained until the glass goes to and returns from the cushion, with a farther supply of polarity.
1865. So, when you rub a glass surface with a leather pad in an electric machine, the particles in both the leather and glass surfaces get disturbed from their natural balance. They show their poles in an active state, and as the glass surface moves through the ether, (812) it polarizes the ether as it passes by, allowing it to return to its normal state until it reaches the ethereal atmosphere above the conductor. This atmosphere gets a lasting polarity; the metal surface of the conductor takes on the opposite state, which means the charge stays until the glass is rubbed again on the cushion, bringing in even more polarity.
1866. The charges of polarization received by the plates at each succeeding revolution of the plate or cylinder, is divided with the ethereal atmosphere over the conductor, and this process is reiterated till the frictional power has accomplished its maximum effect. Then the conductor is said to be charged positively, according to the theory of one fluid, and vitreously, according to that of Dufay, or the theory of two fluids. Meanwhile, if the cushion communicates duly with an insulated conductor, a process perfectly analogous to that just described has been charging that conductor, pari passu, with the one first mentioned. By these means we have two excited or charged conductors.
1866. The charges of polarization received by the plates with each rotation of the plate or cylinder are shared with the surrounding ethereal atmosphere over the conductor, and this process repeats until the frictional power reaches its maximum effect. At that point, the conductor is considered positively charged, according to the theory of a single fluid, and vitreously charged, according to Dufay's theory of two fluids. Meanwhile, if the cushion properly interacts with an insulated conductor, a process similar to the one just described has been charging that conductor, pari passu, alongside the first one. Through these processes, we end up with two excited or charged conductors.
1867. If, before charging these conquerors, two scalps of hair be severally situated on them, it will be perceived that, as the charging proceeds, the hairs on each of the scalps rise, and endeavour to keep away from each other. But, meanwhile, the whole of the hair on either is attracted by that on the other conductor. Moreover, on touching both conductors with any metallic rod, simultaneously, the whole of the excitement disappears, and the hairs assume their normal position.
1867. If, before charging these conquerors, two severed scalps are placed separately, you’ll notice that, as the charging happens, the hairs on each scalp stand up and try to move away from each other. However, at the same time, all the hairs on one scalp are drawn towards the hairs on the other scalp. Additionally, if you touch both scalps with a metal rod at the same time, the entire charge disappears, and the hairs return to their normal position.
1871. In the next place, if we procure a horse-shoe magnet, lay it on a table, cover it with a sheet of paper, and then sift over it iron filings, we shall see the shape of the magnet delineated upon the paper, by the filings arranging themselves above its corners in preference. But as the sifting proceeds, the filings will be seen to extend themselves in filaments, so as very much to resemble the electrified hair above described. A tuft of the ferruginous filaments will be formed upon each pole of the magnet, each filament avoiding its neighbours, as far as possible. But while each filament, in either tuft, avoids every other in its appropriate tuft, the whole of the filaments in one, are attracted by those in the other. Thus, the charges of polarity which cause each similarly polarized filament to avoid those in the same state, induce those polarized by one of the poles of the magnet, to attract such as are polarized by the other pole of the magnet.
1871. Next, if we take a horseshoe magnet, place it on a table, cover it with a sheet of paper, and then sprinkle iron filings over it, we will see the shape of the magnet outlined on the paper as the filings gather more around its corners. As we continue to sprinkle, the filings will spread out in strands, resembling the charged hair mentioned earlier. There will be a cluster of iron strands formed at each pole of the magnet, with each strand avoiding its neighbors as much as possible. However, while each strand in one cluster avoids the others in the same cluster, all the strands in one cluster are attracted to those in the other cluster. So, the polarities cause similarly charged strands to repel each other, while those charged by one pole of the magnet attract those charged by the other pole.
1872. Here is, so far, a great analogy between the phenomena of the polarization of filings and the polarization of the hair, above described. But then there is this difference: excepting iron, cobalt, and nickel, there is no metal which can, by contact with the poles of a magnet, neutralize the polarity by which the iron filings are affected; and even these metals produce this result by a process, the inverse of that by which charges of statical electricity are neutralized. In fact, the magnetic metal, far from acting as a discharger, acts as a keeper; and a piece of iron, of a suitable shape, applied to the terminations of a horse-shoe magnet, prevents the gradual diminution of the magnetism, which otherwise ensues. Hence the name keeper is applied to it, as well as armature, derived from the French.
1872. So far, there’s a great analogy between the way iron filings polarize and how hair polarizes, as described above. However, there is one key difference: besides iron, cobalt, and nickel, no other metal can neutralize the polarity affecting the iron filings just by being in contact with the poles of a magnet. Even these metals achieve this result through a process opposite to how static electric charges are neutralized. In fact, the magnetic metal doesn’t discharge the magnetism; it actually helps maintain it. For example, using a piece of iron shaped appropriately at the ends of a horse-shoe magnet prevents the gradual loss of magnetism that would otherwise happen. That’s why it’s called a keeper, as well as an armature, a term borrowed from French.
1874. The charge of the conductor of the machine is superficial, a gilt globe of glass holding as good a charge as a solid globe of metal; and, moreover, in this superficial charge, the ether and the air participate, undergoing a polar affection, analogous to that of the filings exposed to the influence of the magnet.
1874. The charge of the machine's conductor is superficial, a gold-glinted glass globe holding just as effective a charge as a solid metal globe; and, in this superficial charge, both the ether and the air are involved, experiencing a polar influence similar to that of filings exposed to a magnet's effect.
1875. On the other hand, in the use of the steel magnet, the charge is internal, and, other things being equal, increases with the quantity of iron charged; neither the air nor the ether participate in this magnetic charge. There is no mode in which the charges of the poles of a magnet can be made to pass from one to the other, through any interposed conducting mass.
1875. On the other hand, when using a steel magnet, the charge is internal and, all else being equal, increases with the amount of iron magnetized; neither the air nor the ether are involved in this magnetic charge. There is no way for the charges of the poles of a magnet to transfer from one to the other through any intervening conductive material.
1876. The retention of the charge seems to be dependent upon a state of the particles in which they are capable of being deranged from their normal position with a certain degree of extraneous influence, and can only384 resume their natural relative position by a contrary application of a similar agent. Although steel differs from iron only in containing, as an ingredient, one-fiftieth of carbon, this gives it the highly valuable property of hardening, when suddenly refrigerated; a result which may be accounted for by supposing that, in consequence of the sudden exposure to a powerful conducting medium, there is a sort of a jerk by which the particles loose from their midst an undue portion of their ethereal constituents, and cannot recover their normal arrangement after the refrigeration. When this effect is reached to a maximum, the steel is so brittle as sometimes to fly into two or more pieces when left to itself. When soft iron is subjected to the magnetizing process, it exchanges one polarity for the other with such speed, that, in some electro-magnetic instruments, this reversal is effected more than one hundred times in a second; but precisely in proportion as the magnetism is readily received, it is more readily lost. On the other side, when hardened to a maximum, steel can scarcely be magnetized at all. Thus, to have a permanent magnet, we must employ the metal in a state of induration between the extremes. These facts tend to corroborate the inference that magnetism is dependent on the relative position of the ferruginous particles. It is presumed that the ferruginous particles of which the filings consist indicate, by their direction, as seen externally, the direction in which the constituent particles of the magnet are situated beneath the metallic surface.[42]
1876. The retention of the charge seems to depend on the state of the particles, which can be disturbed from their normal position by some external influence and can only regain their natural arrangement through a reverse application of a similar force. Although steel only differs from iron by having one-fiftieth of carbon, this small amount gives it the valuable property of hardening when suddenly cooled. This can be explained by the idea that, due to the sudden exposure to a powerful conductor, there is a sort of jolt that causes the particles to lose an excessive amount of their ethereal components, preventing them from returning to their normal arrangement after cooling. When this effect reaches its peak, the steel can become so brittle that it may break into multiple pieces if left alone. When soft iron undergoes the magnetizing process, it switches polarity so quickly that some electro-magnetic devices can reverse this more than one hundred times in a second. However, the more easily it receives magnetism, the more easily it loses it. On the other hand, when steel is hardened to its highest point, it can hardly be magnetized at all. Therefore, to create a permanent magnet, we must use the metal in a state of hardness that is between the extremes. These facts support the conclusion that magnetism depends on the relative positions of the iron particles. It is believed that the iron particles in the filings indicate, by their orientation as seen externally, the direction of the constituent particles of the magnet beneath the metallic surface.[42]
1877. If to a wire, connecting the poles of a galvanic battery, iron filings are applied, each ferruginous particle becomes a little magnet, and displays exactly the same disposition to unite in filaments as has been represented to take place when they are exposed upon a sheet of paper, to the influence of a magnet supporting it. But while this affection is thus identical with that induced by the steel magnet, it differs therefrom, in its being as transient as the galvanic discharges to which it owes its existence. These, at the lowest estimate, are sufficiently rapid to go round the globe in two seconds; whence it may be conceived that the time taken to percur a few inches of wire must be almost infinitely brief. Hence, although the filings continue in a state of magnetization so long as the action of the battery is sustained, and the wire kept in due contact with the poles of the battery, it is only by a rapid reiteration of discharges, that this result is effected.
1877. If you place iron filings on a wire connecting the poles of a galvanic battery, each iron particle becomes a small magnet and aligns into strands similarly to how they behave when laid on a sheet of paper influenced by a magnet underneath. However, while this attraction is just like what happens with a steel magnet, it differs because it lasts only as long as the galvanic discharges that create it. These discharges are fast enough to circle the globe in two seconds; therefore, the time it takes to travel just a few inches of wire must be almost instantaneous. Thus, the filings remain magnetized as long as the battery is active and the wire is properly connected to the battery poles, but it is through a quick succession of discharges that this effect is achieved.
1878. As the relative position of the particles composing the steel magnet has been inferred to be indicated by that of the movable filings which they influence, we may suppose the position of the particles composing the wire, to be indicated by that which the filings take by which it is encircled. These are situated always as if forming tangents to the circumference of the wire, and hence it may be perceived that the metallic particles, forming the wire, have been shifted from their normal position, parallel to the axis, so as to take that tangential direction which the magnetization evinces.
1878. Since we can infer the position of the particles in the steel magnet from the arrangement of the movable filings they affect, we can also assume that the position of the particles in the wire is indicated by the way the filings surrounding it align. These filings are always positioned as if they are tangent to the wire's circumference, suggesting that the metallic particles in the wire have shifted from their usual position, which is parallel to the axis, into the tangential direction that the magnetization reveals.
1879. On one end of the wire being in communication with one pole of a voltaic series, on touching the other pole of the series with the other end of the wire, filaments of the particles previously situated parallel to386 the axis, are jerked out of the normal position with an inconceivable quickness, the discharge, however, not affecting successive parts of the length absolutely at once, but successively; so that there is a time required for the process, however inconceivably minute it may appear to us. The effect upon the filaments of filings, at the different ends of the wire, are perfectly simultaneous, and the effect analogous, but different in this respect, that the positive poles are presented externally at one end, the negative at the other, so that, when the polarizing affections meet at an intermediate point within the wire, neutrality ensues.
1879. At one end of the wire connected to one pole of a voltaic series, when you touch the other pole of the series with the other end of the wire, the filaments of particles that were initially aligned parallel to 386 the axis are quickly dislodged from their normal position. However, the discharge doesn’t affect all parts of the wire at the same time, but rather sequentially; this means that there is a very tiny amount of time required for the process, even if it seems inconceivable to us. The effects on the filings at both ends of the wire occur at the same time, and they are similar in effect, but differ in that the positive poles are on one end, while the negative poles are on the other, so when the polarizing effects meet at a midpoint within the wire, neutrality is created.
1880. Thus it will be perceived that no current passes through the wire, any more than the water which is seen to form a wave, on one side of a lake, passes with the wave which is seen apparently to proceed to the other side. Notoriously, in this case, nothing passes but the momentum, which is successively imparted to successive portions of the intervening water; so, in the galvanic discharge, successive portions of the intervening wire are affected by the original disturbing jerks, of which the power passes from each portion to that next beyond it, just as the momentum in the case of the aqueous wave.
1880. So, it can be seen that no current flows through the wire, just like the water seen forming a wave on one side of a lake doesn’t travel with the wave that appears to move to the other side. In this situation, nothing travels except for the momentum, which is passed along to successive sections of the water in between; similarly, in a galvanic discharge, successive sections of the wire are influenced by the initial disturbances, with the energy transferring from one section to the next, much like the momentum in a water wave.
1881. Upon these considerations I hold myself as warranted in calling the affections of the wire, as described, waves of polarization, not that the affection of the wire has the smallest similitude to that with which water produces waves, but that, in both cases, there is a successive communication of a property. It is well known that there is this analogy in the two cases; in either, opposite waves, on due meeting, produce reciprocal neutrality.
1881. Based on these points, I believe I'm justified in referring to the behavior of the wire, as described, as waves of polarization. This isn’t because the wire's behavior resembles that of water creating waves in the slightest, but because, in both situations, there is a sequential transfer of a property. It’s well recognized that there is this similarity in both cases; in each scenario, opposing waves, when they meet properly, create a state of mutual neutrality.
1882. The neutralization of the electro-polarity induced upon the charged conductors (1867) by touching both at the same time by a conducting rod, is effected in some degree analogously to the process in the voltaic discharge; since waves of opposite polarization are produced at each extremity, and, rushing toward an intermediate point, are neutralized by meeting. But the polarization in the case of the conductors, as has been stated, (1874,) is superficial, and extends not only to the surfaces of the conductors, but likewise to the surrounding ether and air, and does not affect the ponderable atoms of the wire unless the charge be too great to pass in this superficial manner. In that case, being condensed upon the wire to a state of great intensity, it causes a polarization of the atoms composing it, similar to that of the voltaic discharge, though less durable.
1882. The neutralization of the electro-polarity created on the charged conductors (1867) by simultaneously touching both with a conducting rod happens somewhat like the process in a voltaic discharge; waves of opposite polarization form at each end and rush toward a central point, where they cancel each other out. However, the polarization in the case of the conductors, as previously mentioned, (1874) is only surface-level and affects not just the surfaces of the conductors but also the surrounding ether and air. It doesn't impact the actual atoms of the wire unless the charge is too strong to be handled superficially. In such cases, if the charge is concentrated on the wire to a high intensity, it leads to a polarization of the atoms that make it up, similar to what occurs in a voltaic discharge, though it lasts for a shorter time.
1883. From the preceding exposition it follows that the conduction and insulation of that species of electricity which is excited by an electrical machine or other frictional processes, exists upon the superficies of insulated masses, or that of the circumambient particles of the air or ether. This frictional electricity likewise passes preferably over the surfaces of conductors, so that the moistened surface of glass, or other non-conductors, conveys it with enormous facility. It is notorious, that when the air is moist, electrical machines are paralyzed. But this cannot be in conse387quence of the moist air acting as a conductor. Agreeably to some experiments which I made, a fog from hot water does not act as a conductor. Evidently, were a fog or a cloud a conductor, the air and moisture forming a thunder cloud could not be electrified, so as to give the discharges which constitute lightning.
1883. From the previous explanation, it follows that the conduction and insulation of the type of electricity produced by electrical machines or other friction processes occurs on the surfaces of insulated masses or on the surrounding particles of air or ether. This frictional electricity also travels more easily over the surfaces of conductors, so that a wet surface of glass or other non-conductors allows it to move with great ease. It’s well known that when the air is humid, electrical machines become ineffective. However, this can't be because the moist air acts as a conductor. According to some experiments I conducted, fog from hot water does not behave as a conductor. Clearly, if fog or clouds were conductors, the air and moisture in a thundercloud couldn't become electrified enough to produce the discharges that create lightning.
1884. It is well known that a tube will carry more lightning than a rod, of which the sectional area should comprise the same quantity of metal. Yet, when the wire is too small to carry a charge outside, it is acted upon intestinally and may be explosively deflagrated. But while the existence of a film of moisture upon the glass legs of an electrical machine, may paralyze its power, to a powerful galvanic battery moisture is well known to be essential.
1884. It's widely understood that a tube can conduct more lightning than a rod, provided their cross-sectional areas have the same amount of metal. However, when the wire is too thin to carry a charge effectively, it can suffer internal failure and may explode. While moisture on the glass parts of an electrical machine can hinder its performance, it's important to note that moisture is actually essential for a strong galvanic battery.
1885. If the poles of a powerful voltaic series, while highly charged, were severally to have a conducting communication with the conductors of an electrical machine, it would discharge them so rapidly, that the most active working would not enable them to give a spark; yet at the poles of the same series there might be charges accumulated which would, in effecting chemical decomposition, heating, deflagrating wire, or inducing magnetism, be immensely superior to that created by a machine.
1885. If the ends of a strong battery, while fully charged, were connected to the wires of an electrical machine, it would discharge them so quickly that even the most effective operation wouldn't produce a spark. However, at the ends of that same battery, there could be built-up charges that would be far greater in terms of causing chemical reactions, generating heat, igniting wires, or creating magnetism than what a machine could produce.
1886. Farraday’s reasoning and observations, founded on the idea that the only difference between galvanic and frictional electricity was that between quantity and intensity, led him to take up the idea that a grain of water with an equivalent of zinc would evolve as much electricity as sixteen millions of square feet of coated glass, charged by a powerful machine of fifty inches in diameter. I am surprised that Farraday did not consider his premises erroneous, when he found them involving such startling conclusions.
1886. Farraday’s thoughts and observations, based on the idea that the only difference between galvanic and frictional electricity was the difference between quantity and intensity, led him to propose that a grain of water with an equivalent of zinc would produce as much electricity as sixteen million square feet of coated glass, charged by a powerful machine fifty inches in diameter. I'm surprised that Farraday didn't think his assumptions were wrong when he realized they led to such shocking conclusions.
1887. The source of this startling inference was, I think, as follows: Farraday entertained the opinion, that the only difference between voltaic and frictional electricity was that of quantity and intensity. He went so far as to intimate that this opinion would be entertained the more confidently as the electrician forming his decision should be better acquainted with the subject. I advanced what appeared to me unanswerable objections to this conclusion, but such as were not deemed by him worthy of reply. Unduly confident in his postulate, Farraday first ascertained the greatest effect which could be produced by a certain number of turns of a powerful machine, with a fifty inch plate, in causing a deviation of the galvanometric needle, and then, comparing the quantity of zinc and water required to produce the same effect through galvanic action, by a rule-of-three statement the result above mentioned was obtained. In my view the error arose from overlooking the fact that in the one case the whole discharge was exercised in polarizing the ponderable matter, while in the other only a portion of the discharge was thus employed, being only a secondary effect of the polarization of the circumambient medium. Only388 that portion of the charge which was forced into an association with the ponderable matter, had any effect on the galvanometric needle.
1887. The source of this surprising conclusion was, I believe, as follows: Farraday believed that the only difference between voltaic and frictional electricity was in their quantity and intensity. He even suggested that confidence in this idea would grow as electricians became more knowledgeable about the topic. I presented what I thought were compelling objections to this view, but he didn't consider them worthy of a response. Overly confident in his assumption, Farraday first determined the maximum effect that could be achieved by a certain number of turns of a powerful machine with a fifty-inch plate, observing the deviation of the galvanometric needle, and then compared the amount of zinc and water needed to produce the same effect through galvanic action, arriving at the aforementioned result through a rule-of-three calculation. In my opinion, the mistake came from ignoring the fact that in one case, the entire discharge was used to polarize the tangible material, whereas, in the other, only part of the discharge was utilized as it was merely a secondary effect of polarizing the surrounding medium. Only388 that part of the charge which was integrated with the tangible material had any impact on the galvanometric needle.
1889. Thus the laws of conduction and insulation, as respects the two kinds of electricity in question, are different; the waves of polarization are in the case of the galvanic circuit confined to absolute contact with conducting ponderable matter. It cannot pass through the electrical medium or the air by the disruptive process. When once a passage has been made for it, it may pass convectively, carrying with it the polarizable matter, as may be seen in the arch formed between the poles of a powerful voltaic series after contact.
1889. So, the rules for conduction and insulation are different for the two types of electricity we're talking about. In the case of the galvanic circuit, the waves of polarization are limited to direct contact with solid conductive materials. They can't travel through the electrical medium or air using the disruptive process. Once a path is created, it can move convectively, bringing along the polarizable materials, which can be observed in the arc formed between the poles of a strong voltaic series after contact.
1890. This arch cannot be formed between two metallic points, because none but those of a most fixed and infusible nature can support the heat produced. It is only between charcoal points that it can be created, because no other competent conductor is infusible at the temperature of its volatilization. It is in fact only by the process in question, that charcoal can be volatilized per se. It may be inferred that as those waves of electro-polarity which require the presence of ponderable as well as ethereal matter cannot pass over an interval without the assistance of ponderable matter such as is supplied by the coal. On contact with each other, the points completing the circuit are subjected to an intensity of the polarizing power which causes the carbon of the points, in the state of vapour, to become associated with the ethereal waves, and thus produces the flaming arch, which distinguishes the scene of reciprocal neutralization.
1890. This arc can’t be created between two metal points because only those that are extremely stable and non-melting can handle the heat generated. It can only be formed between charcoal points since no other good conductor can withstand the temperature of its vaporization. In fact, it’s only through this process that charcoal can vaporize on its own. We can deduce that the waves of electric polarity, which need both solid and ethereal matter, can’t travel through a gap without the solid matter provided by coal. When the points touch each other, the circuit is subjected to a high intensity of polarizing power, which causes the carbon from the points, in vapor form, to connect with the ethereal waves, thus creating the flaming arc that characterizes the scene of mutual neutralization.
Of Mind, as existing independently, and as distinguished from Matter.
1891. Three ideas must coexist in every rational being; nihility, mind, and matter. We can, of course, conceive of a perfectly void space, and likewise of a mathematical point, which designates a position not an entity. Yet, position cannot be determined without surrounding entities, between which this point exists, without having claim to any portion of those entities, whether there be only one actual material surface, or where several are cornered together. Of such points we have already treated, as forming at the immovable centre of a rotating mass, so that a centre is, of course, one state of the existence of such a point.
1891. Three ideas must exist in every rational being: emptiness, mind, and matter. We can imagine a completely empty space and also a mathematical point, which indicates a position rather than an entity. However, a position can't be understood without the surrounding entities between which this point exists, without claiming any part of those entities, whether there’s just one actual material surface or several crowded together. We've already discussed such points as forming at the fixed center of a rotating mass, so a center is, of course, one state of existence for such a point.
1892. After the considerations already presented, it will be seen that there is great difficulty in conceiving of the existence of an atom of matter endowed with polarity, and of course with two centres of two analogous, but opposite and irreconcilable forces. And we must consider that there are more than fifty such heterogeneous elementary atoms, all endowed with various degrees of affinity, so as that two may unite energetically to the ex389clusion of a third. This is designated as a case of decomposition, and may be exemplified by the process in which water is explosively decomposed by potassium, with which the oxygen of the water unites to the exclusion of hydrogen. When we see that from seven parts, by weight, of charcoal, and about nine parts of water, sugar ensues; that the sweetness with which this sugar is endowed, is the result of a difference between this substance and starch, in the proportion of the watery elements: starch consisting of less water than sugar, with the same amount of charcoal; when we learn that twelve parts, by weight, of charcoal, fourteen parts of nitrogen, and one of hydrogen, constitute the deadly prussic acid; and when, in fact, we discover that the atoms of matter which compose our flesh are capable of entering into as many active chemical combinations as the beads of a kaleidoscope can be productive of figures, then it will be manifest that the phenomena characterizing what we call matter, as well as the powers of that matter, are such as to prove our utter incapacity to comprehend the powers and properties of material atoms, and that we must not object to any wonder that nature may produce, because it is beyond our comprehension.[43]
1892. After considering what's been presented, it's clear that it's really hard to imagine an atom of matter having polarity, with two centers of similar but opposite and conflicting forces. Plus, we need to recognize that there are more than fifty different kinds of these basic atoms, each with varying degrees of attraction, allowing two of them to combine strongly and exclude a third. This is known as decomposition, and a good example is when water is explosively broken down by potassium, which causes the oxygen from the water to bond with potassium while leaving hydrogen out. When we observe that seven parts by weight of charcoal, along with about nine parts of water, can produce sugar; and that the sweetness of sugar comes from its difference from starch in terms of water content—starch has less water than sugar but the same amount of charcoal; and when we realize that twelve parts by weight of charcoal, fourteen parts of nitrogen, and one part of hydrogen make up deadly prussic acid; and when we discover that the atoms in our bodies can form as many active chemical combinations as the beads in a kaleidoscope can create shapes, it becomes clear that the phenomena we associate with matter and its powers are beyond our ability to fully understand. Therefore, we shouldn't be surprised by any wonders that nature might produce, because they go beyond our comprehension.[43]
1893. The belief in the powers displayed by matter does not then result from their being explicable, but from their being evident, just as the elaboration of the chick from the egg demonstrates the fact that the yolk and the white have been converted into a chicken without our being enabled to comprehend the process by which it has been effected. Such being the imperfection of our knowledge respecting the intricate nature of matter and its reactions, it seems to me inconsistent that there should have been such backwardness to believe in the independent existence of mind, of which the phenomena and properties are quite as evident as those of matter, the mode of existence and operation in either case being inscrutable.
1893. The belief in the powers of matter doesn't come from our ability to explain them, but from their obviousness, just like how the development of a chick from an egg shows that the yolk and the white have turned into a chicken, even though we can’t fully understand how it happens. Given how limited our understanding is about the complex nature of matter and its reactions, it seems inconsistent that people have been so slow to believe in the independent existence of the mind, whose phenomena and properties are just as clear as those of matter, with the way each exists and operates being equally mysterious.
1894. The great distinction between mind and matter is the presence of will on the one side, and the absence of it upon the other. Vis inertiæ is the antipodes of will; and if gravitation have any association with will, it will be that of the Creator; but in the inert mass actuated, it serves only to add to the evidence of incapability of self-actuation.
1894. The key difference between mind and matter is the presence of will in one and its absence in the other. Vis inertiæ is the opposite of will; and if gravitation is related to will at all, it would be in the context of the Creator. However, in the inert mass that is influenced, it only serves to strengthen the proof of its inability to act on its own.
1896. The existence of vis inertiæ, gravitation, and chemical affinity,390 is not more evident as properties of ponderable matter than reason and passion and consequent will are of mind; nor is will less evidently the offspring of reason and passion, than momentum is of vis inertiæ and gravitation. The existence of these attributes of mind is as evident as is the existence of those of ponderable matter, and the incomprehensibility of their origin or mode of operation should no more be an obstacle to belief in the former case than in the latter.
1896. The existence of inertia, gravity, and chemical attraction,390 is just as obvious as the properties of tangible matter, just like reason, emotion, and resulting will are attributes of the mind; and will is no less clearly a product of reason and emotion than momentum is a result of inertia and gravity. The reality of these mental traits is as clear as that of tangible matter, and the mystery of their origin or how they work should not be seen as a barrier to believing in them any more than it is with the latter.
1897. Nothing is more thoroughly fundamental and essential in the doctrine inculcated by revelation than the omnipotency of the will of God. According to Scripture, the whole heaven and earth, and all that is in them, sprung into existence in consequence of the fiat of the Deity, whose will, under the designation of “overruling providence,” is alleged to regulate every thing, even to the fall of a sparrow, or the advent of a pestilence. It follows that the suggestions which I have made respecting the powers of mind are perfectly orthodox, so far as the mind of the Creator is concerned; and as, according to orthodoxy, man is made after God’s own image, however humble and minute may be the being so made, his mind, so far as it exists, must be, within the sphere allotted to it, existing upon an analogous footing to that of its author. The idea of all things coming from the creative power of God as the first cause, involves the existence of the divine-will power, of the first cause; and consequently, beings endowed with an analogous will, must, so far as they have any available existence, be endowed with will-power, of which the potentiality may be more extensive in spirits than in mortals.
1897. Nothing is more fundamental and essential in the doctrine taught by revelation than the all-powerful will of God. According to Scripture, the entire universe and everything in it came into being because of God's decree, whose will, referred to as "overruling providence," is said to govern everything, even the fall of a sparrow or the arrival of a plague. This means that the ideas I’ve shared about the powers of the mind are completely orthodox, as far as the Creator's mind is concerned; and since orthodox belief holds that man is made in God's image, no matter how small or humble that being may be, his mind, as it exists, must, within its given limits, function similarly to that of its Creator. The concept that all things originate from God's creative power as the first cause requires the existence of divine will, of that first cause; therefore, beings with a similar will must, to the extent that they exist, possess willpower, which may be more extensive in spirits than in humans.
1898. It is because there is no other imaginable power which can be productive of the rationality of the universal creation, that forms the great argument for assuming the will of a reasoning Deity to be the cause of causes. Vain were it to appeal to any irrational force under the name of odylic, or any other, to explain the divine attributes on which this argument reposes. In like manner, the assailants of Spiritualism cannot find any nominal force, whether new or old, which can explain the rationality of the results which I have submitted to the public in this book, as coming from the minds of my spirit friends.
1898. The main reason we can only imagine a powerful force that brings about the rationality of the universe is that it supports the idea of a thinking Deity as the cause of everything. It would be pointless to refer to any irrational force, whether called odylic or something else, to explain the divine qualities this argument is based on. Similarly, those who challenge Spiritualism can't find any known force, new or old, that can account for the rationality of the findings I’ve presented in this book, which come from the minds of my spirit friends.
Of Spirit independently, or as distinguished from Mind and Matter.
1900. Mind is distinct from matter in its usual acceptation; but it also differs from nihility. There are some attributes common to mind and matter; since they cannot be considered as nothing, they must both be something. Therefore, the word thing applies to either, and thing is sometimes received as synonymous with matter. But between these two kinds of things, mind and matter, we have an intermediate thing called391 spirit, which is sometimes confounded with mind. In its original sense, this word merely denoted a thin or refined matter, such as air, wind, breath. In chemistry, it has been applied to every thing obtained by distillation, as, for instance, spirit of wine, spirit of salt, spirit of nitre, of vitriol, spirit of turpentine.[44]
1900. The mind is different from matter in its usual sense, but it also differs from nothingness. There are some characteristics that mind and matter share; since neither can be considered nonexistent, both must be something. Therefore, the term "thing" applies to both, and "thing" is sometimes understood to mean matter. However, between these two categories—mind and matter—there is an intermediary thing called 391 spirit, which is sometimes confused with the mind. Originally, this term simply referred to a thin or refined matter, such as air, wind, or breath. In chemistry, it has been used to describe anything obtained through distillation, such as spirits of wine, salt, nitre, vitriol, and turpentine.[44]
1901. Hence, by analogy, when the mind of a mortal, after death, was seen, or supposed to be seen, in a shadowy form called a ghost or shade, it was conceived to be the spirit or essence of the mortal body which it had inhabited. It was the body which the mind took or kept for its integuments after abandoning its perishable mundane casket, as the spirits are wont to call the carnal body.
1901. So, by comparison, when a person's mind, after they die, is seen, or thought to be seen, in a ghostly form known as a ghost or shade, it’s believed to be the spirit or essence of the physical body it once occupied. It was the body that the mind took on or retained as its covering after leaving behind its temporary worldly casket, as spirits often refer to the physical body.
1902. It is difficult for us mortals to conceive of mind without such a spiritual body. Yet, agreeably to information from my spirit friends, the substances of which the bodies, the country, and habitations of spirits are constituted, seem to have the attributes of materiality no less than the substances of which the bodies, the territory, and the habitations of mortals are constituted. Their spiritual substances perform for them the same offices as our material substances do for ours, yet it is expedient to distinguish them by different appellations, and those cited here have been sanctioned by custom at least as far as the time of St. Paul, or when these words in Genesis were first used: “The spirit of God moved on the surface of the water.”
1902. It's hard for us humans to imagine a mind without a spiritual body. However, according to information from my spirit friends, the materials that make up the bodies, the surroundings, and homes of spirits seem to have physical properties just like the materials that make up the bodies, the land, and the homes of humans. Their spiritual materials serve the same purposes for them as our physical materials do for us, but it’s necessary to call them by different names, and those mentioned here have been accepted by tradition at least since the time of St. Paul, or when these words in Genesis were first used: “The spirit of God moved on the surface of the water.”
1905. The soul seems to be understood as the basis both of the passions392 and the reason, uniting both the power of thinking and reasoning with those of loving and hating, of benevolence and malevolence, so that even the soul of Jehovah has been represented in Scripture as being actuated by jealousy, wrath, and vindictiveness.
1906. According to information from the spirit world, spirit is viewed as the clothing of the soul, and is not constant in its characteristics; but, on the contrary, varies with the plane which it occupies, so that its density is inversely as the rank attained. It is on this account that the inferior spirits cannot rise above the level to which they rightfully belong.
1906. According to insights from the spirit world, spirit is seen as the attire of the soul and is not fixed in its characteristics; rather, it changes based on the level it occupies, so its density is inversely related to the rank achieved. This is why lower spirits cannot elevate themselves beyond the level they rightfully fit into.
1908. According to the speculation in which I indulged in a previous page, a centre cannot differ from the nihility involved by the conception of a mathematical point, without a circumambient something, to which the difference is due, and, however difficult to conceive in what way the attributes of a human soul are associated about the centre whence their influence proceeds, this difficulty, having been shown to exist no less in the case of ponderable atoms, would be an objection to the existence of matter as much as of mind.
1908. Based on the speculation I mentioned earlier, a center can't be different from the emptiness represented by a mathematical point without something surrounding it that accounts for the difference. Even though it's challenging to understand how the qualities of a human soul relate to the center from which their influence comes, this challenge, which is also evident in the case of tangible atoms, challenges the existence of matter just as much as it does of mind.
Of the Soul, as distinguished from Mind and Matter.
1909. The word mind is much used as synonymous with intellect or understanding, though it seems to me we consider it as more or less associated with the passions which actuate it. The word soul, on the other hand, involves the association of every thing which distinguishes a being capable of passion, and competent to reason, from a corpse. It is remarkable that, as spirits become more pure and intellectual, they should be alleged to become more refined in their spiritual integuments, thus removing further from the mundane state, and becoming less capable of giving those manifestations in which violent movements are witnessed.
1909. The term "mind" is often used interchangeably with "intellect" or "understanding," but it actually seems to relate more closely to the emotions that drive it. In contrast, the term "soul" encompasses everything that differentiates a being capable of feeling from a lifeless body. It's interesting that as spirits become purer and more intellectual, they are said to become more refined in their spiritual coverings, distancing themselves further from the physical world and becoming less capable of exhibiting the intense behaviors we observe in more base states.
On the Odic, or Odylic, Force.
1910. There never was perhaps a more eloquent exhibition of that which has been designated as ratiocinatio verbosa, than in the appeals made to the odic force as the means of explaining spiritual manifestations. It may be inferred, from the speculation into which I entered, when treating of mediumship, (806,) that there is a spiritual light and spiritual electricity, which performs for spirits in the spiritual world what our electricity and light does for us in this world. It was pointed out that the term magnetism had been applied to mesmeric phenomena rather in consequence of an analogy between them and those of electro-magnetism, than from any identity. To this spiritual electricity, mortals, in their spiritual organ393ism, which coexists with the mortal body, during mundane life, are liable; being unconsciously under its influence.
1910. There might never have been a more powerful example of what has been called ratiocinatio verbosa than in the arguments made about the odic force as a way to explain spiritual experiences. From the exploration I did regarding mediumship, (806,) it can be suggested that there exists a spiritual light and spiritual electricity that serves spirits in the spiritual world just as our electricity and light serve us here. It was noted that the term magnetism was used for mesmerism more because of its similarity to electromagnetic phenomena than because they are identical. This spiritual electricity affects humans, through their spiritual organism, which exists alongside the physical body during earthly life, making them unknowingly responsive to its influence.
1911. The phenomena of mundane light being ascribed to the undulations of an ethereal fluid pervading the visible universe, (1831,) and electricity being ascribed to the polarization of the same fluid, so the spirits ascribe their electricity and their light to the undulation and polarization of an analogous ethereal fluid. It is to this ethereal fluid of the spiritual world, that the phenomena called odic belong, as I conceive. We may speak of that ether as the odic fluid, and we may designate the light and electricity which it produces as odic light, and odic electricity.
1911. The idea that everyday light comes from the waves of a kind of ethereal fluid that fills the visible universe, (1831,) and that electricity results from the polarization of this same fluid, leads to the belief that spirits attribute their electricity and their light to the waves and polarization of a similar ethereal fluid. I believe that this ethereal fluid in the spiritual realm relates to what we call odic phenomena. We can refer to this ether as the odic fluid, and we can call the light and electricity it generates odic light and odic electricity.
1912. But the use of the term force, as applied either to the ether appropriate to this mundane sphere, or to that which belongs more especially to the spirit world, seems to me erroneous. Imponderable fluids may be instrumental to forces, but, per se, cannot have force. No imponderable material fluid can per se have any force, unless that of the reciprocal repulsion of particles, which causes their equable diffusion and resistance to condensation. Electricity has less force in proportion as it is more isolated. In vacuo it passes more diffusely and with less noise in proportion as the vacuum is more perfect. The violence of electrical phenomena is always dependent upon the reaction of the ponderable masses upon or between which it acts. In proportion as the matter on which it operates is more favourable to its condensation therein, or thereupon, the more violent is the deflagration or explosion which results. But in all the phenomena which have hitherto been recognised as the objects of strict physical examination, vis inertiæ has been indispensable to the exhibition of force. “Give me but where to stand, and I will move the world,” was the exclamation of Archimedes; but the conviction thus expressed, of the necessity of a resisting basis, is universally recognised. In other words, there can be no action without reaction, whether chemical, mechanical, or muscular force be applied. Of course, it is preposterous to speak of an isolated imponderable physical fluid, as possessing force per se. When left to itself it would remain inert, like any other inanimate matter. Clearly, isolated action on the part of such a fluid cannot be shown in any case whatever.
1912. However, using the term "force," whether related to the ether of this physical world or the one more closely linked to the spirit world, seems to me incorrect. Imponderable fluids might contribute to forces, but they cannot have force on their own. No imponderable material fluid can have force by itself, except for the mutual repulsion of particles, which leads to their uniform distribution and resistance to coming together. Electricity has less force when it is more isolated. In a vacuum, it spreads out more and makes less noise, the more perfect the vacuum is. The intensity of electrical phenomena always depends on the reaction of the tangible masses it impacts or interacts with. The more favorable the material is for its condensation, the more intense the explosion or deflagration that occurs. Yet, in all the phenomena that have been recognized as subjects of strict physical examination, the principle of inertia has been essential to demonstrate force. “Give me but where to stand, and I will move the world,” exclaimed Archimedes; this statement reflects the universally accepted idea that a resisting basis is necessary. In other words, there can be no action without an equal reaction, whether dealing with chemical, mechanical, or muscular force. Clearly, it's ridiculous to claim that an isolated imponderable physical fluid possesses force by itself. Left alone, it would remain inactive, like any other inanimate matter. Obviously, isolated action by such a fluid cannot be demonstrated under any circumstances.
1914. It is, however, unnecessary that those who admit the existence of an invisible ethereal medium through which, without muscular contact, or agency, effects are produced by will, should concur in their opinions respecting the nature of that imponderable principle. The question between those agreeing in the preceding principles, is whether it is to the will of mortals or to the will of disembodied spirits that such manifesta394tions are to be attributed. I should think that no person who shall have read the communications which I have introduced into this work, as coming from my spirit friends, can ascribe those communications to the medium and myself. They must either suppose that there is a wilful manufacture of the wonderful and interesting information therein contained, setting aside the test conditions, through which they are sanctioned, as unreliable; or they must ascribe a wonderful fertility to the minds of the media and myself, through whom they have been obtained.
1914. It's not necessary for those who believe in the existence of an invisible ethereal medium that allows effects to happen through will alone, without physical contact, to agree on what that elusive principle is. The real question for those who share these beliefs is whether these manifestations should be attributed to the will of humans or to the will of spirits who no longer have bodies. I think anyone who has read the messages I’ve included in this work, which are from my spirit friends, would not be able to say that those messages come solely from the medium and me. They would have to either assume that the amazing and interesting information provided is the result of intentional fabrication, cast aside the validity of the testing conditions that confirm them, or they would need to credit an extraordinary creativity to the minds of the medium and myself through whom these messages were obtained. 394
1915. So far from the ideas being obtained from my mind, which proceed from my spirit father, that he and I cannot come to one opinion on some points after much discussion. My father and sister have, by reiterated communication, as well established a conviction on my mind of their being that which they allege themselves to be, as if a correspondence had been carried on with them for the same space of time, say eighteen months, while they should be residing in another part of the country.
1915. The ideas I have come from my spiritual father, and surprisingly, we still don't fully agree on some points despite having discussed them a lot. My father and sister have repeatedly communicated with me, making me firmly believe they are who they claim to be, as if I had been corresponding with them for the same period, like eighteen months, while they lived in a different part of the country.
1917. It is assumed that spirits can never tell any ideas which do not exist in the minds of some persons present. Who was present when my spirit messenger conveyed to Mrs. Gourlay the request to send her husband to bank to inquire when a note would be due? Again, when cards were selected without the denomination having been seen by any mortal present, how could the denomination of the cards be spelt out upon the alphabetic disk?
1917. It is believed that spirits can only communicate ideas that already exist in the minds of people who are present. Who was there when my spirit messenger asked Mrs. Gourlay to tell her husband to go to the bank and find out when a note would be due? Also, when cards were chosen without anyone having seen the denomination, how could the value of the cards be spelled out on the alphabetic disk?
1918. In his work, Mr. Mahan assumes that the odic force is identical with that which is the immediate cause of the spirit manifestations. Agreeably to the considerations above presented, no imponderable material principle, such as the ether of the undulation theory is supposed to be, can be a force. The only part which it can perform is that of being a medium of force. The fluid of electricity was never assumed to be a moving power, neither according to the Franklinian hypothesis of one fluid, nor that of two fluids, according to Dufay. Without chemical or mechanical disturbance, they would be as still as the water in a pond during a perfect calm.
1918. In his work, Mr. Mahan suggests that the odic force is the same as what directly causes spirit manifestations. Based on the points made above, no non-material principle, like the ether proposed in the wave theory, can actually be a force. Its only role is to act as a medium for force. The fluid of electricity was never considered to be a source of movement, whether following Franklin's idea of one fluid or Dufay's concept of two fluids. Without any chemical or mechanical disruption, they would remain as still as water in a calm pond.
1919. There is evidently, however, in nature, an imponderable cause of motion, and of other changes, more complicate than simple motion, and, I believe, only one such cause, and that is mind. No one who attributes the creation to the mind of the Creator, but must admit that the mind of the Creator and Ruler of the universe is the moving power of the universe. It must also be admitted that the mind of man, as a moving power, is very minute in comparison with that of its Author, or Source, but still resembling it so far as it reasons, and obeys the dictates of that reason, and causes matter to move in consequence of its designs, desires, wishes, or emotions.
1919. There is clearly, however, an unseen force in nature that drives motion and other changes, which are more complex than just simple movement, and I believe there is only one such force, and that is the mind. Anyone who believes that creation comes from the mind of the Creator must acknowledge that the mind of the Creator and Ruler of the universe is the driving force behind it all. It should also be recognized that the mind of humans, as a driving force, is very small compared to that of its Creator or Source, but it still shares similarities in that it reasons, follows the guidance of that reasoning, and causes matter to move based on its designs, desires, wishes, or emotions.
1920. But if this will of the Creator exists, it must have some medium through which it reaches the objects which it influences, just as the ether of the undulationist is necessary to the transmission of light. It is through this medium that gravitation exists as one of the effects of divine will, since, although it appears to be a property of matter, it is inferred to be no less the effect of an habitual exercise of volition, than the erect posture preserved in man, by analogous means, unconsciously; whence, in him, it ceases with sleep. The human will, within its comparatively minute, humble sphere of action, must require also a medium analogous to that through which God acts; otherwise, how does a thought so quickly move the toe? While encompassed by its perishable tenement, there is a certain extent of this will-power enjoyed through the laws of God; but on casting off this envelope, the spirit, to be qualified for its new state of existence, becomes endowed with more extensive power of the nature in question.
1920. But if the will of the Creator exists, it must have some means of reaching the objects it influences, just as the ether in wave theory is necessary for transmitting light. It's through this means that gravitation exists as an effect of divine will, since, while it seems to be a property of matter, it's understood to be no less an effect of a consistent exercise of intention, similar to how humans maintain an upright posture unconsciously; thus, in humans, it stops during sleep. The human will, in its relatively small and humble sphere of influence, must also need a means similar to God's mode of action; otherwise, how can a thought so quickly move a toe? While encased in its temporary shell, there is a certain degree of this willpower experienced through God's laws; but once this shell is shed, the spirit, in order to adapt to its new state of existence, becomes endowed with a greater extent of power in this regard.
1921. This power of the will exists and is displayed in the mesmeric phenomena, where the will of one individual dominates over the limbs of another. The power of the will of an individual over his own muscles, not only in the usual movement, but in producing a rigidity of the muscles of the arm or thigh, is of course notorious. But it appears that there are some persons morbidly susceptible of this rigidity, or at least preternaturally liable to it. Again, others have a will which is, in some degree, preternatural; hence, when such persons are in proximity, the one can actuate the muscles of the other, and even modify the impressions on the brain.
1921. This power of will exists and is evident in mesmerizing phenomena, where one person's will overpowers another's limbs. The ability of a person to control their own muscles, not just in normal movement but also in creating stiffness in the muscles of the arm or thigh, is well-known. However, it seems that some individuals are unusually sensitive to this stiffness, or at least particularly prone to it. On the other hand, some people have a will that is, in some way, extraordinary; therefore, when these individuals are nearby, one can influence the muscles of the other and even alter the impressions on the brain.
1922. Spirits, as above stated, appear to be endowed with this will-power to an extent proportioned to their necessities. Hence it was substantiated by my spirit father in the first instance, and by the convocation of spirits in the second, that they, like the genius of Aladdin’s lamp, can create, in their own world, the objects of rational desire or fancy by a fiat, but their will-power cannot directly move mundane bodies. In order to effect this, they must avail themselves of the coarser medium of the human will-power, in which case they act, as one mortal may act upon the will-power of another in proximity. The will-power aura of human beings and of spirits seems to emanate from their organism respectively, and, no doubt, connects duly with that of God. Hence, there is thus, that association of the divine will, with all animated beings, which is suggested by the popular theology. The will, and the aura through which it acts, varying with the organism with which it is associated, it requires a certain coincidence in the attributes of a spirit and a mortal, to enable the former to use the aura of the latter to produce any manifestation of its will or ideas. But so far as this coincidence exists, the power is enjoyed. That such coincidences have arisen, I conceive must be evident from the careful consideration of the facts which I have recorded in this work.
1922. As mentioned earlier, spirits seem to possess this will-power based on their needs. My spirit father initially confirmed this, and a group of spirits later supported it, stating that, similar to the genius of Aladdin’s lamp, they can create the objects of rational desire or imagination in their own realm with a fiat, but their will-power cannot directly affect physical things. To achieve this, they need to use the stronger medium of human will-power, acting in a way similar to how one person can influence another's will when they are close. The will-power aura of both humans and spirits appears to come from their respective beings and likely connects with that of God. Thus, there is a connection between divine will and all living beings, as suggested by common theology. Since will and the aura it uses differ with the organism it is associated with, there needs to be a certain alignment in the attributes of a spirit and a human for the spirit to use the human's aura to create any expression of its will or ideas. However, as long as this alignment exists, the power is accessible. It should be clear, upon careful consideration of the facts I've documented in this work, that such alignments have occurred.
1923. The question is put by the Rev. Mr. Mahan, why the odic force, existing in nature, may not be productive of the results ascribed to disembodied spirits? He overlooks the fact that no inanimate imponderable principle can be, per se, a moving power; that inanimate matter does not move itself. Then, as I understand, agreeably to another phase, he inquires why may it not become an instrument to the minds of the mortals concerned?
1923. The Rev. Mr. Mahan raises the question of why the odic force, which exists in nature, might not produce the effects attributed to disembodied spirits. He fails to recognize that no inanimate, weightless principle can, per se, be a source of motion; inanimate matter cannot move on its own. Then, as I understand it, according to another perspective, he asks why this force couldn't serve as a tool for the minds of the living involved?
1924. In the first place, there are facts within my experience which cannot be explained by any possible exertion of any mundane mind, were those concerned to concur in striving to accomplish the result. Thus, how would it be possible for Mrs. Gourlay and myself to have brought about the result of which an account has been given in the supplemental preface of this work, and upon which remarks have been made in other pages? It is utterly impossible that, by any imaginable process, Mrs. Gourlay, having no previous hint, could have become the instrument of my volition at the distance of nearly a hundred miles from Philadelphia, and when, at the time, she was intently engaged in receiving, as she alleges, a communication from her spirit mother to her brother, who was her visitor from his abode in Maine.
1924. First, there are facts from my experience that can't be explained by any ordinary mind, even if the people involved tried to achieve the outcome together. For instance, how could Mrs. Gourlay and I have caused the result described in the supplemental preface of this work, which has also been discussed in other sections? It's completely implausible that, through any conceivable method, Mrs. Gourlay—without any prior hint—could have acted on my will from nearly a hundred miles away in Philadelphia, especially while she was focused on receiving a message from her spirit mother for her brother, who was visiting from Maine.
1925. Again, it cannot be imagined that things would be communicated by my spirit father and others, of which I was ignorant when they were made. The same may be said of Mrs. Gourlay, as she knew nothing of the facts communicated to her, for me. Then, when the narrative of those facts was read over to the spirit, there were often things to be explained and views to be justified, in opposition to my previous impressions. Conversing frequently with Mrs. Gourlay, I know that she had none of the important impressions respecting the spheres, which were conveyed through her for my edification.
1925. Again, it’s hard to believe that things would be communicated by my spirit father and others that I didn’t know about when they happened. The same goes for Mrs. Gourlay; she was unaware of the facts shared with her on my behalf. When the narrative of those facts was read to the spirit, there were often things that needed clarification and perspectives that needed to be justified, contradicting my earlier beliefs. After frequently talking with Mrs. Gourlay, I realized she didn’t have any of the crucial insights about the spheres that were shared through her for my understanding.
RELIGIOUS ERRORS OF MR. MAHAN.
Proposition of Mr. Mahan.
1927. The Rev. Mr. Mahan, not satisfied with endeavouring to refute Spiritualism directly, devotes some pages of his work to the object of bearing it down by the weight of Scriptural superiority, both as to the evidence, and its moral tendencies. This renders the expediency of the strictures which I have made, or may make, on the other side of the question, unquestionable.
1927. The Rev. Mr. Mahan, not content with trying to directly argue against Spiritualism, spends several pages of his work trying to disprove it by highlighting the superiority of Scripture, both in terms of evidence and its moral implications. This makes the necessity of the criticisms I’ve made, or may make, on the other side of the issue undeniable.
1928. There are several truths, which I deem to be axiomatic, which are irreconcilable with the truth of Revelation, (18 to 20.) Merely to state them is to refute Mr. Mahan’s allegation above cited. With readers who will not admit the axioms to which allusion is made, I must agree to differ. (See page 34.)
1928. There are several truths that I believe are fundamental and cannot coexist with the truth of Revelation, (18 to 20.) Just stating them is enough to counter Mr. Mahan’s earlier claim. With readers who refuse to accept these fundamental truths, I can only agree to disagree. (See page 34.)
1929. In the first place, I have represented it as a contradiction to allege that an omnipotent, omniscient, and prescient God can subject any thing to probation, (1380.)
1929. First of all, I have pointed out that it's contradictory to claim that an all-powerful, all-knowing, and all-seeing God can put anything to a test, (1380.)
1932. As a corollary to these axioms, it results that God never has performed any miracle for the purpose of conveying a knowledge of the true religion; simply because all that have been alleged to have come from God have only produced religious discord. Of course God, foreseeing the failure of those miracles, would not have resorted to them.
Of the origin of the Books of Moses no higher evidence exists, according to the testimony of the Bible itself, than that of an obscure priest and a fanatical king.
1937. If we are to judge of the Jewish priesthood by the example afforded by Samuel, we have no more reason to trust a Hebrew pontiff than a Romish pope, (1091.) Bishop Hopkins has sufficiently shown how far priests are to be trusted, (1296.) What would be said of any book, alleged to be due to Divine inspiration, if it had, agreeably to its own authority, an origin no more reliable than the allegation of a priest398 that it had been found in a temple or church, there being no other evidence of its not having been forged by the priest, or his accomplices, than his own allegation? What better evidence would there be of the sacred origin of such a document, than there is of the Book of Mormon—the Bible brought forward by Joe Smith? Yet the following quotation will show that there was no Bible in use in Judea in the reign of Josiah, 350 years after the reign of David, and just before the Babylonian captivity; and that, in consequence, idolatry had to a great extent superseded the true worship.
1937. If we judge the Jewish priesthood based on Samuel's example, we have no more reason to trust a Hebrew priest than a Roman pope, (1091.) Bishop Hopkins has clearly demonstrated how much priests can be trusted, (1296.) What would people think of any book claimed to be divinely inspired if, according to its own claims, its origin was no more reliable than a priest's word that it was found in a temple or church, with no other evidence proving it wasn’t forged by the priest or his accomplices than his own statement? What evidence would there be of the sacred origin of such a document compared to the Book of Mormon—the Bible introduced by Joe Smith? Yet the following quotation will show that there was no Bible in use in Judea during Josiah's reign, 350 years after David's reign, and just before the Babylonian exile; and as a result, idolatry largely replaced the true worship.
1938. Under these circumstances, the high priest alleged a copy of the Bible to be found, and sent it by a scribe to the king. This monarch had lived in such ignorance of the existence of this holy code, that he was thrown into a state of such deep penitence for the sinful omissions arising from his ignorance, as to rend his clothes by way of expressing his sorrow. Moreover, orders were forthwith given to have the abuses abated, which had been introduced solely through ignorance.
1938. In this situation, the high priest claimed a copy of the Bible was found and sent it to the king through a scribe. This king had lived in such ignorance of this sacred text that he was overwhelmed with deep regret for his sinful actions stemming from his lack of knowledge, to the point of tearing his clothes to show his sorrow. Additionally, he immediately ordered that the abuses, which had occurred solely out of ignorance, be corrected.
1939. I view this evidence of the highest importance at this time, when such men as Mahan, and the anonymous author of the parodied letter, (1182,) are appealing to the Bible as the inspired word of God, and thus making God sanction a catalogue of atrocious crimes and indecencies, and when this imposture is to sit as an incubus on those truly moral impressions which the blessed spirits of the immortal Washington and other worthies, as well as my honoured father, would communicate for the amelioration of the religion and morals of mankind. I repeat, that I consider it of immense importance that attention should be called to the questionable foundation on which these pretensions to inspiration are erected. I shall, therefore, not only quote a portion of these pretended words of God, but also that part of a chapter in the Book of Josephus which narrates the same all-important occurrence more fully and satisfactorily, though giving the same evidence essentially.
1939. I consider this evidence extremely important right now, especially when people like Mahan and the anonymous writer of the parodied letter, (1182,) are using the Bible as the inspired word of God. They are trying to make God endorse a list of terrible crimes and wrongdoings, weighing down truly moral insights that the noble spirits of the immortal Washington and other great figures, along with my respected father, would share to improve the religion and morals of humanity. I reiterate that it's crucial to highlight the shaky foundation on which these claims to inspiration are built. Therefore, I will not only quote a part of these supposed words of God, but also include a section from a chapter in the Book of Josephus that describes the same significant event in more detail and with greater clarity, while fundamentally providing the same evidence.
Scriptural Account of the Finding of the Books of Moses by Hilkiah, the High Priest.—2 Chron. xxxiv.; 2 Kings xxii.
1940. “And when they brought out the money that was brought into the house of the Lord, Hilkiah the priest found a book of the law of the Lord given by Moses. And Hilkiah answered and said to Shaphan the scribe, I have found the book of the law in the house of the Lord. And Hilkiah delivered the book to Shaphan. And Shaphan carried the book to the king, and brought the king word back again, saying, All that was committed to thy servants, they do it. And they have gathered together the money that was found in the house of the Lord, and have delivered it into the hand of the overseers, and to the hand of the workmen. Then Shaphan the scribe told the king, saying, Hilkiah the priest hath given me a book. And Shaphan read it before the king. And it came to pass when the king had heard the words of the law, that he rent his clothes. And the king commanded Hilkiah, and Ahikam the son of Shaphan, an399d Abdon the son of Micah, and Shaphan the scribe, and Asaiah a servant of the king’s, saying, Go, inquire of the Lord for me, and for them that are left in Israel, and in Judah, concerning the words of the book that is found; for great is the wrath of the Lord that is poured out upon us, because our fathers have not kept the word of the Lord, to do after all that is written in this book. And Hilkiah, and they that the king had appointed, went to Huldah the prophetess, the wife of Shallum the son of Tikvath, the son of Hasrah, keeper of the wardrobe; (now she dwelt in Jerusalem in the college:) and they spake to her to that effect. And she answered them, Thus saith the Lord God of Israel, Tell ye the man that sent you to me, Thus saith the Lord, Behold, I will bring evil upon this place, and upon the inhabitants thereof, even all the curses that are written in the book which they have read before the king of Judah: because they have forsaken me, and have burned incense unto other gods, that they might provoke me to anger with all the works of their hands; therefore my wrath shall be poured out upon this place, and shall not be quenched. And as for the king of Judah, who sent you to inquire of the Lord, so shall ye say unto him, Thus saith the Lord God of Israel concerning the words which thou hast heard; because thy heart was tender, and thou didst humble thyself before God when thou heardest his words against this place, and against the inhabitants thereof, and humbledst thyself before me, and didst rend thy clothes, and weep before me; I have even heard thee also, saith the Lord. Behold, I will gather thee to thy fathers, and thou shalt be gathered to thy grave in peace, neither shall thine eyes see all the evil that I will bring upon this place, and upon the inhabitants of the same. So they brought the king word again. Then the king sent and gathered together all the elders of Judah and Jerusalem. And the king went up into the house of the Lord, and all the men of Judah, and the inhabitants of Jerusalem, and the priests, and the Levites, and all the people, great and small: and he read in their ears all the words of the book of the covenant that was found in the house of the Lord. And the king stood in his place, and made a covenant before the Lord, to walk after the Lord, and to keep his commandments, and his testimonies, and his statutes, with all his heart, and with all his soul, to perform the words of the covenant which are written in this book. And he caused all that were present in Jerusalem and Benjamin to stand to it. And the inhabitants of Jerusalem did according to the covenant of God, the God of their fathers. And Josiah took away all the abominations out of all the countries that pertained to the children of Israel, and made all that were present in Israel to serve, even to serve the Lord their God. And all his days they departed not from following the Lord, the God of their fathers.”
1940. "When they took out the money that was brought into the Lord's house, Hilkiah the priest found a book of the law of the Lord given by Moses. Hilkiah then said to Shaphan the scribe, 'I have found the book of the law in the Lord's house.' Hilkiah gave the book to Shaphan, who brought it to the king and reported back, saying, 'Your servants are doing everything assigned to them. They have gathered the money found in the Lord's house and handed it over to the overseers and workmen.' Then Shaphan the scribe told the king, 'Hilkiah the priest has given me a book.' Shaphan read it to the king. When the king heard the words of the law, he tore his clothes. The king commanded Hilkiah, Ahikam son of Shaphan, Abdon son of Micah, Shaphan the scribe, and Asaiah a servant of the king, saying, 'Go and inquire of the Lord for me and for the people left in Israel and Judah about the words of this book; for the Lord's anger is great against us because our ancestors have not listened to the words of the Lord and have not acted according to what is written in this book.' Hilkiah and those the king appointed went to Huldah the prophetess, wife of Shallum son of Tikvath, son of Hasrah, who was in charge of the wardrobe; she lived in Jerusalem in the college. They spoke to her about this. She replied, 'This is what the Lord God of Israel says: Tell the man who sent you to me, This is what the Lord says: I am going to bring disaster on this place and its people, all the curses written in the book that was read to the king of Judah. Because they have forsaken me and burned incense to other gods, provoking me to anger with all the works of their hands, my wrath will be poured out on this place and will not be quenched. As for the king of Judah who sent you to inquire of the Lord, tell him this: This is what the Lord God of Israel says about the words you heard; because your heart was soft and you humbled yourself before God when you heard his words against this place and its people and humbled yourself before me, tore your clothes, and wept before me, I have heard you, declares the Lord. I will gather you to your ancestors and you will be buried in peace; your eyes will not see all the disaster I am going to bring on this place and on its people.' So they reported back to the king. Then the king sent for all the elders of Judah and Jerusalem. The king went up to the Lord's house, and all the men of Judah, the inhabitants of Jerusalem, the priests, the Levites, and all the people, great and small, gathered with him. He read in their hearing all the words of the book of the covenant that was found in the Lord's house. The king stood in his place and made a covenant before the Lord to follow the Lord and keep his commands, statutes, and decrees with all his heart and soul, and to obey the words of the covenant written in this book. He made all those present in Jerusalem and Benjamin agree to it. The inhabitants of Jerusalem did according to the covenant of God, the God of their ancestors. Josiah removed all the detestable idols from all the lands belonging to the Israelites and made all those present in Israel serve the Lord their God. As long as he lived, they did not fail to follow the Lord, the God of their ancestors."
Account of the Finding of the Books of Moses, by Josephus.
1941. “The repairs of the temple being completed, and all expenses defrayed, Hilkiah, in conformity to the king’s orders, took out the money for the purpose of converting it into vessels for the use of the temple; and, upon removing the gold, happened to discover the sacred books of Moses. This he took out and gave to Shaphan, the king’s secretary, to peruse, who, upon reading them over, went to the king, accompanied by Hilkiah, who told him that he had executed all his commands relative to the reparation of the temple, and at the same time presented the book to him in great form, assuring him what it was, and where they had found it.
1941. “After finishing the repairs on the temple and settling all expenses, Hilkiah, following the king’s orders, took the money to convert it into vessels for the temple's use. While removing the gold, he stumbled upon the sacred books of Moses. He took these out and gave them to Shaphan, the king’s secretary, to read. After going over them, Shaphan went to the king, accompanied by Hilkiah, who reported that he had completed all the king's instructions regarding the temple repairs and formally presented the book to him, explaining what it was and where they had found it.
1942. “The king ordered Shaphan to read a part of the contents, which being done, he rent his robes, in dread of the heavy curses denounced against a wicked generation. In the height of his affliction, he desired the secretary, with Hilkiah, and several priests who were present, to go to the prophetess Huldah, the wife of Shallum, a man of eminence, and unite their endeavours to prevail upon her to make intercession with God for pardon toward himself and his subjects. He told them there was great reason to apprehend that the vengeance of Heaven would fall upon the present generation as a punishment for the iniquity of their progenitors, and particularly their neglect and contempt of the laws of Moses; and that, without obtaining a reconciliation, they should be dispersed over the face of the earth, and terminate their lives in misery.
1942. “The king instructed Shaphan to read part of the text, and after he did, the king tore his robes in fear of the severe curses declared against a sinful generation. In the depth of his despair, he asked the secretary, along with Hilkiah and several priests who were there, to go to the prophetess Huldah, the wife of Shallum, a prominent man, and work together to persuade her to pray to God for forgiveness for him and his people. He warned them that there was serious cause to fear that God's wrath would come upon the current generation as punishment for the sins of their ancestors, especially for their disregard and contempt for the laws of Moses; and that without getting reconciliation, they would be scattered across the earth and end their lives in suffering.
1943. “Hilkiah, with those who were appointed to accompany him, immediately repaired to the prophetess, and having related the cause of the king’s affliction, and his earnest desire of her intercession with Heaven in behalf of him and his subjects, she bade them return him this answer: That the sentence already pronounced was not to be recalled on any supplication or intercession whatever. That the people were to be banished from their own country, and punished for their disobedience with the loss of all human comforts. That the judgment was irrevocable, for their obstinately persisting in their superstitious and idolatrous practices, notwithstanding so many warnings to a timely repentance, and the menacing predictions of the prophets, if they persevered in their abominations.
1943. “Hilkiah, along with those who were assigned to be with him, quickly went to the prophetess. After explaining the king’s distress and his deep wish for her to pray to Heaven on behalf of him and his people, she told them to go back with this message: That the sentence already given cannot be changed by any plea or prayer. That the people would be expelled from their homeland and punished for their disobedience by losing all earthly comforts. That the judgment was final because of their stubbornness in continuing their superstitious and idolatrous ways, despite numerous warnings to repent in time and the dire predictions from the prophets if they continued in their sinful practices.
1944. “This unchangeable decree was to show, by the event, that there is a just and overruling Disposer of all things, and the predictions which he delivered by the means of the prophets will be infallibly verified, as the certain indications of his whole will respecting mankind. The prophetess added, ‘Tell the king, however, that, in consideration of his own pious and virtuous example, the judgment shall be averted from the people during his days; but that the day of his death shall be the eve of their final destruction.’
1944. “This unchangeable decree was meant to demonstrate, through the event, that there is a just and supreme power overseeing all things, and the predictions given through the prophets will undoubtedly come true, serving as clear indications of his will regarding humanity. The prophetess added, ‘Tell the king, however, that due to his own pious and virtuous example, the judgment will be postponed for the people during his lifetime; but the day he dies will be the eve of their ultimate destruction.’”
1945. “As soon as Josiah received this message from the prophetess, he immediately despatched messengers to the several cities within his dominions, commanding all the priests and Levites, and men of all ages and conditions, to repair with the utmost speed to Jerusalem. These orders being obeyed, and the people assembled, the king went to the temple, where, in the hearing of the whole multitude, he caused the laws of God, as contained in the books of Moses, to be distinctly read; after which he bound himself and the people, with their universal consent, by a most solemn oath, strictly to observe every article contained in the sacred books, respecting the laws and religion established by Moses. This solemn oath was followed by prayers and oblations for the divine blessing and protection.
1945. “As soon as Josiah got this message from the prophetess, he quickly sent messengers to the various cities in his kingdom, instructing all the priests and Levites, along with people of all ages and backgrounds, to hurry to Jerusalem. Once they followed the orders and gathered, the king went to the temple, where, in front of the entire crowd, he had the laws of God, as written in the books of Moses, read out loud. After that, he and the people, with everyone agreeing, made a very serious oath to strictly follow every part of the sacred texts concerning the laws and religion set by Moses. This solemn oath was accompanied by prayers and offerings for divine blessing and protection.
1946. “The king strictly enjoined the high priest to take a particular account of the plate and vessel in the temple, and to cast out so many of them as they should find to have been dedicated by any of his ancestors to idolatrous services. Those that were found were reduced to dust, and in that state thrown into the air. All the priests were likewise put to death, that were not of the flock of Aaron.
1946. “The king ordered the high priest to take a careful inventory of the plates and vessels in the temple and to remove any that had been dedicated by any of his ancestors to idol worship. Those that were found were ground into dust and scattered into the wind. All the priests who were not from Aaron's lineage were also executed.
1947. “Having effected this reformation in Jerusalem, Josiah made a progress throughout his whole dominions, where he destroyed all the relics of Jeroboam’s superstition and idolatry, and burnt the bones of false prophets, upon the very altar which that impious king had set up. Of this401 we have taken notice before, as well as the intervention of the prophet, with a prediction in the hearing of the multitude, at the time when Jeroboam was offering sacrifice, ‘That one of the race of David, Josiah by name, was to do this.’ The prediction was verified, by the event, three hundred and fifty-one years after it was foretold.
1947. “After bringing about this reform in Jerusalem, Josiah traveled across his entire kingdom, where he destroyed all traces of Jeroboam’s superstition and idol worship, and burned the bones of false prophets on the very altar that the wicked king had set up. We have mentioned this401 before, along with the prophet's intervention, who predicted in front of the crowd while Jeroboam was making a sacrifice, ‘That a descendant of David, named Josiah, would do this.’ The prediction came true, happening three hundred and fifty-one years after it was made.”
1948. “So ardent was the zeal of Josiah for extending the great work of reformation, that he went in person to several of the Israelites who had escaped the Assyrian bondage, in order to dissuade them from continuing in superstition, and prevail with them to embrace the pure religion of their forefathers, according to the long established custom of their country. Nor did he rest here, but caused the towns and villages to be searched for the discovery of any remains of idolatrous practices that might lie concealed. The very figures of the horses over the porch of the temple, which their forefathers had dedicated to the sun, and all the monuments to which the people had ascribed divine honour, were, by his special order, taken away and destroyed.
1948. “Josiah was so passionate about spreading the reform movement that he personally went to several Israelites who had escaped from Assyrian captivity to convince them to abandon their superstitions and adopt the pure religion of their ancestors, following the long-standing traditions of their nation. But he didn’t stop there; he had towns and villages searched for any signs of idolatry that might still be hidden. Even the statues of horses above the temple entrance, which their ancestors had dedicated to the sun, along with all the monuments that the people honored, were ordered to be removed and destroyed by him.”
1949. “Having thus purged the whole nation from idolatry, and fully restored the true worship of the one only and true God, he called an assembly of the people at Jerusalem, for the purpose of celebrating the passover, the time for that festival being near at hand. On this occasion the king gave out of his own store, for paschal sacrifices, thirty goats, a thousand lambs, and three thousand oxen. The heads of the priests presented to the others of the sacerdotal order two thousand six hundred lambs, and the chief of the Levites gave to their tribes five thousand lambs, and five hundred oxen. A solemn sacrifice was made of these victims, according to the precepts of Moses, and the ceremony was performed under the direction of the priests. From the time of the prophet Samuel to that day, there had never been a festival celebrated with equal solemnity; for this had the allowed preference, because the whole was conducted in strict conformity to the very letter of the laws, and the precise mode of their forefathers. Josiah, after the accomplishment of a work of such moment and importance to the nation in general, enjoyed his government in honour, peace, and plenty, till he closed his life.”—Book 10, page 153.
1949. “After cleansing the entire nation of idolatry and restoring the true worship of the one and only God, he gathered the people in Jerusalem to celebrate the upcoming Passover festival. For this occasion, the king contributed from his own resources thirty goats, a thousand lambs, and three thousand oxen for the Passover sacrifices. The heads of the priests offered two thousand six hundred lambs to their fellow priests, and the chief of the Levites provided five thousand lambs and five hundred oxen to their tribes. A solemn sacrifice was carried out with these offerings, following the commandments of Moses, and the ceremony was overseen by the priests. Since the time of the prophet Samuel, no festival had been celebrated with such solemnity; it was noteworthy for being conducted in strict accordance with the laws and the traditions of their ancestors. After achieving such a significant accomplishment for the nation, Josiah ruled with honor, peace, and abundance until the end of his life.”—Book 10, page 153.
If the Pentateuch had been previously known to the Jews, it is incredible that it could have become obsolete and forgotten prior to the alleged discovery of it in the Temple, in the reign of Josiah.
1950. After the Pentateuch had been viewed as the word of God, made known to a people as their peculiar inheritance, lifting them, in their own estimation, above the rest of mankind, as God’s chosen people, this code being the sole authority for their bloody and rapacious course toward their neighbours, is it credible that such a document, had it ever existed, could have become both obsolete and forgotten?[45] Yet we have no alternative402 but to admit this absurdity, or to conclude that the Bible has no better authority than the Book of Mormon; the one being no more than the other the work of a designing priesthood and would-be rulers.
1950. After the Pentateuch was seen as the word of God, given to a people as their unique inheritance, making them believe they were above everyone else as God's chosen people, this code served as the only authority for their violent and greedy actions toward their neighbors. Is it credible that such a document, if it ever existed, could have become both outdated and forgotten?[45] Yet we have no choice402 but to accept this absurdity, or conclude that the Bible holds no better authority than the Book of Mormon; both are merely the creations of a manipulative priesthood and aspiring rulers.
1951. What credit would be given to any work having no better authority for divine origin than that of the allegation that some pope had found it in a cathedral or in the Vatican, and had sent it to some monarchical bigot as the mislaid testament of the Almighty, given by inspiration through some ancient predecessor of his holiness?
1952. It may be difficult to conceive that Hilkiah and his associates, in writing a book, as proceeding by inspiration from Jehovah, could have fabricated any facts so derogatory to an immaculate Deity as those mentioned under the authority of Moses. How impious must have been their conceptions, to represent him as authorizing them to borrow trinkets of the Egyptians, in order to purloin them; the sanctioning the cold-blooded murder of three thousand people for religious error; the slaughtering of whole nations, even to their suckling babes, as in the case of the Midianites, Canaanites, and Amalekites, with the setting aside virgins for the fate from which the Roman Virginius relieved his daughter by his dagger! It is difficult to conceive that an idea, so derogatory of God, could have been entertained by his chosen people. Yet, on the other hand, inasmuch as they were written, there must have been some mind so impious as to have originated them; and it may be a less wonder that such fabricators should have existed in a cruel and barbarous age of the world, than that, in the present age of superior morality and civilization, they should find endorsers in the professed ministers of the Being whom they have thus misrepresented.
1952. It might be hard to believe that Hilkiah and his team, inspired by Jehovah when writing a book, could have made up facts so negative about a perfect Deity as those attributed to Moses. What a warped view they must have had to depict Him as allowing them to take trinkets from the Egyptians just to steal them; to legitimize the cold-blooded killing of three thousand people for their religious beliefs; and to wipe out entire nations, including their infants, like the Midianites, Canaanites, and Amalekites, while setting aside virgins for a fate that the Roman Virginius saved his daughter from with his dagger! It’s hard to imagine that such an idea, so disrespectful to God, could have come from His chosen people. But on the other hand, since they were written, there must have been some mind so depraved that it created them; and it is perhaps less surprising that such creators existed in a cruel and barbaric era than that, in our current time of better morals and civilization, they still find support among the professed ministers of the Being they've misrepresented.
1953. Mr. Mahan alleges: “Every reader will agree with us in the assumption that the incorruptible God has never performed and never will perform a miracle in attestation of that which is unreal or untrue. A religion really and truly attested by divine miracles must therefore be admitted to be true.”
1954. To this very admissible truism, I add that an omnipotent and prescient God could not have any occasion to perform miracles in attestation of any thing, since, by the premises, his will must be carried out without miracles. That any thing should, even for an instant, be contrary to his will, is inconsistent with his foresight and omnipotency. It would be a miracle that any thing counter to his will should exist.
1954. To this widely accepted truth, I add that an all-powerful and all-knowing God wouldn’t need to perform miracles to prove anything, since, by definition, His will must be fulfilled without the need for miracles. The idea that anything could go against His will, even for a moment, contradicts His foresight and power. It would be a miracle if anything that opposed His will could exist.
1956. Was this proposition ever impugned? No one would resist the unquestionable dictates of God, however conveyed, whether by miracles or any other means. The question is not whether a religion attested by divine miracles should be accredited, but whether there were ever any miracles, attesting any religion, performed; and if so, what religion has403 the peculiar merit of having been thus attested? Millions, who believe in other religions, deride those miracles of revelation which Mr. Mahan would adduce; and Protestants do not admit many which the Romish Church sanctions. For one, I deny that any miracle has ever been performed with the view of attesting any religion whatever. No miracle could be necessary to attest the will of Omnipotence any more than to enable a man to wave his hand. But, admitting that it ever has been necessary, no miracle has ever been resorted to for the purpose in question, since none has answered the desired end. This would not have been the case had miracles been resorted to by prescient omnipotence.
1956. Was this claim ever challenged? No one would reject the undeniable commands of God, regardless of how they are presented, whether through miracles or other means. The real question isn't whether a religion backed by divine miracles should be accepted, but whether any miracles, supporting any religion, have ever taken place; and if they have, which religion has403 the unique merit of being validated in this way? Millions who believe in different religions ridicule the miracles of revelation that Mr. Mahan would cite; and many Protestants do not recognize those that the Catholic Church acknowledges. For one, I argue that no miracle has ever been performed to support any religion whatsoever. No miracle is needed to prove the will of Omnipotence any more than it is necessary for a person to move their hand. However, assuming it ever was necessary, no miracle has ever been used for this intended purpose since none has achieved the desired effect. This would not have been true if miracles had been invoked by prescient omnipotence.
1959. Instead of assuming, with orthodoxy, that our heavenly Father is quite omnipotent, spirits hold that his powers are only such as this magnificent and almost infinite universe involves; consequently, there is no necessity on their part to admit that every thing must be exactly as God wishes it to be. They are not obliged to consider him as allowing mischievous ignorance, sin, and misery to exist, while by a fiat he could correct them; and still less are they involved in the necessity of supposing that, while able to make every thing perfect, he, from choice, makes them imperfect, and yet has had to resort to drowning his creatures by a great flood, and subjecting whole nations to degrading captivity; authorizing one nation to massacre another, even to each suckling babe, for wrongs done centuries before.
1959. Instead of thinking, as traditional beliefs suggest, that our heavenly Father is completely all-powerful, spirits believe that his abilities are only in line with what this amazing and nearly limitless universe encompasses; therefore, they don't feel the need to accept that everything has to be exactly as God wants it. They aren’t required to view him as allowing harmful ignorance, sin, and suffering to exist when he could easily fix them with a fiat; and even less do they have to suppose that, while capable of making everything perfect, he chooses to create them imperfect, and then resorts to drowning his creations with a massive flood and forcing entire nations into degrading slavery; permitting one nation to slaughter another, including every newborn, for wrongs committed centuries earlier.
1960. By Spiritualism, the Deity is represented as operating by general laws, from which, consistently with his attributes, he cannot deviate, having to perform no miracle to attain his ends; and that through these laws he is incessantly acting for the good of mankind; and the whole universe is progressing under his benign controlling influence.
1960. In Spiritualism, God is seen as working through universal laws that he cannot change, in line with his nature, without needing to perform miracles to achieve his goals. Through these laws, he is always acting for the welfare of humanity, and the entire universe is advancing under his kind guidance.
1962. But, admitting that miracles could, without inconsistency, be supposed to be resorted to by prescient omnipotence, in order to produce or prevent some consequence of a general law, in the making or carrying out of which an all-wise and all-powerful being inconsistently displays a want of wisdom and foresight, it must be perfectly clear that a prescient404 being would resort to such miracles as would produce the desired effect; not such as would be only partially seen or believed, and would become a new source of discord. Omnipotence could certainly devise miracles which could be seen and be believed in by all men; and which would so impress their minds, as to make them believe in what they should hear and see. By a single fiat, God, if as omnipotent as represented in Scripture, could make all his people of one mind. He would not send them a “sword to separate father from child, mother from daughter, mother-in-law from daughter-in-law,” and to make the subordinates of each household rise in rebellion against their master. A prescient God would not perform miracles of such doubtful character as, for want of evidence, to oblige one of the miracle-makers to enforce a belief in them by treacherous and cruel assassination, as did Moses. God would require no evidence of his miracles but such as could be recorded in the minds of believers. He would not have the records of his will so situated, as to be liable to be confounded with the fabrications of priestcraft. If devils were to be cast out, he would not have drowned a herd of swine, merely to give those immortal miscreants a ducking.
1962. But if we accept that miracles could be used by an all-knowing and powerful being to produce or prevent outcomes based on a general law, then it’s clear that such a being would choose miracles that effectively achieve the intended result, rather than those that are only partially apparent or believed, which would lead to more conflict. An all-powerful being could certainly create miracles that everyone would witness and believe in, impressing upon their minds so strongly that they would trust what they see and hear. With just a command, God, if as omnipotent as described in Scripture, could unify all his followers. He wouldn't send them a “sword to separate father from child, mother from daughter, mother-in-law from daughter-in-law,” causing the members of each household to rebel against their leader. An all-knowing God wouldn’t perform questionable miracles that require one of the miracle workers to force belief through treachery and violence, as Moses did. God wouldn’t need evidence of his miracles that couldn’t be firmly established in the minds of believers. He wouldn’t let the records of his will be confused with the fabrications of religious leaders. If demons were to be cast out, he wouldn’t drown a herd of pigs just to punish those wicked beings.
1963. So far are the miracles narrated in the gospel from commanding my credence, that the account of them proves to me, that the Evangelists were men without discretion, in recording any thing so absurd and incredible, and so useless to the main object, of giving a knowledge of God, and of the means of reaching a future happy state.
1963. The miracles described in the gospel are so far-fetched that they lead me to believe the Evangelists were not very sensible in writing down such ridiculous and unbelievable stories, which are also irrelevant to the primary goal of providing a knowledge of God and the ways to achieve a future state of happiness.
1965. If God were to adopt any miraculous means to make his will known, they would not be such as would fail in attaining their end. None but an idiot would resort to measures foreknown to be incompetent to the object for which they should be devised. As no miracles that have been alleged to have been performed have been productive of general conviction of the truth of the creed which they have been alleged to support, it follows that they could not have had a divine origin. A prescient God would not have resorted to incompetent miracles.
1965. If God were to use any miraculous methods to reveal His will, they would undoubtedly succeed in achieving their purpose. Only a fool would use methods known to be ineffective for the goals they are meant to accomplish. Since no miracles that have been claimed to occur have led to widespread belief in the truth of the faith they were supposedly meant to support, it follows that they could not have come from a divine source. An all-knowing God would not resort to ineffective miracles.
1967. When miracles are appealed to by different sects, in support of their conflicting pretensions, it must result that, if religion is to be founded only on miracles, that religion only can be recognised as true whose miracles are so pre-eminently evident as to abrogate all others that conflict with it. But it is notorious that the miracles brought forward by each sect are denied, if not ridiculed, by others. Appealing to miracles is, in fact, appealing to the human evidence on which they depend. In like405 manner, any religion which rests on assumed inspiration, rests, in fact, on the evidence proving that the inspiration claimed ever took place.
1967. When different groups rely on miracles to support their conflicting claims, it means that if a religion is to be based solely on miracles, only the religion with the most evident miracles can be accepted as true, because those miracles would overshadow any conflicting ones. However, it’s well-known that the miracles presented by each group are denied, if not mocked, by others. Relying on miracles is essentially depending on the human evidence that those miracles rely on. Similarly, any religion that claims to be inspired is actually based on the evidence that supports whether that claimed inspiration ever happened. 405
1968. But are we to believe in all miracles which have been alleged by men to have happened? Are we to believe any book to be inspired, because men, who contradict each other, alleged it to be inspired? and if several books are alleged to be inspired, how are we to choose between them? Is a man’s choice of these books to be governed by his education? If brought up in Turkey, is he to believe that the Koran is the word of God; if in Christendom, the gospel? If all who surround him were to treat it as impious to doubt that a book is the word of God, is he to submit to this dictation, or is he to exercise his own judgment, and examine whether the Bible of the Christian, and the miracles on which it rests, are not more likely to be true than the Koran and the miracles on which it rests? But if, after having examined both of these works, he finds that the miracles on which they rest are, in both cases, entirely dependent on human testimony, and that this testimony is disputed on one side by the Mohammedans, and on the other by the Christians, and that each party only admits such miracles to be true as harmonize with his own religion; that miracles told by profane writers rather tend to discredit than to corroborate the occurrences with which they are associated,—will not the inference naturally arise that the belief in miracles is the result of religion, not religion the result of belief in miracles?
1968. But should we really believe in every miracle that people claim has happened? Should we consider any book inspired just because people, who contradict each other, say it is? And if there are several books said to be inspired, how do we decide which one to trust? Is a person’s choice based solely on their education? If someone grows up in Turkey, should they believe the Koran is the word of God, and if they grow up in a Christian environment, should they believe the gospel? If all those around them insist that doubting that a book is the word of God is impious, should they just accept that, or should they think for themselves and see if the Christian Bible, and the miracles it contains, are more likely to be true than the Koran and its miracles? But what if, after looking into both of these texts, they find that the miracles supporting them both rely entirely on human testimony, and that this testimony is disputed by Muslims on one side and Christians on the other, with each side only accepting miracles that align with their own beliefs? If it turns out that stories from secular writers tend to discredit rather than support the events they describe—wouldn’t it make sense to conclude that belief in miracles comes from religion, rather than religion stemming from belief in miracles?
1969. An analogous result may be perceived in relation to any extraordinary manifestation in Spiritualism. Scarcely any one will believe that the spirit hand (1513) has been seen and felt at Koons’s establishment in Ohio, unless previously a convert to Spiritualism. Thus he does not become a spiritualist by reading the account of that manifestation, but believes the manifestation because he has been converted to Spiritualism. Did the truth of that manifestation rest upon the evidence of only one set of eye-witnesses, even spiritualists had not believed in it. As miracles have ever been alleged to have been seen only by very few persons, and have never been of a nature to be seen by a succession of observers, I cannot conceive why any man, in any age or time, could be reasonably expected to display a credulity, the inverse of that now exhibited, as respects this spiritual manifestation. Scarcely any person, without being an eye-witness of the fact, has been brought to believe that tables move without human contact. By recurrence, the reader may perceive that in my letter of February 3, 1854, I use this language in my letter to Mr. Holcomb: You believe that tables move without contact, because you have seen them so moved; I am skeptical, because I have never seen them moved without contact, though I have been at several circles, (698.)
1969. A similar outcome can be seen regarding any remarkable occurrence in Spiritualism. Hardly anyone will believe that the spirit hand (1513) has actually been seen and felt at Koons’s place in Ohio unless they were already a believer in Spiritualism. So, a person doesn't become a spiritualist just by reading about that occurrence; they believe in it because they’ve already been converted to Spiritualism. If the truth of that event relied on just one group of witnesses, even spiritualists wouldn’t accept it. Since miracles have always been claimed to be witnessed by only a small number of people and have never been seen by multiple observers over time, I can’t understand why anyone, in any era, could reasonably be expected to show the kind of belief that is the opposite of what we see now concerning this spiritual event. Almost no one, unless they witnessed it themselves, has been convinced that tables can move without human touch. As a reminder, the reader might recall that in my letter dated February 3, 1854, I wrote this to Mr. Holcomb: You believe that tables move without contact because you have seen them move that way; I am skeptical because I have never seen them moved without contact, even though I have attended several circles, (698).
1970. When I stated to my friend, Professor Henry, the experiment illustrated by plate 3, with the utmost precision, made twice on two dif406ferent evenings, he said: “I would believe you as soon as any man in the world, but I cannot believe that.” Yet the result of that experiment was nothing more than the fact of bodies moving when uninfluenced by any apparent mortal agency, accompanied by a demonstration of a governing reason; a result which has been established again and again by myself with the greatest precision, and by many other investigators. Evidently, if this had never been repeated, it would have been treated as a mental hallucination on my part by my comrades in science and all the rest of the community.
1970. When I explained to my friend, Professor Henry, the experiment shown by plate 3, with complete accuracy, conducted twice on two different evenings, he said: “I would believe you as much as any person in the world, but I can't believe that.” Yet the outcome of that experiment was simply the fact that objects moved without any visible human influence, along with a demonstration of a governing reason; a result that I have consistently proven with the highest accuracy, and so have many other researchers. Clearly, if this had never been repeated, my colleagues in science and the wider community would have dismissed it as a hallucination on my part.
1972. It seems as if facts, incredible at first view, are always believed when they are confirmed by being seen by independent and disinterested and intelligent observers sufficiently often, and under such modifications, as to make all such observers believe in them. We are willing to believe in a mysterious fact as one of a genus, but not when isolated. If I may judge by the incredulity with which my observations in Spiritualism have been met by those who had previously considered me reliable, I should deem it utterly impossible among intelligent, well-educated people of the present day to induce a belief in an isolated miracle; and, as respects ignorant, bigoted sectarians, the difficulty to obtain credence would be at least as great.
1972. It seems that facts, which might seem unbelievable at first, are accepted when they are confirmed by independent, unbiased, and intelligent witnesses often enough and in ways that make all those observers come to believe in them. We are open to believing in a mysterious fact as part of a larger category, but not when it stands alone. Judging by the skepticism my observations in Spiritualism have faced from those who once considered me trustworthy, I believe it would be completely impossible today to convince educated and intelligent people to believe in a singular miracle; and as for ignorant, prejudiced sectarians, the challenge of gaining their belief would be equally daunting.
1973. Were our heavenly Father now to cause miracles to be performed as wonderful and as isolated as those mentioned in Scripture, as no one would know any thing of them direct from God, excepting those by whom they might be witnessed, it would only cause the narrators of them to be ridiculed, as those spiritualists were ridiculed who first asserted their belief in spiritual manifestations. In order, therefore, that miracles should be believed in by an enlightened community, belief would have to be instilled by education or supported by reiterated observation, since, in enlightened communities, no miracles would be believed in but those which should come within these conditions.
1973. If our Heavenly Father were to perform miracles today that were as amazing and rare as those described in the Bible, most people would not know about them directly from God, except for those who witnessed them. This would only lead to the narrators being mocked, much like the spiritualists who were ridiculed when they first expressed their belief in spiritual phenomena. Therefore, for an informed community to believe in miracles, faith would need to be fostered through education or reinforced by repeated experiences, since, in informed communities, only miracles that fit these criteria would be accepted as real.
1974. There is not a single miracle mentioned in the gospel which tends to throw light upon the alleged object of Christ’s mission. The object of their performance was mainly to prove his supernatural power to those who should believe in them, and thus to cause him to be accredited as a missionary from God. So far from their ever having had an effect of this kind on my mind, gospel miracles tended only to destroy my confidence in the veracity or discretion of their narrators, upon the same principle that spiritualists have lost weight with their intelligent friends by mentioning manifestations which were considered by these as incredible.
1974. There isn’t a single miracle mentioned in the gospel that clarifies the supposed purpose of Christ’s mission. The main reason they performed these miracles was to demonstrate his supernatural power to those who would believe in them, thereby establishing him as a messenger from God. Instead of having that kind of effect on me, gospel miracles only weakened my trust in the truthfulness or judgment of those who reported them, similar to how spiritualists have lost credibility with their informed friends by mentioning manifestations that were viewed as unbelievable.
1975. I can foresee a great triumph for spiritualists, sooner or later, in407 the world to come, if not in this; but this result will not flow from the conversion of their skeptical friends to a belief in the manifestations which may have been viewed by the narrators, as described. The conversion of skeptics will arise from their own observation, with the concurrent testimony of many reliable witnesses, all tending to the verification of analogous phenomena.
1975. I can see a big win for spiritualists, eventually, in407 the future, if not now; but this outcome won't come from changing the minds of their skeptical friends regarding the experiences described by the narrators. Skeptics will change their views based on their own observations, supported by the consistent accounts of many trustworthy witnesses, all pointing to the confirmation of similar phenomena.
1976. The miracles of Scripture never have had nor never can have this species of corroboration, and of course will make but little progress among people educated under conflicting impressions. In this age of bigotry in favour of all educational mysteries and extreme skepticism as to innovations, the last thing which could obtain credence would be miracles of the nature of those which Mr. Mahan assumes to be the only foundation for religious belief.
1976. The miracles in the Scriptures have never had and never will have this kind of confirmation, so they'll struggle to gain acceptance among people who have been educated with conflicting ideas. In this time of strong bias towards all educational mysteries and extreme doubt about new ideas, the last thing that could be accepted would be miracles like those Mr. Mahan claims to be the only basis for religious belief.
1977. It has already been urged that Moses was, by his own account, a worldly man, who, as I conceive, was guilty of a misrepresentation in alleging that the Creator of the hundred millions of solar systems comprised in this universe (1342) made him and his people especially the object of a partiality, authorizing them to plunder and extirpate all the neighbouring people: moreover, that Moses was worldly-minded in the extreme, and so intent upon acquiring lands in this world, as to neglect his opportunities, if he had any, of learning from Jehovah, in frequent alleged intercourse with him, any information respecting the immortality of the soul, (1091, 1098, 1271.) My attention has been recently turned to the 24th chapter of Exodus. It is there mentioned that Moses, with more than seventy elders of Israel, went up the mount, and there had an interview with the God of Israel, when “they saw God.” It is then stated that “The Lord spake unto Moses, saying, Speak unto the children of Israel, that they bring me an offering. And this is the offering which you shall take of them, gold, silver, and brass, and blue and purple, fine linen, and goats’ hair,” &c.[46]
1977. It has already been suggested that Moses was, by his own account, a worldly man who, in my view, misrepresented the situation by claiming that the Creator of the countless solar systems in this universe (1342) favored him and his people, allowing them to loot and destroy all neighboring communities. Furthermore, it seems that Moses was extremely worldly and so focused on acquiring land in this world that he overlooked any opportunities he might have had to learn from Jehovah during his alleged frequent interactions with Him about the immortality of the soul (1091, 1098, 1271.) I have recently paid attention to the 24th chapter of Exodus. It mentions that Moses, along with over seventy elders of Israel, went up the mountain and had an encounter with the God of Israel, when “they saw God.” It then states that “The Lord spoke to Moses, saying, Speak to the children of Israel, and tell them to bring me an offering. And this is the offering you shall take from them: gold, silver, and bronze, blue and purple yarn, fine linen, and goat hair,” &c.[46]
1978. There are then two or three chapters occupied with the specification of the various valuable articles of gold, and precious wood, and stones, required by an omnipotent God to furnish a tabernacle. Such is the misuse made by this pretended missionary of God, of the opportunity of learning that which is above all price. How many thousands of human beings408 have been willing to lay down their lives for religious truth!—and yet this pretended favourite of Jehovah, by his own account, spent his time in getting baubles, making the Almighty his agent. It may be that the whole is a fable, and that the account originated in the time of Hilkiah, when the Pentateuch was acknowledged to have been found accidentally. But if Moses and the elders really ascended the mount, and represented themselves as seeing God, and receiving those directions, evidently they were all a set of impostors, who resorted to this mode of obtaining furniture for the tabernacle.
1978. There are then two or three chapters that detail the different valuable items made of gold, precious wood, and stones, needed by an omnipotent God to set up a tabernacle. Such is the misuse of this so-called missionary of God, taking advantage of the chance to learn about what is priceless. How many thousands of people408 have been willing to sacrifice their lives for religious truth!—yet this self-proclaimed favorite of Jehovah, by his own admission, spent his time collecting trinkets, making the Almighty his supplier. It’s possible that this whole story is a fable, originating in the time of Hilkiah, when the Pentateuch was said to have been discovered by chance. But if Moses and the elders actually went up the mountain, claiming to see God and receive those instructions, then they were clearly a group of frauds who used this approach to gather items for the tabernacle.
Great Importance attached to a Belief in Immortality by Cyrus the Great, King of Persia, as contrasted with the recklessness of Moses respecting the same Belief.
1979. Among the errors propagated industriously by fanatical sectarians, is that of representing the Old and New Testament as of inestimable importance, as the only source of our knowledge of a future state of existence, of which heathen writers are mentioned as deficient. In refutation of the calumny thus promulgated, I deem it expedient to quote the following sentiments ascribed by Xenophon to Cyrus, King of Persia, in addressing his children:
1979. Among the mistakes widely spread by extreme sectarians is the idea that the Old and New Testaments are of immeasurable importance and the only source of our understanding of life after death, claiming that pagan writers fall short in this regard. To counter this falsehood, I find it necessary to quote the following thoughts attributed to Xenophon regarding Cyrus, King of Persia, in addressing his children:
1980. “Think not, my dearest children, that when I depart from you, I shall be no more: remember that my soul, even while I lived among you, was invisible; yet by my actions you were sensible it existed in this body. Believe it, therefore, existing still, though it still be unseen. How quickly would the honours of illustrious men perish after death, if their souls performed nothing to preserve their fame! For my part, I could never think that the soul, which, while in a mortal body, lives, when departed from it, dies; or that its consciousness is lost when it is discharged out of an unconscious habitation; on the contrary, it most truly exists when it is freed from all corporeal alliance.”
1980. “Don’t think, my beloved children, that when I leave you, I will be gone forever: remember that my soul, even while I was living among you, was invisible; yet through my actions, you felt its presence in this body. So believe that it still exists, even if it’s not seen. How quickly would the honors of great people fade after death if their souls didn’t do anything to preserve their legacy! For my part, I could never believe that the soul, which lives while in a mortal body, simply dies when it leaves it; or that its awareness is lost when it exits an unfeeling shell; on the contrary, it truly exists most when it is free from all physical connection.”
1981. Let this be compared with the inexcusable inattention of Moses, taking his own narrative to be true, in communicating with God about every thing else, almost, excepting that which concerns immortal life. If the despicable criminality of Abraham in putting his wife at the pleasure of two heathen kings successively, and their repugnance to have violated his connubial rights, be taken as a fit test of comparative morality, if these sentiments of King Cyrus be compared with those of the Jewish lawgiver as respects immortality, the chosen people of God were much below some neighbouring heathens both in morality and religion.
1981. This should be compared to Moses’s shocking negligence, as he assumes his own story is true while discussing everything with God except what really matters for eternal life. If we look at Abraham’s appalling actions in offering his wife to two pagan kings one after another, and their unwillingness to violate his marital rights, as a measure of moral standards, then comparing King Cyrus’s views with those of the Jewish lawgiver regarding immortality shows that God’s chosen people were far behind some neighboring pagans in terms of both morality and religion.
The Worship of a Book, Idolatry.
1984. An image or statue does not speak; it suggests nothing cruel, unjust, or indecent to the worshipper; neither do any of the objects usually treated as idols. It must evidently be an error to accuse idolaters of contemplating the inert image to which they kneel, as their God. They must see that it neither does nor can do any thing. They must perceive that, fixed in one place, the image cannot have that ubiquity or efficacy, essential to divine power. It follows that the object of adoration must be an invisible power associated with the idol, which may occupy the image only when invoked. In every temple devoted to Jupiter there might be a statue of Jupiter, and yet it was never held that there was more than one Jupiter. From the verses subjoined, from Pope’s translation of the Iliad, it appears that Homer gave to Jupiter a supremacy which made the other deities bear to him no higher relation than that which the archangels do to God, according to Christianity:
1984. An image or statue doesn’t speak; it doesn’t suggest anything cruel, unjust, or indecent to the worshipper, nor do any of the objects typically considered idols. It’s clearly a mistake to accuse idolaters of seeing the lifeless image they kneel before as their God. They must understand that it doesn’t and can’t do anything. They must realize that, being fixed in one place, the image cannot possess the ubiquity or power that is essential to divine authority. Therefore, the object of worship must be an invisible power connected to the idol, which might inhabit the image only when called upon. In every temple dedicated to Jupiter, there might be a statue of Jupiter, yet it's never claimed that there is more than one Jupiter. From the verses included, from Pope’s translation of the Iliad, it’s evident that Homer assigned Jupiter a supremacy that made the other gods relate to him no more closely than archangels relate to God in Christianity:
1986. But when a book is made the word of God, which patronizes men as belonging to a chosen seed who are guilty of cruelty, robbery, fraud, massacre in cold blood, it becomes a more active and mischievous idol than any dumb beast, image, or statue can be. An idolater worships a silent idol as the representative of God. The idol cannot say, “I am a jealous God: I wax hot in my wrath.”
1986. But when a book is treated as the word of God, which favors certain people as part of a chosen group who are guilty of cruelty, theft, deception, and cold-blooded murder, it becomes a more dangerous and harmful idol than any lifeless animal, image, or statue can be. An idolater worships a silent idol as a stand-in for God. The idol cannot say, “I am a jealous God: I am full of wrath.”
1987. Mr. Mahan urges, that the sufferings undergone by martyrs to Christianity is evidence of its truth, whereas, it seems to me that it only proves the conviction of the parties, which, if displayed by a dervise or a fakir, would be called bigotry. But if suffering in a cause is evidence in its favour, there have been sufferers on the other side, as well as on that which this author has undertaken to uphold. It is but fair, if those who suffer for one side should have their suffering held up as proof of their conscientiousness, the same conscientiousness should be conceded to those who have suffered for the other. The author of the pages I am about to quote, the Rev. Robert Taylor, was, for want of a better answer to his publication, condemned to Oakam Jail, in England, for one year. It was there he wrote his Diagesis, copies of which may be had of Mr. Curtis,410 No. 34 Arch street, as well as other books which may assist readers to form an opinion for themselves. I shall quote some pages from this work, which, being studied after reading Mahan’s arrogant allegations, will make good the old saying, that “One story is good until another is told.”
1987. Mr. Mahan argues that the suffering endured by martyrs for Christianity is proof of its truth. However, I believe it simply shows their strong beliefs, which, if displayed by a dervish or a fakir, would be labeled as bigotry. If suffering for a cause is considered evidence in its favor, then there have been those who suffered on the opposing side as well as on the one this author is defending. It seems only fair that if the suffering of one side is seen as proof of their sincerity, the same consideration should be given to those who have suffered for the other. The author of the following pages, Rev. Robert Taylor, was imprisoned in Oakam Jail, England, for a year due to a lack of a better response to his publication. It was there that he wrote his Diagesis, copies of which can be obtained from Mr. Curtis,410 No. 34 Arch Street, along with other books that may help readers form their own opinions. I will quote some pages from this work, which, when examined after reading Mahan’s bold claims, will support the old saying that “One story is good until another is told.”
1988. “The ordinary notion, that the four gospels were written by the persons whose names they bear, and that they have descended to us from original autographs of Matthew and John, immediate disciples, and of Mark and Luke, contemporaries and companions, of Christ, in like manner as the writings of still more early poets and historians have descended to us from the pens of the authors to whom they are attributed, is altogether untenable. It has been entirely surrendered by the most able and ingenuous Christian writers, and will no longer be maintained by any but those whose zeal outruns their knowledge, and whose recklessness and temerity of assertion can serve only to dishonour and betray the cause they so injudiciously seek to defend.
1988. “The common belief that the four gospels were written by the individuals they are named after, and that they have come down to us from the original manuscripts of Matthew and John, who were direct followers, and of Mark and Luke, who were contemporaries and companions of Christ, just like works by earlier poets and historians have reached us from their supposed authors, is completely unfounded. This view has been wholly abandoned by the most skilled and honest Christian scholars and will be upheld only by those whose enthusiasm exceeds their understanding, whose carelessness and bold claims can only discredit and undermine the cause they foolishly attempt to support.
1989. “The surrender of a position which the world has for ages been led to consider impregnable, by the admission of all that the early objection of the learned Christian Bishop, Faustus the Manichean, implied, when he pressed Augustine with that bold challenge which Augustine was not able to answer, that,[47] ‘It was certain that the New Testament was not written by Christ himself, nor by his apostles, but a long while after them, by some unknown persons, who, lest they should not be credited when they wrote of affairs they were little acquainted with, affixed to their works the names of apostles, or of such as were supposed to have been their companions, asserting that what they had written themselves was written ACCORDING TO those persons to whom they ascribed it.’
1989. “The giving up of a position that has long been considered unassailable, as acknowledged by the early objections raised by the learned Christian Bishop, Faustus the Manichean, when he challenged Augustine with that bold question which Augustine couldn't answer, that, [47] ‘It was clear that the New Testament was not written by Christ himself or by his apostles, but much later by some unknown authors, who, fearing they wouldn't be believed when writing about matters they had little knowledge of, attached the names of apostles or those thought to be their companions to their works, claiming that what they wrote was written AS PER the individuals to whom they credited it.’”
1991. “Adroitly handled as the passage has been by the ingenuity of theologians, it has been made rather to subserve the cause of the evidences of the Christian religion than to injure it. Since, though it be admitted that the Christian world has ‘all along been under a delusion’ in this respect, and has held these writings to be of higher authority than they really are; yet the writings themselves and their authors are innocent of having contributed to that delusion, and never bore on them, nor in them, any challenge to so high authority as the mistaken piety of Christians has ascribed to them, but did all along profess no more than to have been written, as Faustus testifies, not BY, but ACCORDING to, Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John; and by persons of whom indeed it is not known who or what they were, nor was it of any consequence that it should be, after the general acquiescence of the church had established the sufficient correctness of the compilations they had made.
1991. “Skillfully interpreted by the creativity of theologians, this passage has been used more to support the evidence of the Christian religion than to undermine it. While it’s true that the Christian world has been ‘all along under a delusion’ regarding this issue and has regarded these writings as more authoritative than they actually are; the writings themselves and their authors are not responsible for that delusion, nor do they make any claim to the high authority that the misguided devotion of Christians has attributed to them. They merely state, as Faustus notes, that they were written, not BY, but AS PER to Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John; by individuals whose identity is unknown, which was not significant since the church's overall acceptance had confirmed the adequacy of the compilations they produced.
1992. “And here the longo post tempore (the great while after) is a favourable presumption of the sufficient opportunity that all persons[48] had,411 of knowing and being satisfied that the gospels which the church received were indeed all that they purported to be; that is, faithful narrations of the life and doctrines of Christ according to what could be collected from the verbal accounts which his apostles had given, or by tradition been supposed to have given, and, as such, ‘worthy of all acceptation.’
1992. “And here the longo post tempore (the great while after) suggests a strong assumption that everyone[48] had,411 the chance to know and be convinced that the gospels accepted by the church were truly everything they claimed to be; namely, accurate accounts of the life and teachings of Christ based on what could be gathered from the spoken testimonies of his apostles or what was believed to have been passed down through tradition, and, as such, ‘worthy of all acceptation.’
1993. “The objection of Faustus becomes from its own nature the most indubitable and inexceptionable evidence, carrying us up to the very early age, the fourth century, in which he wrote, with a demonstration that the gospels were then universally known and received under the precise designation, and none other, than that with which they have come down to us, even as the gospels, respectively, according to Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John.
1996. “2. And though ‘no manuscript of these writings now in existence is prior to the sixth century, and various readings which, as appears from the quotations of the Fathers, were in the text of the Greek Testament are to be found in none of the manuscripts which are at present remaining.’—Michaelis, vol. ii. p. 160.
1996. “2. Even though there are no manuscripts of these writings that exist from before the sixth century, and various readings, as noted in the quotes from the Fathers, that were in the text of the Greek Testament can’t be found in any of the manuscripts that are currently available.” —Michaelis, vol. ii. p. 160.
2001. “7. And though ‘it is notorious that forged writings under the names of the apostles were in circulation almost from the apostolic age.’—See 2 Thess. ii. 2, quoted in Unitarian New Version.[49]
2001. “7. And although ‘it is well-known that fake writings attributed to the apostles were circulating almost from the time of the apostles.’—See 2 Thess. ii. 2, quoted in Unitarian New Version.[49]
2002. “8. And though, ‘not long after Christ’s ascension into heaven, several histories of his life and doctrines, full of pious frauds and fabulous wonders, were composed by persons whose intentions, perhaps, were not bad, but whose writings discovered the greatest superstition and ignorance.’—Mosheim, vol. i. p. 109.
2002. “8. And although, ‘not long after Christ’s ascension into heaven, several accounts of his life and teachings, filled with pious deceit and incredible stories, were created by people whose intentions might not have been malicious, but whose writings revealed the utmost superstition and ignorance.’—Mosheim, vol. i. p. 109.
2003. “9. And though, says the great Scaliger, ‘They put into their Scriptures whatever they thought would serve their purpose.’[50]
2003. “9. And even though, as the great Scaliger says, ‘They included in their Scriptures whatever they believed would help their goals.’[50]
2004. “10. And though, ‘notwithstanding those twelve known infallible and faithful judges of controversy, (the twelve apostles,) there were as many and as damnable heresies crept in, even in the apostolic age, as in any other age, perhaps, during the same space of time.’—Reeve’s Preliminary Discourse to the Commonitory of Vincentius Lirinensis, p. 190.
2004. “10. And although, ‘despite those twelve well-known and reliable judges of disputes (the twelve apostles), there were as many and as damnable heresies that emerged, even in the apostolic age, as in any other age, perhaps, during the same period.’—Reeve’s Preliminary Discourse to the Commonitory of Vincentius Lirinensis, p. 190.
2008. “14. And though the difference of character between the three first Gospels and that ascribed to St. John is so flagrantly egregious, that the most learned Christian divines and profoundest scholars have frankly avowed that the Jesus Christ of St. John is a wholly different character from the Jesus Christ of Matthew, Mark, and Luke; and that their account and his should both be true is flatly impossible.[51]
2008. “14. While the differences in character between the first three Gospels and the one attributed to St. John are so glaringly obvious that even the most knowledgeable Christian theologians and deep scholars openly admit that the Jesus Christ of St. John is a completely different figure from the Jesus Christ of Matthew, Mark, and Luke; and that it is absolutely impossible for both their accounts to be true.[51]
2009. “15. And though such was the idolatrous adulation paid to the authority of Origen, that emendations of the text which were but suggested by him were taken in as part of the New Testament; though he himself acknowledged that they were supported by the authority of no manuscript whatever.—Marsh, in loco.
2011. “17. And though we have on record the most indubitable historical evidence of a general censure and correction of the Gospels having been made at Constantinople, in the year 506, by order of the Emperor Anastasius.[52]
2011. “17. And even though we have solid historical evidence that the Gospels were generally criticized and corrected in Constantinople in the year 506, under the orders of Emperor Anastasius.[52]
2012. “18. And though we have like unquestionable historical evidence of measureless and inappreciable alterations of the same having been made by our own Lanfranc, Archbishop of Canterbury, for the avowed purpose of accommodating them to the faith of the orthodox.”[53]
2012. “18. And although we have solid historical proof of countless significant changes made by our own Lanfranc, Archbishop of Canterbury, aimed explicitly at aligning them with orthodox beliefs.”[53]
Evidence of Josephus and Gibbon vs. Mr. Mahan.
2013. The silence of Josephus respecting Christ induced some Christians to concoct the pious fraud of interpolating in his history a notice of the career and crucifixion of Christ, but subsequent Christian writers have detected and exposed the interpolation; so that the history alluded to, written soon after Christ’s death by the distinguished Hebrew, contains no notice of those events; and, from the following passage in Gibbon, it appears that it did not awaken much attention among the Romans. Yet Mahan, assuming the opposite to be true, urges it as evidence of the evangelical account, that the phenomena drew universal attention.
2013. The fact that Josephus didn't mention Christ led some Christians to create the false notion of adding a reference to Christ's life and crucifixion in his writings. However, later Christian authors have identified and exposed this alteration; thus, the historical account written shortly after Christ's death by the notable Jewish historian does not mention these events. From the following passage in Gibbon, it seems that this account did not attract much attention among the Romans. Yet, Mahan, believing the opposite is true, argues that it serves as evidence for the gospel story, claiming that the events captured everyone's attention.
2014. “How shall we excuse,” says Gibbon, “the supine inattention of the pagan and philosophic world to those evidences which were presented by the hand of Omnipotence, not to their reason, but to their senses? This miraculous event, which ought to have excited the wonder, the curiosity, and the devotion of mankind, passed without notice in an age of science and history. It happened during the lifetime of Seneca and the elder Pliny, who must have experienced the immediate effects or received the earliest intelligence of the prodigy. Each of these philosophers, in a laborious work, has recorded all the great phenomena of nature—earthquakes, meteors, comets, and eclipses—which his indefatigable curiosity could collect; both one and the other have omitted to mention the greatest phenomenon to which the mortal eye has been witness since the creation of the globe.” (Gibbon, vol. ii. chap. xv. p. 379.)
2014. “How can we explain,” says Gibbon, “the careless indifference of the pagan and philosophical world to the evidence presented by the hand of Omnipotence, not to their reason, but to their senses? This miraculous event, which should have sparked wonder, curiosity, and devotion in humanity, went unnoticed in an age of science and history. It happened during the time of Seneca and the elder Pliny, who must have felt the immediate effects or received the first reports of the miracle. Each of these philosophers, in their detailed works, recorded all the major events in nature—earthquakes, meteors, comets, and eclipses—that their relentless curiosity could gather; yet both of them failed to mention the greatest event that the human eye has witnessed since the creation of the Earth.” (Gibbon, vol. ii. chap. xv. p. 379.)
The Worshippers of the Golden Calf more righteous than their Assassins.
2015. The example is set in the Old Testament of attributing the worst motives to every one who does not concur with the accusers in religious opinions. I conscientiously believe that the Israelites who made the golden calf were at least as righteous in their worship as those who treacherously and cruelly massacred them in obedience to an order strangely represented as sanctioned by Jehovah: “Put every man his sword by his side, and go in and out of the camp, and slay every man his brother, every man his companion, and every man his neighbour; and the children of Levi did according to the words of Moses, and there fell of the people on that day about three thousand men.”
2015. The example is found in the Old Testament, where the worst motives are attributed to anyone who doesn't agree with the accusers' religious views. I firmly believe that the Israelites who made the golden calf were at least as righteous in their worship as those who cruelly and treacherously killed them following an order unjustly claimed to be approved by Jehovah: “Put every man his sword by his side, and go in and out of the camp, and slay every man his brother, every man his companion, and every man his neighbour; and the children of Levi did according to the words of Moses, and there fell of the people on that day about three thousand men.”
2016. Obviously, the only way in which those who, with Mr. Mahan, can find any pretence for ascribing this horrible sanguinary order to the inspiration of God, is by treating idolatry as so wicked as to be punished, not only in the immediate transgressor, but in his offspring to the third and fourth generation. Is it not a fairer way of viewing this affair to infer that Moses and his partisans were covetous, unprincipled men, who did not hesitate at swindling, lying, massacre, or any measures requisite to give him and them ascendency? Was there ever a greater analogy between the measures of any two evil-doers than those of Mohammed and414 Moses, both professing communion with God, which we now know could not have taken place, and both pleading his commands to exercise the most horrible intolerance at home, as well as cruel rapacity abroad?
2016. Clearly, the only way those aligned with Mr. Mahan can justify this terrible, violent command as being inspired by God is by considering idolatry so sinful that it deserves punishment not just for the person directly guilty but also for their descendants for up to four generations. Wouldn’t it be more reasonable to conclude that Moses and his supporters were greedy, unscrupulous individuals who would resort to cheating, lying, mass murder, or any actions necessary to establish their power? Has there ever been a stronger comparison between the actions of two wrongdoers than those of Mohammed and414 Moses, both claiming to have a connection with God—which we now know couldn’t have happened—and both using His supposed commands to justify extreme intolerance at home as well as brutal greed abroad?
2017. Mohammed appears to have been more successful than Moses in convincing his followers of his mission. There seems to have been a great distrust of Moses, which he artfully always ascribes to the impiety of the unbelievers; like all other religious impostors, identifying his word with that of God. Nothing but his inability to convince the skeptics of the divine origin of his mission could have induced them to worship idols in opposition to his remonstrance; and the fact that Aaron assisted them in casting the golden calf, can only be explained by his participation in the heresy. Does not this alleged conduct on the part of Aaron render the whole affair so absurd as to throw doubt over the whole history? Moses, while killing the malcontents, could hardly avoid punishing their ringleader. Moreover, how could one who would assist in idolatrous worship, be fit to hold the office of high-priest, into which he was soon afterward installed with great pomp?
2017. Mohammed seems to have been more successful than Moses in convincing his followers of his mission. There appears to be a lot of distrust toward Moses, which he cleverly attributes to the disbelief of the non-believers; like many other religious frauds, he equates his words with those of God. Only his inability to convince skeptics of the divine origin of his mission could have led them to worship idols despite his protests; and the fact that Aaron helped them create the golden calf can only be understood as his involvement in the heresy. Does this supposed behavior from Aaron make the whole situation so ridiculous that it casts doubt on the entire story? Moses, while punishing the dissenters, could hardly avoid punishing their leader. Furthermore, how could someone who helped with idol worship be suitable for the role of high priest, which he was later appointed to with great ceremony?
2019. Wicked priests have raised a cry against idolaters, as the real thief strives, by calling after some innocent person within view, to divert the hue and cry from himself. As an exemplification of this species of wickedness, I quote here a speech made to the Emperor Constantius by Julius Firmicius Maternus, (Taylor’s Diagesis, page 144:)
2019. Corrupt priests have shouted against idol worshippers, just like a true thief attempts to redirect suspicion away from himself by calling out to some unsuspecting person nearby. To illustrate this type of wrongdoing, I quote a speech addressed to Emperor Constantius by Julius Firmicius Maternus, (Taylor’s Diagesis, page 144:)
2020. (Addressing the Emperor Constantius.) “Take away, take away, in perfect security,” exclaims this self-called Christian priest, “O most holy emperor, take away all the ornaments of their temples. Let the fire of the mint or the flames of the mines melt down their gods. Seize upon all their wealthy endowments, and turn them to your own use and property. And, O most sacred emperor, it is absolutely necessary for you to revenge and punish this evil. You are commanded by the law of the Most High God to persecute all sorts of idolatry with the utmost severity; hear and commend to your own sacred understanding what God himself commands. He commands you not to spare your son or your brother; he bids you plunge the avenging knife even into the heart of your wife that sleeps in your bosom; to persecute your dearest friend with a sublime severity; and to arm your whole people against these sacrilegious pagans, and tear them limb from limb. Yea, even whole cities, if you should find this guilt in them, must be cut off. O most holy emperor, God promises you the rewards of his mercy, upon condition of your thus acting. Do, therefore, what he commands, complete what he prescribes.”
2020. (Addressing Emperor Constantius.) “Take away, take away, in complete safety," says this self-proclaimed Christian priest, “O most holy emperor, remove all the decorations from their temples. Let the fire from the mint or the flames from the mines melt down their gods. Take all their wealth and turn it into your own possessions. And, O most sacred emperor, it is absolutely essential for you to avenge and punish this wrongdoing. You are commanded by the law of the Most High God to severely persecute all forms of idolatry; listen and entrust to your own sacred judgment what God himself commands. He commands you not to spare your son or your brother; He instructs you to plunge the avenging knife even into the heart of your wife who lies in your arms; to pursue your closest friend with relentless severity; and to rally your entire people against these sacrilegious pagans, tearing them apart. Yes, even entire cities, if you find this guilt within them, must be destroyed. O most holy emperor, God promises you the rewards of His mercy, provided you act in this way. So, do what He commands, fulfill what He prescribes.”
2021. It should be recollected that this diabolical address was made to the Christian son and successor of Constantine. Can there be a more shocking picture of the mischievous consequences of the example and415 doctrines of Moses as respects idolaters? Certainly, Constantius was not any better for his Christianity, when he could listen, without indignation, to such wicked suggestions!
2021. It should be remembered that this terrible speech was directed at the Christian son and successor of Constantine. Can there be a more shocking illustration of the harmful effects of the example and 415 teachings of Moses regarding idolaters? Clearly, Constantius was no better for being Christian when he could hear such evil advice without any outrage!
2022. It is alleged that in the city of Thessalonica the Emperor Theodosius put to death all the pagans that breathed, in obedience to Christianized Mosaic intolerance, which in modern times was carried out in the massacre of St. Bartholomew’s day, and the Inquisition. Such were the effects of the propagation of Christianity, with the appendage of the Pentateuch to the swordlike attributes with which Christ endowed himself: “Think not that I am come to send peace on earth; I come not to send peace, but a sword!” Matt. x. 34.
2022. It is said that in the city of Thessalonica, Emperor Theodosius executed all the pagans, following the intolerance rooted in Christian Mosaic law, which later manifested in events like the St. Bartholomew's Day Massacre and the Inquisition. Such were the outcomes of spreading Christianity, combined with the violent characteristics that Christ associated with his mission: “Don’t think that I have come to bring peace on earth; I have not come to bring peace, but a sword!” Matt. x. 34.
2023. Shakspeare truly makes one of his characters say that whosoever takes away the good name of another commits a more wicked theft than one who takes a purse. But in this portrait of the effect of calumny there is one important feature omitted, which is sometimes the most injurious: I allude to the pain of mind created by a false accusation. If, as I have before urged, it be wrong to hurt the flesh by a blow, is it not wrong to hurt the soul by calumny? The sting of the fangs of the viper, no less than the paw of the lion, may give a mortal infliction; but no less painful may be the effect of a false human tongue. Is it not as great a wrong to wound a man’s soul as his flesh? Yet there never has been any hesitation on the part of sectarians to express any painful opinion as to heretics or idolaters. The word infidel, so much more deserved by themselves for their violation of the precepts they profess, is used as a matter of course, and, coupling with an error in worship a heinous sinfulness, the idolater is always in the wrong. But reasonably, upon the grounds which have been advanced in the preceding portion of this work, (1245,) idolatry may be an imputation against the intellectual pretension, but not against the integrity, of the worshipper; and for one I consider the propensity to the worship of idols displayed throughout the whole of the Jewish history, and even by Solomon the “Wise,” as a strong proof that there never was sufficient evidence presented to the Jews of the divine origin of the books of Moses, or any others represented as conveying God’s holy word.
2023. Shakespeare really has one of his characters say that whoever takes away another person's good name commits a worse theft than someone who steals a purse. However, in this portrayal of the effects of slander, there’s an important aspect missing, which can often be the most harmful: I’m referring to the mental anguish caused by a false accusation. If, as I've said before, it's wrong to harm the body with a blow, isn’t it also wrong to harm the soul with slander? The bite of a viper is just as lethal as a lion’s paw, but the pain caused by a false human tongue can be equally distressing. Isn’t it just as great an injustice to hurt a person’s soul as to hurt their body? Yet sectarians show no hesitation in voicing painful opinions about heretics or idolaters. The term infidel, which they deserve far more for breaking the very principles they claim to uphold, is used casually, linking a mistake in worship with serious wrongdoing, and the idolater is always in the wrong. However, based on the arguments presented in the earlier part of this work, (1245,) idolatry may challenge intellectual claims but not the integrity of the worshiper. For example, I see the tendency to idolize demonstrated throughout Jewish history, even by Solomon the “Wise,” as strong evidence that adequate proof of the divine origin of the books of Moses, or any texts claimed to convey God’s word, was never truly presented to the Jews.
2024. It is not doing as we would be done by to accuse any worshipper of bad motives, for the reasons which I have above given; and when it is considered how unwilling people are to part with their property, the fact that the Israelites gave their gold ornaments to enable Aaron to cast a golden calf, shows that they sincerely believed that their worship would be acceptable to some deity who had the best claim to their acknowledgment. If they mistook the object, it must have been an error of the understanding, which it would have been evidently more reasonable to have corrected by reasoning and evidence, than by punishment.
2024. It’s unfair to accuse any worshipper of having bad intentions, for the reasons I mentioned earlier; and considering how reluctant people are to give up their possessions, the fact that the Israelites offered their gold jewelry to help Aaron create a golden calf shows that they genuinely believed their worship would be meaningful to some deity deserving of their recognition. If they misidentified the object of their worship, it was likely a misunderstanding that would’ve been better addressed through discussion and evidence rather than punishment.
2025. While such eminent men as Mahan, and the learned Goliah of my416 mundane guardian spirit, will hold up this, to my mind, barbarous and preposterous Pentateuch as the word of God, I am obliged to meet them upon the ground thus stated; but there are other highly respectable clergymen, who concur in questioning that the Pentateuch existed until after the return of the Jews from their captivity; and there is evidence, agreeably to the quotations I have made, that this alleged work of divine inspiration, or word of God, as stated in the Second Book of Chronicles, and 22d chapter of the Second Book of Kings, has no better foundation than the word of the priest Hilkiah and his accomplices.
2025. While respected figures like Mahan and the knowledgeable Goliah, my mundane guardian spirit, view this, in my opinion, barbaric and absurd Pentateuch as the word of God, I feel compelled to engage them on this point; however, there are also other reputable clergymen who agree that the Pentateuch may not have existed until after the Jews returned from their captivity. Furthermore, there is evidence, based on the quotes I've provided, that this so-called work of divine inspiration, or word of God, as mentioned in the Second Book of Chronicles and the 22nd chapter of the Second Book of Kings, is built on no stronger foundation than the words of the priest Hilkiah and his associates.
2027. Mr. Mahan conceives that the willingness of the believers in the gospel to sacrifice their lives in testimony of the sincerity of their conviction proves the truth of revelation. Wherefore, then, does not their exposure to the slaughtering sword of the partisans of Moses prove the sincerity of the Israelites in their worship of their idol? No wise knave would do any thing so absurd. History shows that many of those who have been most willing to make sacrifices for their belief have been great fanatics. Their willingness to suffer only proves the intensity of their belief, not the truth of the miracles which they believe.
2027. Mr. Mahan believes that the readiness of gospel believers to sacrifice their lives as a testament to their convictions proves the truth of revelation. So, why doesn’t their exposure to violence from Moses' followers demonstrate the sincerity of the Israelites in their worship of their idol? No wise trickster would do something so ridiculous. History shows that many who have been willing to make sacrifices for their beliefs have been extreme fanatics. Their willingness to suffer only demonstrates the intensity of their belief, not the truth of the miracles they believe in.
2029. But if the belief in a mission by contemporaries is evidence in its favour, is not the disbelief of contemporaries evidence on the other side? Is not the fact that Moses could only expel idolatry from the Hebrews by the sword, a proof that he was unable to convince them by any adequate evidence of his claims to inspiration?
2029. But if the belief in a mission by people of the time is evidence supporting it, isn't the disbelief of those same people evidence against it? Isn't the fact that Moses could only rid the Hebrews of idolatry through force a sign that he couldn't convince them with sufficient evidence of his claims to inspiration?
2030. This surmise, respecting the inadequacy of the facts and reasoning which Moses had to advance in favour of his pretensions as a missionary of Jehovah, appears to be fully justified in the history given by Josephus. From the following language, which this distinguished Jewish historian alleges to have been held by one of the Israelites, it is evident that Moses was then viewed as no better than Mohammed or any of the usurping popes of Christendom. While Protestants sanction such religious despots as Moses and Samuel, they ought not to complain of the papal despots of Christendom, (note to 1091.)
2030. This assumption about the lack of solid evidence and reasoning that Moses presented to support his claims as a messenger of Jehovah seems to be fully supported by the account provided by Josephus. From the statements that this notable Jewish historian reports were made by one of the Israelites, it's clear that Moses was regarded at that time as no better than Mohammed or any of the power-hungry popes of Christianity. While Protestants may support such religious tyrants as Moses and Samuel, they shouldn't complain about the papal tyrants of Christianity, (note to 1091.)
Just denunciation of the religious imposture and usurpation of Moses, by noble-minded Israelites.[54]
2031. “Corah, an Hebrew of great wealth and influence, and famous for his eloquence, becoming jealous of the dignity to which Moses had attained, raised a clamour against him among the Levites who were of the same tribe, by suggesting to them, in an occasional harangue, ‘That it redounded to their dishonour thus tamely to suffer Moses, under pretence of the divine command, to retain unlimited authority, vest the priesthood in his brother Aaron without their suffrages, and bestow places of honour and profit at pleasure.’ He added, ‘that these measures were the more oppressive and grievous as founded on the arts of sophistry and insinuation; that those who are conscious of deserving posts of dignity endeavour to obtain them not by force, but mild persuasion; that it was the interest of a state to check the ambition of such aspiring individuals, before they acquired an influence that might prove destructive.’ He demanded by what authority Moses had conferred the priesthood on Aaron and his sons, enforcing his own title as superior to theirs, both by descent and property.”
2031. “Corah, a wealthy and influential Hebrew known for his eloquence, became jealous of the status Moses had achieved. He stirred up trouble among the Levites of his tribe by telling them in a speech, ‘It’s disgraceful for you to passively let Moses, under the guise of divine command, keep absolute power, appoint the priesthood to his brother Aaron without your consent, and grant positions of honor and profit as he pleases.’ He added, ‘These actions are even more burdensome and unfair because they arise from manipulation and suggestion; those who believe they deserve positions of honor seek them not through force, but through gentle persuasion. It is the duty of a state to restrain the ambitions of such individuals before they gain an influence that could be harmful.’ He questioned by what authority Moses gave the priesthood to Aaron and his sons, asserting that his own claim was superior to theirs, both by lineage and wealth.”
2033. “Testify thy wonted kindness to the Hebrews by inflicting condign punishment on Dathan and Abiram, for suggesting that thy purposes are opposed by my arts. Visit these detractors from thy glory with exemplary vengeance. Let the earth on which they tread swallow them up, with their families and substance, to the manifestation of thy power, and as an example to posterity not to think unworthily of the Majesty of heaven.”
2033. “Show your usual kindness to the Hebrews by punishing Dathan and Abiram for claiming that my actions go against your plans. Bring down exemplary vengeance on these critics of your glory. Let the earth they stand on swallow them up, along with their families and their possessions, to demonstrate your power, and as a warning to future generations not to think poorly of the Majesty of heaven.”
2034. Mr. Mahan urges that those who sacrificed their lives for a cause must have had good reason for their course. What are we, then, to think of Zimri the Hebrew, who used the following language to Moses, and was, as well as those who concurred with him in opinion, murdered in consequence, not after trial, but by Lynch law, as will appear from the sequel?[55]
2034. Mr. Mahan argues that those who gave their lives for a cause must have had valid reasons for their actions. So, what should we think of Zimri the Hebrew, who said the following to Moses, and was, along with those who shared his views, killed as a result, not after a trial, but through mob justice, as will be shown later?[55]
2035. “‘Moses, you are at liberty to contend for the use and observance of your own laws, which have obtained a sanction and authority by long custom alone, or you would have been brought to merited disgrace and punishment, and found, to your cost, that the Hebrews were not to be deluded by your arts. I will never subject myself to your tyrannical decrees, assured that, under a pretext of regard to religion and law, you seek to enslave us, and establish a supreme authority over us, by denying us those liberties to which all free-born men have an undoubted right. Was there a more grievous oppression during the whole course of an Egyptian bondage than the power you usurped of punishing every man by laws of your own formation? You particularly deserve punishment for abrogating and annulling those customs, laws, and privileges which are authorized and established by the common consent of nations, and preferring the sugges418tions of your fancy to rules so generally followed and rationally founded. Conscious that I have done nothing wrong, I now frankly declare, in this assembly, that I have married a strange woman. This I confess with an honest boldness, and would do the same in the face of the world. I also worship the gods whom thou hast forbidden to be worshipped, as I do not hold myself bound to submit to your arbitrary sway either in matters of law or religion, but must assert the liberty of investigating the truth for myself, and directing my own personal concerns.’
2035. “‘Moses, you have the right to argue for the use and observance of your own laws, which have gained acceptance and authority purely through long-standing tradition; otherwise, you would have faced deserved disgrace and punishment, realizing too late that the Hebrews cannot be fooled by your tactics. I will never submit to your oppressive rules, knowing that under the guise of caring for religion and law, you aim to enslave us and impose supreme control over us by denying us the freedoms that all free people rightfully possess. Was there any greater oppression during the entirety of Egyptian bondage than your assumed power to punish everyone with laws of your own creation? You truly deserve punishment for abolishing and invalidating those customs, laws, and privileges that are recognized and established by the mutual agreement of nations, and for favoring your own whimsical notions over universally accepted and rational principles. Confident that I have done nothing wrong, I openly declare in this assembly that I have married a foreign woman. I say this with honest boldness, and I would do the same in front of anyone. I also worship the gods that you have prohibited, as I refuse to submit to your arbitrary control over matters of law or religion, insisting on my right to seek the truth for myself and manage my own affairs.’”
2038. “His contumacy and flagrantly insolent behaviour to Moses raised the resentment of one Phineas to the highest degree. He was a youth eminent for the dignity of his family, his singular prowess, and his personal virtues. Eleazar the high-priest being his father, he was nearly allied to the great lawgiver. Sensible that to suffer such indignity to pass with impunity would bring both the religion and the laws of the Hebrews into contempt, he determined to make an example of the ringleader of the faction, as his exalted rank would cause that example to have a greater influence on the minds of the people. His resolution being equal to his zeal, he repaired, without delay, to the tent of Zimri, and at one stroke slew both him and Cobi his wife. This resolute act excited an emulation among those of his contemporaries who still maintained a regard for the honour of their country, to avenge themselves on those who had done it violation; inasmuch that they fell most furiously upon the faction, and put great numbers of them to the sword.”
2038. “His defiance and outrageously disrespectful behavior toward Moses angered Phineas to no end. He was a young man distinguished by his family's status, his exceptional strength, and his personal qualities. With Eleazar, the high priest, as his father, he was closely related to the great lawgiver. Realizing that allowing such disrespect to go unpunished would bring shame upon both the religion and the laws of the Hebrews, he decided to set an example by targeting the leader of the group, knowing that his high status would make that example more impactful on the people's minds. Driven by both determination and zeal, he went directly to Zimri's tent and, in one strike, killed both him and his wife, Cobi. This bold act inspired others of his time who still cared about their country's honor to take action against those who had committed such offenses, leading them to violently attack the faction and kill many of them.”
Remarkable observance of the Golden Rule by Moses, in his last advice to the Israelites.[56]
2040. “‘Wherefore, to avoid this danger of apostasy from the worship of the God of your fathers, suffer not any of your enemies to live after you have conquered them; but esteem it highly conducive to your interest to destroy them all, lest, if you permit them to live, you become infected by their manners, and thereby corrupt your own institutions. I do further exhort you to overthrow their altars, temples, groves, and indeed to exterminate their nations with fire and sword. By these means alone the permanency of your happy constitution can be secured to you.’”
2040. “‘To prevent the risk of turning away from the worship of the God of your ancestors, do not allow any of your enemies to survive after you defeat them; consider it crucial for your well-being to eliminate them all. If you let them live, you might be influenced by their ways, which could corrupt your own traditions. I also urge you to destroy their altars, temples, groves, and essentially wipe out their nations with fire and sword. These actions are the only way to ensure the lasting stability of your favorable constitution.’”
Straining at Spiritual Gnats, while swallowing Scriptural Camels.
2042. The question is put, Wherefore can spirits cause tappings on or tilting of tables, only when a medium is present? To those who believe in the Old Testament as the word of God, it may be in point to inquire, Wherefore the mere elevation of the hands of Moses, on a hill remote from the field of battle, enabled the Israelites to overcome their enemies, when the opposite result ensued when the hands of the veracious prophet were lowered, as agreeably to verses 11 and 12, chapter xvii. of Exodus?
2042. The question is raised, why can spirits cause tappings on or tilting of tables only when a medium is present? For those who see the Old Testament as the word of God, it might be worth asking, why did simply raising the hands of Moses on a distant hill help the Israelites defeat their enemies, while the opposite happened when the hands of the honest prophet were lowered, as noted in verses 11 and 12, chapter 17 of Exodus?
2043. “And it came to pass, when Moses held up his hand, that Israel prevailed; and when he let down his hand, Amalek prevailed. But Moses’s hands were heavy, and they took a stone and put it under him, and he sat thereon, and Aaron and Hur stayed up his hands, the one on the one side and the other on the other side; and his hands were steady until the going down of the sun.”
2043. “And it happened that when Moses raised his hands, Israel won; but when he lowered his hands, Amalek won. Moses’s hands got heavy, so they put a stone under him for him to sit on, and Aaron and Hur supported his hands, one on one side and the other on the other side; and his hands remained steady until sunset.”
2045. Surely, the peculiar influences thus exercised by the author of the Pentateuch is at least as incredible as that by which the presence of a medium enables spirits to move ponderable bodies, when otherwise they could not move them. The influence ascribed to Moses is alleged to have been witnessed only on one occasion, whereas that attributed to media has been seen in a multiplicity of instances by living witnesses of good character, who will attest to the facts, as well as the media themselves.
2045. Certainly, the strange effects caused by the author of the Pentateuch are just as unbelievable as the way a medium allows spirits to move physical objects when they couldn’t do so otherwise. The influence attributed to Moses is said to have been observed only once, while the effects linked to media have been witnessed multiple times by reliable individuals who can vouch for the events, along with the media themselves.
2046. But, independently of the incredibility of this Mosaic miracle as an isolated fact discordant with the laws of nature and human experience, is it not incredible on account of its inconsistency with the just and humane idea of God which the truly pious entertain, that he should give this assistance to the Jews in their unchristian warfare? This reasoning is at least as applicable to the alleged arrestation of the sun, (involving that of the rotary motion of the earth,) in order that Joshua might make a further slaughter of the vanquished Canaanites. For this slaughter the prominent excuse seems to have been that Moses, wishing to possess the territory of the Canaanites, professed to have the authority of God for extirpating them as idolaters, agreeably to the following language, which is represented by Mr. Mahan and others as the word of God, (Deut. viii. 16, 20, 22:)
2046. But, aside from how unbelievable this Mosaic miracle is as an isolated event that clashes with the laws of nature and human experience, isn't it also hard to believe because it contradicts the just and compassionate idea of God that truly devout people hold? Why would He provide help to the Jews in their unchristian war? This reasoning also applies to the supposed halting of the sun (which would mean stopping Earth's rotation) so Joshua could continue slaughtering the defeated Canaanites. The main justification for this massacre seems to be that Moses, wanting to take the land from the Canaanites, claimed to have God's authority to eliminate them as idolaters, as described in the following text that Mr. Mahan and others present as God's word (Deut. viii. 16, 20, 22):
2047. “And thou shalt consume all the people which the Lord thy God shall deliver thee; thine eye shall have no pity upon them: neither shalt thou serve their gods; for that will be a snare unto thee. Moreover, the Lord thy God will send the hornet among them, until they that are left, and hide themselves from thee, be destroyed. And the Lord thy God will put out those nations before thee by little and little; thou mayest not consume them at once, lest the beasts of the field increase upon thee.”
2047. “You must completely wipe out all the people that the Lord your God hands over to you; do not show them any mercy, and do not worship their gods, because that will trap you. Additionally, the Lord your God will send hornets among them until those who remain and try to hide from you are destroyed. The Lord your God will drive those nations out before you gradually; you cannot eliminate them all at once, or else the wild animals will multiply and become a threat to you.”
The Evidence which is insufficient to establish the Iniquity of a Sinner cannot be sufficient to establish the Divine Authority of a Book.
2049. Agreeably to the preceding quotation from Scripture, one witness is not sufficient to convict a man of any iniquity. Two witnesses, at least, are necessary to establish guilt. But if a single witness be insufficient to establish the iniquity of a man, how is it to be established, on the evidence of the priest Hilkiah alone, that the manuscript, which, as he represented, he had found in the temple, was the inspired code of Moses, or, as Mahan and others would have it, the word of God?
2049. According to the previous quote from Scripture, one witness isn’t enough to convict someone of wrongdoing. At least two witnesses are needed to prove guilt. But if one witness can’t prove a person’s wrongdoing, how can we accept the priest Hilkiah’s claim alone that the manuscript he supposedly found in the temple is the inspired code of Moses, or as Mahan and others put it, the word of God?
2050. Should the righteousness of a religious code be established by evidence insufficient to establish the iniquity of an individual? A fortiori, when, by proving the righteousness of a code, a whole generation was to be convicted of iniquity, was the evidence of one individual sufficient, especially when the iniquity thus to be adjudged was to draw down the unquenchable wrath of God, agreeably to Huldah the prophetess?
2050. Should the validity of a religious code be determined by evidence that is not enough to prove someone's wrongdoing? A fortiori, when proving the validity of a code could condemn an entire generation, was the evidence of just one person enough, especially when the wrongdoing being judged could invoke God's unending wrath, according to Huldah the prophetess?
Word of God, impiously so called, or the Golden Rule inverted by God’s alleged Commands.
2051. “When thou comest nigh unto a city to fight against it, then proclaim peace unto it. And it shall be, if it make thee answer of peace, and open unto thee, then it shall be that all the people that is found therein shall be tributaries unto thee, and they shall serve thee. And if it will make no peace with thee, but will make war against thee, then thou shalt besiege it. And when the Lord thy God hath delivered it into thine hands, thou shalt smite every male thereof with the edge of the sword: but the women, and the little ones, and the cattle, and all that is in the city, even all the spoil thereof, shalt thou take unto thyself: and thou shalt eat the spoil of thine enemies, which the Lord thy God hath given thee. Thus shalt thou do unto all the cities which are very far off from thee, which are not of the cities of these nations. But of the cities of these people which the Lord thy God doth give thee for an inheritance, thou shalt save alive nothing that breatheth: but thou shalt utterly destroy them, namely, the Hittites, and the Amorites, the Canaanites, and the Perizzites, the Hivites, and the Jebusites, as the Lord thy God hath commanded thee,” (Deut. xx. 10-17.)
2051. “When you approach a city to fight against it, first offer it peace. If it responds with peace and opens its gates to you, then all the people inside will become your subjects and serve you. But if it refuses to make peace and decides to fight you, then you must besiege it. When the Lord your God hands it over to you, you must kill every male in it with the sword, but you can take the women, children, livestock, and all the spoils of the city for yourself, and you will enjoy the spoils that the Lord your God has given you. You should do this to all the cities that are very far from you, which are not part of these nations. However, for the cities of the people that the Lord your God gives you as an inheritance, you must completely destroy them; do not spare anything that breathes, but utterly destroy them, including the Hittites, Amorites, Canaanites, Perizzites, Hivites, and Jebusites, as the Lord your God has commanded you,” (Deut. xx. 10-17.)
PAGAN FEARLESSNESS OF DEATH.
Opinion of Mr. Huc, a Christian Priest, that it is their religion which makes Christians more fearful of death than the Chinese, (746.)
2052. Parson Berg and Bishop McIlvaine unjustly represent the doctrines of futurity, held by Christians, as causing those who believe in eternal punishment—in the horrible hell described by Josephus, and sanctioned by the gospel, with the precarious notions of heaven derived from the same authority—to have less fear of death than deists, by them called infidels. But I have known many deists die, and certainly I have never seen any believer in Christianity meet death with more firmness than those who did not believe. Some of the last-mentioned class have died of painful complaints with the most admirable equanimity. But to illustrate the injustice of these reverend gentlemen in their undue assumption of the superior fearlessness of death of those persons who believe in the gospel over those who do not so believe, I will here quote a passage from the travels of a Christian missionary, which describes the equanimity with which the Chinese meet death. From the work of the French missionary, Mr. Huc, it will be seen that death is contemplated with far less fearful apprehension in China than in Christendom.
2052. Rev. Berg and Bishop McIlvaine incorrectly portray the beliefs about the afterlife held by Christians as making those who believe in eternal punishment—in the dreadful hell described by Josephus and supported by the gospel, along with the uncertain ideas of heaven from the same source—less afraid of death than deists, whom they refer to as infidels. However, I've witnessed many deists die, and I've never seen any Christian face death with more courage than those who don’t believe. Some of those non-believers have died from painful illnesses with remarkable calmness. To highlight the unfairness of these clergymen in claiming that believers in the gospel experience less fear of death than non-believers, I will quote a passage from a Christian missionary's travels, which illustrates the composure with which the Chinese confront death. From the work of the French missionary, Mr. Huc, it becomes clear that death is viewed with much less dread in China than in Christian countries.
Observations of the Missionary, Mr. Huc, to whom reference has just been made.
2053. “In no other country than China, perhaps, could men be heard exchanging compliments on the subject of a coffin. People (in Christendom) are most shy of mentioning the lugubrious objects destined to contain the mortal remains of a relation or friend; and when death does enter the house, the coffin is got in in secresy and silence, in order to spare the feelings of the mourning family. But it is quite otherwise in China; there a coffin is simply an article of the first necessity to the dead, and of luxury and fancy to the living. In the great towns you see them displayed in the shops with all sorts of tasteful decorations, painted, and varnished, and polished, and trimmed up to attract the eyes of passengers, and give them the fancy to buy themselves one.
2053. “In no other country but China, maybe, can you hear people exchanging compliments about a coffin. In Western countries, people tend to avoid mentioning these gloomy objects meant to hold the remains of a loved one; when death arrives, a coffin is acquired quietly and discreetly to spare the feelings of the grieving family. But in China, it’s a completely different story; there, a coffin is seen as a basic necessity for the deceased and a luxury item for the living. In major cities, you can find them displayed in shops with all sorts of stylish decorations, painted, varnished, polished, and embellished to catch the eye of passersby and entice them into considering buying one for themselves.”
2054. “People in easy circumstances, who have money to spare for their pleasures, scarcely ever fail to provide themselves beforehand with a coffin to suit their own taste, and which they consider becoming; and, until the moment arrives for lying down in it, it is kept in the house; not as an article of immediate necessity, but as one that cannot fail to be consoling and pleasant to the eye in a nicely-furnished apartment.
2054. “People in comfortable situations, who have extra money for their enjoyment, rarely miss the chance to get a coffin that fits their style and that they find appealing. Until the moment comes to lie down in it, it’s kept in the house; not as something urgently needed, but as an object that is sure to be comforting and nice to look at in a well-decorated room.
2055. “For well-brought up children, it is a favourite method of expressing the fervour of their filial piety toward the authors of their being, a sweet and tender consolation for the heart of a son, to be able to purchase a beautiful coffin for an aged father or mother, and come in state to present the gift at the moment when they least expect such an agreeable surprise.422 If one is not sufficiently favoured by fortune to be able to afford the purchase of a coffin in advance, care is always taken before ‘saluting the world,’ as the Chinese say, a sick person shall at least have the satisfaction of casting a glance at his last abode; and if he is surrounded by at all affectionate relations, they never fail to buy him a coffin and place it by the side of his bed.
2055. “For well-raised kids, it’s a common way to show their deep love and respect for their parents to buy a beautiful coffin for an elderly mother or father. It’s a heartfelt surprise that brings joy to a son, especially when they present it unexpectedly.422 If someone isn’t lucky enough to afford a coffin in advance, they still make sure that before ‘saluting the world,’ as the Chinese say, a sick person at least gets to see where they’ll be laid to rest; and if they have caring relatives, those relatives always make sure to buy a coffin and place it next to the bed.
2056. “In the country, this is not always so easy, for coffins are not kept quite ready, and, besides, peasants have not such luxurious habits as townspeople. The only way, then, is to send for the carpenter of the place, who takes the measure of the sick person, not forgetting to observe to him that it must be made a little longer than would seem necessary, because one always stretches out a little when dead. A bargain is then made concerning the length and breadth, and especially the cost; wood is brought, and the workmen set about their task in the yard, close to the chamber of the dying person, who is entertained with the music of the saw and the other tools, while death is at work with him, preparing him to occupy the snug abode when it is ready.
2056. “In the countryside, this isn’t always easy, because coffins aren’t kept at the ready, and besides, peasants don’t have the same luxurious habits as people in towns. The only option is to call in the local carpenter, who will take the measurements of the sick person, making sure to mention that the coffin should be made a bit longer than it actually seems necessary, since people tend to stretch out a little when they die. Then, they negotiate the dimensions and especially the cost; wood is brought, and the workers get to work in the yard, right next to the room of the dying person, who is kept company by the sounds of the saw and other tools, while death quietly prepares him to take his place in the snug space once it’s finished.
2057. “All this is done with the most perfect coolness, and without the slightest emotion, real or affected. We have ourselves witnessed such scenes more than once, and it has always been one of the things that most surprised us in the manners of this extraordinary country. A short time after our arrival in the mission of the north, we were walking one day in the country with a Chinese seminarist, who had the patience to reply to all our long and tedious questions about the men and things of the Celestial Empire. While we were keeping up the dialogue as well as we could, in a mixture of Latin and Chinese, using a word of one or the other as we found occasion, we saw coming toward us a rather numerous crowd, who advanced in an orderly manner along a narrow path. It might have been called a procession.
2057. “All of this is done with total calmness, and without the slightest emotion, whether genuine or fake. We've seen scenes like this more than once, and it's always surprised us about the ways of this extraordinary country. Not long after we arrived at the northern mission, we were out in the countryside one day with a Chinese seminarian, who patiently answered all our long and tedious questions about the people and things of the Celestial Empire. While we tried to keep the conversation going in a mix of Latin and Chinese, using a word from one or the other as needed, we noticed a fairly large crowd coming towards us, advancing in an orderly fashion along a narrow path. It could have been called a procession.
2058. “Our first impulse was to turn aside, and get into some safe corner behind a large hill; for, not having as yet much experience in the manners and customs of the Chinese, we had some hesitation in producing ourselves, for fear of being recognised and thrown into prison; possibly even condemned and strangled. The crowd had now come up with us, and we stood aside to let it pass. It was composed of a great number of villagers, who looked at us with smiling faces, and had the appearance of being uncommonly pleased. After them came a litter, on which was borne an empty coffin, and then another litter, upon which lay extended a dying man, wrapped in blankets. His face was haggard and livid, and his expiring eyes were fixed upon the coffin that preceded him. When every one had passed, we hastened to ask the meaning of this strange procession. ‘It is some sick man,’ said the seminarist, ‘who has been taken ill in a neighbouring village, and whom they are bringing home to his family. The Chinese do not like to die away from their own house.’ ‘That is very natural; but what is the coffin for?’ ‘For the sick man, who probably has not many days to live. They seem to have made every thing ready for his funeral.’ I remarked by the side of the coffin a piece of white linen. ‘That, they mean to use for the mourning.’
2058. “Our first instinct was to step aside and find a safe spot behind a large hill; since we didn’t have much experience with the customs and traditions of the Chinese, we hesitated to show ourselves for fear of being recognized and thrown in jail; possibly even condemned and executed. The crowd had now caught up with us, and we moved aside to let it pass. It was made up of a large number of villagers, who looked at us with smiling faces and seemed genuinely pleased. Following them was a litter carrying an empty coffin, and then another litter, which held a dying man wrapped in blankets. His face was pale and gaunt, and his fading eyes were fixed on the coffin ahead of him. Once everyone had passed, we rushed to ask about this unusual procession. ‘It’s a sick man,’ said the seminarist, ‘who fell ill in a nearby village, and they’re bringing him back home to his family. The Chinese prefer to die in their own homes.’ ‘That makes sense; but what’s the coffin for?’ ‘For the sick man, who probably doesn’t have long to live. They seem to have everything prepared for his funeral.’ I noticed a piece of white linen next to the coffin. ‘That’s intended for mourning.’”
2059. “These words threw us in the most profound astonishment, and we saw then that we had come into a new world—into the midst of a people whose ideas and feelings differed widely from those of Europeans. These men quietly setting about to prepare for the funeral of a still livin423g friend and relation—this coffin placed purposely under the eyes of the dying man, doubtless with the purpose of doing what was agreeable to him; all this plunged us into a strange reverie, and the walk was continued in silence. The astonishing calmness with which the Chinese see the approach of death does not fail when the last moment arrives. They expire with the most incomparable tranquillity, without any of the emotions, the agitations, the agonies that usually render the moment of death so terrific.”
2059. “These words left us deeply astonished, and we realized that we had entered a new world—surrounded by a people whose thoughts and feelings were vastly different from those of Europeans. These men were quietly preparing for the funeral of a still-living friend and relative—this coffin purposefully placed before the dying man, likely to do what he would find comforting; all of this sent us into a strange contemplation, and we continued our walk in silence. The amazing calmness with which the Chinese face the arrival of death does not waver even at the last moment. They pass away with unmatched serenity, without the emotions, agitation, or agony that usually make the moment of death so frightening.”
2060. It is remarkable that Mr. Huc cites an “entire want of religious feeling, as among the causes of this indifference to death.”[57] But it may be inquired whether that can be a proper kind of religious feeling which interferes with equanimity at the prospect of our spiritual birth. I can easily believe Mr. Huc to be correct, if his entire want of religious feeling means the absence of all fear of an eternal broiling, like that of Dives.
2060. It’s striking that Mr. Huc points out a “complete lack of religious feeling as one of the reasons for this indifference to death.”[57] However, one might ask whether a proper kind of religious feeling can truly disrupt our calmness about the idea of our spiritual rebirth. I can easily believe Mr. Huc is right if his complete lack of religious feeling refers to having no fear of an eternal punishment, like that of Dives.
Conclusion of Strictures on Mr. Mahan’s Religious Errors.
CONCLUSION.
“The doctrine of a future state of rewards and punishments is not to be found in, nor did it make part of, the Mosaic dispensation.”
“The belief in a future state with rewards and punishments is neither found in nor part of the Mosaic law.”
The Pentateuch inconsistently represented as the basis of belief in human immortality, as will appear by the prefixed quotation, as well as the inability of any of its devotees to point out any part which conflicts with the right reverend author’s opinion, above mentioned.—Injustice of representing disbelievers in the Bible as not having as good grounds for belief in immortality as those who rest their belief on a work which,424 by its silence, tends to discountenance the hope of a future life.—Those who uphold the Bible against Spiritualism, the real antagonists of the only satisfactory evidence ever given to man of a future habitation in the spirit world.
2066. Throughout Christendom I believe such a belief is necessary to render a person competent as a witness, or to hold any office. As it is assumed generally by Christians that there is no other proof of immortality than that alleged to be afforded by Scripture, unbelievers in Scripture are assumed to be unbelievers in a future state, and the most unfavourable insinuations are made respecting such persons, (1310.) Bishop McIlvaine, in his “Evidences,” has charitably represented that, as a class, such men are peculiarly vicious, and in their domestic relations immoral; not recollecting how far Christian prelates have been found wanting in the present, as well as in past times. But notwithstanding that the disbelief in a future state is held to be so universally pernicious in its influence, self-called orthodox Christians deem it impious not to bow before the Bible as the holy word of God, or to be wanting in respect for his inspired missionary, Moses. But admitting that the books found by Hilkiah (1940) were written, under divine inspiration, by Moses, how does it happen that those books and their author stand in such high estimation, when they actually give no evidence of immortality, but rather tend to prove that God, in communicating his will to Moses, thought it more important to give to the Jews directions for the decoration of a tabernacle, than to impart to them the invaluable knowledge of their eternal existence? Moreover, God is represented as holding in especial favour, those who did not think it of as much importance to inquire into the truth of immortality, as to obtain decorations for pharisaical worship. Why is Moses, a materialist, to be venerated, who so grossly trifled with his opportunities? There is either a flagitious misrepresentation, or he, of all men, had the best opportunity of learning this all-important truth; and therefore, dying ignorant of it, is proportionally more culpable. Wherefore is the uncandid and unfounded pretence resorted to, that attacking the Old Testament is attacking the basis of the hope of heaven, when, on the contrary, that record has really the opposite tendency—that of enfeebling the evidence of immortality?
2066. Throughout Christendom, I believe that such a belief is necessary for someone to be considered a competent witness or to hold any position. It's generally assumed by Christians that the only proof of immortality comes from Scripture, so those who don't believe in Scripture are seen as not believing in a future life, and they face the harshest judgments. Bishop McIlvaine, in his “Evidences,” has kindly suggested that such people are particularly immoral and have troubled domestic lives; forgetting how often Christian leaders have fallen short, both now and in the past. However, despite the widespread belief that doubt in a future life has a harmful influence, self-proclaimed orthodox Christians see it as sinful not to reverence the Bible as the holy word of God, or to show disrespect for his inspired messenger, Moses. But if we accept that the books discovered by Hilkiah (1940) were indeed written under divine inspiration by Moses, why do those books and their author hold such high regard when they actually provide no evidence of immortality and instead focus more on giving the Jews instructions for decorating a tabernacle rather than sharing the invaluable knowledge of their eternal existence? Furthermore, God is depicted as favoring those who didn’t prioritize investigating the truth of immortality over obtaining decorations for their hypocritical worship. Why should Moses, a materialist, be honored when he wasted his opportunities? There's either a serious misrepresentation, or he had the best chance of learning this crucial truth; thus, dying without knowing it makes him even more culpable. Why do people resort to the dishonest and unfounded claim that criticizing the Old Testament undermines the foundation of hope for heaven, when, in fact, that record weakens the case for immortality?
2067. We see the heathen Cyrus, on his death-bed, (1980,) striving to impress upon his children a belief in immortality, while Moses, dying a worldly-minded, blood-thirsty materialist, employs his last moments in giving inhuman directions for the merciless massacre of every conquered425 pagan. Yet, while Bishop McIlvaine, as respects his contemporaries, represents materialism as irreconcilable with virtue, Moses is to be venerated and the books attributed to his authorship idolatrously worshipped as the word of God! But if the advocacy of any thing which tends to lessen the hope of immortality be culpable, is it not culpable, against the truths of Spiritualism to hold up a book which authorizes disbelief in immortality, and that, too, upon such questionable authority as an obscure priest and fanatical and barbarous autocrat? (1937.) As respects the gospel, it has, I hope, been shown that, with all the exertions of the good parson Harbaugh to exhibit the heaven of Scripture in its most favorable aspect, (777 to 805,) Spiritualism has immensely the advantage in the description given of the spirit world, (409 to 469,) sanctioned by the replies given to my queries under test conditions, (552).
2067. We see the heathen Cyrus, on his deathbed, (1980,) trying to instill in his children a belief in immortality, while Moses, dying as a worldly, bloodthirsty materialist, spends his final moments giving inhumane orders for the merciless slaughter of every conquered425 pagan. Yet, while Bishop McIlvaine claims that materialism cannot coexist with virtue, Moses is held in reverence, and the texts attributed to him are idolized as the word of God! But if advocating anything that diminishes the hope of immortality is wrong, is it not also wrong, in light of the truths of Spiritualism, to promote a book that supports disbelief in immortality, especially based on such dubious authority as an obscure priest and a fanatical, barbaric autocrat? (1937.) Regarding the gospel, I hope it has been demonstrated that, despite all the efforts of the good parson Harbaugh to portray the heaven of Scripture in its best light, (777 to 805,) Spiritualism has a significant advantage in its portrayal of the spirit world, (409 to 469,) as validated by the responses I received to my inquiries under test conditions, (552).
2068. Another ground of pre-eminence is the perfect immunity from any association with such a priesthood as that described by the Right Rev. Bishop Hopkins. Media, replacing the priests, will owe their office to nature, not to any aristocracy, monarch, or theocrat, (1307).
2068. Another reason for superiority is the complete freedom from any connection to a priesthood like the one described by the Right Rev. Bishop Hopkins. The media, taking the place of the priests, will derive their role from nature, not from any aristocracy, monarchy, or theocracy, (1307).
2070. I trust I have shown that the actual morals of Christendom are irreconcilable with the precepts of the gospel, which denounce wealth and enjoin submission to wrong, these morals being also inconsistent with the materialism of the books of Moses. Under these circumstances, let the reader turn to the evidence which has converted me from a prepossessed skeptic to a devout believer in spiritual communication. Let that glorious portraiture of the spirit-world be considered which has been opened to the view of mortals through the high spirits who have accredited me as one of their servants. I will not go over the evidence, nor recapitulate the arguments which I have already so fully urged upon the attention of my readers. I implore them to read with candour, and think earnestly of the facts and reasoning submitted in this volume.
2070. I believe I've demonstrated that the actual morals of Christianity conflict with the teachings of the gospel, which condemn wealth and advocate for submission to injustice, and these morals are also at odds with the materialism found in the books of Moses. Given this, I invite the reader to explore the evidence that has changed me from a biased skeptic to a devoted believer in spiritual communication. Let's consider the beautiful depiction of the spirit world that has been revealed to humans through the higher spirits who have recognized me as one of their messengers. I won’t restate the evidence or go over the arguments I've already presented to my readers. I urge them to read openly and seriously contemplate the facts and reasoning in this book.
P. S.—Explanation respecting Jesus Christ.
P.S.—Explanation about Jesus Christ.
My spirit sister alleges that Christ never uttered the language recorded as his, and upon which I have commented. This being admitted, I wish that nothing which I have said may be considered as bearing personally on a Being who is so much the object of devotion with many of my dearest connections, relations, and friends. I wish that it should be considered that it is only upon the doctrines imputed to Christ, that I have intended to animadvert, not on Jesus himself. Surely I am justified as treating that language as coming from Jesus Christ, which is ascribed to him in the only history of his teachings which has come down to us, and which, under the name of the holy canonical gospel, is considered by more than three-fourths of all the Christians in existence as inspired by God!
My spirit sister claims that Christ never spoke the words attributed to him, the ones I've commented on. If this is accepted, I hope that nothing I've said is taken as a personal attack on someone who is deeply revered by many of my closest connections, family, and friends. I want it to be clear that I'm only critiquing the doctrines attributed to Christ, not Jesus himself. Surely, I have the right to treat the language attributed to Jesus Christ, which comes from the only account of his teachings that we have, and which more than three-fourths of all Christians believe is inspired by God, as his own!
Under this head I place some articles which could not be embodied in this work; but which it may nevertheless be expedient to place within the reach of certain readers. Among the articles referred to is the theory of electricity, which I first published in 1848, and which has been approved by the spirit of Franklin, and, in obedience to his advice, inserted in this volume. Unfortunately, there are but few persons sufficiently acquainted with the phenomena which form its basis, and the technical language employed by professed electricians, to find it agreeable to study the subject in question; but they may qualify themselves to do so by studying the elementary works on this branch of science.
Under this section, I've included some articles that couldn't fit into this work but which might still be useful for certain readers. One of the articles is the theory of electricity that I first published in 1848, which has been endorsed by the spirit of Franklin, and, following his recommendation, added to this volume. Unfortunately, there are only a few people who are knowledgeable enough about the phenomena that form its basis and the technical terms used by professional electricians to enjoy studying this topic. However, they can prepare themselves to understand it better by studying the basic texts in this area of science.
LETTER TO THE EPISCOPAL CLERGY.
Although the subjoined letter has been published in various channels, as well as in a separate pamphlet, I deem it proper to record it in this work, as, otherwise, many who may see the one might not see the other. It will be perceived that the substance of my second letter has been already incorporated in the preceding pages, (714 to 776.) Of course it is to the first letter that I now allude, and which I intend to record here.
Although the letter below has been published through various channels and in a separate pamphlet, I think it's important to include it in this work, as some who see one might not see the other. You'll notice that the main points of my second letter have already been included in the previous pages, (714 to 776.) I'm referring to the first letter, which I plan to include here.
Letter from Dr. Hare to the Clergy of the Protestant Episcopal Church, offering to lay before them the New Evidence of Immortality. (Submitted to the late Convention, Philadelphia, May 15, 1855.)
Reverend and Dear Sirs: Having, from my youth, been on friendly terms with the clergy of the Episcopal Church, within the pale of which I was born and christened; having, in fact, had among the clergy of that church some excellent friends and relatives,—it has been a source of regret that I have not been able to see doctrines deeply affecting the happiness of mankind in the same light. I am, however, fully sensible of the kindness and courtesy with which I have been treated by clergymen in general, and especially by those of the church above designated. I have always been under the belief that in no part of the globe, nor at any period of human history, has a priesthood existed as moral, as sincere, and truly428 pious as those of my country; and among that priesthood, I believe, none have stood higher in these qualifications than such as are of the Episcopal Church.
Dear Reverend and Sirs: From a young age, I’ve had friendly relationships with the clergy of the Episcopal Church, the same church where I was born and baptized. In fact, I’ve had some wonderful friends and relatives among its clergy. It has always saddened me that I've been unable to see doctrines that deeply impact human happiness in the same way. However, I truly appreciate the kindness and respect I’ve received from clergymen in general, and especially from those in the church mentioned above. I have always believed that there has never been a priesthood anywhere in the world, nor at any point in history, that has been as moral, sincere, and genuinely428 pious as that of my country; and among that priesthood, I believe none have been more qualified in these respects than those of the Episcopal Church.
It is happy for me that of late I have, in one respect, found myself more in accordance with the Christian clergy: I allude here to the awakening of perfect confidence in the immortality of the soul. There was on this subject, heretofore, this difference between my sentiments and those of my clerical friends, that while I hoped for a future state, I was no less skeptical respecting the evidence of witnesses who lived some thousand years ago than of those who have, in modern times, alleged themselves to have witnessed supernatural manifestations. I required in the former case, no less than in the latter, intuitive proof; or the consistent testimony of independent observers having sufficient sense, knowledge, and integrity to make reliable witnesses.
I'm happy to say that lately I've found myself more in sync with the Christian clergy in one way: I've developed a strong belief in the immortality of the soul. Previously, I differed from my clerical friends on this issue. While I held onto hope for an afterlife, I was just as doubtful about the evidence from witnesses who lived thousands of years ago as I was about those in modern times claiming to have seen supernatural events. In both cases, I needed intuitive proof or consistent testimony from independent observers who had enough sense, knowledge, and integrity to be considered trustworthy witnesses.
Happily, in the case of Spiritualism, both of these tests have been afforded to me, so that I now believe in a future state no less firmly than the orthodox Christian.
Happily, with Spiritualism, I've had both of these experiences, so I now believe in an afterlife just as strongly as the orthodox Christian does.
Like St. Paul, in the case of Christianity, I entered upon the investigation of Spiritualism with a view to refutation; but the very instruments which I contrived to accomplish that object produced the opposite effect.
Like St. Paul in relation to Christianity, I began exploring Spiritualism with the intent to disprove it; however, the very tools I created to achieve that goal had the opposite outcome.
If human testimony is not to be taken when advanced by contemporaries known to be conscientious, truthful, and well informed, how is it to be relied on with respect to those of whom we know nothing available beside what their own writings mention?
If we can’t trust the accounts of our contemporaries who are known to be honest, reliable, and informed, how can we depend on the testimony of people we know nothing about besides what they say in their own writings?
I am prepared to submit a communication respecting the spirit world from my father, sanctioned by a convocation of spirits, whose approbation was manifested by means which no mortal could pervert.
I am ready to share a message about the spirit world from my father, approved by a gathering of spirits, whose endorsement was shown through means that no human could manipulate.
The practical influence on my mind has been to make me far more happy, to remove all fear of death, and to render me more watchful as to my deportment in life. I know that my sainted parents, and other relatives and friends, my children who died in infancy, are around me, witnessing every act and exercising a limited power over my safety and my health.
The practical impact on my mind has made me much happier, taken away all fear of death, and made me more aware of my behavior in life. I believe that my beloved parents, along with other relatives and friends, and my children who passed away in infancy, are with me, observing everything I do and having some influence over my well-being and health.
Mourning for the dead now seems to be groundless, and at all events can be indulged only upon selfish considerations. But who would grieve deeply at a transient separation, even for years, from friends made happier by the change, when sure of a happy reunion ultimately?
Mourning for the dead now seems pointless, and really can only be done for selfish reasons. But who would grieve intensely over a temporary separation, even for years, from friends who are happier because of the change, when they are certain of a joyful reunion in the end?
No evidence of any important truth in science can be shown to be more unexceptionable than that which I have received of this glorious fact, that heaven is really “at hand,” and that our relatives, friends, and acquaintances who are worthy of happiness, while describing themselves as ineffably happy, are still progressing to higher felicity; and while hovering aloft in our midst, are taking interest in our welfare with an augmented zeal or affection, so that, by these means, they may be a solace to us, in despite of death.
No evidence of any significant truth in science can be more undeniable than what I've received about this amazing fact: that heaven is truly "close by," and that our loved ones—relatives, friends, and acquaintances—who deserve happiness, while feeling incredibly joyful, are still moving toward even greater happiness. While they are present around us, they are deeply interested in our well-being with even more passion and love, so they can bring us comfort, even in spite of death.
As the reverend clergy of the Episcopal Church are about to meet in Philadelphia, I deem it my duty to afford them an opportunity of hearing the evidence on which I rely; and which, with due effort, they can have subjected to their own intuition.
As the clergy of the Episcopal Church prepare to meet in Philadelphia, I feel it’s important to give them the chance to hear the evidence I rely on; and which, with due effort, they can analyze for themselves.
Should the clergy deem it expedient to listen to my exposition, I shall be ready to answer any queries which may be made.
If the clergy find it useful to hear my explanation, I will be ready to answer any questions they may have.
I am aware that there may be considerations which may justify the429 clergy in declining to hear me. I have never, in my own case, deemed it wise to seek abstract right at the expense of practical evil. I would not urge persons in certain official stations to become converts to Spiritualism, lest it should, by consequent unpopularity, interfere with their usefulness, as in the case of Judge Edmonds; and a like objection must arise as to the conversion of clergymen, so far as to bring their convictions in competition with their professional vocation. Orthodox Christians are generally educated to believe not only that the revelation on which they rely is true, but that no other can be justifiable. Hence they are evidently displeased that spiritualists should allege themselves to have come by other means to that belief in immortality which is admitted on all sides to be the greatest comfort under the afflictions to which temporal life is liable.
I understand that there might be reasons for the clergy to refuse to listen to me. Personally, I’ve never thought it wise to pursue theoretical rights at the cost of practical harm. I wouldn’t encourage people in certain official roles to convert to Spiritualism, as it might lead to unpopularity that could hinder their ability to be effective, like in the case of Judge Edmonds. The same concern applies to clergymen, as their beliefs might conflict with their professional duties. Orthodox Christians are typically taught to believe not only that the revelation they trust is true, but also that no other belief is acceptable. Therefore, they clearly disapprove of spiritualists claiming to have arrived at their belief in immortality through different means, which, universally, is seen as the greatest comfort during life’s hardships.
There is, moreover, this discordancy in doctrine: Agreeably to Scripture, man is placed here for probation, and is liable to be eternally punished if he prove delinquent. According to Spiritualism, man is placed here for progression, and when he goes to the next world, still will have the opportunity to progress, however wicked he may be when he departs this life.
There is also a disagreement in beliefs: According to Scripture, humans are here for testing, and they can be eternally punished if they fail. In contrast, Spiritualism teaches that people are here to grow, and when they move on to the next world, they will still have the chance to evolve, no matter how bad they were in this life.
It is conceived by spiritualists that if, as the orthodox allege, God be omnipotent, he can make his creatures to suit his will; if he be omniscient, he must know what they are when made; and if he be prescient, he can foresee what they will be, and consequently cannot have the smallest conceivable motive for exposing them to probation.
It is believed by spiritualists that if, as the traditionalists claim, God is all-powerful, he can create his beings according to his will; if he is all-knowing, he must understand what they are when created; and if he is all-seeing, he can predict what they will become, and therefore cannot have even the slightest reason for putting them through trials.
I foresee that it may not be deemed expedient to take any notice of this letter; but whatever may be the result in this way, does not interfere with the propriety of my putting it in your power to avail yourselves of my offer; since I have a sanction from a higher source, the spirit of the immortal Washington, the proofs of whose communion with me I am prepared to submit to any respectable inquirers.
I understand that it might not be considered necessary to respond to this letter; however, regardless of the outcome, that doesn't change the fact that I should give you the opportunity to take advantage of my offer. I have the backing of a greater authority, the spirit of the great Washington, and I can provide evidence of our connection to any reputable inquirer.
I am aware that this language would, a few years ago, have made me attach the idea of insanity to the author; but this cannot, nevertheless, in the slightest degree, be deducible from it now, from the notorious fact that the same monomania is never entertained by any two persons, and in my hallucination, if it be such, there are a multitude of participators. That is to say, there are a multitude of persons of every grade who believe that they have communicated with their spirit friends, as I have with mine; and who, like me, have believed themselves to have held communion with the spirits of some of the most distinguished men who have departed this life. A faith in the miracles of the New Testament may as well be adduced as insanity as belief in spiritual manifestations under these circumstances.
I know that a few years ago, this language would have made me think the author was insane; however, that can't be concluded at all now, given the well-known fact that the same obsession is never shared by two individuals, and in my hallucination, if it is one, there are many others involved. In other words, there are numerous people from all walks of life who believe they have communicated with their spirit friends, just like I have with mine; and who, like me, believe they have connected with the spirits of some of the most notable people who have passed away. Believing in the miracles of the New Testament could just as easily be seen as insanity as believing in spiritual manifestations in these situations.
The fact that manifestations have been made and truthfully described has been admitted by the Catholic Church, but are ascribed to Satanic agency.
The Catholic Church acknowledges that manifestations have occurred and been accurately described but attributes them to Satanic influence.
Let the doctrines of Spiritualism, and those of the church in question, be compared, in order to determine which owes most to Satan.
Let’s compare the beliefs of Spiritualism with those of the church in question, to see which one is more influenced by Satan.
The existence of a devil being admitted, was there ever a more fertile source of diabolical intolerance than the idea that a peculiar belief being necessary to save men’s souls from hell fire, any temporal evil to which mortals might be subjected to coerce belief, would be as justifiable as the forcible extirpation of an incipient cancer from the body of a child unwilling to submit to the operation? If ever there was a devil’s agency,430 it may be seen in the auto-da-fé, the Inquisition, and the massacre of St. Bartholomew’s day.
The acknowledgment of the devil’s existence raises the question: has there ever been a more fertile ground for diabolical intolerance than the belief that a specific ideology is essential to save people's souls from hellfire? Any suffering that humans might endure to force belief would be seen as justified, much like the brutal removal of a developing cancer from a child who refuses surgery. If there’s ever been evidence of the devil's influence,430 it can be observed in the auto-da-fé, the Inquisition, and the massacre of St. Bartholomew's Day.
Of the same devilish character was the execution of Servetus by Calvin, or the persecution of the Quakers and witches by the Puritans.
The execution of Servetus by Calvin, along with the persecution of Quakers and witches by the Puritans, was equally cruel and ruthless.
Respectfully, your well-wisher, Robert Hare.
Sincerely, your supporter, Robert Hare.
A LETTER FROM DR. HARE.
Addressed to the President of the Association for the Advancement of Science, at their meeting, August 18, 1855.
Addressed to the President of the Association for the Advancement of Science, at their meeting, August 18, 1855.
Introductory Notes.
Having addressed the subjoined letter to the American Association for the Advancement of Science, the standing committee resolved that the subject did not fall sufficiently within the objects of the Association to allow even of its being read to the meeting. In the instance of my letter to the Episcopal clergy, it was stated that its acknowledgment by them was not expected; and after this impression was verified, I admitted that, in their not replying, the interest of the church was best consulted. In the present case I admit that the harmony of the Association was perhaps best consulted in not recognising that the objects of the Association involved the duty of allowing certain facts to be stated before it, which are at war with the received doctrines of science, no less than with those of revelation.
Having sent the attached letter to the American Association for the Advancement of Science, the standing committee decided that the topic didn’t really align with the Association’s goals, so it couldn’t even be presented at the meeting. Regarding my letter to the Episcopal clergy, it was mentioned that they weren’t expected to acknowledge it; and once that was confirmed, I accepted that by not responding, they were serving the church’s interests best. In this case, I admit that the Association’s unity was likely better upheld by not acknowledging that the Association’s goals included the responsibility of allowing certain facts to be presented, facts that contradict both the accepted principles of science and those of revelation.
During the Dark Ages, the so-called word of God (but really the words of ignorant propagandists) had taken such hold of the proper domain of science, that it was heresy to assert the rotundity of this planet, or that the sun did not revolve about it diurnally. But at this time science has established itself upon the domain claimed for religious truth, so that between the positive science of the atheist Comte and the dogmatic opinions of the orthodox savan, there is no room for the germ of Spiritualism to shoot up.
During the Dark Ages, what was referred to as the word of God (really just the views of uninformed propagandists) had such a strong hold on the actual field of science that it was considered heresy to claim that the Earth was round or that the sun didn’t revolve around it every day. However, science has now taken a firm stand in the area that was once claimed by religious truth, meaning there’s no space for the seeds of Spiritualism to grow between the clear science of the atheist Comte and the rigid beliefs of the traditional scholars.
It seems to me that, in due courtesy and liberality, the standing committee might have had my letter read to the meeting, and have let the members judge whether it should be acknowledged. But I place it on record in this volume, and leave the propriety of their having neglected to acknowledge it to be estimated hereafter in this world, as it has already been in the world of spirits, as respects its influence on the estimation of the parties.
It seems to me that, out of courtesy and generosity, the standing committee could have had my letter read to the meeting and allowed the members to decide if it should be acknowledged. However, I'm recording it in this volume and leaving it up to future assessment in this world, just as it has already been considered in the spiritual realm, regarding its impact on how the parties are perceived.
I am aware, however, that every man in society is more or less a peon, and that there is no small analogy between the situation of many holding worldly pre-eminence and that of the poor apothecary of Shakspeare.431 Conscience and reason are ever under the control of expediency. Those who live in society must be governed by the hearts and heads of others as well as their own: unless they are quite sure that the cause of truth will suffer by their silence, they should not speak to give others umbrage. I always considered it my duty not to do any thing which would injure the institution of which I was a member for nearly thirty years. Doubtless, the sachems of the Association did what they thought best, as probably I should have done, had I been situated as they were, and holding their opinions.
I realize, though, that everyone in society is somewhat of a peon, and there's a clear comparison between the situation of many who are in power and that of the poor apothecary in Shakespeare's works.431 Conscience and reason are always influenced by practicality. Those living in society must be guided by the feelings and thoughts of others as well as their own: unless they're certain that remaining silent will hurt the truth, they shouldn't speak just to upset others. I've always believed it was my responsibility not to do anything that would harm the organization I had been part of for nearly thirty years. Surely, the leaders of the Association acted as they thought best, just as I likely would have if I were in their position and shared their views.
In the letter as actually sent to the Association, I introduced the arguments founded on Dr. Bell’s observations, (111, 287, 864,) also the facts and reasoning submitted in the Supplemental Preface. I shall, of course, leave the reader to recur to those passages, and introduce here only the other portions of my letter:
In the letter actually sent to the Association, I included the arguments based on Dr. Bell’s observations, (111, 287, 864,) as well as the facts and reasoning presented in the Supplemental Preface. I’ll let the reader refer back to those sections and will only include the other parts of my letter here:
To the President of the Association for the Advancement of Science:
To the President of the Association for the Advancement of Science:
Dear Sir: Being engaged in putting a work to press, I am sorry to be unable to be present at the meeting of the Association on the 15th inst.
Dear Sir: I am currently busy preparing a work for publication, so I regret to inform you that I won't be able to attend the Association meeting on the 15th.
When I was at the last meeting, I stated an experiment made with the greatest care and precision, which proved the existence of a power independent of any possible or conceivable mortal agency; and I had on that occasion an opportunity of experiencing the fate of the Dutch ambassador who first made the king of Ava acquainted with the fact that bodies of water can be frozen so as to enable people to walk on a solidified aqueous surface. It was a disease of the mind in either case.
When I was at the last meeting, I mentioned an experiment conducted with great care and precision, which demonstrated the existence of a force that is independent of any possible human influence. And on that occasion, I experienced the same fate as the Dutch ambassador who first informed the king of Ava that bodies of water can freeze, allowing people to walk on a solid surface of ice. In both cases, it was a mental ailment.
But let no one apply to his soul the self-complacent unction that it was my hallucination, not bigoted ignorance, that originated that diagnosis. Since that time, the fact of movements being made intelligibly, without any perceptible or assignable mortal aid, has been verified hundreds of times by others; while under my own intuition it has been reiterated many times, the experiment which I adduced having been repeated with every imaginable precaution and instructive variation. * * * * *
But no one should convince themselves that it was just my imagination, not narrow-minded ignorance, that led to that conclusion. Since then, the fact that movements can happen clearly, without any noticeable or explainable human assistance, has been confirmed hundreds of times by others. Meanwhile, my own intuition has been confirmed repeatedly, and the experiment I mentioned has been conducted again with every possible precaution and insightful variation. * * * * *
About two years have elapsed, since I erroneously sanctioned Farraday’s explanation of the manifestations, in ascribing them to involuntary muscular action. This arose from my being, no less than that philosopher, so utterly incredulous and intolerant of any idea of spiritual agency in any of the phenomena of nature, excepting those which I ascribed to God, that I did not take the possible agency of spirits into view; but having been obliged to admit the facts conceded by Dr. Bell, (287,) and having received interesting and intellectual communications of which he has not been informed, I cannot, with him, stop half-way: nor could he, were he to have the interesting communications with his spirit friends which I have had with mine.
About two years have passed since I mistakenly agreed with Farraday's explanation of the phenomena, attributing them to involuntary muscle movement. This came from my being, like that philosopher, completely doubtful and intolerant of any notion of spiritual influence in the natural world, except for those I attributed to God. I didn't consider the potential involvement of spirits. However, having to accept the facts acknowledged by Dr. Bell, (287,) and having received intriguing and insightful communications that he hasn’t been informed about, I cannot, like him, stop halfway; nor could he, if he were to have the engaging communications with his spirit friends that I have had with mine.
There has been a time when religion repressed science; and it would seem that at the present era science is to revenge itself by repressing religious truth, by sanctioning indirectly the alleged manifestations of antiquity, while deriding those of the present time; believing on miracles told by no one knows who, yet denying the allegations of eye-witnesses known to be truthful; while straining at spiritual gnats, swallowing scriptural camels.
There was a time when religion held back science; now it seems that science is getting back at religion by pushing aside spiritual truths, endorsing ancient claims while mocking those made today; believing in miracles that no one can verify, yet dismissing the testimonies of credible witnesses; nitpicking at small spiritual details while ignoring major contradictions in scripture.
With high esteem, your well-wisher,
Robert Hare.
With great respect, your supporter,
Robert Hare.
FARRADAY’S SPECULATION.
Speculation touching Electric Conduction and the nature of Matter. By Farraday.
Speculation about Electric Conduction and the nature of Matter. By Farraday.
Having expressed my objections to Farraday’s inferences respecting matter, &c., I feel that justice requires that I should submit the article which drew forth my strictures. At this time, when electricity and matter are scrutinized with a view to understand the analogous, but different, entities of the spirit world, the ideas of an experimental investigator so eminently successful, must be of interest to readers:
Having shared my concerns about Farraday's conclusions regarding matter, etc., I believe it's only fair that I present the article that prompted my critiques. Right now, as we're examining electricity and matter to better understand the similar yet distinct aspects of the spirit world, the thoughts of a highly successful experimental researcher should capture the readers' attention:
Light and electricity are two great and searching investigators of the molecular structure of bodies, and it was, while considering the probable nature of conduction and insulation in bodies not decomposable by the electricity to which they were subject, and the relation of electricity to space contemplated as void of that which, by the anatomist, is called matter, that considerations, something like those which follow, were presented to my mind.
Light and electricity are two powerful tools for exploring the molecular structure of substances. While thinking about how conduction and insulation work in materials that can't be broken down by electricity, and considering the relationship between electricity and empty space, which anatomists refer to as matter, thoughts similar to the ones that follow came to my mind.
If the view of the constitution of matter, already referred to, be assumed to be correct, and I may be allowed to speak of the particles of matter and of the space between them (in water, or in the vapour of water, for instance) as two different things, then space must be taken as the only continuous part, for the particles are considered as separated by space from each other. Space will permeate all masses of matter in every direction like a net, except that, in place of meshes, it will form cells, isolating each atom from its neighbours, and itself only being continuous.
If we assume the current understanding of the constitution of matter is accurate, and I can refer to the particles of matter and the space between them (like in water or water vapor) as two separate entities, then space must be regarded as the only continuous element. This is because the particles are seen as separated by space from one another. Space will fill all masses of matter in every direction like a net, except that instead of forming meshes, it will create cells, isolating each atom from its neighbors while remaining continuous itself.
Then take the case of a piece of shellac, a non-conductor, and it would appear at once, from such a view of its constitution, that space is an insulator, for if it were a conductor, the shellac could not insulate, whatever might be the relation as to conducting power of its material atoms; the space would be like a fine metallic web penetrating it in every direction, just as we may imagine of a heap of siliceous sand having all its pores filled with water, or as we may consider of a stick of black wax, which, though it contains an infinity of particles of conducting charcoal diffused through every part of it, cannot conduct, because a non-conducting body (a resin) intervenes and separates them one from another like the supposed space in the lac.
Then consider a piece of shellac, which is a non-conductor. From this perspective, it seems clear that space acts as an insulator. If space were a conductor, shellac wouldn’t be able to insulate, regardless of the conducting ability of its material atoms. Space would be like a fine metallic web permeating it in every direction, similar to how we can envision a pile of siliceous sand with all its pores filled with water, or think of a stick of black wax which, despite containing countless particles of conducting charcoal throughout, cannot conduct electricity because a non-conducting material (a resin) intervenes and separates them, just like the imagined space in the lacquer.
Next take the case of a metal, platinum or potassium, constituted, according to the atomic theory, in the same manner. The metal is a conductor; but how can this be, except space be a conductor, for it is the only continuous part of the metal, and the atoms not only do not touch, (by the theory,) but, as we shall see presently, must be assumed to be a considerable way apart. Space, therefore, must be a conductor, or else the metals could not conduct, but would be in the situation of the black sealing-wax referred to a little while ago.
Next, consider a metal like platinum or potassium, which is made up in the same way according to atomic theory. The metal conducts electricity; but how can that be, unless space itself is also a conductor? Space is the only continuous part of the metal, and according to the theory, the atoms don’t actually touch each other and, as we’ll see shortly, must be considered to be quite far apart. Therefore, space must act as a conductor; otherwise, the metals wouldn’t be able to conduct electricity and would be in the same situation as the black sealing wax mentioned earlier.
But if space be a conductor, how then can shellac, sulphur, &c. insulate? for space permeates them in every direction. Or, if space be an insulator, how can a metal or other similar body conduct?
But if space is a conductor, how can shellac, sulfur, etc. insulate? Space permeates them in every direction. Or, if space is an insulator, how can a metal or similar material conduct?
It would seem, therefore, that in accepting the ordinary atomic theory,433 space may be proved to be a non-conductor in non-conducting bodies, and a conductor in conducting bodies; but the reasoning ends in this, a subversion of that theory altogether, for if space be an insulator, it cannot exist in conducting bodies, and if it be a conductor, it cannot exist in insulating bodies. Any ground of reasoning which tends to such conclusions must in itself be false.
It seems that by accepting the standard atomic theory,433 space can be shown to act as a non-conductor in non-conductive materials and as a conductor in conductive materials. However, this line of reasoning ultimately undermines the theory entirely. If space is an insulator, it can't be present in conductive materials, and if it's a conductor, it can't be found in insulating materials. Any reasoning that leads to these conclusions must be incorrect.
In connection with such conclusions, we may consider shortly what are the probabilities that present themselves to the mind, if the extension of the atomic theory which chemists have imagined be applied in conjunction with the conducting powers of metals. If the specific gravity of the metals be divided by the atomic numbers, it gives us the number of atoms, upon the hypothesis, in equal bulks of the metals. In the following table the first column of figures expresses nearly the numbers of atoms in, and the second column of figures the conducting power of, equal volumes of the metals named:
In relation to these conclusions, let’s briefly look at the probabilities that come to mind if we apply the atomic theory imagined by chemists alongside the conductivity of metals. Dividing the specific gravity of the metals by their atomic numbers gives us the number of atoms, based on the assumption, in equal volumes of the metals. In the table below, the first column shows the approximate number of atoms in, and the second column shows the conductivity of, equal volumes of the named metals:
Atoms. | Conducting power. | |
---|---|---|
1·00 | gold | 6·00 |
1·00 | silver | 4·66 |
1·12 | lead | 0·52 |
1·30 | tin | 1·00 |
2·20 | platinum | 1·04 |
2·27 | zinc | 1·80 |
2·87 | copper | 6·33 |
2·90 | iron | 1·00 |
So here iron, which contains the greatest number of atoms in a given bulk, is the worst conductor excepting one. Gold, which contains the fewest, is nearly the best conductor; not that these conditions are in inverse proportions, for copper, which contains nearly as many atoms as iron, conducts better still than gold, and with above six times the power of iron. Lead, which contains more atoms than gold, has only about one-twelfth of its conducting power; lead, which is much heavier than tin and much lighter than platina, has only half the conducting power of either of these metals. And all this happens among substances which we are bound to consider at present as elementary or simple. Whichever way we consider the particles of matter and the space between them, and examine the assumed constitution of matter by this table, the results are full of perplexity.
So here, iron, which has the most atoms in a given volume, is the worst conductor except for one case. Gold, which has the fewest atoms, is almost the best conductor; it's not that these conditions are inversely related because copper, which has nearly as many atoms as iron, conducts even better than gold and has over six times the conductivity of iron. Lead, which has more atoms than gold, has only about one-twelfth of its conductivity; lead, which is much heavier than tin but much lighter than platinum, has only half the conductivity of either of those metals. All of this occurs among substances that we need to consider as elementary or simple for now. Regardless of how we look at the particles of matter and the space between them, and examine the assumed structure of matter through this table, the results are quite confusing.
Now let us take the case of potassium, a compact metallic substance with excellent conducting powers—its oxide or hydrate a non-conductor; it will supply us with some facts having very important bearings on the assumed atomic construction of matter.
Now let's consider potassium, a compact metal that conducts electricity really well—its oxide or hydrate doesn't conduct at all; this will provide us with some facts that are very important for understanding the assumed atomic structure of matter.
When potassium is oxidized, an atom of it combines with an atom of oxygen to form an atom of potassa, and an atom of potassa combines with an atom of water, consisting of two atoms of oxygen and hydrogen, to form an atom of hydrate of potassa, so that an atom of hydrate of potassa contains four elementary atoms. The specific gravity of potassium is 0·865, and its atomic weight 40·; the specific gravity of cast hydrate of potassa, in such a state of purity as I could obtain it, I found to be nearly 2; its atomic weight, 57. From these, which may be taken as facts, the following strange conclusions flow: A piece of potassium contains less potassium than an equal piece of the potash formed by it and oxygen. We may cast into potassium oxygen, atom for atom, and then again both oxygen and hydrogen in a twofold number of atoms, and with all these434 additions the matter shall become less and less, until it is not two-thirds of its original volume. If a given bulk of potassium contains 45 atoms, the same bulk of hydrate of potassa contains 70 atoms nearly of the metal potassium, and, besides that, 210 atoms more of oxygen and hydrogen. In dealing with assumptions, I must assume a little more for the sake of making any kind of statement; let me therefore assume that in the hydrate of potassa the atoms are all of one size and nearly touching each other, and that in a cubic inch of that substance there are 2800 elementary atoms of potassium, oxygen, and hydrogen; take 2100 atoms of oxygen and hydrogen, and the 700 atoms of potassium remaining will swell into more than a cubic inch and a half; and if we diminish the number until only those containable in a cubic inch remain, we shall have 430, or thereabout. So a space which can contain 2800 atoms, and among them 700 of potassium itself, is found to be entirely filled by 430 atoms of potassium, as they exist in the ordinary state of that metal. Surely, then, under the suppositions of the atomic theory, the atoms of potassium must be very far apart in the metal, i. e. there must be much more of space than of matter in that body; yet it is an excellent conductor; and so space must be a conductor, but then what becomes of shellac, sulphur, and all the insulators? for space must also, by the theory, exist in them.
When potassium is oxidized, a potassium atom combines with an oxygen atom to form potassa, and a potassa atom combines with a water atom, which consists of two oxygen and hydrogen atoms, to create a hydrate of potassa atom. As a result, one hydrate of potassa atom contains four basic atoms. The specific gravity of potassium is 0.865, and its atomic weight is 40; the specific gravity of cast hydrate of potassa, in the purest form I could find, is nearly 2, while its atomic weight is 57. From these established facts, some strange conclusions arise: a piece of potassium contains less potassium than an equal piece of the potash formed from it and oxygen. We can add oxygen to potassium, atom for atom, and then add both oxygen and hydrogen in double the amount of atoms, and with all these additions, the substance becomes less and less, until it is not even two-thirds of its original volume. If a specific volume of potassium contains 45 atoms, the same volume of hydrate of potassa contains nearly 70 atoms of the potassium metal, along with an additional 210 atoms of oxygen and hydrogen. When considering assumptions, I have to make a few extra ones for clarity; let’s assume that in the hydrate of potassa, the atoms are all the same size and nearly touching each other, and that in a cubic inch of that substance, there are 2800 basic atoms of potassium, oxygen, and hydrogen. If we take away 2100 atoms of oxygen and hydrogen, the remaining 700 potassium atoms would expand to more than a cubic inch and a half. If we reduce the number until only those that fit into a cubic inch remain, we will have about 430 atoms. Thus, a space that can accommodate 2800 atoms, including 700 of potassium itself, is found to be fully occupied by 430 atoms of potassium as they exist in the normal state of that metal. Therefore, under the assumptions of atomic theory, the atoms of potassium must be spaced quite far apart in the metal; in other words, there must be much more space than matter in that substance; yet it is a great conductor. So, space must be a conductor, but then what about materials like shellac, sulfur, and all the insulators? According to the theory, space must also be present in those substances.
Again, the volume which will contain 430 atoms of potassium, and nothing else while in the state of metal, will, when that potassium is converted into nitre, contain very nearly the same number of atoms of potassium, i. e. 416, and also then seven times as many, or 2912 atoms, of nitrogen and oxygen beside. In carbonate of potassa, the space which will contain only the 430 atoms of potassium as metal, being entirely filled by it, will, after the conversion, contain 256 atoms more of potassium, making 686 atoms of that metal, and in addition 2744 atoms of oxygen and carbon.
Again, the volume that holds 430 atoms of potassium, nothing else while in the metallic state, will, when that potassium is turned into nitre, contain almost the same number of potassium atoms, i. e. 416, and also seven times as many, or 2912 atoms, of nitrogen and oxygen as well. In potassium carbonate, the space that contains only the 430 atoms of potassium as metal, fully occupied by it, will, after the conversion, hold 256 more atoms of potassium, totaling 686 atoms of that metal, along with an additional 2744 atoms of oxygen and carbon.
These and similar considerations might be extended through compounds of sodium and other bodies, with results equally striking, and indeed more so, when the relations of one substance, as oxygen and sulphur, with different bodies are brought into comparison.
These and similar thoughts could be expanded by looking at compounds of sodium and other substances, leading to equally impressive results, and even more so when comparing how one substance, like oxygen and sulfur, interacts with different materials.
I am not ignorant that the mind is most powerfully drawn by the phenomena of crystallization, chemistry, and physics generally to the acknowledgment of centres of force. I feel myself constrained, for the present, hypothetically to admit them, and cannot do without them; but I feel great difficulty in the conception of atoms of matter which in solids, fluids, and vapours are supposed to be more or less apart from each other, with intervening space not occupied by atoms, and perceive great contradictions in the conclusions which flow from such a view.
I’m aware that people are strongly attracted to the processes of crystallization, chemistry, and physics in general, which lead to the acceptance of centers of force. For now, I feel I need to accept them hypothetically and can’t do without them; however, I struggle to understand the idea of atoms of matter that in solids, liquids, and gases are thought to be somewhat separate from each other, with empty space in between, and I see significant contradictions in the conclusions that arise from this perspective.
If we must assume at all, as indeed in a branch of knowledge like the present we can hardly help it, then the safest course appears to be to assume as little as possible; and in that respect the atoms of Boscovich appear to me to have a great advantage over the more usual notion. His atoms, if I understand aright, are mere centres of forces or powers, not particles of matter in which the powers themselves reside. If in the ordinary view of atoms, we call the particle of matter away from the powers a, and the system of powers or forces in and around it m, then in Boscovich’s theory a disappears, and is a mere mathematical point, while in the usual notion it is a little, unchangeable, impenetrable piece of matter, and m is an atmosphere of force grouped around it.
If we have to make any assumptions, especially in a field of knowledge like this one, it seems like the best approach is to assume as little as possible. In this regard, Boscovich's atoms have a significant advantage over the more traditional concept. His atoms, if I understand correctly, are just centers of forces or powers, rather than particles of matter that contain those powers. In the conventional view of atoms, we refer to the particle of matter, separate from the powers, as a, and the system of forces or powers around it as m. In Boscovich’s theory, a disappears and becomes just a mathematical point, while in the usual concept, it is a small, unchanging, impenetrable piece of matter, and m is an atmosphere of force surrounding it.
In many of the hypothetical uses made of atoms, as in crystallography, chemistry, magnetism, &c., this difference in the assumption makes little or no alteration in the results; but in other cases, as of electric conductors, the nature of light, the manner in which bodies combine to produce compounds, the effect of forces, as heat or electricity, upon matter, the difference will be very great.
In many of the theoretical applications of atoms, like in crystallography, chemistry, magnetism, etc., this difference in assumptions doesn’t significantly change the outcomes; however, in other cases, such as electric conductors, the nature of light, how substances combine to form compounds, and the impact of forces like heat or electricity on matter, the difference can be quite significant.
Thus, referring back to potassium, in which as a metal the atoms must, as we have seen, be, according to the usual view, very far apart from each other, how can we for a moment imagine that its conducting property belongs to it any otherwise than as a consequence of the properties of the space, or, as I have called it above, the m? So also its other properties in regard to light, or magnetism, or solidity, or hardness, or specific gravity, must belong to it, in consequence of the properties or forces of the m, not those of the a, which, without the forces, is conceived of as having no powers. But then, surely, the m is the matter of the potassium, for where is there the least ground (except in a gratuitous assumption) for imagining a difference in kind between the nature of that space midway between the centres of two contiguous atoms, and any other spot between these centres? A difference in degree or even in the nature of the power consistent with the laws of continuity I can admit, but the difference between a supposed little hard particle and the powers around it, I cannot imagine.
So, going back to potassium, where the atoms must, as we've seen, be, according to the usual understanding, quite spread out from each other, how can we possibly think that its ability to conduct electricity comes from anything other than the properties of the space, or what I referred to earlier as the m? Similarly, its other attributes regarding light, magnetism, solidity, hardness, or specific gravity must come from the properties or forces of the m, not those of the a, which, without the forces, is thought to have no capabilities. But then, clearly, the m is the matter of potassium because where is the slightest justification (other than an unfounded assumption) for thinking there’s a difference in kind between the nature of that space halfway between the centers of two adjacent atoms and any other spot between those centers? I can accept a difference in degree or even in the nature of the power consistent with the laws of continuity, but I can’t fathom the difference between a supposed small hard particle and the forces around it.
To my mind, therefore, the a or nucleus vanishes, and the substance consist of the powers or m; and indeed what notion can we form of the nucleus independent of its powers? All our perception and knowledge of the atom, and even our fancy, is limited to ideas of its powers; what thought remains on which to hang the imagination of an a independent of the acknowledged forces? As mind just entering on the subject may consider it difficult to think of the powers of matter independent of a separate something to be called the matter, but it is certainly far more difficult, and indeed impossible to think of or imagine that matter independent of the powers. Now, the powers we know and recognise in every phenomena of the creation, the abstract matter in one; why, then, assume the existence of that of which we are ignorant, which we cannot conceive, and for which there is no philosophical necessity?
To me, it seems that the a or nucleus disappears, and the substance consists of the powers or m; and honestly, what idea can we have of the nucleus without considering its powers? Our understanding and knowledge of the atom, and even our imagination, are limited to the ideas of its powers; what thoughts can we rely on to envision an a that is separate from the recognized forces? While someone new to the topic might find it challenging to think of the powers of matter without referencing a separate entity called the matter, it’s definitely much harder—and actually impossible—to conceive of matter without considering the powers. The powers we know and recognize in every phenomenon of creation are one aspect, so why assume the existence of something we don’t understand, something we can’t even imagine, and for which there’s no philosophical need?
Before concluding these speculations, I will refer to a few of the important differences between the assumption of atoms consisting merely of centres of force like those of Boscovich, and that other assumption of molecules of something specially material, having powers attached in and around them.
Before wrapping up these thoughts, I want to point out some key differences between the idea that atoms are just centers of force like those proposed by Boscovich, and the other idea that molecules are made of something specific and material, with powers associated with them.
With the latter atoms a mass of matter consists of atoms and intervening space; with the former atoms matter is everywhere present, and there is no intervening space unoccupied by it. In gases the atoms touch each other just as truly as in solids. In this respect the atoms of water touch each other, whether that substance be in the form of ice, water, or steam; no mere intervening space is present. Doubtless, the centres of force vary in their distance one from another, but that which is truly the matter of one atom touches the matter of its neighbours.
With the latter atoms, a mass of matter is made up of atoms and the spaces between them; with the former atoms, matter is present everywhere, and there are no empty spaces. In gases, the atoms touch each other just like they do in solids. In this way, the atoms in water touch one another, whether that water is ice, liquid, or steam; there is no empty space between them. Of course, the distances between the centers of force vary, but the matter of one atom is in contact with the matter of its neighbors.
Hence matter will be continuous throughout, and in considering we have not to suppose a distinction between its atoms and any intervening space. The powers around the centres give these centres the properties of atoms of matter; and these powers again, when many centres by their conjoint forces are grouped into a mass, give to every part of that mass the proper436ties of matter. In such a view all the contradiction resulting from the consideration of electric insulation and conduction disappears.
Thus, matter will be continuous throughout, and in our consideration, we shouldn't assume a distinction between its atoms and any space between them. The forces around the centers give these centers the characteristics of atoms of matter; and when many centers combine their forces into a mass, they impart the proper436ties of matter to every part of that mass. From this perspective, all contradictions arising from the concepts of electric insulation and conduction vanish.
The atoms may be conceived of as highly elastic, instead of being supposed excessively hard and unalterable in form; the mere compression of a bladder of air between the hands can alter their size a little, and the experiments of Cagniard la Tour carry on this change in size until the difference in bulk at one time and another may be made several hundred times. Such is also the case when a solid or a fluid body is converted into vapour.
The atoms can be thought of as highly elastic, rather than being seen as incredibly hard and unchangeable in shape; just compressing a balloon of air between your hands can slightly change its size, and the experiments by Cagniard la Tour show that this change in size can be amplified until the difference in volume over time can be several hundred times greater. This is also true when a solid or liquid is turned into vapor.
With regard also to the shape of the atoms, and, according to the ordinary assumption, its definite and unalterable character, another view must now be taken of it. An atom by itself might be conceived of as spherical or spheroidal, or where many were touching in all directions, the form might be thought of as a dodecahedron, for any one would be surrounded by and bear against twelve others, on different sides. But if an atom be conceived to be a centre of power, that which is ordinarily referred to under the term shape, would now be referred to the disposition and relative intensity of the forces. The power arranged in and around a centre might be uniform in arrangement and intensity in every direction outward from that centre, and then a section of equal intensity of force through the radii would be a sphere; or the law of decrease of force from the centre outward might vary in different directions, and then the section of equal intensity might be an oblate or oblong spheroid, or have other forms; or the forces might be disposed so as to make the atom polar; or they might circulate around it equatorially or otherwise, after the manner of imagined magnetic atoms. In fact, nothing can be supposed of the disposition of forces in or about a solid nucleus of matter, which cannot be equally conceived with respect to a centre.
Regarding the shape of atoms, and based on the common assumption of its fixed and unchanging nature, a different perspective must now be adopted. An atom on its own could be visualized as spherical or spheroidal, or when many are touching from all directions, it might take the form of a dodecahedron, since each atom would be surrounded by and pressed against twelve others on different sides. However, if we think of an atom as a center of power, what is typically described as shape would instead relate to the arrangement and relative intensity of the forces. The power distributed in and around a center could be evenly arranged and uniformly intense in every direction outward from that center, making a section of equal intensity of force through the radii a sphere. Alternatively, the way the force decreases from the center outward could vary in different directions, resulting in a section of equal intensity that could be an oblate or elongated spheroid, or take on other shapes. The forces could also be arranged to give the atom a polar characteristic, or they might move around it in an equatorial fashion or otherwise, like imagined magnetic atoms. In essence, no assumptions can be made about the arrangement of forces in or around a solid core of matter that cannot also be considered concerning a center.
In the view of matter now sustained as the lesser assumption, matter and the atoms of matter would be mutually penetrable. As regards the mutual penetrability of matter, one would think that the facts respecting potassium and its compounds, already described, would be enough to prove that point to a mind which accepts a fact for a fact, and is not obstructed in its judgment by preconceived notions. With respect to the mutual penetrability of the atoms, it seems to me to present in many points of view a more beautiful, yet equally probable and philosophic, idea of the constitution of bodies than the other hypotheses, especially in the case of chemical combination. If we suppose an atom of oxygen and an atom of potassium about to combine and produce potash, the hypothesis of solid, unchangeable, impenetrable atoms places these two particles side by side in a position easily, because mechanically, imagined, and not unfrequently represented; but if these two atoms be centres of power, they will mutually penetrate to the very centres, thus forming one atom or molecule, with powers either uniformly around it or arranged as the resultant of the powers of the two constituent atoms; and the manner in which two or many centres of force may in this way combine, and afterward, under the dominion of stronger forces, separate, may in some degree be illustrated by the beautiful case of the conjunction of two sea waves of different velocities into one, their perfect union for a time, and final separation into the constituent waves, considered, I think, at the meeting of the British Association at Liverpool. It does not, of course, follow from this view that the centres shall always coincide; that will depend upon the relative disposition of the powers of each atom.
In the current perspective where matter is seen as a lesser assumption, matter and its atoms would be able to penetrate each other. Regarding this mutual penetrability, one might think that the facts about potassium and its compounds, which have been discussed, should be enough to convince anyone who accepts facts as they are, without letting preconceived notions cloud their judgment. When it comes to the mutual penetrability of atoms, it seems to me that this idea presents a more elegant yet equally plausible and philosophical understanding of how bodies are made up, particularly in the context of chemical combinations. If we consider an oxygen atom and a potassium atom about to combine to create potash, the idea of solid, unchanging, impenetrable atoms puts these two particles next to each other in a position that is easy to visualize mechanically and is often depicted. However, if we think of these atoms as centers of power, they will penetrate each other all the way to their centers, effectively forming a single atom or molecule, with powers arranged uniformly around it or as a combination of the two original atoms' powers. The way in which these centers of force can combine and later separate under stronger forces can be somewhat illustrated by the beautiful phenomenon of two sea waves of different speeds combining into one, perfectly merging for a while and then separating back into their original waves, as I believe was discussed at the British Association meeting in Liverpool. Of course, this perspective does not imply that the centers will always line up; that will depend on how the powers of each atom are arranged.
The view now stated of the constitution of matter would seem to involve necessarily the conclusion that matter fills all space, or, at least, all space to which gravitation extends, (including the sun and its system,) for gravitation is a property of matter dependent on a certain force, and it is this force which constitutes the matter. In that view matter is not merely mutually penetrable, but each atom extends, so to say, throughout the whole of the solar system, yet always retaining its own centre of force. This, at first sight, seems to fall in very harmoniously with Massotti’s mathematical investigations and reference of the phenomena of electricity, cohesion, gravitation, &c. to one force in matter, and also again with the old adage “matter cannot act where it is not.” But it is no part of my intention to enter into such considerations as these, or what the bearings of this hypothesis would be on the theory of light and the supposed ether. My desire has been rather to bring certain facts from electrical conduction and chemical combination to bear strongly upon our views regarding the nature of atoms and matter, and so to assist in distinguishing in natural philosophy our real knowledge—i. e. the knowledge of facts and laws—from that, which, though it has the form of knowledge, may, from its including so much that is mere assumption, be the very reverse.
The current understanding of the constitution of matter seems to lead to the conclusion that matter occupies all space, or at least all space affected by gravity (including the sun and its system). Gravity is a property of matter that relies on a specific force, and it is this force that makes up matter. In this view, matter is not just mutually penetrable, but each atom extends, so to speak, throughout the entire solar system while still keeping its own center of force. This initially appears to align well with Massotti’s mathematical investigations, which link phenomena like electricity, cohesion, and gravity to a single force in matter, as well as with the old saying, “matter cannot act where it is not.” However, I do not intend to delve into these considerations or the implications of this hypothesis on the theory of light and the so-called ether. My goal has been to highlight certain facts from electrical conduction and chemical combination to strongly inform our understanding of the nature of atoms and matter, thus helping to clarify in natural philosophy our genuine knowledge—i.e. the knowledge of facts and laws—versus that which, while appearing to be knowledge, might actually just be based on assumptions and be the opposite.
It is to be regretted that the memoir of the Rev. Mr. Whewell could not be quoted, being long and obscure. His opinions, it is conceived, have been stated fairly, (1796.)
It’s unfortunate that the memoir of Rev. Mr. Whewell couldn’t be quoted, as it’s lengthy and unclear. His views are believed to have been represented accurately, (1796.)
Motives for republishing my Memoirs on Electrical Theory.
The principal motive, without which the other motives would not have prevailed, is, that having had an interview with the spirit of Franklin expressly to have his advice, it was given decidedly in favour of publication.
The main reason, without which the other reasons wouldn't have carried weight, is that after meeting with the spirit of Franklin specifically to get his advice, it was clearly in favor of publication.
There is no door in the temple of science which is so easy of access as that which leads to the department of electricity. The illustrations usually given at a popular lecture may, at the same time, amuse an infant, instruct a student, and yet perplex a profound philosopher. As associated with the phenomena of thunder and lightning, at one time attributed to the bolt of omnipotent Jove, no consequences of scientific research are so awful and sublime: coupled with the magnetic electric telegraph, no other result so miraculous. While vis inertiæ would keep all nature in statu quo, whether at rest, or like our planet in motion with a velocity fifty times as great as that of a cannon ball: while gravitation tends like the clock weight to produce a definite action and, per se, never to act again: electricity, with a protean diversity of power, appears to be the great instrument of all those changes by which the quiescent influence of the properties above mentioned, is modified in the mundane sphere of chemistry and of life.
There’s no door in the temple of science that’s as easy to access as the one that leads to the field of electricity. The examples often shown in popular lectures can amuse a child, educate a student, and still confuse a deep thinker. When linked to the phenomena of thunder and lightning—once thought to be the work of the powerful god Jove—there are no scientific discoveries as awe-inspiring and grand. Alongside the electric telegraph, there are no other results as miraculous. While inertia keeps everything in the same state, whether at rest or hurtling through space at fifty times the speed of a cannonball, and gravity acts like a clock weight to create a specific effect but never acts again on its own: electricity, with its incredibly diverse powers, seems to be the key force behind all the changes that modify the stillness brought on by these properties in the visible world of chemistry and life.
Every tyro is aware of the wonderful property imparted to electrics by friction—to the tourmaline by heat; and that the same process, on a large scale, will produce sparks, ignition, combustion, deflagration, and destroy animal life by an instantaneous shock. It is notorious that these won438derful powers may all be imparted to a naked pane of glass, while the charge thus imparted is really only two opposite and equal affections, capable of neutralizing each other by due communication. Known also is it, that properties, to a certain extent similar, may be found in a pile of pairs of heterogeneous metals, with the additional power of electrolysis, or, in other words, of resolving chemical compounds into their ingredients, (1376.) It is well known that, by these means, water, long and almost religiously considered as one of the four elements of the universe, can be decomposed into two kinds of air; that the earths and alkalies have been resolved into metals and oxygen; and that there is scarcely any chemical compound consisting of two elements, which may not, when in aqueous solution or in fusion by heat, be directly or indirectly decomposed by electrolysis, as explained in the note to page 384.
Every beginner knows about the amazing property that friction gives to electrics and heat gives to tourmaline; and that the same process, when scaled up, can create sparks, ignition, combustion, explosions, and can kill living creatures with a sudden shock. It’s well known that these incredible powers can also be given to a bare piece of glass, while the charge it receives is really just two opposing and equal forces that can cancel each other out with proper communication. It is also recognized that properties somewhat similar can be found in a stack of pairs of different metals, along with the added ability of electrolysis, or in other words, breaking down chemical compounds into their basic ingredients, (1376.) It is widely understood that, through these methods, water, which has long been almost reverently considered as one of the four elements of the universe, can be split into two types of air; that earths and alkalis have been broken down into metals and oxygen; and that there are hardly any chemical compounds made up of two elements that cannot, when in an aqueous solution or melted by heat, be directly or indirectly decomposed by electrolysis, as explained in the note to page 384.
These multifarious feats of electricity have caused it to be contemplated as the source of every thing mysterious in nature. It is not surprising, therefore, that those who, through the accessibility of electricity, had become partially acquainted with electrical phenomena, should view it as the source of spiritual manifestations; while those who have a more extensive knowledge of the nature and extent of electrical jurisdiction should perceive at once that the phenomena in question do not fall within its sphere.
These various accomplishments of electricity have led people to see it as the source of everything mysterious in nature. It's not surprising, then, that those who have had some exposure to electricity would think of it as the origin of spiritual events; while those with a deeper understanding of the nature and limits of electricity should quickly realize that these events don't really relate to it.
After the discovery, by Oersted, of the previously unsuspected reaction between galvanized wire and a magnetic needle, those who had resorted to either one or two fluids to explain electrical phenomena, found themselves completely at fault. Yet the language originated by Franklin has been still employed conventionally. This, though not misleading adepts, introduces confusion in the minds of those who have merely reached the ante-chamber of the electrical department.
After Oersted discovered the unexpected reaction between galvanized wire and a magnetic needle, those who relied on one or two fluids to explain electrical phenomena realized they were completely mistaken. However, the terminology created by Franklin is still used conventionally. While this doesn’t confuse experts, it does create misunderstandings for those who are just beginning to explore the field of electricity.
Under these circumstances, I deem it expedient to republish the exposition of electrical theory which I first laid before the scientific world in 1848.
Under these circumstances, I think it's a good idea to republish the explanation of electrical theory that I first presented to the scientific community in 1848.
I hope that those who endeavour to refer spiritual manifestations or animal magnetism to electricity, in any of its modifications, will study this exposition of my views.
I hope that those who try to connect spiritual phenomena or animal magnetism to electricity, in any of its forms, will look into this explanation of my ideas.
Though, as already stated, there appears to be, for the spirit world, appropriate elements, distinct from those of this mundane world, there is, nevertheless, a correspondence. We mortals can best prepare ourselves to understand the elements of that world by understanding our own. From an idea of our light and our vital air, we may by analogy conceive of theirs as a preliminary to any further knowledge.
Although, as mentioned earlier, there seem to be elements unique to the spirit world that are different from those in our everyday lives, there is still a connection. We humans can best get ready to understand the elements of that world by first understanding our own. By grasping the concept of our light and our vital air, we can use that as a basis to imagine theirs before moving on to deeper knowledge.
The following theory has been submitted to the spirit of Franklin, who fully approved of it, and fully admitted the validity of the reasons assigned by me for substituting this new exposition of electricity for that which goes under his celebrated name.
The following theory has been presented to the spirit of Franklin, who completely approved of it and acknowledged the validity of my reasons for replacing the existing explanation of electricity associated with his famous name.
Objections to the Theories severally of Franklin, Dufay, and Ampere, with an effort to explain Electrical Phenomena, by Statical or Undulatory Polarization.[58] By Robert Hare, M.D., Emeritus Professor of Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania.
1. It appears, from the experiments of Wheatstone, that the discharge of a Leyden jar, by means of a copper wire, takes place within a time so small, that were the transfer of a fluid from the positive to the negative surface requisite for its accomplishment, a current having a velocity exceeding two hundred thousand miles in a second would be necessary.
1. It seems, based on Wheatstone's experiments, that the discharge of a Leyden jar through a copper wire happens in such a short amount of time that if the transfer of a fluid from the positive to the negative surface were needed, a current would have to travel at a speed greater than two hundred thousand miles per second.
2. The only causes for the velocity of an electric current, according to Franklin, are the repulsion between the particles of the electric fluid of which it has been assumed to consist, and the attraction between those particles and other matter. These forces are alleged to concur in distributing the supposed fluid throughout space, whether otherwise void, or partially occupied by conducting solids or fluids. Hence, when between two or more spaces, surfaces, or conducting masses, there is an unequal distribution of the electric fluid, the equilibrium is restored whenever a communication is opened by means of a sufficiently conducting medium. Agreeably to this view of the subject, there seems to be a resemblance between the supposed effort of the electrical fluid to attain a state of equable diffusion, and that which would exist in the case of a gas confined in adjoining receivers, so as to be more dense within one than within the other; for, however the subtilty of the supposed electric fluid may exceed that of any gas, there seems to be an analogy as respects the processes of diffusion which must prevail. But on opening a communication between cavities in which any aeriform fluid exists, in different degrees of condensation, the density must lessen in one cavity and augment in the other, with a rapidity which must diminish gradually, and become evanescent with the difference of pressure by which it is induced. Far from taking place in an analogous manner, electrical discharges are effected with an extreme suddenness, the whole of the redundancy being discharged at once, in a mode more like the flight of a bullet, projected with infinite velocity, than that of a jet gradually varying in celerity from a maximum to a minimum.
2. According to Franklin, the only reasons for the speed of an electric current are the repulsion between the particles of the electric fluid it's believed to consist of and the attraction between those particles and other matter. These forces are said to work together in distributing the supposed fluid throughout space, whether it's completely empty or partly filled with conducting solids or fluids. Therefore, when there’s an uneven distribution of the electric fluid between two or more spaces, surfaces, or conducting masses, equilibrium is restored whenever a connection is made with a sufficiently conductive medium. In this light, there seems to be a similarity between the supposed push of the electrical fluid to achieve a balance and what happens with a gas confined in neighboring containers, where one is denser than the other; because, although the subtlety of the presumed electric fluid may surpass that of any gas, there’s an analogy regarding the diffusion processes that must occur. However, when a connection is opened between areas containing gaseous fluids at different levels of compression, the density in one area must decrease while it increases in the other, and this change must happen quickly but gradually slow down and almost disappear as the pressure difference decreases. Unlike this analogous behavior, electrical discharges happen with extreme rapidity, with the excess being released all at once, more like the shot of a bullet moving at incredible speed, rather than a jet gradually changing its speed from fast to slow.
3. So far, in fact, is an electrical discharge from displaying the features which belong to the reaction of a condensed elastic fluid, that agreeably to the observations of our distinguished countryman Henry, the result is more like the vibrations of a spring, which, in striving to regain its normal position, goes beyond it. The first discharge between the surfaces of a Leyden jar is not productive of a perfect equilibrium. The transfer of440 different polarities goes beyond the point of reciprocal neutralization, producing a state, to a small extent, the opposite of that at first existing; and hence a refluent discharge ensues, opposite in direction to the primary one. But even this does not produce an equilibrium, so that a third effort is made. These alternate discharges were detected by means of the magnetism imparted to needles exposed in coils of copper wire.[59]
3. In fact, an electrical discharge shows characteristics similar to the reaction of a condensed elastic fluid. According to the observations of our esteemed countryman Henry, the result resembles the vibrations of a spring that overshoots its normal position as it tries to return. The first discharge between the surfaces of a Leyden jar does not achieve perfect balance. The transfer of different polarities exceeds the point of neutralization, creating a state that is somewhat the opposite of the initial one; thus, a returning discharge occurs, moving in the opposite direction of the first. However, this also fails to establish equilibrium, leading to a third attempt. These alternating discharges were detected using the magnetism transferred to needles placed in coils of copper wire.440
4. Supposing one or more rows of electrical particles, forming such a filament of electricity as must occupy the space within a wire of great length, to be made the medium of discharge to a Leyden jar; agreeably to the hypothesis of one fluid, the electrical filament must be attracted at one end of the wire and repelled at the other, as soon as its terminations are brought into due communication with the coatings of the jar. Yet the influence of the oppositely-charged surfaces of the jar cannot be conceived to extend to those portions of the electricity which are remote from the points of contact, until they be reached by a succession of vibrations. Hence, it is inconceivable that every particle in the filament of electric matter can be made at the same time to move, so as to constitute a current having the necessary velocity and volume to transfer, instantaneously, the electricity requisite to constitute a charge. Even the transmission of the impulses, in such an infinitesimal of time, seems to be inconceivable.
4. Imagine that one or more rows of electrical particles, creating a filament of electricity that fills a long wire, act as the medium for discharging a Leyden jar; according to the idea of a single fluid, the electrical filament would be attracted at one end of the wire and pushed away at the other, as soon as its ends are connected to the jar's coatings. However, the effect of the oppositely charged surfaces of the jar can't be assumed to reach those parts of the electricity that are far from the contact points until they are hit by a series of vibrations. Therefore, it's hard to believe that every particle in the electric filament can move at the same time to create a current with the speed and volume needed to instantly transfer the electricity required for a charge. Even the transmission of these impulses in such an incredibly short time seems unimaginable.
5. In reply to these objections, it has been urged by the Franklinians that a conductor being replete with electricity, as soon as this fluid should be removed at one end, it ought to move at the other. This might be true of a fluid if incompressible, but could not hold good were it elastic. A bell wire moves at both ends when pulled only at one; but this would not ensue were a cord of gum-elastic substituted for the wire.
5. In response to these objections, the Franklinians argue that when a conductor is full of electricity, removing this charge from one end should cause a reaction at the other end. This could be true for a fluid that doesn't compress, but it wouldn’t apply if the fluid is elastic. A bell wire moves at both ends when you pull on just one end; however, if you replaced the wire with a gum-elastic cord, that wouldn’t happen.
6. But if the flow of one fluid, with the enormous velocity inferred, be difficult to conceive, still more must it be incomprehensible that two fluids can rush with similar celerity, from each surface of the jar, in opposite directions, through the narrow channel afforded by a wire; especially as they are alleged to exercise an intense affinity; so that it is only by a series of decompositions and recompositions that they can pass each other.
6. But if it's hard to imagine the flow of one fluid moving at such high speeds, it’s even more unbelievable that two fluids can rush out from each side of the jar in opposite directions through the narrow space of a wire; especially since they are said to have a strong attraction to each other, meaning they can only pass by one another after a series of breakdowns and rebuilds.
7. That agreeably to the theory of Dufay, equivalent portions of the resinous and vitreous fluids must exchange places during an electrical discharge, will appear evident from the following considerations: One surface being redundant with vitreous and deficient commensurately of resinous electricity, and the other redundant with the resinous and deficient of the vitreous fluid, it is inevitable that, to restore the equilibrium, there must be a simultaneous transfer of each redundancy to the surfaces wherein there is a deficiency of it to be supplied. If, after decomposing a large portion of the neutral compound previously existing on the surface of the jar, and transferring the ingredients severally in opposite directions, so as to cause each to exist in excess upon the surface assigned to it, should the redundancies, thus originated, be neutralized by meeting in the discharging rod, neither surface could recover its quota of the electrical ingredient of which it must have been deprived agreeably to the premises.
7. According to Dufay's theory, during an electrical discharge, equal amounts of resinous and glass-like substances must swap places. This becomes clear when considering the following: One surface has an excess of the glass-like substance and a corresponding lack of the resinous electricity, while the other surface has an excess of the resinous and a lack of the glass-like fluid. To restore balance, both substances need to move from where there's an excess to where there's a shortage. After breaking down a large part of the neutral compound that was on the surface of the jar and moving the components in opposite directions to create an excess on each assigned surface, if the resulting excesses meet in the discharging rod and cancel each other out, then neither surface can regain the amount of electrical substance it lost as expected.
8. This calls to mind the fact that no evidence has been adduced of the existence of any tertium quid, arising from the union of the supposed electricities, founded on any property displayed by their resulting combination in the neutral state. It must, if it exist, constitute an anomalous441 matter, destitute of all properties, and of the existence of which we have no evidence, besides that founded on the appearance and disappearance of its alleged ingredients.
8. This reminds us that no evidence has been presented for the existence of any tertium quid resulting from the combination of the supposed electricities, based on any properties shown by their resulting mix in a neutral state. If it exists, it must be an unusual441 matter, lacking all properties, and we have no proof of its existence other than the appearance and disappearance of its supposed components.
9. But however plausibly the discharges consequent to making a conducting communication from one electrified mass or surface to another mass or surface in an opposite state, may be ascribed to accumulations either of one or of two fluids, neither, according to one theory nor the other, is it possible to account satisfactorily for the stationary magnetism with which steel may be endowed, nor the transitory magnetism, or power of dynamic induction, acquired by wires transmitting galvanic discharges.
9. But no matter how convincingly the discharges that occur when making a conductive connection between one charged mass or surface and another in an opposite state can be attributed to the buildup of either one or two fluids, neither theory can satisfactorily explain the permanent magnetism that steel can possess, nor the temporary magnetism, or dynamic induction, that wires carrying electric currents can acquire.
10. For the most plausible effort which has been made for the purpose of reconciling the phenomena of electro-magnetism with the theory of two fluids, or with that of one fluid so far as these theories are convertible, we are indebted to Ampere.
10. For the most credible attempt that has been made to connect the phenomena of electromagnetism with the theory of two fluids, or with that of one fluid to the extent that these theories can be adapted, we owe it to Ampere.
11. According to the hypothesis advanced by this eminent philosopher, the difference between a magnetized and an electrified body is not attributable to any diversity in the imponderable matter to which their properties are respectively due, but to a difference in the actual state or distribution of that matter. Statical polarity is the consequence of the unequal distribution of the two electric fluids whose existence he assumes; while magnetical polarity is the consequence merely of the motion of those fluids, which, in magnets, are supposed to gyrate in opposite directions about each particle of the mass. These gyrations are conceived to take place only in planes at right angles to the axis of the magnet; so that, in a straight magnet, the planes of the orbits must be parallel to each other.[60]
11. According to the theory put forward by this renowned philosopher, the difference between a magnetized object and an electrified one isn’t due to any variation in the invisible forces responsible for their properties, but rather to a difference in how that matter is actually arranged or distributed. Static polarity results from the uneven distribution of the two electric fluids whose existence he posits, while magnetic polarity arises simply from the movement of those fluids, which in magnets are thought to spin in opposite directions around each particle of the mass. These spins are believed to occur only in planes that are perpendicular to the magnet's axis, meaning that in a straight magnet, the planes of the paths must be parallel to each other.[60]
12. The aggregate effect of all the minute vortices of the electrical fluids, in any one plane, bounded by the lateral surfaces of the magnet, is equivalent externally to one vortex, since, in either case, every electric particle on that surface will so move as to describe tangents to a circle drawn about the axis of the magnet. When the electrical vortices of the pole of one magnet conflict in their direction with those of another, as when similar magnetic poles are approximated, repulsion ensues; but if the vortices are coincident in direction, as when dissimilar poles are near, attraction takes place. When a current through a galvanized wire[61] concurs in direction with the magnetic vortices, as above described, attraction ensues; repulsion resulting when it does not so concur. Hence, the magnet, if movable, will strive to assume a position in which its electrical currents will not conflict with those of the wire on one side more than on the other; also the wire, if movable, will strive so to arrange itself so as to produce the same result, which can arrive only when the needle is at right angles to the wire, and its sides consequently equidistant therefrom.
12. The combined effect of all the tiny whirlpools of electrical energy in any one plane, surrounded by the sides of the magnet, is the same as having one large whirlpool from the outside perspective. In both cases, every electric particle on that surface will move to create tangents to a circle drawn around the magnet's axis. When the electrical whirlpools of one magnet oppose the direction of those in another, like when similar magnetic poles get close, it causes repulsion. But if the whirlpools align in direction, like when opposite poles are near each other, it leads to attraction. When a current flows through a galvanized wire[61] and aligns with the magnetic whirlpools, attraction occurs; if it doesn’t align, then repulsion happens. Therefore, if the magnet can move, it will try to find a position where its electrical currents don’t conflict more on one side than the other; likewise, the wire, if it can also move, will try to arrange itself to achieve the same outcome, which only happens when the needle is at a right angle to the wire, making its sides equally distant from it.
13. Electric currents will produce magnetic vortices, and, reciprocally, magnetic vortices will produce electric currents. Hence the magnetism imparted to iron by galvanic spirals, and the Farradian currents produced by magnetized iron within spirals not galvanized.
13. Electric currents create magnetic vortices, and in turn, magnetic vortices generate electric currents. This explains the magnetism transferred to iron by galvanic coils, and the Faraday currents generated by magnetized iron within non-galvanized coils.
14. Ampere’s theory has, in a high degree, the usual fault of substituting one mystery for another; but, on the other hand, it has, in an equally442 high extent, the only merit to which any theory can make an indisputable claim: I mean that of associating facts so as to make them more easy to comprehend and to remember, enabling us, by analogy, to foresee results, and thus affording a clue in our investigations. Evidently, the author of this theory was guided by it in his highly interesting and instructive contrivances; and Professor Henry ascribes his success in improving the electro-magnet to the theoretic clue which he had received from Ampere.
14. Ampere’s theory has a significant flaw: it replaces one mystery with another. However, it also has a notable strength that any theory can claim: it connects facts in a way that makes them easier to understand and remember. This allows us, by drawing analogies, to anticipate outcomes, providing a helpful guide in our research. Clearly, the creator of this theory used it as a basis in his intriguing and educational inventions. Professor Henry credits Ampere’s theoretical insights for his success in enhancing the electro-magnet.
15. Nevertheless, the postulates on which this Amperean hypothesis is founded appear to me unreasonable. They require us to concede that about every atom of a permanent magnet a process is going on analogous to that generally admitted to exist in a galvanic circuit, where two fluids pass each other in a common channel by a series of decompositions and recompositions, (7.) In the galvanic circuit this process is sustained by chemical reaction; but without any coenduring cause, how is it to be sustained permanently in a magnet? Is it reasonable to assume that the heterogeneous constituents of an imaginary tertium quid are perpetually separating only to reunite? (8.)[62]
15. Still, the assumptions behind this Amperean theory seem unreasonable to me. They require us to accept that around every atom of a permanent magnet, there's a process happening that's similar to what's generally acknowledged to occur in a galvanic circuit, where two fluids move past each other in a shared channel through a series of breakdowns and rebuilds, (7.) In the galvanic circuit, this process is powered by a chemical reaction; but without a lasting cause, how can it be maintained indefinitely in a magnet? Is it sensible to think that the different parts of an imaginary tertium quid are constantly separating just to come back together? (8.)[62]
16. In cases of complex affinity, where four particles, A B C D are united into two compounds A B, C D, it is easy to conceive that, in obedience to a stronger affinity, A shall combine with C, and B with D: but, without any extraneous agency, wherefore, in any one compound, should a particle A quit a particle B, in order to unite with another particle of the same kind; or wherefore should any one B quit one A, in order to combine with another A?
16. In situations of complex attraction, where four particles, A, B, C, and D are joined into two compounds, A B and C D, it's easy to imagine that, following a stronger attraction, A will combine with C, and B will combine with D. However, without any outside influence, why would a particle A leave a particle B to bond with another particle of the same type? Or why would any B detach from one A to join with another A?
17. That such a process should take place in consequence of the inductive agency of a similar process already established in a magnet or galvanized wire were difficult to believe; but it would seem utterly incredible that the most transient influence of such induction should be productive of such permanent electrolytic gyration as has been above specified. Moreover, it is inconceivable that the particles of any matter should, as required by this hypothesis, merely by being put into motion, acquire a power of reciprocal repulsion or attraction of which it were otherwise destitute.
17. It’s hard to believe that this process could happen because of the inductive effect of a similar process already happening in a magnet or a galvanized wire; but it seems completely unbelievable that even the slightest influence of such induction could lead to the lasting electrolytic movement mentioned earlier. Additionally, it's unimaginable that particles of any substance could, as this theory suggests, simply by being set in motion, gain a power of attraction or repulsion that they didn’t have before.
18. The vortices being assumed to take place about each atom, cannot severally occupy an area of greater diameter than can exist between the centres of any two atoms. Of course, the gyratory force exercised about the surface of a magnet by the aggregate movements of the vortices cannot extend beyond the surface more than half the diameter of one of the minute areas of gyration alluded to. Wherefore, then, do these gyrations, when similar in direction, from their concurrence approach each other; when dissimilar in direction, from contrariety move away, even when situated comparatively at a great distance?
18. The vortices that are assumed to exist around each atom cannot occupy an area larger than the space between the centers of any two atoms. Obviously, the spinning force generated around the surface of a magnet by the combined movements of the vortices cannot extend beyond the surface by more than half the diameter of one of the small spinning areas mentioned. So, why do these spinning movements, when they are aligned in the same direction, move closer together; while when they are in opposite directions, they move apart, even if they are relatively far away from each other?
19. I should consider Ampere’s theory as more reasonable were it founded upon the existence of one fluid; since, in that case, vortices might be imagined without the necessity of supposing an endless and unaccountable separation and reunion of two sets of particles; not only devoid of any property capable of sustaining their alleged opposite gyrations, but actually endowed with an intense reciprocal attraction which must render such gyrations impossible. But even if grounded on the idea of one fluid, this celebrated hypothesis does not seem to me to account for443 the phenomena which it was intended to explain. If distinct portions of any fluid do not attract or repel each other when at rest, wherefore should they either attract or repel each other when in motion? Evidently mere motion can generate neither attraction nor repulsion. Bodies projected horizontally gravitate with the same intensity, and consequently, in any given time, fall to the earth through the same perpendicular distance, whether moving with the celerity of a cannon ball, or undergoing no impulse excepting those arising from their own unresisted weights.
19. I would find Ampere’s theory more reasonable if it were based on the existence of a single fluid, because in that case, vortices could be imagined without needing to assume an endless and inexplicable separation and reunion of two groups of particles; not only lacking any property to support their supposed opposing rotations but actually characterized by a strong mutual attraction that would make such rotations impossible. However, even if it is based on the idea of one fluid, this well-known hypothesis still doesn’t seem to explain 443 the phenomena it aimed to clarify. If different parts of any fluid don’t attract or repel each other when at rest, why would they attract or repel each other when in motion? Clearly, mere motion can create neither attraction nor repulsion. Objects launched horizontally experience gravity with the same intensity, and therefore, in any given time, they fall to the earth through the same vertical distance, whether they are moving as fast as a cannonball or only experiencing the pull of their own unresisted weights.
20. The objections which are thus shown to be applicable in the case of liquids, of which the neighbouring particles are destitute of the reaction requisite to produce the phenomena requiring explanation, must operate with still greater force where ethereal fluids are in question, of which the properties are positively irreconcilable with the phenomena. According both to Franklin and Dufay, bodies, when similarly electrified, should repel each other; yet in point of fact, collateral wires, when subjected to similar voltaic discharges, and of course similarly electrified, become reciprocally attractive, while such wires, when dissimilarly electrified by currents which are not analogous, become reciprocally repulsive.
20. The objections that apply to liquids, where the neighboring particles lack the reactions needed to explain certain phenomena, are even stronger when it comes to ethereal fluids, whose properties are completely incompatible with those phenomena. According to both Franklin and Dufay, objects that are similarly electrified should repel each other; however, in reality, when collateral wires are subjected to similar voltage discharges, and thus similarly electrified, they become attractively drawn to each other. Conversely, when these wires are unequally electrified by different currents, they repel each other.
21. Agreeably to Ampere, an iron bar, situated within a coil of wire subjected to a galvanic current, is magnetized, because the current in the wire is productive of an electrical whirlpool about every particle of the metal. When the iron is soft, the magnetism, and of course the gyrations of which its magnetism consists by the premises, cease for the most part as soon as the circuit through the coil is broken; but when the iron is in the more rigid state of hardened steel, the gyrations continue for any length of time after the exciting cause has ceased.
21. According to Ampere, an iron bar located inside a coil of wire that is exposed to a galvanic current becomes magnetized because the current creates an electrical whirlpool around each particle of the metal. When the iron is soft, the magnetism—and the movements that make up its magnetism—mostly stop as soon as the current through the coil is interrupted. However, when the iron is in the harder state of steel, the movements continue for a long time even after the cause of the magnetism has ended.
22. This theory does not explain wherefore the hardening of the steel should cause the gyration to be more difficult to induce, yet more lasting when its induction is effected. Evidently the metallic particles must take some part in the process; since it is dependent for its existence and endurance upon their nature and their state. Yet no function is assigned to these particles. In fact, it is inconceivable either that they can participate in, or contribute to, the supposed gyration.
22. This theory doesn’t explain why hardening the steel makes it harder to induce the rotation, yet makes it last longer once it’s started. Clearly, the metallic particles must play a role in the process because the existence and durability of the rotation depend on their properties and condition. However, no role is given to these particles. In fact, it’s hard to believe that they can take part in or contribute to the supposed rotation.
23. The electrical fluid in an iron bar cannot form a vortex about each particle, all the vortices turning in one direction, without a conflict between those which are contiguous. In order not to conflict with each other, the alternate vortices would have to turn in different directions, like interlocking cog-wheels in machinery. But in that case, if magnetism be due to currents, the magneto-inductive influence of one set would neutralize that of the other. Again, how can a current, excited by a battery in one circuitous conductor, cause, by dynamic induction, a current in the opposite direction, through another conductor parallel to the first, but insulated therefrom? How can a current of quantity in a ribbon coil[63] give rise to one of intensity in a coil of fine wire, rushing of course with a velocity commensurate with the intensity thus imparted?
23. The electrical flow in an iron bar can't create a vortex around each particle, with all the vortices spinning in the same direction, without conflicting with the adjacent ones. To avoid conflict, the alternating vortices would need to spin in different directions, like interlocking gears in a machine. But in that case, if magnetism comes from the currents, the magneto-inductive effect of one group would cancel out that of the other. Also, how can a current generated by a battery in one circuit cause, through dynamic induction, a current in the opposite direction in another parallel conductor that isn’t directly connected? How can a quantity current in a ribbon coil[63] lead to an intensity current in a fine wire coil, traveling at a speed that matches the intensity created?
24. From the preceding considerations, and others which will be stated, it follows that it has been erroneously inferred that the only difference between galvanic and frictional electricity is dependent on quantity and intensity. It must be evident that there is a diversity in the nature of these affections of matter, sufficient to create a line of demarcation between them.
24. From the points mentioned earlier, and others that will be discussed, it follows that it has been mistakenly concluded that the only difference between galvanic and frictional electricity is based on quantity and intensity. It should be clear that there is a distinction in the nature of these phenomena that is enough to create a clear separation between them.
25. Having stated my objections to the electrical theories heretofore advanced, it may be proper that I should suggest any hypothetical views which may appear to me of a character to amend or to supersede those to which I have objected. But however I may have been emboldened to point out defects which have appeared to me to be inherent in the theories heretofore accredited, I am far from presuming to devise any substitute which will be unobjectionable. I am fully aware that there is an obscurity as respects the nature and mutual influence of chemical affinity, heat, light, electricity, magnetism, and vitality, which science can only to a minute extent dispel.
25. After sharing my concerns about the electrical theories presented so far, I think it's appropriate to suggest any alternative views that seem capable of improving or replacing those I’ve criticized. However, while I may feel encouraged to highlight the flaws I see in the theories that have been accepted up until now, I don't presume to propose any alternatives that would be without issues. I fully recognize there's still a lot of uncertainty regarding the nature and interplay of chemical affinity, heat, light, electricity, magnetism, and life, which science can only clarify to a very limited extent.
26. The hypothesis which I now deem preferable is so much indebted to the researches and suggestions of Farraday and others, that, were it true, I could claim for myself but a small share of the merit of its origination. That sagacious electrician employs the following language: “In the long-continued course of experimental inquiry, in which I have been engaged, this general result has pressed upon me constantly—namely, the necessity of admitting two forces or directions of force, combined with the impossibility of separating these two forces or electricities from each other.” (Experimental Researches, 1163.)[64]
26. The hypothesis that I now consider to be the best owes a lot to the research and ideas of Farraday and others, so if it were true, I could only take a small amount of credit for its creation. That insightful electrician states: “In the long-continued course of experimental inquiry, in which I have been engaged, this general result has pressed upon me constantly—namely, the necessity of admitting two forces or directions of force, combined with the impossibility of separating these two forces or electricities from each other.” (Experimental Researches, 1163.)[64]
27. Subsequently, (1244,) after citing another proof of the inseparability of the two electric forces, he alleges it to be “another argument in favour of the view that induction and its concomitant phenomena depend upon a polarity of the particles of matter!”
27. Later, (1244,) after presenting another piece of evidence for the inseparability of the two electric forces, he claims it to be “another argument in favor of the idea that induction and its related phenomena depend on a polarity of the particles of matter!”
Supposed grounds for a Theory.
28. The grounds upon which I venture to advance a theory are as follows:
28. Here are the reasons why I'm putting forward a theory:
The existence of two heterogeneous polar forces acting in opposite directions, and necessarily connate and coexistent; yet capable of reciprocal neutralization, agreeably to the authority of Farraday and others: the polarity of matter in general, as displayed during the crystallization and vegetation of salts: also as made evident by Farraday’s late researches, and the experiments and observations of Hunt: the very small proportion of the space in solids, as in the instance of potassium and other metals, which are apparently occupied by the ponderable atoms; while, agreeably to the researches and speculations of Farraday, (rightly interpreted,) the residual space must be replete with imponderable matter: the experiments and inferences of Davy and others, tending to sanction the idea that an imponderable ethereal fluid must pervade the creation: the perfect identity of the polarizing effects, transiently created in a wire by subjection to a galvanic discharge, with those produced by the permanent polarizing power of a steel magnet: the utter heterogeneousness of the powers of galvanic and frictional electricity, as respects ability to produce sparks before contact, and likewise of the polarities which they respectively produce: and superficiality of electricity proper during discharge as well as when existing upon insulated surfaces, as demonstrated by atmospheric electricity when conveyed by telegraphic wires, agreeably to Henry; the sounds observed445 severally by Page, Henry, and Mairran, as being consequent to making and breaking a galvanic circuit through a conductor, or magnetizing or demagnetizing by means of surrounding galvanized coils.
The existence of two different opposing forces that are inherently connected and coexist; yet capable of cancelling each other out, according to Farraday and others: the polarity of matter in general, as shown during the crystallization and growth of salts: also evident from Farraday’s recent research and the experiments and observations of Hunt: the very small amount of space in solids, as seen in potassium and other metals, that is seemingly occupied by the heavy atoms; while, in line with Farraday’s research and ideas (when correctly interpreted), the remaining space must be filled with weightless matter: the experiments and conclusions of Davy and others supporting the idea that a weightless ether must pervade the universe: the complete similarity of the polarizing effects created temporarily in a wire by a galvanic discharge with those produced by the permanent polarizing effect of a steel magnet: the stark difference between the powers of galvanic and frictional electricity in their ability to produce sparks before contact, as well as the polarities they create: and the superficial nature of electricity during discharge and when it exists on insulated surfaces, as shown by atmospheric electricity when carried by telegraph wires, according to Henry; the sounds observed445 respectively by Page, Henry, and Mairran, resulting from turning a galvanic circuit on and off through a conductor, or magnetizing or demagnetizing using surrounding galvanized coils.
Proofs of the existence of an enormous quantity of Imponderable Matter in Metals.
29. It has been most sagaciously pointed out by Farraday that four hundred and thirty atoms, which form a cube of potassium in the metallic state, must occupy nearly six times as much space as the same number of similar atoms fill, when existing in a cube of hydrated oxide of potassium of the same size; which, beside seven hundred metallic atoms, must hold seven hundred atoms of hydrogen and fourteen hundred of oxygen—in all two thousand eight hundred atoms; whence it follows that, in the metallic cube, there must be room for six times as many atoms as it actually holds.
29. Farraday wisely noted that four hundred and thirty atoms making up a cube of potassium in its metallic form must take up nearly six times more space than the same number of similar atoms in a cube of hydrated potassium oxide of the same size; which, in addition to seven hundred metallic atoms, must contain seven hundred hydrogen atoms and fourteen hundred oxygen atoms—in total, two thousand eight hundred atoms. This leads to the conclusion that, in the metallic cube, there has to be space for six times as many atoms as it currently contains.
30. With all due deference, I am of opinion that this distinguished philosopher has not been consistent in assuming that, agreeably to the Newtonian idea of ponderable atoms, the space in potassium not replete with metal must be vacant; since, according to facts established by his researches, or resulting therefrom, an enormous quantity both of the causes of heat and of electricity exists in metals. Moreover, agreeably to his recent speculations, those causes must consist of material, independent, imponderable matter, occupying the whole of the space in which their efficacy is perceptible. To the evolution of the imponderable matter thus associated, the incandescence of a globule of potassium on contact with water, may be ascribed, since it is the consequence of the displacement of such matter by the elements of water, which, in replacing it, converts the metal into the hydrated oxide called caustic potash.
30. With all due respect, I believe this respected philosopher hasn’t been consistent in assuming that, according to the Newtonian idea of tangible atoms, the space in potassium that isn’t filled with metal must be empty. Based on the facts established by his studies, or resulting from them, there’s a huge amount of both heat and electricity sources in metals. Furthermore, based on his recent theories, those sources must be made up of material, independent, non-tangible matter that fills all the space in which their effects can be observed. The glowing of a potassium globule when it comes into contact with water can be attributed to the release of this non-tangible matter, which happens because the elements in water displace it, turning the metal into the hydrated oxide known as caustic potash.
31. The existence both of the causes of electricity and heat in metals is likewise confirmed by the fact that the inductive influence of a magnet is sufficient to cause all the phenomena of heat, electrolysis, and magnetism, as exemplified by the magneto-electric machine. The existence of the cause of heat in metals is also evident from the ignition of an iron rod when hammered, or the deflagration of wire by the discharge of a Leyden battery.
31. The presence of both electricity and heat in metals is also supported by the fact that a magnet’s inductive influence can produce all the effects of heat, electrolysis, and magnetism, as shown by the magneto-electric machine. The presence of heat generation in metals is also clear from the heating of an iron rod when it’s hammered or the burning of wire by the discharge from a Leyden battery.
32. The superiority of metals as electrical conductors may be the consequence of the pre-eminent abundance of imponderable matter entering into their composition, as above alluded to in the case of potassium.
32. The superiority of metals as electrical conductors might be due to the significant amount of intangible matter that makes up their composition, as mentioned earlier in the case of potassium.
33. Graham, in his Elements, treating of electricity, alleges that the “great discoveries of Farraday have completely altered the aspect of this department of science, and suggests that all electrical phenomena whatever involve the presence of matter.” Unless the distinguished author from whom this quotation is made intended to restrict the meaning of the word matter to ponderable matter, there was no novelty in the idea that electrical phenomena involve the presence of matter, since the hypotheses of Franklin and Dufay assume the existence of one or more imponderable material fluids. But, on the other hand, if the meaning of the word matter is only to comprise that which is ponderable, the allegation is inconsistent with the authority cited. According to the researches of Farraday, there is an enormous electrical power in metals, and, according to his speculations, such powers must be considered as imponderable material446 principles, pervading the space within which they prevail, independently of any ponderable atom acting as a basis for material properties; the existence of such atoms being represented as questionable.
33. Graham, in his Elements, discussing electricity, claims that the “great discoveries of Faraday have completely changed the landscape of this branch of science, and suggests that all electrical phenomena involve the presence of matter.” Unless the notable author from whom this quote is taken intended to limit the meaning of the word matter to tangible matter, there was nothing new in the idea that electrical phenomena involve matter, since the theories of Franklin and Dufay assume the existence of one or more intangible material fluids. However, if the meaning of the word matter is only meant to include that which is tangible, the claim contradicts the cited authority. According to Faraday's research, there is a significant electrical power in metals, and based on his theories, such powers must be seen as intangible material446 principles, filling the space in which they exist, independently of any tangible atom acting as a basis for material properties; the existence of such atoms being viewed as uncertain.
Electrical Phenomena attributed to Stationary, or Undulatory, Polarization.
34. It having been shown that in electrical discharges there cannot reasonably be any transfer of matter, so as to justify the idea of their being effected either by one current or by two currents, the only alternative seems to be that the phenomena are due to a progressive affection of the conducting medium, analogous in its mode of propagation to waves, as in the case of liquids, or the aërial or ethereal undulations to which sound and light are ascribed. (1, 2, 3, &c.)
34. It has been demonstrated that in electrical discharges, there's no reasonable way for matter to be transferred, making it unlikely that they result from either a single current or two currents. The only other possibility seems to be that these phenomena arise from a progressive effect on the conducting medium, similar in its propagation to waves, like those in liquids, or the air or ether fluctuations associated with sound and light. (1, 2, 3, &c.)
35. The idea intended to be conveyed by the word wave, as applied in common to the undulatory affections above mentioned, and that which is conceived to be the cause of the phenomena usually ascribed to one or more electrical currents, requires only that there should be a state of matter, which, while it may be utterly different from either of those which constitute the waves of water, light, or sound, may, nevertheless, like either, pass successively from one portion of a mass to another.
35. The concept represented by the term wave, as commonly used for the undulatory effects mentioned above, and what is thought to be the cause of the phenomena usually attributed to one or more electrical currents, simply requires a state of matter that, while it may be completely different from the substances that make up the waves of water, light, or sound, can still move progressively from one part of a mass to another, just like them.
36. The affection thus designated may be reasonably distinguished from other waves, as a wave of polarization, since the wire acts, so long as subjected to the reiterated discharges of a voltaic series, as if it were converted into innumerable small magnets, situated like tangents to radii proceeding from its axis.
36. The affection mentioned can be reasonably distinguished from other waves as a wave of polarization, because the wire behaves, as long as it’s exposed to the repeated discharges of a voltaic series, as if it were turned into countless small magnets, positioned like tangents to radii extending from its axis.
37. But if a polarizable medium be requisite to electrical discharges, since they pass through a space when devoid of ponderable matter, there must be some imponderable medium through which they can be effected. Hence we have reason to infer that there is an imponderable existing throughout all space, as well as within conductors, which is more or less the medium of the opposite waves essential to electric discharges. Quoting his own language, Davy’s experiments led him to consider “that space, (meaning void space,) where there is not an appreciable quantity of this matter, (meaning ponderable matter,) is capable of exhibiting electrical phenomena:” also that such phenomena “are produced by a highly subtile fluid or fluids.” Moreover, that “it may be assumed, as in the hypothesis of Hooke, Euler, and Huyghens, that an ethereal matter susceptible of electrical affections fills all space.”
37. But if a polarizable medium is necessary for electrical discharges, and since they can pass through a space that doesn't contain ponderable matter, there must be some imponderable medium that facilitates them. Therefore, we can infer that there is an imponderable substance present throughout all space, as well as within conductors, which serves as the medium for the opposing waves essential for electric discharges. In his own words, Davy’s experiments led him to conclude “that space, (referring to empty space,) where there is no significant amount of this matter, (referring to ponderable matter,) is capable of displaying electrical phenomena:” as well as that such phenomena “are caused by a highly subtle fluid or fluids.” Moreover, “it can be assumed, as per the hypothesis of Hooke, Euler, and Huyghens, that an ethereal matter responsive to electrical influences fills all space.”
38. Agreeably to the suggestions above made, all ponderable matter which is liable to be electrified internally by electrical discharges, may be considered as consisting of atoms composed of imponderable ethereo-electric particles in a state of combination with ponderable particles, analogous to that which has been supposed to exist between such particles and caloric when causing expansion, liquidity, or the aëriform state. Atoms, so constituted of ethereal and ponderable particles, may be designated as ethereo-ponderable atoms.[65]
38. Following the suggestions mentioned above, all material substances that can be electrically charged internally by electrical discharges can be viewed as made up of atoms containing weightless ethereo-electric particles combined with weighty particles, similar to what is believed to happen between those particles and heat when they cause expansion, liquid form, or a gas-like state. Atoms made up of ethereal and weighty particles can be referred to as ethereo-ponderable atoms.[65]
39. A quiescent charge of frictional electricity, only affecting the superficies of any ponderable mass with which it may be associated, and having no influence upon the component ethereo-ponderable atoms severally, is not to be ascribed to redundancies or deficiencies of the ethereal matter, but to different states of polarization produced in different sets of the particles of such matter existing about the electrifiable bodies.[66] During the action of an electrical machine, these particles are polarized by the opposite polarities transiently induced in the surfaces subjected to friction; one set of particles going with the electric, the other remaining with the rubber.
39. A static charge of frictional electricity, which only affects the surface of any substantial object it’s associated with and doesn’t influence the individual ether-particles, should not be attributed to excesses or shortages of ethereal matter, but rather to different states of polarization created in different groups of particles of that matter surrounding the electrifiable objects.[66] When an electrical machine operates, these particles are polarized by the opposite charges temporarily induced on the surfaces that experience friction; one group of particles goes with the electric charge, while the other stays with the rubber.
40. The particles thus oppositely polarized, severally divide their appropriate polarities with other ethereal matter surrounding the conductors, and this, when insulated, is retained until a further polarization results from the same process. Thus are the ethereo-electric atmospheres respectively surrounding the positive and negative conductors oppositely polarized, and consequently charged to the degree which the machine is competent to induce. Under these circumstances, if a conducting rod be made to form between them a communication, by touching each conductor with one of its ends, the polarities of the ethereo-electric atmospheres by which they are severally surrounded propagate themselves, by a wave-like process, over and more or less through the rod, according to its nature and dimensions, so as to meet intermediately, and thus produce reciprocal neutralization.
40. The particles that are oppositely polarized each share their respective polarities with the surrounding ethereal matter around the conductors, and this is stored when insulated until another polarization occurs from the same process. This is how the ethereo-electric atmospheres around the positive and negative conductors become oppositely polarized and charged to the extent that the machine can generate. In this situation, if a conducting rod is used to connect the two by touching each conductor with one of its ends, the polarities of the ethereo-electric atmospheres surrounding them transmit themselves, in a wave-like manner, through the rod, depending on its properties and size, so that they meet in the middle and create a neutralization effect.
41. When the oppositely polarizing waves, generated by friction, as above described, are by means of a conducting communication transmitted to the surface of a coated pane, the two different portions of the electro-ether there existing are severally polarized in opposite ways, one being endowed with the properties usually called vitreous, or positive, the other with those usually called resinous, or negative. In fact, the two polarized atmospheres thus created, may be conveniently designated as the “two electricities,” and alluded to in the language heretofore employed in treating of phenomena, agreeably to the hypothesis which assumes the existence of heterogeneous fluids instead of heterogeneous polarities.
41. When the opposing waves created by friction, as described above, are transmitted to the surface of a coated pane through a conducting medium, the two different areas of the electro-ether present there are polarized in opposite ways. One area takes on the properties typically referred to as vitreous, or positive, while the other exhibits those usually called resinous, or negative. In fact, these two polarized regions can be conveniently referred to as the “two electricities,” similar to the terminology previously used to discuss phenomena, in line with the hypothesis that suggests the existence of different fluids instead of different polarities.
42. Of course it will follow, that the oppositely polarized ethereal atmospheres thus produced, one on each surface of the electric which keeps them apart, must exercise toward each other an attraction perfectly analogous to that which has been supposed to be exercised by the imaginary heterogeneous electric fluids of Dufay. The electro-ether[67] being elastic,448 a condensation over each of the charged surfaces, proportionable to the attractive force must ensue; while over the surface of an electrified conductor, the similarly polarized atoms, not being attracted by those in an oppositely polarized atmosphere beneath the surface, tend, by their reciprocally repulsive reagency, to exist further apart than in a neutral state. Hence, the electro-ether, as it exists over the surface of an insulated conductor, is rendered rarer, while, as existing over the surfaces of charged panes or Leyden jars, it must be in a state of condensation.[68] And, consequently, while the space perceptibly electrified by the charge of a conductor, for equal areas and charging power, is much more extensive than the space in which the charge of a coated pane is perceptible, the striking distance being likewise much greater; yet upon any body, successively subjected to a discharge from each, the effect will be more potent when produced by means of the pane.
42. Naturally, it follows that the oppositely charged ethereal atmospheres created on each side of the electric source that keeps them apart must attract each other in a way that's similar to how the imaginary different electric fluids proposed by Dufay are thought to operate. The electro-ether[67] is elastic,448 leading to a condensation over each charged surface that corresponds to the attractive force. Meanwhile, on the surface of an electrified conductor, the similarly charged atoms are not drawn to those in a differently charged atmosphere beneath the surface, and due to their mutual repulsion, they tend to space out more than they would in a neutral state. As a result, the electro-ether above the surface of an insulated conductor becomes less dense, while over charged panes or Leyden jars, it becomes more condensed.[68] Consequently, the space that is noticeably electrified by the charge of a conductor is much larger than the space where the charge of a coated pane is detectable for the same areas and charging power, and the distance at which this effect is felt is also greater; however, for any object that is subsequently subjected to a discharge from both, the impact will be stronger when delivered by the pane.
Ignition, Electrolysis, and Magnetism, Secondary Effects of Frictional Discharges; or, in other words, of Polarizing Electro-ethereal Waves.
43. In proportion as a wire is small in comparison with the charge which it may be made the means of neutralizing, the conducting power seems to be more dependent on the sectional area,[69] and less upon the extent of surface. The reciprocal repulsion of the similarly polarized ethereal particles must tend always to make them seek the surface, but at the same time their attraction for the ethereo-ponderable particles composing the wire has the opposite effect, and tends to derange these from their normal polar state of quiescence. Commensurate with the extent in which this state is subverted, is the resulting heat, electrolytic power, and electro-magnetic influence. The phenomena last mentioned are, however, secondary effects consequent to the participation of the ethereo-ponderable matter in the undulations resulting from the statical discharge.
43. As a wire gets smaller compared to the charge it can neutralize, its ability to conduct seems to rely more on its cross-sectional area, [69] and less on the surface area. Similarly charged ethereal particles push away from each other, which makes them want to move to the surface. However, their attraction to the ethereo-ponderable particles in the wire has the opposite effect, causing a disruption in their usual stable state. The more this stable state is disrupted, the more heat, electrolytic power, and electromagnetic influence occur. The last mentioned phenomena are secondary effects that result from the interaction of ethereo-ponderable matter with the waves produced by the static discharge.
44. Such effects, making allowance for the extreme minuteness of the time occupied by the process, are probably, in all cases, proportional to the degree in which the ponderable matter is effected, up to the point at which it is dissipated by deflagration; but the duration of a statical discharge being almost infinitely minute for any length of coil which can conveniently be subjected thereto, the electro-magnetic and other effects of a statical discharge are not commensurate with the intensity of the affection of the wire.
44. These effects, considering the extremely brief time taken by the process, are likely proportional to how much the physical matter is affected, up to the point where it is destroyed by combustion. However, the duration of a static discharge is almost infinitely brief for any length of coil that can be easily used, so the electromagnetic and other effects of a static discharge do not match the intensity of the impact on the wire.
45. There is, in fact, this additional reason for the diversity between the electro-magnetic power of a statical discharge, as compared with that of the voltaic series: any wire which is of sufficient length and tenuity to display the maximum power of deflagration by the former, cannot serve for the same purpose in the case of the latter. Moreover, the form of a helix closely wound, so that the coatings may touch, which is that most favourable for the reiteration of the magnetic influence of the circuit upon an iron rod, cannot be adopted in the case of statical discharges of high intensity, since the proximity of the circumvolutions would enable the ethereal waves, notwithstanding the interposition of cotton or silk, to cross449 superficially from one to the other, parallel to the axis of the included iron, instead of pursuing the circuitous channel afforded by the helix with the intensity requisite to the polarization of the ponderable atoms.
45. There’s actually another reason for the differences between the electromagnetic power of a static discharge and that of the voltaic series: any wire that is long and thin enough to show the maximum power of discharge with the former won’t work for the latter. Also, the shape of a tightly wound helix, where the coatings can touch, is the best for enhancing the magnetic influence of the circuit on an iron rod, but it can’t be used for high-intensity static discharges. This is because the closeness of the coils would allow the ethereal waves, even with cotton or silk in between, to superficially cross from one to the other along the axis of the iron, rather than following the longer path provided by the helix with the strength needed to polarize the tangible atoms.449
The extreme Diversity, as respects striking Distance, between the direct Effects of Frictional Electricity and those directly arising from Galvanic Reaction.
46. The intensity of the excitement produced by different electrical machines is estimated to be as the relative lengths of the sparks which proceed from their prime conductors respectively. Admitting that the relative intensity were merely as the length of the spark, not as the square of that length, still there would be an infinite difference between the intensity of a voltaic series and that of electrical machines, if measured by this test. Large electrical machines, like that at the Polytechnic Institution, London, give sparks at twenty inches and more; while, agreeably to Gassiott’s experiments, a Groves’s battery of 320 pairs, in full power, would not, before contact, give a spark at any distance, however minute. It follows, that, as respects the species of intensity which is indicated by length of sparks, or striking distance, the difference between the electricity of the most powerful voltaic series and electrical machines is not to be represented by any degree of disparity; it proves that galvanism proper and electricity proper are heterogeneous.
46. The level of excitement generated by different electrical machines is measured by the relative lengths of the sparks that come from their main conductors. Even if we assume that the relative intensity is just based on the length of the spark, rather than the square of that length, there would still be a huge difference between the intensity of a voltaic series and that of electrical machines when assessed this way. Large electrical machines, like the one at the Polytechnic Institution in London, can produce sparks that are twenty inches long or more; meanwhile, according to Gassiott’s experiments, a Groves’s battery with 320 pairs, at full power, would not produce a spark at any distance, however small before contact. This indicates that, regarding the type of intensity signified by the length of sparks or striking distance, the disparity between the electricity of the most powerful voltaic series and electrical machines cannot be measured by any degree of disparity; it demonstrates that galvanism and electricity are fundamentally different.
47. It should be recollected that the intensity of galvanic action in a series of 320 pairs, excepting the loss from conduction, would be to that of one pair as 320 to 1.[70] Of course, the striking distance of a battery of one pair would be 320 times less than nothing: 320 below zero.
47. It should be remembered that the intensity of galvanic action in a series of 320 pairs, minus any losses from conduction, would be to that of one pair as 320 to 1.[70] Naturally, the striking distance of a battery with one pair would be 320 times less than zero: 320 below zero.
48. We may infer that the undulatory polarization of ethereo-ponderable matter is the primary, direct, and characteristic effect of galvanic excitement, in its more energetic modifications. Yet, that by peculiar care in securing insulation, as in the water batteries of Cross and Gassiott, ethereal undulations may be produced, with the consequent accumulation of ethereal polarity requisite to give sparks before contact, agreeably to the experiments of those ingenious philosophers.
48. We can conclude that the wave-like polarization of ether is the main, direct, and defining result of strong galvanic excitement. However, with careful insulation, like in the water batteries created by Cross and Gassiott, ethereal waves can be generated, leading to the buildup of ethereal polarity necessary to create sparks before contact, according to the experiments of those clever scientists.
49. Hence it may be presumed that, during intense ethereo-ponderable polarization, superficial ethereal waves may always be a secondary effect, although the conducting power of the reagents, requisite to the constitution of powerful galvanic batteries, is inconsistent with that accumulation of ethereal polarity which constitutes a statical spark-giving charge.
49. Therefore, it can be assumed that during intense ether-polarization, surface ether waves are usually a secondary effect, even though the conductivity of the reagents needed to create powerful galvanic batteries doesn’t align with the buildup of ether polarity that creates a static spark charge.
50. As all the members forming a voltaic series have to be discharged450 in one circuit, the energy of the effort to discharge, and the velocity of the consequent undulations must be, cæteris paribus, as the number of members which co-operate to produce the discharge. Of course the more active the ethereo-ponderable waves, the greater must be their efficacy in producing ethereal waves of polarization, as a secondary effect, agreeably to the suggestions above made, (49, 36.)
50. Since all the members in a voltaic series need to be discharged450 in a single circuit, the energy required for the discharge and the speed of the resulting waves must, all else being equal, relate to the number of members working together to create the discharge. Naturally, the more active the ethereal waves are, the more effective they will be at generating ethereal waves of polarization as a secondary effect, in line with the points mentioned earlier, (49, 36.)
51. Hence, in a battery consisting of one galvanic pair excited by reagents of great chemical energy and conducting power, the electro-magnetic effects are pre-eminent; while De Luc’s electric columns, consisting of several thousands of minute pairs, feeble as to their chemical and conducting efficacy, are pre-eminent for statical spark-giving power, (48.) This seems to be quite consistent; since, on the one hand, the waves of polarization must be larger and slower as the pairs are bigger and fewer; and, on the other hand, smaller and more active as the pairs are more minute and more numerous.
51. Therefore, in a battery made up of one galvanic pair powered by highly reactive chemicals with strong conductive properties, the electromagnetic effects are dominant. In contrast, De Luc’s electric columns, which consist of thousands of tiny pairs that are weak in chemical and conductive effectiveness, excel in generating static sparks. This seems quite consistent; on one hand, the polarization waves must be larger and slower when the pairs are bigger and fewer. On the other hand, they become smaller and more active as the pairs are smaller and more numerous.
On the perfect similitude between the Polarity communicated to Iron Filings by a Magnetized Steel Bar and a Galvanized Wire.
52. If by a sieve, or any other means, iron filings be duly strewed over a paper, resting on a bar magnet, they will all become magnets, so as to arrange themselves in rows like the links of a chain. Each of the little magnets thus created will, at its outermost end, have a polarity similar to that of the pole (of the magnet) with which it may be affiliated. Of course the resulting ferruginous rows formed severally by the two different poles of the bar will have polarities as opposite as those of the said poles.
52. If you sprinkle iron filings over a piece of paper sitting on a bar magnet, they will all turn into tiny magnets, arranging themselves in rows like links in a chain. Each of these tiny magnets will have a polarity at its outermost end that matches the pole of the magnet it’s near. Naturally, the rows created by the two different poles of the bar will have opposite polarities, just like the poles themselves.
53. In an analogous mode, if two wires be made the media of a galvanic discharge, iron filings, under their influence, will receive a magnetic polarity, arranging themselves about each wire like so many tangents to as many radii proceeding from its axis: those magnetized by one wire reacting with such as are magnetized by the other.
53. Similarly, if two wires are used to create a galvanic discharge, iron filings will develop a magnetic polarity due to their influence, arranging themselves around each wire like tangents to the radii extending from the axis: those magnetized by one wire will react with those magnetized by the other.
54. The affections of the ferruginous particles during the continuance of the current so called are precisely like those of the same particles when under the influence of the bar magnet. The great discordancy is in the fact that the influence of the magnet is permanent, while that of the wire is indebted for existence to a series of oppositely polarizing but transient impulses which proceed toward the middle of the circuit from each side, so as to produce reciprocal neutralization by meeting midway.
54. The behavior of the iron particles while the current is flowing is exactly like that of the same particles when affected by a bar magnet. The major difference is that the effect of the magnet is permanent, while the effect of the wire is due to a series of opposing but temporary impulses that move toward the center of the circuit from each side, resulting in mutual cancellation when they meet in the middle.
55. The effect upon the filings, as originally pointed out by Oersted, is precisely such as would arise were the ponderable matter of the wire, resolved by each impulse into innumerable little magnets, situated so as to form tangents to as many radii proceeding from the axis of the wire.
55. The impact on the filings, as Oersted originally noted, is exactly what you would expect if the physical matter of the wire were transformed by each push into countless tiny magnets arranged to line up with many radii extending from the center of the wire.
56. Independently of the filings, the wires react with each other as if their constitution, during subjection to the discharge, were such as above supposed. When the discharges through them concur in direction, they attract, because the left side of one is next the right side of the other, bringing the opposite poles of their little magnets into proximity; but when the discharge is made in opposite directions, the two right or the two left sides will be in proximity, and will, by the consequent approximation of the similar poles of the little magnets, be productive of repulsion.
56. Regardless of the filings, the wires interact with each other as if their composition, while subjected to the discharge, were as described above. When the discharges through them are in the same direction, they attract each other because one wire's left side is next to the other wire's right side, bringing the opposite poles of their small magnets close together; however, when the discharge moves in opposite directions, the two right or two left sides will be close to each other, causing repulsion due to the similar poles of the small magnets getting closer.
57. From these last-mentioned facts and considerations, it must be evi451dent that, assuming that there is in a galvanized wire a derangement of the poles of the constituent ethereo-ponderable particles analogous to that permanently existing in magnetized steel, involves no contradiction, no absurdity, nor any thing but what is consistent with the researches and inferences of Davy, Farraday, and other eminent investigators of the phenomena of nature.
57. From these last-mentioned facts and considerations, it must be evident that assuming there is a misalignment of the poles of the ethereal particles in galvanized wire, similar to what exists permanently in magnetized steel, involves no contradictions or absurdities, but is entirely consistent with the research and findings of Davy, Faraday, and other prominent scientists studying natural phenomena.
Process by which the Ethereo-ponderable Atoms within a Galvanic Circuit are polarized by the Chemical Reaction.
58. In order that an ethereo-ponderable particle of oxygen in any aqueous solution shall unite with an ethereo-ponderable particle of zinc in a galvanic pair, there must be a partial revolution of the whole row of ethereo-ponderable zinc atoms, with which the atom assailed is catenated by the attractions between dissimilar poles; and likewise there must be a series of decompositions and recompositions between every atom of water existing in the circuit, an atom of hydrogen being eliminated at one end, an atom of oxygen at the other. The impulse must extend through the negative plate to the conductor, by which it communicates with the zinc or electro-positive plate. When the circuit is open, the power of combination exercised by the zinc and oxygen is inadequate to produce this movement in the whole chain of atoms, liquid and metallic; but as it is indifferent whether any two atoms are united with each other, or with any other atoms of the same kind, the chemical force easily causes them to exchange partners, as it were, when the whole are made to form a circuitous row in due contiguity.[71]
58. For an ethereal particle of oxygen in any water solution to connect with an ethereal particle of zinc in a galvanic pair, there needs to be a partial shift of the entire row of ethereal zinc atoms, which the target atom is linked to by the attractions between opposite poles. Additionally, there must be a series of breakdowns and reconfigurations between every water atom present in the circuit, with a hydrogen atom being released at one end and an oxygen atom at the other. The impulse must travel through the negative plate to the conductor, which connects to the zinc or electro-positive plate. When the circuit is open, the combination power exerted by the zinc and oxygen is not strong enough to drive movement through the entire chain of liquid and metallic atoms. However, since it doesn't matter if two atoms connect with each other or with other atoms of the same kind, the chemical force easily allows them to swap partners, so to speak, when they are arranged to form a circuitous row in proper alignment.[71]
59. As we know that, during their union with oxygen, metals give out an enormous quantity of heat and electricity, it is reasonable to suppose that whenever an atom of oxygen and an atom of zinc jump into union with each other, a wave is induced in the ethereo-ponderable matter, and that this wave is sustained by the decompositions and recompositions, by means of which an atom of hydrogen is evolved at the negative plate, and probably enabled to assume the aeriform state. There must, at the same time, be a communication of wave polarity by contact of the negative plate with the connecting wire, by which the positive wave in the wire is induced. Although the inherent polarities of the atoms are not, agreeably to this view, the moving power in galvanism, yet they facilitate, and in some cases induce, the exercise of that power, by enabling it to act at a distance, when otherwise it might be inefficient.
59. As we know, when metals combine with oxygen, they release a huge amount of heat and electricity. It's reasonable to assume that whenever an atom of oxygen and an atom of zinc come together, it creates a wave in the ethereal matter, and this wave is maintained by the breakdown and reconstruction processes that produce an atom of hydrogen at the negative plate, which can likely turn into a gas. At the same time, there must be a transfer of wave polarity through the contact of the negative plate with the connecting wire, which induces the positive wave in the wire. Although the natural polarities of the atoms aren't, according to this perspective, the driving force in galvanism, they do help and sometimes trigger the use of that power by allowing it to work from a distance when it might otherwise be ineffective.
60. This, I conceive, is shown in the effect of platina sponge, upon a mixture of the gaseous elements of water; also in Groves’s gas battery, by means of which hydrogen and oxygen gas severally react with water in syphons, so as to cause each other to condense, without any communication beside that through the platina, and an electrolytic decomposition and re452composition extending from one of the aqueous surfaces in contact with one of the gases, to the other surface in contact with the other gas.
60. I believe this is demonstrated by the effect of platinum sponge on a mixture of water's gaseous elements; also in Grove's gas battery, which uses hydrogen and oxygen gas to react with water in syphons, causing each gas to condense without any connection other than through the platinum, and an electrolytic decomposition and recomposition extending from one of the water surfaces in contact with one gas to the other surface in contact with the other gas.
Difference between Electro-ethereal and Ethereo-ponderable Polarization.
61. There are two species of electro-polarity which come under the head of statical electricity. One of these Farraday illustrates by supposing three bodies, A, B, and C, in proximity, but not in contact, when A, being electrified, electrifies B, and B electrifies C by induction. This, Farraday calls an action of the particles of the bodies concerned, whereas, by his own premises, it appears to me to be merely a superficial affection of the masses or of a circumambient ethereal matter. This species of polarization, to which the insulating power of air is necessary, affects the superficies of a body only, being displayed as well by a gilt globe of glass as a solid globe of metal. No sensible change appears to be produced in the ponderable conducting superficies by this inductive superficial electrification of masses; and of course no magnetism.
61. There are two types of electro-polarity that fall under the category of static electricity. One of these is illustrated by Faraday, who imagines three objects, A, B, and C, close together but not touching. When A is electrified, it electrifies B, and then B electrifies C through induction. Faraday refers to this as an action of the particles of the involved bodies, but from his own reasoning, it seems to me to be just a superficial effect on the masses or the surrounding ethereal matter. This type of polarization, which requires the insulating power of air, only affects the surface of a body, being evident in both a gilt glass globe and a solid metal globe. No noticeable change occurs in the solid conductive surface due to this inductive superficial electrification of masses, and therefore, there is no magnetism.
62. When a small image, of which the scalp has been abundantly furnished with long hair, is electrified, the hairy filaments extend themselves and move apart, as if actuated by a repulsive power: also, when iron filings are so managed as to obey the influence of the poles of a powerful magnet, (51,) they arrange themselves in a manner resembling that of the electrified hair. There is, moreover, this additional analogy, that there is an attraction between two portions of hair differently electrified, like that which arises between filings differently magnetized. Yet the properties of the electrified hair and magnetized filings are, in some respects, utterly dissimilar. A conducting communication between differently electrified portions of hair would entirely neutralize the respective electrical states; so that all the electrical phenomena displayed by them would cease. Yet such a communication made between the poles, exciting the filings, by any non-magnetic conductor, does not in the slightest degree lessen their polar affections and consequent power of reciprocal influence. Upon the electrified hair, the proximity or the contact of a steel magnet has no more effect than would result under like circumstances from any other metallic mass similarly employed; but by the approximation, and still more, the contact of such a magnet, the affection of the filings may be enhanced, lessened, or nullified, according to the mode of its employment. In the case of the hair the affection is superficial, and the requisite charging power must be in proportion to the extent of surface. In the case of the magnetized ferruginous particles, it is the mass which is affected, and, cæteris paribus, the more metal, the greater the capacity for magnetic power. In the instance of the electrified hair, as in every other of frictional excitement, the electrical power resides in imponderable ethereo-electric atmospheres which adhere superficially to the masses, being liable to be unequally distributed upon them in opposite states of polarity, consequent to a superficial polarization of the exciting or excited ponderable masses; but in the instance of bodies permanently magnetic, or those rendered transiently magnetic by galvanic influence, the ethereo-electric matter and the ponderable atoms are inferred to be in a state of combination, forming ethereo-ponderable atoms, so that both may become parties to the movements and affections of which the positive and negative waves consist.
62. When a small object with a thick head of long hair is electrified, the hair strands stretch out and move apart, as if repelled by something. Similarly, when iron filings are arranged to respond to the poles of a strong magnet, they align in a way that looks like the electrified hair. Additionally, there's another similarity: there is an attraction between two pieces of hair that are charged differently, just like what occurs between filings that are magnetized differently. However, the behaviors of the electrified hair and the magnetized filings are, in some ways, completely different. If a conductive connection is made between two differently charged sections of hair, it would completely cancel out their electrical states, and all electrical effects would stop. On the other hand, if such a connection is made between the poles that excite the filings using any non-magnetic conductor, it doesn't reduce their magnetic qualities or their ability to influence each other at all. The electrified hair is unaffected by the presence or contact with a steel magnet any more than it would be by any other similar metal; however, the influence on the filings can be increased, decreased, or canceled out based on how the magnet is used. In the case of hair, the effect is superficial, and the charging power must match the surface area. With the magnetized iron particles, it's the mass that matters, and, all things being equal, the more metal there is, the greater the capacity for magnetism. In the case of electrified hair, like other cases of frictional electricity, the electrical power comes from invisible electric atmospheres that stick to the surface, which can be unevenly distributed due to a superficial polarization of the materials being used. However, in materials that are permanently magnetic or temporarily magnetized by electric influence, the electric matter and the physical atoms are thought to combine, forming electric-matter atoms, so that both can participate in the movements and effects of the positive and negative waves.
63. Thus an explanation is afforded of the hitherto mysterious diversity453 of the powers of a gold-leaf electroscope and galvanoscopes, although both are to a miraculous degree sensitive—the latter to the most feeble galvanic discharge, the former to the slightest statical excitement; yet neither is in the most minute degree affected by the polarization which affects the other.
63. This explains the previously mysterious differences453 in the capabilities of a gold-leaf electroscope and galvanoscopes, even though both are incredibly sensitive—the galvanoscope to the faintest galvanic discharge and the electroscope to the slightest static charge; however, neither is affected in the slightest by the polarization that influences the other.
64. The charge which may exist in a coated pane affords another exemplification of statical or electro-ethereal polarity. In this case, according to Farraday, the particles of glass are thrown into a state of electro-polarity, and are, in fact, partially affected as if they belonged to a conductor; so that insulators and conductors differ only in the possession in a high degree by the one of a susceptibility of which the other is possessed to an extent barely perceptible. The facts seem to me only to show that either an insulator or conductor may be both affected by the same polarizing force, the transmission of which the one facilitates, the other prevents. I am under the impression that it is only by the disruptive process that electricity passes through glass; of course involving a fracture. It gets through a pane or jar, not by aid of the vitreous particles, but in despite of their opposing coherence. The glass in such cases is not liable to be fused, deflagrated, or dissipated, as conductors are. It is forced out of the way of the electrical waves, being incapable of becoming a party to them. Discharges will take place through a vacuity, rather than through the thinnest leaf of mica. But if, as Farraday has alleged, from within a glass flask hermetically sealed, an electrical charge has been found to escape, after a long time, it proves only that glass is not a perfect insulator, not that perfect insulation and perfect conduction are different extremes of the same property. On the contrary, the one is founded upon a constitution competent to the propagation within it of the electro-polarizing waves, with miraculous facility, while the other is founded either on an absolute incapacity, or comparatively an infinitely small ability to be the medium of their conveyance. The one extremely retards, the other excessively expedites, its passage through a space otherwise void.[72]
64. The charge that can build up on a coated pane is another example of static or electro-ethereal polarity. In this case, according to Faraday, the particles of glass become electro-polarized, acting somewhat like they are part of a conductor. This means that insulators and conductors differ mainly in how much they can respond to electrical forces; one has a high level of susceptibility, while the other has such a small degree that it’s almost unnoticeable. It seems to me that both insulators and conductors can be influenced by the same polarizing force, but one allows it to pass through while the other blocks it. I believe electricity can only move through glass through a disruptive process, which involves breaking it. It passes through a pane or jar, not with the help of the glass particles, but despite their tendency to stick together. In these situations, glass doesn’t melt, explode, or dissipate like conductors do. It gets in the way of electrical waves, unable to join them. Discharges will happen through an empty space rather than through the thinnest piece of mica. However, if, as Faraday suggested, an electrical charge has been found to escape from within a sealed glass flask after a long time, it only shows that glass isn’t a perfect insulator, not that perfect insulation and perfect conduction are two different extremes of the same property. Instead, one is based on a structure that easily allows the propagation of electro-polarizing waves, while the other is based on either a total inability or a very small capacity to transmit them. One significantly slows down, while the other extremely speeds up its passage through an otherwise empty space.[72]
Competency of a Wire to convey a Galvanic Discharge is as its sectional area, while statical discharges of frictional electricity, preferring the surface, are promoted by its extension. Yet in proportion as such discharges are heavy, the ability of a wire to convey them and its magnetic energy become more dependent on its sectional area, and less upon extent of surface.
65. Reference has been made to two modes of electrical conduction, in one of which the efficacy is as the surface; in the other, as the area of a section of the conductor. Although glass be substantially a non-conductor, the power of the surface of glass when moistened or gilt to discharge statical electricity is enormous. It has been generally considered that, as a protection against lightning, the same weight of metal employed as a pipe would be more efficacious than in the usual solid form of a lightning rod: yet this law does not hold good with respect to galvanic discharges, which are not expedited by a mere extension of conducting surface. Independently of the augmentation of conducting power, consequent to454 radiation and contact with the air, the cooling influence of which, according to Davy, promotes galvano-electric conduction, a metallic ribbon does not convey a galvanic discharge better than a wire of similar weight and length.[73]
65. There are two ways that electricity can flow: one based on the surface area and the other based on the cross-sectional area of a conductor. Even though glass is mostly a non-conductor, its surface can discharge static electricity very effectively when it's wet or coated. It's commonly believed that using the same weight of metal in a piping form is better for protecting against lightning than using the standard solid lightning rod. However, this doesn't apply to galvanic discharges, which don't get improved just by having a larger conducting surface. Besides the increase in conductivity from exposure to air, which according to Davy helps with galvanic conduction, a metal ribbon doesn't carry a galvanic discharge any better than a wire of the same weight and length.
66. Agreeably to the considerations above stated, the sectional area of a conductor remaining the same, in proportion as any statical accumulation which it may discharge is greater, the effects are less superficial; and the ethereo-ponderable atoms are affected more analogously to those exposed to galvanic discharges. It is in this way that the discharge of a Leyden jar imparts magnetic polarization. Thus, on the one hand, the electro-ethereal matter being polarized and greatly condensed, combines with and communicates polarization, and consequently magnetism, to ethereo-ponderable bodies; while, on the other hand, these, when polarized by galvanic reaction, and thus rendered magnetic, communicate polarity to the electro-ether. Hence, statical electricity, when produced by galvanism, and magnetism, when produced by statical electricity, are secondary effects.
66. Based on the points mentioned above, while keeping the cross-sectional area of a conductor the same, the greater any static charge it can discharge, the less surface-level effects are observed; and the ethereal-matter atoms behave more like those that undergo galvanic discharges. This is how the discharge from a Leyden jar creates magnetic polarization. On one hand, the electro-ethereal matter becomes polarized and significantly condensed, interacting with and transferring polarization, thus inducing magnetism in ethereal-matter bodies; on the other hand, these bodies, once polarized by galvanic reactions and made magnetic, transfer polarity back to the electro-ether. Therefore, static electricity generated by galvanism and magnetism created by static electricity are secondary effects.
67. Where a wire is of such dimensions, in proportion to the charge, as to be heated, ignited, or dispersed by statical electricity, there seems to be a transitory concentration of the electric power, which transforms the nature of the reaction, and an internal wave of electro-ponderable polarization, similar to those of galvano-electricity, is the consequence.
67. When a wire is sized in relation to the charge in a way that it can get heated, ignited, or broken apart by static electricity, there appears to be a temporary buildup of electric energy that changes the nature of the reaction, and an internal wave of electro-ponderable polarization, much like those seen in galvanic electricity, results.
68. As above observed, (31,) the current produced by the magneto-electric machine has all the attributes of the galvano-electric current; yet this is altogether a secondary effect of the changes of polarity in a keeper, acting upon a wire solely by dynamic induction. But if, by mere external influence, the machine above mentioned can produce within a circuit a current such as above described, is it unreasonable to suppose that the common machine, when it acts upon a circuit, may put into activity the matter existing therein, so as to produce waves of polarization, having the power of those usually ascribed to a galvano-electrical current?
68. As mentioned earlier, (31,) the current generated by the magneto-electric machine has all the characteristics of the galvano-electric current; however, this is entirely a secondary effect of the polarity changes in a keeper, affecting a wire solely through dynamic induction. But if, through simple external influence, the machine mentioned can generate a current within a circuit as described, isn’t it reasonable to think that the common machine, when it interacts with a circuit, could activate the matter present in it, creating waves of polarization with the same power attributed to a galvano-electrical current?
69. It has been shown that both reason and the researches and suggestions of Farraday warrant the inference that ponderable atoms, in solids and liquids, may be considered as swimming in an enormous quantity of condensed imponderable matter, in which all the particles, whether ponderable or imponderable, are, in their natural state, held in a certain relative position due to the reciprocal attraction of their dissimilar poles. A galvano-electrified body differs from one in its ordinary state, in having the relative position of the poles of its ethereo-ponderable atoms so changed, that their inherent opposite polarities not being productive of reciprocal neutralization, a reaction with external bodies ensues.
69. It has been shown that both logic and the research and ideas of Faraday support the conclusion that tangible atoms, in solids and liquids, can be seen as floating in a vast amount of condensed intangible matter, where all the particles, whether tangible or intangible, are naturally held in a specific relative position because of the mutual attraction of their different poles. A galvanically charged body differs from one in its normal state by having the relative position of the poles of its ethereo-tangible atoms altered, so that their inherent opposite polarities don’t balance each other out, leading to a reaction with external bodies.
70. In statical excitement the affection is superficial as respects the ponderable bodies concerned, while in dynamic excitement the polarities of the whole mass are deranged oppositely at opposite ends of the electrified mass; so that the oppositely disturbing impulses, proceeding from455 the poles of the disturbing apparatus, neutralize each other intermediately. Supposing the ponderable as well as the imponderable matter in a perfect conductor to be susceptible of the polar arrangement, of which an electrified state is thus represented to consist, non-conductors to be insusceptible of such polar derangement; imperfect conductors may have a constitution intermediate between metals and electrics.
70. In static excitement, the effect is shallow regarding the tangible objects involved, while in dynamic excitement, the polarities of the entire mass are disturbed in opposite directions at the ends of the electrified mass; this causes the opposing impulses, coming from455 the poles of the disturbing device, to cancel each other out in between. Assuming that both the tangible and intangible materials in a perfect conductor can be arranged polar-wise, with an electrified state represented as such, non-conductors are resistant to this kind of polar disruption; imperfect conductors may have properties that fall between metals and non-metals.
71. When an electrical discharge is made through any space devoid of air or other matter, it must then find its way solely by the polarization of the rare imponderable matter existing therein; and consequently its corruscations should be proportionably more diffuse, which is actually found to be true; but when gaseous ethereo-ponderable atoms intervene, as in wire, they enable competent waves to exist within a narrower channel and to attain a greater intensity.
71. When an electrical discharge occurs in a space without air or other substances, it can only navigate by polarizing the rare, weightless matter present there. As a result, the sparks produced are generally more spread out, which is indeed the case. However, when gaseous, weight-bearing atoms come into play, like in a wire, they allow the effective waves to travel through a narrower path and achieve greater intensity.
72. I consider all bodies as insulators which cause discharges through them to be more difficult than through a vacuum, and which, by their interposition within a circuit, can prevent that propagation of the oppositely polarizing undulations which would otherwise ensue. This furnishes a good mean of discrimination between insulators and conductors, the criterion being that a discharge ensues more readily as there is more of the one and less of the other in the way: that the one leads the waves where they would not go, the other impedes their going where they would proceed. Both in the case of disruptive discharge through air, producing a spark, or of a deflagrating discharge through wire, causing its explosion, there is a dispersion of intervening ponderable particles; and yet there is this manifest discordancy, that in one case the undulatory process of transfer is assisted, in the other resisted. The waves follow the metallic filament with intense attraction, while they strive to get out of the way of those formed by the aeriform matter, as if repelled. Hence the term disruptive, from dirumpo, to break through, was happily employed by Farraday to designate spark discharges.
72. I see all materials as insulators that make it harder for discharges to occur compared to a vacuum, and that, by being placed in a circuit, can stop the opposite polarizing waves that would otherwise happen. This serves as a good way to distinguish between insulators and conductors, with the idea being that a discharge happens more easily when there's more of one and less of the other in the way: one type allows the waves to go places they normally wouldn’t, while the other blocks them from going where they naturally would. In both the cases of a disruptive discharge through air that creates a spark and a deflagrating discharge through a wire that causes it to explode, there is a scattering of particles in between; yet, there is a clear difference: in one case, the wave transfer is facilitated, and in the other, it is hindered. The waves are drawn to the metal wire very strongly, while they seem to want to escape from the waves created by the air, as if they are being pushed away. This is why the term disruptive, from dirumpo, meaning to break through, was aptly used by Faraday to refer to spark discharges.
73. The zigzag form of the disruptive spark shows that there is a tendency in the aeriform particles to turn the waves out of that straight course, which, if unresisted or facilitated, they would naturally pursue. On the one hand, the aerial filaments being unsuitable for the conveyance of the electric waves, these are forced by them out of the normal path—first in one direction, then in another; while, on the other hand, the finest metallic filament furnishes a channel for the electric waves, so favourable that this channel is pursued, although the consequent polarization of the conducting particles be so intense as to make them fly asunder with explosive violence. Even when a bell-wire has been dissipated by lightning, it has been found to facilitate and determine the path of the discharge.
73. The zigzag pattern of the disruptive spark indicates that the air particles tend to push the waves off their straight path, which they would normally follow if nothing interfered with them. On one hand, the air filaments are not suitable for carrying the electric waves, causing them to veer off course—first in one direction, then in another; on the other hand, the thinnest metallic filament provides such a good channel for the electric waves that this path is followed, even though the resulting polarization of the conducting particles is so intense that they can explode apart. Even when a bell wire has been destroyed by lightning, it has been observed to guide and define the path of the discharge.
74. The various forms of the electric spark, resulting from varying the gas through which it may be made to pass, agreeably to the researches of Farraday, is explained by the supposition that the peculiarities of the spark is partially the consequence of the polarizability of the gaseous atoms through which the discharge is made, and varies, accordingly, in its appearance.
74. The different types of electric sparks, which come from changing the gas they travel through, as researched by Farraday, can be understood by the idea that the unique characteristics of the spark are partly due to the ability of the gas atoms to be polarized when the discharge occurs, which causes it to look different each time.
Difference between Frictional Electricity and Galvanic does not depend on the one being superior as to Quantity, the other as to Intensity; but on the different Degrees in which the Ethereo-ponderable Atoms of the Bodies affected are deranged from their natural state of Neutralized Polarity.
75. I infer that all magneto-polar charges are attended by an affection of ponderable particles; and that the reason why the most intense statical charge does not affect a galvanometer is, that it is only when appositely excited bodies are neutralized by the interposition of a conductor as during a discharge, that ethereo-ponderable particles are sufficiently polarized to enable them to act upon others in their vicinity, so as to produce a polar affection the opposite of their own. (54.58.) In this way dynamic induction is consistently explained, by supposing that the waves of polarization, in passing along one conductor, produce, pari passu, the opposite polarization in the proximate part of any neighbouring conductor suitably constituted, situated and arranged to allow it to form a part of a circuit.
75. I conclude that all magneto-polar charges are accompanied by an effect on measurable particles; and that the reason the strongest static charge doesn't impact a galvanometer is that it’s only when similarly charged objects are neutralized by a conductor during a discharge that ethereal particles are polarized enough to influence nearby particles, creating a polar effect opposite to their own. (54.58.) In this way, dynamic induction is clearly explained by suggesting that the waves of polarization, as they travel along one conductor, create, pari passu, the opposite polarization in the nearby part of any other conductor that is properly designed, located, and arranged to be part of a circuit.
76. It is only during the state of the incessant generation and destruction of what has been called the two electricities, that the circuit, which is the channel for the passage of the polarizing waves, is endowed with electro-magnetic powers. It was, no doubt, in obedience to a perception of this fact, that Oersted ascribed the magnetism of a galvanized wire to a conflict of the electricities. Undoubtedly, that state of a conductor in which, by being a part of an electrical circuit, it becomes enabled to display electro-magnetic powers, is so far a conflict of the two electricities, as the affections of matter, which are denominated electrical, consist of two opposite polar forces, proceeding, agreeably to the language of Farraday, in opposite directions from each side of the source, and conflicting with each other, so as to be productive of reciprocal annihilation.
76. It’s only during the continuous generation and destruction of what’s been called the two electricities that the circuit, which serves as the pathway for the polarizing waves, gains electromagnetic powers. This is likely why Oersted attributed the magnetism of a galvanized wire to a clash of the electricities. Clearly, that state of a conductor, where it becomes part of an electrical circuit and can exhibit electromagnetic powers, is indeed a clash of the two electricities. The effects of matter, labeled electrical, arise from two opposing polar forces that, according to Faraday, move in opposite directions from either side of the source and interfere with each other, leading to mutual annihilation.
77. That a corpuscular change in conductors is concomitant with their subjection to, or emancipation from, a galvanic current, is proved by an experiment of Henry’s, which he afforded me an opportunity on one occasion of witnessing. I allude to the fact that sound is produced whenever the circuit is suddenly made or suddenly ruptured. By I. P. Marrian it has been observed that a similar result takes place during the magnetization or demagnetization of iron rods, by the alternate establishment or arrestation of galvanic discharges through wires coiled about them so as to convert each into an electro-magnet. Mr. Marrian represents the sound as resembling that produced by striking a rod upon one of its ends.[74][75] Sounds from this source were observed by Dr. Page in 1838. See Silliman’s Journal for that year, vol. xxxiii.
77. An alteration in the behavior of conductors occurs when they are exposed to or released from a galvanic current, as demonstrated by an experiment conducted by Henry, which I had the chance to observe once. Specifically, sound is generated anytime the circuit is either abruptly completed or disconnected. I. P. Marrian noted that a similar phenomenon happens during the magnetization or demagnetization of iron rods, caused by the alternating flow or stoppage of galvanic discharges through wires wrapped around them, turning each into an electromagnet. Mr. Marrian described the sound as being similar to that made when striking one end of a rod. Sounds of this nature were recorded by Dr. Page in 1838. See Silliman’s Journal for that year, vol. xxxiii.
78. Thus it appears that there is an analogy between the state of matter which involves permanent magnetism, and that which constitutes a galvanic current, so far as this, that either by one or the other, during either its access or cessation, an affection of the ponderable particles concerned ensues, sufficient to produce sound.
78. Therefore, it seems there is a similarity between the state of matter that involves permanent magnetism and the one that makes up a galvanic current. In both cases, whether during the arrival or the stopping of either, it causes a reaction in the weighty particles involved that is strong enough to create sound.
79. Simultaneously with the production of sounds, as above stated, by the opening or closing of the galvanic circuit through a metallic rod or457 the coils of an electro-magnet, secondary waves are induced, called secondary currents. It seems reasonable to ascribe these waves to the same shifting of the poles, which produces the sonorific undulations.[76]
79. At the same time that sounds are produced, as mentioned earlier, by opening or closing the electric circuit through a metal rod or the coils of an electromagnet, secondary waves are created, known as secondary currents. It makes sense to attribute these waves to the same shifting of the poles that causes the sound waves. 457
80. Within the bodies of animals and vegetables, the electro-ether may be supposed to exist as an atmosphere surrounding the ethereo-ponderable atoms of which their organs are constituted, so as to occupy all the space which is not replete with such atoms. Hence a discharge of frictional electricity may indirectly polarize the whole animal frame, by producing ethereo-ponderable polarization in the constituent atoms of the fibres of458 the nerves and muscles. Probably this polarization is produced more immediately in the ponderable solids by a discharge from a voltaic series or a wire subjected to electro-or magneto-dynamic induction. In the latter instances the shock is reiterated so rapidly as to appear more enduring, while in the former it is more startling and producible at an infinitely greater distance.
80. Inside the bodies of animals and plants, the electro-ether is thought to exist as an atmosphere surrounding the ethereo-ponderable atoms that make up their organs, filling all the space that isn't filled with those atoms. This means that a discharge of frictional electricity can indirectly polarize the entire animal body by causing ethereo-ponderable polarization in the atoms of the fibers of458 the nerves and muscles. It's likely that this polarization happens more directly in the solid substances through a discharge from a voltaic series or a wire subjected to electro- or magneto-dynamic induction. In the latter cases, the shock occurs so quickly that it seems more lasting, while in the former, it is more shocking and can happen from a much greater distance.
81. Agreeably to Farraday’s researches, (1485 to 1543,) there is reason to suppose that in frictional spark discharges, the consequent shock, light, and other peculiarities are in part owing to waves of ethereo-ponderable polarization, indirectly produced in the intervening gaseous matter.
81. According to Farraday’s research (1485 to 1543), there’s reason to believe that in frictional spark discharges, the resulting shock, light, and other characteristics are partly due to waves of etheric-polarization, which are indirectly created in the gas present between the sources.
Of Ethereo-ponderable Deflagration.
82. It is well known that between two pieces of charcoal severally attached, one to the negative, the other to the positive, pole of a numerous and well-excited voltaic series, an arch of flame may be produced by moving them apart after contact. This phenomenon evidently depends upon the volatilization of the ponderable matter concerned; since it cannot be produced before the carbon has been volatilized by contact, nor by any body besides charcoal, this being the only conductor which is sufficiently infusible, and yet duly volatilizable. Metals, similarly treated, fuse at the point of contact and cohere. On separation, after touching, a single spark ensues, which, without repetition of contact, cannot be reproduced. Hence, it may be inferred that the carbonaceous vapour is indispensable to this process, as a medium for the ethereo-ponderable polarizing waves, being soon consumed by the surrounding atmospheric oxygen. The excrescence upon the negative charcoal, observed by Silliman, together with the opposite appearance on the positive charcoal, may be owing to the lesser affinity for oxygen on the negative side.[78]
82. It is well known that when two pieces of charcoal are connected, one to the negative and the other to the positive terminal of a strong and properly functioning voltaic circuit, a flame can be produced by moving them apart after they touch. This phenomenon clearly depends on the vaporization of the material involved; it cannot happen before the carbon has been vaporized by contact, nor can it occur with any material other than charcoal, as it is the only conductor that is both infusible enough and capable of being vaporized. Metals, treated in the same way, melt at the point of contact and stick together. When they are separated after touching, one spark occurs, which cannot happen again without making contact. Therefore, it can be concluded that the carbon vapor is essential for this process, serving as a medium for the ethereal-ponderable polarizing waves, as it is quickly consumed by the surrounding oxygen in the air. The growth observed on the negative charcoal by Silliman, along with the opposite phenomenon on the positive charcoal, may be due to the weaker attraction for oxygen on the negative side.[78]
83. There may be some resemblance imagined between this luminous discharge between the poles, and that which has already been designated as disruptive; but this flaming arch discharge does not break through the air; it only usurps its place gradually, and then sustains this usurpation. It differs from the other as to its cause, so far as galvanic reaction differs from friction; moreover, it requires a volatilizable, as well as a polarizable ponderable conducting substance to enable its appropriate undulations to meet at a mean distance from the solid polar terminations whence they respectively proceed.
83. You might think there’s some similarity between this bright discharge between the poles and what has been called disruptive; however, this fiery arch discharge doesn’t break through the air; it simply takes over its space gradually and then maintains that takeover. It’s different from the other in terms of its cause, just like galvanic reaction differs from friction; additionally, it needs a substance that can evaporate as well as one that can be polarized to allow its specific waves to meet at a midpoint between the solid polar ends where they originate.
84. The most appropriate designation of the phenomenon under consideration is that of ethereo-ponderable undulatory deflagration. Under this head we may not only place the flaming arch, but likewise the active ignition and dissipation of fine wire or leaf metal, or when attached to one pole, and made barely to touch the other.
84. The best way to describe the phenomenon we're looking at is ethereo-ponderable undulatory deflagration. This includes not only the blazing arc but also the active ignition and burning off of thin wire or sheet metal, especially when connected to one pole and lightly touching the other.
85. In one of Farraday’s experiments, a circuit was completed by subjecting platina points, severally proceeding from the poles of a voltaic series, while very near to each other, to the flame of a spirit lamp. This was ascribed by him to the rarefaction of the air, but ought, as I think, to be attributed to the polarizable ethereo-ponderable matter of the flame, performing the same office as the volatilized carbon in the flaming arch, between charcoal points, to which reference has been made.
85. In one of Farraday’s experiments, he connected a circuit by bringing platinum points, each coming from the ends of a voltaic series, very close to each other and exposing them to the flame of a spirit lamp. He attributed this phenomenon to the rarefaction of the air, but I believe it should be credited to the polarizable ethereal matter of the flame, doing the same job as the vaporized carbon in the flaming arch between charcoal points that have been mentioned.
Summary.
From the facts and reasoning which have been above stated, it is presumed that the following deductions may be considered as highly probable, if not altogether susceptible of demonstration:
From the facts and reasoning mentioned above, it is assumed that the following conclusions can be seen as very likely, if not entirely provable:
The theories of Franklin, Dufay, and Ampere are irreconcilable with the premises on which they are founded, and with facts on all sides admitted.
The theories of Franklin, Dufay, and Ampere clash with the principles they are based on and with the facts that are widely accepted.
A charge of frictional electricity, or that species of electric excitement which is produced by friction, is not due to any accumulation, nor to any deficiency either of one or of two fluids, but to the opposite polarities induced in imponderable ethereal matter existing throughout space however otherwise void, and likewise condensed more or less within ponderable bodies, so as to enter into combination with their particles, forming atoms which may be designated as ethereo-ponderable.
A charge of static electricity, or the type of electrical excitement created by friction, doesn't come from an accumulation or lack of one or two fluids. Instead, it results from the opposite polarities that are induced in the non-material etheric matter present throughout space, even in otherwise empty areas, and also condensed to varying degrees within physical objects. This creates a combination with their particles, forming atoms that can be called ethereo-ponderable.
Frictional charges of electricity seek the surfaces of bodies to which they may be imparted, without sensibly affecting the ethereo-ponderable matter of which they consist.
Frictional electric charges look for surfaces of objects where they can attach themselves, without significantly affecting the ethereal and tangible material they are made of.
When surfaces thus oppositely charged, or, in other words, having about them oppositely polarized ethereal atmospheres, are made to communicate, no current takes place, nor any transfer of the polarized matter: yet any conductor, touching both atmospheres, furnishes a channel through which the opposite polarities are reciprocally neutralized by being communicated wave-like to an intermediate point.
When surfaces are charged in opposite ways, or in other words, have different polarized energy fields around them, and they are brought into contact, no current flows, nor is there any transfer of the polarized matter. However, any conductor that touches both energy fields provides a pathway through which the opposite polarities cancel each other out by transmitting in a wave-like manner to a middle point.
Galvano-electric discharges are likewise effected by waves of opposite polarization, without any flow of matter meriting to be called a current.
Galvano-electric discharges can also be produced by waves of opposite polarization, without any flow of matter that can be considered a current.
But such waves are not propagated superficially through the purely ethereal medium; they occur in masses formed both of the ethereal and ponderable matter. If the generation of frictional electricity, sufficient to influence the gold-leaf electrometer, indicate that there are some purely ethereal waves caused by the galvano-electric reaction, such waves arise from the inductive influence of those created in the ethereo-ponderable matter.
But these waves don't just travel through the purely ethereal medium; they occur in groups made up of both ethereal and tangible matter. If the generation of frictional electricity, strong enough to affect the gold-leaf electrometer, suggests that there are some purely ethereal waves produced by the galvano-electric reaction, then such waves come from the inductive influence of those created in the ethereal-tangible matter.
When the intensity of a frictional discharge is increased beyond a certain point, the wire remaining the same, its powers become enfeebled or destroyed by ignition, and ultimately deflagration: if the diameter of the wire be increased, the surface, proportionally augmented, enables more of the ethereal waves to pass superficially, producing proportionally less ethereo-ponderable undulation.
When the intensity of a frictional discharge goes beyond a certain level, and the wire stays the same, its ability becomes weakened or destroyed by overheating, and eventually leads to an explosion: if the diameter of the wire is increased, the larger surface area allows more of the ethereal waves to pass through, resulting in proportionally less ethereo-ponderable undulation.
Magnetism, when stationary, as in magnetic needles and other permanent magnets, appears to be owing to an enduring polarization of the ethereo-ponderable atoms, like that transiently produced by a galvanic discharge.
Magnetism, when at rest, like in magnetic needles and other permanent magnets, seems to be due to a lasting polarization of the ethereo-ponderable atoms, similar to what is temporarily created by a galvanic discharge.
The magnetism transiently exhibited by a galvanized wire, is due to oppositely polarizing impulses, severally proceeding wave-like to an intermediate part of the circuit where reciprocal neutralization ensues.
The temporary magnetism shown by a galvanized wire is caused by opposing polarizing impulses that move in a wave-like manner to a middle part of the circuit where they cancel each other out.
When magnetism is produced by a frictional discharge operating upon a conducting wire, it must be deemed a secondary effect, arising from the polarizing influence of the ethereal waves upon the ethereo-ponderable atoms of the wire.
When magnetism is created by a frictional discharge acting on a conducting wire, it should be considered a secondary effect, resulting from the polarizing influence of ether waves on the ether-ponderable atoms of the wire.
Such waves pass superficially in preference; but when the wire is com460paratively small, the reaction between the waves and the ethereo-ponderable atoms becomes sufficiently powerful to polarize them, and thus render them competent, for an extremely minute period of time, to produce all the affections of a galvano-electric current, whether of ignition, of electrolysis, or magnetization. Thus, as the ethereo-ponderable waves produce such as are purely ethereal, so purely ethereal waves may produce such as are ethereo-ponderable.
Such waves pass quickly by preference; but when the wire is relatively small, the interaction between the waves and the ethereal-ponderable atoms becomes strong enough to polarize them, temporarily allowing them to generate all the effects of a galvanic electric current, whether it’s ignition, electrolysis, or magnetization. So, just as the ethereal-ponderable waves create purely ethereal waves, purely ethereal waves can also create ethereal-ponderable ones.
The polarization of hair upon electrified scalps is supposed to be due to a superficial association with the surrounding polarized ethereal atoms, while that of iron filings, by a magnet or galvanized wire, is conceived to arise from the influence of polarized ethereo-ponderable atoms, consisting of ethereal and ponderable matter in a state of combination.
The way hair sticks up on charged scalps is thought to be related to a surface interaction with nearby polarized ethereal atoms, while the alignment of iron filings from a magnet or electrified wire is believed to come from the effect of polarized ethereal and ponderable atoms, which are a mix of ethereal and tangible matter.
Farradian discharges are as truly the effects of ethereo-ponderable polarization as those from an electrified conductor, or coated surfaces of glass are due to static ethereal polarization, (39, 40, 41.)[79]
Farradian discharges are just as much the result of ethereal-ponderable polarization as those from an electrified conductor, or the charged surfaces of glass are due to static ethereal polarization, (39, 40, 41.)[79]
THE END.
THE END.
PRINTED AND STEREOTYPED
BY HOLMAN & GRAY
PRINTED AND STEREOTYPED
BY HOLMAN & GRAY
INVOCATION OF SPIRITS.[80]
Query to the High Spirits.
Question to the High Spirits.
Reply of the Spirits.
Response from the Spirits.
PORTUGUESE HYMN SPIRITUALIZED.
PORTUGUESE HYMN MODERNIZED.
Translation of Portuguese Hymn, as altered.
Translation of Portuguese Hymn, as changed.
JUST PUBLISHED BY
NEW RELEASE FROM
PARTRIDGE AND BRITTAN,
PARTRIDGE AND BRITTAN
300 Broadway, New York.
300 Broadway, NYC.
Brittan and Richmond’s Discussion.
Brittan and Richmond's Chat.
Four hundred pages, octavo. This work contains twenty-four letters from each of the parties above named, embodying a great number of facts and arguments, pro and con, designed to illustrate the Spiritual Phenomena of all ages, but especially the modern Manifestations. To insure a wide circulation, the work is offered at the low price of $1.
Four hundred pages, octavo. This book includes twenty-four letters from each of the parties mentioned, presenting a lot of facts and arguments, pro and con, aimed at showcasing the Spiritual Phenomena throughout history, with a focus on modern Manifestations. To reach a broad audience, the book is available at an affordable price of $1.
The Present Age and the Inner Life;
The Current Era and the Inner Self;
Being a Sequel to Spiritual Intercourse. By A. J. Davis. This is an elegant book of near 300 pages octavo, illustrated. Price $1, postage 23 cents.
Being a Sequel to Spiritual Intercourse. By A. J. Davis. This is a beautiful book of nearly 300 pages in octavo size, illustrated. Price $1, postage 23 cents.
Discourses from the Spirit-World,
Messages from the Spirit World,
Dictated by Stephen Olin, through Rev. R. P. Wilson, Writing Medium. To do good is the Golden Rule of the Universe. This is an interesting volume of some 200 pages. Price 63 cents.
Dictated by Stephen Olin, through Rev. R. P. Wilson, Writing Medium. Doing good is the Golden Rule of the Universe. This is a fascinating volume of about 200 pages. Price 63 cents.
The Spiritual Telegraph, Vol. I.
The Spiritual Telegraph, Vol. 1.
A few copies complete, bound in a substantial manner—contains the fullest record of the facts, etc., of the Spiritual movement that has yet been published. Price $3.
A few copies are available, bound in a sturdy way—this contains the most comprehensive account of the facts related to the Spiritual movement that has been published so far. Price $3.
The Shekinah, Vol. II.
The Shekinah, Vol. 2.
Embellished with Six Portraits. Edited by S. B. Brittan. The work is elegantly printed and bound in muslin, at $1 50.
Embellished with Six Portraits. Edited by S. B. Brittan. The book is beautifully printed and bound in cloth, for $1.50.
Brittan’s Review of Beecher’s Report,
Brittan's Take on Beecher's Report
Wherein the conclusions of the latter are carefully examined and tested by a comparison with his premises and with the facts. Price 25 cents.
Where the conclusions of the latter are carefully examined and tested by comparing them with his premises and the facts. Price 25 cents.
The Telegraph Papers.
The Telegraph.
Volume I., some 400 pages, 12mo., consists of all the more important articles which have appeared in the Second Volume of the Telegraph, from May to July inclusive 1853. Price 75 cents.
Volume I., about 400 pages, 12mo., includes all the major articles that were published in the Second Volume of the Telegraph, from May to July 1853. Price 75 cents.
Philosophy of the Spirit-World.
Spirit-World Philosophy.
Rev. Charles Hammond, Medium. Price 63 cents, postage 12 cents.
Rev. Charles Hammond, Medium. Price 63 cents, shipping 12 cents.
A Chart,
A Chart
Exhibiting an outline of the Progressive History and approaching Destiny of the Race. Bound, or on rollers. By A. J. Davis. Price $1 75.
Exhibiting an overview of the Progressive History and upcoming Destiny of the Race. Bound, or on rollers. By A. J. Davis. Price $1.75.
The Philosophy of Special Providences.
The Philosophy of Special Providences.
A Vision. By A. J. Davis. Price, 15 cents; postage, 3 cents.
A Vision. By A. J. Davis. Price: 15 cents; shipping: 3 cents.
The Celestial Telegraph.
The Celestial Telegram.
Or, secrets of the Life to Come, revealed through Magnetism; wherein the Existence, the Form, and the Occupation of the Soul after its Separation from the Body are proved by many year’s Experiments, by the means of eight ecstatic Somnambulists, who had Eighty perceptions of Thirty-six Deceased Persons of various Conditions; a Description of them, their Conversation, etc., with proofs of their Existence in the Spiritual World. By L. A. Cahanet. Published by Partridge & Brittan. Price, $1 00; postage, 19 cents.
Or, secrets of the afterlife revealed through Magnetism; where the existence, form, and activities of the soul after it separates from the body are demonstrated through many years of experiments involving eight ecstatic sleepwalkers, who had eighty encounters with thirty-six deceased individuals from various backgrounds; a description of them, their conversations, and more, along with evidence of their existence in the spiritual world. By L. A. Cahanet. Published by Partridge & Brittan. Price: $1.00; postage: 19 cents.
Familiar Spirits,
Familiar Spirits,
And Spiritual Manifestations; being a Series of Articles by Dr. Enoch Pond, Professor in the Bangor Theological Seminary. With a Reply, by A. Bingham, Esq., of Boston. Price 25 cents; postage 3 cents.
And Spiritual Manifestations; a Series of Articles by Dr. Enoch Pond, Professor at the Bangor Theological Seminary. With a Response by A. Bingham, Esq., of Boston. Price 25 cents; postage 3 cents.
Night Side of Nature.
Night Side of Nature.
Ghosts and Ghost Seers. By Catharine Crowe. Price, $1 25; postage 20 cents.
Ghosts and Ghost Seers. By Catharine Crowe. Price: $1.25; shipping: 20 cents.
Gregory’s Lectures on Animal Magnetism.
Gregory’s Lectures on Animal Magnetism.
Price, $1 00; postage, 17 cents.
Price: $1.00; shipping: $0.17.
The Macrocosm and Microcosm;
The Big Picture and the Small Picture;
Or, the Universe Without and the Universe Within. By William Fishbough. This volume comprehends only the first part, or the Universe Without. Paper, bound, price, 50 cents; muslin, 75 cents; postage, 12 cents.
Or, the Universe Without and the Universe Within. By William Fishbough. This volume includes just the first part, or the Universe Without. Paper, bound, price: 50 cents; muslin, 75 cents; postage, 12 cents.
Arrest, Trial, and Acquittal of Abby Warner,
Arrest, Trial, and Acquittal of Abby Warner,
For Spirit-Rapping. By Dr. A. Underhill. Price, 12 cents; postage, 2 cents.
For Spirit-Rapping. By Dr. A. Underhill. Price: 12 cents; shipping: 2 cents.
Physico-Physiological Researches
Physical and Physiological Research
In the Dynamics of Magnetism, Electricity, Heat, Light, Crystallization, and Chemism, in their relations to Vital Force. By Baron Charles Von Reichenbach. Complete from the German second edition; with the addition of a Preface and Critical Notes, by John Ashburner, M.D.; third American Edition. Published by Partridge & Brittan at the reduced price of $1 00; postage, 20 cents.
In the Dynamics of Magnetism, Electricity, Heat, Light, Crystallization, and Chemistry, in relation to Vital Force. By Baron Charles Von Reichenbach. Complete from the second German edition; with a Preface and Critical Notes added by John Ashburner, M.D.; third American Edition. Published by Partridge & Brittan for the reduced price of $1.00; postage, 20 cents.
Spiritual Experience of Mrs. Lorin L. Platt,
Spiritual Experience of Mrs. Lorin L. Platt,
Medium. Price, 20 cents; postage, 3 cents.
Medium. Price: 20 cents; shipping: 3 cents.
Spirit-Manifestations:
Spirit Manifestations:
Being an Exposition of Facts, Principles, etc By Rev. Adin Ballou. Price, 75 cents; postage, 11 cents.
Being an Exposition of Facts, Principles, etc By Rev. Adin Ballou. Price, $0.75; postage, $0.11.
Spiritual Instructor;
Spiritual Mentor;
Containing Facts and the Philosophy of Spiritual Intercourse. Price, 38 cents, postage, 6 cents.
Containing Facts and the Philosophy of Spiritual Communication. Price: 38 cents, postage: 6 cents.
The Spiritual Teacher.
The Spiritual Mentor.
By Spirits of the Sixth Circle. R. P. Ambler, Medium. Price, 50 cents; postage, 7 cents.
By Spirits of the Sixth Circle. R. P. Ambler, Medium. Price: 50 cents; postage: 7 cents.
Light From The Spirit World.
Light from the spirit world.
Being written by the control of Spirits. Rev. Charles Hammond, Medium. Price, 75 cents; postage, 10 cents.
Being written under the guidance of Spirits. Rev. Charles Hammond, Medium. Price, 75 cents; postage, 10 cents.
The Pilgrimage of Thomas Paine.
The Journey of Thomas Paine.
Written by the Spirit of Thomas Paine, through C. Hammond, Medium. Paper price, 50 cents; muslin, 75 cents; postage, 12 cents.
Written by the Spirit of Thomas Paine, through C. Hammond, Medium. Paper price: 50 cents; cloth: 75 cents; postage: 12 cents.
Elements of Spiritual Philosophy.
Aspects of Spiritual Philosophy.
R. P. Ambler, Medium. Price, 25 cents; postage, 4 cents.
R. P. Ambler, Medium. Price: $0.25; shipping: $0.04.
Stilling’s Pneumatology,
Stilling's Theology of the Spirit,
Being a Reply to the Question, What Ought and Ought Not to be Believed or Disbelieved concerning Presentiments, Visions, and Apparitions according to Nature, Reason, and Scripture. Translated from the German; edited by Prof. George Bush. Published by Partridge &. Brittan. Price, 75 cents; postage, 16 cents.
Being a Reply to the Question, What Should and Should Not be Believed or Disbelieved concerning Presentiments, Visions, and Apparitions according to Nature, Reason, and Scripture. Translated from the German; edited by Prof. George Bush. Published by Partridge & Brittan. Price, 75 cents; postage, 16 cents.
Voices from the Spirit-World.
Voices from the Spirit World.
Isaac Post, Medium. Price, 50 cents; postage, 10 cents.
Isaac Post, Medium. Price: 50 cents; shipping: 10 cents.
Dr. Esdaile’s Natural and Mesmeric Clairvoyance.
Dr. Esdaile’s Natural and Mesmeric Clairvoyance.
With the Practical Application of Mesmerism in Surgery and Medicine. (English edition.) Price, $1 25; postage, 10 cents.
With the Practical Application of Mesmerism in Surgery and Medicine. (English edition.) Price: $1.25; shipping: 10 cents.
Also, Mesmerism in India.
Also, Mesmerism in India.
By the same Author. Price, 75 cents; postage, 13 cents.
By the same Author. Price: 75 cents; shipping: 13 cents.
Fascination:
Interest
Or, the Philosophy of Charming. By John B. Newman, M.D. Price 40 cents; postage, 10 cents.
Or, the Philosophy of Charming. By John B. Newman, M.D. Price $0.40; shipping, $0.10.
Shadow-Land:
Shadowland:
Or, the Seer. By Mrs. E. Oakes Smith. Price, 25 cents; postage 5 cents.
Or, the Seer. By Mrs. E. Oakes Smith. Price: 25 cents; postage: 5 cents.
Supernal Theology.
Divine Theology.
Alleged Spiritual Manifestations. Price, 25 cents; postage 5 cents.
Alleged Spiritual Manifestations. Price: 25 cents; shipping: 5 cents.
Messages from the Superior State.
Messages from the Supreme Court.
Communicated by John Murray, through J. M. Spear. Price, 50 cents; postage, 8 cents.
Communicated by John Murray, through J. M. Spear. Price: 50 cents; postage: 8 cents.
Love and Wisdom from the Spirit-World.
Love and Wisdom from the Spirit World.
By Jacob Harshman, writing Medium. Price, 60 cents; postage, 11 cents.
By Jacob Harshman, writing for Medium. Price: 60 cents; postage: 11 cents.
Seeress of Prevorst.
Seeress of Prevorst.
A Book of Facts and Revelations concerning the Inner Life of Man and a World of Spirits. By Justinus Kerner. New Edition; published by Partridge & Brittan. Price, 38 cents; postage, 6 cents.
A Book of Facts and Insights about the Inner Life of Humanity and a Realm of Spirits. By Justinus Kerner. New Edition; published by Partridge & Brittan. Price: 38 cents; shipping: 6 cents.
Philosophy of Mysterious Agents.
Philosophy of Mystery Agents.
Human and Mundane; or, The Dynamic Laws and Relations of Man. By E. C. Rogers. Bound; price, $1 00; postage, 24 cents.
Human and Mundane; or, The Dynamic Laws and Relationships of Humans. By E. C. Rogers. Hardcover; price, $1.00; shipping, 24 cents.
The Science of the Soul.
The Science of the Mind.
By Haddock. Price, 25 cents; postage, 5 cents.
By Haddock. Price: 25 cents; postage: 5 cents.
Sorcery and Magic.
Magic and Sorcery.
By Wright. Price, $1 00; postage, 19 cents.
By Wright. Price: $1.00; shipping: 19 cents.
The Clairvoyant Family Physician.
The Psychic Family Doctor.
By Mrs. Tuttle. Paper, price 75 cents; muslin, $1 00; postage, 10 cents.
By Mrs. Tuttle. Paper, price 75 cents; muslin, $1.00; postage, 10 cents.
Answers to Seventeen Objections
Responses to Seventeen Objections
Against Spiritual Intercourse. By John S. Adams. Published by Partridge & Brittan. Paper, price 25 cents; muslin, 28 cents; postage, 7 cents.
Against Spiritual Intercourse. By John S. Adams. Published by Partridge & Brittian. Paper, price 25 cents; cloth, 28 cents; postage, 7 cents.
The Approaching Crisis:
The Coming Crisis:
Being a Review of Dr. Bushnell’s recent Lectures on Supernaturalism. By A. J. Davis. Published by Partridge & Brittan. Price, 50 cents; postage, 13 cents.
Being a Review of Dr. Bushnell’s recent Lectures on Supernaturalism. By A. J. Davis. Published by Partridge & Brittan. Price: 50 cents; postage: 13 cents.
Practical Instruction in Animal Magnetism.
Practical Guide to Animal Magnetism.
By J. P. F. Deleuse. Price, $1 00; postage, 16 cents.
By J. P. F. Deleuse. Price: $1.00; shipping: 16 cents.
Spirit-Minstrel.
Spirit-Guide.
A collection of Ninety familiar Tunes and Hymns, appropriate to Meetings for Spiritual Intercourse. Paper, 25 cents; muslin, 38 cents; postage, 6 cents.
A collection of ninety familiar tunes and hymns, suitable for meetings focused on spiritual connection. Paper, 25 cents; muslin, 38 cents; postage, 6 cents.
Spirit-Voices.
Spirit Voices.
Dictated by Spirits, for the use of Circles. By E. C. Henck, Medium. Price, paper, 38 cents; muslin, 50 cents; postage, 6 cents.
Dictated by Spirits, for the use of Circles. By E. C. Henck, Medium. Price, paper, 38 cents; muslin, 50 cents; postage, 6 cents.
Buchanan’s Journal of Man.
Buchanan's Journal of Man.
A Monthly Magazine, devoted to Anthropological Science, by which the Constitution of Man is determined through Phrenological and Psychological Developments. Price, per annum, $2 00; single copies, 25 cents; postage, 3 cents.
A monthly magazine focused on anthropological science, which determines the nature of humanity through phrenological and psychological advancements. Price: $2.00 per year; single copies: 25 cents; postage: 3 cents.
Beecher’s Report on the Spiritual Manifestations,
Beecher’s Report on the Spiritual Manifestations,
To the Congregational Association of New York and Brooklyn. Price, paper 25 cents; muslin, 38 cents; postage, 3 and 6 cents.
To the Congregational Association of New York and Brooklyn. Price: paper $0.25; muslin $0.38; postage $0.03 and $0.06.
The Ministry of Angels Realized.
The Ministry of Angels Uncovered.
By A. E. Newton, Boston. Price 12 cents; postage 1 cent.
By A. E. Newton, Boston. Price 12 cents; shipping 1 cent.
Amaranth Blooms.
Amaranth Flowers.
A Collection of embodied Poetical Thoughts, by Mrs. S. S. Smith. Price 62 cents; postage 8 cents.
A Collection of Expressive Poetic Thoughts, by Mrs. S. S. Smith. Price 62 cents; postage 8 cents.
Reply to a Discourse
Respond to a Discussion
Of Rev. S. W. Lind, D.D., President Western Baptist Theological Institute, Covington, Kentucky, by P. E. Bland, A.M., St Louis. Price 15 cents; postage 2 cents.
Of Rev. S. W. Lind, D.D., President of the Western Baptist Theological Institute in Covington, Kentucky, by P. E. Bland, A.M., in St. Louis. Price is 15 cents; postage is 2 cents.
The Harmonial Man:
The Harmonial Guy:
Or, Thoughts for the Age. By Andrew Jackson Davis. Price 30 cents; postage cents.
Or, Thoughts for the Age. By Andrew Jackson Davis. Price 30 cents; postage cents.
Biography of Mrs. Semantha Mettler,
Biography of Mrs. Semantha Mettler,
And an account of the Wonderful Cures performed by her. By Francis H. Green, Harmonial Association, publishers. Price, paper 25 cents; muslin, 38 cents; postage, 6 cents.
And a description of the Amazing Cures she performed. By Francis H. Green, Harmonial Association, publishers. Price, paperback 25 cents; cloth, 38 cents; postage, 6 cents.
PARTRIDGE & BRITTAN, Publishers,
No. 300 Broadway, New York.
PARTRIDGE & BRITTAN, Publishers,
300 Broadway, New York.
FOOTNOTES:
[3] There is also this difference, that in Fig. 2 the board is supported by only three wheels, so as to have one in front under the hands of the medium, by which sufficient pressure is secured to make its rotation certain. But as the position thus given does not fall into the plane of the pulley at the back of the disk, the wheel in question is supported upon an axle which is secured in staples or holes, and carries a pulley just at the position where it is coincident with the plane aforesaid. The wheel is visible in front.
[3] There's also this difference: in Fig. 2, the board is propped up by only three wheels. One of these wheels is located at the front, just under the medium's hands, ensuring enough pressure for a solid rotation. However, since this position doesn't align with the plane of the pulley at the back of the disk, the wheel is placed on an axle that's secured in staples or holes, and it includes a pulley exactly where it meets that plane. You can see the wheel in the front.
[4] Vis inertiæ, or force of inertness, is the force by which a body, when at rest, resists being put into motion, or, when in motion, resists arrestation. The force, in this latter case, is called momentum, being directly as the weight multiplied by the velocity. Thus, two pounds, moving at the rate of one foot per second, exercise exactly the same momentum as one pound moving at the rate of two feet per second.
[4] Vis inertiæ, or the force of inertia, is the force that makes a body, when at rest, resist being set in motion, or, when in motion, resist coming to a stop. In this latter situation, the force is known as momentum, which is directly proportional to the weight multiplied by the velocity. So, two pounds moving at one foot per second have exactly the same momentum as one pound moving at two feet per second.
The force of a spring, or of explosive compounds, cannot be called momentum; neither velocity nor weight enter into its constitution; though, when transferred to a projectile, it produces momentum proportional to the force with which it acts, the weight moved, and velocity imparted.
The force of a spring or explosive materials isn't considered momentum; neither speed nor weight are part of its makeup. However, when it's applied to a projectile, it generates momentum that's proportional to the force it's exerted with, the weight that's moved, and the speed given.
Muscular force does not come within the definition of momentum, although it produces this property in a hammer, proportionably to its weight and the resulting velocity. Nor is the force of gravity momentum, though momentum be generated by it in falling bodies.
Muscular force isn't included in the definition of momentum, even though it creates this property in a hammer, based on its weight and the speed it gains. Likewise, gravitational force isn't momentum, although it does generate momentum in falling objects.
[5] It is suggested that these words may be misapprehended. I use them in the sense given by Johnson: “Sight of any thing, commonly mental view.”
[5] It's suggested that these words might be misunderstood. I use them in the sense defined by Johnson: “Sight of any thing, commonly mental view.”
I understand that evidence to be intuitive which is obtained by the simultaneous action of the mind and the sight, and, of course, of any other of the senses. Intuitive is derived from the Latin word intuo, to look upon. “Intuere cœlum,” according to Cicero, means to look at the sky.
I understand that intuitive evidence comes from the combined effort of the mind and sight, along with any other senses. "Intuitive" comes from the Latin word intuo, which means to look upon. “Intuere cœlum,” as Cicero stated, means to look at the sky.
[6] I have since been assured by my spirit friends, that there was no deception on the part of the medium here alluded to. It has since been alleged by them that it was my own father who made the raps on the small table above mentioned, when I sat at it between the two media. It was my spirit friend, William Blodget, who rapped when the flute, tubes, and rod were held against the door, or when the rapping appeared to be made against the partition between the parlours.
[6] I've since been assured by my spirit friends that the medium mentioned here wasn’t being deceptive. They later claimed that it was actually my father who made the knocks on the small table I was sitting at between the two mediums. It was my spirit friend, William Blodget, who knocked when the flute, tubes, and rod were pressed against the door, or when the knocking seemed to come from the wall between the two rooms.
[8] It may be expedient to state that the disk was counterpoised by a weight at the smaller end of the board. This weight was suspended from a hook at one end of a rod, which was so fastened by staples, as to have the distance of the hook from the fulcrum adjusted so as to make the weight counterpoise the disk exactly.
[8] It might be helpful to mention that the disk was balanced by a weight at the smaller end of the board. This weight was hung from a hook at one end of a rod, which was secured by staples, allowing the distance of the hook from the fulcrum to be adjusted so that the weight perfectly balanced the disk.
This experiment may be understood by looking at Plate 3. The board employed is there represented, associated with a wire-gauze cage and spring balance. Let all these be removed in the mind’s eye. Suppose the large disk represented in the Plate I to be affixed with its axle to the board, near where the hook is represented as attached to the balance. Suppose a counter-weight at the other end of the board to balance the disk, so as to keep the board level when left to itself. Now, the cord and weights being applied, as in the experiment with table, (154,) on the medium placing her hands on the small end, the results above described ensued.
This experiment can be understood by looking at Plate 3. The board shown is connected to a wire-gauze cage and a spring balance. Imagine removing all of these from your mind. Now, picture the large disk shown in Plate I being attached with its axle to the board, close to where the hook is depicted as connected to the balance. Imagine a counterweight at the other end of the board balancing the disk, keeping the board level when it’s left alone. Now, with the cord and weights applied, like in the experiment with the table, (154,) when the medium places her hands on the small end, the results described above occurred.
[10] My father was a member of the convention by which the original constitution of the State of Pennsylvania was made. Subsequently, he served in the legislature, and held the office of Speaker of the Senate. His name must be associated with many of the laws of his time. During leisure he used to amuse himself with the Latin poets and historians, as well as with those of Great Britain and of France. The Historical Society of Pennsylvania have lately published a journal which he wrote of a tour, made in 1775, through New York to Canada and Niagara Falls.
[10] My father was part of the convention that created the original constitution of Pennsylvania. Later, he served in the legislature and was the Speaker of the Senate. His name is linked to many of the laws from that era. In his free time, he enjoyed reading Latin poets and historians, along with those from Britain and France. The Historical Society of Pennsylvania has recently published a journal he wrote about a trip he took in 1775 from New York to Canada and Niagara Falls.
[12] I had remarked to the company during the evening that I felt a spirit touching my forehead. I had often before that time felt a gentle touch upon my forehead or brow, as if touched by a feather, but I did not know its cause, and this was the first intimation.
[12] I mentioned to everyone that night that I felt a presence lightly touching my forehead. I had often experienced a soft sensation on my forehead or brow, like being brushed by a feather, but I wasn't sure what caused it, and this was the first indication I had.
[13] Apotheosis from apo, among, and theos, god, having been used to signify translation to a place among gods, might not apo-angelosis be used to signify translation to a place among angels, from apo, among, and angelos, an angel?
[13] Apotheosis comes from apo, meaning among, and theos, meaning god, and has been used to mean being elevated to a status among the gods. Couldn’t apo-angelosis be used to mean being elevated to a status among angels, from apo, among, and angelos, meaning an angel?
“Praise undeserved is satire in disguise.”
Praise that isn't earned is just disguised mockery.
This being manifestly true, it follows that whatever applause may be bestowed upon an author by his spiritual advisers, as he may consider them, will be so inverted in the mind’s eye of an unbeliever as to have all the efficacy of satire. Under these circumstances I should be terribly satirized were I here to give the whole of a communication made by this benevolent philanthropic spirit, of which the following is a part. Were I to give his sentiments in full, it would be rather from the motive of showing how vivacious is the interest taken in the progress of Spiritualism by certain worthies of the spirit world, and to give another exemplification of the ardour of the spirit mind after emerging from its mundane tenement. But the main motive for publishing so much of the communication in question as subjoined, is the confirmation thus afforded of the account previously given by my angel sister, of the attendance of high spirits upon my lectures at Boston.
This is clearly true, so it follows that any praise an author might receive from his spiritual advisers, as he might see them, will be perceived by a skeptic as nothing more than mockery. Given this, I would be heavily criticized if I shared the entire message from this kind-hearted, philanthropic spirit, of which the following is just a part. If I were to share his full thoughts, it would mainly be to show how lively the interest is in the progress of Spiritualism among certain notable figures from the spirit world and to illustrate the enthusiasm of the spirit mind after leaving its earthly body. However, the primary reason for sharing this portion of the communication is to confirm the account previously provided by my angel sister regarding the presence of high spirits at my lectures in Boston.
This account was also confirmed by independent communications from two other sources. Opecancanough, the Indian chief, was present, as he gave me to understand, and without knowing the names, described some of the parties who were present.
This account was also confirmed by independent communications from two other sources. Opecancanough, the Indian chief, was there, as he made clear to me, and without knowing the names, he described some of the people who were present.
Part of a Letter from Mrs. Gourlay to the Author.
Part of a Letter from Mrs. Gourlay to the Author.
Philadelphia, November 14, 1854.
Philadelphia, November 14, 1854.
“My Dear Sir: Having finished reading your letter, I felt a very powerful influence indicating the presence of spirits. Accordingly, seating myself at the instrument, [Plate I. Fig. 2,] the following communication was rapidly given:
“My Dear Sir: After reading your letter, I felt a strong sensation suggesting the presence of spirits. So, I sat down at the instrument, [Plate I. Fig. 2,] and the following message came through quickly:
“‘My dear sister, say to our beloved friend and brother that I was present at his lectures in Boston, and was much pleased to hear him speak so nobly and fearlessly in the holy cause of Spiritualism. * * * * * * * * * * * * *
“‘My dear sister, please tell our beloved friend and brother that I attended his lectures in Boston and was very pleased to hear him speak so nobly and fearlessly in the sacred cause of Spiritualism. * * * * * * * * * * * * *
“‘There was a great assemblage of elevated spirits convened at our friend’s lectures in Boston. Among those whom I particularly recognised were B. Franklin, W. E. Channing, J. Q. Adams, H. Kirk White, Byron, Burns, Moore, Dr. Physick, Dr. Rush, Dr. Chalmers, and a host of others. His chief supporters were his father and mother, his loving sister Martha and brother Charles, and his friend Blodgett, Walter Gourlay, and myself.
“‘There was a large gathering of enthusiastic people at our friend's lectures in Boston. Among those I particularly recognized were B. Franklin, W. E. Channing, J. Q. Adams, H. Kirk White, Byron, Burns, Moore, Dr. Physick, Dr. Rush, Dr. Chalmers, and many others. His main supporters were his father and mother, his loving sister Martha and brother Charles, along with his friend Blodgett, Walter Gourlay, and me.
W. W.’
W.W.
“My dear friend: The above is the communication which I received, verbatim, and which you will please accept for what it is worth. I believe it came from the source whence it purports to have emanated. I questioned W. W. regarding the nature of the marks of approbation. His reply was, ‘We rapped several times.’
“My dear friend: The above is the message I received, verbatim, and I hope you take it for what it’s worth. I believe it came from the source it claims to have come from. I asked W. W. about the nature of the marks of approval. His response was, ‘We knocked several times.’”
[15] First spiritual sphere.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ First spiritual realm.
[16] This spirit, I have ascertained, was the late Mr. McIlhenny, treasurer to the Athenæum, who died in August, 1854. I took the more interest in this as he was my classmate, and was present at some of the investigations which led to my conversion. I took leave of him one evening in July, 1854, after a walk in Walnut street. He then appeared to be nearly a convert to Spiritualism, though he did not deem it prudent to acknowledge his opinions publicly. His remarks coincided with those ascribed to him by the truly angelic Maria. Within the last month Maria brought him to communicate with me.
[16] I've found out that this spirit was the late Mr. McIlhenny, the treasurer of the Athenæum, who passed away in August 1854. I was particularly interested in this since he was my classmate and was present during some of the discussions that led to my conversion. I said goodbye to him one evening in July 1854 after a walk on Walnut Street. At that time, he seemed almost like a convert to Spiritualism, though he didn’t think it was wise to share his views in public. His comments matched those attributed to him by the truly angelic Maria. In the past month, Maria helped him reach out to me.
[17] To meet the curiosity of the reader, it may be well to say that communications by the pen are either impressional—that is, resulting from the volition of the writer, aided in the matter by the influence of a spirit—or they are automatic; that is, produced by the mechanical action of the spirits on the hand of the medium, entirely independent of the medium’s volition.
[17] To satisfy the reader's curiosity, it's good to clarify that written communications are either impressional—meaning they come from the writer's intention, influenced by a spirit—or they are automatic; that is, created by the spirits' mechanical influence on the medium's hand, entirely separate from the medium's intention.
[18] I would state, on the authority of this lady and her relatives, many of whom were opposed to Spiritualism, that this was the first time that she had ever produced a poetical effusion; though it has not been an uncommon circumstance for her, since then, when under spiritual influence, to write page after page of extremely beautiful and excellent composition, both in prose and verse, far surpassing in elegance of language her natural powers of thought and fancy.
[18] I can say, based on what this lady and her family, many of whom were against Spiritualism, have told me, that this was the first time she ever created a poem. However, it has since become quite common for her, when in a spiritual state, to write page after page of stunningly beautiful and outstanding work, both in prose and poetry, far exceeding the elegance of her usual thoughts and creativity.
[20] The fact that my father, my brother, my nephew, and my friend General Cadwalader, are each residing with their mundane wives, proves that in this world a hymeneal torch may be lighted, which may not be extinguished by death.
[20] The fact that my father, my brother, my nephew, and my friend General Cadwalader are all living with their ordinary wives shows that in this world, a wedding flame can be lit that death cannot put out.
[21] I quote here the language of Samuel, the wicked pope of Judea, to Saul, respecting the destruction of the tribe of Amalek: “Thus saith the Lord of hosts, I remember that which Amalek did to Israel, how he laid wait for him in the way, when he came up from Egypt. Now go and smite Amalek, and utterly destroy all that they have, and spare them not; but slay both man and woman, infant and suckling, ox and sheep, camel and ass. And he took Agag the king of the Amalekites alive, and utterly destroyed all the people with the edge of the sword. But Saul and the people spared Agag, and the best of the sheep, and of the oxen, and of the fatlings, and the lambs, and all that was good, and would not utterly destroy them: but every thing that was vile and refuse, that they destroyed utterly.”
[21] Here I quote the words of Samuel, the evil pope of Judea, to Saul about the destruction of the Amalek tribe: “This is what the Lord of hosts says, I remember what Amalek did to Israel, how he ambushed him on the way when he came up from Egypt. Now go and strike Amalek, and completely destroy all they have; do not spare them, but kill both man and woman, infant and nursing baby, ox and sheep, camel and donkey. And he captured Agag, the king of the Amalekites, alive, and completely destroyed all the people with the sword. But Saul and the people spared Agag and the best of the sheep and oxen, the fattened calves and lambs, and everything that was good; they did not want to destroy them completely, but they completely destroyed everything that was worthless and unwanted.”
One would think here was butchery enough to satisfy a devil, but it does not satisfy the God of the Bible. Saul is deposed for giving quarter to Agag, and not carrying his revenge so far as to destroy the flocks and herds as well as the captive king, of whom the blood-thirsty, blasphemous pontiff becomes himself the cold-blooded executioner, hewing Agag to death before the Lord. Dr. Berg alleges that men are assimilated to the god whom they worship. What ought then to be the effect of worshipping the God thus described in the Bible?
One would think there was enough butchery here to satisfy a devil, but it doesn’t satisfy the God of the Bible. Saul is removed from power for sparing Agag and not carrying out his revenge fully by also destroying the flocks and herds along with the captured king, for whom the bloodthirsty, blasphemous priest becomes the cold-blooded executioner, chopping Agag to death before the Lord. Dr. Berg argues that people become like the god they worship. So what should the effect of worshipping the God described in the Bible be?
How does this comport with the extravagant precepts of Christ, agreeably to which we are to return good for evil?
How does this align with the extravagant teachings of Christ, according to which we should return good for evil?
There cannot in the history of any pagan country be found an instance more glaring, of the unjustifiable perpetuation of revenge, than this putting a whole people to the sword for a wrong done by their ancestors some hundred years before.
There’s no example in the history of any pagan country that’s more glaring than this unjustified continuation of revenge, where an entire people is slaughtered for a wrongdoing committed by their ancestors hundreds of years ago.
If examples draw us, while precepts do no more than lead, according to the proverb, what influence are such examples of the morality of the Bible likely to produce in those who are taught to view it as the word of God?
If examples attract us while rules only guide, as the saying goes, what impact are such examples of the Bible's morality likely to have on those who are taught to see it as the word of God?
From the pernicious influence of such religious errors may the noble spirits of our progenitors relieve us and our offspring!
May the noble spirits of our ancestors free us and our descendants from the harmful effects of such religious mistakes!
[22] Shakspeare’s king, in the tragedy of Hamlet, is made to express this correct sentiment in the midst of his villainy: “Pray I cannot, be my inclination sharp as ‘twill.” Why? because he still retained the objects for which he sinned. But though David had exposed Uriah to be killed to obtain his wife, he retained her in despite of his professed penitence.
[22] Shakespeare's king, in the tragedy of Hamlet, expresses this accurate sentiment amidst his wrongdoing: “I can't pray; my desire is as sharp as it will be.” Why? Because he still held on to the things for which he sinned. But even though David had set Uriah up to be killed to take his wife, he kept her despite his claimed remorse.
Yet of this man Jehovah is represented as saying, “I took thee from the sheepcote, from following sheep, that thou shouldst be ruler over my people Israel, and I have been with thee wheresoever thou hast walked, and have cut off all thine enemies from before thee, and have made thee a name of the great men that are in earth.”
Yet of this man, Jehovah is quoted as saying, “I took you from the sheepfold, from tending sheep, so that you would be ruler over my people Israel. I have been with you wherever you have gone, and I have eliminated all your enemies before you, and I have made your name like that of the great men on earth.”
Thus God is represented as the constant companion, and, of course, accomplice of his butchering, robbery, and treachery: just the part which would belong to Satan, were such an evil being to exist. He is called to account for the murder of Uriah, but the pagans whom he robbed and massacred were only vermin in the estimation of the Jewish Jehovah.
Thus God is depicted as the constant companion and, of course, accomplice to his butchering, robbery, and treachery: exactly the role that would belong to Satan, if such an evil being were to exist. He is held accountable for the murder of Uriah, but the pagans he robbed and killed were merely seen as vermin in the eyes of the Jewish Jehovah.
[25] God is made out to be a strange bungler. Though omnipotent, he does not make his creatures as he wishes them to be; and although omniscient, has to subject them to trial to discover what they are. He does not inform them of that which he wishes them to believe, but punishes them and their children to the third and fourth generation for his own omission. For no other reason than his having afforded to a particular nation more knowledge of his will than he had afforded to others, he gives them a right to extirpate their neighbours and take possession of their lands.
[25] God seems to be a strange mess-up. Even though he's all-powerful, he doesn't create his creatures the way he wants them to be; and even though he's all-knowing, he has to put them through tests to find out what they're really like. He doesn't tell them what he wants them to believe but punishes them and their descendants for generations because of his own mistakes. Just because he gave one particular nation more understanding of his will than others, he allows them to wipe out their neighbors and take their land.
[26] “I will send my fear before thee, and will destroy all the people to whom thou shalt come, and I will make all thine enemies turn their backs unto thee. And I will send hornets before thee, which shall drive out the Hivite, the Canaanite, and the Hittite from before thee. I will not drive them out from before thee in one year; lest the land become desolate, and the beasts of the field multiply against thee. By little and little I will drive them out from before thee, until thou be increased, and inherit the land. And I will set thy bounds from the Red Sea even unto the sea of the Philistines, and from the desert unto the river: for I will deliver the inhabitants of the land into your hand; and thou shalt drive them out before thee.”
[26] “I will send my fear ahead of you and will destroy all the people you encounter. I will make all your enemies turn and run from you. I will send hornets in front of you to drive out the Hivites, Canaanites, and Hittites. I won’t drive them out all at once, so the land doesn’t become desolate and the wild animals overwhelm you. Instead, I will remove them gradually until you have grown and can take possession of the land. I will set your borders from the Red Sea to the Mediterranean Sea and from the desert to the river. I will hand over the inhabitants of the land to you, and you will drive them out.”
[27] “Think not that I am come to send peace on earth; I came not to send peace, but a sword. For I am come to set a man at variance against his father, and the daughter against her mother, and the daughter-in-law against her mother-in-law.” “Suppose ye that I am come to give peace on earth? I tell you, Nay; but rather division: For from henceforth there shall be five in one house divided, three against two, and two against three. The father shall be divided against the son, and the son against the father; the mother against the daughter, and the daughter against the mother; the mother-in-law against her daughter-in-law, and the daughter-in-law against her mother-in-law.“
[27] “Don’t think that I came to bring peace to the earth; I didn’t come to bring peace, but a sword. I came to make a man go against his father, and a daughter go against her mother, and a daughter-in-law go against her mother-in-law.” “Do you think I came to give peace on earth? I tell you, no; but rather division: From now on, there will be five in one house divided, three against two, and two against three. The father will be divided against the son, and the son against the father; the mother against the daughter, and the daughter against the mother; the mother-in-law against her daughter-in-law, and the daughter-in-law against her mother-in-law.”
[28] The fact that so many of the Israelites, assisted and of course countenanced by Aaron, the brother of Moses, afterward made high-priest, were thus induced to worship an idol, shows that they were pious but ignorant. It has elsewhere been urged that any one that worships, means to worship right as much as a person who pays a debt means to pay the right creditor. It argues against the sufficiency of the facts and reasoning by which Moses supported his pretensions to inspiration, that he had to resort to his sword in order to prevent his people from worshipping idols. That they were sincere, must be evident from their relinquishing their golden trinkets for the purpose of furnishing materials for the calf.
[28] The fact that many of the Israelites, supported and obviously encouraged by Aaron, the brother of Moses, who later became the high priest, were led to worship an idol shows that they were devout but uninformed. It has been suggested elsewhere that anyone who worships intends to worship correctly just as someone who repays a debt intends to pay the right creditor. This raises doubts about the adequacy of the facts and reasoning Moses used to claim inspiration, especially since he had to resort to his sword to stop his people from worshipping idols. Their sincerity is clear from their giving up their golden trinkets to provide materials for the calf.
[29] It must be admitted that Moses does not seem to have cared whether his soul perished or not, provided he could get enough territory on this side of the grave, by pleading God’s sanction, and the skilful use of the sword. He seems to have valued the favour of Jehovah only for worldly objects. Had it been otherwise, in lieu of so much stress being laid upon the “promised land,” it had been more wisely rested on the hope of heaven. Had Moses obtained a knowledge of the spirit world, the Sadducees had not been materialists, nor the Pharisees worldly-minded, corrupt hypocrites, as alleged by Christ.
[29] It's clear that Moses didn’t seem to care whether his soul was in danger, as long as he could gain enough land in this life by claiming God’s approval and skillfully wielding the sword. He appeared to value God’s favor only for personal gain. If it had been different, instead of focusing so much on the “promised land,” the emphasis would have been placed on the hope of heaven. If Moses had understood the spirit world, the Sadducees wouldn’t have been materialists, nor would the Pharisees have been corrupt, worldly hypocrites, as Christ suggested.
[30] “Two or three years since Professor Bronn described twenty-six thousand six hundred and seventy-eight species; and, upon an average, one thousand species are discovered every year. M. Alcide D’Orbigny, in 1850, stated the number of mollusks and radiated animals alone at seventeen thousand nine hundred and forty-seven species.”
[30] “About two or three years ago, Professor Bronn listed twenty-six thousand six hundred and seventy-eight species, and on average, a thousand new species are discovered each year. In 1850, M. Alcide D’Orbigny reported that the number of mollusks and radiated animals alone was seventeen thousand nine hundred and forty-seven species.”
[31] [The use of the word “demons” in the text would seem to make it very uncertain that the Catholic school entertains the doctrine of an individual, personal devil. When used in the plural, as it often is, it cannot mean the devil, yet both singular and plural, the word “demon” seems to convey the same idea. Scripture commentators make the word demon to signify a spirit, whether good or bad. But our author does not seem to have yet become very thoroughly grounded in the doctrine of the communion of angels with man; which will certainly be found to be the only tangible doctrine.—Translator.]
[31] [The use of the word “demons” in the text makes it unclear whether the Catholic school believes in the idea of an individual, personal devil. When used in the plural, as it often is, it can't refer to the devil, yet whether it's singular or plural, the term “demon” seems to convey a similar meaning. Scripture commentators define a demon as a spirit, whether good or bad. However, our author doesn't seem to have fully grasped the doctrine of the connection between angels and humans yet; this will surely turn out to be the only solid doctrine.—Translator.]
[32] [Having reached this stage of our author’s remarks, his translator begs leave to submit them to a transient review. It is evident that his investigations in the physical demonstrations, relating to spiritual philosophy, fall very short of the intelligence of the present time. He seems to be a total stranger to that flood of truth and love that has for years been pouring its blessings on the hearts and minds of tens of thousands of delighted and grateful recipients in the Western hemisphere, and by the very means that appear to have been fully in his power of reaching that heavenly boon, but which were all exhausted to convince the world that the devil has nothing to do with it.
[32] [Now that we've reached this part of the author's comments, the translator would like to offer a brief review. It's clear that the author's research in physical demonstrations related to spiritual philosophy doesn't match the understanding of today's world. He seems completely unaware of the wave of truth and love that has been flooding the hearts and minds of thousands of joyful and grateful people in the Western world for years. Despite having the tools to access that divine gift, he instead used them to try to prove that it has nothing to do with evil.]
This is certainly a point gained on Catholic ground, and had our friend supplied some argument equally conclusive for theologians of the opposing school, he would probably save them the sin of making out of the devil, by imputation, a veritable saint.
This is definitely a point scored on Catholic territory, and if our friend had provided an equally convincing argument for theologians from the opposing side, he would likely save them from the sin of turning the devil, by association, into a true saint.
The question will naturally arise with his readers, If the power and intelligence do not emanate from the devil, from whom or what do they emanate? But on this subject, from some reason that can only be guessed at, our author, the abbot, is so far silent. The confirmed theory of spirit intercourse, when the vehicle is mechanical or automatic, makes the character and intelligence of the communication depend on the communicating spirit, subject to apparent irregularities. But our author, in his hurry perhaps to prove his favourite postulate of excluding the devil, makes them depend on the one, as he says, who “consults the table.” If he speaks Greek, then the table talks Greek, and ditto for all other languages, &c. But certainly the marquis would corner him here. He says, also, that the motive power is intercepted by a non-conductor, as silk round the hands. Although this may be true to some extent with feeble mediums, still the fact that tables often move without contact with any one, must nullify the abbot’s theory, whatever it may be.]
The question will naturally come up for his readers: if the power and intelligence don't come from the devil, then where do they come from? However, for some reason that can only be guessed at, our author, the abbot, is silent on this topic. The established theory of spirit communication, when the medium is mechanical or automatic, implies that the character and intelligence of the message depend on the communicating spirit, although there can be noticeable inconsistencies. But perhaps in his rush to prove his favorite idea of excluding the devil, our author makes them depend on the one who, as he says, “consults the table.” If he speaks Greek, then the table will communicate in Greek, and the same goes for all other languages, etc. But certainly, the marquis would challenge him here. He also mentions that the driving force is blocked by a non-conductor, like silk around the hands. While this may hold some truth with weak mediums, the fact that tables often move without anyone touching them must undermine the abbot’s theory, whatever it may be.
[33] [This is probably correct, when the medium writes impressionally; but exactly the reverse is true when the writing is automatic, or mechanically controlled by the spirit.—Translator.]
[33] [This is probably accurate when the medium writes in a way that's more about impression; but the opposite is true when the writing is automatic or mechanically controlled by the spirit.—Translator.]
[34] Our author seems to confound his dramatis personæ: he first says it is the language of the communicant, and afterward the language of the medium which the spirit understands. But the simple theory is, according to the experience of the Western hemisphere, that what is communicated depends on the intelligence of the communicating agent, which is the spirit. That spirits, it is true, possess the clairvoyant faculty, and can read our thoughts, but those thoughts must be clothed in a language they understand.—Translator.
[34] Our author seems to mix up his dramatis personæ: he first states it's the language of the communicator, and then claims it's the language of the medium that the spirit understands. However, the straightforward theory, based on the experience of the Western hemisphere, is that what gets communicated relies on the intelligence of the communicating agent, which is the spirit. It's true that spirits have the ability to see beyond, and can read our thoughts, but those thoughts must be expressed in a language they understand.—Translator.
[35] This communication, as well as those immediately preceding and following it, would have been inserted under the head of Corroborative Evidence, page 55, &c., had they been received in time.
[35] This message, along with the ones right before and after it, would have been included under the section for Supporting Evidence, page 55, etc., if they had arrived on time.
[37] Andrew Jackson Davis.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Andrew Jackson Davis.
[39] “Mr. Sunderland, in his ‘Book of Human Nature,’ p. 280, says this was the first of the spirit writing, but Mr. Capron alleges that he was acquainted with cases of this kind long before the disturbances at Stratford.”
[39] “Mr. Sunderland, in his ‘Book of Human Nature,’ p. 280, states that this was the first instance of spirit writing, but Mr. Capron claims he knew about similar cases long before the disturbances at Stratford.”
[40] Latterly, Sir David Brewster has conceived that only three elementary species of light are requisite, according to the theory of emission, to perform all the offices which Newton ascribed to seven.
[40] Recently, Sir David Brewster has suggested that only three basic types of light are needed, based on the theory of emission, to carry out all the functions that Newton attributed to seven.
[41] It should be understood, that when two magnetic needles are associated by the contact of dissimilar poles, the extreme poles do not lose their magnetism, although it will be more feeble than when the needles are independently situated.
[41] It should be understood that when two magnetic needles come into contact with opposite poles, their outer poles don’t lose their magnetism, although it will be weaker than when the needles are positioned independently.
[42] Explanation of the Galvanic Pile, Battery, or Series.—When pieces of zinc and silver are so placed in the mouth as to have their surfaces separated by the tongue, their extremities extending beyond it externally, on allowing the latter to touch each other, a metallic taste is perceived by the person whose tongue is subjected to the process thus described. It has been ascertained that at the same time a minute portion of the zinc is oxydized at the expense of the water which exists in the saliva.
[42] Explanation of the Galvanic Pile, Battery, or Series.—When pieces of zinc and silver are placed in the mouth so that their surfaces are separated by the tongue, with their ends sticking out, if those ends touch each other, the person will feel a metallic taste on their tongue. It's been found that at the same time, a small amount of the zinc gets oxidized using the water found in saliva.
Suppose a pile of plates of zinc and silver, or copper, alternating, to be separated into couples by the interposition of moistened cloth; each plate will on one side touch its partner, on the other side the moistened cloth. Every couple of zinc and copper separated by the cloth are situated as the pair above described, when separated by the tongue, and are equally capable of giving a discharge which would be sensible to the taste, under those circumstances. The plates which are in metallic contact have no such disposition to discharge, because there is no moisture to act upon them, and no diversity of electrical state can be excited on account of their great conducting power, which would neutralize any such excitement as soon as it could be created. The surfaces separated by the cloth cannot discharge to each other, because there is no conductor extending from one to the other. But as the whole pile is a conductor of electricity, to discharge every pair entering into its constituency it is only necessary to touch each end simultaneously with a good conductor—a wire, for instance. The whole series will then be discharged at once, and the energy of the discharge is proportional to the number to be thus discharged. There is an uncertainty and obscurity as to the precise rationale of the effect thus obtained. There is as much difference about this as there is about the nature of matter. It will not be expedient, therefore, in presenting a popular view, to enter upon that intricate question, and will be enough to state the laws and facts which are admitted generally by men of science. It is universally admitted that, if each of the terminal plates, in such a pile or series, have a platina wire soldered or otherwise well connected with it, the other ends of the wires extending into some water, this liquid will be decomposed, and a similar decomposition may, directly or indirectly, be effected of various substances held in solution by water, as well as substances liquified by heat. Moreover, when the same wire is made to form the means of discharge by extending from one terminal plate to the other, it acquires the property of attracting iron filings, and, so long as the discharge through it is sustained, will cause the compass needle to arrange itself always at right angles to the wire. Under these circumstances, according to the Franklinian theory, a current of electricity passes from the positive to the negative pole; according to the theory of Dufay, a fluid proceeding from each pole, they combine in the wire. According to the view above given, two opposite waves of polarization pass, by which the metallic atoms or particles are shifted from their natural position, so as to act externally, as already stated.
Imagine a stack of alternating zinc and silver, or copper plates, separated by a damp cloth; each plate touches its partner on one side and the damp cloth on the other. Each pair of zinc and copper plates, separated by the cloth, is like the pair described above when touched by the tongue, and they can both produce a noticeable taste sensation under those conditions. The plates that are in direct metal contact won't discharge because there's no moisture interacting with them, and their strong conductivity prevents any electrical differences from building up, neutralizing any excitement as soon as it occurs. The surfaces separated by the cloth can't discharge to each other either since there's no conductor linking them. However, because the entire stack is an electrical conductor, you only need to touch each end with a good conductor—like a wire—to discharge each pair within it simultaneously. The whole series will then discharge all at once, and the energy released is proportional to the number of pairs being discharged. There's some uncertainty and confusion about the exact reasons behind this effect, much like the debates about the nature of matter. Therefore, it won't be necessary to dive into that complicated topic while presenting a general overview; it's enough to mention the laws and facts broadly accepted by scientists. It's widely recognized that if each of the terminal plates in such a stack has a platinum wire soldered or securely connected to it, and the other ends of those wires are placed in water, the water will break down, and similar decomposition can occur with various dissolved substances and substances melted by heat. Additionally, when this wire is used to connect the two terminal plates, it gains the ability to attract iron filings, and as long as the discharge continues through it, it will cause a compass needle to align at right angles to the wire. In this scenario, following Franklin's theory, electricity flows from the positive to the negative pole; according to Dufay's theory, a fluid emanates from each pole and combines in the wire. From the perspective mentioned above, two opposite waves of polarization pass through, shifting the metallic atoms or particles from their usual positions to act externally, as previously described.
It is not, I believe, known to whom the world is indebted for the fundamental observation in galvanism, made, as has been mentioned, by the assistance of the tongue and plates of silver and zinc. Subsequently, Galvani, probably without any reference to this phenomenon, ascertained some other consequences of the reaction of the elementary pair; but to Volta we owe the pile or series above described. In whatever form voltaic series may have been subsequently constructed, the main principles are the same, the reaction of chemical agents so arranged in succession as to be productive of that intensity of discharge, and powers of decomposition, to which allusion has been made.
It’s not, I believe, clear who we should thank for the basic observation in galvanism, which was made, as mentioned, with the help of the tongue and silver and zinc plates. Later on, Galvani discovered some other results from the reaction of this basic pair, probably without considering this phenomenon. However, we owe the voltaic pile or series described above to Volta. Regardless of how voltaic series have been constructed since then, the main principles remain the same: the reaction of chemical agents arranged in a sequence that produces the intensity of discharge and decomposition powers mentioned earlier.
These have latterly been called electrolytic; and decomposition, by the voltaic series, has been called electrolysis, by Farraday—a beautiful, well-conceived, and expressive word. (See Essay on Electrical Theory, in the Appendix.)
These have recently been referred to as electrolytic; and decomposition, according to the voltaic series, has been called electrolysis by Faraday—a beautiful, well-conceived, and expressive term. (See Essay on Electrical Theory, in the Appendix.)
[43] It were absurd to draw any conclusion from this, that incomprehensibility is a reason for believing the miracles ascribed to Mohammed or any other religious impostor. That we cannot understand how a result is accomplished is no reason for disbelieving it in opposition to the evidence of our senses; but, at the same time, it forms no reason for believing, of itself, but is rather a clog upon belief, when intuitively awakened.
[43] It’s ridiculous to conclude that incomprehensibility is a reason to believe the miracles attributed to Mohammed or any other religious fraud. Just because we don’t understand how something happens doesn’t mean we should disbelieve it against what we can perceive; however, that alone doesn’t give us a reason to believe, but rather acts as an obstacle to belief when it's instinctively stirred.
[44] In this last sense it is used as synonymous with essence. By chemists, latterly, spirit of turpentine is called oil of turpentine. All the volatile oils obtained by delicate distillation, usually with water, like oil of turpentine, are called essential oils or essences.
[44] In this sense, it is referred to as essence. Chemists now often call spirit of turpentine oil of turpentine. All the volatile oils obtained through careful distillation, usually with water, like oil of turpentine, are known as essential oils or essences.
As respects the employment of language to express ideas when a new view is originated, there is a choice of evils; we are placed between Scylla and Charybdis. There is no alternative but to use an old word in a sense more or less new, or to coin a new one. In either case there is a manifest disadvantage; and the question arises, shall we teach a new meaning for an old word, or present to those to whom we would convey our ideas a new idea with a new word to designate it? The word matter, it will be found, has, in Webster’s dictionary, ten meanings assigned to it. Though in some of its acceptations it may be considered as applicable to every thing that exists, so as to qualify space so far as to distinguish it from nihility. Nevertheless, it has been used as distinguishing those substances which are neither spiritual nor mental. The antagonism of spirit and matter in the words, “There is a spiritual body and a material body,” is not warranted in chemistry, since the distillate or spirit evolved by distillation is a material body, however it may be more volatile or of less density than the caput mortuum left in the alembic or retort.
When it comes to using language to express new ideas, we face a tough choice; we’re caught between a rock and a hard place. We have to either use an existing word with a somewhat new meaning or create a new word. Both options have their drawbacks. The question is: should we teach a new meaning for an old word, or should we introduce a new concept with a new word? The word "matter" actually has ten definitions in Webster’s dictionary. While some of its meanings can apply to everything that exists, helping to differentiate it from nothingness, it has also been used to describe substances that are neither spiritual nor mental. The contrast between spirit and matter in the phrase, “There is a spiritual body and a material body,” isn’t supported by chemistry. In that field, the distillate or spirit created through distillation is still a material substance, even if it’s more volatile or less dense than the caput mortuum left in the alembic or retort.
[45] It is a remarkable fact that, although in later times the Jews have been so frequently named after Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, it does not appear to have been customary during the time which intervened between the supposed era of Moses and that of the finding of the Pentateuch in the temple.
[45] It's interesting to note that, even though Jews are often referred to as descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob in later times, this naming convention doesn’t seem to have been common between the supposed time of Moses and when the Pentateuch was discovered in the temple.
This serves to show that the Pentateuch is a fabrication of the priesthood and King Josiah.
This shows that the Pentateuch is a creation of the priesthood and King Josiah.
[46] The following trash is thus made to be specified by the God of the universe:—gold, silver, brass, blue, purple, goats’ hair, red rams’-skins, badger skins, shittim-wood, oil for light, oil for anointing, spices, sweet incense, onyx-stones, shew-bread, candlesticks with six branches, almond-shaped bowls with a knop and a flower, knop and branches of beaten gold, seven lamps, large dishes, curtains of fine linen, spoons, cherubims of gold. Eight columns, nearly one hundred verses, are taken up with this mummery, expressly directed by Jehovah himself.
[46] The following items are specified by the God of the universe:—gold, silver, brass, blue, purple, goats’ hair, red rams’ skins, badger skins, acacia wood, oil for light, oil for anointing, spices, sweet incense, onyx stones, showbread, candlesticks with six branches, almond-shaped bowls with a knop and a flower, knop and branches of beaten gold, seven lamps, large dishes, fine linen curtains, spoons, cherubim made of gold. Eight columns, nearly a hundred verses, are dedicated to this ceremony, directly instructed by Jehovah himself.
Now, let the use Moses made of his opportunities be compared with that which I have made of those afforded me by the spirits, and then judge between Spiritualism and self-called orthodoxy.
Now, let's compare how Moses took advantage of his opportunities with how I've taken advantage of the ones offered to me by the spirits, and then decide between Spiritualism and self-proclaimed orthodoxy.
[47] “Nec ab ipso scriptum constat, nec ab ejus apostolis sed longo post tempore a quibusdam incerti nominis viris, qui ne sibi non haberetur fides scribentibus quæ nescirent, partim apostolorum, partim eorum que apostolos secuti viderentur nomina scriptorum suorum frontibus indiderunt, asseverantes SECUNDUM cos, se scripsisse quæ scripserunt.—Quoted by Lardner, vol. 2, p. 221.
[47] “It's unclear whether it was written by him or by his apostles; instead, it seems to have been penned long afterward by a few unknown individuals. These writers, wanting to ensure their works were taken seriously despite lacking firsthand knowledge, attached names either from the apostles or from those who seemed to follow the apostles, insisting that AS PER them, they wrote what they wrote.—Quoted by Lardner, vol. 2, p. 221.
[48] “By all persons, understanding strictly all parsons, for the common people were nobody, and never at any time had any voice, judgment, or option in the business of religion, but always believed that which their godfathers and godmothers did promise and vow that they should believe. God or devil, and any Scriptures their masters pleased, were always all one to them.
[48] “By all persons, understanding strictly all parsons, because the common people were nobody, and never had any say, opinion, or choice in matters of religion, but always accepted what their godfathers and godmothers promised and vowed for them to believe. God or devil, and any Scriptures their leaders chose, were always the same to them.
[49] “‘Almost from the apostolic age!’ Why, the text itself, if it prove any thing, proves that such forged writings were in existence absolutely IN the apostolic age, and among the apostles themselves.
[49] “‘Almost from the apostolic age!’ Well, if the text shows anything, it proves that these fake writings definitely existed during the apostolic age and were among the apostles themselves.
[51] “Si forte accidisset, ut Johannis Evangelium per octodecim secula priora prosus ignotum jacuisset, et nostris demum temporibus, in modium productum esset omnes haud dubie uno ore confiterentur Jesum a Johanne descriptum longe alium esse ac illium Matthæi, Marci, et Lucæ, nec utramque descriptionem simul veram esse posse.—Carol. Theoph. Bretschneider Probab, Lipsiæ, 1820.
[51] “If it had happened that the Gospel of John had remained completely unknown for the previous eighteen centuries, and finally resurfaced in our time, everyone would undoubtedly agree in unison that the description of Jesus by John is very different from that by Matthew, Mark, and Luke, and that both descriptions cannot be true at the same time.—Carol. Theoph. Bretschneider Probab, Leipzig, 1820.
[52] “Here it is. ‘Messala V. C. consule, Constantinopoli, jubente Anastasia Imperatore, sancta evangelia, tanquam ab idiotis evangelistis composita, reprehenduntur et emendantur.’—Victor Tununensis, Cave’s Historia Literaria, vol. i. p. 415—i. e., ‘The illustrious Messala being Consul, by the command of the Emperor Anastasias, the holy Gospels, as having been written by idiot evangelists, are censured and corrected.’—Victor, Bishop of Tunis in Africa.
[52] “Here it is. ‘Messala V. C. Consul, in Constantinople, at the command of Emperor Anastasius, the holy Gospels, as if written by foolish evangelists, are criticized and revised.’—Victor Tununensis, Cave’s Historia Literaria, vol. i. p. 415—i. e., ‘The distinguished Messala being Consul, upon the order of Emperor Anastasius, the holy Gospels, as if they were written by foolish evangelists, are condemned and amended.’—Victor, Bishop of Tunis in Africa.
[53] “See Beausobre, quoted in the Manifesto of the Christian Society; and this and the preceding extract vindicated, in the author’s Syntagma, against the vituperations of the evangelical Dr. John Pye Smith, in locis.”
[53] “Check out Beausobre, referenced in the Manifesto of the Christian Society; and this and the earlier quote are defended in the author’s Syntagma against the criticism from the evangelical Dr. John Pye Smith, in locis.”
[58] According to Farraday’s researches and general experience, we have reason to believe that all particles of matter are endowed with one or the other of two species of polarity. This word polarity conveys the idea that two terminations in each particle are respectively endowed with forces which are analogous, but contrary in their nature; so that of any two homogeneous particles, the similar poles repel each other, while the dissimilar attract; likewise, when freely suspended, they take a certain position relatively to each other, and on due proximity, the opposite polar forces, counteracting each other, appear to be extinct. When deranged from this natural state of reciprocal neutralization, their liberated poles react with the particles of adjacent bodies, or those in the surrounding medium. Under these circumstances, any body which may be constituted of the particles thus reacting is said to be polarized, or in a state of polarization.
[58] According to Farraday’s research and general experience, we have reason to believe that all particles of matter have one of two types of polarity. The term polarity means that each particle has two ends, each of which has forces that are similar but opposite in nature. Thus, in two identical particles, the like poles repel each other while the unlike poles attract. When freely suspended, they align in a specific way relative to each other, and when close enough, the opposing polar forces cancel each other out and seem to disappear. When disturbed from this natural state of balanced interaction, their exposed poles interact with particles from nearby bodies or the surrounding medium. In this situation, any object made up of the reacting particles is said to be polarized or in a state of polarization.
Statical implies stationary; undulatory, wave-like.
Static means stationary; wave-like means undulatory.
[64] This seems to have been entirely overlooked in his suggestions respecting the nature of material atoms. It appears to me that the characteristics thus insisted upon are incompatible with the idea that each property is of itself a diffusible matter, and that in such atoms two polarities can exist inseparable from each other.
[64] This seems to have been completely ignored in his suggestions about the nature of material atoms. It seems to me that the characteristics he emphasizes are inconsistent with the idea that each property is essentially a dispersible substance, and that in such atoms, two polarities can exist inseparably from one another.
[65] Pouillet suggests that when the passage of a ray of light through glass, is influenced by a powerful magnet, agreeably to the experiments of Farraday, “consistently with the undulatory theory of light, it is the ether of the body submitted to the experiment, which would be modified by the magnetism, and that it would be very difficult to recognise whether it is modified without any participation of the ponderable matter with which it is so intimately connected.” Thus the existence of matter, composed of ethereal as well as ponderable particles, is sustained by all the evidence which has been brought to uphold the undulatory theory of light.—L. & E. Phil. Mag. &c., for 1846, vol. xxviii., page 335.
[65] Pouillet suggests that when a ray of light passes through glass and is influenced by a strong magnet, in line with Farraday's experiments, “consistent with the wave theory of light, it's the ether of the substance involved in the experiment that would be affected by the magnetism, and it would be quite hard to determine if it’s altered without any interaction from the tangible matter it’s closely tied to.” Thus, the idea that matter consists of both ethereal and tangible particles is supported by all the evidence presented to support the wave theory of light.—L. & E. Phil. Mag. &c., for 1846, vol. xxviii., page 335.
[66] The word statical has been used to designate phenomena which are the effects of electricity when at rest, as when accumulated upon conductors or the surfaces of panes or jars. Phenomena which are supposed to arise from electricity in motion (forming a current) are designated as dynamic. Thus, when charging one side of a pane produces the opposite state in the other, the effect upon the latter is ascribed to statical induction; but when a discharge of electricity through one wire, causes a current in another, forming an adjacent circuit, the result is ascribed to dynamic induction. This method of designation is employed whether the alleged current be owing to electricity generated by friction, as in the case of a machine, or generated by chemical reaction, as in the case of a galvanic battery. A good word is wanting to distinguish electricity, when produced by friction, from electricity produced by galvano-chemical reaction: for want of a better, I will resort to that employed by Noad, (frictional,) which has the advantage of being self-explanatory.
[66] The term "static" has been used to refer to phenomena that occur due to electricity when it's not moving, such as when it's built up on conductors or the surfaces of glass or jars. Phenomena that are thought to result from electricity in motion (creating a current) are referred to as "dynamic." For example, when charging one side of a glass panel causes the opposite side to react differently, the effect on the latter is called static induction; however, when an electrical discharge through one wire generates a current in another wire, forming a nearby circuit, that effect is termed dynamic induction. This terminology is used regardless of whether the current is produced by electricity generated through friction, like in a machine, or through a chemical reaction, as with a galvanic battery. There isn't a good word to differentiate electricity produced by friction from electricity produced by a chemical reaction, so for lack of a better term, I will use the one suggested by Noad, (frictional), which is clear in its meaning.
[69] The sectional area of a conductor is the area of the superficies which would be exposed by cutting it through at right angles to its axis.
[69] The cross-sectional area of a conductor is the area of the surface that would be revealed if it were cut straight across at a right angle to its length.
[70] According to Colomb’s experiments, electrical attraction and repulsion are inversely as the squares of the distances: ought not the inductive power of statical charges which is produced by those forces, and which precedes and determines the length of the resulting spark, to obey the same law?
[70] Based on Colomb’s experiments, electrical attraction and repulsion are inversely proportional to the square of the distances: shouldn’t the inductive power of static charges produced by those forces, which influences and determines the length of the resulting spark, follow the same rule?
If this calculation be correct, the intensity must be as the squares of the striking distances, as indicated by sparks.
If this calculation is correct, the intensity must be proportional to the squares of the striking distances, as shown by the sparks.
It may be urged that the striking distances, as measured by the length of the sparks, is in the compound ratio of the quantity and intensity. As to the quantity, however, galvanic sources have always been treated as pre-eminent in efficacy, so that on that side there could be no disparity. Moreover, I have found, that in galvanic apparatus of only one, or even of two pairs, as in the calorimotors, the intensity lessened as the surfaces were enlarged. By a pair of fifty square feet of zinc surface, a white heat could not be produced in a wire of any size, however small. The calorific power of such apparatus can only be made evident by the production of a comparatively very low temperature, in a comparatively very large mass.
It can be argued that the striking distances, measured by the length of the sparks, relate to both the quantity and intensity in a combined way. However, when it comes to quantity, galvanic sources have always been considered superior in effectiveness, so there's no conflict there. Furthermore, I've observed that in galvanic devices with only one or two pairs, like calorimotors, the intensity decreases as the surface area increases. With a pair of fifty square feet of zinc surface, it was impossible to generate a white heat in a wire of any size, no matter how small. The heating capability of such devices can only be clearly demonstrated by achieving a relatively low temperature in a relatively large mass.
[71] Suppose a number of boys and girls, associated as partners for a dance, to stand up in a row, severally united, and distinguished into couples by those joining hands; the sexes being regularly alternating, so that no two of the same sex should be hand in hand. Under these conditions no effort to take a boy from one end of the row, or a girl from the other end, could be effected with the consent of the couples concerned, both partners in which would thus be deprived of the power of joining in the dance. But should it be understood that only an exchange of partners was all that should be intended, and, consistently, a boy from one end and a girl from the other end of the row, taken simultaneously and allowed to form a couple, forthwith, the rest merely shifting their hands from one neighbour to another, there would no longer be the same motive for resistance and the required exchange might be cheerfully accomplished.
[71] Imagine a group of boys and girls paired up for a dance, standing in a line, each couple linked by holding hands; the boys and girls alternating so that no two boys or two girls are next to each other. In this setup, no one could take a boy from one end of the line or a girl from the other end without upsetting the couples involved, as both partners would lose their chance to dance. However, if it were understood that the goal was simply to exchange partners, and a boy from one end and a girl from the other end were taken at the same time to form a new couple, then the rest could just shift hands with their neighbors. In that case, there wouldn’t be the same reason to resist, and the exchange could happen happily.
[73] It is well known that Wollaston effected the decomposition of water by the aid of a powerful electrical machine. Having enclosed platina wires within glass tubes, these were fused so as to cover the ends. The glass was afterward so far removed, by grinding, as to expose minute metallic points to the liquid. Under these circumstances, the electricity conveyed by the wires, being prevented from proceeding over them superficially, was obliged to make its way through the ethereo-ponderable matter of which metals consist. Instead of proving the identity of galvanism with frictional electricity, this experiment shows that in one characteristic, at least, there is a discordancy. At the same time it may indicate that ethereal may give rise to ethereo-ponderable undulations.
[73] It is well known that Wollaston decomposed water using a powerful electrical machine. He enclosed platinum wires in glass tubes, which were fused to seal the ends. The glass was then ground away to expose tiny metal tips to the liquid. In this setup, the electricity flowing through the wires, unable to travel over them easily, had to pass through the ether-like material that makes up metals. This experiment does not confirm that galvanism and frictional electricity are the same; instead, it shows a difference in at least one aspect. At the same time, it might suggest that ether could produce ether-like waves.
[74] Agreeably to experiments of Farraday, the particles of a glass prism may be as influenced by an electro-magnet as to affect the passage of polarized light.
[74] According to experiments by Faraday, the particles of a glass prism can be influenced by an electromagnet in a way that affects the passage of polarized light.
[76] These phenomena excite more interest in consequence of the employment, for medical purposes, of an apparatus originally contrived by Callan, but since ingeniously modified by our countryman, Dr. Page, into a form which has been designated as the electrotome. A coil of coarse copper wire, covered with cotton, like bonnet wire, is wound about a wooden cylinder. Around the coil thus formed, a coil of fine copper wire similarly covered is wound, leaving the extremities accessible. One end of the coarse coil communicating constantly with one pole of a galvanic battery, the other end is left free; so that by scraping with it the teeth of a rasp attached to the other pole, a rapid closing and opening of the circuit may be effected. Under these circumstances, an observer, holding the ends of the fine coil, receives shocks more or less severe, according to the construction of the battery, the energy of the agents employed to excite it, or the total weight and relative dimensions of the coils as to length and sectional area. Agreeably to the received doctrine, the shocks thus produced are owing to secondary currents caused by dynamic induction. Agreeably to the hypothesis which I have advanced, the atoms of the coarse wire, polarized by waves proceeding from the poles of the battery, induce a corresponding polarization of the atoms of the fine wire; the aggregate polarity imparted being as the number of atoms in the former to the number of atoms in the latter: or (to use an equivalent ratio) as the weight of the coarse, to the weight of the fine wire. But as on breaking the circuit through the coarse wire, the ethereo-ponderable atoms in both wires resume their neutral positions, while this requires each circuit to be run through within the same minute interval, the velocities of their respective waves will be inversely as their sectional areas and directly as their lengths: in other words, the velocity in the fine wire will be as much greater as the channel which it affords is narrower and longer. The cylinder included within the coils as above stated being removed, a cylindrical space is vacated. If into the cavity thus made iron rods, like knitting needles, be introduced, one after the other, while the apparatus is in operation, the shocks increase in severity as the number augments; so that from being supportable they may be rendered intolerable. The shock takes place without the presence of iron, but is much increased by its assistance.[77]
[76] These phenomena attract more interest because of the use of a device originally designed by Callan, but skillfully modified by our fellow countryman, Dr. Page, into what is now called the electrotome. A coil of thick copper wire, wrapped in cotton like bonnet wire, is wound around a wooden cylinder. Around this coil, a coil of thin copper wire, also covered in cotton, is wound, leaving the ends accessible. One end of the thick coil is constantly connected to one pole of a galvanic battery, while the other end is free; by scraping this end with the teeth of a rasp connected to the other pole, a rapid opening and closing of the circuit can be achieved. In this situation, an observer holding the ends of the thin coil receives shocks that vary in intensity depending on the design of the battery, the strength of the sources used to power it, or the total weight and dimensions of the coils in terms of length and cross-sectional area. According to the established understanding, these shocks are due to secondary currents created by dynamic induction. Based on the theory I proposed, the atoms in the thick wire, polarized by waves from the battery’s poles, induce a similar polarization in the atoms of the thin wire; the overall polarity imparted is proportional to the number of atoms in the thick wire compared to the number in the thin wire: or, to put it another way, as the weight of the thick wire to the weight of the thin wire. However, when the circuit is broken through the thick wire, the ethereal-ponderable atoms in both wires return to their neutral positions, requiring that each circuit be completed within the same short interval, meaning that the speeds of their respective waves will be inversely proportional to their cross-sectional areas and directly proportional to their lengths: in simple terms, the speed in the thin wire will be much greater because the passage it provides is narrower and longer. Once the cylinder enclosed by the coils is removed, a cylindrical space is created. If iron rods, like knitting needles, are introduced into this space one by one while the device is operating, the shocks increase in intensity as the number of rods increases; what starts out as tolerable can quickly become unbearable. The shock occurs even without the presence of iron, but its effect is significantly amplified with iron. [77]
These facts appear to me to justify a surmise that the ethereo-ponderable atoms of iron, in becoming magnetized and demagnetized, co-operate with the ethereo-ponderable atoms of the copper coils in the induction of secondary undulations. It is conceived that these may be owing to the intestinal change attended by sound, as above stated, (73;) this being caused by a sudden approximation of the poles of the atoms, previously moved apart by the influence of the galvanized coil. But if this sudden coming together of the previously separated poles of atoms within a magnetized cylinder of iron, can contribute to the energy of secondary waves, it is consistent to infer that these waves owe their origin to an analogous approximation of the separated poles of the cupreous atoms, forming the finer coil, in which the secondary undulations may be created without the presence of iron. Of course, this reasoning will apply to all cases in which the phenomena hitherto attributed to Farradian currents are the result of dynamic induction.
These facts seem to support the idea that the ethereal atoms of iron, when magnetized and demagnetized, work together with the ethereal atoms of the copper coils to create secondary waves. It is thought that this might be related to the changes caused by sound, as mentioned earlier, (73;) which occur from the sudden closeness of the poles of the atoms that were separated by the effect of the galvanized coil. However, if this sudden rejoining of the previously separated poles of atoms inside a magnetized iron cylinder can enhance the strength of secondary waves, it makes sense to suggest that these waves also come from a similar closeness of the separated poles of the copper atoms in the finer coil, where secondary waves can be generated without the presence of iron. Naturally, this reasoning applies to all situations where the effects previously linked to Farraday currents are actually due to dynamic induction.
Thus it appears that the polarization of magnets, and that created and sustained when a galvanized coil or helix acts upon another in proximity, have the same relation to galvanic discharges that the charges upon insulated surfaces have to their appropriate discharges. The permanent magnetism of steel seems to have some analogy with the charge upon a coated pane, while we may consider as analogous with the charges upon insulated conductors, already adverted to, (61, 62,) that state of the ethereo-ponderable particles, (38,) of a wire helix, which state, resulting from the influence of an included magnet, or neighbouring galvanized coil, and being discharged on a change of relative position, or breach of the galvanizing circuit, is productive of spark, shock, ignition, or electrolysis, as exemplified by Callan’s coil, Page’s electrotome, or the magneto-electric machine.
It seems that the polarization of magnets, as well as the polarization created and maintained when a galvanized coil or helix interacts with another nearby coil, relates to galvanic discharges in the same way that charges on insulated surfaces relate to their corresponding discharges. The permanent magnetism of steel appears to be similar to the charge on a coated pane, while the state of the ether-ponderable particles in a wire helix can be viewed as analogous to the charges on insulated conductors previously mentioned. This state, which arises from the influence of an included magnet or an adjacent galvanized coil, and is released upon a change in position or interruption of the galvanizing circuit, can produce spark, shock, ignition, or electrolysis. This is demonstrated by Callan's coil, Page's electrotome, and the magneto-electric machine.
[77] Agreeably to the usual construction, the cylinder about which the inner coarse wire coil is wound is originally of iron, so that there is as much of this metal contained as it can hold. Various contrivances are resorted to for the closing and opening of the circuit, which are more ingenious and convenient than scraping a rasp, as above described.
[77] According to the usual understanding, the cylinder that the inner coarse wire coil wraps around is made of iron, holding as much of this metal as possible. There are different methods used for turning the circuit on and off, which are more clever and practical than the scraping method described earlier.
[79] It is well known that if a rod of iron be included in a coil of coated copper wire, on making the coil the medium of a voltaic discharge, the wire is magnetized. Agreeably to a communication from Joule, in the L. & E. Phil. Mag. & Jour. for Feb,, 1847, the bar is at the same time lengthened, without any augmentation of bulk, so that its other dimensions must be lessened in proportion to the elongation.
[79] It is widely recognized that if you put an iron rod inside a coil of insulated copper wire and send a voltaic discharge through the coil, the wire becomes magnetized. According to a report from Joule in the L. & E. Phil. Mag. & Jour. from February 1847, the rod also stretches without increasing in volume, meaning its other dimensions must decrease in line with the elongation.
All these facts tend to prove that a change in the relative position of the constituent ethereo-ponderable atoms of iron accompanies its magnetization, either as an immediate cause or as a collateral effect.
All these facts suggest that a shift in the relative position of the individual ethereo-ponderable atoms of iron occurs during its magnetization, either as a direct cause or as a related effect.
[81] See paragraph 410.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See para 410.
[82] See paragraph 449.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Refer to paragraph 449.
[83] See paragraph 415.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See para 415.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!